Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http: //books .google .com/I

l^

r

-A '-.

I '.

'*• Ih

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

VOL. XLVIL
PART I. (History, Antiquities, &c.)

(No8. I TO IV.— 1878 : with 23 plates.)

EDITED BT

The Philological ISecretary.

" It win flomish, if nataralists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science
in different parts of Asia^ will commit their observations to vmting, and send them to
the Asiatic Society at Cadcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long
intermitted ; and it will die away, if they sh^l entirely cease." Sir Wm. Jones.

CALCUTTA :

PBIITTED BT G. H. BOUSE, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION FB

AND PUBLIBHBD AT THE

ASIATIC society's BOOMS, 57, PABK STBEET.

1878.

'

I

CONTENTS

OP

JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Pabt I,

FOE 1878.

Tags
No. I.

The Mo'allaqali of Zuheyr, rendered into English, with an introduc-

r ti on and notes. — By C.J. Ltall, C. S 1

Stray Arians in Tibet. — By B. B. Shaw, Political Agent, (with a

Plate), 26

On Representations of Foreigners in the Ajantd Frescoes. — By

BXjENBBAxiLA MiTBA, Eai Bahadur, LL. D., C. I. E. (with

four plates), 62

A Copper-plate Qrant from Banda. — By EXjendbalXla Mitba,

Rai Bahadur, LL. D., C. L E., (with a plate), , 73

Recent Trans-Frontier Explorations, communicated by Col. J. T.

Walkeb, C. B., R. E., Surveyor-General of India, (with a

^ Map), 78

Notes on two Copper-plate Inscriptions found in the Hamirpur

District, N. W. P., by V. A. Smith, B. A., B. C. S. With a

note by PeaknXth Panpit, M. A., B. L , 80

The Antiquities of Bagura, (Bogra). — By H. Beyebedge, C. S., ... 89

No. II.
Mathxiri Notes. — By F. S. Geowse, M. A., OxoN. 0. S., ... 97

No. III.

The Song of Manik Chandra. — By G. A. Gbiebson, C. S., 135

The Lokaniti, translated from the Burmese Paraphrase. — By Lieut.

B. C. Temple, B. S. C, OfFg. Wing Officer, Ist Goorkhas, 239

No. IV.

The Bangash Nawdbs of Farrukhdbad— -A Chronicle, (1713—1857).

By William Ibyike, C. S., Fatehgurh, N. W. P., Pabt I, ... 259
The P^la and the Sena Rajds of Bengal. — By Bajendbalala Mitba,

Kai Bahadur, LL. D., C. L E., 384

LIST OF PLATES

IN

JOUENAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Pabt I,

FOB 1878.

PI. I (p. 26). Arians (DarcLs) of the Upper Indus.

PL II (p. 66). A Persian Embassy to an Indian Court (from Ajantd).

PI. Ill (p. 68). A Bactrian Domestic Scene from Ajantd.

PL lY (p. 69). A Bactrian Domestic Scene from Ajant4.

PL V (p. 69). rig. 1. Bactrian. Fig. 2. Indian.

PL YI (p. 73). A Copper-plate Grant from Bandah.

PL YII (p. 78). Sketch Map constructed to illustrate explorations made

in connection with the operations of the Great Trigonometrical

Survey of India.
• PL YIII (pp. 101, 102). Ground Plan of the Temple of Ridhd Ballabhi at

Brindaban.
PL IX (p. 102). Temple of Ridhd Ballabhi in Brindiban.
PL X (pp. 113, 114). The Chhatthi P^n^at Mah&ban (from a photograph).
PI. XI (p. 115). Restored Elevation of the Sikhara over the Jag-Mohan

temple of Govind Deva, Brindiban.
PL XII (p. 116). Restored Elevation of the Sati Burj, Mathura.
PL XIII (p. 116). The Sati Burj, Mathura (from a photograph).
PL XIY Temple of Jugal Kishore at Brindaban (from a

photogpraph).
PL XY (p. 117). Mediaeval Hindu Pillars from Sahar (from a photograph).
PL XYI (p. 117). Inscribed Pillar from Sahar (from a photograph).
PL XV II (p. 117). Pillar with grotesque Mask from Allahabad (from a

photograph).
PL XYIII (pp. 114, 118). Buddhist Rails, Mathura (from a photograph),
PI. XIX (p. 118). Buddhist Rail from the Bhutesvar Tila, Mathura (from

a photograph).
PI. yx (p. 118). Miscellaneous Antiquities, Mathura Museum.
PL XXI (p. 130). Inscribed slab found at Mathura in 1878; and Pili

Inscription found at Mathura.
PL XXII (p. 141). Supposed to represent Yasu Deva ; son of Mdnik

Chandra.

vi List of Plates.

PI. XXIII Fig. 1. (p. 136). Dharma Pil'scity. Fig. 8. (p. 144). Haris-
chandra Rajd^s Tomb. Fig. 4. (p. 148) Saringa or Tambur^.

PI. XXIV (p. 384). Facsimile of tbe obverse of a copper-plate inscription
from Bhagalpur.

PI. XXV (p. 384). Facsimile of tbe reverse of a copper-plate inscription
from Bbagalpur.

WOODCUTS.

No. 1. An octave lower in a Song of Manik Cbandra, p. 147.
No. 2. An octave Basso ditto, p. ib.
No. 3. An open note E flat ditto, p. 148.

JOURNAL

07 THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Part I.— HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e.

No. I.— 1878.

The Mo'aJlaqah of Zuheyr rendered into English^ with an introduction

and notes, — By C. J. Lyaxl, C. S.

How war arose between 'Abs and Bubj&n from the Bace of D&his :
who fell therein, and who slew them : what famous Days were gained by
either kin : what songs were made to tell of valiant deeds done, and what
dii^es oTer brave men that died : how the heads of BubyS^n were slain at
the Cistern of el-Haba'ah, and how 'Abs wanaered forth thereafter through
many stTange lands : all this may be told at another season. What is now
to be related is the manner in which peace was made, and the brother tribes
reconciled together.

' There was a certain lord of Buby&n, by name el-H&rith son of

*Auf son of AbA H4ritheh, of the house of Ghey? son of Murrah son of

Sa'd, great in wealth and fame among the kindred of Fezftrah. He said

one day to his nucleus son, Eh&rijeh son of Sin&n — " Thinkest thou that

any whose daughter I asked in marriage would deny her to me ?*' '' Yes,"

he answered ; "Who?" said el-H&rith. " Aus son of H&ritheh son of La'm

of T^yP'j" ^^ Kh&rijeh. Then said el-H4rith to his servant — " Mount

with me." So they mounted one camel together, and rode until they came

to Aus son of H&ritheh in his own land ; and they found him in his house.

And when he saw el-H&rith son of *Auf , he said—" Hail to thee, 0 HILrith :"

" And to thee," said el-IjE&rith. " What has brought thee hither, 0 HA-

rith ?'* said Aus. " I have come a-wooing," answered he. " This is not

the place for thee/' said Aus, and turned his back upon bim and spoke no

2 C. J. Ljall-^The Mo'allaqdh of Zuheyr, [No. 1,

word more. Then Aus went in to his wife in anger. Now she was a
woman of 'Abs : and she said — ^^ Who was the man who stopped at thy
door, with whom thou hadst such short speech ?" He answered — ^ That
was el-HsLrith son of 'Anf son of Abii H&ritheh the Morri, the lord of the
Arabs." '' What befeU thee that thou didst not bid him alight ?" asked
she. " He dealt foolishly with me," said he. '' How so ?" she asked.
*' He came a- wooing," he answered. " Dost thou wish to wed thy
daughters ?" she asked. " Yes," said he. '' And if thou wilt not give one to
the lord of the Arabs to wife, to whom then wilt thou wed her ?" '' Nay,"
he answered, '' the thing is done." '* Nay but," said she, '^ make amends
for what thou hast done." " How ?" he asked. '' Follow after him and
bring him back with thee." '' How should I do so, when that has befallen
which has befallen between me and him ?" She answered — " Say to him
— * Thou f oundest me in anger because thou didst propound to me suddenly
a matter whereof thou hadst not spoken to me before, and I was not able at
the time to answer thee but as thou heardest : but now return, I pray thee,
and thou shalt find with me all that thou desirest' : Terily he will do as thou
askest." So Aus mounted and rode after those twain. ''Then," (says
Kharijeh son of Sin&n, who was with el-H4rith and tells the tale,) " By
God ! I was journeying on our way, when I chanced to raise mine eyes,
and saw Aus riding after us. And I went forward to el-H4rith, but he
spoke nought to me by reason of the gtief that was in him ; and I said to
him — ^'Here is Aus son of HUritheh following us.' He answered — 'And
what haye we to do with him ? pass on.' And when Aus saw that we tar-
ried not for him, he cried after us — *• O H&rith ! wait for me a moment.'
So we waited for him, and he spoke to us that speech which his wife had
made for him ; and el-H&rith returned with him in gladness. And I heard
that Aus when he went into his house said to his wife — * Call to me such
an one' — naming the eldest of his three daughters ; and she came forth to
him. And he said to her — ' 0 my daughter, this is el-H&rith son of 'Auf,
a lord of the Arabs : he has come asking a boon, that I should wed to him
one of my girls ; and I purposed to wed thee to him : what sayest thou
thereto ?' She answered—* Po it not.' ' Why ?' he asked. She said—* I
am a woman uncomely in face, faulty in temper : I am not his uncle's
daughter, that he should regard my kinship with him, nor is he thy neigh-
bour in the land, that he should be ashamed before thee ; and I fear lest
one day he see in me something which may displease him, and divorce me,
and there befall me therein what is wont to befall.' He said : * Arise — God
bless thee ! Gall to me such an one' — nan^jng his second daughter : and she
called her. And he spoke to her as he had spoken to her sister, and she
answered him after the same fashion, saying — * I am ignorant and awk-
ward : there is no skill in my hand. I fear lest he see in me something to

1878.] C. J. Lyall— I^tf Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. 8

displease faixn, and divorce me, and there befall me therein what thou know-
eat. He IB not mina uncle's son, that he should regard mj right, nor thy
nmghboor in tJiy land, that he should be ashamed before thee/ He said:
' Arise — God bless thee ! CSall to me Buheyseh' — ^naming his youngest
daughter ; and she was brought to him. And he spoke to her as he had
spoken to her two sisters. And she said — ^'As thou wilt.' He said
— ' Verily I offered this to thy two sisters, and they refused.' * Nay but I,'
said diie (and he had not told her what the two had said), ' By Qod ! am
the &ir in face, the skilful with her hands, the noble in nature, the honour-
able in her &ther ; and if he divorce me, God will bring no good upon him
tjierealter.' And he said — ' God bless thee !' Then he came forth to us
and said — ^ I wed to thee, O H^th, Buheyseh daughter of Aus.' ' I accept
her,' said el-H&rith. Then Aus bade her mother make her ready and deck
her for the wedding ; and he gave command that a tent should be pitched
for el-H&rith, and lodged him therein. And when his daughter was decked
out, he sent her in to el-H4rith. And when she was brought in to him,
he stayed but a little space, and oame forth to me ; and I sai J — ' Hast thou
prospered P' ' No,' said he. * How was that ?' I asked. He answered
— * When I put forth my hand to take her, she said *' Stay ! doest thou
thus bef<»e my &tiier and my brethren ? No, by God ! tiiis is not fitting !" '
Then he commanded that the camels should be made ready, and we started
on our way, taking her with us. And we journeyed a space ; then he said
to me — * Qo on ahead :' and I went on ; and he turned aside with her from
the road. And he had tarried but a little when he joined me again ; and I
said — * Hast thou prospered P' * No', he answered. * Why P' said I. He
answered — ' She said to me—'' Doest thou with me as with a woman- slave
that is hawked about for sale, or a captive woman taken in battle P No, by
God ! until thou slay the cam^s, and slaughter the sheep, and call the Arabs
to the feast, and do all that should be done for the like of me." ' I answered
— * By God ! I see that she is a woman of a high spirit and understanding ;
and I hope that she will be to thee a wife who shall bear thee noble sons,
if Qod vrill.' And we travelled on until we came to our country. And
el-HArith made ready the camels and the sheep, and prepared a feast ; then
he went in to her. And in a little while he came forth to me, and I asked
him— ^ Hast thou prospered P' * No,' said he. ' How was that P' I asked.
He answered : * I went in to her and said — ^* Lo ! I have made ready the
camels and the sheep as thou seest ;" she answered me—'' By God ! I was
told that thou hadst a nobleness which I do not see in thee." " How so P"
I asked. She said-^" Hast thou a light heart to wed women while the
Arabs are slaying one another P" " What wouldst thou have me do P" I
asked* She said^-" Qo forth to these thy kindred, and make peace be-
tween them : then retom to thy wife, and thou shalt not miss what thou

4 C. J. Lyall— 1%<? Mo'aUaqah of Zuheyr, [No. 1,

desirest." * ^ Bj God !' said I, ' a noble and wise woman ! and she has spoken
a goodly word !' And he said — * Come forth with me' : so we went forth,
and came to the two tribes, and walked between them with peace. And
the peace was made on the condition that the slain should be reckoned up,
and the price of the excess taken from that tribe who had slain more of
the other. And we bore the burden of the blood wits ; and they were in
all three thousand camels, which were paid in the space of three years.
And we returned home with the fairest of fame ; and el-Harith went in to
his wife, and she bore him sons and daughters." So said Kharijeh ; and
these two, Kharijeh and el-Harith, are the twain whom Zuheyr praises in
his song. Such is the testimony of Moljammed son of 'Abd-el-'Aziz el-
Jauhari.

■ Now while 'Abs and Bubyan were covenanting tc^ether for
peace, a thing befell that came nigh to setting them at war again. 'Abs
had pitched their tents in esh-Sharabbeh at a place called Qa^an, and near
them were many tents of Duby^. Now there was a man of Bubylm,
Ho^eyn son of Pam^am by name, whose father Pam^am had been slain in
the war by *Antarah son of Sheddad, and his brother Herim by Ward son
of H4bis, both of the house of Gh^lib, of 'Abs ; and Ho^eyn swore that he
would not wash his head until he had slain Ward or some other man of the
line of Ghalib : but none knew of this oath of his. And el-Hirith son of
'Auf son of Abu Hiritheh and his cousin Khdjijeh son of Sin&n had already
taken upon themselves the burden of the price of blood, and 'Abs and
Bubyan mixed freely together. And a man of 'Abs, of the house of Makh-
zum, came to the tent of Ho§feyn son of Damdam and entered therein.
" Who art thou, O Man ?" said Ho^eyn. " Of *Abs," said he ; and Ho-
9eyn did not cease to ask his lineage imtil he found that he was of the
house of Gh&lib ; and he slew him. And news of this came to el-H4rith
son of ' Auf and Herim son of Sin&n his cousin, and it was grievous to them.
And the news came also to the men of 'Abs, and they mounted and rode
in a body towards el-H&rith's tent. And when el-Harith heard of the
anger that was in their hearts, and how they purposed to slay him in requi-
tal for the death of their brother, (for Ho^eyn son of Pamdam was also of
the line of Murrah, as was el-H4rith son of 'Auf,) he sent to meet them
a hundred camels, and with them his son, and said to the messenger — " Say
to them — * Are the camels dearer to you, or your own lives ?' " And the
messenger went forth to meet them, and spoke after this wise. And er-
Babi' son of Ziy&d, who was the leader of *Abs in that day ( — * for Qeys
son of Zuheyr, their chief in the war, though he counselled the peace, yet
took no part therein himself, but withdrew from his kin and went away to
'Om&D, where he became a Christian and spent the remainder of his days
in prayer and repentance : for he said — '* By Qod ! never again can I look

1878.] C. J. LjaH— The Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. 6

in the face a woman of Ghafaf&n : for verily I have slain her father or her
brother or some other dear to her") — er-Rabi' cried to his following
— " O my people ! your brother has sent you this message — * Are the
camels^dearer to you, or will ye rather take my son and slay him in the
stead of your slain ?'" And they said — " We will take the camels and be
reconciled, and conclude our covenant of peace." So peace was made,
and el-H&rith and Herim gained the more praise.

^ And Zuheyr made this song to tell of the noble deeds of el-H4rith
and EMrijeh, and the rest of the house of Ghey$ son of Murrah :
for all shared in the peace-making, though the leaders therein were el-
Harith and Kh&rijelu

r

^ — toy jju )1jJ1 «j:^ \M hs9^ e/ir^ *^ c*;^ V ^-i^j

^ O -^ ^ y^-J

us"

C-' -^ 5'*'-'

Oo^ 0-' O ^O^ XC^^C ..V*' « S^ . .^ ^^^-

jtu jiJif ^yi ^ly ,j^ 5;«<^ «j;**-ij \)^. ^/< I ♦
^y;j) ^,-_tuJi .^ cjiil >i^^ w-ijkiJ ,^ ^^j

#► "

» •^ %t^ ^<^o

rSr ^ #»<,<^^ c»x »»'-^ o o ^ .^9 tf*v

fi^l y^l ^r^ vi/*^^ A— -U^ ^;; ^Ul ^j;^ Ui

C. J. Ljall-— 1%€ JUb'allaqah of Zukeyr,

[No.1,

'*&^-'

#» ^ ** •

• •

^i«»$

.oXf •# ^

•O ^*^ >» • ^irf'x

^ • «» **

^ y ^<

o' f* •/&/ o ^^

C>^ O-'^. ^

1 i ^«. «

e; -

J ^ -^ • ^

••

UiJJb Jju« Ulc ^ ^j/W^

x^-'T'^

^ ^ ^

^ m ^

^o^^ -» 99f/^, x_ ^^^ ^^ • ^ 9 ^0^ ^ 9 ^f^ I X

1878.] C. J. LjtJl—Tke Mo'allaqah ofZuheyr.

O"^ O q9 ^-J -» ^C^ •'»«/ ''•©^ ^ ''O O-^^ CO'-'

Jb;^^ ytaS ^ Jl^ ^ m*J JJJ J U *iJ Jliii

> ^. ^^^ -» ^ -» ^

sSi *^

^ X

c-:-'

S'' -'U*

r -^i I

<»i»»

$^^^

^j

^•<

f UJI J^jiv-^^j; *l (••>

^ ^

IjyiX^I ji^ f^ UVU \yiSS

Q^^ ^ >••

^ ^

^

^ ^

O^ "^ ^ ft ft ^x X ^ ft/^C^ <^ (P > fti- ^ ^ ^

,A«*J ,JV4U) ^,5HXaJ vi«i;b Ij!

U ft ^'r*'^ ^^ ^^ if ft-^

O-^^* ft

JtjA yjXyi] ^.aj^ JU. /-^ i^o

^ *»

^* • ^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^it ^ ^ ^^ ft ^ i0 ^ ^ ^ ^^. ^ ^ '^ 9 ii ^^

^ Uil,1 JV- «r-ti^ ^;S^^-,«>.J|wi4JlC*JL

8 C. J. Ly&W-^The Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. [No. 1,

- ? o -

d I-' f^c^ o^^^ ii^if ^ ^''C.^

^ o9^ 9o^ ^ o ^ o9 if^ \ ^ of*'*' •'^ 6^ -* •'v'o^''

X6^C"'«*»» ^ ff^^ 'f ^''t"^ -^C"^ i, ^ ^ ^^o9 y ^ 9 o ^^

X ^ ^ y ^

tf/ x^ ^^fca-^o ^ c***^ 9^u^^ x^xo ''^Of ^^ o^-^

J Im.f AmJ) v^^' OJ""^ y^ ^^^^ ^^^1 V^M'I 4*^ ^^^

-'C ^^ o*'*' $ ^ 99 i,y ^9^ tUm €f^ ^ 9i,4^x, .'^C'^C ^^

^^"^ *• ^ X o** o «•''' 9 ^ i, ^^ 9^ • $^x ** '^ o ^ & -^C/" <» '"'

^ a ^ ^ **

f%9 •^ ^ o

^ • o^, ^^-^ tf- ^&' fr**^ 99^9ft,^fi<, \ yo 9 ^

III •• Ml !• &l5* ■ * • • "'ri

i^^ 9 9 ^^ ci 9 9^ ^ t>9 • .^ ^ o

• o '' *•

,_- ^aJ) g,y, si j^ ii «Jl^ uJuflJ, ...ft^ ^i[AJ! ,j,u;
* i«il — ft«J| jju j-IaJ| ^jjb »Oju Is^ S ^j — i^iiJI »Um# ^1^

^o9^ ^o y ^'^<*^ * ''£'* o -' • ^ 9^9^ *'o9/' 6^<» -'Of' •"Cj*'

1878.] C. J. Ljt^—The Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. 9

Aboumbnt.

In TT. 1 — 16 the poet, after the faahion of his fellows, strives to touch the hearts
of his hearers and to prepare them to receive kindly what he has to say on his real
theme by the mention of women and the deserted pasture -grounds which the tribes-
men leave at the end of Spring ; Umm Auf^ was his wife : she bore him, we learn,
many children, who all died young, and one day in an angry mood he divoxx^ her.
Afterwards he repented of his deed, and prayed her to return to ^im^ but she
would not.

Then he turns to praise the two who made the peace and bore the burden of the
price of blood (w. 16 — 25). After that ho exhorts the two tribes (w. 26 — 33) to keep
faithfiiHy their pact of peace, and after what they have known of War, to stir her not
up again. Then he tells of the deed of I^o^eyn son of Pam^am, how he slew his enemy
while the two peoples were making ready the peace (w. 34 — 39). Then by a figure
he relates how the senseless war broke out afresh, and more blood was spilt ; for which
again the House of GheyQ paid from their herds, though themselves without blame
(w. 40—46).

What follows would seem to be a store of maxims of life and conduct, some of
which are wanting in certsdn recensions of the poem, and all do not appear to be here
appropriate ; nevertheless many of them seem clearly to touch upon the generous deed
of the Peace-makers, and to be meant to praise them and to set them as an example to
men. In the last verse he warns those who heard him that though noble men may
pay for misdoers once and again, the time will come when the thankless shaU find none
to bear the burden of his g^t.

I.

1 Are tbej of Umm Aufa's tents — ^these black lines that speak no word

in the stony plain of el-Mutathellem and ed*Darr&j ?

2 Yea, and the place where her camp stood in er-RaqmatUn is now

like the tracery drawn afresh by the veins of the inner wrist.
8 The wild kine roam there large-eyed, and the deer pass to and fro,

and their younglings rise up to suck from the spots where they lie

all round.

4 I sfcood there and gazed : since I saw it last twenty years had flown,

and much I pondered thereon : hard was it to know again —

5 The black stones in order laid in the place where the pot was set,

and the trench like a cistern's root with its sides lubroken still.

6 And when I knew it at last for her resting-place, I cried —

' Good greeting to thee, 0 House — fair peace in the morn to thee !'

7 Look forth, O Friend — canst thou see aught of ladies camel-borne

that journey along the upland there above Jurthum well ?

8 Their litters are hung with precious stuffs, and thin veils thereon

cast loosely, their borders rose, as though they were dyed in blood.

9 Sideways they sat as their beasts clomb the ridge of es-Siib&n

— ^in them were the sweetness and grace of one nourished in wealth

and ease.

B

10 C. J. Lyall— 2%45 Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. [No. 1,

10 The J went on their way at dawn — ^thej started before sunriBe :

straight did they make for the vale of er-Bass as hand for mouth.

11 Dainty and playful their mood to one who should try its worth,

and faces fair to an eye skilled to trace out loveliness.

12 And the tassels of scarlet wool in the spots where they gat them down

glowed red like to ^ishriq seeds, fresh-fallen, unbroken, bright.

13 And when they reached the wells where the deep blue water lies,

they cast down their staves and set them to pitch the tents for rest.

14 On their right hand rose el-Qan&n and the rugged skirts thereof —

and in el-Qan&n how many are foes and friends of mine !

15 At eve they left es-Siibftn : then they crossed its ridge again

borne on the fair-fashioned litters, all new and builded broad.

XL

16 I swear by the Holy House which worshippers circle round —

the men by whose hands it rose, of Jurhum and of Qureysh-—

17 How goodly are ye, our Lords, ye twain who are found by men

good helpers in every case, be it easy to loose or hard !

18 Busily wrought they for peace, those two of Ghey5, Hurrah's son,

when the kin had been rent in twain and its friendship, sunk in

blood.

19 Te healed 'Abs and Duby&n's breach when the twain were well-nigh

spent,
and between them the deadly perfume of Menshim was work-
ing hate.

20 Ye said — * If we set our hands to Peace, base it broad and firm

by the giving of gifts and fair words of friendship, all will be well.'

21 And ye steadfastly took your stand thereon in the best of steads,

far away from unbrotherliness and the bitter result of wrong.

22 Yea, glory ye gained in Ma'add, the highest — (Jod guide you right !

who gains without blame a treasure of glory, how great is he !

23 The wounds of the kindred were healed with hundreds of camels good :

he paid them forth troop by troop who had no part in the crime ;

24 Kin paid them forth to kin as a debt due from friend to friend,

and they spilt not between them so much as a cupper's cup full of

blood.

25 Among them went forth, your gift, of the best of your fathers' store,

fair spoils, young camels a many, slit-eared, of goodly breed.

1S78.2 0. J. Ljfdi—The Mo'allaqah qfZuheyr. 11

III.

26 Ho ! carry my message true to the tribesmen together leagued

and Duby&n — ^Have je sworn all that ye took upon you to swear ?

27 It boots not to hide from God aught evil within your breasts:

it will not be hid — what men would hold back from Gt)d, He knows.

28 It may be its meed comes late : in the Book is the wrong set down

for the Beckoning Day ; it may be that vengeance is swift and

stem.

29 And War is not aught but what ye know well and have tasted oft :

not of her are the tales ye tell a doubtful or idle thing.

30 When ye set her on foot, ye start her with words of little praise ;

but the mind for her grows with her growth, till she bursts into

blazing flame.

31 She will grind you as grist of the mill that falls on the skin beneath ;

year by year shall her womb conceive, and the fruit thereof shall

32 Yea, boys shall she bear you, all of ill omen, eviUer [be twins :

than A^mar of 'Ad : then suckling and weaning shall bring their

33 Such harvest of bitter grain shall spring as their lords reap not [gain :

from acres in el-'Ir&q of bushels of com and gold.

IV.

34 Yea, verily good is the kin, and unmeet the deed of wrong

Hofejn son of J^amdam wrought against them, a murder foul !

35 He hid deep within his heart his bloody intent, nor told

to any his purpose, till the moment to do was come.

36 He said—' I will work my will, and then shall there gird me round

and shield me from those I hate a thousand stout cavalry.'
87 So he slew : no alarm he raised where the tents stood peacefully,

though there in their midst the Vulture-mother had entered in

38 To dwell with a lion fierce, a bulwark for men in fight,

a lion with angry mane upbristled, sharp tooth and claw,

39 Fearless : when one him wrongs, he sets him to vengeance straight,

unfaltering : when no wrong lights on him, 'tis he that wrongs.

V.

40 They pastured their camels athirst, until when the time was ripe

they drove them to pools all cloven with weapons and plashed with

blood :

12 C. J. ljj2X\—The Mo*allaqah ofZuheyr, [No. 1,

41 They led through their midst the Dooms : then they drove them forth

again
to the pasture rank and heavy, till their thirst should grow anew.

42 But their lances — ^by thy life ! were guilty of none that fell :

Nehik's son died not by them, nor by them el-Muthellem*s slain ;

43 Nor had they in Naufal's death part or share, nor by their hand

did Wahab lie slain, nor by them fell el-Mukhazzem's son.

44 Yet for each of those that died did they pay the price of blood —

good camels imblemished that climb in a row by the upland road

45 To where dwells a kin great of heart, whose word is enough to shield

whom they shelter when peril comes in a night of fierce strife and

storm ;

46 Tea, noble are they ! the seeker of vengeance gains not from them

the blood of his foe, nor is he that wrongs them left without help.

VI.

47 Aweary am I of life's toil and travail : he who like me

has seen pass of years fourscore, well may he be sick of life !

48 I know what To-day unfolds, what before it was Yesterday ;

but blind do I stand before the knowledge To-morrow brings.

49 I have seen the Dooms trample men as a blind beast at random treads

— whom they smote, he died : whom they missed, he lived on to

strengthless eld.

50 Who gathers not friends by help in many a case of need

is torn by the blind beast's teeth, or trodden beneath its foot.

51 And he who his honour shields by the doing of kindly deed

grows richer : who shuts not the mouth of reviling, it lights on him.

52 And he who is lord of wealth and is niggardly with his hoard

alone is he left by his kin : nought have they iov him but blame.

53 Who keeps faith, no blame he earns : and that man whose heart is led

to goodness unmixed with guile gains freedom and peace of souL

54 Who trembles before the Dooms, yea, him shall they surely seize,

albeit he set in his dread a ladder to climb the sky.

55 Who spends on unworthy men his kindness with lavish hand,

no praise does he earn, but blame, and repentance the end thereof.

56 Who will not yield to the spears when their feet turn to him in peace

shall yield to the points thereof, and the long flashing blades of

steeL
67 Who holds not his foe away from his cistern with sword and spear,

it is broken and spoiled : who uses not roughness, him shall men

wrong.

1878.] C. J. LjaXi—The Mo'allaqah ofZuheyr. 18

58 Who seeks far away from bis kin for housing, takes foe for friend :

who honours himself not weU, no honour gains he from men.

59 Who makes of his soul a beast of burden to bear men's loads,

nor shields it one day from shame, yea, sorrow shall be his lot.

60 Whatso be the shaping of mind that a mim is bom withal,

though he think it lies hid from men, it shall surely one day be

known.

61 How many a man seemed goodly to thee while he held his peace,

whereof thou didst learn the more or less when he turned to

62 The tongue is a man's one half, the other his valiant heart : [speech !

besides these two nought is left but a semblance of flesh and blood.

63 If a man be old and a fool, his folly is past all cure :

but a young man may yet grow wise and cast o£E his foolishness.

VII.

61 We asked, and ye gave : we asked once more, and ye gave again ;

but the end of much asking must be that no giving shall follow it.

^ Notes to thb iMTSODirCTioir.

* This story is taken from the Agh&ni, iz. pp. 149 — 150 ; it rests on the
following undd ;~-el-]^a8an ihn 'All, who heard it from Mol^ammed ihn el-Qiisim ibn
Mahraweyh, who heard it from 'AbdaU&h ihn Ahi Sa'd, who heard it from Mo^^ammed
ibn Isl^ el-Musey^dht, who heard it from IbrcLhim ibn Mohammed ibn *Abd-el-^Aztz ibn
H>mar ibn 'Abd-er-RabmlUi ibn 'Au^ who had it from his father. 'Abd-er-Ea^^mHn
■on of 'Auf was one of the first converts to el-IsIcLm, and must have known well el-
mrith son of 'Anf of Bubyan, who in his old age became a Muslim. There is some
nncertaiaty as to the names of those who bore the bloodwit at the peace between *Ab8
and £)ubySn : but the great majority of the authorities recog^ze el-Q&rith as the
leader in the peace ; some join with him Kh&rijeh son of Sin&n, his first cousin, and
othera KhArijeh's brother Herim. That two were foremost in the noble work is ap-
parent from ▼. 18 of the Mo^aUaqah, as also that they were of the house of Ghey^ son of
Morrah. If Herim had been one, it seems probable that this glory would have been
claimed for him by name by Zuheyr, whose chief patron he was ; but though Herim
is praised in a large number of poems by Zuheyr, this particular deed is never claimed
for him. It is observable that, while two are spoken of in w. 17 — 22 of the poem
(where the dual number is used throughout), afterwards, when speaking of the second
payment made necessary by the murder coimnitted by ^o^eyn (w. 42 — 44), Zuheyr
uses the plural, as if many of the family of Ghey t} had taken part in it.

* This tale rests on the authority of the famous Abd 'Obeydeh, and is also in
the Aghftnt (ix. pp. 148-9). It is told in substantially the same termfl by et-Tebriat
and Ibn Nubiteh. In el-MeydAnl's Proverbs (Freytag*8 edn., ii. pp. 276 aqq.) it is
said that it was Kharijeh son of Sin^ who offered his son and two hundred camels to
the men of 'Abs in satisfaction for the murder of the man slain by Qo^yn ; and the
curious fiu^t is added that of the two hundred camels only one hundred were paid, for
eUIalibn came and diminished the amount of the bloodwit to that number. If this wer»

14 C. J. Lyall— 2!*tf Mo'allaqah ofZuheyr. [No. 1,

true, it would be an important datum for fixing the year in which the peace was made ;
but it is not conflistent with the other facts of the history. The date of the peace ia
fixed by M. Caussin de Perceval, on grounds of great probability, at from 608 to 610
A. D. (Essai, ii. p. 499) ; it was not till the 8th year of the Hijrah (629—639 A. D.) that
'Abs and £)uby^ embraced el-Isl&m (id, iii, p. 218). According to the ?qd el-Ferid
of Ibn 'Abd Rabbih, quoted by M. Fresnel (Joum. Asiatique, 8me s^rie, iv. p. 20),
the two persons whom Zuheyr praises in his Mo^aqah are 'Auf and Ma'qil, sons of
Subey* son of *Amr, of the line of Tha^lebeh ibn Sa^d. These two did indeed, accor-
ding to el-MeydAni, make peace between *Abs and their own tribe of the Benii Tha*-
lebeh, who at first refused to join the rest of £)uby4n in the engagement ; but it is
impossible to reg^ard them as the two praised by Zuheyr if t. 18 is genuine, inasmuch
as they were not of the line of Ghey^ son of Murrah.

The name of the man who was slain by ^o^eyn son of pam^Uun is given by el*
Meydani and the 'Iqd as TtjAn. 'Antarah slew Pamjam, Qofeyn's father, on the Day
of el-Mureyqib, one of the earliest battles of the war (Fresnel, loc» eit, p. 6), and Ward
son of ^&bis flew Herim, Qosoyn's brother, on the Day of el-Ya^uriyyeh, imme-
diately after the slaying of the hostages by ^oSeyfeh (Aghlbii, xvi 30). Between
these two dates 'Antarah composed his Mo^allaqah, in w. 73 — 75 of which he mentions
Pam4am as slain by his hand, and the two sons as still alive.

It is worthy of notice that the Mo'alliaqah, in w. 40—46, (if those verses are
rightly placed,) seems to tell of a graver dissension as having arisen out of Qo^eyn's
violent deed than that which this tradition relates ; for it would appear that the renewal
of strife which followed it was the occasion when the slain men named in w. 42 and
43 (said in the commentary to be all of ^Abs) met their death ; and that some bloodshed
ensued seems certain from the metaphor in w. 40 — 41, whore the camels, (that is,
the fighting men,) after a f >m', or period of thirst, are said to have been led down again
to drink of the pools of Death. The ^im* was probably the truce during which peace
was being arranged.

* This parenthesis, telling of the end of Qeys son of Zuheyr, is founded on the
testimony of Ibn el-Athir, who is believed generally to follow Abii 'Obeydeh (K4mil
L p. 434.), and et-Tebrizt (Qam^eh, p. 223) ; it is vouched for by a poem by a man
of 'Abs, Bishr son of Ubayy son of ^om^m, quoted in the Qam&seh, where it is said
of the horses that ran in the Kace of D&^is —

<< They brought to pass— so Gkni willed— the spilling of MAlik's blood,
and cast Qeys away forlorn an exile in feir ^m&n.^'

^ This paragraph is mine, and expresses what seems to me the most probable
view to take of the case. I should add that besides el-^&rith, Herim, and EhArijeh,
another pair of the house of Qhey)$ are mentioned in the 'Iqd (Joum. Asiat., JuiUet
1837, p. 18) as having exerted themselves to establish peace between 'Abs and Bnbydn,
vis. ^^Uumaleh son of el-Ash*ar and his son H&ahim.

KoTBS TO THB Mo^ALLAOAH.

The measure of the poem is the noble cadence called the Twoil^ most loved of all
by the ancient poets. Each hemistich consists of four feet, amnged thus—

187&] 0. J. LjtJl—The Mo'allaqah ofZuheyr. 15

(In the iecond foot the third syllable is occasionally, bat rarely, short: the only
instances of a short third syllable in the 128 hemistichs of this poem are y. 14, a and
by y. 28, by and y. 83, d ; it is obeeryable that it most frequently occurs with proper
names.)

In the English an attempt has been made to imitate the metre of the original.
The measure adopted is not absolutely unlmown in our langpiage ; it is to be found in
many lines of that wonderful organ-swell, Browning's Abt Vogler ; the seyenih stanza
of that poem in particular is almost entirely in the TatoU, The following lines are
exactly the Arabic cadence —

'* Existent behind all laws, that made them and, lo, they are !"

" Andy there I Ye haye heard and seen : consider and bow the head !"

Other Yerses of the same stanza exhibit the licences which I have found it neces-
sary to take with the metre to adapt it to the English ; these are chiefly the following : —

(1.) Dropping the first short syllable, as in y. 10, bf 11, a.

Hub 18 a licence which the Arabs themselyes allow, but only (except in a few
doubtful instanoes) at the commencement of a poem. It is matched by Browning's —

" GiYe it to me to use I I mix it with two in my thought."

(2.) Addition of a short syllable at the beginning of a foot^ as in y. 12, a ; so in
Browning —

'' And I know not if, saye in this, such gift be allowed to man."

(3.) Exchanging the one long third syllable of the second foot for two short) as
in T. 4) « and b ; so Brownings-

^' But here is the finger of Gk>d, a flash of the Will that can.''

(4.) Changing ^ — — into ^ ^ «— in the third foot, as in y. 9, a, y. 11, b;
compare Browning's —

'* That out of three sounds he i^ame, not a fourth sound, but a Star.'

>»

The text aboye giyen and translated is that of Arnold (Leipzig, 1850), with two
■light amendments in the Yocalization of y. 3 ^ and y. 69 by and the substitution of lau
£ar ti» in y. 64 ^ ; of these the last two are indicated in Arnold's notes, pp. 23 and 24,
and the first is adopted from ez-Zauzeni. Arnold's recension agrees in the text and
arrangement of the yerses with ez-Zauzeni's^ except in y. 69, which the latter entirely
omits.

• Another recension is to be found in Ahlwardt, Six Poets, pp. 94 aqq, ; this is based
on the MSS. of Gotha and Paris : it difibrs from Arnold's chiefly in the arrangement of
the yerses in the teshbib describing the journey of the ladies, and in the omission of
seyeral of the Twnximw which follow y. 49 and the arrangement of those which it retains.
The following is the order of the yerses in Ahlwardt's recension as compared with
Amold'% the nnmbeia of the yenes being those of the latter and the axraogement that of
the foimeir :—

16 C. J. Lyall— OTtf Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr. [No. 1,

1—8, (9 omitted) 11, 10, 14—16, 12—13, 18, 16—17, 19—22, 26, 23—24, 26^-44
a, (after which Ahlwardt inserts a second hemistich which is not in Arnold, and com-
mences the next Terse with a first hemistich which is also wanting in the latter. Arnold's
44 b agrees with Ahlwaidt's 44 b :) 45— 47, 49, 48, 60, 62, 61, 67, 64, 66, 63, 68, 60, 69.
TV. S6 and 61 — 64 are omitted ; they will be found in the Appendix, p. 192.

Of the two main dififerences above mentioned, it must be admitted that the arrange-
ment of the verses describing the journey reads more smoothly and consecutively in
Ahlwardt's text than in Arnold's ; perhaps this is rather a reason for suspecting the hand
of a later adjuster than for rejecting the more difficult order : in such a matter how-
ever no critical judgment is worth much. The second difference, the omission of w.
56 and 61->64 among the sententious utterances which close the poem, seems to be
also generally in favour of Ahlwardt ; v. bb might, as he suggests (Bemorkungen iiber
die Aechtheit &c., p. 64), find its proper place after v. 61. Of the last four verses of
Arnold I would retain v. 64, which seems a fitting close of the poem, and appropriate
to the tradition (of two payments by the Peace-makers) with which it is connected ;
the other three are clearly out of place where they stand, and belong to another poem
(perhaps two others), whether by Zuheyr or some other poet.

Among the minor differences of arrangement, Ahlwardt's text seems to err in
placing V. 18 before w. 16-17 ; v. 16 appears clearly to be the opening of the real
theme, and the change of person in v. 18 (called iltifdtj is of frequent occurrence in the
old poetry and offers no difficulty. Of the transposition of v. 26 there is little to be
said one way or the other. The additions in Ahlwardt after v. 44 a are evidently to
be rejected, the second inserted hemistich being a mere echo of v. 24 a.

Of textual differences there are few of much importance; in v. 11 a, Ahlwardt reads
li-f'fodiqi for li^l-lafi/i ; in v. 14 &, wa man for ica ham ; in v. 16 d, mufa"am% for wa
muf*ami : in v. 20 b, m«na-^-'ainr» for mina-l-qauli : in v. 22 a, ioa gheyriM for hudi-
tumd : in v. 26 b, ifdli'l'Muzennemi for ifdlin musmnemi (see note below on this verse) :
in V. 26 a, faman mubliffhu for aid ^ablighi : in v. 27 a, tektumenna (wrongly) for tehtu*
munnOf and nufiisikum for fud&rihum (last better) : in v. 21 b, iahmil for iunUj (last
better) : in v. 36 i, yet^'efiy'emi for yetaqaddewU : in v. 37 a, tefza* buy&tun kethiretun
for yufzi^ buytttan kethiretan (last preferable) : in v. 40 a, ra*'au md ra^au min fimUhim
thumtna for ra^au finCahum hattd iSd temma, and &, teailu bir-rimdhi for tefarrd bis'tiidhi
(last preferable metrically) : in v. 43 a, ahdrakufi-Uqaumi for ahdraket fi-l-mauti : in v.
46 by fala^at for faraqet (last preferable, since the former unnecessarily repeats the
(dli'dttn of V. 44 d) : in v. 46 a, iu-Uwitri yudriku witrahu for iu-d'^iykni yudriku teb-
lahu : in v. 64 a, eUmeniyyeti yelqakd for eUmendyd yenelnahUf and d, rdma for yerga : in
y. 63 a, yufdi for yuhda : in v. 60, b, wa lau for tva in : in v. 69, for our reading Ahl-
wardt has the following-^

%oa man lam yezel yettahmilu^-ndsa nefsahu,

wald yughnihd yauman mina^d^dahri, yn^ami :

in y. 63 b, (Appendix p. 192,) yahlumu (right : see note below) for yahlumi :
in V. 64 d, aayoJ^ramu for sayohrami (both are equally right g^rammatically, but the
former would be an igtpd if the verse really belongs to this poem).

The verses of the Mo'allaqah quoted in the AghAnt are the following : —

together on p. 146, Vol. ix, — w. 1, 8, 4, 6, 66, 64 (in the laat verse Ahlwardffl
reading, not Arnold's, is given) :
on p. 148, v. 18 :

1878.] C- J. Lyall— -2%fi Mo^allaqah of Zuleyr, 17

on p. 150, YV. 18, 25 (ifdU-UMuzennemi^ in accordance with Abti ^Oboydeh'a
reading), 24 :

on p. 154, V. 60 (with the story of this verse having been quoted by ^Othman son
of <Aff^].

The translation offered is as literal as I have found it possible to make it consis-
tently with Elnglish idiom and the rhythm ; where it seemed necessary, I have ex-
plained deviations firom absolute literalness in the notes : where the change of phrase
was slight, I have not thought it needful to notice it. Thus in v. 3, a, khilfetan is not
" to and fro** but " one after another : in v. 32, " Boys shall she bear you, of ill
omen, all of them like Ahmar of 'l.d," is the word-for-word rendering. I have
not however consciously anywhere departed from the sense of the original, and
but seldom from the phrase. Of other translations, the only ones I have seen are that
by M. Caussin de Perceval, at pp. 531 — 536 of YoL ii of his Essai aur Vhuioire den
Arabe8 avant CIslamismey and that by Riickert (which omits the teshbib) at pp. 147 — 150
of the first volume of his translation of the Qam&seh ; the translation by Sir W. Jones,
which I believe to be the only one before published in English, I have not been able
to consult.

▼. 1. El-Mutathellem (according to the Marasid, el-Mutathellim) is a hill in the
high land stretching Ea^t of the northern Qij&z, in the country of the Bend Murrah
of Gha^.fan ; it is mentioned in 'Antarah's Mo'allaqah, v. 4, in connection with el-
^azn and es-^mmAn. Of ed-Darraj no particular information is given in the Mar4sid.

T. 2. ^ Er-Raqmatdn" : according to ez-2iauzent two places are meant by this
name, which is the dual of er'taqmeh, a word meaning '* the meadow" {raudah) ; he
says that one village called er-Baqmeh is near el-Basrah, and another of the same name
near el-Medlneh : they are thus far distant one from another. Raqnieh however
means, besides a meadow, the side of a valley, or the place in it where water collects ;
it seems more probable from the way in which the name is used that one place, not two,
is intended ; the same name, in the same dual form, occurs in a lament by a woman
of Ghatafan over the death of M&lik son of Bedr given in the Agh&ni (xvi, p. 30) —

'^ So long as a turtle moans in the g^ves of er-ltaqmatdn
or er-Bass, so long weep thou for him that rode el-Ketefan/'

The second hemistich of this verse gives concisely a simile for the water- worn traces
of the tents which is found in a more expanded form in Lebid's Mo^allaqah, vv. 8 and
9, g. V. The tattooing over the veins of the inner wrist is said to be renewed, because
the torrents have scored deeply certain of the trenches dug round the tents, while others
that did not lie in the path of the flood have become only fSaintly marked, like the
veinB beneath the tracery.

C

18 C. J. LjaW^Tke Mo'allaqah ofZuhei/r. [No. 1,

V. 3. " The wild kine," the antiiope defassaj a species of bovine antelope. " The
deer," drdm (for ar'dm)f plural of rCm. RCm is the white antelope {antiiope leue&ryz) ;
though identical in form with the Hebrew r*em {ret/m), it is very doubtful whether the
latter word means the same : the T.xy translate it by futy6K€p»s (A. Y. '* unicorn").
The Assyrian is, like the Arabic, rCmu, and there is a good discussion of the meaning
of this word in an article on the Animals of the Assyrian Sculptures in the Transactions
of the Society of Biblical ArchsBology for 1877 ; it appears certain that it is not the
antiiope leticon/x, but some larger and robuster animal, perhaps the wild buffalo (see
Job zxxiz, 9-12).

V, 6. " Trench*' : round the tent a trench is dug to receive the rain ficom the
roof and prevent the water from flooding the interior.

V. 6. " In the mom" : the morning was the time when raids were made, and
the word fabAh thus itself is used in the sense of a sudden attack. Yd fabdhdh was the
battle-cry {ahi^dr) of Temim in the Day of el-KulAb. To wish peace in the morning
to a place is therefore an appropriate greeting.

vv. 7 — 16. The journey here described would take the wanderers along the
southern skirt of the tract called by Palgrave (Cent, and East. Arabia, YoL I, chap,
vi) " the Upper Kaseem ;" er-Eass is still a place of some importance, and will be
found marked on Palgrave's map some distance to the North of ^Oneyzeh. In the days
of Zuheyr the country was in the possession of the Bend Asad, who were not always
on the Mendliest terms with the Benii £)uby&n, among whom the poet lived.

V. 12. Tassels of scarlet wool decorated the haudaj in which ladies rode. " *J«A-
riq seeds" : habbu-Ufend ; the exact nature of this plant with a* scarlet seed or finiit
is very doubtful : see Lane, «. w. (Hy^hp and ^JJ

V. 16. " The Holy House" is the Ka*beh. The mention of its building by the
Qureysh and the men of Jurhum must not be understood of the same time. Jurhum
was the name of two Arab stocks : the first the ancient race who peopled the lower
JHijdz and TiMmeh at the time of the legendary settlement of Ishmacl among them,
with whom he is said to have intermarried ; the second (whom M. de Perceval regards as
alone having had a historical existence) a tribe who ruled in Mekkeh from about 70
B. C. to 200 A. D. They were expelled from Mekkeh and dispersed so that no me-
morial of them remained by an Azdite stock fix)m el- Yemen called the Khuz&^ah (O.
de Perceval, Essai, i, 218. AghAni, xiii, 108-111.). The second Jurhum are said
(Agh. tV/., p. 109) to have rebuilt the Ka^beh on the foundations laid by Abraham after
it had been overthrown by a flood : the architect was one 'Omar el-J&nid, whose
descendants were known as the Jedarah, or masons. The Qureysh settled in Mekkeh
during its occupation by the Khuz4*ah, and gained possession of the Ka*beh in the
time of Qu^aj'y, whoso mother was of the race of the Jedarah, about 440 A. D. (0.
de Perceval). Qu^ayy, in the year 460 A. D. or thereabout, caused the building
erected by the Jurhum to be demolished, and rebuilt the Ka'beh on a grander scale.
It was rebuilt a third time in the year 606 A. D., very shortly before the Mo*allaqah
was composed. Mol;^ammed, then 36 years old, assisted in the work. These throo
occasions are probably those to which Zuheyr refers.

1878.] C. J. Lyon— The Mo'allaqah of Zulieyr. 19

** Circle round," \dfa Ikaulahu ; the (awdf, or going round aeven timca, waa one of
the moBt ancient rites of the religion of the Arabs ; it was the mode of worship tised
not only for the Ka^h, bat also for the other objects of reverence among the pagan
Arabs : see Lane, «. v. Duwdr,

y. 18. In this verse md heyna-U^Mhireti must be understood as meaning the
friendship of the two houses of the family. i?^>» ("that which is between") has two
contrary significations : disunion, that which parts or separates, and concord, that
which joins ; so BdtU'Ubeyn means both enmity and friendship.

*Aihtreh here means the stock of Baghl^ son of Reyth son of Gha^£ln, the com-
mon father of 'Abs and Buby&n ; according to the dictionaries ^aahtreh is the smallest
sub-division of the tribe, but its use hero is clearly opposed to that view. The various
words meaning tribe and &mily are very loosely applied in the old poetry, and the
distinctions drawn between them by lexicographers (see Lane «. v, »ha^b) do not seem
to be borne out by usage. La v. 24 *Abs and Bubydn are each called qaum^ and in v.
34 'Abs is a hayy,

V. 1 9. The literal translation of this verse is —

"Ye two repaired the condition of *Abs and Duby&n (by peace), after that
they had shared one with another in destruction, and had brayed between them

the perfume of Mcnshim."
The second hemistich is said to refer to a custom which existed among the Arabs
of plunging their hands into a bowl of perfume as they took an oath together to fight
for a cause until the last of them was slain. Menshim, the commentators say, was a
woman in Mekkeh who sold perfume. Such an oath was followed by war to the bitter
end, and so " he brayed the perfume of Menshim" became a proverb for entering on
deadly strife. That oaths so taken were counted of special force may be seen from the
tale of "the Oath of* the Perfumed ones," hilf el-Mu(ai/^abin, taken by the sons of
'Abd-Menif and their partisans in or about 490 A. D. (see C. de Perceval, Essai, i.
254. Ibn-el-Athir, Eimil, i. pp. 329-30.)

y. 22. Ma'add was the forefather of all those Arabs (generally called mmta^ribeh
or insititious) who traced their descent from 'AdnAn, whose son he was. The name is
thus used to denote the Central stocks, settled for the most part in Nejd and el-^ijiz,
as opposed to the Arabs of el- Yemen or of Yemenic origin by whom they were bor-
dered on the North and South. The name of Ma'add's son Niz4r is also used in the
same way. KizHr was the fsither of Mudar, Rabi'ah, and Anm4r ; the last-named and
his descendants joined themselves to the people of el- Yemen ; and " Rabi'ah and
Mudar" is again a comprehensive term used to desig^te the tribes of Nejd and the
^jiz.

y. 26. " Slit-oared, of goodly breed" : min *ifAlin muzennemi. There are two
ways of taking this phrase : the first is that here adopted, whereby muzenttem is ren-
dered as an adjective attached to *ifdl, meaning " slit-eared." Camels of good breed
had a slit made in the ear, and the piece of skin thus detached (called zenemeh) left to
liang down. The ordinary grammatical construction would require the femininei
muztnnemehy to agree with 'ifM; but the masculine is used by a poetic license. The
other, resting on the authority of Abii *Obeydeh, roads *%fdli Muzennemi, " young
camels (the offspring) of Muzennem" (or el-Muzennem) : Muzcnnem, he says, being the
name of a frunous stallion-camel whose breed was much renowned among the Arabd.

20 C. J. Lyall — The Mo^allaqah of Zulieyr. [No. 1,

It is worth remarkmg that this line seems to contradict the assertion of et-Tebrizi,
in his commentary on the Ham&seh, p. 107, that the young camels (seven or eight
months old) called *ifdl (plural of '«/W) were not given in payment of bloodwits.
Perhaps there was an exception in the case of the better breeds. The passage, how-
ever, on which et-Tebrizi makes this remark does not necessarily boar him out.

V. 26. " Tribesmen together leagued," el-Ahldf, plural oi hilf. The commen-
tary says that these confederates were Ghatafin, Asad and Tayyi' ; other authorities
quoted by Lane fs. v. hilf J restrict the appellation to Asad and Ghatafdn, Asad and
Tayyi', or FezArah (a branch of BubyAn) and Asad. Since Duby&n, a division of
Gha^af&n, is named separately firom the Ahldfy it would seem probable that the word
here means only Asad and T^yyi*. I do not, however, find that these confederates
took any part in the War of D&^, except at the battle of Shi'b Jebcleh, when Asad
joined BubyAn and Temim against ^Amir and ^Abs ; their presence at the oath-taking
between the various branches of Ghatafan would, however, render the engagement
more formal and solemn : they were a sort of " Guaranteeing Power."

w. 27-28. Herr von Kremer (Culturgoschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen,
Vol. ii., p. 358, note*) regards these verses as interpolated, and alien from the spirit of
the poetry of the Ignorance. Ho says, moreover, that they are inconsistent with v. 48,
which expresses the true feeling of that ago, that of the Future no man knows any-
thing. Certainly their spirit is more religious than is usual in the old poetry, and tho
mention of the Book and the Reckoning Day points to a body of doctrine which wo
are accustomed to think was first planted among the Arabs by Mohammed. But it is
to be remarked that tho passage where the verses come (w. 26-33) seems thoroughly
consecutive and complete in sense : that the same number of verses is given, in the
same order, in all the recensions of the poem ; and that v. 28 exhibits a very curious
construction, easily intelligible indeed, but unlikely to be used in an interpolation :
this is the carrying on of the mejzuni imperfect from the apodosis of the conditional
sentence in v. 27 ^ into the unconditional proposition of v. 28.

As regards the possibility of such an exhortation being addressed to the tribes
settled in the country East of Yethrib and South of the mountains of T^yyi' in 610
A. D., I do not think that it should be hastily rejected. Few subjects are more obscure
than the real nature of the religion of the pagan Arabs. It would seem that at the
time when the Prophet arose there was extremely little religious faith in the people of
any sort : that their old divinities were held by them in much the same estimation as
that in which our own forefathers in Norway and Iceland held Odin and Thor when
Christianity first overspread the North. But beyond the reverence, such as it was, paid to

♦ His words are — " Das Gedicht, Zohair XVI, wird man wegon v. 27 (28), der von
der Abrechnung am jiingsten Tage spricht, fiir unecht oder interpolirt erklarenmiissen.
Ich entscheide mich fiir das Letztere, denn v. 49 (48) spricht die echte, alte Idee aus,
dass man von dem Zukiinftigen nichts wisse." In the same note, H. von Kremer sees
traces of Mohammedan recension in the name 'Abd-allAh in a poem of 'Antarah's. I
presume that he considers the occurrence of that name as belonging to the father of
Mohammed, the son of Jud'An, and the brother of Dureyd son of e?-Simmeh, as well
as to the tribe-fathers *Abd-allAh ibn el-Azd (Ma^drif, p. 64), *Abd-allAh ibn Ghataian
{id. p. 39), and *Abd-allAh ibn KaT) and ^Abd-allAh ibn KilAb, sub-divisions of *Amir ibn
^a'^a'ah {id. pp. 42 and 43), to be insufficiently vouched for.

ARIANS ( DARDS ) OF THE UPPER INDUS.

(Tht c

e ail btack.)

1878.] C. J. Lyall— TAfi Mo'alla^ah of Zuheyr. 21

el-L4t, el-K)zz&, MenAt, Fols, Wedd, and the rest, there was certainly a back-ground
of Mth in The Gk)d, Allah, whose name was, as it still is, in the mouth of every
Bcdawi as his most frequent ejaculation. Without assuming such a faith as already
well known to the people, a great portion of the Qur'An would bo impossible : that
revelation is addressed to men who join other gods with God, not those who deny Him.
Some tribes may have had more of this belief in the One God, and been accustomed to
look more immediately to Him, others (especially those who, like the Qureysh, pos-
sessed famous shrines of idolatrous worship which brought them in much profit,) less :
probably contact with Judaism and Christianity determined in some measure the
greater or less degree of it. Now among the neighbours of the tribes of Ghataf&n
were the Jews settled frx)m Yethrib to Kheybar and Teymfi ; to the North was Kelb in
the Daumat (or Dumat) el-Jcndel, almost entirely Christian ; Christianity had made
some progress in T^yyi', nearer still ; and we have seen how, according to a fairly
vouched for story, Qeys son of Zuheyr, the chief of *Abs, spent the last years of bis life as
a Christian anchorite in *OmAn. To the West was Yethrib, in constant relations with
the Kings of Ghassan, who were Christian, together with their people ; and to the
North-east was el-I^ireh, whose King, en-No^&n Abii QAbiLs, had long been a
Christian, and where Christianity had spread among the people long before his day.
£n-Niibighah of Bubydn, ZuhejVs famous contemporary, had dwelt long at the
Courts both of el-Hireh and Ghassan; and in a well-known passage* (much con-
tested, it is true, but in favour of the genuineness of which much may be said,) he
refers to a Rabbinical legend of Solomon's power over the Jinn, and how they built
for him Tedmur. At the fair of *0k&$ Quss son of SdHdch had preached Christianity
long before Zuheyr made this poem. And to *Abs itself belonged one of the JFTanifa,
Khilid son of Sin4n son of Ghoyth (see Ibn Quteybeh, Ma'dri^ p. 30). These
things seem to me to make it not impossible that the lines may be genuine. The
objection that they are inconsistent with v. 48 appears wholly groundless ; the latter
refers to the vicissitudes of this world and the chances of life : the former to the
reckoning of God in the world after death. (See note on v. 32 for a further argument
in £Eivour of the authenticity of these verses.)

y. 29. War, eUHarb, is feminine in Arabic ; as in w. 31 and 32 it is personified
as a woman, it seemed best to use in the translation the feminine pronoun in vv. 29
and 30.

V. 31. '' Skin," thifdl, is the mat of skin that is placed beneath the mill to
receive the flour. The comparison of War to a mill and the slain to ground grain is
common in the old poetry ; so says *Amr son of Kulthum (Mo'aU. w. 30, 31) —

♦ En-N&bighah, v. 22 tqq. For a discussion of this passage, see Noeldeko,
Beitrage z. Kenntn. der Poes. d. alt. Araber, p. XI, and Ahlwardt, Bemerkungen uber
die Aechtheit d. alt Arab. Gedichte, pp. 17-18 and 41. Noeldeke appears to overlook
the tradition (unless he rejeQts it) that en-Noin&n was a Christian.

22 C. J. LjBl\—The Mo'ailaqah of Zuhej/r. [No. 1,

" When our War-mill ib set against a people

aa grain they £ei11 thereunder ground to powder ;

Eastward in Nejd is set the skin beneath it,
and the grain cast therein is all Qu^^ah."

" Year by year shall her womb conceive" : telqal^ kUhdfan ; Jciahdf is said of a
she-camel that conceives in two following years. Another word used in a like sense
of War is ^awdn, which is applied to an animal with a hard hoof (as a cow or mare),
that after bringing forth her first-bom (bikr) conceives again forthwith and bears
another yoimg one ; so harbun ^awdn is said of a war the fury of which is perpetually
renewed (see Qam^seh, p. 180). Again, hd^ilt plural hiydl, is used of a war which lies
long dormant ; its meaning is a she-camel that docs not conceive for two years, or some
years, and it is therefore the opposite of kishdf. El-Q&rith son of *Ob&d said of the
War of Basils after the slaying of his son Bujoyr by Muhelhil —

" The War of Wil'il has conceived at last, having long been barren."

V. 82. " Ahmar of *Ad." According to the received story of the Muslims, it
was to Thamiid, not to *Ad, that the prophet $Ali^ was sent to warn them of their wick-
edness. The sign that he gave them was a gigantic she-camel that issued forth at his
bidding from a rock (Qur'^ vii. 71) : " Then said those among them that were filled
with pride — * Verily we reject that in which ye believed.' And they slew the she-camel
and rebelled against their Lord, and said — *0 §alil^ ! bring upon us that wherewith
thou didst threaten us, if thou art indeed of the Sent of God !' Then the earthquake
seized them, and they lay on their faces in their dwellings, dead." (Qur. /. c. w.
74 — 76. The story is also told in Sdrah xi, w. 64 — 71.) The leader in the slaying
of the Camel was Qudslr el- Ahmar, " Qud4r the Red" ; and thus " More ijnlucky than
A^mar of Thamiid," fiind ** More unlucky than the Slayer of the She-camel," became
proverbs. The people of Thamftd ( — who are mentioned* by Diodorus Siculus and
Ptolemy, and as late as 460 A. D. in the Kotitia dignitatum utrimqtie imperii: see
C. de Perceval, Essai i., p. 27 — ) dwelt in ^ijr, a valley on the road Northwards from
the Qij&z into Syria, The race of 'Ad, on the contrary, were settled -in the South of
Arabia, in the Ahqdf, now a vast desert of sand : Ibn Qutoybeh (Ma'Arif, p. 16) places
them "in ed-Daww, and od-Dahn&, and *Alij, and Yebrin, and Webbar, from *OmAn
to Qa^ramaut and el- Yemen." To them was sent Hud (Qur. vii. 63 and xi). They
were thus separated by the whole distance of Arabia frova. Thamud, and, it is probable,
also by a vast space of time, if the Thamtideni of the Notitia dignitatum axe the same
as the latter people. The commentators give two reasons to explain why Zuheyr
said, ** Alimar of *Ad" instead of " Ahmar of Thamiid" : the first is the necessity of the
rhythm, which would not permit him to say Thamiid ; the second is that some of the
genealogists say that Thamiid was a cousin of 'Ad, and after the destruction of the

• In Mr. George Smith's " Assyria" (" Ancient History from the Monimients"
Series), p. 100, Sargon, in 716 B. C, is related to have led an expedition into Arabia,
" where he conquered the Thamudites and several other tribes, carrying them captive
and placing them in the cities of Samaria."

1878.] C. J. Lj9\\—The Mo'aUaqah of Zuheyr. 23

ancient race of 'Ad the people of Thamud inherited their possessions and were called
^Ad el-Akhireh, '' tiie later *Ad." The first reason must be rejected, for it would have
heen easy to the poet so to frame the verse that ThamM might have been used instead
of 'Ad : for instance, he might have said —

Fatunt^ lakum gkilmdnay kullun ka'annahu

Qiiddru Tham&din : thumma tur^i^ fqtef(imi,

Moreorer other poets also speak of Ahmar of ^Ad: e. g,, Abil Jundab el-HutSali,
quoted by et-Tebrizi in the I^am^seh, p. 421. The second is more probable, though
the Biblical genealogies framed for 'Ad and ThamM by later Muslim writers can
hardly have been known to Zuheyr. According to these, the following was the
descent of these two tribes —

Niy? (Noah)

Sftm (Shem)

I
Irem (Ajram)

*Ati9 (Ub) *Abir or Juthir (Gether)

'Ad ThamM

A third hypothesis is possible— that some Tersion of the legend of $alih and his Camel,
and the judgment which followed its slaying, was current in the days of Zuheyr
which dropped out of mind when el-Islam overspread the land.

If this verse is genuine, it woidd seem strongly to support the opinion that
yy. 27 — 28 may also be genuine ; for it refers plainly to a legend (mentioned in the
Qnr^ftn in a way which shows that it was well known. to those addressed) of God's
judgment on the wicked. That it is genuine and not a JblusHm interpolation appears
highly probable from the mention of 'Ad rather than Thami^d : the latter would have
been named by a Muslim following the version of the legend embodied in the Qur'An.

V. 33. '' Of bushels of com and gold,'* min qafizin wa dirhemi : the coinage
called dirhem was silver, not gold ; but the latter is hqre used (like the word dirhem in
the original) in the general sense of money. The qajiz was a measure of capacity
containing eight mekkuks or twelve fd^a of el-*Irdq : one 9&^ of Baghdad is 6J ri/fo, or
pints : the qafiz is thus 64 pints. The word is originally Persian, kawtzh (jJ^^.

v. 37. "Though there in their midst the Vulture-mother had entered in,"
ledd htffiku 'alqet rahiahd * Ummu qash^ami: literally, " In that place where the Vulture*
mother cast down her camel-saddle." " To cast down one's saddle" (as "to lay down
one's staff" in v. 13) means to halt in a place. "The Vulture-mother" is a name of
Death, or Calamity ; qtuh^am means an old voltnxt^ and is used in that sense in the
laat verse of 'Antarah's Mo'allaqah.

V. 35. " A bulwark for men in fight," nmqai^af: literally, " one whom men cast
before them (in battle)," to shield themselves or to do a desperate deed.

24 C J. Lyall— 2%tf Mo'aliaqah of Zuleyr. [No. 1,

V. 40. As explained at the end of the second note to the Introduction, this
Terse appears to refer to the breaking out again of strife which followed the deed of
9o?oyn. " They pastured their camels athirst," ra^au if im* ahum : literally, " They
pastured (their camels) for their ftim\ or period between two drinkings." Camels in
Arabia are not taken down to drink every day ; in the greatest heat they are watered
every alternate day : this is called ghibh ; as the weather gets colder, they pass two days
without water, and come down on the fourth : this is called rih^ ; then follow khimSf
gidij and so on to Hshr, when the ^inC is eight days, and they are watered on the tenth.
The camels are the warriors, and the pools the pools of Death. The image seems
intended to figure the senselessness of the strife, and its want of object and aim.

V. 41. " Till their thirst should grow anew**: these words have been added in
the translation to complete the sense ; they follow from the description of the pasture
(kela*J as unwholesome, heavy (mustauhalj , and indigestible (mutawakhkhamj : such,
that is, as to stir their thirst again in a short time. The unwholesome pasture is the
brooding over wrong in the intervals of combat. In like manner Qoys son of Zuheyr
says, of the bitter results of wrong in this same War of D4^ (^amliseh, p. 210.
Aghani xvi., 32) —

<< But the stout warrior ^^amal son of Bedr

wrought wrong : and wrong is a surfeiting pasturage."

V. 44. The commentary on this verse seems to me to err in taking Jcullan as
equivalent to kulUi, wUhidin mina-l-^dqiiin ; it is, I think, equivalent to kulUi w&hidin
mina-Uqatld : this follows from the hu in ya^qilutwhu at the end of the hemistich*
I have translated accordingly.

T. 45. This verse contains a difficult word which the dictionaries do not satis-
factorily explain, viz, hildl in lihayyin hildlin. In form it is the plural of hdll^
<* alighting or abiding in one place" ; but it seems always to be used, as here, as an
epithet of praise. Lane f^s. v. hdllj says that it means *' a numerous tribe alighting
or abiding in one place." I have not foimd it in the Ham&seh, though hayyun holulun
(another plural of hdllj occurs in a poem on p. 171 ; but it is used in a poem by *Amr
son of Kulthdm given in the Agh4ni, voL ix., p. 183 —

SlI^JI JJ^ J^-f cOai 5)j^ ^j^ ^, fji] Je-UI Jj

Which seems to moan —

*< Ho ! carry my message to the sons of Jusham son of Bekr,

and Toghlib, (that they may know) as often as they come to the great irihey
How that the glorious warrior, the son of *Amr,

on the mom of Nat4*» bore himself stoutly in battle."

♦ For the vocalization of NatA* here given see the MarA^id, #, v. It is a village
of el-Yem4meh belonging to the Bend ^anifeh.

1878.] C. J. LjaH—The Mo'allaqak of Zuheyr, 25

It may poadbly mean mtmerwu, and hence ttrtrng, this Benae being derived from that
of a body of men halting together in a compact host, on the alert and prepared for all
attacks.

y. 46. This verse is in praise of 'Aba, and is in continuation of v. 45. The
second hemistich offers some difficulty : one does not expect to find their protection of
■'him tiuit wrongs them'* set down to their credit; but the words ^/-/^itl ^aleyhim
cannot be otherwise rendered. Probably the wronger spoken of is the man who by
slaying a member of another tribe inTolves his own in difficulties. It sometimes
happened that such an one found himself unsupported by his kinsmen, and turned out
from among them as a hhali^ or outcast : for instance, el-^ilrith son of ]pftlimy who
slew Khilid son of Ja*&r of 'Amir while the latter was under the protection of
en-Xo'min son of el-Munt^ir, King of el-Qireh, was so treated by his tribe of
Munah, the same as that to which the men whom Zuheyr praises in this poem
belonged. Such a desertion, unless for the gravest possible cause, was held to be
disgraceful ; and 'Abe are accordingly praised because they would not give up the
wrongdoer, though he brought evil upon them.

V. 47. Zuheyr was eighty years old when he composed his Mo'allaqah ; if this
was in 608 or 610 A. D., as M. de Perceval supposes, he may well have been a hundred,
as the AgliAni relates (ix. 148), when he was seen by Mohammed, who said — '^0 God!
grant me a refoge from his Devil ! " — that is, his cunning in song ; it is added that he
nuide no more poems from that day tUl his death, which ensued shortly after. This
would be about 628 or 630 A. D. ; and we know that his son Ea^ gave in his adhesion
to the Prophet in 631 (the latter part of the ninth year of the Hijrah), after Zuheyr's
other surviving son Bujeyr, together with the greater part of his tribe, the Muzeyneh,
had already embraced el-IsUm.

T. 49. *' Blind beast," ^athwA : literally, '^ a weak-eyed she-camel"— one that
sees not well where she is going, and therefore strikes everything with her forefeet,
not paying attention to the places where she sets down her feet (Lane). The word is
used proverbially : you say — Bekiba fuldnunul-^ashtody " Such an one rides the weak-
eyed she-camel" ; that is, he prosecutes his affair without due deUberation ; and
— Khabaia khabia-U-^tuhw^ ^* He trod with the careless tread of a weak-eyed she-
camel," he acted at random.

y. 50. If this verse is rightly placed next after v. 49,. the tending by the teeth
and the treading under foot should refer to the weak-eyed she-camel spoken of in that
verse ; and so I have taken it, the camel being bUnd Chance^

T. 63. I am £Eur from satisfied with the translation g^ven of this verse, in which^
however, I have scrupulously followed the commentary. The doubtful words are
mu^HU^imm-Unrri and yet^emjem; the former is explained as meaning birriM kh/iUfun^
that is, " puz« goodness" ; and the latter as the same as yetaradded^ that is, '* he is
disturbed, confounded, perplexed." But Lane renders tnufmaUnnU'l-birri as " quiet,
at rest, in heart or mind'* (t. v, birr, end) ; for t^enyema, he gives — ** he spoke indis-
tinctiy, he concealed a thing in his bosom, he held back from the thing, not daring to

D

26 R. B. SU,w—Straif Avians in Tibet. [No. 1,

do it'' ; the sense of " being disturbed in mind" does not occur, fhongb it may, per-
haps, fairly be gathered from the last of those given by Lane. I should be inclined
to render man yuhda qalbuhu, ^<^— " He whose heart is g^ded to quietness and rest of
soul is not disturbed in his doings, but acts without fear or trouble of spirit."

y. 56. Among the Arabs, when two parties of men met, if they meant peaoey
they turned towards each other the iron feet ^«v4;, plural of Mf^J of their spears : if
they meant war, they turned towards each other the points.

y. 57. The "cistem", hau4, is a man's home and fiumily.

y. 60. This verse, the commentary tells us, was quoted by OthmAn son of
'AfEln, the third Khalifeh.

y. 62. This accords with the proverb — innantO'l'mar'u hCafghareyhi—^*'*' A man
is accounted of according to his two smallest things" — ^his heart and his tongue.

yy. 60-62 seem consecutive in sense, and probably belong to the same poem ;
but it is very difficult to see how they cohere with the rest of this. y. 68, on the
other hand, seems separate not only from the rest of the poem, but also from the three
verses that precede it ; grammar would require that the verb at the end of it should
be inarfh\ not m^'z&m — yahlumu, not yahlum : but to read it so would disturb the
rhyme, and be a fault of the kind called iqiod. The commentary says that the mim of
yahlum is originally mauq&f (quiescent in a pause), and is read with kesr, because that
is the appropriate vowel for making a quiescent letter moveable ; but this reason is
very lame. On the whole, it seems certain that v. 63 does not properly belong to the
piece, and it is probable that w. 60-62 are also intrusions. No other poeifi of those by
Zuheyr that remain has the same metre and rhyme as his Mo^Uaqah, and it is most
likely that fragments of other poems, now lost, in this measure and rhyme that have
survived have been included in it, because there was no other piece into which they
could be put. The rest of the maxims fonning the conclusion of the poem can be
understood as arising, some more, some less closely, out of its subject ; but the different
order in which they occur in different recensions, and the iajct that some recensions
omit some of them which others supply, make it doubtful whether even they all pro-
perly belong to the Mo'allaqah.

Stray Ariam in Tibet. — By B. B. Shaw, Political Agend.

(With one plate.)

The line which divides the Musalmftn from the Buddhist populations
of Asia, where it crosses the valley of the Upper Indus, passes through the
villages of a small tribe which is worthy of some attention. It is Arian in
blood though surrounded on all sides but one by Turanians of the Tibetan
branch. The people of this tribe are proved by their language and their
customs, which are supported by their traditions of former migrations, to

1878.] B. B. Shaw— iS/roy Ariam m Tibet. 27

belong to the Dllrd* race, althongh they themselyes are not aware of the
kinship. They are known simply as Brbk-p^ ^or highUnders). While
isolated among strangers they have preseryed themselves with a caste-like
feeling from amalgamating with them, and seem to have only recently and
very superficially accepted the religious beliefs of their neighbours. The
greater port of the tribe is thus nominally Buddhist, while two or three of
their north-westernmost Tillages bordering on Baltistin have become
MuaalmcUi.

This tribe presents therefore, to the student of early institutions, the
interesting sight of a people of pure Arian race, isolated in the semi-
barbarons stage, and who enjoy the rare distinction of being practically
unaffected by the action of any of the great philosophising or methodising
religions ; although in some of their customs they have not altogether
escaped being influenced by contact with neighbours of another race.

I paid a visit to the D4h-Hanu district (the home of these so-called
Buddhist D4rds) on my way down to India from LadAk (Western Tibet)
last winter (1876). In a wild gorge through which the narrow Indus
rushes, and where the grand masses of gpranite seemingly piled in confusion
on both banks scarce leave room for the passage of the river and conceal
the higher mountains behind them, my first camp was pitched. Close by,
the Hanu Bavine, which in its upper part expands into a wide inhabited
valley, escapes through a rocky chasm into the Indus. Here, on a little
triangular plain a few yards in extent between the cliffs and the river, the
only flat spot around, the people of Hanu were waiting to receive me.
The sun was setting ; the gorge was already in deep shade ; a line of women
in dark attire was drawn up along the side of the pathway, each holding
in her hand a saucer full of burning juniper-wood from which columns of
smoke ascended in the still air, uniting overhead in a kind of canopy and
giving out a pungent incense-like odour. A wild music of drums and
screaming pipes was playing* As I approached, the women bent down and
placed on the ground at their feet the smoking bowls which screened them
as in a cloud, while they greeted me in the peculiar manner of their tribe by
waving the two hands rapidly in front of their faces with fingers closed as
if holding something.

My attention was chiefly attracted by some witch-like old hags of the
number, wiih faces begrimed by juniper smoke, whose sharp haggard fea*
tures and deep sunk eyes were in marked contrast with the flat Tibetan
eoontenances to which one is accustomed in Lad4k. These were unmis-

* Although Dr. Leitner (in hia Dardist&n) states that the name Dard was not
daimed by any of the race that he met, yet I have heard the Br^ people of that tribe
apply it to their parent stock in Astor nnder the form DarcU, They are also known to
their Kashmiri Bdighbonrs by the name of Dard^ and Dardu,

28 B. B. Sh&w^Stray Avians in Tibet. [No. 1,

takeablj of a different race. They wore long straight woollen smocks,
square flat caps poised on their heads with one of the comers projecting
over the forehead, the hair done up into numberless slender plaits hanging
loose and straight, and sheep skins suspended like cloaks over the shoulders,
the only part of their dress resembling that of Tibetan women, excepting
the mocassin-like boots. The men were clothed just like Tibetans* with
caps, like black nosebags, falling over one ear.

These people were inhabitants of the Hanu side-valley, whose villages
lie some distance up it, but who had come down to the gorge of the main
river (Indus) to receive me. They have lost their own tribal dialect and
speak Tibetan ; but otherwise in dress and customs they resemble the rest
of their people.

My next day's march led through similar scenery, the path now rising
up the side of the cliff supported on frail-looking scaffoldings of tree-trunks
resting on projecting rocks or on wooden trestles, now plunging precipi-
tously down to the river-side where a stone could be thrown to strike the
opposite cUff across the Indus. We saw a village or two on the other side
at the mouths of lateral valleys, inhabited not by Brokp^ but by Musal-
m^ Tibetans from beyond the mountain-range on the west. At length
we came to a succession of isolated villages on our own (north-east) side of
the river, mostly placed on high alluvial plateaux near the mouths of side
ravines (whence they obtain their water for irrigation), and divided by
vertical cliffs into terraces rising in successive steps. Here the warmth in
summer is great, the rays of the sun being thrown off from the granite
^des of the confined valley, so that where water is available the vegetation
is luxuriant. Vines trail from the overhanging cliffs and from the splendid
walnut trees, and two crops ripen each year on the same ground during the
summer season, nothing being grown in winter. The apricots, mulberries,
and apples of the district are celebrated. Between the villages there is
nothing but the most arid wastes of granite without a green thing to cheer
the eye. In this part the villages that occur in the other side of the river
are inhabited by Brokpas as well as those on this.

Dah is the principal village in this part. Situated on a long sloping
alluvial terrace about a hundred yards wide and at the highest part perhaps
a couple of hundred feet above the river, it is separated from a still higher
terrace by a wall of cliff which culminates in a point immediately
above the village. On this point a cairn surmounted by thin staves with
fluttering rags attached, marks the supposed abode of a local demon or
deity. The howling waste behind, invisible from the village on account
of its higher level, but rising into still higher mountain masses which tower
above, affords a fitting scene for all the supernatural doings of the
• "Women are everywhere the most conservative of national castoms.

1878.] B. B. Shaw— Sfmy Arians in Tibet 29

mountain ' spirits. The soeneiy which inspires awe in a passing tra-
yeller, has made its mark on the minds of the inhabitants. These lofty
solitudes are, &om their earliest years, connected with ideas of dread, which
shape themselves into myths. The priest affirms that sometimes in the early
dawn while performing the annual worship, he perceives a white indistinct
shape hovering over the cairn ; and this, he says, is the goddess of the spot
revealing herself to her worshipper. The people believe that this demon
keeps a special watch over all their actions, and in a country where frequent
accidents by flood or fell are almost inevitable, and where a false step or a
falling rock may cause death at any time, they put down such disasters to
the vengeance of the goddess for the neglect of some of their pecidiar
customs which they have persuaded themselves are religious duties.

Foremost among their tenets is the abhorrence of the cow. This is an
essentially DiLrd peculiarity, though not universal among them. Unlike
Hindus they consider that animal's touch contamination, and though they
are obliged to use bullocks in ploughing, they scarcely handle them at all.
Calves they seem to hold aloof from still more. They use a forked stick
to put them to, or remove them from, the mother. They will not drink
cow's milk (or touch any of its products in any form) ; and it is only recent-
ly that they have ' overcome their repugnance to using shoes made of the
skin of the animal they so contemn. When asked whether their abstaining
from drinking the milk and eating the flesh of cows is due to reverence
such as that of the Hindus, they say that their feeling is quite the reverse.
The cow is looked upon as bad not good, and if one of them drank its milk,
they would not admit him into their houses.

Again in reply to a question, they ascribed this custom to the will of
their goddess. They found by experience that she would not allow them
to drink the milk of cows with impunity. The son of a certain head-man
of the village of Ganok, a Musalman Brokp^, had broken through the
prohibition after living some years among the Baltis. After a time the
goddess caused him to go mad and to throw himself into the river where he
was drowned.

Thus although the Br5kpds of Dclh-Hanu are nominally Buddhists,
yet their real worship is that of local spirits or demons like the I/ha-mo
(goddess) of DtOi.*

* In this, however, they are not smgnlar ; for the Tibetanfi of Lad&k also have a
reverence for similar spirits of purely local influence called Zhd (cf. Lhd-sa " the city
of gods"), a reverence which seems to be neither founded on the Buddhist dogmas, nor
much countenanced by the more respectable members of the LiUnaite hierarchy. An
annual incarnation of one of these demons (a female) takes place at 8hd, a village of
Ladlik, in the month of August ; but though L^^mas are so plentiful in the country, it is
to one of the lay members of a certain family that the honour of giving a temporary
body to the deity belongs, while Lkoias are rarely to be seen in the crowds that witness

80 R. B. Shaw— ^^ray Ariana in Tibet. [No. 1,

Her name is Shtrin^-mo.* A certain family in the Tillage supplies
the hereditary officiating priest. This person has to purify himself for the
annual ceremony by washings and fastings for the space of seyen days,
during which he sits apart, not eyen members of his own family being
allowed to approach him, although they are compelled during the same period
to abstain from onions, salt, chang (a sort of beer), and other unholy food.
At the end of this period he goes up alone on to the rocky point
before mentioned aboTe the yillage, and after worshipping in the name of the
community the deity who dwells there in a small cairn^t he renews the
branches of the ^ shukpa" (Juniperus eaeelsa)X which were placed there the
preyious year, the old branches being carefully stowed away under a rock
and coyered up with stones.

It is said that this deity or spirit accompanied the ancestor of the
priestly family from the original home of the Brokp^s in Gilgit. Former-
ly the priest used to be occasionally possessed by the demon and in this
state to dance a deyil-dance, giying forth inspired oracles at the same time,
but these manifestations have ceased for the last twelye or fifteen years.
The worship is now simply one of propitiation inspired by fear, the demon
seeming to be regarded as an impersonation of the forces of nature adyerse
to man in this wild mountainous country. Sacrifices of goats (not sheep)
are occasionally offered at all seasons below the rock, by the priest only, on
behalf of pious donors. They talk of the existence of the demon as a mis-
fortune attaching to their tribe, and do not regard her with any loyalty as
a protecting or tutelary deity. In each house the fireplace consists of three
upright stones of which the one at the back of the hearth is the largest,
18 inches or 2 feet in height. On this stone they place an ofEering for the
Lhdmo from eyery dish cooked there, before they eat of it. They also
place there the first-fruits of the haryest. Such is their household wor-
ship.

Besides this spirit- worship, which is their tribal religion, they haye a
superficial coating of Buddhism. They say that three or four cycles, that is

the perfoimance and consult the oxade. Perhaps this may be the remains of a form of
local spirit worship which may have preceded Buddhism in these countries. I have
already treated this subject elsewhere.

* The affix mo is the Tibetan feminine affix, aaboia the masculine.

t The Sidh'pdth Kdjira (probably Dkrds) have also a custom of '* going once a year
to the top of a moimtain as a religious exercise and patting a stone on a cairn" (Leit-
nex's DlLrdistl^ YoL I, Part 3, p. 42).

X TbiB is also a Tibetan custom with this difference, that each Tibetan householder
has a similar sacred bundle of ahukpa branches and horns of animals on the flat roof of
his own house. But these customs are mere suryivals (superstiiionfl) among the
Tibetans, while they form the religion of the Brdkpi^

1878.] R. B. Sha,w— Stray Avians in Tibet 81

forty or fifty years ago, after a war between Sbigar and LadAk, when their
country was occupied by the LadiLk army, the Lamas converted them. The
bead liuna at the monastery of Skirbuchan, further up the river, told me,
however, that it was only some twelve or fifteen years ago that the Brokp&s
were converted by LIUnas from his monastery who went on begging tours
amongst them. But this may have been a mere revival. At any rate,
there is a remarkable absence in the D^-Hanu country, of those Buddhist
monuments (long stone dikes covered with inscriptions, and tall structures
snnnounted by obelisks and containing relics, called respectively Mand and
Ckarien) which form such a conspicuous feature along the roads and in
the villages of Tibet. I saw one or two small ehortem^ evidently newly
erected, and in two villages small gompoM or hermit-cells (the larger
monasteries of Tibet have the same name) inhabited each by a single L&ma,
one of whom was a Tibetan and the other, whom they brought forward
rather as a curiosity, a real Brbkpa L^a, the only one in existence.
These gompaa also were quite new.

The BrokpcU bum their dead like the LaddJcis ; that is to say in little
brick furnaces on the hill-sides. The upper part of the ftumace is a short
upright cylinder into which the body is crammed in a squatting posture
with the head tied well down between the knees, while a fire is lighted in
the square base of the furnace. This method is probably adopted as saving
fuel in a country where it is so scarce, and where it would be difficult to
get logs sufficient for the ordinary mode of Hindu cremation where the
body is extended at full length on an open pyre. The corpse is carried to
the burning on a kind of sedan-chair raised by poles on men's shoulders.
It is placed in the squatting posture in which it is to be burnt, but cover-
ed up with flowing coloured sheets so that it might almost be taken for a
veiled woman being carried on a journey. Often in Ladclk a broad-
brimmed Lima's hat is placed on its head to secure a blessing for the soul
of the defunct.

Mr. Drew, who has given a most interesting short aocoimt of these
Brbkpjis in his '' Jummoo and Kashmir," is, I think, mistaken in suppos-
ing that they have no caste, as the other Dtlrds have. I have heard of at
least three caste-like divisions, which we may call those of priests, cultivate
torSy and artisans. The priestly families (called Zhahdak, Tib.) form
the highest division in each village. Although men of the next caste are
allowed to come into their houses, yet it is only on condition of washing their
hands and faces before doing so, especially if they have recently been among
the entiles (Tibetans, &c.), a precaution that does not seem to be considered
necessary on other occasions by the Br6kp^s, who are a very dirty people.
This next caste which forms the bulk of the people is called Biishen, The
younger branches of the priestly families become BiishenSf since there can
only be one priest or Lh4bdak in each village.

32 R. B. ShAw—Stra^ Ariam in Tibet. [No. 1,

Besides these there is a lower caste consisting, in the village of DdJi,
of only five families. Thej were originally blacksmiths, it is said, but no
longer carry on the ancestral calling. They are called RUzmet (Tib.)
or Gargyut,* Their women are not allowed to approach the cooking-
hearths of the higher caste, nor are the JRuzmet men, excepting after a
purification similar to that of the JRiishen on going into the houses of the
priests. The higher castes will not eat what is cooked by them.

Eeversing the custom of the Hindus in the matter of marriage, the
lower caste may take wives from the higher, but not vice-versd (except in
the case of the priests who, I gather, can marry JBushen women) . Proba*
bly as a consequence of this, a married daughter is never allowed to re-
enter the house of her parents and may not touch anything belonging to
them. After three generations of marriages with the higher caste, the
progeny are admitted into it. While at Ddh, I was questioning a party of
BrokpSs, and one of them, an old man who, though sitting rather apart,
had been very forward in answering my questions, became silent and hung
down his head when I began inquiries into the caste- system. It appeared
that he was a Ruzmet or low-caste-man. But presently he brightened up
and said : " True, I am now a Emmet , but in three generations I can be-
come ROsheny This thought seemed to console the old man, much to the
amusement of the others.

Polyandry is the rule in Dah-Hanu. As the Brokpds do not inter-
marry with the neighbouring Tibetans, it would seem that the question of its
possible cause or effect in a disproportion of the sexes could be well studied
in this confined area. I had not leisure or opportunity to obtain exact
statistics, but if there were any notable excess of either sex in such small
communities, where there is no monasticism to speak of, it could hardly
escape notice by the more intelligent among them. I repeatedly put the
question ; " Why do several brothers take only one wife between them ?"
The answer given me was : ^' Because the land is not sufEicient to provide
food for the families of the several brothers, if they each took a wife."
Again I asked : " If an equal number of boys and girls are bom in your
village, as you say ; and each family of two or three (or more) brothers takes
only one girl to wife between them, where are the other girls ? Do they

* These castes seem roughly to answer to three oi}t of the four castes prevaleiit
among the main body of the Dlirds : viz., Ist, Shin ; 2nd, Yashkun (these two castes
trade, cultiyate land, or keep sheep) ; 3rd, Kramin (P derived from JTrtfrn^^work) (are
weavers, carpenters, blacksmiths, artisans in fact) ; 4th, J)6m (are musicians and do low
drudgery ; this caste seems absent firom the D&h-Hanu division of D4rds). [See Leit-
ner's Dardist&n, Vol. I, Part 3, p. 48, 2nd note, and Drew's Jummoo and Kashmir,
p. 426.]

1878.] R. B. ShAW^Stray Arians in Tibet 83

mftrry into the villages of the neighhouriDg Tibetans ?" Thej answer, No.
" Are there many unmarried women in your villages ?" They reply that,
on the contrary, they often find it difficult to procure wives. It would
seem therefore that there must either be a great defect in the number of
births of females, or an equal excess in their deaths while young. I could
not hear of female infanticide and do not beHeve that it is practised, as, if
it were, it must be known to the Kashmir officials.

It is not only in marriage that they keep themselves apart from their
neighbonrs. They will not eat with the Hbetan Buddhists or Musahn&ns
or other outsiders, nor will they allow these to come near their cooking
places. The caste prejudice seems to originate on the side of the Br6kp4,
for their neighbours often eat in their houses, only separate dishes are given
them which are afterwards purified with burning juniper. No Brokpii
will eat in the house or from the dishes of a Tibetan ; nor will he eat fish
or birds or (of course) cow's flesh. Formerly, if they had been among the
Tibetans, they would purify themselves with the smoke of the " shukpa'*
before entering their own houses again.

The tribe is subdivided into several groups of villages. Ist. Those in
the Hanu side valley (whose inhabitants have exchanged their own lan-
guage for Tibetan, being situated on the main road between Skardo and
LadJkk.) 2nd. The Dah group, consisting of Baldes, Phindur, By^ma,
Sani, Dundir, and Dhh villages. 8rd. The Garkhon group, consisting of
darkhon, Dikrchik (large village on west of Indus), San^ha (ditto), Urdiis,
Gragra (up side-stream on east), and Watsara. These are all the Buddhist
villages. The people of each group consider themselves to be one commu-
nity. The Dih people reckon from seven ancestors who first colonised
their villages and of whom they give the names : viz., Lalusho (from whom
the Lhilbdaks or priests spring) ; ZonS, Dhhre, GhehaghS (these three are
the ancestors of the Btuhen caste) ; DmS, GahurS, and Tukshiire (these are
the fathers of the Buzmet caste). The land of Dah is still divided according
to these families, though some of it has changed hands. In this fact we may
perhaps see a trace of the early Arian joint family holding, passing into
the stage of individual proprietorship. Each man knows his own ancestry
(real or imaginary), and each field is known as belonging to the patrimony
of one of the seven fathers of the tribe, though it may now be in the hands
of a descendant of one of the others. The remaining groups of villages have
similar traditions. The Dah people say that their ancestors, when they
first came, lived by hunting, not by agriculture. One of their mighty hun-
ters dropped his bow (called in their language Dah) on the hill-side. It
became a water channel which fertilized the fields of what afterwards be-
came a village. One of their Chiefs found certain seeds growing wild which
he sowed near the water-course. These seeds proved to be those of wheat

£

34 R. B. ShsLW—Strni/ Avians in Tibet. [No. 1,

and barley. Thus the village was founded. The story of the bow is pro-
bably originated either by the curved course of the water-channel which
comes out of a side valley and bends round the hill side to reach the village ;
or else by a mere superficial resemblance of sound between the name Dah
(of which the origin had become forgotten) and the name for a bow.

Several of the villages possess a communal dwelling in which every in-
habitant of the village has a place. That of D^h is very curious. It covers
a considerable space in the angle between the Indus and a side-stream, pro-
tected on two sides by the precipitous declivities of the high alluvial plateau
on which it stands and on the third by a wall. It was thus fortified against
the raids of the neighbouring Baltis. The interior consists of an intricate
maze of passages, some open and some covered in, which may be considered
either as the lanes of a tightly packed village, or rather as the passages of
a vast single storied house which forms the common dwelling of the whole
community, each household having its separate apartment or den. Here
the people always live during winter, for warmth or for company. They
all, however, have other houses for summer, out in the fields. I could not
discover that there was any difference in tenure between the lands adjoin-
ing the common dwelling and the outlying fields. The village of Darchik
likewise is cut ofE from the lower course of the valley by a vertical cliff, the
escarpment of the plateau on which it stands. There are only two ways
of approach. One high up and away from the river, is guarded by a forti-
fied communal dwelling. .The other, near the river, consists of a rugged
narrow staircase constructed in the face of the cliff and closed by a gateway
at the top. Such precautions were necessary in former days when the men
of Baltistdn made raids on their neighboxirs, especially on such as were not
Musalmtlns, and penetrated even to Lad^k. Now all is peace under the
conmion rule of our Feudatory, the Mahdrdjd of Kashmir.

So much for the (so-called) Buddhist BrhJcpas. But the villages of
the same tribe which lie exposed to Musalman influences down the Indus
on the two roads leading north-west and south-west respectively, have all
been converted to Isl4m. Of the settlements on the former road, that
down the Indus, and in side-valleys near it, the village of Ganok is entirely
inhabited by Musalmd.n Brbkpas, while those of Dangel, Marul, Chiili-
chan, and Singkarmon, are inhabited partly by Musalman (Shi*ah) Brbkpds,
and partly by Baltis (Tibetan Musalmclns) of the same sect. Below this
the population is entirely Balti. On the other road, that across a low Pass
south-westward to Kargil, the villages of Tsirmo and Lalung are also in-
habited partly by Musalm^ Brohpas and partly by Musalmdn Tibetans
from the adjoining district of Purik. These Musalmdn Brohpas on both
roads speak the Dah dialect, and dress like the Dah people, and keep apart
from the Tibetan Musalmlins both in matter of marriage and in eating.

1878.] R. B. ShsLW^Sirai/ Ariana in Tibet. 35

But the J have no caste inequalities amongst them like their non-Musal-
mAn kinsmen, and generally they do not object to drinking milk, though
at Tsirmo, there seems to be a relic of the Brokpa prejudice against the
cow in the fact that their women do not touch that animal.

A short account of the language of these Upper Indus Dirds (or D^-
Hanu Brhkpas, as they are usually called), including both the Buddhist
and the Musalman sections, is given hereafter.

It is a question how these Ariau D2Urds (for Arians and D^s they
undoubtedly are) reached their present abode. Both above and below them
in the valley of the Upper Indus and to the east of them in the parallel
valley of the Shayok, the inhabitants are all of Tibetan race. D^rdistdn pro-
per, or the country of the D^rds* (the ancient Bolor), is situated far away
on the lower course of the Upper Indus, and along that river no vestige of
their passage exists and no connecting link with their former home.t But
from the country of the Dards the Indus makes a wide bend westwards
and southwards, and from the concavity of this bend we find a line of
Dard communities running south at first and then trending ofE to the east
until it almost abuts against the settlements of the Dclh-Hanu BrhJepas on
the Upper Indus. These Dards are Musalm&ns, as are also the main body
of the Dard race in their own home. The Buddhist Brokpas of Dah-Hanu
acknowledge no kinship with these people, although they say that their
ancestors also came from Gilid (Gilgit) and BrusMl^ that is, from Dardi-
8tan proper. There is, however, an unmistakable mutual affinity of language
and customs. Mr. Drew,{ in explanation of the dilEerence of religion, very
justly supposes the D&h-Hanu Brokpds to " belong to an earlier immigra-
tion separated from the main mass of their tribe brethren at a time be-
fore the Dards were converted to Muhammedani9m."§ The Dah-Hanu
people, having Buddhists on one side of them, would the more easily receive
an outward varnish of that faith, while the later D4rd settlements to the
west of them, surrounded by, and intermingled with, Musalm^ns, would

* See Mr. Drew's excellent Bace Map in his '' Jummoo and Kashmir." To illus-
trate the present paper the whole of the lightly shaded region to the south, west and
north of Gilgit up to the Muzt^h mountains, should be painted of the same colour as
Gilgit) for it is all the home of the Ditrds, though. Mr. Drew's plan only permitted him
to colour what lies within the Mahiriji of Kashmir's territories.

t The isolated settlements of D^rds in certain villages of Baltist&n, are apparently
of more recent origin and moreoTer do not bridge the chasm.

} Drew's " Jummoo and Kashmir", p. 430.

{ If we are to believe the TArtkh-i-Bashidi, this had not taken place at the time
of its author, Idink Haidar's invasion of Dardist&n, in the first half of the 16th ceu-
tnxy ; and, according to Mr. Drew, *^ Jummoo and Kashmir", page 429, does not seem
to have been very completely effected so lately as SO years ago.

36 R. B. ShAw— Stray Arians in Tibet [No. 1,

accept IfiUm, even if they did not bring it with them from their home. A
non-descript paganism (which was probably the religion of the early D&rds)
does not easily resist the encroachments of one of the great dogmatic reli-
gions when thrown into unprotected contact with it.

Did the D^-Hanu Brbkpds come by the same route as their later bre-
thren, or did they come, as some of them say, up the valleys of the Indus
and Shayok ? In the latter case, it would be very strange if a migration
of D^rds, with the whole upper course of the Indus before them, should
have stopped and located themselves precisely at that point on its course
where a subsequent migration of their kindred, starting from the same
point but coming by a different route (latterly at right angles to theirs),
happens, some centuries after, to have struck the Indus* It seems more
probable that the line of the later migration marks that of the earlier one ;
and that the ancestors of Ddh-Hanu people took the route vi& Astor, D^
sa'i, the Drks river, and Kargil, (a route facilitated by the nature of the
country in that direction). Crossing by a low Pass into the Indus Valley,
they were there arrested by the more difficult mountains on the east of
that river. They probably found this district uninhabited ; for though
the valley of the Indus, both below and above was, and is, occupied by
Tibetan States (Baltistcln or Little Tibet, and Ladak) ; yet so difficult is the
gorge of the Upper Indus in this intermediate portion, that all traffic from
Skardo (Baltistkn) directed towards LadAk, is diverted round by the paral-
lel Shayok Valley, only crossing back into that of the Indus by the Hanu
Pass, beyond Dtih.

Both the Dah-Hanu people and the D^rd communities (above men-
tioned) settled on or about the Dr^ river, are ciEklled by their Tibetan neigh-
bours Brok'-ph (often pronounced Dbk-pc^ with a disregard to the spelling
peculiar to Tibetans and Englishmen). Brbk means a "mountain pas-
ture'' or " alp". The reference may be to the pastures to which they in
summer take their sheep (as do also their Tibetan neighbours however) or
to the fact of their having settled on grounds which were formerly pastures.
But the term Brbk-pdy or Highlander, seems more likely to have been ap-
plied (as Mr. Drew suggests) to a tribe seen to arrive across the high
mountains and descending into the Indus Valley, than to a people coming
tip that valley from its lower portion, and who have not, since their arrival,
taken to a life in the high mountains in any greater degree than their
neighbours.

A few words of notice are required for the Dris DJLrds of the later
immigration just mentioned. Their connection with their parent stock
is very close, and betokens a comparatively recent separation. They say
that their ancestors came from Dar^l ; and their settlements extend
fax up the course of the streams leading down from the uninhabitable pla-
teau of D^osa'i, which alone separates them from D^distan proper.

1878.] B. B. ShsLW— Stray Ariann in Tibet. 87

The fmihest settlements of these people at the emhouehare of the
Dris river into the Indus, approach very closely to, without mixing with,
those of their unrecognised kinsmen of the D^-Hanu Division. I have
collected a few of their grammatical rules and have made a very short com-
parative tahle of some of the most ordinary words in the two dialects, hy
which it will he seen that they are really only different forms of the same
mode of speech. These later D^ds, as far as Dris, are intermingled with
Musalmin Tihetans or Baltis. At Drcks the former are Sunnis in religion
while the latter are Shi'ahs, hut lower down near the Indus hoth are Shi'ahs.
The D^brds of the Dr^ district keep themselves quite separate, both as
regards marriage and eating, from the Baltis with whom they are inter-
mingled in the same villages, and show also some slight traces of that ab-
hoirence of the cow which is so marked among the D4h-Hanu people, and
which is also prevalent in gpreater or less intensity among many of the other
Di^rds in their own home. To carry the linguistic inquiry a little fur-
ther back, a comparison with Dr. Leitner's account of the Astori form of the
Dird language will show that the speech of the Driis Srbkpc^ is almost
identical with that of the people of Aster or Hazora who are one of the
chief branches of the D4rd race in Dcb^distin, only divided by the river
Indus from Gilgit. We have therefore a continuous chain of communi-
ties leading from Dardist&n proper to the settlements on the Upper Indus
at D^-Hanu. The small gap that does exist in point of language and
dress between these latter and the most advanced (geographically) of their
brethren, would seem to indicate a lapse of time occurring between two suc-
cessive migrations. The foremost may be in all probability considered the
earlier, and in either case they profess the religion of their environment.

Thus we have here the furthest extension in this particular direction,
of an Indo-Arian migration, a kind of side-eddy from the great stream.
As when one of our Indian rivers is filled by the melting snows, if a sud-
den increase of the flood comes down, one may see the waters, dammed up
as it were by the too slowly moving masses in front, trickle off to one side
in the endeavour to find a speedier exit. But soon, the temporary increase
abating or the circumstances of the ground proving unfavourable, this side
channel ceases to flow onward and stagnates to a pool, leaving the traces of
its abortive course as far back as the point of divergence. So it would
seem that long after the successive floods of Indo-Arians had poured over
the long water-parting of the Hindu-Kush, the latest or the most easterly
wave (the D2krd one) expanding in its turn after a vast lapse of time, but
finding the southward way blocked in front of it by the earlier comers,
sent off side-currents to the south-eastward. These were but pimy streams,
wanting moreover sufficient vis ^ ter^o to carry them onwards when they
found themselves amid a foreign element and progressing towards a higher

38 R. B. Shaw— iS/r^^ Ariam in Tibet [No. 1,

and more barren country, instead of reaching the fertile pbdnB to which a
southerly course had formerly led their brethren, the Hindus. Here there-
fore they remained, wedged in among alien populations, but connected with
their starting point by the living trail of their passage.

J^ote. — With reference to the question whether any and what degree
of connection exists between the DiUrds and the Ghalchahs of the Upper
Ozus (see my paper on the latter in the Asiatic Society Bengal, Journal
1876), — it is curious to see that Mr. Drew from native (D&rd) information
classifies one of the Ghalchah tribes, the W&khi (called by him Wakhik or
Ooijal) amongst the D^lrds. See Drew's Jummoo and Kashmir, p. 457.
The termination k of the word Wakhik is probably a mere Dardu affix,
(cf. dosteky gre9iok for dotty grest).

Dr. Leitner also (Dardistdn, Vol. I, Part II, p. 24) says that Qojhl is
the name given by the Chil^sis to the people between Hunza and Pamer on
the Yarkand road. Now these people are the SariqoH Ghalchahs. He
adds ** there are also Oojals under a E4j4 of Chjal on the Badakhshin
road." These can be no other than the Wakhi Ghalchahs, called by Mr.
Drew also Ohijal, and the idea suggests itself that perhaps Gojal may be
the Dardu form of the name GhaUha given to the same tribes by their
Turki neighbours. It is formed by a mere inversion of the position of the

latter two consonants, viz., /, and j or ch : Jlar for tar* or *ar^ (as
ITuckloto for Lucknoto), At any rate we see that there is an affinity asserted
by the Dclrds between themselves and the Ghalchahs, those neighbours
who seem to be, one the most primitive race of the Indian family and the
other the most primitive of the Iranians. This assertion of affinity is, to
some extent borne out by a comparison of the dialects (see Journal of
Asiatic Society of Bengal, for 1876, Paper on the Ghalchah languages).

Some Orammatical forms of the Dard dialects spoken hy the Brok-pis of

(t) Dah'Sanu and of (ii) Bros.

Sorii^Ds.

There is no broad d^ like aw in pawUy as in some neighbouring dialects
and languages.

The accented d to be pronounced as m father ; unaccented a as in ordi-
nary, oriental.

1S78.] R. B. Shiiw— Stray Arians in Tibet. 39

The accented ^ as ey in theyy but more staccato. Unaccented e when
final is neutral in sound as in the English word the when rapidly pronounced
before a consonant ; this sound approaches that of unaccented a. When
not final, it is pronounced as in then or yes.

Besides the long and short h, o and tf , u, there is a double-dotted o, pro-
nounced as in German schon, and a double- dotted v as in German miihe or
French tu.

With regard to the consonants ; the dh represents the English soft th
of the, thiSy &c., and not the Hindi aspirated d'h (which will be represented
with an apostrophe, as (TA, fh). Similarly yh is k (ghain) and not the

aspirated Hindi consonant.

Ihh is the compound used by Mr. Drew, in a short list of D^-Hanu
words given in his " Jummoo and EAshmir," to represent a ch pronounced
with the tongue curled back to the roof of the mouth. It stands, as he
remarks, to the English ch in the same relation that the Hindi palatal (
does to the dental t, [or that the W&khi seh does to the English sh (see
my paper on the Ghalchah Languages in the Journal Asiatic Society of
Bengal, for 1876) ; or that r (see below) does to r].

The n (with a mark over it) is the French nasal n which is felt rather
as affecting the previous vowel than as a distinct sound. When followed
by a vowel however, it acquires something of the sound of ny in the word
youny, but never to the extent of allowing any distinct y to be heard as in
English younger, hunger. Thus mon "I" is pronounced exactly like the
French man " my." Again haits " I am" and hytms " I go" would
be spelt in French hanse, hiounsse. But hana (where n is followed by
a vowel) is sounded (as regards the medial consonant) somewhat like the
English word hanger (not as in anger).

The f (with a dot over it) represents the palatal r of Hindi, pronoun-
ced with the tongue turned back. It approaches the sound of a d.

The r (with a dot under it) represents a sound intermediate between
an r and a French j or the ;; in *^ azure ;" that is, the r is not clearly trilled
but slurred over ; while the tongue is almost in the position for an r a
stream of air is passed, without vibration of the tip, between it and the
palate. Thus in the yrord potro " grandson", the sound is intermediate be-
tween potro SLudpotjo (as in English we may sometimes hear people pro-
nounce the word " trill" almost like " chill").

The z (with a dot underneath) represents the French j or the z in
azure. It approaches the last letter in sound.

The y is only used as a consonant, as in English '' yes," " sawyer", <&;c.,
(not as in " by," or " every").

40

B. B. Shaw — Stray Ariam in Tibet.

[No. 1,

Singular.

N. ei aewe

et-sa (before Trans.

verbs not in Past

Tense)

G. iia of aewe

D. eiara to a ewe

Ace. euza aewe

Abl. Suzano from aewe

Sta^tufna with aewe

Instr. it-ya by a ewe

N. d a she goat

a-sa (before Trans.

Verbs not in Past

Tense)

G. oya ovhi of a she goat

D. a-ra to a she goat

Ace. a-za,. a she goat

Abl. a-zano fromashegoat

Instr. c^yS by a she goat

N. ySt ahouse

ySt'Sa (before Trans.

Verbs not in Past

T.)

G. yStms of ahouse

D, yStara to a house

Ace. gdta-dze ahouse

Abl. gota-yono from a house

gotas-silma • with a house

Imfbr. gSt-ya by ahouse

L D^Hanu Dialect.

The SuBBTA^niYE.

Plural.

^ ewes

dta-M (before Trans.
Verbs Ac.)

Stan of ewes

iian-da to ewes

^ian-za ewes

e'ian^zano &om ewes

eian-suma with ewes

dian-ya by ewes

oyo she goats

oyosa (before Trans.
Verbs Ac.)

oyon of she goats

oyon-da to she goats

oyon-za she goats

ayon-zano from she goats

oyo-yS by she goats

g6ii houses

gSti-sa (before Trans.
Verbs &c.)

gStin of houses

gStin-da to houses

gotin-dze houses

gotin-dono from houses

gotin-ya by houses

And so with go " a cow," Gen. gSs, and the other cases gS ; goio " a
bull," Gen. gSloSy other cases gSlS ; biii " a boy," Gen. bins, other cases biiL
But Genitive of tehiga " a woman" is tchugoya while the Dat. is tehUgd^
ra, the Ace. tchiga-ze, the Abl. tchiige-yono and the Instr. tchig^ya. The
post-position 9wna " with", governs the Genitive.

The Plural is irregular though generally ending with a vowel for the
nominative and by the same vowel followed by n (and by the appropriate
post-positions, if any) for the oblique cases.

1878.]

R. B. Shaw — Stray Arians in Tibet.

41

Thus the plural of hiu " a boy" is hS in the nom. and hSn in the ob-
lique cases ; ^6t ^ a house", in the plural is ^oti and ffotin ; " cattle"
(plural) is goU 9S\A. golen ; " women" is ^<Auyoytf, obi. tshiigotfun, Boda
" fathers", obi. hodan ; apshi " horses", obi. apshan.

Adjectites do not seem to change for the gender.

PBONOUirS.

Singular. PluraL

Ist Person.

ha or hen^

N. mon (with intrans. verbs)
mi-ta '\ (with transitive verbs f j

or > in the Present and
ma-^a) Futipre)

me

G. miormiu • mj

D. ma-ra tome

Ace. mon-ze (with Present )

and Future Tenses) )

AbL men-fono or mon-dea from me
Instr, nU-ga (with Past | ^^ ^^

Tense of Trans, verbs.) )

2nd Person.
N. tu (with intransitive V.) \

f».Mor^tf-«a (with transitive > thou.

Verbs in Present and Fut.) )

G. tiu they

D. iua-ra ,..,,.,,.,.... to thee

Ace. tu-ze (with Present ) ^^

and Future Tenses) ;

Abl tu-geno from thee

Instr. ii-ga (^thPastK^^^

with transitive
verbs in the Pre- ^ we
sent and Future
Tenses

as8u •• our

agsu-ra tons

assii-fa us

assu^ono or a^^u-deo from U4

ha-ya OT heng-ya by us

Tense of transitive Y.

iH

tsuia or isu^sa (with /

trans. V. in Pres, and i ^®

Put, J

tsi ......•• your

tsu-ra to you "

tsii-fe you

tsu-yono from you

tsi-ya ,,..,• by you

8rd Person.

N. 90 (fern, sa) or p*ho\

(with intve. V.) Ue (here or

w-*a (with trans. V.) [ there)

Pres, and Fut. ^

G. t€9 0Tp'hos of him (do.)

D. t^-ra to him

Ace. t^'fa (with Pres. 7 , .

Tenses) )

Abl. iS-yono from him

Instr. sojya (with Past K- jj^
iDse of Trans. V.) ) ^

Tense

id or p%d (with intr.

V.)
ti-sa (with tr. V.)

ten or p'*h6un
ten-da or p^heun-da
tin-fa or p'heun-za

ten- or p'heun-yono
id' or p^hd-ya

they (here-
or there)

of them
to them
them

from them
by them

42

H. B. Shaw — Stray Arians in Tibet.

[No. 1,

THE VEEB.

The Intransitive Verb " to go".

Stfosti = (in order) to go.

Bya-su = about to go.

Byuiito = in going, or, whilst going.

Oyeto = gone or having gone. Bo — go (Imperative).

Indicativb Mood.

Present Future Tense.
Singular.
hyuns.,,! go (masc.)
1. fnon or mi X or will go

go (fern.)

r hyuns.,.!
i < or will i
Lbinis.,, 1

o ,.. (hytma thou goest

Lbinia ...•' do. (fern.)

Q (80 hyalla he goes

XiaUni she goes

Plural.
ha hyenis,,,. we go or will go

tsi hyeni, •••••• ye go, &c.

te hybn ...•• they go, &c.

1. monhyH I go

2. tiihyun thou goest

3. sohyun he goes

Aorist.

hahyUii we go

tsi hyeni ye go

ti hyeni they go

1 *«/v» fy** — I^ent (m.)
1. mon \ " ^ „ .« .

\yy*8.,. ditto (tern.)

Past Tense.

hh gyeune we went

o J- {go ... thou wentest (m.)
\yyiiia ditto (fern.)

M

80 go he went

sagyani ... she went

tsi gyi or gyiui ye went

te gyeani or gyeim ...... they went

Perfect Tense.

ha gyeuns (P gyS-huns) we have gone

tsS gyi'Ostin ye have gone

te gye-astin they have gone

Future Tense.
mon hyilho, I will go (the other persons of this tense are the same).

1. fnigyeiis (? gy^-hus)* I have (or

had) gone

2. tii gye-astu thou hast gone

8. 80 gye-astu he has gone

• See Pa«t Tense of Auxiliary Verb « to be".

1878.] R. B. ShsLW—Stray Ariana in Tibet 43

Thb Defectiye AuxiLiiLBY " to be".
Present. Past.

1. man or mi hdns Iain

2. ta or iihana tbou art

3. so hdn lie is

1. ha or hen^ hanis we are

2. ttihani ye are

man hUs I was

tU hUa (near) or astu (&.r) thou wast
80 hiia or astu he was

ha hims we were

tsi hUi or astin je were

8. tShani they are ( te hun or astin •• they were

The TBAKSiTiYE Yerb has some peculiarities about its subjects.
In the first place, all Tenses except the Past take the second nominative
form of Pronouns, ma-sa, ti-sa, &c., and they add the particle sa to substan.
tives in the nominative. Secondly, the Past Tense puts^the subject in the
Instrumentative case, and the object in the nominative, the verbal inflec-
tion agreeing with the latter (not in gender, however, but in person), so as
almost to assume a Passive form. But as there is a separate Passive, this
Tense may be most nearly compared with the Hindustani Transitive Past
e. y., us-ne ^h aurat mari (Hind.) " he struck a woman" ; where the
verb is in the feminine to agree with the object "woman". So in the
Brokpi dialect : Tashis-ya man kutudhos " Tashi struck me", lit. " by
Tashi I was struck", where " kutudhos** is the Past verb-form agreeing
with the 1st person singular. The 1st persons singular and plural (when
occurring as objects of the action) have each a particular form of the verb
igned to them, while the remaining persons have a common form.
With this explanation we will proceed to the

CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB.

KtUisti = (in order) to strike, (on account of) striking.

Kuti'SU = about to strike.

Kutytmto = in striking, or whilst striking.

Kutedho = having struck.

Impebative.

Kuti = strike.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Pbesent Future Tsifrss.

Plural.

Singular.
r kutyu^ 1 strike (masc.)

1. mi-sa < or will strike

Kkutinis ditto (fem.)
r Jcutyuna thou strikest

2. tu-sa \ (m.) &q,

Lkutinia ditto (f.)
A C sO'Sa kutyalla he strikes &c.
C sa-sa hutini she strikes &q.

ha-sa Jcutyenis we strike, &c.

tsu-sa hutyeni ye strike, Ac.

td'Sa kutyan they strike,^.

44

R. B. Shaw — Stray Avians in Tibet.

[No. 1.

AOBIST.

1. masa hutyu .•..••...I strike

2. tu-sa hutyun thou strikest

8. S0'9a kutyun he strikes

Instr.

S. 1. mi-ya
2. ti-ya
8. to-ya

PI, 1. heng-ya
2. tsi-ya
8. ten-ya

Ohjecfc.

ha-sa kutyun we strike

tsi'Sa kutyeni ye strike

ti'9a kutyeni they strike

Fast Tense.

Verb. English.

« ( kutudhos (masc.)
( kutedhis (fern
ha kutedhens

I was struck
we were struck

1

/i.1. _j.\ 7 ^ J ( thou, he, ye or they

(the rest) ktftet < \ i_ i

* i — ^wast, was or were struck

1)y me
by thee
by him

by us
by you
^by them

Pebpsct Tefbe.

Singular. Plural

1. ma-sa kutyus ...I have (or had) hh-^a kutyims we have struck

struck

2. tii'Sa kutS'Ostu thou hast struck

tsi'Sa kutS'Ostin ...ye have struck

8. «o-«i A;i^^-a«^t»... he has struck tS-sa kut4-astin ...they have struck

FuTUBE Tekbe.

1. ma-sa kutiko I will strike (the other persons do not vary from this).

Future Preterit Tense.

hh'Sa kuti'SU huns.,, we were about

to strike
tei-ga kuti'SU Mi ... ye &c.

te-sa kutisu hun ... they&c.

CoiTDITIOirAL MOOP.

1. nAsa kutetto if I strike (the other persons and tenses do not vary from

this form).

Passive.

1. md'Sa kuti'SU hOs.,. I was about

to strike

2. tu-^a kuti-su hua ... thou &c.
8. sO'Sa kuti'SU kUa ... he &e.

1. mi kutellas,., I am or have been

struck

2. tU kutella ... thou <&c.
8. 90 kutella ... he &q.

heng kutellam ...... we are or have

been strudc

tsi kutellan ye &c.

tS kutellan they<&c.

When there is a Dative case with a Transitive Past tense, the verb
may agree with it in person as it would with the direct object :

1878.] R. B. Bhsiw—Straif Ariant in Tibet 45

E. g. 2^-ya iiZ apsh mitra doios ea thou gayest thy horse to me.
Where the verb agrees with the person of the person in the Dative.
In short when there is both a direct object and a dative, one of which is
the 1st person (Singokr or Plural), the verb agrees with that person bj
preference, as

E. g. So-ya mon goha-ra dotbs = He gave me to the head-man.
and 90-ya ma-ra dpth eh dotos = He gave a horse to me.
Where the 1st person (whether direct object as in the first example,
or dative as in the second) governs the verb.

But mi-ya miU apsh tiea-ra det = I gave mj horse to thee.

BsoKPA Yebsiok of thb Ibt Stobt IK FoBBEs' Pebbian Gbammab.

JLfiatun-ra ek mtah-ya shunat : Tu kishii-a-rU hatuk sar hatOy
Flato-to a man-by it-was-asked : thou Bhip4o many yean satest^
tso-a-rSL na-tito yi zit ?
■ea-to (vonderfdl) what was seen P

Aflatun-ya razit : ttb-a harany mi-ya ni-zito tit

Plato by it-waa-said : of the sea this me-by wonderful was seen
mon traloho pa-^r nupddos,
I safely side-to arriyed.

AiTAiiTBiB : Of the verbs, shunat is the Past Tense Transitive answering
to the typical kutet, with its subject tni^h-ya in the Instrumentative case.
JBato is 2nd Person Sing, of the Past tense of an Intransitive verb, thus
answering to the form yo of the specimen verb given above. Kishti-
^i-rU is dative, from ki$hti-h obi. crude form of kishti (a foreign word).
Tuba is oblique of tao (the Tibetan word for "lake'*). Na-zito (lit.
** not seen") is negative of Past Participle of following verb (to see) ;
ftV is Past tense transitive agreeing with its object yi " what" (». 0., not
taking the termination in — bs or ens appropriated to the 1st persons
sing, and plural) ; the instnunentative case of the agent, tu-yay is under-
stood. Razit is the same form as shunat^ and so is zit which follows.
XHpadds seems at first sight abnormal, for '' to arrive" is an intransitive
Terb, and yet it has taken the form peculiar to the Past of transitive
verbs. But in reality it is quite normal : only the Brokpcl verb means
" to cause to arrive" (P. rasantdan). E. g. mi-ya dak niipat " I delivered

the post" (lit. ' by me the post was caused to arrive'). Thus mon

nUpadae of the text, is literally : "I ... ... was caused to arrive" or, as we

fihoold say : " I arrived." The full form would be : Kishti-ya man
nMpados (lit. by the ship I was caused to arrive) ** the ship caused me to

arrive."

But although this Past tense of Transitive Verbs so much resembles
a Fasaive in eonstruetion, yet there is as much distinction kept up in the

46 K. B. Shaw— fif^r^y Arians in Tibet [No. 1,

mind of the speaker between it and the real Passive, as there is for
instance in Hindustani between us-ne aurat mari, and auraf mari gai.
The sense is active though the form is passive. In the one case the agent
is known and generally mentioned in the Instrumentative case ; in the
other the agent is not known or mentioned.

DXn-HAifcr Love Song.

Mi mUghU Skishur qaniya kaskye skyet-tb
I young-man (pro. name mountain below if-I-look

of place)
Bos payUl zi-chun ; toto hunshyi skyet-th
Father's home see makes ; and above if-I-look

Numes payUl zi-chttn, Zii-lo Qoda nanb tUni te.

(name of woman) home see- makes. Pray G-od fisite joined make,
in genitive

" If I look below, from the Skishur mountain,
" My father's home is seen (makes itself seen) ;

And if I look above,
" Niim6's home is seen. Grant, O God, that
our destinies may be united !"
Ajstaltsis : Skyet'tb is the Conditional, answering to kutet-tb. Pay id
would seem to be compounded of the Tibetan word yul " village" and a
prefix ^a. Zi-chun is composed of the verb " to see", plus the 3rd per&,
sing, of the aorist of the verb " to do", answering to the typical form
kutyun. Zu-lo is the Brokp^ form of the common Tibetan salutation jiA
OTJu-le, which is like the Hind. jt. Qoda (^Khuda) and nanh are words
borrowed from their Musalman neighbours, apparently in the absence of
any words of the same meaning in their own dialect. 2V is the Imr
perative.

e^4

e^^'Sa .,.. ^ewes

II. Dras Dialect,

The SuBSTANTrVB;

Singular. Plural.

N. esh or ez a ewe

esh'Sa (before transitive

verbs, not in Past Tense)

G. ezo of a ewe

D. & Loc. ezu-re fco, or at a ewe

Ace. e^ a ewe

Abl. ezu-zo from a ewe

• ft

ezU'SH nala with a ewe

Instr. ezu (before Trans. *)
Verbs in Past tense) ) ^7 a ewe

c?o of ewes

ezo-re to, or at ewes

^?o • ewea

ezo-zo from ewes

ezO'Sei nala with ewes

ezo-^a by ewes

1878.]

B. B. Shaw — Stray Ariam in Tibet,

47

N. at a she-goat

ai-ta (before Trans.

Verbs not in Past Tense)

G. ofo of a she-goat

D. A Loc. ai-r6...to, or at a she-goat

Aec. d* a she-goat

AbL M-zo from a she-goat

a%-9ei nala with a she-goat

Instr. CM ...(before... by a she goat

Trans, verbs in

Past Tense)

ate
aie-sa

]

she-goats

cno of she-goats

aio-re to, or at she-goats

aio she-goats

aio-zo from she-goats

d:io-9ei'naU with she-goats

mO'za by she goats

'S. gor a house

ghr-sa (before Tr. v.
not in Past Tense)

Q, gor-o of a house

D. & Loc. gor-re ...to, or at a house

(sometimes — ra)
Ace. gor or gor-re a house
AbL gbf-zo from a house

(in some-fio)
Instr. gbr-i by a house

(before Trans.

Verbs in Past Tense)

fori -^
fori-sa )

gov*

gori

.houses

goro of houses

goro-ra to, or at houses

gSro ot goro-ra ...houses
gorO'ZO from houses

gorO'Za ,,, by houses

Adjectiyes do not seem to change for Gender.

Trosovsb,

N. man I

fnon^a (before Tr. V.,
not Past T.)
G. mion of me, my

A Loc |*»^^^ to, or at me

Ace. man me

Abl. mo^iro from me

Instr. mi (before Tr. by me
Vbs. in Past Tense)

IS we

he-sa (before Tr. V.,
not Past T.)
asso of us, our

asso-re to, or at us

asao "OB

agsO'ZO ....• from us

assO'za by us

48

B. B. Shaw — Stray Arians in Tibet.

[No. 1,

thou

N. ^&

iti'Sa (before Tr.
V. not in Past
Tense)

a. t6 (or tuin?) of thee, thy

D. tu-re to thee

Aco. ^t^ thee

AbL tU'ZO from thee

tuin-sSi ndld ...,,. with thee
Instr. td by thee

ye

ii6 (f . t9a)

taO'Sa (before Tr.

V. not in Past

Tense)

t86 (or Ubin ?) of you

t$6-re to you

tid you

ttd-sfo from you

tsd'Sdi ndJd . , . , with you

tsb'Za (tsd'za f .) by you

Pronouns Substantival and Adjectival.

this

Plural,
fit or ani
ni-sa or ani-ta

(before Tr. V.

not Past T.)

these

Singular.

N. nu or bo or dnu or^
ain (fern, ni or d or

ani)
nusa or anu-sa (i.ni-9a

or an»-«a (before Tr.

V. not in Past T.)^
G. niso or nisSi, or of this
ani-iOy ani-sei

D.nisi-re to this

Ace. nisS'OT {tin this

Abl niid'ZO from this

Instr. nm by this

When these pronouns are prefixed to substantives, their case-affixes are
detached from them and placed after the substantives only, in the form
peculiar to the latter ; e. g., ani mazar-tang-Oy not ani-so mazar-tang-o.

rS or pero (f. rd)
rd'»a (f. ra-sa) be-
fore Tr. V. not

nino or anino ...of these

ninO'H or anino-ri ...to these

nino or anino ,.,,.. .these

ninO'ZO or anino-zo ...from these
ninO'Za or anino-ia ...by these

N. rb {ri f em ) \

''^T I' ^^''''\ that
before Tr. V. not i ""^

in Past Tense /

G. sb or o«o (f. rds6)..»oi that

also asi'Sii
D. si-rS or asi-rS to that

(f . risS-rS)
Ace. se or asi or da... that

(f . ri9i)
Abh si'ZO or «w^-|ro... from that

(f . resS'Zo)

Instr. sisi or asi by that

(f . re9t)

those

Past Tense

reno or perano of those

(f. rano)

reno-re or perano-re to those

(f . rano-re)
reno or perano those

(f . rano)
renO'ZO or perano-so-.^troTa. those

(f . ranO'Zo)
reno-za or perano-,,, hj those

za (f . ranO'za)

1878.]

B. B. Shaw — Stray Ariam in Tihet

49

Belativc

5 Pronoun.

Personal Adjectival Pronoims.

N. li or JciH (?)

^ho

miano

my own

G. kiso

of whom

tano

they own

D. hese-re

to whom

resano or tomo

his own

Ace. i^e (?)

whom

assano

our own

Abl. kesi-zo (?)

from whom

isano

your own

Instr. ke^si

by whom

renano or tomo

their own

The Belative Pronoim is used like the Hindustani ^o, jis^ka^ &o,, fol-
lowed by a corresponding demonstrative pronoun later in the sentence : a
pronoim do seems to be specially employed for this, like so in Hindustani,
but the other demonstrative pronouns are also used.

Thb Verb " to be.

i>

Present and Future.

M.

P.

a 1.

mon hano9 or hana

mon hanis

I am or shall be

2.

tu hano or haon

tu hani

thou art &c.

3.

TO hano or haoh

ri hhni

he, she is &c.

PL 1.

he hanis or haiis

hi ha ins

we are &/fi.

2.

tso hanet or hdnt

tsa haint

ye are <&c.

8.

r^ haii

ra hanie
Past (Imperfect).

they are <&c.

S. 1.

man hsitbs

mon asilyis

I was (lit. I was being)

2.

tu asilo

tu asilie

thou wast

a.

ro asilo

ri asilie

he, she was

PLl.

he asilU

hi c^silyis

we were

2.

tso asilet

tsa asiliet

ye were

8.

ri a9iie

ra Hsilie

Conditional.
Past.

they were

S. 1.

mon asilbzto

mon asilazto

if I were

2.

tu asiloto

tu asilato

if thou wert

3.

ro asilto

ri asilto

if he, she were

P1.1.

he asilezto

hi asilaseto

if we were

2.

tso asiletto

tsa asilateto

if ye were

3.

re asilto

ra asilato

if they were

The Ibbeoitlab Vebb '' to become."

Present.
Infinitive and Supine : hono ^ to become/' or, " in order to become.
Imperative, hi " become."
o

»

60

R. B. Shaw — Strny Ariam in Tibet,

[No. 1,

Mase.

Fem.

s.

1.

fnon hbmos

man homu

I am becoming

2.

tu hS

tube

thou art becoming

3.

ro heno

re bene

he, she is becoming

PI

. 1.

hi bonas

bi bonas

we are becoming

2.

tso bat

tsa hat

ye are becoming

8.

ri betM

ra bena (?)
Present Future.

thej are becoming

s.

1.

mon bom

mon bom

I become or shall become

2.

tu besh

tu besh

thou becomest &c.

3.

ro bei

ri bei

he, she becomes <&c.

PI.

1.

bi bon

hi bon

we become &c.

2.

tso bat

tsa bdte

ye become &c.

3.

re ben

•

ra beni
Imperfect.

they become &c.

s.

1.

mon bom-alos*

mon bom-alts

I was becoming

2.

tu biaio{?)

tu biale(?)

thou wast becoming

3.

ro blah (?)

re bialie (?)

he, she was becoming

PI

. 1.

hS hdn-ales

be hon-alyis

we were becoming

2.

tso bialet (?)

tsa hialiet (?)

ye were becoming

3.

re ben-ale

ra ben-alie
Perfect.

they were becoming '

s.

1.

mon bilos*

mon bilies

I have become, f e., I am

2.

tu bilo

tu biliesh

thou hast become, ». e.,
thou art

3.

ro bilo or bil

re bill

he, she has become, ». «., is

PI

. 1.

bd biles

hi bilies

we have become, i. «., are

2.

tso bilet

tsa bilieti

ye have become, ». «., are

3.

re bilen

ra bilyen
Pluperfect.

they have become, i. e,,

are

s.

1.

mon bilalos

mon bilalyis

I had become

2.

ta bilalo

tu bilalie

thou hadst become

3.

ro bilalo

ri bildlie

he, she had become

PI. 1.

be hilales

be hilalies

we had become

2.

tsa bilalet

tsa hilaliet

ye had become

3.

r6 bilale

ra bilalie

they had become

1878.]

B. B. Shaw — Stray Ariam in Tihei.

51

COJTDITIONAL.

Present.

S. 1.

mon hilozto

mon hilazto

if I become

2.

tu biloto

tu hilato

if thou becomest

3.

ro hilto

r4 hilto

if he, she become

Pl.l.

he hilezto

hd hildseto

if we become

2.

Uo hiletto

tsa hilateto

if ye become

d.

re hilto

ra hilato

if they become

The IiirrBAKSiTivE Vebb "to go.*'

Infinitive and Supine : hozdno " to go*' and " in order to go.**

Imperative : ho or hoze " go.**

Yerbal Adjectives : ho^ensto " going*', hos^eta " having gone.**

Present.

Masc.

Fern.

English.

s.

1.

mon hb:^umus

moh hozumis

I am going

2.

tu hozaon

m

thou art going

8.

ro hbzon or hbzSun

m •

re hozani

he, she is going

PI

.1.

hi hbzunaa
or hbnat

we are going

2.

t90 hbzat

tsa hozat

ye are going

3.

ri hbzena

ra hozein

*

Imperfect.

they are going

s.

1.

mon hozum-albs*

mon hbzum-alis

I was going

2.

tu hbzalo

tu hbzalS

thou wast going

3.

ro hbzalo

re hbzaliS

he, she was going

PI

. 1.

he honales

hS hbnaliSs

we were going

2.

tso hbs^alet

tsa hbzaliet

ye were going

3.

ri hb^enaU.

ra hbzenalie
Present Future.

they were going

s.

1.
2.

mon hbzum
tu hbzd

I go or shall go

3.

ro hbzSi

re hb^ie

PL

1.

hi hbzon (or hon ?)

2.

tso hb^at

tsa hozate

3.

re hbzen

ra hozeni

52

R B. Shaw — Stray Arians in Tibet,

[No. 1,

Future.

S. 1.

ffu>n bbzwn bil .

.« *•• .«•

... I shall go &^,

2.

^ 5dre 6>Z

.. ... ... 1

... thou wilt go

8.

ro bhzei ...

•• p.. «••

... he will go

PL 1.

5«' 5drofi bil

•• ••• •••

... we shall go

2.

tso bbzat bil

•• ••• «..

... ye will go

3.

rS bbzen bil

•• •■• •••

... they will go

Compound Future.

S. 1.

mon bbno hdns .

•• •.. •••

... I am to go

2.

tu bbno haon

*• ••• ••*

... thou art to go

8.

ro bbno haon

•• • •• • ■•

. . he is to go

PI 1.

be bbno Mm« .

•• ... •••

... we are to go

2.

tso bbno hanet .

*• ••• ••• <

,.. ye are to go

8.

ri bbno hi^n

•• ••• •••

Past.

... they are to go

S. 1.

mon gha^

mon gyes

I went

2.

tu go*

iugyi

thou wentest

8.

ro gau*

ri gyie

he, she went

PI. 1.

bi gyea

be gyiSs

we went

2.

tso gyet

tsa gyeti

ye went

8.

rigyi

ra gyie

they went

Perfect and Pluperfect.

S. 1.

mon galbs*

mon gaUs

I have or had gone

2.

tu galo

tu galS

thou hast or hadst gone

8.

ro gdlo

ri gain

he, she has or had gone

PI. 1.

be g alia

bi galyis

we have or had gone

2.

tso galet

tsa galiet

ye have or had gone

8.

ri ghU

ra gala

CONDITIOKATi.

they have or had ^one

Present Future

•

S. 1.

mon bozeto

.■• «•• •■•

... if I go

2.

tu bozeto

... ••• *••

... ifthougoest

8.

ro bozeito

• a. • • « •■•

... if he goes

PL 1.

bS bozunto

... ... ...

... if we go

2.

tso bozatto

••• ••• ••■

... if ye go

3.

ri bozenio

.•■ ••• •«.

Preterit.

... if they go

S. 1.

mon galbsto

mon galazto

if I had gone

2.

tu galbto

tu galato

if thou hadst gone

8.

ro gielto

ri gielto

if he had gone

1878.] E. B. SYisw— Stray Arians in Tibet. 63

PL 1. U galezio U galhseto if we had gone

2. t90 galetto tsa galateto if ye had gone

8. H gielto ra galato if they had gone

Masc. Fern. English.

PI, 1. hi galezto he gaiasefo if we had gone

2. too galetto tsa galateto if ye had gone

8. re gietto ta galato if they had gone

Probably all these tenses (Imperfect or Past, Perfect, and Pluperfect)
are compounded of some auxiliary verb-tense running as follows (there is
actually such a verb meaning " I came, &c.") :

S.

Masc.

Fem.

Masc.

Fem.

aids

alis

PI.

ales

alids

alo

aiS

alet

aliet

alo

alie

ale

alie

to which are prefixed the various verbal stems or complete verb tenses, per-
son for person. In many cases the combination has subsequently suffered
from elision.

J?, y., hil'dlds, &c., would be an uncorrupted example. The stem and
the auxiliary tense are both perfect, and the former does not vary with the
persons.

In galos, galo, &c., the verb root (probably gd) has suffered its vowel to
coalesce with the initial vowel of the auxiliary.

In hozum-albs, loz-alo, <&c., the auxiliary has destroyed the final syllables
of the verb tense, excepting in the 1st pers. Sing, and the drd pars. Plural.

In anlbSy hiloSy &c., the initial vowel of the auxiliary has itself suffered
alteration from the pressure of the verb-root before it.

In the root as (of hsilos " I was*'), and the root bi or be (of bilos ? bi'
albsy '' I have become"), we have perhaps representatives of the universal
Arian roots, bhu and as for the idea of ^^being" or '' existence."

In some verbs the terminations are bsy -d, -d.

If again we subdivide the auxiliary tense albs, <&c., into its root al
and its terminations -d«, -o, -o, es, -et, and -e, it would appear that it was by
the addition of these latter to the Present Future Tense, that the Present
Tense was formed :
E. g. Ft. Fat. Tense. Termn. Present Tense. Pr. Fat. Tense. Termn. Present Tense.

bozum OS ... bdzumus.

boze o ... bozao (n).

boz^i o ... bozdu (n).

bozon ^8 bozon^ls.

b5zat et bozat.

bozen 6 bozena.

TBAirsiTiVE Veebs are conjugated like intransitive ones. But they
show traces of the quasi- Passive formation with the subject in the Instru-
meotative Case, such as we find in the Past Tenses in Hindustani and in

54 R. B. Shaw — Stray Avians in Tibet, [No. 1,

the Ddrd dialect of Dah-Hanu (see above). As in the latter, the subject
takes a special form in the Past tenses, the singular taking an affix or
termination, generally -/, and the Plural -za (cf. Dah-Hanu -ya); but unlike
in that dialect the verb agrees with its proper subject (in the Instrumenta-
tive case) and not with its object. In the other Tenses the subject takes
the affix -sa as in the Dilh-Hanu dialect. This in both dialects is now a
simple variety of the nominative.

These facts I think corroborate the hypothesis that the Dah-Hanu
people formed an earlier migration than the Dras Dards. For they retain
most fully the quasi- Passive formation of the Past of Transitive Verbs,
which we find again in the Indian dialects (from which they had less op-
portunity of borrowing than the Drds people had). It was therefore
perhaps an early D^rd formation of which all but slight traces have been
lost by the later Dards.

The Tbansitive Vkbb "to strike."

Infinitive and Supine = Jcutino " to strike" and " in order to strike,"

:= kutiokuni " in striking."
Imperative : kutS " strike."

Verbal Adjectives : kutiensto " striking," kuteta and kutetato " having
struck."

Present.

Masc. Fem. English.

S. 1. mon-sa kufemus mon-sa kutemis I am striking

2. tu-sa kutaon tit-sa kutan (?) thou art striking

3. ro-m kute?io OT kuteun re-sa kuteni he, she is striking
PI. 1. he-sa kutmas he-sa kutonas we are striking

2. tso-ga kutiat tsa-sa kutiat ye are striking

3. re-sa kuteyia (or kuty- ra-sa kuteih (?) they are striking

bna.

Present Future.

S. 1. mon-sa kufem I strike or shall strike

2. tu-sa kutez or kute thou strikest or wilt strike

3. ro-sa kuie'i re-sa kutti he, she strikes or will strike
PI. 1. he-sa kutbn we strike or shall strike

2. tso-sa kutiat ye strike or will strike

3. r6-sa kuten ra-sa kuteni they strike or will strike

Compound Future.

S. 1. mon-sa kutiono hans mon-sa kutibno hanis I am to strike

2. tu-sa kutibno haon tti-sa kutibno hani thou art to strike

3. ro-sa kutibno haon ri-sa kutibno hani he, she is to strike

1878.]

R. B. Sbaw — Stray Ariant in Tibet.

55

PI. 1. hi'M kuiihno Tiomis
2. tM'ta kutiono hanet
8. ri-Ma kutiono han

S. 1. moh-sa kutemdibs

2. tti-sa kutalo {kuialor)

3. r0'9a kutelo
PI. 1. hi-9a kutonalds

2. tso-sa kutid/et

3. ri'Sa kutenaU

hS'ta kutidno hains
iad-sa kutiono haint
re-sa kutidno hdnie

Imperfect.

tnon-sa kutemdlU
tU'Sa kutdle
re-sa kutelie
hi-sa kutondlyis
tsa-sa kutidliet
rd-sa kutenalie

we are to strike
ye are to strike
they are to strike

I was striking
thou wast striking
he, she was striking
we were striking
ye were striking
they were striking

Past.

S. 1. mi kutds (in some yeThs'bi)

2. tbkutd^'O)

3. se-si kutdu{-o)
PL 1. assO'Za-kutiis

m

2. tso-za kutiei

*

8. reno-za kutte

I struck
thou struckest
he, she struck

mi kuti^

to kute

re-si kuti

assO'Za kutiees we struck

tsa-za kutieti ye struck

rano-^a kuttee they struck

Perfect and Pluperfect.

8. 1. mi kutdlbs mi kutdlts I have or had struck

2. to kutalo (kute-dsilbr) to kutdli thou hast or hadst struck

8. se-si kutalo re-si kutdli he, she has or had struck

PL 1. asso-zo kutidlis asso-za kutidlyis (?) we have or had struck

2. tso-za kutidlet tso-za kutidliet (?) ye have or had struck

3. reno-za kutidU rano-za kutidli they have or had struck

Present.
S. 1. moh'Sa kuteto if I strike

2. tu-sa kuteto if thou strikest

8. rO'Sa kuteito if he strike

PL 1. M'Sa kutunto if we strike

2. t$o-sa kutidtto if ye strike

8. rC'ta kutento ' if they strike

Conditional.

Past.
moh-sa kutdlbzto if I have or had

struck
tu-sa kutdlbto if thou hast or

hadst struck
ro-sa kutilto if he has or had

struck
he-sa kutdiezto if we have or had

struck
tsO'Sa kutdletto if ye have or had

struck
re-sa kutilto if they have or had

struck

50 R. B. Sh&w— Stray Artam in Tibet. [No, I,

TRANSLATION OF STORIES PROM FORBES'

PERSIAN GRAMMAR.

1.* Ek-i kozalo Af ratun-re : " L4 bariri nawi-za ( ? ya)
one (Instr.) had-asked Plato (Loc.) many years ship in (Loc*)

betalo ; t6 sara-za ( ? fa) lao safar t*h^. T6 sara

(thou) hast-sat thou (Instr.) sea in (Loc.) much voyage madest. Thou (Ins.) sea

-za ( ? ra) 'ajdib zok pd.sha ?*' Afratun-i rajau : " mon salamat-gi
in (Loc.) wonders what sawest P Plato (Instr.) said : I in-safety

sara-zo kd,tos chupe-^e, din mi p^has 'ajliib.
sea from came-out shore to this I (Instr.) saw wonderM.

2. Ek paqirek g^M grestok-o dd.rr-r6 di zek mang&a

a beggar went fisunner's door to (?) something demanded

Ara-no jaw^b kdti : G6r-r6 cb6i niisb. Paqir-i

Inside from answer oame-out (f.) : House (Loc.) woman is not. Beggar (Instr.)

rcijau: mi tiki torik mangalos mi chSL n^ mang^,

said : I (Instr.) bread piece bad-demanded I (Instr.) (the) woman not demanded,

mon-re h, jawttb Iddos.f
me to this (f.) answer arrived.

4. Ek bakim dezgao bozalo md.z4r-tang-ra ; tomo pelsho muka-re
a doctor daily used-to-go grave-yard-to his own shawl feu^e to

pali^ta bozalo. Zako-za kozi6: Ani-sei zok sabab b^ni?

having- wrapped used-to-go. People (Instr.) asked : this of what reason is (f.) ?

Hakim-i rajdu: Ani m^zkr-tang-o muo-re mon sbarmanda
Doctor (Instr.) said : This (f.) grave-yard (Gen.) dead (Loc.) I ashamed

binos : mion rd.biti keta mu6.

am: my medicine having-eaten (they) died.

8. Ek manuzo-re bwiro krum Iddo. Ek dostek (mubirak)

bubdrek
a man to big work (office) arrived. ' A friend congratulation

t'hiono cllo. S6-si koziu : Tu koi bilo, ki alo ? So dost

in-order-to-make came. That (one) asked : Thou who art, why earnest P His friend

* The numbers are those of the stories in the order given in Forbes' Persian
Granmiar.

t Here the verb seems to bo governed by the person of the Locative or Dative as
in other cases it is by that of the Instromentative. Normally one would think this

, , , , mou're d jawdb Iddd or mon d j'atcdb

me to this answer reached (Srdpers.) I this answer received (Istpers.)

1878.]

R. B. Sbaw — S^ray Ariam in Tibet,

57

sbarmanda bilo, rikjau: Tu-aa mofi su^n tli6 nosh dk

ashamed has-hecome, said : Thou (2nd nom.) me reoognitlon makest ib not P

Mon to purono d5st \alh% mon to mutro rono id68; mon parudos
I thy old Mend am I thy presence to weep came ; I heard

tu sheilon fh^.

thou blind makest (beoomest).

COMPARATIVE TABLE OF A FEW ORDINARY WORDS IN
THE DRAS DIALECTS OF DAH-HANU AND OF DRAS.

N. B. Kashmiri words added for comparison are marked K. and
Gaddi (Hindi) G. H. Resemblances to ordinary Hindi are not noted.

English.

Dah^Ranm,

Dr^.

man

mush

manu^o

father

b6

blibo

mother

ki

kx^ (cf . Gaddi Hindi ijjt)

8oh

bin

push

daughter

mol^i

dih

girl
child

mola'i

sin^

bal6

elder brother

b^yo

kikko

younger brother

r?*

zk

wife or woman

tchigd

ch^i

grandson

pot|ro

potfo

heart

ho

h)o

stomach

krutpa (Tib.)

der

head

shish

shish

eye

atchi

Ach6 (E. a4sh)

ear

k&ni

kon

nose

nuto

noto

tootb

dini

doni

beard

rmaghri

dA\

breast

kro

kroo

waist

doko

dakhri

band

hit^

h^t

foot

kuti

p6

lower leg

kankan

kin (pi. kinyi)

knee

kut6

kuto

thigh

patW

patai5

68

B. B. Shaw — Stray Arians in Tibet.

[No. 1,

Engluh.

Dah^Hdnu.

Dras.

bone

itti

^ti

hair

z4kur

z^Lku

mouth

uzi

hzi (E. ds)

lip

oti

hth |a?i»o = upper
I karino = lower

tongue

gip

zip

chin

miilsi'^f:! ^ p.^fVf^iilrKi

finger

giili

anguy6

name

niin

n6m

grass

ghhs

kash

road

pun

pon

apricot

«•

?u

zuzu

leaf

pani

pat6

birch (tree)

jriish (^ush)

fozi

wheat

gum

glim

barley

ghono

J^

field

tresh

grestok ;* grest (yrd<# Kashmir)

push!

cultivator

flower

pusho

cow

g6

gho

crow

qi

korkus

horse

kpsh

^shp

dog

shud

shun (Eashm. hitn)

cat

biilu

pushu

ram

churdi

kard

ewe

^'i

esh

he-goat

mingyar

mugir

she-goat

d.

^

buU

g61o

d6no

calf

bitok

batsar (watsir, K.)

lamb

run

urun (urnu, G. H.)

kid

chal

chdl (cMu, a. F.)

cattle

gol6

dbni {dand, Q. £t)

male

p-h^g (Tib.)

biro

female

mbg (Tib.)

sonti

milk

diit

dud

cream

iispris

shamal

wool

pash

pash

bear

ish

frog

chustrdk

manbk

« oJboiek

seems to be a tennination an(

L not a part of the word. Cf . dottek for d6m

1878.]

B. B. ShM— Stray Ariam in Tibet

59

JSnglUk.

Dah'Sanu.

Dras.

sun

•• •
sun

sur

star

turi

tAr6

earth (gronnd)

pi

sxun

moon

gyun

yun {zun E.)

mountain

riing

qaniya

pasture (alp)

nirda

shiai

rock

churr

chif

ravine

Ulrr

shnng

river

sin

sin

irater-course, canal

gy^p

y^p

rain

charchu

meg

BDOW

^

bin (E. 9hin), ifo (rain or snow)

avalanche

binal

ice

gaSs (Tib.)

86r

water

VLk

w6!

jear

sar

barir

month

mnfiA

mens (mint E.)

day

dis

chag

spring (season)

bazun

bfU5no

ulo

nw41o

aatnmn

8har&

shlur^

wiater

ynno

y6no

to-day

hsh

&8h

yesterday

run

•

to-morrow

rutti

the day before yes-

d6g.di8

terday

V

night

rat

T&d

work

kriim

krum

bread

manili

tiki

village

bon

house

g6t

g^

the town qfDria

Hembabs (Tib.)

Hunmas

door

dkn

darr

bow

OA

d^nu

arrow

qiin

q6n (E. kin)

iron

ching&r

chimir

smell

ghun

gon

big

bono

bw^ro

Uttle

so

chuno {ehwi Tib.)

60 R. B. Shaw— iSf/roy Arians in Khei. [No. 1,

BnglUK Dak-Hanu. Brat.

old pur6no*

new no n4o

wet haridho a? o

dry shuko shuko

black kyono kino

white sno :;bo

red lodo lalo

I mon {Gen, miii) mon (^€hn. mion, K. mihn)

we biiorbeng (pbl. assii) b6 {phi, asso, K. a«)

thou tii til

ye tsi (o&/-tsu) tso (K. ^«0)

this (masc.) so (ohl, t6) (K. «o) nu (o&Z. nis^)

this (fern.) sa ni

these (m.) t^ {ohl, ten) ni {ohl, nino)

that (m.) p'ho ro {ohl, s6)

that (f .) pTia r6 {ohl r^)

those (m.) p1i6 (o5/. p'heiin) r6 or pero (oftZ. reno)

those (f . ) Th.{ohl, rano)

who (reive.) k^si

who P ko k6i

what ? y6 zok

beyond beski peLri

this side of dzii yrkn,

towards suri, lokhshyS wari

there yonder pitri perj^

with suma or tsi-suma se'i-n^l^

thus hang

first (adv.) y&r meza

there potsi

there is Id, (pi. 14n) or bet

much ^ nu Icto

or >

many J i. 14i

very 14

I do chii or tii fhiono (to do)

I did tet fh&s

* Pronounced also prtmo and prdn / aa in FrAn^Drdt^ a village near Dr&s, called by

Englishmen Pdndrda, and sometimes wrongly derived from Fdyin *Uow." The name
given by Mooicroft for the Dr&s lucerne grass, viz. prangos, is perhaps merely prdn^
Jcdsh *^old grass," t. #. ^^hay ;" as lucerne forms the winter fodder of the cattle in^ tho
state of hay.

1878.]

B. B. SbAW — Stray Arians in Tibet,

61

BnglUh.

Dak^Htmu.

Dr^.

strike

kut^

kut6 {Inf, kutiono and dibno)

died

mu

mun {Inf, miribno)

broke

pitit

potd>u

bear

qun-t6 (imp.)

paruzono {Inf.)

write

zbri-t6 (imp.)

likibno {Inf.)

drink

pi (imp.)

pi5no {Inf.)

eat

ke (imp.) (K. khe.)

sleep (imp.)

8&

sb, {Inf sono)

sleep (subs.)

nish

nish

lick

li

weave

bo (imp.)

wibno {Inf.)

cultivate, plough

bahe (imp.)

bahn tliibno {Inf.)

give

d6

d6 {Inf dibno)

see

a

pdsh6

look

sky^

tfaki^

towards

lokh-sky^

downwards

ka-skye) ho = down
Astori)

1.

upwards

hun-skye (hunn =
above. Astori)

lost

nut

noto

come (imp.)

y6

6 {mlo K.)

came

Mia

^0

rise

Ot6

ut6

dig

aku

okoe

I speak

raznfis

r&zem

one

ek

ek

two

dii

du

three

trd.

tr6

four

chorr

chiur

five

punsh

ponsh

six

shd.

shd.

seven

tki

s&t

eight

art

dft

nine

nu

nAu

ten

diish

d^is

eleven

kudish

akfli

twelve

biidish

bu&i

thirteen

trobish

tybfii (tfO*i)

fourteen

chudiflh

chod^i

62

JEnglish.

fi.Eteen

sixteeen

seventeen

eighteen

nineteen

twenty

twenty-one

thirty

forty

fifty

sixty

seventy

eighty

ninety

hundred

Rajendralala Mitra — On Bepresentationa of

Drag,

[No. 1,

DahSanu.

pdrndish pazilen

shohish shoni (sho*i)

satunsh satdri

af tiinsh saiM

kunja (?for ek-iin- kuni (?for ek-un-bi) (20-1)*

biza 20-1

biz& bi

biza-ek bi-ek

biz^-ddsh (20-1-10) tri

du-buzu (2 X 20) du-bio (2 x 20)
du-buzu-diish (2 x 20 dubio ga ddi (2 X 20-f-lO)

+ 10)

tra-buzu (3 x 20) tr^-bio (3 X 20)

tra-buzu-dcLsh t|'e-bio ga d&i

char-buzu ch^r-bio

chd.r-buzu-dd.sh ch&r-bio ga dd'i

sho shal

On Representations ofl^reigners in the Ajantd Frescoes, — Bif
RXjendbalXla Mitea, LL. D., C.I.E.

(With 4 plates.)
The Ajantd Pass first came to the notice of Europeans during the
great battle of Asdyi, which broke down the Marhatt^ power ; but the caves
near it were not visited by any Englishman until several years af terwards»
According to Mr. Burgess, some officers of the Madras army were the first
to visit them in 1819, and Col. Morgan of the Madras army wrote a short no-
tice of them, which appeared in Mr. Erskine's ' Bemains of the Buddhists in
India.' Then followed Lieut. J. E. Alexander in 1824, and his account was
published by the Royal Asiatic Society in 1829. t Dr. Bird visited the place by
order of Sir John Malcolm in 1828, at the same time when Capt. Grisley
and Lieut. Ealp were at the place. The account of the former appeared in
his " Researches into the Cave Temples of Western India," a meagre and
faulty account, utterly imtrustworthy for all historical purposes. The
description of the latter appeared in this Journal.]: It is graphic and en-

* These seem to retain a trace (Jc for eh) of the deducted unit itself which Sanskrit
had lost (of. dnavintatt), but of which F^ seems to show the original presence^
{ekuna^atC).

t Transactions Bl. As. Soc, I, p. 557*

X Ante V.

1878.] Foreigners in the Ajantd Frescoes. 63

thosiastiCy but calcxdated more to rouse than to allay the curiosity of the
reader. Mr. Burgess says, " A somewhat interesting and correct topographi-
cal account of them, was subsequently (1839) published in the ^* Bombay
Courier", and republished in a pamphlet form, but 1 have not seen the
brochure. Soon after, came out Mr. Fergusson's description in his Memoir
on the " Bock-cut Temples of India," (1843) and laid the foundation
of a critical study of these remarkable works of art. It drew to them
the attention of the Court of Directors, and Capt. Gill was, six or seven
years after, deputed to prepare facsimile drawings of the fresco paint-
ings which adorn mosfc of the caves. His report was published in
1855, but it was meagre, like the works of his predecessors, and subserved,
like them, only to whet the desire for further information. Dr. Wilson's
account, in his paper on the ''Ancient Bemains of Western India",
published in 1850, in the Journal of the Bombay Asiatic Society*,
is a mere resum6 of what was then known, and Dr. John Muir's
subsequent notice professes to give nothing more than a foretaste of what
may be seen at the place. Dr. Bhau Daji came to Ajantd in 1865,
and took facsimiles of most of the inscriptions, some of which had
been previously noticed by James Prinsep, and published translations
of them in the Bombay Joumal.t The translations are generally correct
and of great value, but the general remarks on the nature of the caves
and their ornaments are brief and not always satisfactory. The learned
gentleman had the intention of writing a separate paper on the subject,
but ins untimely and lamented death prevented his carrying out the
intention. Since his death several notices have appeared in the ' Indian
Antiquary ' which are highly interesting, but none of them is exhaustive.

When Major Gill's copies of these curious works of art were sent to
Europe, it was expected that antiquarians in England would take them in hand,
and submit to the public a full and comprehensive critical account of their
character, and the subjects they pourtray. But the copies were destroyed
by fire in the Sydenham Crystal Palace, and nothing came of them. In
the meantime the originals suffered greatly from leakage in the caves and
want of care, and it was apprehended that in a few years more they would
be totally lost. A representation was accordingly made to Government to
adopt some measures for their preservation. Thereupon a party of drafts-
men, imder the superintendence of Mr. Griffiths, Principal of the Art School
at Bombay, was deputed in 1872-73 to prepare copies of all the printings
which were still legible. The result was a " collection of excellent copies
of four large wall-paintings covering 122 square feet of canvas, 160 panels
of ceiling, aggr^ating about 280 square feet, 16 moulds from the sculp*
tuxes, and several drawings." In reporting on these Mr. Griffiths says :

• Vol. in, pp. 7 Iff. t Vol. VII.

6^ Mjendral&la Mitra — On Bspreieniaiians of [No. 1,

" The artists who painted them, were giants in execution. Eren on the
Tertical sides of the walls some of the lines which were drawn with one
sweep of the hrush struck me as being very wonderful ; but when I saw
long delicate curves drawn without faltering with equal precision upon the
horizontal surface of a ceiling, where the difficulty of execution is increased
a thousand-fold, it appeared to me nothing less than miraculous. One of
the students, when hoisted up on the scafEolding, tracing his first panel on
the ceiling, naturally remarked that some of the work looked like a child's
work ; little thinking that what appeared to him up there as rough and
meaningless, had been laid in by a cunning hand, so that when seen at its
right distance, every touch fell into its proper place.

" The condition of mind in which these paintings at Ajantik were origi-
nated and executed must have been very similar to that which produced the
early Italian paintings of the fourteenth century, as we find much that is
in common. Little attention paid to the science of art, a general crowding
of figures into a subject, regard being had more to the truthful rendering
of a story than to a beautiful rendering of it ; not that they discarded beau-
ty, but they did not make it the primary motive of representation. There
is a want of aerial perspective — ^the parts are delicately shaded, not forced
by light and shade, giving the whole a look of flatness — o, quality to be de-
sired in mural decoration.

" Whoever were the authors of these paintings, they must have con-
stantly mixed with the world. Scenes of every-day life, such as preparing
food, carrying water, buying and selling, processions, hunting-scenes, ele-
phant-fights, men and women engaged in singing, dancing, and playing on
musical instruments, are most gracefully depicted upon these walls ; and
they could only have been done by men who were constant spectators of
such scenes, by men of keen observation and retentive memories. * * * #
In every example that has come under my observation, the action of the
hands is admirable and unmistakeable in conveying the particular ex-
pression the artist intended."*

Adverting to the second picture he says : " Parts of this picture are
admirably executed. In addition to the natural grace and ease with which
she is standing, the drawing of the woman holding a casket in one hand,
and a jewel with a string of pearls hanging from it in the other, is most
delicately and truly rendered. The same applies to the woman seated on
the ground in the left hand corner. The upward gaze and sweet expression
of the mouth are beautifully given. The left hand of the same woman... is
drawn with great subtlety and tenderness. "f "The third picture", he
remarks, ** contains eight figures and portions of three others, all of which are
seated or standing upon large lotus flowers with nimbi round the heads. The
* Indian Antiquaxy, III. 26. f Ibid., loc. cit.

1878.] Fbreifftters in the AJanfd Frescoes. 05

action of some of the figures, especially the standing ones, bears such a very
striking resemblance to what is characteristic of the figures in Christian
art, that the j might have been taken from some mediaBval Church, rather
than from the caves of Ajanta. The delicate foliage which fills in the
spaces between the figures will give some idea of the power of these old
artists as designers, and also of their knowledge of the growth of plants.'**
Bef erring to a picture in cave No. 16 he observes : '* This picture, I
consider, cannot be surpassed in the history of art. The Florentine could
have put better drawing and the Venetian better colour, but neither could
have thrown greater expression into it. The dying woman, with drooping
head, half -closed eyes, and languid limbs, reclines on a bed the like of which
may be found in any native house of the present day. She is tenderly
supported by a female attendant, whilst another, with eager gaze, is looking
into her face, and holding the sick woman's arms, as if in the act of feeling
her pulse. The expression on her face is one of deep anxiety, as she seems
to realize how soon life will be extinct in One she loves. Another female
behind is in attendance with a pankft, whilst two men on the left are look-
ing on with the expression of profound grief depicted in their faces. Below
are seated on the floor other relations, who appear to have given up all
hope, and to have begun their days of mourning, — for one woman has
buried her face in her hands, and, apparently, is weeping bitterly, "f

And he sums up the value of the whole by saying — " For the pur-
poses of art-education, no better examples could be placed before an Indian
art-student than those to be found in the caves of Ajanta. Here we have
art with life in it, human faces full of expression, — limbs drawn with grace
and action, flowers which bloom, birds which soar, and beasts that spring, or
fight, or patiently carry burdens : all are taken from Nature's book — growing
after her pattern, and in this respect differing entirely from Muhammadan
art, which is unreal, unnatural, and therefore incapable of development."];

It is to be regretted, however, that as yet no attempt has been made to
secure for the public a detailed, descriptive, critical and historical account of
these relics. At one time a proposition was made to place the drawings at
the disposal of Mr. Fergusson for the purpose ; but, I believe, it has since
fallen through.

The Oovemment of India has, however, in the meantime, caused pho*
tographic impressions to be taken of Mr. Griffiths' drawings, and copies
thereof sent to Societies interested in Indian Archseology. Three batches
of these photographs have, from time to time, been received by the Asiatic
Society of Bengal, and they fully bear out Mr. Griffiths' remarks regarding
their value.

• Loc oit, p. 27. t Ibid., p. 27. t Ibid., p. 28.

I

CO Rajcndralala Mitra — On Bepresrfttatiotts of [No 1,

A large number of the photograph-* represent architectural details and
floral scrolls of much importance as illustrations of ancient art-designs in thia
country, and are well worthy of careful study. There are others representing
scenes in the legendary life of 13uddha, which are of considerable value in
connexion with the antiquity of the legends which they illustrate. While
a few depict scenes from private life, or state pageantry, which afford inter-
esting details regarding the manners, customs, habits, social condition, and
intercourse of foreigners with the people of Western India, two thousand

years ago.

Messrs. Ralph and Grisley were the first to notice the existence of
foreigners in these frescoes. In their animated and scenic correspondence,
mention is repeatedly made of foreigners as distinct from the natives. In ono
place they say : " Here is a lovely face, a Madonna face. What eyes 1 She
looks towards the moon. Observe, these are Hindu faces — nothing foreign.'**
Elsewhere, " Observe that Abyssinian black prince seated on a bed — remark
his ornaments. Now the woman seated on his left knee whom he embraces
is as fair as you or I. Did these fellows get Georgian slaves ?" Again :
" Here are evidently three beauties in this apartment — one an African, one
copper- coloured, one of a European complexion. Yes; and how frequently
we see these intermixed. See this, R. is a fair man, a eunuch." Again, " How
often we see people of three complexions in the same panel ! Now ihis is
the most extraordinary thing we have found. Here are three placid por-
traits— they are Chinese, Nothing can be plainer ; — observe the style of
their hair ; — the women have locks brought down in ringlets over their faces,
and falling on to the neck, like some of the Hampton Court beauties."
The writers did not, however, attempt to define the character of these
foreigners, in any detail. It will not be uninteresting, therefore, to examine
at length the peculiarities of a few of the figures shown in the photographs.

The first picture I have to notice is a court-scene on the south side of
the cave No. I. In Messrs. Ralph and Grisley's paper it is thus described :
" Here is a fair man of full age, dressed in a robe and cap, like some monk
or abbot. Here is, next to him, a half-naked Brahman, copper-coloured,
with shaven crown, and the single lock on his head. Here is a man
presenting him with a scroll on which something is icritfen. He is in a
crowded court, — he has come to an audience." In the original this picture
measures 15' X 6'^ff. (Plate II.) It represents a large audience chamber
with colonnaded side aisles, and a large portal in front. The room is
carpeted with some stuff bearing sprigs on a black, or dark-coloured,
ground. On the centre is a charpai or bedstead, which serves the pur-
pose of a throne. It has four feet of the ordinary modern make, with
a tape-woven top, such as is to be met with in every decently furnished
house in northern India in the present day. Over it is a mattrass of
ptriped cloth, and on the off side a large pillow or takidy having behin<J

♦ Antfy Vol. y, p. 658.

,-n Asia.*. Sor^: PLATE II,
_ ^ _ ^-_ ^ ^

Is 78.] Foreif/tiers in the Ajanta Frescoes. 67

it an ornamented head-piece shaped like a corona. A king or chief
is seated, squatting on this throne in the usual oriental style, dressed in a
flowing dhuti or body-cloth, a chddar tied round the waist, and a tunic
of some kind whose character is not apparent. He wears a rich heavy
crown, bracelets and necklaces, one of the last being worn athwart the chest,
very like a Brahmanical cord. The face and parts of the arms and chest
are destroyed or smudged over. In front of the throne there is a man
seated, holding an ox-tail chauri, and having in front of him a curious orna-
ment, shaped like a cornucopia. To the right there are four other persons
seated on the ground, one of them having in front a tray placed on a
tripod stand. The pose of the person is like that of a Brahman engaged
in worship. Behind and on the two sides of the throne, there are several
persons, — ofEcers of state, courtiers, body-guard, and menials, — standing in
different attitudes, some dressed in dhuti only, others with tunics or made
dresses, the character of which, owing to the smudgy condition of the
picture, cannot be satisfactorily made out, except in one case in which a
pair of close- Qtting trousers and a chapJcan are unmistakable. Some are
armed with clubs, and one , near the entrance to the hall, upholds a standard.
Their shaven chin, oriental head-dress, dark complexion, and characteristic
featui-es leave no doubt in my mind that they are all Indians. Among
them there arn four females, one standing behind the throne, and three
seated on the carpet on the left side. In marked contrast to these are three
persons standing in front of the king, and four others at a little distance.
The foremost among them has a sugar-loaf- shaped hat with a black band,
a large flowing gown of white stuff, a striped jacket, and a dagger held in
a cloth girdle. The lower part of the gown or long coat is partially cover-
ed by the figure of the Brahman engaged in worship, but from the portion
which is visible, it is evident that it extended below the middle of the leg.
Between the girdle and the lower edge of the jacket there is a waist-band
buckled in front. Round his neck there is a necklace with a large locket.
He is in the attitude of making a courtesy to the king, with his right hand
passed under the jacket and placed on the left breast, and the left holding
out a folded letter. The second person, dressed in the same style, but with a
black jacket, is standing with folded hands in token of respect. His hat
has no band. The third has a Persian helmet, with a crescent on top and
a rosette on one side. He is bearing a tray full of presents of some kind.
At a little distance from the last, just entering the hall, there is another
person of the same nationality, bearing a tray, and outside the door there
are two or three others who are evidently servants of the persons who have
entered the hall, and belonging to the same nationality. The lower part
of the gowns of these is not visible, but it must be the same as in the case

68 Eajendralala Mitra — On Representations of [No. 1,

of the foremost figure. The coat of the mau with a helmet is probahlj
short.

The complexion of these persons, except the first, is markedly fair.
Studying the group carefully the conclusion appears inevitable that it
represents an embassy from a foreign country. The foremost person is the
ambassador, who is presenting his credentials in open court to the Indian
potentate. Behind him is his secretary, and then follow the bearers of the
nazr or presents from the foreign court.

But whence is this embassy ? and what is the nationality of the persons
who compose it ? We are aware of no Indian race or tribe which differed
so materially and markedly in complexion, features, and dress from the natives
of the country as represented in the court. From beyond India on the
north and the east, there was no nation which, two thousand years ago, could
have presented such a group. We must look to the North -West, therefore,
for the biiiih- place of the ambassador and his suite. Now on that side we
had the Afghans, the Bactrians, the Scythians, and the Persians. But
the Afghans never had the peculiar sugar-loaf hat, nor the flowing gown,
nor the crescented helmet. Their features too, were, as shall be presently
shown, coarser and rude. The Bactrian and the Scythian dresses, to judge
from numismatic evidence — the only evidence available in the case, — were
also different. The coat was short, the trousers tight-fitting, and the
head-gear very unlike a sugar-loaf hat. The Persian dress, however, as we
now have it, is the exact counterpart of what appears in the picture. The
hat, the gown and the jacket are identically the same.

The helmet appears repeatedly in the sculptures of Khors4b4d and
, Nineveh, and the features and the beard are in no way different. We may,
therefore, safely conclude that the picture represents a group of Persians,
either merchants, or an embassy from Persia to an Indian court, probably
the latter, as the letter in the hand of the foremost person would be redund-
ant in a merchant. I am not aware of any mention of such an embassy
in Buddhist religious history ; but I have read but a sn:iall portion of Bud-
dhist literature, and as it is abundantly evident that the frescoes of Ajanta
were not confined to representations of religious history, it is not necessary to
hunt up any relationship with it of Buddhist legends. Nor is it material to
know whether the representation is historical or an ideal one. In either case
it shows that the Indians of old had free intercourse with the Persians, and
were thoroughly familiar with their features and dress. Literary evidence
on this subject may be had in abundance in Sanskrit literature, but it is not
necessary to adduce it here.

The second scene I have to describe is a domestic one, and three editions
of it occur in the collection of photographs before me. There is no indica-
tion, however, to show whence they have been taken. The scales attached

.7

o\x

^

1878.] Foreigners in the Ajantd Frescoes. 69

show them to be of large size, about 30 x 28 ft. In its simplest version
(Plate III) it represents a divan placed in front of a cloth screen, and covered
with cushions and a check pattern coverlet ; and on it are seated a big, stout,
burly-looking man and a lady by his side. The man is seated cross-legged,
and is in an amatory mood, perhaps somewhat befuddled with wine. His face
is heavy and square, and he has both a beard and a moustache. He wears
long hair covered by a thick conical cap with a turban, or a fur band around
it like the Qilpaq cap of the Central Asiatic races of the present day. On his
body is a coat or tunic reaching to the knee and trimmed with, what appears
to me, patch-work decorations ; knee-breeches and striped stockings com-
plete his dress. He holds a cup in his left hand, and before him, on the
ground, in front of the divan, there is a covered tray. The lady beside him
has a gown reaching to the knee, a shell- jacket, (both set off with patch-
work trimmings,) and a pair of striped stockings. She has a skull cap on
her head, and earrings. Her right hand is lifted as in the act of telling some-
thing interesting to her lord. To the right of the man, in front of the
divan, there stands a maid, arrayed in a long flowing gown which leaves only
the tips of her shoes visible, and holding a flagon, shaped like a soda-water
bottle with a long narrow neck, ready to replenish the cup of her lord.
Behind the mistress there is a second maid with a wide-mouthed covered
jar in her hand.

In the second version the man holds the cup in his right hand, and a
stick or straight sword in his left. He has also an elaborately-worked belt,
and the trimmings of the coats and gowns are of different patterns. The
lady leans on the shoulder of her lord by her right hand, and by her attitude
expresses great solicitude to please him. There is also a third maid,
squatting in front, and ready to serve out edibles from the covered tray
beside her.

The third version is even more developed. (Plate IV). The screen
behind the divan is set off with floral designs. The coat of the hero and the
gown of his lady, and also that of her maid, are set off with triangular striped
streamers flying from the back. The features of the lady are vivid with
life, and the expression, of endearment on her face is truly admirable.
The second maid holds a swrdhi or g<^let instead of a jar. The lady has,
instead of a cap, a fillet round her head with an aigrette in front, and the
maids similar fillets, but without the jewel. The third maid is replaced
by two bearded, thick-lipped Negro-looking servants who are serving out
dishes from the covered tray. The stockings in the last two versions are
white. In two small panels the male figure is reproduced in company with
another male, — ^two jovial companions, engaged in pledging their faith to each
other over a cup of liquor. (See Plat« V, fig. 1). The striped stockings are
distinctly seen in these, as also a pair of check-pattem trousers, not striped.

70 Rajentlralala Mitra — On Eepresentations of [No. 1,

There are more than five hundred representations of Indian men and
women in the photographs, but thej appear totally unlike the human figures
shown in these plates, and, bearing in mind the fact that the artists of these
frescoes were most faithful in delineating the peculiarities of their subjects,
it is impossible to deny that they took their models for these from other than
Indians. It is difficult, however, to determine what nationality they had
in view. The features, the cap and the turban of the principal figure, are
the exact counterparts of what may be every day seen in the Kabulese fruit-
sellers in the streets of Calcutta ; but the coat is different. I have never seen
an Afghan woman in her native dress, but the gown and the jacket of the
female figures appear very like those of Jewesses. The patch- work trim-
mings are peculiar to them, and the best specimens of the kind of work I
have seen are of Jewish make. The Afghans, however, are in no way inferior
in this art : they bring to Calcutta every year a number of rugs and other
articles of patch- work, which are remarkably beautiful. Knowing how such
domestic arts as needle-work and patch- work are perpetuated for generations,
and looking at the complexion, the cap and the turban, I was first disposed
to believe that the figures on these plates represented Afghans, the thick-
lipped servants being Negroes.

In the Zodiac Cave (No. XVI) Dr. Bhau Daji found an inscription
which once " contained the names of seven or eight kings of the Vakitaka
dynasty, but only that of Vindhyasakti, the oldest and most eminent, was pre-
served intact." " By a strange fatality," says the writer, "the inscription
has been obliterated wherever a royal name existed, so that one is tempted to
suppose that the destruction was intentional. But," he adds, " the destruc-
tive influence of the rainy weather is sufficient to account for the gaps."*
The name of this Vindhya^akti's country is mentioned in the Seoni copper-
plate ; but the chief himself is not named there. Dr. Bhau Daji identifies
this Vindhyasakti with a chief of the Kailakila Yavanas who, according
to the Vishnu Purana, once ruled in India. Having advanced thus far,
he takes Kailikila to be identical with an ancient city and citadel named
Ghulghuleh near Bamian, mentioned by Mr. Masson in his paper on the
Antiquities of Bamian {ante^ v. 708), and Vakataka with Bactria, thereby
suggesting, though not positively asserting, that the Bactrian Greeks were
the authors of the Ajanta caves. If this reasoning be admitted, the figures
we have shown would be those of Bactrian Greeks. But there are various
difficulties to overcome before we can accept the identification. The name
Vindhyasakti is too thorough a Sanskrit word to be the name of a Bactrian
Greek, and there is nothing to connect him with the princes of the Seoni
plate, except the word Vakataka, which, as given in the Seoni plate, is

* Journal, Bombay As. Soc, VII, p. 65.

1S78.] Foreigners in the Ajantd Frescoes. 71

unmistakably the name of an Indian, and not of a trans-Indian locality,
particularly Bactrian, for which the usual and very extensively-employed
term is Valhika. In the Puranas these Valhikas are said to have reigned
after Yindhya^akti. Denying, however, the accuracy of the identification
of Yakataka with Bactria and of Vindhya§akti having been a Bactrian, it
might still be said that the figures under notice are Bactrians. In some
Kenerki coins the cap is conical, and surrounded by a turban or a band of
fur like the Qilpaq cap ; the cut of the coat is of the same style, and the
close-fitting trousers and stockings are, as far as can be made out in coins,
the same. The coarse square face of the Mongolian type is particularly
remarkable, and, as the Bactrians exercised supremacy for some time in
India from a little before the commencement of the Christian era, to nearly
a century after it, it would be much more reasonable to suppose the
representations to be of Bactrians, rather than those of Afghans, who
attained to no political distinction at the time, and were to some extent
included among the Hindus.

The stockings of the peculiar pattern which has hitherto been thought
to be the outcome of modern European art, are remarkable : I have
noticed them nowhere else in Indian paintings or sculpture. The Hindus
seem to have borrowed the stockings from their neighbours ; for in a
panel in Cave No. I, there is a representation of an Indian bacchanalian
scene, unmistakable from the features and dress, in which they have been
reproduced on the legs of a man and his lady-love. Before the importation
of stockings from Europe, the Indians got their supplies from Kashmir.
I do not, however, know when knitted stockings were first introduced
into that country. To England they first came in the reign of Henry
YIII, and it is extremely doubtful if they were of much more ancient
date in Kashmir. And after all what I take to be stockings might be
sewed hose of cloth or milled stuff of some kind.

The indulgence in spirituous drinks was common all over India, Bactria
and Persia in ancient times, and the evidence of it in the frescoes does not
call for any notice.* That the cup and the flagon indicate something
more potent than sherbet, I believe, none will question.

The curtains behind the divan suggest the idea that the sites of the
Bactrian domestic scenes were tents, and that the people shown had not be-
come settled inhabitants of the country. But the evidence in this respect
is too meagre to attach any importance to such an idea.

Looking to the made-dresses of the Persians and the Bactrians, it might
be supposed that the Indians got theirs from those sources ; but, as I have
shown in my " Antiquities of Orissa," such was not the case, at least when
the Ajanta frescoes were painted. In the Indian bacchanalian scene above
noticed, the dresses of the Indian man and woman are quite different, and

• FiV/e iia«im my paper on * Spirituous Drinks in Ancient India,' a fife, XLH,
pp. 1 ff.

72 Rajeiidralala Mitra — On Representations in the Ajantu Caves. [No. 1,

by no means such as to justify the assumption that they had been designed
from foreign models. In the very afPecting picture of the death of a lady
of rank in Cave No. XYI, the bodices shown on some of the maid- servants
engaged in grinding com in hand-mills, are quite unlike the jackets of the
Bactrian women.

In an Indian scene in Cave No. I, where a large number of sable
beauties are exhibited, there . is a figure seated cross-legged, whose dark
features, punchy belly and style of sitting, leave no doubt in my mind of his
nationality ; and he is dressed in a dhuti which leaves a part of his thigh
exposed, and a mtrzdi of flowered muslin which is thoroughly Indian, and the
like of it has nowhere been seen out of India. (See plate V, fig. 2.) The
mtrzdi is in use by the Hindus to this day all over northern India, and its
make seems not to have changed in the least since the time of the fresco.

It is not my intention to enter into a discussion here as to the date
of the Ajantd Caves. The late Dr. Wilson of Bombay took them
to extend from the third or second century before, to the fifth or sixth cen-
tury after, Christ.* Mr. Burgess, after a careful study of the Caves, states
'* that the oldest of them cannot be later than the second century before the
Christian era." Long before him Mr. Fergusson came to the same conclusion
in his ' Kock-cut Caves of India,' and in his ' History of Eastern Architec-
ture' remarked that Cave No. XII, " the fa9ade of which so much resembles
that of the Ndsik Chaitya (B. C. 129), cannot be far off in date" (p. 122).
The latest are supposed to be of the 6th or 6th century. Accepting
this opinion for my guide, and there is not much to show that it is untenable,
and bearing in mind that Cave No. I is one of the largest and richest in paint-
ings which long preceded sculpture, I may fairly come to the conclusion that
the scenes I have described above represent phases of Indian life from
eighteen hundred to two thousand years ago.

* Journal, Bombay As. Soc., Ill, p. 73.

JoUTDsl, Ai: Eocy: Bengtl, P

A COPPEK PLATE GRANT TROlf BANDAB.

187a] 78

A Copper-plate Grant from Bandd. — By^ EXjendbalXla.

MiTRA, LL.D., O.I.E.

(Witli a plate.)

The Society is indebted to Mr. A. Cadell, Asst. Magistrate, Banda^
in the N. W. Provinces, for the sight of a Copper-plate found in Parganah
Augisi of the Bandd district. The plate measares 16i inches by 10^,
and is in an excellent state of preservation. (See plate YI.) It is a
hammered one ; very rough on the outer face, but moderately smooth oa
the inscribed side. Bound its edges slips of metal have been very roughly
and clumsily rivetted on to form a raised rim for the purpose of pre-*
venting the inscription from being easily rubbed off. At the middle of
the lower edge, close by the rim, is a round hole, half an inch in diameter.
It was intended for a ring which bore the seal of the donor, and perhaps
also held together two plates, one of which is missing. If a second platei
did once exist, it was intended only as a cover for the ficst and bore no
inscription, for the latter contains the whole of a deed of conveyance, with
a colophon giving the name of the writer and engraver of the record, and
hitherto no document of the kind has been found which contains any thing
after the name of the engraver. The record is inscribed longitudinally^
and comprises nineteen lines, the first four of which have a break in the
middle, caused by an outline figure of the goddess Rdjalakshmi with twa
elephants standing on expanded lotuses, and pouring water on her head.
The writing is of the Ku^Ua type^ but slender in body, and verging to the
modem Nagari character. It records the grant of ' ten ploughs ' of land in
the village of Bamura^d, which is situated in the circle of Sudali, to a
Br&hmana naqied Gabhanta S'arman, the son of Ja^a, the grandson of Satti,
and great-grandson of Yapana, a member of the Ydjasaneyi school of tho
Bhdradvdja gotra, having the threefold Pravara of Bharadvdja, Angirasa^
Yarhaspatya, and an inhabitant of the village of iphakari. The boundary
of the plot is given in detail, and the date of the gift was Monday, the 5th
of the waxing moon in the month of M%ha, Samvat 1190 =: A. C. 1135.

The donor was Madanavarma Deva, a devout follower of S'iva. His
immediate predecessor was Pfithvivarma Deva, who had succeeded Kirti-
varma Deva.

The first monument of this line of princes was brought to the notice of
the Society by Lieutenant William Price, in 1813. It was a large inscribed
stone found on aTocky hill in the vicinity of the town of Mau, about ten
miles from Chhattarpur. The record was in a bad state of preservation,, and
the transcript and translation of it published in the * Asiatic Researches'*

♦ YoL XII, pp. 359 et uq,

K

74 Rajendralala Mitra — A Copper-plate Orantfrom Bdndd. [No. 1,

are full of lacunae. It comprises the history of nine princes with the names
of their ministers.

The second record was found by Capt. T. S. Burt in 1838. It too was
an inscribed slab, which had been detached from one of several temples at
Khajraha, nine kos from Chhattarpur, which is on the high road from
Saiyar and Hamirpur, close by the fortified town of R^jga^h, on the right
bank of the Kdm river, S. W from Chhattarpur. It gives the names of six
predecessors of Dhinga.*

The third was communicated to me by Major-General Cunningham,
who found it at Khajraha.t It was a short record of 13 lines, but it was of
value in settling the date of the dynasty on a sure footing. In commenting
upon it I pointed out the relation it bore to the two preceding monuments,
and the results deduoible from a reading of the three inscriptions together.
The conclusion I then arrived at regarding the date of Madanavarma, the last
prince of the line, was, that he must have lived about the middle of the twelfth
century. The exact date given by the copper-plate now under notice is Sam-
vat 1190 = A. D. 1135. The name of the immediate predecessor of Prithvi-
varma, the father of Madana, in Lieutenant Price's inscription, is Sallak-
shanavarma ; but this appears to be an alias or title, the real name being
Kirtivarma in the copper- plate. Putting the names found in the four inscrip-
tions together with such corrections as the several records have helped
me to make, I arrive at the following genealogy. Altogether we have sixteen
names. Of these, documentary evidence exists for the dates of three ; the 7th
king, Dhdnga, being assigned by two records to Sam vat 1011 and 1019 re-
spectively; the Idth by one to Samvat 1173 ; and the 16th by another to
1190. For the rest we have to depend upon averages. For reasons assigned
in my paper on the Khajraha inscriptions, the earlier reigns may be taken to
have been long, but some of the later must have been very short. Dhdnga
is said to have lived 109 summers, and then to have resigned his life at the
confluence of the Yamun^ and the Ganges, and this led Mr. Sutherland and
those who wrote after him to suppose that the prince had committed suicide.
Such is, however, not the inevitable meaning of the passage. To this day
the ordinary civil way of announcing a death is to say, so-and-so has sur-
rendered his life to the holy river so-and-so or the sacred pool {Kshetra)
80-and-so, and the inscription has probably adopted the same mode of
expression.

I. Nannuka, of the Chandrirtreya race A. D., 746 771

II. Vdgyati or Vakpati, son of I, 771 798

III. Viyaya, sonof II, ^... 898 823

IV. VAhUaorBahila,sonof III, 823 848

• Journal, As. Soc., Vin, p. 169. f Ibid., XXXTT, pp. 2731

1878.] Rdjendraldla Mitra — A Oopper-plnte Grant from "Bindd, 75

V. S'riluffBha, eon of IV, 848 873

VI. Yasodhanna, Bon of V, by Kankuti, 878 900

VII. DMnga, j son^^ Vl^by Namadevi, ^ ^ ^^

VnL Ga^da Deva, Minister— Prabh^, 952 988

IX Yidjadhara Deva, Minister — S^iyan4ma, son of last, 983 1103
X. Yiyajyapila, Minister — Mahipala, son of last, .•• 1108 1023

XI. Eirtirarma Deva, Minister — ^Ananta, 1024r 1045

XII. Yarma Deva, Minister — ^Yoge^vara, son of last,... 1045 1065

XIII. JajaTarma Deya, Minister — ditto, 1110 1120

XIY. Eirtiyarma Deva alias Sallakshana, Minister—

Yatsa and other sons of Ananta, 1120 1130

XY. Pritbvivarma Deva, ditto, 1120 1130

X YI. Madanavarma De va^ Minister — Gadadbara, 1 130 1150

The annexed translation of the record has been prepared for me by
my young friend B4ba Durgar^una Baso, Pleader, High Court of Calcutta.

Trofulaium of an inseriptionjrom Farganah Augdsi, JBandcU

May this be auspicious !

The dynasty of the kings of the lunar race, glorious as the moon on the
f oreliead of the god of the universe, (Yi^veSvara) gladdening the universe,
prospers. In that noble and flourishing dynasty, rendered resplendent by
heroes like Jaya^kti and Yijaya^kti, the king of Kalanjara, the fortunate
Madanavarma Deva, the highly revered, the great king over great kings, the
supreme lord, the devout worshipper of 31 va, successor of the highly revered,
the great king over great kings, the supreme lord, the fortunate Prithvi-
varma Deva, toho was the successor of the highly revered, the great king over
great kings, the supreme lord, the fortunate Eirtivarma Deva, reigns supreme.
He, having subdued his enemies by his irresistible majesty, untroubled holds
the earth like a married wife, and thereby keeps his intellect unclouded, and
his conscience unsullied. He commands all his relatives, Eayasthas, and
other great men inhabiting the village of Bimurad^ within the district
of Sudili : — " Be it known unto you that, on Monday, on the day of
the full moon, in the month of Magha, of the Samvat year eleven hundred
and ninety (in figures 15th Sudi, Magh, Samvat 1190) I have, after having
duly bathed in holy water, after offering oblations to the gods, having
worshipped the sun and the lord of Bhavani (S'iva) and after offering obla-
tions to the fire, for the promotion of virtue of my parents and of myself,
with water held in my hand and consecrated with ku^ grass, and having
pronounced the word Svasti (let this be auspicious), bestowed, for the
period of the duration of the sun and the moon, on the Br&hma^a Gabhanta
SBTtaij son of Ji^ grandson of Satti, great-grandson of B4pan, of the
Y&jasaneya branch (Sakhd) of the Bharadv&ja gotra having Bharadvaja, An-

76 BA]enAm\&\siWiiTti''A€oj9per'plafeQranifromBandd, [No. 1,

girasa and Ydrhaspatya for his threefold Frahara, an inhabitant of the Tillage
of phakari, making the gift descendable to his sons, grandsons and sncces*
siTe dejscendants, ten ploughs of land (in figures 10 ploughs) in the above
named village, the said land requiring seven and a half dronas of seed for
cultivation, and bounded on the east bj the boundary post of the village of
Kanamusra, on the south by the post of the village of Bamasaida, on the
west by the tope of Madhuka trees, and on the north by the post of the
village of Bijauli i the sacred lands thus bounded with fields of Jddya* and
lands and water comprised therein, and with right to make all present, past,
and future collections from debtors. Knowing this, you should render
imto him, in compliance with my orders, shares, usufructs and all other
dues. No one must make any opposition to his enjoying these lands with
all duties and all Asavas, sugarcanes, cotton, saffron, ilax, mango, Madhuka
)(mowa) and other trees, as well as salt mines, and with all other things
within the boundary, whether above or below the soil, and whether he enjoys
the lands by himself cultivating them, or getting them cultivated by others^
and whether he makes a gift of, or mortgages, or sells, them. This
grant is irrevocable and interminable, and it should be so preserved by
future sovereigns. Thus has it been said: ^This earth has been enjoyed by
many kings including Sagara and others. To whomsoever belongs the earth
for the time being, to him is due the fruit (of such gifts).* Written by
Sddha, the clerk of the edict department, and inscribed by the well-con-
nected Jalpana.^'

2}ran8cript of an inscription from Targanah Augdsi, Bandd.

* TxdbMy Joaxi^ Serffhaim joar,
f fv^f^ i^ ^^ original.

X ^MW^^ *^ *he original, Tho ^ is obviously an incoiroct writing for jf and
the ^ if ahouM be vocalised.

•I

1878.1 Rdjendral^la Mitra — A Gopper-plaie Grant from Bandd, 77

^

\\

t.'^

\^

\^

t.1

\<

^^

\^

iwf?m fi^irtj^ ^ ^nftf •sfliM'5 ijfwqRt %w^ ^nr^ift ^*^

^!TO ^w ^i^ ^ilf^i^i^ ^f^ ^fRT ^ II f^ife?!^ ^^iffeiiT ^aSt^-

78 [No. 1,

Recent Trans-Frontier Uxplorations, communicated hy Col. J. T. Walker,

C. B., R. E., Surveyor- General of India,

(With a Map.)

Daring the year 1876, the Miill&, one of the explorers attached to the
Great Trigonometrical Sorvej, made a fiurvej up the course of the Indus
from the point where it enters the plains ahoTe A^k, to the point where it
is joined by the river of Gilghit. All other portions of the course of the
Indus — ^f rom the table-lands of Tibet, where it takes its rise, down to its
junction with the ocean — have long since been surveyed ; but up to the present
time this portion has remained unexplored, and has been shown on our maps by
a dotted line, the usual symbol for geographical vagueness and uncertainty.
Here the great river traverses a distance of some 220 miles, descending
from a height of about 5,000 feet to that of 1,200 feet above the level of
the sea. Its way winds tortuously through great mountain ranges, whose
peaks are rarely less than 15,000 feet in height and culminate in the Nanga-
Parbat, the well-known mountain whose height, 26,620 feet, is only ex-
ceeded by a very few of the great peaks of the Himalayas. The river in
many places is hemmed in so closely by these great ranges, that its valley
is but a deep-cut, narrow gorge, and, as a rule, there is more of open space
and culturable land in the lateral valleys, nestling between the spurs of the
surrounding ranges, than in the principal valley itself.

The positions and heights of all the most commanding peaks in this
region had been long fixed by Captain Carter's observations at trigono-
metrical stations on the British Frontier line ; but no European has ever yet
penetrated into it.* Very difficult of access from all quarters, it is in-
habited by a number of hill tribes, each independent and suspicious of the
other, who are in a great measure separated and protected from each other ^

by natural barriers and fastnesses. As a whole, the region has never been V

brought into subjection by any of the surrounding powers. Each com-
munity elects its own ruler, and has little intercourse with its neighbours ;
and with the outer world it only communicates through the medium of a
few individuals who have the privilege of travelling over the country as
traders. The Mulld possesses this privilege, and thus in the double capa-
city of trader and explorer, he traversed along the Indus, and through some
of the lateral valleys, leaving the others for exploration hereafter.

* Several itineraries whicb were obtained £rom native information are published
in Dr. Leitner*8 Dardistin, and they have been combined together, with considerable
ingenuity and very tolerable saccess, by Mr. Baveqstein, in a map published in the
(Geographical Magazine for August, 1875.

IcutU, April

r

L: .

1878.] J. T. Yfslker—Beeent Trans- Frontier Explorations. 79

This work done, he proceeded, in accordance with his instructions, to
Tisin, marching through the Gilghit Valley, but not surveying it, because
the labours of the lamented Hay ward, who was murdered at Yasin, already
furnished us with a good map of that region. From Y^sin he surveyed the
southern route to Mastuj through the Qhizar and Sar Laspur Valleys ; this
has furnished an important rectification of a route which had hitherto been
laid down from conjecture only, and very erroneously ; for the road, instead
of proceeding in a tolerably straight direction from Yasin to Mastuj, as was
supposed, turns suddenly from south-west to north -north-east at Sar Las-
pur, which is situated at some distance to the south of the direct line, in a
valley lying parallel to the valley of Chitral. At Mastuj the MulUl
struck on to his survey of the route from JaUUbdd, vid Dir and Chitrdl, to
Sar^add-i-Wakhan, in 1873, and then proceeded along that route towards
the Baroghil Pass, as far as the junction of the Qazan with the Yarkuu
River, and then along the northern road from Mastuj to Y^in. This
road turns up the Gazan Valley, crosses the Tui ar Moshabar Pass — ^which
is conjectured to be probably not less than 16,000 feet in height — and, after
traversing a deep crovassed glacier for a distance of about eight miles,
reaches the point where the Tui Biver issues in great volume from the
glacier ; the road then follows the course of the river down to its junction
with the Warohagam Biver, a few miles above Y^in.

Betuming to Sar Laspur, the Mull& next surveyed the route to the
south-west, up the valley leading to the Tal Pass. This pass is situated on
a plateau of the range which connects the mountains on the western
boundary of the valley of the Indus with those on the eastern boundary of
the valley of Ghitr&l, and is generally known by the people of the country
as the Kohistin. The sources and most of the principal affluents of the
Swit and the Panjkord rivers take their rise in this region, all the most
commanding peaks of which were fixed by Captain Carter's triangulation ;
but of the general lie of the valleys relatively to the peaks, nothing
at all definite has been known hitherto. The MulU has done much
to elucidate the geography of this region. On crossing the Tal plateau he
descended into the Panjkord Valley, and traversed its entire length down
to Dodbah, at the junction of the Dir river with the Paujkori, where he
again struck on his route survey of 1873.

It would have been well if he could then have gone done the Panjkora
to its junction with the Sw&t Biver, but circumstances prevented him from
doing so. He therefore travelled along the Havildar's route of 1868 as
far as MiinkiUai, and then surveyed the road to Naw&gai and on to Pashat
in the valley of Kunar ; and finally, returning to Nawagii, he surveyed the
road from there down to the British fort of Abazai.

80 V. A. Smith — Tivo Chandel copper-plate Imcriptions, [No. 1,

Thus the explorations of the MtdU have added much to our know-
ledge of the geography of the interesting regions lying heyond our nor-
thern Trans- Indus Frontier. A good deal, however, still remains to be
done before our knowledge of these regions is as full and complete as it
should be, and every effort will be made to carry out further explorations
as soon as possible.

The accompanying sketch map has been constructed to illustrate the
MulU's operations ; it also shows the localities where more information
is wanted. In the north-east corner the results of a recent reconnaissance
of portions of the Karambar and the Nagar Valleys by Captain Biddulph
are given, but somewhat modified from his map of the country.

Notes on ttoo ancient copper-plate Inscriptions found in the Samtrpur
District, iV. JV. P.— By V. A. Smith, B.A., B.C.S. With a Note

ly YiB.ksns(k^K Panpit, M.A., B.L.

In 1872, a peasant when ploughing in the lands of Mauza Nanyaur^,
Parganah Panw4ri, Zila Hamirptir, turned up two inscribed copper-plates.
The plates were brought to Mr. W. Martin, C. S., who is now on furlough^
and were left by him in the hands of a local pandit (Muralidhar) who was
in his service. With the assistance of this man, I have had N%ari trans-
scripts prepared, and have made translations of the inscriptions.

Plate No, I is 15 inches long by 11 inches broad, and is covered
with an inscription of 19 lines, very well engraved and in good order.
This record is interesting as throwing light on the chronology and order of
succession of the Chandel kings. It tells us that Vidy4dhara Deva was
succeeded by Vijaya Pala Deva, and that the latter was succeeded by Deva
Varmma Deva, lord of Kalinjar, who in 1107, Samvat, bestowed the lands
to which the record relates. The statement that Vijaya Pala Deva suc-
ceeded Vidyddhara Deva is in accordance with the testimony of the
Chhattarpur Mhau inscription, but that document gives Klrtti Varmma as
the name of Vijaya Pala's son and successor, whereas my copper-plate
instead of Kirtti Varmma names Deva Varmma Deva. Both inscriptions
apparently refer to the same prince.

General Cunningham conjecturally assigns 1122 Samvat (1065 A. D.)
as the date of the conclusion of Vijaya Pdla*s reign and the accession
of Kirtti Varmma. Whatever was the name of Vijaya P41a's successor,
it is clear from this copper-plate inscription that he had begun his reign
previous to 1107, Samvat (1050 A. D.).

1878 ] V. A. Smith — Tuoo Ohandel copper-plate Inscriptions, 81

Plate No. II is 14 inches long by 8 inches broad, and ha? the
edges turned up all round, so as to form a raised rim. The inscription is
in 14 lines, and the letters have evidently been made with a punch, because
their outUnes are visible on the back of the plate. The writing is more
crowded, and the characters more difficult to read than those in Plate No. I,
but with the exception of one or two epithets which are unimportant to
the general sense, I think my readings and translation are pretty complete
and correct. I have not been able to make a facsimile. Like No. I, the
document is a deed of gift of lands to a Br&hman. The donor is EiLja
Dhanga, and in accordance with the Khajurdho inscription, it is recorded
that he was the son of Ya^ Yarmma, who was the son of Harsha Deva.
The date 1055 Samvat (998 A. D.) is written both in words and figures.
The Khajuraho inscription which records Dhanga's self-sacrifice in the
sacred waters of Pray^ is dated 1056 Samvat ; this copper-plate shows
that he was still living in 1055 Samvat.

This record, therefore, adds but little to our knowledge of Chandel
chronology, but it is of value as corroborating the evidence of the Khajur&ho
inscription, respecting the order of succession of the kings.

It is noticeable that the recipient of the g^ant recorded in this copper-
plate is Budra Sri Ya^odhara, a member of the Bhiradwaja got, which
traced its descent from Angoras, Bharadw&ja and YiLrhaspatya : probably
he was the same person as the Prime Minister Ya^odhara, mentioned in the
Khajur&ho record. The donee whose name is recorded in Plate No. I,
belonged to the same family, and this is perhaps the reason why both
inscriptions were found together.

I have not had an opportunity of visiting Mauza' Nanyauri, but I am
informed that an ancient Gaharwdr tank exists there, and that there are
also the remains of an old village site.

The present village is said to have been founded by one Noni Sah
Kormi, and to be named after him.

NoU. — Dhanga's name has been sometimes incorrectly written Banga, the mistake
is evidently due to the similarity of the characters for b ^ and for dh '^m Kntila
writing.

No. !• NAmTAUBX Coppbb-Platb.
Ndgari Transcript.

82 V. A. Smith — Thoo Chandel copper-plate Itueriptioftt, [No. 1,

^MipiN nwiw ^7ir^ jpn u^i^mrif ii<fvi4rrwii<^miiii4M: w W^fnrt
WKwrcnwn8i9 (3) ^i«nf \\*<^ ^htwht^ uww wnW^f ^mfK^ «^^rnj-

IJiiT^rt TT^MlH^r^ KW^TH^TPW IJOTTinff^WTftr il^^lWRt^TW WT^ir-

VKX^^ K\w\^l^ ^nwfir (4) i ^TwhwTjt ttitH^ij^tt^^ts ^n^i^^ i
«i% ftfiw^TWT ^^^nnn^Tw fqi|ir ^^fiRrr^vr ^wi x^k^ ^w www
wi^^mW viR^ ^^nnf 9iT«f^ »«rT ^ (5) i wwifq^TOiini^ 3^ wftr-
1^ (6) I zmv6 «f uniftf^m^ (7) iim'»'»*T^Tii ^fkx^ nvi^RQ ^vKr

^iJi^TKm^ ^^n«iWTftKm^ Vi*^w^ irr*nr«iVTf^j ^^i^^w^* (8) ^w^f^^^s (9)
wSmKm^rws (10) ^^^pm^i(ll) ^nwR^T*^: (12) ^^rrPfijiir (13)

^JITTWl^^lCT:(14)^«W«w^firiT^PC'wN:(15) y^f^^f^Hi^<lilifift^;(16)

^tm ^^ ^^T wfti^fr w^ H^T ^nnr u (20) ^W v ^jfinzwrfir ^w vftf
OT^ftr < WT *f j^W'ii^T ftr«iW warrft^T n (21) iM m^vs^ wM ^tt^p
WT^T^'TTJ I ^[fi?^T^« fvf rfw ^ wii yc^ u (22) ^;^ ^kk^ ^ vi
%K^ ^^aiKt I ^ ft¥T^ liftj «WT fwfii: ^^ iW8if?f u (23) ^wW nmmt

imti^^JJ^^l 'fTlK^fin^Tflf ^^^^irtWWiltt (24) iiSl^iT^PRt:

Om Svatti. The supreme master, Mahdrdja Adhirdja, the supreme
lord Sri Vidyddhara Deva^ whose feet were adored by the supreme master
Mahdrdja Adhirdja, supreme lord, Srt Vijaya JPdla Deva, whose feet were
adored by the supreme master, Mahdraja Adhirdja, supreme lord, the devout

follower of Mahesvara, the lord of Kdlinjara^ 8riDeva Varmma Deoa

may he prosper ! The fire of his (Deva Varmma*s) prowess devours the
extremities of space ; and he is the preceptor in the rite of giving
widowhood to the wives of foemen slain in the arena of battle. Who by
truthfulness conquers Tudhisihira ; by munificence, the lord of Champd
t. e,f Kama / by depth, the great ocean ; by sovereignty, the god beloved

1878.] V. A. Smith— 2W Chandel eopper^phte Inscripfiong, 83

of Saehty i, e^ Indra ; by beaatj too, over Manobhava ; by eloquence, over
Suhra with Vdehaspati; what is the use of recounting his other qualities,
white as the clear splendour of the moon ? Wise, religious, yaliant, truthful,
subduer of his passions, grateful, the producer of the gladness of good men
and of auspicious appearance. Thus his body (is) adorned with many quali-
ties. Beckoning this world to be insubstantial (worthless), yet beautiful to
look upon as the pith of a plantain tree ; on Monday the third date of the

black fort-night of the month of Baudkha^ Samvat 1107

— — (25) in Bdjapurdvcfgfdf informs the principal inhabitants, of whom
Bdlhmans are the foremost, of the village Kathadau attached to Ranamaulla^
and all Royal officers. On the anniversary of the death of my mother, 8ri
Bkuvana Devi^ Queen, having bathed in water according to sacred precept,
having satiated the Mane9 of ancestors with kuda^ seaamum and water, after
satisfying gods and men, having presented an Arghya to the Sun, having
duly worshipped the god, the lord of Bhavdni^ i, e,, Shiva, and having
presented oblations in the fire, according to usage ; For the increase of the
virtue and fame of my parents and myself , to the Bribma^a Abhimanyu,
son of Bhaiia JEUd, gp*andson of Jayavara, originally an inhabitant of
OMcarC Bhatta Ordma ; a member of the Bhdradtodfa gotra and the triple
pravara of Angirasa, Brihupati and Bhdradvdja, skilled in the Vedas
and Veddngas, engaged in the six acts proper for a Brdhma^, and of excel-
lent disposition — ^to him this village has been granted by us with its land
and water, its mango and mahua trees, with its hollows, waste and stones,
its rocks and tillage (?) — with its mines of metal and salt, with its forest
and concealed treasure, with its clear defined boundary, with all grass,
watering-places (?) and pastures for kine within its limits, excluding aught
previously given to the gods or Br&hmaQS, as a Sdsona, Therefore, by you
all complying with the orders (herein conveyed) all the rents in kind, taxes,
gold payments, fines, hereditary rights and the rest should be made over
to this person. Till the moon, sun and earth endure, he with his son,
grandson and descendants should enjoy (the grant) or assign it, or give
away to another, till it or cause it to be tilled, none who enjoy th^
kingdom after me, should prove an obstacle in the way. By many kings,
Sagara and others, the earth has been enjoyed. Whosesoever has been
the land, his has been the fruit. He who accepts lands and he who grants
lands, both these doers of virtuous deeds certainly go to Heaven. A
Conch, a throne, an umbrella, fine horses and fine elephants, these mark the
grant of lands ; and the result is Heaven, O Indra ! He who resumes land,
whether given by himself or given by others, becomes a worm in filth and
falls with his ancestors. By stealing a single auvema, a single cow, or even
a finger-breadth of land, (the thief) remains in hell till the end of the Uni«
verse. Great prosperity. SrL Sriniad Deva varmma Deva.

84 V. A. Smith — Two Chandel eopper-plate Inscriptions. [No. 1,

No. 2. NANTATJBiC Coppke-Plate.
Ndgari Transliteration,

^r*i*^*i^ ^ft^^if'^ I 'ffr^f r^f^ifnr^ ft^^x:?^ i»ncTT«r ^finw ^t^sthi

^MfH\K^^J^ W^^'^I^Slflf^^ ^vi^^v^ ^fwini vitmwi* ^^T^^nC^WTW

^iRnft[ft»J I "^m ^w 't^ ^ftr^Qi 'r^ 'T^ ^^1 1 ^W ^J 3jf?fiztpff«r ^ni

Translation of the Inscription of the Nanyaurd Copper-platCy No. 2.

Om. It is well. Sri Harsba Deva, the king, of the great family of
Sri Brahmendra Muni, was [as] the kalpa vriksha the root of joy to well-
wishers, the water of immortality for the eyes of good friends, a very ketu
in the destruction of hostile armies, a bridge in the surging sea of good
men's burdens, the Jewel on the diadem of the three worlds, the sovereign
whose hand dearly loved the sword, whose glory like that of the summer
sun was insupportable. From that abode of generosity sprang Ya^
Yarmma, a very Indra in the destruction of the dark hosts of (his)

1878.] V. A. Smith — Two Chandel copper-plate Inscriptions, 85

enemies, an axe in cleaving the trunks of the elephants of (his) enemies,
hj whose radiance like the whiteness of the moon and jasmine were illu-
minated, the caves of Kuldchala frequented hy the consorts of the
kinnaras ; his son was Sri Dhanga Deva, the favourite of the Goddess of
Victory the prowess of whose blade's edge was famous in numberless battles.
Wonderftdly did he kindle in the hearts of the enemy's wives the flame of
separation, which unceasingly spread, though besprinkled with the water
of tears. [In his undivided reign] there was flight in the wavy curls
[alone] of the denizens of the antahpura, in amorous dalliance [alone]
there was seizure by the neck, in female breasts alone was hardness and
brows [alone] were crooked, on the moon [only] were spots, and in the
plantain tree [only] was saplessness: the poets spake weU, and amidst
clusters of the Kairava [N^mphoBa esculenta] alone there was enmity
at the rise of Mitra (meaning both Sun and friend). The king and
sovereign lord Harsha Deva, the destroyer of the exultation of enemies,
succeeded by the king and sovereign lord Ya^o Yarmma, destroyer of the
exultation of enemies, succeeded by the king and sovereign lord Dhanga
Deva, destroyer of the exultation of enemies, ruler of Kalinjar, in the
Samvat year 1055 at the full moon of Kartik, on Sunday the 15th day of
the bright half of the month, to-day here in Eliii, when the orb [of the
moon] which is a joy to the heart of Bohij^^i, and is marked with the form
of a deer, was seized as a mouthful by the son of Sinhikd \i. e.y Eahu] —
to the member of the Bharadwaja gotra, and the threefold pravara of
BhAradwaja, Angirasa and Yarhaspatya, belonging to the Yajasaneya
$dkhd, to him originally an inhabitant of Tarkdyikd residing in the village
of Durbdhara, named Budra Sri Ya^odhara, the son of Budra Jaya Kumdra
— to him with its waste, streams and tanks, land and water, upland and
lowland, and mango and mahud trees, the village of ChuUl bounded on
the four sides by Sa^aroshara — ^f or the sake of increasing his own and his
parent's merit, he the lover of religion gave — ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦
•**♦**, and having given the beloved of the
people addressed those present saying — ^Bemain happy by continuing to
pay (the donee) rents in kind and in money and the rest. Om, So the
writers of Smritis (have said) : Many kings, Sdgar and others, have
enjoyed territory, so long as any retained his lands, so long has his been
the fruit. He who receives land in gift, and he who bestows it, both these
are meritorious and assuredly go to heaven. He who filches a single cow,
a single gold-piece, or one finger's breadth of land, goes to hell till the end
of all things. This is the decree of S^ri Dhanga who is steadfast in the
practice prescribed by the Vedas and whose ruling prowess pains the circle
of his enemies. Sri Dhanga.

86 V. A. Smith — Two Chandel copper-plate Imcripiions. [No. 1,

Note by B6b% Franndth Pandit.
The Society is indebted to Mr. Y. A. Smith, B. A., B. 0. S., for these
two copper-plates recording the grant of two villages bj two kings of the
Chandel Dynasty, Dhanga Deva and Deva Varmma Deva in Samvat 1055
and 1107 respectively. Mr. Smith has sent transcript, and translation of
both the plates, which I have revised for publication in the Society's Jour-
nal. Some parts of the translation however, specially of plate No. 2,
remain tentative and far from literal. The Note appended by Mr. Smith
gives the most salient points in the grants, and after the exhaustive notice
in General Cunningham's Archsological Survey of India, Vol. II, there is
nothing .to be added to the ample materials which exist concerning the
chronology of the Chandel Dynasty. I have added some philological
parallels gathered from several grants, and those who care to pursue the
matter further may consult the Khajurdho inscription in the Asiatic
Besearches, YoL XII, and the Ujjayini grants in the Transactions of the
Boyal Asiatic Society. Yol. I, reprinted in Colebrooke*s Works, Yol. II,
and the Banda copper-plate, ante p. 73. The village Tarkayikd, of No. 2,
is the same as the TaJcdri of No. 1, and the Dhakari of the Banda copper*
plate, ante p. 76. All three may be safely identified with the Tikri of

modem maps.

NOTES.

(1.) Compare ^ ^ ^rTOTTX:^infti|Hnrt<<I^M<*}^<: ^^<in^wmni*i-
UfPT, &c. in J. A. S. B. Yol. YIII, pp. 491, 492. Also ^ n ^T^TOTTT^ir^t

Ac. in J. A. S. B., Yol. X, pp.*99, 100.

(2.) Compare the partly decyphered sloka IfirrfiflTi^f^lT^ IT^^
l^r^T^f^* in the 9th line of the Dhavala Inscription, J. A. S. B., Yol. X,
p. 820.

(3.) Compare 1T^ ft-^^^airriT^ icrvf I J. A. S. B., Yol. YIII,
p. 297. The sloka ^^IK^l^Kdi UTT 'f^ ^ I ^TTH^sriWifft?^, &c. in J. A.
S. B., Yol. Y, p. 379.

(4.) Compare ^^WTTSf^^'TTir^ HT^^rntnt ^flir^<ll(\lMif%i0a|im^T*
iff^ ^X^vfn I J. A. S. B., Yol. Y, p. 379. TTlf'Tftr f^Wif^rfir iHilli^^in.
ft:HH^tii>[<ty i^^^T^mf^ I J. A. S. B., Yol. YIII, p. 297. The royal
officers are set out in great detail in the Kumbhi grant. J. A. S. B. Yol.
YIII, p. 492, and in the Fyzabad grant. J. A. S. B. Yol. X, p. 100.

(5.) Compare ^rmr ^^m iwrfVlftnnil^ I J. A. S. B. Yol. Y, p. 879.

ir^^nrt WwTi mvm ^MmH\^^ wf(w% i J. A. s. B. Yol. Yili, p. 492.
iT«(^)^ ^t tu^nn W'TT^ro^ ^^ ^M^r wm\ i J. A. s. B. Yol. X,

p. 100.

1S78.] V. A. Smith — Tu)0 Ohandel copper-plate Inscriptions, 87

(6.) Compare WTWrfipiTnwni ^V^ilrfW4sD I J. A. S. B. Vol. V,
p. 379. ^TOW^ ^HBT'l^^ftwi^illftl^ r€lW f%irii|^l(lll^t|f lt| I J. A.
8. B. Vol. V, p. 729. iHlHiMKIdlini H^^lftreir^ l J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII,

p. 492. inmPnirrmir^ ^^^itrfw^S i J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. lOO.

(7.) The phrase WiT^^TOT^f^fi'fiTr«r occurs in the Copper-plate
grant of Arjuna (Samvat* 1267) in J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 379 hut has not
been translated. A similar omission is noticeable concerning the adjectiye
prefix ^^^^nntPil^ll to the donee's name in the copper-plate grant of
Karka U (Saka 734) J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 297. The etymological
signification of the word f^Hv JlT is " gone out or from," but I suppose that
in passages like the above^ it is used to denote the original residence of the
donee.

(8.) J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492, Vol. X, p. 100.

(9.) These words occur in the copper-plate grant of Ajaya Sinha Deva
(Samyat 932) J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492, and have been translated into
"mango trees and Aoney'* (p. 486). Compare ^iPT^mRrfT^firT^- of the
oopper-plate grant of Jajachandra (Samvat 1243) J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100,
which has been correctly translated into " with gardens of modhu and man-
go trees" (p. 103). iT^V signifies the tree Bassia latifolia, and is never so
&r as I am aware used as a synonym for 7?w, honey.

(10.) Compare ^si^f^ seemingly a mistake for W^n?rTW^ in Jaya-
chandra's copper- plate grant. J. A. S. B. p. 100, which has been translated
at p. 103 into " with caves and fertile farms.'* ^R^ according to Wilson
signifies saline soil. The phrase ^UTTT^s in Ajaya Sinha's copper-plate
grant J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492, where it is translated into ^* together
with salt-pits."

(12.) Compare ^^RVWTS in J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492. ^m^^-
^f^lV^: in J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100.

(13 ) Compare ^firf^s %mf3rfN< in Pravara Sena's copper-plate grant.
J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p 729. ^^^nnvir* in Ajaya Sinha's copper-plate grant.
J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492 ; and ^rf^lfc^^^rf^^PH in Jayachandra's
copper-plate grant. J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100.

(14.) Compare ^g^T^nr^T^^rf^WS in the copper-plate grant of Karka
XL J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 298. ^aimiepN^JI? in Ajaya Sinha's copper-
plate grant. J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 492 and %l^r^9^g^:T9T7f^lQlir in
Jayachandra's copper-plate grant. J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100, the first
half of which compound seems to have been omitted from the translation at
p. 103. The words in the present plate may also be read as ^^.'^kl'^r^l^^.
which synonymous expression also occurs in Arjuna's copper-plate grant,
J. A. S. B. Vol V, p. 879.

(15.) Compare ^StTH^IT: in Ajaya Sinha's copper-plate grant. J. A.
8. B. VoL VIII, p. 492. €l||4|Ffl)|^^^t|^ in Jayachandra's copper-plate

88 H. Beveridge — The Antiquities of Bagwrd. [No. 1,

grant. J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100, where it has been translated into '* which
extends as far as TrinayuthiV (p. 103).

(16.) This is the usual reservation about previous endowments. Com-
pare ^^5(^tr^W^T«lilV^in:fWT in J. A. S. B. VoL VIII, p. 298. t^n||i|-
?;fBR^^^ Vol. V, p. 379.

(17.) Compare ^mnfW^Vf^T in J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 879. ^mrrftr-
^^^ in J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100.

(18.) Compare Jfm ^^:^WWSi\^vm^SkK^i^, J. A. S. B. Vol. V,
p. 379, which is translated into " the full usufruct of all the rights and dues
heretofore paid to Government,*' (p. 382). Also ^ilT^^irpfr^nc^rc-
^TftfWT^fffirf'nWTfif^iT^^nir in J. A. S. B. Vol. X, p. 100 which is gener-
ally translated at p. 103 into " its revenues, as settled, or are to be settled.'*

(19.) Compare ^T^*inr<HI4l^<<; &c. in J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 729.
'9nnmTWTTOf^^cT^^^infl^: &c. in J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 298.

(20.) This sloka occurs amongst others in J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 879.
Vol. VIII, pp. 298, 493. Vol. X, p. 100.

(21.) J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 494. Vol. X, p. 100.

(22.) Compare J. A. S. B. Vol, VIII, p. 494 where ifCTUT is a mis-
take for ^tnin, and Vol. X, p. 100.

(23.) J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 379. Vol. VIII, p. 493. Vol. X, p. 100.
In Fravara Sena's copper-plate grant the latter half of the slok is different :

iRt -HH^rw^ ^'g^^ftr "s^^ftifir i J. A. S. B. Vol. V, p. 729.

(24.) In this sloka ^^* should be substituted for the sake of the
metre for ^^'. Compare J. A. S. B. Vol. VIII, p. 493.

(25.) The words in the original ^^^^m ^ilT^T^ seem distinct enough,
but I am unable to attach any meaning to the compound.

The Antiquities of Bagurd (Bogra), — Bg H. Bevebedge, C. S.

Though Bagurd is almost a by-word among the Officers of Government
for seclusion and dulness, yet like most places in this world it has attract-
ions which only require unveiling. Perhaps to most Anglo-Indians,
Bagurd is chiefly interesting, because it was the residence of Sir George
Yule and the scene of many of his tiger-slaying exploits, but in reality the
district has claims to attention of another and more enduring order.
Foremost among these is the circumstance that it occupies an important
place in the legendary and historical annals of Bengal. It is traversed
from north to south by the sacred Karatoyd, which divides it into two
nearly equal portions. This river has now dwindled into an insignificant
stream, easily fordable in the cold weather and scarcely navigable except

1878.] H. BeYeiiige^The Antiquities of JSayurd. 89

in the height of the rains. But in old times, it was a great river, and
formed the houndarj hetween Bengal and Kamrup. The western bank has
apparently undergone little change. The old rampart, known as Bhim-
jang^, still runs alongside of the western bank, and the ancient mound
and fortification of Mah&sth4n continues to overhang the sacred bathing-
place at Sila-dwip ; but on the east the appearance of the country has
been greatly changed. The old river-bed has been nearly filled up, and
long and wide churs, '' made blithe by plough and harrow", now cover
the channel up which the ships of the famous Chdnd Saudigar used to sail.

Though no longer a territorial boundary, the Karatoyd is still remark-
able for the demarcation which it makes between two distinct kinds of
soil. On the west, Baguri is a veritable land of Edom, the soil being
almost as red as blood. It is at the same time so hard and tenacious, that
ditches cut in it retain their sharpness of outline for years, and that the
walls of the peasants' huts are almost invariably made of earth. The ant«
hills so common on the edges of the fields testify to the peculiarity of
the soil, for they stand up in sharp and many-pointed pinnacles and are
like Adens in miniature. On the east of the Elaratoyd, however, all is
sand and alluvium, and the ryots have to construct the walls of their
houses with reeds or mats. This difference of soil is said to affect the
crime of the district ; for burglaries are reported to be rare in the western
thilnds, as it is no easy matter for thieves to break through and steal, when
the walls of the houses are so thick and hard as they are in the '^ Khiar"
land. The etymology of the word Karatoy^ is indicative of the antiquity
and sanctity of the river* The name is derived from kar ' the hand' and
toyd ' water', and is held to signify that the river was formed by the water
which was poured on the hands of Siva, when he married the mountain-
goddess P&rvati.

J find also that there is the same tradition in Bagur& as in Maiman-
singh about the origin of the name Das-kah4nid as applied to Sherpur. The
Bagurd Sherpur is called Das-kahani& as well as the Maimansingh Sherpur,
and the explanation given is, that the Karatoyd was once so broad that
ten k&hans had to be paid for crossing it. The explanation, however, does
not seem a very probable one, for ten kdhans means 12,800 kauris, i, e.y one
rupee, and I can hardly believe that any Bengali ever paid so much for
crossing a river. It is just possible that the charge had reference not to the
breadth of the river but to the fa»t that it separated two rival kingdoms.
The charge may therefore have been in the nature of an embargo or an
export-duty, and went for the most part into the pocket of the king or his
representative, and not to the ferryman. It would be quite in accordance
with the principles of native finance to levy such exorbitant duties on
people leaving the country or taking merchandise abroad.

90 H. Beveridge — The Antiquities of Bagurfl* [No 1,

By the Hindus Bagurd is popularly identified with the country of king
Yirat, where the five Pdn<}aTas remained hidden for a year. Bagura, they
tell us, was the Dakshina Go-grih or southern cow-house (Scottice hyre) of
king Yirat, the northern one heing in Qhor^h&(, t. e,, Aswasala. Bhim,
they say, disguised himself as Yirat's herdsman, and huilt the rampart known
as Bhim's Jangal to make a pen for the cattle. So say the Pandlits, while the
ryots improve the evidence got from this by pointing to the stone-pillar in
the Badalgdchhi thina and calling it Bhim's pdnti, i. e., Bhlm's ox-goad.
Additional corroboration is sought from the fact that the^e are villages in
Baguri, known by the names of Yirat and Eichak ( Yirat *s brother-in-law).
Unfortunately, however, names of places are more likely to be the o&pring
of traditions than to be evidence of their genuineness, and even if the village
of Kichak be old, it more probably derives its name from the wandering
gypsies and robbers of the last century who were called Eichaks, than from
the villain of the Mahabhdrat.

A more convincing indication of the antiquity of Baguri was obtained
only last year when a tank was being dug in the middle of the town. The
tank had been excavated to a considerable depth, when the workmen came
on the top of a brick well. The well is still standing in the tank and may
be seen by the curious. It is circular in form and solidly built with large,
thin bricks which are so broad in proportion to their length as to be nearly
square. The mode of building seems peculiar, for the bricks are arranged in
layers which ore alternately composed of flat and perpendicular bricks.
The top now visible appears to me to be the real top of the well, and it
is some fifteen feet below the present, surface of the country. The
remarkable thing is that the earth is not sand or chur-earth, but is
solid, red soil. How the well came to be where it is, I cannot explain ;
but if the fifteen feet of earth were really gradually deposited above it> then
the well must be many centuries old. Close to this tank, and only separated
by the public road, there is an interesting proof of the antiquity of the soil
in a magnificent Banyan tree. It is, I think, the finest tree I have seen next
to that in the Botanical Gardens at Calcutta, and it is much more attract-
ive than the latter, because it is still in the heyday of its career of
beneficence. The BaguriL market is held under it and twice a week hundreds
of men and cattle are sheltered by it from the sun and rain.

The real glory of Bagura perhaps is the Badalgachhi pillar which bears
an inscription of the Pal Bajas, and which has been described by Sir
Charles Wilkins and more recently by a native gentleman. I have never
seen this pillar, and I hear that it is now so shrouded in jungle as to
be almost inaccessible. As it is situated in the Government Estate of
Jaipur, it is to be hoped that the authorities will look after its preservation.
It is locally known as Bhim*s ^dnti or ox-goad.

1878.] Q. BeYoridge — The Antiquities of Bagurd, 91

The most widelj*known antiquity in Bagar& is Mah^th&n^ or the Great
Place, which is situated seven miles north of the Oiyil Station. Mahasthan
probably originally owed its importance to its being near a sacred bathing*
place, and hence some haye with a perYerse ingenuity suggested that the
true name is Mah^uni&n« Afterwards it became the habitation of a
Kshatriya prince named Farasur&m. Some traditions identify him with
Parasur&ma the destroyer of the Kshatriyas, though to do this, it is
necessary to change his caste and make him a Br&hmap. He was defeated
and slain by a Mnhammadan, named Muhammad Sh4h Sultan, and probably it
is this circumstance which has done most to perpetuate his fame. Muham-
mad Sh4h Sul^dn is buried at Mahasthan, and his tomb is annually visited
by thousands of pilgrims. There id no inscription on the tomb, and no one
seems to know exactly who he was or where he came from. He bears the
title of Mdhi-suwar or fish-rider, and Hindus who swallow their own tradi-
tions wholesale, think they must rationalize this epithet by referring it to
the figure head of the ship which brought the faqir. It is hardly worth
while to do this when there are so many more marvels connected with him.
The name Mahi-suwir probably has its origin in invention, pure and
simple.

The only genuine inference which we can make, I think, from Muham-
mad Shah*s history is, that he was the hero of a popular rising. He was
not a fighting man apparently, and is never called a GhiLzi, like the famous
Isma'il of Rangpdr. Parasuram was probably a bigoted tyrant, and
was killed by those of his subjects who had turned Muhammadans. This
view is supported by the local tradition that Parasurdm could not bear
the sight of a Musahnin. It seems also certain that Muhammad Shah was
helped by Parasuram's own subjects ; for the tradition is, that one Harpal,
the Baja*s sweeper, used to convey information to Muhammad Shdh of what
was going on inside the palace. The sweeper's tomb is still pointed out
on the mound of MahiUthdn, and until Muhammadans got more puritanical,
they used to make ofEerings at it of shardb and kahdb, i. e., meat and wine.
Muhammad Shdh's tomb is in good preservation and is lighted up every
night. It is surrounded by a wall, and close to the doorway there is a large
stone Gauripdt (not a lingam) lying on the ground. Mr. O'Donnell has
described Mah^than in the Asiatic Society's Journal for 1875, Part I,
No. 2, but there are some errors in his account. As far as I can learn,
the l^end of the beautiful Sila Devi has its origin in a mispronunciation.
The original name of the place is Siladwip, i. e., the mound of stones,
' dmp^ in Bagura being used to mean any high place and the epithet Stla
being applied to this one on account of the large stones lying about on it.
The populace, however, have lost sight of this meaning, and so started the
tradition of Sila Devi. There is no flight of stairs at Sila Devi's Ghat, only

92 H. Beveridge^I^ Antiquities ofBagwr^ [No. 1,

two old trees. The sacred part of the river extends over 2^ reaches or
about two miles, from Skand (a name of Siva) gh&t to Gobindgh&t ^ ^^
village of Gokul. The place called SUa Devi's ghd^ lies about half-waj
between the above gh&t^. An annual fair is held in the month of Chait,
but the most sacred time is when the conjunction of the planets admits
of the bathing's taking place in the month of Ptis (Pds NMjani).

Mr. O'Bonnell speaks of the grant for the l&khiraj of Mah^th&n
having been confirmed in 1666 by the Gk>vemor of Dhdkil. In fact,
however, the confirmation is dated 7th Jumida I, 1096, A. H. (1st
April, 1685) in the thirtieth year of the reign. I have seen the original
sanady which is in the Becord-room at Bogra. The deed bears the seal of
Kokultiksh Muzaffar-Jang [Husain]. It is in the form of an order addressed
to the officials of Silbaris in Sirk^ B^dh4, and directs them to respect
the liLkhirdj of the saint Muhammad Sultan Mahi-suw&r's Astdn. The
word ' &stdn' suggests to me the idea that Mah^h^n maj after aU be a
Muhammadan name meaning the Great Astdn. The Hindu name perhaps
was Siladwip. The place is also often called Mastdngarh and under this
name it appears in the Survey Map. I send a copy of the Sanad along
with these remarks.* With regard to the resumption-proceedings, noted

* The following is a transcript of the copy of the Sanad —

^jli. J , , , . iSiT^ Lrtii^l ei'^*^ i-«iiAo i)(I«»f *^i>Ia. JjU ^^ ,>liu»t J

(^\ ^yj^. !; jjh^'^ ^^\j\ J SJi^JL^ di-J|^ ^^ i^jj ^Ja. \j ^^IjUU
j^jL j^jf olUfj J i^^suo iilJUT3'vjj>J l^^j ^Aj^ ^j^ja ^ ^JcS fj

m

V

1878 ] H. Beveridge— 1%^ Antiquities ofBaffurd. 98

bj Mr. O'Donnell, I must in jusfcice to our Goyemment observe tbat no
attempt was made to resume the whole tenure. All the land within the
garh or fortification (some thousands of bighas apparently) was admitted
to belong to the lakhirdjd&rs. The dispute was only about 300 bighas
of chur-land which had formed between Mahisthdn proper and the river-
channel. The resumption-proceedings, however, must have been rather
harassing to the proprietors ; for they began in 1824, and did not end
till December 1843. Sila Devi's Gh&t is in this chur which was sought
to be resumed, and this perhaps is enough to show the baselessness of
the story about her, for clearly the chur was formed long after MahiLsth^n
was made.

Translation,

It has been ordered that fhe Matasaddfs of all present and future matters of go-
Temment, and the Chaudhmis, and ^&nungo8 of Pargana Silbaris in Sirk£r Birahi
■hould bear in mind that, inasmnch as it has come to the knowledge of government
that according to ihd/armdna and $anad$y granted by former rulers, the senrice of the

Bacred shrine of the king of saintB, Qagrat and income of

HasUUxgafh and the land comprised within the bend of the river, in the said Pargan%
have been settled on Sayyid Muhammad Tahir and on Sayyid 'Abdur-ra^mdn and on
Sayyid Mohammad Baz4 and on their children, without anyone else being a partner, it
IB necesaary that the above-mentioned persons should be looked upon as the servitors of
the illuminated shrine, and that they should be left in possession of Mast&ngafh and of
the above described lands, so that the lands may go down to their heirs ; that they
may perform the vows and prayers as usual at this holy shzine ; that they may apply
the income to defraying the expenditure of the religious house, on travellers, and on
themselves for their own livelihood, so that they may occupy themselves with loyal
prayers for the continuance of the present government. Every care is to be taken in
this matter.

Written on the 7th Jumid^ I, of the 80th year of the present reign, corresponding
to the year of the Hijra 1096.

(Signed) Musafiar Jang Bahidur, foster-brother {kokuUdsh) of 'Alamgir F^Ushih-
i-QhixL

It is impossible to reconcile the particulars given in the sanad copy with historical
fiusts. Jirttf the name should be Muzafiar Husain not Muzaffar Jang, It is possible
fliat the copyist mistook ^ji^**^ for kSj^, Secondly, Muzaffiir Husain Kokultftsh (also

called Fid&i Ehin A'zam Kokah, kokah being the same as kokultdth) was governor of
Bengal from the middle of 1088 H., [A. D. 1677] i. #., the 20th year of 'Alamgir, to
the 9th (or 12th) Babf II, 1089 (•'. d., the 21st year of 'Alamgir), when he died at Dhi-
k^

Bat the 7th Jumid^ I, 1096 [1685, A. D.] £el11s in the 28th year of 'Alamgfr, whose
80th year commences with the Ist Rama^n 1097 [A. D. 1685].

The name of the saint is written at the top instead of in its proper place in the body
of the deed, in order to do him honor. This is in accordance with Hindu customs, as
Biay be seen in wanud* for lands dedicated to an idoL

M H. Beveridge — The Antiquities o/Ba^urd, [No. 1,

I could find nothing Buddhist at Mahdsthdn, and mj impression is
that Messrs. Westmacott and O'Donnell have been somewhat too ready to
believe that Buddhism once prevailed in Bagurd. Bardankti(i is a com-
paratively recent place, and has nothing to do, I think, with the Pandra
Yarddhana of the Chinese pilgrim. There are two statues at Mahdsthan.
One appears to be Basudeb (Krishna), and the other is simply a mermaid.
It has no theological signification at all, I think, and is just a fantastic
figure such as are common in Hindu palaces. The *' right hand clenched,"
referred to by Mr. 0*Donnell is, I think, a foot.

One curious remain at Mahasthan is a large brick well with rude stone
steps leading down it. The steps are simply lai^e stones jutting out from
the brick work and look very awkward things to descend by. However I
was told that many persons go down by them at the time of the fair. The
well is called the Jiyat-kun4, or well of life, and the tradition is, that Parasu-
r&m for a long time got the better of Sh4h Sultan, because when any Hindu
soldier was killed, Parasurdm revived him by sprinkling water from this
well over him. The sweeper Harpal told Shah SuIfiLn of this, and then he
destroyed the efficacy of the water by throwing pieces of beef into it. The
fortification of Mahdsthin is quadrangular in shape,and is popularly said to be
two miles square. There are four openings in it, and these are pointed out
as the gates. One is called the Tamar Darwdzah, because it is said to have
been sheathed with copper. Outside the rampart there is on one side a
large lake, called the Kalidoha Sdgar. There are islands in it, and a promon-
tory on its banks is called Bish-Mathan, because it is said that ^on it the
goddesses Lutta and Padya mixed the poison which destroyed Chdnd
Saudagar*s family. Chand Saudagar is, as is well known, the impious
merchant who would not worship Manesha, or the Lady of the Snakes. He
is said to have lived at Ch&ndmoa, i, 0., Chandmukh, near Mahasthi&n, and
the foundations of the house he built for his son are still pointed out.

Another antiquity in Bagurd, the importance of wliich, however, is a
good deal exaggerated by the people, is Jogir Bhaban, or the Ascetic's house.
It lies some seven miles west of Bagur4. It appears to have been an early
settlement of the Gosdins, or followers of Siva. The remains consist of
some temples with elaborately carved wooden doors. One temple has the
Bengali date 1089, and the name Meher .Nath Sadak. One of the doors
has the date 1119, and the name of Shukhal Nath Gosdin. There is one
curious tomb with three monuments of different sizes. The largest is the
guru's, the second is the disciple's, and the third and smallest is sidd to be
that of the guru's dog (*'his faithful dog shall bear him company").
There is a well of life here, too, but it is quadrangular in shape. The
jogi in charge of the temples gave me a curious instance of faith. There
are several images inside one temple, and the jogi candidly said that he

1878.] H. Beveridge— 2%c Antiquities of Bagurd. 95

could not tell what god one of tbem represented. However, he said, as it
was in the temple he accepted it and worshipped the unknown god. To
the west of Jogir Bhaban, there are said to be the remains of the house of
the Kaj4 Salbon (S&liTdhan ?) and to the north of it, the remains of the
house of the E^jd Sri Nath. Perhaps they were ancestors of Parasur^m.

Betuming to Mahasth&n, I have to saj that Parasurdm was evident-
ly a devoted worshipper of Siva. Indeed, he seems to have meditated
setting up a rival to Banaras. In and about Mah4sthdn, there are places
called K&shi, Brindaban, and Mathuri.

In 1862, or thereabouts, a number of gold coins were found at Bdman-
p4r£, near Mahasthan. The most of them have disappeared, but I have
seen two, and have sent them to the Asiatic Society for identification. The
records of the case which is said to have taken place about them have been
destroyed. In 1874, a pot of old rupees was found in the village of Mahd-
sth&n by a labourer who was digging a ditch in a p^ garden. The
owners of the pan garden wrested the coins from him, and were convicted,
rather harshly I think, of robbery and sentenced to six months' imprison-
ment. On appeal, their sentence was reduced to three months. Some of
the coins were bought from the owners by Major Hume and were after-
wards sent to the Asiatic Society. One coin was lying in the Magistrate's
Milkhanah, and has been sent by me to Professor H. Blochmann.* I have
also sent down two other silver coins which are said to have been found
at Mahisth&n.

* The silver coins were described in Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, Part I, for
1875, p- 2S8. The coins now sent are five in number, vtz., 2 gold coins, regarding
which Dr. Bijendralila Mitra says : — " One of them, with the lion on the reverse,
" belongs to Mahendra Gupta, or as given on the margin of the obverse, Sri Mahendra
'* SiiSha ; and the other to Chandra Gupta. Both have been figured in Thomas's Prin-
" sep. The princes belong to the 2nd and Srd centuries of the Christian era."

The three silver coins are— (1) a silver t^^kah of Shams-uddfn Hyils Shih of Ben-
gal, aa published by Thomas in his ' Initial Coinage of Bengal.'

(2.) A silver tdt^ah^ struck in 862 H., by Mahmtid Shah I, of Bengal as figured
in this Journal, for 1875, PL XI, No. 7* The reverse is the same as in Nos. 6 and 8,
hut the reading is still doubtfuL

(3.) A sOver tdnkah by the same king, of coarse manufacture, similar to Nos. 2
and 3, of PL XL,lo€.cit.

JOURNAL

ERRATA.

JPage 114,1 40, for Plate Xm read Plate XVIH.

ti ^^7, L 80, iot „ 18 „ „ 15.

t, 118, L 16, „ „ 13 „ „ 18.

„ 118,1.31, „ „ 04 „ „ 19,

-„ 118,1.40, „ „ 15 „ „ 20.

„ 118,1.41, „ „ 13 „ .„ 18.

.„ 130, 1. 9, „ „ XIX „ „ XXI.
JB'or U read 14 Plates.

\JA. kA\#t/«%>WW

One of mj inchoatie projects was tne compiiaTiiou ui » dchco
Hlustrating the life and doctrine of the different Vaishnava Reformers of
the 16th and 17th centuries, who all made Brindaban their head centre.
Though both the men themselves and their writings are scM^ely known hj
name to European Orientalists, they have had an enormous influence on the
tendencies of modem Hindu thought, and the sects which they founded
still continue to gather converts from all parts of India. To last year's
volume of the Society's Journal I contributed an article on Swami Hari

K

JOURNAL.

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part I.— HISTORY, LITERATURE, &c.

No. IL— 1878.

Mathurd Notes. — Bff F. S. Gbowbe,. M. A. Qxoier., B. 0. S*

(With eleven plates.)

The following scraps from my note-book have been hastily thrown*
together in the midst of the worry and confusion occasioned by my sudden
and moet unexpected transfer from a dietrict, to which I had become great-
ly attached, and where I had confidently hoped to spend with much pleasure
to myself and some slight advantage i& the public the few years that yet
remain of my career in the executive branch of the service. I cannot avoid
this personal explanation, as it supplies the only adequate apology for the
very unfinished state in which these fragments appear. I had intended to
work up several of them into separate articles ; but the opportunity of
doing this has been denied me, and I have no choice but either to send
them as they lure, or else allow them to perish amidst the general wreck in.
which all my household gods are now involved.

1. Ootdin Mori Vans ef Brindahan, and the sect of the Bddhd Vallabhis,
One of my inchoate projects was the compilation of a series of notices
tllnstrating the life and doctrine of the different Vaishnava Reformers of
the 16th and 17th centuries, who all made Brindaban their head centre.
Though both the men themselves and their writings are scarcely known by
name to European Orientalists, they have had an enormous influence on the
tendencies of modem Hindu thought, and the sects which they founded
still continue to gather converts from all parts of India. To last year's
volume of the Society's Journal I contributed an article on Swami Hari

98 F. S. GrowBe^Mathurd Notes. [No. 2,

D&8 and his descendants, the Oosains of the temple of B^ke Bihdri ; and in
the Introduction to the first Book of my translation of the E&m&yana I
have given an account of Tulsi D&a, which I had intended to supplement,
on the completion of th^ poem, with a disquisition on his theological system.
But both translation and disquisition must now be indefinitely postponed ;
for a certain amount of quiet and composure is necessaiy for the adequate per-
formance of so long and laborious an undertaking. I was under the impres-
sion that such a series, however dull and occasionally repulsiye the separate
articles might be, would still be of interest to the student and supply sound
material, out of which to construct one short chapter at least in the great
book of the future, the History of Comparative BeHg^on. This project
however is very summarily disposed of, since it is only at Mathur4 that
MSS. are obtainable, nor would the Gos&ins communicate them to any one, in
whom they had not by long intercourse acquired confidence : so suspicious
are they of European interference. The language moreover in which the
poems are written is not without difficulty and requires some special study,
even on the part of natives, before it is readily intelligible. These are pro-
bably the reasons why Prof. Wilson in his * Beligious Sects', is able to give
very full and accurate accounts of the great teachers of earlier times, who
wrote in Sanskrit, while his notices of the more modem schools are meagre
and apparently, as a rule, not derived from original sources. Thus, though
he devotes five pages to the Badh& Vallabhis, he does not mention the name
even of the Chaurdsi Pada, which is their great authority, and to illustrate
their doctrine, translates a passage from the Brahma Yaivarta Furdnf^
which is rather the standard of the YaUabhach4ris, a different sect, who
have their head quarters at Gokul.

The foimder of the E&dh& Vallabhis was by name Hari Vans. His
father, Yy&sa, was a Gaur Brahman of Deva-ban in the Sah&ranpur district,
who had long been childless. He was in the service of the Emperor and on
one occasion was attending him on the march from Agra, when at last his
wife T&ra gave birth to a son at the little village of Bdd, near Mathur4, in
the samhat year 1559. In grateful recognition of their answered prayers,
the parents named the child after the god they had invoked, and called him
Hari Vans, i, e,, Hari's issue. When he had grown up, he took to himself
a wife, by name Eukmini, and had by her two sons and one daughter.
Of the sons the elder, Mohan Chand, died childless ; the descendants of the
younger, Gopin&th, are still at Deva-ban. After settling his daughter
in marriage he determined to abandon the world and lead the life of an
ascetic. With this resolution he set out alone on the road to BrindabaUy
and had reached Gharth&val, near Hodal, when there met him a Br&hmAn,
who presented him with his two daughters and insisted upon his marrying
them, on the strength of a divine command, which he said he had received

1878.J F. 8. Growse— JfaMttm Notee. 99

in a vision. He farther gave him an ima^ of Krishna with the title of
Ridha Yallahh, which on his arrival at Brindaban was set up by Han Vans
in a temple that he founded between the Jugal and the Kolija Ghdts on
the bank of the Jamund. Originally he bad belonged to the Madhvacharya
8ampradaya and from them and the Nimbdrakd, who also claim him, his
doctrine and ritual were professedly derived. Bat in consequence of the
mysterious incident, by which he had been induced to forego his intention
of leading a celibate life and take to himself two new wives ; or rather
in consequence of his strong natural passions, which he was unable to
suppress and therefore invented a fiction to excuse, his devotion was all
directed not to Krishna himself, except in a very secondary degree, but to
his fabled mistress Radhd, whom he deified as the goddess of lust. So
abominable a system was naturally viewed at fiifst with no little atnazement,
as is clear from the language of the Bhakt M&1&, which is as follows :

^l^i<c«w^ti*»*i*i*F Tim 5€rf *ra5 ^npr % ii
^1fR4^5*li^^*i*l ^i\ vmn %r3i «iTf% % ii

TrtMslation of the text ofNAhha Ji.

" The Gos^n Sri Hari Yans : who can understand all at once his method
of devotion P with whom the feet of blessed liddhd were the highest object
of worship ; a most staunch-souled devotee ; who made himself the page in
waiting on the divine pair in their bower of love ; who gloried in the enjoy-
ment of the remnants of all that was offered at their shrine ; a servant who
never pleaded obligation or dispensation ; a votary of incomparable zeaL
Account him blessed who follows in the path of Vyisa's great son, the Gosdin
Sri Hari Yans : who can understand all at once his method of devotion P"

In the gloss, or supplement of Priya Dds, the same sentiment is ex-
panded and a reference made to the legend of the Br&hman and his two
daughters.

100 F. S. Growse— Jfa^^ffra Mtes. [No. 2,

<IWll TOPf HP^* ^W «TO ^9TCT 1
^•1^1*1 WHffs n^f%^ ^\k^ \\

f^iif t'w ^re ft^ f^ 2(^ iTTt$ I
^^re nf ?!rrft kj^ ^i^ ft^ir i?|?ii? ^

^ ^m mi 51Tft^ §^ fw ^

vi^^i %n ^ HOT «R viipjcf II

iit^ fro ^m nf T^ ^ tgr^T OT
Tif^w^iwira •WITT %T ^^TO ^

%^ %T IRfTO ^T f^^ITO |$9lwni%T I
%Tt f^^n^ lOTT^ f?l^q ft^

f%ft f^ it^i ^ fliy^l^i m^ ^

1878.] F. S. Qroyrse^Mathurd Kotea, 101

'R % ^Wq ^!ft iCT* ^Wp? cK%*

^ wi %r3[ ^* '^ 'nO' «ini%T ii

2Van«20ft(m.

" Would you know the one point in a thousand of Sri Hit Ji's ways ?
lie adored B&dh4 first and after her Krishna. A most strange and un-
natural fashion, that none could even faintly comprehend save hy his favour.
He obliterated all distinction between obligation and dispensation ; his Be-
loved was in his heart ; he lived only as her servant, singing the praises of
the divinity night and day. All the faithful know his many edifying and
holy actions ; why tell and repeat them since they are famous already.

** He left his home and came ; his passion for Eadhi and Krishna had
80 grown : but you must know Hari had given an order to a wealthy Brah-
man : ' Bestow your two daughters in marriage, taking my name, and know
that their issue shall be famous throughout the world. By their means
my worship shall spread among my faithful people, a path for the pathless,
of high renown.' Obedient to the loving order he went home ; the delight
of all was past telling, for it was more than the mind could even conceive.
B^h^'s dear spouse gave the gracious command: 'Publish abroad my
worship and the delights of my sylvan abode.' He drank in with his very
eyes the essence of bliss and gave it to every client who supported the cause
of the female divinity. Night and day imbibing the honeyed draught of
sweet song and cherishing it in his soul, with no thought but for Sydm^
and Sy4m. How is it possible to declare such incomparable merit ? the
soul is enraptured at the sound more than at that of any other name."

By his later wives he had two sons Ban Chand and Kishan Chand, of
whom the latter built a temple to Kildhd Mohan, which is still in the pos-
session of his descendants. The former was the ancestor of the present
Gos&ins of the temple of B4dhd Vallabh, the chief shrine of the sect. This
was built by one of his disciples, a Kayath named Sundar D&3 who held
the appointment of Treasurer at Delhi. One of the pillars in the front
gives the date as stmbat 1683. An earlier inscription, of 1641, was no-
ticed by Prof. Wilson, but this would seem to have been over the gateway
leading into the outer court, which since then has fallen down and been
removed. The temple is in itself a handsome building and is further of
special architectural interest as the last example of the early eclectic style.
The ground plan is much the same as in the temple of Haridev at Gobar-
dhan (described in my Mathurd Memoir, Part I, page 172) and the work
is of the same character, but carried out on a larger scale. The nave has
an eastern facade, 34 feet broad which, as will be seen from the accom-

102 F. S. Growse— Jfff/Aiini Xotes, [No. 2,.

panjing photograph, is in three stages, the upper and lower Hindu, and
the one between them purely Muhammadan in character. The interior is
a fine vaulted hall (63 ft. x 20 ft.) with a double tier of openings north
and south ; those in the lower storj having brackets and architraves and
those above being Muhammadan arches, as in the middle story of the front.
These latter open into a narrow gallery with small clerestory windows
looking on to the street. Below, the three centre bays of the colonnade
are open doorways, and the two at either end are occupied by the staircase
that leads to the upper gallery. Some of the carved panels of the stone
ceiling have fallen ; but the outer roof, a steep gable, also of stone, is as
yet perfect. Some trees however have taken root between the slabs and
unless carefully removed must eventually destroy it. The actual shrine, or
eella^ as also at the temple of Gobind Deva, was demolished by Aurangzeb
and only the pliath remains, upon which a room has been built, which is
used as a kitchen. As no mosque was ever erected at Brindaban, it is not a
little strange that Mr. Fergusson in his History of Indian architecture,
when speaking of this very locality, should venture to say '' It does not
appear proven that the Moslems did wantonly throw down the temples
of the Hindus, except when they wanted the materials for the erection of
mosques or other buildings.'' A thorough repair of roof, eaves and east
front would cost Bs. 4,500, and as a typical example of architecture, the
building is worth the outlay. A modem temple has been erected on the
south side, and the nave of the old fabric has long been entirely disused. In
fact this is the last temple in the neighbourhood in which a nave was built
at all. In the modem style it is so completely obsolete that its distinctive
name even is forgotten. On the opposite side of the street is a monument
to the founder, which however the present generation of Gosdins are too un-
grateful to keep in repair. They are the descendants of Braj Chand's
four sons, Sundar-Bar, R4dha Ballabh D^, Braj-Bhukhan and Nagar Bar Ji ;
and the heads of the four families so derived are now Daya L&l, Manohai
Ballabh, Sundar L&l and the infant son of Kanhaiya Lfil.

Hari Vans was himself the author of two poems ; the one, the Cfhaurdd
Fada, or ' 84 Stanzas,' in Hindi, the other the Eddkd Sudhd Nidhi, or
* Treasury of Radh4's Delights,' in 170 Sanskrit couplets. The latter,
though not much read, is held in great esteem and, regarded solely as a piece
of highly impassioned erotic . verse, it is a spirited and poetic composition.
There is a good Hindi commentary upon it by one Bansidhar, dated sam-
hat 1820. It is written in a very florid style and its interminable compounds^
to be rendered into intelligible English, would require a greater expenditure
of time and thought than I can now bestow upon them. But as MSS. are
scarce and Sanskritists may like to see a specimen of the text, I subjoin the
first 25 and the last couplet in the original.

JournAairt.SocBengiJ p.'. 1,1878. PLATE IX.

.n'-A SAILAHH

1878.]

F. S. Growse — Mathurd JSotet.

103

^fftwl^j^!^rjMnrwiff'i{ ?t ^i(wi^f.if^w«i^ w^^ ii ^ ii

HT^WB^ ¥Wlt ^TOTO^J* 7! ^lfN*l^^'5^wW ^J^ 11 8 II
^^ul% lfd4I^^Nfl1^4i3*l^1 Pint ^f?l «Tfq ft^^^t II ^W

iwj: «ffiww<iw^i^«1w«iw»iiw#i^i*i^^«i% I

^iMRifilS isw irw ^i^^imi pro 'i^ 3^toi tiwpwti^. i
TOin w^ ^9l%ra^q^i^aii<iii|if^f^i9i|ii4«iij|^^4<i jn) ^niii'oii

%«fTft ni*K^4l?ti ^^ ft^ra 4iHiifcni4ii4(\^ii|^^i(u^i€ii: i
^^|fw?prf?Rlff5iv: 5|!^ ?l ^1^11^% nfi mftt?! fii^: jpi^t^ iicii

IWa^^^fr? 1WRI%Wffq%TVITW I

104 F. S. Growse— JfaMtfrd No(e9, [No. 2^

ff^r: w^ Hf^ wft 5'HJife*^<ii4l-i^f*i^%i*i^ifvi<<*ir. ii \^ B
w^iniz?! ^ (5*ii*f*id1Rfli^ ?»iww ^^ ^if%^!rra^i

^^'wq^pif?! ^Rdifiiiwl lawT^^^ w^^ramii\^«

f

1878.] P. S. QTOWse—Mathurd Notes. 105

The Hindi poem, the Ohaurdsi Fada^ is much more popular and most
of the €K>84in8 know at least some of its stanzas bj heart. There is a com-
mentary upon it by Lok-n4th, dated samhat 1855, and another in verse,
called the Bahasya artha-ninipana by Rasik Ldl, written in samhat 1734.
Keither of the two, however, is of much assistance to the student ; all the
simple passages being paraphrased with wearisome prolixity, while real
difficulties are generally skipped. I subjoin the text and a translation of
the first 12 stanzas.

II ^K

%TC %rt ^91v ^ %Tt ^ifil w^

Ura %Tf^ %Tt %Tt %Tt WK '^T^ I
'^Fu H^ "fll^ %^ 'nit^ flT^ 11

lOG F. S. Growse— Jf<i^*i*m Notes, [No. 2,

T ^IfvifR^v ^*^ft*n ^n^ 'FIT
^ ^OffH^W* ^wir ^iifi iqrO TTf^WT ^^'itt fireft iwwrfipft ii *

^ 'ftf^pref^** inj'nc'i Tft ^ ^V t*f ^ifs ft^w ^f^ ii

118 II

^IT^ ?^T ^Rffft ?t^ ^^ 'Wi^ H^ r f^% WW% ^5^ ^W^**! I

^f^ fflWR! %^ f^T'i ipw ^ t'^ 'Nh HtWI HPnf H f I

'W^^ '^rfr ^3^ TTWT W^ 1 ^IT ^n 5W ^IPRI ^ ^*^ II

Tf^ ^^ *!M fttm (41(41^1 31111 3l^f^^r^W ^RITiZ^ €if II

1^)1

^IT3f !WT?f «dl*if<<^* ^ ^r^V! ^ ^w win ^K, \

^TT^t'l ^RfSirra T^M^ «zf% «2:f% ^ WJH ^Rf% qr II
^ IpR^ ^t^ iiWIWf^ l^fRHI llfi^QTil tJTIW; I

1878.] F. S, QrowBe-'Mathurd Note». 107

Hi

*tT ^5^ w^ fwi ^rr^ finpf ww %Ral^ t\ i

'^ ^Ppw ^15^ ^1^^ ^ ^Hs\ Hf^ ^ ^iPCt tt
^^ ^KfeB f^f^ f^r^ V^ ^l^^j^M^W ^ ^ I

f^2* ^f^TC 'i^TT inlrfwi f^^ iiftff^N ^wn: f%%P[t ii

108 F. S. Qrowae—Mathuri ITotet. [No. 2,

w^ f^^ra t?ra^ ^ *if*iPi f^j^j^ f^^^ftpct I
'fN f'wwi ^t^ %ppf v^jf^ ^e^ f%^ $rrt i

^BTO*[<t ^Nn^ ^T^ ^ipr m^

^ ^ ^^ ^f^ ^irf^ ft^ ^^ mt%
^ miR<(h iiwr ^ ^* 5^ 11

II U 11

*ih:^ »pft »ft« ira wm <iM n

1878.] r. S. QTOwee^Mathurd Note9. 109

f%ifRi^^i^f^ w«r %Twi "ft^ ^15 ^"W

iiPI ^rt^ SlfrJM< Ilf?l|fW ?FTft«ft II

^^TO^ %f^ ^f?f «R?i Hifinft I

^^ ^rWt i^TR ^ f^ ^j^rftwr
Ti^ ^T ^iTO ?»2 *fy4^f<*ft I

^nrav ^ ^ %f% wfii^ ^^ V ilfti

Tramlatum of the first twelve Stomas of the Ohaurdsi FaJa»

I. " Whatever my Beloved doeth is pleasing to me ; and whatever is
pleasing to me, that my Beloved doeth. The place where I would he is in
mj Beloved's eyes ; and my Beloved would fain be the apple of my eyes*

110 F. S. Growse—lT^^Atfm Notes, [No. 2,

My Love is dearer to mc than body, soul, or life ; and my Love would lose
a thousand lives for me. Bejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans ! the loving pair, one
dark, one fair, are like two cygnets ; tell me who can separate wave from
water ?•

II. '' O my Beloved, has the fair spoken ? this is surely a beautiful
night ; the lightning is folded in the lusty cloud's embrace. O friend,
where is the woman who could quarrel with so exquisite a prince of
gallants ? Eejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans ! dear Bidhikd hearkened with her
ears and with voluptuous emotion joined in love's delights.f

III. '' At day-break the wanton pair, crowned with victory in love'a
conflict, were all exuberant. On her face are frequent beads of labour's dew^
and all the adornments of her person are in disarray, the paint-spot on her
brow is all but effaced by heat, and the straggling curk upon her lotus face
resemble roaming bees. (Bejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) her eyes are red
with love's colours and her voice and loins feeble and relaxed.

rV. "Your face, fair dame^ to-day is full of joy, betokening your
happiness and delight in the intercourse with your Beloved. Your voice
is languid and tremulous, your cheeks aflame, and both your weary eyes are
red with sleeplessness ; your pretty tilak half effaced, the flowers on your
head faded, and the parting of your hair as if you had never made it at all.
The Bountiful one of his grace refused you no boon, as you coyly took the
hem of your robe between your teeth. Why shrink away so demurely ?
you have changed clothes with your Beloved, and the dark-hued swain has
subdued you as completely as though he had been tutored by a hundred
Loves. The garland on his breast is faded, the clasp of his waist-belt loose
(Bejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) as he comes from his couch in the bower.

V. " To-day at dawn there was a showe^r of rapture in the bower, where
the happy pair were delighting themselves, one dark, one fair, bright with
all gay colours, as she tripped with dainty foot upon the floor. Great
Sydm, the glorious lord of love, had his flower wreath stained with the
saffron dye of her breasts, and was embellished with the scratches of his
darling's nails ; she too was marked by the hands of her jewel of lovers.
The happy pair in an ecstasy of affection make sweet song, stealing each
other's heart (Bejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) the bard is fain to praise, but the
drone of a bee is as good as his ineffectual rhyme.

* That IB to say : it is nothing strange that B&dhd and Erishna should take such
mutual delight in one another, once. they are in &ct one and are as inseparable as a
wave and the water of which the wave is composed.

t The first line is a question put to Erishna by one of lUcUid's maids, asking him
if her mistress had promised him an interview. The second lino is a remark which she
turns and makes to one of her own companions.

1878.] F. S. Qrowse—Mathurd Xotes, 111

VI. " Who 80 clever, pretty damsel, whom her lover comes to meet,
stealing through the night ? Why shrink so cojlj at my words P Your
eyes are suffused and red with love's excitement, your bosom is marked with
his nails, you are dressed in his clothes, and your voice is tremulous.
(Rejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) Radhil's amorous lord has been mad with love.
YII. ^ To-day the lusty swain and blooming dame are sporting in their
pleasant bower. O list ! great and incomparable is the mutual affection of
the happy pair, on the heavenly* plain of Brindaban* The ground gleams
bright with coral and crystal and there is a strong odour of camphor. A
dainty couch of soft leaves is spread, on which the dark gproom and his
fair bride recline, intent upon the joys and delights of dalliance, their lotus
cheeks stained with red streaks of betel juice. There is a charming strug-
gle between dark hands and fair to loose the string that binds her skirt.
Beholding herself as in a mirror in the necklace on Han's breast, the silly
girl is troubled by delusion and begins to fret, till her lover wagging his
pretty chin shews her that she has been looking only at her own shadow.
listening to her honeyed voice, as again and again she cries * N&j, nay,'
Lalit4 and the others take a furtive peep (Rejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) till
tossing her hands in affected passion she snaps his jewelled necklet.

YIII. '' Ah, red indeed are your lotus eyes, lazily languishing and
inflamed by night-long watch, and their cdlyrium all faded. From your
drooping eyelids shoots a glance like a bolt, that strikes your swain as it
were a deer and he cannot stir. (Rejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !) O damsel
voluptuous in motion as tiie swan, your eyes deceive even the wasps and
bees.

IX. *' Ridhi and Mohan are such a dainty pair, he dark and beautiful
as the sapphire, she with body of golden lustre ; Hari with a tilak on his
broad forehead and the fair with a roli streak amidst the tresses of her
hair : the lord like a stately elephant in gait and the daughter of Vrisha-
bhinu like an elephant queen : the damsel in a blue vesture and Mohan in
yellow with a red khaur on his forehead (Rejoice, Sri Hit Hari Vans !)
R&dh&'s amorous lord is dyed deep with love's colours.

3L ** To-day the damsel and her swain take delight in novel ways.
What can I say P they are altogether exquisite in every limb ; sporting
together with arms about each other's neck and cheek to cheek, by such
delicious contact making a circle of wanton delight. As they dance, the
dark swain and the fair damsel, pipe and drum and cymbal blend in sweet
concert with the tinkling of the bangles on her wrists and ankles and the
girdle round her waist. Sri Hit Hari Vans, rejoicing at the sight of the
damsels' dancing and their measured paces, tears his soul from his body
and lays them both at their feet.

* Abhutj not oreatod, solf-producod, divino.

112 F. S. Growse—Mathurd Notes. [No. 2,

XI. '* The pavilion is a bright and charming spot ; R^h& and Hari
are in glistening attire and the fnll-orbed autumnal moon is resplendent in
the heaven. The dark-hued swain and nymph of golden sheen, as they toy
together, shew like the lightning's flash and sombre cloud. In safibon ves-
ture he and she in scarlet ; their affection deep beyond compare ; and the
air, cool, soft and laden with perfumes. Their couch is made of leaves and
blossoms and he woos her in dulcet tones, while coyly the fair one repulses
his every advance. Love tortures Mohan's soul, as he touches her bosom,
or waist-band, or wreath, and timorously she cries ' off off.' Pleasant is
the sporting of the glorious lord, close-locked in oft-repeated embrace, and
like an earth-reviving river is the flood of his passion.

XII. '' Come lUldh^, you knowing one, your paragon of lovers has
started a dance on the bank of the Jamuna's stream. Bevies of damsels
are dancing in all the abandonment of delight ; the joyous pipe gives forth
a stirring sound. Near the Bansi-bat, a sweetly pretty spot, where the
spicy air breathes with delicious softness, where the half -opened jasmine fills
the world with overpowering fragrance, beneath the clear radiance of the
autumnal full moon, the milkmaids with raptured eyes are gazing on your
glorious lord, all beautiful from head to foot, quick to remove love's every
pain. Put your arms about his neck, fair dame, pride of the world, and
lapped in the bosom of the Ocean of delight, disport yourself with Sy&m in
his blooming bower.'*

If ever the language of the brothel was borrowed for temple use it has
been so here. But, strange to say, the Gosdins, who accept as tiieir Qospd.
these nauseous ravings of a morbid imagination, are for the most part highly
respectable married men, who contrast rather favourably both in sobriety
of life and intellectual acquirements with the professors of rival sects that
are based on more reputable authorities. Several of them have a good know-
ledge of literary Hindi : but their proficiency in Sanskrit is not very high :
the best informed among them being unable to resolve into its constituent
elements and explain the not very recondite compound suduHihaf which
will be found in the second stanza of the B4dh&-6udh4,

To indicate the fervour of his passionate love for his divine mistress,
Hari Vans assumed the title of Hit Ji and is popularly better known by
this name than by the one which he received from his parents. His most
famous disciple was Yy^ Ji of Orchha, of whom various legends are repor-
ted. On his first visit to the Sw4mi he found him busy cooking, but at
once propounded some knotty theological problem. The sage without any
hesitation solved the difficulty, but first threw away the whole of the food,
he had prepared, with the remark that no man could attend properly to two
things at once. Vy^ was so struck by this procedure that he then and
there enrolled himself as his disciple, and in a short space of time conceived

I

•I

1878.] F. S. Growse— JfaAffni Mies. 113

such an affection for Brindaban that he was most reluctant to leave it, even
to return to his wife and children. At last, however, he forced himself to
go, but had not been with them long before he determined that they ^ould
themselves disown him, and accordingly he one day in their presence took
and eat some food from a Bhangi's hand. After this act of social excom-
munication he was allowed to return to Brindaban,. where he spent the
remainder of his life and wh^e his aatnddkj or tomb, is still to be seen.

Another disciple, Dhruva D&, was a voluminous writer and composed
as many as 42 poems, of which the following is a list: 1. Jiv-das^ ; 2, Baid«
gy&n ; 3, Man-siksha ; 4, Brindaban-sat ; 5, Bhakt-nam£vali ; 6, Brihad-
baman Pur&n ; 7, Khyil Hulas ; 8, Siddhdot Bich4r ; 9, Priti-chovani ; 10,
Anandashtak ; 11, Bhajanishtak ; 12, Bhajan-kundaliya ; 13, Bhajan-sat ;.
14, Sring^-sat ; 15, Man-sringdr ; 16, Hit-sringir; 17, Sabha-mandal ; 18^
Ras-muktikvali ; 19, Bas-hiravali ; 20, Bias-ratn&vali ; 21, Premdvali; 22,
8fi Priyd Ji ki nim4vali ; 28^ Bahasya-manjari ; 24, Sukhmanjari ; 25^
Kati-manjari ; 26, Neh-manjari ; 27, Ban-bihib ; 28, Bas-bihir ; 29, Bang,
hulas ; 30, Bang.bih4r ; 31, Bang-binod ; 82, ifnand-dasa ; 33, Bahasya-
lati ; 34, Anand-lat;& ; 35, AnudLg-iat& ; 36, Prem-hit& ; 37, Bas-anand ; 38,
Jugal-dhy^n ; 39, Nirtya-biUs ; 40, I>4n.lila ; 41, M^-lila ; 42, Braj-lila.

Other poems by different members of the same sect are the Sevak-bdni
and the Ballabh-rasik ki b^ni ; the Guru-pratap, by Damodar Dia ; the
Hari-nim-mahim&, by D&modar Sw&mi ; the Sri Bdp Ldl Ji ka ashtdka,.
by Hit Ballabh ; and the Hai i-nam-beli, the Sri Lai Ji badhai and the-
Sri Larili J4 ki badhai by Brindaban D4b«

2. l^e Ckhatthi Tdlndy or Assi Ehambaj^ at Mahdban.

The description of this building given in my Mathur^ Memoir, Part
I, page 149, is not very accurate. The pillars of the cok>nnade are mostly,,
if not all, anterior in date to Mahmtid of Ghazni, and probably belonged ta
a temple, or it may be to several different templea of the Jaini faith, which
he destroyed when he captured the fort in the year 1017. After they had
been lying about for centuries, the Muhammadans in the reign of Aurangzib
roughly put them together and set them up on the n.te of a modern Hindu
temple that they had demolished. The buUding so constructed was used
as a mosque till quite recent times, and its connection with Krishna, or his
worship even, at any earlier period is entirely fictitious. That is to say,
so far as concerns the actual fabric and the materials of which it is con*
structed : the site, as in so many other similar cases, haa probably been
associated with Hindu worship from very remote antiquity. In Sir John
Strachey's time 1 obtained a grant of Bs. 1000 for the repair of the buil-
ding, which had fallen into a very ruinous condition, and in digging the

114 F. S. Qvovfse—Mathurd Notes. [No. 2,

foundations of the new screen- walls (the old walls had been simply set on
the ground without any foundation at all) I came upon a number of re-
mains of the true Hindu temple, dating apparently from about the year
1500 A. D. The Iconoclast would not use these sculptures in the con-
struction of his mosque, since they had too recently formed part of an idol-
atrous shrine, but had them buried out of sight ; while he had no scruple
about utilizing the old Jaini pillars. Whatever I dug up, I either let into
the wall or brought over to MathudL for the local Museum, which in all
probability will now never be instituted.

On a drum of one of the pillars is an inscription, which I read Bdm^
dasa has iknavi ham, meaning, it would seem, ' Column No. 91, the gift of
Bdm Das.' This is now upside down and from this fact as also from what
has been said above, it may clearly be seen that my statement in the
' Memoir' that ' the pillars, as they now stand, occupy their original posi-
tion' cannot be maintained. I still think, however, that in the main they
represent the original design and that height was gained, from the first, by
the simple expedient of placing one pillar on the top of another. For some
of the inner columns are so carved, that they seem to be broken in two ia
the middle, though they are really each a single shaft.

3. The Hindu sikhara ; its origin and development.

If Mr. Fergusson had ever been able to visit Brindaban or to procure
photographs of the temples there, it is possible that he would not have
found the origin of the Hindu sikhara such an inscrutable mystery as he
declares it to be. He conjectures that the external form may have been
simply a constructural necessity resulting from the employment internally
of a very tall pointed horizontal arch, like that of the Treasury at Mycense.
But so far as my experience extends, no such arch was ever used in a
Hindu temple. On the contrary the cella, over which the sikhara is built,
is separated from the more public part of the building by a solid wall
pierced only by a doorway small enough to be easily closed ; while the
chamber itself is of no great height and is covered in with a vaulted cieling,
as to the shape of which nothing could be learnt from a view of the sikhara
outside. And vice versd. Thus at the great temple of Gobind Deva the
central dome of the nave (or porch as Mr. Fergusson very inappropriately
calls it) is perfect ; but it is impossible to determine from thence with any
certaiuty what would have been the outline and proportions of the tower
that the architect proposed to raise over it. I have no question in my own
mind that the origin of the sikhara is to be found in the Buddhist sttipa
of which a representative example may be seen in Plate XIII sculptured at
the back of a small pillar. Nor do I detect any violent breal in the

1878,] r. S. GTowse—Mathurd JVbtes. 11 5

development. The lower storey of the modern temple which, though most
commonly square, is occasionally, as in the Madan Mohan example, an
octagon and therefore a near approach to a circle, is represented by the
masonry plinth of the relic-mound ; the high curvilinear roof by the swell-
ing contour of the earthen hill, and the pinnacle with its peculiar base by
the Buddhist rails and umbreUa on the top of a Dagoba. From the original
stupa to the temple of Parsvanilth at Khajraha, of the 11th century, the
towers of Madan Mohan and Jugal Elishor at Brindaban of the 16th, suid
the temple of Yishveshvar at Banaras the gradation seems to be easy and
continuous.

A description of the two Brindaban temples is given in the Journal
for 1872 (pages 318-320), but it is only now that I have been able to get
photographs taken of them.

4. 27ie temple of Oohind Deva at Brindaban,

Mr. Fergusson in his Indian Architecture speaks of this temple as
" one of the most interesting and elegant in India, and the only one per-
haps, from which a European architect might borrow a few hints." I
should myself have thought that ' solemn' or ' imposing' was a more appro-
priate term than ' elegant' for so massive a building, and that the sug-
gestions that might be derived from its study were * many' rather than
* few* ; but the criticism is at all events in intention a complimentary one.
It is, however, unfortunate that the author of a book, which will long and
deservedly be accepted as an authority, was not able to obtain more satis-
factory information regarding so notable a chef d^oeuvre. The ground-plan
that he supplies is extremely incorrect : for it gives in faint lines, as if
destroyed, the choir, or jag-mohan^ which happens to be in more perfect
preservation than any other part of the fabric, and it entirely omits the
two chapels that flank the cella on either side and are integral portions of
the design. The cella itself is also omitted ; though for this there was
more excuse, since it was razed to the groimd by Aurangzib and not a
vestige of it now remains beyond the rough rubble wall of the choir, to
which it had been attached. The three towers, over the two side chapels
and the dome in the centre of the nave, were certainly never erected.
Those over the choir and the sacrarium were both finished, and of the former
I annex a plan. Its restoration was completed last month, (March 1877)
with the exception of the finial and a few stages below it, which had entirely
perished, and which Sir John Strachey on that account would not allow me
to replace, on the general principle that in all such cases the new work must
be more or less conjectural and therefore untrustworthy.

As in the later temple of Badha Ballabh (described in the first section

lie F. S. Qrowee^Mathurd Notes. [No. 2, •

of ibis article) the triforium is a reproduction of Miihammadan design, -
while the work both above and below it is purely Hindu.* It should be
noted however that the arches in the middle story are decorative only, not
oonstructural : the spandrels in the head might be — and, as a fact, for the
most part had been — struck out, leaving only the lintel supported on the
straight jambs, without any injury to the stability of the building.

Its restoration was commenced in September 1873, and has been
carried on under my. supervision, without any professional assistance, up to
the present time. The cost was estimated, in the D. P. W., at Rs.
1,82,387, but for the comparatively modest sum of Es. 38,365 I have been
able to accomplish almost all that was ever intended to be done. I had
applied for a small supplementary grant of Bs. 8,642 ; but if it is sanc-
tioned, there will be no one on the spot to see it expended, f

5. The Sati Burj at Mathurd.

This is a slender quadrangular tower of red sandstone which stands on
the bank of the Jamund, at the very heart of the modem city. It com-
memorates the Queen of Maharajd Bihdr Mall of Jaypur, and was erected
by her son, the Mahardjd Bhagawdn D&a, in the year 1570 A. D. The up-
per part, which had been destroyed long previously, was replaced about the
beginning of the present century by an exceedingly ugly and incongruous
plaster dome, which may help to preserve what remains of the original
work, but quite destroys its architectural effect. The lower stories being
also in a ruinous condition, I suggested to the reigning Maharaja that he
should undertake its restoration as a family monument. It is not at all
likely that the work will ever be set on foot ; but the design that I had
prepared for it may be deemed worthy of preservation. No small amount
of time and thought was bestowed upon it, and I hope that architects will
consider it both a pleasing object in itself and a probably faithful repro-
duction of the destroyed original.

* Thus eclecticism, which after all is only natural growth directed by local circom-
Btances, has for centuries past been the predominant characteristio of Mathura archi-
tecture. In most of the new works that I have taken in hand, and notably in the
Catholic Church, which I had commenced and now have to leave unfinished, I have
conformed to the genius laei and have shewn my recog^tion of its principles, not by a
servile imitation of older examples, but rather by boldly modifying them in accordance
with special requirements and so developing novel combinations.

t The grant has been sanctioned and the work is being carried on, under the
supervision of the Executive Engineer in the Archaeological Department, by the same
local agency and the same body of stone-masons that I had collected and organised.

j^xim

Aaiat; Soc::BcTxga:^"rE.XI.

plat;

X

GfRO
H

AD

MOHAN,

j7*^

^^^"'^y''^^^

jjjjI^Trl^^iHr

^m^kssBom

m;zm:ms

if]^

RESTORED ELEVATION OF-
THE SATI BUR J. MATHURA.

1878.] F. S. Growee^Mathurd Notes. 1 17

6. Mediaval Hindu columns from Sahdr.

Sah&r is a small town in the Chbatd Pargana, which was of some im-
portance last century as the favourite residence of Thakur Badan Siuh, the
father of Suraj Mall the founder of the present Eharatpur dynasty. A
short time ago a dispute arose between the Muhammadans and the Hindus
as to the possession of a site on which they wished to erect, the one party
a mosque, the other a temple. The real fact, as afterwards more clearly
appeared, was that the Hindus had originally a temple there, which the
Muhammadans had thrown down and built a mosque over it. This too had
fallen and the ground had for some years remained unoccupied. The case
when brought into Court was decided in favour of the Hindus, who there-
upon set to work and commenced the erection of a shrine to be dedicated
to Rddhd Ballabh. In digging the foundations, they came upon the re-
mains of the old temple, which I rescued and brought into Mathur4. They
consist of 10 large pillars or pilasters in very good preservation and
elegantly carved with foliage and arabesques and also a number of muti-
lated capitals, bases, &c., the whole series proving an interesting illustration
of the mediaeval Hindu style of architecture. Their value is increased by
the fact that two of the shafts bear inscriptions, in which the date is clearly
^iven as sambat 1128 (1072 A. D.). With the exception of the date,
I have not succeeded in reading much else ; but the accompanying
photograph* of one of them is on a scale large enough to be legible*
The style that I call ' the mediaeval Hindu,' and of which these pillars
afford a good late example, b^an about the year 400 A. D. and continued
to flourish over the whole of Upper India for more than seven centuries.
It is distinguished by the constant employment in the capital, or upper
half column, of two decorative features, the one being a flower-vase with
foliage over-hanging the comers and the other a grotesque mask. The
physiognomy of the latter is generally of a very un-Indian type, and the
more so the further we go back, as is well illustrated by Plate 13, a photo-
graph that Sir John Strachey was kind enough to send me of a pillar in the
andergroond temple in the Allahabad Fort. The motif is precisely the
same as may be seen in many European cinque cento arabesques, where a
scn^ pattern is worked up at the ends, or in the centre, into the semblance
of a human face. The fashion with us certainly arose out of the classic
renaismmee, and in India also may possibly have been suggested by the
reminiscence of a Oreek design. But it was more probably of spontaneous
and independent origin-; as also it was among our Gothic architects, in
whose works a similar style of decoration is not altogether unknown. In

* The base, shown in this photograph, is more than a thousand years older and
bekynga to the Indo-Scythian period. It has been oscmI simply as a socket in which
to imbed the pillar and so xaise the inscription above the ground.

118 F. S. QtoyrBe—Mathitrd Noten, [No. 2,

the earlier examples, such as that at Allahahad, the face is very clearly
marked \ though eyen there the hair of the head and the moustaches are
worked off into a scroll or leaf pattern. In later work, of which numerous
specimens may he seen in the accompanying illustrations of different dates
ranging hetween the two limits fixed hy the Allahahad pillar at the begin-
ning and the Sah4r columns at the end, the eyes are made so protuberant,
and the other features so distorted and confused by the more elaborate
treatment of the foliage and the introduction of other accessories that the
proportions of a human face are almost and in some cases are altogether
destroyed. The tradition however exists to the present day ; and a Ma«
thuri stone-mason, if told to carve a grotesque for a corbel or string-
course of any building, will at once draw a design, in which are reproduced
all the peculiarities of the old models.

r'-l

\ 7. Miscellaneous Antiquities, Mathurd Museum.

Plate No. 13 shews two Buddhist rails of early character. The one
giving the representation of i^stupa, to which I have jdreadj^ref erred, was
brought from the khera of Jaysinhpura, a village on the road between
Mathur4 and Brindaban. The other I dug out of one of the Ohauwara
mounds, where I found also a copper coin of Kanishka's reign. The
columns with their bell-capitals surmounted by winged lions, and the
miniature window-fronts or pediments, with which the architraves are
decorated, illustrate the characteristic features of the architecture of the
period. The upper group represents a sacred tree, enclosed in a railing,
with two devotees worshipping it, the one having a wreath in his hand and
the other a ckauri. Below is an inscription in a single line ending with
the word ddnam, which records the name of the donor ; but though most
of the letters are clear, I cannot determine what the name is. The second
group is probably a scene from one of the J&takas, to which the two birds
will probably at some time give a clue.

Plate No. 14 shews a Buddhist rail, also of the Indo-Scythian period,
of unusually large dimensions, the height of the stone, though a piece of it
has been broken off at the bottom, being still 6 ft. 4 in. It is sculptured
with a female figure, almost nude but for her metal ornaments, who carries
a wicker-work umbrella, the stick of which is so long that it rests upon the
ground. In the compartment above is a very curious bas-relief represent*
ing two monkeys and a bird, seated on basket-work chairs, with a hideously
mis-shapen dwarf standing on the ground between them and apparently
shedding tears.

In Plate 15 the two Buddhist rails placed on either side of the lowest
range of sculptures are the same of which a back view is given in Plate 13.

;: Beng»l, Pt, 1, for It

PILLAR WITH OROTESQOE MA-'iK. FHOM ALLAH.^BaD.

1878.] P. S. GiowBe—Mathurd Notes. 119

The draped Buddha, which I rescued from the hed of the Jamond at
Jaysinhpura, is of early date and executed in a different style from most
of those found in the neighbourhood. The arabesque pilaster next to it
is a good specimen of the mediaeval Hindu period. I found it in opening
out the new paved way along the river bank in the city. The fragment of
wall-decoration and the head are from the Kank&li tila, and the larger stone,
covered with miniature temple fa9ades of the same style as the caves at
Karli and Ajanta, I brought from Mahaban.

In the second tier (over an intermediate row of three Buddhist cross*
bars) the small bas-relief, that occupies the place in the centre, is very
carious. It represents a rustic wooden throne, with drapery thrown over
it and a footstool set in front, and two attendants standing at the back,
each with a chawri to keep off the flies. The object of veneration is a
relic-casket, which is exposed upon the chair. Next to the pillar with the
figure of Maya Devi under the saj tree is a stone that I brought from
Shergarh in the Chhdta Pargana, where I found it imbedded in one of the
towers of a Port built according to tradition by the Emperor Sher Sh^h.
It is the only example that I have seen in India of the use of the tref oiled
circle as a decoration. It is the special characteristic of the architecture of
Kashmir, a style which I am inclined to believe once spread much farther
south, and was of purely Indian origin ; while the later styles were modified
more or less by Greek influences. The festoon is the same, as in the two
flanking pillars (from the Kankali tila) which I ascribe to about the
year 400 A. D. the flower-vase being here used only, without the grotesque
mask which was of somewhat later introduction. On the other side of the
enthroned relic is what appears to be the spandril of a doorway with an
outer border of grapes and vine leaves, and in the jamb the model of a
triumphal pillar with bell-capital and winged lions and an elephant stand-
ing above the abacus. The upper portion of such a pillar with an inscrip-
tion on the abacus, dated in the reign of Huvishka samhat 39, is also in
the museum, and is figured by General Cunningham ia volume III of his
archaeological survey.

Of the two nude Jaina figures in the third tier, the one with the group
of devotees below it, adoring the chakra, is of special interest on account of
the inscription, which gives the date both in letters and figures as
samhat 57. It would seem either that the century is omitted, or that
some other era than than of Yikramdditya is intended : for the figure has
rather a modern appearance, and the letters, which are very scratchy and
ill-formed, are quite unlike the bold characters in the other inscriptions,
when the king's name is given as well as the date and which are therefore
known to be of the Indo-Scythian period.

120 F. S. Grow9e—Mathurd Notes. [No. 2,

In the upper tier, the female figure with a child in its lap (from the
Manoharpur quarter of the city) is of exceptional character and uncertain
date. The square hoz, with a seated Buddha fully draped, on each of the
four sides, is shewn hy the flanking columns to be of great antiquity. I
brought it from the Mahdvidya tila, which is unquestionably one of the
oldest religious sites in Mathurd and probably has many relics of the past
buried under the modern temple. The architraTe, with defaced figure
sculpture at either end, I found in the progress of the repairs of the
Chhatthi PaLdL at Mah&ban, being part of the Hindu temple there which
was destroyed by Aurangzib. It is a good example of a simple but very
effective style of decoration.

8. The Festival of the JToH, as kept in Braj,

In 1877 the Festival of the Holi fell unusually early in the year, while
the weather was still cool enough to allow of a mid-day ride without serious
inconvenience. I took advantage of the opportunity thus afforded me and
made the round of the principal villages in the Chhat4 and Kosi Parganaa
where the rejoicings of the Phul Dol, for so these Hindu Saturnalia are
popularly termed, are celebrated with any peculiar local observances, visit-
ing each place on its special f6te-day and jotting down what I saw in my
note-book. Several of the usages are, I believe, entirely unknown beyond
the limits of Braj, even to the people of the country, and — ^so far as I could
ascertain by enquiries — ^they had never before been witnessed by any
European. The following extracts from my diary may therefore be thought
worthy of preservation.

Jfeft. 22nd^ Barsdna, the Bangila Holi, — In the middle of the town
is a small open square, about which are grouped the stately mansions and
temples built by the great families who resided here during the first half
of the 18th century. I find a seat in the balcony over the gateway of the
house still occupied by the impoverished descendants of the famous Katara,
Bup B4m, the founder of Bars4na's short-lived magnificence, from which
I have a full view of the humours of the crowd below. The cheeriness of
the holiday-makers as they throng the narrow winding streets on their
way to and from the central square, where they break up into groups of
bright and ever varying combinations of colour ; with the buffooneries of
the village clowns and the grotesque dances of the lusty swains, who with
castanets in hand, caricature in their movements the conventional graces
of the Indian ballet-girl,

Crispum sub crotalo docta movere iatus,

all make up a sufficiently amusing spectacle ; but these are only interludes
and accessories to the great event of the day. This is a sham fight between

BUDUinST RAILS, MAT;IT;ra

ls78.] F. S. Growse—Mathum Notes, 121

the men from the neighbouring village of Nand-ganw and the Bars&na
ladies, the wives of the Gosdins of the temple of Ldrli Ji, which stands
high on the crest of the rock that overlooks the arena. The women have
their mantles drawn down over their faces and are armed with long heavy
bambns, with which thej deal their opponents many shrewd blows on the
head and shoulders. The latter defend themselves as best they can with
round leather shields and stags' horns. As they dodge in and out amongst
the crowd and now and again have their flight cut off and are driven back
upon the band of excited viragoes, many laughable incidents occur. Not
nnfrequently blood is drawn, but an accident of the kind is regarded rather
as an omen of good fortune, and has never been known to give rise to any
ill-feeling. Whenever the fury of their female assailants appears to be
subsiding, it is again excited by the men shouting at them snatches of the
foUowing ribald rhymes. They are not worth translation, since they con-
sist of nothing but the repetition of the abusive word sdld^ applied to every
person and thing in Bars^a. That town being the reputed home of
Kadha, the bride, its people are styled her brothers ; while the Nand-gdnw
men account themselves the brothers of Krishna the bridegroom.

^it^ ^T^ wpit ^ %TT Rtrcrt^ II

ft^^R! ^ ^i<R€ii in^ «% w^Hi^ II
3iT^ m^ irfr^ w ^^ni*ii^ i

vrar^ ftnRT^ ^r^ ^ f'lTT^ ^ ii

Feb, 23rrf, Nand-gdnw. — Another sham fight as on the preceding day,
only with the charactors reversed j the women on this occasion being the

122 F. S. Grow'se—MalJiurd Xotes, [Xo. 2,

wives oi: the Gosains of the Nand-ganw temple, and their antagonists the
men of Barsana. The combatants are drawn up more in battle-array,
instead of skirmishing by twos and threes, and rally round a small yellow
pennon that is carried in their midst ; but the show is less picturesque in
its accessories, being held on a very dusty spot outside the town, and was
more of a phallic orgie.

Feb. 27th, the Soli. Phdlen. — Here is a sacred pond called Frahl4d-
kund, and the fact of its having preserved its original name gives a clue,
as in so many parallel cases, to the older form of the name now borne by
the village. The local pandits would derive the word Phdlen from the
verb phdrna, " to tear in pieces," with a reference to the fate of Prahlad's
impious father, Hiranya-Kasipu : but such a formation would be contrary
both to rule and to experience, and the word is beyond a doubt a corruption of
Prahldda-grdma. Thus : 1st, the r in the compounds jpr and yr is elided
by Vararuchi's sutra, Sarvatra lava-ram, III, 3, as in kos for kros ; 2ndly,
the d in Idda is elided by Vararuchi II, 2, as in pau for pada ; 3rdly, the
initial g of gdma is elided by a further application of the last quoted rule ;
4thly, the m in gam becomes », these tv^o letters being ordinarily inter-
changeable, thus dhimar = dhivar ; Bhanidni Bhavdni ; gauna = gamana ;
and 5thly, a nasal is inserted, which can always be done at pleasure. The
result is Pahlau-aunw, from which to Phalan or Phalen is a transition so
easy as to be almost a phonetic necessity.

Arriving at the village about an hour before sunset I found a crowd
of some 5000 people closely packed in the narrow space on the margin of
the pond and swarming over the tops of the houses and the branches of all
the trees in the neighbourhood. A large bonfire had been stacked half-way
between the pond and a little shrine dedicated to Prahldd, inside which the
Khera-pat, or Ptinda, who was to take the chief part in the performance
of the day, was sitting telling his beads. At 6 P. M. the pile was lit and
being composed of the most inflammable materials at once burst into such
a tremendous blaze that I felt myself scorching, though the little hillock
where I was seated was a good many yards away. However, the lads of the
village kept on running close round it, jumping and dancing and brandish-
ing their lathis, while the Panda went down and dipped in the pond and
then, with his dripping pagri and dhuti on, ran back and made a feint of
passing through the fire. In reality he only jumped over the outermost
verge of the smouldering ashes and then dashed into his cell again, much to
the dissatisfaction of the spectators, who say that the former incumbent
used to do it much more thoroughly. If on the next recurrence of the
festival, the Panda shews himself equally timid, the village proprietors
threaten to eject him, as an impostor, from the land which he holds rent-
free simply on the score of his being fire-proof.

1S78.] F. S. Gvowsii^MrMur/i Xotes, 123

Feb, 2%thy KosL — After sitting a little while at a nach of the ordinary
character given by one of the principal traders in the town, I went on to
see the chaupdis, or more special Holi performances, got up by the differ-
ent bodies of Jat zamindars, each in their own quarter of the town. The
dancers, exclusively men and boys, are all members of the proprietory clan
and are all dressed alike in a very high-waisted full-skirted white robe,
reaching to the ankles, called a jhagd, with a red patgri^ in which is set at
the back of the head a long tinsel plume, Kalangi, to represent the pcjicock
feathers with which Krishna was wont to adorn himself as he rambled
through the woods. The women stand at one end of the court-yard with
their mantle drawn over their faces and holding long lathis with which at
a later period of the proceedings they join in the Holi sports. O^jposite
them are the bands-men with drums, cymbals and timbrels and at their
back other men with sticks and green twigs which they brandish about over
their heads. The space in the middle is circled by torch-bearers and kept
clear for the dancers, who are generally 6 in number, only one pair dancing
at a time. Each performer, in the dress as above described, has a knife or
dagger in his right hand and its scabbard in his left. At first darting
forward they make a feint of thrusting at the women or other spectators
and then pointing the knife to their own breast they whirl round and round,
generally backwards, the pace growing faster and more furious and the
clash of the band louder and louder till at last they sink down, with their
flowing robe spread out all round them, in a sort of curtsey, and retire into
the back ground to be succeeded by another pair of performers. After a
pair of men comes a pair of boys, and so on alternately with very little
variation in the action. Between the dances a verse or two of a song is
sung, and at the end comes the Holi khelna. This is a very monotonous
performance. The women stand in a line, their faces veiled, and each with
a Idihi ornamented with bands of metal and gaudy pendents, like the Bac-
chantes of old with the thyrsus, and an equal number of men oppose them
at a few yards' interval. The latter advance slowly with a defiant air and
continue shouting snatches of scurrilous song till they are close upon the
women, who then thrust out their Idfhis and without uttering a word fol-
low them as they turn their back and retreat to their original standing-
place. Arrived there they let the women form again in line as they were
at first and then again advance upon them, precisely as before, and so it
goes on till their repertory of songs is exhausted or they have no voice left
to sing them. To complete my description I here give some specimens of
these tdkhis or verses, and have added notes to all the words that seemed
likely to require explanation. They are too coarse and at the same time
too stupid to make it desirable for me to translate them.

12A F. S. Grow&e—MntJium Notes. [No. 2,

^* ^ #% ^^ ^BR^W 1W ^ ^TUT ifbtt 11\H

??i 'rffRR mm «R^ ?ftT I

wi{ ^fh[^ it ^r^S? it ^ ^ »i^ %T?ft II ^11
f^i^ ?^ll II i«n: i^ 53^ ^^ir ^ ^n^ i

1^ S'cra ^^ ^if^%T^^ ip» ^ ^'5^ 1WI ^w % ira II 'OH

^ Vt^ ^ »fm*** WZX^ f ll«: II

* Sydlii^ a woman's dopoHa*

t Jhagdy a man's dross.

J Adhbar, in the middle.

{ ifar^ an ornament worn by women on the elbow.

I Sukf the planet Venus, which is rogardod as auspicious.

% Chdlan, the same as the more common ffauna,

** Jarij for zorif xabrdaatu

ft Jom, lust, passion.

X% Dyausy the day-time.

{{ Khaddna^ a clay pit.

Dl 2r^i, fix, for thahra.

f f Chonday the knot of hair at the top of a woman's head.

*** Odl katdnay to have the cheek kissed.

I

I

1878.] F. S. Growse— Math imi Notes. 125

WT«r fiiJ ^ iiiLii
^rftpr Iftr 'ft^ «Kft§ i

iPRT^reiR 'iiT^ iPR ^rat 'Rif ^rot 'in; *pnf ^t^ i
^^ Hfif^^if qz^R ^i^rrt TT^^^ ^az^ut ^^ft^ ii \\ ii

Mdrch IHf Kosi. — Spend an hour or two in the afternoon as a spectator
of the Holi sports at the Gomati-Kund. Each of the 6 J^t villages of
the Denda Pai§ has two or more chaupdis, which come up one after the
other in a long procession, stopping at short intervals on the way to dance
in the manner ahove descrihed, hut several at a time instead of in single
pairs. One of the performers executed a pas de seul mounted on a daf, or
large timhrel, which was supported on the shoulders of four other men of
his troupe. Bands of Mummers (or swanks) were also to he seen, one set
attired as Muhammadan fakirs ; another (ghdyahn M swang) as wounded
warriors, painted with streaks, as it were of hlood, and with sword-hlades
and daggers so bound on to their neck and arms and other parts of the
body that they seemed to be transfixed by them. Some long iron rods were
actually thrust through their protruded tongue and their cheeks, and in
this ghastly guise and with drawn swords in their hands, with which they
kept on dealing and parrying blows, the pair of combatants perambulated
the crowd.

March 2nd. — At 2 p. m. ride over to Bathen for the Holanga mela, and
find a place reserved for me on a raised terrace at the junction of four
streets in the centre of the village. Every avenue was closely packed with
the densest throng, and the house-tops seemed like gardens of flowers with
the bright dresses of the women. Most of them were Jdfs by caste and
wore their distinctive costume, a petticoat of coarse country stufE worked
by their own hands with figures of birds,. beasts and men of most grotesque
design, and a mantle thickly sewn all over with discs of talc, which flash
like mirrors in the sun and quite dazzle the sight. The performers in the
ehaupdi could scarcely force their way through the crowd much less dance,
but the noise of the band that followed close at their heels made up for all
shortcomings. There was a great deal of singing, of a very vociferous and

* Bhaungartkf a thicket,
t Ndra, a twisted string, izar^and,
i Jhatak, a knot.

f Any sabdivision of a Jit clan is called a Pdl, and the town of Kosi is the centre
of one such sabdiTiBion, which is known as the Dcndti Pal.

120 F. S. Growse—Mathurd Notes, [No. 2,

probablj also a very licentious character ; but my ears were not offended,
for in the general din it was impossible to distinguish a single word. Hand-
fulls of red powder (ahir) mixed with tiny particles of glistening talc were
thrown about, up to the balconies above and down on the heads of the peo-
ple below, and seen through this atmosiDhere of coloured cloud, the frantic
gestures of the throng, their white clothes and faces all stained with red
and yellow patches, and the great timbrels with bunches of peacocks'
feathers, artificial flowers and tinsel stars stuck in their rim, borne above
the players' heads, and now and again tossed up high in the air, combined
to form a curious and picturesque spectacle. After the music came a posse
of rustics each bearing a rough jagged branch of the prickly acacia, stripfc
of its leaves, and in their centre one man with a small yellow pennon on a
long staff, yellow being the colour appropriate to the Spring season and the
god of Love. The whole party slowly made its way through the village
to an open plain outside, where the crowd assembled cannot have numbered
less than 15,000. Here a circular arena was cleared and about a hundred
of the Bathen Jd^nis were drawn up in a line, each with a long bambu in
her hands, and confronting them an equal number of the bow-men who
arc all from the neighbouring village of Jau. A sham fight ensued, the
women trying to beat down the thorny bushes and force their way to the
flag. A man or two got a cut in the face, but the most perfjcct good
humour prevailed, except when an outsider from some other village
attempted to join in the play ; ho was at once hustled out with kicks and
blows that meant mischief. The women were backed up by their own
husbands, who stood behind and encouraged them by word, but did not
move a hand to strike. When it was all over, many of the spectators ran
into the arena, and rolled over and over in the dust, or streaked themselves
with it on the forehead, taking it as the dust hallowed by the feet of Krish*
na and the Gopis.

The forenoon had been devoted to the recitation of Hindi poems ap-
propriate to the occasion. I was not on the spot in time enough to hear
any of this, but with some difficulty I obtained for a few days the loan of
the volume that was used, and have copied from it three short pieces. The
actual MS. is of no greater antiquity than 1776 A. D., the colophon at the
end, in the curious mixture of Sanskrit and Hindi affected by village pancjlitsy
stiinding thus :

Sambat 1852 Bhadrapad sudi 2 dwitiya, rabibar, likhitam idam
pustakam, Sri Gopal Das Charan-PahAri*-madhye parhan arthi Sri Seva
Das Bafi Bathain vdsi :

* Charan-Pahiri is tho namo of a small dctachod rock, of tho same character as the
Bliaratpur ninge, that crops up above the ground in the \Tllage of Little Bathen.

1878.] F. S. Growse—Mathurd Xoteg, 127

but probabh' many successive copies have been made since tbe original was
thumbed to pieces. The first stanzas which are rather prettily worded,
are, or at least profess to be, the composition of the famous blind poet Sur
Das.

^TPR ^n^ 'virf^ ^'tNt ^tif^it^f^^ II
'^WT^ire f^ ^af^ 1%^ ^PTOfT ^ ^ II

^T^'i ^ ^iwra q^rre ^?w ^ifJpi ^ ii
^ ^rfari ffiR^ra l**i*S ^ n^ f SR aiT II

" Thy ways are past knowing, full of compassion, Supreme Intelli-
gence, unapproachable, unfathomable, beyond the cognizance of the senses,
moving in fashion mysterious.

" A lion, most mighty in strength and courage, dies of hunger ; a snake
fills his belly without labour and without exertion.

" Now a straw sinks in the water, now a stone floats : he plants an
ocean in the desert, a flood fills it all round.

" The empty is filled, the full is upset, by his grace it is filled again ;
the lotus blossoms from the rock and fire burns in the water.

" A king becomes a beggar and again a beggar a king, with umbrella
over his head ; even the guiltiest (says Sur Das) in an instant is saved, if
the Lord helps him the least."

The second piece, in a somewhat similar strain, is by D^modar Das.

12S F. S. Growse— Jl/ii^/mm Xofes. [No. 2,

^ ^t^TTO ^n^ f%f %rar M*^ fif^ ^^ n
%^ j^tTT ^^ ^ HP»T ^sint irf^ iWT I

41*1 Kl 5R^ f^ f ^^'ft «PR 'TO^TOT II

Th'anslation.

" Come, my soul, adore Nand*lala (». e, Krishna) whether living in the
house or in the woods (i. e, whether a man of the world or a hermit) there
is no other help to ]&j hold of.

** The Veda, the Pur&nas and the Law declare that nothing is better
than this ; every day honour increases four-fold, like the moon in its de-
grees.

" Who has wealth ? who has house and fortune ? who has son and
wife ? says Ddmodar, nought will remain secure in the world, it is gone in
a moment."

The third piece, an encomium of the blooming Spring, is too simple to
requii'c any translation.

1^ ^^ 1^ ^^iq«i «ra^ li^Mpi I

"RWr ^TO «RT^ ^^^IT 11W cWf ^FW I
'rat 8ftd^*fl^^R*) %3r! iWiW^l!! II

1^ f\m\^ "^ Mi^T spi^ ^^^% ^a^ i

The only divinities who are now popularly commemorated at the Holi
Festival are Radhd, Krishna and Balardma ; but its connection with them
can only be of modern date. The institution of the Ban-jatra and the

1878.] F. S Qrowse—Mathurd Notes. 129

K^-lila and all the local legends that they involve is traceable to one of the
Brindaban Gos&ins at the beginning of the 17th century A. D., viz. Narayan
Bbatt, a disciple of Krishan Das, Brahmachdri, whom Sandtan, the leader
of the Bengali Vaishnavas in Upper India, appointed the first Pujari of his
temple of Madan Mohan. The fact, though studiously ignored by the
Hindus of Mathurd, is distinctly stated in the Bhakt-m^la, the work which
they admit to be of paramount authority on such matters. But the scenes
that I have described carry back the )xdnd of the European spectator to a
far earlier period and are clearly relics, perhaps the most unchanged that
exist in any part of the world, of the primitive worship of the powers of
nature on the return of Spring. Such were the old English merry-makings
on May Day, and stiU more closely parallel the Phallic orgies of Imperial
Rome as described by Juvenal. When I was listening to the din of the
village band at Bathan, it appeared to be the very scene depicted in the
lines —

Flangebant alise proceris tympana palmis,
Aut tereti tenuis tinnitus sere ciebant,
Multis raucisonos efflabant comua bombos,
Barbaraque horribili stridebat tibia cantu.
Or again in the words of Catullus :

Leve tympanum remugit, cava cymbala recrepant,
Ubi sacra sancta acutis ululatibus agitant,
Quatiuntque terga tauri teneris cava digitis.

"While the actors in the chaupdi, with daggef in hand, recalled the
pictures of the Corybantes or Phrygian priests of Cybele, the very persons
to whom the poet refers. In Greece the Indian Holi found its equivalent
in the Dionysia, when the phallus, the symbol of the fertility of nature, was
borne in procession, as it now is here, and when it was thought a disgrace
to remain sober. In like manner the Gosains and other actors in the In.
dian show are quite as much inspired in their frenzied action by their
copious preliminary libations as by the excitement of the scene and the
barbarous music of the drums, cymbals and timbrels that accompany them.

Mathiird, April &h, 1877.

POSTSCBEPT.

1. Beeent Archcsological Discoveries.

Since my transfer from the district, the mound adjoining the Magis-
trate's Court-house, which has often been explored before with valuable
results, has been completely levelled as a Famine relief work. A large
number of miscellaneous sculptures have been discovered, of which I have
received no definite description. But the more prominent object is a life-
size statue of Buddha, which is said to be very finely executed and also in

B

130 F. S. Growse-^Mathurd Notes. [No. 2,

excellent preservation, though unfortunately it has been broken into two
pieces by a fracture just above the ankles. On the base is an inscription in
Pali characters, of which a transcript has been sent me by a clever native
draughtsman. I decypher it as follows ! —

" Deyadharmfiyam Sakya-bhikshu Yasa-dittasya. Yad atra punyam,
tad bhavatu mata-pitroh sukhd ryapdddhya yatam cha sarwa-satv-anuttara-
jnana-vaptaye.*'

I have probably misread some of the letters printed in italics, for as
they stand they yield no sense. (Vide PL XIX.) The remainder I trans-
late as follows : . x . -

" This is the votive offering of the Buddhist monk Yasa-ditta. If
there is any merit in it, may it work for the good of his father and mother
and for the propagation of perfect knowledge throughout the world."

In Sanskrit the primary meaning of deya-dharma is the duty of
giving ; but in Pdli it ordinarily stands for * the gift' itself. The literal
signification of the monk's name Yasa-ditta is ' Besplendent with glory ';
ditta being the Pali, Prakrit, or Hindi form of the Sanskrit dijpta^ by a
rule of Vararuchi's, imder which the example given is sutta (the modem
8otd) for 8upta. Vdpti, * the propagation' is from the root vap, to sow ;
from which also comes the Hindi word hdp, * a father,' like the Latin satory
from aero.

A second inscription of some length commences with the words Mahd"

rdjasya Devaputraaya HuvishJcaaya Samvatsare 51 Hemanta masa 1 div

but I have not been able to read further, as the only transcript that I have
received is a very imperfect one. A great number of fragmentary sculps
tures of different kinds have also, as I understand, been discovered, and
some of them have been photographed for General Cunningham, who spent
several days at Mathura for the purpose of examining them. His account
will doubtless appear in some future volume of his Archaeological Survey.

Since Gen. Cunningham's visit a third inscribed slab has been found.
A transcript has been made and sent me and a facsimile of it is herewith
given. I have not yet succeeded in decyphering it. It begins with the
word siddham ; then apparently followed the date, but unfortunately there
is here a flaw in the stone. After the flaw is the word etasya,* The second
line begins with the word Bhagavat, In the third line is the name J£a-

♦ The word following etaiya begins with the letters pu the remainder being
defaced, and was ysohMy purvaye. This phrase etasya purvaye is of frequent occurrence
in these inscriptions and is translated by Gen. Cunningham * on this very date'. I do
not think it can bear such a meaning. It might be literally rendered * after this* ;
but it is really an expletive, like the Hindi dyCy or occasionally the Sanskrit tad'anania*
ram, with which an Indian letter generally begins — after the stereotyped complimen-
tary exordium — and which in the absence of full stops and capital letters serves to
indicate a transition to a new subject.

Jouni, Aaiat. 8oc. Bengal, Ft I, 1878.

PLATE XXL

/

1

INSCRIBED SLAB,
Found at Mathura in 1878.

PALI IN80&IPTI0N.

Found at Mathum.

1878.] F. S. Grov^se—Matliurd Notes. 131

fhurd; at the end of the sixth line mdtapitroli; in the middle of the
seventh line bhavaiu sarvva.

2. The Bddhd'Sudhd-nidhi.

The delay which has occurred in puhlishing these notes, enahles me
now to add a translation of the text of the Sanskrit poem of Hari Vans. It
has heen written at a considerahle disadvantage, since here in Bulandshahr
I am unahle to consult the commentaries which I had borrowed at Mathura.
£)ven in this district there is, I find, at least one temple of the sect, at the
town of Shikdrpur.

TrOTislation,

1. Hail to the home, of Vrisha-bhdnu's daughter, by whom once and
again even Madhu-Siidan — whose ways are scarce intelligible to the greatest
sages — ^was made happy, as she playfully raised the border of her robe and
fanned him with its delicious breeze.

2. Hail to the majesty of Vrisha-bhdnu's daughter, the holy dust of
whose lotus feet, beyond the conception of Brahma, Siva and the other
gods, is altogether supematurally glorious, and whose glance moistened with
compassion is like a shower of the refined essence of all good things.

3. I call to mind the dust of the feet of Eadhikd, a powder of in-
finite virtue, that incontinently and at once reduces to subjection the great
power, that was beyond the ken even of Brahma, Eudra, Sukadeva, Narada,
Bhishma and the other divine personages.

4. I call to mind the dust of the feet of BMhik4, which the noble
milk -maids placed upon their head and so attained an honour much desired
by the votaries of the god with the peacock crest, dust that like the cow of
heaven yields the fullness of enjoyment to all who worship with rapturous
emotion.

5. Glory to the goddess of the bower, who with an embrace the
quintessence of heavenly bliss, like a bountiful wave of ambrosia, sprinkled
and restored to life the son of Nanda, swooning under the stroke of Love's
thousand arrows.

6. When will there visit us that essence of the ocean of delight, the
face of Bddhd, with sweet coy glances, bewildering us with the brilliancy of
ever twinkling sportive play, a store-house of every element of embodied
sweetness !

7. When shall I become the handmaid to sweep the court-yard of the
bower of love for the all-blissful daughter of Yrisha-bh^nu, among whose
servants oft and again every day are heard the soft tones of the peacock-
crested god ?

8. O my soul, leave at a distance all the host of the great and affec-.
tionately hie to the woods of Brindaban ; here Eadhd's name is as a flood

182 F. S. Qrovrse—Mathnrd Notes. [No. 2,

of nectar on the soul for the beatification of the pious, a store-house of all
that is divine.

9. When shall I hear the voice of blessed Rddhd, that fountain of
delights, crying * Nay, nay,' with knitted brows, as some gallant suitor, fallen
at her feet, begs for the rapturous joy of her embrace ?

10. When, oh when will Rddhik4 shew me favour, that incarnation of
the fullness of the ocean of perfect love, the marvellous glory of the glis-
tening splendour of whose lotus feet was seen among the herdsmen's
wives ?

11. When shall I attain to the blissful vision of the goddess of the
blooming bowers of the woods of Brindaban, her eyes all tremulous with
love, and the different members of her body like the waves of an overflow-
ing ocean of delight ?

12. O queen of Brindaban, I betake me to thy lotus feet, fraught
with the honeyed flood of love's ambrosia, which, planted in Madhu-pati's
heart, assuaged by their grateful coolness the fierce fever of desire.

18. Fain would my soul loiter in the woods sacred to Kadha's loves,
where the sprays of the creepers have been plucked by Kidhd's hands, where
the fragrant soil blossoms with B^hd's footprints, and where the frequent
birds are madly garrulous with Eadha's praises.

14. When, O daughter of Vrisha-bhanu, shall I experience the con-
ceit induced by excess of voluptuous dalliance, I your handmaid, charged
with the message, * Come and enjoy Krishna's dainties,' and answered with
the smile, * Only stay, friend, till night comes.'

15. Ah ! when i^hall I behold Hddhi, with downcast eyes, bashfully
stealing a distant glance at the moon-like orb of the face of the lord of
lovers, as she trips with twinkling feet, all graceful in her movements, to
the music of her own bangles ?

16. When, O Radhd, will you fall asleep, while my hands caress your
feet, after I have tenderly bathed you and fed you with sweet things,
wearied with your vigil through a night of dalliance, in the inmost bower,
in the delicious embrace of your paragon of lovers ?

17. O that the ocean of wit, the singular ocean of love's delights, the
ocean of tenderness, the ocean of exuberant pitifulness, the ocean of love-
liness, the ocean of ambrosial beauty and grace, the ocean of wantonness,
blessed Radhikd, would manifest herself in my soul !

18. O that the daughter of Vrisha-bhdnu, looking up all tremulous
and glistening in every limb like the flowering champa, would clasp me in
her arms, charmed by my chanted praises of Sydm-sundar, as she listens for
the sound of his pipe !

19. Blessed Radhikd, cool me with the multiplicity of love, that
breathes in the swan-like melody of the girdle that binds your loins red-

1878.] F. S. Growse^Mathurd Notes, 133

dened with dalliance^ and in the tinkling of the bangles, like the buzzing of
bees, clustered round your sweet lotus feet.

20. Blessed Eddhikd, wreathed with the surge of a Ganges wave of
heavenly dalliance, with lovely lotus face and navel as a whirl in the stream,
hastening on to the confluence with Krishna, that ocean of sweetness, draw
near to me.

21. When, O blessed Badhikd, shall I rest upon my head your lotus
feet, Govinda's life and all, that ever rain down upon the faithful abundant
torrents of the honeyed flood of the ocean of perfect love P

22. When, O Kddhd, stately as an elephant in gait, shall I accompany
you to the bower of assignation, to shew the way, bearing divinely sweet
fiandal wood, and perfumes and spices, as you march in the excitement of
love's rapture ?

23. When, O blessed B4dh&, having gone to some secluded slope of
the Jamuna and there rubbing with fragrant unguents your ambrosial
limbs, the very life of Love, when shall I see your prince of lusty swains,
with longing eyes, mounted on some high kadamh tree ?

24. When, O blessed B&dhikd, shall I behold your heavenly face,
clustered — as if with bees — with wanton curls, like some lotus blossoming
in a lake of purest love, or A moon swelling an ocean of enjoyment, an
ocean of delight.

25. Ah ! the name of Eidhd, perfection of loveliness, perfection of
delight, sole perfection of happiness, perfection of pity, perfection of honeyed
beauty and grace, perfection of wit, perfection of the rapturous joys of
love, perfection of all the most perfect that my soul can conceive !

170. O ye wise, if there be any one desirous of marvellous happiness
let him flU the pitcher of his ears and drink in this panegyric, called the
Sasa^sudhd-nidhi, or * Treasury of Love's delights.'

JBuland^hahr, April I5ih, 1878.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part I.— HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e.

No. III.— 1878.

The Song of Manik Chandra. — By G. A. GsiEBSOif, 0. S.

Introduotion.

In my notes on the Bangpur dialect, I promised to give an account of
the song* whose name heads this article, and that promise I shall now do
my best to redeem. I find, however, that the task has been more difficult
than I anticipated. I do not doubt but that king Mdnik Chandra, and
his terrible wife did once exist ; but the traditions current concerning him run
80 counter to ascertained history, that I have been able to discoYcr very few
grains of truth amongst the legendary chatE that has accumulated about his
name.

To begin with; the first name we meet with is a crux. Manik
Chandra's brother was a Fdla king.

Manik Chandra himself was certainly not a Pdla, for he was a
laniyd by caste, while Abul-Fazl describes the Pdlaa as Kayasthas.*
Moreover, I know of no dynasty of Fdla kings, containing names ending
in '' Chandra," like M^nik Chandra, Gopi Chandra, or Bhava Chandra.
The brother's name was Dharma Pal.

The following account has been drawn from various sources. I have
consulted Buchajetak throughout, and wherever his story differs from mine
in important particulars I have recorded the points of disagreement.

* Cf. however, Mr. Westmacott's article on the Pdl Kings, in Vol. LIX of the
Calcutta RtvieWf on which I have drawn froely, and gratefully, while treating on tho
present subject.
8

136 G. A. Grierson— 2%tf Sony o/Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

In the Dimld Thdnd situated to the north-west of Rangpur, and nine
or ten miles to the south-east of the suh-divisional head quarters of Bay-
dohard is the city of Dharma Pal. Buchanan thus descrihes it — ^^ It is
in the form of a parallelogram, rather less than a mile from north to south,
and half a mile from east to west. The following sketch (Fig. 1) taken
in riding round it, will enahle the reader more easily to understand it than
my account.* The defences consist of a high rampart of earth, which at
the south-east comer is irregular, and retires hack to leave a space that is
much elevated, and is said to have heen the house of the Rdj4's minister
(Divdn^hhdna) . On the east side I observed no traces of a ditch, nor gate ;
but a ditch about 40 feet wide surrounds the other three faces, f In the
centre of each of these is a gate defended by outworks, and in these
are a good many bricks. At each angle of the fort has been a small square
projection, like a sort of bastion, extending however only across the counter-
scarp to the ditch ; and between each gate and the bastion at the comer
are some others of similar construction. The earth from the ditch has been
thrown outwards, and forms a slope without a covered way. At the dis-
tance of about 150 yards from the ditch of the north-east and south sides
are parallel ramparts and ditches, which enclose an outer city, where it is
said the lower populace resided. Beyond these on the south is another
enclosure, in which it is said the horses were kept. Parallel to the west side
of the city, at about the distance of 150 yards, runs a fine road very much
raised ; but its ends have been swept away by changes that have taken
place in the rivers."

To the west of this city at a distance of two miles, was the city of
Mdnik Chandra, now, however, called, after his more famous wife Mayand
Matir kof^X

Here Mdnik Chandra reigned over the half dozen square miles of
territory which constituted him a rdjddhirdja. His wife Mayani was
deeply skilled in magic, an art which it appears in those days, though im-
lawful for a man, was lawful for a woman. § She was (so says the legend)
the pupil of a mighty magician who by his intense devotion to and abstrac-
tion into the Holy Name had acquired immense powers. His mere word
was sufficient to strike one dead. He could cause the sea to cease to move

• The plan given is Buchanan's, and is very fairly accurate. The city is noted
for containing within the inner walls three remarkably fine tanks.

t The ditch and rampart are called in Bangpur the Kof ( sr^ ^VTH «S T0i«
Wlft^ 'rf^WTK «^7f ^Jlf^T 31^ ) ^' A. G.

t iT^T MfHK #T«. This lady is said to have founded several other important
towns. Amongst names which still survive I may mention Mayand taUr hdf (mntr

{ Bee verso 60 of the poem. "*

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%tf Song ofMdnih Chandra, 137

and the lights in his dwelling burnt with surpassing splendour, though
only fed with Ganges water.

Now this man was a sweeper.

The Ha'di Siddha.

He was a Sddi, the caste which acts as sweeper in Bangui. In Rang-
por its impurity signifies nameless abomination, a fact which should be
specially noted. Bangpur forms part of K4marupa. Hither one of the
fire Fandavas never set his foot, and the land is consequently impure.
Its men are not as other men, nor its laws as other laws. It has a special
code of its own, most of which can be found in the Yogin{ Hhntra ; and
this law allows many things (such as certain kinds of flesh eating) to its
straitest sects of Br4hmans. Hence impurity in Wesfcem India frequently
becomes purity in Bangpur; while Bangpur impurity includes things
simply inconceivable in Arga varta.

The Ha4i of the poem, and of the popular legends of the present day
was a Vaishnava ; and as Mayana was also of the same sect (in which the
members are practically all of one caste) it is not impossible that she should
have had such a man for her Guru.

I say only " not impossible," for I consider it highly improbable, and
for the following reasons : — It is evident that the true story has been much
transformed in its passage from mouth to mout^, and I believe that the
principle recasting (i£ I may call it so) was due ta the influence of the
Vaishnava followers of Chaitanya. Translated into common English the
story is that Mayani's chaplain was a man of remarkable sanctity, whom
the populace credited with supernatural powers. He was a great saint, and
bis religion followed that of his historians. The Yogts who narrate his
history are at the present day followers of the teachers of the religion of
Yishnu (not, be it observed, the popular Vaishnavas, vulgo Boishfoms) ; and
they naturally claimed their hero as belonging to their own sect. It is
peculiarly the tendency of this beautiful, almost Christian, religion to preach
the doctrine of the equality of castes ; — ^how every valley shall be exalted,
and the rough places made smooth. The lowest amongst the low, — ^the
despised and rejected amongst men, is fully capable of attaining equal holi-
ness with the strictest Brdhma^ of the holiest sect which worships at the
shrines of Vfinddvana. Such being the case, what is more natural than
that the ignorant and illiterate members of the same religion, who (like the
Yogu) have the traditions of a missionary priesthood in their family, should
instinctively point out how even an abominable Hadi can attain the terrible
powers which their fathers attributed to a Vaiishtha or to a Durvdsa,

But, now that I have shown that it is quite possible for such an idea
to have arisen^ I would point out that the man who is now called the

138 G. A. Grierson— TAe Song ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

Hd4i Siddba cannot have been originally a VaUhnava at all, and was never
by caste a Hddi. He is still occasionally addressed as Haripa (not H&dipa,
or Hdripa), which is quite a possible name for a follower of Hari \ but
on going back even so short a space as the first decade of the present
century, we find that Dr. Buchanan, whose powers of observation are un-
questioned, describes the Guru of Mayan& Mati as a Yogi by caste, whose
name was Haripa while he never once mentions the fact of his being
Hddi, which is now much the commoner name. Now in the Bangpur
dialect, a is frequently lengthened, and r is interchangeable with d so that
the change from Sari to Sadi is easy, and such a change, having once
taken common currency, would have itself suggested the idea so pecu-
liarly Vaisknava to which I have before alluded. (Of. Max Muller^s
lectures on the science of language, for evidence as to the tendency of false
etymology and of phonetic decay in originating popular legends.) This
Haripa, according to Buchanan was the pupil of Kanipa,* who was the
pupil of Gorakshandth. Thand Dimla, where these Yogis live, is close
to Nipdl, and we must go there to find out who Gorakshandth is. I am
now writing in Supaul, in the north of Bhdgulpur, and not twenty miles
from the Nip41 frontier ; and what I have heard about him here, confirms
in a remarkable degree what Buchanan tells of him. The dwellers of the
low lands will have nought of him, and we do not find his cultus till we
reach the half savage Buddhist dwellers of the interior. Here we discover
a curious mixture of the Mahd Bhdrata and Buddhism. They say that
during Yudhish^hira*s journey through the pathless tracts of the Himalaya
to heav^en, his brethren (as we know) fell behind, one by one, and perished
miserably. Here, adds the Nip41i, only one survived, — the club-bearing
Bhima. He was saved by a Buddhist saint called Gorakshandth who after
performing many wondrous acts made him king over Nipal.f

* I know of no religions teacher called Kanipa. There was a Eanapa, who was a
toacher of the Jamg^ama sect of the S'aivas, (Mackenzie apud Wilson I. 227), who was
of some celebrity, and it is just possible that his name may haye been adopted by the
Yogis, who were originally a Skiva caste.

t The above is the popular tradition I have gathered from oral accounts. The fol-
lowing summary of what is noticeable about Gorakshan&th and the Yogis is gathered
principally from Wilson.

The first teacher of Buddhism in Kip£l, was Manju,who came from MahiLchin and
who made the valley of KhatmAnijIu, formerly a lake, habitable by cutting through the
mountains with his scymitar. He taught a pure form of Buddhism, which became
afterwards impregnated with Br&hmanical ideas through the invitation given by
Narendra Deva, king of Nip&l, to one Matsyendra Nath a teacher of the Fdiupata form
of the S'aiva religion. This was apparently about the 7th century A. D. This Matsy-
enctra was in reality the LokesVara Padmapdni, who descended to the earth by command
of the Adi Buddha, and hid himself in the belly of a fish, in order to overhear Siva
teach P&rvati the doctrine of the Yoga, and Wilson shows that Fadmap&iB^ came either
from the oast or from the north of Bang&l.

1878.] G. A. Qnerson—The Song ofMdnih Chandra. 139

It is quite natural that tho Buddhists should claim him as their saint,
but in reality he was nothing of the sort. He was a teacher of the Saiva
religion, and one of the reputed founders of the sect of Yogis, Whether
the Yogis of Bangpur are an off-shoot of the Nip&li converts, or whether
Gorakshan&th and his fellows came from north-eastern Bang&l, or from
Asibn, where the FdSupaia culius, whose followers finally became Yogis^
was established I cannot pretend to decide. I am inclined to believe in
the former hypothesis, for they themselves have a tradition, that ihey cams
from the west, having formerly been pupils of S^ankardchirya, who were ex-
pelled by him for indulging in spirituous liquor* Besides, they reject, to the
present day, the authority of Br&hma^s, and have their own priests ; and this
is just what would be expected from people coming from Buddhistic Nipil.
They rose too to power under a dynasty of Pdlas, most of the members of
which family were Buddhists. Be thift as it may, this much however
is certain, that at the time of M&nik Chandra, the Yogis practised a
Saiva religion and worshipped a deified teacher of their sect, also worship-
ped in Nipal, named QorakshanMh. Qorakshandth moreover, had already
supplanted Siva himself, and was alone worshipped by his followers.

The poem annexed bears abundant witness to this. At every Nodua
whether Tindiee digtius or not, he is brought in as a deus e» machina ;

Sixth in descent from Matsyendra Kith, in the time of spiritaal teachen, comes
Goraksha N&th, who, according to this, ought to have flouriBhed in the 8th century.
There must however he some mistake here, for it is known that Qoraksha Kith was a
contemporary of Eabir, and held a controversy with him which is extant fOorakh
Ndth hi OoahtAi, W. I. 213), and Eahfr lived in the 15th century. Hence, xmless the
list of teachers in the Safha Ftadipa (W. I. 214) is incorrect, Matsyendra Nath must
have lived at a much later period than that tentatively assigned to him by Wilson.
Another Karendra Deva reigned in Nipal in the 12th century, and it is possible that
it IS he who introduced Matsyendra K&th, in which case the discrepancy would not bo
so outrageous. But, here another difficulty arises, we find that we must date Goraksha
Kith's pupils' pupil as flourishing in the 14th century, a fact which agrees better with
the theory of Narendra Deva n ; but then, what becomes of Eabir ?

We have seen that Matsyendra Nath taught Fdiupata ShivUmf and it is a well
known fact that the Kdnphdid Togi$y to which sect those who sing the Mdnii Chandra
mmg belong, are the representatives at the present day of that form of religion. The
above account in no way tallies with the tradition mentioned Uter on, in the text, that
the To^ were errant pupils of Sknkaiichirya, nor is such a story borne out by the
Sbnkara Vyaya. In chapter 41, Sknkara successfully combats the Toga doctrine, but
he treats his opponents with a respect which he would never extend to backsliding
disdples (S. Y. c. 41. Bibl. Indica, £d. p. 198).

That the Yogis rapidly became an important sect is evident from the numerous
temples dedicated to Goraksha Kith, not only in Nipil but in the Panj&b and North
West Provinces. We read that the Emperor Akbar consorted with them. He was ini*
tiated into their learning, and, on one occasion, ate with them, at one of their festivals.

140 G. A. Grieroon— The Song o/Mdnii Chandra. [No. 3,

not as an ordinary saint, but leading the whole Hindd Pantheon, and the
oharacters of the Mahi,bh^rata to boot. It is GorakshaniLth, and not S'iva,
who grants a boon, or comforts a sorrowing widow on her husband's funeral
pyre. As he is considered in Nipil, so he is here, a saint whose austerities
have rendered him not only an omnipotent but The Omnipotent, and who
has always been proof against the charms of the most wanton Apsarases
ever sent for a holy man's seduction by a terrified Svarga, We are bound
therefore to assume that the guru of the Lady Mayana, whatever his
name was, and whom for the sake of simplicity we can call the Siddha
was a Yogiy i. e, a Saiva by religion, and professed doctrines which were pro-
fessed also by semi-Buddhist races in Nip^l.

As this introduction relates to the M&Dik Chandra poem, I shall, now
that I have stated my opinion concerning his identity, for the future call
him as he is called in the modem edition of the poem, the Hd^i Siddha.

Bharma Fala.

The Hddi Siddha was, as I have already said, of great power, but his
pupil Mayand, by dint of continued practice of her magic art, became
greater still. She could control everything but fate ; and the whole of
the poem is nothing but a description of her struggles with that resistless
passive energy.

According to universal tradition both in Buchanan's time, and at the
present day, her husband, Mdnik Chandra was brother of Dharma Pala.
This I have before shown, is an impossibility if the names are correct.

In order to obtain an approximate date for Dharma Fdla it is neces-
sary to consider two lists of dynasties. They are now-a-days the traditional
history, and they agree with Buchanan's account. The following are those
I have collected :

1. Dharma F41a.

2. Mdnik Chandra (his brother j died early).

8. Gopi Chandra.

4. Bhava Chandra.

5. A Pdla Edj^. Name unknown.

6. Here Buchanan reasonably suggests a period of anarchy.

7. Nila Dhvaja.

9. Chakra Dhvaja.
10. Nildmbara.

According to Buchanan, Nildmbara was defeated by Husain Shah
about the year 1500 A. D. ; and thus, allowing six reigns to a century,
.(a moderate estimate), we must date Dharma Pal as having flourished

■ ASUS. Boc-MKnatii.. i

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%d Song ofMdniJc Chandra. 141

about the year 1850 A. D. ; he certainly (if he ever existed, and if the
dynasty lists are true) cannot have lived much before the commencement
of the 14ith century, $ . «., before our English King Edward III.

Abul-Fazl- gives a list of ten Fdla Swings quoted by Mr. Westma-
eott ; and they became extinct about the middle of the eleventh century
thus leaving a space of 250 years to be accounted for. . Hence it need not
necessarily be determined that Dharma B4j^ was a member of the great
family of F&la Kings. Buchanan suggests that he may have represented
the remains of a family which survived the wreck of the dynasty, to save
a portion of the kingdom which remained unconquered, by the successors of
Adi Sura in Eangpur ; and the fact is not rendered less improbable when
we consider the history of the Hd^^ Siddha. We know that the F41a
kings were, when we first meet them, Buddhists and that subsequently
some branches of the family changed their religion to some one or other
of the many varying sects of Hindtiism. If then Dharma F41a ruled in
a country in which such a holy man was arch-priest, it is rather a
confirmation than otherwise of this theory. I myself think it certain
that Dharma F41a was a member, or descendant of the great F41a
family, for Dr. Buchanan gives an illustration of an image found in his
city, which contains the typical Fala emblem of an elephant borne down
by a lion. (Fig. 2.)

We thus I think can be certain of the following facts, — that early in
the 14th century a king named Dharma Fala ruled over a small tract of
country near the Karatoyi river in the present districts of Eangpur and
JalpaigurL That this Dharma Fdla was a member of the great Fala
family which once ruled over northern Bamga. That in his territory there
was a saint of considerable sanctity, then living, who professed tenets bor-
rowed possibly from Nip41. And that close to his capital city there lived
in a fortified stronghold a powerful chief named Mdnik Chandra, who was
married to a lady called Mayan^. It may be gathered from local tradition
that Mayana was an ambitious and designing woman, and that she acknow-
ledged the saint above-named as her spiritual instructor.

Between the king and the chief, according to local tradition, a war arose,
which ended in the defeat and disappearance of the former, and triimiph of
the latter, in a great battle fought on the banks of the river Hdngrigosha.
The battle-field i» still shown, a mile or so to the north of Dharmapur.

Ma^nik Chandra.

^ After this victory, Manik Chandra took up his residence at Dharma-
pur, while the Lady Mayan& remained at her old home Mayana Matir hot

142 G. A. Qneraon—The Song o/Mdnik Chandra. [No. %

probably to be near her old Guru, the ruins of whose home are still shown
in the neighbourhood.

The further particulars regarding M&nik Chandra will be gathered
from the annexed poem. Who he was we cannot tell, we must be content
with knowing that he was a neighbouring chief of Dhanua F^ and his
conqueror.

He appears to have governed at first with vigour and success. We
read of rustic wealth and security, and light taxation. The revenue
system is worth noticing, it was a peculiarly elastic and simple land tax.*
The land in those days was little more than a wild forest, and the soil poor
and barely cultivated. The sparse prajdi scraped with their flimsy ploughs
the surface of the sandy soil immediately round their homestead and strug-
gled lazily for bare existence. I suspect that, even in king M4nik's time,
life and property were not over secure, and under these circumstances it
was necessary that the taxes should be light. Each plough-owner was
therefore required to pay for each plough in his homestead thirty kdoru per
mensem.f Under the light taxation which may be inferred from this absurd
exaggeration of the text, the prajdt were necessarily happy and contented,
until Mdnik Chandra did what was in Bangpur the most unpopular
thing a zaminddr could do. He engaged a Bangui! Div4n. I have in my
previous paper enlarged on the hatred of the Bangpuri peasantry for a
genuine freshly imported native of the south, and I need not dwell upon
it here. Suffice it to say that the new Div4n fully bore out the character
of his nation, for he immediately doubled the land-tax. The result was a
rising of the peasants, and according to their account, the mysterious death
of the king shortly afterwards from the efEects of Eangpur fever. He left
no living child, but his wife Mayan^ was subsequently confined of a pos-
thumous one. The child was not bom till eighteen months after Manik*8
death, — and ill-natured people might feel inclined to consider Manik
Chandra's claim to the title of father not proved ; but the poem chivalrously
comes to the rescue of Mayan&'s reputation, and makes her pass through
a long series of puerile adventures (the old tale of Orpheus and EurydikS
with the characters reversed), and finally obtain from Gorakshanath, and
his attendant gods, the boon of having a son of such perfect vigour and

* The same Bystem prevails to the present day in parts of Nip&l, where the demand
for land is not so great as it is in the more settled British territory. A plough is there,
however, only considered as equivalent to eight bigas, the average rent for a plough
of land being considerably below that current on this side of the frontier.

t The text says 1^ ^m^ of k6orit» A bu4i is five gandas or twenty. One ^^i of
h&oria — a pice. 1^ pico a month » 4 ^Lnis, 6 pie, per year per plough. In the light
soil of Bangpur, one plough can easily cultivate fifteen higoB or five acres of land, so
that the annual land-tax was, according to the toxt^ loss than 8f pies per higa^ or tha#
a penny farthing per acre^

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2^ Song ofMdnik Chandra. . 143

virtue that it would take at least twenty-five months to fashion him.
As a matter of special grace he was presented to her with seven months of
his growth already accomplished, so that he was in fact horn only eighteen
months after his conception.*

During Mayani's pr^nancy she became tatt for her dead husband,
and mounted the pyre with his corpse. I need hardly say that the flames
refused to touch her, although the relations of her late husband did their
best to aid them, by thrusting her more and more into the flames with long
poles, t

Mayan& after passing through various adventures survives them all,
and in due time gives birth to a son, who is called Gopi Chandra. It is he
who is really the hero of the poem, and not his putative father who gives
it his name. All references to the latter end before the 154th verse, and the
remaining 550 narrate the fortunes of his son.

Apparently from the bii«th of her child, Mayan& deserted Mayani
matir kot and went to dwell in Dharmapur. She was a clever woman and
managed to keep up without great difficulty the high rates of land
revenue, which had caused the death of her husband. { When Gopi
Chandra was nine years old, it was time for him to be married, and so
Mayani looked round for a suitable match.

Ba)'a' HariV Chandra.

At the present day, seven or eight miles south of the ruins of Dharma*
pur, in the thin^ of Darv&ni, there is a village called Char Char4.§ Here
there is a large mound of earth called Hari^ Chandra Baj^ F4t, i. e., the
seat of king Harii Chandra.

Buchanan described it as a circular mound of earth about 40 feet in
diameter. " In searching for materials to build a pig-stye, the heap was
opened by an indigo-planter, and a building of stones was discovered. The

* The Yogis of course see nothing extraordinary in this ludicrous idea. They say
the events occurred in the Saiya Tuga^ when all things were possible. I asked a YogC
once why the child was presented to Mayanil already seven months deyeloped, and he
explained that it was " to prevent excessive scandal," which might have occurred if the
<duld had been bom twenty-five months after his fi&ther's death ! ! This is straining at
a gnat, and swallowing a camel with a vengeance.

t The description of this rite in the poem is curious enough : whether such con-
duct on the part of the relations was. common in the performance of it I do not know.
I hare been unable to identify Chind the merchant^ who figures in this part of the
poem with any other legend.

X I gather this from the last verse of the poem, from which it is evident that it
was not till Gk>p£ Chandra's return that the land revenue was reduced to its former level.

i IfK ^ITT i^ ifl ft short distance due east of the better known ^n?mi *MWTfic
MamgaijJ Typdmdri.
T

144. • G. A. Gnerson—The Song of Mdnik Chandra, [No. 3,

upper parts of this, consisting of many long stones, were remoyed, wben a
friend of more science in antiquities, recommended tbe planter to abstain
from furtber depredations. In its present state tbe lower part only of the
building remains and is a cavity of about 13 feet square at tbe mouth, and
8 at the bottom. The sides are lined with squared stones, which form a
deep stair on each side, and the walls are exceedingly thick. My description
will be more easily understood by consulting the plan (fig. 8). I have no
doubt that this is a tomb."

Since Buchanan's time it has been still further desecrated, and, now
little remains beyond the mound of earth and the name.

Harii Chandra had two daughters Adun^ and Padun4.* These he
gave in marriage to Gopi Chandra with a hundred maid- servants to wait
upon them.f By his eighteenth year Gopi Chandra had no child. It had
been foretold to Mayan4 that at that age he would die unless he became a
Sanny^i.^ So he prepared, much against his will, to go forth wandering
in the forests with the H^di Siddha. His two wives Aduna and Padun&
tried hard to persuade him to stay, and their arguments form, in my opinion,
by far the best portion of the poem (w. 24!3-302). They contain many
touches of true poetry.

This flight of fancy, however, almost immediately leads us into the
most unnatural — ^the profoundest bathos. The king tempted by his wives,
in order to put the correctness of his mother's words to the test, makes
her pass through the ordeal of boiling oil. Although the king has strength
of mind to keep his mother iq boiling oil for nine days, it is gratifying to
learn that he really was a tender and affectionate son ; for when he found
at the expiration of that time that his mother had been boiled to death, he
began to weep. Mayan4 of course was really not dead, she had only
changed herself into a grain of mustard seed, and soon reappeared in her
proper form. After the usual preparations, the king sets out on his journey
with the H44i Siddha. His minor adventures need not be recorded here.
He passed through many trials as preparations for his future, and finally
in an evil moment promised to let the H^i have twelve Mort9 wherewith
to buy gdnjd. When he would have given it, he found that the store from
which he intended to take it had been spirited away. Thereupon, rather

* In Buchanan, Hndna and Pudna.

t Buchanan says that Gk)pi Chandra had a hundred wives, but I can find no trace
of this in any modem legend. The maid-servants may have been concubines, but not
wives. They are the hundred damsels mentioned in verse 242. They are it is true
called queens in verse 410, — ^but that is only part of the gross and puerile exaggeration
displayed there, Adunil and Padun& being still kept separate.

{ Y. 241. The term Sannyasi should be noticed. It is the ordinary term for a
Skiva mendicant, Yairigi usually representing a Yaishf^ava one.

J0UKM-.jLaiA.1- aOC; fBKOAt. Ptl

ni:3.

Suisia >r Ta->)

.........

1 1

1878.] G. A. GrieTson—The Song of Mdnik Chandra, 145

than break his promise, he told his companion to pawn him for the money.
The Hd4i took him at his word to the hdzdvy where all the women fell in
love with him, which gives rise to an amusing scene. However they could
not afford tin twelve kdorts demanded ; so the Hi^i Anally took him to the
house of a harlot named Hiri.

'RVrsf the Harlot.

According to popular tradition, Hird is said to have lived at '' Ehold
Eufa a village in the west of the Dinajpur District." This place I have
been unable to identify. Mr. Westmacott, who has most kindly taken
much trouble in assisting me on this point, suggests that the place may be
ElioU Hafi, a village in the east of that District, where the Dinajpur and
Kangpur road crosses the river Karatoyd. There were lately extensive ruins
to its north, but they have been excavated by the Northern Bengal Eailway
people for ballast. This theory is not at all so improbable as it might
seem at first sight, for every tradition leads us to believe that Hira's residence
was near the Karatoya. Dinajpur is to the west of Rangpur, and if the
original belief was that KhoU Ku^d ( ? EhoU Hafi) was " to the west in
Dinajpur" the change for "in" to " of" need not surprise us. The locality
of Hird's house is not mentioned in the poem, but a reference to v. 658
will show that it probably was Ebola Hd(i.

Hird, of course, fell in love with the king, and, being a woman of pro-
perty, easily found it in her power to borrow the twelve Moris from a
neighbouring banker. The banker drew up the deed of transfer, conveying
Gopl Chandra to the harlot's sole use and possession for a period of twelve
years, and she then and there paid over the money, and took delivery. The
procedure of the sale is worth noticing (vv. 537-546).

After obtaining possession of the king, Hir4 had him bathed and
adorned in gorgeous apparel ; she then sent for him and tried to tempt
him, but though she exerted all her fascinations, and the king was almost
yielding, she failed ignominiously, Gopi Chandra piously remembering
his mother's parting words.* Indignant at her repulse the harlot went to
the other extreme, and put him to perform the meanest and vilest offices of
her household. The king was continually ill-used, and beaten, and one
of his hardest daily labours, was carrying twelve hhdngi loads of water
from the Earatoya to her house.

On the last day of the twelve years he went to draw water a^s usual,—
but his strength failed him and he fell into the river.

* Gopi Chandra is much lauded for his continence, but, as it appears that tho
Ha^ before leaving him made him a neuter, there is really little ground for credit.

146 G. A. Grierson— l^e Son^ of Manik Chandra. [No. 3,

The beguming of the end.

When the king left his home, his two queens retired from the outer
world and shut themselves up in a well-guarded palace. The hundred
concubines appear to have become the willing property of a foundling
called Khetu, whom Majan& had cherished and brought up together with
her son. This man had subsequently entered Gopi Chandra's service, in
the days of his power.

Adund and Padun& set themselves to playing dice, for they knew that
as long as lucky numbers were thrown, the king their husband was well.

The dice continued to fall prosperously until the king fell into the
Earatoyd, and then they fell in disarray. A parrot and his mate beheld the
tears of their mistresses, and consoling them, ofEered to go in search of
Gopi Chandra.

After some days* the birds found their master, and gave the message
of his queens. The king, thereupon wrote a letter on the leaf of a wild
plant which g^w by, and sent it by them to his mother, who on receiving
intelligence of her son sunmioned the Hdji, who in his turn went to
the king.

The H&di then proceeds to distribute poetical justice all round. All
the woes which Hird had inflicted upon Gopi Chandra, she is made to suffer
herself. He then cut her in two, her upper half becoming a bat, and her
lower half a minnow.

The Harlot's maid-servant was cursed to become as her mistress had
been, and in her old age to marry a peon, who would beat her every day of
her life. Finally we have the fruit of all the king's penance in his being
imbued with a knowledge of the magic art by his eating a filthy mess of the
Hill's concoction, and he returns home, still however wearing his pilgrim's
weeds. His maid-servant was the first to see him, but she did not recog.
nize him. His own wives wavered in their recognition when he denied
his identity. The only being that did not hesitate, wa;s his faithful ele*
phant who made obeisance to him while he was yet afar off.

After the usual festivities Gopi Chandra again ascended the throne,
and made his subjects happy by fixing the land revenue again at the old
rate of thirty kdojrie.

Concluding remarks.

Such is the epic of Rangpur, containing here and there a tiny pearl of
interest, hidden amidst the rubbish, which is mainly presented to our view.
I have ventured to write so much about it, and to submit it to the Society
for three reasons.

* There is considerable confusion here amid dates*

1878.]

G. A. Grierson — Tke Song ofMdniJe Chandra,

147

First, I believe that men more competent than I, may be able to add
a little to the history of the P4la kings, after considering it. Second,
because it exhibits a. curious, and most instructive lesson as to how a purely
STaiva hero celebrated by men of a S^aiva sect has given rise to a poem of
STaiva foundation, but of yai8h];iava superstructure, and sung by the de-
scendants of these same men. Nay more, how a distinctly 9aiva sect, has
become to all intents and purposes a Yaishnava one, while it still retains
its old gods, and its old heroes. It would not be difficult to find parallel
transformations in more modem religious history. Thirdly, and more for
this reason than any other, because it is a very fair specimen of the peculiar
Bangpuri patois. And here it may be noticed, that any parts purely and
distinctly Yaishnava interpolations or additions {e, g, the introductory lines)
are written in a Bengali much more classical, than the rude language of
the ?aiva ground- work. This will be evident to any one who pays attention
while reading.

The song is usually sung by four men, — and in parts, not in unison.
I am not sufficiently acquainted with Hindu music to give the technical
name of the chant. It certainly is the only song I have heard in this
country in which harmony is introduced. The top notes of the chant are as
follows :

To he 9ung an octave lower than written.

This is sung chant-like, so as to go once to each line, but leaving the
three last notes without words. To these last three notes, the words '* He !
Bdj& !" " He ! Mayan& !" '^ He ! Yame !" or some such apostrophe which
depends on the person whose adventures are being immediately narrated,
are sung as a sort of burden. An example will make this clear. Take the
first line of verse six. It is sung thus —

8ro Baeao ...

>••••

manikchandra raja bangabiU^ sa- ti He r&- ^k

I do not give the harmonies of this, because I cannot. I tried to
reproduce them on a harmonium, but though I believe I got the separate
notes of each part correctly first on a violin, from the mouth of each

148

G. A. Grierson — The Song ofMdnih Chandra,

[No. 3,

siiiger, when I tried them together I got nothing but a common-place sort
of chaDt, containing one or two conaecutiTe octaves, and not a particle of
the spirit of what I had just heard simg. The aboTe is the music of the
narrative portion of the poem. Each '' duy&J'* has a separate melody of
its own.

As the song is sung, the upper part is accompanied in unison on the
%annga^ of which an illustration, taken ,from Buchanan is appended.

(Fig. 4.) The open note is tuned to E flat

P ^

and the higher notes are formed by pressing down the wire on the various
projecting knobs over which it passes.

In conclusion, as I stated in my former paper, the poem is in many
places unintelligible to every body I have met. In such places (mtya yug&r
kathds) the singers have sometimes traditional interpretations. In one or
two cases, however, they do not profess even to such : and, I trust, that
I may be pardoned under such circumstances for giving a literal transla-
tion, without attempting to educe sense out of the arrant nonsense thus
arrived at.

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%tf Song of Mdnih Chandra. 149

^if^ ^ri^ ^RTT ^j7? H^ ^nf ^ I ^

5)^ ^rar ^?E^fi3I^ <n% lira iTff: ^tfc I «

^i^ ?5^ mc^ ii^OT ^ir: I

^ 3^ ^fft lft% ^T^RT ^^"^ I

irefir ^^iTC ft^ irter ^ft^ ^ I '^

^^ ^^^ W{ 'rra 1TO ^5nj I c

$cT infiwr ^^ TisfT ^i[ijT •n^ ^^ i

f^ nf^ TifTf pF^ m^ m^^fT I \*

^ I i|^ I The uBual form for Noxn. Sing, in Rangpnrf. See my '^ Notes."
Moct of the irregular grammatical fomui contained in this poem will be found therein,
and hence I shall not usually draw attention to them here, n ^ | Wt^K ^Tf^99 ^

152 G. A. Qnerson—The Song ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

rfHr ^^ ^rt^ ^nr wrw iitc ^rc i

Tw ^ infiwr ^wr <\^\^ ^iPti*{i ^iPm^ ^w: i 8\

WTO ^niTl" infinir ^wr <i^i< ^rft ^ i ^\

^dC 'TOT Tffnft 6^1 iT^piTC «I<N< I 84

iT ^TOT ^Pi*ii 'tipr 'TT ^rrf'OT ^?iT I

%5|" %5|" '^WT 'wnwT pR ^n^ B 8d

v^ ^^ ?!f?r If ^TT 11^ trw I

%5 firf^ ^5iTC fef^ iFincii flpfl^i I 1^

»• I ^i^r^w = ♦^(^ H H9I ir^=wniirii «^ i ^-»?rf^

H

1878.] G. A. Grierson — The Song ofMdnih Chandra, 163

WN 5fe 'WT ft% ftpTO *lft^ I

* $ Ti^TTC iTfri ^Tfift^ finji I 11

tm ^W^ ifT ^i^ i?^ ^5^ I 1*®

^w\K aiS^K '^R 'Nrt %ra ftrftc^ i

► ^Wl< ^1%^ f^ ^ ^ fli^IT^ I 1^

'TWrc W^ ^ WSJ ^ ^lft?{T I

i ^fpc ^w spff QT^ ^rnr ^^l^an r <8

154 G A- Grierson— T»^ Sam^ ofMamik Oiamdrm. [No. 3,

XX9K ^m ^ MW\ ^IW ift^ WZ I
^^^ ^Hftft HTOTT Hi? ?[^ ^WW T^ I

cw iiw< ^snati ft^ 1^15 wfz^i i <^

^ff^ ftfe wrar f^rera: iif^ i <^

wii fl[^ wn 5|iiT>^^ %T^;n[^ I '^^

TOC iTOK fRPC 'IT infiST I

il'pir ^f'WT TTV ft^ 41^ ^rf^WT I ^8

Wl^ ft'TT ^Brtcf W( iN tlf^'^l I 'fi^i^

^c I ^H = ^«9 I ^^1 59f^= ^^^ I

1878.] G. A. QnerBon— The Song of Mdnik Chandra. 155

Wi: ^ «R f^RJT 'IT^ Wf^ WR^l I

^Cl[ IHETT ^[PWT OTiTT 0<i^ *R«<1< Trt^^ I

^n^ ciPir 5r$^ ^iw 'f'piT ^rra^ 'irfc^l

wrra ftp'^ ^wtTT ^figw I ^

^nf»T inn td[t ^ i ^in: irt f^ ^ ^i^i^ i ^^ i ^i^

^ww ?rI^ ITO 'T^ **llJilW.l ft^ I ^8

1CTC1CTC 5^ ^ m45^^ ^?t I ^

wfT «n^ fwv ^wftf 5^ ^^'''^ ^ ^^ •

ITCR THW ^, WlfT 'n^ ftpjT *lf^

^n ^ireT ^ft^ ^npn iTCR ^RTT *r<^.i I ^

^TR^ ^nfii^ ^ift^ yp^s^ I

156 G. A. Qrienon—The Sang of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

'w^ ^rniT ii'sprr infiw ^ i
^ft^iiT 3jf5i^ inp fro wif^f^ TPRPi I

$^ w JiW 'TT ^^m TTCT TOT I

K^i^ 'nil Ti:% ^(V^,i*| »<5W ft^ I t^*^

S^ ?rf ^'^^ ''^ ^nrr^ wrf^ I
^iftj^ wiw mc^ 1^ ^<Mn*{i I

ISTC ^W^^ ^liTO Pt ^ ftt|^ I

1878.] G. A. GneKon—The Song ofMdnih Chandra, 157

^ Tf^ ^ft^ ^ f^€T THCT '^I^ I

iNwt w^ET inc^ T^w wftrarc ^nfii^ ii t,*'®

^ ^11 ^;?^ ^RT'TT iCT^ *r<*ii I

w? ^R?rr ift^ ^sTfra ^ift^ 3Hti7{T ii \*^

^rt^ 'w^ T^ ^rro^ ^wrw ii \\\

u^n^^ ^ ^TRHw ^HOTw ursj II \^,R

5? ?r^ ^rf^ '^^ «iTC wrf^ I

Wa ^R*IW ^ft^ ^TiW uft^ 3Tt^ It \\^

ip%8n[ if^n^ i?^ j(^m, m^i:^ wrf^^ i

frit IPI ^ic^ rft^ ^iW ^^<i< %T<^\ II \\8

g^i^n^fw TOT 5^ <I^^IM.I I

^RTWif wrfii^ m ^^ftn^T II W*

^wi f% Prf»i% ^"t^ inprr ^ft ^rrtft ii \\<

^^ wpi 5nf?r §^ ^ ^ I

^^(^< ^ ?i^ l^ipp: isrnira qpi ii \\>o

^lFq^1[^ Wp!T iTTO^ 'llft^jT I

$^5T^ ^fW Tf^ TETTT ^W ■<«<i!lC^t II \<,^

m«rw ^PTiRT infti^ ^^ ^f^ I
ic^ irnrr ifhr ^riw ^c^r ^tftprr I

^5^ ^^ 'RfojT TO^ ^3nW ^IpT^T II W<1

^•< J ^BBTCsr^^n

15S G. A. GrieTson—The Song ofMdnih Chandra. [No. 3,

^^5TT ^li'T iTSTiTT ^pwr: ^rft^ I

ftn^TC^ fti^w ^nw Tnwnw ii

TOrft ^'TC 'W^ wf ^ ir^ II \RR

ftiftrcr ^Tsr j[f^ ***{^i ^iixr ^^^smpjr i

^ Tic$ jft^ ^m ftw in:^ v^ i

fl5^K ^q ^nW 1^ 5R^fnpp 11 \^^

*f3«ii ^^5ft^ ^TnTi?r mfiiTO iiftpji ii t,^

§^^ ^i^ irSt §^^^ trr^ i

$5qi^ ?i^ ^f^rarc «nwT^ irq ii ' t.'^^

'lit ^|T^ ^ic^ wpa i!:^Rnc «ift:^ i

Ta^\k w^ ^^ ^=RriTT 5^ ^^^nP{T ii ^'^^

Tnrr inc<! ift^ ^rwc ^jfri^rni ironw i
^^f^^^rtt^^iT^l'

^ \__

^nx^ 11^ ^nc^ Hwr ^Tk^i II ^^^^i^

^^l< 3TO ^nc^ ^TTOT ^ift^ I.

%^rc ^T^ft^ 'nfjpsjT JNt irfiRrr i

^^;^^ I W =5 W « \^« I JT^TWr^ = c;** e^>/ H \^8 I f W^ = ^T'Sk I

1878.] G. A. QrierBon— The Song ofMamh Chandra. 159

iri'lFq ^l[^ ii^TT itWTC «Rf<*j! I

^ infif ^1E^ »TTOT ^TTT «I^^IW.I II \^<

^^TC ^TT^ttc •iif3r*ji im ^twr \

'Rf W'BII^ *IWl< ^5TC ^?T^ ^ft^ If ^^^

M\^< wm^ wwTC TT mf<*{i ^

^ft^ ^m xrwnc^ ^i^f^ ii ^9\

'ntif^^ ^jit^ iiiprT iJWTC ^ift^ fi

$!f rft^ ^RTO ^ft^ ftfg^ I

^Tpr ^flr g^^Pi m^i^ ^^?r ^ft^jr i

if^pTTC 'IWT ^8W^ 'tW^ WT5?l% ^iP^^ir I

wnf^T ^RTC ^r$ ^:^ •ifiR crrI' I ^^i t^e^

X

160 O. A. Querson--The Song of Mdnik Chandra, [No. 8,

5R 9T ^rfc^ inpiT 9Tn: wif^^ i

^PBTRinc ftfen ^inftw *dwr ^%^r: i

^13^ ^ Tift ^ ^t^cm ^v^ II \«.*

^^ ^w 5Pr Tift^ fin: iNsr t\w Tut it ^i\

^rrorc ^ iirrr ^ Tiw wfc^ i

irr^flf Tra^ ^rtt nf^ wfti^ ii \ir

^rwnc 5gnft vr TnfMI Hfic^

ifir^ TTO Tir %rT %TirniTC ii

TT TT 'nimft'Tnr ftirnr t^: i
%TiRi ^PwiT TrnfNirf^ i

W6l< in% TW ^Pw T?9^ 'Wf 1

^ ^T ^if^ni TT V^ ^RT II \\J^^

T 'IWr ^[pRJT iRJTT TT ^nftW ^ |

^IWTOTC 'npw THOT ^3Tf5c*r flr^ ii ^^\i^

HISTC f!^ im ^iftRT II ^\j^^

TTIT ^pfT 1^ f^ iZpf^ firfif faf^ |

^inPT ^TtnW Wrfil^ ITRT «Rft^ (I ^^^*

\8c I ^fw = ^ftr N u« I irrr^n: = ? iw ii \«.^ \ fwms? w.W

1878.] G. A. Grierson— iV*^ Song of MdniJc Chandra. 161

g^ ^pc wfiF'iT %^y\T< tnim^ i

irjfi^ *fttrt 'nfii^ «rft< iftrrt ^nflt *^ \<«

^^rc ^ftpl" f^rat ^n^rft^ 1

^(far inf^f^ Krtipr mfOT 1 \<t

iirc fire ^^nprr iNf if^rc TTft I

^Tkmx fiw ij^ ft« ftjOTCVr I \«

w^at Twt ^iwn ^ftwi ft*j ^ I

w^ ^nftpfT 9fTC ^nftil ^Pi^ fiwi: 1 \<^

IRT^ «PS ftp^'^ '''P^ ''^ 'wfliw I i,^^

HT^ Hrft ^R'pIT ^CWf '^fi^i I

53^r: ^ftpl" ?nwnf ft^ ^wnc^ 1 ^^«

wpw wnrnpTT t^ th ^:* tfiri r,'®^

162 G. A. Qriermn—The Song of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

^nnp^'f 'rt^ 'W 'iwc ^ ^iwc Rhr 'iw ft^ I

'i'^ ^ 'iiRT wre WTO miw I

'Hw f^ 'wt ^iw 'T^ wpPTC fiw?: I

ftW 'f^ ftw ^^ HTW WW I \^*

ftW TT ^ mV( ^EW^ I \^

l^KTW^? fir W^'WW WICI

ipfe^fw ^rw ^fixT ^TP^ fi^wK I

Pit %^ ^ ^trtr: wxwx I \^

§^1^ 5^ ft^ ^ffTW iftin^ I \^8

%^ ^% mw.ww wiTCTT Pit ^tr^t i \^*.

frnr ftf 'wft uw ^T^ ^w^ f3wc i

^IWW ift^ 'IT ^ 5|^Rr HT T'l 'TO I

\«» I ^^ = ^fWT n \^B I w% ^nt= ^fwn? n

1878.] G. A. Grieraon— .2%^ Song ofM6nik Chandra, 163

'iwc M [Tkm [< ^fwrt mw fww i \^®

^ w*l*(m fife %ni^ ^rawi* ^mPu^ ^ftnp i

^mper ^t^ ^'cnT %^ ^bhpif ^rfb?T i \^^

fipnf 'RfojT ^iTift <Fni^RT ^fifinrr i \£.*

^npn iifcra «iiRi< ^ifi:^ irfwr ^t^raj i

fipTTT «nlV.<(i ^ireiT ^fW ^if^njT II \«L1^

^ iip4 jj^[ ^[^ n«rv^ I

^ITTH ^^IW ^fi^JT »l^ *im^l< '^nftw I <,«L8

^g^mwr ii^prr 'nft^ 5f^ii^ I

iTwNni sfe %nr?T mk^iw ^ofOTi i \ei

^ftRjr

^it^ ^^ ^nfV^i ftt% Ti'fr ^frf^ I \«L«

\c» \ ^ro =3ifft:^Tif n

164 G. A. Grierson— I^ Son^ of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 9,

jpM ^V9 nM^iA ^rtftr wn ^ ^ i

^ ^?w IT f^ ^wrr wPk irnc i '^•^

^ 'lit i^wc 'TO ^iwrr ^t^tw ^5fi?rr i

^ftii 'nft ^1*^1 ^TOT iit^ w: I v^

trW" if^iTC Ttf^ ^ ^rft^ ^ftr^rr i

^nfir wtfk inf% infti 'iifl^rT ^w ftt ^w u
wnftr ^rrfir ^Riftr 'wftr ^fk^} ^ ftf iw i

^ ftf ^ 'IWT iC ^fTT *fV^ I ^<^\

f^ ft^ iTwr f^rar ^ift^, ?EWhw 'nft'ipc ^nfin^ i

iRmif^ ^wra vfNif ^TCTCT I

?r? lEif^ i?^ iifif wig Tp[^ %ftw I '^^i^

^ifti ^inftr vjftr ^iifwr ^[ftirr ^w ^cB^ ^CT I

iW ?w^ ^ ^CTi ftf ^wftro I ^\8

^«n^ wftr *pL*ii iihi 'W^TOT I

^ntr 'iHw ^cww T^WT Rwnro i

^iPi ^Krtt ^R^i fTw ^cB^ in[^ I '^^^^

\^t I «fTff = »nfti R ^\i I M^^jn^] ^^^ = ^^ N

1878.] G. A. GTierBon-^The Sang of M6nik Chandra. 165

^irfii ^cw! ^ift?jr 'wt ww^ ^T^ I

?rBl% WTTT irf^ ^Tf ^rw ^rft^ I R\t£.

lin: ^ ^TO ^J^TT H^'TT ^RIT ^fM^ I

$ ^WT ^ft^ 'n^iT Hi^rc 'IT ^nf^ ^^ I

Tft "^m Kim< wv^ 3t^ ^it^ II ^^^

Tft ''W ^TifT ^f^ gftWJ 3fT% ^wt I

^ fts^ ^rfr "^m ^cwr ^rf^^ f'j^ m^ i ^^^g

irfiw HTfR: ^if^ ^ iwTO I 3^3^i

^t: di«|fi fJpir ftrww ^rft:^ i ^5^^

_^ •^^

ic iHETT ttPi^i m^pi wpiTC innr ^w 1 ^i^<

1^ inc^ ^R^ ^rnv ^inwm'r 1

IRJI m'l *iri«tl< Jl^ WT^Hf T^ Vf I '^l^^

^^« I ^fi^rnf -^ WT^rw •

166 G, A, Qnerson— The Sony of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

inf int^ i[Wi: ^n^ Tftr'W <i*ii<. "^^^^ ^if^ t

%rTNft ^n^ ^Tfif iwnc *j<ii.^ i ^^»
vm ^Tx^ ^wna ^nPw ^ra ft^ i

^ ^ w? *rwK ^ntSw I ^i^\i

iwrc inpn ?ifSr ^Rf <w< xiwre (Swispr isft:^ i '^^d

%1W ^iPn UITT ^fWt "^WTO f?[^ I ^8»

W9 M\^{K WITT[ni ?RITO ^T^ ^ I ;^8^^

J[^ ^r5r% ^rfr ^^n^ ^iritc ^ctt juj<i41 i ^sti

'WlfJ? TT^t ^Rf ^rf^ ^rtft ^f^ '^'^^ I ^8<

OTTt ^PC %^ 3lft Hl^ ^flfiR lan I

^r^ ^rra g^ TT^ fiRT ^TOT ^3!^ I MS

^»M ^rjTPft ^m if^iJFw II xm i^ = ^i^R x^%\ f%jr«=fMn

1878.] Q A. Qrierson—The Song ofMdnih Chandra, 167

TiftPir i^RiT ^r«Ti ^^nft i Ri»

ftift 'thr: ^t^ i?^ 5^1 ^nw ^f^ r s^i^

ftr'wf »nf^ Pi^ng^i f^ <ri<jf)^ ^«m*i ^rar i

VT ^rt^ 5^^ Ti[§ *n^T ^it% ?iTftg I

Tj^rr ^ ^ ^RiT ^fft ^psr^ ^ft i

TT^ T^ "Ml**! fHwrif ^ira %7srr ^srrsi i

^ ft[^:^ ^rfti% ^Bnfit«T ifrtt ^rcr i ^i^

1T^ ^IRT ^Bnfit«T ?if f)i<^ ^ f^ 3flC I

T

168 G. A. Grienon— The Song ofMdnih Chandra. [No. 3,

^ ^ ^ i!T ^i^t?nc frir ^ I

%^ ^ ?5r: ^TO ^f^ ^^ I

%^ ^TO 'T'r: ^to 55§t ^re^ w{ I '^^^

wt ^bir: ^i[% irf^ iro ^Tprr ^ \

y^iK ?Erif 5iif ftc ^^ ^ u^ ^1^ I

^ 5^ 'Rw -^ ^ Mi^HK ^3tn:^ I '^^e*

iST^ i|i% 5|m^ ^n^ ^fw «inc ^^ i

pRT 'iwi? W7T IFS'R ^Tf^^ iRcW I R'®^,

gt^ ^ ^ ^[^ wrfir ?iWTC ^RfT I
iOTf ^ig iPTi: TTCt ?n^ ^ft^irww \

\^\i I nftw = Hir^i ^fft:^ n

1878.] O. A. Grierson— I%tf Song ofMinih Chandra. 169

<ins^

^wi^ ni4ii %f<^.i *j wi «i^ tip5i*{i «iii*<i ^WTC ^srfir I
^rht: mil ^rm Hre ^pc ^otiOi^t: %5 «nic i

^4^1 v^ ^{fk^i ftwTf ^rftw I
^55'iT iw ^ic^ ?[ret f^ ^Hf I

'ft^TC TnOT ^5^ ^RT ^"RcT $fi9^ I

Wlli T\J ^TWt fK^ 'WTcT fiTOT ^ I '^^l^

F'sit iiw ^rw ^ ^rer ^w i

^iw^^fcqr mftr ^(^ ii^ra 1 '^^

^^ ^JITOT %TOT ^ 5^ irftfli^ II ^^^

?J^ ^W ^ ^RIT Tft ^Wf^ %Z\ I

mil ^ ^f^ ^Twr fro ^^ ^T^T I

170 G. A. Grierson— TAtf Sang e/Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3^

^ l!^^ ^lf<'*'l< IT ^ flic H^ I

^T^ ^T ^ ^1^ <r^^ ^WK I

5^ ^I'TO ^fia^ ^fti^TO vreft^ I j^^^

'T'qT ^TsiK in ^f^ iu^ir ^n:^ ^^ftnscr i Rd.»

f^lPr "^ITqT T^ T^ ^TTO iilfij ^T^ I

ijj4^i^ wr; '^[tt tr% ^fM^i I

^nft ?t^ i^t: ^m gf^T ^tict^ ^ i
'eft'in: 4i<«id f^ ^isrr 5^*r ^prro i

ift Tt ^^*JK ^fe ^rra f^ 'I'rtft I

^ T^ t^ ^lf<^ ^laiTO ^^ ^RTOt I ]^o|^

^ft« 1 ^r^ = ifT^ II ^« I 5^ =5«r «

1878.] G. A. Grieraon— 2%ej Song ofMdnik Chandra. 171

^TC ^rflf Jj^ tIt Jlft cITO I

flTUf ?r^5PT ^(iiti inft ^nft i

l^g^R: f^raw T? fine f¥ WRBTf?: I v<

%«r i|Pr ^T^ 1IF8I ^"^ w^ I ^•^

^^1^ ^t^ ^rft ^^ vw ^^3^ ^ I

if^ ^cpir iT^ 'RTO qic^ ^nftr^ I

3pi Tf Wfsflf WW ^CTT^ ilT ^9T^ I
• ^Rirft^ ^Xl TCT IHOTT ^lf% VX^ I H\«

^TT f^ IT ^^* cftr VTRB^ PiftIK I ^\e

= ^ifif * ^\^ I ^T =ft?ft^ n ^\^ I m^T = ^1^ I cl the Braj BhiOiA

fnUR

172 G. A. Grierson — The Song of Mdnih Chandra, [No. 3,

icPr i%i; gtw ^T^T iiii[^ I ^j ^^o

»«, Tm ^ ^Tt^ Wh -rti^ , ^^^

jfNra ^g^ Tpw %TC ti^ I

^mPii^

^'^^

1878.] G. A. Qnerson—Tke Song of Mdnih Chandra. 173

vsH^< ^w41 iiTftw gf^wr I ^^9

^CT ftT 51[ ftT I|^ f^ 'VIC^ I

TX^

ftc ^HTUT ^%if gflr ?:ra ^T^^^ I

ir? «iwr ^^ fii^ ?n^ <«i^i. n ^^^^^

?tTOR: «iiJW pR irfcw ft^rc 'rt^* 1 ^8\

«t «t irPpTT 'BFTO frim ^ ft^ 1 ^8i

t^RT flfim WPIT ?f^ ^l^ ^li?^ I

Ji^'ffw 5ri^^ 'rf^ ^^ ^ ^trat Mif^^fl I ^8^

^M« ^wft 'n^ ^rot gf^^ 1

'T^ ftT ♦*n.*ji ^siTO ^'Rt f%^ *f<^i I ^8^

R8* I Ji^nc =jy» 11

174 G. A. Grierson— I%tf Song ofMdnih Ohmdra. [No. 3,

lit W ^TCT ^■'WT ^WTC ^iftjSJT I

irn: 5W irnrf^ ^of^ 't^wr: ^3ir: i
v?fi ^ isH^i ^nc^ ^^<T ^pL^j I

t^rc ^IWT %^?T^ ^Tf^'^jr I ^tJLl

^^ TI^ ^ ^ra ftW ^TO ^K^ I

^ '^w^ ^R^ ^TTO^ ^srarf^ R

inr ^rt^ 'TO ^^n: ijiw?: ^mr: i n«i<

%^ iT^ iT^ «ir?Ti[ ^rTi?jf ^irt^ I

^fTisr %TT ^^TK ^mc^ T^nr «hf<'^j i

U!l I TO = ^ft tt ^H,^ I 1?K^ = oyc (Norn. Plur.) II

1878.] G. A. Qnenon-^The Song ofMcmik Ohandra. 175

^rf^c ^j^^Of^r ^crar ^i5m ^^ iR^ i

^fTwr 'iPB ^j^n ^^ijr ^ift^g ^if^ iww i ^<^

^T^ ^ ^T irrj ^ir *{X^i 'inj^ 15^ 1

%rarni 5r^ *iti[ ^roi mf ^frg 1

^rm 'nft^ iifiB^wr Tif^ 'wfiil B H>©H

^ 1TOT tiPi^ii ^ 'TT ^nf'CT ?r^ I

iiftpn: ^nnw ^nfir^ 5Nf ^rf^rat i H«8

z

17C O. A. Grienofi — The Song of M6nik Chandra. [No. 3,

^iCTT ^ft TOW ^ nftOT»r ^fbiT I

5iri 'it^ vi^\ ft% JinT^r gftwr i ^^e^

vwwrtr: ?ftwT utrt ^prnw i
«nic^ 3if[^ ^ftwT in^^rif^ 'ffrnw i

%w ftiw w5f ^rw 51c ^ifk^ I

%W ft*!! Wff ^H^ St? 'Rftf qf^ I

V^ ^ ^(fc^ qfwi^ ^%^ qcft^si I

<i^i<4l« ftf TTSTT ^ 'W $ft[% I

^ ft^ ^ ^TfT fi^ ^wr I

^ ^«i5t ft^ ^ ^Tin^ ^fij 'TOW f^T I

ftin^t^f^^TOT^ 'npff ^ tw I

^iK ftrf 52^ ft^ ^iTOT 'BrFst ft^ I ^^

1878.] G. A. Qnerson—The Song ofManik Chandra. 177

^TT^t ^[C^ W^ ?tWW fro %^nT ^BTOT I 1^1\

^4aK liferiT ^% 'IHTT HTW: ^Ipft I

^^rr ^n^ ^TTOTTT gfiRTT W^T Hlt% I
in?Nf ^fipTT ilTIT.% TtWW ^IW< WT^ I

ftifit^ji ^Tjf^ f^ 5i^r i^r: Trf% I

ftfw^ wwR ^% ^TC «rrc mt% i i^^.<

^W^nC ^Wl^ W9^ *ll^K 'RJ I ^d.^

% wn{ ihr ^fTO ^ ^inc^ nw ^i^ i

irft^Rc iT^^nr mOi^j 31^ ^iftra T i
«TC irrarfi: TPiTT ^ ^JTRT ^W I

^ruf w^ ^TT^ifir in^ ^n^ w^ irrar i

■ - ■ ' « —■

178 O. A. Grierson — The Song of Mdnik Chandra, [No. 3,

niri*|i^< ^z^ «in^ ^T^ ^crpr fTwt i
^nw ^rrpr ttw w^ ^nw ^wt't w? i

^n^ ^^ypc m^ ^RTi 8«i

fil^lfi. WIW ^[p^ iwft gf% fifl^ I «•<

^T^jrofnrr ^ft^^rraiTr ^n^ 3tic 311; 1

^I'^ofV ^fw in'^ %^ i^BT Tnc I 8 e«

inftWi^ Ti^ ^^ ^^CT in^ ^^ I

m^ ^rit^r: ^TT^ f*i% ^nrr sft^ I b®^

^w wr 3nt^ w^ ^^TO 't^ ftf^ I

'rot gf^ gpwT ^^ ^<^d irf^ 1 8o£.

^l^Tf 1^^ 'W^ ^ ''ICT HfOIT I 8\o

% ^»n: mf%^ »i^ ^ 'wr f^r 1 8\\

<l«IC< iTT 'W'TT w^ "w^^pr mfT T^ \

5tir im in^rrc irronj gf%^ f^ ^r i

XXm HTR f^^rwr ^ 3W?^^ B 8\8

4^^«ii ^ ^iifiidi. ^<CT ^tr: iTPf ^n^ I

fro f^ ^nP« f^ *iiPi* f^ Nt I 8\<

^T^r^^ =a Doctor H »•« I ^fftr = ^^ II »\« I ^n? = Hftl II

1878.] G. A. Gnenon—The Song of Mdnik Chandra. 179

1W8T ^^'fiiEg Tfftj %3iT i^Pir I 8\^

^ Sft^IT ^CT Wr ftf <lMli. %^ *A(tl«M*j irf^ I
g^ g^ ^5ft?IT 'T'lTT »1*TC lpf?W I

M¥«Q^ 'nfii^ 3ttc^ Prawpc i

^RPi mz{ t(^ ftiw 5l«T ^rrer «rnc i 8^^^^

^iftR: ^^ fMjT ?^ TpffW^ I

fl*WW %fe^ 'W'TT ^iP^^K ^nfii^ I 8^^

?nH ^CTO ^f^fRjT <i*ii< 53WT 'inf^^ I %\i^

WftH^ fSB'f <Wl* MiflW I

Vlt^ ^UIRT *lf<*ll ^ifPT M'flMK 'int^l^ I

ic ^r: '^ifipr <i«ii^ ir?Ti:^ i 8^^^

xm fisf^rw ^% gftr ft^ i

^^5^ ^5|TO tWRT ?|p!T ft^ I 8^£.

^RTIPT $^ «T1FT ^iftT «nifT ^ft^TO I

M)ipi ViW ^''J'f ♦iHcqq fiRTT I 8^\

180 O. A. Grierson— T/itf Sony of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

finjT 'TftRfT rwTc ^<JT ^nf^^rn: wrt5w i

I?N %ICT 5|% i?^ ^ITTPr ^kR^ I

^ f^ ^CT *n^ ii^re ^lyf i^q^r ^f<*{i i
«TC^r[^wmif^%iR:ftr^i 8^<

Tiftnp ^ftrar ^rwr m<^^^ ^ifirai i 8^^

?^pr: ^TTQiRr ^m ^nci^ iiT intr I 88»

wcv^ w^ ^jfe^ ^''s:^ ^^iftnjT I 88^^

Tii^d ^?f TT f%^ %R ^TTR 'irfr:^ I

^BRf 151^ SPW: f^JRf ^P{ I

*TTlfT g'U f^T TT >5ftr^ R^ I 888

1878.] G. A. Qnenon—The Song o/Mdnik Chandra. 181

^'R^ wc^c ?:t5ir: ^ftiT n^f^ I ee^

^c^iTT ^rf5f3rr wprr ^n^^^^rn: ^nfira I bb^

iK^^ ^n*ii ^tnc nft^ ^re I

'Rfro ^^BT ^fe'TT ^T ^ft^ ^''IT I

ire% irg M<^fii. f^ i 8«l\

Urat ^TRWI ^f^^ 1^ TT Wft.^ I SyL'^

^innf irr ^ ft^ ^wiw ftw ^ i s^l^

^nc^^nn iif5p{T *R?^ iw^ i

^ ^ 'CTIT ^'Efe ^^< ^1«<IW I

fiPT %?(% v^ TOi^ 'w^ ^nl3i^ I 81^

mW ^rfbjT iftW ^n^ IT ^ifojT I 8«LC

^ ftf Irene mw irf^% ^n^ftRjT i

^ ftT %rc ^irtt ^Tii% *^(V^i I «<•

182 G. A. Gnerson—The Sang of Minih Chandra. [No. 3,

555 ihf^ (Hin3^.i*^nu%^n^ftftf'Ri% wftr^l^l^i 8<i^

^CTiftT ^f^fT W^ ftf VW I

ftf^ ^cp^ ftWT ftT ^Tft^Fcrrf5pr I 8<e

wrwHTf ^rfi: ftnsr ^if^ ftp^mc^ i %^^

^rra era iQ^^TT^ ^ ^TT ^rn[% 'w:^! i 8<^

^^ ^wr^ ^ iT^n 5r^ ^ftwr i 8<^

ifir ^li fttir «rt^ m it% ^i^ i

'irRn: ^ 5:^ ^i^ ^crc "^n 1

^Bnn ftw ^'^ f^ ^nrr ^rft f^i 1

<i*ii< ^TF^'RT yi\T^< ^ ^3^^ I

%^ 'iPT'TC inif ^iei^ ftramCT I 8«^

^w «r5Ter ^ ^o^rr F^RSf ^nfwT 1

^i^Hid ^rt^pw ^rejcf ^inw f'f'i I 8^^

1878.] a A. Grierson— 1%<? Song ofMdnik Chandra. 188

3^51 ift'^ Tift mpn: wtf^w I

^CT ^fff ^TO ^tf^iPrr ^sfifiw I 8^

^Bw Tw ^$tor: ^iftr ^[^ 5^ ^aw i
^w^ ^ft^^wTT vrftwf <^ I

^enr "fw ^Srere 'nftr ^CT yw ^3^ I

?[7 ^1% «nf59 ft ^m[^ ^iIX*}i^< ^T^ I 8^

'^'jjinT ^ft^J *1*TC tfelPsfB I

ftw ftw ^v wr^wr ^rnniE^ i 8^»

^^ ^w< <wi% ^ftwr '^tft^ f

wftr ^rfi^ ^nft ^ ^ 5^ I

^TC ^r^ ^rf^ %^ ^n$f IP? II 8^?^

^nx m^ii. ^Tw ^5i^ ftft^j I

^fil ^% ^fiil ^J5|T ^r«!T^ ^ft^ I

^TO ^n'f ^ftpqi ^PRT "^W ft^ II 8^8

if ji^m igw TO ^m %f ^TT 'Tptt I

^RT^TTCi: ^rjf^ ^1% ^^^f 'TCT I 8^

^15^ IfFi^TC TO 1W ftfCTJ ^^ ^?rW I 8^<

UITTO ^nft^ Vft ^roft^JT NjfJjM I 8^«

WWflf^ ^ VlTiT 'lift m^ I

»^^ I Wf = w»

ia4 0. A. Grienon— 2^« Song qfMdnih Okandra. [No. 9,

HHwrc fin: ^fir^ nf^^ ^ra w^ I

ijT 'nPT «nn% ftwr ^ir^ i i ^^ i scb

iih%TC ^if^ HTWRf fn[ ^^^niv in^ ^t'^tt i set

^13 «iif5f: frrwt ^i^ Tif¥ ^ 'rrai ^nc i

^rrc ^p?T 'wf^ ^nftRTT ^p^ ^K^rc ^rTi[ i

^r: «irfr ^ ini% ^TRT ^iWT?: ^rTi[ I ee.^

^fil ^fe %iW ^RTT ^f^^T^ ^rT1[ I 8£.e.

lira %RT ^f^ ^T»rra ^w: «iwr 3rf«RrF I

HPTO^ ^ft^ Txm ^sfe^ ^iftRIT I !••

1878.] G. A. Qrierson— I^tf Song ofManik Ohandra. 185

'wf^T «ifl?p ^wa %^ M}r^ ^fl^^
^r^ ^^ ^T^ ^^ f^ti^ %f^ 'TO t

TF^ 3^ ^p^ %^ ^^Ipf ^f^ »TO I

'TF^ ^^ 'n^ 't^ ^flWr ^f>l 'TO I *•<

^F^ 'Nt ^t^ ^^ ^n^ M^ wi[ I

^p^ %^ ^F^ 'Nn ^nwn; ^f^ 'to i hl***

^T'Rf in^TO^Pf^jsrwi ^f^ I

^Ri: ^nft^ ^iw ^m ^i^ f^ i u*^

^cwK ^c'w: hTk^ ^ftj ^f^ I u«^.

ffiff^ ^ <i*iK ^[^r: ^n^ wj gr I iiLt,*

^wnc 'ip'j^ \\T^< ^^ fift^ I

v% Tmn wifli^ 3nrK wif^^ i hl^'i

TFOTf ^n^w ^(X*ti ^^ifT ^rf^ f^ I 5iL<,^

^(PITO ^5T^ 'TOT t%^ ^ ^l W 1

186 G. A. Qriewon— The Song ofManile Chandra. [No. 3,

1T^ SWt TT^ '^ TT'J^ W: I

fl?^ ^^ m^ ^t^ rft^ TT^'pi: w: I i\d

%WT ift in^ Tfsr^ iiTinc Prrc i 1^\

^fN pRnjT?: um ^ii% ?ni% ^ffwi i I'l^
^w «Tir ^ 'n^ 'CTifiiif gf^ I

^it^^ «llP^ ^psil^I ll^lMK 'nifiw I

^n: ^T ^rf^ xni% ^rt^rr ftrf'RiT isnc i i^o

^?yif ^^ %»m ^WT ^fe^^ ^i[ I n^^^^

1878.] G. A. Qnerson—The Song o/Mdnik Ohandra. 187

^nc if^ ^rnmc^ wTPn ^rfHTi: «ii.w< i

%*FiTTO ^n^ <l^K ^i.^< ^^TC I

<T^i< ^rr^ncT ^f^ irtfOTi i ^^^

^if^ ^ ^'T it^ ^l^K «i<w< I

«n^ ^w ^T^ ^ ^K ^^n^R I 1^^

^n: ic?! irf^ ^ti% ^irtTT ftrt%^ wi[ I 1^^

^n: ^^ «irf^ it^ ^nft^ ^f'l^ I w*

ftrcT ^rf^ 'nw^i ^iTO^rar ftife^ i

$ WTi: VfT «RfT 'in^ra^ ftife^ I 18R

W^ 'IW^T 'TOWcT prtOa^ I

^ ^^ mf^ ftnsT T^wr ^c^w mi[^ i

Tw 11^ 'Rft^ ?r^a^^ 'irtr^ f^ I 188

wn: '^TTT ^? ^rf^T ^if?^ T^wr ft^ I

^irf^ T^wr imrcnTO «i^ irri ft^ i i8i

ICW ifhl 'rf'T f*rf^*ii ^if'^w I

IT U^it "IT ^TOT TJ^m. ^tft'J I 18^

186 G. A. Grietaon—The Song of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 8,

OTWW ^rafbir mfv I ^^^"^

TT^ 3Wt TT^ '^ TT^'pi: w^ I

fl?^ ^^ m^ ^t^ rft^ Ti^I^ ^rc I i\€.

^wt Trftf 49 MK m^ ^TOT ^ft^rc inc i I'l*

%WT ift in^ Tfsr^ iiTinc Prrc i l^\

^fN pRnjT?: um w^ ^^% ^if^w^ i IH.^
'w «Tir ^ 'n^ 'CTifiiif gf^ I

IOC ^w ^t''^ ^Tf^ ^ ^qtPot i:^ I

^n: '^TJT 'irf^ xni% ^rt^rr ftrf'RiT isnc i i^o

^?yif ^^ %»m ^WT ^fe^^ ^i[ I 1^1^^^

1878.] G. A. Orieraon— 1^« Song ofJUdnih Ohandra, 187

wTpn^rfHTi:

%*FiTTO ^n^ ^JWTC ^brtr: gii^ I

<T^l< ^TTOW Mf%^ ^fOTT I ^1^^

T^ ^ V^ it^ ^l^K «I<W< I

«iTO TWT ^T^ ^ ^ftiiK «IM^< I y^^^o

^TC ir?T irf^ mi% ^rtw ftrt^r^ wic i ii^^

^n: 11^ irf^ it^ ^np!^ jifiT^ I ^e*

ftr^ irf^ ifw^i ^JTO«w ftjfe^ I

$ WTi: VfT «RfT 'tinra^ ftrf's^ I 18^

w^^ 'nn^T 'TOHW prtOa^ I

^ ^ mf^ ftnsT ^wf 'R'w ini[^ I

TW H^ ^ift^ <WIS*I IkfX^l ft^ I 188

^TC *TT ^^ JiP«*ii ^if?^ T^wr ft^ I

$ ^^ gft^ 'T^ iw^ ft^ I i8<

mm rfhi irfii fii(^«ii ^ifSiw I

IT U^it "IT ^TOT TJ^([m ^ft.^ I 18^

188 G. A. Grierson— 2!^ Smg of Minih Chandra, [No. 3,

%^ ^ ffKX f^ ^ ^ ^W I

^ ^n: 'i^ ^npt ^(^*i*! ^nf^ i 18^

^?n^ 3WTT iFr% irram hT^^ I *«^

«iTC w^rarc ^nftpsi Tif^ uttt ^R*|i i ii*

'WpW

fsrappf ^TOi T^t HTO 5fx^ I 11.18

'fire ^3nR: mi^Ihi ft^ wr ^r'^ i hil

^ ^I^Mi^H ^r^^ ^iftw 3hC 3tl[ I

fti? ^Nni!^ ^CTTT Ihgx ^rngrr inc i iyL<
%T^rT?T *(X^r ^T^rra ft^nrn{ ^rarr^ i

IJPTC ^T3T f^ Ulf^K *r<*lT I «,1^

^ ^wnfirft ^€t ^rrfir ^rrar gf^ ^ror i n^

^C%^ ^'ITT fjp^^X f^ feft ^ift irtt^ I ll£.

^"TOT % ^R* ^TOT ^I'RT ^f^ I i^«

^iRw ^^w ^f^^ TT irftwr ^^ I

1878.] G. A. Grierson— I%tf Sang ofMdnih Chandra. 189

mft ihi^ ^!fe^ ft^iT "IT M\T<^ i i<i^

^ 'HI?!' 1^1^ ^Pf ^WT ^[1% ire I

^inpiT ^npt ^ncn ^Not f^rf'sr t^wt qi(V<ii i

5^1% hP^ Tn^rr fnft ^Bii^^ i

i?WT %T<^\ ^infT Tsl^ €iPii«iK wfira i

iTWT ^(tlijl TH^fT 5"^ ^SHli. ^^ I 1^\

^cwTi: ^Mi< uTifT ^TTOT Tnrre ^nre i

JTRTT ^nft* i^ti: ^rarPT ^ftRcrc Trf3ro i i^©^

1^^ I Hm ==*A4L H v^^^ I JTTWrT = A^ H

n

190 Q. A. Grierson— TA<? 8(mff of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

Tin: ^dtK, VTO %wf ^VT[ wzk ww i

^ wf ^ i^^^ ?tn: ^i^ 'Pnr i i^

m^iTliii ^lm^ wftR TX^n 'ift^ ^'WT ff^*|i i ^'^^

liraiP IPPt ^iftR U5IWr ^fUE^ ^?^T1[^ I 1^"^

m^ ^p^ ^r^^i f^ ^iPMK ^iHi^ I

WOT TW ft^ 'craTi ^1%^ ^rft^ f^ I 1^

«i^K m(V*iw ^r:^ ^iJjf nfw^ ^rnft i

iira inftf^ ^^ ft% 5^ ^w wi^ ^rr|t i

ftfifc^ii m^^i ft% 5I3T 'W^ fifV I

ft'RrpT "Hm^ ^iftSf 'ITC 'tr: mfSf i i"^

RTw^T ^rgprr pw^sc^r t^r: tit? i
^c^^'ttt: ^ «nT fcR ^TK §«iiw I

pT^ ^w 'S^rnc^ ft^ igpfP^TT m^^ ^rrft t i"^^

1878.] G, A. Qnenon-'The Son^ of Mdnik Cfhandra. 191

^ ^fi^TT ^n^ rwT ^^nr ^ir TfT I

^nf'r wt^ ^tfk^ 'W[K, ^^w: ^x't g ^^^^^

ftfftRjr ^T^^ ft% ^fjsi I'TC vf% I

«rtK inir iiT^ ?nwT iiFRT 31^ wf^ i

^^ ^fr: Tf^fjx ^fTsrtft'rr irf^ i
^rt'T %^ TfW! ^^rnc Mf^^ ^i^^*ji I

59^«TOT wni^ fl^l^^ Pli.^*! ^ I

%T% ^'i" ^T^ ^ ^n^ *<fH< ^c?T I

^nct '^ftlfT ^ ^[^ ?? 'TOE I

^ ft^ ^rr^ ^PJT ^ ^3^fraT ft^T I ^eo

^nwi% ^ ^rw irftj ^^w ]

'TTC v^u^rc iNr TtR: wrar <ww ^rft^ i

B B

192 G. A. Orierson— 1%^ Son^ ofMdnih Cfhandra. [No. 3,

WVfl %^3|TC ^WR: VmK Hf^ 'HM<Sl*|l f

%rS ^nii ^n^RTC ft?iT ^Riftr ^w^ ^5ft?ir I <*t

%tS wuf ?tnTR: ppiT ^insr ?ww ^(V<ii i <•!

^eRb't ^ra^l" iirat ^^fpw ft^ iw I <•<
^rw f?T *ift m^ i(f^ wifJra P

V^ 3T^RT lirat 'nW ^fTTOT f^ I ^•'^

ijftpT 3TO ^npt iirat 5^ 2rra ^ i

'TO ^ nfWmw «R Hft^rrc m^ t <*^

^vmIk ^irc mf^ i.iaii< >i(^<iii. infill i <\*

^mpc «^R7T ^Riftr 'mc ^ 5PT I <^\

^^1^1 f%^ ^vi\ ^JB^r ^n^ ijf^ I ^^'i

^ ^w TiPirf u^iii. ^f^TTC ^Jfifii^ IT <\^

^nwt ^iT^ ft^ ^^rt^ ^3^ qnf^i
^PTtSt ^i% Pn^ ^«i< %r<^i I

187a] G. A. Grieraon— 2^ Song ofMinik Ohandra. 193

■^rrTO ^nsrjfT ^ ^irnr 'fft ^rni i

"tn^ ?TW «f^R: Ptcr: Tif^ ^wiw irp{ i ^^^

^rwr «rt^ vP? ftrajTC ^'iiii^ ^nt^^j i 1(5^^

fRf'f frnn: ft^j ^ *(i(%*jr 1

▼«TC ^qrow vf^ itftpp ^lf<^ I

"'W'W TT^ ^ WtT ^ift ^n^ J

mFTC ^nwf wpni: ^ifniro irw • ^^^

%^ ^3W[ s*4i< q(ft% ftif ^n^ JTRHfT 1 <^«

^ ^T3?r xt^ ftjjT TT>rr ^"^ift^ ^ipit i <Rd

5«:^ inf^ ^1^ 5«^ «nfiF^ I <^«

%\T^< "iRTW ^3^ iTfi55r 4if^^i I ^^i^

^'T ^iT lift: ^ft: ^r?«(K ^nfira 1 <^^

1^ ^ ^p«9 ^ ^nr: m^t ^itot i

IM a. A. Orienon— 2!^ Sang ofMinik Okandra. [No. 3'

lipi^ ^[r: w^ ^mnl Pr<ii 'ift: ^p$r i <^t

'OC 1WT w^IT WP^ imW t|W*{| I

^?^ 5h^ Tif^ iri%^ I m^

'HE ^WT ^Pl^T lift ^TT ^fTO ^ift^ I

«!^t ^^nrw ^F^T ^% ^w^ ^% I *
^iRf ftrur ^tPi% mw ^ipfR: un^i

ic^ ^im m^ ^nw ^iw vx^ \

^TC 11^ ^rf^ Tl^ 'Wf ^Wl^ I ^s\

?nc «in|T ^njt ^ift^i i#fc trrt ft'f i ^s'^

^W ^TOTT ^fbiC toI^ fM^K ^rf5c^ I ^88

WnW ^iPl^ll ^^ <l^R ^RTW 'TOITIPJT I

let^ f ^T^^ ^imwr ft^ ^r^nc^ i <8i

wftra VTB^ 'J^l^ 'nift ^^ ^ I <8<

vi^ ftn| mi? ^TT ^ "nftniT 3r^ i ^8>a

pT^rr «rw ^Nn^ fip^ ^^^^ in^^ ^ft i <8^

Pw wrwr ftw ^r: «r^ ^tsr: I <8i£.

1878.] G. A. GneTBon—The Song ofMdnih Chandra. I95

'iftf Tmr ^WT iTT ^i[^ I

<i*

<i<

w ^ TOt ?lwr ft^ iR I

w inw vprr ^ira n^rc t%TC

^^ Ti?rr irrar ^wn: f^RTC I

^,Pr *WcT ^TOT 'IfRTO irft^

«f^ ?f%^ *«Tflpt 5>n: ^fw mw^ i ^«^>©

<i^

r^^K ST^ TC 'W HIBf ^Rfcjr I

*

ftrer ^ ^rrfs^ 5BTi[ ir:^ ^npc J ^^o

^('w ^ f«[^ lift Piipj ifx ^nt^r I
^TCT TiilV.^ w^ WBT Tjsrra franco i
^n^ 'n^ Pf'IT JTR^ •irfir'iri
Tuft ^ ^^ firf^ ?rTC ^R^ nw I

%TC W^ ^MT %prT ^pItIP ^55i[?C I

fiiftr w^ ^^ %*l^ mft% mra I

«^

«^

ii\

196 G. A. Griersott— 2fc Song ofMimik Chandra, [No. 8,

^nwpr wwnf ftw^ 1^ i
(Jwjt ^ftnp TCTT JHfm^ift^ I

wit ^17^ ilN ^WT Wn^ TTRTW I

iihi tip» ^wr ^sjiPr^ ^wiw i «^

w^^ ^ m'r ^BPf wrf? ft^ I «^

ww^ %w 5^ ^w wPfc^i I

f^f(W TO ^fi^ TCTT %^?T^ VTOC^ I <«•

TTR^ MTnft ^JTW fVtl^ JifPC I

jpi vr %TC ^w: %w ^fej Pr?^ t^f^ i

^t^piT ii<it< fWTO ifpj ^^ ^ftpjr I ^^

^ mux ^w ^ ^ 'Rft:^ I i^9

tpfl^ nff^ TTsix ^tor: ^n^ 511^ I

g^ g^ ^fi?rr ^Tf^ ^nn^ 'P^^ •

^TC «iqji< fe^ fi<l<^ inniw I ^'^^

^sww ftrat ^cwr ^wf ^^nfiw i ^'S^

ftrc^wrr «itit. ^irr xm %PfT ^ift:^ i

1878.] a. A. Grierson— 2Stf Sofy ofMdnih Ohanira. 197

'n^nr ^ HPT ?wnc ftfiy^r i ^^

iiRT 'Wi: ^T^ ^BipiT «inr %nn%Nft i <^*

g^ g^ %t<*iT TT^ inrn: ^rf^ j
^(^ nvfit wpsi wgyn "m^ wt^ I

TT^ ftWT Tl% ^^ ^^ llR^l I

'wc ^T^t^ ^n^rr Prar^ ^i^nr t ^^

gi g^ 'wft^ ^a^ ftpfi^ 'rra^

ppipi ^snfii^ ^WT ^TO T^ ^fx^ I ^^oa

%i^e*i< w^ ^wrii fw^ ^ift fti I ^^'^

<«^ I ^T^ir = wrmrn i <«^ i ft'ir^ = W^m^ &

198 G. A. Grieraon— The Song of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 8,

^T^ ^T^ TTTO pT^TT 1li5i^ IT Hlft I <^1

'Twr R ^rft^ ipf^ ^iftp^ I

^rrf^;^ Ji^ wi^ «i*fii< ^m^r i

^fti'T «rift^ ^rtt'^ TfTO fw ^^^iR I

M{^< TWfi: pT^ TfTO ^Wi?!' IT Ttft I <^^

lift Piw ^ ^h^ipc ^Ernwr^t iRW I

^ 5R7t ^RIT 5WT ^WT^ ^[PW I

Pi^ irft ^RiT ^fjs[ wv ^nniT ^f^ i <£^

PPT^I^TTT WTC 'WT^ 'OTn ^rt*PT I

fi^w ^^ ^55»iT if^fT ^iftri: mniT ^tw i «••

^ 5ti^i. Pr^TT TTf^ 'wc?^ TT mft I '©•^

11% Pi^ ^ndt" ^nft: ^^^trc gpR i '©•^

?iTwi TT ^rwT^ ^n^iT^ ipr: I '©•s

tIt^ ^^n^ Tifir ^rft^ ??w ^TiRi ftw I '©•i.

6[^r< ^TTOTic^ ^TTsir f^ fk^Va wrc ^roc^ i '©•<

^rt%T Miwi ?r[ip Tnoff ^rt%T Jrnn^ wif i

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 27itf Song ofMdnik Chandra. 199

^(^< ^PCTT «Rlfi^,l ^^ I '©•£.

fl*T f^ ^rfcTT Tx^^m ^ip^cT ^r^rnc^ i ^\^

^ftr^ ftfe wt in^ ^^ft^w. 'nft'sf I

^w ^fft ^RiT 5i[OT TT^rra ♦f^<q ^nc^ j?^ I

Tiftr^ir ^ftWT ^IIT f^RT 5^ ft^ I *®\«

%»liT ^ ^T^ "^SJ^ f^ ^<t« PT^R I

%^ «Rft ^n^ TiTC ^n^ ^5[pr: I ^\i

'rg inPrcra ^rrfsra ^iftr^ I

^T^ ftro ^ *IX«iTC ^nfiw I

^n^ 'inftRir n^ ^rm f^ I ^a^t,

JTOt'c 5j^f^ ^al^:^ ^?R:f«T nnr^ urc i

ii^ %rCT «!% 'R'pn fipTR irfr^ I

liW^jl^l WW ^i*<i w ^r^ t^ I '©^a

^^» I ^1^^ cf. V. 436.1
C C

200 G. A. Griewon— T//^ S<mg ofMdnik Chandra, [No. 3,

'iw *Tm ii^ira ^RRif i?ipr ^rft^ I

FIT ?5TT ^W[^ ^r^% ^rrfiRIT I iQ^^

Tlf^ ^lOl*(T 5R^T «Trc Wf^ I
^oPi Tret ^(f^f^T vrrwt ^rwm i

WpTT

«^<

TW 5?gfT ^ra ftiTT %pr «rw iift^ i

^rt^ ^ 3tw ^a:'ni: ?TO[% (%^ I
^ITR iTT^ ^nc^ ^^ii?: ^ift^rr I

^irsTT ftr ^i*ii«R irf^pn: ^ufii^ i

^ ft^ 'rft^ ^j^Twr ^^wr ^Tfnw i

^i^rK xj^m w^m^ ti:^ i ^^^

VA^y."^ "^n ^'^^y' ^ •^^^ t^^* ^^ copied ont by an energetic «4^ wha
had the greateet contempt for the dialect it iUuatnttes. He ahowed hif contZt by

W^'off ^J*"^ discover tins nntil the first two hundred and fifty ve«es had J;^
printed off ; so, thus for the above mnst be taken cum grano sal/s. The princS
improvements wm be noted m the terminations of the genitive and locative. TZ^
point out here, that Rangpurf possesses an instrumental ending in v which mZ
easily be confused with the Bangilf locative Thni. »t^ ,•« t> ^ ' ^

187S.] . G. A. Grierson— Ti^i? Song of Mdnih Chandra. 201

TranBlation of the Song of Ma^nik Chandra.

1. Think on the name of R&ma, meditate on him with a single mind.
If then ntterest the name of B^ma what can Yama do. 2. The wicked
man did not utter the name of Rama in the sloth of his tongue : and eyen
though it was a receptacle of ambrosia, his body was devoured by poison.
8. Who walketh uttering the name of Kama, along with him goeth a ser-
vant of Rama armed with bow and arrow. 4. The ship that is called by
the name of Rama, hath for its pilot the Holy Master himself. Opening
out his arms he crieth out " Come, I will ferry thee across.'* 6. I have
placed the worship of Rama upon my head. I pause awhile from consider-
ing his virtues, and sing the virtues of one who hath accomplished (his path
of holiness). By praising him I obtain the accomplishment of my desires.

6. Manik Chandra was a very pious king in Banga. Each month he
used to collect a tax on each plough of seven and a half gandas* of Morts,
7. The people paid a tax of seven and a half gandaa of Mofis, and on
the day of the Ashfamt pujd used to bring him a herd of goats. 8. The
fuel-seller, who supplied him with fuel, had six months' taxes remitted to
him in consideration thereof. 9. The leaf -seller, who supplied him with
bundles of leaves, had six months' taxes remitted to him in that consider-
ation. 10. Such a king was Manik Chandra that his raHyats* fences were
built simply of thin reeds ; the man who lived at hap-hazard, even he had
a horse at his door. So proud were they, that not even the maid-servants
wore idrU made of jute. 11. No one had need to use the foot-path of
another, and no one had to drink the water of another's tank.f

12. From the south there came a Bangdld with a long beard ; and
that Bangdliy when he came, made money from the country. 13. Where
the tax had formerly been 71 ganda$ he took 15 gan^as. 14. They sold
their ploughs, they sold their yokes, and some sold their ploughshares ;
through the distress caused by the taxation, some even sold their children
at the breast. 15. The misery of the poor unhappy widows became very
lamentable ; all through the country the villages became broken up. 16. The
little rd*igai8 said to the big raHyats " Brothers, let us all go to the
pradhdns^X 1^- S&7^i^?> '* What advice will all the pradhdns give," all the
ra^iyatt after consulting together, went to the house of the pradhdns, 18.
" What advice shall we adopt, brothers, and what course of conduct ? The
king within the kingdom hath become unjust." 19. The Pradhdng said
to all the ra'iyats, " This advice I have no power to give ; come to Siva.
Let U8 see what command the mighty BhoUndtha will give us." 20. All

* A budi IB five gai^das or twenty.

t t. e,y every one had his own private path to the hdiy and his own private tank.

t The Rangpuri term for the village head-man.

202 G. A. Grierson — The Song of ManiJc Chandra. [No. 3,

the raHyaU after consulting together, went to S'iva's (temple). 21. Calling
him " Siva Th^kur," they cried with a loud voice. Siva Thdkur was in
the temple, and put his foot outside the door.* 22. When they saw Siva,
all the raHyaU made obeisance. Tying their clothes round their necks, did
they make obeisance.

S'rVA SPAKE.

23. " Long may ye live, long may ye live, O raHyaU^ may Dharma
bless you. May the days of your life be as many as the sands of the sea.
24. Why, why O ra'iyatSy have ye all come ?"

The Ba'itats spake.

25. " What advice shall we adopt, and what course of conduct. The
king within the kingdom hath become unjust." 26. The ancient Siva
meditated, and after meditating looked up, and found in the fate of the
king that the limit of his life was six months distant.

S'rVA SPAKE.

27. " K ye tell this word unto Mayan& she will assuredly destroy
my kingdom of Kaild^."

The Ba'iyats spake.

28. " One oath, two oaths, three oaths in the name of Hari. If we
speak thy word, may we die in great sin." 29. All the raHyatSy after con-
sulting together, went to SrikaU \ik\, 80. They filled an earthen pot
with incense and vermilion. They filled a coop with geese and doves. 31.
They also took a white goat, tying him with a rope. Fasting on a Sunday,
they took them to a tirtha on the Ganga.t 32. They tied the goat at a
place sacred to Dharma on the banks of the Gang^, and sacrificed it there. ^
88. They offered several geese at the ghdt, and burnt incense and vermilion
there. 84. They rooted up unblown hinnd grass and brought it. And then
wringing out his lanyufi, he (Siva) gave vent to the curse ; and that curse
they (the raHyats) took up in the corner of their garments.

85. On the Sunday Siva gave the people this curse. On the Monday
the fever seized the king. 36. On the Tuesday the king became weak ; on

* It ifi worth noting how entirely the ideas of the author of the poem are circum-
Bcribed by the incidents of his village life. Every one, God or man, acts and lives as if
he were a simple RangpuH villager. This verse is an instance. When one ra'iyat goes
out to see another, it is the village etiquette, to bawl out to him, *' He ! so-and-so,"
while the visitor is yet a hundred yards or so from the house of him on whom he is
about to call. If the latter is " at home," he goes outside his door, and greets the
comer. This latter action is called '* putting one's foot outside the door." Compare
the "RtigliHh expression of '^ calling on a person."

t By the Gang&, is meant the Brahmaputra. Sea note to v. 159.

X Lit. Dug a hole for the sacrificial post in the same.

1878.] G. A. Qrierson— -2%tf Song of Mdnik Chandra, 203

the Wednesday he ceased to eat or drink. 37. On the Thursday the king
gave up the ghost*: and on the following Tuesday, Chitra Govinda, the
accountant of Yama, opened out his account papers. 38. He found in the
account papers, that Mdnik Chandra had six months to live ; and turning
his head, he began to speak to Saman Edja Yama.

Yaha spake.

39. " A king within his kingdom hath become unjust. Bring hither
that king within the house of Yama." 40. He began to call for KhiX
Yama. He sent a letter (for the king) by Godd Yama.

Yama spake.

41. '' I tell thee Godd Yama, and take thou heed unto my words.
Sring Manik Chandra Rdjd here, with his hands and neck tied." 42. He
'took his leathern rope and his iron hammer, and tied them in a knot ; and
then GodA Yama started on his journey. 43. Many miles he went, many
roads he met. He went a great distance and reached the house of Manik
Chandra. 44. During the six months' illness within the palace, the fair
MayaniL did not enquire about the true state of affairs.

The KiKa spake.

45. " O Nengd my servant, I tell thee, carry my message : go to
Mayan& and tell her about this. 46. Say, 'For six months the king
hauh been ill within his palace. The King of Kings wisheth to see thee.' "
47. Neng^ heard these words and did not tarry. He went off to the pa-
lace of Mayan^. 48. Inside the door the Lady Mayana was playing dice,
and through the lattice of the door Nengd made obeisance to her.

MayanI spake.

49. " Why, why, O Nengi hast thou come ?"

NenoX spake.

50. ^' Hear, O lady, hear the news ; for six months the king hath
been ill within his palace. The King of Kings wisheth to see thee." 51. The
lady Mayand became absorbed in contemplation, and, in her contemplation,
her eyes fell upon Yama. 52. She took a hangdld betel-nut and sweet
mt^ha bhart jpdn leaf, and divided the nut into two pieces with a knife.
53. In the ^an leaves she put a little lime, and folded together the het khili
and the upar khiii.f 54. She put sixteen scores of charms on the top of

* Or perhaps " lost his power of sensation."

f The little conical shaped parcels of prepared pan, which we see in the hizdrs^
endonng a piece of betel-nat and some lime, are called Jchilis, The outside wrapping
is made np of two leaves^ of which the lower one is called the he^ khili, and the upper
one, the ^ipar khili.

204 G. A. Grierson— 2^^ Shn^ of Mamik Chandra. [No. 3,

it ; and put the plate of pan on the bead of the maid-semint. 55. The
Ladj Majana went out, seeing that it was a lacky time, and arrived at the
palace of the king.

MatanI spakb.

56. "^ Why and wherefore did the great king summon me ?"

The Kofo spajce.

57. " The king hath heen ill for six montlis in his palace, and the fair
Majana did not enquire ahout him.*'

MatastI spake.

58. " Hear, O king of kings. Learn the magical arts which I have
acquired, and then the river of mj life will dry up upon thy shoulder.*
59. In my life time great trees will live and die, and we two shall live
together in everlasting youth."

The Kino spake.
GO. '* Hear, O Mayana : let Tama carry off me, Minik Chandra ;
but nevertheless let not the knowledge of a woman be heard by me."t 61.
The king, although offered the arts of women, n^lected .them ; and at
exactly midday Cuckold^ Yama started. 62. He brought the thirsts of
death and struck him with them. The king arose crying '* Water, water.
63. Give me, O ^ve me water, O fair Mayani. Give me one vessel of
water, and save my life.*'

MayanI spake.

64. '' There are a hundred queens in thy palace. Drink water at
their hands, O king of kings."

The Kino spake.

65. '' Water, at the hands of even a hundred queens, would smell of
fish. It is when I drink at thy hand, that I find great solace."

MatakX spake.

66. " If I go now to bring thee water, that cuckold Yama will bind
thee and carry thee away."

* t. «. thou wilt live as lon^ as I.
t lit. my womb.

{ The word Bh^duyd is an abusive term, and means, more coirecUy, a man who
makes money by the sale of his wife^s person.

1878.] G. A. Grierson— I%c Sonff of Mdnik Chandra. 205

The King spake.

67. " List O Majand. Take heed to my words. Place the knife
for sacrificing goats upon my bed. 68. When that cuckold Yama
Cometh, like a Daitya, or a Danava, him will I strike and slay with the
sacrificial knife." 69. As soon as the Lady Mayan & took the vessel in her
bands, many men were heard to sneeze,* and many death-watches sounded,
70. Just as the Lady Mayan^ passed outside the house, seven men from
the seven quarters came in with a noise like thunder. 71. They tied him
with leathern thongs, and with an iron mallet they began to beat him.

The King spake.

72. "Who beateth me so often? The Lady Mayand hath gone
to fetch me water. Let me fill my belly with one vessel of water."

The Yama spake.

73. "Thy wife hath got a boon from Gorakh Nath. If Mayani
meet us, little good will it bode us. She will kneel upon us, and beat us this
very midday." 74 Being unable to bear the beating of Yama, the king
gave up th^ ghost, uttering the name of Mayana. 75. That ghost took
Godii Yama and tied it up in his languti, and to the seven quarters went
off the seven men.

76. But Mayana went to the banks of the Gangaf and spake " Hear,
O Ganga, I make known unto thee my petition. 77. There is a king whose
worship thou hast enjoyed for these twelve years ; give one vessel of
water and save his life. 78. For one vessel of water thou shalt have
forty-two vessels ; therefore do thou restore to life a pious king,"

GanoI spake.

79. " For whom thou art taking thy vessel full of water ; that pious
king hath himself been taken away." 80. On hearing this Mayand be-
gan to weep, and hurled away her vessel worth a IdJch of rupees. 81.
Mayan& dived fourteen fathoms beneath the water, and sat in contempla-
tion, and saw that the vermilion on her forehead had become discoloured.
82. She saw that her shell bracelets had turned black, and she broke on
her head the two bracelets worth a Idkh of rupees.

Thb bxtkden of heb song.

88. ^ I have lost my Lord* How many days must I wait and ' watch
for him."

84. Mayan& walked to the palace. When the Lady Mayana entered
the temple, she lit both the front and the rear lamps. 85. Mayani walked

* Sneezing is a sound of ill omen,
t See note to v. 159.

208 G. A. Grierson— 2%e Song of Mdnih Chandra, [No. 3,

to Yaina*8 abode ; the Lady Mayand arrived on the banks of the dread
river. 86. When Mayana saw the river she became fearful. It is a
river SIX months wide. The ferry-boat finishes its voyage in a year. Each
wave seems vast as mountain peak.

The Bubden of heb sonq.

87. " My fate hath become a lot of misery, as Krishna was of Binda.
The boat is broken and the ropes are worn ; how can I pass over, O my
guru. That is, if my guru is by me to help me. 88. I will hold the
rudder of virtue. O my guru, the boat is broken, and the ropes are worn,
but I will cross over."

89. Half her scarf she spread upon the water, and thinking upon
virtue, she took her magic seat. 90. Mayana uttered the words '' iudu,
tuduy^ and the journey of six months was accomplished in six quarters of
an hour. 91. She walked to Yama's palace, where thirty-six krora of
Yamas were sitting in the hall of audience. 92. As soon as the Lady
Mayand stood in Yama's abode, on this side and on that side the Yamas
began to run away. 93. When Mayan^ came to Yama's palace, she
spread great alarm ; some got colic and some got pains in their heads. 94.
She became a Muhammadan doctor and a Hindu doctor, and extracted the
poison from their bodies ; but when she came to give them medicine every
one ran away. 95. As soon as Godd Yama cast' eyes on Mayana, he ran
away as fast as his legs would carry him to his own palace. 96. He went
to his own palace and hid himself in a room, and from where she, the Lady
Mayana, was, she lost sight of him. 97. The Lady Mayand went into
contemplation and gazed about, and in her contemplation she saw him in
his room. 98. Mayand collected herself together, and laid aside her own
proper form. She put on the appearance of a gardener's wife, and went
into the palace of God^ Yama. 99. " God4, Goda", Mayani cried to
him with a loud voice. 100. As soon as God4 Yama saw Mayana he
burst through the tdf^ walls of his palace and ran away*. 101. Mayana
cried " mdr mdr" and chased him through a treeless field, where a hundred
ploughmen were ploughing. Like a deer did Mayana chase Yama. 102.
Thence Goda Yama lost his senses and turned himself into a prawn, and
jumped into the sea. 103. The Lady Mayand went into contemplation
and gazed about, and in her contemplation her eyes fell on the prawn.
104. Mayani uttered " turu turu^^ with a terrible cry, and changed
herself into forty-two buffalos, who jumped into the sea. 105, Eating
cress she chased Yama. In mid-sea she caught Yama by the neck. 106.

* Compare note on v. 21. All the houses of the peasantry in Kangpur are hnilt
of fdt^J{jnAt) waUs. When a thief is caught in such a house, he attempts, usually
successfaUy, to escape by bursting through these flimsy obstructions.

1878.] a. A. Gneraon^The Sang of Mdnik Chandra. 207

There GocUl Yama, migbtj as the thunder-bolt, burst the staff she held
in her right hand and fled. 107. Thence Godd Yama lost his senses and
he became a minnow and began to swim in the water. 108. Leaving
her former shape, Majana concentrated herself and became a JPdnkduri
and Vdnoydr* by a change of her form. 109. With flappings of her
wings she chased him, and in mid-sea she snapped up Goda Yama in her
bill. 110. Then Goda Yama, mightj as the thunder-bolt, thrust Mayand
ofF, and ran away. 111. Thereafter what did Goda Yama do ? He
became an eel, and hid himself in the mud. 112. Thence the Lady
Mayana went into contemplation, and her eyes fell upon him in the mud.
113. Mayana uttered " tudu, tudu" with a terrible cry, she became a
swan ; pecking at the mud she chased Goda Yama, and in mid- sea she
seized Goda Yama by the neck. 114. He thrust off the Lady Mayan&
and fled away. He cast aside his former form, and Godd Yama concen-
trated himself. 115. He took the form of a maggot and went off to
Patala. 116. When he arrived at Patala, Yama twisted his beard (boast-P
fully). "Now, how will the iydlt, the Lady Mayand, recognize me."
117. The Lady Mayand went into contemplation and gazed about, and
in her contemplation her eyes fell on the maggot. 118. Leaving her
former shape Mayana concentrated herself, and became an ant by a change
of her form. 119. She went to the world of Patala, and, seizing Goda
Yama by the throat, gradually pulled him up out of the ground. 120.
Leaving her former shape Mayand concentrated herself, and became her
ownself by a change of form. 121. She threw him down on his face,
and began to belabour Godd Yama. She continued belabouring him till
her hands were weary. She then turned him on his back, and began to
kick him. 122- Then Godd Yama, mighty as the thunder-bolt, became
a house pigeon and flew off to the sky. 123. Mayana changed her shape,
and became a falcon and a hawk, and she pecked at him and cast Godd
Yama down from heaven. 124. Thence Godd Yama lost his senses, and
became a mouse changing his form. 125. He went to Kathiya the oil-
xoan's house, and hid himself under his mdchd.\ 126. The Lady Mayana
went into contemplation and gazed about, and in her contemplation her
eyes fell upon the mouse. 127. Leaving her former shape Mayana
concentrated herself, and became a cat by a change of form. 128. She
changed herself from being one cat into forty-two cats, and surrounded the
house of Kathiyd the oilman. 129. One danda, two dandas, three dandas
passed, and the ill-natured woman caught good-natured Goda Yama. 180.
She made him descend from the mdchd, and with a sudden leap the Lady
Mayand seized him by the neck. 131. Thence Godd Yama, mighty as tho
thunder-bolt, slipped out between the interstices of her claws and fled.
* Two kinds of fish-oating birds. t A bamboo Ixiuch.

208 O. A. Grierson— I%e Song ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

132. Yama left his fonner shape, and concefntrated himself. He became
a Vaishnava and changed his form. 133. He used the earth castings of
crabs instead of sandal-wood paste, and made his rosarj of Sdil seeds.
134. Hopefully he took a branch of a castor-oil tree (for his stick), and
going into a Vaishnava pujd house, sat himself amongst the worship-
pers. 135. The Lady Mayan& went into contemplation and gazed about,
and in her contemplation her eyes fell upon the Vaishnava, 136. Maya-
n& gave up her former shape. She concentrated herself, and took that of
a bee« 137. In the place of one bee she became forty-two bees, and sei
out for the place of worship, and she flew around the heads of all the
Vaishnavas there. 138. All the Vaishiiavas said, ''Brothers, hear the
news. What ranful Vaishnava is in this assembly ?^' 139. As soon as Qodk
Yama saw the bees, he slipped under the quilts of the Vaishnavas. 140.
As soon as the Lady Mayan& found out where he was, she settled down
upon Yama's neck. 141. Not being able to bear the stings of the bees,
Ood^ Yama ran away from the place. 142. Mayand laid aside her bee-
shape, and, after concentrating herself, took her own form. 143. She
seized God& Yama, and plucked up from the ground an armful of elayd
grass. 144. Fifty-two times sixteen scores of ropes she twisted, sitting
set a place where three roads meet,* and tied her own waist to that of God£
Tama. Then she carried off God& Yama beating him with a rod of cane.

MatanI spake.

145. ^Hear, O God& Yama, while I make my petition. Set free
xny husband, who is my only wealth."

Qoj)i Yama spaxx.

146. '* Thy husband I will not set free", and thereupon Mayan& be-
gan to weep.

The BTTBDEifr of heb soira.

147. ^' My husband is no longer in my house, 0 lord of the unhap-
py. For whom shall I abide in the days of my youth ?"

148. Mayani uttered " tudu, tudu*^ with a terrible cry, and all the
Heavenly Munis came down on hearing her voice. 149. In a chariot of
flowers, came Gorakh the Vidy&dhara. Biding upon a flail, came Ndrada

* The fact that a place, where three roads meet, is oonsidered especially f avmir-
able for performing magical rites, is worth noticing. I need haxdly draw attention
to similar customs obtaining in Europe. In Tirhut, — ^it is customary, when a per-
son is sick, to cast away at midnight at a place where three roads meet, an offering
of some yellow doth, a fowl, and some condiments, over which some charms hare been
recited. It is believed that the disease will then leave the sick man, and seiso upon
the way&rer who first comes across the offering in the morning.

1878.] G. A. Gnerson—The Song ofMdnik Chandra, 20a

the best of munis. 150. On the back of Ya8oy4 came Bhold, the lord of
the world. Biding on a bow and arrow came Rama Chandra and Laksh-
ma^a* 151. The five P^iqijAva brothers came down here and there ; there
IS no counting the nmnber of munis who came from heaven. 152; Mayan&
parted her hair in two, and fell at the feet of Gorakh N^th^

Mayai^X spake.

153. ''^Help, help, O Qcn^kh the Yidy&dhara. He hath carried off
mj husband, who is all my wealth. He will not give back my husband,
who is my wealth."

GOBAXH Na'tH spake.

154. ^* Hear my words. All the munis have taken advice, and have*
Messed thee, Lady Mayand. 155. Go, O Mayani, we give to thee a.
boon. Let there be a foetus developed for seven months now within thy
womb." 156. Even as the muniis blessed her, hsx body which was as-
light as 9old (pith) graduaHy became heavy.

The Mukis spake.

157* '' In eighteen months, it vrill be bom,, in its nineteenth year it
win die. But, if it worship a Hd()i's feet with steadfast mind, it wiU not
die." 158i. On hearing this Mayand delayed there no longer. She start-
ed for her palace and arrived there in safety. 159. She took nine kdorts
in her hand, and departed to the banks of the Gang£.* 160. With the nine-
ledorU she bought a piece of land, and then returned to her own palace*
161. She broke up the old bouse and made a bier, and with it went some
firewood on litters on men's shoulders. 162. Oil,.yAt^ mustard, and sesa-
mum b^an to go. She called all her relations, and she cut some fresh
bamboos and made a bier. 163. She took the pious king away upon>
the bier she had prepared, and the Lady Mayan£ herself was carried off
upon the door of the hoi:»e. 164. Mayand began to sing the Song of
the Excellence of Hari. She began to praise him as she was carried to
the river's bank. 165. She built a funeral pyre running north and south,.
■he buried posts and made a platform. 166. By the side of each post she
set a jar of ghu Beneath each of them she set a jar of oil. Mustard seed
and sesamum she scattered over the pyre. 167. May ana utfcered the
words " Guru, Guru" with a terrible cry, and Gorakh N&th came ther»
and stood visible.

MAYAiri SPAKE.

168. '' Protect me, O protect me, O Gorakh the Vidyadhara."

* It must be noted, that throughout this poem, the word Gkuagd does not refer to
the xiw coBimoDly known as the Qanges. It always refers to the Brahmaputra.

210 G. A. Grierson— 2%d Son^ of Mdnih Chandra. [No. 3,

GoaA.KH NIth spake.

"Go forth Majana, I have given thee a boon. Within the fire thou
shalt perceive the cold of Magha. 169. Mayana began to spread vermilion
all over her forehead. 170. She put on a silken scarf. She took a golden
knife and a mango branch in her hand, and she laid out the king towards
the north and south. 171. Mayana laid the king*5 head on her right
hand, and she put her own head on his left hand. 172. In each house-
hold a citizen gave one piece of firewood. The pile of firewood almost
touched the sky as well as the earth. 173. Water and sandal- wood did
Chandra, the merchant, scatter upon the pyre. ISTot a single near relation
was present to set it alight. 174. One who lived near the door of the
king, — ^a brahman guru, — stretched forth his hand and applied the torch.
175. Each relation cast one vessel of water on the pyre. Together they
lustrated the pyre, once, twice, and five times. Saying " Hari boi^^ they
set it alight. 176. E'en as the fire smelt the smell of the ghi, it blazed
up with a great roar. 177. For seven days and nine nights Mayana stay-
ed within the blaze, and even her apparel though offered to the flames did
not take fire. 178. Mayana burnt the body of the pious king, and placed
the ashes in her lap. There sat Mayana, like a Goivdmi in his house.
179. Mayana burnt the body of the pious king and the smoke rose up to
heaven. There sat the Lady Mayana like unmelted gold. 180. The
little relations said to the big relations, " Brothers, thrust at her. Let
all the relations thrust at her." 181. The Lady Mayana is sitting with-
in the fire. She cries : " Hear, O relations, I have a child of seven
months in my womb. Let not all the relations thrust at me." 182. The
little relations said to the big relations, " Brothers, let us go to Chand the
merchant, and ask his advice. 183. Ye know Chand the merchant from
childhood. Let us see what answer he will give." 184. Behind the door
sat the merchant playing dice ; and through the lattice, did they make reve-
rence to him.

Cha'nd spake.

185. " Why, O relations, why and wherefore have ye all come ?**

The Eelatioits spake.

186. " For seven days and nine nights Mayand hath been in the fire^
and yet the Fair Mayana hath not been burnt."

Cha'nd sPAEi:.

187. " This Mayana hath obtained a boon from Gorakh Nath. Fire
doth not bum her, nor doth she sink in water. Were the three worlds to
come to an end, she would not go to Yama's abode. And yet, O relations,
ye wish to slay her. 188. Sit ye in a place where three roads meet, and

.1878.] G. A. Grierson— The Song of Man ik Chandra. 211

twist of grass fifty-two krors of ropes ; carry ye off a stone weighing
twenty-two mans, 189. Thrust her forth from the fire, and tie ye the
twenty-two man stone upon her chest. 190. Cast ye Mayani and the
ashes of the fire away on the stream, that they may float away. Then
bathe ye and return to your homes." 191. On hearing this the relations
no longer stayed. They carried away the stone of twenty-two mans. 192.
They thrust the Lady Mayana forth from the fire, and tied the stone of
twenty-two mans on her chest. 193. They cast her and the ashes upon
the stream, and bathed and returned to their homes.

194. At the expiration of eighteen months and eighteen days Mayan&
became filled, and then the (future) pious king turned himself in her womb.
*^ I die, I die," said Mayana, and she began to weep. 195. She brought
into use her magical art called kharupd (the art of cutting), and by it she ,
cut open her fifty-two krors of ropes. 196. " I die, I die," said Mayand,
as she landed at the foot of a JNim tree ; and as she ascended, a sound was
heard like unto the roaring of heaven in the intermediate quarters. 197.
The Mahdr^ja fell upon the ground amid the after-birth and birth waters ;
and he began to cry, saying '^ omtfd and chovayd,^^ 198. The little relations
said to the big relations, " Brothers, let us go and see whose child is crying
thus." 199. They took one step, and they took two steps, and they arrived
at the spot. Mayand said unto them. " Hear, O relations and mark my
words. 200. Decorate the j>dlkt of the old king and bring it here, and take
this child-king to the palace." 201. They decorated thepdlki of the old
king and brought it, and they mounted the pious king within it. 202. Big
drums, and little drums, guitars, and cymbals sounded in all directions.
Cymbals, side drums and kettle-drums sounded in all directions. 203. There
was firing of guns and a thick darkness caused by the smoke. Father could
not recognize son ; he only could call for him. 201. There was a poor man
who had a child in the kingdom, and he could not give it food and water in
his own house. 205. So he cast it down at a place where three roads meet,
amidst its after-birth and birth waters. 206. That child did Mayand also
take up into her bosom, and carry to the palace.

Mayan! spake.

207. " I say unto thee, my maid-servant, pay attention to my words."

208. The maid-servant went and called the wet-nurse and brought her.

209. The wet-nurse cut the navel strings of both the children. She took
all the presents that Mayana gave, and went to her own house. 210.
What with to-day and what with to-morrow seven days passed, and during
the seven days the king caused a concert of flutes and drums to be made.
211. What with to-day and what with to-morrow, ten days passed, and
after ten days the king held the first irdddha after his father's death. 212.

2l2 G. A. Giienon— The Sony of Mdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

On the thirteenth day the king held the final irdddia^ and held a concert of
drums and OTmbak, and all the relaticMis came and sacrificed. 213. He
gaye a feast to all his relations, and at that hour the Lady Majand first
touched fish. 214. What with to-day, and what with to-morrow, a year
passed, and after one year another day came. 215. What with to-day, and
what with to-morrow, five years passed, and she gave him to be taught by
a ^ru, 216. He taught the king to write in four lessons. What with
to-day, and what with to-morrow, seven years passed* 217. The king was
then named. M&nik Chandra B^ja's son was called Qopi Chandra. 218.
And his younger (foundling) brother was called Lanke^war " Found in
the Field."* 219. What with to-day, and what with to-morrow, nine yeais
passed ; and then, what did the Lady Mayan& do ? 220. She spake as
follows to the Ouru brdhma^.

MayanX spake.

221. " Qo, go, 0 guru br&hma^, pay attention to my words. Go
quickly before the king Harii^ Chandra. 222. He has two daughters
in his palace, named Aduni and Padund. Arrange a marriage between
them and my son, and return." 223. The Beverend Br&hma9 on hearing
these words did not delay. But hastened to the palace of king Haxis'
Chandra. 224. He cried out with a loud voice *^ Ho ! King Hans' Chan-
dra, "f ^^ ^^°S ^^ ^ ^^^ house and he stepped out. 225. The reverend
and learned Brdhma^ made salutation. 226. The king gave him a god-
like throne to sit upon, and after supplying him with camphor and betel,
enquired as follows. 227. " Why and wherefore, O gwru brihman, hast
thou come so great a distance ?"

The Bsa'hman spakJb.

228. '^ Mayanil hath sent me to thy presence. In thy palace are two
damsels named Adund and Paduni. The fair Mayand wisheth to form a
marriage with them. 229. Mayan4 hath a son within her palace, and to
him doth she wish to give them.''

The Kino spake.

230. '' Go, go, I consent,*' and ordered him away. And the BdLh*
ma^ on hearing this returned to Mayani. 231. They took a load of
betel nuts and a load oi pan leaves. And five brdhma^s began to cut the <
betel and the pdn, 232. They cut the betel and jpin and searched for a

* He is also called Eheta, or Khetuwl, and appears to have become Gopl
Chandra's servant. He took over his concubines when the latter went on his pilgii*
mage. See also note to verse 290.

t Compare note to v* 21.

1878.] G. A. Qnerson^The Song ofMdnik Chandra, 213

lucky day, and then did they fix the time of the marriage. 233. On the
Saturday, Mayani &sted, and on the Sunday, she made arrangements for
the marriage. 234. They planted five plantain trees in King Haris' Chan-
dra's palace, and they lit the golden lamps and the censers on the day
fixed. 235. They then sent for five singing women, and cries of '' ulu^
ulu** were heard around. 236. He gave Adnn& in marriage, he gave Pa-
dun^ and he gave a hundred maid-servants to wait upon them. 237. He
gave as wedding-presents a hundred villages, and a hundred elephants.

238. He gave as wedding presents a' hundred horses and a hundred cows.

239. After giving them in marriage he allowed them to depart. And im-
mediately afterwards the Lady Mayand sent an invitation to all the kings
of all the kingdoms. 240. From that time that pious king was called
€k>pi Chandra.

241. After eighteen years, at the advice of his aged mother he
became a Sanydst. 242. A hundred beautiful damsels, weeping, fell at
bis feet, " O pious king, do not depart and leave us."

The Queen spake.

243. *' Nay, nay, thou shalt not go, my King, to a far country. For
^hom but thee, have I built up this cold dreary house (of my life). 244.
I built a humble* dwelling, nor yet is it sullied by old age. Why art thou
leaving me in my youth, and turning my bridehood into vanity ? 245. In
my dreams shall I see my king. I shall throw my arm on the couch ; but
the wealth of my Hfe will not be there. 246. Behold, everyf mother
and sister of a man of modest wealth shall have her master to sleep upon
her bosom, while I, unhappy one, will remain weeping in an empty house.
247. When a house is empty and the doors are closed, men come and
kick the walls outside. In the time of her youth all voices cast scandal at
a widow. 248. Therefore shalt thou take me with thee. I am the life,
tbe wealth of thy life ; let thy damsel go with thee. 249. In the time
of thy hunger I will cook thy food. When thou art thirsty I will give
thee to drink. 250. In mirth and laughter will I pass the night. 251.
If we have a long field to traverse, I will wile away the time in talk.
When we approach the dwelling of a householder, there will I reverence
thee like my guru. 252. A cool mat^ will I spread for thee ; on a pil-
low shalt thou rest thy feet. Laughing and joking will I shampoo thy
body. 253. When I hurt thy hand I will shampoo thy feet, and amidst
our sport and laughter, I will devour thy bosom, and thou shalt devour

* lit. pent-roofed.

t lit. ten. This use of " ten" for " every" is of frequent occurrence in Bong-
pur. Hius Jku*/an ki kaf ^ la the stock ejcpression eqtdvalent to *< What do peo-
ple say T'

2l4i G. A. Qrierson— I%d Song of Minih Ghandra, [No. 3,

mine. 254. In the hot season will I fan thy countenance with a palm
leaf. In the cold month of Magha I will nestle into thj hody for warmth,
255. In the cold month of Magha I will cook for thee spiced viands.*
Indra's favourite sweetmeat, the lap of a hundred wives, will I alone cause
thee to enjoy.'*

The King spake.

256. " List, O daughter of king Hari^ Chandra. In many varied
ways art thou displaying thy oharms, nor can I bear them. 257. Thy
teeth are white as the sold pith, from eating the Yansa Sari nut. When
thou speakest, they glisten (like white flowers), and the bees come humming
towards them. 258. If thou goest with me, thou wilt be a woman of
fresh and fair appearance, and I will be a man clad in one rough blanket.
When they see us, all the people will say — * There goeth a pilgrim, but
he is a stealer of women.' 259. And if they say this, no householder
will give us shelter* In thy word and in mine, O daughter of a prince,
will they put no trust,"

The Queen spake.

260. " Hear me, my King, thou loved one not to be deceived.f One
petition, and no more I make unto thee. 261. Like thee will I put
around my neck a Bama rosary. Like thee will I wear nought but a
single tight and scanty cloth. 262. My two breasts will I tie up in
tattered clothes. I will break six of my front teeth. My tresses which
hang down unto my knees, them let me cut and cast away. 263. I will
take in my hand a hollow gourd. I will cast a rough blanket round my
neck. I too will become a pilgrim. Following thy footsteps will I beg
for alms."

The BUllDEN OF HEB SONG. J

264. " O ! the pipe of S'yam. My mind whirls. My eyes flow with
tears."

The King spake.

265. " O mighty fate. I am encompassed amidst a net of charms.
What love is this which I have for a woman. 266. If thou goest with
me, thou wilt be going with a pilgrim. There there are tigers of the wood,
and when thou seest them thou wilt be afraid. There there are tigers of
the wood, and great is the fear of them that be mighty. 267, When a

* Lit. curries made of cold weather chillies,
t Lit. " Engliflli."

X This J)ut/d forms the first verse of a song in honour of SIf ish^ which is given
in the appendix.

1878.] G. A. Grierson-— TA<9 Song of Mdnih Chandra, 215

man and a woman, in such plight as thou and I, go along, the road ; the
tiger of the wood seizeth the woman and eateth her. 263. Whether the
tiger eat thee or eat thee not, he will assuredly kill thee. Why therefore
wilt thou kill thyself heeause thou wouldest follow an ascetic."
269. The damsel hegan to laugh freely.

The Queeit spake.
'' Who sayeth these words P and who helieveth them P 270. What
tiger slayeth and eateth the woman that goeth with her hushand P These
words are but to deceiye, and a pretext for thy flight. 271. Let the
tiger of the wood devour me, I fear him not. It is better to die at the
feet of my husband than to lead a life of perpetual disgrace. 272. Thou
wilt be my banyan tree, and I will be thy creeper. To thy feet will I
cling, and then whither wilt thou flee P 273. When I was in my father's
house, 0 pious king, why didst thou not then become a pilgrim P 274.
Now I have become a comely woman, and worthy of thee. If thou leavest
xne and becomest an ascetic, I will surely die. 275. Let the stream of
my youth fall down before thee. When the hairs of my head turn gray,
then do thou turn pilgrim. 276. The branches of fair jasmines bend
down to the ground (with age). I am now a full grown woman, and how
long shall I retain my comeliness P 277. How long shall I keep my
youth, e'en though I bind it and tie it down. For continually my heart
weepeth for my husband/'

The btjbden of heb song.

278. '' Thou hast wedded me, and thou art going. I weep for thee.
Thou hast thy father, and thy brethren ; but I, unhappy one, have none.
I have left them all for thee, 0 king."

279. He had chosen Adun& and Padun&, and had married them. A
hhaffa brdhma^ had named her Adun^. 280. He himself had called her
Adun& and given her maid-servants.

The Ejkg spake.
** How can I break such love in my house P 281. I will take alms
from one door, and will go to the door of another : easily will I lose my
Kshetri birth and my £aniy& caste. 282. Where'er I shall see a
woman like thee, my youthful lovely wife, there weeping will I lay me
down and die. 283. Where'er I shall see a woman like my lovely
wife. First will I address her as * mother,' and then will I ask for alms."

The Queen spake.
284. ** Alas, alas, my own husband, thou hast uttered a black word.
Thou hast married me in my childhood, and thou desertest me in my
youth."

£ S

216 G. A. Qrienou'-The Sang of Manih Chandra. [No. 3,

Ths Enra sfaks.

285. '' Now also wait thou with th j hand upon thy heart. Until I
return after fifty years have passed away."

The Queen spaex.

285. '' Lift np thy head, O king, and see a pair of juicy cocoa-nuts
oyer my heart. The pair of cocoa-nuts shine forth with lustre. 287. I
will open the nuts and put them to thy mouth, thou hast not strength in
thy body (to pluck them). It is a fruit, which if a man refuse, he will
suffer the Jiangs of hell four times fourteen times.

The King bpake.

288. '' Hear me, 0 lady, daughter of Hari^ Chandra. When a secret
hath been divulged, the meaning of its words become plain. 289. In
front rideth an elephant's mahduij behind him the king. Far have I gone,
and (I have learned that) the great house of my pilgrimage is at a far dis-
tance. 290. I have tasted the fruit of the cocoanut and my belly was
not filled. In vain have I, a householder, suffered* in my servitude."

The Queen spake.

291. '' Hear me, my king. My pleasant loved one, one petition have
I to make unto thee. 292. ** Do not, O pious king, go to a far country.
Give me one little child, that I may keep him in my lap. 293. I will keep
him and nurse him in my lap, and I will touch thee when I see my darling
child. 294. I will place the sun-shade and staff of thy royalty over ray
child's head. I will be the mother of the king and will enjoy the king-
dom." 295. The queen spoke of a child, and the king heard her words
and said,

The EiNa spake.

296. '' What thou desirest is not a chtni chdmpd plantain, that I
may mix it with water and give it thee to eat. It is not the fruit of a tree,
that I can pluck it, and place it in thy hands. 297. Fate hath not given
thee a child. What can I do ? 298. I will repeat the charms of the
gurus of old, and will become a seven months' child within thy womb. 299.
Thou shalt call me ' son.' Thou shalt open the covering of thy breast,
and shalt give me milk."

The Queen spake.

300. '* 1 spake to thee of a child, and thou speakest to me of milk.
Thou art my wedded husband, how can I call thee ' son.' 801. I knew

* Lit. Died. A popular song makes Gk)p{ Chandra charge his wtvee with intrigu-
ing with Ehetuwi Lankes'var as a last resource for getting away. But this is not borne
out by any copy of this poem which I have seen.

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2^^ Song ofManik Chandra. 217

not, O king, that there were but a sheep* and a jackal within thj heart.
Not one kdori of sense hast thou in thy body. 302. (Thy mother) be-
cause she is a widow, wisheth to make her daughter-in-law a widow too.
Even if my husband pass her house, (jealously) doth she turn her eyes
upon him."

The Knra bpaxe.

803. '^ Ha ! thou daughter of a yOe one ; thou hast abused my mother.
I might haye stayed a few days, but I will go to-morrow." 304. He
could not bear the childishness of the damsel, and so the fair king went to
the place of audience. 805. (There was a grove) of twelve supdrt trees
and thirteen fdl trees, and in its shade sat the king's son. 306. The
brahmai[^8 and the relations all sat in a row, and Bir Simh, his BhandiLriy
gave him the accounts of the kingdom. 307. On a golden seat sat Maya-
Jki with her feet on a silver stool. The Lady Mayan& went to the audience
of her good son. 308. The full cutcherry hummed with the noise of the
crowd, and there the fair Mayani stood. 309. When the king saw his
mother, he made obeisance ; as he made obeisance, he tied his cloth around
his neck.

May^lNa' spake.

810. '' Long live the widow's son. May Dharma bless him. May
the years of his life be many as the sands of the sea. 3 LI. I thought the
widow's son had gone to be a pilgrim ; but lo, till to-day he is here with
his fair wife. 812. The Satya Tuga is passed, we are in the second Yuga,
the third Tuga will come. But in the Kali Yuga sons will marry early.
813. The Kali era is a foul era, and hath now approached. Each sitteth
alone and enjoyeth another's wealth. 314. Kings will no longer do jus-
tice in their kingdom, and sons will no longer ofiEer sacrifices for their
fathers. 815. Wives will no longer be faithful to their husbands. Pupils
will no longer reverence their teachers. 316. Behold, four miscreants
went to destruction. 317. The miscreant who doth not reverence his
teacher, him even jackals will not eat. Even crows will not touch the body
of a Vaish^ava. 818. Let a miscreant be cast into fire and he becometh
dust and ashes. Let him float upon the water and he becometh food for
fishes. 819. He is buried beneath the earth and he becometh food for
worms. No where do I see salvation for a miscreant."

The bttbden of heb Bova.

320. " My darling blue lotus, how canst thou become an eremite ? Men
will say there goeth one who hath no mother." 321. The king made up
his mind to be a pilgrim, and at a cross-road his queen began to weep.

* /• e. That your heart contained nothing but cowaidice and treachery.

218 Ot. A. Grieraon—The Song ofManik Chandra, [No. 8,

The Queen sfasie.

322. " How canst thou wish to go to a far country ? Oh wait and
pass the charms of Mayan& through an ordeal. 323. Oh put her to
the test of hurning oil. If she survive that ordeal, then shave thy head
and go forth a pilgrim." 324. The king heard this and hastened to the
hall of audience. 325. He sat in the audience chamher, and could not
make up his mind. Often and often he called for his servant Khetu, his
younger brother.

The Km& spake.

326. " My servant Khetu, take heed unto my words. Gk)* unto my
mother's palace.*' 327. On hearing this, the servant did not delay. 328.
" Say this to Mayand — (* Thy son) would put thee to the test (of burning
oil')." 329. Hearing these words, Mayan4 laughed. " This is not thy
thought, but a conspiracy between thy wives. All the thoughts they teach
thee, will become barren. 330. Instead of one ordeal, I will pass through
seven, and then will the Prince leave his house."

The King spasb.
331. " I say unto thee, Khetu, and take thou heed unto my words.
332. Build thou up a furnace deep and wide. Strip off the three fibres of
three cocoa-nuts, and place the bare (nuts round the furnace as supports for
the cauldron)." 333. Khetu set a cauldron holding sixty mans upon the
furnace, and into the cauldron he poured eightyt "fnans of oil. 334. H6 cast
upon the flames fuel of 661 wood, and set it blazing. Over all he placed a
cover. 335. For seven days he ceaselessly added fuel. 336. One day,
two days, five days passed. After seven days he lifted the cover. 337.
" The oil is hot, even as fire," such words did Khetu speak unto the king.
338. " Thy servant was ordered to make (preparations for) the ordeal by
oil. 339. What command hath the king of kings for his servant ?"

The KrsiSt spake.
"Go and say this unto my mother. 340. * The ordeal by oil is
ready before the king. The king doth summon thee ; O Mother, come
quickly'."

Matana' spake.
341. " Do I eat at thy fathers' hand, or at the hands of the fathers of
the king. At thy conunand, what ordeal shall I pass through ?" 342.

* Note tlie force of ^^ here, and in vv. 328 and 332. It has entirely lost any
special meaning of its own ; and is used as a pure expletive to add strength to an
impeiative.

t 8ic in original.

1878.] G. A. Qnerson—Tke Song ofMdniJc Chandra, 219

These words E^efcu told the king, who heard them, and became furiously
enraged. 343. The king took his evening towel for washing his body,
and flung it to Khetu. 344. And Elhetu shook that towel, and with it
bound tightly the lady Mayana, and cast her into the oil. 345. Even as
the lady Mayand fell amid the oil, the flames rushed up with a roar to
heaven. 346. Mayan^ sunk into the oil up to her neck, and, as she did
so, she took the oil into her hands and patted it into her head as if she were
bathing. 347. Seeing calamity (approaching) the king became furiously
enraged. He called Khetu, calling him, " Slave, slave," and began to
abuse him. 348. "Lift up the cover and place it over my mother, and for
nine days continuously, do thou add fuel to the flames." 349. One day,
two days, three days passed away. But Mayan^ concentrated herself and
took the form of a grain of mustard. 350. After nine days, Khetu lifted
np the cover and when he could not see the queen, he began to cry. 351.
Thus did he say unto the king. " Thy mother is dead, and gone to Yama's
abode. 352. Wherefore dost thou keep thy pdgarC on thy head ? Be-
hold (I am unclean) and the assembly of brahmai^s will not drink water
at my hand." 353. The king cried " Mother, mother" and began to weep.

The bttbdeit op his song.

354. " Fate hath made me motherless, O lord of the unhappy.
Such was written in my destiny. No longer will I see my mother." 355.
He took a handful of twigs in his hand and began to search amidst the oil.
356. Once, twice and thrice he searched. At the third time of searching
he flshed up the towel. No trace of Mayand's body was within the Are.
857. Sixteen men took the cauldron on their shoulders, and they flung out
the oil at a place where three roads meet. 358. With a loud roar the
flames rose to heaven, but Mayand in her form of a mustard seed remained
hidden in the JDub grass. 359. Suddenly Khetu began to weep, and when
she heard the sound of his weeping, Mayand felt pity for him.

Mataka' spake.

360. " Weep not, weep not, Khetu, my servant. Cease thy tears. I
am Mayan^. I have not been burnt within the furnace." 361. He took
up the sixty-^TMin cauldron in his hand and brought it before the king. 362.
Mayani in fact underwent seven ordeals, and passed them all.

The Kixo spake.

363. " Hear, O lady Mayand, my mother. From what aiddha hast
thou learnt thy magic arts ?"

Matana' spake.

364. " Thou askest me from what holy man I have learned my arts.
I have learned them from Gorakh Nath himself. 365. I tell thee, learn

220 G. A. Qnenon—The Sang o/Mdnik Chandra, [No. 3,

thou thy knowledge from Khola the H£4^.'* 366. When the king heard
the name of a Hddi, he stopped his ears with his hands. For she had
tittered an impious word with her tongue.

The Kisa spake.

367. ^* A Hddi is of a vile caste. He cleanseth privies and doth not
bathe. Shall I, a king, make obeisance to a Ha^i for twenty-two dandat !

MatanI spake.

368. ** Hear me, my child, speak thy words in a whisper, so that the
Ed4i may not hear. If he cursed thee, thou wouldest die at once. 369.
Thy subjects feed their lamps with oil and ghi : but that Ha4i feedeth
his lamp with merely Gang4 water. 870. As many lamps as there are in
the houses of thy subjects, so many hath that H^i in his little hut 871.
In whosesoever house he eateth, to whosesoever house he goeth, simply at
the word of his mouth he causeth the sea to stop its motion.'' 372. The
king sat in his audience chamber and could not make up his mind. Re-
peatedly he called his servant Khetu, his younger brother. 373. " Where
hast thou gone, my brother ? First would I eat pdn,* then I would have the
pandit of the days of my father come to me.** 374!. Khetu heard these
words and made no delay. He hastened towards the pandifs house. 375.
" I say unto thee, O reverend pandit, and pay thou heed unto my words. The
king would see thee in his palace. Haste thee to the hall of audience." 376.
He dressed himself in a dhufi of modest kind. Loosening out his brahma^
nical cord, so that the threads appeared in pairs, he passed it round his
neck. 377. He took his papers relating to the Almanac under his arm,
and proceeded to the king's hall of audience. 378. The hall was full, the
crowd gave forth a confused noise. At this time did the pandit, the son of
a pandit, present himself. 379. " Incarnation of justice" he said and
made obeisance. '^ Tutelary Deity of my family*' said the king making
obeisance in return. 380. He called him *' Eeverend Brother," and made
him sit upon the couch. " 0 reverend Sir, thou art the crest-jewel among
prophets. 381. What day will the kiiig sew for himself a beggar's
wallet and quilt P What day will the king shave his head p 382. What
day will the great king besmear himself with ashes ? What day will the
pious king pierce his two ears ? 383. What day will the pious king
wear nought but a languti ? What day will I carry a beggar's platter in
my hand P 384. What day will I start for a far country P Bead me
aright, and prophesy me this." 385. Taking every precaution to ensure
good luck, he produced his Almanac. Such power was there in that Alma-
nac that it could speak itself.

* That is to say, ^' inunediately." Chewing pan is such a mechanical and conti-
nuous action with a Hang^uri man or woman, that the phrase "to do a thing after
eating pdn^*, means to do it at once. Cf. w. 398, 653 and 692.

1878.] a. A. Qnerson—The Song ofMdnik Chandra. 221

The Book spake.

886. " On Taesday will he sew bis wallet and his quilt. On Wednes*
day will he shave his head. 887. On Thursday will he besmear himself
with ashes. On Friday the king shall pierce his two ears. 388. On
Friday the king shall pierce his ears, and on Saturday shall he put on a
iangufi. 389. On Sunday the king shall take in his hand a beggar's
platter ; on that day the king shall set out for a far country. 390. He
will take thee from thy home and will give thee advice and hope. For
some days he will distress thee in the midst of the forest. Other sorrow will
he give thee in the sandy waste. 391. Other sorrow will he give thee in the
city of S'rikali. He will pawn thee for food in the house of Hiri the Har-
lot. 392. The Harlot's dress will be a linen stM bright as fire. Thy
dress, O king, will be a knotted rope. 393. Unsifted rice will she give
thee and hrinjals full of seeds. She will give thee hrinjaU full of seed, and
thou wilt bum them and eat them. A pitiless harlot is she ; thou wilt be
forbidden oil and salt. 394. The harlot will seek the privy, and it wilt
be thou who wilt cleanse it. Thou shalt close thy eyes, and proffer her the
water of her sin.* 395. Early in the morning shalt thoii rise, and she
will beat thee with a broom. Thou shalt lift up the bed of her sins, of
countless, countless sins. 396. Bhdngt ropes will she give thee and a
hhdngi stick and two water jars. Twelve loads shalt thou measure out
every day."

The Knra bpase.

397. " Hear, Reverend Sir. Happiness and misery are written in our
destiny. Methinks, I see death written by the Creator in my fate. 'Tis not
in two syllables and a half that it can be cancelled." 398. Brother Khctu,
where art thou gone ? First would I esitpdn. Then would I give the Brdh-
ma^ a present and bid him good speed." 399. He gave him a present
and bade him speed. '' Make present the barber of my father's time." 400.
He went to the ndpit and called him to the king, saying " Brother, fetch
thy razors and come." 401. The hall was full. The crowd gave forth
a confused noise. At this time did the barber, the son of a barber, present
himself. 402. Even as the pious king saw the barber, he descended from
. his thronet ; and as he did, the theatrum of the temple, and other walled
buildings fell to the ground. 403. The forest trees, and the shrubs, the
Tery leaves of the trees began to weep. The forest deer bent their heads

* Kot a literal tranBlation.

t The word used is ^^ pdf\ ^pdf in Rangpur is the term used for one of thoFo
oolid blocks of maflonry found here and there in the district. Kings of the olden days
an said to have sat upon them, and there to have dispensed justice. One of them,
however, (Uoiri^ Chandra Rdjdr Fdi, see fig. 3), is ahnost certainly a tomb.

222 G. A. Qnenon—Tke Song ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

and wept. 404. At the gJidt of the Ghd{todl there were twenty-two
kdhans* of ships, and they all wept. Twenty-two kdkans of ships wept
and twenty- three kdhans of boatmen, and amongst them YisVes'Tar the
boatman also wept. 405. The deer-park wept and the children's smnmer-
house. Even the school of harlots wept. 406. The TV^iya Manjar wept
within its cage. And nine httdisf of dogs wept as they were hunting. 407t
The hospital and the toshd-khdna wept at intervals. Water-houses, sum-
mer-houses and cow- houses it (?) wept in countless number. 408. In the
elephant stalls, the elephants wept. In the stables, the horses wept. In
the throne-room, all the dresses were wet with tears. 409. A hundred
cows wept, throwing their tails round the king's neck §; and nine hudU of
dogs wept at his feet. 410. A hundred queens rolled upon the earth and
wept, Aduna and Faduni clasped his feet and wept.

Adttsa.' Aim Pabttna' spake.

411. " Alas, alas, my husband, my wealth. Thou art deserting me.
Who now will protect me, and bring me ght and rice to eat ?'* 412. The
king's mother .wept with tears falling from her eyes, and they brought a jar
of Gangd water. 413. They brought a leaf of a Newaij tree, and they
poured water on him from a golden cup. 414. As they poured water
on the head of the king, the royal throne quaked. 415. The barber
grasped his razor and gazed around. But he received no order to shave
the king.

Matana' spake.

416. " O barber, towards whom art thou looking ? Scorn not thou
to shave the head of my darling. Diamonds will I give thee and mounted
work ; pearls will I give thee as a token. 417. Shave off all his hair,
leave only one crown-lock. If thou shavest it off, thereby wilt thou lose
thy quilt and wallet." 418. He took his razor in his hand and for a hun-
dred days the king's hair fell upon earth. It became a hairy Qanga and
began to flow away. 419. Mayana uttered " OMu, Tudu^' with a terrible
cry, and sixteen hundred Munis came down on hearing it. .420. In his
chariot of flowers descended Gorakh the Vidyadhara. On a flail came
riding N4rada, best of munis. 421. On the back of VdsoyAr descended the
mighty Bholanath. On bow and arrow came down Rama and Lakshmana.
422. In different directions descended the five Pdndava brothers. There

* A kdhan a 16 pans of 20 pandas or 1280.

t A bu^i SB 5 gan4(i8 or twenty.

X The meaning of gokula here is unknown to every one whom I have consulted.

§ I know of no other flight of poetry equal to this in the whole poem. I have
tried hard to persuade myself that the translation is incorrect; but in vain. The
words are too plain to admit of any other meaning.

1878.] G. A- Gnerson— The Sony ofMdnih Qhanira, 223

is no counting the number of H^i Siddhas^ with their ears cut. 423. A
Hd4i hid his face with the dust of cow-dung fuel \ and seeing danger at
handy Mayanii began to weep.

The BXTBDEir of heb sokg.

424. '^ The apple of his mother's eyes. Alas, mj child I Who took m j
own away ?" 425. They snatched the razor from the hands of the ndpit^
and gave it into the hand of the ear-cutter. 426. Even as the ear-cutter
took the razor in his hand, he ciied *^ Rem, R&nC* and cut both the ears of
the king. 427. They fastened to the king's ear an ear-ring of crystaL
They clothed him in a cloth covered with holy symbols. 428. Five Yaish-
pavas came and dressed the king in a languti, A languti with a string did
they put upon him. 429. They placed round his neck a R&ma rosary.
They put into his hand a gourd-platter. 430. A torn quilt, a torn langu*
tij a torn (heart at) departure. All the followers of Chaitanya were col-
lected near the door. 431. Holy Chaitanya and Nitydnanda, also B^fi^
Sit&, and the High Priest of the Yaish^vas sang the Holy Lay. 432. The
king's son began to weep, and cried for alms. His servant Khetu g^ve him
alms : elephants, horses, his royal staff and umbrella. Those alms he placed
with reverence at the feet of his guru.

The GuBtJ spake.

433. ^ Depart, depart, 0 king, I give to thee a boon. Thou shalt go
to the three comers of the earth, but shalt not go to Yama's dwelling.
plaoe." 434. As the king turned his head to one side, all the heavenly
Munis returned to heaven. 435. Mayani bathed herself in five lofas of
water, and glad in heart she entered into her own home. 436* In a mo-
menty* she cooked a dish of rice and fifty curries. She touched it, and placed
it in a golden dish. 437. She filled a golden vessel with water. " Eat,
eat my darling. Happy and light of heart, go thou on thy pilgrimage." 438.
When he saw the rice in a (golden) plate, he struck his forehead with his
handy and wept.

The Ejotg bpakb.

439. " When I was lord of my kingdom, O my mother, then did I
eat rice in many a golden dish. 440. Now I am a beggar, not worth a
angle kdort, I cannot eat from a golden plate." 441. He took a plan-
tain leaf and cut it. Thereon he placed a little rice. 442. He took the
shell of a broken gourd and from it he drank a little water. 443* He
washed his face and hands with water. Then what did he do ? He uttered
the words '' S'ri Krishna" and ate the food. 444. One mouthful, two

* Lit at a stroke*

221 O. A. Grieraon— I7/C Song of MdniJc Chandra. [Ko. 3,

moutbfuls, five mouthfuls he ate. Then he looked towards the water, which
was trickling out of the hroken gourd. 445. He put his face to the earth
and sipped up the water, and as he did so Devi's hrother S'ani* came over
his destin J. 446. S'ani and Ketu took up their ahode in the king's heart.
And all his body became defiled. 447. Then Mayan^ wept in pitiful ac-
cents.

The bttbden of heb botsq,

448. '* My son is all my fortune. Who will make us meet again.
4-19. Thou art going to a far country. Thou wilt dwell in the house of
a strange woman. First the householder will eat and then he will think
of thee. 450. When thou seest an Atita or a Yaishnava do not thou
despise him. With thy head touching the ground reverence thou him who
weareth a rosary. 451. When thou shalt see the mustard plant scanty,
and the dub grass thin ; then wilt thou know that thou art in a far coun-
try."

The KiNa spake.

452. " If I see a flower, I will not pluck it. If I see a bird, I will
not fling a stone at it. 453. If I see another's wife, I will not smile at
her. First I will call her mother, then vrill I ask for alms." 454. She
put sixteen kahana of kdorts in his wallet. '* See that thou teUest not
thy guru about these kdorU^ 455. '' In dust and ashes will I spend the
money. Following the Hddi will I go to Tama's abode."

456. The hundred queens went to Khetu. But Aduni and Faduni
went to their own palace. 457. In that palace, there were guards in twelve
places, and thirteen thdnds. No Atita or Yaishnava was allowed to enter
that house. 458. And e'en as the two damsels entered their dwelling.place,
the doors of virtue shut themselves without keys. 459. They set them-
selves to play at dice in silence.

The Queen spake.

460. '^ What day the dice will fall from my hands in disorder, I shall
know that that day my husband is dead."

461. The burden of the kingdom remained in the lap of Mayand,
the king's mother. And the H4di and the king started for a city in a far
country. 462. One kroi, two kroS, five kroi he went. And the king's feet
were cut and covered with blood.

The bubden of his boko.

463. " Alas ! Fate, sitting in a lovely place, hath written ndserr on
my destiny." 464. One day, two days, seven days passed. Night and

♦ S'ani and Ketu of course mean ill-luck. I^ however, by " Devf ' is meant
DvLYgij iihii is certainly not S'ani's sister.

1878.] G. A. GneTQon—The Sang ofMdnih Chandra. 225

daj he journeyed on. 465. So the king left his home and went to ano-
ther country, and the H&4^ said, " Glory to fate. This is the fruit of my
destiny."

The Ha'pi spake.

466. " A proud word did the king speak concerning me. Verily, in
a short space, I will hring him into trouble." 467. " Tudu, Tudu^'' cried
he, with a terrible voice ; and in the atmosphere that wondrous Hadi creat-
ed a forest. 468. They passed through . a small forest, and came to a
great one. The spittle in the king's mouth was dried up, nor could he
speak. 469. In the vacant atmosphere the Hddi went along. While the
king toiled slowly along, thrusting the jangal aside with his hands. 470.
Prickles pierced him and thorns pierced him. His blood poured forth in
streams. He could not travel further, and (in despair) the king struck his
forehead with his hand.

The bijbben of his song.

471. " To whom shall I tell my woes. Even my guru hath- become
pitiless." 472. More pangs he gave the king. He took him through a
sandy waste. At the king's tears the H^di's heart was touched, and he
created a pleasant Kadamba tree upon the road. 473. The kuig went to
a place deep (under the foliage) by the foot of the tree, and sleep came
upon him in handfuls.

The King sfas:e.

474. " What with ploughing through water, and what with plough-
ing through sand, I have undergone great hardships. Place thy left thigh
upon the ground, that I may rest awhile. 475. The Hddi laid his left
thigh upon the ground, and the king rested his head upon it and fell asleep^
476. The Ha^i cried " TSidu, Tudu^^ with a loud voice, and summoned an
hundred Yamas.

The Ha'di spake.

477. " Hear, 0 ye Yamas, take heed unto my words. Build ye a
road from hence to Daryapur, seven cubits broad and chest high." 478.
The Yamas heard his words, nor did they delay. They departed to build
the road. 479. From thence to Darydpur they built the road, seven
cubits broad and chest high. 480. " Hanumdn'' he cried with a loud
voice, and made them plant trees at intervals along the road. 481. He
smote the king with a slap like a thunderbolt, and crying "Guru, Guru"
the king arose, weeping.

The Ha'di spake.

482. " Ihave built a road with great labour. Give me twelve Moris,
that 1 may buy happiness and enjoy myself. 483. I would buy and eat

226 Q. A. Grierson— 2%tf Sony of Mdnih Chandra. [No. 3,

twelve Jeiorit worth of gdnjd : then will I take thee on to Gh&<jApar." 484.
When the pious king heard these words, he closed his ears, and cried " Bto,

The King bpakb.

485. *' I know nought of such a thing, 0 father guru. He who
goeth with such a transgressor, will surely die. 486. Naj, nay, there is
no need of binding me. Instead of twelve JcdorU take twelve hahan9, and
return unto thy house." 487. The Hd^i was in contemplation and sud-
denly started. 488. He went into contemplation and gazed about, and in
his contemplation his eyes fell upon the sixteen Mhana in the king's wallet.

Ths Ha'pi spaiue.

489. " His mother ezcelleth me in charms. She hath put sixteen
kdhans of hdorts in his wallet.'' 490. He cried '< Tudu, Tudu'' with a
loud voice, and took the sixteen kdhans of hdojru^ and flew up into the sky.
491. He created two stones weighing half a man each, and put them into
the wallet. And the pious king took his hhdi and began to eat. 492.
** Give me, give me the hdorU^^ he began to coax. But after saying so
twice or thrice, he became angry. 493. The king opened the wallet
and became amazed. Wonderful thing ! No kdorts were within the
wallet.

The bitbden of his boko.

494. " Why do my eyes dance in my head ? I know not what is writ-
ten in my fate. 495. Why, why, O father guru, hast thou wrongfully
given up pity ? In my wallet there are no kdoru. Give me, unhappy one,
in pawn for the kdofis I have promised." 496. Immediately the Ha4i
called his mother-earth to witness. " I call thee to witness, that he himself
hath offered himself in pawn. 'Tis not the Hacjii who hath given him."
497. He put the pious king in his wallet, and took him to the city of Dar-
yapur.

The Ha'pi spas:e.

498. '' A man for pawn, a man for pawn. Take him, O mother, thou
seller of milk. I would pawn him for twelve kdorts, I wish to get twelve
Mofts to eat ydnfd,"

The GowijiDrf spake.

499. '^ See, see, we would see what kind of pupil this is of thine.*'
600. He pulled the king out by one hand, and the king arose radiant in
person.

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%« Song ofMdnih Chandra. 227

The GowXiaKf spake.

501. '' I perceive tbat be is of beautiful form and accustomed to eat
royal food.* Can sucb as be eat in tbe bouse of a Gow&Hni ? 502. Fill
up mj milk-pail witb money, and fill up tby wallet again. Leaye my quar-
ter of tlie town, and go tbou elsewhere. " 503. He seized tbe king by tbe
hand, and wandered about amongst tbe sbop lanes. 604i. '^A man for
pawn, a man for pawn, O motber, tbou seller of crusbed rice" and as soon
as tbe crusbed rice-seller saw tbe king, sbe upset ber stall of crusbed rice.
505. Sbe clasped bim round tbe waist, saying, " I die (of love for tbee)" ;
and witb great difficulty tbe king separated bimself &om ber. 506. '' A
man for pawn, a man for pawn, 0 motber, tbou seller of turmeric. A man
for pawn, a man for pawn, O motber, tbou seller of 9dg. 507. A man
for pawn, a man for pawn, O motber, tbou seller of vetcb. A man for
pawn, a man for pawn, 0 motber, tbou seller of pease." 508. And as
Boon as tbe seller of pease saw tbe king, sbe immediately called ber own
husband ber father. 509. Sbe upset ber stall ; sbe caught tbe king by tbe
waist exclaiming " I die." 510. Tbe crusbed rice-seller arose and said to
the pease-seller " You get away. Let go tbe waist of tbe king. I first
caught hold of bim." 511. They both caught bim by the waist and began
to pull ; and of a sudden tbe king began to weep. 512. Tbe H&^i felt
pity at tbe tears of tbe king, and called on Indra with a loud cry. 513.
With great noise, hail began to fall in tbe hazdr. And they let go tbe
king's waist, and every one went to ber house. 514. '^ Don't stop up tbe
door, don't stop up tbe door, O sister, seller of pease. Don't you see that
I'll catch my death out here in tbe wet" ? 515. And when the seller of
pease heard that word, she made a great fuss, and left tbe door free for
passengers. 516. Tbe H^i took the pestle for pounding pease, and with
it began to pound the king. 517. He cut tbe king's nose, and bis hair,
and made proclamation by beat of drum. He put bis band upon tbe king's
neck, and pushed him out from that haz&r, 618. He left that locality,
and went to Yijaya tbe ploughman, and stopped before bim. 519. " A
man for pawn, a man for pawn, O bouse of a halwdJ** 520. " Out-
wardlyt be is of comely form. How can be eat in tbe bouse of a plough-
man ? 521. Fit for bim is tbe bouse of Hira, the harlot ; but how wilt
thou go within her house ? 522. Sbe bath bung a pair of drums by ber
door, and if the king of any quarter come to ber abode, 523. And if
he strike tbe drum one blow, sbe will demand a thousand rupees at the
door." 524. Yijaya went away witb them^, and showed them tbe harlot's
house. 525. He took down the stick and smote the drum, and by its
sound his arrival was made known in the house of tbe harlot. 526. Sbe
♦ Lit. *' a king over his bhdV* t Lit. over the yeesel.

228 G. A. Gnerson—The Song of MiniJc Chandra, [No. 3,

began to call to her maid-servant. *' The king of what country has now
come ? Allow him to enter, and fan him with a chdmara.^'* 527. The
maid-serrant heard her, nor did she delay, but went into the presence of the

The MjLiD-BEBTAin? spake.

628. " Why, Keverend Sir, hast thou come so far a distance ? Why
hast thou left thy throne, to lie upon the earth ?"

TnE Ha'pi spake.
529. " It is not bamboo oil vessels, nor Imz&T cups that I carry in my
wallet. Herein have I a pupil. 530. I would pawn him for twelve
hdoftSf to hujydnjd that I may eat. 531. Will Hira, the harlot, take him
in pledge ?'*

The Maid-sebyaetf spake.

^ Let me see, let me see what sort of pupil he is." 532. He pulled
him forth by one hand, and the king arose radiant in person.

The BrEDEPT op hee so^a.

633. " On seeing his beauty, my eyes run with tears." 634. The
maid-servant told the harlot what she had heard. " The king is more
beautiful in his feet than thou art in thy face. 535. The king for
whom thou hast been offering sacrifices these twelve years ; him thou hast
found at thy very door." 536. On hearing this, the harlot did not delay,
but went before the king.

The Ha'pi spake.

637. ^' Hear, oh harlot, what I have to say unto thee. A good pupil
is this whom I would pledge with thee. 538. I would pledge him for
twelve kdorisy that with them I may buy gdnjd.^^ 539. On hear-
ing this, the harlot did not delay, but sent to the hazdr for a adud banker.

540. She collected the paper and pens and counted out twelve JcdorU.

541. In a clear voice, the Hadi told the banker to write, and he wrote the
year, the date, and the word S'ri on the paper. 542. He wrote the name
of Hira, the harlot, on the paper and also the twelve kdoris, 543. He wrote
the name of Dharma on the paper, and threw the pen to the H4di. 544. And
when that mighty Ha^i took the pen in his hand, he uttered the words " Bim,
Bdm" and made his signature. 545. She counted out the twelve kdoru
and gave them to the Hddi, who on his part made over the king to the
harlot. 546. And from the day that the Ha^i gave the deed into the
harlot's hand, the king lay pawned with her. 547. The Muni Hidi
tightly tied up the passions of the king and made him neither a woman nor
a man. 548. When Hira, the harlot, turned her head to one side, he

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%c Sony of Mdnik Chandra. 229

buried the twelve kdoru in the earth. 549. And when the pious king
turned his face away, he turned himself into a golden pumpkin and went
to the regions of Fatdla. 550. Beneath fourteen fathoms of water he
took his magic seat, and for twelve years he stayed there in contemplation.
651. When the king turned round again, and could no longer see his Guru^
he b^an to weep.

The Hablot spake.

552. ** O king, why dost thou weep ? For thy sake I have been
doing penance these twelve years. 553. Where art thou gone, my maid-
servant ? Bring me pdn to eat* and then bathe the king, and make him
put on all the radiancy he can." 554. The maid-servant brought the
king after bathing him. The harlot well knew how to spread a bed. 555.
Over a coarse mat she spread fine mats as high as the chest, and over all
she laid an indra-kamhaLf 556. She made ready cloves, nutmegs and
camphor for eating : so much, that there would be no counting the number
of times the king would spit. 557. As soon as the pious king entered
into the room, she took him in her lap, and sat him on the bed, and offered
him a vessel of pdn, 558. *' Eat a khiliX of pdn^ and eat a single betel-
nut, O king. Lift up thy head and gaze upon this luckless harlot." 559.
The king was pleased in his heart when he saw the cloves, nutmegs and
camphor, and at one time she gave him four or five khiiis. 560. Once,
twice, and thrice he bruised the khili in his fingers, and then the warning
of his mother came into his remembrance. 561. ** Thou art going to a
far country. Thou vrilt dwell in the house of a strange woman. First the
householder will eat, and then he will think of thee. 562. When thou
seest an Atita or a Yaishnava do not thou despise him. With thy head
touching the ground, reverence thou him who weareth a rosary. 563. If
thou seest a flower, thou shalt not pluck it. If thou seest a bird, thou shalt
not break its eggs. 564. If thou seest another*s wife, thou shalt not
smile at her. 565. When thou shalt see the mustard plant scanty, and
the dub grass thin, then wilt thou know that thou art in a far country.'*
666. When the words of his mother came into his mind, the king cried,
** Bdm, Ram," and flung the khili of pdn away. 567. Thereupon the
harlot became angry, " Why, O king of kings, dost thou not eat the pdn ?
For thy sake I have been doing penance these twelve years." 568.
She took five khiliB in her own hand, and put them in the pious king's
mouth, but he cast them out, saying '^ ihu^ thu,** 569. As the king moved

* Beo note to v. 373.
t A kind of blanket.
I See note to v. 63.

230 6. A. Gnenon—The Sang ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 3,

from place to place and sat down, the harlot followed him and sat close
up to his body. 570. She began to scatter white and red sandal- wood over
his bodj, bat the king began to call her "^ Mother, mother", and she replied
'' Mj heart doth not let me, O king, be called * mother' bj thee." 57L
The harlot placed the king's hand upon her heart, but he called her mother,
and asked her to suckle him. 572. Once, twice, and thrice the king
became angered. He even three or four times abused the harlot.

The bubden of his soira.

573. '' I tell thee the words of thj heart. Unholy is such love.
Vainly hast thou lit thy wax candle, and passed a waking night. I am
blessed by Bdma ; and Kubuj^ was not (loved by Krishna) as Radha was.
574. A harlot hath no loveliness within her, her beauty is nought but
copious locks of hair. She is but a gift fit for a barber, like the dhaturd*
flower. 575. I see a harlot's dealings to be like a ferry-boat. Men pay
hdorU at the landing-stage, and pass over. 576. I see thee, O harlot,
to be like traffic in things of no value. Thy beauty is like that of a dark
well. Low caste hddU and doms as well as br^Lhma^s, bathe (to wash
off the defilement) after touching thee." 577. For four watches, the
harlot argued, but still the pious king addressed her as '' Mother." 678.
Once, twice, and thrice did the harlot become angpry, at last she kicked the
pious king off the bedstead. 579. She called for her maid-servant, who
turned the king out with her hand on his neck. 580. The harlot's dress
was a linen sdri bright as fire ; but the king's became a knotted rope.
581. Unsifted rice and brinjals full of seeds she gave him; brinjals
full of seeds, and he burned them, and made chutney of theuL A
pitiless harlot was she ; she forbade him telt and oil. 582. In the cold
month of M4gh, she gave him an old tattered «ir», and a goat hut
to live in. 583. Bhdngi ropes she gave him, and a hh6ngi stick, and
two water-jars. Twelve loads of water did he measure out the livelong
day. 584. If one amongst the twelve was not supplied, in payment for
it seven men would beat him. 585. He took hMngi ropes and a bhdngi
stick and two vessels of water ; and he went to fill them at the Karatoyi
river. 586. One, two, or three loads he filled. The whole day tiie
Mahdrdja was carrying the twelve loads. 587. Seven vile men seized
the king and laid him on his back and then the harlot would put on her feet
golden pattens. 588. Hird, the harlot, after bathing would laugh glee-
fully, and proudly stand upon the king's chest. 589. After bathing her
body, she shone with excessive brilliancy, and she took off her wet clothes,
and put on a dry linen sdri. 590. The wet clothes she would wring
out over the king's face. At midday the king would cover his face and

* Fair to look upon, but has no scent.

1878.] G. A. Grierson— 2%tf Song ofManik Chandra. 231

weep. She then would seize him by the neck and thrust him out. 691.
What with to-daj and what with to-morrow twelve years passed. 692. He
took hhdngi ropes and a hhdngi stick and two water-jars, and went to draw
water at the river Kardtoy^ 693. On the bank of the river, the king
became giddy and fell into the river. '' Alas ! 1 heard not the words of
Adoni and Padun^ and have lost my life through attending to the voice of
an old mother."

694. Even as the pious king mentioned the names of the damsels,
the dice fell from their hands in disarray. And lamentably they began to
weep. 696. " Twelve years have passed and my husband doth not let
his voice be heard, and now the thirteenth year has come. 696. To-day
why have the dice fallen in disorder ? Of a surety my husband is dead
and gone."

The srBDEN of heb Boira.

697. " My love, how may 1 go forth ? To-morrow at dawn and in a
lonely place will 1 tell thee the tale of my woes. He playeth his pipe in
Vfindibvana: and my heart saith unto me, let me go and see KfishQa."
598. The two sisters went out to the theatrum of the temple in tears.
And a jay and a parrot from their cage heard them weeping.

The Jat spake.

599. ''O pairot, my elder brother, let us see why our mother
weepeth." 600. They united their strength and burst the bars of their
cage, and through the broken walls they flew away. 601. After resting*
for a moment on the straw of the thatch, they each alighted on the arm of
the damsels. '' Why, why, mother, art thou crying in the theatrum ?"
602. Ths damsel said, '' Listen to me, ye two dear birds. Your father
should have returned according to his agreement after twelve years. It is
now the thirteenth year and he hath not come. 603. Why did the dice fall
in disorder from our hands ? Of a surety I believe that your father is dead
and gone." 604i. '' Mother, let us two loose. We will search where our
&ther is." 606. " Speed ye, speed ye, my pretty children, to a far country,
and find out where your father is." 606. The birds made obeisance at the
feet of their mistress, and flew away in a southern direction. 607. For
seven days the birds flew, but found no trace of the king. 608. On the
banks of the river there were a banyan and a pippal tree, and the birds flew
and rested on a branch of the banyan tree. 609. The birds flew from the
western branch to the eastern branch, and underneath them passed the
king bearing his burden. 610. He descended into the water and cleansed
his teeth, and over his head the birds began to hover*

* lit. Bcratchiiig.

a 0

282 G. A. Qrienon^The Song of Manih Chandra. [No. 3,

The bibdb spake.

611. ^Arfc thou the king Oop{ Chandra? We two brothers hare
come for news of thee." 612. He stretched forth his arm, and the two
birds settled down upon it. 613. The eyes of the king flowed with afbc*
tion, as he conmienced the tale of his woes. 614 He plucked the leaves
of some wild plants (that grew by), and with his teeth he mended a reed
pen. 615. He cut his left thigh with his little finger, and wrote a letter
with the blood. All his woes he wrote within it. 616. '' If thou art a
good mother, thou wilt rescue me. If thou art a bad mother, thou wilt
leave me in sin." ** This letter give ye to your grandmother." 617. The
birds made obeisance to the king and flew ofE to Mayan&*s abode. 618.
They made a hole in the roof and threw in the letter " See, see, oh Gran-
dam, see if thy head* is in this P 619. If thou art a good mother thou
wilt rescue him." 620. She opened the envelope and began to read : and
lamentably the birds began to weep.

The bubden of heb bong.

621. '^ My son left me in the morning. I fear that he hath died in
the fierce heat of the sun." 622. Mayana went into contemplation and
gazed around, and her eyes fell upon the Ha^i sitting beneath fourteen
fathoms of water. 623. She brought into play her magic art called
iharupd (or cutting), and she cut away the Hd^i's seat of contemplation
and himself. 624. He began to float away through the cold sea ; but
Mayani seized him by the hair and pulled him on land. 625. She struck
him a slap forcible as a thunderbolt ; and the H44i who was still in con-
templation got up with a start. 626. In his contemplation the H^
gazed around, and his eyes fell upon Mayani. 627. '^ O sister, I am going
to the king. I will first rescue thy son, and then will I eat my ffdnjd.

MiLTAiTA' spake.

628. ^ If I find that my son hath learned only a few charms, I wiU
bum thee, O H4di, to ashes, and send thee to Yama's house." 629. The
H&4^ started, and arrived at the ghdf where the king was sitting. 630.
As soon as the king saw the Hadi's face, he laid down the two water-jars
and broke them. 631. He divided his hair in the middle and fell at the
feet of the H&4^ 682. Thereupon the H&4i P^t him into his wallet and
carried him ofE to the harlot's house. 633. When he arrived there, he
uttered a loud cry, and the whole city began to quake with a rumbling
noise. 634. The harlot sidd to her maid-servant ** Daughter, see who it
be. If it be a beggar, send him away." 635. The maid-servant hastened
to the door and when she saw the H&^i she retiimed to her mistress. 636«

* f . f ., if this concemeth thee.

1878.] G. A. Qrierson— -I^^ Song ofMdnih Chandra. 233

She said unto the harlot, '' It is not an Atita, but the Hddi the lord of
Lanka." 637. When the harlot heard this, what did she do ? She went
inside the house and hid herself. 638. The harlot said to herself '^ I am
hidden." But the mighty H&di saw her by his power of contemplation, and
grasped his staff. 639. '' I tell thee my staff, and pay thou heed unto my
words. Bind Hir4, the harlot, and bring her forth." 640. The staff received
one order as if it were a thousand, and with a roar it entered the harlot's
house. 64L It thrust the harlot forth, and then the Hddi took up the
twelve JedorCs, 6dk2. The harlot brought forth the deed executed twelve
years ago, and he counted into her hands the twelve kdoris. 643. She gave
the deed into his hand, and the Hadi said, ^* Bam, Bdm," as he tore it up.
644. The H&di brought a cauldron of (Ganges water, and seven vile men seized
the harlot and throw her on her back. 645. He put on the king's foot
pattens weighing twenty-two maunds, and stood the king upon the harlot's
breast. 646. As he swayed upon her in mounting, he crushed the har-
lot's thirty-two ribs into small pieces. 647. As soon as the Hd^i sprin-
kled water on the king's head, saying " B&m, B&m," all his sin was put
away from him. 648. After bathing his body, he shone with excessive
brightness, and he took off his wet clothes and put on a dry linen dhufi-

The Ha.'pi spake.

649. " O prince, pay heed unto my words. For twelve years the
harlot hath done penance in her house. Do thou fulfil to some extent
her desires. 650. Qo forth, O Hir& the harlot, I give to thee a boon.
Become a bat within the kingdom." 651. The Muni's word was not
spoken in vain : she became a bat, and flew up to heaven. 652. He caught
hold of the harlot in his left hand, and divided her into two parts. 653.
The forepart flew up to heaven, but he cast the rear-part into the sea.
654. As she fell into the sea she cried '' dohdi"

The Ha.V spake.

655. " Go forth, O Hird, thou harlot, I give to thee a boon. Be-
come a minnow, and dwell within the water. 656. Go forth, go f orth,
O Ch&p&i, thou maid-servant, I give to thee a boon. Become a harlof^
and live within the kingdom. 657. In thy youth earn thy living out
of the work of thy caste ; and in thy old age, take Apdilg for thy husband.
He will beat thee and kick thee and break thy thirty-two ribs. 658. Go
forth, O wealth of Hiri, I give to thee a boon. Come into the town of
KhoUhiLti> and be a petty hazdr made of tiles." 659. He utterly destroyed
Hird's house, and then took the king away to teach him magic arts.

234 G. A. GneTBon—The Song ofMdnik Chandra. [No. 8,

The Ha^di sfaxe.

660. " I say unto thee, O king, and take thou heed unto my words.
Go thou into the market and heg for ahns. Let us sit together, as guru
and disciple, in the town of Pardi."

The Kd^g sfao:.

661. '' I am a king's son, and have become a Brahm&ch&ri. How can
I beg ? I know not how to do it." 662. So the H4di gave him three or
four directions, and the king took a platter in his hand and went to beg.

The Ha'pi bfaee.

663. " Victory to fate, this is the fruit of my works. I have in my
house a pupil, beautiful in every limb. He will drive the daughters-in-
law and the daughters of the householders mad. 664. He changed him-
self into Nengadi the Kofwdl and went about fastening the door bars in
every house. 665. He is bending forward entreating for alms, and they
are setting the dogs at him. He will not get any alms, and will return
to the H&dd-" 6^* ^0 king went about begging, but the Hd^i cried
out with a loud voice. 667. And from heaven there came down at his
call five damsels, who placed five dishes of food before him. 668. He
ate his own share, and put aside that of the king with care, and in it he
put two and a half times sixteen scores of charms. 669. He mixed it
with spittle and phlegm, and added to it the juice of refined* sugar. Sail
seeds, keld seeds and durd seeds he added to the mess. 670. Meanwhile
the pious king went about crying for alms. 671. He bent fonvard
entreating for alms, and they set dogs at him. He was tmsuccessful in his
quest, and returned to the presence of the H.&^u

The Kin'g bfaee.

672. " O guru, the people of thy country I have seen to be pitiless
and stony-hearted. They gave neither alms nor charity, and set the dogs
at me."

The Ha'pi spake.

673. '^ Thou hast not obtained alms. It mattereth not, my son*
Accept the leavings of my food. I met a pious woman on the road. 674.
She gave me a little rice. I have eaten my share, and carefully put
some aside for thee." 675. With tottering steps the king drew near the
food. And when he saw it he struck his forehead with his hand. 676.
A rice which my dogs would turn aside from ; such have I, a king, come to
eat. 677. '' TudUy Tudu^'' said the H44i with a great voice ; and the
king felt an-hungered as if he had fasted for twelve years. 678. He took

• Lit. covered.

1878.] G. A. Qiierson— The Smg of Mdnih Chandra, 236

his first mouthfol with expressions of disgust, hut it came to his taste like
sweet amhrosia. 679. When again he put forth his hand to take a
mouthful, he snatched at it, thrusting aside the H^di's hand, and took two
and a half mouthf uls at once. And therefrom he learnt two and a half
times sixteeen scores of charms. 680. By his charms in his meditation
Le bound up his top-knot as a woman ties it, and embraced the mother of
Ood& Tama. 681. Bj his charms, in his meditation, he tied up his top-
knot as a man ties it, and lamed God4 Yama himself. 682. The Hd^i
uttered the words '' Tudu^ Tudu^^ with a loud voice and thereupon the
afEairs of his home came in the king's remembrance.

The Knra bpake.

683. ^^ Give me leave, O guru, and let me journey forth in the bark
of virtue. Travelling in a chariot of light, would I see my wife and home,
and then return to thee.*' 684. He placed his stafE in the hands of the
king, who thereupon fell at the feet of the H&<jd. 685. The king carried
the stick over his shoulder (although it weighed) eighty maunds ; and
started ofE for his own home. 686. The mighty Ha^i laughed aloud, and
the king left him and started on his journey. 687. He reached his palace,
and cried *^ TudUy Tudu^^ with a roar like a lion. The damsels were asleep
but now awoke. 688. Without being struck, the gongs at the gate
sounded ; and without fire being applied, milk and rice began to boil. 689.
In all the little hazdrs the lamps began to blaze. The king began to float
in a sea of delight.* 690. A swarm of bees flew up around his head.
The king saw the delights of holy Vfind&vana before his eyes. And all
pregnant women gave birth to their offsprings.

The Qtteek spaee.

The BtTBDEET OF HEB SOKG.

•

691. '^ A pilgrim hath come, and standeth in my door. 692.
Where is the maid-servant. I would first eat pnn,f and then (would
I enqtdre) whence the pilgrim hath come, and dismiss him." 693. The
maid-servant made ready alms. 694. *' Take alms, O reverend pilgrim,
I am the maid of a householder, and would return within the house."

The Enra spaxe.

695. '* I am a pilgrim from the south : I call myself a Brahm&ch&ri. I
cannot take alms from the humble hands of a maid-servant. 696. If
a lady give me alms, then this pilgrim's son can take it."

* lit. coldness. f See note to v. 373«

236 G. A. Orierson— 2%^ Song ofMinih Oiandra. [No. 3,

ThS MATB-SEBTAITF SFAKX.

697. ** Wait awhile, O pilgrim, thou who sittest and beg^esfc shame-
lessly. Long will it be before thon obtainest alms, even though thou criest
for them." 698. The maid-servant went weeping to the damseL "He
is a pilgrim from the south, and calleth himself Brahm&chdri. 699. He
taketh not alms from the hands of a maid-servant, but saith, ' Let the
ladies give me alms.' " 700. When the two damsels heard this they took
alms and arose. Behold, without a key the door opened of itself. 701.
Adund and Padun& went out with the alms. " Take alms, take alms, O
reverend pilgrim. We are the daughters-in-law of a householder, and
would return within the house."

The Kisa bpaes.

702. " I am a pilgrim from the east. My name is Brahm&ch&ri. I
cannot take alms from the hand of a woman. 703. If the imibrella*
that shadeth thy head can give me alms, then can this pilgrim's son ac-
cept them." 704. The ladies pointed out the ring upon his finger. '' We
see a woman's ring upon thy hand. 705. Thou art the umbrella of mj
head. Thou art a pilgrim, and I am a pilgrim, pupils of one guru."

The KiKa spake.

706. '* One evening I stopped at a house, and they gave to a man
(hdkari kdldi ddl and duS rice. 707. He ate it greedily, and was
attacked with cholera and died. 708. First one man took somethingf
ofE his body, and then another ; and as my share they gave me these two
rings."

The QiTEEzr spake.

709. "Where is my maid-servant ? First will she eat p6n.X Then
shall she cut the rope which ties the elephant. 710. If this be my
husband, he will recognize him. If he be a pilgrim from the south, he wiU
trample him to death." 711. She cut the elephant's rope, and the ele*
phant came &om a distance. 712. While yet afar off he made obeisance
to the king. And when he approached, he lifted him on to his shoulder with
his trunk. 713. The elephant awaited awhile and stood steady, that the
damsels might approach. 714. The king descended from the back of the
elephant, and the damsels took him by the hand and led him within the
house. Amid laughter and jokes, they began to speak familiarly with him.

* J. «., thy husband.

t So explained to me. It means literally, " First one gave a blow, and then
another gave the last blow."
} See note to v. 873.

1878.] jG. a. Grierson— 2%tf Song of Mdnih Chandra. 237

The Queen spake.

715. '' How hath the Guru taught thee magic arts P Let us see how
thou wilt aj^roach thy mother." 716. He changed himself into a golden
bee, and flew to his mother's pakce. 717. He appeared in Majana's house,
and, uttering a loud cry, made her spinning-wheel fly up into the air. 718.
But Mayan4 also was skilled in charms, and with a jump she seized the
spinning-wheel by its head.

Mayajta' spake.

719. '' Come, come my son, the darling of an unhappy one." 720.
The king divided his hair and fell at the feet of his mother. 721. He
sent for Mathu the barbed. He began to clear ofE his vow,* and the
Hr^hma^s came, and collected materials for sacrifice. 722. The king be-
gan to perform the celebration of the office of sanktrtiana and gave away
the contents of seven bams in charity. 728. t He himself crossed the
Yaitarani on the tail of a cow, and his ancestors crossed (the river of life)
into paradise. 724. Mayan& bathed herself with five lofas of water, and
laughing returned quickly]; into the house. 725. After cooking a dish
of rice and fifty different curries, she cleaned three (brass plates) with
tamarind juice. 726. Mayan& summoned the 'Bi&^i with a loud voice, and
he inmiediately came and stood before her. 277. The first plate she gave
to the H&di. The second she took herself, and the third she gave to the
king. 728. After washing their hands and mouth, what did they do P
They uttered the holy name of Krishna, and, beginning their meal, ate one,
two, and five mouthfuls each. 729. After eating and drinking, their hearts
were glad, and they washed their mouths with water from a golden
vesseL 730. Then the Hadi, who came from paradise, placed his feet on
the head of the king, and returned to his own place. 731. They cleaned
the king's throne ; and Hanuman took the staff and umbrella of royalty, and
marched about ; and the throne-elephant approached dressed in his trap-
pings. 732. The king clothed himself magnificently, and the elephant
mounted him on his shoulders by his trunk. 733. He took the king to
the throne, accompanied by the music of drums and trumpets ; and bowed
himself down before it, and with his trunk placed him upon the seat. 734.
Then the king immediately fixed the land revenue at one and a half scores
of kdortSy (as it had been in old days) and ever since reigned happily within
his kingdom.

* By cnttiiig his nails and hair which he bad allowed to grow.

t This 18 most essentially a '* Satpa yuger kathd,** What does it mean P

X Lit. At a bound.

288 O. A. Qnereon--The Song ofMdnih Chandra.

APPENDIX.

The f oQowing are the lines referred to in the note to verse 264. I
give them as an example of the yeiy peculiar nature of the dialect. It is
difB.cult, and requires a very literal translation, which I give.

The word for " fresh butter" appears in two forms, — ^irflr and ^prfiT ;
and it is worth noting how the latter has remained almost unchanged from
the time of the Attar eya JBrdhmana,^

w^, w%K irrj ^y^ I

^fWfT ^T^ ^rtfi> ^Brf%^ wftW II

^imP^ir ^«T ^rj ftrc fHf^ m^ ii
f^ nfti m^ wr^ 31 ^w 'm i
^^m fnrnr «re 'u^ ^ni^ ii

O the pipe of Sj&m (Krishna). My mind whirls, my eyes continually
run with tears. The mother said " O Yadu, how art thou deeping on the
deep bed of flowers in the north ?" Hearing the mother's voice, Yddu sat
up ; he could not open his eyes, and began to rub them. YAdu goes to bathe ;
Yas6d4 remains in the house, and divides out this rice-milk and fresh
butter.

After flnishing his bath, he goes towards the house — ^his mother gives
him a grand throne to sit upon ; being pleased, Yddu eats the milk, and the
fresh butter.

After eating the milk and fresh butter, YAdu's mind becomes satisfied ;
and he washes his mouth with water in a grand golden pot.

• Ait Br. I. 3. 'PnFt^riiwf^ 11

1878.] 239

The LokarAti translated from the Burmese Paraphrase. — Btf Lieut. R,
C. Tbmplb, B. S. C, Ofisf' ^«^ Officer, 1st Qoorkhas.

Inteoductiok.

There is probably no book so universally known to the Burmese as the
Lokaniti, pronounced in Burmese Lawkanldi. It is read in all schools of
any standing whether they belong to the GoTemment or to enterprising
Hpongyis or Priests. It has been copied into hundreds of palm-leaf MSS
with more or less accuracy according to the learning of the various scribes,
and about five years ago the Roman Catholic Missionaries published it at
Bassein in Burmese and Pftli, and soon afterwards the GU)vemment itself
published an edition of it in Burmese and P&li in an issue of 10,000 copies.
The book is as its title signifies a collection of Proverbs or Maxims on sub-
jects of every day life, and as it now stands, is not I think of any great
antiquity. It has a semi-religious character which it bears in common
with many Buddhist works of a similar nature, and seems to belong to a
series of books of Proverbs, though of very different dates to it, which are
known respectively to the Burmese as the Dammantdi, Y&zantdi, and Law-
kanldi, «. e., Books of Proverbs concerning the Law and Religion (*' the
Law*' having much the same signification to a Buddhist as it had to the
Jews of the Bible), the ILing and Common Life. These titles are in Pali
respectively Dhammaniti, R&janiti and Lokaniti.

I was never able in Burmah to find out much about the history of this
book which is professedly merely a collection of passages from older reli-
gious works, although I have personally and through the kindness of several
friends made many enquiries from the Burmese Say&s or learned men.
According to one account, it was written originally (date unknown) in
Sanskrit ( ? Pali) by the Vdngnk (Brahman) Sinn^kgyaw (Burmese name)
and paraphrased into Burmese in 1196 Burmese Era (= 1826 A. D.) by
the Hp6ngyi U P6k of the Mahk Oung My^ B6ng San Ok Kyoung (the
Great Brickbuilt Monastery in the Sacred Place) at Ava. This U P6k's
name as priest was S^k-kan-da-bl, to which the king of Ava added the
titles of Thin Thiddamma-daza, Mahd. Damma-y&za Guru, (= Sanskrit,
Sri Saddharmadhaja, Mah4 Dharmar&ja Guru) or the True Teacher of the
Law, the Great High Priest, Master of the Law. Again one of my qor-
tespondents writes that the author was a priest " with no very extraordina-
ry knowledge of PUi" who either collected the maxims from old books or
what is more probable collected some of them and added others of his own
•composition. This opinion is corroborated by the unequal merit of the
original P&li verses, and by the many grammatical and other errors observa-

H H

240 B. G. TemiAe— 'The Zoianiti translated [No. 8,

ble in them even upon a superficial examination. Lastly in one of the
MSS. in the Bassein District there is a preface partly in Burmese and
partly in £^^1, according to the usual custom, which was forwarded to me.
This contains much the same information as the account above given, and
is almost identical with what is given as the last or 165th sloka of the
Government printed edition of the Lawkanidi, a rendering of which will be
found at the end of the following translation of the whole work. From
these sources of information it is difficult to tell whether the book was
compiled or only revised by the Hpdngyi St^kk^dabi, but I think the latter
is probably the correct assumption.

The Lokaniti is divided into seven khandas or chapters, each contain-
ing a series of proverbs on the subject of the chapters. These subjects are
(1) the Wise, (2) the Good, (3) the Wicked and Foolish, (4) Friendship,
(5) Women, (6) Kings, (7) Miscellaneous Subjects. In the first of these
chapters, and in fact throughout the whole work, there is a strong religious
element, but they contain at the same time many spicy bits of shrewd
worldly wisdom, while the quaintness of the similes with which the pro-
verbs abound should I think of themselves attract attention.

In reading the rendering of this book it must be borne in mind that it
is a Buddhist work, and that such words and expressions as *' the truth,*'
" the Law," " God," " angels," " the world to come" and so on, have a
Buddhist and not a Christian signification. However, it bears so strong a
resemblance to our own " Proverbs of Solomon, the son of David, King of
Israel," that I thought it advisable to translate it into Biblical language,
deeming that the Buddhist mode of religious thought would be more forci-
bly brought before English readers by that than by any other mode.

Lastly, when making the following translation in 1875, I had the assifr
tance of Moung Shwd Th&, a well-known '' Munshi" of Bangoon.

THE BOOK OF THE PROVERBS OF COMMON LIFE.

Qlary he to him that is blessed^ that is holy, that is the Author of all

Truth^

Chapter I.

1. Making my obeisance to God,t the* Law, and the Assembly of the
Perfect,^ I have written in one book, called the Book of the Proverbs of

* This is the usual heading of Buddhist books. In P&li it runs as follows : '* Na-
mo tassa bhagavato arahato Baxnm& Sambuddhassa."

t Or Buddha or the All Wise.

J Or to the Three Precious Things. The " Three Precious Things" are (in Pali)
Buddha, Dhamma and Bangha, which are translated by Childers in his Ehuddaka
Patha as Buddha, the Law, and the Church.

1878.] from the BurmeMe Paraphrase. 241

Common Life, many things from out of many holy books ; which things
I have bripfly set forth in the language of the Scriptures.*

2. The Book of Proverbs that speaketh of divers matters is unto man
as an heart ;t as father and mother, as a teacher, as a friend ; therefore he
that knoweth this book is as one that hath seen and heard much and be-
oometh excellent and wise.

3. He that is idle from whence shall he obtain knowledge P He that
is without knowledge, from whence shall he obtain riches ? He that is
without riches, from whence shall he obtain friends ? He that is without
friends, from whence shall he obtain happiness ? He that is without happi-
ness, how shall he do well ? He that hath not done well, how shaU he at-
tain unto the perfect state ?X

4. There is no wealth like unto knowledge, for thieves cannot steal it :
in this world knowledge is a friend and leadeth unto happiness in the world
to oome.§

5. Think not the wisdom that seeth and heareth a little thing, and
ponder this in thy mind. It is a drop of water that falling often times on
an ant-hill filleth it.||

6. Think it not a small thing to be learned in thy books or with thy
hands : if thou learn well but one of these only thou canst live.

7. Not every mountain hath precious stones ; not every elephant hath
a charm ;% not every forest hath the sandal- wood ; not every place hath a
wise man.**

8. Surely he that is searching after knowledge should go with much
yearning to the place where he heareth the wise man is that is filled with
knowledge.

9. By degrees wisdom is learnt : by degrees riches are gotten : by

* Or PaH Langpiage or Magadhi Language. The P&li language is literally '* the
langvago of the Scriptures." The following is firom Childers' account of the Pftli
language— " The true or geographical name of the P&li language is MAgadl^t,
' Magadhese language', or Magadhabh^sa, language of the Magadha people.*' The
word pAli in Sanskrit means " line, row, series*' and by the South Buddhists is extend-
ed to mean the series of books which form the text of the Buddhist Scriptures.
Thence it comes to mean the text of the Scriptures as opposed to the commentaries,
and at last any text or even portion of a text of either Scriptures or commentaries.
F^libh^ therefore means '' the language of the teoi^s** which is of course equivalent to
mying '^MAgadht language.** Ghilders* PiUi Diet. Pre£ELce, footnote.

t Or solid thing, or pith, or core, or best part.

% Or the night of perfect rest, or nirvtbut, or n^bl^

{ Or life to follow.

I Or hill of white ants.

f Or charm against danger.

•^ Or a wise man of great famo, or a wise man of the Council of the King.

242 B. C. Temple— !Z%<? Lohantti translated [No. 3,

degrees he climbeth that climbeth a mountain : by degrees desire is appeas-
ed : by degrees anger cometh : by degrees are these five things.

10. The knowledge of seeing and hearing : the knowledge of the sta-
tutes* : the knowledge of reckoning : the knowledge of carpentry : the
knowledge of the Books of Proverbs : the knowledge of healing by charms :
the knowledge of music : the knowledge of throwing : the knowledge of
shooting with the bow : the knowledge of the ancient writings :f the
knowledge of medicine : the knowledge of jesting : the knowledge of the
stars :% the knowledge of juggling : the knowledge of the Book of Words :§
the knowledge of the arts of messengers : the knowledge of the ways of
speech : || the knowledge of charms : these are the eighteen kinds of know-
ledge.

11. In the world if none asketh aught of the wise man he is like a
drum that is not beaten ; if any asketh aught of him then his wisdom
floweth forth as the rain : but the ignorant man whether any asketh aught
or asketh not alway talketii much.

12. In the world the knowledge that is only in the books,^ or the
riches in the hand of another, when thou hast cause to use them, then the
knowledge that is only in the books thou canst not call knowledge nor the
riches in the hand of another riches.

13. In the world by the stalk of the water-lily thou shouldest know
the water whether it be deep or shallow : by his deeds and the manner of
his speech thou shouldest know a man whether he be base-born or of high
birth : by his words thou shouldest know a man whether he be wise or a
fool : by the green herb and the parched thou shouldest know the land
whether it be rich or poor.

14. In the world he that hath a little knowledge thinketh that little
knowledge much and is proud : wherefore is it thus ? A young frog that
hath not seen the sea thinketh the well wherein he dwelleth to be a great
water.

15. In the world if a man gather not knowledge in his first age : if
he gather not riches in his second age : if he keep not the law in his third
age : how shall he begin these things in his fourth age ?

16. My beloved children, learn knowledge and wisdom : wherefore are
ye idle ? My beloved children, learn knowledge and wisdom every day.
He that hath not knowledge and wisdom becometh the servant of another
and rightly unto him that hath knowledge and wisdom is homage paid in
the world.

17. In the world the mother is an enemy to her children, likewise the
father is an enemy to his children ; wherefore is it so P In the time of their

* Danunath&t. { Or Sknchiln.

t Or PurAnas. || Or Th^da.

X Or Yedas. ^ Or on the pahn-leavcs.

1878.] from the Burmese JParaphrase, 243

youth they make them not to learn knowledge : therefore their place is not
in the midst of the assembly, as the place of the bittern* is not in the
midst of the wild-duck. Because they make them not to learn knowledge
are they called their ^enemies.

18. Doth any sharpen the thorn that groweth in the valley ? my
8on,t it becometh sharp of itself. My son,t hath any given his keen eyes
to the deer ? my son,t they are keen of themselves. Doth any give the
sweet smell to the lily that is in the mud ? My son,t the smell is sweet of
itself. Doth any teach his good manners to the child of high birth ? My
8on,t he must teach them to himself.

19. The betel-nut that is without lime hath an ill-savour : he that
hath not riches hath an ill-savour when he putteth him on ornaments : that
which is eaten without salt hath an ill-savour : he that hath not knowledge
hath an ill-savour when he writeth a book. J

20. He that listeneth and marketh carefully with his might becometh
filled full of knowledge. By learning knowledge increaseth : from the
knowledge that is learnt cometh imderstanding.§ He that hath imder-
standing of that he should know hath happiness ever with him. ||

21. In the world both unto the ox and to the man is the appetite and
lust and sleep, but learning is unto the man alone ; wherefore if thou fall
short of learning thou becomest as the ox.

22. In the world there is no friend like knowledge : there is no ene-
my like disease : there is no lover like unto thyself : there is no strength
like unto fate.

23. In the world the place of the duck is not in the midst of the
crows : neither is the place of the lion in the midst of the oxen ; neither
the place of the horse in the midst of the asses : nor the place of the wise
man in the midst of fools.

24. Surely though the ignorant man sit at the feet of the wise all his
days he knoweth not the law : wherefore is it so P It is even as the ladle
knoweth not the taste of the pottage.

25. Surely he that is wise if he sit at the feet of the wise even for a
moment, quickly will he know the law : wherefore is it so P It is even as
the tongue knoweth the taste of the pottage.

26. The strong man goeth not to the battle if he be not armed ; like-
wise the wise man speaketh not but according to the scriptures ; even as
the merchant that goeth on a journey afar goeth not without companions ;
nor joumeyeth any anywhither by himself.^

27. In the world, if he lose his wealth, if there be sorrow in his mind,

• Or paddy-bird. { Or the meanings are known,

t Or Sir, or my masters. || Or beareth happiness.

} Or sacred yerse. - V Or without companiona.

244 R. C. Tem^le-^The Lohantti trantlaied [No. 8,

if there be evil in his house, if any deceive him, if any mock him ; the wise
man telleth not of these things.

28. In the world he that knoweth what he should say whatsoever
happeneth ; that knoweth whom he should love ; that knoweth how to be
angry : the same is called a wise man.

29. He that would eat of good things without money ; he that would
fight without strength ; he that would dispute without knowledge : these
are like unto madmen.

80. Going often times unto the house of another, not being called ;
disputing often times with another, not being questioned ; being proud of
his own conceit : these three things are a sign of the mean man.

81. He that is not comely babbleth much : ro he that hath a little
wisdom showeth it publicly : so the pot that is not filled with water trou*
bleth the water :* so the cow that giveth not milk kicketh.

82. The young frog when he sitteth him downf thinketh, Now am I
a lion, but when the crow snatcheth him up he coazeth him saying. Friend,
friend : likewise the fool that hath no wisdom thinketh himself wise, but
when the wise man asketh him a question, then he speaketh unto him kind*
ly saying, My lord, my lord.

88. Because the young frog sitteth in the Uke manner, shalt thou say.
It is a lion ? because the pig grunteth in the like manner shalt thou say.
It is a leopard ? because the cat hath the like colour and form shalt thoa
say. It is a tiger P because their form appeareth the same in thine eyes
shalt thou say. All wise men are equal in knowledge P

84. No ruler is satisfied with his wealth ; so also is no wise man satis*
fied with the good word : as the eye is not surfeited by looking on the
beloved, nor the sea surfeited with water.

85. It IB not right that ha fail in wisdom and learning that hath
come to a full age, if he be of them that are noble. It is even as the acacia
flower} that hath no smell.

86. In the world though a man be base-bom he becometb a minister
of the king ; though a man be a f ooPs son he becometh wise ; though a
man be the son of him that hath no riches his wealth becometh abundant :
therefore be ye not scoffers of men.

87. Whoso leameth much by his yearning after knowledge cannot
interpret that which he hath learnt, as the dumb cannot tell that which he
hath seen in his dreams.

88. The potter striketh not the pot to break it, but that it may be«

* Or troubleth the water by shaking.

t Or dtteth on his haunches as a lion.

% Or agati flower or the beautiful acaoia flower.

1878.] fttm the Burmese Paraphrase. 245

come goodly ; so the teacher beateth not the scholar to make him misera.
ble, but that he may increase in knowledge and wisdom he beateth him.

89. If any bind the flower of the periwinkle tree in the leaf of the
butea tree, then to him it is not the flower of the periwinkle tree only that
hath a sweet smell, for the leaf of the butea tree likewise smelleth sweetly :
therefore it behoveth to follow both the wise man and them that cleave to
him. Here endeth the book concerning them that are wise.

Ghapteb II.

1. Be ye companions with the righteous and keep ye company with
the npright : the upright man knowing the law of the just becometh excel-
lent and is not wicked.

2. Forsake the company of the wicked, but cleave unto the righteous
for he is worthy of companionship. Work righteousness day and night,
remembering alway that all things change continually.*

8. The fruit of the water fig tree when it is ripe without is red, but
within it is altogether full of flies : as it is with these so is it with the
heart of the wicked.

4. The fruit of the jacaf tree when it is ripe without seemeth cover-
ed with thorns, but within it is full of sweetness : as it is with these even
BO is it with the heart of the righteous.

5. In the world the sandal- wood though it be dead:( loseth not the
sweet smell ; neither loseth the elephant his comeliness in the eyes of men
on the place of battle ; nor the sugar-cane his sweetness in the mill : even
go he that is wise and good forsaketh not the law though he become poor
and wretched.

6. That which is called a lion though he be an-hungered eateth not
of any green thing ; that which is called a lion though he become lean
eateth not of the flesh of the elephant : for being noble he keepeth the law
of the noble. § So he that is born noble though he become poor doeth not
that which is not noble.

7. In the world the sandal- wood || is sweet, and sweeter than the
sandal-wood is the moon ; but sweeter than sandal-wood and moon is the
righteous word of a righteous man.

8. Let not the words of the righteous transgress even for a moment.
Baying, Behold I the s\m that hath rays innumerable riseth in the West :
Myinmo^ boweth his head : or the flres of hell are cold, or the lily flow*
ereth on the mountain-top.

* Or that the state of life changeth continually.

t Or jack-fruit tree.

J Or dried up.

i Or guardeth his nobility.

I Or almug tree.

S Ox Mount Kyin-mo or Mount Meru.

246 B. C. Temple— 1%9 LoJcantti translated [No. 8,

9. The cool shade of a tree is sweet ; and sweeter than the shadow of
the tree is the shadow of thy f amily, thy father and thy mother ; and
sweeter than this is the shadow of the learned ; and sweeter yet than this,
is the shadow of the king : but very much more sweet is the sweetness of
the law, that is called the shadow of the good God.

10. As the humble-bee desireth the flower, so loveth the righteous to
be of good report : as the fly hankereth after all manner of rottenness, so
longeth the wicked man after sin.

11. He that hath a wicked mother speaketh wickedness, and the son
of a wicked father worketh wickedness : but if his father and his mother
be both of them wicked, then both that which he saith and that which he
doth becometh evil.

12. He that hath an excellent mother speaketh righteously, and the
son of a good father worketh righteousness : if his father and his mother
be both of them good then all that he saith and all that he doth becometh
excellent.

13. There is need of the brave man in the place of battle : there is
need of the skilful word in the time of wrath : the friend is wanted in the
time of eating : or if there be any trouble before thee, then there is need of
the wise man.

14. When one dog seeth another he showeth his teeth that he may
oppress him : in the like manner when the wicked man seeth one that is
righteous he vexeth him that he may cause him hurt.

15. In the beginning the foolish man of himself doeth not that which
he hath to do, neither maketh he another man to do it : then doeth it care-
lessly in haste and sorroweth afterward.

16. In the world he that tumeth away wrath is not troubled even
for a little, and God, beside other good men, praiseth him that is grateful.
It behoveth every one to be patient of the angry word, and him that is
thus patient God, beside other good men, praiseth, sajing. Behold ! this
man is good.

17. In the world he is miserable that must live in a narrow place full
of uncleanness ; and more miserable than he is he that must live among his
enemies that love him not ; but yet more than he is he miserable that must
live amid the ungrateful.

18. Teach them continually that thou shouldest teach, and keep tbem
alway from evil-doing. Is not this the good word ? Let him that is in-
structed love the upright man that instructeth him, but let him not love the
unjust man that is wicked,

19. Honour him that is greater than thou and thou shalt be reward-
ed : keep thou the brave separate one from the other and thou shalt con-
quer : make thou a little present to him that is lesser than thou and thou

1878.] from the Burmese Paraphrase, 247

shalt win him : be thou diligent and thou shalt overcome him that is thine
equal.

20. In the world not every one telleth of the poison, saying, This is
poison ; but of the goods of the priest they tell, saying, Truly this is poi-
son : for the poison slayeth but once, but as for the goods of the priest
they kill for ever.

21. By his swiftness is known the goodness of the horse : by the
weight of his btirden the goodness of the ox : by the much milk she giveth
the goodness of the cow : and the wisdom of the wise man by the wisdom
of his speech.

22. The riches of the just though they be little are like unto the
water that is in the well, for they are a place of refuge unto all : but the
riches of the unjust though they be great are like unto the waters of the
sea, for in them is no place of refuge neither for them that bathe nor for
them that drink.

23. The rivers drink not of their own water, neither eat the trees of
their own fruit, nor fall the rains in every place : likewise are the riches
of the just man only for an help unto others.

24. Desire ye not that which ye should not desire, neither think
ye that which ye should not think ; but meditate ye carefully on the things
that are,* loving not to make your time profitless.

25. Without endeavour it cometh and with endeavour it cometh not.
Is not this word true ? For the possession of riches cometh neither unto
man nor unto woman according to their endeavour.

26. Whosoever loveth the wicked : whosoever loveth not the righte-
ous : whosoever loveth only the law of the unjust : by these things shall
he be destroyed. Thus shaU it be with him. Here endeth the book con-
cerning them that are good.

Chapteb III.

1. Love not the wicked man greatly : it is as the pot thou bearest
on thy head that is not full x>f water and maketh a noise.

2. The snake hath an evil temper and likewise hath the wicked man
an evil temper, but the temper of the wicked man is more evil than the
temper of the snake ; for the temper of the snake is quieted by the charm,
but how shall ye cure the temper of the wicked man ?

3. When the foolish man knoweth his own foolishness, then, though
he be foolish, shall he be called wise ; but when the foolish man thinketh
himself to be wise though he be still foolish, then shall they say of him,
Verily this is a fool.

♦ Or of nature.
I I

248 R. C. Temple— The Lokantti irandated [No. 3,

4. Whatsoever evil the foolish man doeth, it profiteth him not ; and
though he thinketh it to he even as honey, whensoever his evil deed pros-
pereth then doth misery fall upon him.

5. The foolish man when he hath strength in his body hecometh
wicked and striveth after the goods of another by force : the foolish man
that hath little ¥risdom when his body is destroyed goeth down into hell.

6. In the house it is the rat that maketh mischief : in the forest it is
the monkey : among the birds it is the crow, and among men it is the teach-
er of false doctrines.*

7. The night seemeth long to the wakeful man : the way seemeth
long unto him that joumeyeth : likewise his life seemeth long to the foolish
man that knoweth not the righteous law.

8. The man that hath an evil mind seeth the fault of another though
it be only as a sesamum seed : but though his own fault be as a cocoanut,
he seeth it not.

9. If thou wouldest be wise show not thy fault unto another, but
strive to learn his fault. Wherefore should this be so ? Hide thy faults
as the turtle draweth in his head and his members, but mark well the faults
of others,

10. When the foolish man praiseth the wise, it is called chiding, but
if the wise man praiseth the wise, then is it called praise indeed.

11. Make a present and thou shalt win the covetous : bow down be-
fore him and thou shalt win the haughty : follow after himf and thou
shalt win the foolish : speak the truth and thou shalt win the wise. Here
endeth the book concerning them that are wicked and foolish.

Chapteb IV.

1. If a stranger work for thine advantage then is he as thy brother,
and if thy brother work not for thine advantage then is he as a stranger : so
the sickness that is part of thee;]: is not for thy profit, but the medicine
that Cometh from the desert § profiteth thee greatly.

2. He that speaketh slightingly behind thy back, but speaketh kind-
ly to thy face ; shun thou him as a friend that hath such an heart, as the
bee avoideth the poison that is in the pot.

3. If thy riches decrease thy friends cast thee off ; likewise desert
thee thy wife, thy children, and thy brethren ; only will they shelter them
under thy riches : wherefore in the world thy greatest friend is thy wealth.

4. In the world thou canst only know thy servant if he be good or
bad when thou usest him : so only canst thou know thy brethren in the

• Or P6ngna or the Brahmin. t Or within thy body,

t Or obey his will, § Or forest.

1878.] Jram the Burmese Paraphrase, 249

time of danger : so canst thou know thy friends when thj riches are few :
80 canst thou know thy wife when thy wealth is fled.

6. Whosoever increaseth thy prosperity call him thy friend : whoso-
ever giveth thee food call him thy father and thy brother : whosoever loveth
thee him also call thy friend : and whosoever being happy maketh thee
happy call thy wife.

6. Make not a great friend of thine enemy, neither make close ac-
quaintance with thy friend, for when they are angry they will discover thy
faults.

7. Whosoever hath once quarrelled with his friend if he wish to be
one with him ag^ain, he must pursue him unto death,* as the mare doth
that is with young.

8. So long as thy desire be not fulfilled bear thine enemy on thy
shoulder : but when the time of the fulfilment of thy desire cometh, then
destroy thou him as thou wouldest break the pot thou carriest against the
rock.

9. That which remains of thy debt : that which remains of the fire :
those also that remain of thine enemies often times increase again : there-
fore leave thou none remaining.

10. Whosoever hath a face as fair as the water-lily : whose speech is
ffweet as the sandal- wood, and whose mind is as the poison that slayeth
quickly : put not thy trust in such an one.

11. Trust not the master that is rough : still less put thy trust in
the master that is quick to anger : still less in him that praiseth not : still
less in him that is an oppressor.

12. Keep the thing that is homed fifty cubits from thee : keep the
horse one hundred cubits from thee : keep the elephant that hath tusks
one thousand cubits from thee : keep the bad man from thee altogether.

13. An evil abode ; a wicked husband ; a wicked people ; a wicked
friend ; a wicked wife ; a bad servant : these must be kept afar off.

14. Whatsoever friend cometh forward when thou art oppressed with
sickness ; when thou art an-hungered ; when thou losest thy wealth ; when
thou art in the hands of thine enemy ; when thou art before the king ;
when thou art in the place of sepulture : only such a friend canst thou call
a friend indeed.

15. Whosoever speaketh fair words hath many friends, but the harsh
man hath but few. Seest thou not here the parable of the sun and the
moon ? Here endeth the book concerning friendship.

* Or the kingdom of death.

250 E. C. Temple— 2%<? LoJeantti iramlated [No. 3,

Chapteb V.

1. The beauty of the black cuckoo is his voice : the beauty of a
woman is her love for her husband : the beauty of the uncomely is their
knowledge, and the beauty of the priest is his long- suffering.

2. The wealth of a woman lieth in her beauty : of a man in his know-
ledge : of a priest in hi» well-doing : of a king in the strength of his
armies.

8. A priest is comely if he be lean, as a four-footed beast is comely
when he is fat : so a num becometh comely when he is wise and a woman
when she hath an husband.

4. Be the harper never so good, if he play not on the harp for five
days only his skill is fled ; be the archer never so skilful if he shoot not
with the bow for seven days his cunning deserteth him : so the honour of
a wife if she be a month separate from her husband is destroyed, and the
disciple is lost if he be but half a month from his master.

5. The bufEalo rejoiceth when he is in the mud, and the red duck
when he is in the lake : so the woman rejoiceth when she hath an husband,
and the priest when he doth according to the law.

6. Thou mayest praise the corn* after thou hast eaten of it, so thou
mayest praise thy wife when she is become old : so likewise thou mayest
praise the army when it retumeth home after the enemy is conquered, and
thy grain after thou hast stored it in thy bams.

7. The woman that hath been put away from two or three husbands ;
the scholar that hath learned in two or three schools ; and the bird that
hath escaped twice or thrice from the net knoweth well the way thereof.

8. Tame the wicked by beating : tame the bad husband by firm
words : tame the bad wife by keeping away the money from her, and the
greedy man by making him an- hungered.

9. The night that hath no moon is not good to look upon ; nor the
sea that hath no waves ; nor the lake that is without wild-ducks ; nor the
damsel that is without an husband.

10. It is the husband that should bring the riches, and it is the wife
that should keep them. Is not this saying true ? For it is the man that
should be the leader of the womanf as the needle is of the thread.

11. Every river is crooked : every forest is full of fire- wood : every
woman when she is in a quiet place doeth evil.

12. The woman that is a disputer ; that is envious and a backbiter ;
that is covetous of whatsoever she seeth ; that cooketh much and eateth of
it ; that eateth before her husband ; that goeth abroad to other^s houses :

• Or the rice.

t Or be the beginner or the original cause.

1878.] from {he Surmese Paraphrase. 251

her husband should put her away though she hath borne him an hundred
children.

13. The woman that delighteth in her husband when he eateth and
when he adometh himself, and as a mother correcteth that which is wrong ;
that is much ashamed as a sister when she seeth that which is not
decent or that which should be hidden ; that is respectful as a slave before
her husband when he hath business ; that obtaineth a companion to consult
in the time of trouble ; that giveth joy in theiiour of sleep ; that is clever
to make herself comely ; that is patient in the time of anger : that woman
he that is wise calleth excellent^ and when she is dead she is counted
among the angels.*

14. The maiden whose flesh is as the colour of gold ; that hath eyes
black as the hart's ; whose waist is small and whose loins are broad ; whose
leg tapereth as an elephant's trunk ; whose hair untied curleth at the tips ;
whose teeth are level ; that hath a deep navel ; that is pleasing in her car-
riagef : thou shouldest wed such an one even if she be of low birth.

15. The eighth month { is the most excellent among the seasons; so
the most beautiful is the best among women ; even so the eldest is the most
excellent among sons and the North among the four quarters.

16. The woman that in each life§ desireth steadfastly to become a
man must bear herself towards her husband respectf ully, even as the wife
of the chief of the Spirits || beareth herself respectfully to him.

17. Whatsoever man in each lif ef desireth steadfastly to become a
man goeth not near the wife of another, as he that would wash his feet
shunneth the mud.

18. If he that hath become old take to wife a young girl, whose
breasts are small as the fruit of tbe fig-tree, not being able to deal with her
according to her desire, then she doeth him an injury.** Believe her not if
she saith she knoweth her old husband only : wherefore being wedded to a
young wife he shall come to ruin by reason of her. Here endeth the book
concerning women.

* Or goeth to the country of the spirits or of the "Skis*

t Or habits.

J OrKovember.

§ Or in each state of life.

II Ormts.

V Or in each state of life.

** Or speaketh evil of him behind his back.

252 R. C. Temi)le— I%tf LoTcaniti translated [No. 3,

Chapteb VI.

1. A king sleepeth but one watch of the night : a wise man sleepeth
but two : but he that is wedded sleepeth for three and the beggar sleepeth
all night.*

2. In whatsoever place there is none that is rich ; no wise man that
seeth and heareth much ; no king ; no river ; and likewise none to heal :
in the place where are not these five remain not even for a day.

3. In whatsoever place there is none to love, none to desire, none that
is friendly, none to teach wisdom and learning : remain not in that place
even for a day.

4. In the world the house is desolate wherein are no children and the
kingdom desolate that hath no king : so the mouth of him that hath no
wisdom is dumbf and all is desolation to him that is poor.

5. In the world he that would be rich becometh a trader : he that
would be learned serveth him that is wise : he that would have sons mar-
rieth a young wife : and he that would be a ruler doeth the desire of the
king.

6. The priest that is not content cometh to ruin, as a lord of the
world, if he be satisfied, cometh to destruction : so an harlot is ruined if
she become modest, or she that is pure if she lose her modesty.

7. The strength of a bird is as the heavens : the strength of a fish is
as the sea : even as the strength of a king is as a weak man and the strength
of a child is a cry.

8. Long-suffering, wakefulness, industry, almsgiving, mercy, pru-
dence : these six things are the glory of kings, of rulers, and of parents.
This is the glory they desire that are good.

9. In the world kings command but once ; priests and teachers^
speak but once ; prophets § teach but once : and after their manner doeth ||
the good man that is worthy to be loved.

10. In the world the idle man is evil i£ he be married, so is the priest
evil if he keep no guard over his body or his mouth or his heart : likewise
is the king evil that doeth aught without thinking of it, and the wise man
that is wrathful if his wrath escape him.

11. In whatsoever place there are many great men^ each desiring to
be called a wise man and longing to be the chief of all : the work of those
men cometh to nought.

• Or for four watches.

t Or quiet or desolate.

X Or BrahmanB or Pongnas.

^ Or saints or gods and the holy.

II Or foUoweth their teaching or doeth the law of their mcaniiig.

% Or chiefs.

1878.] from the Burmese JParapJirase, 253

12. Every king should of himself know his revenues whether they
be less or more, and his provisions if thej be enough or not : of himself he
should know his servants if thej do not their business ; that he that is
worthy of disgrace may be disgraced, and he that is worthy of greatness may
be made greater.

13. In the world turn thy back toward the sun and thy belly to
the fire, pay respect with thy whole body to the great man,* and by wis-
dom find a way to the world to come.f

14. In the world touch neither fire, nor water, nor a woman, nor a
fool, nor a snake, nor a prince, but pass them by or instantly they will take
away thy life.

15. In the world if any hath a bad wife, hath rude servants and evil-
minded, hath a snake in his house : verily he shall die.

16. In the world by teaching wisdom to him that is very foolish, by
living with a very wicked wife, by keeping company with the unjust shalt
thou become less even though thou art a wise man.

17. In the world if the son do an evil deed thou sayest. His mother
doeth it : likewise if the disciple work evil thou sayest. The master doeth
it : so if the people do wrong thou shalt say. It is the king that hath
done this ; and if the king himself do evil then shalt thou say, This is the
work of the High Priest. J

18. By his kindness§ a king should conquer him that is wrathful and
proud, and him that is dishonest by his honesty : even as he overcometh the
sour man by a present and by his truthfulness the liar.

19. In the world the rude man is tamed by a gift and by a gift
Cometh every good thing ; for he that bringeth gifts and fair words gaineth
respect from another because he payeth it.

20. Gifts and offerings bring || love in the world, as a sour mind
bringeth^ hate : so also gifts and offerings bring || many followers even as
a sour mind bringeth^ loneliness.

21. In the world thou canst conquer the enemy thou desirest to con-
quer, if he use not hi? advantage when it is great, for then thou bccomest
his equal : it is as thou makest a rope of grass and with it bindest an ele-
phant.

22. A king that hath his fill of armies, if he be not able to conquer

* Or lord or master.

t Or offer respectfully thy back to the sun, thy belly to the fire, thy whole body
to the great man, and thy wisdom to the world to come.
X Or the Paiohit or Chief Brahman.
{ Or without anger.
II Or are the medicine or charm for.
If Or is the medicine or charm for.

254 R. C. Temple— TA<? Lohantti translated [No. 3,

his enemies, what profiteth him his power ? It is as a fire, that is kindled
in a place where is no wind, that hnmeth not.

23. None gratifieth his hist as a king, so none taketh either his form,
or his speech, or his ornaments,* or his clothing or his jewels or anything
that is his.

24. The king is not mj kinsmanf ; the king is not my wife's bro-
ther^ ; the king is my master§ : keep these alway in thy mind.

25. When thou waitest on the king stand not afar off ; neither ap-
proach very close ; nor go between him and the wind ; nor keep in front of
him ; nor look from a place lower than he, nor yet from one that is higher ;
these six things thou shalt not do : keep thyself from these as thou guard-
est thyself from fire.

26. Be thy glory as the glory of the God that knoweth all things, if
thou obtain not the favour of the king, || it becometh thee not : for it be-
hoveth the ruby that is of great price to be set in gold.^ Here endeth the
book concerning kings.

Chapteb VII.

1. How shall the priest do his duty that keepeth close acquaintance
with a woman ? or how shall he have a tender heart that eateth much of
flesh ? How shall he speak true words that drinketh strong drink ? or he
know shame that hath strong desire ? How shall he obtain knowledge
that is very idle ? or he gather riches that grovelleth ?

2. He that is a drunkard ; that goeth abroad at wrong times ; that
goeth often times unto feasts ; that is a gambler ; that hath evil friends ;
that is an idler : he that doth these things cometh to destruction by reason
of them.

3. In the day time speak not without looking first, and in the night
time without asking first, but bear thyself as the hunter that is fearful of
danger and looketh to and fro in the forest.

4. The prophet** Byasa saith of five kinds of men that they are dead
while yet alive : these are they that are poor, that are sick, that are igno-
rant, that are debtors, that are about the king.

* Or his flowers and aweet smelling things.

t Or spouse.

i Or sister's husband.

§ Or lord.

II Or the refuge that is called the king.

f Or the ruby of great price if it be set in gold becometh goodly.

♦•Or teacher.

1878.] Jrom the Burmese Parapkrase. 255

5. It is the wisdom* of the wise man that he seeth dxa^&r «re yet
it cometh and avoideth it from afar, neitiier is he afraid when he seeth that
it hath already fallen on him.

6. In the world he that sleepeth over much, that is f (Mrgetf ul, that
taketh his ease, that hath much sicknesS| that is lazy, that is strong iA hia
lu8ts,t that is eager for whatsoeyer is new : these sey-en know Bot the
Scriptures. {

7. Go to the poor, thou gift : for he that hath many gifts is surfei-
ted. Go unto the valley, thou Angel of the Raia ; for the sea is suif eited
with water. Such is not the law, but the deed is thine owaL.f

8. In the world when any hath finished that he hath to do he regard*
eth it no morej| : therefore when thou hast aught to do, leave undoae a
remainder thereof.

9. In the world cotton is light, but lighter^ is he that is wantoEn, and
lighter still is he that hearkaneth not unto his parents aad his teaobeni^
and lights yet than all is he that heedeth not the word of the exoeU^il;
God.

10. In the world the sunshade** that is of stone is of worth,tt and o£
greater worth j::{: is it to hearken to the Angels, and greater idiill is tibe
worthi^:]^ of the instructions of thy teachers and parents^ but the wcffd 4)£
the excellent God is the most worthy §§ of aU.

11. In the world thj right hand is called the slave of the body toA
his little finger the slave of the ear and the nose ajid the ^yes, but the left
liand is called the slave <^ the feet.

12. The angel|| || Kuwera dwelleth in the midst of the betel-leaf : at
the bottom thereof there dwelleth a sypirit^^ And at the top thereof there
Swelleth a devil.*** Wherefore when thou eatest of it^ cut oeS the top and
the l>ottom therecff , and thou shalt be ef good repute.

18. An angel of high degreefff guardeth thd tablets ; an angel of

• Or nature.

t Or hath great desires.

{ Or the books.

f Or this is &<^t the law of naAure, 'hrA the 'Aeed is the oxig^inal cause.

I Or car«£hno.inarelfi)riL
9 Or more woffthlesa.

** Or hiie or umbrella,
ft Or heavy.
%t Or heavier.
{§ Or heaviest

II Or n&t or spirit.

n Or belu or sprite or yakkha.
•♦• Or he that is evil,
ttt Or a Brahma.

256 B. C. Temple— 2%^ Lohmiti tramlaied [No. 3,

lesser degree* guardeth the bindingsf thereof ; therefore it behoveth him
that leameth knowledge to propitiate the angels both of the higher and
lower degree, :{ for thej love him that doth this.

14. According as the ox cherisheth man and bring^h him wealth, so
let him love him as a parent and respect him.

16. Whosoever eateth of the flesh of the ox the same is called the
devourer of his own mother* s flesh : if an ox die it is meet that he be given
to the birds of the air§ or unto the waters. ||

16. He that leameth on the fifth day of the week will be complete
in knowledge : he that learneth on the first or sixth daj will leave undone
a part thereof : he that leameth on the second or fourth day will obtain
none of it^ : and he that leameth on the third or last day of the week will
die.

17. There is that sayeth that he that learneth knowledge on the
eighth day of the waxing or the waning moon killeth the teacher, and that
he that teacheth knowledge on the fourteenth day of the waxing or the
waning moon killeth the scholar : also there is that sayeth that if know-
ledge be taught on the tenth day of the waxing or the waning moon it
will be destroyed, and that if it be taught to any at the full moon his pa-
rents will be slain.

18. In the world he that leameth knowledge eateth not of the cocoa-
nut on the seventh day of the waxing and the waning moon : on the
ninth day also he eateth not of the gourd, neither of the kenbeng on the
twelfth day, nor on the third day of the divers kinds of curries : if he eat
of these his knowledge will be lost.

19. In the world a man is renounced for the profit of his family : a
family for the profit of the village : a village for the profit of the city :
and the whole world for the profit of a man.**

20. In the world the lion, the good man and the elephant, these leave
the place that is not for their advantage and go their way ; but the crow,
the bad man, and the deer, these come to destruction in the place where
they find delight.

21. In whatsoever place there is none to love and none to desire,
there is no friend and none to teach : tarry thou not there.

22* The wise man goeth to the new place with a watchful mind as
one that goeth forward, and remaineth in the old place with a constant

• Or a Pisana.

t Or bag.

t Or both the Brahmaa and the PiMuaas.

i Or the YultnreB.

I Or that he float on the water.

V Or be of a calm mind.

•• Or self.

1878.] from the Burmese Paraphrase, 267

mind as one that standeth still : wherefore leave not quickly the old place
without trying the new.

23. A woman when she eateth eateth twice as much as a man, hat
her wisdom is four times greater than his, and her lust eight times greater.

24. In the world the taste of the sugarcane hecometh sweeter accord-
ing as the joint is further from the top ; so the excellent man that is a
good hushand hecometh sweeter from the heginning even unto the end, as
doth the sugarcane : likewise also the evil friend hj degrees loseth his
sweetness, as doth the sugarcane when thou eatest thereof from the hottom
to the top.

25. If the country he filled full of hushandmen and of merchants and
of nohlemen and of priests of good repute, then shall the herders he increased.

26. The wisdom of him that prayeth not f adeth away, as the house
of him that is idle hecometh foul : even so also is idleness as rust to him
that is beautiful, and sloth as dirt to the sober priest.

27. In the world the riches of them that do little labour become the
riches of them that work much. They that are come to a low estate teach,
saying, Our fortune is the reason thereof : but they that are wise teach not
so, saying. It is because they do not their work with all their might. If
the work be not finished, and he profiteth not according to his desire ; Is
the fault with it ? Nay, the fault lieth not with it.

28. Whosoever is of low estate, neither can work with his lips nor
with his hands, whose form is not fair, who lacketh strength : though he
be blamed by reason of these, yet is this age a lesser age and maketh his
wealth only to be of any worth. Here endeth the book concermng divers
matters.

29. The book concerning the wise ; the book concerning the good ;
the book concerning the evil ; the book concerning friends ; the book con-
cerning women ; the book concerning kings ; the book concerning divers
matters. He who put in order these seven books is called Chakkindabi the
true teacher of the law,* the great High Priest, Master of the Law,t that
dwelleth in the building that is built of bricki^ in the Sacred Ground. § He
made clear the interpretation of the writings of the Book of the Proverbs
of Common Life in the second fifth-month || on the first day of the week^
and the seventh of the waning moon, in the eleven hundred and ninety-
sixth year.

* Or Saddhamma Dhaja.

t Or Mahi Dhammarftja Ghira.

t Or in the Ok Kyoung.

{ Or MaM Oung myd bdngts^in.

I Or intercalary month.

S Or Sunday.

^»N»^^*^l^^^l^i^>^»^*»VN^^<^^^V^S^^^^<^VS^^S^M\^^^»V^

j

JOURNAL

OP THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part I.— HISTORY, LITERATURE, &c.

No. IV.— 1878.

The Bangash Naw&hs of Farrukhdbdd—A Ghronzele, (1713— 1857).— ^y
William Ibvine, C. S., Fatehgarh, N, W, P. — Pabt I.

Prom the time of Farrukhsijar's accession in 1713, the imposing
fabric of the Mughal Empire began to fall asunder. In the hands of weak
and dissolute princes, surrounded by self-seeking and incompetent courtiers,
the central power rapidlj withered and ddcayed. As control relaxed, the
provincial governors usurped more and more, in fact if not in name, the
attributes of sovereignty, and transmitted their authority to their heirs
with little more than the nominal concurrence of the faineant descendants
of Babar and Akbar. To this period of disintegration can be traced the
origin of nearly all the great Muhammadan principalities which the English
found, when they first intervened in Indian politics. From 'Ali Wardi
Kh&n, a subahdar who died in 174J>, descend the Naw&b-Nazims of Bengal ;
the Nizdm of Haidardbdd represents the family founded by Nizdm-ul Mulk,
Ajsaf J&h, Subahd&r of the Dakhin from 1713 to 1748 ; the kings of Audh
sprang from Sa'dat Kh&n, Burhan-ul Mulk, appointed Subahdar of Audh
in 1713 ; the Bohelas achieved their independence in the early part of
Muhammad Shah^s reign ; and the Ja^s of Bhartpur first rose into impor-
tance at the time when Chuninian became the ally of 'Abdullah Khan,
Kutb-ul Mulk, the rebellious Wazir of Muhammad Shah. The B.ingash
house, which founded Farrukhabad and acquired a considerable territory in
the middle Du&b, arose at the same time and in the same way as its more
famous rivals ; and although in the end it fell upon evil days, there was
a time when its prospects of future greatness were little, if at all, inferior to
L L

260 W. Irvine— Tlte Bangash Nawdls of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

those of its competitors. At the death of Mahanimad Kh&n in 1743, no
one would have foretold that his successors would so soon be distanced in
the race for power. The rashness of one successor and the weak unam-
bitious nature of another, aided by the exposed position of their country,
placed in the highway of all hostile forces from east or west or south, soon
reduced Farrukhdb^ to comparative iosignificance. Still, it is impossible
to deny that the Bangash Nawabs have received but scant justice at the
hand of the general historian. Nowhere has their history been told in any
connected form, and many of the events in which they played a prominent
part have been passed over or incorrectly narrated. To remedy, so far as
possible, this defect, is the object of this paper. It is, I believe, the first
attempt in English to tell, from the local point of view, the story of the
Nawabs of Farrukhabad.

Account of the sources from which this history is derived.

Since many of the books I have used are MSS. not known beyond the
limits of the district, it is desirable to begin with som6 account of them
and their authors.

The oldest and most valuable of these is a collection of letters from
and to Muhammad Khan, Ghazanfar Jang, made in 1159 H. (Jan. 1746—
Jan. 1747) by Munshi S4hib Bae under the name of Khujistah Kaldm^
which denotes the date. There are 206 letters from, and 89 to Muhammad
Khan. His correspondents ingluded all the great men of that time, but
letters are most numerous to the Emperor, to the Wazir Kamr-ud-din E^hdn,
to Nizdm-ul Mulk, to Khan Daur4n Khin, Amir-ul Umrd, and to Koshan-
ud-daula. The letters belong mostly to the period from 1140 H. to 1156
H. The MS. measures 10 in. x 6^ in. and contains 251 leaves of
fifteen lines to a page, but there are two or three leaves wanting at the
end. The book, which was obtained from the heir of S4hib K4e'8 great-
grandson Bhaw^ni Parsh&d, lay in a heap of other papers, which had been
reduced to dust by damp and insects, in a long-disused room. No other
copy appears to be in existence.

The family history of Sahib E.de, so far it can be pieced together from
the fragments left at the end of his book, is as follows : His grandfather,
Manohar Das, filled the office of peshkdr of Bahat, Sahin<ji and Antri with
other districts of Sarkir Gw^liar. He lived in Gwali^r where he had a
masonry house. After his death, his son Dw4rka D4s went to Sh^jah4n-
ibdd in search of employment, and lived in the Pahi.rganj ward. Through
his friend L41a Gaj Singh, peshkar of the KhaUa Shartfoy he was ap-
pointed to some office. He left two sons Dal Chand and S4hib K4e. The
former was letter-copier and keeper of private accounts to Naw&b Sa*dat
Khan* S&hib B^ was educated by his brother, and in the time of Far-

J878.] W. Irvine~I7<<? Bangagh Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. 261

rakhsiyar (1718 — 1718) entered the service o£ Nawdb Muhammad Kh^n as
Munshi or Secretary. The period of his death is not known. His grand-
son, Dalpat K4e, held the same office and played a prominent part in the time
of Nawdb Muzaffiar Jang (1771—1796) and Ndsir Jang (1796—1813).

The next in order of time and perhaps of value, is a work by Sayyad
His&n-ud-din Shah Gwiliari. His grandfather, Abu*l Hasan, was sister's
son and son-in-law to the saint Muhammad Ghaus Gwalidri. His^m-
ud-din came to Famikh^bad in Muhammad Khan's time (before 1748) and
served as a yakka or adventurer riding his own horse. He was present at
the siege of Allahabad (Oct. 1750 to April 1751), the siege of Fathgarh
(April-May 1751), and the campaign in Rohilkhand (Oct. 1751 — April
1762). He became a Fakir and died in 1210 H. (July 1795— July 1796).

His book is of little value till he comes to the battle of November
1748, in which ^aim Khdn lost his life. From that time till the death of
Ahmad Khan in 1771 the narrative is full and interesting. The style is
clear and graphic with little attempt at literary effect, and I think he fully
deserves Mufti Wali-uUah's praise of trustworthiness. The MS. was
lent to me by Mir Fazl 'Ali from the Madrasa library of Mufti Wali-
uUah. It measures 7i in. x 5 in. and has 393 pages of 11 lines to the
page. It is divided into the following headings — Muhammad Khan and
J^aim Jang, pp. 4-54 — Im4m Khan succeeds, fine to Emperor paid. Imam
Kbdn imprisoned, Bibi Sahiba escapes ; pp. 54-89 — Ahmad Khdn, death
of Naval Ede, defeat of Wazir, siege of AUahabid, pp. 89-150 — Return
of the Wazir, Ahmad Khdn goes to Rohilkhand, pp. 1.50-226 — Ahmad
Khan retreats under the Hills and gets aid from the Rajah of Almora, pp.
226-249 — The Wazir with the Mahrattas arrives and besieges Ahmad
Khan, pp. 249-264 — Interview between Ahmad Kh4n and the R4jah, the
Wazir makes peace and takes the Nawab's son with him towards Lakhnau,
pp. 264-313 — Ahmad Khdn and his chiefs, with the Rohelas, march from
the entrenchment, Ahmad Khdn comes to Farrukh4b4d, pp. 313-310 —
Marriage of MuzafEar Jang, pp. 340-353 — The Wazir brings the Emperor
(Shah 'Alam) to attack Ahmad Khan, pp. 353-393.

The next in order of date is Mufti Wali-ullah's Tarikh-i-Farrukhd'
had written about 1245 H. (July 1829— June 1830). Sayyad Wali-ullab,
son of S. Ahmad 'Ali (who died 1187 H.=I773 A. D. aged 51), was born at
San4i, Sirkar Khairabad, on the 14th Shawwal 1165 H. (26th August, 1752).
The family had been settled for ten generations at Sandi, about twenty-
six miles south-east of Farrukhabad, on the other side of the Ganges.
Before that, ten generations had lived at Daipur, just east of Kanauj and
close to the Ganges. The founder of the colony there is said to have come

from Labor.

When he was nine years of age, Wali-ulkh came with his father to

2G2 W. Irvine— T^tf Bangash NawdU of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Farrukbabad. He studied at Farrukh&bid, Kanaaj and Bareli, finisbing
under 'Abd-ul Basit Kanauji. In 1189 H. (March 1775— Feb. 1776),
wbile on his way to Mecca, he visited the town of Kabmat&bad in the
eastern part of the Dakhin, where he was initiated into the Nakshbandi and
Kadiriya tenets by Khw4ja Rahmat-ullah. In 1190 H. (Feb. 1776— Feb.
1777) he spent six months at the holy places. Ketuming to India he at
length in 1196 H. (Dec. 1781— Dec. 1782) settled at Farrukbabad. From
his savings he bought several houses, and joining them together he ei^ab-
limbed a madrassa and named it Fakhr-ul Maraba o Maba*-ul Mufdkhir^
which gives the date 122^ H. (Feb. 1809— Feb. 1810). His Hbrary is
st ill kept there, but there are no scholars and nothing is taught. On the
2i>th August, 1805, he was appointed Mufti, which office he held till the
13th October, 1828, when he was succeeded by his relation, Mufti
Wilayat-ullah. Wali-uUah died on the 5th JamMi II, 1249 (18th Nov.,
1883). The following idrikhs give the year of his death. The first is^by
BahMur ^Ali Sayyad.

I. Oanj-i-ma^ni ha^raft zer zamtn.

II . Da fan kardand ganj-i-ilm ha-khdk.

One of the copies of his history lent me by Mir Fazl 'Ali measures 10
in. X 6^ in., and has 370 pages, the number of lines to a page varies. The
book is divided into two parts. Part I, History of Farrukbdbad and the
Bangash family ( 160 pp.) containing an introduction and six books, the
first book comprising five chapters. Part II : divided into five books, (1)
Famous personages ; (2), Shekhs, Sayyads, and Fakirs ; (8), Learned men ;
(4), Poets, and (5) an account of the author. In the historical part there is
little or no detail, much being taken from the Sigar-ul Muidkharin and
similar work.% though some facts are added from personal knowledge or
enquiry. The most valuable' part is, that giving the traditional origin of
the Bangash Pa^h^ns. About two-thirds of the work is taken up with
biographies of obscure Muhammadan worthies who lived in, or had visited
Farrukbabad.*

The Lauk'i-Tdrikh is an XJrdd work which in its present sbape was
composed in 1255 H. (March 1839— March 1840). Mfr Bahadur 'Ali's
copy, lent me by his nephew Sal&mat 'Ali of Chibramau, measures 9| in.

X 6 in., and has 554 pages, with 16 to 18 lines to the page. It is written in
an easy popular style, and though defective in chronology and arrangement,
it preserves a mass of interesting tradition which would otherwise have
perished.

The origin of the book is thus described: In 1248 H. (May 1832 — May

1833) Manavvar 'Ali Khan Bakhshi, great-grandson of Muhammad Khan*s
daughter, Daulat Khatun, began to prepare an account of Farrukhabdd and

* He was the author of soveral other works.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%<? Bangash Natodhs of BirruJchdhdd. 263

its mlers from the work of Mufti Wali-ullah and other books, such as the
Khuldwh'i'Bangash^ but more especially from the recollections of an old
man, AllahdM Elh^n, son of Mukim Khdn chela. Two copies of this
work were given away, one to Nawdb Dildwar Jang, son o£ Nawab Husain
'AH Kh4n, and the other to Dharm Dds, Edyath Kharowah. Neither of
these copies can be found now, although search has been made.

Manawar 'Ali Kh^n says, that as he had neither practice in the Urdd
language nor the habit of literary composition, he made his book over to
Mir Bahadur 'Ali to be put into shape. Bahddur 'Ali returned it corrected
in 1255 H. (March 1839 — March 1840) with additions from his own know-
ledge. To the amended work were given the titles of Anwdn-i Khdnddn-
i'Bangash or Lauh-i-Tdrikh, A poetical tdrikh, giving the year 1255
H., is as follows:

" Kyd bant hai, miyan, yih khuh kitdhy

The book is divided into eight parts, besides the introduction. I. Nawdb
Muhammad Khan, Qhazanfar Jang. II. N. Kdim Khan. III. N. Ahmad
Khan, Ghalib Jang. IV. N. Daler Himmat Khdn, MuzafFar Jang. V. N.
Imdad Husain Khan, Ndsir Jang. VI. N. Kh^im Husain Khan, Shaukat
Jang. VII. N. Tajammul Husain Kh4n, Zafar Jang. VIII. Chap. 1, Bio-
graphy of Manawar 'Ali Khdn ; Chap. 2, Biography of Mir Bahadur 'Ali.

Manawar 'Ali Khan, born in 1799, was the son of Sarfardz 'Ali Khdn,
Ustarzai Karlani Path&n. His great-grandfather, Khudddad Khan, had
married Daulat Khatun, the ninth daughter of Nawdb Muhammad Khan»
Ghazanfar Jang. On his grandmother's death in 1809, his father gave up
all her jdgirs, but Manawar 'Ali Khdn in 1839 still received 200 rupees a
year from Sarfardz Mahal, widow of Nasir Jang, to whom the property had
been assigned. Manawar 'Ali Khdn died on the 13th Sha'ban 1280, H.
(24th August, 1863).

Mir Bahadur 'Ali was a Sayyad of Chibramau, a small town on the
Grand Trunk Koad, about eighteen miles from Farrukhdbdd. He claims
to be descended from the eldest son of Zain-ul *Abidain, who left Madina
and settled in Turmaz. Some of his descendants were long settled near
Ldhor, but gradually moving eastwards they reached, some five hundred
years ago, the town of Chibramau, Sirkdr Kanauj, Sdbah Akbardbad. It
is said that once seventy to eighty families existed, occupying three muKaU
la*, but for the last two or three hundred years these have disappeared.
Now-a-days there is only one small muhalla, with five or seven families of
Sayyads. During the Mughul rule .the male members of these families
sought employment at Delhi as Kdzis, Muftis, religious officers, Diwdns,
writers or revenue-collectors. The absence of a genealogical table is apolo-
gized for by Bahddur 'Ali.in|hi8 biography. Owing to the unsettled times
and the occnrrence of several Mahratta incursions and village raids (Qcm^

26 i W. Irvine— 1%<? Bangash Xawdhf of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

war Gardi) the records of his ancestors had been destroyed. From signa-
tures in books in his possession, he traces his familj for six generations.
His father and grandfather used to say the Chibramau Sayyads were among
the descendants of Sayyad Kam&l, who came down country from L&hor.
One of his sons 8. 'Ali Amjad settled in Chibramau, the others went to
Samdhan, Parganah T&lgr4m, to a village near Elanauj, to the town of
Talgr^y to San4i, to M&rahra and to Sakatpur. Bahadur 'All's ancestors,
some openly and some secretly, were all Shi'as in religion.

Bah^ur 'All's grandfather, GhulAm Hosain, was bom, he asserts, in 1101
H. (Oct. 168^— Sept. 1690) and he died in 1226 H. (Jan. 1811— Jan. 1812).
He had only two sons, Chir6gh 'AU and Hashmat 'Ali (i. 1182, May 1768—
May 1769, d, 1231 H. Dec. 1816— Nov. 1816). The grandfather was at one
time in the service of Najib Khdn and Shuja'-ud-daula, from the former re-
ceiving Rs. 125 and from the latter Rs. 100 a month. For forty years he ,j
was in the service of Naw4b Daim Khan, chela of Naw&b Ahmad Kh4n, first
as a trooper on Rs. 80, then as a physician on Rs. 50, then as a pensioner on
Rs. 20 a month. At last he was made teacher, on Rs. 10 a month, to the
Nawab's sons and wife. Till near the end of his life, he lived at the gate-
way of Daim Khan's house in Farrukh&b^. Five or six years before his
death, when be became very feeble, his son and grandson persuaded him to
remove to Chibramau, where he died on the 27th Ramzan, 1226 H. on the
day of the Divali festival. Bahadur 'All believed his grandfather could per-
form miracles, and relates a story of his appearing in a dream to a sick man,
and telling him to gather grass from his tomb, which when ground was to
be applied to the chest. An instantaneous cure was the result.

Bahidur 'All's father, ChirAgh *Ali, was bom in 1157 H. (Feb. 17M—
Jan. 1745). When twenty-five years of age he became blind. He retain-
ed, however, his bodily strength, and was endowed with great quickness of
understanding and power of repartee. His touch was so fine, that he could
tell the wrong from the right side of a rupee. He possessed a great talent
for planning buildings ; and he also practised physic, as he had learnt it
from his father, Ghulam Husain. His memory was wonderfully good, and
he remembered the details of every body's family history in all the country
round Chibramau. He died on the 4th Ramzan, 1247 H. (6th Feb.
1832) Bahddur 'All's mother's people lived at Bhonganw, a town on the
Grand Trunk Road in the Mainpuri district, about 22 miles west of Chibra-
mau. She was the second daughter of Shekh Khalil-ur-rahmiln Kh&tib,
son of Shekh Khair-uUah Khatib.

Bahadur 'Ali was born on the 20th Shawwdl 1195 H. (9th Oct. 1781).
In 1201 H. (Oct. 1786— Oct. 1787), his grandfather brought him to Far-
rukhdbad to live at the gateway of Nawab Ddim Khan chela. He was
taught there for six years. He read through the usual Persian books and

1878.] W. Irvine— I%tf BangasTi Nawdbs of IkrruJchihdd. 265

#

wrote daily some composition for his teacher's correction. Mir Makhu
Fakir was engaged to teach him writing. A few hooks on grammar and
physic were read and the whole word of Qod ; to this was added some
arithmetic. It was also his habit to visit the holy and religions men of
that time, whom he names. Once Hafiz Ghulam Muhammad condescended
to go over a chapter of the Kur&n with him.

When Bah^or 'Ali had completed his twelfth year, his uncle Hashmat
*Ali came home from Lakhnau. He had lived in that city for fifteen years
as a teacher in the family of LiLla Lachman Singh and L41a Badh Singh
Sarsdt Brahmans, employed in the service of Eajah Tikait K^, N^ib. In
1207 H. (Aug. 1792— Aug. 1793) Hashmat 'AH, taking Bahadur 'AH with
him, returned to Lakhnau. The boy was made over to Mir S^jid 'Ali, a
great friend of his uncle's, who followed the profession of a teacher. After a
year had passed, Bahadur ' Ali was sent to read grammar with Maulvi Kamil
Ahmad Sh4hjah4npuri ; and in order to gain an acquaintance with the
poets, he frequented Maulvi Pir 'Ali Basulpuri. For a short time he also
attended Maulvi Ghulim Muhammad, F4i^, Amethawi, who conferred on
him the poetical title of Nur. A desire to write poetry having sprung up
in him, he asked his uncle to introduce him to Miyan Ghulam Hamddni
Mashafi, whose instructions he followed for several years. Here he took
the names of Gardish and Wdmih. It was at this time that he wrote a
Persian diwdn entitled Juw&ld-U^Iihk. He also attended the poetical
assemblies held every fortnight at the houses of Miyan Jur&t, Inshallah
Khin, Mir Takki, Miyin Mashafi, Shahzidah Sulaimin Shikoh, Miy^n
Muntazar and others. On these occasions he recited ghazala under both
the above titles in Persian and Urdu.

For the eleven years, ending in 1217, H. (May 1802— April 1803) ^
which he spent in Lakhnau, Bahadur 'Ali to provide for his own support
-worked as a teacher at various places. He was also for a time a trooper
in the Naw&b Wazir's service, in the time of Asaf-ud-daula (1775 — 1798)
and Sa'dat 'Ali KhiLn (1798—1813). Farrukh&bad having been taken over
by the English, Bahadur 'Ali returned to his home in the end of 1217, H.
and for a long period supported himself as a teacher. At length he was
appointed tutor to E4jah Jaswant Singh, Baghela Th&kur, of Tirwa in the
south-east of the Farrukhdb^ district, on a salary of Bs. 8 a month, plus
the food of two persons, besides presents. Through the B&jah's influence
he obtained the appointment of Th^nadar of Chibramau, which he held for
two years. Afterwards, at the B&jah's request, he acted as Wakil for him
and his brother, Kuijiwar Pitam Singh, at Mainpuri, Bareli, and Fathga^h
in the office of the Collector, the Civil Courts, the Revenue Board's Oflice,
and the Court of Appeal.

2G6 W. Irvinc—Ti^^ BangaA Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

On the death of his patron abovenamed,* Bahadur 'Ali lost his ap-
pointment and went to live in Farrakhabad. There for some years he
taught the children at the house of L^a Daler Singh, K&jath Sribastab,
'^ Chaoni-w^la ;*' and subsequently he was for some years in the service of
R4e Chandi Parshid, Eiyath Saksena^ of muhalla Sadhwif a. For two years
he was with Mr. Martin, Indigo-planter, on Bs. 15 a month, as a parwdna-
navis at the Shamsh&bid factory ; then for a year and a half he was em-
ployed on Es. 20 a month in the Joint-Magistrate's Court at Si^hpura (now
part of the Eta district). He was recommended by Munshi Zahdr 'Ali
'Abb^si Shekhpuri. When the Court was abolished,t he went for three
years to Lakhnau, where he obtained various employments, as a writer at
the Darjih&d Th&na, forty-three miles east of Lakhnau, as account-
keeper to a merchant, and for part of the time as a teacher. On his
return he again became a teacher at Farrukhib^d. In 1839 when he
wrote, he had been for some years living at the gate of Lala Dil Sukh
B&e, the son, and L41a Shankar Parshdd, the grandson of the deceased
Diwan Debi D^. During this period, hundreds, old and young, had
been his pupils ; but not one had done him any service, or turned out
a real friend, or shown any afEection, nor had even one been true to his
word. He says he had no complaints to make nor any claims. Indeed he
was accustomed not even to go down the street, where such ungrateful men
dwelt.

Bahadur 'Ali was married on the 7th Zi'lhajj 1220, H. (28th Feb.
1806) to the daughter of Shekh Karm-ullah of Shamsh&bM, son of Asad-
ullah Fardki. The family had a quantity of land and groves, granted by
the Emperors, with yearly and daily allowances. In the disorders of the
time, all these came unjustly into the possession of S. Tahawar 'Ali Kab^e.
Bahidur 'Ali's father-in-law, his uncle SifEat-uUah, and Shekh Khdb-uUah,
another relation, made great exertions to recover the property, but " da>«a-
" hah-nd'insd^ aur riidigi kdkim&n'i'FarruJcMhdd ke, apne ddd aur hakk
" Jco na pahunehe,^^ The younger branches of the family scattered to
TiLlgr4m, Sakrawah, and Chibramau.

Bahadur 'Ali had no issue ; but, as he says, this being a matter out of
one's power, he indulged in no regrets. He passed his days in reading, in
recitations of poetry, in teaching, in reading aloud, and in the writing of
books. And he failed not to give God thanks for his mercies ;

" Harcha SdkU-md rekht, 'ain aMf asV

He furnishes a list of thirteen works composed by him, besides short
tales. The thirteenth is the History of Farrukh4b^ called ^Anwdn-i-

• IWjah Jaswant Singh died on the 3rd Oct. 1815, being sacceeded by his brother
Pitam Singh, who died 11th November, 1836— Kali Rde, pfp. 149, 160.

t The Sirhpura Joint-Magistracy oxistod from 1816 to 1828, Gaz., N. W. P., IV.
pp. 3, 4.

187S.] W. Irvine— The Bangash Nawdhs of FarruJchdhdd. 267

Khanddn-uBangash or Lauh-i-Tdrikh, From about 1814 or 1819 he
adopted the poetical title of '' Sayyad,'^ He also wrote in Hindi (Bhdkhd)
in the name of ManhL

He sajs he intended his books to be a memorial of him after his death ,
and he hoped that they would take the place of children. In their com-
X'osition he passed his days very happily. From the day that he began to
write, he claims never to have written, with an object, in praise of any
noble, nor had he sought their favours. He refused the invitations of the
Sahibzildahs of the city, for with worldly persons there can be but two
objects Kdida or Fdida, and when neither is desired there can be no reason
to court the great. He prays that God may grant him similar indepen-
dence during the small remains of life — " Atnin sam Aminy

From 1225, H. (Feb. 1810— Jan. 1811) with the help of his second
brother, Muhammad 'Ali, he observed the ceremonies of Tdzia'ddri yearly ;
he belonged to the Shi*a sect. As his home did not afford the requisite
accommodation, he bought half an acre of land at his door, intending to build
an Im4mb4r4 and a dwelling-house. He managed to complete a small
dwelling-house, and the masonry foundations of the Im^mbdr^ were laid
on the 13th Muharrum 1241, H. (dOth August, 1825). But from poverty
he had been unable to proceed with it ; he writes that he hopes it may be
finished before he dies, so that his soul may rest in his grave in peace.
His father was buried at his own request in an earthen tomb within the
Imamb^. Bahadur 'Ali himself died on the 30th Sha'b&n 1270, H. (28th
May, 1854).

There is a small work called MaharidUi Mughuliya ha-Afghaniyay
a copy of which was kindly procured for me by Maulvi Manzur Ahmad,
Deputy Collector (to whom I am also indebted for first calling my atten-
tion to the Lauh-uTdrikh). So much of it is in verse, and the rest is
in guch a bombastic ambitious style, that the residue of fact is very small.
Still, although the date of the copy is January, 1834 (the author's and owner's
names have been carefully obliterated), I infer that its composition is of older
date, or that independent sources were employed, for it contains a few state-
ments not met with elsewhere. The MS. measures 9i in. x 6i in. and
has 101 pages of 14 lines to the page. I have also picked up twenty-six
leaves of a collection of reports from some Lakhnau a mil in the years 11G2
— 1164 H. From internal evidence I believe the writer to be \;jwab
Baka-ullah Khan, Kh4n 'Alam, faujddr of Kora. I have gleaned from
these letters a few facts about Naval Kde's death and the subsequent events.
The first nine leaves and some leaves at the end are wanting.

The Ehuldsah'uBangash, apparently almost contemporary with Mu-
hammad Khan (1713 — 1743), is quoted once in the Lauh-uTarikh,

IC M

268 W. Irvine— ^tf Bangash Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Neither of this book nor of a collection of letters made by Manshi Dalpat
liae (d. 28th March, 1823), grandson of Munsbi Sahib Bae, have I been able
to obtain any trace. Other authorities used are well enough known. The
principal of these are the Siyar-ul-Mutdkhartn, Tdrikh-i-Muzaffari^ Khiz-
dnah-W Amira, Amad-us-Sa'dat, Life of Hafiz Bahmat Khan, Fathgarh-ndmah
Curwen's translation of the Balwint-ndmah and the Mijtdh-ut Tawdrikh
(edition of 1849). The Ma'aHr-ul TJmrd in the article 'Abd-ul Mdnmr Khdn^
when speaking of Kdim Khdn*8 death, refers for details to " the account of
his father Muhammad Khan Bangash", but 1 cannot find in the book any
biography of Muhammad Kh4n. The Hadikat-ul Akdltm, of Murtaza Hu-
sain, I have also put under contribution.

Nawab Muhammad KhJ^t, Bangash, Ghazanfab Jano.

Origin of the family,

Muhammad Khan was a Bangash of the Karlani Kaghzai clan. Malak
Kais, 'Abd-ur-Bashid, the ancestor of all Pa^hans, had three sons Sarban,
Batan, Ghurghasht. The second son, whose name was Shekh Haiy4t, obtain-
ed his appellation from his love of peace and his piety, Batan in their
language signifying the Pure. Batan had three sons, Isma'il, Ashyun,
Kajin, and one daughter, Matd. The descendants of the sons are usually
called Batan, The children of Matu by her husband. Shah Husain, son of
Mu'az-ud-din, are called Ghilzai, Lodi, Sarwani.

Sarban, the eldest son of Kais, had two sons, the elder of whom, Sharf-
nd-din, had five sons. Of these the youngest was Amir-ud-din. One day
while out hunting Amlr-ud-din at one of his camping-places picked up a
Say y ad boy, to whom he gave the name of Karlani. When he grew up he
was married to a woman of the tribe, and his children were called the Kar>
l&ni. Among Karldnis are the Dilazak, Afridi, Kha^ak, and Malak-miri
subdivisions. Belying on the truth of the above story, the Karl&ni believe
themselves to be Sayyads. Karlani having been brought up with Adarmar,
son of Amir-ud-din, his descendants have been classed among the Sarban
tribes.

The origin of the name Kaghzai is related as follows. Once Shekh
Hay at, alitis Batan, was anxious to marry his daughter Matu to Shah
Husain, son of Mu'az-ud-din Mahmud, son of Jam^l-ud-din Hasan, son of
Sultan Bahram, who had left his own coimtry of Ghor by reason of the
desolation caused by the first Muhammadan invasions. Accordingly a man
of the Kagh tribe, that is, a professional singer, was sent to enquire into
the genealogy of Sh4h Husain at Ghor, his birthplace. On returning he
threatened to throw doubt on Shdh Husain*s purity of descent unless his,
Kdgh'sy daughter were accepted in marriage. Sh&h Husain married the

1878.] W. Irvine-'The Bangash JSTawdha of Farruihdbdd. 269

girl, who was called Mihi, and also Sarw. Having no children, she adopted
a son of her co-wife Matu, and called him Sarwani. By reason of this
adoption he came to he called Kaghzai.

The word Bangfuh originally meant the hill country. But in course
of time it was applied to the inhahitants, those in the upper hills heing
called Bala Bangash, those in the country along the foot of those hills, that
is, in Koh^t} ^^^^ known as the P^in Bangash. At present the Bangash trihe
is most numerous in Koha(, the rest dwell to the west of it, in Kdram and
Shalnzan). The valley of the Bangash is encircled hy hills, and its greatest
length is from east to west. To the east and south-east is found the
Khafak tribe in the hills of Khafkan ; to the north are the XJrakzais ; to
the south-west is the boundary of the Waziris ; to the west is the country
of Kdram. The Bangash who live in Kuram and Paiwar are in subjection
to the Tori ; those in Shaluzdm are their own masters ; while those in
Kohat are British subjects. In all they number about eighteen thousand
households. •

Years after the first settlement took place, many of the Sarw&nis quitted
the Bala Bangash, and from that time were designated Kaghzai, those who
stayed in their original seat continuing to be called Sarwdni. After this
a party of Karl4ni, who had settled near the Sarwani Kaghzai in the Bala
Bangash, also began to be called Kdghzai, though in truth they are neither
Sarw&ni nor the children of Kagh. In short, there are two kinds of Kdgh-
zai, (1) KarUni K^hzai and (2) Sarwdni Kaghzai.

In the reign of *Alamgir Aurangzeb (1658 — 1707), Malak 'Ain Khdn
Karlani Kaghzai, quitting his native country for Hindustdn, came to Mau-
Kashidabad, where he took service in the troop of *Ain Khan Sarwdni, then
in the employ of the Khdnzddah family. Malak 'Ain Khdn, son of Gohar
Khan, son of Sabza Khan, son of Jahdn Khdn, son of Strang Khdn, be-
longed to the Harya Khail, in it to the Shamilzai, and in it to the Daulat
Khail, who are the descendants of Daulat Khan, known as Haji Bah^ur.
This latter must be distinguished from the other H4ji Bahadur, the Koha^i,
of the family of Shekh Adam Bantiri.

The town of Mau-Bashiddbad is now little more than a name ; its site
has been turned into one vast tobacco- field. It lies close to the high bank,
which overlooks the old bed of the Ganges and the stretch of lower land be-
tween it and the present stream. It is situated twenty-one miles west of
Famikh&bady five miles west of the old town of Shamsh&b4d-Khor, and about
one mile north-east of the modern but more thriving town of Kdim-
ganj. Though Mau has now only a few inhabitants, the country surrounding
it is full of flourishing Pafhin colonies, such as Biepur, Pathaura,
'A(aipur ; and the inhabitants of these places are all known outside the

* Haiyat-i-Afghini, p. 448.

270 W. Irvine— The Bangasl Naw&hs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

district under the generic name of Mau Pa^hdns. They are to be found in
numbers in our native cavalry, where they appear to bear a high character
as soldiers.

Mau Eashidab^d, the former name of which was Mau-ThoriyA, was
re-founded in the reign of Jahdngir about 1607, A. D. (1016, H.) by Nawab
Rashid Khdn, jAgirdar of Shamshabad. A few of his descendants, known as
KhdnzddahSy still exist though reduced to poverty.* The myth so common in
the East is told to account for the selection of the site. Jackals drove ofE
the Nawab*s dogs, and in his astonishment, he inferred that such a soil
would produce men more brave and strong than found elsewhere.

Muhammad Khdn^s early years.

'A in Kh^n married in Mau, and when he died left two sons, Himmat
Kh^, aged thirteen, and Muhammad Khan, aged eleven. Since Muhammad
Khdn died in December, 1748, at about the age of eighty lunar years, his
birth must have taken place about the year 1665. One day, the story goes,
Muhammad KhAn had ridden out on his elder brother*8 horse along the
edge of the river, and he brought it back in a profuse sweat. Himimat
Khdn fearing that he would some day throw the horse down and get injured
himself, gave Muhammad Khan a slight reproof. Angpry at being spoken
to, Muhammad Khan took refuge at a fakir's hut. The fakir, to cheer
him, prophesied that he would one day be a BdtoanSazdri or Commander
of Fifty-two thousand. Himmat Kh4n, the elder brother, in time Ifeft
home and took seivice in the Dakhin, where he died. His body is interred
in Sher Muhammad Khdn's bagh in Mau, a grove which had been planted
in the days of Nawab Bashid Kh&n. He left one daughter, Bibi F4tima,
who becanie the wife of 'Indyat 'Ali KhAn, Bangash Kdghzai.

When Muhammad Khdn reached the age of twenty years ($. e. about
1685, A. D.), he took service with Yasin Khdn Bangash, then a leader of
renown among the Pafhans of Mau. In the month of October of every
year, ho started from Mau with four or five thousand men, horse and foot,
and went across the Jamna. In those days the EAjahs of Bundelkhand
were at incessant war with each other, and the trade of the soldier flourished.
When any Eajah, who had a rebellious vassal to deal with, heard of Yasin
Khan's arrival, an agent would be sent to engage him to punish the
rebel. The ordinary terms were one-fourth of the plunder or of the
money obtained. When the agreement had been reduced to writing, pay-
ment of one half beforehand was demanded as Ajauri or money in
advance. This sum was divided among the troops, so much to each
horseman and so much to each footman. A march was then made against,
the place designated, and it was surrounded. If the inhabitants fought,
force was met by force ; if they asked for terms, a settlement was made.

^ On Rashid Ehdn and the Ehdnzadahs. Note A.

1878.] W. Irvine— I%tf Bangatih NawdU of Farrukhdbdd. 271

Any money collected was forwarded to the Edjah who had engaged the band,
after deducting any balance that might be due. Whatever they had gained
was divided, and the share of any man killed was set apart and sent to hif>
widow at Mau. For eight months these plundering expeditions continued,
and when the month of June came, they all returned to Mau. Owing to the
rank of 'Ain Kh&n*s family and his own relationship to them, Tasin Kh^n
had great affection for Muhammad Kh4n. Yasin Kh^n was an XJstarzai
Bangash, a native of Mau, and a relation of Muhammad Khan's mother.
One day while besieging Orchha,* on the Datlya frontier, Ydsin EMn
was killed by a shot from a villager's gun. The Pa^h^ns then chose as
their leader Sh^i Kh^n, Bangash, of Mau, Y^in Khdn's maternal uncle.
Soon after, Muhammad Khdn having quarrelled with Sh^i KMn, left
him, and with his seventeen followers, sought employment on his own
account. Qradually all the Mau Pa^hans joined Muhammad Khan's stan-
dard They went from the service of one K&jah to another, and in this
manner many years were passed in the Dakhin and Bundelkhand.

Bundelkhand politics during the second half of the seventeenth cen«
tnry seem to be unusually obscure, and as I have not been able to verify
them from other sources, I only give for what they are worth the one or
two stories, relating to this early part of Muhammad Khdn's career, which
appear to have some sort of historical character. One is that when the
E£jah of Datiya died, he was succeeded by his eldest son, Pirthi Singh, who
at once set to work to turn out his brother, B4m Chand. The latter called
in Muhammad Kh&n on the promise of a large sum of money, and with his
aid Pirthi Singh was defeated, the Eajah being killed by Muhammad
Kh&n's own hand. The Pathdns had hardly reached Mau with their plunder
when an emergent call for succour was received from Madar Sh4h of Siprif
and Jalaun. He reported that Muhammad Amin Khan, with more than
forty thousand imperial troops, was coming to overwhelm him. Muhammad
Kh&n, hastily collecting all the men he had ready, marched to the B^jah's
aid ; but, before his arrival, the B4jah had already been forced to seek safety
in flight. There were, however, several encounters between Muhammad
KhiLn and Muhammad Amin Khdn before a final peace was concluded.

The usual routine of these free-booting expeditions was for the leader
to put himself at the head of from five hundred to a thousand men of his
own and other clans. Muhammad Khan had by his boldness and bravery
gained such a reputation, that all the Bajahs of the country trembled at
his name. If he saw a village, town, or city weakly defended, he surrounded
it, and sent to the headmen for his black maQ (nazardnd). If one or two
thousand rupees were forwarded, he went away — otherwise the place was

• Gazetteer, N. W. P. I, 554. On the Betwa, 142 miles S. E. of Agra,
t About 55 miles west of Jhansi in Bundelkhand.

272 W. Irvine— T/itf Ban^ash UTawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

attacked and plundered. There was sometimes stifE fighting on these
occasions, and stories are told of twelve and twenty men having been killed
by Muhammad Khan's own hand in the assault on some rich fort. The
reward was sometimes plunder to the value of four or five lakhs of rupees.

Once in those days, Muhammad Kh^n, at the head of three hundred
horsemen, made an attack on a fort, at the instigation of some Rajah. He
first tried an assault but failed, and then had recourse to besieging, with no
better result. The men inside made a valiant defence. Now, it so hap-
pened, that on one side of the fort was a large and deep piece of water.
The Rajah, thinking that no one could attack him on that side, had left it
quite unguarded. One night, at midnight, Muhammad Khin, taking with
him several active men well armed, went into the tank and swam across to
the foot (faztl) of the fort wall. Climbing up by the aid of a tree they
then jumped down into the fort. The Rajah was asleep close by ; roused by
their arrival, he got up and fled, calling upon his followers for aid. To
save his life, he tried to hide in a room, but Muhamniad Khan followed
him into it and slew him. Meanwhile so many of the zamindars had col-
lected, that all Muhammad Khdn*s companions were killed, and the door of
the room was shut upon him. Muhammad Khdn, after commending him-
self to God, fixed his shield into the shelf, and raised a beam by applying
his head. He thus got through to the open air, with his ears all bleeding.
When he had pushed half his body through the roof, the Rajah's women,
whose apartments were close by, renewed hostilities by hurling at him their
ricc-pestles and brass vessels. This attack put him still more out of breath,
but brushing the women aside, he clambered ofE the roof down the wall by
the aid of the same tree. Then, swimming across the lake, he regained his
camp. Next morning the zamindars evacuated the fort, paid up their
money and made Muhammad Khan an offering, touching his feet humbly
and saying, " Khan jiu^ turn manai ndhin, deotd ho, tumkari sanmukh ke
'* ham ndhin hain^ In his old age, the Naw4b Sahib was fond of telling
this story, saying, that though he had many a time been wounded, no pain
had ever equalled that of pushing aside the rafters of that roof, and during
an east wind the pain still troubled him.

Hitherto Muhammad Kh4n had been little more than' a petty free-
booter, and having reached the age of forty-five, there seemed every likeli-
hood that he would so remain during the rest of his career. Chance,
however, called him to higher honours on a wider stage, to which we now
propose to follow him.

Muhammad Khan enters the Imperial service.
In February, 1712, (Muharram 1124, H.) Bahadur Sh4h, successor of
'Alamgir Aurangzeb, died after a reign of five years. A struggle for the

*

I

1878.] W. Irvine— T^c Bangash Nawdhs of Farruhhdhdd. 273

succession then commenced between bis sons. Tbe victory remained with
Mu'izz-ud-din, wbo ascended tbe throne in June, 1712, under the title of
Jahanddr Shah.

One of bis brothers, 'Azim-us-shan, disputed tbe tbrone with Jabandar
Sb4b, but receiving a defeat retreated and was drowned in the river Eavi.
'Azim-us-sban bad, however, on his departure from his government of Bengal,
left at Bajmahal a son named Mirza Jalal-ud-din Farrukhsiyar. This son
determined to avenge bis father. First he succeeded in pei*suading Husain
'Ali Khan, Stibabdar of Bihar, to espouse his cause. They were afterwards
joined by 'Abdullah Khan, tbe elder brother of Husain *Ali Khan, wbo
held tbe Subab of Allahdb4d.

Husain 'Ali Khan and Farrukhsiyar bad not yet reached Allahabad

on their march from Patna 'Azimabad, when Sayyad 'Abd-ul Ghaffdr Khan

Gardezi, sent by Jabandar Shah at tbe head of ten to twelve thousand men,

attacked 'Abdullah Khan at Allahdbad. 'Abdullah Khan withdrew to tbe

fort and sent one of his younger brothers to meet tbe enemy in tbe field.

On cries arising that 'Abd-ul Ghaffar Kbdn was dead, his troops turned

and fled.

On bearing of this defeat, Jabandar Sh^b sent off bis son, 'Azz-ud-din,

with fifty thousand men under Khwaja Absdn Khan. 'Azz-ud-din bad
marched from Agra and bad reached Khajwah,* when hearing that Husain
'Ali Khan and Farrukbsiyar bad joined 'Abdullah Khan, he baited and began
to entrench himself. Farrukhsiyar advanced on him with 'Abdullah Khan in
tbe vanguard, batteries were prepared, and an artillery fight went on from
sunset till the third watch of tbe night. Losing heart, tbe prince 'Azz-
ud-din and his Commander-in-Chief fled a little before day- break ; and
finding they were deserted by their leaders, the army dispersed. Tbe camp
and its contents fell into tbe hands of Farrukbsiyar.

From Khajwah letters were sent in all directions, calling for aid from
all noted chiefs and partizan leaders ; among others a royal " Shu^ka" and
a letter from the Sayyad brothers were sent to Muhammad Kb^n, who was
then in Gobad territory with a force of eight or nine thousand men. Sahib
RAe Kayath, who bad been his secretary from 1105 H (Aug. 1693 — Aug.
1694)t was sent to find out which side was most likely to succeed. On re-
ceiving bis report, Muhammad Kh^n marched and joined Farrukhsiyar at
Kbajwab with twelve thousand men.;^

* Tn the Fathpur diatrict, on the Grand Trunk Road, some twenty-one miles north*

west of Fathpur.

f This date seems impossible, it is, however, that given in the '< Lanh."

% The " Life of H&fiz Bahmat Khin" (p. 32} says he had only twonty-five men.

This is not consistent with the rewards conferred on him for his services and the

number in the text is more likely to be corre3t, seeing that Muhammad Khdn had been

leading a predatory life with success for over twenty years.

274 W. Irvine— 2%<j Banga»h Nawdha of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

^\q contending Emperors at length met on the field of Samogar, nine
miles east of Agra, in the parganah of Fath^bad,* where the decisive battle
was fought on the 14th Zi*lhajj, 1124, H. (1st January, 1713). Though
there is no mention of him in the standard histories such as the " 8iyar-ul
Mufdkharin^f there can be no doubt that Muhammad Khin bore himself
bravely in the van under the immediate eye of Sayyad 'Abdullah
Kh4n4 One of his lieutenants, Sher Muhammad Khan, lost his
life. Jah4nddr Sh4h quitted the field near sunset, and after a time his chief
supporter, Zulfikar Khdn, also withdrew. Victory thus declared itself for
Farrukhsiyar.

On the 15th Zi'lhajj, the day after the battle. Chin Ifilich Khdn, 'Abd-us
Samad Khdn, and Muhammad Amin Kh4n were presented by Sayyad 'Abd-
ullah Kh^n, and made their submission. 'Abdullah Khdn, with Luffullah
Kh4n and other nobles, was sent on to prepare the way at Delhi. A week
afterwards Farrukhsiyar set out for the capital. On the 14th Muharram
1125 H. (30th January 1713), the new Emperor halted at Barahpul near
the city. Honours and rewards were distributed. Among others, Muham-
mad Khan was presented by the Sayyad brothers. He was invested with
a dress of honour and received an elephant, a horse, a palki, a shield, a
sword with jewelled hilt, a jewelled aigrette, a turban ornament (jigha),
a fish ensign, kettle-drums and standards, besides assignments of revenue.
At the same time he was raised to the rank of a Commander of four thou-
sand. From that day he was styled Nawdb.

The following parganahs, all in Bundelkhand, were assigned to Mu-
hammad Kh4n for the support of his troops.

1. Irichh.§ 8. K41pi.t

2. Bh^nder-ll 4. Ktinch.**

• Proc. B. A. S., for August, 1870, p. 252.

t The author of the " Siyar-ul Mut&kharin" seems to have borne a gfmdge against
Muhammad Khin, his name is omitted wherever possible, if he is named, it is only to
depreciate him, nor is he ever accorded the simplest title, with which, as usual in
native historians, men no more distinguished than he, are lavishly indulged. Grant
Duff (p. 361} remarks on this author's prejudice against Afghans. In one passage
(Sul-M. Translation of 1789, Vol. Ill, p. 240,) he denounces them heartily as all bad.

X See Muhammad Khan's biography in the T&rikh-i-Muzaffari under the year
1156 H.

\ Gaz. N. W. P. I, 423. A town in Parg. Moth, Jhansi District, 42 m. N. of
Jhansi.

II Gaz. N. W. P. I, 392. A parganah and town, formerly in the Datiya state
but ceded to the Mahyattas in 1748. It is now in the district of Jhansi, and the town,
on the Pahf!g, is 24 m. from Jhansi.

% Gas. K. W. P. I, 474. A town and parganah in the Jalaun district. The
town is on the right bank of the Jamna.

** Gaz. N. W. P. 1, 605. A town and parganah in the Jalaun dibtrict. The
town is 42 m. from E&lpi. K^ch was a mahil of Sirkiur Irichh.

1878.] W. Irvine— 5%^ Bangash mtmhs of FarruhUhdd. 275

6, Seondah.* 7. Sipri.J

6. Maudah.t 8. J41aiin §

The following men were deputed to manage these mah^ls — Daler Kh£n,
chela, was posted to Ktinch, Seondah, and Maudah ; Ahmad Kh^n, Warak-
sai, to Irichh and Bh&nder ; Pir Khan, paternal uncle of the Bihi S4hiha,
Nawab Muhammad Khdn's principal wife, to K^lpi ; Shuj*at Kh4n, Ghil<
zai, to Sipri and Jalaun.

Muhammad Kh6n founds Kdimganj, Muhamddbdd, and Farruhhdhdd.

In the first year of Farrukhsijar's reign, Muhammad Khdn was des*
patched on two expeditions against the Bajah of Anupshahr and Eajah Me^a*
The first named was speedily reduced to submission ; and the latter having
been made a prisoner, was sent to the Emperor by the hands of D4tid Khan,
chela.

Muhammad Khdn then obtained leave to return to his home, where
he began to found a town a little south-west of Mau, within the lands of
Chaloli, Mau-Bashiddbad, Kuberpur and Subhdnpur, and to it he gave
the name of K^imganj in honour of his eldest son K^im Khdn. It is
now a place of considerable trade, it had 10,323 inhabitants in 1872, and
is the head quarters of the tahsil. It is 21 miles north-west of Far-
rukhdbad.

In the same year the fort and town of Muhamdabad, 14 miles south-
west of Farrukh^bdd were founded, portions of five villages : (1), Kil-
m&ptir; (2), Kabirptir ; (3), Rohila; (4), Muhammadpur, and (5) Taki-
pdr having been taken for the purpose. Tradition gives the following
reason for selecting this site.|| Before the first Muhammadan invasion a
group of twenty-seven villages had been given by the Bajah of Khor (now
known as ShamshdbM) to Kharowah Kdyaths in his service. Before Mu-
hammad Khdn had risen to fame, and was still little more than a common
trooper, he tried to persuade Har Parsh^d, kandngo, to record him as the
jagird^r of a village on the Kdli in Tappa 'Azimnagar (now in the Eta
District). The kanungo refused to do so without superior order. When
Muhammad Kh4n jose to power, he recollected this ; and selecting the high
mound in the Kayath's land known as '^ Eal k4 khera'*, built on it the fort

* Gaz. N. W. P. I, 582. A town and parganah in tahsili Girwin of the B&nda
district. Hie town is 11 m. from Banda.

t Oaz. K. W. P. I, 645. A town and paiganab in the Hamfrpiir DiBtrict. The
town is 20 m. from Hamirpar.

X In the Gwiliar state, some 60 miles north of Sironj in the Tonk state, and about
55 m. west of Jhinsi.

\ Gas. N. W. P. I, 433. A parganah, tahsil, and town in the district of Jalaun.

I Kilf B£e's " Fatehgarhn^unah," p. 117.

276 W. Irvine— JAc Bangath Naw6hs of FarruJcMhdd. [No. 4,

of Muhamddb4d. In one of the bastions, still known as the '' Bfie S&hib k&
burj'*, Har ParshM, kantingo, was built up alive. The old abandoned fort
and the large lake just beneath it were owned and held, up to 1857, by the
Nawdb Ba'is for the time being. MuhamddbM is a smaller place than
^aimganj, but is still of some importance as the head-quarters of a Police
division, and as the first halting-stage on the road from Farrukhibdd to
Mainpuri.

Parmnagar, the chief town of parganah Parmnagar, on the left bank of
the Ganges, in the Farrukhdb&d District, is sometimes called Muham-
madganj, after Naw&b Muhammad Kh4n, but the date of foundation is
not known*

The Gity of FarruJcMhdd,

Nawdb Muhammad Khdn's next undertaking was on a very different
scale. He now set to work to found a city which, even in its present
decaying state, counts as one of the principal places of Northern India.
Residence at Mau must have been disagreeable to the new Naw4b. The
Pa^hans would not allow him to ride on an elephant through the streets, for
fear of their women's privacy being infringed. Af ridis, Toyahs, and Kh4nz-
&dahs were numerous, but the Bangash were very few. If the Naw4b ever
did pass by, the Afridi boys threw clay pellets at him. To avoid this
Muhammad Kh^n used to come out of the town, and mount his elephant
near the tomb of Kahmat Khan, the martyr.* Often did he complain to
the Bibi Sahiba of the way these Pa^hans tried his patience.

An occasion for the acquisition of land for a site with the Emperor's
consent soon presented itself. Kdsim Kh^n, Bangash, father of the Bibi
Sahiba, first wife of Naw^b Muhammad Khdn, was a soldier of fortune
who had risen to the conmiand of some three hundred men, in the service of
some Eajah of the South. In 1126 H. (6th Jan. 1714 to 27th Dec. 1714)
Kasim Kh4n was on his way home to Mau with all his wealth. Near where
the native infantry lines and the European barracks now stand, a place then
covered with jungle, he was set on by a Thakur Kdjah of the Bamfelaf tribe,
whose villages were in the direction of Muhamd^bad. Hundreds of men fol-
lowed this Kdjah in his plundering forays up to the bank of the Ganges and
as far west as Mau. K&sim Kh4n and his party defended themselves bravely,
but were at length overpowered and slain. He was buried where he fell.
One ruined arch of his tomb still stands, in the middle of an enclosure sur-
rounded with palm trees. A mango grove was planted to the west of the
tomb, and the name of the village changed from Jamdlpur to El^im Bagh,
under which name it was known in the revenue records till it was absorbed
within the boundaries of the Fatehgarh cantonment. {

* See note on Khanz^dahs. f Note No. B. on the Bam tolas. } Kili Bae, p. 120.

i

18T8.] W. Irrine— The Bangask Nawdhs of IbrrukhdhdJ, 277

>

The surYiYors of ICasim Khan's party arrived the next morning at Mau.

To console his wife, Muhammad Ehdn set out for Delhi. There he was

giaciouslj received hj the Emperor Farrukhsiyar who, by way of price for

her father's blood, made over to the Bibi S4hiba the whole fifty-two of the

Bam^la Tillages. Muhammad Khdn received a dress of honour, and they

say he was made Ndzim of Gw41iyar : the truth of this latter statement

is, however, extremely doubtful. The Emperor expressed a wish that a city

called after his name* should be founded on the spot where Kdsim Kh^n

was killed, and that the fifty-two Bamtela villages should be included within

its walls.

No better site could have been selected than that chosen for his city
by Muhammad Khdn. The strip of land along the right bank of the Gan-
ges from Eampil to Kanauj is one of the most thickly-peopled and the
most fertile in Northern India. There is abundance of water, for from the
firmness of the subsoil, wells can be dug at pleasure ; and the native saying
is true without exaggeration, that in Farrukh4bid there is a well in every
house. They say that before the city was founded the Naw4b once came
by chance to the high mound, the site of a D hi or abandoned village, where
the city fort now stands. The Ganges then flowed much nearer than it
does DOW, and a delightful view extended on all sides to a distance of several
miles. The Naw&b took a liking to the place, and said that a dwelling-
house there would be very pleasant. In the tarai or low land the Pa thins
shot many alligators and crocodiles {magar and goK), There were quanti-
ties of wild geese and other game ; they even say that the high grass and
reeds concealed tigers, which sometimes devoured men.f

In truth, there is to this day no pleasanter view in the whole of the
plains of Upper India than that obtained at all seasons from the fort of
Farmkhibdd. Passing the tiled bungalow used for the Munsiff's Court-
house and the square unshapely mass of the tahsil building, we wend our
way up to the pretty garden at the summit. There we pause a moment
to take our breath, and admire the grandiose outline of Mr. C. B. Lindsay's
Town Hall. As we turn with our face to the north, our gaze first falls on
the ruins of the once magnificent pleasure-house of the Nawdb in the Pien
Bagh ; further on, the eye rests delighted on the slender minarets of the
Karbala ; beyond stretches all that remains of the Nawdb's hunting-groimd
or Bamna, still dotted here and there with trees ; and closing in the horizon

* FajTukhib^ was sometimes styled Akmadnagar Farrokh&b&d, as in the coin
of SUhj^Oian II. stmck there in 1174, H. (Froc. B. A. S., July, 1876, p. 188,) and in
the Fenian aooonnts of 1209 and 1210, Fnsli (1801-1802) preserved in the Collector's
office. It got the second name, I suppose, in Ahmad Eh&n's time (1750-1771).

t This is really not so improbable as it Bounds to us now, for so late as 1803
tigers were shot along the Ganges below Kanauj. See Major Thorn's " Memoir of
the War in India."

278 W. Irvine— T7ie Bangask Nawdhs qf Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

is the faint silver streak of the Ganges. Taming half round to the right
we see the city, looking like a vast wood of deep-shaded Nim trees, from
which there peeps here and there a comer of the double-storied mansion of
some Sahib-z4da or wealthy banker. Turning back again and looking
westwards, we find before us the domed tombs of the former rulers, of
Ahmad Khdn in the Bihisht Bdgh within the walls, of Muhammad Kh&n
and Kaim Khdn further on beyond the Mau gate.

In 1126 H. (Jan. 6th 1714— Dec 27th 1714,) the foundations were laid
under the auspices of Neknam Khan, chela. The date is denoted by the
words *^ Allah Ghani" which were commonly used in the family at the
head of documents. All the buildings at Farrukh^bdd or Muhamd^b&d were
built after the plans and under the care of Adam, mason, whose name used
to be seen on the inscription of one of the fort gateways now destroyed.
We learn from a scolding letter to Ydktib Kh4n, about the dilatoriness and
dishonesty of one Muhammad Danish, that the rates of wages were then,
labourers two falus or pyce a day, skilled bricklayers, five /aids a day, and
those imperfectly skilled iowcfaliis. The wages were to be paid direct to
the men every night.

The Bamtelas did not resign their ancient possessions without a strug-
gle. The work of building the city wall went on by day, but the Bam^e-
las, who lived all round, came in force every night and knocked the wall
down again. They also destroyed some of the buildings in the fort. To
get rid of the annoyance caused by these turbulent Th^kurs, Muhammad
Khkn called in the imperial troops who were stationed at intervals round
the city. The Bamfelas were ejected from the nearer villages, and any vil-
lagers aiding them were severely punished. The imperial forces remained
till the city was well established, when their places were taken by the Na«
w4b's own men.

Aid was also obtained from friendly Bdjahs. They relate that Rdj&h
Tilak Singh Gaur of Siroli, Parganah Shamshdbad East, ten or eleven miles
south-west of Farrukh^bad, unable from old age to come himself, sent his
son Akbar Sah (afterwards a chela under the name of Purdil Khan), aged
fifteen or sixteen, at the head of seven hundred R4]puts of his own clan.
They were posted just outside the Mau Darwaza where the Bam^elas usual-
ly passed. They had been there a week or ten days when the Bam^elas as
usual came to damage the wall. This time they went round to the Kutb
gate, on the north face of the city, and effected an entrance. Akbar SAh
Gaur drew out his men, and there was a good deal of fighting. On the one
side three hundred and on the other five hundred men were killed. Lai S4h,
the head of all the Bam^elas, was wounded and made prisoner.

]n spite of these interruptions Neknam Khan, chela, had laid out the
fort, to which he made three gates opening to the north. He also dug a

1878.] W. iTYme—The Bangash Nawdhs of Farruhhdhdd. 279

ditch as deep as the height of a man, and set up twenty earthen bastions.
These, in 1839, could still he traced, though even then thej had fallen out
of repair. Not a yestige now remains. The same chela also built a palace,
a mosque, and a hall of audience. The palace was called the Bar4 Mahal.
In 1839 only the Birahdari was left, the rest of the site was occupied bj
the private garden of Mukhtar Mahal, widow of the deceased Nawdb Shau-
kat Jang. The mosque was known as the '* Bari Masjid," and the audience
hall was called the *^ Bafa Diw&n-Kh4na." This latter was demolished by
Naw4b Muzaffar Jang (1771—1796) ; and Nawdb Ndsir Jang (1766—1813)
built a dwelling-house (kofhi) on the spot. There were several shops of
petty traders within the fort, but at first there were no other buildings except
the above. After the mutiny, the Nawdb's palace was entirely dismantled ;
and beyond a small mosque, which may be the one referred to, there is not
a trace left of any building in existence at the time of the mutiny.

There were twelve gates to the city : 1, Eufb gate ; 2, P4en gate (also
called the Husaini gate) ; 3, Gang4 gate ; 4, Amefhi gate ; 5, Kddiri gate •
6, Lai gate ; 7, Madir gate ; 8, Dhalawal gate ; 9, Elhandiya gate ; 10, Jasmai
gate ; 11, Tarden gate ; 12, Mau gate. The first, eighth, and eleventh are now
closed; Amethi, Dhalawal and Jasmai are the names of adjoining villages;
the other names explain themselves.

To seven of the gates, sardis were attached, so that from whatever
direction a traveller arrived, he might find a convenient resting-place. The
Hau sdrai near the gate of that name, was erected by the Bibi Sihiba, the
^ Nawab*8 wife. A sarii at the Jasmai gate was half built, then knocked

down ; the land was owned (1839) by the sons of Nawdb Azim Khdn ; at
the MadiLr gate was a brick-built sardi, where now stands the Madar bdf i built
by Naw4b Muzaffar Jang, which, in 1839, was occupied by the son of Mu-
hammad 'Ali Ehdn, alia% Buldki, son of Dildaler Kh4n and nephew of Mu-
zaffar Jang. There was also a brick sardi at the Amethi gate opposite the
Anguri bagh ; this the Naw&b's descendants have demolished, and they
have sold the materials, the site is used for the sale of wood and thatching-
grass. A substantial sarai was also built near the Ldl gate, which we Eng-
lish have taken to pieces and rebuilt after our own fashion.*

At each gate were stationed five hundred armed men and two guns,
one on each side. The Nawdb's sons and slaves (Ehdnazads), who had
troops in their pay, were allotted places of abode round the outer part of
the city. It was intended that money-changers, merchants, and the work-
ing-classes generally, should occupy the centre. Tlie whole was surrounded
by an earthen wall. For each of his twenty-two sons, Muhammad Kh4n
built a brick fort and women's apartments. At each house he planted a
private garden (Khina b4gh) surrounded with a high waU. Round the city

* This was done by Mr. Newnham, Collector, in 1825.

I

i

V

280 W. Irvine^The Bangath Nawdhs of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

wall was a ditch, with sloped and levelled sides, fifteen yards wide and thirty
feet deep. So long as Mohammad EMn lived, this ditch was cleaned every
day, and the gates were kept in good order.

Bound the fort were the houses of the chelas who were on duty day and
night. Many groves were planted, especiaUy noteworthy were the Naulakha
and Bihar Baghs heneath the fort, which did not contain any mango trees,
but consisted entirely of guava, her, custard-apple and orange trees. The
Naw4b*s sons and chelas had orders to plant gproves outside the city
wherever they pleased. The soil is very favourable to the mango and it
comes to great perfection ; the water-melons are also very large and sweet
and plentiful.

Two entire villages, Bhikampura and Deofhan, were included within
the walls, besides portions of other villages. It was intended that each
trade should occupy a separate bazar, hence we have the quarters named
after trades such as Kasarhaffa (braziers), Pasarhatta (druggists), Sar4f4
(money-changers), Lohai (iron-mongers), Ndnhai (salt-dealers), Khan^hai
(sugar-merchants), and so forth. Other quarters were set aside for particu-
lar castes, such as Khatr^na (for the Khatris), Mochidna (for shoe-makers),
Koli&na (for Hindu weavers), Sadhw4ra (for S&dhs), Bamanpuri (for Brah-
mans), JuUhpura (for Mussulman weavers), Bastogi muhalla, Agarwdl
muhalla, Kighazi muhalla (for paper-makers), Mahdjanpura, Bangashpu-
ra, Khatakpura, Sayyadpura, and so on. This arrangement has been upset
in more recent times, and the castes have become more or less mixed. Still
it is observed to some extent, for I doubt if a single Sidh lives outside the
Sadhwdra, and its ofEshoot the Sdhibganj Auhalla.

Events from 1719 to 1726.

During the reign of Farrukhsiyar, Nawdb Muhammad Kh&n would
appear to have attended Court seldom, being occupied with the founding of
Farrukhdhdd. Meanwhile Delhi had been the scene of much intrigue.
On the 9th Rabi II, 1131 H. (18th Feb. 1719) the Sayyad brothers,*
'Abdullah Khdn and Husain 'Ali Kbdn, had deposed and imprisoned the
Emperor Farrukhsiyar, After the short reigns of two boys successively
raised to the throne, Abul Fath Ndsir-uddin, entitled Muhammad Shdh, suc-
ceeded on the 16th Zi'l Ka'd, 1131 H.t (18th Sept. 1719), his reign counting,
however, from the deposition of Farrukhsiyar. After intrigues against the
power of the Sayyads, with which we need not concern ourselves here, it
was agreed that Husain 'Ali Khdn, accompanied by the £mperor, should
march to reduce the revolted provinces of the Dakhin. The march of the
Sayyad began at the end of Shawwdl^ (end of August 1720). On the 9th
Zi'l Ea'd, 1182 H. (8rd Sept. 1720), the Fmperor made a first march from
* Siyar-ul Matdkharin 418 (Lakhnau Edition), f S-uUM 422. t S-ul-M. 433.

1878.] W. Irvine— I%tf Bmffosh Natodb* of larrukhdbdd. 281

Agra of three hos^ accompanied by 'Abdullah Kh&n. He wished to halt till
the 15th, the anniversary of his accession* Hnsain Ali Khdn, however, urged
an advance, and on the 14th (8th Sept. 1720) the army marched to a little
beyond Fathpur Sikri. After four or five days they moved on southwards
'Abdullah Khan remained behind, and on the 19th Zi'l Ka'd (13th Sept.
1720), he started for Delhi.

Then follows in the " Siyar-ul Mutdkharin" a statement, damaging to
Naw&b Muhammad Khdn's reputation, which I quote. " On the road to
'' Delhi* Muhammad Elhdn, Bangash, came to visit 'Abdullah Khdn and
'^ expressed his desire to march and join Husain 'All Kh&n in his campaign
*' of the Dak bin, were he not prevented by want of means. He received
'* fifty thousand rupees, in addition to the several lakhs of rupees which
'^ Husain 'Ali Khin had paid him to induce him to start. Then, with a lie
" which looked like truth, he said he was going to the Emperor's camp.
''He took his leave, and 'Abdullah Kh&n resumed his march to Delhi."

On the 6th Zi'l Hajj, 1182 H. (30th Sept. 1720, when about thirty-
fiTe kog beyond Fathpur Sikri, Husain 'AJi Kh4n was assassinated with the
Emperor's knowledge and consent. A return to Agra then commenced.
As soon as he received word of his brother's death, 'Abdullah Kban raised
to the throne Sult&n Ibr&him, son of Baf '-ul Kadr, son of Bah&dur Shih.f
This was on the 11th Zi'l Hajj, 1132 (5th Oct., 1720), A few days were
spent in collecting such an army as could be got together in the time. On
the 17th Zi'l Hajj, 1132 H. (11th Oct., 1720) 'Abdullah Kh4n started from
Delhi.

On the 9th Muharram 1133 H. (30th Oct., 1720) Muhammad Sbdh's
camp left Shdhpur. It was here that Muhammad Kh^n, after a good deal
of wavering and consultation with his friends, such as Shuj'at Khan Ghilzai
snd others, threw in his lot with the Emperor and joined him with three
thousand men.:( It is said that 'Abdullah Kh^n had written to him
reminding him of the many favours he had received, and requesting aid at
this crisis If they gained the day, he would make Muhammad Khdn first
in the whole kingdom. But a flarmdn from Muhammad Shih, another
from his mother, Kudsia Begam, and letters from the nobles, arrived about
L the Bame time. Self-interest and perhaps some faint respect for the reign-

ing house, appear to have carried the day.

When Kutb-ul Mulk 'Abdullah Kh&n reached Hasanpur§ three kos
from the Emperor's camp, he halted. On the 12th MuhaiTam, 1133 H, (2nd

• S-Bl-M. 433.
t S-ul-M. 437 and 438.
t S-iil-M. 439.

§ Haflonpur lies, I believe, close to the town of 01, in Parganah Far&h of the Agra
l^ifltiict, some twenty-four miles north-west of Agra.

282 W. Irvine— I%tf Bangatih Naw&hs of Ihrrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Nov , 1720) he placed his army in battle arraj. The battle beg^ early on
the 4th November and lasted all that day and night. On the Sth, after
'Abdullah Ehdn had descended from his elephant to fight on foot, he was
wounded by an arrow in the forehead. Haidar ^uli Khan recognizing him,
took him and his brother Najm-ud-din 'Ali Eh4n prisoners, put them on
an elephant, and conveyed them to the Emperor. The drums then beat to
victory. Muhammad Khan in this hotly contested battle appears to have
fought in the main body. In S&hib lUie's collection, there is a long letter
from Muhammad Eb^n to Baj^h Jai Singh Saw4e describing the battle,
but there are no personal details. The Naw&b for his services was pro>
mised six lakhs of rupees on receipt of treasure from Bengal, but the
money was never paid.

If the local myth were to be believed, Muhammad Ehdn played a
much more dramatic part than history accords him. The story goes that
Muhammad Kh4n with his whole force moved down on 'Abdullah Ehan.
On the Naw4b*s elephant, seated behind him, were Mukim Kbdn and Dadd
Kh4n, chelas. The elephant was driven close to that of Sayyad 'Abdullah
Kh4n and Muhammad Khdn gave him " Saldm *alaikum.** The Sayyad
with a " TFa ^alaikum*^ stretched out his hand from the howdah to be
kissed. Muhammad Ebdn then threw his silken girdle round it, and drag-
ged the Sayyad out of his howdah. From the jerk 'Abdullah Khan's
turban fell off, and Muhammad Khdn threw him down a Kashmir shawl to
wind round his head. The Sayyad refused to take it and, looking towards
Muhammad Kh^n, spat at him. Mukim £lh4n and Daud Kh4n sprang
down and seized Sayyad 'Abdullah IGidn, the former taking his shield and
the latter his sword. An attempt at rescue was foiled and about midday
the Nawab reached camp with his prisoner ; on a demand from the Emperor
the Sayyad was made over to him. The shield remained with AUahdad
KhAn, son of Naw&b Mukim Kh&n, up to the time of Nawdb Shaukat Jang
(1813-1823) ; and Naw^b Amin-ud-daula used often to send for it, and
highly extol the valour by which it had been won.

On the 16th Muharram, 1133 H. (6th Nov., 1720)* the Emperor
Muhammad Sh&h marched for Delhi ; and advancing quickly he reached it
on the 19th (9th Nov., 1720)' and encamped for two days near the pillar of
Khw&ja Niz4m-ud-din. Those who had distinguished themselves were
presented. On this occasion Muhammad Kh4n, who had been made a
Commander of six thousand on Muhammad Sh&h's accession, was increased
to the rank of Hafi Hazdri .7000 horse. ' He received a khilat with
seven lakhs of rupees in cash, he was granted the title of Ghazanfar Jang
<' The Lion of War", and the parganahs of Bhojpur and Shamshab&d, both

« S-ul-M. 443

J 878.] W. Trying— The Bangn^h Naijodhs of Farrukhdhdd. 288

in the modem district of Farrukh&b4d, were added to his former jdgirs. He
was soon after appointed Subahd4r of Allahab&d (between 22nd Oct., 1720
and 11th Oct., 1721).* At this time, his 'Amils or subordinate governors
were for Allah^b&d, Bhure £Mn, chela ; for Irichh, Bhdnder and Kalpi,
Daler KhAn, chela ; for Sipri and Jalaun, Kama! Khan ; for Bhojpur,
NeknAm Khin, chela ; for Shamsh&b4d, Dadd Khan, chela ; for Buddon,
Sahaswin (now both in the Bud^n district) and Mihrabad (now in the
Shahjah^npor district), Shamsher Khdn, chela.

In 1135 H. (1st Oct., 1722— 20th Sept. 1723) Samsdm-ud-daula pro-
cored a grant of the Subah of Agra in favour of Kajah Jai Singh Sawae . t Jai
Singh soon after marched against Churiman J4t, to pimish him for having
dded with the late Wazir, 'Abdullah Khdn. Muhkam Singh, son of Chur-
4man, insulted^ his father in open darbar, and rather than bear the disgrace
the father committed suicide. Badan Singh, nephew of Churaman, sided
with Hdjah Jai Singh. The fort of Thdn was occupied on the 9th Safar,
1135 H. (8th Nov., 1722), and Badan Singh, who was father of Suraj
Mall, then succeeded to the territory. In this campaign Muhammad
Khan bore a part.

In the fifth year (Jan« 1723 to Dec. 1723), Muhammad Khdn went with
the army under the command of Sharf -ud-daula Iradatmand Khan and
Kajdh Jai Singh, sent to chastise Ajit Singh Bafhor, Bajdh of Marwdr. Be-
fore the army could reach his territory, Ajit Singh was assassinated by his
son Bakht Singh. § Through the mediation of Nawdb Muhammad Khdn,
Dhonkal Singh made his submission to the Emperor. ||

Muhammad Khdn had barely reached Mairtha with Abhai Singh alia»
Dhonkal, when he was recalled to undertake the recovery of Bundelkhand
from Chattarsdl. Six months were employed on this duty, when on receipt
of intelligence that Mubdriz Khdn, faujdar of Burhdnpur, had been killed,
he was ordered to return from Bundelkhand to the Duab, and thence to
proceed by way of Akbardbad to Gwdlydr to meet an irruption of the
Mahrattas. Bdji Bdo had appeared north of the Narbada, had attacked

* The local MSS. say Agra, but I think this must bo a mistake. For some dis-
paraging reniArks about Muhammad Khdn in regard to this AUahabdd appointment,
see S-ul-M. 451, line 6 from end.

t S-ul-M. p. 466.

X S-ul-M. p. 439.

§ Tod (Madras Reprint, 1873,) Vols. I, 636 and II, 81 gives the date about 1780 S.,
corresponding to July, 1723*

I Muhammad Khin is not named in the list of Musalmdn leaders in Tod, II, 80,
bat the same authority shows that Dhonkal, or the exterminator, was a nickname of
Abhai Singh, son of Ajit Uingh. The *^ Tanikh«i-Hindi" mentions Muhammad Khdn
[Uowson'B Elliot, VIII, 44.]
0 0

284 W. Irvine— 1%<9 Bangash Nawdbs of Farruhhdhad, [No. 4,

Girdhar Bab&dur, the Imperial Governor of Milwa, and for two seasons
(1725 — 1726), had obtained plunder and contributions.* Muhammad
Khdn was appointed to the command of five thousand men, with two lakhs
of rupees a month for their pay. He waited at Akbarab&d to receive the
money and was then told to go on to Gw^lidr, where he entertained nearly
ten thousand horsemen, and lay there idle for seven months.

On his way back from the above expedition, Muhammad Eh&n was
asked by Ehdn Daur4n Khdn, who then held in jigir parganahs Bhongamf
and Talgrdm,^ to send two thousand men to aid Mahtya Sad4nand in
reducing to submission Jaswant Singh, zamindar of Mainpuri. The tradi*
tional story is, that the Chauhdn Eajdh, Dalip Singh, neglected to pay his
respects to the Nawab, and Bhure Kb^n with five hundred horse was sent to
bring him. When the Kajdh came before the Nawab, he delayed in making
his salim, and Bhure Kh4n bent his neck down with his hand. The Rdjdh
freeing himself drew his sword. Then the Nawab sent an arrow at him
and hit him in the head so that he died on the spot. His son, Jaswant
Singh, was appointed his successor and the Nawab resumed his road to Far-
rukhabad.§

BundelJchand Affairs.

We have already seen,|| that the jagirs given to Muhammad Kh4n in
the reign of Farrukhsiyar and the early part of that of Muhammad Sh4h, lay
mostly in Bundelkhand. Farrukhsiyar (1713 — 1719) granted him the par-
ganahs of Sehand^ and Maudah** in jAgir : to the charge of these Daler
Khdn, chela was appointed. In the first year of Muhammad Shdh's reign
(Feb. 1719 — Feb. 1720) a tankhvoah was granted on Kalpi,tt Irichh,J J
and other places in Bundelkhand.

In the same year, 1719 — 1720, it was reported that the Bundelas had
plundered Edlpi, had killed Fir 'Ali Khan, Muhammad Khan's 'Amil, and
his son. They seized the women and children of the respectable Muham-
madans, and knocked down their houses, mosques and tombs. Nawdb Bur-
bdn-ul Mulk then asked that the Mughuls might be sent against the

* Grant Duff, 218, Bombay reprint, 1873.
t In tho Mainpuri District.
X In the Farrukhib&d District.

§ Qaz. lY. 550, 552. Jaswant Singh's accoasion took place in 1783 S. = 1726
A. D.

II P. 274.

11 Twelve miles south of Bdnda.

••In the Hamirpur District.

ft On the Jamna, in the Jalaun District.

XX In the Jhansi Dijstrict.

1878.] W. Irvme— The Bangash Nawdhs of FarruJchihdd, 285

invaders, but the Emperor confided their chastisement to Muhammad Khau.
Baler Kh^n, ehela, was ordered off with a proper force, and marching rapid-
ly he ejected the Thdnas of the enemy from the parganahs of E^lpi and
JaULlpur.* The inhabitants then began to return to t^e plundered towns.

At this period Naw4b Amin-ud-din 'Itimad-ud-daula passed awaj.f
Some of his enemies considered that Muhammad Kh^n had been favoured
by the late Wazir, and they caused letters to be written to the Rajahs of
Chanderi and Orchha and to other zamindars, instigating them to resistance.
The Hindus assembled to the number of thirty thousand horse, besides
countless infantry.

K4im Kh^n, the Naw&b*s son, then faujd&r of Sark&r Ghord, had
meanwhile been besieging for a year the town of Tarahwdn ,| the residence
of Pahdr Singh. This place had four forts, very strong, surrounded with
jungle, steep ravines, and difficult passages through the hills. Kaim Khan
had with him ten thousand horse, and by the greatest exertions he succeed-
ed in capturing the fortress. He then made ready to march to the aid of
Daler Eh&n.

Muhammad Kh^n now represented to the Emperor, that if the punish-
ment of the rebels were not heartily desired, the army had better be recall-
ed. The Emperor encouraged Muhanmiad Kh4n to persevere. But he,
discouraged by the number of letters sent by his enemies to the Hindu
fiajahs, wrote repeatedly to Daler Khdn enjoining him to restore the forts
and Tillages of the enemy. Times had changed and the campaign must be
relinquished. Despite these orders, Daler Kh^n, in the pride of his courage
and resolution, thought not of the superiority of the enemy and refused to
withdraw from offensive operations.

On the 29th Rajab of the 3rd year of the reign (1133 H., 13th May,
1721) Chattarsal advanced with nearly thirty thousand horse and a numer-
ous artillery. Daler Khan with the force he had, some four thousand horse
and foot, prepared for the attack. He rode at the enemy at the head of
five hundred men, and threw them into confusion. By the fickleness of
fortune he now received, besides sword and spear wounds, two bullet shots,
one in the forehead and one in the breast. He expired on the spot, and his
five hundred companions, after prodigies of valour, were all slain. § When
the emperor, Muhammad Sh^h, heard of Daler Khan's death, he made a
present to Muhammad Khan, by way of consolation, of a jewelled aigrette
and akhilat.||

* In the Hamiipur District,
t He died in Babi 1133 H. (January 1721).

X In the Banda District, 42 miloa east of B&nda. Gaz. N. W. P. I, 593.
§ The " 8iyar-al-Mutakh&rin,'' p. 452, says Daler Kh£n had 1000 men with him,
of whom 700 or 800 were kUled.
a S-ul-M. p. 452.

2HG W. Irvine— The Bangath Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Daler Eh&n, chela, was by birth a Bundela Thdkur.* He is famed
for his bravery, but he seems to have been very hivish and extravagant in
his management. He spent one year's income in equipping a body of seven-
teen hundred horse, magnificently clad and armed. When the Naw^b sent
urgent orders for remittance of revenue, Daler Khan marched with his
regiment and halted where is now the P^n B4gh below the fort. At-
tending darbar, he made each of his men present a gold coin as " nazr."
Daler Khdn then took up the Nawdb's shoes and stood behind his seat, say-
ing, " I am only fit to carry your shoes, you may give the Subah to whom
" you like, one who will bring you heaps of money ; these seventeen hun-
** dred men are all the revenue you will get from me.'* This made the
Nawdb smile, he embraced Daler Kh&n and sent him back to his district.

Daler Kh4n took part in nearly all the campaigns in which Muham-
mad Khan was engaged. The Fathans and the Bundelas on account of his
bravery, styled him " Sdrm^n" (brave, bold), the mark of which is that a
man's arms are so long that his hands touch his knees when standing
upright. Daler Khdn had this peculiarity.

The traditionary account of his death is as follows : One day Daler Khan
had gone out to shoot followed by only three hundred horse, the rest being
left in camp. A scout brought word to Bdjah Chattars^l, who came out
with a large force. Both sides began to fire. Naw4b Daler Khan's com-
panions advised a retreat. He refused, with the remark, ^* One must die
sooner or later." Then reciting the final prayer (Fdtiha) and taking up
his horse's rein to urge him on, he rode straight into the Rajah's army and,
cutting his way through, came clear out on the other side. Numbers of
the Bundelas were killed. He then made for the Rajah's howdah, and at
this moment he received a ball in his chest, so that he fell dead. All the
three hundred horsemen shared his fate. When his troops heard of his death
they came out to attack Chattarsal, who then retreated. Daler Kh4n was
buried in the village of Maudah,t and all the people of Bimdelkhand mourn-
ed his loss. On every Thursday sweetmeats are offered at his tomb. Every
son of a Bundela, on reaching the age of twelve years, is taken by his father
and mother to Maudah, where they place his sword and shield on Daler
Khan's tomb. They make an offering, and the boy then girds on the
sword and takes up the shield, while the parents pray that he may be brave
as Daler Khdn. Kettle-drums are regularly beaten at the tornb.^

* The motto on his seal was " Az lulf i Muhammad Daler dmadam,*' Hisilm-ud-din
says ho was uncle to the Rani of Gohad living in 1758. If this be tme, Daler Khin
was a J&t, but the accepted story is that in the text.

t Gaz. I; 27. In the Hamirpur Bistrictf 20 miks from Hamfrpur. The tomb is
one mUe outside the town (Gaz. I, 645J on the Hamirpur road. The date there given,
1730, seems to be a mistake.

t Note C. on Bundelkhand traditions of Daler (or Dalel) EUa.

1878.] W. Irvine— ^tf Bangath Ndivdhs of FarrukhdbdiL 287

About the time of Baler Khdn's death, that is in 1133 H. (Oct. 1720—
Oct. 1721), Muhammad Khin was appointed governor of Allahabid. The
authors of the " Lauh'' say the Sanad for AUabdbad used to be with Amin-
ud-dauhiy grandson of Muhammad Kh&n, and niib from 1786 to 1803, and
that Islim Khdn Bakhshi had a copy. I know not what has become of
these now. The revenue is said to have been eightj-two lakhs of rupees.

In the latter part of 1723, when Muhammad Kh&n reached Mairtha*
on his way to Court with Abhai Singh, son of Ajit Singh of Mdrwar,t a
farm&n and an order sealed by the Amir-ul-Umr4 (Kh4n Daur^n Kh4n)
were received. These stated that Chattarsdl had occupied a large portion
of imperial territory, that Burh^-ul-Mulk had been sent in haste against
him, and that Muhammad Kh4n should also hurry to the spot.

In obedience to this order, Muhammad Khdn proceeded in the 7th year
(Dec. 1724 — Dec. 1725), to the Subah of Allah^b^d, which had been already
granted to him with all its tarkdrs. For years, owing to the resistance of
the zamindars, his deputies had been unable to regain effective possession
in Bundelkhand. After a two months* stay in AUah&bdd, an army of fifteen
thousand horsemen was collected. With these he proceeded to the banks
of the Jamna at Bhognipur.;^ Burh&n-ul Mulk had already returned, and
had gone back to his Stibah of Audh.

Repeated orders came to make an advance, and several leaders were ac-
cordingly sent across the Jamna. Muhammad Khdn then crossed the river
himself. In the course of six months' fighting, he penetrated as far as par-
ganah Sahendah, south of Bftnd4. Minndns and orders from Kh4n Dau-
r&n Khdn were now received through Ayd Mall, stating that as Mubdriz
Kh4n had been killed, the campaign against the Hindus had been post-
poned. § Although the enemy had nearly succumbed, the Nawdb was
reluctantly compelled to forego his advantage. The enemy swore by most
solemn oaths not to re-enter Muhammad Kh^'s j^irs, and they retreated
three marches from the Muhammadan army. After placing his IJhdnas in
the country, Muhammad Khdn came away. He then, as already related,
was sent on duty to Gwaliydr to repel an expected attack from the Mahrat-
tas. Taking advantage of his absence, the Bundelas, in the most faithless
manner, broke their oath and set aside their treaty, and prevented the col-
lection of any revenue.

At this period, Harde Nardyan and the other sons of Ohattarsdl had
OTerrun the whole of Baghelkhand to the frontiers of Subah 'Azimdbdd,

• Abont forty mUes west of Ajmir, in Jodhpdr territory.
t See back, page 283.

t In the Cawnpur difltrict, on the road to Kalpi, about six miles from the Jamna.
i Mab&riz EMn, governor of Haidarabad, was kUlod in battle with Asaf Jah in
October 1724. Elph. 616.

288 W. Irvine— TAc Bangnsh Niawdbs of Fu)^nkhdhdd. [No. 4,

and approaching Allahdbdd had raised disturbances in that quarter. In the
9th year (1139 — 1140 H.) Muhammad Khan received a farmdn directing
him to proceed to his Subah to restore order, Bundelkhand being a sub-
ordinate division of the Allahdb^d province. An allowance of two lakhs of
rupees a month was made, afterwards commuted to a grant of the Chakla
of Kor&.

As soon as he reached Allah&bad, Muhammad Khdn began to raise an
army. Seventeen rupees was the pay of a trooper and twenty rupees that
ofaJamddar. On the 12th Jamida II, 1139 H. (24th January 1727,)
Akbar Elhdn, the Nawdb's third son, was appointed to lead the van and
crossed the Jamna. Muhammad Kh^n*s advance-tents were sent across the
river, and he soon followed with fifteen to sixteen thousand horse and the
same number of infantry.*

At this time the Bundelas, with a force estimated at 20,000 horse and
more than 100,000 foot, held the whole of Baghelkhand up to Fatna, the
country of Sankrit, and M&ndo (or Mddhon)t as far as Haldi:^ the
only place left was the fort of Bewand, [Bond, Pewand ?] which Hardi Sah
and Jagat Bae had invested with a force of 30,000 horse and 50,000 foot.
To meet this powerful confederacy, Muhammad Khan urged the Wazir to aid
him with contingents from Udait Singh, Edjah of Orchha, B4o E&mchand
of Datiya, Pirthi, zamindar of Sahen^ah, Durjan Singh, zamindar of Chande-
ri, Bajah Jai Singh of Maudah, Kh&nde Bdm Narwari and Bajah Gopdl
Singh Bhadaurya. He also wished for the aid of certain faujd&rs, Sayyad
Najm-ud-din 'Ali Kh^n, Sdbit Khan, Jan Nis^r Kh4n, Buzurg 'Ali Khan,
and the Naib Faujddr of Jaunpur. None of these men, except Jai Singh
of Maudah, appear to have obeyed the orders issued to them from Delhi.

The first operations were directed to clearing the eastern part of Bun-
delkhand. The forts of Luk§, Chaukhandi,|| Garh-Kakarelit and Mau**
in the Sankrat-Barsinghpurft country were reduced. They also obtained
Bamnagar^^ the forts of Katauli,§§ Sahrab, and Kalydnpur,|||| with a

* The crossiiig took place, I am inclined to think, at AllahilMd, or perhaps, at
the Mau ferry, some 35 miles above that place.

t Query, 22 miles west of Riwah.

X Query, 10 miles north-east of Riwah.

{ In Riwah, eaat of the Tons. Long. 81-29, Lat. 24*55.

II Long. 81.29} Lat. 25.1. About 10 m. S. of Bargarh Railway Station, in the
Riwah state.

f Long. 81.17 Lat 24.26, west of the Tons, in the Pannah state.

** Long. 81*^9 Lat 25*^21 about seven miles S. of the Dabhaurah Railway Station.

ft Long. 81*1 Lat 24^48 about 7 m. east of the Jabalpur Railway.

XX There is one Ramnagar about 2 m. west of Kalinjar.

§} Long. 81*15 Lat 24*»69^

nil Long. 81*7' Lat. 25^

4
I

1878.] W. Irvine— 2!^tf Bangaah Nawdhs of Furrukhdhdd. 289

hundred Jeos of the country belonging to M^dho* and B^ndah. For a time
the enemy bung about the bills near Tarabw&n, after which they entered the
fort, Cbattarsal himself taking refuge in flight. Leaving K^im Khan to
invest Tarahwan, Muhammad Khdn himself went to within four koa of
Sahen^h, but the enemy again gave way and fled. The parganahs of
Bhin4,t Maudah,^ Failani,§ Agwdsi|| and Simauni,^ with the ferries, had
now been cleared. The campaign up to the first capture of Tarabwdn
fleems to have occupied ten months or a year.

Kaim Khan, the Nawdb's eldest son, and another blrother, H4di Ddd
Khan, were left behind with 12,000 horse and 12,000 foot to besiege
Tarahwin. Babu Chattar Singh, son of Kdjah Jai Singh of Maudah, was
also put under his orders, together with Khan Jahdn, Halim Khdn, Muham-
mad Zu'lflk&r, Rie Har Parshdd, and two zamindars, Sadu and Har Bans.
Sangram Singh, brother of Anandi Das, had also promised to join with some
men he had collected. Kaim Khan's instructions were to take the place as
quickly as possible, and then rejoin his father with the captured cannon, lead, '
and powder of Tarahwan, Kalydnpur and Kakrauri. The zamindars were
to be conciliated, Tarahwan bringing in fourteen lakhs of rupees.

The fort of Tarahwdn, the head-quarters of Pahdr Singh, had three
mud forts with four masonry citadels, surrounded by an extensive jungle.
For many years no Mubammadan governor had attacked it, and for some
months it resisted all efforts to reduce it. The garrison was commanded by
8abh& Singh, son of Harde Nardyan and grandson of Chattarsdl, aided by
Har Bans, zamindar of Barga^h** with a number of Mah^attas, '^ Barki," (?)
and others. On the 9th Jamadi I, 1140 (12th Dec, 1727), after severe
fighting, Kaim £[han succeeded in entering the outer fort, having beaten
in the gates by driving his elephant against them. The Hindus, after a
short stru^le, were expelled from the second fortress and compelled to take
refuge in the third fort. About two thousand of the besieged lost their
lives. From the walls of the fourth fort, the defenders threw down burning
substances, and the contest was prolonged for some fifteen hours : at three
hours before sunrise the survivors sallied forth intending to escape, when
three hundred of them were killed, and as many more were drowned in the

• Midhogarh, Long. 8C<'68' Lat. 24''34'.

t Mataondh, to the south-west of Banda, is suggested by Mr. Cadell.

{ In the East of the Hamirpur district.

{ In the Banda district, the next parganah to Maudah on the east.

I Aug^ in the Banda district, the parganah next to Pailibii on the east. Mr.
Cadell tells me that the name is spelt Agw&ri on a slab in the mosquo at Aug&si built
by Shih Kuli on the site of the Hindu fort.

% About 10 miles south-west of Aug&si.

** Bargafh, a station on the E. I. Railway (P)

290 W. Irvine— T*tf Bangail Nawaba of Furrukhdhdd. [No 4,

liver. The fort was then completely occupied. The siege had occupied five
or six months. After this victory ^dim Khan marched against the fort of
Kalj&n Singh, eight kos from Tarahwan,* and against Muhkamgarh in the
same neighbourhood. t

While Kdim Kh4n was occupied with Tarahwan and the country to
the east, Muhammad Khan advanced from Sihondah. Skirmishing went
on continuously for one month and twenty-one days. The enemy had
strengthened their position by throwing up strong entrenchments, overlook-
ing the bed of the torrent, in addition to Ihe village fort. Tradition hands
down Ichauli as the site of the great battle which now took place. This
might refer to the Ichauli on the Sydni river, eleven miles west of Bdnda,
although this village does not seem far enough to the south and west to
fit in with the rest of the details ; nor is there in the district anything
known of a fight there against the Muhammadans. In the Hadihat-ul'
Akaltm the name is spelt Ajuni or Ajuli, and it is said to be in parganah
Mahoba. The date of the battle was the 2nd Shuwwal, 1139, (12th May,
1727).

At about two hours after sunrise, the first entrenchment, defended by
Harde Narayan and Hindu Singh Chandela with twenty thousand horse
and forty thousand foot, was carried by the Muhammadans, who had
advanced slowly and in good order. Here Bhure Khan, Dilslwar Khan,
Imam Khdn, Ghuldm Muhammad Khdn, 'Abd-ur-rasul Khan, and Mu-
hammad Zaman Khan, chiefs and leaders, lost their lives, while Akbar
Khan, the Nawdb's son, received a graze from a spent ball, and Sayyad
Ja'far Husain Khdn, Allahydr Khdn and Mangal Khdn were wounded.
The Bundelas now retreated to a second fort occupied by Jagat lide,
another son of the Kdjah, with fifteen thousand horse. Fighting was
resumed, and here Ahmad Khdn, Irddat Khdn, Sirdir Khdn and Husain
Khdn were slain, and Eahmat Khdn with other horsemen was severely
wounded. At length Harde Nardyan, Jagat Nardyan and Mohan Singh,
sons of Chattarsdl,;J; and Hindu Singh Chandela fled to a third fort, near
a village on a winding torrent surrounded by inaccessible ravines. Here
were Chattarsdl's own head quarters and a force of ten thousand horse and
twenty thousand foot.

Muhammad Khdn pursued his enemy and renewed the engagement.
After several hours, the Bundelas continued their flight to a river with a

* Ealydnpur Kh&9 is about 17 miles sonth-east of Tarahwibi.

t There is a Mokengarh in the Indian Atlas, 6 miles south of Tarahwdn on the
Fysmmi-nadi.

X This name is spelt Sattarsal throughout Sdhib Rao's MS., but I have adhered to
the more usual form. The author of the IlrnHkat-ul-AkdUm tells us both forms were
used.

1878.] W. Irvine— I%a Bangash Navodhs of FarruhUhdd. 291

toiimonB course, full of whirlpools and having many ravines. Driven out
of this position, they took shelter in the ravines about half a has behind
their camp. Finding here no place of security, Chattarsdl with his sons,
their relations and dependents, having mounted on horseback in order to
escape notice, made off twelve Jcos into the jungle. All the camp equipage,
tents and cannon fell into the hands of the victors. Pursuit was made for
a distance of two Jeos ; the Muhammadans then halted and encamped. It
was soon learnt that the Bundelas had gone off to the vicinity of Sdlhat,
Damdast, and Thdna Faswdrah.* These places are described as full of
high hilla, deep lakes, torrent beds, ravines, and thorny jungle of great
extent. The Bundela leaders had thrown up entrenchments, intending to
dispute the passage. Chattars41 himself took up a position at Surajmau
some Jeo9 south of Jaitpur.

Muhammad Khdn estimated his own loss in the above battle at four
thousand to five thousand killed and wounded ; and that of the enemy at
twelve to thirteen thousand. The Muhammadan army was reduced to some
foiurteen or fifteen thousand horse, and there was a great scarcity of water
and fodder. Not a single one of the Hajahs or faujdars had joined him.

The auxiliary forces of the Bundelas, numbering some forty thousand
horse and one hundred thousand foot, were made up by the troops of the
Eajah of M4ndo,t of the (jahilwars of Bijipur,;^ of Khdn^e B4e Narwari,§
of the zamindars of zila' Mdlwa, of all Gondw4na and Malak Ga4h,|| with
the Gaurs and the Parihdrs of the country round.

The oral tradition of this battle gives a more romantic version of it.
It is as follows : One day before the battle,^ Muhammad Khdn distributed
ninety thousand rupees among the troops ; and the heralds (nakib) announced
that, the morrow being fixed for the decisive struggle, every man must be ready
armed by midnight. On the other side Chattars^ made his preparations.
His army consisted of one hundred thousand foot and seventy thousand
horse. Several other Bdjahs followed his standard.

From the hour of morning prayer the battle began. The contending
leaders advanced slowly towards each other on elephants. Skirmishing
parties were thrown out from both sides. The Khalifa used to say that he
had at one time expended all the arrows from his quiver. So many were

* Abont 6 miles noith-east of Mahoba.

t M&ndogaib, 22 miles west of Kiwah.

X Possibly the Bijipar in Scindiah's territory, 52 miles south-west of Gwaliar.
Thornton, 120.

{ Karwar, a town abont 40 miles south of Gw^liiu:.

II Query. The Gko'h Kotah 25 miles east of Sdgar. Thornton, 324.

Y The authority for these details is EhalifiEi N&*im, son of K&li Miyan Ji, the teach-
er of the Naw&b's chelas, who told the author of the " Lauh-i-Tarikh.''
P P

292 W. Irvine — The Bangaih Naiffdbs of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4»,

lying about, however, that by holding on to his saddle and stooping over,
he plucked up eighteen in one handful. About midday the Naw&b's ele-
phant rushed at and struck that of Mangal Kh4n Musenagari,* and ran
after it for some little distance. Chattarsdl's army thought that Muham-
mad Khin had taken to flight. With one voice all the Bundelas shouted
out that the Bangash had fled. Hearing this outcry, Muhammad Kh4n
turned round with his face to the back of the howdah, calling out as was
his custom '' Bahdduro, yihi wakthahdduri hd hat.** He asked the elephant-
driver what this fighting meant, it had never occurred before, when the
man explained that intending to fight Chattars^Ps elephant, he had drugged
his own. The elephant was again turned to face the enemy.

Muhammad Khan, armed to the teeth, was standing up to his full
height in his howdah, the sides of which were some three feet high.
Suddenly they see bearing down upon them two Bundela horsemen with
spears in their Bands, and as they come they avoid all encounter. When
stopped by any of Muhammad Khan's men, they reply, " We have some-
thing to tell your Nawdb." At length they came close to Muhammad
Kh4n's elephant. There they halted, and one of them got out a small bag
from his waist-cloth and eat some tobacco. Then grasping his spear firmly
in his hand, he shouted out " Bangash, keep a sharp look out, I am at you."
He so impelled his horse, that it placed its two forefeet on the trunk of the
Nawab's elephant ; he then made a thrust with his spear. The Nawab avoid-
ed the blow, and shot an arrow at the man with such force, that he fell
dead from his horse. The horse was killed by the elephant.f The second
horseman did as the first, and was killed in the same way. The Naw&b
exclaimed to Mangal Khdn Musenagari — '^ How brave must these Bunde-
las be."

Bhdre Kh4n, chela, now placed himself at the head of a number of brave
Pafhins and penetrated the enemy's army, intending to kill ChattarsdL
Bhtire Khan lost his own life instead, and the Nawab's son, Akbar Ktiin,
received a bullet wound. For the loss of Bhtire Khin the Nawib wept,
and for many days after the battle wore orange-coloured clothes in sign of
mourning, saying, " What Bhdre said was true, he said he would die be-
fore me."

About two hours to sunset the elephants of Nawdb Muhammad Kh^
and Bajah Chattarsal met face to face. Chatt-arsdl seated under an iron-

* Musenagar, parganah Bhognipur, Cawnpxir district^ on the left bank of the
Jaxxma some 13 or 14 miles east of Kalpi.

t The tradition is that the Nawib's arrows bore a head of several fingera' breadth,

a shot from his bow usually killed any one hit. Up to Shaukat Jang's time (1813

1823) there were several of these arrows in the Armoury, and Chaudhri 'Alim-ullah,
bearer of the Fish standard, had several of them.

1878.] W. Irvine— TOtf Bangash Nawdbs of FarruhhdMd. 293

plated canopy was encouraging his troops to the final onset. Naw&b Mu-
hammad Khdn aimed at the canopy with a steel javelin (sdng) which breaking
through struck the elephant. Cbattars^ himself swooned. The attendant
in the hind seat said to the mahout — '' Drive off the elephant ; the fight will
be renewed to-morrow." Chattars^Ps elephant was turned round and it
fled for many miles. His troops began to retreat, and Ani Rao, sister's son
to the Bajah, was killed. The Fa^h^s ran hither and thither despatching
the flying Bundelas.

At night-fall Chattars^ came to his senses and asked who had won.
His courtiers said, ^' No one has gained the victory, when you became insen-
^ sible we retreated eight or ten miles, to-morrow morning we will renew
<< the engagement." Chattars&l flew into a passion with his brothers and
nephews, and declared that he would never retreat before Muhammad Khan.
' He wanted to know why they had brought him away, he would either go

back or else take his own life. No one listened to his words.

The whole night long Naw&b Muhammad Kh&n and his men remain-
ed in arms upon the field of battle, expecting the return of the Bundelas.
Not a single man got leave to go for food or water. Near at hand was a
wild plum tree on which there was some unripe fruit. These were gathered
one by one, and the Naw&b's mahaut driving his elephant up to the tree
collected some of the plums, part of which he gave to the Naw&b.

On the 29th Shaww^, 1139 H. (8th June, 1727), twenty-seven days
after the first battle, the imperial army marched towards the enemy's posi-
f tion. At one watch before sunrise on the 1st Zi'l-ka'd (9th June, 1727),

Muhammad Khdn mounted and placed himself at the head of his troops.
Before, however, they could come to close quarters, and while they were
still one hos distant, the enemy broke and fled towards Mahoba* and" else-
where. Those who lingered were slain. The forts of B&rigarh,t the resi-
dence of KUin Jahin, the sister's son of Chattars&l, and Lahuri-Jhumar,^
submitted at once to the parties sent against them. The Muhammadans
then encamped one kos beyond Mahoba, while the enemy lurked in the hills
of S61hat,§ there being but two ko9 left between the armies. Further pro-
. gress was delayed by heavy rain, which rendered it impossible in that soil

f to place one foot before another.

At this point there seems to have been a delay of some five months
during whicb the advance was suspended. It was not tiU the 17th Babi
II, IIM H. (21st Nov., 1727) that the army got near to Silhat. That very

* In the south of the Hamfrpor District,
t Ten miles S. £. by E. from Mahoba.
I 16 miles S. £. of Mahoba.

{ Mr. Oadell tells me that S&lhat is still a well-known jungle between Mahoba
and Jaitpur.

294 W. Irvine— 1%<5 Bangash Nawdbs of Farruhhdbdd. [No. 4,

day Harde Sah arrived to re-inforce Jagat B4e. The enemy, from the
strong and high earth- works which they had thrown up on the hills, kept
up a musketry fire and discharge of arrows. This went> on the whole day,
and nearly one hundred of the enemy were killed and many were wounded.
The Muhammadans also lost some men. At sunset the enemy gave way and
many were destroyed hy the artillery fire. Half of the hill and jungle was
gained. Efforts were then directed to cutting down the jimgle and making
a road.

Another delay of four months appears now to have interposed. The
complaint of Muhammad Kh4n is that the enemy were scattered all over
the country like ants or locusts. Without numerous troops nothing could
be done, and already all the troops, that could be paid from the two lakhs
of rupees a month, had been entertained, while there was a further force
under Kdim Kh4n engaged in the siege of Tarahw4n.

On the 6th Eamzin, 1140 (5th April, 1728) the army reached its
encampment between Salhat and Kulpahdr.* The attack on the enemy
was made on the 20th Eamzdn (19th April, 1728). One ^« beyond Kulpa-
h^r there are numerous high hills covered with thorny jungle. Here the
enemy had prepared seven entrenched places, with two strong outworks in
front. The walls and ditch were carried back on each side to the hill itself.
On the summit of the hills were posted some of their best men who, as
soon as the Muhammadans appeared, began to fire down upon them. The
walls were first breached by artillery fire, when an assault was ordered. The
enemy then retreated to the second outwork, where the contest was renewed.
Thus, step by step, the hill was gained and all the entrenchments cleared.
During the following night, about midnight, Harde Nardyan, Jagat H&e and
Mohan Singh attempted a night surprise, but without result, although three
distinct attacks were made.

On the 21st Bamzdn (20th April, 1728) Muhammad Khan started for
Mundh&rif where there was a fort built of stone on a hill surrounded by
thick jungle. Although the defenders fired down on the scaling party, the
fort was taken. There the army encamped and prepared for a further
advance. The enemy's leaders then brought their infantry into the wood,
which stretches far and wide for many koa. From the shelter of the trees
they began to discharge their arrows and kept up a severe fire of musketry.
Their skirmishers were soon expelled by the Muhammadans, headed by Akbar
Kh&n, the Naw&b's son. Muhammad Kh4n also advanced in person to his
support. Many heads of the fallen foe were cut off and brought in, with
many stray horses which, together with a number of loaded baggage-camels,
became the booty of the army.

* About 6 miles N. B. of Jaitpur.

t This I take to be Moorhari of the maps, 4 miles E. of Jaitpur.

1878.] W. IrYine— The Sangagh Nawdhs of Furrukhdhdd, 295

The Muhammadans now fixed their camp in front of Kulpahdr, with
Jaitpur on their right, Mondhiri slightly on one side in the same direction,
and the hills of S41hat, occupied by the enemy, on their left. Daily skir*
mishes occurred whenever the troops were out clearing .away the jungle.

The enemy now gathered themselves together in the hills of Ajhnar,*
which is three ho9 beyond Jaitpur, and Surajmau, which is the same distance
from that place. The Muhammadan camp was moved into the hills beyond
Jaitpur, while active preparations were made for the siege of Jaitpur itself.
It had taken twenty months to drive the Bundelas as far west as Ajhnar.
These twenty months, if we count from the 12th Jamadi II, 1139, (24th
January, 1727), the date of crossing the Jamna, would end in Safar, 114iO
(August, 1728).

During the rainy season (July to October, 1728), the siege progressed
but slowly. Owing to the excessive moisture the mines fell in as soon
as dug. The fort was protected on one side by a lake of great depth,
one ko9 wide and several kos long, it was placed on a hill, and the enemy
had mounted it with cannon and '' rahkla." It was not till four months
or so afterwards that the place fell. By the time it had been taken, the
campaign had lasted over twenty-four months (Jamadi II, 1139, to Jamadi
1, 1141 = January 1727 to December 1728).

At this period Muhammad Kh4n saw reason to complain bitterly of
the way he was treated at Court. He says he had performed the work of
seven or eight men, that he was fighting night and day ; yet no honours
were granted for his sons or relations, nor pensions to the dependents of
those who had fallen. Instead of reward, their j^irs were resumed. The
parganah of Shahpur,t he was now told, had been granted for one harvest
only, although it had been given in exchange for a gift of two krors of
" diLm." In the affair of Ajit Singh of Marwir, lakhs had been given away,
while all that Muhammad Khin had asked was the restoration of one par-
ganah.

For the preceding six months the enemy had caused confusion in parts
of parganah Panw&ri. % Darak Singh, an ally of Chattars41's, now took up
a position with two thousand horse and five thousand foot in the strong fort
of Sahandi§ on the banks of a river extremely difficult to cross. Orders
were given to Muhammad Bishdrat Multdni, who commanded in Bdth,|| to
coerce Darak Singh and take his fort. This man showed little zeal or
energy, for he camped a long time in zila' Auli^ on pretence of conciliat-

* Six miles S. of Jaitpnr.
t Now in the Cawnpur District.

% The parganah N. W. of Jaitpur, in the Hamirpur District.
§ Mr. Cadell suggests Seonri, on the Dassan, 6 miles N. W. of Panw&rL
D About 12 miles N. of Panwari town.

^ Qaery. Orii in the Jalaun District, the "1" being interchangeable with '<r"
at times.

206 W. Irvine— TAtf Banga$h NawihB of Farruhhdhdd. [No. 4,

ing bis troops. He then lingered in JaUlpnr,* and it was only on getting
sharp orders to make over Auli to Bio R4in Ghand,t that he advanced and
cleared the parganah of R4th.

Sardar Kh&n was also sent with KuQW&r Pancham Singh, to force R4o
Ram Chand's armj to retire from the investment of the forts and thinas
in the country of Rajah Pirthi Singh. ^ With the assistance of the Bha-
dauriya forces, these orders were executed. §

We have already seen that Tarahwan fell first before ^iim Kh&n in
Jamadi I, 1140, (December 1727). He then cleared the plain country and
the bills in the east of Bundelkband ; and, leaving Sayyad 'Arif Ali Kh&n
in charge, aided by Sadu a zamindar, he rejoined his father. Hardly had he
done so, when word came that at the instigation of the sons and grandsons
of Chattars&l, the zaminddr of Bargarh|| and Hindu Singh, with a force of
five thousand horse and ten thousand foot, had broken into revolt. Kdim
Kh4n was at once sent back with five thousand horse and five thousand
foot. When he came within twelve kos of Tarahwin, his spies informed
him that the enemy had already regained the first outwork of the fort.

On the 1st Rabi I, of the 10th year=1141 H. (24th Sep., 1728), while
Muhammad Kh&n was following up the Bundelas in the hills of Ajhnar
and was besieging Jaitpur, his son ^aim Khdn commenced his attack, for
the second time, on Tarahw&n. On this occasion the outer fort only was
taken. It was not till more than a month afterwards, on the 9th Rabi II,
of the 11th year=1141 H. (Ist November, 1728), that the final assault was
given. A mine had been driven under one of the bastions and filled with
gunpowder. The moment the explosion occurred the assault took place.
About six hundred of the assailants were slain and a still larger number of
the besieged. The rest gave way and fled towards Tarhatf pursued by the
Muhammadans who, after the victory, occupied the fortress of Tarahw&n.

^aim Khin followed up this success and, after five or six defeats in
the field, so closely pressed his opponent at Bargarh that he was glad to
submit. These operations must have occupied some months, for although
ordered to rejoin his father at once, K4im Khan was still absent when the
Mahrattas suddenly appeared on the 12th March, 1729, to turn Muhammad
Khan's course of victory into defeat.

While Jaitpur was invested, Muhammad Kh&n moved onwards into
the hills, and kept up constant skirmishes against the enemy \mder Chattar-

• Hamirpur District about 24 miles N. E. of R&th.
t EajahofDatiyaP

I Of Sahen^ahP

{ The Bhadauriya fiunily history will be noticed hereafter.

II About 34 miles east of Tarahwin, near the Jahbalpur line.
H Bi&rhatP

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%c Banganh Nawdht of Farruhhdbdd, 297

f41, Harde Niurdyaii and Jagat Rae. At length Harde Sih, Jagat Bile,
Mohan Singh, Laehman Singh, and other sons and grandsons came in with
their families ; and after a time, Chattarsdl himself with ten thousand horse
and fifteen thousand foot drew near, bringing his B&ni and grandchildren.
For three or four months (December 1728 to January and February 1729,)
the Bundelas waited quietly in camp, expecting an answer to Muhammad
Ehin's report to the Emperor, in which he craved leave to bring his pri-
soners to Court.

Although no answer came negotiations went on. Diw4n Harde SAh*
was more especially friendly with Muhammad Kh^n, they frequently made
excursions and hunting expeditions together, and talked of setting out
together on a " mulkgiri." The only difficulty was a want of carriage, and
l^iim Kh&n was requested to send Y4kdt Kh&n with money for expenses,
and carriage for fifteen hundred horsemen. Those men with ^^m Ehdn
who had relations with the main army, were to procure and send carriage
for them.

For a long time no settlement with the Bundelas could be come to.
When Muhammad Kh4n asked for the delivery of his j^girs, which they
had long occupied, they replied that besides the troops with them they
possessed nothing. At length they agreed to submit to the Imperial autho-
rity, and bound themselves by all the oaths most sacred to Hindus never to
rebel again, but to deliver up all the places they occupied, and to permit
Imperial th&nas or armed posts to be placed throughout their country.

From Delhi no answer was vouchsafed, and three months passed by.
The Bundelas made use of this interval to send messengers with overtures
to Burh4n-ul-midk, who received them favourably. Letters came privately
from Court inciting Chattars^ to resist and recommence hostilities. The
Bundelas had by this time learnt that Muhammad Kh&n had powerful
influences against him at Court, and were thus encouraged to renew the
struggle.

When three months had thus passed by, the time of the Holi festival
approached. Chattars&l was brought by his sons in a palki to Muhammad
Kh4n. They represented tbat from age, weakness, and confinement their
father was extremely ill. If he died in camp, it would be said that he had
been made away with. On these pretexts leave was obtained to remove the
old Bajah to Surajmau, three koa beyond the Muhammadan camp, which
was then in the hiUs some distance south of Jaitpur. Jagat R^ and his
brothers were also allowed leave to celebrate the Holi festival (February —
March 1729).

As there had been every prospect of a speedy end to the campaign,
Muhammad £[h4n*s allies had returned to their homes, many of his soldiers
had proceeded on leave, or had returned to Allahdb^, and others were scat-
* ^ Drwia" seexDB to have been the title of the eldest son.

29S W. iTYino— The Bangash Nawdhs of Warrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

tered about in small parties at the Thdnas he had established. In all, about
four thousand horsemen were left with his standards. Bumours now be-
gan to spread that the Mahrattas, who had just defeated and slain the
Nazim of Mdlwa (Girdhar BahMur), had been sent for ; but relying on the
solemn covenant which had been entered into, Muhammad Khdn treated
aU that he heard as popular falsehoods. He collected no supplies nor any
stores of grain.

It was not till the Mahrattas were within eleven ko9 of his camp, that
Muhammad Khdn became assured of their approach. By great exertions,
he increased his force to about nine thousand or ten thousand horse and the
same number of foot. He proceeded to throw up an entrenchment round his
camp. Diw&n Harde Sahe, the eldest son and heir of Chattarsdl, remained so
far faithful to his engagements as to take no active part in the attack ; bat
aU the others went over to the Mahrattas. The only other ally was Bajah.
Jai Singh of Maudah, but he seems to have been a half-hearted one, for he
insisted on discharging most of the one thousand men he commanded, and
retained with him no more than one hundred horse and one hundred foot.
Kunwdr Lachman Singh, brother of the Bajah of Orchha, attended for a
time with four or five hundred men, but soon withdrew on some excuse.
There were great difficulties caused by the want of money, the revenue of
Chakla Kor4 not being received. Gunpowder and other requisites were
also needed, and the Emperor was asked to send one thousand mans of lead,
one thousand mans of gunpowder, two large cannons, and fifty '' rahkla."

The Mahratta army was commanded by Baji B4o, the ditodn of B4jah
S&hu, FiU Jddon and others, twelve leaders in all. No account could be
got of the force they had when they started, but on the way they had been
joined by all turbulent spirits among the zaminddrs, who came in the hope
of plundering and laying waste the imperial territory. The total force had
thus swelled to nearly seventy thousand men besides an equal number of
Bundelas.

On Wednesday the 22nd Sha'bdn of the Uth year (1141 H. = 12th
March 1729), the Mahrattas sent out a party to the hills of Ajhnar, who
came within one koa of Muhammad Khan's encampment and reconnoitered
the position. They fell on the grazing cattle of the camp followers, but
were soon driven away by the Muhammadans, who brought in three heads
and some horses.

The next day, before sunrise, the Mahrattas advanced by the right and
left to the rear of the camp, where they cut off the camels and other beasts
of burden when going out for grass. Troops were sent out to recover the
camels and the fighting went on tiU midday. The same tactics were repeat-
ed on the 24th (14th March, 1729), and the enemy were again repelled,
twenty heads being brought in.

I

\

1878.] W. Irvine— 2»« Banff mh mwdhs of FurruhUhdd. 299

On tlie 25th Sha'b4n (15th March, 1729), Muhammad Eh£n made a
sortie and all day the enemj hid themflelves in the hills. Near sunset they
suddenly rushed out, but wercf driyen back with a loss of five men and four
horses. After the first watch of the night, when it was very dark, the con-
test began again on the right wing and " the fire was like the fall of leayea
from trees." Four of the enemy were killed and some horses and camels
captured* It was now reported that Biji B4o had sent for his brothen
who was then on a plundering expedition towards Ko^ah and BdndL

Gradually the Mahrattas succeeded in closing round the camp, and
placed outposts to the rear where they kept up the most vigilant outlook.
In all directions the roads were closed, prices rose very high, mdhrwah or
mandioay a small inferior grain, cost twenty rupees the seer, and other grain
could not be procured. All, great; and small, endured the greatest priva«
tions for two months (15th March to 15th May, 1729,) sustaining life on
the flesh of camels, horses, and cows. Nor were they left in peace by
night or day ; they were in action often five and six times a day. Each
day the enemy '^ like the multitude of the stars before the rising sun, fled
^ into the rocks and hollows of the hills." But Muhammad Khib had not
men enough to leave part to guard his tentis, and with the rest to advance
and set up batteries against the enemy's place of refuge, nor to pursue
them when they retreated.

The Mahiattas, hearing that ^&im EMn, theNawib's son, had reached
Supa,* six ho9 the other side of Jaitpur, with supplies and re-inf oroements,
moved off to oppose him. Muhammad Khan's soldiers, distressed by the
high prices and want of pay, seized the opportunity and suddenly set off
on the road to Jaitpur. With the Nawdb there were not left more than
one thousand horsemen. The Bundelas soon hearing of the retreat of the
soldiers issued from the hills of Ajhnar. Muhammad Khan mounted and
rode out to meet them leaving not a single man behind in camp. From
evening till one hour and a half after sunset fighting went on with spears,
swords, arrows and muskets, but at last the enemy returned to the hills of
Ajhnar. Muhammad Kh&n maintained his position for three hours longer^
while his chief men went off to Jaitpur to collect the fugitives.

Before the arrival of the leaders at Jaitpur, the men had continued
their flight and were already scattered in all directions. His companions
now counselled Muhammad KhiLn to commence a retreat. Up to this point
he had stood fast, resolved to maintain his name and fame as a soldier, but
now that honour was satisfied, he was persuaded to move, in the hope of
recalling the fugitive troops. Muhammad Kb&n had " tried to seek escape
^ by death, but since, of the life lent to him, some part was yet unspent, he

* Aleut 8 xniloB N« W, of Mahoba, and 14 milos N. £. of Jaitpur.

800 W. Irvine— Tie Bangash NawdU of Furruihdhdd. [No. 4,

" fought on till at midnight not another infidel was to be seen either to the
" left or to the right, but still death did not come to him."

On reaching Jaitpur he began at once to strengthen the fortifications.
But there were no stores of food and no time to send for supplies. The
Mahrattas having defeated Kdim Khan soon returned, and completely in-
vested the town and fort of Jaitpur, into which Muhammad "Kh&a had with-
drawn with his men and had closed the gates. A cannonade from both sides
began and Akbar Kh&n, the Nawdb*s son, who was renowned for his strength,
threw down heavy stones from the fort wall and killed many of the Mah-
rattas. When the besiegers found they could not take the place by assault,
they decided to starve out the garrison. Jaitpur was strictly invested for
several months till there was no longer any grain for food. Then the
soldiers began to slaughter their horses and bullocks. Flour could not be
procured even at one hundred rupees the seer. Some of the Mahrattas used
to come at night with supplies of flour, half of whirh was made up of
ground bones. Those inside let down their money by a rope, flour was at-
tached in its place at the rate of a seer for every hundred rupees, and the rope
was then drawn up.* Many of the soldiers died of starvation, and many
more leaving the Nawdb to his fate escaped from the fort. Biji B&o's
orders to his guards were that any of Muhammad Kh&n's men who gave up
their arms should be allowed to pass unmolested. Many having no food pre-
ferred to give up their arms and get away. Only some thousand or twelve
hundred remained with the Naw&b.

When the Mahrattas had fallen thus unexpectedly on his father, K&im
Khitn was still away at Tarahwin. He obeyed at once the summons to
him. He got as far as Sup&, a few miles from Jaitpur, when the Mahrattas
met him. As he had barely more than a thousand men with him, he was
soon defeated, many of his men killed and the supplies under his convoy
scattered. All hope of immediate relief was thus dispelled. It only re-
mained to Muhammad Khdn to call upon the £mperor and the gi^at
nobles and E&jahs for aid to extricate himself from his trying position.
These efforts were unavailing. Although the most urgent appeals were sent
in all directions, not a hand was raised to help or encourage him.

In this extremity Naw4b Muhammad Kh&n wrote to his son, j^dim Kh4n
telling him to go to Sa'dat Khan Burh&n-ul Mulk Bah4dur Jang, and 'Abd-ul
Manstir Khin to demand aid. His orders were to head the relieving force
in person, in order to extricate his father from the toils of the Mahrattas.
K4im Khim went to Sa'dat Kh4n and 'Abd-ul-Mansur Khin at Faiz4b^
'Abd-ul-Mansdr Khin had married Sa*dat Khdn*s daughter, and he was also
his sister's son. These two nobles decided that they would send no troops

* These details are conflnned by the author of the Hadikat^tU'AkdUm^ who got
them, he says, from a book written by a man who was present thzonghoat.

1878.] W. JiYvae—The Bangeuh Nawabs of Farrukhdbdd. 801

with Kaim Eban, but kept him for seveTal days in suspense. One day a
Bisalddr (commander of cavalry) in Sa'dat Khan's army, himself ui Af ridi,
commanding twelve hundred men, said to K£im Kh^, " Tou will neither
"get troops here, nor will you be allowed to go yourself, you must devise
** some other plan."

The Bibi S4hiba, mother of K^m Khan, hearing reports of intended
treachery, sent Neknim Kh&n, chela, to Faiz&bad. Reaching that place he
went to the Risilddr already mentioned and convinced him and his Pathdns,
who were of Mau, Farrukhdbad, Shdhjahdnpur and Anwala, that rather
than allow Muhammad Kh4n to be captured, it would be to their interest
to march to his relief. Nekn&m Kh&n told them to assemble whenever the
camel kettle-drums should begin to beat in his camp. The same day ^&im
Khdn and Neknam Khan visited 'Abd-ul Mansdr Kh4n, and asked leave to
depart. 'Abd-id Mansdr KyLn proposed their waiting for the troops he
had sent for, who would arrive in a few days. Neknam Kh&n then forced
KiuxL Klian to rise, and pointing to Sa*dat Khdn, said to K&im Kh4n, '' You
*' will never deliver Muhammad Kh&n by their means." He then in a great
rage lead K&im Kh&n by the hand out of the audience hall. With them
were mxtj Pa^h^ns clad in chain mail, whose orders were to strike at once,
if any one lifted a finger to touch them. Beaching camp the kettle-
drums were beaten for the march. On hearing the sound, twelve hundred
Patbans in 'Abd-ul Manstir Kh&n*s service left him to follow ]^&im Kh£n.
When word was brought to him, Sa^dat Kh^n sent off a camel rider to
recall Kdim Khdn. Regardless of the Nawdb's message he continued his
route to Sh&hjah&npur. There more men joined his standard. Thence he
moved to Bangarh,* the abode of 'Ali Muhammad Khdn Boh^la, from
wkom they obtained further re-inforcements. Then coming to Mau, num-
bers of recruits flocked to enter their service. The army thus gathered
together numbered some thirty thousand men : as each man was promised
one hundred rupees a month, the expenses were enormous. It was only by
delivering over to them all the Nawdb's goods and chattels, together with all
the cash he could obtain from the money-lenders, that j^^im Kh^n induced
them to enlist.

An advance was now made, and crossing the Jamna they passed into
Bundelkhand. The Bundelas, hearing that Kaim Kbdn was approaching
with a strong force, hastened to make terms with Naw^b Muhammad Kh^.
They took a written agreement from him never to attack them again,
and to be content with the tribute which had been formerly paid. Muham-
mad Kh4n at this time did not know that Kaim Kh4n was marching to
his relief. He had come several marches from Jaitpur when he met his
son. Kaim Kh&n proposed they should return to renew the war^ but Mu-
* In the Bttdilon District about 10 miles N. of Budaou.

802 W. Irvxae— The BangaA Nawdbs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

hammad EL&n declined to break hia pledge. K&im Kh&n's noble conduct
at this trying juncturo extorts words of praise' from a most unfriendly cri-
tic, tbe author of the '' Siyar-ul-Mut&kharin'\*

The siege of Jaitpur had lasted three months and ten days, from the
middle of May to the end of August, 1729, (Shawwdl 1141 to Safar 1142) ;
and with it ended Muhammad Kbin's connection with that part of the
country. For the rest of his life he continued to press on the Emperor
and his unwilling wazir his losses and his claims. But he never i^in
exercised any authority in, or obtained any revenue from the jag^rs still
nominally his within the limits of Bundelkhand. Once only while in Mdl-
w£ did he write to his quandom ally, Harde Sdh, reminding him of an agree-
ment made at Kharelaf to give up the government cannon, and to refrain
from interference with the jagir mahals. There was also an unfulfilled
promise that Jagat Rdj's agents woidd pay eight lakhs for Sahendah. Mu-
hammad Kh&n reminds Harde S4h that the j^irs were worth fifty or sixty
lakhs a year, that never for one moment would he forget his claims, the
matter was one of opportunity, and with God's help he would still enforce
his rights. If Harde S&h, who said he was a friend, allowed the j^irs to be
'* eaten" by others, he would become himself responsible. In the same
letter, he expresses his satisfaction that Harde Sdh had taken the parganahs
of Auli,:]: Kan&r,§ B4mpdr,|| Kdnch^ and others from Lachman Singh.
Ihe same course he hoped would be pursued in respect of Kalpi,** Jalal-
pur,tt Sahen<Jah,^^ and Maudah.§§ All these orders were no more than
idle threats which were never to be enforced.

Muhammad Ehin was now directed to proceed to comrt with no more
than five hundred men, leaving ]^^m Kh4n in charge of the rest of his

* p. 465, line 4. — Grant Duff (p. 227), makes the Jaitpur affair follow the appoint-
ment to M&lw&, but there can be little doubt from the local histories, confirmed by the
«< 8iyar-ul-Mut£kharin" and the <* T&rikh.i-Muzaffari", that Muhammad Eh£n received
the M&lw& appointment afi&r he had been unsucceBsfiil in Bimdelkhand and had escaped
from Jaitpur. I also doubt the coirectness of the date 1732 in the Gaz. N. W. P. If
27. On p. 29, the year 1738 is given, which must be wrong : on p. 426, the date is
1731. On p. 645, Dalel Ehin's death is given as having taken place in 1730 instead
of 1720.

f In the Hamirpur District, Parganah JaUlpur, about 84 miles S. of Hamfrpur.

% Query. Or&i, in the Jalaun District.

§ In the Jalaun District. See Gaz. I. 191. Now in Parganah Madhugarh.

II Query. In Parganah Madhugarh, Jalaun District.

IT In the Jalaun District.

** On the Jamna in the Jalaun District.

ft In the Hamfrpur District.

XX This is I fancy some place in the Hamirpur District and not the parganah of
this name in Bibidi.

}} Hamirpur District,

I

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%« Bangath Nawdhs of larrukhdhdd. 803

tfinj. He replied that he had got as far as Jal41par on his way home, but
was forced to stop owing to the disturbances raised bj the troops, to whom
more than one krar of rupees was due. Before, while the fighting was
going on, no other thought could find place, night and day they were occu-
pied with plans of resistance. But from the day of arrival at Eharela*
and Moth and the junction with K^im Khan, they had resorted to every
kind of violence in demanding their pay, and in requiring food for the time
being. Their demands were made morning, noon and night, so that the
Naw&b could neither eat nor sleep. He was driven to his wit's end, and
death was better than such a life. He begged, therefore, that to content
them, a portion of those two lakhs a month might be paid, which had been
promised to him before he crossed the Jamna ; or that to silence them a deed
for Allahabad might be granted, with assignment (tankhwdh) on the mah^ls
recovered from the enemy in Bundelkhand, and a tamtd for the Sarkdr of
Ghorat in the name of ijL&im Khdn, from the year of the campaign against
Sayyad 'Abdullah Eh^n (1721), when a petition, with order granting this
Sarkar, was despatched to Baler Ehdn. He also demanded a sanad in
favour of another son, Akbar Eh^, for the faujddri of Farganah Irichh.

We next find the Naw&b reporting that the whole of the men had crossed
the Betwah, they would speedily reach Edlpi, and commence to cross the
Jainn4, there being sixteen boats, large and small. Again Muhammad Ehdn
reiterates his complaints. He accuses the courtiers of making him out a
traitor and a rebel. Notwithstanding all the services he had done, the two
lakhs a month had not been paid. ijLdim EJidn had recently raised a great
army ; His Majesty could not have reflected where the money was to come
from. Did he think IJ[&im Eh4n knew alchemy, or could unearth hidden
treasure P Had any one else raised an army at such a juncture, he would
have been bountifully rewarded. Now the Naw^b's companions-in-arms
received word that their tanJehtodhSj granted in the Emperor Farrukhsiyar's
time, had been resumed. This was most unjust.

If the Emperor should deign to redouble his ancient favours, then

Muhammad Eh4n could continue his service. If not, he would draw on

the garment of resigpoation and withdraw from public life, or if desired

would proceed on a pilgrimage to Mecca. He himself was much cast down,

but what he vmtes is for the satisfaction of his troops, to whom all his

letters were shown. Although their pay was so greatly in arrears they

would not, out of respect to his fellow clanship, prevent his journey to

court. He felt much annoyed at the report spread that he did not intend

to present himself, and he invoked the wrath of God on the men who made

such unfounded statements.

* Parganah Jampur, Hamirpiur District.

t Bee article Qlwrd in Elliot's Supp. Glossary, p. 891.

804 W. Irvine— 3%e Bangash Nawdbs of Ihrrulshdbdd, [No. 4,

Again, in acknowledging a fresh order to attend court, Muhammad
"Eh&a goes over the above points once more. The Jamna was crossed on
the return march apparently on the 11th Rabi' I. 1142, (23rd Sept., 1729).
The river was in flood but the men were to cross on boats. His chief lead-
ers were unprovided with horses, having just come out of a long campaign,
and the strings of horses for sale not having yet arrived, they had not beeu
able to mount themselves. On his arrival at court Muhammad Kh4n
hoped that Boshan-ud-daula* would become security for him, and procure
for him sanads in Kaim Kh^'s favour for the zamindari axidfaufdari of
Sarkar Ghoril. Pir 'Ali Kh^n, his agent at court, still held the order bj
which His Majesty had before granted them to Daler Khdn. Nor had any
reply to his request for the Jhujddri of Irichh been forwarded.

Muhammad Khan seems at length to have reached Court. The next
eleven months (Oct. 1729 — Sept. 1730), we can presume were spent in
urgent repetition of the oft-told story of his wrongs. The Siyar-ul Mu-
tdkharin statesf that his removal from the AllahdbM Subah was caused
by his failure in Bundelkhand. This does not seem quite correct for, if
the Tahsirat'tm-Ndzirin is to be trusted, the appointment to Allahilb&d
was not conferred on Sarbuland Khan, Mub&riz-ul Mulk, till 1144 H.
(July 1731 — June 1732). Before this Muhammad Khiln had been restor-
ed to favour, and his sanad for the Nizdmat of Malwa is dated the 17th
Rabi I. of the 12fch year (1143 H. = 19th Sept. 1730). The removal from
Allahilbad in 1144 H. is, therefore, more probably to be attributed to some
ill-feeling raised by Muhammad Kh&n's dealings in Malw&, where he was
then present.

A characteristic anecdote, relating to this period, is told in the SJiardif"
i'Usmdni.X When Muhammad Khiln reached Kanauj on his return from
Bundelkhand, Kuh-ul-Amin Khdn Bilgrdmi, one of the leaders who had
enlisted under Eliim Kh&n's standard, introduced to the Nawdb the kdzi
of Bilgr&m, Muhammad Ahsin, whose jdgirs had recently been resumed by
Burhan-ul-Mulk. The Nawdb promised to use his good offices with the
Emperor ; and the kdzi followed him to Delhi. The empire was then in
all its glory, and the saying was quite true that the Emperor of Hindust&n
lived like a God upon earth.

On his arrival at Delhi, Muhammad "Khia at his first audience demand-
ed the Subah of AUahabid ; but the Emperor made the excuse that to give
it then was not convenient. Inmiediately on hearing this answer, Nawdb
Muhammad Khdn stretching forth hi 3 hand took two-folded ^^fn leaves

* Bakhshi-nl l^Iamalik, Roahan-ud-Danla, Za£ax Kh£n Bahadur, Rostam Jang,
t p. 466.

t The Shardif'i-Usmdm was wiitten in IISSR, by GhuUm Hasan, SaHikf, ul-
Farshiiri, Bilgrimi, poeticaUy styled Samin^

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%^ Bangazh Naw6ls of FarruMdhdd. 305

from the Emperor's own pdnddn, and sat down on the spot where he had
hitherto stood. Samsam-ud-daula Khan Daurdn Khdn turned to him
anziouslj, and exclaimed, "Nawah Ghazanfar Jang ! what does this mean ?"
Mohammad Kh&n replied, '* While I was a servant I stood, from this day I
" leave the Emperor's service, whj then should I stand any longer ?" The
Emperor tried to pacify him, hut all efforts were unavailing, and the same
day he gave orders to pay off his troops. A quarrel then occurred between
the Nawab and Buh-ul-Amin "Kh&a about a balance of one lakh of rupees
due by the latter, which he refused to refund. The kdzi thus lost his
protector, and the Naw&b departed for Farrukhabad.

From a passage in the Inshd-uTdr Muhammady* it would seem
that at this period Akbar Khan, the Nawilb's son, acted as his deputy at
AUahab&d. In the course of a long account of the principal events of his
life, Yir Muhammad speaks of leaving Bhagwant Bae and coming with
Naval Singh to attack some fort. Having failed in their object, they
went to Allahabid. Naval Singh entered Akbar Kh4n's service, while Xkt
Muhammad, dismissing his followers, took refuge with a holy man named
£[hdbullah. Akbar Khdn sent a mace-bearer for him, but he refused to go, as
on that day he had lost a child nine months old. A disturbance took place,
and Akbar Kh^n attempted to use force. The Fafbdns refused, however,
to attack the house of a holy man. The reason of Akbar Khdn's interfer-
ing seems to have been, that Sa'dat Khdn Burhan-ul Mulk had sent a
request for Yar Muhammad's arrest as a deserter. Akbar Khdn did not
i succeed in arresting him, and a week after a sanad came from Sarbuland

£han, the'new Subahdar, appointing Boshan Kh4n Turahi to be his deputy.

The Campaign in Mdlwd,

On reaching Delhi in the latter part of 1729, Muhammad Khdn seems
to Lave entered into prolonged negotiations. He could not succeed, how-
ever, in retaining Allahdb^, which was an easily held country (he-JcMr)^
bub had to content himself with appointment to the Subah of Malwd, which
had been ravaged by the Mahrattas, and was liable at any moment to be
le-invaded. The sanad for M&lwd is dated the 17th Babi I. of the 12th
year (1143 H. = 19th Sept. 1730), and is " ha^mashrut, ha daatur-i-
ma^mul, hasb-uUzimman.**

£oshan-ud-daula it was, through whom the appointment was obtain-
ed,t and one lakh of rupees of the money advanced from the treasury was
left iQ his hands. Of this sum two thousand rupees were paid as a dou-
ceur to the employes of the elephant stables, to facilitate the delivery of
four elephants. The balance appears to have been appropriated by Boshan-

• p. 168, Calcutta, 1246 H.— 1830-1.

t See as to his influence and his cupidity, Seir-Mutaqharin I, 264, 274. He died
14t]x Zil-haj 1148 H., do. p. 294.

306 W. Irvine— 2%tf Bangoih Naiodhi of Ibrrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

ud-danla. A lakh of rupees was also promised to Eokah Jiti* in order to
obtain a quick settlement of the claims for j4girs. The money to be ad-
vanced from the Treasury was at first fixed at sixty, and then fifty lakhs.
Gradually the grant was reduced to a most insignificant amount, although
Bdjah Jai Singh Siwile had received thirty-two lakhs for a two months'
campaign.

When Muhammad EhiLn left Delhi, it was agreed by Amir-ul XTmri
Eh^n Daur&n Eh^n and Boshan-ud-daula that, on his arrival at Mathura
or AkbadLbdd, the grants for his friends' j^Lgirs and a tanad for the f aujd4ri
of GwilMr should be delivered to him. He had reached Gw&li4r, however,
without these grants having been received, and Mangal £Ih&n was still delayed
at Court by the non-fulfilment of these promises. Mangal Eh&n's j4gir of
parganahs Maur&nwah,t Sarsendi,| and Bahli,§ and the assignment on
Nim Kh&r,|| had long been in the occupation of Burh^n-ul Mulk. A settle-
ment of this claim was urged, in order that the j^Lgirdir might provide his
equipment.

The other j^rs asked for were as follows : ten lakhs of ddm for
Mangal Kh^n from Hisar^ his native country ; thirty lakhs of ddm for
'Abd-un Nabi "Khin from parganah Aun^h** which was held by his father
entirely in jdgir ; ten lakhs of ddm for Shekh Beche on parganahs Sher-
gaphft And Th&uAjXX the j4girs of his family ; five lakhs of ddm for
Sayyad Sharif 'All Ehin on Eanauj§§ his native country ; fifteen lakhs of
ddm for Sayyad Ja'far Husain Elhin on Sh^ptir ;|||| ten lakhs of ddm for
K&le Ehan and Shuj'at Khan from Budion ;%% five lakhs of ddm for Dil^
war 'Ali Khdn Aurangdb4di on Karnal,*** the parganah having been held
by his ancestors in jdgir ; five lakhs of ddm for Mustafa Khdn from Musfaf £-
bidftt ; fi^e lakhs of ddm from Jhtisii^tt ^^^ ^^® lakhs from Ch^§§§

* A favourite mistress of Muhammad Shah's, who was intrusted with his private
signet. Seir Mutaqharin I, 264.

t XJnao district, about 30 miles S. of Lakhnau.

X In the Lakhnau district, written generally Sasendi — ^it Hes 16 miles S. of Lakh-
nau.

{ I £euic7 this is in the Faisib&d district — see Elliot's Supp. Glossary, p. 337.

g In the Sit&pnr district, 18 miles S. W. of Sit^pur.

% West of Delhi.

** I have not traced this parganah.

ft This might be the Shergafh in the Mathura district.

it Possibly this is the Th&na Farida in the Aligarh district.

{{In the present district of Farrukh&bid.

Ill In the Gawnpur district.

%% In Rohilkhand.

*** North of Delhi and west of the Jamna.

ttt In the Mainpuri district.

ttt In the Allah&bad district.

{{{ In the Allah&bid district.

ISrS] W. Irvine— 2%<? Bangash Nawdhs of Farruhhdhdd. 807

for Sadakat Khan ; and five lakhs of dam for Haidar 'All Khdn from par-
ganah Akrdbad.* The Nawdb*s agent was instructed not to take sid^uts
(collection accounts) for these allowances unless they were without the
condition ^^ pde-btiki,*^

On the 5th Jamadi I. of the 18th year (1143 H. = 5th November,
1730), Muhammad Khdn writes from Agra that, of the sixty cannon order-
ed to be delivered from the fort, the commander (kila'ddr) had made over
no more than twenty-nine. Although there were two thousand cannon in
store, they offered guns, broken and useless, carrying only a shot of two
or three pyce (falus) weight and without pallah. The Nawab says he
might as well take jazdil (swiyel-guns) at once. Such as they were,
they had neither carriages nor bullocks, and Muhammad Kh&n was fain to
take them as they were. His agent was told to get an order at once from
the Mir Atash to deliyer guns carrying shot of from one seer to three seers
weight. With whatever artillery could be procured he intended to start.

As the large cannon g^ven by the Emperor and brought from Delhi
was defective at the breach, and the other formerly with Nijibat 'Ali Khau
had been sent back to Court, a request was made for a large cannon carry-
ing a ball of fourteen to fifteen seers, with two others somewhat smaller.
These could be delivered from the forts of Akbar^bad or Gwali4r, where
there were large guns in store.

At Akbariibad some three to four hundred troopers presented them-
selves daily to hiCve their horses branded. On entertainment half a month's
k pay and a little more for necessaries was advanced to each man. A force

of 8,200 horse and 2,500 foot was collected. It was made up as follows :
There were 500 horse and 1000 foot under Mukim Khan, 400 horse and
700 foot under D4ud Khan, 600 horse and 600 foot under Sa'ddat Kh4n,
and 200 foot imder Bakhtdwar Khan ; Allahyar Kh4n and others, Dilaz&ks
of Dholpdr B^ri, had brought more than 2000 horse. There were 500 hoise
under Sh^istah Kh4n, Misri Kh^n, Khudddad Khan, Muhammad Khdn and
others, seven leaders from Firuz&bad and Shikohabdd. Fath Khan Yusufzai,
Ghairat Kbdn and others came with about 200 horse : and the same number
was sent by B^ Har ParshM, 'Amil of Bdjah Jai Singh Sawde, under their
Ghaube leaders from Mathura. Besides the above there were some 2000
horse in small parties from Mau, Shdhjahdnpur, Shahdb4d and Katabr
generally. All these were in addition to the men brought from Shahjahand-
bad. Naw4b Koshan-ud-daula had also promised to aid with a corps of
500 horse and 1000 foot of Kumis, Arabs, and Habshis in his pay.

'Umr E[hdn,t Daler Khan, J and Yar Muhammad Khan, son of Dost

* In the Aligarh district.

t Faujdar of Mandd near the Narbada.

X Appar<>ntly of KorwAo near Sironj. Dowson's Elliot, VIII, 68.

B B

[

308 W. Iryine— The Banga»h Nawdhs of Fanukhabiid. [No. 4,

Muhammad Khan,* and the other chief soldiers of Ujain, Narwar and
Sironj, reported that they had ready more than twenty thousand men.
They were ordered to join with them at Narwarf and Kaldbagh.J If
they had been sent for to Gwali^r, two months advances would have been
asked for, and the whole of the grant from the Imperial Treasury exhausted
before leaving Gwalidr. Muhammad Kh^n endeavoured to make the
money last as far as Ujain, that is for the succeeding two months.

At length on the 6th Jamadi I. 1143 H (6th November, 1730), the
army was set in motion, and leaving Akbardbdd it encamped at J^jau on the
Ban or Ctangan river, nineteen miles south of that city. The next morn-
ing, the 7th (7th Nov. 1730), a march was made and the army stopped at
a short distance from Dholpur. Mu^im Kh4n, D4ud Khdn and Sa*dat
Khan with the artillery crossed at once. On the 8th, the crossing of the
Cbambal had not been effected by the rest of the army, the river not being
then f ordable, while the boats were few and small. On the 9th, Muham-
mad Khan crossed and the camp followed. Thence with one night between
they reached Gwaliar.

From Gwalidr Muhammad Khdn reiterated his request for tbe fauj-
ddri of that place. Without such a hold over them no hearty aid could be
hoped for from the Kajahs and others ordered to serve under him. It was
promised to him before he left Delhi, but having got rid of him from Court,
the ministers paid no heed to his remonstrances. Chattar Singh of Shiu-
puri§ and Kalarasll learning that the mnad ior Qvj^^^bx had not arrived^
collected men and began fighting Khande R&m whom he had ejected from
the fort of Bajaur.^ The mercenaries had thus found service near their
homes and went to join the combatants. If once these Rajahs and the
mercenaries knew that Muhammad Kh4n had been made faujdar of Gw^
liar, they would no longer seek service except under the government of
their country

Eajah Udait Singh of Orchha, his son Kunwar Bahadur, R4o Rdm
Chand of Datiya, Chattar Singh of Shiupiiri and EjaUras, the Bhadauri-
ya Rdjah, Rajah Durjan Sdl of Chanderi and others had been directed from
Delhi to place themselves under Muhanmiad Khdn*s orders. Sayyad Nijabat

• The founder of Bhop^ Dowson's Elliot, VIII, 67, 69.

t About 44 miloa south of Gw41i4r.

X About 102 miles S. of Gw&liar, 4 miles N. of Sar&e Nau, and 16 miles N. of

Sadhaura.

\ I tAke this to be the Sipri of the maps, 67 miles S. of Gw&li^, but there is a
Shiupuri 97 miles S. \V. of that place.

II About 74 miles S. of Gwalidr.

% Or perhaps the Pichor in Lat. 26© 67'; Long. 78© 27' in Gwaliir tenitory,
some 25 miles 8. E. of Gwdlidr on the left bank of the Siad rivor.

f

1878.] W. Irvine— 1%« Bangasl UTawdhs of BtrruiMbdd. 809

'Ali Kh&a, fanjdir of Iricbh,* was also told off ; and on the part of Maha<
rajah Abhai Singh of Marw^r, Jai Singh and Mdn Singh Rdthor of Kat-
Mm, about fifty miles west of Ujain, were deputed. The Mahirana of
Udeptir reported that he had sent Rao Mukr^j Dhabhai from XJdepur
towards Mandeshwarf with troops and artillery.

While Muhammad Kh4n was still at Gw41i4r, an urgent letter came
from Kh^ Daurdn Khin. As the Mahrattas intended to cross the Nar-
bada, it was necessary that, without further delay, the Nawdb should proceed
by forced marches, not even staying at Sironj. He should get to the river
in time to oppose the crossing. Four months had already been wasted. On
receipt of these orders, Mukim Kh^n was sent on in advance, and after some
opposition made good his way to Sironj. Sa'dat Elhdnwas sent to Man-
deshwar, and Dadd Kh&n. to S^rangpur X

When Muhammad Kh4n reached Sadhaurah,§ eighteen miles beyond
Sarae Nau|| to the south in the direction of Ujain, a letter written in
Jamadi II, 1143, (Dec. 1730), was received from Asaf Jah Nizdm-ul Mulk.^
This noble, after congratulations on Muhammad Khdn's appointment, pro-
posed that they should meet at the Narbada to concert common measures
against the opponents of Islam. Nizam-ul Mulk had crossed at Farddn-
pur** in order to quell a revolt in Lakldna,tt and the opportunity would not
recur as he seldom visited that part of his Subah. Muhammad Khan accept-
ed the proposal, saying, that as the Mahrattas at the instigation of the Hin-
dus of Hindtist4n intended to ravage the whole of Mdlwd, he trusted that
Nizam-ul Mulk as the champion of Islam would stop them at the ferries
on the Narbada.

On the 17th Rajah, 1143 H. (16th January, 1731), Muhammad Khdn
reached Sarangpur, about fifty miles from Ujain. Hearing of his approach,
Mulh4r Holkar, who with twenty thousand men was plundering the country,
sent his baggage and heavy stores across the Narbada, and lightly equipped
continued the investment of Shdhjahdnpur, a town about eleven miles

^ Now in the Jh^nsi district.

t About 78 miles N. W. of Ujain,

{ About 52 miles K. E. of Ujain.

4 Lat. 24*' 37'; Long. 77"* 29*.

I Lat 24*» 48'; Long. 77« 39'.

IT The only other letter of his to Muhammad Khan preserved, of a date prior to this
<me, is a report of his fight with BAo Bhim Hada of Kotah, Rijah Gaj Singh Narwari,
Dilawar Khan, Sayyad Sher Khan, Babar Khdn, Dost Muhammad Kh&n and Farhat
Kh&n. It took place on the 13th Sha'ban. The year 1796 S. (1719 A. D.) is given
in Tod, II, 469.

•* DowBon*s EUiot, VII, 498. A pass half way between Aurang&b&d and Burhin-
piir.

ft This place is not traced.

310 W. Irvine— T^c Bangagh Natodbs of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

Kouth-weBt of Sdrangpur and aboub twenty-one miles north- east of
Ujain.

The day that the Muhammadans drew near to Sarangpnr, about an
hour to sunset, while the men were still scattered on the line of march, the
enemy suddenly appeared and showed fight. The war howdahs (*amdri)
having been taken off, Muhammad Khan got into a palki and started at the
head of a small force. The enemy, as their custom was, spread out and
came on in all directions. Soon, however, they fled " like crows on seeing
a bow," six of them were killed, their heads brought in and their horses
captured. Night coming on they were not pursued.

On the 19th Rajah, 1143 H. (I7th January 1731), the army reached
Shdhjah^npur from Sarangpur : and the next day they encamped near the
village of Talodri. In the afternoon the enemy made their appearance and
troops were moved out against them. On Muhammad Khan's mounting
and advancing, they gave way and were followed for three kos. Seventy of
them were slain by sword and spear. The heads and horses were brought
in, with six or seven prisoners. Owing to the darkness the pursuit was
stopped at one watch of the night, and the troops returned to camp. The
people of the country were so frightened, that the Mahrattas left only one
trooper in a town or village to collect their demands. After Muhammad
Khdn's arrival, however, and their defeat, the Mahrattas themselves were
glad to withdraw beyond the Narbada. Ujain Ddr^ul-fath was reached
on the 22nd Rajah, 1143 H. (20th January 1731).

Spies now brought word that the Mahrattas, leaving their baggage on
the other side of the Narbada, were coming across to plunder the towns and
Tillages of Malwd. They were reported to have invested the town of Bolae.*
Accordingly on the 11th Sha'ban, 1143 H. (8th Feb. 1731), Muhammad
£hdn set up his tents and took the field again, turning towards Dhdr.f Of
all the contingents, that of Kunwar Bahadur of Orchha was the only one
which had arrived.

While Muhammad Kh4n went towards Dhdr, he sent his son, Ahmad
Kh4n, with Mukim Khan, Y4r Muhammad Khan, and D^ler Kh4n at the
head of 12,000 horse and 20,000 foot to deal v^th Holkar in the direction
of Sarangpur and Shahjah^npur. The invaders were driven away towards
Mandeshwar, after they had plundered in parganah Bol&e. Then Y&r
Muhammad Kh&n made friends secretly with Mulh^r Holkar, and the two
chiefs exchanged turbans. As a pretence the army was taken towards
M&hidpur,! and the traitor told Holkar that the country of Ujain was left

* About 47 miles N. E. of Ujain and 14 miles B. E. of Shahjaliinpixr.

t About 60 miles S. W. of Ujain.

X 20 miles N. of Ujain and 38 miles W. of Shahjah&npur.

1878.] W. Irvine— The Bangash Nawdhs of Farruhhdhdd. 311

defenceless and could be plundered. Should he fail, however, he could
then turn on Muhammad Khdn in the direction of Dhix. Mulh&r, persuaded
by Ykr Muhammad went to Ujain, and set fire to two or three houses in
Bakabganj. The naib (Mukim Kh&n) came out to meet the Mahrattas, and
after some fighting they made off in the direction of Muhammad Khdn.
A story that they had plundered some merchants near the town of Andru*
in the ta^luka of Nand Lai Sandloif was untrue.

Meanwhile Muhammad Khdn had reached Dh&r on the 17th Sha'bdn,
1143 H. (14th Feb. 1731). From early morning of the 22nd (19th Feb.
1731) many Mahrattas appeared in the vicinity. The Muhammadans
killed several, cut off their heads and brought in their horses. In the after-
noon the contest ceased. Next morning Holkar with his army appeared in
sight, and made a first attack on Sulaiman Khan who commanded three
thousand horse. The attack was repelled. Then Ma'zum Kh4n with 1000
horse on the right, and Muhammad 'Umr Eh&n, faujdar of M4n4^, on the
left, hastened forward ; and Muhammad Khdn himself advancing quickly,
•^e enemy gave way. Several leaders and some fifty troopers were left on
the field, besides those wounded. The Muhammadan loss was twelve killed.
Pursuit was made for two kos, and they returned to their tents when one
quarter of the night was past. These contests went on for about ten days
to the end of Sha'b&n (26th Feb. 1731).

For some time no word had been heard of Niz^m-ul Mulk's departure
from Burhdnpur.l At length on the 2&th Sha'b4n (25th Feb. 1731), a letter
was received, and Muhammad Khan determined to set out for the Narbada.
He had also been delayed by the non-arrival of D^er Khan. The latter
now wrote that Ydr Muhammad Kh^n had gone off to his home, taking with
him his friends and some men. Ddler Kh&n announced his own intention of
joining if he were waited for. Accordingly on the 28th he arrived, and on
the 29th Sha*b4n (26th Feb. 1731), they set out for the Narbada by double
inarches. Other reasons for the delay may have been, that Muhanmiad ISihka.
was not able to move without reinforcements, or that, to save his dignity,
he did not wish to move more rapidly than he could help to the place of
rendezvous with Nizdm-ul Mulk. The Mahrattas had now been expelled
for a time from Ujain, Mandeshwar, Dhdr and Depalpur,§ and their new
forts on the Narbada had been levelled.

A second letter came now from Nizdm-ul Mulk referring to his having
crossed the river at Fard^npur on the 20th Jamadi II, 1143 H. (20th Dec.

* Query. The same as Inddr.

t Op perhaps Mandloi — See No. 7 of Index to Vol. Ill, of Aitchison's Treaties,
ed. 1878.

J On the north hank of the TApti, 132 miles S, E. from Ujain. Thornton, 141.
§ About 28 miles S. W. of Ujtdn.

312 W. Iryme—The Banga^h Niawdbs of FarruhMhad. [No. 4,

1730), to suppress the rebellion in Zila' LakUna.* He reports having
heard that Baji llao had reached Sultanpurf and Nandurb4r^ on his way
to Gil j rat. It was thought that as Kanhaya B&nd and Pila G^kwllr were
opposed to him about the chauth of that Subah, he must intend to eject
them ; and being taken up with fighting among themselves, they would not
find the time to invade Mdlwa. Spies had, however, since brought intelli-
gence that Baji Rao's brother was marching by way of Navapurah§ to Surat
and Gujrdt ; meanwhile Baji Bao, leaving Sultan pur and Nandurbir, would
make for Mdlwa vid Ghargun.|| His brother would then come through
Dohad^ to join him, and they would unite to expel the th^nas of Kanhaya
Ji and Pila Gaekwar from Malwd. Kanhaya Ndzar, Pila Gaekwdr and
Udd Pun war had opened nf*gotiations with Nizam -ul Mulk, and he advises
Muhammad Khan also to receive their overtures and try to bring them over*

On the 20th Rajab (I8th Jan. 1731), Nizam-ul-Mulk wrote again
froTu Galnah** that as soon as Muhammad Khan's letter was received on
the 17th Rajab (15th Jan. 1731), he had started for Burhanpur. He trust-
ed that Muhammad Khan would make no delay, so that they might meet
and discuss plans together, for " Daulat ham 'z itifdk khezad'* (Union is
strength). Another letter tells Muhanunad Khdn that Rdjah Abhai Singh
was about to make peace with Baji liao. Pila Gaekwdr, Kantd Band, Uda
Ji Punwar and Anand Rao had, however, entered into the closest relations
with Nizam-ul-Mulk : and acting with them was Tirnek Rao Paharya, son of
Khandu Ji, who had lately succeeded his father. The troops of these allies
might amount to some twenty thousand horse. Chimna, brother of Baji
Rao, had 9000 horse, and would advance by the pass of Nandby4i*i, which
is towards Gujrat. Baji Rao was reported to have 3000 or 4000 horse.
Holkar with some 3000 men had gone towards Malwa.

On Friday the Ist Sha'ban 1143 H. (29th Jan. 1731), Nizdm-ul-Mulk,
who was near Dhamanganw,tt acknowledged the receipt of Muhammad
Khan's letter reporting his arrival at Sadhaurah. As Dhamanganw was

• OrLakUba.

t About 5 miles from the north bank of the Tapti, and 30 miles S. of the Narbada,
and 102 miles W. of Burh^pur.

J About 10 miles S. of the T£pti and 80 miles S. W. of Sultinpur.

§ About 12 miles S. of the Tapti, 86 miles 8. W. of Nandurbdr and 165 miles W.
of Burhinpiir.

II On the Kundi river, 25 miles S. of the Narbada and about 55 miles N. W. of
Burhanpiir.

f On the boundary of M41wa and Gujrat, 100 miles W. of Ujain. Thornton 284.

•* About 120 miles S. W. of Burhinptir, 165 miles N. £. of Bombay, in the Ehan-
deah District. Thornton, 433.

ft About 70 miles S. W. of BurhAnptir.

1878]. W. Irvine— 1%<? Bangaal Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. 313

counted as thirty koi from Burh^npur, Niz&m-ul-Mulk hoped soon to reach
the Narhada.

He does not appear to have hastened himself much, for it was not till
Sunday, the 17th Sha'bAn (14th Feb. 1731), that leaving behind his large
guns, artillery and heavy equipage he started from Burhanpur. On the 22nd
(19th Feb. 1731), he was at Salganw, a distance of twenty-two kos from
Burh&npur, and intended to march vid Ghargun to the Narbada. Muham-
mad Khan was recommended to come by the pass (kanal ?) of Naubahra,
which was the usual route. On Saturday the 23rd, Nizam-ul-Mulk was
within twenty ko9 of the ferry of Akbarpur* on the Narbada, the advanced
tents would go on next day, and on the 25th (22nd Feb. 1731), he hoped to
reach Akbarpur. The darogha, however, came back and reported that
Muhammad Kh^n was still above the gh^ts. Although professing to be
burning for an interview, Niz^m-ul-Mulk thought that his dignity re-
quired him to divide the remaining distance into two marches. Mu-
hammad Kh^n, in answer to one of the letters, had complained that the
alliefl Kanhaya Ji, Chimn4 Ji and others had sent him no men. Niz^m-
ul-Mulk reassures him by pointing out that they were far away near
M^davif in the xiW of Surat. Some further time was occupied by
Kizdm-ul-Mulk going off to take a fort, and the desired interview did not
take place till some time afterwards. We have no report of what took
place, further than that the two Subahdars agreed to act in concert to put
down the Mahrattas. Muhammad Khdn in his report to the Emperor is
loud in his praises of Niz4m-ul-Mulk as an obedient and dutiful subject of
the State. Muhammad Khiln finally left Akbarpur on the 1st Shawwdl
1148 H. (29th March, 1731).

Niz&m-ul-Mulk went from Akbarpur to reduce the forts of Edjaur and
Nad4w41i, the residence of Mohan Singh on the other side of the ferry. By
the 4th Shawwal (1st April, 1731), the besieged were suing for terms, the
fort was to be evacuated and made over to Nizdm-ul-Mulk's envoys. This
noble was, however, threatened by a new danger, which hastened his depar-
ture from that part of the country. He heard that Bdji B^ leaving the
Narbada had gone towards Surat and Nurpurah. This made it necessary
for him, he said, to provide without losing a moment, for the safety of
Aurangabad and other parganahs and important forts. His own spies con-
firmed the news, saying, that they had left during the night, when it was
said that Bdji B^ would march next day. Chimn& Ji Damodar having
been released, had reached Dobhoi, twenty miles south-east of Baroda ; and
he had written to his son that Bdji B4o had moved and gone towards the
Ghat of Ndnabyari.

* About 35 miles S. of Indur and 40 miles S. E. of Dhdr.
t On the Tapti aboat 32 miles east of Surat.

31 i W. Irvine- 2%^ Bangasli Naicdhs of Fun-ukhdhad. [No ^,

The explanation of Nizam-uI-Mulk's anxiety and haste would appear
to be that he had heard of the defeat, on the 1st April 1731, between Baroda
and Dobhoi in Gujr&t, of his allies, Fll&ji Gdekw^r and others. Uda Ji
and Chimnd Ji Pandit were taken prisoners.* This defeat rendered futile
all the negoeiations for a. general alliance between the two leaders,
Muhanunad KhilnandNizdm>uLMulk. - But Muhammad Khin was benefit-
ed indirectly, for Nizdm-ul-Mulk was forced to take the field openly against
Baji Kao, thus for one season averting from Mdlwa the full force of the
Mahratta depredations. Bilji Bao was forced to remain in the Dakhin on
the defensive.

Grant Dufff speaks of no open fighting between Bdji K^ and Niz4m-*
ul-Mulk from April 1731 till the time of concluding a treaty in August
of that year. Nizam-ul-Mulk, however, in the last but one of his letters
to Muhammad Khan, details what he calls his victories over Bdji E4o. The
latter had invested Baroda which was occupied by men of his own nation.
But hearing of the approach of the MuhammadaDS, the Mahrattas raised
the siege and made off towards Surat, and when they thought they were at
a safe distance, they turned off to plunder pai^anah Auklah.

Hearing of their movements, Nizdm-ul-Mulk says, he left the ferry
of Akbarpur and passed near the fort of M4ndo, sending his heavy baggie
and large guns to Burh&npur. Making forced marches he soon reached the
river, ^here finding much of his artillery in his way and difficult to get
across, he left it behind. Then redoubling his haste he reached the port of
Surat, and for the third time left more of his impedimenta at the village of
Malwa. They pressed on though troubled by hunger and thirst, carriage
became very difficult to procure, and for two or three days deaths were
frequent. For most of the time they passed through desert and wilderness.
After crossing the ferry they drew near to the enemy and caught them
unawares. They took to flight, but the Bhils and Kolis captured numbers
of them, more especially at night when they had lost their way. The
Muhammadan army had now come to the shores of an arm of the sea. This
gives an opening to the Persian scribe to descant on serpents and the rod
of Moses, Pharaoh and Pharaoh^s host.

They had passed through the deserts and unoccupied country of Khikn-
desh, Surat, and Kokan, where from the thickness of the woods, it is di£&.
cult to force a practicable route. When they reached Surat the enemy
were driven towards Daman, J which was under the sway of the Farangi,
and thence to the Kokan, the western boundary of the Dakhin. They then
were caught at a place where you go from the Tal Kokan to the country

* Grant Duflf, p. 226.

t p. 225.

X On the coast, 55 miles S. of Surat.

1878.] W. Irvine— The Bangaah Ifawdbs ofMrrukhdbdd. 815

above the ghilt. Thank GK)d ! the Subah of Gujrdt was freed from Bdji
Rao, Malwa was no longer in danger, and the fort of Surat, which is the
gate of Grod's house (Mecca), had been recoyered from the infidel.

While Muhammad Khan had gone to meet Nizam-ul-Mulk, he had
sent his son, Ahmad Kh4n, with Mukim Kh4n to the east to reduce K&lk-
11 and Chakaldah* two forts on the right bank of the Narbada, the head
quarters of Uda Punw4r. Both were places noted for their strength, more
especiallj Chakaldah, which had four forts and deep ditches, with jungle on
three sides and the Narbada on the fourth. As the garrisons offered a
stubborn resistance, Muhammad Khin himself determined to march to his
son's aid ; and leaving Akbarpur on the 1st Shawwill 1143, (29th March,
1731), in two days he arrived near Kilkli. By an effort this fort was
taken, and the next day they proceeded to invest Chakaldah. After six
hours* fighting the besieged were overcome so far that they sued for terms.
Three thousand souls, men and women, submitted and were set at liberty.
The waUs, ditch and bastions were razed to the ground, and gold keys as a
token of the capture were forwarded to the Emperor. While the Muham*
madans were encamped near Chakaldah, Baji Rao was plundering in the
direction of Jibwah,t while Kajah Abhai Singh was opposing him. Mu-
hammad EJi^n hoped to march that way after clearing the country and
destroying the forts.

This capture of Ud4 Ji's forts provoked a strong remonstrance from
Niz&m-ul-Mulk. He had told Muhammad Khiln that Ud4 Ji and his
friends were at enmity with B&ji B4o. To secure success in the negocia-
tions with them, they mudt be treated with consideration. If there were
any of Holkar's men in the forts, then with God's aid they should be seized.
Otherwise it was highly advisable to postpone any attack, and to put these
men out of humour for a trifling cause was undesirable. The year before, .
when R4j Adhiraj (Eaj Jai Singh Sawili of Jaipur) had cleared out the
forts, he could not maintain himself, and the former owners re-occupied
them. Former Ndzims had not troubled themselves about the place, which
was at a distance from Ujain and in one comer. To retain it would give
great trouble and bring little profit. Above all, at such a time they should
not be interfered with, and the Emperor's advisers knew nothing of the
state of affiurs. The break up of the confederacy by the defeat on the 1st
April, 1731, rendered these remonstrances of little weight, and before the
letter was received the forts had been taken and levelled with the ground.

Muhammad Kh4n turned against the fort of Konsi, the home of

* Chakaldah is about 110 miles S. E. of Ujain, on the right bank of the Narbada,
Silkli has not been traced.

t There is a Jabwah 100 miles W. of Ujain.

s s

316 W. IxYine— The Bangash Nawdhs of Mitrukhdbdd, [No. 4,

Miwie BhiUn,* which possessed four strong citadels connected with each
other, and surrounded hy a deep ditch filled with water. On all sides were
steep hills and inaccessible ravines. Fighting with muskets, rockets, arrows,
spears, swivel-guns (rahkla) and cannon went on day and night. The first
entrenchment was stormed and the garrison asked for terms, which were
granted. The fort was not dismantled, as it afEorded a protection against
the inroads of the Mahrattas.

While Muhammad Kh^n was engaged with these forts, he heard that
Mulhdr Holkar was plundering in the country of Bampuraf and Mandesh-
war. He was opposed by the Imperial troops in the neighbourhood of
S^rangpur, Sh^hjah&npur and Dhar, and he went ofE for a time into Jaipur
territory. Meanwhile An^hd, another Mahratta leader, had ravaged the
country round K^nfh. The two leaders then united with Ma^hwdrah to
trouble the road between Parafh and Shdhjahdnpur. Reports of these
things came from Sheikh Am4n-ullah, manager of Shdhjahdnpur, the jdgir
of Nizam-ul-Mulk, and from Daud Kh&n, chela, Niib Faujdar of S&rang*
pur. At this time too, Fath Singh Wilulbdnsi and other Mahrattas had
crossed the Narbada, and unopposed at any point by any of the Hindustani
armies, had plundered the country of M&ndd{ returning home by way of
B&rigarh.

Muhammad Kh^n returned and reached Ujain on the 13th Zilka'd of
the 13th year, (9th May, 1781). He complains that besides himself no
one else was heartily desirous of repelling the Mahrattas. To add to his
difficulties, his troops now mutinied and demanded their arrears of pay.
He found some means or other to content them for the time. Then Bijah
Kishor Singh, son of Bijah Ajit Singh, was despatched to parganah Muham«
madpur, and Sayyad Fath 'Ali Kh&n B4rha to parganah BhadAwar, to pro-
tect the towns and bar the way to the enemy ; while Anwar Khim was
placed in Ujain itself, and Mukim Khan had orders to drive off any of the
enemy who approached that place. When these dispositions had been made,
Muhammad Kh&n on the 19th Zi'l^'d (15th May, 1781) left Ujain.

MQx^jio Durjan Sii of Kofah, KuQwar Bah&dur of Orchha, and the
sons of the B^jah of Chanderi were asked to take some of Muhammad
Khiln's troops and attack Anthu, who was reported to be then near Kdn^h
at the head of one thousand men ; and Mulh&r, who had appeared again in
the neighbourhood of S4rangpur. This request was refused.

On the 8th Zil Hajj (3rd June, 1781), Muhammad Kh&n was near
Kanth. Anfhu now withdrew. But next day, when the Naw&b reached

* Or perhaps W&mA Bie Bhildn; or Mawdn^ the title genoFaUy givea to the
chiefs on the Narbada. (Maloohn's GeDtral India, L, 516.)
t There is a Btopora 40 miles N. E. of Mandeshwar.
X Near the Narbada about 60 nules S. of Ujain,

1878.] W. Ir/ine—The Bangagh UTawdhs of FarruJchdhdd. 817

Shihjahiinpury word came from D&ud Kbdn, naib of Sirangpur, that he
would be oyerwbehned by Mulhdr unless he were reinforced at once. Forth-
with, at midnight, the M&h4dko, Kunwar Bahidur, and the sons of the
Bijah of Ghanderi having been appointed to lead the van, the army set
out and reached Sirangpur, about nineteen miles distant to the north, at
an hour and a half after sunrise. The troops were still on the line of
march or engaged in crossing the river, when Holkar, An(hd and others
suddenly appeared. The Muhammadans at once drew up and engaged
them, the fighting going on till an hour before sunset. The Mahrattas
then fled, and in the pursuit, which extended for four hoSy many were kill-
ed. Muhammad Eii^n, with his men, was out till midnight conducting the
pursuit and plundering the camp and baggage, called in the Mahratta
tongue '^ JPoroo." When the pursuers got near the town of Sundarsi, about
twenty-three miles south of Silrangpur, a spy came and informed them that
the enemy in their flight from the field, after resting a short time in Sun-
darsi, had resumed their route and were making for the Narbada, and must
have gone already fifteen or twenty Jeos, The Muhammadans after a pur-
suit of ten to twelve kos returned to their camp.

Muhammad £[hdn speaks of having with him tweqty thousand horse
and twenty thousand foot. Night and day he was engaged in efforts to
expel the invaders. On the other hand, the Ndzim of Gujrdt (Hamid
Khdn ?) had only given cash, jewels, elephants and horses to B4ji R^, while
the thdnas were still in the hands of Kantyd and Udd Funwar. The N4zim

'* had never gone a kos from the city. In the dispute between the Ndzim

and Mubdriz-ul-Mulk (Sarbuland Khdn) he heard that in the first encoun-
ter the latter gained the advantage, but night coming on the pursuit was
stopped, and next morning an arrangement was come to.

The Ei^jahs had throughout shown great reluctance to attend Mubam-
mad Kh^n, Kunwar Bahidur of Orchha being the only one who had done
any real service. M&hdr^ Durjan Singh of Kofah, and R&o Matw4rah now
requested leave to go home, and threatened to go without it, if leave were not
granted. They quitted the army on the 22nd Muharram, 1144 H. (16th
L Jvly> 1731). From this defection others were disheartened, and a few days

^ afterwards Kunwar Bahidur of Orchha with four or five hundred horse, and

Jogr&j, son of Bdjah Jai Singh of Ghanderi, with forty or fifty horse march-
ed away to their homes. Although, as Muhammad Kbdn says, the presence
or absence of the latter was equally matter of indifference, still these de-
fections were discouraging. The other R&jahs, Udait Singh of Orchha,
H&m, Ghand of Datyd, Ohattar Singh of Shdhdbdd, and the Bhadaurya
Kdjah, had paid no heed to all the orders and messengers sent to them direct
from the Emperor. Nor had any attention been vouchsafed at Court to

318 W. Irvine — The Bangask Nawdbt of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Muhammad Kh&n's recommendation of Hindu Singh Chandela* for whom
he had asked for the rank of Sihhazdriy 2000 horse, ^jdgir of his native
country, and restoration to his zamindari. If Hindu Singh were sent to
M41w^ the Bhadaurija R4jah would no longer have a pretext for lingering
at Kanauj (where he held the office of Faujddr).

After Mulh&r and An^hti had recrossed the Narhada, Muhammad Kh&n
went to extort his revenue from one Umanf ; and in two marches having
reached Bdjgarh,^ he defeated the zamiadar referred to, and settled matters
with him. Muhammad Kh4n then returned to Sironj. This place, which is
ahout 136 miles north-east of Ujain and about 150 miles south of Gwiliar^
he made his head- quarters, probably because it was further from the Narba*
da than Ujain, and nearer his line of retreat by Gwaliir to Hindustan.
His foothold in M41w4 was too precarious for him to risk being sur-
rounded and cut off. He appears to have remained at Sironj during the
rainy season of 1731.

The state of the Sdbah was most deplorable. The whole country had
been spoiled by the N4zim and ravaged by the Mahrattas. It was entirely
out of cultivation and uninhabited (he cheragh)^ nowhere was any crop to be
seen, there was nothing but dry g^rass. The villages which were inhabited
had been plundered by the Th4kurs and burnt to the ground, the ravages
of the infidel caused the country to be deserted. Only Ks. 5000 had been
collected from Mandeshwar and Rs. 4000 from Sironj and Bhilsa.§
During the rains of 1731, Muhammad Elh&n made repeated reports of these
facts, stating his want of money, the mutinous conduct of his troops, the
impossibility of getting any revenue from M41wd, and the necessity for
help in men and money. These urgent appeals were left unanswered.

His difficulties were further increased by the fact that Malwd, from
one end to the other, was granted out in tankhwah to jdgirdirs, who were
backed up by Khdn Daur&n Khan and Roshan-ud-daula. These jdgirddrs
complained at Court of the slightest interference, but gave not the least assis-
tance. Nowhere was there sufficient land left for the Subahdar to plant the
sole of his foot, much less to use for a riding or hunting-ground. On the
one side, from a tank which lies two and a half ho9 from Ujain, began the
jdgir of Burh&n-ul-Mulk and others ; and in another direction, from Fathi-

* Appaienily Hindu Singh of Chachendi in the Cawnpur district. He was ejected
from his estate in the tenth year by Buxh&n-ul-Mulk and B^jah Gopdl Singh Bhadau*
riya. [Dowson's Elliot VHl. 46.]

f Or AdmiyAn.

% Long. 76*, 46' and Lat. 24^—82 miles N. of S^Lrangpur and 66 miles W. ol

Sironj.

i Ahout 44 miles S. E. of Siroi\j.

1878.] W. Irvine—The Bangash Navodha of FarrukhdUd. 319

bid,* four or five kos from the city, tlie parganahs and villages were all ia
jdytr. Kampurahf was held by B4jah Jai Singh Saw&i ; Haif AH Kh&n's
jdgir was Eankr&l ; B4jah Mdlrdj held Kadraulah in Dhimoni ;X other por-
tions of the Subah had been assigned to Niz4m-ul.&fulk Ajsaf Jdh, to
Nawab Kad8ia,§ to H&fiz Khidmatg&r Khdn, Mukarrab-ul-hazrat Khakin,
to Mir Husain Khin Kokah,|| to Sa'd-ud-din Khan Bahadur Mir Atash,
(o 'Ali Ahmad Khin, and to the eunuchs of His Majesty. Many of the
agents of these gprantees allowed their ta'luhahs to become places of resort
for the Mahrattas, where the plunder from the imperial territory was
stored. When any Mahrattas took refuge with them and a force was
sent after them, the agents declared that there were no fugitives in their
parganahs. If the army entered their lands, they then raised loud com-
plaints of the damage. Thus everything had to be left in confusion, and
it became impossible to re-settle the country.

The zamindars of Bimpurah were in league with Mulh&r Holkar and
helped to plunder the country. When the imperial army followed them up,
Bajah Jai Singh Saw^ remonstrated at Court, and Muhanamad Kh4n was
rebuked. In defending himself he gives an instance of what was done. Sit&
Bdm Ndgar had been chief writer of the zamindars of B&mpurah till B&j
Adhirij took possession. This man then became a jama'dar in the regiment
of Mulpm Kh4n. Having broken his 1^, he was put on Mukim Khdn's
elephant, and the day the army left Bansilah he set out for his home fol-
lowed by fifty or sixty men. Bajah Jai Singh Saw4i*s men were lying in
ambush at seven or eight Jco9 from Bdmpurah. As he passed they stopped
him and seized the elephant. They would neither return the elephant nor
grant an interview to the Nawab's messengers. Muhammad Khdn exclaims
how hard it is that Bdj Adhirdj, who held all Akbardbdd and Ajmer,
and had lately received the parganahs round the capital, should try to
stretch forth his hand on Subah M&lw& and intrigue there with the infidels.
As for Haif 'Ali Kh&n's ^o^ir, it had been customary for the zamindar
of Kankrdl to ^&j peshkash to former n&zims ; one lakh of rupees had been
paid to Bijah Girdhar Bahadur besides four elephants. Now instead of
injuring, Muhammad Khdn had benefited the j^irddr. When Mukim
k "Khin went there, he settled the zamindars' payment at a higher amount,

collected the money, and remitted it to the jagirddr. The latter's* Amil still
retained possession of the jdgirs of 'Abd-ur-raz4k Kh&n, Khwajah Munir

* About 12 miles 8. of Ujain.

t There are several Rimpurahs, I suppose this to be the one 56 miles N. W.
of Sironj.

X 69 miles E. of Siroig near EhimUsa.

{ Mother of Muhammad ShiLh.

t Killed in U49 H. in fight with B^i E&o outside Delhi. Qrant Duff, p. 236.

820 W. Irvine— 1%« San^ash Nawdbs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4^

Khan and Qh£si R^m. After settling Ujain, Mubammad Eh4n intended,
he saidy to go to Dhamoni to recover the^^^ir of Bajah Mdlr4j.

Seeing that no one in the Presence paid any attention to his represent
tations, Muhammad Kh4n determined to leave a naib in his place and
repair to Court . On his way, he resolved to settle Sh^h^bdd* and Banddah^i*
the faujd^ of which B4jah Chattar Singh had not yet relinquished, and
he had also behayed badly to 'Atik-ullah Ehdn, naib of Muhmnmad Khan.
This expedition put the finishing touch to the Naw&b's misdeeds, and no
doubt formed one of the causes of his sudden recall.

Kdjah Chattar Singh Narwari, who was specially recommended to Mu-
hammad Kh4n by Hdfiz Khidmatgdr Kh4n as his " friend and companion'%
held the Sarkdrs of Shah^b^ and Banddah, to which Muhammad Kh&n had
been appointed f aujd4r. His ancestral estates were in Shiupuri and Kald-
ras, and his country extended up to the neighbourhood of Sironj. He
also held Narwar^ which for seven hundred years had never been in posses-
sion of the Hindus. Although he had been ordered to join he did not attend,
he did not give up the SarkdrSy and nothing could be collected ; at length he
surrounded Sayyad Atik-ullah Kh4n, naib, and cut off his supplies. From
his position in the line of Muhammad Khan's communication with Hindu-
stan, he was able to give great annoyance. Narwar, " which is as a gateway
** sufiGlcient for the passage of one man at a time", was the only route open
to recruits ; the road by Bhadawar being closed by the Bhadauriya B4jah.
Seven or eight times the men of Chattar Singh had' murdered messengers at
the pass of Narwar and had taken their letters. Only one pair of messengers^
after giving up their letters, had escaped with their lives. To obviate this
inconvenience, Muhammad Khdn renewed his request that his son Akbar
Kh4n might be made f aujd&r of Narwar and Bhaddwar. Or if that were
not approved, some one of the Mughal party might be appointed to keep
the road open. This request was refused on the ground that, Shdhabad
having recently been taken from Bdjah Chattar Singh, Narwar, his native
country, could not be taken without any fault. As an alternative, the
Nawab urged that Chattar Singh's rank (manaah) and jdgirg might be
taken away, as a lesson to others who had failed to attend in obedience to
the Emperor's orders. After writing to him in vain several times, Muham-
mad Kh&n decided to proceed to active measures against him.

About the commencement of his second year in Malwfi (^October — No*
vember, 1731,) Muhammad Khdn marched to Sar4e Nau about fifty miles
north of Sironj, giving out that he was on his way to Court. On the 3rd
Jam&di, I. 1144 H. (23rd October, 1731), the army surrounded the village

• About 90 mUes N. W. of Sironj.
t About 68 miles N. of Bironj.
i About 44 miles S. of GwlUi^.

1878.] W. Irvine— 1%« Bangaah Nawabs of Farrukhdhdd. 821

of Labkari. The villagers relying on the strength of their fort resisted
and fought for three watches. At length they took to flight, and the small
fort was carried by assault (ha'9ar^i'9uwdri) ; many of the garrison were
killed or left for half dead. The following day, an attack was made on
Ch4ndaur* where there was a strong fort, and the zamind&rs were noted for
their turbulence. Fighting went on all day, but at length this fort too was
taken, and lives were lost on both sides.

The Muhammadans next went to Chargdn, a fort on a high hill, sur-
rounded by jungle, and with many outworks. Its defenders relying on
their numbers took to the jungles and ravines. Fighting went on morning
and evening for twenty-four days ; till the enemy sued for and obtained
terms. Thence the Imperialists turned to £h4ndaur,t the stronghold of
Kahri Singh, grandson of Chattar Singh. During the night Kahri Singh
made off and his fort was taken. Two or three other forts were reduced
in the same way.

The last place attacked was Sh^hdbdd, Chattar Singh's place of resi-
dence, and declared, perhaps with some exaggeration, to be as strong as the
fortress of Gw&li4r. After some time had passed, Chattar Singh proposed
to negotiate and Muhammad Khan tried to conciliate him. It was agreed
that he should join with his troops. Intelligence, however, came of a fresh
invasion under BAji Bdo. The night before the morning fixed for the
march, Chattar Singh brought forward claims for pay. These were all
agreed to. During the night, however, Chattar Singh absconded and made
off to his own country. As the danger pressed, Muhammad Khdn had no
alternative but to return to Sironj.

The Mahrattas were reported to be in force in the country of Khan-
j4n and Umdn and Sewni,;]: and though in the Dakhin they talk of the
'' ehauthj^ i, «., one-fourth, yet they took from the towns and villages more
than three shares both in Mdlw4 and Gujr&t. As in this year (1144) they
felt quite safe on the side of Gujrdt, they had brought nearly 100,000 horse
into M41wa. Fath Singh, an agent of S^u,§ Pil& Jddon, Anand E&o, brother
of Ud4 Punw4r, S&m4ji and others, with more than thirty thousand horse,
posted themselves near Khimldsa, on the east of the town of Sironj towards
Chanderi, at a distance of seven ho$ from Sironj. Chimnd, B&ji B^'s bro-
ther, Mulh&r and others vnth a force of thirty thousand horse were in the

• Ferliape the Chandoria of the Indian Atla»— Sheet 62 N. E. in Lat. 24^, 59)^
liong. 77% Z&V to the N. W. of Sar&e Nau.

t Perhaps the Bhadaura of the Indian Atlas — Sheet, 52, N. E. Lat. 24% 48' ;
Long. 77% 27i^ about 18 miles N. of GKmah.

X Sewi, or Sewli.

f I cannot find this Fath Singh in Chrant Duff, is it another name for B^ji Rio f

822 W. Irvine— I%a Bangash Natodbs of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

country of Umatw&rah.* There was a further force of twelve thousand
men which had not crossed the Narbada. Another army, supposed to num*
ber ten to twelve thousand men, was directing its steps towards M&lwi bj
way of Gadh.f Eighty or ninety thousand of the enemy were thus advan-
cing on all four sides.

As soon as the Mahrattas crossed the Narbada, the zamindirs sent
agents to fix the amount of black-mail (khandali) to be levied The money
was then paid, and the Rajahs, no longer anxious about their own territories,
stayed at home. The zaminddr of Shiupuri and Kal4ras and others gave
hostages for the punctual payment of the annual tribute. The Bajah o£
Orchha, the Bhadauriya Ilajah, the sons of Chattars41, and the Bdjah o£
Datiya fixed what they had to pay. The zamind&rs of M41w4 exchanged
turbans with the Mahrattas and entered into alliance with them.

Muhammad Khan tried to open negotiations direct with Rajah Sdha
at Puna, but the only answer received was, that Baji R^ Pandit Pardh^n,
who was of high dignity and power in his State, was his sole and only-
adviser in all matters. A written document should be given as demanded ;
Pil4ji Jddon and Mulh4r Holkar were subordinates of the Pandit Pardhin,
and must act according to his wishes.

On hearing that the enemy were approaching KhimUsa, Muhammad
Kh&n left Lo^^h-Dongar,^ and after continuous marching for three days and
nights he arrived at Sironj. It was decided that next morning they would
attack the enemy, who were reported to be thirty thousand strong. Then
intelligence was received that Mulhir had left UmatwArah with fifty thou*
sand horse, and after levying black-mail from the Mahar^ (of Kotah) had
arrived within fifteen or sixteen miles of Sironj. Twenty thousand men
were also scattered about Mandeshwar, Ujain, and Shdhjah&npur, to the
south and west of Sironj.

It was obvious that if Muhammad Kh&n went on to Khimlasa, it
would take him ten to fifteen days to defeat and pursue the enemy. While
he was absent, a second Mahratta leader would plunder Sironj, Bhilsa and
other towns. Muhammad Eliin thought it best to succumb. He therefore
sent for both the Mahratta leaders, gave them presents, with horses and an
elephant, by way of '' khila'V^ After an agreement had been made, they
went away by Gadh and crossed the Narbada in boats. After the Mah-

* XJmadwara, a Bmall district in the province of M61ws, of which it occupies the
centre, it is bounded by the K&li Sind and Parbati riTers. The principal towns are
Ghaonchra, iUjghar and Kignir. Hamilton's HinddsULn, I, p. 367. See also Aitchi-
son's Treaties, £d. 1876, Vol. HI, p. 446.

t Perhaps Ga^h Mandala, 90 niiles S. E. of S&gar.

X From the remarks of the author of the Hadikat'Ul'AkdHMy in describing the
campaign of the English south of GwiUiiur in 1782, it seems that this place must be
quite dose to KaUraa.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2^ Bangagh Nawdbs qf larrukhdbdd. 823

ntta custom, thej had asked for an agreement in writing, but this, without
the Emperor's leave, Muhammad Khan refused to give. He reported to
Court that if his orders were to oppose the Mahrattas, the requisite troops
and money must be sent, and if a settlement was to be made he would act
accordingly.

Muhammad Kh4n now settled for the rainy season of 1782 at Sironj,
and employed his leisure in writing to Delhi for help. He prophesied that
the next year the Mahrattas, if not checked, would spread from the banks
of the Narbada to Akbardbid, Allah&bid, and close to the territory of
Bihar, then would finally turn upon Subah Ajmer. The income of MalwA
could not provide for the pay of an army. For twenty years he had served
the Imperial house, but whatever he had saved was all expended. His
jdgirB were in the hands of the Bundelas, and when he was despatched
to M41w&, the ministers made him swear solemnly that, till the Subah was
reduced to order, he would make no attempt to recover his ya^/r«. Mean-
while Jin Nisdr EJiin, faujdar of Kora, had for three years levied large
Bums from Sahindah, and other parganahs made over in trust to Anandi
Sangrim. Without 40,000 horse and 40,000 foot, order could not be
established, while he (Muhammad Kh&n) had not money to pay even two
thousand horse. He therefore asked for five lakhs of rupees a month, a
strong Mughul force, and contingents from the friendly Rajahs. The
Mahrattas had four or five armies stationed at five or six marches from
each other, and a similar disposition ought to be made of the Imperial
forces. If his word be doubted, and his reports be held long-winded and
exaggerated, he begs that some one else be deputed, whose reports are
trusted and "^ who can abbreviate this lengthiness,*' and he (Muhammad
£h^) would willingly serve under him. There were of old seven Sultans
in the Dakhin, but former sovereigns overcame them. In comparison ,
what an easy task it would be to get rid of '' this set of thieves" from one
comer of that coimtry, if His Majesty would leave Shihjahandbdd and
bring an army to M41w4. If things went on much longer as they were,
the disturbance would soon extend to Hindtist&n. How much better it
would be, then, to resist the encroachment at once.

'^ Sar^uehaahma hdyad giriftan ha-mtl,
" Chii pur shudy na hdyad guz^ashtan ha piV*
Instead of sending any help, letters from Court were now sent to va-
rious zamindars, hinting that a new nazim was about to be appointed.
They should therefore await his arrival instead of joining Muhammad
Kh&n. Similar letters of encouragement had been forwarded to the Mah-
rattas. Nizam-ul-Mulk, although appealed to, made no sign ; and then
other efforts were made to obtain help from a distance. By a parwanah of
the 20th Bamz&n, in the 14th year (6th March, 1732), the Naw&b sent

T T

324 W. Irvine—I!^ Bangash Nawdha of Farruhhdbdd. [No. 4,

lU. 17,000, in hundU upon the bankers of Lahore, to the commanders (tmnan-
dirs) of the Afghans living in Kabul. They were requested to enlist re-
cruits, but none appear to have come.

The only answer from Court to Muhammad Kh4n*s appeals was an
upbraiding letter from Kh&n Daurin Kh4n. The Mahrattas had beea
allowed to spread all over the country, while Muhammad Ehin's agents ac-
companied them, pointing out the proper routes. It was asserted that the
arrival of the enemy at Orchha and Narwar was with the connivance o£
those agents. By great exertions, Khdn Daurin Kh&n says, he had ob-
tained a renewal of the g^nt of parganah Akbarpur* from 1146 Fusli, al-
though His Majesty said it had been granted several years before for one har-
vest only, and the officials of the Diw^ made objection that it was khdliaa^
or directly under the Grown. In another letter of this time, Kh4n Daur&n
Khin sets forth with great vehemence his own incorruptibility, and
asserts that, except the enhanced jdgir of one kror of ddm granted in the
Sayyads' time (1718-1720), he had received nothing. All beyond this he
held to be accursed. What then could he gain by dismissals or appoint-
ments to offices or jdgirs ? When Muhammad Khln was appointed to
Malwa, he had, out of friendship, pressed for the removal of one of his
(Khan Daurin's) own relations, who had been previously named.

Soon ^ fcvrm&n in the Emperor's own hand- writing reached Sironj,
informing Muhammad Khdn that Bajah Jai Singh Sawae had been
appointed his successor, and directing him to report himself at Mustakirr-
ul-Khilafat Akbar&bad, to which place the Emperor in person intended to
proceed after hunting in the preserves of Shiuli near Delhi. Information
of his supercession had already reached him on the 4th Jamadi, I. (12th
Oct. 1782), in letters from ^aim Khan, his son, Mangal Khdn, who had
gone to Delhi to raise men and money, and Pir 'Ali Kh4n, his representa-
tive at Court. Orders were at once issued to Mukim Kh4n to report himself
to Muhammad Kh4n after making over the town of Ujain and the other
places to the servants of Baj Adhiraj. On the 6th of the same month
(14th Oct. 1782), the Nawab's family and dependents started on their way
home. The men engaged by Mangal EMn were made over, with the
Emperor's approval, to the naibs of Bij Adhiraj (Jai Singh Saw^). Mu-
hammad Kh4ii then left M&lwa and arrived at Akbar&bad on the 29th
Jamadi, II. (6th Dec. 1732), after an absence of two years.

Apart from difficulties about money, and the general non-success o£
his arms, three causes appear to have led to Muhammad Kh^'s disgrace,
(l)y the complaints of the jagird&rs, who were influential in the
palace, (2), the attack on Chattcur Singh Narwari, who was protected by the
favourite, Hifiz Khidmatg&r Khan, and others, (8), the friendship which

* In the Cawnpur district.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2!*^ Bangash NavMs of Farrukhdbdd. 826

appeared to have sprang up between Muhammad Kh/in and Niz&m-ul-
Holk, whose acts were then most jealously watched by the clique in power.
The subsequent rapid advance of the Mahrattas is Muhammad £h4n's best
justification, and it is clear that with inferior means he did as much, if not
more, than the Wazir and the Amir-ul-Umr4, backed by all the forces of
the empire, were able to accomplish.

Campaigns against the JfaAra^a«— 1145-1149 ff. (1732—1736).

In the 15th year (Sept. 1732 to Aug. 1733), shortly after Muham-
mad Ethan's arrival at Akbarabad, he received a Jarmdn from the Emperor
stating that the Mahrattas were reported to be between Sironj and Narwar,
and engaged in plundering the zamindars of the Umaif clan. Jamdat-ul-
Mulk, 'Itim&d-ud-daula, Kamr-uddin Khdn having been appointed to repel
them, Muhammad Khan was directed to join him. 'Itimad-ud-daula also
wrote to the same effect.*

With Kamr-ud-din Kbin, Wazir-ul-Mam41ik, came Zahir-ud-daula
Mahimid Jang, his brother, and Khdn Mruz Jang, son of Asaf J&h Nizam-
iil-Mulk and son-in-law of the wazir. When they reached Akbar4bad,
Muhammad KhAn went out to meet them and escort them. The next day
the wazir came to the Nawab's house and urged him to join in the cam-
paign. Looking on it as a holy war for Isl4m, Muhammad Khan agreed.
He then advanced with Khiin Firdz Jang and Mah&mid Jang beyond
Narwar to Lo^ah-Dangar, south of Kalaras. There he heard that the infi-
dels had crossed the Narbada, but Kdjah Jai Singh Sawae, unable to bar their
way, had sent his baggage home to his own country, and had himself gone
one march in that direction. The wazir, who had received a letter from
RiLjah Jai Singh Saw4e, wrote urgently to recall Muhammad Khdn, on the
plea that the rains were upon them and nothing more could be done. The
Nawdb in obedience to these orders retraced his steps, and rejoined the wazir
at Shiupuri.

Thej then marched to punish the son of Uddrd, who had instigated
the murder of Jan Nisir Khan, faujdir of Kora and brother-in-law to the
wazir. On the 9th Mubarram, 1146 H. (Uth June, 1733), they drew
near to Ghizipur.f The Rajah's fort was bombarded from three hours after
sunrise till far into the night. During that day the batteries were advanced
to the ditch of the fort which surrounded the houses. Bhagwant in the dark-
ness fled to the jungle, and took refuge in Stithar, a place of strength
belonging to him. Muhammad Kh4n then encamped on the Jamna at the

* His ftiU titles are Wasfr-ul-MamiUik, Jamdat-ul-Mulk, 'ltdm£d-ad-daala, J^amr'
nd-dm Khan, dun, Na^rat Jang.

t In the Fathpur district, about 11 miles S. W. of FathpuT,aiid about 8 miles from
the l&ft bank of the Jamna.

326 W. Irvine— The Bangath Nawdh$ of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

ferry of Chkr KMjari, while troops went in pursuit of the fugitive. One
account* states that Muhammad "Khin adjusted the matter hj exacting a
contribution, bnt his own letters do not state how the af&dr ended.

Muhammad Khan does not appear to have taken part in Muzaffar
Khfin's campaign of the 16th year (114f6.1147 = Sept. 1738— Sept. 1734),
or in that of the 17th. year (1147-1148) under Kamr-ud-din Khan. About
this time Muhammad Kh4n had a dangerous illness, and for fourteen days
he could eat or drink nothing but a little rice-water.

In 1148 H. (May 1735— May 1736), or 1149 H. (May 1736— April
1737), Muhammad Khan reported to His Majesty that the son of Baji
Bio with other leaders was in Bundelkhand. A party of them with two
or three hundred horse came to the banks of the Jamna, and ascertained
several places where the river was f ordable. The rumour was that they
intended to cross into the Dudb. In reply the Emperor wrote that the
sons of Chattarsal were in league with the enemy, and had given them a
passage. It was expected that they would ravage Kord, Kalpi and Itawah.
Sarbuland Khan Mubariz-ul-Mulk had received orders to prevent their
crossing, while Muhammad Khan, instead of remaining idle, should pro-
ceed towards Gwilifir. The Emperor intended to go to Akbar&bdd in person.

Muhammad Elhan's reply to this command was, that he had no means
to raise an army, that he still owed his men the pay for their second year
in MAlwi. In his beggared state he had not thought it advisable to go
to Gw^iar, he was moreover ill, but he hoped his son, Akbar Elh&n, would
be appointed faujdar of Gwali6r. In another letter to the wazir he declines
to attend, as he does not wish to appear at Court solitary and without
friends. He sent his son, J^iiai Khdn, with such troops as he had. If the
Emperor appointed him to a subah and granted him ten kror of ddmj
he could raise as many men as was desired. To meet the enemy fifty thou-
sand men were required, and the revenues of a subah would be absorbed.
To go with an insignificant force to Gwdlidr, and there to sit with hands
drawn into sleeve and feet into skirt, would only encourage the invaders.

Next Kh4n Daur4n Khan Amir-ul-XJmr4 writes two letters to Mu-
hammad Khdn. It was reported that Chimn4 Ji had advanced beyond
Gwilidr via Sironj and Bundelkhand, after ejecting R&jah Jai Singh from
Mdlwi, and had plundered the country. Muhammad Kb&n should collect
a large army from the country near Akbardbdd, and a subsidy would be
allotted. Burh&n-ul-Mulk had orders to proceed to Akbardbid and was
advancing by daily marches. Fakhr*ud-daula, brother of Khin Daur&n Kkia,

* That of the " 8a*adat-i-Jdwed" in Dowson's Elliot, Ym, 842. See also EUiot,
YIII, 50, and Supp. Glossary, p. S26. From the Httdikat-^'Akdlifn^ Second CUme,
art. Itdwah, we leam that the Wazir had huiried to Dehli, to thwart a combination
between Eh&n Daurto, Biirh£n-iil-Mulk, and Mub&ciz-ul-Moik.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%d Banyash Naiodhs of Farruhhdhdd. 327

was also on his way with a strong force. E&o Badan Singh J&t would
soon he at Akhar&bid. All these would aid in the protection of the city.
Nasrat Y&r Kh4n and B4e Shiu D^, the niihs of the Nizim (Bajah Jai
Singh Saw^), would also assist. The great ohject was to defend the suhah,
to tranquillize the city, and to preserve the name and fame of Hinddst4n.
Mubdriz-ul-Mulk would soon arrive at Gw£li4r, and the Bhadauriya IUljah|
if freed from anxiety ahout his home, vtrould also join.

Bajah Jai Singh Saw&e also opened communications with Muhammad
Kh£n, and tried to induce him to quit his retirement. At first Muhammad
Kh&n's only reply was to taunt Jai Singh, pointing out that he held one-
third of Malwi, one-fourth of the Delhi suhah and the whole of the Akhar&-
hid Niz&mat, hesides his native country, which produced an income equal
to that of a Suhah. The Mahrattas in the Jaipur territory pretend to he
one in aim and ohject with the B^jputs and Bundelas. This is only deceit
Cfilosqfi), who knows where they will stop, not only have they reached
Hinddst&n hut they are spread ahroad in Bang^U. The Bdjah might he
quite sure that, whenever they had made safe their position elsewhere, they
vrould throw him over, and demand the very places which they then prof es-
sed to protect.

By the offer oijdgir$ and money payments, B&jah Jai Singh succeed-
ed in overcoming Muhammad Khdn's reluctance to serve again. Before
he appeared in the field, however, the Mahrattas, having crossed the Jamna
at the ferries opposite Aurdyah and Sarae Ajit Mall in the Etiwah district,
had plundered Kh&npur, Derapdr, Mangalpur, Sikandrah and Shiuganpur.*
Their collectors had recovered khandi from the zamind&rs and faujdars
of the Duah. Other parties were scattered in the country of Gwali^r,
Bijipdrt had heen surrounded, and the inhabitants of Antri^ had taken
refuge in Gwilidr. The latter were suspected of being in league with the
invaders. The zaminddrs of Baojhfi (?) had heen defeated.

On the 7th Bamzan, 1148 H (10th Jan. 1736), the Naw&b's troops
began to cross the Jamna. Muhammad Khdn had fixed the 14th Shawwal
for his own advance, but as the Mahrattas were reported to have gone off
towards Delhi, the inhabitants of Akbar^bdd and Bde Shiu D^, n4ib, be-
came frightened. The army of the invaders in Bhaddwar might see their
opportunity, and crossing the river might invest the city.

Beports now came in that one force of Mahrattas had advanced beyond
Nfirabad§ in the direction of Akbardbad, and that another party was near

* The first is, I suppose, onr Gawnpore^ the other places are in the Cawnpor dis-
txict. There is, however, a kasbah Eh&npur just south of Auruyah.
t Lat. 26*», 2'. Long. 77^ 28', fifty-two mUes 8. W. of GwaHir.
{ Twelve miles B. of Gw&liibr.
{ Fourteen miles N. W. of Gw41ilff.

328 W. Irvine^I^tf Bangwh Nawabi of Ikrruhhdhdd. [No. 4,

Antri in the country of fihadiwar. Accordingly on the 2l0t Ramzan, 114i8
H. (24th Jan. 1736), a divisbn of two thousand horse and two thousand foot,
under Zabardast EMn, Basul Khiin and others, was sent to Dholpur to pro«
tect the ferries on the Chambal. The zamind^rs of the Dandota, Satgir,
Ardwar, Tdnpuri and Gujar clans were granted hkila^U^ and posted from
point to point (ndkahandi) to guard the routes. This task was efficiently
performed, although the niib faujdir of Dholpdr had retreated. A party
of the enemy posted themselves at Nur&bad and came daily to the ferries,
but found they were unable to cross. Muhammad Kh&n exercised similar
vigilance in Akbar&b^d ; at length the Mahrattas went back to Bhad£war,and
there rejoined their other army. Gwili&r was held by 'Umr Kh^n, with two
thousand men from Mau under K^e Khin Khafak, Sher Ehim Warakzai
and Ahmad TShka Afridi, added to one thousand men of Gw^ar itself.

The usual complaints now commenced of want of means, and of diffi-
culties about the pay of the troops. Y&V^^ Kh4n, Kh&n Bahadur, was
sent home to bring five lakhs of rupees, but after great difficulty he pro-
vided 1,20,000 rupees. This was like a drop of water on a fire. Muhammad
Khdn, though ready and willing, professed to have no money, and for a year
had been waiting in Akbar4b6d, put ofE from day to day with promises.

Muhammad Eh&n's efEorts were further paralysed by doubts of the
policy favoured at Court. He exclaims that he could not find the word to
the enigma ; while he waited for orders to march on Dholpur, the infidels
resorted to Delhi, where they received audience of His Majesty. They were
received as friends, and money was bestowed on them. Should he march to
Dholpur and fight the enemy, he might be told by the ministers that peace
had been concluded, and that he had only thrown matters into confusion.

He reports that B&ji Bdo had one hundred thousand horsemen in
Bundelkhand, Bhad&war and GwiU^r. Part of them had gone towards
KAlpi intending to plunder Kor&. The sons of Ghattarsal and Bhagwant
(of Ghiziptir in the Fathpur district) had agreed to pay them lakhs, and to
levy krors of rupees for them in that country ; other Hindu R4jahs and
zamindirs beyond the Jamna and Chambal had pricked up their ears, and
even some parties of Muhammadans from M61w& had entered their service.
The Bhadauriya Bajah like the rest had come to terms with the invaders.
In no way had Baji Kio quitted the service of Bajah Sahti, nor had the
Mahrattas ceased to harry the Imperial territory. At such a critical moment,
the Nawab could not understand why Burhan-ul-Mulk was sent to his
Subah, and B6jah Abhai Singh of Mirw4r to his home.

At length Bajah Jai Singh Saw&e wrote to say that, on the 8th Babi
I, 1149 H. (6th July, 1786), B&ji Bao and his son had submitted to the
Imperial authority. With B6ntiji Sendhia, Mulhar Holkar, Baswant B4e
Punwfir, and other companions, he sought an interview with the B&jah at

1878.] W. Ixvine^The Bangaah NawdbB of Bin^ukhdhdd, 829

Dholpur. He gave an agreement under his seal, with sureties, not to act
contiarj to his word. Bkji Bio left on the 13th of the same month, while
B6jah Jai Singh proceeded towards Subah Ajmer, where the Kithors had
raised disturbances. Apparently this was the occasion on which B^ji lUo
received the appointment of nAib Ndzim of Malwa.*

Shortly afterwards, in the same year, the Mahrattas crossed over into
the Du&b and plundered Firuzabad, 'Itimadpur and Jalesar. £urh4n-ul-
Mulk, without waiting for the rest of the Imperial forces, attacked and
defeated them near Jalesar. Kh&n Daur&n Kh&n then advanced from Delhi
with a large force, accompanied by Muhammad Khan at the head of twelve
thousand men. They met Burhdn-ul-Mulk near Mathura early in Zil
Hajj 1149 H. (March — April, 1787). As they were returning to Delhi the
Jiis of the village of Mitrol, between Kodal and Falwal, fell on and plun-
dered their baggage. By the Emperor's order Muhammad Kh4n returned
to protect Akbardb&d.t

Muhammad Khdn atiktfor Bengal and Patna^ hut get$ AJlahdhdd,

]^4im Khan was now at Court, and through his influence, the Emperor
promised to appoint Muhammad Kh&n to Fatna and Bangal6. To conceal
the matter from Mahibat Jang, the then Subahdiur of Beng^, no sanad
was to issue for that Subah, a note in the Emperor's hand-writing being
taken instead. Muhammad Sh&h was never long of one mind, and he
soon began to raise difficulties. Muhammad Kh4n then proposed that ^&im
Khin should be made Nizim of 'Azimiib^-Fatna, while he should be made
n4ib of Bengal under the heir-apparent. He offered to remit to Court
all the property confiscated by 'Ali Wardi Kh&n, and to pay regularly ten
or fifteen times the revenue forwarded by Sarfardz £lh&n,{ signing any
undertaking that might be demanded. Notwithstanding these promises,
the negotiation seems to have fallen through.

Allahib&d was then asked for, but a formidable rival arose in Burhan-
ul-Mulk, who offered a peshkaah of fifteen lakhs of rupees. Muhammad
Khan's claims appear, however, to have had some weight. His conditions
were, that he should obtain the Subah, free of all interference, including
Jaunpur, Ghi^pur, Kuhna Sar^, Baniuras, Hadah, M4nikpur, Ghora, K&lin-
jar etc. ; that Kord and Kanauj should be made over to him as dependen*
cies ; and that Sarkdr Gw^4r should be given to Khizr KyLn as Sdbah,
with Muhammad Kh4n as N4zim. Without entering Kor4, he could not
bar the way to the sons of Chattars&l and Bhagwant, and if he had no

• Grant Dufi; 284, 235.
t Dow8on*B Elliot^ YHI. 54, 55, 56.

t Bon of the fonner Sobahdikr, Naw4b Shtya'-ud-danla. He had been ousted by
'Ali Waxdi Shin Mahlkbat Jang.

830 W. Irvine— 1^« Bangash Natodhs of FarruJchdUd. [No. 4,

jurisdiction there, his interference would occasion never-ending disputes.
Kanauj, which was in the hands of a stranger, the Bhadauriya lUijah, was
his home country, and till he held it he could never feel himself safe while
absent in Allahdbdd. At length the farmdn of appointment was forwarded
by Eamr-uddin Kh^n Chin 'Itim&d-ud-daula, the Wazir, and Muhammad
Kh&n was ordered to attend Court at once vrith five hundred horse.

It was in the beginning of Bajab 1148 H. (Nov. — Dec. 1735), that
Muhammad E!h&n was restored to the Subah of Allahdbid. A few months
afterwards, on the 4th Muharram, 1149 H, (4th May, 1786),* Sarbuland
Kh4n was restored. Muhammad Khdn seems to have obtained afterwards
promises of re-instatement, but his claims were postponed to those of Amir
£[han 'Umdat-ul-Mulk, who was appointed to Alkhabid in the year 1739.t
On Amir Khan's assassination in 1159 H. (Jan. 1746 to Jan. 1747), { the
Subah passed to 'Abd-ul Mansdr Kb^n Safdar Jang.§

On relinquishing his government into the hands of Sarbuland Kh^n,
Naw&b Muhammad Khdn strongly recommended to his protection Rajah
Jaswant Singh, zamind^r of Bhadoi|| who when at Court had been made a
SihJiazdri, 2000 horse, with the title of Eajah and the gift of kettle-drums.
He was appointed to the charge of the rahddri from Ban&ras to Allah^b^
and he performed well the duty of keeping the roads open. Bajah Jai
Singh of Maudah had, however, interfered, and had collected much money
from Bhadoi. Bajah Jaswant Singh would he hoped be preserved fronoL
further oppression.

Muhammad Kh&n's interest in Eajih Jaswant Singh arose from the
fact that the R4jah had given to the NawAb a daughter in marriage. Jas-
want Singh had also taken the field on one occasion in Muhanunad Kh&n*a
cause. In 1148 H. when Muhammad Khan was re-appointed to Allahab&d,
Sarbuland Kh4n wrote secretly from ShahjahAnibad to his son and deputy,
Shkh Naw4z Kh&n, directing him to oppose the entry of the new Subah-
d&r. On the other hand, Jaswant Singh, at the instigation of Muhammad
Kh&n, marched from Bhadoi towards Arail, having with him 2000 horse
and 20,000 matchlockmen. He was joined by Lai Bikramijit, son of Jograj
Gahilwir, R&jah of Bijipur and Kantit.^ The allies then prepared to at-
tack Sayyad Muhammad Khan, ruler of Arail. On hearing of this rising,
Shah Nawaz Khin left the fort of Lai Jalwah in parganah Sangror with
1000 horsemen, Shekh Allahydr, author of the Had^kat-ui-Akdlm, having

* Both dates are taken firom the " TabB£r&t-un«Nilzir£n.'*

t Dow, 11, 438, ed. 1803.

{ Mifiih-ut-taw&rikh, p. 489.

{ 'Axn^-tis-Sa'dat, p. 50.

II In the Mirzipur district, on the left bank of the Qanges.

H Both in the Mirsapnr district.

«

1878.] W. Irviae— I^d Bangash Nawdbs of lUrruihdbdJ. 831

command of the van. Marching all night, they crossed the Ganges at the
ferry of Kasondhan.* Before their arrival, Jaswant Singh attacked Say-
yad Muhammad Kh4n, most of whose men fled ; and although he held his
ground under a mango tree with a small body, some forty-three in number,
of his best troops, his artillery and standard elephant were taken. Shekh
Allahy^ now arrived, and Shih Nawiz Khan engaged the enemy on the
left. Their horsemen, thinking the day was won, had dismounted, and
were seated in the bed of a dry tank. When the Muhammadans approach-
ed, the syces ran away, Lai Bikram4jit and Jaswant Singh alone succeeded
in mounting their horses. The other men tried to escape on foot pursued
by Shekh Allahyar's troops. Many of the horses, owing to the uneven
ground of the tank, fell and threw their riders. Shekh Din Muhammad
BilgdLmi, hampered by his armour and his iron gauntlets, and the unsteadi-
ness of his horse, was set upon by a group of ten Bajputs, who pulled him
off his horse. He' succeeded in cutting off the heads of two men, and broke
his sword on the third. Of the seven left one tried to wrestle with Din
Muhammad, when Sayyad Muhammad, a retainer of Shekh Allahyar's, rode
up and was about to dismount. Din Muhammad told him not to interfere.
Two of the assailants now fled, another tripped and fell, and Din Muhammad
despatched Lim with his mace. Sayyad Muhammad then wounded the last
Bajput, who threw down his sword and begged for his life. This encounter
was witnessed by Shekh AUahyar, then fifteen or sixteen years of age, from
the back of his elephant. Pursuit was made for three kos, till they drew
near to the hills of Bijipur. In the morning 1720 dead bodies were counted ;
on the aide of Shiih Naw^ Khan 83 men were wounded and 7 killed, f

Nadir 8Mh*s Invasion.

When Nidir Sh4h invaded India and defeated the Imperial troops near
Kam41 in February 1739, (1161 H.) Muhammad Shah, the day before the
battle, put NawHb Muhammad Khdn in charge of his women. Muhammad
Shdh, the story goes, made some bitter remark as to his absence from the
battle-field, which provoked a quick retort from Muhammad Kh&n. The
Naw^b retired in dudgeon to his house at Bangash ghaf on the Jamna. Many
days after. Nadir Shdh asked for his friend Muhammad Kh^n. The Emperor
sent for him, but the Naw4b replied that he was ill. The messenger went back
and fore several times. At length two of N4dir Shah's chamberlains (naafichi)
and Muhammad Sh4h*s page (khatods) were sent. No longer able to excuse
himself, Naw^b Muhammad Khdn told his companions that his last hour

* On the left hank of the Ganges, in parganah KewaiL

t HadikaUul'AkdUm IkUm II, art. Aitul, and Iklun III, art. Bilgrim, Account
of Shekh Din Muhammad.

V V

832 W. Irvine— TA« Bangath Nawdbs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

bad come. Patting on his chain mail-shirt (zarrah) , hia breastplate and
back-piece (hagtar and ehahdr-aina)^ his helmet (khuz) and gauntlets
(dasUfdna), and attaching to his waist his shield, sword and dagger, he
started for the audience hall, taking with him his son, Ahmad Khan. Mu-
hammad Kh&n, being a mere soldier, did not understand a single word of
Persian, Turki or Pushtu, while Ahmad Khin understood all three.*
When they arrived, N4dir Sh4h and Muhammad Shdh were seated on two
chairs in a line. Two hundred Wilayatis were on the right and two hun«
dred on the left of Nidir Shah with drawn swords in their hands. The
master of the ceremonies (*Arzbegi) announced Muhammad Kh4n, stating
that he was armed and refused to leave his sword at the door, on the ground
that he was a soldier, not a noble, and that a soldier's jewels were his arms.
N&dir Shah directed that he should be admitted armed. When Muham-
mad Kh&n appeared, he first made obeisance to his own king, and then
turning to Nadir Sh4h presented his dagger by way of offering (nazar),
Nidir Shah touched and remitted it. Muhammad Khan then went and
stood at the right side of Muhammad Shah. Nddir Sh4h remarked, " Bro-
ther Mirza Muhammad Beg, you have three faithful servants, and the rest
are traitors ; those three are Nasir Kh4n, Kh&n Dauran Khan and Muham-
mad Kh&n ; from these I received no letters, from all the rest I received
invitations to invade your country." Muhammad Khan craving leave, re-
marked that none was so faithless as he ; for had he been staunch His Majes-
ty would not have easily come so far ; and he regretted that he had not
been posted to the van of the army. N4dir Sh4h made no reply. After a
short interval a khila't, more valuable than given to any of his equals,
was granted. Putting on the robes, he made his obeisance, but gave no
money offering. Nddir Sh4h's wazir, thinking this was wrong, asked the
reason. Muhammad Kh&n answered that it was not a soldier's business to

give tribute of gold and silver, that he left to amirs and wazirs. He was

only a soldier, and his head was his offering.

Some days after this, Muhammad Khdn attended an audience, when the

two kings were seated as before, guarded by the WiUyatis with drawn swords.

N&dir Shih's Persian troops and a small number of Muhammad Shdh's men

were drawn up outside. With Muhammad was a Shekhzida of Shekhpur,t

very clever but very thin and very short. He was a perfect master of the art

of archery, and possessed arrows of every sort.;(

* Pfr Muhammad Khawas is named as the authority for this story.

t A village close to Kamalganj, on the Cawnptxr road, 8 miles south of Faxrukhi-

UdL.

X The following are the names of varioos kinds of arrows then in use : 1. Zaia,
it tears the flesh : a single arrow costs as much as a gold coin. 2. Kalendra. 8.
Kohar^iardsh, 4. Ohwd, with a head three fingers broad ; it makes a wound like a

•'

1878.] W. Irrine— 2%0 Bangash NawiU of BsrrukhdbdJ. 888

Nadir Shih called out a champion, a great big man, and asked Muham-
mad Sb4h to match him. Muhammad Kh4n proposed to meet him, but the
Shekhzida offered to go instead. The Nawdb laughed at him, and
said he did not want to be turned into the laughing stock of the armj.
The Shekhzida would not listen. Meanwhile, the perspiration poured down
Muhammad Khdn's body from anzillEy, and he muttered a prayer to 6K>d.
Seeing his opponent, the Persian said he would lift him and carry him
off on his lance point. The combatants then galloped their horses at
each other, and the Persian several times failed to touch the Shekh.
At last his lance hitting him penetrated through his armour, and
he was lifted from his horse, sticking to the end of the lance like a naf
(tumbler), and he bled a little. Nadir Shih beg^n to laugh, and the counte-
nances fell of those on the other side. Then wounded as he was, the Shekh
let fly an arrow at the horseman's head so that it went through his steel
head-piece and his chain-shirt, then entering his horse's body it came out and
fell into the ground uninjured. The man stunned sat on his horse for a minute
with the lance in his hand. The Shekh, with the lance still sticking into
him, called out " Come and remove this, for the man is dead." N4dir Sh&h
praised the Shekh highly and gave him a JehilaH, On the 7th Safar, 1152
H. (5th May, 1739), N^klir Shah left Delhi, taking with him aU his plun-
der.

Muhammad Khan's correspondence contains little or no reference to
the invasion of N^Ldir Shdh, possibly because he was present in person at
head- quarters, and thus had less occasion to write letters. Only onoe, in writ-
ing to Baji Bao, he declares that when Nadir Shdh attacked Kandahar, the
Afghans of Kabul wrote that if Muhammad Khan were appointed they
would resist, they only wanted a leader. When he spoke to the Emperor,
the plan was at first approved but subsequently rejected.

When Baji K4o, after the departure of Nadir Sh&h, wished the nobles
to unite in one confederation to reduce the affiurs of the Taimurya line to
better order, Muhammad Khan was one of the nobles to whom he wrote.
The Nawab returned a favourable reply, though, as he professed, he had
little further interest in the world — ^'^ dtmyd nakshe ast bar-db o ziydda az
Mtrdb nesf* — a remark which reminds one of Bacon's —

*' Who then to frail mortality shall trust
Bat limns on water, or bat writes in dost."

These plans were put an end to by B&ji Bao's death in the year 1740.

spear. 5. Ifukia, without head, it inflicts a blow but no wound. 6. Thitth, 7. An^
kii'ddr, with a bent head like a saddle-niter's needle. 8. Ndwak^ tliis is a kind of
pipe of steel like a flute (pkngi) attached to the bow. In tliis district Siroli Chand
Thok, in parganah Shamsabid East, is celebrated for its bows and arrows.

834 W. Irrine— 1^0 Bangatk Nawdht of Farrukhdbid. [No. 4,

»

Death of Akhar Khdn.

It was about this time, 1152 H. (1739), that Nizim-ul-MuIk and bis
son, Gb&zi-ud-din, now at tbe bead of affairs, disgusted Mubammad
Kban bj non-fulfihnent of a promise to confirm bim in bis govern-
ment of A114h4b4d, wbich was given to Amir Kb^n 'Umdat-ul-Mulk.*
Mubammad KbAn quitted Court without leave and retired to bis estates.
8ber Zam&n Khdn and Abu Samad Kb&n were sent at tbe bead of a large
force, with orders to turn bim out of bis territory. Nawab Miibammad
Kb&n, not being in good health himself, sent bis elder sons, Akbar Khan and
Ahmad Kh&n, to oppose the invaders. Akbar Kb&n had ten thousand horse,
and Ahmad Khan five hundred bors^ and one hundred swivel gpms carried
on camels. The foot soldiers were also very numerous.

The two armies met at Rao-ka-Sikandra in tbe Aligafb district. Now,
Mubammad Kb&n had instructed bis chief -men that on no account were
they to allow Akbar Kb&n to fight on horseback, for being a young man
of rash temper, he might ride into the enemy's ranks and be destroyed. The
Patbans therefore forced Akbar Khan to mount an elephant. Ahmad
Khan's elephant was coming up alongside, when Akbar Kb&n called out
'* Keep that elephant back, why are you driving it up beside mine." Akbar
Kh4n was of a very proud nature, and being the next in age, he did not defer
even to tbe eldest son, l^iim Khdn, thinking that on Muhammad Kb&n's
death he, Akbar Kh6n, would succeed. Ahmad Khdn was vexed by his
brother's words, and drove his elephant off to some distance.

Tbe battle then began, both of the nobles sent from Delhi were slain,
and the Fafhans gained the day. Then Ahmad Khan out of revenge
turned bis camel swivels in the direction of Akbar Khdn, and ordered thena
to be discharged. The ball from one of tbe zamhurak penetrated Akbar
Khdn's brain, and be was killed on the spot. They brought tbe body home,
and Nawdb Mubammad Khdn mourned much for bim, lying for three days
on his cushion weeping for him and fasting.

Muhammad Khan negotiates for Ali Muhammad Khdn Itohela,

In 1158 H. (18th March, 1740— 7th March, 1741), Rijab Hamand
was sent as Ndzim to Katahr, with orders to expel 'Ali Muhammad Kh^n
Bobela. In this difiiculty the Rohela appealed to the Nawab to intercede
for him, for although Hamand had given his acquittance for tbe kharif^
be still showed hostile intentions. The Nawab wrote to ^amr-ud-din
Khdn, Wazir, hoping that he would not send his son Mir Mu'in-ud-din
Khdn, to reinforce Rdjab Harnand. 'Ali Muhammad Khdn was a loyal
subject, who had attended Court every vear, and in 1729 when 'Azim-ullah
Khdn Zahir-ud-daula, the wazir's brother, went against the Sayyads of B^r-
ba, the Rohela joined with bis troops and did good service. A man who

♦ Dow, II, 488.

1878.] W. Irvine— The Bangash Nawdhs of liirruJchdhdd. 835

perforins such services should not be ruined for some little fault, especially
at a time when the rebels (the Mahrattas) were very strong. Even if a
fault had been committed, let it be forgiven. ^4im Kh^n was also instructed
to urge the same objections to the wazir personally. But on the 4th Mu-
harram, 1154 H. (11th March, 1741) letters were received from Kaim
Khan, stating that the wazir insisted on presenting his son, Mir Mu'in-ud-din
to the Emperor, so that he might be appointed to support Rajah Hamand.
Before this, Muhammad Eh&n had sent Rahmat Khan and Sh&h Ikh-
tiyar to negotiate with Rajah Harnand. Sh4h Ikhtiyar came back with *
a message asking for two trusty men. Mul^im Khdn and 'Abdullah Khan
were sent with him, and they took with them the wazir's letter in originaL
They re<iched Bud&on. Meanwhile Rahmat Kb&n had joined the Rajah, and
remained in his camp six days. Then he was dismissed, and the R&jah made
three or four marches of twenty kos, and drew near to the army of 'All
Muhammad Khan, who had enca^iped at seven or eight kos from Anwala.*
In this interval Muhammad Kh4n had advised 'Ali Muhammad Kh&n
not to hold money too dear, but to settle matters. The Nawab had never
seen his troops, no doubt they were efficient. But, by aid from friends,
matters might be brought to a happy conclusion. He should, however,
strengthen his posts and collect men and material. His men should be
called in from all outlying posts to one point. No opponent could carry
away the soil, and after he had retired the thdnas could be restored as
before. If the troops were scattered, they could not support each other,
and if one party suffered a reverse, all the rest were disheartened. All this
had been experienced and proved by Muhammad Khin. But as far as
possible, soft words should be used, and money spent to get rid of the diffi-
culty. If in no way it could be settled, even at the cost of a year's income,
then an efficient resistance should be made.

The- affair ended by the defeat and death of Rdjah Harnand. f Muham-
mad Khan did his best to persuade the wazir that 'AH Muhammad Khan
had not meant to fight, and that the calamity was not his fault. He was
still ready to submit.

Nawab Muhammad Khan's correspondence with ' Ali Muhammad Khan
ends with the acknowledgment of a letter, which mentioned the arrival of the
Bohelas at Almorah in Kumaon on the 5th Ramzan, 1154, (8rd Nov. 1741).
The hillmen had fled to the other side of the Sarjd, while the zamind^ of
Srinagar and Sirmtir Bahat had sent his brother to treat. Snow having
fallen, the Rohelas had removed to Rudrpur and would soon be back at Anwala.
Muhammad Kh^n refers to the advice he had given that, the climate being
severe and the produce small, an .arrangement should be made. The coor-

* In the Bareli diBtrict.

t life of HafijB Bahmat Eh&n, pp. 16, 17.

336 W. Irvine— 2%^ Ban^h Naioabn of B»mik%dhdd. [No. 4,

tiers, he sajs, looked on a settlement as a yictoiy, and he advised 'All
Muhammad Eh&n to report to Court that, to please them, he had left the
hills and had returned to Anwala.

Nardyan Das plunders Ndjth Alt Kkdn^s camp,

Nar4yan IMis, an officer of K6jah Jai Singh Sawfie, had been sent to
restore order in Bhad&war. While there, his troops got out of hand from
want of pay, and plundered the equipage of Najib 'Ali Ehin, an officer in
the employ of Kamr-uddin Khin, the wazir, who was collecting in Earhal.*
Nawfib Muhammad Kh&n, who at the time was faujdir of Shikohdbad,*
sent Amr Singh and Sh^istah Kh^n to persuade Nar&jan Das to give up
the property. Purdil Khdn was despatched with men to aid Najib 'Ali
Kb in, and Ja*far Khan Bakhshi, who was out in the parganahs, was
directed to follow. In addition Mangal Kh^n was sent. When the latter
reached Sarae Ajit Mall, and Ja'far Khan was near Itdwah, Nardyan D&s
made off by the fords on the Jamna. They followed and persuaded him to
deliver up one elephant, elephant kettle-drums, several swivel guns (rakhla)
and cannon, with carts and bullocks. After considerable difficulty, an ac-
quittance was obtained from Najib 'AU Khan and forwarded to the wazir.

Story of a Mango.

I introduce here, as an illustration of manners, a story about a won-
derful mango tree in Farrukhibad. One day Muhammad Kh&n was seated
in the back seat of Muhammad Shah's hauda during a hunting-expedi-
tion. The Emperor ate a mango half a seer in weight, of very fine taste,
good colour and exquisite aroma. He gave the stone to Muhammad Kh&n^
who wrapped it in his handkerchief, and sent it to l^&im Kh&n then at Far-
rukh&bdd« K4im Khan came out to meet it with honour as far as Soronf,
through which , before the founding of Kdsganj,} ran the road to Delhi.
The mango stone was planted in the Haiyat Bagh, where is Muhammad
Khan's tomb. The fruit it yielded when it grew up had no equal in Far-
rukhdbad, though only half as good as the original.

Whenever it began to flower, a company of infantry (najth) was sta-
tioned round it, and they kept guard over it.§ During the fruit season
thirty seers of milk a day were poured over the roots. It stood at the

* Both in the Kanipiui district.

t On the Barhganga, 27 miles N. of Eta and about eO miles K. W. of Fairakhi-

X Nineteen miles N. of Eta and about 8 miles S. W. of Soron.

} Similar honours were paid in the time of the late Naw£b of Rimpur to the tree
" Samar-hihisht" in a village just east of Thina Bhowan in the Muzafftunagar dia^
trict. This tree has an entry in the khewaf or Proprietary Becord all to itself. I
think the Naw&b paid Rs. 300 for the tree.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%tf Banga^h Natoih* of Farruihdbdd. 337

head of N&sir Khan's tomh, who had once heen Subahdar of K^bul. Nawdb
Mnzaffiir Jang (1771 — 1796) tried to propagate the tree by budding, but
with the greatest difficulty the gardeners obtained one tree, wbich was put in
the 'Ali B^h, where it was known as the " golah" mango. Nawdb Shaukat
Jang (1813 — 1823) once sent several of the mangoes from the tree in the
Haiyat Bagh to Hakim Mahndi 'Ali Khan, chakladar of Muhamdi in
Audh, who lived for many years in the Fatehgarh cantonment. Mahndi 'Ali
Khan said he had eaten few mangoes equal to them, and he asked for
some cuttings. Shaukat Jang gave permission, but from the day the out-
ings were taken, the original tree began to decay and in one year it dried up
and died.

Muhammad KMtCs death and his character.

The close of Nawfib Muhammad Khin's career was now at hand. He
was m>ore than eighty (lunar) years old when an abscess formed in his neck.
The Emperor sent a letter of condolence and one of his private physicians,
Alwi Khan. The Hakim's treatment was of no avail, and on the 2nd Zil
Ka'd 1156 H. (9th December 1743), Muhammad Khdn breathed his last.
When Muhammad Shah heard of his death, he wrote this chronogram —

8itun'i'hdb'%-mulk-i'H.ind uftdd, *

About three hours before his death, the Nawib, to prove the strength
with which God had endowed him, took up his bow and arrow from his bed,
and aimed at the roof with such force that the arrow buried itself up to
its head in the wood.

He was interred in the Haiyiit B&gh, in the village of Nekpur Khurd,
pargana Pah&ra, half a mile or so west from the Mau gate of the city.f
The tomb stands on an elevated platform and is surmounted with a high
dome, which can be seen for some miles round. It was bmlt by the
Kawab in his own lifetime. Bound it he planted a garden in which was
every fruit to be found at Delhi. There were forty wells for irrigation, and
the income of twelve villages was spent on it. Boshan Khan, chela, had the
care of it. While digging the foundations foi the tomb, an iron "y^*a"{
weighing five maunds was found. The workmen proposed to fix it on the
top of the dome, but Boshan Kh&n said he could get five maunds of iron easily
enough, and he had another spike made. The iron rod thus disinterred was
pat down at the gate of the garden, and young men went daily to try their
strength by lifting it. In Ndsir Jang's time (1796 — 1813) it somehow got

• Another **Tarikh" is " Dakhl-ul-jinnat wfli."
t EiH lUke, p. 68.

X See Kali Bile, p. 127) for a description of what is evidently the same Oaja as
that referred to in the text.

• 338 W. Irvine— 1%« Bangagh Nawdhs of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

broken. The two pieces, in 1839, still lay near the Man gate, and the Hin-
dus worshipped them, saving, that it was the head of Bhim Sen's spear.*

Nawab Muhammad Khan to the last maintained very plain and soldier-
like habits. His manner was not overbearing, he had no pride, and was
free from self-glorification. He always wore clothes of the commonest
stuff. In his audience hall and in his house the only carpet consisted of
rows of common mats, and on these the Fa^hdns and chelas and all persons,
high or low, had to be content to sit. The Nawab sometimes sat on a cu-
shion, sometimes without one. As the Fafh^ns presented themselves, they
uttered an " Auji Nawab ^ saidm ^alaik'^ then sat down in rows. At meal
times five to six hundred Fafhins would sit down to the same trays. To
each were given two unleavened cakes of half a seer each with a cupful o£
meat, and a flat dish of paldo, or whatever else there was, all receiving an
equal share. The same food was placed before the Nawab. Fathans ge-
nerally eat paldo of cow and buffalo flesh, and this the Naw4b liked. He
disliked soft bread. They say his kitchen expenses amounted to five hun-
dred rupees a day.

When any noble from Delhi visited the Nawdb, no change was made,
the same mats were spread to sit on, and the same food presented. The
, visitors were astonished at the contrast between his great wealth and power,
and the simplicity of his personal habits. Then, for each day after their
arrival, the Nawab would name some chela to entertain the visitor sump-
tuously.

Once Naw&b 'Umdat-ul-Mulk Amir Kh&n, on his way from the East,
passed through Farrukhdb^d with his followers, who were so effeminate in
their habits that they applied lamp-black to their eyelids, black powder to
their teeth, and red dye to their hands and feet ; wearing also finger-rings,
silver bracelets and ear-rings. The Naw4b himself adopted the same style.
Their camp was pitched in the Lakhola Bdgh, planted by Nawdb ^aim.
Khan before his accession.f ^aim Khan went to see Amir Khan, with
whom he was on familiar terms, having known him at Delhi. Amir Kh6n
proposing a visit to Nawdb Muhammad Khan, Kdim Khan said he would in-
form *' B4b4 Khdn" (his father) that day, and would take him the next day.
Accordingly he went from Amefhi^ and told his father. Next morning
the diwdn-khdna was adorned with a white cloth, and a common pillow
was put ready. Then Muhammad Khan sat down with a high cap on, such
as then usually worn at Mail. Before him were a pdn-ddn of painted wood

• K4H EAe, p. 127.

t It lies outside the El&diii gate* east of the city, between it and Fatehgafh can-
tonment.

X Half a mile ieom the Ganga gate, at the 1^ . E. comer of the city.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2^^ Bangash Nawdhs of Farrukhdhdd, 839

and a bell-metal spittoon. Amir Kb&n arrived and was placed at the Na-
wab's side. After a little, the Nawab taking out a prepared betcUleaf from
his wooden box and a bottle of scent from a wooden casket, presented pan
and scent to the -visitor and dismissed him. Nawab Amir Khan was much
amused at this poor display. On the road back he said to Kaim Khan,
Though your father is a Bawan Hazari, he looks like a villager, whj do
you not teach him better ?" Kaim Khan gave some playful answer.
Meanwhile Muhammad Khan had given orders to his chela, Ja'far
Khan, the chief Bakhshi, (who gives his name to the Mohulla Bazarya Ja'far
Khan), to provide such an entertainment that his master's name should not
be a byeword in Delhi. Ja'far Khdn got out some thousands of silver vessels,
he cut up many thousand rupees' worth of gold brocade, and spread scarlet
broad-cloth all over his bagh. He sent for all the favourite singers, and
made ready the most exquisite meats. Nawab Muhammad Khdn sent to
tell Nawab Amir Khan that a feast was ready at Ja'far Khdn's house. After
dinner, Amir Elhan's men proposed making over the silver dishes for safety
to the servants of the house, but Ja'far Kh4n refused them, sajring they
were the perquisite of the khidmatgars. The gold brocade was taken away
by the singing-women and their men. Amir Khdn was now loud in his
praise of Muhammad Kh&n. At his next visit, the Nawab made him a
handsome present, and excused himself for having entertained him so badly,
on the ground that he was only a soldier.

Nawab Muhammad Khan was a great lover of the fair sex. We know
that he had twenty-two sons and twenty-two daughters who grew up and
were married. For the number of his concubines he was like a second
Solomon. He had, they say, seventeen hundred women in the private
apartments of his palaces. There were besides nine establishments (akhd"
ra) of one hundred women each, taken from all classes, Kachi, Chamar»
Koli, Bdjput, Banya, B^hman, Sayyad, Mughal, Pafhan and Shekh. Many
had seen their lord's face but once, yet all their life long they received the
monthly allowance first fixed. Of the seventeen hundred, some nine hun-
dred had died in the Nawab's lifetime ; their tombs were in the Buland
Bagh*, where no men were ever buried. Some days after the death of
f £[aim Khan became known, the Bibi Sahiba, Muhammad Khan's widow,

like a sensible woman, threw open the doors of the Bar4 Mahal, sending
word to the inmates that they had three days given them, in which they
might leave if they liked. Those that stayed would get bread of barley
and clothes of gazi (the commonest quality of cotton cloth), for neither
Muhammad Khan nor Kdim Khan was there to provide for them. About
four hundred women elected to leave with all their property, and four hun-
dred only remained to eat the Bibi Sahiba's barley bread.

* JuBt outside the Mau gate.

X X

840 W. Irvine— -1%^ Bangash Nawdhs of FarrukMbdd. [No, 4,

The Ohelas.

Slavery is a part of the Mubammadan l^al system, but there must be,
I think, few instances, in which it has been ctoried to the length practised
by Muhammad Kh6n. Slaves were preferred to equals or relations as
deputy governors of provinces, slaves led his armies, he even kept a body-
guard of slaves.

One of the reasons assigned for this preference is the trouble given bj
his brother Fath&ns of Mau. Many of them at one time had farming
leases of parganahs. If the Nawdb complained of embezzled revenue, their
answer was, that they would fight, but not pay. If one of them was im-
prisoned as a def aidter, all the other Fafh^ns rose in arms till he was releas-
ed. For this reason, it is said, some years after his rise to power, the Nawab
remitted large sums to Afghanistan, and induced a colony of the Bangash
tribe to emigrate and settle in the city of Farrukh4b4d. From among
them he selected eighteen leaders as Jam'adars. They were petted in every
way, the Naw4b looking on them as his own right arm, and to them his
daughters were given in marriage. He gave them land for their houses
on the side of the city nearest to the Ganges, and the quarter to this day
bears the name of Bangashpura.

Another expedient cesorted to was to seize the sons of B4jputs and
Br&hmans, who were then made into Muhammadans. Some were obtained
by consent, some by payment ; others were the sons of revenue defaulters,
whose sons were seized and made Muhammadans. Thousands of boys were
thus obtained and taught the precepts of Isl4m. From them were selected
the leaders of the army, and the collectors of land revenue in the parganahs.

Muhammad Eh&n had qtdte a passion for increasing the number of
his chelas. All his managers (Amils) and deputies (Sdbahdars) had orders
to send him all the Hindu boys, whom they could procure between the ages
of seven and thirteen. When they grew up, they were placed in his poHoe
or army, or were appointed to manage the Naw&b's private afbirs. When-
ever an *afnil had a fight with a troublesome village or invested it, he seized
all the boys he could get, and forwarded them to the Naw&b. Others be-
came Muhammadans of their own accord. In this way, every year one or
two hundred boys were made Muhammadans, and by the end of his Hf e the
Naw&b had made some four thousand chelas. Many of these were killed
in battle in the Naw^b's lifetime, many died without issue, and many were
never married. The descendants of the rest still exist, and are distinguish-
ed as Ohazanfar-haehha (progeny of Ghazanfar), the title of Muhammad
Khan having been Ghazanfar Jang. During the Naw&b*s lifetime these
men were never styled eheias, they were always known as Tifl-i'Sirhdr
(sons of the State). All places of trust were given to them, the Naw4b*8

1878.] W. Iryine— The Bangagh N^twdhs of Farrukhdhdd. 841

household was in their charge, and his whole estahlishment under their
orders. For many of them he obtained the title of Naw4b from the
Emperor.

Of whatever caste a chela had been, he was married to the daughter of
a chela originallj of the same caste, a K4jput was given to a Bijput, a Brah-
man to a Brahman, and so forth. This plan was followed till the time of
Naw§b Ahmad Khan Gh^ib Jang (1752—1771). After that time they all
got mixed together, so that one caste cannot be distinguished from another.
Among the chelas were the sons of powerful Bajahs, who by misfortune
had been captured and made Muhammadans. Thus Shamsher Khan *' Masjid-
wala" is reported to have been a Banafir Rajput, Sher Dil Kh4n was a Tomar,
Pur Dil Khan a G^ur, Daiid Khdn a Brdhman and so forth.

The Nawfib used to tell his chelas to collect as much money, goods or
jewels as possible. In adversity such property could be made of use to
him or themselves. But he who built a masonry structure in any village
would be at once removed from employment. Nothing was to be built but
with sun-dried bricks and mud mortar, and to each chela permission was given
to build a single brick room as reception halL The only exception was in
favour of T4kut Khan, Kh&n Bahadur, of whom we will speak again
presently.*

A teacher was appointed for the boy chelas, his name was Kali Miyan
Sh^h. When a boy could read and write, he was taken before the Nawab ,
who presented him with one hundred rupees, a shield, and a sword, by way
of hkila^i.

From among the chelas of eighteen to twenty years of age, the Naw&b
selected five hundred youths, and trained them as a picked regiment. They
had firelocks of Lahore, accoutrements of Sult^ni broad-cloth, powder-horns
each holding two and a half seer of powder, and each a pouch with one hun-
dred bullets. One day, they were drawn up along the Jamna bank under
the fort at Delhi while the Emperor was seated on the fort wall, with
Muhammad Kh&n standing in an attitude of respect beside him ; Muham-
mad Sh&h ordered them to fire at some moving object in the river, and was
BO delighted with the good practice they made, that he asked for a gift of
the whole corps. Muhammad llihkn made the objection that they were a lot
of Brdhmans and Bijputs, who could do nothing but talk a ryxsMa patois and
use their swords. The Emperor accepted the excuse, and sent one thousand
rupees to be distributed.

The names of the principal chelas, with any facts known about them,
will now be given.

• Only one or two other cheltu) founded any ganj^ and tho fact will be mentioned
under each man's xiamo.

342 W. Irvine — The Banff ash Nawdba of JParrukhdhdd. [No. 4 ,

1. YIkut KhXn, KhXn Bahadub.

On the day after the battle, in which Sayyad Abdulla Kh^n was taken
prisoner, 'Azim Kh4n Ba^a Khail, a friend of Muhammad Khdn's, presented
him with a eunuch whom he named Yalj:ut Khan, and he obtained for hint
from Muhammad Shah the title of Khin Bahadur. Yakdt Khan, is said
to have held the office of N&zir. On his seal were the words —

Ydkiit surkh-ru ha'tufail-UMuhammad ast.

In his case, the Naw4b removed the prohibition against building or
founding towns, saying that as he had no children it did not matter. Seven
ganjes were founded by Yakut Khan.

1. Kdsganj, also sometimes called Yakut ganj. It is now the most
important town in the Eta district with, in 1872, 15,764 inhabitants. It
lies nineteen miles N. of Eta.*

2. 'Aliganj, in parganah 'Azimnagar of the Eta district, 34 miles £•
of Eta, and about 30 miles N. W. of Farrukhabad. The date of the fort
is 1143 H. (6th July 1730— 25th June 1731), and the mason Muhammad
Adam '' Muhammad Khani'' appears to be the same as the man mentioned
at p. 278, who built the fort at Farrukhdbad.f

3. Kauriyaganj. The only identification I can suggest for this place
is the Kauriyaganj in parganah Akrabdd of the Aligarh district, 12 miles
from Aligarh. :(

4. Khud&ganj, on the left bank of the Kdlinadi, in parganah Bhoj-
pur of the Farrukhabad district, on the main road to Cawnpur, 17 miles
S. E. of Farrukhdb&d. The ancient name of the village was Sanauli.
Yikdt Elhdn, besides the bazdr, built a masonry sarde with a high gate, and
a mosque. The date on the gateway was 1152 H. (30th March 1739 — ^18th
March 1740) ;§ it was removed in 1855-6 to make way for the metalled
road to Fatehga^h.

5. Nabiganj. This is a small bazdr on the Grand Trunk Eoad, in the
parganah of Kishni Nabiganj in the Mainpuri district. It lies about half
way between Bewar and Chibramau. ||

6. Y&V^tganj. This town is in parganah Bhojpur of the Farru*£h4-
bid district, about seven miles S. E. of the city of Farrukhabad. KaH Rae

• GaB. N. W. P. IV, 162.

t Gaz. N. W. P. IV, 110. Tho date, 1747 A. D., must be wrong, if the date in
the Persian inscription, 1143 H., is correct.
I Gaz. N. W. P. II, p. 672.
{ E^HIULe, p. 133.
g Gaz. N. W. P. IV, 746.

1878 ] W. Ijy'me— The Bangasl Nawdbs of Farrukhdhdd. 343

(p. 133) says five villages were absorbed: (1), Jakha; (2), Jyau^i; (3).
Makarrabpur ; (4), Mustafabad alias Ganwaganw ; (5), part of Nagla Khem
The place used to be called Sarai Ntiri, from Mijan Ndri Shah, a faqir, or as
some say a eunuch, who built it. In Yakut Khdn's time the site had
become deserted ; he built a masonry sardi and changed the name. There
is still an old masjid, bearing the following inscription :

Ma8Jid'i-*ali hind rdhat fizd
Az lafqfat Ndr Bakhsh-i-Faiz-zd
Sal tdrtkh-ash Khirad guft andar in
" Farz add shud andar dn bahr^-Khudd.^^

This gives the year 1086 H. (March 1675— March 1676).

7. Daryaeganj, in parganah 'Azimnagar of the Eta district, on the
Aliganj and Fatiali road, 28 miles N. E. of Eta. The remains of a large
brick fort built beneath the old bank of the Ganges are still to be seen.*

The chelas of former days used to say that Miyan Kh^n Bahadur
spent twenty-five lakhs of rupees on these gunges, his house, and the hdghs
he planted. The house in which Bakhshi Fakhr-ud-daula used to live was
built by Khan Bahadur ; and he planted the Kala Bagh, and built in it
the Barahdari where Nawab Muzaffar Jang (1771 — 1796) was intended.

YjCkut KhXn lost his life with his master, Kaim Khan, in the disastrous
battle of November 1748, fought with the Rohelas at Dauri Rasulpur near
Buddon. The tradition is, that his elephant carried off his dead body to
'Aliganj, and that he was buried there. His tomb is in the midst of an
enclosure lying at the foot of the fort, surrounded by a low wall of block
kunker. At the foot of his tomb is a mound which is, tradition says, the
burial-place of his elephant. The tomb with its well-preserved enclosing
walls forms, together with the handsome frontage of the ruined tomb on
the high mound above, the chief feature of interest in the place.f In the
statement, on the page just cited, that Y&ktit Khan was originally a Katiya
Thakur of Angraiya, I suspect there is some confusion between him and
another chela, Baz Bahadur Khan. At p. 154 of the Gazetteer, we are told
Khdn Bahadur had no issue, which is probably true, as he was a eunuch. Yet
at p. 69 we hear of his son, Bakhtbuland Khan. In Kdli Rae*s " Fateh-
garh Nama", p. 108, line 15, the Kesri Singh Katiya of Angraiya, who
became a Muhammadan, is said to have borne the name of Baz Bahadur
Khan, and it is he who was the father of Bakhtbuland Khan, and not Ydkut
Khan, Khdn Bahddur.

2. Dalkb Khan. We have already given an account of this chela at
p. 286. There is a Dalerganj called after him. It lies 9 miles N. W, of
Farrukhabad, on the road to Kdimganj.

♦ Gaz. N. W. P. IV, p, 218. f Gaz. N. W. P. IV, p. 110.

341i W. Irvine— T»e Bangash Nawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

8. Shamsheb KhjCn. In 1720-1 he was appointed 'amil of the par-
ganahs of Budaon, Sahaswdn and Mihr^bid (see p. 283). At one time he
had charge of the parganahs of Mosenagar, Bilhor, Akbarpur, Sh&hpur and
Kanauj, all, except the latter, now in the Cawnpur district. Abdul Mansdr
Khdn Safdar Jang on his way from Faizdbad to Delhi crossed the Ganges
at Ndndmau gh4t in parganah fiilhor. Shamsher Kh&n said that Safdar
Jang's advanced tents should not be pitched within his jurisdiction, unless
compensation were paid for any damage caused to the crops. This order
displeased Safdar Jang, and halting, he despatched a camel rider to Farruk-
h&b&d with a letter to this effect : Nawdb ndmddr saldmat, Shamsher-i'
khud rd dor miydn hakufiy wagama 6b na khwdhad mdnd. ** Respected
Naw^b, greeting ! put up your sword (shamsher) in its scabbard, else it will
lose its edge." Muhammad Kh4n ordered S&hib R^, his scribe, to write
an answer to match. The Munshi wrote thus on the back of the note,
Nawdh ndmddr saldmat y %n shamsher mar dan dar ma^rkah-i-maidan he-khun
chashtdah ha-miydn na midyad, " Respected Naw&b, greeting ! this sword,
till it has tasted blood in battle, never returns to its sheath." Safdar Jang, on
receipt of this reply, wished to attack Shamsher Khan at once. His cour-
tiers dissuaded him, pleading the displeasure of the Emperor, adding that
if he won, it would be said he had fought a slave, while if he lost, he would
be dishonoured for ever. Accordingly he left the neighbourhood at once,
and went on to Delhi. Shamsher Kh4n caused the rear guard to be plun-
dered. It is said that the ill-feeling between the rulers of Lakhnau and
Muhammad Khan*s family commenced from this trivial quarrel. On Sham-
sher Khan's seal were the words NigahdaVy ai Muhammad, dh-i-shamsher.
He played a principal part in the events following the death of Nawab Kdim
Kh4n ; he was one of the five chelas arrested and sent to Delhi, where he
was executed in 1750, as will be more particularly related hereafter. His
sons were : 1, Hasan 'Ali Khan ; 2, Rahm 'Ali Khan ; 3, 'Umr 'Ali Khan ;
4, Kazim 'Ali Khan ; 5, Rastil *Ali Khan. There is a Shamsherganj, called
after him, in parganah Bewar of the Mainpuri district.

4. MuKf M KhXn. This chela held Uj jain during the time Muhammad
Khdn was Subah of Malwd. Ho was one of the five sent in custody to
Delhi by Safdar Jang and there executed. The motto of his seal was —
Nahfalakaz ndm-i'Muhamrnad Mufilm, He was with the Nawab from
his early days, and the Bibi Sahiba observed no pardah to him. His sons
were — 1, 'Azim Khan, 2, Hasan 'Ali Khan.

6. Ja'fau KnXy. He was the Nawab's Bakhshi. His house was
near the Takya of Muhammad Zaman Shdh, a faqir brought by Nawab
Ahmad Khan from Delhi ; it was afterwards occupied by Nawab Himmat
Bahadur. He was another of the five chelas executed at Delhi. There is a
Bazarya Ja'far Kh&n in the city called after him.

1878.] W. Irvine— 1%<? Bang ash Natodhs of FarruJchdhdd. 315

6. IslIm KhXk. One of the five principal chelas executed at Delhi.
There is an Islamganj in parganah Bhojpur ; and parganah Amritpur in
the Farrukh&bdd District is also called Islamganj, but whether after this
chela or not, I do not know. He had a son named 'Usman Khdn.

7. SabdXb KhXn. He, too, was one of the chelas executed at Delhi.

8. DAiTD E^hIk. He is said to have been originally a Brahman. He
was one of the chelas, with the Nawab in his younger days, to whom the
Bibi Sahiba observed no pardah. We have seen him employed to take
a rebel Kajah to the Emperor in 1713-14 (see p. 275). In 1720-1 he
was appointed 'amil of parganah Shamshabad. He had charge of the col-
lections of Jaunpur and Bandras, when the subah of Allahabad was under
the Naw&b, and he acted as ndib faujddr of S&rangpur in Malwa. Daud-
ganj, in parganah Azimnagar of the Eta district, was founded by him.

9. Bnt^BE KhXn. a story told of this man shows the amount of license
accorded to these chelas. One day Bhtire Kh&n, coming into darbdr late,
could find no place to sit. Kicking away the pillow separating Muhammad
Kh^n and Kaim Khin, he sat down between the NawiLb and his son. Kdim
£Mn turned angrily to his father, and said " You have given such freedom
to these chelas that they will never respect me." Muhammad Kh4n replied
that he loved them as he did his sons. Kaim Kh&n got up in a rage, and went
off to his home at Amefhi. Muhammad Khan then scolded Bhtire Khdn,
saying, that he had lost confidence in him, for if while he was alive they did
not respect his sons, who knew what they would do when he was dead.
Bhtire Khan putting up his hands, said " May God Almighty grant that I
" never see the day when you no longer live." He was the Naw4b*B deputy
in the Sdbah of Allahdb&d. He was killed in 1728 in the battle against
Bajah Chattarsdl at Ichauli. (See p. 290.)

10. Sa'dat KhXk. He was 'amil of Mandeshwar* in M^wa, south
of Nimach, during the time the Naw4b held that subah. His seal bore the
words Be lutf-i-Muhammad Sa^dat na hud, A grandson. Imam Khan, lived
in Shaukat Jang's time (1818—1823) at the gateway of the Khas Mah&l,
and received an allowance of a rupee a day. Another descendant, Ghairat
Kh&n, was alive in 1889, but so poor that he had not even food to eat.
When Muhammad Khan quarrelled with Sa^dat Khan Burhan-ul-Mulk,
Subahdar of Audh, he gave his chela, Sa'dat Khdn, the ironical title of
Burhan-ul-Mulk. The revenues of the Gwdli^r country, then under imme-
diate charge of 'Umr Kh6n Gwaliiri, were paid in at Mandeshwar.

11. Neem^Im KhIk. He was one of the four chelas to whom the
Bibi Sahiba used to appear unveiled. He had the charge of the buildings
at Farrukh&bad ; his masjid and well, fort and hdgh still existed in 1889 ;

* Thornton, 645. In Scindiah's territory and the chief place of a parganah. It
li©8 360 miles 8. W. of Gwili^ and 80 miles N. W. from Ujain.

316 W. Irvine— T^e Bangasl Nawdhg of Fan^uJcliabdd. [No. 4,

he also built a mosque at Chibramau near the tomb of Sadr Jah&n, the
martyr, on the edge of the tank. His motto was, Sastam az luff-i-Muham*
madnekndm. We have seen him employed (p. 301) to extricate K.k\m. Khdn
from the clutches of Sa'dat Khan Burhdn-ul-Mulk at Faizabad. In 1720-1
he was appointed Amil of parganah Bhojpur, (see p. 283).

12. JahXn KuXn. He was one of the Bakhshis, and an old chela to
whom the Bibi Sahiba kept no pardah. He founded Jahdnganj in parganah
Bhojpur, on the road from Farrukhabad to Chibramau, about 9 miles S. of
the former place. His son, Hahmat Khan, who was Bakhshi to Nawab
Ahmad Khan, built the masjid at the Mau gate of the city.

13. KamXl KhXn. He is the founder of Kamdlganj on the Cawnptir
road, 9 miles south-east of Farrukhabad. In 1720-1 he had charge of Sipri
and Jalaun (see p. 283). He was killed with Naw&b Kaim Khdn in the
battle of Dauri.

14. RosHAN KhIn. The Haiyat Bagh and the building of the Nawab's
tomb were under his charge (see p. 337), There was a Roshanganj, named
after him, somewhere on the road to Chibramau, but the site is not known.

15. DiLiCwAB KhXn. He had the epithet of the " Janubi" (the south-
erner) and was Darogha of the Diwan Khana. He must be the same as
the man styled in one place "the Aurangabadi. "

16. PxiEDiL KhXn. He was a son of the Gaur Rajah of Siroli (see
p. 278). He was Darogha of the camel establishments.

17. Fakhb-fd-din KhXn. He held the office of Bakhshi of the army,
and was also styled Fakhr-ud-daula. He played a prominent part on the
accession of Muzaffar Jang in 1771, and was naib till his assassination a
year afterwards. He is buried in the Bihisht Bagh near the Mau gate, in a
separate tomb, a little to the left as you enter the gateway.

18. 'AlIwal KhXn. He was originally Kesri. Singh, son of Chattar
Singh, a Bamtela Thakur of the village of Baraun, and some of his descen-
dants still exist in that village and Babarpdr,* This man is said to have
been a bit of a wag. Once Muhammad Khan appointed him 'Amil of some
parganah. On starting to take up his duties, 'Al^wal Khdn mounted with
his face to his horse's tail. The Nawab called out to ask the scoundrel
what he meant by riding like that ? His answer was, ** I am looking
behind me to make quite sure the Nawdb Sahib is not sending ofE another
'Amil just behind me." The allusion was to the frequent changes of
'Amils, no one being longer than two or three months in one parganah.
Dismissals and appointments were constantly occurring. On hearing the
above answer, the Nawdb said, " Tell that buffoon that he is appointed for
a year."

♦ Kali lUe, p. 120.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2!Se Sangagh Nawdhs of FarruhUhdd, 847

19. EusTAM KhXet. He was killed with K^im Eh4n in the battle of
Dauii (1748).

20. 'Abd-ub RAstfL EhIn. He was killed in 1728 at the battle of
Ichauli, (see p. 290).

21. Hiji SarfabXs KhjCk. He was one of Ahmad Khan's Bakhshis,
and he will be mentioned in the Allahabdd campaign, and in the retreat to
the hills.

22. JXn NisiB EhXk. He held charge of Ujain in Mdlw& as the
deputy of Mukim Kbdn. Having incurred the Nawab^s displeasure he was
flogged, and being very frail he died at the first stroke.

23. Bahmat KhXn. There was a Rahmatganj founded bj him, but
its site is not known now. He was distinguished as '* Sawdrahwala," and
commanded a cavalry regiment.

24. Eabm Eha'n. He was Darogha of the elephants ; his seal bore
the inscription Ba fazUi'Muhammad Karm ndmddr,

25. JowXhib EhXn. He was Darogha of the stables.

26. SalXbat Khan. He was the '' Mir 'Imarat" or superintendent
of buildings. ,

27. Shamsheb KhXn, II. He had charge of the poultry.

28. MahtXb KhXk. Darogha of the kitchen.

29. NXmbab KuJis. He was a Gahilw^r Thdkur of the village of
Chilsara, parganah Shamshdbdd West, and his descendants still live there.
A mosque built by him still stands, and to the west of the village are the
foundations of some ganj or fort once belonging to him.

30. Nl]iO)AB KhXk, II. 31. Sulaiman Khin. 32. Khushydl Khan.
83. Fulad Khan. 34. Nasir Kh^n. 35. Sherdil Khan, a converted
Tomar Rajput. 36. Nfihirdil Khan. 37. Hafizullah Khdn. 38. Lutf-
ullah Khan. 39. Bakhtbuland Khin. 40. Lai Khan. 41. Mashraf
Khan. 42. Mubdrik Khdn. 43. Najm-ud-din Khan. 44. Ranmast
Khan. 45. Bdra Khdn. 46. Pahar Khan. 47. Nakki Khan.

The Nawdb'8 territory.

We do not know precisely how the large territory, of which Muhammad
Kh&n was at his death de facto ruler, had been acquired. A grant mjdgir
of the parganahs of Shamsh4bfid and Bhojpur in the first year of Muham-
mad Shah's reign (1719) may have formed the nucleus ; as for the rest

•* The good old rule

Bufficeth them, the simple plan,
That they should take, who have the power,
And they should keep who can."

The extent of the Nawab*s dominions was popularly described by the
following doggrel verse —

Y T

348 W.Irvine — Tlte Bangnah Nawdhs of Farruhhdhdd, [No. 4,

Miyan do ah o miyan do kdf
SItuda hdsil in mulk jumla mu^df
Shavand kasha-i-Kol o Kord had^d

m

JBa daryde Oang o Jaman insardf.

There is a certain amount of exaggeratioti in the east and west
boundaries thus given, and the parganahs across the Ganges are ignored.
Taking the existing division into districts, one may say roughly that
Nawab Muhammad held the western half of the Cawnpur district, the
dividing line being drawn from Bithdr on the Ganges to Musenagar on
the Jamna ; the whole of the Farrukhabad district ; all of the Mainpuri
district except perhaps one parganah ; the whole of the Eta district, except
two small parganahs in the north-west corner ; nearly one half of the
Budaon district across the Ganges ; and one parganah of the Shahjah&npur
district. If the Kauryaganj founded by Khan Bahadur be correctly iden-
tified with the town in the 'Aliga^h district, then the Nawdb's authority
did extend within twelve miles of Kol-'Aligarh. The local tradition states
that parganah M&rahra in the Eta district was obtained in farm from the
Sayyad jagirdars in 1738,* but the mode of acquisition was most probably
a little less legal than through a farming lease. We know from the Life of
Hafiz Kahmat Eh&nf that Muhammad KhSn held Budaon, for it was while
on an expedition with the Farrukhabad 'Amil against some zamindars, that
Daud Kh^n caused Shah Alam Kh&n, the father of Hafiz Eahmat Khin, to

be assassinated.

The anecdotes already given show that the Naw&b kept a very strict

watch upon his agents, moving them frequently and prohibiting them from
building permanently. In this way he seems to have kept complete con-
trol over his country and his orders were implicitly obeyed. The following
notices are gleaned from Sahib liae's collection of the Nawab*s corre-
spondence.

Kanatjj. In the second year of Muhammad Shah's reign (Feb. 1720
to Jan. 1721) the faujdari of this Sarkar was in the name of the Nawab's
son, j^aim Khan. Then, when Rdjah Girdhar Bahadur was removed from
Allah&bdd, he begged for a territory near his house as a residence for his
dependents. The faujddri of Kanauj was then relinquished to Girdhar
Bahadur. After his death it passed from one to another till the Bhadau-
riya Bajah obtained it. When Muhammad Khan was restored to Allah&bad
in the year 1148 H., he objected strongly to leaving his home country in
the hands of a " hypocritical infidel." The^a^iV was therefore granted to
him. The nett income he states at Bs. 8000 a year. The old jumma pay-
able to the Imperial Treasury was 35,00,000 of dam, but after enhancement
it had been raised to one kror of ddm*

• Gaz. IV, 168, 162. f Seo p. 9.

1878.] W. Irvme^The Bangash Naiodbs of FarrukUhdd. S49

SniHFTTB. Muhammad Khan held this parganah before he went to
Bundelkhand in 1139 H. (Aug. 1726 — Aug. 1727). It was then resumed
as part of the khdisa or crown-lands and a grant was made for only one
harvest. The Nawab held the parganah, however, for several years, after
which it was again resumed. Through the intercession of Khdn Dauran
Khan, it was on the 10th Ramzan 1145 H. (13th Feb. 1733) granted per-
manently from the Rabi harvest of 1140 F. (March 1733). This being a
border district, some difficulty was caused by defaulters taking refuge in
the estates of Kajah Hindu Singh of Chachendi.

Itawah. In the later years of his life Muhammad Khdn was faujdar
of Itawah. He was displaced by Eaj Adhiraj Jai Singh Sawae about 1153
H. (March 1740—March 1741).

Jalesab. Through Rajah Jai Singh Saw^e, a lease in Yakut Khan's
name was obtained of Kokaltash Khan's jdgirs in this parganah. This
produced an objection from Kasir-ud-daula Sadat Khan ZuUfikdr Jang,
and the Emperor addressed a farmdn to Muhammad Kh^, dated the 2nd
Zi'l ICa'd of the 24th year (30th Dec. 1741). The lease was then relin-
quished.

Sauj and Ali-eheba. The former was the jd^/r of *Amir-ul-Umra,
Khan Dauran Khan ; the latter that of Farrah Khan Bahddur and Mu-
hamdi Khan Bahddur.

Babnah SohXb with a revenue of ten lakhs of dam was taken on
ijdra or lease by Yakdt Khdn from the jagirdar.

NiDHPTTB, Aebabab.(d, and Sikandabpttb are mentioned as in the pos-
session of the Nawab. In one 3'^ear the estimated revenue of Akbarabad
and Sikandarpur was put at 65,000, or at the outside 70,000 rupees. In
1146 F. (1738-9) there appears to have been a drought.

KoiL and Sikaitdbah are stated to have been in the Nawab*s pos£es-
sion in 1146 F. (1738-9).

SABifH must have been included in the Farrukhdb&i territory, since
Muhammad Khan was called on to furnish an escort for treasure coming
from Jinnat-ul-bul&d, Bangal. The revenue of Sakith is stated to have been
one lakh of rupees, besides ih^jagirs farmed to the faujdar of Itawah.

KuBAOiii. Kaim Khan received 17 or IS lakhs of dam from this par-
ganah as payment on account of the faujddri of Kanauj.

SinKonXBio. This parganah appears to have been held as a dependen-
cy on Itawah, in which Karhal does not appear to have been included.

Bhokoa'm and TAligbIm were in 1726 in the jdgir of Khan Daurdn
Kh^n.

Anwalah. This parganah was at one time the jdgir of 'Umdat-ul-
Mulk 'Amir Khan.

860 W. Irrine— 2^4? Bangmh Natoah9 of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

Muhammad KhdtCi wife and children.

The Naw&b Beems to have had but one legal wife, M&laha Bind or
Baba'ha Bdnu, alias the Bibi Sd^ba, daughter of Kisim Kh&n Bangash.
She has been often mentioned already, and will be often mentioned again.
She had two sons, i^aim Kh&n, the second Nawab, and Ditim Kbin, who died
in childhood ; also two daughters, Boshan Jahan, wife of Koshan IQian Ban«
gash, and another who died unmarried. She died on the 28th Zi*l Ka'd 1182
H. (5th April 1769), and was buried in a separate tomb in the Bihisht Bagh
a little to the south-west of Naw&b Ahmad Khan's mausoleum. There is a
handsome masjid in the city built by her, called the JBtbi Sdhiba lei masjid^
and the quarter round it is known by that name. There is also a Muhalla
Bibi ganj near the Mau gate.

The unsettled times of the 18th century are reflected in the fact that
seven sons of Muhammad Khan were killed in battle ; nine died deaths of
violence, and only six died a natural death. The names of the sons (whose
descendants will be given in an Appendix) are as follows :

1. ¥4im Elhdn, succeeded his father as Nawab (1743 — 1748) as will
be related hereafter. He left no issue.

2. Ahmad Khan, succeeded in 1750 and died in 1771.

3. Murid Kh£n. Full brother of Murtazza Khin (No. 4). He was
killed with ^aim Khan, leaving three sons.

4. Murtazza Khdn. He was cut down at the order of MuzafFar Jang,
son of Ahmad Kh&n (No. 2), and he died a prisoner in the Mubarik Mahal
within the fort. He left seven sons.

5. Akbar Khan. He was killed at Sikandra K^ (see p. 334). He
left two sons. They say that the daughter of one of these sons, Khan-Kha-*
nan Kh&n, was betrothed to Sa'dat 'Ali, son of Shuja'-ud-daula, Nawdb
Wazir, but Nawab Ahmad Kh&n forbad the marriage, unless the Lakhnaii
family gave a wife for his son, Mahmdd Khin.

6. 'Abd-un-nabi Khdn. He was killed with Kdim Khin. When
*Abd-un-nabi Kh&n started for the campaign with l^aim Jang, he sneezed as
he mounted his elephant and a cat crossed his path. From these evil omens,
it followed that Naw&b 'Abd-un-nabl Kh&n never came back alive. His
son, 'Abd-ul-Majid Khdn, from that day took an aversion to the name of
sneezing and to cats. If a servant felt inclined to sneeze, he rushed out of
the house, nor did any servant ever dare to utter the word *' cat." If abso«
lutely necessary it was referred to as a ** fish.'* They also had strict orders
never to mention any one's death. If their master were invited to a friend's
house on his death, they told him that sugar had been tasted at a certain
house, referring to the practice of pouring sugar and water down a dying
man's throat. If they had to remind him of the third-day ceremoniesi they
would say — "To-day there is a great display (dhum-dhdm).'*

1878.] W. Irvine— 1%« Bangmh Navoihs of FarrukMbdd, 351

WbeDever Naw&b *Abd-ul-Majid Khiln went out, he gave his khiLnsd-
m&n several rupees with instructions to give one to Mayd Barn Banija, a
man who kept a shop at his gate, in order that he might present it as a
nazar on the Nawab's mounting, for it was a good omen. He also sent four
annas to a gardener for a garland and flowers, to be given as he started.
Several rupees were changed into kauris, which were divided into two-paisa
lots. Orders were then g^ven to the khansdman to warn the troops, as the
Naw&b S&hib was coming and required an escort. Accordingly the kh4n-
saman told all the tenants of the Kawab*s houses that the Naw&b was
coming. Thej were of all castes high and low.

The Nawab then moimted a horse adorned with silver trappings, a
khidmatgar waved a chaunri, while some four to eight companions followed
on ponies. When the Naw^b reached his gate, Maya Kam Baniya presented
the rupee. The pdn-seWer gave a dona of pdn, of which the Nawdb ate
some, and gave the rest to the khansdm^. Then the gardener ofEered the
flowers, from which the Nawab selected one and stuck it in his turban.
When he came back, he directed the kh^nsaman to dismiss the army for that
day. On each man present a taka in kaurU was bestowed, and with a
8aldfn to the Naw&b they went away.

When any of the younger men of the Sahibz^ah families visited 'Abd-
nl-Masjid Khan, it was a favourite joke to tickle their nostrils with a straw
and produce an artificial sneeze. They would then ask for pardon. But
'Abd-ul-Masjid Khdn would only get the more angry, and request them
never to come near him again. Then the Sahibzidahs would hold their
handkerchiefs to their faces to conceal their smiles.

7. Husain Kh^n. Executed at Allah&b4d by orders of Safdar Jang.

8. Fakhr-ud-din Khan. One account says he was killed with JE^&im
Khin, another that he was one of the five sons executed at Allahabad. He
left one daughter.

9. Isma'il Kh&n. He left four sons. He was one of the Ave execut-
ed at AUah^bad.

10. Karim D4d Khan. One of the five executed at Allah4b4d. He
left two sons.

11. Imam EIh4n. He was named by the Bibi Sdj^iba as l^aim Kh&n's
successor, and he was reigning Nawdb for five months and some days. He
was arrested and sent to Allahabad, where with Nos. 7, 8, 9 and 10 he was
executed in 1750 by orders of Safdar Jang. He left two sons.

12. Khuda Bandah Khin, or in some MSS. Khudawand Khitn. In
some lists he is placed fourth, but this seems to have been done to flatter
his son, Amin-ud-daula, who as n4ib was all powerful from 1786 to 1803.
Khuda Bandah Khdn died at his fort in Delhi on the 9th Zil Hajj 1194 H.
(7th Dec. 1780). Hiajdgir, obtained on his daughter; Umrao Begam's,

352 W. Irvine — The Bangash Nawihs (^ Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

marriage to Nawab Muzaffar Jang, was the pai^anah of Sakrdwa. He left
one son.

13. IMansur 'Ali Khdn. He had one daughter.

iJb. IIa<lidud Khan. Killed with Kiiim Khan, leaving no issue.

15. Bahadur Khan. He also was killed with IJ^aiin Khan ; he left
two sons.

IQ, Shddi Khdn. He was killed by a cannon shot at the siege of
the Fatehgaj-h fort by the Mahrattas in April — May 1751. He left no
is.sue.

17. Salabat Khan. Ho was living in 1802 ; he had four sons.

18. Manavar Khdn. He left six sons.

19. Muhammad Amin Khan. He gave abuse to some zamindar, who
thereupon cut him down with his sword. Mivan 'Alim-uUah Shah Pirzada^
who lived in Jan *Ali Khan*s masjid at the gate of the fort, cut down tho
zamindir. Amin Khan left two sons.

20. *Ata-ullah Khan. He was shot by misbake by Keshan Khan
Bangash Ustarzai, son-in-law of Muhammad Khan, one day that the Naw&b
was out tiger-shooting in Bahbalpur Sawdrah.*

21. 'A'zim Khan. He survived the Cession and left ten sons.

22. Shaistah Khan. He also was alive in 1802, he left one son.

In the time of 'Alamgir II. (1754—1759) Nawdb Ahmad Khan at-
tended for two years at Court, and performed his duties as Bakhshi of the
empire. While he was away, Shaistah Khan set up an imperial throne in
his house and made a guldl hdri in imitation of the Empcror^s audience hall.
He ordered his servants to make him obeisance as if he were Emperor.
Several thousand rupees were &lso coined, worth seventeen annas each, with
the legend —

Sikka zad dar hahr o bar az auj mdhi id hamdh
Sdni Tuimur o Bdhar. Sazrat i Shaistah Shdh.

Sending one of the rupees, Bakhshi Fakhr-ud-daula reported all this
to Ahmad Khdn. Alarmed lest the Emperor might hear of it, he ordered
the Bakhshi to take away Shaistah Khan's jfrgir, to seize and destroy all
the rupees he could lay hands on, and to imprison the Sahibzada in the
fort. It was only after many months that Shaistah Khan was set at liber-
ty.

The daughters of Muhammad Khan.

It is said that the late Amir Dost Muhammad of Kdbul had so

♦ Tho MS. says near KAdirganj, which is in the Eta District near the Ganges, some
45 miles N. "W. of FarrukhAbad (Gaz. IV, 151) while tho place meant is in the Tftrai
between the Burh Ganga and the Ganges, four or five miles west of Eampil, nine or t«n
miles from Kadirganj, and some 35 miles N. W. of Farrukhabdd. There is good shoot-
iag there still, but no tigers.

1878.] W. Irvine— 5%tf BangasJi Natodhs of FarruJchdhdd. 353

many sons that he did not know them all by sight, so when he met any well-
mounted and well-dressed youth, he would ride up and ask him whether
he was his son or not. A somewhat similar anecdote is related of Nawab
Muhammad Khan. One day seeing a married daughter in the women's
apartments, he turned to the Bibi Sahiba and asked what wife (mahal) it
was. The Bibi Sahiba gave him one or two slaps on the back, and replied
" What do you mean, she is one of your daughters."

The daughters who grew up and were married were —

1. Bibi Iloshan Jahan,.the full sister of Kdim Khan. She was mar-
ried to Iloshan Khan Bangash Ustarzai, but had no issue. She founded
the bazar of Eoshanabad, parganah Shamshabad West, on the old road, nine
miles north- west of Farrukhdbad. There is a small mosque, now rapidly
falling into decay, the inscription on which has gone ; and a well close by
with a stone let into the side on which a few words only can be now deci-
phered. In 1846 it was read as follows :

Cha sharin dh-i-chdh-i-Boshandbad,

Kdli Rde (p. 113) gives the date as 1149 H. (1st May 1736— 20th
April 1737). She is also called the " Shahrki Bibi,'' and the villagers still
believe in her power of exorcism. She is said to have been buried in
Kdsim Khdn's tomb in the Kasim Btigh at Fatehgarh (see p. 276). She
had one full sister who died unmarried, aged twelve or thirteen.

2. Bibi Rahmat-un-nissa. She was married to 'Inayat 'Ali Khan
after the death of his wife, Bibi Fatima, daughter of Himmat Kluin and
niece of Muhammad Khan. This daughter had no full blood brother. She
was the mother of (1) Sultan 'Ali Khan, (2) Rustam 'AH Khdn.

3. Karim-un-nissa. She became the wife of the above 'Indyat 'AH
Khdn after the death of Rahmat-un-nissa (No. 2). She had no full brother.
Her sons were (1) Murad 'AH Khan, (2) 'A'zim Khan.

4. (Name unknown) wife of her cousin, Shuja't 'AH Khdn, son of
'Indyat 'AH Khan (see above Nos. 2 and 3), by his first wife, Bibi Fatima,
This daughter had no full blood brother nor any sons.

5. Bhii ri Khanum, wife of her cousin, Muhammad 'Ali Khdn Ban-
gash, full brother of Shuja't 'AH Khdn (see No. 4). She had no full bro-
ther, she was the mother of (1) Amir 'AH Khan, (2) Kutb 'AH Khan.

6. Begamd Sahiba, wife of Iradat 'AH Khan Bangash, son of Shuja't
*Ali Khan. She had neither full brother nor offspring.

7. Bibi Kafiya, full sinter of Isma'il Khdn (No. 9), and Shdista Khan
(No. 22), and wife of Rustam Khan Bangash. She had no children.

8. (Name unknown) wife of Mustaffa Khan and full sister of No. 7.
She had no children.

9. Bibi Daulat Khatun. She married Khuda Dad Khdn, Banga.sh

354! W. Irvine— 1%^ Bmgash Naw&h$ of Ihrrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

Ustarzai Karl&ni, and was the greai-grandmother of Manavor 'Ali Khdn,
one of the joint authors of the '* Laii^-i-Tarikh.*' The family tree is

Khuda Bid Kh&n = Daulat Eh&tun

Sikandar 'All Ehan

d. 12th Sha'ban 1195 H. (16th July 1781)

Sarfariz 'Ali Kh^n

d. 5th Shawwdl 1238 H. (15th June 1823)

• \ \ \ \ — '

Manarar A. E. Haij&t A. E. Husain A. E. Sa*dat A. E. Shuja't one
b. 1798 d. 1863 A. E. daughter

She is said to have been very generous and charitable. It was at her
expense that the tomb of her father, Muhammad Eh£n, in the Haiydt
Bagh was repaired. She became a disciple of *At4 Earim Sh&h of Salon.*
When Nawdb MuzafFar Jang stopped all the family pensions, she went to
Delhi, and the Emperor made over to her the income of Bangasbghdt. On
MuzafFar Jang*s entreaties she returned, and received in jdgir the village of
Barna Ehtird, parganah Bhojpiir, 900 kacha bigahs in Ehan^iya, parganab.
Eampil, and the Tarw41a Bagh or Naulakha. When her son Sikandar 'Ali
Eh&n died, she turned ya^tr, wearing only white clothes or in winter a blan-
ket. She was very humble-minded and spent her time in spinning or in praying
at her son*8 tomb. Among her other accomplishments she understood brick-
lajing and carpenter's work. We hear of her tending the bruises of Elaim
Ehan's widow after the assault on the Ame^hi fort in 1772-73 (see Part II).

She was excessively fond of her great-grandson, Manavar 'Ali Ehan,
and never allowed him to be for a moment out of her sight. When he
was five years old, she married him to the granddaughter of Sanjar Ehdn
of Budain, parganah Eampil, and obtained for him from Naw&b Nasir
Jang (1796 — 1813) an allowance of ten rupees a month.

One day she returned to the Bara Mahal from the house she was build-
ing in Bangashpura, on the site given her by her father at her marriage.
When she got out of her conveyance she at once asked for a drink of water.
Her slave girls having conspired to poison her, brought poisoned water in a
fresh vessel. She drank and then Manavar 'Ali Eh&n. The latter vomited
at once and so recovered. Daulat Ehdtun did nothing, as no traces of poi-
son betrayed themselves. At length when the poison showed itself, every
remedy was resorted to without effect. In the evening her bed was brought
out, and her grandson, Sarfaraz 'Ali Ehan, with his own hand gave her some

* On the Sai about 20 miles S. E. of Eie Bareli in Andlu

1878.] W. Jryine^The Banga^h Naw&h$ of FarruhkdUd. 855

medicine, but as her teeth were clenched, it could not be got down her
throat. She then expired. The date was the 17th Babi I. 1224 (2nd May,
1809).

At once Naw&b N^sir Jang and Sarfaraz Mal^al came to the dwelling
where Danlat Ehatun died, placed their own locks on all the doors, and sta-
tioned a guard at the gate, any one passing in or out was searched. Next
morning Amin-ud-daula (son of Khudabandah Kh^n No. 12) came, and
when she was bathed for interment he noticed that some one must have poi-
soned his aunt. However, he did nothing, and she was buried within her own
house at Bangashpura. Nasir Jang then confiscated all the property, and
at the suggestion of Sarfaraz Mahal stopped Manavar 'All Khan's allow-
ance. Sarfar&z 'Ali Khan, the deceased's grandson, was then pressed to give
a relinquishment on condition of receiving a zi-hakka pension ; giving
way to other's advice, he went and filed a rdzindma in the Collector's
Oifice.

Khuda Dad Khan, the husband of Daulat Kh&tun, quarrelled with his
wife because she asked him to pay the usual visits of ceremony to the
ruling Nawab, Ahmad Khan (1750 — 1771). He left his home and went to
the Dakhin, whence he kept up a correspondence by letter but never return-
ed. There, in a city when Pafhans dwell called Kirp4 Khun4 or Kirya
Khund (?), he married again. His son by that wife married the daughter
of Wdhid '41i Khan Bangash of the same city, a man of high position.
Although Khuda Dad Khan in the war with Holkar and Daulat Bam
Sendhia had his shin bone injured by a bullet, he insisted on riding and
refused to mount an elephant or take to a palJcL Daulat Bam to honour
him styled him Nawdb Sahib, but he objected alleging that at Farrukhabad
that title was given to slaves. Daulat BSm then addressed him as " Khan
S&hib." Khairati Khan Bangash, Sher Muhammad Khan, Najib 'Ali
Khin, Nawab Abd-ul-Karim Kh&n and Mir Nawdb were serving under
Sendhia at that time.

10. Asalat Khatun, wife of Bangash Kh&n, full sister of 'Ati-ullali
Khiin (No. 20), and mother of Wall Muhammad Khan.

11. (Name unknown), wife of Ytisaf Kh^n and full sister to Mansdr
•Ali Khdn (No. 13). She had no children.

12. Kamila Kh&num, the wife of Murdd Khan (Masalle) Bangash, son
of the uncle of 'In&yat 'Ali Khan above-named (husband of Nos. 2 and 3).
She had no full brother. She was the mother of Khair&ti Kh&n Bangash.
Her husband's family was as follows :

z z

856

W. IrYine^The Banga$k NawdU of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Munir Kh&n

I

Alaf Kh&n Kiam Kh&n

I

Muham-

*In&yat 'All Eh&n Murad Khan mad

I ^ Khan

Khairati Elhan

Allah Y&t
Khin

One

daughter
m. to Muham-
mad 'AU Kh^n

I

Safdar 'All
Khan

Daughter

m. to Khuda-
bandah Khan
(No. 12). She
was the mother

of Amin-ud-daula.

Mur&d KhAn was reputed to be very wealthy. At the battle of Daori
Rasulpur in Nov. 1748, he received such severe wounds that he fell from
his elephant in the battle-field. For three days he lay unnoticed among
the corpses. At length a zamindar searching among the dead recognized
him. As MurAd Khdn had once procured his release when kept in custodj-
by Nawab Muhammad Khin, the man went for a litter and carried the
wounded Nawub to his village, applied some remedies to his wounds and
gave him food. When he was better they sent him back to Farrukhabad.
Murad Khan had received eighty wounds in different parts of the body,
and a sword-cut had so disfigured his nose, that he went by the name of the
'* Nakatta Pa^han'* or noseless Pathan. He also had a wound in his throat
which had left a hole, and when he ate or drank he had to apply a wax plug.

13. (Name unknown), full sister of Karim Dild Kh£n (No. 10), and
the wife of Khan 'Alam Kh&n.

14. (Name unknown), full sister of Bahadur Kh&n (No. 15), and the
wife of *Ali Dad Kh&n.

15. (Name unknown), full sister of Bah&dur Kh&n. (No. 15), and the
wife of Sard&r Kh&n.

16. Sahib Kh&tun, wife of Johar Kh&n Bangash. She had no full
brother.

17. *JCbid& Kh&num, daughter of of 'Arifa Kh&num, and wife o£
Hurmat Khan Bangash. She had no full brother.

18. (Name unknown), wife of B&bar Kh&n.

19. Alif Kh&tun, wife of Hak-d&d Kh&n Bangash.

20. La<}li Kh&num, wife of Muij^ammad Kh&n Bangash.

.1878.]

W. Imne — The Bmgash Niatodhs of FarrUhhdMd, 857.

21. Eh&nam Sihiba, full sister of Murtazza KUn (No. 4). She
died in jouth unmarried.

22. Nanhi Bibi, wife of Baz Eh&n Eangash.

Note A.
EASHH) KHXN AND THE KBX^ZADAS.

The few Kh&nz&das, descendants of Kashid Eh^n, now found in a
state of poverty in Man, state the descent of their ancestor as follows : —

•UftnUim^ Shekh Ibr&hfm DfoiwhTnand

Shekk

Siimj-ad-dm

Shekli Hahmdd
8hekh Ahmad

'AbduUa

^wl^a B&yazid [alias P(r Boshin)

Bhekh

EamiL

od-din

Shekh Bhekh
Khairw Kux-ud-
ud-din din

1

Shekh
Jalal-ud-din

I

MiniEhtn
1

Nawab

RARhid

Khia

1

^ i
Kaw&b Habfb-

L Ilhim- nllah

uUah Shin

Khia

d. B. p.

Asad-
nlUh
Ehin

Nawib
HidiDid
Ehin
(left
■^-^ descendants

in the
Sihib Dakhin.)
Did
Khin

'Abd-Qs 'Aidnr 'Ab
Buhhin Bahmin Kai
d. 8. p.

i.nl 'Abd-ul Ehuc
im Hakim Did
Khir

'Abd-nl Mohammad
Biqi Ma*mid

Bahmatullah

Ehia(Bahmat

Khin).

The above is all that the Kh&nz^das know ; thej are ignorant of the
part plajed in history by Jalala, of the events of Rashid Khan's life, where
he served or when he died. Maulvi Manzdr Ahmad, Deputy Collector, then
Tahsildar of ^&imganj, to whom I am indebted for much information on
this and other subjects, pointed out how closely the names given by the
Khanzadas coincided with those connected with the Jalala, who gave so
much trouble in Akbar's reign (see " Haiydt-i-Afgh&ni" by Muhammad

858 W. Iryine— The Ban^agh Nawdhs of FarruMdhdd. [No. 4,

HaiyAt Kh4n, Labor, Kohindr Press, Sept. 1866, pp. 164, 165—158 and
" T<irikh-i-Fari8hta," Lucknow edition. Vol. I, p. 266). For want of fur-
ther authorities to refer to, Manzur Ahmad was unable to identify. Rashid
Kb&n, founder of Mau, with Rashid Khan, son of the historical Jalala.
From the " Mafisir-ul-Umrd,'* however, it is made quite clear that the two
men are the same (see in that work imder " Rashid Kh4n"). I proceed to
give an abstract of the Biography from the " Ma&sir-ul-Umra*' adding
from the articles " AUahdAd Khan," " Asadullah," " Hadidad Khan" and
** Rashid Khdn" in Kewal Ram Agarwalah's " Tazkira-ul-Umri."

The founder of the Roshani sect, called in derision the Tariki or tlie ob-
scure,* was Shekh B&yazid who was descended in the seventh generation from
8iraj-ud-din An^irt, and was bom at Jilandhar one year before Babar entered
India (». e., in 1527). On growing up he left his birth-place with his mother
and went to his father 'Abdullah at Kiili Kurm in the hills of Roh. In
the year W9 H. (April 1542 — April 1543), he became notorious by pre-
tending to do miracles, through which he induced many tribes of the Af-
ghitns to become his disciples. At this time he wrote a book in Pushtu
called " Khair-ul-bay4n." They say that when it was brought to the Court
of Mirza Muhammad Hakim, ruler of Kabul, the learned men there were
unable to refute it. When Pir Rosh&n died he was buried at Tahyapilr (?)
in the hiUs. He left four sons and one daughter. The sons are (1) Shekh.
'Umr, (2) Nur-ud-din, whose son Mirzi Khan entered the Imperial service
and was killed in the Daulatabdd campaign in the Dakhin (most probably
in February 1633),t (3) Jamal-ud-din, (4) Jalal-ud-din.

Jalal-udldin in the year 989 H. (Feb. 1581— Jan. 1582), being then
fourteen years of age, attended Akbar when that Emperor was on his return
from Kabul. He was graciously received, but for some reason being dis-
satisfied he returned to his father's disciples among the Warakzais and Afridis,
to whom he was also related. In the 3l8t year of Akbar's reign (2nd April
1585 — 22nd March 1586), the Mahmand and Gharba, who lived round Pasha-
war and could muster ten thousand horse, were aroused by the oppressions of
the subordinates of Sayyad Hamid Bukh4ri:{: practised on the Tayuldars of
that neighbourhood. They placed Jalala ( Jal6l-ud-din) at their head, attacked
and slew Sayyad H&mid and then made Terah their stronghold. Rajah Man
Singh§ Nazim of Kdbul advanced on Terah and dispersed the Afridis. He
then went to 'Ali Masjid and inflicted considerable punishment on Jalala.
Shortly after Zain Kh&n Kokah arrived, having been appointed to super-

* For notices of Jalila and the Haush&iiis see Blochmann's " Ain-i-Akbaii," Vol.
I, pp. 340, 345, 366, 361, 397, 408, 411, 469.
t Elphinstone, p. 608.

X Mr. Blochmann's ** Ain-i-Akbari," Vol. I, p. 897.
{ 'Ain 1, 339.

1878.] W. Irviae—Tke Bangash Nawahs of Farrukhdhdd. 359

fiede the Bitjih, and he made great efforts to uproot the rebels. In the
32Dd year (2drd March 1586— 12th March 1587), Jalala was forced to qait
Terah for Bijaur, the head-quarters of the Ytisafzai. Zain Khan* followed
him up and posted *Isma'il Kuli Khanf and Sadik Muhammad Eh4n:|: to
watch the passes. Jalala managed to elude them and return to Terah.
Sadik Muhammad E^han, however, so troubled the Afridis and Warakzais
that they gave up MuUa Ibrahim, who was looked on by Jalala like a
father. Jalala losing confidence made off for TudLn. The Afghans seized
all his property and made it over to the imperial commander.

Iif the 37th year (20th March 1591— to 10th March 1592), Jalala
returned from Tdr4n and again raised the standard of revolt. Asaf Kh4n
Ja'far was sent by the Emperor to restore order. He defeated the rebel
and captured his family. Asaf Khan made over Jaldla's family to one
Wahdat 'Ali.

In 1007 H. (25th July 1598— 13th July 1599), Jalala took Ghazni
but could not maintain his position. In the 45th year, 1007 H. (12th
Sept. 1599 — 2nd Sept. 1600), Jalala who was in company with the Lohanis
near Ghazni was surprised and wounded. Mur^ Beg, with some of Sharif
Ethan's troops, pursued and slew him.

The spiritual succession fell to Ahddd, son of Shekh 'XJmr, Jalala's
brother, § who had married his uncle, Jalala's, daughter. In the reign of
Jabangir (1605 — 1627) he gave the imperial troops much trouble, some-
times gaining the victory and sometimes being defeated. In 1035 H. (23rd
Sept. 1625— 11th Sept. 1626), ZaEar Khan, son of Khw4ja Abtil Hasan, naib
of Mirza Intizdm Bakhsh, Subahdar of Kabul, besieged his, Umr's, fort. On
the day of assault a bullet struck him and killed him.

He was followed by his son, 'Abd-ul-Kadir, who continued the warfare.
At length by the exertions of Said Khan,|| Nazim of Kabul, he was induced
to submit to the Emperor Shdhjahan, from whom he received the rank of a
Haz&ri. In 1043 H. (28th June 1633— 17th June 1634), while employed
in K&bul, he lost his life. In the beginning of the 11th year, in 1047 H.
(I8th Oct. 1637— 7th Oct. 1638), Sa'id Khan sent to the Emperor's Court
his mother, Bibi Alae (the daughter of Jal4la,)*|f with her two sons-in-law
(1) Muhammad Zamin, (2) Sahib Dad, and (3) Kidir Dad, the son of

• *Am I, 344.
t »Ain I, 360.
J *Ain I, 355.

§ The Mau tradition ib that he was no relation, but nBarped the succession.
I 'Ain I, 466.

IT A sanad dated 15th Zi'l Ka*d of the I2th year, 1048 H. gives Jatndl Khdlun as
the name of Abd-ul-lJLddir*8 wife.

800 W. Irvine— I%e B(mga$h NawdU of FarrukhdMd. [No. 4,

Muhammad Zaman. The Emperor took pity on them and sent them on to
Bashid Khin, who was then in Talingana.

In the same year Karim Did, the younger son of JaUla, who was lead-
ing a wandering life among the Lohanis, was sent for hy all the trihes in
order to renew the struggle. 8a'id Khin sent Rajah Jagat Singh* against
the Pathans ; all the other tribes submitted, except the Lakan and two others
with whom Karim Did had taken refuge. Beduced to extremities, these
saw themselves forced to deliver up Karim D4d. By royal order he was
sent to the Emperor. Afterwards Jamdat-ul«Mulk Sa'd-ullah Khin mar-
ried the daughter of Karim Did, and she bore to him Lutf-ullah KhiLn and
others.

AUahdid, son of Jalal-ud-din, was either one of the children captured
in 1591 — 1592 and made over to Wahdat 'Ali, or elae came to Hindiist4n
after his father's death (1599 — 16O0) owing to a quarrel with his brothers.
If the second of these two suppositions is correct, the date of 1016 H.
(1607) which I have given for the founding of Man Bashid4b6d would
seem a little too early. The first notice of Shekh Allahdad is in Jahin-
gir's 11th year (10th July 1615 — 28th June 1616), when he was made a
Hazari with the title of Kh4n added to his own name. In the 12th year
(29th June 1616— 18th June 1617), he received the title of Bashid Khfin
with the rank of two thousand five hundred. In the 14th year (7th Jime
1618— 27th May 1619), he rebelled in K4bul, but in the 15th year (28th
May 1619 — 17th May 1620), his fault was forgiven and he was restored to
his dignities. In the 18th year (25th April 1622— 14th April 1628), he
was under Mahabat Khan and did good service in the Dakhin. In the Ist
year of Shahjahan's reign (4th Feb. 1628— 24th Jan. 1629), he came from
his jdffin, was raised to be a Commander of Three Thousand with 1500
horse, and was appointed to the campaign against Jhujhir Singh Bundebi,
son of Bir Singh Deo. In the 2nd year (25th June 1629— 14th June
1630), he accompanied the Emperor to the Dakhin and in the third year
did good service. In the 4th year (5th Jan. 1632— 25th Dec. 1632), he
was wounded while fighting under 'Azim Kh&n against 'Adil Shah and
Niz4m-ul-Mulk. His brotherf and many personal followers were slain in
the same battle. In the 5th year (26th Dec. 1632— 15th Dec. 1633),
Bashid Kh4n was appointed f aujdar of part of the Akbarabad Subah. In
the 6th year (16th Dec. 1633— 5th Dec. l634), he went with Shkh Shuja'
to the Dakhin. He fought agunst the Bijipur forces in the 7th year (6th
Dec. 1634— 25th Nov. 1635) ; in the 8th year (26th Nov. 1635— 15th Nov.
1686), he was attached to Khin Dauran, and in the 9th year he was no-

• By the '* Taz1dra-iil-TJmr&" this would seem to be the son of lU^a Basil of Mau
in the Ndrpiir State in the hills. See also Proc. B. A. S., 1872, p. 157.
t Or rather, I shoold say, his cousin Mini Eh&n son of Ncir-ud-din,

1878.] W. Irvine— -jPHtf BangaA NawaU of Farrukhdhdd. 861

ticed for his brarery in captoring a fort. In the lOfcb year (28th Oct. 1636
.—17th Oct. 1637), he was appointed Nazim of Burhdnp^ and raised to be
a Chahir HazarL In the 11th jear (18th Oct. 1637— 7th Oct. 1638), he
was made Fanjd&r of Sark&r Bijagafh in addition to Borhanpdr. In the
18th year (2nd Ang. 1644i — 22nd July 164(5), he was put in charge of the
Sdbahs of Talingana. In the 22nd year (20th June 1618— 9th June 1649)
he died in that country at N&nder.* He was buried at Man, a town which
he had founded near Sham8h4bad.t

The goYemors of the Dakhin never undertook any important enterprise
without consulting him. He had a large number of well-armed fighting
men in his service, who were very faithful to him and looked on him as
their spiritual guide. Mab&bat Khin once wrote to the Emperor that Ba-
shid Kh&n, having such a powerful following, ought to be recalled from
the Dakhin. He and Eh£n Zam4n were friends and of one mind ; they
ought not, therefore, to be left on the frontier, for if they rebelled it would
be difficult to reduce them.

"RAftKifi Eh&n so governed his Subah of Burhanpur that high-way rob-
bery and thefts ceased, the bad characters thinking themselves lucky to
escape with their lives. The 'Idglih of Burh&nptir, till then very small,
was enlarged by him. He was learned in history, secretly bigotted in reli-
gion ; he wrote much poetry which has been approved by good judges. His
expenditure on his harem was larger than that of any Amir of his time. In
most of his habits and in his way of wielding his sword he followed the
customs of Iran.

Two sons of Bashid Khin are named in history, (1) Asadullah, (2)
Bh^ullah (Bashid Khin). Asadullah, the eldest son, on the death of his
father in Shdhjahan*s 22nd year (20th June 1648— 9th June 1649), was
made a Haziri. In the 24th year (29th May 1661— 18th May 1652), he
was appointed Thdnad&r of Chiindaur in the Dakhin Subah, and in the 27th
year (25th April 1653— 14th AprU 1654), faujdar of Dabdauri (?) in Sar-
kir Saukhar (?). In the 28th year (15th April 1(354— 4th April 1655),
he became Faujdar of Ilichpur with a mansab of 1500 ; in this year he
died.

BhamuUah, the second son, on the death of his father in Sh^hj^han's
22nd year, had also been raised in rank. On the death of Asadullah in
the 28th year (15th April 1654— 4th April 1655), he was appointed Tha-
nadar of Chandaur in succession to his brother. In the dOth year (24th
March 1656— 18th March 1657), on the death of his uncle Hididad Khin,

* A town on the north or left bank of the Gbd&Yeii, 146 miles K. of Haidar&bid.
Thornton, 682.

t In the " Ma'a8ir-iil.Uiiir&" Shamidbdd is quite distinct^ and so is Ifau, bat I
eannot read the word which follows.

362 W. Irvine— 2%<j Banga^h Nato&hs of FarrukMbdd, [No. 4,

IlhamuUah was selected as baying the best claims to succeed bim and
keep bis force together. He was made a commander of 1500 borse.
When Aurangzeb left the Dakbin for Hinddstan, Ilbamullah accompanied
bim. After the successful campaign against Jaswant Singh was over
(April 1658 — Elpbinstone 521), he was made a Sib Hazdri, three thousand
horse, and at the same time bis father's title of Rashid Khan was conferred
upon him. After the first campaign against Ddra Shikob, (June 1658),
be received a grant of twenty thousand rupees. When Sultan Shuja' bad
been defeated in January 1659, he was sent under Ma'zum Khan, comman-
der-in-chief, and Prince Muhammad Sultan to the province of Bengal. In
the 4th year (25th Jan. 1661 — 14th Jan. 1662), be took part in the cam-
paign in Koch Bih&r and Assam. In the 5tb year (15th Jan. 1662 — dbth
Jan. 1663), he was made faujdar of Sarkir K^mrup.* For a short time
be was Subabdar of Orissa. In the 19th year (13tb Aug. 1675 — 1st Aug.
1676), he was removed from Orissa and re-posted to the Dakbin. He acted
as faujdar of Nander for a time. In the 28th year (1684-5) be received a
khilat,\ He was alive in 1097 H. (1686) in 'Alamgir's 29tb year and still
jagirdar of parganab Shamsbabdd, as is shown by the inscription from Sarde
Aghat in pai^anah *Azimnagar, formerly called Tappah 'Azimnagar, a
modern off-shoot from Shamshab4d. j;

Hddi Dad Khan, brother of Hashid E^bdn, was in the beginning of
Shabjaban's reign a commander of seven hundred. In the lltb year
(18th Oct. 1637— 7tb Oct. 1638), be was made a Hazdri. In the 22nd
year (20tb June 1648 — 9th June 1649), be was appointed to the Subah of
Talingana in succession to bis deceased brother Rashid Kh&n, with a rise
in rank. In the 24th year (29tb May 1651— 18th May 1652). be was
given the title of Kbdn to be affixed to his own name with the rank of
2,500. He died in the 30th year (24tb March 1656— 13th March 1657).
He left a number of sons, many of whom attained to mansaha.

Another distinguished member of the family was Shekh Nurullab, son
of ICadirdid Khan, son of Muhammad Zaman, son-in-law of Abdad, the
nephew of Allahdad Basbid Khan. In the time of Alamgir be was a com-
mander of 400, and bad charge of one of the forts in the Dakbin. During
the reign of Bahadur Shah (1707 — 1712) be was made a Hazari with bis
father's title of Kddirddd Khdn. He was appointed faujdar of Jamand (?)
in the Subah of Khandesb. In Farrukhsiyar's reign (1713 — 1719) be joined
Asaf J&h Niz&m-ul-Mulk, who had been appointed Subabdar of the Dak-
bin. Ndrullab was closely related to Asaf Jab's mother. He fought
bravely in the campaign against Sayyad Dilawar 'All Kbdn and 'ALam 'All

• Nimrdp in the MS. of Haasir-iil-ninT& and Tazkira-ul-UmriL

t Ma'asir-i-'Alamgiii, p. 249.

t Gaz. N. W. P. IV. 197, and Proc. B. A. S., for 1874, p. 104.

1878.] W. Iryme-— The Bangash Nawdhs of FarruJcMhdd. 863

Kh4n, after which he was rewarded with the rank of Three Thousand, 2000
horse, and the title of Bahadur. In the attack on Muh^riz Khdn he com-
manded the van. When Asaf Jah had overcome all opposition he obtain-
ed for Kadirdid Khan the rank of Panj Haz&ri, 4000 horse. Kadirdad
was assassinated bj one of his own servants. As he left no issue, Asaf Jah
out of \i\^jdgirs granted to his relations the town of Janiganw (?) in the.
Subah of Aurangabad and the village of Ambarah in Subah Khindesh.
Thpse were still in possession of the family when the '' Maasir-ul-Umr&*'
was written.

The Mau tradition alleges that Shamsh&bad was granted to Mirzie
Kh4n, while Rashid Khan and Hadidad Khan received appointments in the
Dakhin. At' first the Naw^b lived in Shamshab&d close to the tomb of Fir
Aziz-ullah, and Mau was not founded for two years. The Nawab's troops
who took up their residence in Mau are said to have been 900 Toyah horse-
men, Muhammad zai, 600, Warakzai, 500, DiUzak, 400, Ghilzai, 400, Kha-
lil, 400, Khatak, 400, Mataniya, 30O, Lohani, 200, Afridi 200, Bangash,
100, in all, including other tribes, about 15,000 fighting men. Oral tradi-
tion asserts that the settlement of Mau was opposed by the Eathor chiefs
of Bampur* and Khemsiptir.f The Muhammadans under 'Abd-us-Samad,
alias Mirza Khan, Muhammadzai, Ddud Khan, Yar Khan, Burh&n Khan,
Toyah, and Mir Khan, Khafak, gained a signal victory near Khemsipur.
The Bdjah of Edmpdr was wounded and taken prisoner.

Nawab Hashid Kh&n's tomb, a plain but substantial domed edifice
without any inscription, stands on the high land above the Burh-Ganga or
old bed of the Ganges. It was repaired by a former Collector, Mr. Newn-
ham, in 1826.]; At its side, surrounded by a wall, is the masonry tomb of
the Nawab*s wife. The tombs are surrounded by ancient dsupalu and ntm
trees. The attendant in charge is an old Kh&nzddah woman.

At Masita Kh&n Khanzadah's chaupdl, there lies a flat stone weigh-
ing some ten maunds which the popular voice, with, as my informant truly
says, some exaggeration, declares was carried every day by the Nawab to the
Ganges to stand on while bathing. The site of the Nawab' s fort is styled
the hot, Kachis and some Khdnzadahs occupy it, two high gates still
stand, and there is some brick pavement left. Fart of the land is still call-
ed Muhalla Gau-khana, and a little of the so-called Bafa Bdzar still- exists ;
in it is a mosque known as the Jdma' Masjid, without any inscription,
which was repaired two years ago by Nizdm 'Ali Khdn Mataniya of Muhal-
la Kila', an employ^ of the Haidar&b^ State. In Khanpur, close to Sham-
shabady there is a B&rahdari built by Mirz& Kh4n, cousin of the Nawib, and

* In parganah Azimnagar of the Eta diBtrici. Gkiz. lY. 180.
t Seventeen miles from Farrukh^bdd on the Mainpuri road.
t KaU Rie, p. 114.
2 A

864 W. Irvine— 2%c Bang ash Nawdhs of FarrukhdbJd. [No. 4,

at Man there is a Muhalla called after him '< Kot Mirz& Eh&ni." Nawib
Hadi Ddd EhiLn's tomb is at Nander on the Godaveri where he died, but
there is a village in pargana Shamshabdd called after him Hadidadp^. Bibi
Eaba'h, wife of IMmullah Khan, son of liajshid Kh4n, built a garde and well
with stairs in Mauza Kuberpur, south of Mau and east of ^dimganj ; the
Af ridis knocked the sarde down and used the bricks, the Baoli is still there
half in ruins. The place near it is called " Sadie Bibi Baba'h" to this day.
A separate village, formerly called Sayyad Firtizpur, lying between "M^avl
and Chak Mau-Kashidabdd, is known as " Katra Eahmat Kh4n" (market-
place of K. K.) after a great-grandson of Mirzi Kh4n. His tomb is in
Mauza 'Ataipur, east of Mau, a village formerly called Baripur but now named
after a Nawab 'Atai Khan. Subhdn Khin, another chief, resettled Mauza
Bhartpur just south of Kaimganj, and called it after himself Suhb^nptir.
In the lands of Hamirpur, the next village west of Mau, is a shrine dedica-
ted to Fir Roshan, the ancestor of the Khdnzadahs. The Putwari who
pointed it out to me gave the correct pronunciation, with the long a in the
name *' Eosh4n."

Mau Rashiddb^ remained a Jdgir of the descendants of Bashid
Khdn till it was resumed by Nawdb Muzaffar Jang (1771 — 1796). All
they now have is a few revenue-free plots, and one of them is glad to be a
Head Constable on Bs. 10 a month.

Note B.
THE BAMTELAS.

•

There are two origins assigned for the name Bamfela. The first is,
that a Thakur chief when bathing in the Ganges made as was usual a gift
of his wife to the officiating Brahmans, and then purchased her back by a
large gift of money. One of the conditions imposed by the Brahmans was,
that her issue should be called Bamtela. The other story is, that this Eajah
having seized a Brdhman woman and made her his concubine, her children
by him were called Bam^elas.

She had three sons (1) Hathi Bae, whose descendants lived in Bhao-
pur, Jasmai, Nurpur, Dh&ranagar, Sathanpur ; (2) Nibal Deo, whose de-
scendants held Dhalawal, Gharampur, Garhya ; (3) Sab Sukh. This Sab
Sukh had three sons (1) Bhart Sih, whose descendants lived in Hathipur,
Awdjpur, Na'matpur and Baraun ( 8 Biswahs) ; (2) Nandan Sdh, whose fami-
ly held Adtili and Kashidpur ; (3) Chattar Singh, whose family held Baraun
(12 Biswahs) and Bdbarpur. The founders of these families are said to
have lived fourteen or fifteen generations ago, but the Awijpur zamindars,
when enquiry was made by the Settlement Officer, could not carry back their
genealogy more than six generations.

1878.] W. Irvine— T^c Bangash NawiiU of FarruhhdUd, 365

The Bamfelas are not found outside pargana Pabara, and there they
are usually divided into the Eight villages and the Fifty-two villages. In
the former, which lie west of the city, they are still prominent, especially
in Baraun. In nearly every one of the eight villages they still hold the
zamindari. Some of them are Musalmans. In only thirteen of the fifty*
two villages can any trace of them be found, many of the villages have
been absorbed into the City, and in the others their position is insignificant.

Note C.

TRADITIONS OF DALEL KH^fN IN BUNDELKHAND.

I am indebted to the kindness of Alan Cadell, Esq., 0. S., Settlement
Officer of Banda, for a memorandum on Dalel Khan by Pandit Mathura
Parshad, Settlement Munsarim, founded on oral traditions derived from
an old man Eup Brdhman, and other inhabitants of pargana Maudha. Dalel
Khan is called the son of Muhammad Khan Bangash. He was given, they
say, by his father to Bajah Chattarsal who adopted him, and when he grew
up endowed him with the pargana of Son^ha (or Sihon^a). Dalel Kh^n
appointed his nephew, Murad Khdn, to be thanadar of Sihonda. After a
time Harde Sah, son of Chattarsdl, angered Dalel Khdn by some deceit he
practised, and Dalel Khan prepared for war. The Hindu Rajahs were also
afraid that Dalel Kh4n would in time oust them, for Ohattarsil had nursed
him to be like a snake in their sleeves. They therefore entered into a
league to destroy him, binding themselves by an oath, according to the
Shastras, or Ganges water, holding a sword in one hand. Then all the
Bijahs marched from Pannd, Datiya, and Chirkhdri, and assembled at Ban-
da. Dalel Kh&n was told that twenty-two Rdjahs and thirty chiefs had
come with intent to kill him.

Dalel Khdn marched from Sihonda and on his way hunted in the for-
est of Mungas, 14 miles N. E. of Banda. Thence he went by way of
Pipronda, about 7 miles west of Mungas, to Alona about six miles north-
west of Pipronda, where he encamped on the banks of the river Ken.

The Bundelas advanced to Maudha, about thirteen miles west of
Alona, to Makaranw, Achrela, Bharela, Tandohi, Ingo^ha, Pipronda, all
villages three or four miles to the north-west of Maudha. Jagat Raj's
camp was in Makaranw, while Kirat Raj went to a distance, to the village
of Pothya Buzarg on the Betwa, about sixteen miles north of Maudha in
pargana Sumerpur, Hamirpur district. When Kirat Raj left his camp
followers behind, the village which sprung up was named Kiratpur.

One day while out hunting Dalel Khan went from Alond to Bhulsi,
two or three miles off, across the Ken, and thence to Padhori seven miles
further on and only four miles east of Maudha. The Musalmans of Mau-
dha remonstrated with him on his rashness, and advised him to take shelter

366 W. Irvine— 2%tf Banjash XawdU of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

in their houses or to return to Sihon^a.. Dalel Khan rejected their counsel,
saying he would he disgraced if he retreated, that he had with him Ihrahim
Kh4n, his brother, 'Inajat Khan, Haidar Khan, Himmat Khdn, Mu'az-ud-
din Khan, Sayyad H4mid *Ali, Baz Kh^n, Mukhtar Khin, Rahim Khan,
and five hundred other Fa^hdns. Turning to his troops he harangued them,
and offered to pay up and discharge all those who held their wives and
children dearer than honour. A number of the Path&ns then left him.
With the rest he marched from Fa^hori to Maudha.

Now Himmat Kh&n was Dalel Khan's chief friend, and he usually
rode by the Nawdb*s side and conversed with him. That day as he rode
along half stupified with opium, Dalel Khdn as usual addressed his conver-
sation to Himmat Kh&n, and playing on his name remarked that if Himmat
(courage) held firm, they might after all win the day. As no reply came the
Kaw4b called out, " Brother, are you nodding or have you dropped behind ?"
Haidar Khdn who was at some distance cantered up and answered, '' Nawab
Sahib, he was only Himmat Kh4n at meal time, he left us at Padlhori, I
am the Himmat Khdn for this emergency."

When they reached Korhiya Tal, near the Parao, Dalel Khdn told
his men to alight and breakfast. They then mounted and drawing their
swords made ready for the attack. The Bundelas meanwhile advanced from
Makaranw, and Tandohi. The battle then commenced. The first day fifty
Fa^hans and three hundred Bundelas were killed, the second day one hun-
and fifty Pa^hdns and four hundred Bundelas. Haidar Khan pushed his
advance as far as Makardi^w, and on his way killed five leaders and sixty
men. He was killed himself in Makaranw. His tomb exists there near a
pond, to the west, of the metalled road to Hamirpur, and it is known as
Haidar Shahid. Sayyad Hdmid 'Ali was killed to the east of Maudha, and
his tomb is some twenty-five or thirty rassi to the east of the town ; its
name is Hdmi Shahid or Hamid Shahid. Baz Khan's tomb is close to
Shekh Ch4nd Fir's dargah, and it is called Baja Sarmdr Shahid. 'Inayat
Kh .n's tomb is to the south of the B&nd& and Jalilpur road, it is called
'In&i Shahid.

Dalel Khan was slain himself on the third day. Many others were
killed with him. Ibrahim Khdn, brother of Dalel Khan, fell at a place now
in Maudha but then a jungle. A second Ibrihim Khan was killed near
where 'Abd-ul-Karim Kanungo's house now stands. There is a Darg4h
known as that of Maudi Shahid, which no doubt is meant for Muaz-ud-din.
There is also a Shahid's tomb called vaguely Biba Shahid, which Mr. Kaye,
late Collector, put into repair when opening out a new road. There are
numerous other tombs in Maudha and its vicinity.

They relate that on the day of his death Dalel Khan drove the Bunde-
las before him as far as Mowaiya, about four miles south-west of Maudha.

1878.] W. Irnne-^The Bangaal Naiodhs ofFarmkMbdd, 867

Here one Bundela, urged by despair, struck at him and cut ofE his left
hand ; where the band f eU a tomb was built, which is also called Dalel Shahid.
It lies to the east of the metalled road to Nyaganw. The Bundelas finally
drove Dalel EJian back into Maudha, where he received the cup of martyr-
dom. His tomb and a masjid with well still exist. The date assigned
locally for Dalel Khan's death, viz., 1792 S. (1735 A. D.) is fourteen years
out, the correct date being May 1721.

The Hindi poets of his time composed many doM (couplets) in praise
of Dalel Khan's courage ; such as are still current were collected from the
lips of the before-named Bdp Brahman, from Shakir Musalman of Mau-
dha, Sarddr Khan of Bhamaura, about three miles to the south-west of
Maudha, and others.

lit. — At the time Harde Sdh, Jagat Edj and Mohan Singh had ap-
pointed to take the oath on Ganges water, Mohan Singh went away to Bija-
nagar, about two miles east of Mahoba. Then Harde Sah refused to join ;
and Jagat Eaj set out alone. The poets on this occasion put the following
dohd into Chattarsdl's mouth —

Sl^^iiraft^^T flT^ ^Hf art fic^ni I

wiw ^i^ ^^ % ^^ ^^ ^T ^ «rn? n

'^ Mohan has decided not to join, Harde Sah is angry, Jagat fights
" alone, but he cannot bear the weight of it."

2nd, — Chattars&l wrote a long letter to Dalel Kh^n trying to dissuade
him from fighting. The inhabitants of Maudha remember these verses.

Ivc^ BUT % TPi w^^ ^TW ^'r ^ifjjr i
t^ ^fT^ ^w % 'I'm ^'n ^n II

im ^ jp? i^T ^ 9iim ^^r^ vt^ «

" I am not deceived by Harde Sdh, Earat Sen is a disobedient son ; tell

my son Dalel, of Bangash race, a good son, that brother Muhammad Khan

made him over to me, since then he is my son, better than all the world ;

Mohan has gone ofE, Harde has concealed himself, let him (Dalel) give ear,

and Jagat will then be talked over."

Brd. — The following answer was sent by Dalel Kh&n :

«^ ^*

^W ^[%^ ^ ^« try ^ ^ ¥^ n

'^ You are a great king, and the most powerful of aU Bdjahs, now how
can Dalel retreat, it would disgrsce both creeds," >. e., his own and that
of his supposed adoptive father Chattars&l.

868 W. Irvine— 2%^ Bangath T^awdhs of FarrukUhid, [No. 4,

4M. — Some miscellaneous verses are given which have been handed
down.

" You occupy great jdgirs^ you eat butter and sugar, if you do not
defeat Dalel, he will make widows in many houses."

bth. — The following call for aid was sent to Harde S6h.

" Our cart has stuck in the clay, make no childish excuses, help us now
to shove on the cart, lend aid to your country, 0 Hirdesh ! (Harde Sah)."
6f A. — ^Harde Sah's answer was—

^% ^w ^ ^ ^^ ¥r^w 'm W^ n

'' He heeded not my counsel, Jagat acted wilfully ; now the calamity
has fallen on his head, he comes back in submission to me."
*7ih, — ^Yerses in praise of Dalel Kh&n.

wm MK wrrft ^^ ift ^ ftr% nrr ^m i

m^ ^xyt ^^ 5f i?t«r ft% ^w ^TT I
iSf ^'1 ^q^ «f^ '^ ftf«r 'fiw <^^ II

«Ri?r ?T^ ^^TT^ %* ^K ^T^V lit^ I

^i^ f^ ^ q^T ^ ^ ^^^sm ^^^ I

?R ^^ Y^w ftiT «ir«r wit ^^ n

" Dalel's chest was a yard wide, he was a perfect soldier ; the bright soul
has rejoined its essence, he has gained the rank of beatitude ; collecting
together all his followers, he was killed in the field of battle. Like a lamp
bums a moth, so did Dalel rush into the fight. From Delhi came Dalel
Khan, with sword in hand, and fought by Maudha town with Jagat Maha-
raj. The fight was like that of practised wrestlers (Patthan, a play upon
the word Pa^hdn) ; the blood flowed and turned the earth into mire. For
three days the Pa^hans undaunted fought, Jagat trembled and fled from the
field. The fourth day at noon the Bundelas surrounded him (Dalel Khin) ;
then fell Dalel to the earth; and many swords wounded him."

1878.] W. Irvine— 2^5 Banff ash Naw&ls of Farrukhdbdd, 369

8^^. — ^The following verses were taken down as recited by Sarddr Elhdn
of Bhamaura village, pargana Maudha :

ii^iiir fro^urar ^*ftr*r 'vtt^ ^t«i fk^ ^^'n i

^ TT^Pf * ''^^ %^ irer «i^ ^^ ^#5T i*^T ^K:m ii \ •
VK^ iiri ^zm ^w 'w^ ^ vtf ^^vff <^^ i

^y^ «ir ^m wrtt fewr fj^jT «rw ^^i^ ^t i^w ii ^ n
ij^iT^ ^T if ^^ ^er «ww irn:^ ^^ ^^ ^roft n

i^T^ir ^ ?rvf ^^ f%T^T»Tir nft iiiR irft ifH* ^^ hk ^% ^ i
^^ ^^nrrai ^i %?: ^€t ^* ^t ^t^^ ^i w'^%t w ^wt ^^n^r ^ n
%^ i ^^c^iT^ ^ ^f^pr TT^ ^^qn ^^ ^n^iift jT^pft i«*r^r ^ i
^ftftnir ^T^ ^f «Tir ^^ i^if mr ^t^[V * irrr ^ *^ hk^^t t ii » i

** They gathered in Sihun^a-gaph, when came word of the war ; they took
Tip bow and arrow and repaired to the hunting-ground of Mungas. They
leapt into the midst of the foe, like the ehitah^ seizes and shakes a deer*
All the Rdjahs hesitated, when bold Dalel began to drive his way through
them. The Pa^han left Mungas, Dalela encamped in Paprenr. He hunt-
ed the herds of deer, and his bullet killed many a one. Leaving Paprenf,
they camped in Alond, and lingered on the banks of the Xarundwati.
Passing through Bhulsi, they stopped in Pan^hori, and fought with the
Bundelas in Baharela. Like elephants black as lamp-black, maddened, lift-
ing up their tusks, they drove all before them. Muhammad's son jumped
exultingly, his followers shouted 'Ali, *Ali. Eight-barrelled and seven-bar-
relled guns were let off, they discharged the great Janjdls, In many ways did
he thrust with his spear, did brave Dalela, the mighty. The cannon roared,
the swords clashed, the rockets flashed like lightning clouds. They drew
their chapndl^ look at them once ! on every side the Mughal and the
Bundelas are mingled in one wave. In the rivers of blood there are num-
bers of Rajahs and lords of armies. The Mugalanis and Turkanis are dis-
heartened. Hear thus, O friend ! the fighting, the sword wounds, in the
battle of Maudha, and how the field was won.*'

* The MS. has ehilhy a falcon, in place of which I suggest ekitaK

370 W. Jryfine^The Batyash Nawdbs of BirruUdhdd, [No. 4,

9M. — Verses in praise of Dalel Khan's horses.

€RTf ^ir >iT^ i^iit T^ 'fr^

JfW qilR^ q<f U^ ^1% ^H ^ I

x^ $^ OT^ %ir w^*/t f5^ ^ 11

" Their hoofs stamp the ground, as soon as the foot touches the stirrup ;
they go like the wind, these milk-white steeds. They are fed on ghi and
sugar, they get a handful of spices. A line is formed in their hack, they
are so stout ; they are fiery and strong. By strong chains two grooms lead
them ; they pull at the chains and plunge and prance. They have arched
necks, are white, youthful, strong and young. They are as if formed in
moulds out of gold, they are of heautiful shape and form. They have cloths
of gold stuff and hrocade of every colour, green, yellow, hlack, white, pur-
ple, every colour. They leap and hound, in strength they are elephants.
Sahih Asgar, these are the steeds of a great lord."

10th, — Verses in praise of Dalel Kh4n obtained from Shakir Muham-
mad called Ldhori.

j(%mK '^ ^r ^TT ^tRT ^^^ ^<^ fnw ^ix ^%t ^ i
aK ^^ wt^ ^^ ^^wt^ W^ ^ ^r^TT -^mi ^ \

si «J

'* Muhammad Khan*s son was Dalel, he scattered the Bundelas, many
swords were drawn, there was no delay, from bravery their livers burst their
clothes. The armies met, they bravely fought. Though pressed hard they
would not give way before those hosts. Sword in hand Dalel Pathan went
forward, twirling his moustache."

nth, — The following verses are handed down as Dalel Khdn's answer
to the Musalmins of Maudha when they entreated him to turn back.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2!Jtf Bangagh Sawdhs qf FurruHdbdd. 871

*f% ^^ ^[^T T?r ^ *^ ^r^ ^^"^ UPC vnt^ n

" My name is Dalel Khdn, how can I retreat, the good name of the Ban-
gash is in my hands, on me is the hand of Muhammad Shah, whose is this
sword. This Pa^han honour have I hound fast round me, I will fight face to
face. Through their youthful strength the Pa^hans will enter the hottest
of the struggle. They fear not the fray. Rajah and Maharajah will flee
at the sight of my hare sword. Said brave Dalel, boldly in the battle-
field, call 'All, Ali' as Hindus call on Hanum&n."

12th, — When Dalel Khdn saw his companions fall, he exclaimed :

Trfti^ ^^T Hit <T W«r ^T^ ^^ ^^i? I

" My son Murad Khdn is dead and brother Ibrahim ; Hdmid, Haidar,
Fatte Khiin, each ate opium and died. Dead, too, is Inayat Kb4n, the
powerful Pathan. My life is now worthless ; saying this, he grasped his
sword."

13^;^. — ^When Dalel Khan rushed into the midst of the Bundelas, a
poet of their side said —

" Dalel flees before the waves of the Bundelas." A Bundela reproved
him, and said he should say —

** The Btmdelas flee before the torrent of DalePs attack."

NAWA'B KAIM KHAN.

On his father's death in December 1743, fCaim Khdn the eldest son suc-
ceeded without opposition. We have already seen that he was employed in
1721 to avenge the death of Daler Khan ; and in 1729 it was he who col-
lected a force to relieve his father from investment by the Mahrattas at
Jaitp^r. During the later years of Muhammad Khan's life he had lived at
Delhi as his father's representative, and many stories, trivial in themselves
and not worth repetition here, are told of the affection shown to him by the
2 B

872 W. Irvine— 2^4? Bangash Natedhi of Farruihdhdd* [No. 4,

Emperor Muhammad Shih from whom he obtained the title of '* Farzand
Bahadur."

He was a very strict Sunni, said the prayers five times daily, observed
Friday, and every day wrote out a verse of the Kura'n. He is said to have
been a great protector of learned men. He was fond of sport of every kind,
and at Delhi had the Emperor's permission to shoot in his private preserves.
He was also a perfect cavalier, and in those days no one equalled him in the
wielding of the lance. He had a riding horse named Pari (the Fairy)
famed even in the Dakhin. Mounted on it he used to hunt the Saras and
ride them down. Many other horsemen attempted it but not one succeed-
ed. He was also clever in other ways. He could found cannon with his
own hands ; and he could make very good shoes. Thirty to forty years
ago shoes of a pattern invented by him called " |^aim-khani*' were much
worn in Mau and ^aimganj. He is said to have ruled over eighty-four
mahdls, but their names are not given.

Once a Mahratta in the employ of Baji Edo came all the way from
Puna to try his skill at the lance with I^aim Kh4n. The Naw4b gave him
a house at Amethi and entertained him for six months. In this interval
he made enquiries from Mau Pafhins in service at Puna, who wrote
back that the man was what he professed. A day was then fixed for
the tournament in despite of Mahmtid Kh&n Bakhshi*s exhortations.
All the Path&ns were ordered to be ready before sunrise at Shikarpur,
three or four miles north-west of the city, where in the bed of the Ganges
was an open space in which the troops were usually exercised. Tho
Nawdb mounted his horse Pari, and taking the Mahratta with him rode
out to the plain. There they contended till full noon, but neither had
been touched. Now, the Mahratta had a handkerchief round his arm,
such as they usually tie above their other clothes. The Naw4b decided
to try and loose this handkerchief with the point of his spear. He
touched it repeatedly, but being wet with perspiration the knot had
become extremely tight. After some hours, however, the Nawdb suc-
ceeded in untying it with his lance and carried it off on the point. The
Mahratta was offered presents which he refused, being a noble in his own
country, and he then took his departure for Puna.

Kaim Khin^s home was in the fort at Amefhi, which he had built in
his father's lifetime. It lay one mile south-east of the city within tho
boundary of New Amethi, a small town founded by the Nawdb, round which
there was a ditch and earthen rampart with bastions which can still be
traced in parts. The remains of the fort and its site were confiscated after
1857 for the rebellion of the then Nawdb Rais, and being put up to auc-
tion, were bought by *Ali Muhammad, a native of Amefhi, then tahsilddr of
the city. He has used the bricks to build a house of a semi-English
fashion and he has planted the ground with fruit trees.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%« Bangash Ndwdbg of Farrukhdhdd. 373

K&Lm Kh4n, it was, who planted the large mango grore outside the
J^diii gate, called the Lakhdla Bagh from the number of trees (Lakh =
100,000) . It lies within the bounds of Khanpdr, Barhpur, Chandpiir, Maseni,
and Nekpur Kalan, and still covers some 158 acres. One of his last acts
before starting on the Bohilkhand campaign was to order Kam41 Kh4n chela
to have the gateways of the Tirpolja Bazdr and the bastions of the Kali
Burj, just beneath the fort, completed by the time he returned.

In his time on every birthday the fort used to be sumptuously adorn*
ed. In the Biradari and Buland Mahal, canopies of Sult^ni broadcloth
embroidered in gold used to be set up. There were twelve hundred staves
or poles of gold and silver in his store-house. These were used when re-
quired to support the broadcloth awnings. A cloth of gold curtain was
hung at the Kamani gate. No one's horse, or pdlki or elephant was allow-
ed to enter the fort ; all, however high in rank, dismounted at the gate.

He had four wives, besides concubines ; the wives were (1) Shah Begam,
his first wife, daughter of KaU Kh^n Bangash and nieee of Kasim Khdn,
(2) Bibi Jow&hir, a Pafhan woman, (3) Kh^ Mahal, a Domni from
Chaloli close to Kaimganj, (4) Ma'tabar Mahal, a native of Delhi. Ho
left no issue.

No non-Moslem was allowed to touch his women's ornaments ; no man
was ever employed to sew their clothes ; and no physician was ever permitted
to feel their pulse. The four wives all lived at the Amefhi fort. They had
extensive jdgirs in their own names. As they died ofE, this property passed
part to Sarfaraz Mahal, wife of Nawdb Ndsir Jang (1796 — 1813), part to
Nasrat Jang, younger son of Ndsir Jang, and part to the ruling Naw4b.

Whenever Shah Begam came from Ame^hi to visit her mother-in-law
at Farrukhabad the whole of the bdzar was closed. The shopkeepers call-
ed this " Hartal" or « Hat-tdra," from hdf a shop and tdrd a lock, that
is, they had to put locks on their shop doors. The conveyances were four,
wheeled bullock carriages, covered with broadcloth from top to bottom.
The Begam sat in the middle, and the slave girls round the edge. The
cover was tied on with sUken cords, and the whole was then locked up. A
free woman of great age sat in front, and the driver was an old man. On
the road no word was spoken. The eunuchs on horseback cleared the way«
The bazar was closed for fear the Begams might overhear an unfit word.

They say Naw4b Muhammad Khan had four chosen friends (1) Man-
gal Khdn Musenagari, so named from his being a native of the town of
Musenagar on the Jamna, which was then within the Nawab*s territory, (2)
Ma'zum Khiln Daryabddi,* (3) Khizr Khin Panni,t (4) Shuja't Khan

* Daryihid is 43 miles £• of Lakhnaa.
t Paani is the name of a tribe of Fa^hins.

374 W. Iryine—The Ban^ash Nawdhi of Farrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

Ghilzai, KiLdirganjwdld.* On his death-bed Muhammad Khdn said to his
son that he must look on these four as his true friends. If there was war
he should fight by the advice of Mangal EMn, who had been in every fight
from his childhood ; if an army had to be raised, he should do it through
Shuja't Khdn, a chief from Afghanistan ; if revenue had to be collected, he
should employ Khizr Kh&n Fanni ; if a negotiator were required at the
imperial court, he should send Ma'zum Kh4n who had great experience there.
All four of these men were killed in the battle of Dauri when Kaim Kb4n
lost his own life.

We shall see how little heed was paid to these dying injunctions.
The new Nawab appears to have placed himself entirely in the hands of
Mahmud Kh4n Afridi, a resident of Ame^hi, whom he appointed to be his
Bakhshi. His brothers and relations, Yusuf Khdn, Mu'azzam Khan, ' Azam
Khdn,'Sa'dat Kh&n, and others had several thousands of Afridis imder their
standard, and seem to have formed a powerful body in the state. Mahmud
Khan's kettle-drums were beaten at Kanauj, and he had complete authori-
ty over a territory paying a very large amount of revenue. He had one
son, Sh4di Khdn, who was thrown from his horse the fourth day after his
marriage ; his foot caught and he was dragged and killed. In 1839 the
arches of Mahmtid Xhan*s audience hall in Amefhi were standing in a dila-
pidated state. They are not in existence now, and the family seems to
have entirely disappeared.

Sohilkhand affairs.

Eatahr or Eohilkhand had gradually come into possession of 'Ali Mu-
hammad Ehdn Eohela, and he paid no revenue to the imperial exchequer.
Once Muhammad Shah sent his Diwdn, Harnand, with an army to recover
'Ali Muhammad Khan*s country. He got as far as Bangarhf and opened
his batteries. 'Ali Muhammad Khan came out and defeated him, so that the
imperial army fled to Delhi. % Muhammad Shah was very angry and a second
time, after an interval, he prepared an army, which he put under Khwdjah
A9li Sdhib. He too opened batteries against Bangajrh, to be repulsed like
Harnand with the loss of a number of men on the Imperial side.

A third time Muhammad Shah despatched all his forces under Kamr-
ud-din Wazir. Now, Kamr-ud-din, who was a wary man, reflected that if
he went he should meet the same fate as the others, the same army having
already fled twice. He would be forced to flee or would get killed, in either

• Gaz. N. W. P. rV. 74, 161. Kadirganj is in parganah Nidhpur, Tahail 'Ali-
ganj, Eta district, 82 miles N. E. of Eta. Shuja't Khib was killed with l^^Um Khin at
Dauri, as we shall see further on.

t In the BudiLon district, U miles N. E. of Bud&on. Misprinted Bangoih ia
Elliot, VIII, 116 and.360.

X Idfe of H. E. k., pp. 16^to 18.

1878.] W. Jivine—The Bangash Nawdbs of FarruUdhdd. 375

case his Waz^rat would be gone. A defeated Wazir was always dismissed.
The Wazir therefore persuaded the Emperor to march in person to the
attack of Bangarh. Kaim £[han joined the imperial army with his troops.
This was in 1158 H. (Jan. 1745— Jan. 1746.)*

For three stages the army came to the same river and drank its waters,
so the Emperor gave it the name of the " faithful friend" (Y4r-i-wafadar) ;
it flows below Auseth. At length the army reached Bangarh and proceed-
ed to invest it. Mirza Mu^im 'Abd-ul-Manstir Khan Safdar Jang com-
manded the vanguard. One night the Pafhans made a night attack and
surprised Safdar Jang's battery, many of his men being killed. The Bohe-
las returned in safety to Bangarh. Their fort was surrounded with such a
thick plantation of bamboos that a cannon ball could not penetrate it. The
firing went on for several days, till at last the Kohelas advised ' Ali Muham-
mad Kh^n to make peace, for to him who fights his sovereign, his wife be-
comes unlawful. 'Ali Muhammad Khan was to be introduced to the
presence through Safdar Jang, the negotiations being conducted by his
Diwan Naval Kae.

Kdim Khan's troops lay on Safdar Jang's right hand. One day 'All
Muhammad Kh4n was on his way to Safdar Jang followed by twelve thou-
sand mail-clad Path4ns. As he passed his eye fell on ^aim Khan's tents,
and he asked whose camp it was. They told him that it was.Kdim Khan's.
Then his principal men said, " Why let the credit of the peace be gained by
'* this Mughal and his Diwdn, Naval Eae, there is your clansman, ^dim
" Khdn, ask him to introduce you." 'Ali Muhammad Khdn agreed to the
proposal and went to I^dim Khdn, who received him most cordially. When
Safdar Jang, who had been kept waiting, heard this he was much vexed,
and for the rest of his life he bore a grudge to JKaim Khan. Then ]^4im
Khdn tied 'Ali Muhammad Khan's hands together with his own hand-
kerchief, and took him to the presence, where his nazar was accepted. The
Emperor foi^ave him, invested him with a robe of honour, and appointed
him to the Sdbah of Sarhind, to the west of the Jamna. The Emperor
and all the nobles then returned to Delhi, f

In the year that Muhammad Shdh died (1748) 'Ali Muhammad Khdn
left Sarhind and came back to Ka^ahr. He died shortly afterwards on the
3rd Shawwal 1161 H. (14th Sept. 1748), leaving three sons. 'Abdullah
Khdn, FaizuUah Khin and Sa'dullah Kh4n.^

• Scott's Farishta 11, 218. The Life of H. B. K. p. 20, gives 1 155 H. which wotdd
be before the death of Muhammad Ehini although in the same passage Kiim Khan is
Bpoken of as the reigning Naw&b. The Persian text mentions the 27th year, which fell
in 1157 and 1158 H.

t The author of the Sadikat-ul'Akdlim who was in Naval Rie's anny, confirms
the &ct of 'AH Muhammad Khan's presentation through ^&im Ehiin.

X Life of H. B. K pp. 20 to 23.

370 W. Irvino— The Bangash NawihM of Farrukhdhdd. [No. 4,

Accession of Ahmad Shah,

Muhammad Sh&h died in 116 L H. and on the 2nd Jamadi I. of that
year (I9th April 1748), was succeeded by his son Ahmad Shah. Soon after^
Safdar Jang was appointed wazir in place of 'Itimad-ud-daula, E^mr-ud-
din Kh&n, killed in the fighting against Ahmad Sh4h Durrini. Now Saf-
dar Jang, who was a deadly enemy of the Bangash family, caused &Jarmdn
to be sent calling ^aim Khdn to court. Kaim Khan in his reply told the
Emperor not to place reliance on Safdar Jang, who was his, Kiim Khan*s,
hereditary enemy. The £mperor and the Wazir were enraged. The Wazir
laid plans of revenge in consultation with J4wed Kh4n. Accordingly & far-
man was prepared telling Kaim Khan that an important work was confided
to him, that many of the Mahals of Bareli and Muraddbid, recovered with
his aid in the late Emperor^s time, had again been usurped by Sa'dullah
Khdn, son of 'Ali Muhammad Kh4n Bohela. This territory was therefore
made over to him, ]K4im Khdn, with orders to march and occupy it. This
farmdn was sent by a relation of the Wazir's, Sher Jang, son of Sayadat
Kh&n, the elder brother of the late Burhdn-ul-Mulk Sa*dat Khan.* On
the 4th Shawwal 1I6I H. (I6th Sept. 1748), the messenger was within
one or two kos of Farrukhabdd, and hearing of his approach Nawab Kaim
Khan caused a Bdri to be erected near the *Idgah. Then he proceeded in
state to the spot surrounded by nobles on elephants. First the/armi» was
read, then making his obeisance, the Nawab put on the accompanying
dress of investiture. With kettle-drums beating he returned to the fort,
where the chief men, money-lenders, and officials presented gifts of money,
and offered their congratulations.

The principal leaders were then sent for to be consulted. Chief among
them was Mahmdd Kh4n Afridi, the Bakhshi, with his brothers. These
all voted for immediate war, but the Nawdb seems to have been reluctant to
attack his fellow Pa^hdns. Shuja't Khdn G-hilzai, who had formerly exchan-
ged turbans with the late 'Ali Muhammad Khan Bohela, Yakut Khdn
Khdn Bahddur, Shamsher Khdn, Mukim Khan, Isldm Khdn, Kamdl Khdn
and Sarddr Khdn, chelas, represented to the Nawdb that the Bohelas were
not his enemies, and if some one was sent across the Ganges, Sa'duUah Khdn
might be persuaded to attend. As a compromise Ma'zum Khdn, brother of
Mahmtid Khdn Bakhshi, was despatched with a small retinue to A^walahf
with three robes of investiture for the three sons of 'Ali Muhammad Khdn.
His orders were to invest them with the succession, but as \isual to confis^

* For the name see *Amad-us~Sa*dat, p. 44, line 15, where a doubt is suggested,
but the despatch of some /armin is proved by the statements of Hisdm-ud-din, an eye-
witness.

t In the Bareli district, twenty-one miles S, W. of Bareli

1878.] W. Iryine— The BangM% Nawdh$ of Ihrrukhdhdd. 377

cate to the Emperor's use all the moveable property. If any difficulty was
made, the Nawdb would march in person. It is suggested that the three
sons had, before Ma'zum Kh4n's arrival, accepted investiture at the band
of a messenger sent direct by the Wazir. However that may be, Ma*zum
EMn's mission failed, and next day he set out for Farrukhab^d.

When Ma'zum Kh^n reported his want of success, Mahmud Kh4n
declared that by the return of the khiiats, a disgrace had been inflicted,
which could only be wiped out by an immediate march upon Anwalah. For
many days the matter was discussed with Shuja't Kh4n Ghilzai and the
chelas. Shuja't Khdn still wished to avoid hostilities. But Mahmud
Khan, thirsting for territory and plunder, charged Shuja^t Khdn with act-
ing the go-between in favour of the other side ; alluding to the fact that
he and *Ali Muhammad Khan had exchanged turbans.* Stung by this in-
sult, Shuja't Khdn exclaimed, '* In the name of God the Great, the Com-
" passionate, bring out the flag and I shall be the first in the fray." That
day the coffers of the treasure were unsealed, the flag set up, and the artil-
lery brought out.

Meanwhile orders had been issued offering service to noted leaders of
mercenaries and to neighbouring zaminddrs, such as Bajah Kusal Singh of
Burti,t lUjah Hindu Singh of Chachendi,:^ and the Bajah of Shiti-

* The " Golifliin-i-Bahinat" teUs us that after 'Ali Muhammad Ehin was cap-
tured and taken to Delhi, Hifiz Rahmat Kh^ and his relations for six months sought
a shelter with Shuja't Ehiui Ghilzai at ^iidirganj.

t Rdrii, in parganah Bidhuna, lies some thirty miles east of the town of Etowah
{Qaz. TV, 469). It was the chief place of a taluka belonging to a family of Sengar
Thiikurs, whose head has always borne the title of Kdjah (id. IV. 299). The story goes
that when Kusal Singh reached home, his mother asked him for news of the battle-field,
and out of affection began to shampoo him. When he told her that " Bhai ]^&im
(brother IK^Lun) was slain," she exclaimed that he was no son of hers, and could never
have been in the fight. When the H^ah had bathed, he went to the cooking-place to
eat his food. T^en the lUni called to the slave girl ^Ai eheriy kadarddr ratoi me^
lohd na jdn pdtve, Rajah lohd se bahut darat hat. The story concludes dramatically
by saying the H&jah then and there committed suicide, by swallowing the diamond out
of his ring. But the sober truth seems to be that he lived for many years, and died
about 1786 A. D. (Gaz. IV. 299).

X Chachendi (or Sachendi) lies in parganah J&jmau of the Cawnpur district, four-
teen miles south-west of Cawnpur, on the Kilpi road. From a manuscript kindly
lent me by Mr. F. N. Wright, C. S. (through the good offices of Mr. Atkinson, C. S.)
I learn that Hindd Singh, son of Har Singh Deo, son of Eharakjit Deo, was a Chin-
del Thikur of Bih&ri on the banks of the Ganges. After a quarrel with Rijah Indar-
jit of Shiiirijpiir, he left his home, and took service with the Bio of Sapihi in parganah
Jijmau, a minor branch of the Shiurijpiir house. After a time Hindu Singh set up on
his own account, raised an army, built forts at Bihnor and Chachendi, and having ac-
quired a large territory took the title of R^ah. He was contemporary with B^jahs
Mandhiti and Hindfipat of ShiMjpiir.

378 W. Irvine — The Banga»h Nawdhf of Farrukhdhdd, [No. 4,

^jpur,* In answer to the appeal thej joined Kaim Khan with some twenty
thousand men. Several Mahratta leaders, then Nazims of ICiLlpi, were also
entertained and brought to Farrukhiibad by Ja*f ar Khan, chela, Nazim of
parganah Akbarpur.f Sheikh FarhatuUah of Lakhnau, out of enmity to
Sa*dat Khin and Safdar Jang, also joined with his force.

The Rohelas were much dismayed at the prospect of attack. To
avert it if possible, they drew up a petition and sent it with the veil of 'All
Muhammad Khan's widow by the hand of Sayyad Ma'sum4 Their peti-
tion was to this effect : " When the father of this orphan, ». «., Sa*dullah
" Khan, died, he relied on none but God and you ; if you wish to take
" this territory, be it so ; send here Shuja't Khan and Shamsher Khan
*^ and Khan Bahadur, we will accompany them to your presence ; in exchange
" for our father's lands, we will conquer by our swords some of the country
" held by Safdar Jang further to the east." When the holy man came be-
fore the ' Nawab in open darb4r, he threw down the wrapper of Sa*dullah
Khdn's mother at the Nawab' s feet. Then he held aloft a Kura'n and said,
'' O Nawab ! head of this clan, by this holy book, by regard for this helpless
'^faqiTf and the unprotected owner of this veil, I adjure you to have mercy
" on this race and slay not the defenceless, for the Book says * Peace is a
" good work both to saints and the Prophet', accept then my prayer."

Having heard the Sayyad's words, the Nawab turned towards Mahmfid
Kh4n Bakhshi, and to him confided the whole discussion. This man at
heart wished nought but harm and dissension. He replied '* You are a
" Sayyad and a Pirzada, what know you of worldly affairs, why do you in-
" terfere ?" Several remarks to the same effect having passed, the Sayyad
saw that no favourable impression had been produced. Repeating the de-
nunciations of God and his prophet against the proud-minded, he told all
those then present that the displeasure of God and the Prophet would fall
upon them. He then took his way back to the town of Anwalah, where he
reported to the Rohelas and warned them to prepare at once for war. Ac-
cordingly, the Rohela leaders at the head of some twenty-five thousand men§
set up their tents in the groves near Dauri Rasulpur, not far from the town
of Budaon, and there prayed night and day to God.

* On the Grand Trunk Road in the Cawnpur district, some twenty-one miles north
west of Cawnpur. I supposed this Grangd Singh to be the same as the one mentioned
with the other Rajahs afterwards, hut he does not appear in Mr. Wright's MS. list.
The Shiur&jpur Rijahs were Chindels, and the Raj was founded by Shiii R^ Deo^
who is- said to have migrated from Kanauj about 1336 A D.

t Now in the Cawnpur district.

X The Life of H. R. E. says Sayyad Ahmad, aliaa Shdhji Miyin, was sent, and tho
*Amdd'H9'Sa*datf p. 44, tells us he was Sayyad Ma'zum*e father.

§ *Atndd'U8'Sa*dat, p. 45, says 40,000 foot and 7000 horse.

1878.] W. Irvine— 2%^ Banyash Ifawdhs of Farrukhdbdd. 879

J^dim Khin and Mahmlid Ehin Bakhshi now determined to march.
Thej had fifty thousand horse and foot paid direct by the State, besideB
the contingents of two hundred brothers, dependents and chiefs of the
Ban]gash clan, all provided with elephants, and each vieing with the other in
the completeness of his preparations. These served at their own expense.
There were further the contingents of the B&jahs already mentioned.
Nawab Ahmad Khan, too, who on account of differences with his elder
brother caused by Mahmud Kh4n Bukhshi, had lived for two years at Delhi,
hearing of the intended campaign, took leave of the Emperor on some pre-
text, and by rapid marches joined his brother's army. There were two hun-
dred large cannon, besides swivel guns, and chddar, and camel-guns attached
to the howdahs of the elephants, as used by Europeans,* with abundance of
lead and powder.

The army marched on the 2nd Zi'l Hajj 1161,t (12th Nov. 1748), and
by stages reached the Ganges at K^irganj, about forty-three miles north-
west of Farrukh4b4d, where it crossed by a bridge of boats into the Bud&on
district. Shamsher Elian and Eh^n Bah^ur were sent on in advance, and
cutting a way quickly past Auseth and other villages, they prepared the
Nawdb's encampment at the edge of the water. Daily skirmishing parties,
armed with bows and arrows or muskets, were sent out from the Nawab's
army. Meanwhile the angel of death had visited the camp of K4im Ehin,
fear and destruction never left it, all whether old or young were depressed
and agitated. The whole of the night of the 11th Zi*l Hajj (21st November
1748) they wore out on their prayer-carpets interceding for a favourable
answer to their prayers.

On the other side the Eohelas, having given up all hope of escape, had
begun to form an entrenchment round th^r camp, close to the village of

* Or " imder charge of a European," Mata^na-i-farangL

t There seems some conflict as to the correct year of I^iUm Ehin's death. In the
M8. of HisiLm-ud-din, the 3rd year (1163-4 H.) has been written first, then crossed
ont, and the figure 1 substituted. His poetical t&r£khfi yield 1161, 1162, and 1163, H.
The only other contemporary authority I know for 1162 H. is the TabtiraUun'Ndzi*
fin^ from which probably the author of the Miftdh, p. 497, copied that year. The
Ftttehgafh Ndma, a modem work has the same year. On the other hand, the Khizdna
'Amirahj the Siyar' ul'Muta^kharin and the Tdrikh-'uMuzaffari all agree in naming
Ahmad Shih's first year (1161 H.) The life of Hdfix Rahmat Khan, WaU-ullah,
the Zauh-i-Tdrikh, and Dow, all foUow the above and fix the year 1161 H. The
Mt^astr-ul-Umra, without naming the year, leads one to infer that it was 1161 H., while
the Akhbdr-uMukabhat in one place has 1161 H. and in another 1163 H. The year
1163 H. cannot be admitted, as then the date of Naval Rae's death, which is not dis-
puted, would fall before instead of after K^m Khin's death. I would decide in favour
of 1161 H. as having the most evidence in its favour. The date I make out to be the
12th Zi'l Hajj, though some books give the ICth, and some the 16th of that month.
2 c

880 W. Irvine— 1^0 Banga$\ Ndwdht of Ibrruhkdhdd. [No. 4,

Daiiri Bastilptir, four miles soath-east of the town of Budion. On the
morning of Monday the 12th Zi'l Hajj* (22nd Nov. 1748), Kaim Khan
gave the order for battle. Putting on his war attire, he rode out on his
elephant followed by fifteen of his brothers,t and the principal leaders' and
relations of Mahmdd Khin Bakhshi, namely, Ma'ziim Khdn, 'Azim Kh4n,
Tusuf Kh4n, Sa*dat Kh&n, Salabat Kh&n, Ahmad Khan and others, besides
the friendly Rajdhs.

The chelas, Shamsher Kh&n, Mukim Kh&n, IsUm Kh4n, Ja'far Kh4n,
Bustam Khdn, Kamdl Khin, Khan Bah^ur Khan, were sent on as an ad-
vanced guard. They advanced rapidly towards the grove of mango trees
where were posted the Bohela leaders, Hafiz Bahmat Kh4n, Don^e Khan,
Fath Khan, and others. Shamsher Khan made his attack at the south
comer of the hd^h, and putting its defenders to the sword captured their
guns. Some of the Bohelas, who had climbed the trees unperceived by
the other side, suddenly poured down arrows and balls like as if the heavens
had fallen to the earth. Several of the bullets struck the chain armour of
Kh&n Bahadur Khdn, and an arrow grazed Shamsher "Khkn upon the fore-
head. Many of the men were killed. After this ^4im Khan and the lead-
ing men arrived with their elephants to re-inforce the first attack. A dis-
charge of arrows and musketry was delivered, and then their men drawing
their swords put many of the Eohelas to death.

At the very moment of the contest at the south comer, Ma'zum Khdn,
brother of Mahmtid Khin, Manavvar Khdn, and Namdar Kh4n, brother of
'Izzat Khi.n, advanced against Sa'dullah Khan, who was in position at the
north corner of the same hd^h. They fought their way close up to Sa*d-
nUah Kh4n. Manavvar Khan had in his hand an iron mace (gurz) . He had
raised it to fell Sa'duUah Khan, when Ma'ztim Khdn cried out " Brother,
take him alive," and at the same time drove his own elephant forward, in-
tending to throw his cloth (chadar), made into a noose, over Sa'dullah Khan's
bead, thus dragging him from the one elephant on to the other. Sa'dullah
KhAn crouched down in his howdah, and the noose missed him. Just at
this moment Mull4 Sard&r Kh&n Bakhshi with some horsemen and match-
lockmen rushed up from his battery, which was to the south of the hd^h,
and the whole of the Bangash leaders and their elephants came under fire.
Ma'zum Khiin, 'Azim Khan, Salabat Khan, Jalal Khan and other Afridi
leaders were killed.

• Wali-nllali and the Siyar-fO-Muta^kharin give the date, 15th Zi'l Haj}.

t The brothers with their number in the list of Muhammad Kh&n*s sons (p. 350*
862) were Ahmad Ehin, No. 2, ' Abd-un*nabi Khdn, No. 6, Husain Khan, No. 7, Fakhr-
uddin Khin, No. 8, Murtazza Khin, No. 4, Imim Kh&n, No. 11, BahiLdur Ehin, No. 16,
H&did6d EhAn, No. 14, Isma'il Ehdn, No. 9, Earim-d£d Kh&n, No. 10, Ehtida-bandah
Kh^ No. 12, Shidi Ehin, No. 16, Mans^'Ali Kh^ No. 13, Manavvar Ehim, No. 18.

1878.] W. Iryine— The Bangash Nauodbs of FarruhUhdd. 881

On seeing this, Mahmtid Khan Bakhshi drove his elephant forward,
and was soon afterwards shot dead. Then Naw4b iCaim Khan ordered his
brother, 'Abd-nn-nabi Khdn, to advance in support. 'Abd-im-nabi Khan and
8h6h Asad 'All* were seated on one elephant. The former was killed and-
the latter wounded above the elbow. One after another, the sons of Muham-
mad Kh4n advanced by ^iim Kh&n's order and were shot down. Those
killed were 'Abd-im-nabi Khan, Hadiddd Kh&n, Bahadur Kh£n, Murid Khdn;
while those wounded were Imdm Kh4n, Fakhr-ud-din Khan and Murtazza
£h4n. Those sons of an Amir in bravery and courage did not belie their
race ; but " against the foreordained what avails, failure and success are
^ alike in the hand of Qod."

Three accountsf attribute the Nawdb's death to an ambuscade, an in*
cident omitted by others'. { Some such accident is almost required to
account for the immense slaughter of leaders. It is related thus. Mangal
Kh4n Musenagari had counselled Kaim Khdn not to advance too far, before
the fate of the day was decided. His advice was disregarded. Now be-
tween the two armies lay a hollow, long, wide and deep, like the ditch of a
fort, called in the Hindi tongue Bihar ^, Close to the edge of this hol-
low were high hdjra crops. The Rohelas had three thousand men on one
side with muskets ready loaded, and five thousand on the other hidden in
the high crop along the edge of the ravine, ^aim Khin in his pride charge
ed at the enemy, the Kohelas gave way and threw themselves into the hoi-
low. Kaim Khan with sixteen thousand veterans and fifty-one chiefs on
elephants descended into the hollow in pursuit of the fugitives. As these
were on foot, they could scramble up the high bank on the other side, and
thus made good their escape. Nawdb Kaim Khdn had only got half way
across the low land, when suddenly the Kohelas in ambush rushed up to
the edge, and eight thousand matchlocks were fired down in one volley.

At the critical moment of the attack, Eajdhs Hindti Singh and Gang4
Singh and Kusal Singh, who were on Kaim Khdn's right, turned for flight.
Their bad example was imitated by the Mahrattas from Kalpi. Seeing
this, the other Rohelas, Hafiz Kahmat Khan, Donde Khan, Fath Khan and
others, came out of the hdgh, joined Mulla Sard&r Khdn, and with their
united forces turned against Nawab K^im Khan. Those of his companions,
who were still unhurt, gathered round his elephant. The enemy maintain-
ed their fire, but attempted no hand-to-hand encounter. When most of
those round the Naw4b had been slain, the Kohelas surrounded his elephant
and pointed their matchlocks upwards to shoot at him. Shekh Farhat-
ullah of Lakhnau, who was on the right hand, brought his elephant closer

• Died 7th Safar 1184 H. (2nd June 1770).

t The Siyar'Ul'Muta*khann, the *Amdd'U8^Sa^dat, and the Lauh-i-Tdrikh,

t Life of H. B. K. and Shih Hisam-ud-din.

S Uneven land, full of mvines.

882 W. Irvine— 2%<J Bangash Mwdbs of Ihrrukhdbdd. [No. 4,

up ; but at that momeDt he was carried off by a musket shot. Shortly
afterwards, at about one and a half hours after sunrise, a ball struck Kiim
Elh6n on the forehead and he fell dead. Dilawar Elhan Narkasse,* who
was seated in the Nawab*s howdah, received him in his arms and wiped off
the blood. An attempt was made to carry off the body, but the Rohelas
pursued and coming up with the elephants cut off the head of the NawaU
Others who lost their lives in this battle were Mangal Khan Musenagari^
Ma'zum Khan Dar}'4b^, Khizr Khin Panni, Khitn Bah&dur Khan Khwa-
ja Sarae, Bustam Khan and Kamal ELhan, chelas, and Roshan Im4m, son of
Miyan Fazl Imam. Khan Bahadur Khdn was buried at 'Aliganj, the popu-
lar tradition asserting that his elephant carried his body there from the
field of battle.

During the battle Shuja't Kh4n Qhilzai, who had come there from a
sense of duty though against his own inclination, had stood alone on one
side. When he was told that ^aim Kh4n was dead, he wept and exclaimed,
'* Shall such a leader be slain, and I go back alive to appear before the Bibi
" Sahiba ; to do so would be more than I can bear/' He went towards the
leaders of the enemy's army, intending to give himself up. When he came
near to H4£z Bahmat Khdn, the men about hiin said, '' May your mouth be
filled with dust." But Uafiz Rahmat Khan, who had got down from his ele-
phant, said, '^ Send for a palki, meanwhile will you get down F'' Diwin Man
Bae, who was standing close by, said in Fu8htu,t " Wise men do not kill
the scorpion an4 leave his brood " During this conversation one of the
Bohelas rode up with his matchlock across his shoulder. He fired it at
Shuja't Khan and shot him through the breast.

After the death of the Nawib the rest of the leaders, some wounded
and some scatheless, took to flight. They were Naw&b Ahmad Khan, who
was wounded, his son Mahmud Khan, Husain Khan, Fakhr-ud-din Khan,
Isma'il Khan, Imam Khan, Kkrim-dad Kh&n, brothers of ^&im Khan, and
the chelas, Shamsher Khan, Mukim Kh6n, Islam Khan. They fled though
no one cut off their retreat nor was any man pursuing them. After being
much scattered and after much molestation from the zamindars of that
part, they re-assembled near the banks of the Ganges. At first a bridge of
boats was thrown across, but Nawab Ahmad Khan and the others caused it
to be broken up. Then driving their elephants into the river they forded
it, while the horsemen and infantry, stripping to their waist-cloths, threw
themselves into the water and swam across. Out of shame they all slunk
into the city and sought their homes by bye-ways. When it was noised
abroad that Nawdb ^aim Khdn was slain and kis army defeated, there

* A bdgh just outside the I^idiri gate of Famikhib&d is called after this man B£ni
Bdgh Narkasse.

t An unlikely language for a Hindu to know, but thus in His^-ud-din's MB.

1878.] W. Jryme—The Bangazlt Nawdhs of FarruhMhdd, 383

arose weeping and wailing in every lane and in every house. Not a house-
hold was left untouched by this sorrowful event, and the fate of thousands
was never traced. Many had been wounded and taken prisoners, many were
found dead on the field Of these latter, those that were recognized were
carried away and interred in the graveyards.

The body of the slain Nawab, clad in rich garments and followed by
holy men and mourners, was despatched from the battle-field to Farrukba-
bad.* The next day but one, three headless corpses were laid at the feet of
the Bibi Sahiba. ^4im Khan was identified by a lily mark on his foot. It
is a coloured mark on the sole of the foot, and he who has it is destined to
bear rule. The Bibi Sihiba after her lamentations were over, took the body
of her son, and wrapping it in the clothes he wore when slain, carried it out
to the Haiyat Bagh for burial at the side of his venerable father.

The following chronograms give the year of ^aim Kh&n's death :

l.—Kaim4-hihi8ht shud (L162).

'* He stood firm in paradise."

1 1. — Kanjashf ha- hdz hard sh ikdr (11 63) .
" The sparrow pursues the hawk."

llh—Fdk he-had shahtd Kdim Khdn (1162).

After the victory the Eohelas felt as if they had been raised from the
dead, and they offered up a thousand prayers and thanks to God. Then
with drums beating a triumphal march, they returned to their capital of
Afiwalah ; and parties were sent out to overrun and occupy the Farrukhdbad
parganahs on the north or left bank of the Ganges. These consisted at
that time of ten mahals : 1, Buddon, 2, Ausefh, 3, Jakldbad, 4, Mihrabfid,
5, Ausayd, 6, Aujhani, 7, Kh^katmau-Dahlya, and three others not named
(two of them probably 8, Amritpur-Islamganj and 9, Paramnagar, and
the third perhaps 10, Sahaswdn). The Eohelas advanced as far as Kha-
katmau, opposite Farrakh&bad, where they first met with resistance. A
chela who was *Amil of the place showed a strong front and kept up a
vigorous musketry fire at the enemy, many of whom were killed. He would
not abandon his parganah, and the Bohelas thinking there was no need to
entangle themselves in brambles, left the place and marched back. All the
rest of the Trans-Ganges country was thus lost permanently to the Far-
rukhabad Nawdbs. Only Amritpur, Khakatmau and Paramnagar were pre-
served through the courage of this nameless chela. f

(To he continued,)

* The OuHtidn-i-Eahmutt describes in some detail the finding of the body ; bat
the Hadikat'Ul-AkdHm says it was never found. Reports spread of Kaim Jang's being
still alive, and 8hekh AUahydr once saw a man who obtained notoriety for several
years by giving himself out to be K&im Jang.

t The battle of Dauri will be found in '* Siyar-td-Muta' kharin^ III. 874, " 'Amdd'
M 8a*dat" p. 44, line 16 to p. 46, line 17, " Khizdna Amira'' (Lucknow edition) p. 80
and " life of H. B. K." pp. 29—32. I follow His&m ud-din almost entiiely.

381 Rajendralala Mitra— On the Pdla [No. ^,

On the Pdla and the Sena It6ja» of Bengal. — By BijENDBAXA.'LA.

MiTBA, LL. D., C. I. E.

The Society has lately received from Mr. Smith of Bhigalpur a copper-
plate of one of the P^la Kings of Bengal. It measures 15'5* x 12*7* inches,
and has a scalloped top 6 inches high and 6' 5 long at the hase. The centra
of the top is enclosed in a circle, 3 inches in diameter, and around it is a
band of lotus petals. The legend in the centre is a wheel mounted on a
stand, and supported by a deer rampant on each side — a well-known Bud-
dhist symbol. Below this is the name of Ndr4yana-p&la Deva, and below
that a sprig formed of a flower and two leaves. The front of the plate is
surrounded by a border line, but on the reverse this does not occur.
The inscription in front extends to 29 lines, of which the first four are
broken in the middle by the base of the scalloped top, which covers the
plate to the depth of 2 inches. On the reverse there are 25 lines of in-
scription. The plate is thick, and in a fair state of preservation. The
letters are of the Kutila type. See plates XXII and XXIII.

The record opens with a stanza in praise of Go-p41a, who was a devout
Buddhist, and a follower of Sugata. His son and immediate successor was
Dharma-pdla. The latter had a brother named V4k-pala, who lived under his
sway. On his death Deva-pala the eldest son of his brother succeeded him.
Yak-p&la had a second son named Jaya-pala, who is said to have brought
Orissa and Allahabad under his brother's government. On the death of Deva-
p^la, Yigraha-p41a, the son of Jaya-p&la, came to the throne. Yigraha-piila
married Lajjd of the Haihaya race, and had by her a son, named N4r&y-
a^a-pila. The last, as the reigning sovereign, is spoken of in the highest
terms of praise ; but the only noticeable work of his described in the record
is a bridge of boats across the Ganges near Mungher. In the 17th year of
Ids reign, on the 9th of Vai^4kha, when this prince was encamped near Mud-
gagiri, modern Mungher, he presented the village of Mukatika for the support
of S^iva Bhatt^raka and his followers. The donee appears to have been a
Hindu, and the gift was made with a view to assist him in offering charu
and hali to a divinity named Sahasrdksha, and also for the dispensation of
medicines to the sick, and food and shelter to the indigent. The record was
composed by Bhatta Gurava, the minister who erected the Bud41 pillar, and
engraved by Meghadasa, son of Subhad&sa. The genealogical table deducible
from this record may be thus arranged ;

,r BengiJ, Pel, nil-

FACSIMILE OF THE 0BVKR3E OF A COPPER -PLATE INSCBIFTION FROM BHAGALPUR.

1. Socy. of Bengal. Pt. I, 1873.

FACSIMILE OF THE REVEKSE OF A COPPtB - PLATE mSCRIPTION F

1878.] onJ the Sena Bdjds of Bengal, 385

I. Go-pila

f — ; ^ ,

II. Dharma-pala Yak-pdla

lY. Yigraha-pala
y. Ndr4jai^p41a.

The genealogy here giyen is apparently not in accord with what hsia
been hitherto known to be the family tree of the P41a8, and, in order to
elucidate the history of the P^las, it is necessary to advert to certain records,
already published, relating to some of the sovereigns of the family.
General Cunningham, in his Archseological Survey Keports, Vol. Ill, has
already noticed them at length ; but some of the facts contained in them
require to be further discussed.

The first inscription brought to the notice of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal was a copper-plate grant of one of the Pala Eajas of Bengal. It
had been discovered among some ruins at Mungher, and translated by Sir
Charles Wilkins, in 1781, three years before the foundation of the Society.
The translation was published in the first volume of the ' Asiatic Kesearches,*
(pp. 122, et eeq.y^ but without any facsimile or transcript of the original.
The original is lost, and so many doubtful points in it cannot now be
solved. It opens with the name of Go-p41a, a pious king, who acted accord-
ing to what is written in the S^^ra, and obliged the different sects to con-
form to their proper tenets. His religion is not mentioned ; but he was
evidently a Buddhist, for the document begins with a comparison between
him and Sugata Buddha, the allusion to the S^dstra being intended either
to imply his tolerant character, or to the scriptures of the Buddhists. His
son, Dharma-pdla, seems to have died while engaged in a marauding excur-
sion towards the Him&laya. The circumstance is explained by his pane-
gyrist in the following manner : '^ He went to extirpate the wicked and
plant the good, and happily his salvation was effected at the same time,
for his servants visited Kedir, and drank milk according to the law, and
they offered up their vows where the Ganges joins the ocean, and at €k)kar-
^a and other places." It is scarcely likely that the king had ever exercised
any power in those places. His accomplished wife, Kanna Devi, bore him
a son, Prince Deva-p&la, who succeeded his father in the kingdom " even
as Bodhisattva succeeded Sugata.*' His name occurs as ** the lord of the
land" in a Buddhist Inscription found in a mound near Pesserawa in Behar.*

• Journal, As. Soc. XYII, p. 493.

886 Rdjendral&la Mitra— 0» Us Fdla [No. 4,

His conquests, according to the chronicler, extended from the source of
the Ganges to Adam's bridge, including the Vindhja and EL^mboja coun-
tries ; but probably it did not in reality stretch much beyond the Vindhy-
an range. The conquest of Kdmboja evidently had no firmer basis than
the imagination of the poet. When encamped at Mudgagiri, modem Mun-
gher, this prince, on the 21st day of Mdrga^ir^ (November — December,)
in the 33rd year of his reign, bestowed the town of Misika in Krimila, a
department of S'rinagara, modern Patna, to one Bodha Bhikshurata Mi^ra.
The imprecations against the resumption of the grant are given in the
usual Puranic style.

Soon after, a second monument of that dynasty was found at Budal
in Dinajpur, and also translated by Sir Charles Wilkins. It was a record
inscribed on a stone pillar, by order of a minister of one of the Pala Rajas.
As in the last case so in this the translation was published in the ' Research-
es,' (Vol. I, pp. 131 et seq.,) without any text. But a plate was added,
giving a front and a side view of the pillar and a specimen of the character
of the inscription. Sir William Jones was not satisfied with either of the
translations, and appended to them some explanatory notes. A revised
transcript and translation of the last, however, has since been published by
B4bu Pratapachandra Ghosha,* and all doubts regarding the original have
now been removed. This inscription was put up by a minister of Ndrdya^a-
p41a who recorded the merits of his ancestors, who seem to have been all
officers of the P4la family. Trusting to the wisdom of one of them, the
chronicler states, *' The king of Gau4a for a long time enjoyed the country
of the eradicated race of Utkala (Orissa), of the Hunnas of humbled pride,
of the kings of Dravi(j[a and Gurjara, whose glory was reduced, and the
universal sea-girt throne." B4bu Pratdpachandra Ghosha has thus sum-
marised the historical results of this record.

I. Sdndilya.

II. Viradeva.

III. P4nchala.

IV. Garga, married Ichchh&.

V. Sri Darbhapdni, minister of Deva-p41a, married Sdrkara.

VI. Some^vara Mi^ra, married Tarala.

VII. Kedirnatha Mi^ra, married Badhvi of Devagr^ma, Sura-pala,
contemporary.

VIII. Gurava Mi^ra, minister of N&r4yana-p41a.

The third record was found at S^rn^th, near Bandras. It was inscribed
on a stone, and a facsimile transcript and a translation of it were publish-
ed in the fifth volume of the * Asiatic Researches ' It contained the

* Ante XUII, pt. I. pp. 366f.

1878,] and the Sena Rdjds of Bengal 387

names of four members of the dynasty under notice, viz,, Mahi-p&la, Sthira-
p41a, Yasanta-pdla, and Kumdra-pala ; but the record was throughout so
corrupt, and the reading so manifestly incorrect, that no reliance whatever
could be placed on it for purposes of historical deduction. The stone was
not forthcoming early in this century ; but General Cunningham pointed out
to Major Kittoe, the probability that the original stone would be found
somewhere about the tank of Diw4n Jagat Sinha in the city of Bendres,
which was constructed entirely of stones removed from Sam^th. After a
short search the latter found it. " The inscription was recorded", says
General Cunningham, '* on the base of a squatted figure of Buddha, which
was broken at the waist. Kittoe sent me a tracing of his sketch of the
statue, and a copy of the inscription, with transcript in modern Ndgari.
This differs very much from Wilford's version, as will be seen in the
following translation."

'' Adoration to Buddha. Having worshipped the lotus foot of Sri
Dhama-rdsi, sprung from the lake of Yardnasi, and having for its moss the
hairs of prostrate kings, the fortunate Mahi-pdla, King of Gauda, caused to
be built in Kiai hundreds of monuments, such as f^na and Chitraghan^a.

'' The fortunate Sthira-p41a and his younger brother, the fortunate
Yasanta-pala, have renewed religion completely in all its parts, and have
raised a tower (Saila) with an inner chamber (garhha-kufi), and eight large
niches. Samvat 1083, the 11th day of Pausha."*

The learned antiquarian does not mention where the stone now is, nor
the name of the person who translated the record. He has also not given a
facsimile or transcript of it. Under the circumstances no critical enquiry
can be made as to the correctness of the reading and the translation. This
is much to be regretted, as the document is the only one which has a really
intelligible and useful date in it.

It is to be regretted also that the next record to which I have to refer,
a copper-plate inscription found at Amgdchhi in Dindjpur, appears also to
be defective. Colebrooke, who translated it, published only an abstract.
According to Colebrooke^s abstract the first prince mentioned in it is
Loka-p&la, and after him, Dharma-pdla. The next name has not been
deciphere^f but the following one is Jaya-pdla, succeeded by Deva-p4la ;
two or three subsequent names are yet undeciphered ; then follow Kdja-
pfila, — Pdla Deva, and Yigraha-p41a, and subsequently Mahi-pdla Deva,
Naya-pala and Yigraha-pdla. The date aj^ears to be of the last king's
reign, the 9th day of Chaitra (March — April), Samvat 12.

The next record, in order of discovery, was found by Captain Marshall
in 1864r, but not published in any form. Mr. Broadley noticed it in 1872.
It was found inscribed on the jamb of the entrance to the N&landa temple.
It occurs at the foot of an ornamental scroll, and measures 8 inches by 5.

• Arch. Survey Report III, p. 121.
2 J)

888 Rijendraliia Mitra— On the Pdla [No. 4,

Its language is Sanskrit, and its extent 12 lines, of which the second breaks-
off in the middle a£ter the word Samyat, and the third begins so as to leave
some space at the beginning. This was done probably with a view to leave
room enough for the date in figures or words ; but thej were never put in.
The jamb being made of hard basalt, and having been placed on the door
side, deep behind a broad portico or veranda, suffered not at all from the
influence of the weather when in situ ; and, since the destruction of the
temple, having remained buried under a larg^ mass of rubbish, between 20
and 30 feet deep, looks as fresh as when it was first turned out of the
sculptor^ s atillier.

The subject of the record is a donation to the temple, but the nature
of the gift is not apparent. The words used for the purpose are deya
dharmoyam " this is a religious gift," and the pronoun therefore may apply
to the stone on which it occurs, or to the gate of which the stone forms a
part, or to the portico, or to the entire temple. The words, however, are
generally used as a formula for expressing a gift, and the gift might be
other than the substance on which they occur. Looking to the nature of
the temple, — a brick structure cemented with clay and plastered with stucco,
which had undergone several repairs, the plastering in many places being
not in keeping with the mouldings formed of bricks, and the door- ways, apart
from the stone-facings, being perfect and bearing marks of plastering
under the stones — ^there is no doubt now that the temple existed from
long before the time of the P&la Kings of Bengal, and the formula there-
fore does not apply to it. Greneral Cunningham takes the temple to date from
the 1st century B. C. The donor was one Bdladitya, a native of Kau^ambi
in the Doab of the Ghinges, the son of Gurudatta, and grandson of Hara-
datta. He was a Buddhist by religion, a follower of the Mahay&na school,
and a devout worshipper. He belonged to a clan of oil-sellers named Tail4-
<j[haka. He had no pretension to royalty, but in religion, whether Hindu
or Buddhist, it was not necessary for a devout person to have high social
position, to make a religious gift in an ancient public temple. He claims
no merit to himself for the gift, but desires that the fruit of it may
promote *' the advancement of the highest (religious) knowledge among
the mass of mankind."*

When I first read the inscription from a facsimile, I was disposed to take
the date of this inscription to be the Samvat year 913 = A. D. 856. I made
out the figures from three symbolical words : the first — a^ni, " fire," being
equal to 3, the second rdgha^ " power," = to 1 ; and the third dvdrUy * door'
=s 9. This would be equal to 319 ; but the practice invariably followed in
explaining symbolical figures is to transpose them according to the well-
known rule, aAkasya vdmd yatt, " figures run to the left/' and I had no

• AtiU XLI, pt. I, p. 310.

1878.] and the Sena Bdjda of Bengal. 889

hesitation, therefore, in adopting it, particularly as the character of the
writing, the Kufila, which had a range of hetween four or five centuries
from the 8th to the 12th, fully justified my course. The symbolical mean,
ings of the first and the last words are well known and undoubted. The
second, however, was not in common use, at least I had never found it used
in that sense. Its first letter rk was unmistakable, but the second could be
a compound of d and ya, which would produce adya or one, the r being taken
for the visarga after agni. This would lead to the same result. Inasmuch
however as the first word cannot take the nominative case-mark in the
midst of a compound term, I preferred the reading adopted. Soon after
communicating my translation to Mr. Broadley I paid a visit to Behar, and,
on examining the stone, I found the second letter to be clearly a dh, and
the word rddha being equivalent to the Hindu month yai^kha(A.pril — May),
I came to the conclusion that the first two words meant the 3rd of Vai^kha,
the subsequent word dvdra tate meaning *' spread on the door*', «. e,, the gift
whatever it was given at the gate.* This explanation left the figures of the
Samvat unprovided, but the blank space after the word Sam vat I supposed waa
the locale of the figures or symbolical words which were never engraved. Pro-
fessor Kdma Krishna Gopdl Bhanddrkar of Bombay, to whom a facsimile
had been communicated by Mr. Broadley, took the two upright strokes after
the word Samvat to be equal to ll.f I could not, however, subscribe to
this opinion. In the Ku^ila character the figure for 1 is not an upright
stroke, and there was no reason to suppose that a departure had been made
in this case. The blank spaces after the word at the end of the first line and
at the beginning of the second line would under the supposition also be
unaccountable. In Sanskrit inscriptions and MSS. it is not usual to break
the matter into paragraphs, and the blank spaces cannot but imply a
deliberate act intended for something to be put in afterwards, the matter
not being ready at hand at the time of the incision.

Mr. Broadley found an inscription of Go-p41a at the same place, two of
Madana-p41a and Yigraha-pala respectively at Behdr ; three of Mahi-p^la,
and one each of Kima-pala and Deva-p41a at Ghosrawdn and Titrawan.
The Ghosrawdn inscription was first noticed by Major Kittoe. J

With a view to complete the summary of the references to the history
of the Pdla Kings, it is necessary further to refer to the list of the P^las
given in the Ain-i-Akbari (vol. I, p. 418) and in T4r4n4th's work. They
have been entirely superseded by the inscriptions, but they afford curious
illustrations of the changes which had been effected by the traditions
current in the time of Abul Fazl. Abul Fazl's list has been reproduced in
Pere Tieffenthaler's work.

The Genealogical lists derived from these several sources may be thus
tabulated :

• Ante^ XLI, pt. I., p. 810. t Loe, cit. J Ant0 XLV.

890

Raiendraldia Mitra— 0« the Pdla

[No. 4,

I

«3

ft)

CO

N

u

i

p.* 6

^ S 3

ego
S o

I

I

I •

I k

o «

Oft

'^^S'si

*4

g* f P4 00 i

;i4

it

II

PQft

P4

^

ftn

If t^i t i

7 I Q. Q. CL t .

i^ © c8 rt •=»

* i

©

I

Icr

'3 '^^

It-

5
^

g

I ilS;ll

P4
I

r

i

4^

vqS "^ • • • • •

p^a bbp,P<
4ft

Qj O 93

pqWO

o

CO

' H © I •

: : : e.^

© g

ftcQ

.ii^^d li: : : ::::::::
4 it?<^ 1 1 : : : ::::::::

eft}>ft>g >^

f-i o ««

O CO

^ 5 P%

1878.] and the Sena JRdjds of Bengal, 391

It is obvious that the several authorities quoted above all refer to the
same dynasty, and the question therefore arises — ^how to reconcile their dis-
crepancies ? The list of the Ain-i-Akbari and that of T&randth, may be
left out of consideration, as they are founded upon tradition, and, in dealing
with long lists of names, tradition is always open to mistakes. But the case
is different with patents issued during the lifetime of the grantors, and
which, from that circumstance^ are naturally expected to be accurate in so
important a matter as the names of the immediate ancestors of royal per-
sonages. Discrepancies in such cases cannot easily be explained away, and
in the present instance the difficulty has been greatly enhanced by some of
the patents available being imperfect and mutilated. It is the farthest
from my wish to cast any reflection on the translators whose works I have
to review ; I have high respect for their ability and profound scholarship ;
but where the originals they had to work upon were smudgy, obliterated, and
partially illegible, their translations cannot be implicitly relied upon.

The first discrepancy I have to notice is in the name of the founder of
the dynasty. According to three inscriptions, of which two are in a perfect
state of preservation, and tradition as recorded by Taran^th, it is Gk)-pila ;
but in a fourth, and that the most defective, it is Loka-pdla ; and the Ain-i-
Akbari changes it to Bhu-pdla, Assuming Colebrooke's reading of the
Dindjpur plate to be in this part correct, I can account for the difference
by attributing it to the exigency of metre. The geneal(^y is given in verse,
and the necessity for a word of two syllables, I think, induced the convey-
ancer to change the first part of the name from the monosyllable go to
the dissyllable loka^ the meaning remaining unchanged — go = ' earth' and
loka = ' region' or earth. The hhu of the Ain-i-Akbari has the same signifi-
cation. It might appear repulsive to an Englishman that Mr. Black should
change into Mr. Melanos, to suit the convenience of a poet, but in the
middle ages it was not uncommon in Europe to translate English names into
Latin even in prose epitaphs, and in the present day poets not unfrequently
change the quantity of proper names to suit their rhyme. In Sanskrit
the practice of using synonyms either for the sake of metre, or for that of
rhetoric, was at one time not unknown. If this explanation be not accepta-
ble, it might be supposed that the person referred to had two aliases ; and the
writer of the Din4jpur plate xised one name, that of the Ain i Akbari another.
It is worthy of note that the writer of the Bhdgalpur monument was only
five generations removed from the founder of the dynasty, whereas that
of the Dinajpur plate was separated from him by over twice that interval, and
greater faith must be reposed on him who was the nearest to the founder.

The second name is the same in all the three inscriptions in which it
occurs, and calls for no remark. The third, however, is not so. In the
Bhdgalpur record, which is the most perfect, it is Vak-p41a, but in the

392 Eajendralala Mitra— On the Pdla [No. 4,

Mungher plate Deva-pila. In the Din&jpur plate it is illegible. It ap-
pears, however, from the first record that Ydk-pdla was the younger brother
of I)hanna-p41a) and served as a lieutenant to his brother. The second record
in giving the succession of the reigning sovereign, did not, therefore, feel called
upon to name him. In the third record I think the illegible name which
Colebrooke could not read and the next name Jaja-pala are not names of
reigning sovereigns, but epithets of Dharma-p&la, which have been mistaken
for proper names. The word p41a * a protector' is just one of those which
a Hindu poet would most likely play upon in a variety of ways, and try to
educe as many alliterations out of it as possible, and as Colebrooke says,
'' so great a part of the inscription is obliterated, (portions of every line being
illegible) that it is difficult to discover the purport of the inscription,"*
such a mistake was not at all unlikely to happen. If the illegible name be
assumed to be Deva-p^la, the son of Y4k-p41a and successor of Dharma-p41a,
we could not make Jaya-pala his son, for the Bh^alpur plate makes Jaya-p^
the son of Y4k-p41aand brother of Deva-p&ia, and Vigraha-p&la his son. The
Buddl pillar names Sura-pala only, leaving out Vigraha-pdla, but as the object
of the pillar was not to give a genealogical table of the kings of the Pdla
dynasty, but to record the names of the ancestors of one Gurava, the minister
of N&rdyana-p^a, naming the kings incidentally as patrons of those ances-
tors, the omission is not remarkable. The Dinajpur plate names only one
person between Deva-p&la and N4r4yana-p&ia, and his name is illegible.
We may reasonably assume it to have been Yigraha-piUa.

The sixth name in the Bh^alpur plate has not its counterpart in any
other record. Its absence from the Mungher plate is accounted for by the
fact of the latter not extending beyond Deva-pdla ; and from the Budal plate,
on the supposition of the owner of it not having been a patron of the
family to whose honour it was dedicated. It should have been present in
the Dindjpur plate, but as the entirety of that document is not forthcom-
ing, it is impossible to say precisely whether there is only one name
illegible in it after Deva-pdla, or two.

Leaving out of consideration the lists of the Ain i Akbari and of T4r4.
n^th, which are unreliable and quite irreconcilable, we have only the Dinaj-
pur plate to supply the names of the descendants of Nardyana-pdla down to
Mahi-p&la, and it gives us four names viz,, E4ja-p41a, — p&la, Yigraha-
p41a and Mahi-p41a, which we must accept as correct pending the discovery of
some more authentic document. I accept the Naya-p&la and Yigraha-pala
II. on the same authority, with Sthira-p41a and Yasanta-pdla as their alioiei
on the testimony of the Benares stone.

In addition to the above there are four other names in inscriptions,
each giving a single name ; but as there is nothing reliable to show the order

* Afl. Eeseaxches^ IX, p. 434.

1878.] and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal 893

of their succession, and further as they do not fall within the scope of this
paper, which I wish to confine to the sovereigns of Bengal only, I shall take
no note of them. Within the limits which I prescribe for myself, the mate-
rials available, as aforesaid, afford a list of eleven reigning sovereigns instead
of thirteen, as given by General Cunningham, his Nos. 3 and 4 being inad-
missible in the face of the Bh&galpur plate.

The only intelligible date available for these eleven reigns is afforded
by the Benares stone, and that is Samvat 1083 = 1026 A. D. The docu-
ment when first read was utterly untrustworthy, and in drawing up my
monograph of the Sena R4j4s I took no notice of it. Although no fac«
simile has since been published, as General Cunningham obtained a copy of
the record from so able an antiquarian as the late Major Kittoe, and him-
self read the date as given above, I am bound to accept it ; for I am
of opinion that no one in India in the present day has so thorough a
knowledge of Indian lapidary writing as that profound scholar, and
he is not at all likely to make a mistake in reading a mediaeval figure. The
date may be taken to be about the middle of Mahi-pdla's reign, and as Mahi-
p41a was the most renowned of the Fdlas of Bengal, the only one whose
name is still remembered by the people, and whose monument, the Mahi-
p41a Dighi of Dindjpur, is still in existence, his reign may be fairly assumed
to have been of more than average length. If I say it lasted from 1015
to 104)0 A. D., I fancy it would not be by any means thought to be
improbable.

With this starting-point gained it is necessary to calculate backwards the
times of his eight predecessors. For this purpose General Cunningham adopts
an average of 25 years. He says, '* Assigning 25 years to a generation, and
working backwards from Mahi-p41a, the accession of Go-p41a, the founder
of the dynasty, wiU fall in the latter half of the 8th century ; or still earlier,
if we allow 30 years to each generation. By either reckoning, the rise of
the Pala dynasty of Magadha is fixed to the 8th century A. D., at which
time great changes would appear to have taken place amongst most of the
ruling families of Northern India."*

The General assigns no reason for adopting this average, and I cannot
help thinking that it is too high. It is certainly not in accord with data
available from Indian history. Twenty reigns of the Mughals, from 1494
to 1806, give an average of 15 years and 7 months. Twenty-one reigns in
Kibshmir, from 1326 to 1588, give 12 years and 6 months. Forty reigns of
the Delhi Pa^h^ns yield an average of 9 years and 9 days. Twenty- four
reigns of the Bengal Pa^ins, from 1200 to 1350, produce a little over 6
years. Similarly twenty reigns in Burmah, from 1541 to 1781, offer an
average of 12 years. Doubtless these averages are of periods and reigns

* Arch. Surv. lUiport, III, p. 135.

894 lUjendraldla Mitra— On the Pdla [No. 4,

some of which were much trouhled ; but in a place like Ceylon, whose
insular position protected it to a great extent from outside or foreign at-
tacks, twenty reigns from 1410 to 1798 yield an average of 19 years and
nearly 5 months. In England, in the same way, from Edward TV to
William IV, or 1461 to 1837, twenty-one reigns yield an average of
no more than 17 years, 10 months and 25 days. There was nothing in the
physical or political condition of the F4las in Bengal which could give them
a greater immunity from the vicissitudes of changes incident to royalty than
in the places named. James Prinsep, after a careful survey of the history
of Indian dynasties, took 16 to 18 years to be the average, and nothing has
since been found to show that his calculations were wrong. Doubtless in
taking averages a great deal depends upon the period and the number of
reigns taken into account. A George III, or an Akbar, with two or three
average reigns, would often upset all calculations; but with 20 to 40
reigns, the risk of error -from occasionally protracted reigns is reduced to a
minimum. The P^las in Bengal did not enjoy any great immimity from
outside attacks. They had very powerful rivals in the kings of Orissa on
one side, in those of Behar and Kanauj on another, and those of Assam and
Tipperah and Eastern Bengal on a third, and it is well known how outside
rivalry foments domestic discord ; and, taking these facts into consideration,
I cannot assign them a higher average. Eighteen years, in my opinion,
would be (if anything) high, but in consideration of the number of reigns
being small — only eight before Mahi-pdla — ^and to provide for the possibility
of there having been an Akbar or two among them, I shall take it at 20,
which would be the highest possible admission. At this rate the result will
be as follows :

I. Go-p£la, 856 VII. — p41a, 976

11. Dharma-pdla, 876 VIII. Vigraha-pala, II,.. 995

III. Deva-pfila, i395 IX. Mahi-p^la, 1015 to 1040

IV. Vigraha-pala, I 916 X. Naya-pdla, 1060

V. N&rdyana-p4la, 935 XI. Vigraha-pala, III, 1080

VI. Eaja-pala, 955

The inscriptions noticed above clearly show that all the P^las were
staunch Buddhists ; but several of them were tolerant enough to employ
Hindus as their principal officers of state ; and, though they no doabt en-
couraged the drffasion of their own religion, they not only did not oppress
their people for their religion, but even allowed their Hindu ministers
to apply to them, in official and estate documents, praise which could be
grateful only to Hindu ears. They went further, and sometimes gave lands
for religious purposes which cannot be strictly called Buddhist.

The last question in connexion with the P41as is the locale or extent of
their dominion. Tar4nath calls them all kings of Bengal ; so does Abul

1878.] and the Sena Rdjds of Bengal. 895

Pazl in the Ain-i-Akbari. The Mungher plate does not name the kingdom
of the three P^las, but it was executed when the camp of Deva-pala was
pitched at Mudgagiri, i. «., Mungher. The Bhdgalpur plate was also
executed at Mungher, and in it Ndriijana-pAla is called the "lord of Anga,"
or king of Bhagalpur and its neighbourhood, including Mungher. The
Budal pillar occurs in the Din4jpur district, and that would show that in
the time of Ndrayana-pdla his minister Crura va had administrative power on
the north of the Padma. The Dindjpur plate not having been fully deci-
phered, we know not where it was executed, and, though found at Amgdchi,
it is possible that the grant may refer to some place at a great distance
from it. There can be no doubt, however, that one of the latest kings
named in it, Mahi-pdla, exercised full sovereignty in the province to the
north of the Padmd. That vast sheet of water in Dinajpur which still bears
his name, the Mahi-pala dighi, is a proof positive on this point. We
have also the evidence of the Sdrndth stone which calls him lord of Gauda,
though the stone cannot be accepted as a proof of Mahi-pala's reign having
extended as far as Benares. In a sacred place of pilgrimage any person
could go and dedicate a temple or an image, without in any way acquiring
political power in the locality.

Mr. Westmacott, in his *' Traces of Buddhism in Dindjpur," supplies
several other proofs in support of the sovereignty of the Palas on the north
of the Padmd. He says, " In all south-eastern Din Aj pur, and the neighbour-
ing parts of Bagura, remains of Buddhism, and of the Buddhist Pdla kings
are numerous. It was in this neighbourhood that in the seventh century
the Chinese pilgrim Hiouen-Thsang found the Buddhist court of Paundra-
. yardhana which I identify with Vardhana Ku^i, the residence o£ a very
ancient family, close to Govindaganj, on the Karatoya. Mr. Fergusson, in
his paper on Hiouen-Thsang, quotes from an account of Paundrade^ in
the fourth volume of the * Oriental Quarterly Magazine,' that Vardhana
Ku^i, governed by a Yavana, or Musalmdn, was one of the chief towns of
Nirvritti, comprising Dindjpur, Rangpur and Koch Behar, and consequently
the eastern half of Hiouen-Thsang's kingdom of Paundra Vardhana."*
Elsewhere he says : " Dharma-pdla, whose fort still bears his name, more
than seventy miles north of Vardhana Kuti* and other Pala kings, were
ruling east of the Karatoya long after Bengal had been subdued by the
Senas, before whom indeed the Palas probably retreated by degrees to the
north-east, and were supplanted without any great catastrophe."t Again,
** close to Jogi-ghop& are extensive brick remains, said to have been the
palace of Deva-p41a, whether the Deva-pala of the Mungher plate or not
I will not say, but certainly of the Amgdchi plate. Bhiml& Devi, daugh-
ter of Deya-p41a, is said by the ignorant pujdris to be represented by one

• Ante, XLIV, p. 188. f Loe, cit.

2 £

390 Rdjendralala Mitra— On fhe Pdla [No. 4,

of tbe Jogi-gbop& carvings. A mile to the south-west, at Amdri, are more

brick remains which Dr. Buchanan heard called the palace of Mahi-pdla.

Across the btl, two miles north-east, at Chondiri, are remains, which he

was told were those of Chandra-pala's palace ; there are more bricks at

Katak and Dhoral, and indeed in all the country round are innumerable

brick ruins. Seven miles north of the great stupa is the celebrated Bud&L

pillar, set up by a minister of Nardyana-pala, and bearing an inscription,

in which Deva-pala and Sura-pula are mentioned as having preceded

KarayaQa-pala. A dozen miles north of that again was found the Am-

gachi plate, containing a grant of Vigraha-pdla, and enumerating his

ancestors, Sura-pdla his father, Mahi-pala, Dharma-pala, and others."*

Several local names, such as Mahiganj, Mahinagar, Mahipur, Mahi-santosh,

Nayanagar, <&c., also bear remains of the names of former Pala kings.

The evidence thus is on the whole sufficient to show that the Falas
exercised sovereignty on the west of the Bhdgirathi, certainly as far as
the boundary of Behar and probably further, taking the whole of the ancient
kingdom of Magadha. On the north it included Tirhut, Malda, Eajshahi,
Dinajpur, Rangpur and Bagur4, which constituted the ancient kingdom of
Faundravardhana. The bulk of the delta seems, however, not to have be-
longed to them. To show this and to prove the time when they were
finally expelled from Bengal proper, we must turn to the history of the Sena
Hajas of Bengal.

In my paper on the Sena Rdjds,t I have already put together the
names of all the Sena Kajas that have been brought to light by authentic
records, and nothing has since been discovered to disturb their genealogical
table as published by me. Mr. Westmacott, in 1875,]; published some remarks
on my paper, but his criticisms did not apply to the order of succession.
But several important facts have since been brought prominently to notice,
and they necessitate slight alterations in the dates assigned by me to the
several princes of that dynasty.

The most important of these facts is the era of Lakshniana Sena.
The credit of first discovering it is due to Colebrooke. In the Preface to
his translation of the * Digest of Hindu Laws,' he remarked : " Haldyudha^
the spiritual adviser of Lakshmana Sena, (a renowned monarch who gave
his name to an era of which six hundred and ninety-two years are expired),
is the author of Nyaya-sarva^va, &c.'' But no notice was afterwards taken
of this era, and Prinsep in his * Useful Tables' entirely passed it over. Sub-
sequently an opportunity offered him when he noticed an inscription from
Buddha Gayd,§ in which the era of Lakshmana is distinctly mentioned,
• Zo€.eit. t -4«fe, Vol. XXXIV. i Ante, XUV, pp. 1 i § AnU, V, p. 669.

1878.] and the Sena Rdjda of Bengal. 897

but he overlooked it. In that record the date is given in these words :

" On Thursday, the 12th of the wane, in the mouth of Yaisakha, Sam.
or year 74 after the expiration of the reign of the auspicious Lakshmana
Sena Deva." Calculated with the datum given by Colebrooke, it would have
at once settled the date of Lakshmana Sena ; but this was not done. In
1873, I found a MS. of the * Sadukti-karndmpta,' dated S'aka 1500=1578
A. D., in the colophon of which the work is described to have been com-
piled in the S^aka year 1127=:1205 A. D., which corresponded with
some date of Lakshmana Sena which I could not make out. The date is
given in words, the meaning of which could not be reconciled ; the words
are ^iTV^9n(r^7rr^f?fq^ r^<^rfW"ii I The author was the son of a con-
fidential friend and a general under Lakshmana Sena.*

Shortly after the publication of my remarks on this MS., in an anony-
mous article on the life of Ydchaspati Mi^ra, published in a Bengali magazine
called Banga Darsana, Babu Rajakfishna Mukarji announced that the era
of Lakshmana Sena was still current in Tirhut, and its date in 1874 was
767, its distinctive mark being ^« w*» the initial letters of *' Lakshmana
Sena Samvat.*' The Babu also qoticed an inscription of S'iva Sinha, a local
chieftain, which bore date the 280th of Lakshmana Sena*s era. A brief
notice of this article appeared in the * Indian Antiquary' for 1875 The
Babu, likewise, used this date in an elementary history of Bengal, published
in that year. Thus the credit of utilizing the date and bringing it to
bear on the history of Bengal is entirely due to him.

In 1875 Mr. Westmacott brought to notice a copper-plate grant
found in the bed of a tank called Tarpandighi, seven miles S. S. E. of
Debkot in Dinajpur,t which bore the 7th year of Lakshmana Sena's reign ;
but no attempt was then made to trace the initial date of the era<r

In 1877, Pandit Rdman&tha Tarkaratna, who is employed by the Asi-
atic Society of Bengal to collect information regarding Sanskrit MSS. in
private libraries, while travelling in Tirhut, collected some information on
the subject, and conmiunicated it to me. He also purchased there two old
Sanskrit MSS. for the Government of India, which were dated in the era
in question. One of them Anumdndloka-ftkdf a gloss by Madhusudana
fhakkura on the Anumdna Khanda of Gange^ is dated '^^ ^« tfH^^r
^^^^^y^l^f I " the 14th of the waxing moon in the month of Chaitra L. S.
479." The other, Fratgakshdloka-darpanaj a gloss by Mahe^ Thakkura,
on the Bratyakslia Khanda of Gange^a, has ^^refil^^^^ wq^^^^H^rn I
" In the year of the Vedas (4) the eight, and the Nigamas (4,) accor-
ding to the king Lakshmana."

• Notices of Sanskrit MSS. IH, pp. 134—148-9. t ^nU, XLIV, p. 18.

398 RAjendralala Mitra— O/i the Pdla [No. 4,

Apparently disjointed as these facts are, they are of great importance
in the elucidation of the date of the Sena llajas. To put them together,
we have first in the Tarpandighi plate the 7th year of Lakshmaqia's reign.
In the Buddha Gay& inscription we have the 74th year of his era. Then
we have in the Sadukti-karn&mrita MS. some date which corresponded
with the S^aka 1127=1205 A. D. Then comes the Siva Sinha inscription,
dated in the 280th year of that king's era. Then we have two MSS., one
dated in the 459th year, and the other in the 484th of that era. And
lastly we have the fact that the era is still current, and in the present
year reckons 771. That the era is not a newly devised one, is abundantly
evident from the fact of its having been in regular currency all along, and
its present figure, therefore, gives us a very correct clue to its initial date.
The pandits of Tirhut reckon the era to be a luni- solar one, comimencing
from the 1st of the Inni-solar month of Miigha, and it must have therefore
commenced in January 1106 A. D., or within three years of the date which
I conjecturally assigned to Lakshmana Sena in my paper on the Sena
E^jas.* This settles the date of Lakshmana Sena on infinitely more reliable
data than what we have for any other Hindu sovereign of the pre-
Muhammadan era.

Beginning with HOC, Lakshmana had a very prosperous reign of many
years, for his minister Haldyudha informs us, in the preface to his Br4h.
mapa Sarvasva, that he commenced service when very young as a court
pandit, and was successively raised by the king to higher ranks, till he
was made a minister when he had become old.f A period of 30 years
would scarcely be too much for this, and Lakshmana's reign may very
fairly be assumed to have extended to the close of the fourth decade of the
12th century. His immediate successors, M&dhava Sena and Ke^va Sena
did not take up each two or three years, and the rest of the century was
taken up by Lakshmaneya alias A^oka Sena, the Lakshmaniyd of Muham-
madan writers.

The name A^oka has puzzled many antiquarians. With the' vivid
recollection of the name as that of the great patron of Buddhism, they
have found it difficult to reconcile with it the idea of a Hindu bearing the
name. But the word simply means '' grieiless,'' and there is nothing to
prevent such a name being given to a Hindu. On the contrary, Hindu
mothers and guardians often use terms indicative of immvmity from pain,
grief and the like ; and, in the case of a posthumous child which lost its
mother immediately after its birth, a term implying that it would never have
cause to mourn the loss of its parents, would by no means be inappropriate.

With the close of Aioka Sena's reign, the sovereignty of the Hindus
in the delta passed to the Muhammadans ; but the exact time when this
• Ant4y Vol XXXIV, p. 139. t ^nte, p. 138.

1878.] and the Sena Raj as of Bengal, 899

happened, yet remains undetermined. When writing my paper on the
Sena Ildjas I accepted as a fact the opinion then prevalent, that this
happened in 1203 A. D. This, however, has since heen questioned. The
late Mr. Blochmann, whose researches into the dark points in the Muham-
madan history of India were unrivalled, came to the conclusion, that the
transfer must have taken place four years earlier, or hetween 1198 and
1199, whereas Major Baverty, in his translation of Alhiruni, removed it
590 H. = 1194. A. D.,* while Mr. Thomas placed it at 599 H. = 1204
A. D. Even the latest of these dates would seem to he a little too early,
if we should take the statement of the author of the ISadukti-karndmrita,
who completed his work in 1205, when he described himself as a district
Commissioner in the service of Ldkshmaneya, to mean that his master was
then reigning at Nuddea. He could not have held that position in 1205,
if the kingdom had passed away to the Muhammadans five years before.
But it was possible for him to describe his official rank in his work, even
after he had lost it, or to refer to the king when he reigned at Sondrgdon
after his retirement from Nuddea ; for it is now well-known that he and his
descendants lived at the latter place for several years after his overthrow
by Bukhtiar Khiliji.f Dr. Wise believes that there must have been a
Ballala Sena reigning in Yikrdmpur or Sonargaon after Lakshmaniya, and
Susena and Sura Sena, whose names I once took to be aliases of Laksh-
maniya, were probably those of other successors. On this point, however,
there is no reliable information at hand ; and as the question of date is
related to Muhanmiadan history, I shall leave it unnoticed for the present.
Turning to the ancestors of Lakshmana Sena, the first name I have to
deal with is that of Ball41a. The close of his reign of course took place in
the year of the oomimencement of the reign of his son. But when it com-
menced, remains uncertain. The Ain i Akbari makes it begin at 1066, which
would give it a duration of 41 years. The authority of Abul Fazl, how-
ever, is not great in such matters ; and, as I have rejected it in the case
of the*F41as, I cannot consistently accept it in the present instance. This
much, however, may be unhesitatingly stated, that BalUla's reign was a
long and prosperous one. He is the best known to this day of all the Sena
Bu.j4s, and the system of nobility or Kulinism which he organized, exists
to this day in full force. None but a powerful sovereign, reigning with
ODnsiderable eclat for a prolonged period, could have carried out the sys-
tem so thoroughly as he did ; and a reign of 41 years is after all not
so improbable as absolutely to necessitate its rejection.

Of the predecessors of Ballala we have lapidary proofs of four names,
Yijaya Sena, Hemanta Sena, Sdmanta Sena, and Vira Sena, extending, at an
average of 18 years, to 994 A. D., or at 20 years, which I have reluctantly
• Ante XUV, p. 277. t AnU XLIII, p. 83.

400 Rajendraldla Mitra— On the Pdia [No. 4,

assigned to the Palas, to 986 A. D. The last name I took to be an alia^ o£
Adisura, Vira and Sura being synonymous, and a notable instance of the use
of synonyms occurs in the name of the founder of the Pala dynasty, who is
at option called Go-pala, Bhu-pala or Loka-pala. In a Bengali book, entitled
Samhandha-nirnaya, published two years ago, Pandit Ldlamohana VidyA-
nidhi slates that he had been informed of a tradition current in the Yaren-
dra country which makes one Bhusura the son of Adisura, and adds that
Bhusura dying without male issue, his daughter's son A^ka Sena suc-
ceeded him, who was followed by Sura Sena, and the latter by Vira Sena.
On asking the pandit for his authority for this tradition, he told me that
be had got it from a Kulajna at Murshidabad, but that he had heard it no-
where else. On so slender an authority, I cannot induce myself to accept it
as a matter worthy of historical enquiry. The two names A^oka and Sura are
later names, which the Kulajna put at the beginning, evidently not knowing
where else to place them. Leaving these names aside, it will be seen
that the Pala and the Sena dynasties fall for some time within the same
period. The one beginning in the 9th decade and the other in the 6th
decade of the 10th century. It is obvious, therefore, that they could not
have reigned over the whole of Bengal at the same time, nor could the
Senas have followed the Palas, as the modern Anglo-Indian historians usually
make them ; but there can be no doubt that both dynasties did reign in
Bengal at the same time. The difficulty, however, may be easily overcome.

It has been already shown that the Palas occupied western and north-
em Bengal. There is nothing, however, to show that they had extended
their sway to the eastern districts. Whereas tradition assigns to the Senas
the whole of the delta and the districts to the east of it. The chief seat
of their power was at Vikrampur near Dhakd, where the ruins of Ballala'g
palace are still shown to travellers. Dr. Wise, in his notice of Vikrampur,
says — ** A remarkable evidence of this is afforded by the names of the 66
villages assigned to the descendants of the Five Brdhmans whom Adisura
brought from Kanauj. All those villages were situated within the delta,
and none out of it." This is of course an indirect evidence, but it is not the
less significant. It may be added that none of those who dwelt out of the
delta, in the northern districts, were included in the scheme of Ballala's
nobility. The Vdrendras have since organized a system of their own, but it
is not in accord with that which prevails as the system of Ballala.

The religion of the Senas was Hinduism, either of the S'aiva or of the
Vaishnava sect. In the Rajshdhi stone and the Bikerganj copper-plate,
S^iva is the divinity invoked. In the Tarpandighi plate preference is given to
Vishpu or Narayana, and the epithet Parama-mahe^vara occurs in all the
three. The well-known fact of the founder of the family obtaining five
Brihmans to perform Vedic rites which, owing to the dominance of the

1878.] and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal. 401

Buddhists, had become obsolete in Bengal, clearly shows that they were
Hindus, and there is nothing to give rise to suspicion in the matter.

In no part of the world could two such near neighbours as the Pdlas
and the Senas, professing such antagonistic faiths as Buddhism and Hin-
duism, co-exist without coming into hostile contact ; and in Bengal there
is no reason to suppose that the case was otherwise than what has been
elsewhere invariably the result of such neighbourhood. Even chiefs pro-
fessing the same faith have not been noted for their amity to rivals, and
we may therefore take it for granted that the Palas and the Senas fre-
quently fell out with each other, until one expelled the other from the
country. When this expulsion took place, it is at present impossible to
determine with absolute precision. But materials are not wanting to show
that this happened about the middle of the 11th century. It has been
already shown that to the time of Mahi-pala, northern Bengal belonged to
tbe Fdlas, and the Tarpandighi plate of Lakshmana Sena, and the preva-
lence of that sovereign's era in Tirhut to this day, incontestably prove that
northern Bengal had come into the possession of tbe Senas before the com-
mencement of the 12th century. Ballala, the father of Lakshmana, had the
title of " King of Gau^a," and that takes us to the 7th decade of the 11th
century ; and in the Bhdgulpur stone there is a verse which says " Vijaya
overthrew the king of Gauda." The verse is somewhat involved in its
construction, but the most obvious meaning appears to be the following :

" * Thou hast no hero to conquer,' said the bards. On hearing it,
through a misconception (the words being susceptible of the meaning
* thou hast conquered no hero') the king overthrew the king of Gau^a,
subjugated the hero of Ejimrupa and quickly conquered him of Ka-
linga."* At an average reign of 18 years Vijaya must have com-
menced his reign in 1048. At an average of 20 years the date would be
1046, the overthrow therefore must have taken place between 1046 and
1055. As it is not likely that Mahi-pala's reign had extended beyond
1040, the event must have taken place when Naya-pdla, his successor, was
the sovereign of Gau^a. The Palas then receded from northern Bengal,
and reigned for some time in the western districts of the kingdom, making
Magadha or Mungher their capital.

The result of these remarks may be thus tabulated :

PXla Kings. Sena KrNas.

In Western Sf Northern Bengal, In Eastern Sf Deltaie Bengal.

I.— Go-p4la, 855 L— Vira Sena, 986

II. — Dharma-pdla, 875 II. — Samanta Sena, 1006

III. — Deva-pdla, ^ 895 III.— Hemanta Sena, ... 1026

• AnU, XXXIV, p. 144.

402 E&jendral£la Mitra— On the Pdia [No. 4,

In the whole of Bengal,
rV.— Vigraba-pdla, I, ... 916 IV.— Vijaya a^w* Sukha

Sena, 1046

v.— N4rayana-p41a, ... 936 V.— BallAla Sena, 1066

VI. — Kaja-pdla, 956 VI. — Lakshma^a Sena, ... 1 106

VII. pala, 976 VII.— Mddhava Sena, 1136

VIII.— Vigraha.p41a II, . . . 996 VIII.— Ke^ava Sena, 1 188

IX. — Laksbmai^eya alias

A^ka Sena, 1142?

IX. — ^Mabi-pala, 1016 In Vikrampur,

to 1040 Ball^aSena,

X. — Naya-pala, ......... 1040 Su Sena,

to ? Sura Sena, &c.,

In Behar,
XI. — Vigraha-p41a III and others.
In my first paper on the subject I started the opinion that the Senas
were Kshatriyas of the lunar race, and not Vaidyas as they are supposed to
have been by the people of the present day. The opinion was founded upon
the positive declaration of two inscriptions, and that of a work, the Ddna-id'
gara, written by BalUla himself. It has now the support of another
inscription. In the Tarpandighi plate there occurs a verse which Mr.
Westmacott thus renders into English : " The kings of the race of Ausha-
dhindtha (moon) neutralize the sharp fever-poison of their enemies by the
lustre of the nails of their feet, as with the juice of the creepers nurtured
(as plants with water) by the lustre of the diadems of numbers of kings,
prostrate in homage."* Exception, however, has been taken to the deduc-
tion by some of my countrymen, mostly Vaidyas of the Sena family, who
claim themselves to be of the royal race, and several Bengali books have been
written to prove my error. My critics all labour under the mistake that
I wanted to make the Sena kings members of the KSyastha caste, in order
to glorify that caste, and enjoy the advantage of a ray of that glory, being
myself a Kayastha ; but as I have nowhere said anything of the kind, I
cannot but leave this part of their criticisms unnoticed. They have created
their own Frankenstein, and I leave them to lay it in the best way they can.
The chief arguments which they urge to controvert the statements of the
inscriptions are — 1st, that the statements may be due to poetical license, or a
desire to eulogize the kings in an exaggerated style ; 2nd, that the reference to
the moon, who'is, according to the Puranic mythology, the lord of medicines,
may be due to a desire to make an indirect allusion to the profession of the
Vaidya caste ; 8rd, that others than Kshatriyas could pall themselves descen-
dants of the lunar race ; 4th, that Adisura, who is described as a descendant

* Antiy XLIV, pt I, p. 18.

N

1878.] and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal 403

of the lunar race cannot be the same with Yira Sena, for none would employ
a synonym to indicate a proper name, and so the epithet of the former
cannot apply to the latter.

Little need be said in reply to these arguments. The first is a mere
assumption, and not by any means a permissible one. Exaggerations and
hyperboles are the chief aliments on which poets most do thrive ; but there
is not a single authentic instance in which poetical license has been, in
India, permitted to invade the domains of caste. The Purd^as have made
mortals conquer the immortal gods, endowed them with the most tran-
scendental attributes, called them gods, but never changed their castes ; nor
have they ever attempted to disown cross sinisters from the escutcheon of
the greatest of their kings. And what is true of these Furanas, is equally
so of later writings, when tenacity for caste distinctions had grown much
stronger. It is observable also, that no spirit of poetical hyperbole can be
predicated of Ball41a Sena describing his own caste in a law treatise by
himself.

The second argument is ingenious ; but it is, like the first, a mere
assumption. I have no hesitation in saying, that in the whole range of
Sanskrit literature, there is not an instance in which the caste of the Vai-
dyas has been indirectly referred to by allusion to the moon. At best it
is an attempt to give preeminence to a possible metaphorical interpretation,
in preference to an obvious literal meaning.

The third is incorrect. None but a Kshetriya could call himself a
member of the lunar or the solar race, and members of those races, when
degraded or outcasted, could not retain their claim to the honor of member-
ship under them. The instances cited of Yayati's children becoming
members of different castes refer to the earliest stage of Hindu society,
when caste distinctions probably did not exist, or at any rate were not
very strictly observed ; and even then there is no proof to show that those
who were degraded were in the habit of calling themselves members of the
solar race. Within the last two thousand years, a Br&hman or a Kshetriya,
condemned to be a Chanddla, has never been permitted to call himself a
Br&hman or a Kshetriya Chanddla. The idea is simply ridiculous.

The fourth argument has already been answered by the parallel
case of GK>-pdla appearing also under the names of Bhu-pdla and Loka-
p&la. Were it otherwise, the argument would not advance in the least,
for my antagonists admit that Yira Sena was the great-grandson of
Adisura by the daughter's side, and if so, the son-in-law of Bhusura
and his son-in-law could not be of other than the caste of Adisura.
On the whole the arguments are based on a series of suppositions, in
order to support a modern tradition against the avowed declarations of
authentic contemporary records. I deny the accuiacy of the tradition, and
2f

>

404 RijendraWla Mitra— 0« Ihe Pd/a [No. 4,

my antagonists beg the question at issue, hj saying that the tradition must
be correct, and the records must be made to conform to it by a number of
suppositions. Truth can never be elicited by such a course of reasoaing^
and it would be a mere waste of time to enter into a disputation with
persons who attach greater importance to traditions than to authentic
contemporary records.

I*

\^

l^

l^

\»

\\l

l<

Transcript of a Copper-plate Jrom Bkdgalpur.

^ nirftniT "wfti ^wqre ^: 5«5* h^^ki^^v^^^ • «ifiinc wg-fw-

1878.] and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal. 405

vfT^* ^TT^rftr ^f:wTf*r ii^vwi «
^w^i ^^}^^^\l ^fwTii-

f^'^qi^T ^X^ wft<^ H +^ 'B^ ^r-

^iitnrcTfvir i ^r^r^ftJ^
M I ^mqfir i ^ft^ i *t^ i wj^i i ^*[ i ^"t i ff^m i ^mi9 i ^\z \ ^w i

406 lUjendraUla Mitra— Ow the Pdla [No. 4,

^< I ^^PTO ^^ srfifyrfqiT« i^ir^RT firwi ntTwr i ^mjqw^nfw^ft^^ i

• ^ ft

BO , iwT^ I ?iijifiM*i||MMci|ii^MiimRftqii<i4|ii I ^^^fift ^Tf^imprt I

Bc I 1?^ ci^ iR[T ifiwj^ iro ?r^ ^ u ^^Q^rwrf^ ^ %^ ^ftr-
1^ I wt: h t^Tfi^r^fimiK?) tfi^ wvr^(^) w ^wt^ ^fiij q^n: ^t4^

119 I ipniWR^Si ^n^TOTZ«I^TT II

1878.] and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal 407

TsAirsLATioir.

Be it auspicious ! May Da^bala, whose heart is resplendent with the
jewel of mercj, whose loved mistress is benevolence, whose mind was wash-
ed clean of the mud of book-learning by the pure water of the river of
perfect Sambodhi knowledge, who, having conquered the promptings of
desire * * * acquired eternal fame, — may the Lord of the universe, pros-
per.

Now Go-pdla Deva made his family the abode of prosperity. (Laksh-
mi). Well able to sustain the weight of the earth, the only asylum of
kings whose wings having been dipt by fear sought his protection, always
devoted to protect honor, he was the home of heroism. Of him was born the
auspicious king Dharma-pdla, whose greatness was as beauteous as the ripple
of the milky ocean. Having conquered Indraraja and other kings, he (Dhar-
ma-p&la) earned the glorious S 'ri, goddess of fortune, whom he presented as
a sacrifice to the father of wealth, Vamana, the wielder of the discus.

Like Bdma, that saintly king had a brother of equal merit, in V^k-
pdla, who was in glory the counterpart of the son of SumitrA (Lakshmana).
This prince, the abode of justice and valour, living under the rule of his
brother, placed all the quarters under one umbrella, by divesting them of
all hostile armies.

Unto him was born a son named Jaya-pdla, by whose imperial virtues
the earth was sanctified. Overcoming all enemies to religion, he established
his elder brother, the heroic Deva-pala, in the dominion of the earth. When
by the order of his brother he issued forth to conquer, the lord of Utkala,
oppressed from a distance by his very name, forsook his home. Bearing
that prince's order on his head, the king of Pr^jyotisha, trembling from
fear, withdrawing his army, with all his dependents lived under him.

The auspicious Yigraha-pala, enemyless from birth, was born his son.
His spotless sword was like the water which wiped away the beauty of the
wives of his enemies. By him his enemies were made the objects of heavy
misfortune, and his friends long-lived. Lajja, the ornament of the Haihaya
race, became his wife, even as the daughter of Jahnu (Ganges) is that of
the Ocean, and her virtuous conduct alike purified her father's and her hus-
band's race.

He, through the essence of the guardians of the quarters gave birth,
in her, for the protection of the earth, to the auspicious N&rdyana-p&la
Deva, the virtuous whose feet became resplendent by the light of the crown-
jewels of kings. He has sanctified his throne by his justice. Kings, forsaking
the Lainga Pura^a, the source of the fourfold blessings, wish to follow his
conduct. He is esteemed in the mind of good men, and confirmed (in his
position) by his own dependents. By his charity he has suppressed in

804 Rijendralala Mitra— On the Pdla [No. 4,

his country the expression, " give, O king."* Through his fear his sword,
though dark as a blue lotus, appears flame-coloured to his enemies. He, by
his wisdom and his own virtues, has kept the helpless earth always in the
path of justice. Attaining his protection, beggars no longer turn their
minds to seeking alms. Lord of wealth, doer of no wrong, patron of learn-
ed men, and endowed with great affluence, he is in his glory like unto a
blazing fire (anala), and yet by his conduct he is like Nala.f His fame,
bright as the rays of the autumnal moon, spread over the three worlds, wears
a resplendence which even the loud laughter of S'iva cannot rival, and the
garlands of Ketaki flowers on the hands of Siddha ladies (are so eclipsed
that their existence can be ascertained only) by the hum of bees (about
them). Two persons did sa^ to two others, ** let penance be mine and the
kingdom thine ;*' once to him (Narayana-pala) by Vigraha-pala, and once to
Bhagiratha by Sagara.

In his victorious camp in Mudgagiri on the bank of the Bhagirathi
river, where he has made a hridge of boats, which seems to rival a line of
rocky hills where the roaming of excessively dense (crowds of) elephants
has so clouded the glory of day-light, as to produce the impression of an ap-
proaching rainy season, where the dust raised by the hoofs of the countless
cavalry of the only king of the north, has covered the quarters, where the
earth has sunk low hy the weight of the innumerable kings of Jambudvipa
who had assembled to serve the great lord, the mighty sovereign, the
Supreme king among kings, the auspicious Narayana-pala Deva, the suc-
cessor of the devout follower of Sugata, the supreme king among kings,
the auspicious Vigraha-pdla Deva, prospers. To subordinate kings (raja-
rApaka), to princes (rajaputra), to the Prime Minister (rajamatya), to the
minister of Peace and War (maha-sandhi-vigrahika),- to the Chief Justice
(mahaksha-patalika) to the Generalissimo (mahdsamanta), to chief com-
manders (mahasenapati), to the grand warder (mahapratihara), to the chief
investigator of all works (mahakartakritika), to the chief obviator of diffi-
culties (mahddo^asadhasadhanika), to the chief criminal judge (mahadan-
da-nayaka), to chief minister of the heir-apparent (mahakumaramatya),
to viceroys (rajasthanino upMhika), to Investigators of crimes (doshapara-
dhika), to the chief detective officer (choroddharanika), to the mace-bearers
(dandika), to the keeper of the instruments of punishment (dandap^ika),

♦ The words in the original are Beyam me anga-rc^jan ; and the word anga may be
taken as an interjection = 0, or an adjective meaning chief, great or principal, or a
noun, the name of a country including the western part of Bengal. In the last two cases
the word rdjan should change into rdja to be in Samasa, the first is therefore the right
meaning. Bat it has probably been used as a dottble entendre.

t Nala, the famous king of Vidarbha noticed in the Mahabhdrata. The com-
parison is forced for the sake of the alliteration in the woi*ds nala and a»dh.

1878.] and the Sena Rdjds of Bengal 409

to collectors of customs (s'aulkika), to commanders of dmsions (gaulmika),
to supervisors of cultivation (kshetrapa), to boimdarj rangers (printapala) ,
to treasurers (koshapdla), to superintendents of wards (khanda-raksha), to
inspectors of wards (tadajuktaka), to the superintendents of appointments
(viniyuktaka), to the superintendent of elephants, horses, camels, and war-
boats, (hastjaiva-nau-balavyapritaka), to the superintendents of mares, colts,
cows, buffaloes, sheep and goats (kisora-vadavd-go-mahishyajavikddhyaksha),
to the chief of swift messengers (drutapeshanika), to messengers (gamaga-
manika), to swift messengers (abhitvamdna), to commissioners of districts
(vishayapati), to head officers of villages (gramapati), to superintendents of
boats (tarika), to (men of the different tribes of) Goda, Malava, Khaia, Huna,
Kulika, Kallata, La^a, Cha^a, and Bhata,* — ^to all servants and other? who
are not specified here, to all who have assembled here in the village of
Mukutika in the division of Kuksha on the bank of the river, as also
to the inhabitants of the neighbouring villages, who live by service under
the king, from the respected Brdhman to the lowest Meda, Andha and
Cha^^^^ — ^0 ^ these he sends appropriate greetings and. acquaints and
commands them. Be it known unto you that in the village of Kal4-
sapota, where Narayana-pala Deva himself has establisfaad thousands of
temples, and where he has placed the honorable S'iva Bhat^a and FasupA^
ti Achiirya, I, Narayana-pala Deva, for purposes of due worship, f <»• the offer,
ing of oblations charu and yajms, for the performance of new ceremonies,
and for the dispensation of medicines, bedding and seats, to diseased persons,
and for the purpose of enabling them to enjoy without let or hindrance the
village as defined, I have given the above-named village of Mukutika, along
with its surrounding grazing-grounds, with all the waters and lands belong-
ing to it, above and below the surface, together with the mango and the
madhuka trees, with all its low and barren lands, along with its rents and
tolls, including all fines for crimes, and rewards for catching thieves. In it
there shall be no molestation, no passage permitted for Ghat 09 (jugglers) and
Bhafas (troops). The land shall not be a trouble (to the possessors) who
shall have the enjoyment of all shares, privileges, gold &c., and other income.
I grant this to be enjoyed as many years as there are holes in the earth, and
as long as the sun and the moon shall endure, in order that the virtue
and fame of my parents and of myself may be enhanced. I have given this
edict engraved to you, honorable S'iva.

Be it then respected by all ; and future kings, knowing the grievous
sin that is incurred by destroying the great merit of gran ts-of -land, should
uphold it. Let the neighbours and those who till the land, be obedient to

• Bahu Pr4nn£th Pandit's paper on the Chittagong plate (ante XLIII, pp. 318/)
and Mr. Weetmacott's papor on the Tarpandighi plate, (ante XUV, pp. 1/) contain
many interesting notes on the meanings of these official titles.

410 Rajendralala Mitra— On the Pdla and the Sena Bdjds of Bengal

my commands. They should render to the donees their respective shares, j

privileges, rent, gold and all other dues. Dated the 9th Yai^kha,
Samvat 17.

The following are excerpts for those who dread the mandates of virtue : \

The earth has been enjoyed by Sagara and many other kings. The
fruit (of grants-of-land) belongs to him to whom the land belongs for the
time.

The donor of land enjoys heaven for sixty thousand years. He who
abrogates or prompts others to abrogate such a gift, suffers in hell for a like *
period.

He who resumes land given by him or others, becoming a worm, rots
in ordure along with his forefathers.

Again and again doth Bdma entreat all future kings to protect this
common bridge of virtue.

Knowing riches and life to be as unsteady as water on a lotus petal,
no man should intentionally attempt to deprive another of his reputation.

Bhatta Gurava, the spiritual guide of the king, the proficient in the
difficult knowledge of God through the Yed&nta, versed in all the Vedas and
the Yed^ngas, and the most proficient in the performance of sacrificial rites,
has composed this. Mudgadasa, son of Subhad&sa, an inhabitant of Sat-
s&matata, has engraved this edict.

^^

INDEX

TO

JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Pabt I,

FOR

1878.

A

CCES9I0N of Ahmad Shah, 876

Ahmad Shah, accession of, 376

Ajanta frescooB, 62 ; date of Ajanta caves,
72

Antiquities of Bagura (Bog^ra), 88 ; miscel-
laneous, in Mathura Museum, 118

Arians in Tibet, 26

Assi khamha or ChhatthS Tiini of Mah&-
ban, 113

B

AGUBA, or Bogra, antiquities of, 88

Bamtelas, 364

Banda, copperplate grant from, 73

Bandelkhund a£fairs, 284, 374

Bangash Nawabs of FamikhiLbiUl, 259

Beveridge, H., the antiquities of Bagura
(Bogra), 88

Bhag^pur, transcript of copper-plate at,
404 ; tnmslation of ditto, 407

Bogra or Bagura, antiquities o^ 88

Braj, Holi festival in, 120

Brind&ban, Gk>8ain Hari Vans of, 97 ; tem-
ple of Gobind Deva, 115

Brokpas or Aryans in Tibet, 27

L/HAXJRASI Pada, a Hindi poem, 105,

109
Ghhatthi Tilai or Assi khamba of Ma-

haban, 113
Columns, medisBval Hindd, from Sahir,

117
Copperplate grant frt>m Banda, 73 ; tran.
script of, at Bhagulpur, 404 ; two an-
cient inscriptions at Hamirpdr N. W.
P., 80 ; of Nanyaurd, 81, 84

JL/ARD race, 27 ; grammatical forms of

the Dard dialects, 38
Bharma Pila, 140

E

XPLORATIONS, recent trans-fron-
tier, 78

F

„ ESTIVAL of HoU in Braj, 120
Frescoes in Ajanta, 62
Furrakhibid, the Bangash Nawabs of,
259 ; city o^ 276

G.

[OBIND DEVA, temple of, at Brindi-
ban, 115
Gosain Hari Vans of Brindiban, 97
Grierson, G. A., the song of Manik Chan-
dra, 135
Growse, T. S., Mathuri notes, 97

H

ADTSiddha, 187

Hamirpur, N. W, P., two ancient inscrip-
tions on copperplate, 80

Harischandra, B4ji, 143

Hari Vans, Gosain of Brinddban, 97

Hindi poem, the Chaur^si pada, 105, 109

Hindu Sikhara, its origin and development,
114 ; mediaeval columns from Sahiir, 117

Hir&, the harlot, 145.

Holi festival in Bng, 120

1 NSCRIPTIONS, two ancient on copper-
plate in Hamfrpur, N. W. P., 80

Invasion of Nadir ShiUi, 331

Irvine, W., the Bangash Nawabs of Far-
rukh&bid, 259

J^YALL, C. J., the Mo'allaqah of Zuheyr
rendered into English, with notes, 1

MaHABAN, the Chhatthi PiUni or
Assi Khamba of^ 113

412

Index.

J^fango, story of a, 336

Manik Chandra, soiijj of, 135, 149, 201 ;
particulars about him, 141

Mathuri, notes on, 97 : misceUaneoua an-
tiquities at, 118 ; Sati Burj at, 116

Media) val Hindi columns from Sahar, 117

Mitra, Dr. R., on representations of fo-
reigners in the Ajanta Frescoes, 62 ; on
date of Ajanta caves, 72 ; a copperplate
grant from Banda, 73 ; on the Pal and
Sena Rajas of Bengal, 384

Mo'allaqah, of Zuheyr rendered into Eng-
lish with notes, 1

Muhammad Khan, the Bangash Nawab,
268

JNj ADIR Shah's invasion. 331
Nanyaura, copperplates, 81, 84

(jRIGrlN and development of the Hindu
Sikhara, 114

XAL Rajas of Bengal, 384

Prannath Pandit, notes on two ancient

copperplate inscriptions in Hamirpur

N. W. P., 80, 86

0 AHAR, mediaBval Hindu columns from,
117

Sati Burj at Mathura, 116

Sena rajas of Bengal, 384

Shaw, R. B., Stray Arians in Tibet, 26

Sikhari Hindu, its origin and develop-
ment, 114

Smith, V. A.,;notes on two ancient copper-
plate inscriptions found in the Hamir-
pur district, N. W. P., 80

Song of Minik Chandra, 135

1 EMPLE of Gk)bind Deva at Brindi-
ban, 115

Temple, R. C, Lieut., the Lokaniti, trans-
lated from the Burmese paraphrase, 239

Tibet, Stray Arians in, 26

Translations of the Radha Sudhi Nidhi of
Hari Vans, 121 ; of the song of Manik
Chandra, 201 ; of copperplate at Bha-
gulpur, 407 ; of the Lokaniti, 239

W ALKER, J. P., Col., recent trans-
frontier ^explorations, 78

Radha Suddh& Nidhi by Hari Vans, 7

translation of, 131
Radha Vallabhis, 97

TJHEYR, the Arabian poet, 1, 26

A SKETCH

OF THE

TURKI LANGUAGE

AS SPOKEN IN

EASTERN TURKISTAN

(K&ahghar -^nd Yarkand.)

BT

ROBERT BARKLEY SHAW, F.R.G.S.,

political A^ent, latt <m tpeeuU dttig at Ehtlgkar^
Gold Medallist, Boyal Oeographical Society .

PART n.

VOCABULAEY,

TuBXi — English.

With list of names of Birds and Plants by J. Scvllt^ Esq.,
SuRQBON) H. M. Benoal Abmt (late on tpecial duty, at KdihgharJ,

Extra Number to Part I of the Journal, Asiatic Society of Bengal.

CALCUTTA :
f&iirrss BX i. w. tbomas, at thi baptist itissioir pbbss.

1880.

NOTES FOR GUIDANCE

IN CONSXJLTnTG THE YOCABVJJlRY,

In many words the letters t^ j and ^c are either inserted or omitted according to
the fancy of the writer. If not found under one spelling, then look under the other.

Thus ij^ = v2jUU, jUi^ = iShbk, Oi = O^yyf^ « y^ = y^.

If not found with a j (medial) try j\ and vim versd : e, g.y {^^^Jiy^ = {S^y%^

When not found with an o look under ^ (*. g. (3^^ = o'^^) . So also with

y and 1^^ ^ and ^^ sj and kS^ k (final) and ^. In MSS. xt is often

found written jo e. g, U^ for U^,

Many verbs ending in -la-mak^ -la't-maky 'Mn^mak and 'la*8h-mak will not be
found here, as they are formed at will from other words (often Persian or Arabic),
with a sense that is obvious on inspection. La-mak gives a simple verbal meaning
(generally transitive), laU-mak a causative one, la^n'tnuk a reflective (or simply intran-
sitive) or passive one, la^sh-mak a reciprocative or collective one. £. g. koz-la-mak »
to eye (from k'dz " an eye'') ; piehdq'la'tndq » to knife ; ghazab'la*Umdq » to make
angry (to cause to be angry) ; tust-la'tt'tnak «■ to become, or make one self, inactive ;
j-u-ba-ru'la'th-mak ^ to go, or come, or be, opposite, or &cing, one another (from

ru'ba-ru " face to face," P.).

The ordinary final aspirate $, which in many Persian words is pronounced mere-
ly as a short a (or, more correctly, is imperceptible after the fat hs of the last conso-
nant)— is by some Turki scribes employed to represent the short vowel a even before
another consonant. This is due to the tendency of the Turkis to use some visible
letter to represent even the short vowel sounds, a tendency carried even to the extent
of employing one and the same letter for the long and the short vowel (after our occi-
dental fashion: cf. all and an, 8ee Oram. p. 15, at bottom). £. g. jVUJUi or

tV^iUrJAf ) properly, according to Arabic methods, ^■JIaJ ) ; and even (Jtui^jj (for

♦-t^c;'^ (and {J^^^ ^^^^ (^r**** or jV^-<oi), which are of course pure mis-
spellings. It will save some puzzles if this be remembered in reading MSS.

The mark zamma (J, ) is often used to represent the u sound which approaches

the sound of i. Thus ^^^ has been found for ^,j^ **iaith." To Turki ears the

sound « seems nearly to approach the sound of I, (dgiin for din). Hence in practice
also J and ^ are sometimes interchanged : e, g, ^^^ iriin — ^^j^f iWff. Final it is
pronounced by them almost like an English final y, as in " very ;" e. g., utru pronounced
iitry.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Part I.— HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e. ,
EXTRA NUMBER

To Part I for 1878.

A Vocabulary of the Language of Eastern Turkistdn. — By R. B. Shaw,
^Political Agent, With two Turki Vocabularies of Birds and Plants
by J. ScFLLY, Esq., Surgeon, H, M, Bengal Army (late on special
duty J Kashghar),

Ahbreviaiiona : — ^P. signifies Porsian derivation ; A. Arabic ; T. Tnrki ; Kaz. Eh.
K. and Y. signify respectively that the words so marked are used in the K^z^k, Kho-
qand, X^hghar, and Yarkand dialects. P. T. means i>artl7 Persian, partly Turki, &c.

£ee. and coll. mean reeiprocaiive and collective^ tr, and intr, sig^nify transitive and
intransitive^ re/l, and pass, stand for reflective and passivcy caus. stand for causative ; p, p*
jAGauB post-positioUj prd, stands for pranouncedy pron, iov pronoun.

^^jij^ •^W ' dbdd'Chi'liq (subs.) a well-inhabited or cultivated place, P. T.
^y^f t^W' dbdd'liq (subs, and adj.) an inhabited place; inhabited,
^;Wi dbdan (adj.) good. [cultivated, P. T.

^vOI dbgar (adj.) occupied, full of care, busy.
Ji^l abuz (adj.) learned, well-read.
^^^I abushqa (adj.) old, advanced in years.

V' op, intensitive particle prefixed to dq " white."

^1 dpa (subs.) elder sister. P>ig)«

O^V^' ^jpdr't-fndq (v. caus.) to cause to take away (from foUow-

(3^^' apdr-mdq (v. tr.) to take away [contr. from alip-bdrrndk}.

V^^ dptdb (subs.) the sun, (for aftdb P.). ldftdba,V,).

*^^ ' dptdba (subs.) a disk-shaped basin for hand- washing, (for

Wi^*^ »' Aptdba-chi or Abtaba-chi (subs.) Basin-bearer, the title of

a high dignitary at the Court of Khoqand (spelt by tho
Russians Autobashi),

«y^j| apqut (subs.) the back part of the boot above the heel.
1

2 E. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

(^ I at (subg.) name.
^ di (subs.) horse.
«^l for^*=^l ivhich see,

^] atd (subs.) father, [sian dynasty).

^^W'^' atd'heg (subs.) father-king, patriarch (the name of a Per-
^0*1,3^1 atd'dash (adj.) of the same father.

^UiUI dt-a^sh-nidg (v. rec.) to name together ; to assign to, to
entitle so and so to. [nick-name.

P^ ' dtdgh (subs.) renown, high name, sur-name, title ; also
^l-^ASfiU) dtdgh-la^sh'tndq (v. coll.) to combine to give a name.
^LoltcUT dtdgh-la-nidq (v. tr.) to give a name, sur-name or nick-
^Jtlc^T dtdghMq (adj.) called, sur-named. [name.

(3^ ' dtdq (subs.) same as dtdgh.
^U.£)j\jT dtdq-la'sh^maq (v. coll.) same as dtdgh-lash^rndk,
^L«)SUT dtdq-la-rndq (v. tr.) same as dtdgh-la-mdq.
<,JjJ5^T dtdq-liq (adj.) same as dtdgh-Uq.
45i^l atd'liq (sub.) one who is in the place of a father, a guar-
dian, tutor. Title of a high official in Turkistan.
^jUiUl dt-a-mdq (v. tr.) to give a name to, to name.
^UiUl dt^a^n-mdq (v. pass.) to be given a name to, to be named,
to be renowned. [but into large cylinders.

ijj5'>»"yj>'^*I dihdsh'Chdi (subs.) a sort of Tea compressed like brick-tea,
iJ^J^ I dt-tt^r-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to throw, to cause to beat
out cotton (from dt-mdq),
^j»*l(iil dt-ddsh (subs, and adj.) name-sake, having the same name.
^^^1 dt-qU'Chi (subs., from dt-rndq) a thrower, a shooter ; or

specially, a thrower or beater out of cotton.
O^^' dt^qur-rndq (v. caus.) the same as dt-tur-rndq, (but with-
out its special meaning of beating out cotton).
O^JJ^ ' dt-huz-maq (v. caus.) the same as at-qur-maq.
^S^I dt^qU'laq (subs.) a kind of grass of which tinder is made*
^»-^3Gl dt-la-mdq (v. tr.) to stride across. [to step over.

oW?*^^' dt-la^fi'dur-rndq {y, caus.) to cause oneself to bestride, «?f«.,
^wXj I di'la^n-mhq (v. intr. or refl.) to be astride, to bestride, to
sit or mount on horse back, to ride.

1878.] of Eastern Turkutdn. 3

^j4^T di'ligh — 1, (sabs.) a rider, cavalier ; 2, (adj.) named,
(3^1 dt'Iiq, the same as at-ligh, [called.

jUS ? dt-mdq (v. tr.) to throw, propel, project, shoot ; also to spin.
^^^^1 dt-mish (num.) sixty (for alt-mish),

jh^ ' dtiz (subs.) a bed, or portion of land divided off for irri-

^uAx)l dt'iih^maq (y. reo.) to throw, Ao., at one another^ [gation.

^LoJjo) dt-il'tnaq (v. pass.) to be throTm or shot ; (of a gun), to

j^ deh (adj.) hungry. [go off.

^1 ieh (subs.) the interior, the inside.
OirifJ^i dchdr-cki'liq (subs.) famine (J from ach^r, the con-

tinuative of aoh^maq)*
^UJI^I afra^^t-rndq (y. oaus.) to cause to be in a divided state, to
Jl«^)^| ajra-^sh-mdq (v. rec.) to divide from one another, [divide.
O ]/^' ojra-Umdq (v. pass.) to be divided, separated.
0^^]/^^ ojra^mdq (v. intr.) to be in a divided condition.
ijifi^^ ajriq (subs.) dhub grass (whose roots run along under-
^1 aju (subs.) a black bear. [ground).

>' dch-qu (subs.) a key, i, e, opener (from ieh'trAq).
i^^ ' dch'liq (subs.) hunger (from dch.)
O^^' deh-mdq (v. tr.) to open.
(5^$"' dch'tndq (v. tr.) to be hungry.
0>J"' ^A-tffl' (v. adj.) open.
^■J^S^l aeh-U-mah (v. caus.) to cause to become bitter or sour

(see aehUmah).
iJUm^I dch-ish-maq (v. rec.) to open to one another, or with one
another.
<— A^-^^l aeh-Uh-mah (v. rec.) to be made sour together (see achU
54^' achigh (adj.) sour, bitter, angry. [mak),

VJ*'^Cr^' aehigh-tdsh (subs.) alum.

^UJXaa*.) aohigh'la^t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to become angry.
09^ <3^ I dcMq or dchuq (adj.) open.

4^^^^T dehiq-liq (subs.) openness, candour, good humour.
Vj*'^c54^' achiq-tash (subs.) alum.
O^^AyT dehiq-mikq (v. intr.) to be hungry.

4 R B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Langttage [Extra No. for

^UJU*^I deh-iUmdq (v. pass.) to be opened.

CJWj^l achUnuth (v. intr.) to become soup ; to smart (as a wound).

^^T dhhta (adj.) castrated.
^ja^lAA^I dkhta-ehi (subs.) castrator.

^\aJ;U^I dhhtar-i-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to search, or seek.
^jU-iJo^^liii. T dkhtar-ish-maq (v. rec.) to search one another.
^^.^Ui^T dkhtar-rndq (v. tr.) to search, seek.
I^^-^^T dkhsham (adv.) last night, yesterday evening.
^j^|itw^l dkhsham-liq (subs.) the evening of this day, this evening.
ci^l^l ahhldt (subs.) sweepings.
iS^Jy^^ akhur-mdq (v. tr.) to shout, to call loudly.

yj^'ljl addsh (subs.) name-sake, (more specially) a friend, com-
panion (for ^^l«>3().
4J^4),jl adash-rndq (v. intr.) to lose the way.
^y^^ 'jCn adra-qdisun (part of verb) May he remain uncared for

[an imprecation] kaz.
^^■^y^y^*3l ddam-chi-lik (subs.) humanity, kindness. P. T.
ji^i adir (subs.) uneven broken ground.
fi<^y ddim (subs.) a pace, step,
vi^"*^^*^' ddim-la-sh-indq (v. recip.) to pace against one another.
O^^*^' ddim-la-mdq (v. intr.) to pace, step.

j] dr [^r] (subs, and adj.) male, masculine, (see^l ).
yT dra (subs.) the midst, the middle (often used with da
adverbially). Expressions : Ara-ga tiishmak = to inter-
vene ; ara-ga salmaq = to interpose ; dra-gha kirmak =
to interfere, to intervene.
*V];» drala (subs.) a cart (generally with two wheels and
shafts).

J^T^]^ ara-cha-la-rndq (v.) to separate.

»jl^l dra-da (adv. & post-p.) in the midst.
JI;T drdl (subs.) island. (Qu. passive form from dra "middle.")
O^'y' dra-la-t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to visit or inspect [see
ara-la-maq'],
^'b' dra^lash (adv.) middle-wards, intermixedly, confusedly.

1878.] of Eastern Turkisidn, 6

j^;yL&Jl;T dra-lash-tttr-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to be mixed, to mix
^UJt)l;T dra-lash-rndq (v. intr.) to become intermixed. [(trans.).
^U8);T dra-la^mdh (v. tr.) to inspect.
^jJI;! dra-liq (subs.) a bribe, present [to one who intervenes dra-
ga " in the midst'*].
jUT ^M drdm-dlmdq (v.) to take rest, to repose, P. T.
JltS^^jl aramadan (subs.) a tall tree whose leaves are made into Tea.
yJl) I drdn (subs.) butter milk.

c)l^l drdn [prd. eren'] (adv.) unwillingly, reluctantly, with
^; ' drpa [often prd. dpdl (subs.) barley. [difficulty.

^;' drba (subs.) cart, waggon (see drdba),
^\JU|T arWUmdq (v. cans.) to cause to use incantations (for the

purpose of curing wounds, &c.).
^UAVj^T arla^sh^mdq (v. recip.) to say charms in opposition to the
supposed causes of ill, to say charms in company.
^W;l drhd'q (subs.) a spoken charm for curing snake bites, or
procuring fine weather.
^^^r arhdq-chi (subs.) one who uses such charms.
^^^4;! arha-rndq (v. tr.) to say charms for curing bites, or pro-
curing fine weather.
*^l art (subs.) a low Pass, a water-parting or . watershed,
rising ground. Often used in composition, as : Kizil-
art, Muz-art, &c. and often pronounced and written at,
J^^T drt'tnaq (v. tr.) to load (a horse, cart, &c.).
I^UJ^T drt'tndq (v. intr.) to remain over, to exceed.
^L«jf^ij^| dri-tv^-mdq (v. cans.) 1, to cause to load ; 2, to cause to

remain over.
^l^y^I drtugh-rdq (adj.) more [comparative of artugh, much].
i^T v5^* drtugh or drtuq (adj.) excessive, much, many. (From

drtmdq,)

OX^yj^ drtuq-luq (siibs.) quantity, great amount (muchness).

y^^i^J ' drttsh (subs.) the pencil cedar, " Juniperus excelsa" kh.
^U^mju^] drt'ish'fnaq (v. coll.) to aid one another in loading (from
art'fndq).

6 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

jM^^T art'ii-mdq (y. pass.) to be laden (said of the load) ; (of a
man) to be carried hanging on to a horse without sitting
on his back.
jjUijJ;! art'in-mdq (v, refl.) ditto.

^;' drcha (subs.) the pencil cedar [see drtt^h'],
i.,J^«-Ua^ ' drchi't-mak (y. cans.) to cause to clear, Ao.^ (see archi^

mak). [mak).

^\.aAjj*-;1 drchi'Sh-mak (v. recip.) to clear in company (see arohi-
iilUi^i drchi-mak (v. tr.) to clear, to free from obstructions, to
peel (as a fruit).
^y^^f^Vj^ arzdn-chi-liq (subs.) cheapness, abundance, P. T.
^Ulj^l arzdn-liq (subs.) ditto.

^UJb;^l arzi't-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to please.
^^U-^-jl arzi'Sh'fndq (v. recip.) to please one another, to be agree-
able to one another.

O jij' (*rzi-^^2 (v« intr.) to please, to be agreeable [gov. the

person in^^].
^Iw;) arslan (subs.) a lion.

^;^ arffha (subs.) remedy, aid, method of action.
WJ*•^;I argha-sez (adj.) helpless, unfortunate.
^<y^l arghamohi (subs.) rope, cord. (For following) :
^^*a=^I arghxmchm (subs.) do.
O^y^J orghtimdq (subs.) a large horse, a charger.

^j 1 drqa (subs.) the back, the rear.
%6i*MMj\ drqa-st-da (post-pos.) behind, after (lit. at its back).

P^V^ drqdgh (subs.) the woof (of a stuff), the cross-wise threads

placed by the shuttle.
(3^' drqdq (subs.) ditto. [support.

^UjS\i^T drqa-la-mdq (v.) 1. to carry on the back ; 2. to back up,
^UiJlj; I drqa^Wn-mdq (v. p.) to be backed up, supported, &c.
sJ^J^ drqan (subs.) rope, eaz.
^J^ drqcto (subs.) the woof, kajs.
'^ I drka [prd. lirka'] (subs.) a pet child.
^_g^y;l dr [«r] kishi (subs.) a male person.

1878.] of Eastern Twrhiatdn, 7

ViSjo^l drhah (subs.) a male [of animals as well as mankind].
(3^ ' dr-m&q (v. tr.) to separate, divide.
4^4^^^' drmdn-Uq (adj.) desirons, troubled with longing, P. T.
^^ji drman (subs.) a kind of tall grass, a weed. [to peel.

i}^jj^ aruH-mdq (y. caus.) to make clean, to clean, to rub clean ;
^j^l arugh (verbal adj.) thin, out of condition (from aru-maq),
(}ij^ aruq (adj.) ditto.
O^^Sf^lr oruq-chi-liq (subs.) tbinness, want of condition.
OirO^J' oruq-liq (subs.) ditto.
O^JJ ' aru-mdq (v. intr.) to be tired, fatigued.
(}^}J\ dru'n-mdq (v. p.) to be cleaned.
isj art (subs.) a wasp.

iSJ^ dri — 1. (conj.) further, moreorer, yerilj ; 2. (post-p.) beyond
(see nart). [clean.

^ULjl arit-mdq (v. tr.) to clean [see arut-maq] to cause to be
^W;' ari-rndq (v. intr.) to be clean. [water-course.

gi;I arighy 1 (adj.) clean, (from ari-mdq) ; 2 (subs.) an artificial
^UXa^I arigh'laH-mdq (v.) to cause to be cleaned. [another,

^UllU^I ariffh-ia^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to cleanse together or one
^y^ti^y arigh-la-rndq (v. tr.) to cause to become clean, to cleanse.
^1 driq [prd. eriq] 1. (subs.) the whole ; 2. (adj.) clean.
^jiy driq — 1. (subs.) a water channel, small canal ; 2. (adj.) thin.
^V«X2^I ariq.ia'indq (v.) 1. [same as ariffk^la-maq] ; 2. to become
thin, out of condition.
^5^(3^;' ariq-liq (subs.) 1. cleanness ; 2. thinness.

vi^i^l urik (subs.) any thing sorted out or selected for its size,
w^^' urih'la-mak (v, tr.) to sort out or select for size.
tjtJ^^I ari^i^mdq (v. pass.) to be cleansed.

O^jI dr.il.m&s (V. pass.) to be separated, divided (from ir-maq).
fi^ Mm (subs.) inauguration, any solemnity or customary
observance at the beginning of any work.
"^^y urimchik (subs.) cheese.

J^ uz or iz (adj.) foot-mark, track.

j^ dz (adj. and adv.) little, small ; not much.

8 K. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^c![}\ dzdda (adj.) neatly clothed, natty, careful of one's ap-
pearance, P.
^"iJ^jiiJ'J^ dzdr Hr-mak (colnp. v.) to scold, abuse, rebuke, upbraid, P.T.
(j]j^ dzdq (adj. used aho subs.) low, a low place, lower.
jfUijyl dz-aVt-mdq (v. cans.) to cause to diminish.

^^'jl dz^Umdq (v. intr.) to diminish, to become less.
wv/«l«3;I izda-mah (v. tr.) to search for, (from iz).
cSJl^^'l az-dur-mak (v. tr. caus.) to cause to break (tr.), to make

some one break or tear.
cJ >^^*V az-dur-mdh (v. t. caus.) to cause to lose the way.
4Jfb J' dz-rdq (adj. and adv.) smaller, fewer ; less,
(jf^; I dz-glidq (subs.) a person who often loses his way.
U^j^ dz-ghdl (subs.) an erratic water-cut, a deep channel cut by
a torrent or inundation (when the water has left its
usual bed).
^^; ' dz-ghan (subs.) a thorn-bush or tree.
*ii|l dz-ghana (adj. and adv.) tiny, little.
(J^J^J^ az-ghu'^r-rndq (v. tr.) to cause to lose the way.

^U-A^jl az-ghu'sh-rndq (v. coll.) to lose the way in company. ^

Mi^J' az-ghun (subs.) some influence which causes men to lose
their way (a local superstition in the Takla-makan desert) .
*«3^;l azal'da (adv.) from eternity, A. T.

^y dzma (subs.) [see dzghal].
(j!^J^ az-mdq (v.) to lose the way.
(jy^'ijl^j] dzmal-la-mdq (v. tr.) to desire, wish for.

^*' dzu (subs.) a back tooth, grinder, tush, kaz.

fijjjf dzugh (subs.) ditto. ^

<3^*' dzuq (subs.) ditto.

O-tf' dzuq (subs.) daily food.
C jy^J ' dziq-tur-rndg (v. caus.) to cause to lose the way.
JfUASyl dziq-ish'mdq (v. coU.) to lose the way in company.
^UX^'I dziq-mdq (v.) to lose the way.
cJJ/^^l dsdn-rdq (adj.) easier, P. T,
(j^i^^t dadn-liq (subs.) easiness^ ease, P. T.

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn. 0

UumT (fj#a [for dkiita, a.] (adv.) dlowlj, quietly*
^' U8id [ for ustddy iu] (subs.) a master workman*
jl;Uu-T dHa^rdq (adv.) more slowly, P. T.
AilliMi dtidna (subs.) a grand tomb of some celebrated person,

(lit. threshold, P.)
^jt^] (ff^tn^adj.) low.
**^e/*^ <f«ftn.(fo (post-pos.) below, beneath.

e/i^' ustin (adj.) high, superposed,
^•^vi^i^**'' uHin-da (post-pos.) above, upon.

^\^]jm] dsra^t^m&q (v. cans.) to cause to take care of, attend to.
^UI^T dsro'l-rndq (v. pass.) to be taken care of, attended to.
^W^T dsra-mdq (v. tr.) to take care of, attend to.

Cr*^ ds-rndq (v. tr.) to hang, to suspend.
• iiJU-»| ilg^f^Jc (v. tr.) to strike with the horns, to butt.
c2JU*»^/ us-ush-mah (v. recip.) to butt at one another (as the

Chinese lower orders are said to do in fighting), to
strike one anotber with the horns (of animals).

i^\ iwiah )

^ > (adj.) hot, warm.

C^I issiq )
y^' dsh (subs.) food, [generally pilao]. Also the liquid in

which skins are soaked. P.
^T dthd (adj.) more, exceeding.
^UJlft 1 dsha-t-tnaq (v. cans.) to cause to eat, to feed.
^|;vA] dsha-rdq (adj.) [comparative of dshd] more.
^I^IAI dtha-mdq (v.) to eat, to take a meal, kaz.
J^' dsh-paz (subs.) a cook, P.
^^' ushta (adj ) bleached, washed white.
. ,«A.II^' uihta-chi (subs.) a bleacher.
" sj^^ iuhidn (subs.) wide trousers, drawers.
yj)#|t^^T d9h'ddsh (subs.) a meal-fellow, one who eats from the same

y6*^» dgh-Hz (adj.) without food, destitute. [dish.

jtS^J ushqar (subs.) potash.

A^l^l Ishk-c^ha (subs.) Lord of the Gate (a title) (see uO^ ).
2

10 R. B. Sbaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^USltftl dMh-la-t-maq (y. caus.) to cauae to tan (leather), to liave

tanned.
i»j U514l uh-la-Umah (v. cans.) to cause to work.

^UolAi deh'ia-mdq (v. tr.) to tan leather.
(^L«HI ish^ia-mak (v. tr.) to work, labour, do.
^3^^' dsh-Uq (subs.) food, provisions.

^UmtI dshmaq, 1. (v. tr.) to cross, surmount (a pass) ; 2. (v.
intr.) to remain over or exceed.

^jL^^i dsh-ur-mdq (v. cans.) 1. to cause to cross, or surmount ; 2.
to cause to remain over or exceed.

^yjCyi,] dshugh-rag (adj.) more, more excessive.

Oy*^ dshuq (subs.) sheep's knuckle bones (for playing with).
<3^' dshuq (adj.) much, excessive.

i3 Jy^J^^ dshuq-tur-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to do quickly, ta cause

to make haste.
^Uj^I dshuq-mdq (v. intr.) to make haste, kh. kaz.

(jHi-*l dshiq (adj.) much [same as aehuq.^
^uhJi] dshiq-mdq [same as ashuq-maq,']
tT see«2*T

^ ' dgha (subs.) elder brother, kaz.
^^' dghdch (subs.) wood, kaz.

^^ » dghU'Oha (subs.) woman, wife.

^jv.'V'*^ ' dgh^dar-maq (v. caus.) to cause to fall, to upset, (spec.)
to pull one off a horse.
jUi^^lcXcl dgh-dar-ushmdq (v. recip.) to cause one another to fall
jfuJ^la^l dgh-dar-ul-mdq (v. caus. pass.) to be caused to fall, (or

simply) to fall

^U^jT dgh-dar-ish-rndq (same as dgh-dar-ush^mdq).
^jvx Ji^lcXil dgh^dar-iUrndq (same as dgh^dar-uUmdq).

^5«^j/l aghramehi for s^f^J^ (subs.) a rope.

*""l " 'T . **

fj^^jc I dghri-Umdq (v. caus.) to cause to suffer grief or pain, to

grieve (tr.)

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 11

^j^t ighrigh (adj.) ill, suffenug.
cHr^' dg^gi (tHe same as the last).
tt^^TV*^' dghrig-ehan (subs.) a person who is always ill, an invalid,
li sT^' dghri'tnc^ (v. intr.) to be ill or suffering, to be in grief.
y^ ' dghz (subs.) mouth. [subside, to faint.

Cr^f dgh-rndq (v. intr.) to fall on one side (as a horse-load), to
ji) aghu (subs.) a spur or projection of the mountain side

over which the road has to rise in order to cross it.
jyA dghwr (subs.) a stallion, an entire horse.
j^ dghur (adj.) heavy, large, valuable, important.
ji^^ dghir (adj.) [same as last.]
k>i^ I dghil (subs.) a cattle shed, enclosure for cattle.
^j^UxfiJ dgh^in-a^t'tnaq (v. refl. cans.) to cause to roll.

^t«UjL£| agh.in.^t^mdq (v. refl.) to roll one's self, turn over, roll (as
a horse) [Qu. from dghmdk with the sense of " to fall

o' dq (adj.) white. [on oneself."]

^UJ ]j\i] aq-ar-H'indq (v. cans.) to 4»use to be white, to make white.
^y^j\i I dq-ar-rndq (v. intr.) to be white, to become white.
^4*^1 dgi'hash (adj.) white headed.
^•1 dqta (adj.) castrated.
^U>;Uj| dqiar-Umaq (v. caus.) to cause to search.
^t« j\ji\ dgtar-maq (v. tr.) to search.
Vj**^! Aq-tdih (Prop, name) White-stone.
P^i iq^tdgh (comp. subs.) Ht white mountain, t. 0. snowy-
range (as distinguished from mountain ridges on which
the snow is not perpetual and which are called Qdra*
tdgh). Locally this word is often used as a proper name
applied to the particular snow mountains of the neigh-
bourhood ; but its use in general geography should be
supplemented, as in native use, by prefixing the name of
the locality, as in English we say : the Brighton Downs,
the Wiltshire Downs, &c. The neglect of this causes
much confusion, and false geography. There is also a
place called Aq-tagh from the colour of its rocks.

n

12 R. B. Shaw— J Voedbulary of ike Language [Extra No for

jU^T -jUii] dq-it-rndq or dq-us-^niq (v. caus.) to cause to flow, to pour.
jL^^T dq-tuTrindq (y. cans.) [the same as last].
^y^Jy^} uq-tur^nuiq (▼. caus.) to cause to understand, to instruct.
f^^i aqsaq (adj.) lame,
(3^' ug-maq (v. intr.) to understand.
f3^' dq-maq (v. intr.) to flow.
^^1 aka (sabs.) elder brother.

AT " 40^' ^^9 <»y** (*^i') erooked, evil-disposed.
Ji di (adj.) pale red, pink.
)T dia (adj.) variegated, spotted.
tjJf] dla-hula (adj.) of intermixed colours.
^)T Alaeh (Prop, name) a comprehensive name given to the
tribes of Eazzaks and Kirghiz, from some eponymous
ancestor.
^)i dla^eha (subs.) a kind of striped cotton cloth.
l3^' • dlar-mhq (v. tr.) to look with anger upon, to change coun-
tenance with anger.
Jjt^SLl^) alomghaq^ehhq (subs.) magpie.

^^) I dlaqan (subs.) the hollow of the band.
^t«)l diamdn (subs.) a robber, bandit.
^IXC>)| alanggan (subs.) a word used with repetition aUmggan
shalofiggan, to express a confused mass of things,
cf )' Aidt (Prop, name) a high plateau north of the Pamir
cTv ' dlhdm (subs.) land-tax* . [steppes,

^y^' dlhdn-^hi (subs.) one who pays land-tax.
^^*-^l alhasti (subs.) a night-mare, an incubus.
^VUl dliao (num. subs.) all six, the whole six.
cT^I AIM (Pr. n.) a mountain range south of Siberia ; aZ«o
the fox-skins brought thence.

^X^^l dltdi-lan (num. subs.) the whole six.
U^*^' dlt-mish (num.) sixty.

i^' ditun (subs.) gold.
^J^j^^ {f/^im-cAt (subs.) gold-smith.

1878.] of JSkuiem Ihirkistdn. 13

^^^ dliin (adj.) low ; dltin^da (post-pos.) below [gov. gen.]
^^acH^'T alti'^n'^hi (inun.) sixfcht
^Utys^T dlju-^Mh^-maq (y. rec.) to twaddle to one another, use empty

talk together.
^^y*r] dlju-nidq (v, intr.) to twaddle, gossip.
i e/^' ^^^^^ (subs.) a measure of length of about 28 inches

(Russian arMchine).
^UjIcjJT dlda-^t^nidq (y. caus.) to cause to deceive.
^UJtljJl dlda-^sh-nuiq (y. rec.) to deceive one another.
^UltXJ I dida-^maq (v. tr.) to deceive, play off.
^Uilc^ dida-^n-tfAq (v. pass.) to be deceived, Ac.
u5*oiT didi (? aid) (subs.) front, presence.
«i>iaJT dldi-da (post-pos. gov. gen.) in front of, in presence of.
(j^}/i^* dldereh^i-maq (v. caus.) to cause to do quickly, to hasten,

to hurry (tr.)
^l^diT diderask (adj.) quick, hurried (applied to the iifork not
to the agent).
^l^^I&j^fXJT dldera-^th^wr^mig^ (v, coll. caus.) to cause to make haste

in company.
^U^j^gJ] ild&ra^*9h-mdq^ (v. ooll) to make haste, or be busy in

company.
O^lrt*^' dlderO'maq (v. intr.) to make haste, be busy.

^1 alqa (subs.) ear-ring, ear-ornament, kaz. from ▲.
c:>U)T dlqai (subs.) a small wild plum.

yj)#Ui| dlqash (subs*) the act of blessing, or praying for fche wel-
fare of another.
JfU^UJI dlqa-^sh-maq^ (v. rec) to invoke blessing on one another,
to invoke blessings together.
^UlSJl dlqa-maq (v. tr.) to bless, invoke blessings on.
v^rJ^' dlqiih [same as 4^a«A].

^T dima (subs.) apple,
^5^^ I Almaii (Prop, name) a place north of lasiqkiil, the site of
the Russian cantonment of Yiemy (called Atmati from
its groves of apple-trees).

14 R B. Shaw — A Vocabulary ofiht Language [Extra No. for

O^^i dltndq (v. tr.) to take ; also to overcome in any contest.
Much used in composition : e. g. cdip-kelmah '' to
bring*', alip-kirmak " to take into", aiip-barmaq " to
take away" &c.

(^aIUJI Alma^liq (Prop, name) the name of several places in Cen-
tral Asia.
^)yi aluxin (subs.) "Turkey-red," the cotton stuff dyed that
colour and so called. {J from A.)
yi; >I1 dlu-hdlu (subs.) plum.
Jjs^* y I dlu-hoJchdr (subs.) plum.
A<>- Jl alu-elia (subs.) a small plum.
^y ulugh (adj.) great, large, grand, venerable (referring to
moral qualities or position chiefly), aho elder.
(3U^X^y I ulugh-la^^ah^mdq (v. recip.) to exalt one another.
i^^thyi I ulugh'ia-fndg (v. tr.) to make great, to exalt.
^UcyT ulughJiq (subs.) greatness, dignity.
^jf^ I dlish (v. subs.) a taking ; spec, the head of a canal or
derivatory water-course, where the water is taken out of
the main stream.
^^^Jis}] dl'ish-mdq (v. recip.) to mix (with the hands), (lit. to

take together).
C^nJ^I di'in-mdq (v. pass.) to be taken.

(JUJUajJ I dl'in^iUmdq (a redoubled passive) to be taken.

^^' dmdch (subs.) a plough.

o^T dmut (subs.) a large kind of pear, F.

o^^^ • dmurtU (subs.) ihe same, P.

^1 ana (interject.) here, this, look here )

^^ dna (subs.) mother.

SmS^^ unak (subs.) a milch-cow.

^^^] dnt (subs.) oath, engagement, vow ; dnt ichmak = to drink
an oath, t. e., to swear.

^S^^ ^V* (subs.) a stack.
AiS^T (in-<;^(pron.)that much [from an, oblique of ui, which see].
*«*l 'ncAa(term.) — ^fold; e, g. yua-aneha "a hundred-fold."

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 15

)«^iT dn^da (adv.) lit. in that ; but tpeeially : in that place,
theie.
cIdST dn-ddgh (pron. and ady.) like tbat, such ; aUo like tliat, so.
0]^I^T dn-tUffh-rdq (pron. and adv.) more like that.

^1«^1 dn-ddq [same as dn-ddgh'}.
Aar^ltXil dn^q-eha (pron. and adv.) lit. to an amount similar to
that, such like, so much.
^ld>T dn-ddin [same as dnddq] kh.

^;i«^T an-din (adv.) lit. from that ; hut speciaiUf : from that
place, thence. • [sition.

kmM dng (ohsol. subs.) understanding [only used in compe-
ls I on-ya [prd. on^a] (pron.) to him, her or it [on, the oblique
form of ul],
*^'^' an-ga-cha (adv.) to that amount, up to that time*
jif^^ ang-siz (adj. and adv.) ivithout understanding ; aUo sud-
denly, without premeditation.
OUjILF dng-la-t'tndq (v. cans.) to cause to underst&nd, to instruct.
oU-»»lwi dng-ia-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to understand one another.
^UICT dng-UMndq (v. tr.) to understand, to be aware.
^Ujax>| ang-Ia^n-maq (v. pass.) to be understood or known, (refl.)
to make itself known (of news ^.), to come to one's
knowledge.
y u [for ul] (pron.) that, he, she, it.

y du (subs.) sport, himting, shooting, aho game [ P from
b' dwa (int.) yes, well, all right. [Persian dhu].

ImT - Ij I Htuwa (subs.) bird's-nest.
c^l^l utodt (subs.) shame, modesty.
O^b' Hwdt'indgi (v. intr.) to feel shame or modesty.
^3^b' ^tod-t'tndq (v. tr.) to quiet a child.

^1;' itwdq (subs.) crumbs, debris, (from uwa-mdq),
^U^yl^l dwa-la-'sh-rndq (y. recip.) to agree together, to consent

■

together, to combine [from dwa],
^LmmJI^F Hwa-la'^sh'm&q (v. recip.) to build nests in company (as
swallows or rooks).

1

16 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of th$ Language [Extra No for

^U)ljT ikoa^a-maq (v.) 1. to build nests ; 2. to rub, to wring.
jfUI^I ikoam*i-mdq (v. pass.) to be crumbled, to £aU into debris.
O^'jl Ikoa'tndq (v. tr.) to crumble ot break-up.
^^1^1 Hkoo'i^-nidf (y. intr.) to be quietly occupied (of a ohild).
VJ I uh^ an exclamation used in lifting weights.
VS)! uiba (subs.) a pestilenoe, epidemioi from A. loaha,
tt))«^) ohddn (adj.) good.

Si^l upa (subs.) a white powder used bj women to improve
their complexions.
uJ^^^y^l op'tur-mai (t. %aus.) to cause to kiss [used of the person

who submits to the operation].
(4/i/fij^ opchin (subs.) a set of four horse-shoes with the nails.
O^l^iy dpra-Umdq (v. caus.) to cause to crumble to pieces, to

break up, crumble (tr.).
O^jii^ opra-^nAq (y. intr.) to crumble, to fall to dust ; to grow old.

(Xiji^ opruq (adj.) cnmibled, ruinous (from preceding).
(3^.2^' opru-^l^mdq (y. pass.) to be crumble [also dpra^'^l-tnaq^,
l^l bpJea (subs.) lungs ; wrath, Anger, offence.
^UJVj Kj^I opka^qhqmdq (v. tr.) to beat one's shoulders and back with

the fresh lungs of an animal. A Turki custom sup-
posed to be a remedy in illness. [offend.
uJ^^^i^' opka-la'^t-mak (y. caus.) to cause one to be offended, to
<— J'^ vj' opka-la-^sh'mak (v. recip.) to be offended with one another.
\^J\f^i^j\ dpia-la-mak (y. intr.) to be offended, to take offence.
u-A*i>l op-mak (v. tr.) to kiss, to embrace.
V^^ ^P^P (subs.) a kind of bird with a crest, a hoopoo (?).
4^^^) opiich (subs.) a kiss.
u-A*^>l op'Uih-mak (y. recip.) to kiss one another.

«»;* ut (subs.) gall,
tjl - o^l ot (subs.) fire.

^) ot (subs.) grass.

«^j' uwiit (subs.) malt, sprouting grain used for making a sort

of beer, kaz. [mdq).

O^W ota-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to pluck out weeds (see oid"

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn, 17

^lo^u^l otd'-^gh'mdq {v. recip.) to pluck weeds in company.
^y otdgh (subs.) a temporary abode, a Kirghiz tent.
ci^UIjjI ) otdghat (subs.) a plume, a crest of peacock's feather worn
*i^jl ) by high dignitaries under the Chinese.

^U;) ot&q (same as otagh),
<»J^^I Utah (subs.) knee-boots worn in Turkistdn.
^^^arUj) utah'Ohi (subs.) a bootmaker.
^3^^;' otd-mdq (v. tr.) to pluck up weeds or grass,
i^lxujl uta-mak (v. tr.) to read or say prayers, to recite.
jf^jf otdo (same as otdgh) Kh.

jyj^ otra (subs. & adj.) the midst ; middle, intermediate ; [otra^
Muda = in the midst of it] ? for urta. [mediate.

^_^f[AI otrd-n^hi (subs. &. adj.) the middle one j middle, inter-
^jt iitru (adv.) opposite, facing ( ? from ut-mak " to meet").
f)/^ utruJc (subs.) he, untruth, Kaz. ( ? for durogh, P.).
T 4^-^' vtrui'Ohi (subs.) liar, Kaz.

^UjjI oUqhch (subs.) dry shavings Ac. for lighting a fire. In
the bazars of Yarkand and Kdshghar these are sold in
the form of short log^ of wood 3 or 4 inches thick, and
so accurately sliced to the thickness of stout paper, that
when all the slices are put together and tied in the form
of the original log, no separation can be detected at first
sight. This is done with a special tool. The ends are
dipped in sulphur before sale, so that they can be used for
raising a flame from the embers of overnight.
JI^'UjjI ut-qaz-rndq (v. cans.) [same as following].
O^y^j' ut-quz-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to sit. [recite.

C-TI^IC^I ut.Jcar-mah (v. caus.) to cause to pass over or through, to
CJ UflCjI auJoaz-mah (v. caus.) [the same as the last].

>!^^j' utJcur (adj.) sharp, (viz. * which passes through').
^jy^y ut-kur-maJc (v. tr. and caus.) to sharpen, [also same as «/-
har'niaJc].
*— rU>jf^jl ut'kuz-mak (v. tr. and caus.) do. do.

0 J'^ ot-Iaq (subs.) a grassy phwe, a meadow, a pasture.
8

1^ ^' B- Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

uJ W)l Awu-H-mah (v. caus.) to cause to increase.
tJ^^;l ut-mak (v. tr.) to pass, to go over or through, to penetrate,
to cross, to meet. Metaph, to go through or accomplish
anj work ; to pass over or forgive a fault, &c.
*^^1 utna (subs.) a temporary loan of any thing.
^^'^ iitni (subs.) [the same].
jy^i utur (adj.) straight.
C^^yj' utur-la-rndg (v. tr.) to make straight.
iS^)y^^ utur-maq (v. intr.) to sit.
^mJpjl^ utuk (subs.) high riding boots, Kh. [(from ut-mak).

v*-y!;' utiln (subs.) pardon obtained by some-one*s intercession
c)^^' otun (subs.) fuel, fire-wood. (From ot " fire"),
^}) ufffueh (subs.) a handful.
^^1 doh (hum.) three.
^1 ueh (subs.) a feud, a state of enmity.
«j' uch (subs.) an end, a point.
'n^jI ucha (subs.) the posteriors, the back.
^^U.^1 ochdr-qush (compound subs.) a flying bird [from bch-mhq

= to fly, and quah = a bird].
^^U^) dcMr-Uq (subs, and adj.) a creature that flies ; also flying,

possessed of the power of flight,
^^^y uchash (adj.) at feud, inimical.
l^l^Uy ucha'-sh-mak (v. recip.) to be at feud with one another

[from an un-Tised verb ucha-mak],
iU>) ucMgh (subs.) a fire-place, cooking-place.
^^? ucMq (subs.) [the same].
i-TUjI iichak (subs.) entrails, Kh.

^Ujl oeh-ao (num. subs.) all three, the three.
^8jU.j) dch-do-lan (num. subs.) all three.
^15-^1 uchat (subs.) entrails.
JbU.^1 dch-ai-lan (num. subs.) all the three.
^I^jl doJira-'t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to meet.
jUAlIjI dchra-^'sh^mdq (v. recip.) to meet one another.
.^^1*1 sehra-rndq (v. intr.) to meet, to encounter on the road [gov-
ems ga"]'

1878.] ofHattem TurhUtdn. 19

jU*.jl deh^qdq (adj.) flying about much [from doh^mda].
cy^-)' ^^-qun (subs.) a spark,

*— > **^J uch'kak (adj.) burning badly, becoming extinguished rapid-
ly (of flre-wood, or fire) [from uch-mak}.

9^9' uchku (subs.) a goat.

iS^H^Jr ilttmieh-la-'sh-rndq (v. recip.) to take by handsful together

[from next].

^L«ift.j/ uumch'Ia'tndq (v. tr.) to take by handsful [from uwuch],
Ua.jI ujma (subs.) mulberry.
J^^j) ujmdq (subs.) Heaven, the abode of the blessed.
jU*.^l och-maq (v. intr.) to fly,
u-A^j' ueh-mah (v. intr.) to become extinguished, to go out (as
jy^jl dehor (subs.) news, intelligence, answer. [fire).

i5^^->' och-dr-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to fly.
u«A^^jl u^'Ur^mak (v. caus.) to cause to become extinguished, to

extinguish, to put out.
^^UJu^jl och-dsh'tndq (v. recip.) to fly together.
Jj^j' t^^tf^ (a^i-) open [same as ooAi^].
^^i^^l dch^d-la-si (num. subs.) all the three of them.
^«^8^^I och-O'lan-ohi (num. subs.) third, Kh.

vJ^j' tkr^tfn (post-pos.) because of, for, on account of [governs
the genitive].
^j^y^jlf deh-an-ehi (num. adj.) third.

fT^i ukh (interj.) an exclamation of pain or fatigue, (Cf.
German "ach").
^UAl^jl uleh^ra'^sh-nidq (v. recip.) to snort together [of horses].
^L«|^jl ukh-ra-rndq (v. intr.) to snort.
^Ujvm^j) ohhilui'H'indq (v. caus.) to make like, to equalize ; aho, to
\j^^^^^y okJuhash (adj.) like, equal to. [compare.

^^ILmaAjI okT^sha-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to be alike, to resemble one another,
^L«\.M^j) okhsha-mdq (v. intr.) to be like, to resemble ; to be probable,

to be likely ; to be fulfilled (a promise).
O^J-^^^' ukhshtt-mdq (v. intr.) to retch, vomit.

20 R. B. Shaw — A Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^UJla^j) ukh'la^H-mdgi (v. caus.) to cause to sleep.
O^^^^j' uhh-la'^sh-maq (v. coll.) to go to sleep together.
ij^'^y ukh'la-mdq (v. intr.) to sleep, to g^ to sleep.

jy^y oJehor (subs.) a manager (for horses). From P.
Cr^jy^y ckhoT'a'mdq (v. intr.) to sneeze (of a horse).
*J3' ura (adj.) standing upright.

}jy ura (subs.) a bole in the ground for storing grain, a gamer,
a cach^.
^*y^fjy dradan (subs.) a colouring matter, madder.
p|;jl ordgh (subs.) a covering, the cloth bound round a package.
ij\)}i ordq (subs.) a sickle, Eh. Kaz.
^jK*lj^l ordq-chi (subs.) a reaper, Kh. Kaje,
Li^St;^! ura-laA (adv.) upwards, up-hill.
^jUI^I dra-rndq (v. tr.) to wind, wrap.

^]jj\ orau (subs.) a cloth wound round anything (the same as

dragh']y Kaz.
^;^) urta (subs, and adj.) middle ; urta-da (adv.) in the middle.
^jU;^) urthq (subs.) partner ; also friend, intimate.
^\ufcti\3j] urfaq-la-rndq (v. intr.) to be in partnership.
^^\a\3jjI\ urta-mak (v. tr.) to set on fire, to bum (chiefly the dry
grass of a hill-side). [enflamed.

i.J\6jl5^l urta-ti-mak (v. refl.) to bum itself, to bum (intr.), to bo
y^^^jjl urtang (subs.) a staging post, a traveller's rest-house, a
stage ( ? from urta, qu. half-way-house).
^«*^^;jl lirtang-chi (subs ) a man in charge of a staging post, a

post-master or post-rider. [audience.

)djj) 4rda (subs.) a Eoyal residence, a Court, a Eoyal place of
u-TliJjiji ordak (subs.) a duck [wild or tame].
t?^^*i^^' ^'dur-^ndq (v. caus.) to cause to strike.
u-/^j^*^J!^' or-dor-mak (v. caus.) to cause to braid the hair,
^lij^l urgha-ehi (subs.) a female (of man or beast), Kaz.
^lc;j| urghdq (subs.) a sickle.
i^\j^€jji orga-t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to leam, i, e, to teach.
^jj crkach (subs.) a camel's hump.

1878.] of Eastern TurkisUn, 21

uJ^^lf;^! orga-'n-iBh-mah (v. recip.) to learn together.
*— ^^lyj' orgd-^n-mak (v. refl.) to instruct oneself, t. e, to learn.

^^Jrjy orgot (subs.) winnowed grain prepared for the mill.
*— ^^i!;' or-la-'t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to climb.
immf^^yj] dr-Ia-mak (v. intr.) to climb ; to rise, to mount up.
c-J^^jl dr-la-^n^mak (v. refl.) to climb, (cf. " se cramponner.*')
iS^J}^ ur-rndq (v. tr.) to strike, to beat.
O^jl ur-rndq (v. tr.) to reap, to cut grass.
vi) l^jl or-mak (v, tr.) to braid the hair.

u-Tl^jl ormak (subs.) a rough loom without treadles for weaving
coarse carpets, &c.

u-Tl^^' uwur-mak (v. tr.) to turn over, to reverse. Yuz uwurmak
= to turn the face, to face round.
^UASl^jl urma-la'^sh-mak (v. recip.) to crawl together.
^_/L«!>L<jjl urma-la-mak (v. intr.) to crawl, to creep.
^V^.JLuiU;jl uma-^sh'tur-rndq (v. recip. caus.) to appoint to each his

place, to settle each in place.

^^UAli^jl uma-^sh'tndq (v. recip.) to be each in his own place, to be

respectively settled.
jfL«U;jl uma-rndq (v. intr.) to be settled, fixed, (from urun),
fj\^jy^2f^^ ur'Uah-ttir'fndq (v. caus.) to cause to fight.
J^A^j^jl ur-ush-qdq (adj.) given to fighting, quarrelsome.
^U^^^l ur-wh-rndq (v. recip.) lit, to strike or beat one-another,
f . e. to fight.
i-A^jj;jl or-osh-mak (v. recip.) tol)raid one-another's hair.
ajf)^ urugh (subs.) seed ; aho offspring, family, clan.

^^y h}^^ tfrwyA tuqqan (subs.) relations, family.
jfUSltf^jl urugh'la-'t'tndq (v. caus.) to cause to get thin, &c. (see

urugh'la^maq)*
^U^]U^jl urugh-Ja-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to make one-another thin, to

get thin together [see next word].
jfUoXc^l urugh'la-mdq (v.) 1. to get thin ; 2. to sow seed ; 8. to

muster strong in family, to swarm.
i3)J)^ see urugh; uruq (adj.) thin, in bad condition.

22 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

O^^^jl wrtkq^-la-m&q^ [the same as urugh-la-rndql.

w^ji;) uruk (subs.) apricot.

O i)J>^ ur-ul-indq (v. pass.) to be struck, to be beaten.
^£^)Jjl^ or^oUmah (v. pass.) to be braided [of hair.]

tin

(^Uij(;jl uvmr-uUmah (v. pass.) to be turned, reversed, upset.

y^)j}\ wrun (subs.) place, station. [i^g)-

^Uij2;^) ur-un-rndq (v. refl.) to strike one's self against (in pass-
^U^^l ur-un-ush-mdq (▼• refl. recip.) to strike against one another
J!^ oz (pron.) self. [in passing.

jji uz (adj.) handsome, pretty, beautiful.
VJ' uza (subs.) surface, top ; uza-si'da = on the top of it.
^VJ?/;! uza^^t-mdq (v. cans.) lit. to cause to go far (eloigner) ;
to reach out a thing ; to go out to meet, or to escort,
a guest.
^b«Ijj) uza-mdq (v. intr.) to go far.
(}];jl^ uzdq (adv.) far, (eloign^.
%jj^'il}j) uZ'la-mak (v. tr.) to top, or take the top ofF any thing, to
skim [from uza"],
^Ij;) uzangu (subs.) a stirrup.

v-Aj^I OZ'hak (Pro. name) a certain tribe of Turki race, the ruling

tribe in Bokhara and Khiva. [run.

(j^))'^j)^ oz-dur-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to go a-head, to cause to out-

uJ^;«^j' fO-dur-maJc (v. cans.) to cause to break by pulling, to cause

to pull in pieces.
^jy bz-ga (adj.) lit, to itself ; i, e. separate, different.
^^j)^ oz-ga-cha (adv.) in a separate or different manner, otherwise,
changed (in a bad sense) [e. g. ish ozgaeha holdi '* affairs
have gone to grief"].
^»lJ^J^jy ozgct-r-t-mak (v, caus.) to cause to change colour [from

oz-ga-r-maJc],
\D\j^jSj^ dzga-r-sk-maJe (v. recip.) to change colour together.
u-T^lfjf;! ozga-r-mak (v. intr.) to become different (of colour) ; to
change colour, to become discoloured. [consciousness.
^JJj^Jjl bZ'ldlc (adv.) by one's self or selves ; (subst.) self-ness i. e.

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn. 23

C^i^) oZ'lik [the same as the last].

j|t«[^l dZ'fndq (v. intr.) to out-nin, to get foremost in a i<ace.
ulJ^jl iiz-mak (y. tr.) to break off by pulling, to pull in pieces, to
ij}})^ uzuq (subs.) food, provisions. [tear away,

w^*^' ozok (subs.) a finger-ring.

^^J^*y uZ'uJc (subs.) a piece broken off, a fragment [from Hz-
male] ; (adj.) fragile, slender.
wUij;^) uz-ul-mah (v. pass.) to be broken by pulling, to be torn away

f)Jy *zt*«» (subs.) a grape. [from uz-tnakl.

f)Jj) dZ'Om (pron.) I myself; oz-dmiz = we ourselves.

cjlj^^l uzun (adj.) long, tall.
t-Siji)! oz-ong (pron.) thou thy-self ; oz-ongiz = ye yourselves.

i^j^ oZ'i (pron.) he himself, &c.
A^jl oz-y-eha (adv.) of one's self, by one's self.

^Umj) uBsdq (adj.) thirsty.
JIm^jI fMa/ (adj.) bad, evil, Kh. Kaz.
45^' J^y usal'la-indq (v. intr.) to become bad, to go to the bad.

^L«Umj| usM-mdq (v. intr.) to be thirsty, to thirst.
^^j\ ustd (subs.) a teacher ; an artisan, ^rom P.
KumijI ustara (subs.) a razor, P.

u£LLmjI usiang (subs.) a canalized stream, a trunk canal.
v2jU«4 jAawj ] uS'twr-mak (v. caus.) to cause to become large, to cause to

increase, to increase (tr.).
ej^jl iUtun (subs.) pillar, column [ for P. " siiun'^ ].
sti)^}^ w^tm (adj. adv.) upper ; above ; Ustun-da upon, (obi. pos-
sessed form of following word : for ust-in = '* the top
of it").
^■**^^' ust'i (subs, poss.) its top ; Ust-i-da = on its top.

^'^^^l uema (subs.) a black dye for the hair, P.
(j\*m^] U9'indq (v. tr.) to fill up grain, &c. into a sack, to shovel
or scoop anything into a bag.
uLAa4»j| ilS'tnah (v. tr.) to butt, to strike with the horns,
u-/^-^^^' ui-mak (v. intr.) to increase, to grow, to get big.

24i R. 6. Shaw — A Voeahulat^ of the Language [Extra No. for

^;l u-sha (pron.) that [contr. from u^shaT],
^VJt&^l unha-H-mdq (v. tr.) to break in pieces, to break up.
^l^jl ushi^ (jbA\') little ; (subs.) bits, debris, powder ; aho a

menial servant.
ij-^y u-shal (pron.) that [from ul and shuT],
^JUJLAjI m^JiaJ'Umd^ (v. pass.) to be broken up.
♦ ^ -^' tf-«^an-cAa (pron. and adv.)^to that amount ; \shul becoming

ehan in the oblique cases].
)j3t*j) u-^han-da (adv.) lit, in that very [place] ; there.
^liXit*;! wehan-ddq^ (pron. and adv.) like that, so.

y^^Jl ueh'hu (pron.) this, this very [from ehu and hu].
^CsA^ u-ehan-ga (pron.) to that very (place), thither.
^_gA*^jl oshni (subs.) shoulder.
J^^j^jl ueh-WT'^iniq (v. cans.) to cause to exceed, to magnify, to in-
crease, (see ashur-mag).
i3y^!^ ushuq (subs.) sheep's knuckle-bones used for playing.
(jf^jl^ ushuq (adj.) much, very much.
^USj^jl ushuq-maq (v. intr.) to agitate oneself, to hasten (see dshuq'
mag),
vlJ^;l uBhvh (subs.) frost, cold [as it affects vegetation].
^W^^l ughrd-mhg (v. tr.) to encounter.
^UJy^jl ughar-la-H-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to steal or rob.
^jUAS^^I ughar-la-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to rob one another.
^j^'K^}^ ughar-la-rndq (v. tr.) to thieve, to rob.
i^j^y ughri (subs.) thief.
t)^jl see Jj^j'
(J^J^ ugMdq (subs.) a kid, also a game on horse-back played

with the body of a kid.
^^j) ftghlan (subs.) a male child, a boy.
i^yfi jf ugliuch (subs.) a rolling-pin for pastry,
o^j) ughut (subs.) malt.

Jj^^ *ighwr (subs.) a mortar in which grain is pounded.
J^^j^ ughuz (subs.) milk of the cow during a day or two after
the birth of the calf, (not drinkable).

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn. 25

Jy^^' uglul (subs.) a male child, son, boy. [w«^]-

cj'^irf;' ufra-'Urndq (v. caus.) to cause to crumble [ same as bpra-'U
O^ *!/!;' ufra^mdq (v. intr.) to crumble, [same as opra-maq'].
J^;) ufruk (adj.) crumbled, ruinous [opruq].
Kij) ufka (subs.) lungs ; anger [see apkd]. .
ciJUjKijI ufka-la-mah (v. intr.) to take offence [see ajpia-ia-mak'].
i£A«ij) uf-mah (v. tr.) to kiss [see '6]pmak\

O!^ oq (subs.) a projectile ; an arrow, a bullet ; also the pole of

a cart or plough ; the beam of an oil press.
\ij/^ oqa (subs.) gold lace (real or imitation).
<^^;) aught (subs.) subsistence, sustenance, maintenance [A. with
a special meaning acquired]. fnaq],

O^Jy^^ t^g-^^^'^i (y* caus.) to cause to understand [from itq-
^^y^jl oqshu-mdq (v. intr.) to retch, vomit.

O^^l uq-mdq (v. tr.) to understand, to comprehend, to take in.
^u3jij] oqu-t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to read, to instruct, to teach.
0^*^j^^[ oqU'^sh-mdq (v. recip.) to read in company.

0^jij) oqu-^l-rndq (v. pass.) to be read.

**i ** I
O J^r oqu-mdq (v. tr.) to read, to recite.

10' ^ka (subs.) a younger brother.
uf^O' H^^* C^i-) step- : e. g. ugai-hala, a step-son or daughter.
^^1 uqta (subs.) defalcations in the matter of public revenue,
by which either the prince or the private payers of
revenue are cheated.
^U^jt uktam (adj.) same, Ejls.
AdB^^I ukcha (subs.) the kernel (in any stone-fruit).
A^ jl ukcha (subs.) heel. [sit.

l^ji ugza (subs.) a roof, generally a flat roof on which one can
jf^^jl uk'Suz (adj.) left an orphan, without parents, Kaz.
^'^^^^jl\ uksu-mak (v. intr.) to sit aside in grief, to fret, aUo to dimi-
4-J^^jl ug-mak (v. tr.) to rub into powder, Kaz. [nish, Kaz.

^^^jl ogot (subs.) winnowed grain prepared for the mill [the

same as orgof].
4

26

R. B. Shaw — A Voeahularif of the Language [Extra No. fcr

"J

^U^y

iUXiS,T

tfifctfr-7-4fui^ (▼. cans.) to cause to bellow.

ugur-t-mah (v. cans.) to cause to torn (tr.), to make some-
one turn something.

uhwT'malc (v. intr.) to bellow.

ugwr-maJc (v. tr.) to turn over, to torn round, to turn aside.

ukur-ush-mak (v. recip.) to bellow at one another, to bellow
in company.

ugur^ush-mak (y. recip.) to turn oyer together (tr).

uh$z (subs.) an ox, Kh.

uffuz [the same,] Ejus.

ug-ul-mak (t. pass.) to be crumbled.

uhun-mah (v. intr.) to regret, to be sorry.

ukunueh (subs.) regret, sorrow.

uhi (subs.) owl. [*^)*

ti/ (pron.) that, he, she, it (oblique, generally an sometimes

Ulat (subs.) pestilence (on man or beast) [see uUmah],
uldr (subs.) a snow pheasant {Tetraogalltu fihetanm).
ula-^sh-fur'mdq (y. rec. cans.) to cause to catch up a party.
ulash-tur^mah (t. rec. cans.) to cause to partition, or

distribute,
ula-'sh-rndq (v. recip.) to unite with others, [specially] to

catch up a party,
dtt-la-^sh^rndq (v. recip.) to hunt together [see du]*
iilash-mak (v. tr.) to distribute, to divide, see c^jf*
uldffh (subs.) a beast of burthen, a baggage aniTy^jvl.
uUgh'liq (subs.) an owner of baggage-animals, (adj.)

appertaining to baggage-animals.
uldq [the same as nldgK],

auldq (subs, and adj.) privacy, seclusion; private, secluded.
ulaq-tur^mdq (v. caus.) to cause to stray, to drive away
from a herd or flock, Kaz,

duidq-la-rndq (v. intr.) to make private, [used of a place,
not of a person].

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 27

o'^j' uidq^mdq (v. intr.) to stray, to go astray, Kaz.
l3^V dU'la-mdq (v. tr.) to hunt, to shoot, to kill in hunting.
li^Jj) ula-mdq (v. tr.) to join, unite.
i^Sj) idany (subs.) a horse's girth.

UJjl ulta (adj.) incorrect, mistaken, wrong.
J^}) ultan (subs.) the sole of a boot, Kaz.

c5S^>^^' ^itur-S^^^-^ \ (v. cans.) to cause to sit, to seat.

^^Ujf^yJjl uUiilr'gliuZ'fnak (v. redupl. caus.) to cause to kill, lit to

cause to cause to die (see uUmak) ,
cj^Vyy viltur-rndq (v. intr.) to sit, to be seated,
^^l^^^jl uUiur-maJc (v. caus.) to kill, lU. to cause to die.

^jl tf^a (subs.) booty, plunder, loot.
^^UJt)Wj| ulja-hh-^sh-rndq (▼. recip.) to loot one-another.

^tcjls'jl tfZ/o-to-m^ (v, tr.) to plunder, to loot,
^^U^Wy Uleha-^sh-mak (v. recip.) to weigh one-another.

c/^^l tt^Aa'ib (subs.) a balance, scales, any weighing instrument.
kJ^'^jl iUcha-tnak (v. tr.) to weigh.

^UL Wjl fi2^AwH-7-fm{|7 (t. caus.) to cause to become greater, to

cause to increase. [ulugh.

^Uj^jl ulgh-ai-rndq (v. intr.) to become greater, to increase [from

^j^Ji^ atowaUghi (adj.) the first, the foremost, A. T.

^^j^ aiowaUqi (the same).

«•

^^— 'jl iilka (subs.) territory, region, district,
cj^jl iiikan (adj.) great, large, Kaz.
u-A^^jl ulgwr-mak (v. intr.) to come or go forward, to advance

(P for ilgar^'tnak),

^^Ji^ aunoaUgi (adj.) the first.

^3^j' (rare, probably borrowed from the West) for iSlJji
u«A^^I Ul'tnak (▼. intr.) to die.

yj^J^Jr ^7tM (subs.) a tribe, a division of a tribe (chiefly of nomads).
Almost obsolete,
ci^ Vj*!^^' w/-«*A hon (adv.) the day before yesterday, the other day.

28 R. B. Sbaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

\^yy ulush (subs.) a portion, a share.
jjVv&y^l iiliUh-maq (v. tr.) to separate into parties.

py^l ulugh (adj.) great, large, grand; also eldest, elder.
(3lr^y^' ulugh-rdq (adj.) greater.

^l/eXijijl ulugh' ia-rndq (v. tr.) to enlarge, to confer grandeur.
SmmSyy ul'uk (subs.) a dead man or beast, a corpse, a carcass.
A Jjl ul'Um (subs.) death ; (adj.) past, expired.
\^\ M^mach (subs.) a kind of semolina made of flour and eaten

•with soup.
^4y«^) umrutqa (subs.) the back-bone, Kaz.
s^)^ un (num.) ten. Also for und^ which see.
^)j)l Un (subs.) a voice, a sound.
jUJUy una-^t-nidq (v. cans.) to cause to agree.
^UJmU^I una-'sh-rndq (v. recip.) to agree together (in any matter).
ijUU;! una-mdq (v. tr.) to agree, to consent.
Jijl und (subs.) flour.

I Ji^l un-da (pron. and adv.) lit. in that (place or time), i. e., there,
then. [cry)

y^lx|«yJ)l iinda-mak (v. tr.) to summon with the voice (without out-
^_.C^jJijl un-dt^-mak (v. cans.) to cause to sprout,
bi^^l ung (adj.) right (hand) ; also right, proper.
j|UUui^l ungal't'indq (v. cans.) to cause to improve, to cause to
become better (any work, &c.).
^UJVxi^) ungal-mdq (v. intr.) to improve, to become better.
i^^ji ungai (adj.) easy.

i^UJjI fin-mak (v, intr.) to sprout, to shoot out from the ground.

iJ^yjl^ ^^tti-qdq (adj.) one who makes frequent mistakes, or
omissions.

^Wyjl unuUmdq (v. tr.) to make a mistake, to forget.

sSy Ui (subs.) house, chamber. [and met),

^y ui 1. (subs.) idea, thought ; 2. (adj.) deep, profound (lit.

\S}' uwi (subs.) a bullock, an ox.
n^' tfya (subs.) a nest, or sleeping place of an animaL

1878.] of Eastern TurkUtdn. 29

^^Hy tiyat (subs.) shame, modesty.
•XmoU*) uyat-nz (adj.) shameless.

•UjU^) ^aUmdg (v. intr.) to feel shame.

O^^'^' tfya7-ma£ (y. pass.) to be put to shame, to be ashamed.
^Uib^l uya-^n-rndq (v. intr.) to awake.
uJ^^j' uyer-ul-mak (v. pass.) to be turned, Kaz.

*rf '^-^f «V^-»^* j (v. tr.) to turn, Kaz. for iiilc^t,) which see).
^^}j^y uyeru-mak )

^UJlo^) uigha-Umdgi (v. caus.) to cause to awake, to awaken.

sj^!^ uiyhdq (adj.) awake ; also wide-awake, sharp, acute.
O^^j' uiffha-n-mdq (v. intr, or refl.) to be awake. [ ? from ut
"thought" : thus — ui-ffha-maq (if there were such a verb)
would be '* to be conscious," and the Beflective utyha-^n-
tndq would be, literally, " to be conscious of one's self,
f. e. to be awake."]
^jl uiqu (subs.) sleep.
^UjS^y uiqu-la-'t-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to sleep, to put to sleep.
^jU-l8jA|^l uiqu-la'^sh'tndq (v. recip.) to sleep in company.
jjUS^jl uiqu-Ia-mdq (v. intr.) to sleep.
OJ^J^jf uiqt^^uq (adj.) drowsy after sleep.
^UjXj|^| ui'la-H-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to think.
^U^Xj|;i ui'la-^ah-mdq (v. recip.) to think together.

^j^H)i ui'la-rndq (v. tr.) to think, to reflect.
^—A^Jfejl ui-la-mak (v. fcr.) to marry or cause to marry, to set up in

life (said of the father or guardian) [lit. to make a house^
holder of. From iii = house.]
i-A*^ ^jl ui-Ja'^n-mak (v. pass, or refl.) to be married, or started in life.
W^l dima (subs.) an ornamental work done by cutting out a
pattern and fixing it on another ground.
(j\^y oimdq (subs.) a thimble.

(3W^' ut-maq (v. tr.) to excavate (? from ui = deep).
^USluj) dina-^f'tndq (v. caus.) to cause to play.

yj^^^' oifkish (subs.) a lover, Kaz.
^U^UjjI oina-'sk-rndq (v. recip.) to play with one-another.

80 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahuiaty qftke Langi$age [Extra No. for

^3^f^H^ oina-mdq (v. intr.) to play. (Probably for oyun-^^-maq).
ij^yi)^ uyu-*t-mdq (▼. caus.) to cause to curdle.
oWr^' uyu-mdq (v. intr.) to curdle, become curdled.
MfHjl^ oyun (subs.) play.
i^^yijf^ oyun^hi (subs.) a player.

cfl d (interj. used in addressing a person).
^^1 di (subs.) moon, month.
yUVj^l di'paltu (subs.) a battle-axe (? from its crescent shape).
(3U^V> I i^ya-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to grudge one-another.
py dydgh (subs.) leg, foot.
j^UJtXfljT dydgh-la'^sh-rndq (▼. recip.) to lie head and feet together

(like herrings in a barrel) ; to lie with all the feet in-
wards to the fire.
^LoXiUT djfdgh^la-mdq (v. tr.) to wade (on foot) across a river,
' O^T dydq (subs.) a bowl (of wood or earthen ware, &c).
oWT for akt
^^j=c'vjl dydq-chi (subs,) a cup-bearer, one who fills the bowl.

O^^l aya-mdq (v. tr.) to withhold, to withdraw (anything), to
grudge (anyone anything).

^Uiy aya-n-mdq (v. refl.) to withdraw one's self from, to flinch,

to shirk, to shrink from,
^^m iyak (subs.) chin, Kaz.
v^ WjLul iharJi-mak (v. cause.) to cause to send.
v^/L^Uj|| H^ar-H'tur-mak (v. cause, redupl.) to cause to have (some-
thing) sent, to cause to cause to send.
<^U^Ui' ihar-mah (v. tr.) to send.

4^^*^' ibriq (subs.) an earthenware water- jug»
UiJ^^I ipak (subs.) silk.
s^\/*)y^txi} ipla-sh-tur-mak (v. recip. caus.) to cause to take their

proper places, to put into the proper order among them-
selves, or mutually.
v-J UmIU^I ipla-'sh-mak (v. recip.) to get into one's proper places, to

arrange one's selves or themselves.
\^\/ctx»] ipla-mak (v. tr.) to arrange in proper order or sequence.
Oil it (subs.) a dog.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 31

cjJU^' itak (subs.) a skirt, lower edge. [dersoni (/*)

y^^l italyil (subs.) the female of the Sliungkdr or Falco Hen-
jA i"^J^ J tt'tisi (subs.) lit. dog-tooth ; a kind of stitch in which the

needle is passed through alternately from opposite sides
[P herring bone].
(^Ul^i it-mak (v. tr.) 1. to make, to Wld ; 2. to shut, fasten.
viJUliT a%t-fnah (v. tr.) to speak, to say.
vlJUixu] it-il'tnak (v. pass.) 1. to be made ; 2. to be fastened,
w^^AfrVil ait-il-mak (v. pass.) to be said.

^ ich (subs.) inside, interior ; fcA-t-^= within.
^J^ls^l ichak (subs.) entrails, Kh.
i^'^l ichai (subs.) entrails.

*;«^l ieh-'ra see ichkari*
j^teil ich-gur (subs.) a wwst band.
tJiij^il ich^qi4iq (subs.)

^jf^^ ich'k'ari (adv. and p. p.) inside. See Oram,, p. 65.

y^^^ ichku (subs.) goat.
viJUsil ich-mak (v. tr.) to drink. [saddle.

^*^*^' ichmak (subs.) a saddle pad, a piece of felt going under the
^^^>1^^' ieh'Ur'mak (v. ca\is.) to cause to drink, to give to drink.
cJ^'Jj) aida^H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to drive away.
U-Tu^IiX^I aidaJgj^^ffiak (v. recip.) to drive away in company,
^^-'^''^d' atda-mak (v. tr.) to drive away [the same as hnda-makl,
lJ'^I 1. aidi^ corr. from a%t''ti " he said" ; 2. idi, contr. from irdi
" he was."
ji) er (subs.) a male, a man, a husband ; aUo^ a hero, a brave man.
o!/d' if^g, (adj.) far, distant.
^jV alran (subs.) butter-milk.

J^]j^ er-dnlar (subs.) heroes, men of worth [from er and (?)
double Plural, P. and T., as a mark of respect].
iX^ji^ ert-fnhq (v. tr.) to get the better of, to deceive (P for artmiqy
qu. " to come over" vulg.)

^ji* erta (subs.) morning ; (adv.j^o-morrow.

32

R. B. Shaw— ^ Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^^J erta-ffi 1. (Bubs.) a tale, a liistory ; 2. (adj.) belonging to
the morning.
^VjA^yj itjat-t'fndq (v. cans.) to cause to grin,
^ll^l irj(n-m€tq (v. intr.) to laugh foolishly, to simper, to grin.
i^«3/J irdi (part of def. verb subs.) usually contracted to idi
[which see] " he was."
9M»ji^ irsa (Pot. Part, of def. verb subs.,prd. also Ua) " may be."
viJU;yi4^l irsh^in^-maJc (v. caus.) to cause to arrive up.
cLJUA^l irsh-mah (v. intr.) to arrive up, to arrive after.
jUjU;4] irgha-i-mdi (v. caus.) lit, to cause to swing ; [usuaUy]

to shove, push or shake.
-^Uili^el irgha-'fi-mii (v. refl.) to swing or move one's self.
^yiy) irghu-t-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to leap over. [lation.

^IJijiji) irghu^'sh-mdq (v. colL) to leap together, to leap in emu-
(^yfiji} irghu-mdq (v. tr.) to leap over, to jump.
^ji) irha (adj.) pet, favourite.
JSji) ir-gach (vl. adj.) having been (from ir^mah).
^U^j^Litf^I irgash-tur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to follow.

iJ'^^Kji'i irgash-mah (v. tr.) to foUow of one's owa accord ; to join

or attach one's self to.

u-T'^l erJcaJc (adj.) male.
liJUjSK^) irha-la-t'tnak (v. caus.) to cause to favour.
sjj\^%y) irha^la"' sh-mah (v. recip.) to favour one another.
i^USIf^l irha^la^mak (v. tr.) to pet, to favour [see irka],
^*JUif^Ji] irka-la-'n-mak (v. pass.) to be petted, or favoured.

J^j^ irkan or c;^ ikan (Indef. Part, of defect, verb subs.
irmak) lit. "being", "having been". Commonly used
for the copula "is". Gives a dubitative sense when
joined to other verbs. See Grammar.
^y) erakta (subs.) husband.
CSH^^' erkit (subs.) sour butter-milk.
wUUji^il trk-il-mak (v. pass.) to be strained [as any watery stuff

through a cloth].

1878.] of Eastern TurhiMn. 83

^jifj*) irhin or ^^H^t ihin same as irhtm.
^*f^jv irhin (adj.) wide, broad, extended.
^^UiluJ^I irkin-ia-^sh-mak (v. reeip.) to be reciprocallj at ease ; to

hare room between one another.
xUiftMji] irkin-la-mak (v. intr.) to be at ease, not tightened for

epace ; to hare room.
^/•^^I ir-mas (Neg. form of irur, the Continuative Part, of defec-
tive verb subs.) pronounced usually imas, " not being/'
" is not."
i}^jV air-mdq (v. tr.) to divide, to separate.
^— ^^^) irfnak (Infinitive of the defective verb substantive, not

common in this fonn,) to be.
^1^1 irmak (subs.) any trifling occupation.
(JJUm»1>1.^) irmah'la^th-mak (v. recip.) to trifle with one another.
i^LtUL^I irmak-la-mai (v. intr.) to trifle.

Ji}^ ir-ur (Continuative Part, of ir-maky not common) being ;

alao is.
^^1 iriin (subs.) lip.
u/U>2;£l irun-mak (v. tr.) to dislike doing (P to put up one's lip at),
to procrastinate.
KlX.Xy^yj») irOn-Ush-kak (adj.) procrastinating habitually.
^Uty^l irun-Ush-mak (v. coll.) to procrastinate together.
^j[;it airi Csubs.) a pitch-fork.
i^Ua^I iri-Umak (v. cans.) to melt (trans.) [lit. ** to cause to be
in a melted state" from iri-mak]. {mak"]*

^L«;yLnJ^I irith'tur-fnak (v. cans.) to cause to arrive up [from irieh-
i^UJmj^I irish-mak (v. intr.) 1. to arrive up, [same as irsk-fnak] ;

2. to melt together [recip. form of iri-mak'],
i^UiX^l irik-la^mak (v. tr.) to sort out or select the largest, [nuyer.'*
c/U^i) irik'fnak (v. intr.) to be weary (not with hard work), " s'en-
jUl^T air-H-rndq (v. pass.) to be divided [from air-migf],
• l^^sjJ^) inr-il-ish (vl. subs.) divarication, place where waters &o.
separate into several channels or courses. [another.

^U^jJb^T atr-il-i^k-nidq (v. pass, recip.) to be divided from one
6

84 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

<— -^^/^' tri-mak (y. intr.) to melt, to become melted.

^hj^ji^ irimchik (subs.) cream-cheese.

^J^ irin (subs.) lip.

^ •l^ if^'Chak (adj.) procrastinating, lazy. [mak).

^^^^^i;i^ irin-mak (v. intr.) to be lazy, to procrastinate (see frtm-

ji^ iz (subs.) track, trace, foot-track.

^ Jy^J^) iz-ghur-ntdq (v. intr.) to whislle.
jSji) izgu (adj.) good.

^^'^jrj^ izgu-lik (subs.) goodness.
%mmf^'ijV tZ'la-mak (y. tr.) to track, to follow the traces^
^ji) tzma (adj.) talkatiye. Eh.
^j^ izntak (subs.) braid, edging (of robes).
c-Tv^l iz-mak (y. tr.) to rub up in water, to dissoWe (tr.).
l/il iza (subs.) reproof, molestation, P.
c-TUil^l izla-t-mak (y. cans.) to cause to search.
uJ^ Wa>)^| ufla^^sh^ak (y. recip.) to search in eompanj.
w^^wl izla-mak (y, tr.) to search.
I— Tuiyjil iz^ii^^nak 1. (y. pass.) to be dissolyed as in water ; 2. (t.
intr.) to gossip, to chatter (see izma).
^j>*^ U (subs.) smell, aroma ; aUo the sickness &e., caused by
rarity of the air at high eleyations ; memory, reoollec«
tion, understanding. [smoke.

\jHf (us) u (subs.) grime, the dirt formed on walls, &c., by
tt^^' Uan (adj.) safe, well, Kaz. Eh.
u-TU-JbUol itan-la^^sh-mak (y. recip.) to ask mutually after one

another's welfare.
^^Lti^' isan-lik (subs.) safety, welfare.
i^Uiliiw^I ig^a^t^mak (y. cans.) to cause to search.
iiJUilLwl itfa^'sh-mak (y. recip.) to search together.
iiJUU^I uta-mak (y. tr.) to search for.
vIJUjU-h^I Uka^t-fnak (y. cans ) to cause to smell.
i^JUAICmoI Uka^'sh-mak (y. recip.) to smell (tr.) together.
^1^1 iskak (subs.) a pair of tweezers.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 35

iiJUK-iul Uka-mak (v. tr.) to wneD, to snuff.
^U«l<Mj) (iK*) iS'la-rndq (v. tr.) to make grimy with smoke.
Kl)\j»tmj] tB-la-^nak (v. intr.) to suffer from the rarity of the air.
wVJJUol U'la-^n-mak (v. refl.) to smell (intr.), to gire out an odour.
^wXms^/ C««) is-la-^n-rndq (v. pass.) to be made grimy with smoke ;
to become grimy.
UXaaaj) interna (subs.) fever, feverishuess.

^Uj^l isui^rndq (t. caus.) to cause to be hot, to heat. (From
primitive in-mak of issik *^ hot.")
sijmi) uargha (subs.) ear-ring.
\±)\u^J0m>^ isar-mah (v. intr.) to become drunk, tipsy.
^^Uol iaaruk (adj.) drunken, tipsy.

"^1 iski (adj.) old, worn out, Kh., Kaz. ; and tlience, '' bad*' (in
which meaning chiefly it is used in Eastern Turkist&n).
"^1 iS'lik (adj.) intelligent, sharp [from is],
"{I ish (subs.) work, labour, deed, business.

^^f Uh (subs.) a companion, comrade. (Possibly the origin of
the verbal affix of reciprocity " mA.")
wtM^I eshak (subs.) donkey, ass.
^^B^^iiJ^-^' eehak'munjdq (subs.) common glass beads [lit. " donkey

beads," i, e, second-rate ones. Conf. "donkey-engine"].
^VMj[l eshdn (subs.) a title applied in Turkist&n to religious
teachers [ P the P. eshdn s « they ;" the PI being
used as a mark of respect ; or else from following series].
^cK^^-M^I ishdn-ji (subs.) a confidential person, one in whom con-
fidence is felt.
j^l^jdilM^I isMn-dur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to put confidence in, to

cause to believe.
^Ui^M^I ishdn-mdq (v. tr.) to put confidence in, to believe, Kh., Kaz.
(»j UI^I ishiUmak (v. tr.) to hear.
K^ \j»jy^lM^i] ishiUtur-mak (v caus.) to cause to hear, to relate.
s±jSJLi] ishkak (subs.) a paddle [from ishmakl.
v£X^^I ishik (subs.) a door, a gate.
UJwlAjl ish'la-t-mak (v, caus ) to cause to work.

86 R. B. Shaw— -4 Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

i£iUX^I Uh-U-mak (t. tr.) to work [from uK\.
jU^I UKqdr (sabs.) potaah.
^UM^^A&«n>) Uhgtr-iih-rndq (t. recip.) to whistle to one another.
4J ^^;;4*^l uhqiT'mdq (t. intr.) to whistle,
^fl^^l ishkali (subs.) a horse hobble.

uLK^^I ish-mak (v. tr.) 1. to twist or plait ; 2. to paddle.
^^^6^' tshii^mak (v. tr.) to hear.

^^^k^^ UUUmah (v. pass.) 1. to be heard ; aho 2. [MA-tV-mai] to
be twisted, or to be plaited.

jy^J aighur (subs.) an entire horse, a stallion.
v£JU>l iJtak (subs.) a file (instrument for filing).

^J^ ikan (Indefinite F^. of defective verb (i(f)¥nah) '' being

or haviDg been", ueed ae copula ** is.*'
^1^1 ikao (num. subs.) both.
s^yH^ ikaolan (num. subs.) both.
^JVH^ ikaUan (num. subs.) both.
^^^I fW (num.) two.
^/i^i^l iki'din (adv. expr.) bj twos \hir'din iki-dm = by ones

and twos].
^^r^^ 1* iki-^nehi (num. adj.) second ; 2. ikin-ehi (subs.) a culti-
vator [see ikin],
(s/ft^l ikin 1. (part.) see ikan ; 2. (subs.) a young crop.

^i^/iji^iji^^ »*»n hirin (adv. ezpr.) by twos and ones.
^1 iga (subs.) master, owner, aUo husband.
^^'^I iga-chi (subs.) elder sister.

J^^ igar (subs.) saddle,
w^l igak (subs.) a file. [own*

v^UyXI iga^ta-mak (v. tr.) to become master of, to rule or govern, to
u-TUiJlXjl iga-la^^n-mak (v. refl.) to make one's self master of ; aho

(spec.) to frequent, to haunt.
^^1 igao (subs.) a file,
w^l ig-mak (v. tr.) to bend.
*^^ igna (subs.) a needle.

1678.] ofHastem Turkisidn, 87

\£)\^j^ iffir-mai (t. tr.) to spin.

y^) igi» (adj.) high, tall ; aUo deep«
^^jtP^ igin (suhs.) a young crop [see ikin].
^i^l igin (subs.) clothes, clothing,
^^ ^' igin-chi (subs.) a cultivator [see 1st igin\.
s2j\A^) ig^iUmak (t. pass.) to be bent.

tk' Hi 1* (subs.) a country (vide JRemf9i-«/ta=The country of
Roum) ; 2. (adj.) allied, in alliance.

iJjT (HI (subs.) a g^h.

^ * oUa (subs.) elder sister ; also an old woman.
^^^' ildt (subs.) any nomad tribe.
^U^Ll iJa^t^mak (v. cans.) to cause to sift.

c/ U^X^I ilaJgh-^nak (v. recip.) to sift in company [also used in

Yarkand for irgaah-mak'].
w^^l ila-mak (v. tr.) 1. to sift, to pass through a sieve ; 2. to

mix dough; 8. to tan (leather).
^UXjI aUa-^nak (v. tr.) to make, to do.
^j^\ ildn (subs.) a serpent, a snake.
wv^j«^^l atUm-dur-mak (v. cans.) to cause to turn.

VilA«^^T dilaiumak (v. intr.) to turn (of itself), to be turned.
{jjit^jit^ aUan-usk-mak (v. recip.) to turn together.

wlA*^l ilt-mak (v. tr.) to take away (chiefly used in comp. as

iitip hirmak " to take away and give)."
v^A*^i ilt'tnak (v. intr.) to become dizzy through smoking, &c.
^,^^1 f7-(?A» (subs.) an Ambassador, a negotiator [fromi/^'aUied'*] ;
ako (prop, name) the capital of Khotan.
j»)«^' ildam (adv.) quickly.
^^UiUbl ilgha'*f-mdq (v. cans.) to cause to sort.

J^t iUghar (subs.) a frontier station of troops, an advanced
guard, a raid.
^ImULI ilgho'^sh-rndq (v, recip.) to sort together.
0^^**i' H-gha-fndq (v. tr.) to sort by hand, to pick out, to search, to
investigate ; (intr.) to advance, to attack; to make a raid.

33 R. B. ^hvim— A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^UiUbl iigha-^n^rndq (v. refl.) to sort themflelres,
^^1 ilqi (subs.) a troop of horses, a stud.
\,Sf^ i^['Chi (subs.) a guardian of a troop of horses.
^^"Vy^ «' it-iO'^Bh'iur'inak (y.ieci'p. caus.) to cause alliance between,

to mediate.
iiJt&lbl il-ia^^sh-mak (r. recip.) to enter into alliance together
[fromf7"amed"].
i}*V iliq (adj.) warm.

\Sj^ fi-yor* (adv. and p. p.) in front, formerly ; dUoy before

(goTems n^ative). •

iiJUJ^I il^mak (v. tr.) to hang up (as on a peg), to hitoh into.
A*^l ilma (subs.) a particular stitch, '' chain-stitch."
uXaI^) ilih (subfi.) 1. a hand [unusual in Yarkand] ; 2. marrow.
^IJ^>£Amj|| ilih hoUrndq (comp. verb) to go security.

^^Mi' iilik (num.) fifty [ ? conn, with ilik "hand"].
i^UJjJjl iUin-mak (v. pass.) to be hung up.
^^W ifnas (part of defective verb subs.) " is not" [for ir-mas],
oW^ aimdq (subs.) a tribe, the descendants of a particular person ;
aUo (prop, n.) a tribe near HedLt.

iiSJUiUi) imdn-mak (v. intr.) to be respectful, to show respect,
ijjls^l imehah (subs.) a woman's breast.
^|«AiW*il imehak'dash (subs.) a fosjber brother or sister [lit. breast

companion],
^fg:*^) Un-chi (subs.) an empiric, a quack.

1^*^ im-di (conj.) now.

%JiJ\i^] im-gak (verb, subs.) excessive labour and weariness con-
sequent thereon, trouble, difficulty [from obs. prim, im-
ga-mak'},
uJ^UitX^^) (tn-ga^n-mak (v. refl.) to be wearied with excessive labour

of any kind.
vfjU^V'^l im-la-t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to treat empirically.
i^J^^^T im-ia'^ah-mak (v. recip.) to make signals to one-another

by nodding or winking. [doctor.

s^^t^ im-la-mak (v. tr.) to treat empirically, to act as a quack

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn. 39

lilJ^^' im-la-mai (y. ir.) to make signs by nodding or winking to

any-one.

iJJUaji im^fnak (t. tr.) to suck [the breast, as an infant].
^^t^i^| im-uk-dash (subs.) a foster brother or sister.

w^^^yi*dl im'tz-mak (t. cans.) to cause to suck, to give an infant

the breast. [infant.

^— ^)4^' im-iZ'Uk (subs.) a contrivance for artificially feeding an
U^4^' imish [part of defective verb subs.] " it is understood to be."
cTUm^I ifn^i^^fnak (v. recip.) to suck together from the same
, breast [of foster brothers, &o.].

^^ in (subs.) width, breadth.
^1 ina (subs.) mother, EiJS.
W' ina (subs.) needle, Kaz.
O^' inds (subs.) a confidential servant.
\mmf^J itnak (subs.) a cow.

A^Uj) ina^a (subs.) a nurse (of children).
^UiU^I inan-mdq (v. intr.) to believe, to trust [governs ffha],
^j^' inji (subs ) a pearl.
*i^i^^' injiffa (adj.) fine (as opposed to coarse).
KmjUM,]oXi) inda-^sh^mai (v. recip.) to beckon to one another.
^ ^^*^] inda^mak (v. tr.) to beckon, to summon.
v-xuT atnah (subs.) eye-glass, spectacles, P.
•-^^1 ingah (subs.) chin.

J^J ingan (subs.) a female camel.
0^r*4' (Rnu-Urndq (v. cans.) 1. to cause to fade, Ac. ; 2. to cause

to become sober.
jU^yjl ilmu-^Bh-rndq^ (v. recip.) 1. to fade, Ac. together ; 2. to

become sober together.
Cr^y^^ d^nu-mdq (v. intr.) to fade, to lose colour or flavour.
iy^jH^ dinu-mdq (v. intr.) to become sober.
^.fS' ini (subs.) a younger brother, Kh.

uf!^' atwdn (subs.) a veranda, a colonnade, P.
^T dyu (subs.) a bear, Kaz.

O^ C^ ' ^y*yA dyiq (subs.) a bear.

40 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

4-^1 iyiJc (subs.) a distaff.
^^^^^i^igifnah (v. intr.) to become soft, to relax (as a man's
wrath, or the udders of a cow when the oalf is put to her
previous to milking) ELiz.

W^ hdhd (subs.) father, or grandfather (used in the former

sense chiefly by children, like our " papa"). «

^^^ habhq^ (subs.) father or grandfather ; also child. [trate.

^UJb hdt-mdq (v. intr.) to sink (as the feet in mud) ; aUo to pene-

)y^, bdtur (subs, and adj.) a brave man ; brave [corr. of *^ bahi-

dur," P.].

(Sjr^ hdtuq (subs, and adj.) ground where the feet sink, a quag-
mire (applied also to deep sand).
^-V hdja (subs.) the husband of one's wife's sister.
^U^lUsA^b hakhsh-la-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to give to one another, P. T.
^L«lUs^b hahhsh'la-mdq (v. tr.) to give, to grant, to forgive, P. T.
^j^'^^y hakhihi (subs.) a strolling minstrel, an inspired bard (pre-
tending to receive inspiration from supernatural be-
ings) ; also a hunter.
^W hhr prd. generally hh (subs.) existence, being, presence,
(cf. Qerm. dasein) ; also that which exists ; (adj.) ex-
istent, being, present. When apparentlg used as a verb
it may he translated '^ there is" (Germ, es gilt) . Thus
hakim bar = * there is a Governor' (a Governor exists),
whereas hakim dur or hakim ikon would be " (he) is
Governor."* Ba^ is an attribute in itself ; dur or ikon

* There is the same distinction in the Tibetan and Burmese languages. In the
former yod-pa or dug^pa means " to exist," " to be found at a place," while zin-pa is the
mere means of connecting the attribute with its subject [Jaeschke's Tibetan Gram.
§ 89]. Again in Burmese «AI-^AI is the real verb substantiye denoting concrete ezistenoe,
while ^pyi{8)'thl is a copula denoting connection of some sort between a subject and an
attribute : thus myin thi-thi « '* th^r^ i$ a horse," while mym 'pyHtytht » « (it) U
a horse."

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 41

is the mere means of comiecting a subject with an
attribute. [JBar is never really a verb, although it might
appear so from certain uses of it. E. g. at har would
be translated '* there is a horse ;" but in reality this is a
phrase in the common Turki form, like at chtmg '* the
horse (is) big" — ^where the copula is wanting. Thus
ut bar is literally " the horse (is) existent." Bar is
never a copula, being itself an attribute. And it does
not contain the copula, any more than any other
adjective used in a similar way. The copula is sous^
entendu. The use of har for our verb " to have" is
another case of the above ; e. g. maning at-im bar
=> " my horse (is) existent," i. e. I have a horse.
Here " my horse" is the subject and " existence" is the
attribute ; and there is no verb expressed. The subject
and atlaibute are merely connected by collocation as in
other cases. Even with pronouns and seeming auxiliary
verbs, bar is merely an adjective : e. g. bhr-man " I
(am) existent" is like hichih man " I (am) small" ;
4iheJch bar idi " a shekh was existent" is like shekh pir
idi ^ the sh^kh was old*' (in the Past tense the copula
of that tense is introduced, in both cases). Thus it is
merely as a memoria technica that bar can be said to
correspond with the English " there is." It really
corresponds better with the " there" of that expression.
Its use as an unmistakable substantive or adjective
requires no explanation : e. g. bcir-i-ni tutti " what-
there-was of -his he took ;" ahUim bar ui " the house
where my wife is present" (an elliptical expression).
These remarks may be generalised. What bar still is, all
Turki verbs seem formerly to have been, and even now
are in their essence. Unlike bar they are affected by
certain agglutinated syllables which make of them
separate substantives or adjectives connected with
difEerent^tenses or modes of action Ac. But like bar
6

42 B. B. Shaw— ui Fooahulafy of the Language [Extra No. for

they aQ require a copula to be understood. It might
almost be said, paradox as it seems, that there are no
verbs in Turki, only substantives and adjectives. At any
rate in external form there is no difference between the
application of a noun of action (or suffering, or con-
dition) and any other attribute. Take as an example
any verb-tense (so-called) : e. g. qelur-man. This, as it
stands, is " continuously-doing I," where a copula, men-
tally supplied, is necessary to make this signify " I (am)
continuously doing.'* So with other tenses. But it
may be thought that the auxiliaries which are some-
times used as copulas, must be true verbs. On the con-
trary dur is an adjective meaning '* continuously stand-
ing'' ; ikan is an adjective, " indefinitely being" ; trur
is a substantive or adjective " continuously doing*' ;
irdi is a substantive in the possessed form of the
8d. pers. sing, (ird-im, ird^ng^ ird-i are as r^ular sub-
stantive formations as at-itn, aiding, iU-i " my horse,"
^ thy horse**, " his horse**, and mean literally '^ my
past-being'*, " thy past-being*', " his past-being"). In
no part of the so-called verb do we find an expression
which is itself a statement without requiring a copula to
be mentally supplied ; and no where do we find such a
copula to supply in the last instance. It does not exist.
Collocation is the only true copula in Turki. A so-
called verb is only an attribute attached to a subject
under the rules applicable to substantives and adjectives.
The fact of its being an attribute of action, or suffering,
or condition, makes its form of application differ in no
way from that of any other substantive or adjective.
Urup'tnan '* I (have) struck (having-completed-striking
I)** does not differ in form from hichih man " I (am)
small", nor qelghu^tn-har ^* I have to do (future-doing
of -mine existent}" from at-im bar " I have a horse
(horse of-mine existent)."]

1878.] of Eastern TurhUtdn. 43

^JM Hir-eUh (adv. and pron.) wholly, aUo all, the whole. {Lit.
' to the amount of what there is' : from bar wh. s.^ and

cA«A "extent").
C/>^n hdr9 (snbs.) an ounce, " white leopard'* (so called).
cJ^W harghdq (suhs.) a receipt or discharge in full given hy the
officials for Govenmient demands which have heen paid
(in kind).

(^/^ hdr-liq (suhs.) existence, heing ; (also adj.) possessing pro-
perty, [from hdvy see ahove].
tJ^W hdr-mdq (v. intr.) to go.
J^-*;vj Idrmdq (suhs.) a finger.
^U;U^b hdsh'hdrmdq * the head finger,' * the thumV (also 5a*A-

maldaq) ; eshak-qoi, lit. * donkey hand,' the 1st finger ;
oira^qol, lit., middle hand, ' the middle finger ;' ifdn qol,
lit. side hand, ^ the ring finger ;' ehimchilak * the little
finger.'
L9jji*tXj lasturma (subs.) a shed.

O^jy^^' boS'tttr-rndq (v. tr.) to cause to tread [see has-nidq],
(jjjji^^ hastur-uq (verb, subs.) a pole tied across a loose load to

keep it together by pressure [from hag-tur-rndq],
^^IamIj haaqan (subs.) a sledge-hammer. [press").

Ot^^W hasqun (subs.) a night-mare, (connected with hasmdq " to
^•4<^W hasma (adj.) impressed, stamped, printed ; (subs.) printed

calico, print.
^j'-k^W has-mdq (v. tr.) to press, impress, print, stamp ; aho to

tread, to tread out (as com).

(3Vy^^* ^^^'^^ (subs.) an instrument for using pressure [see
hagturuq'], a press.

(^y*^, hat'Uq (verb, adj.) oppressed, humble, meek, quiet.
JH^W hcMtiq — the same,
yj^^ hdsh (subs.) head, aho chief, also the first.
*^y hdsha (subs.) a sparrow-hawk.
<3^W bdshdq (subs.) the iron point of an arrow.

41 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the L<mguage [Extra No. for

^Lku.b IdahMq (subs.) the halter for tying up a oow <fi;c.^ [from hdtik
and IdgK-la-rndq,"] [break.

k.ylih, hdsh-fukhi (subs.) lit.y first cock, f. e. cock-crow^ daj-
ar*lj hdsh-chi (subs.) a leader or guide.
la^W hdshqa (adj.) separate, other.
^USlyttf Idsh-ld't'indq (v. caus.) to cause to precede, guide.
^y^^tmKj Idsh-la-rndq (v. tr.) to precede, guide ; also to renew.
(JUit&Vj hdth-la^n-mdq (y. refl.) to guide one^s self.
^;iA^W hashlighin (adv.) leading, first.
^ljj|4^b bdsh-malddq (subs.) the thumb, the chief finger.
(3/^W bdihuq same as hdshdq,
^W hdshi [used in comp. to mean '^ a chief ;" origmaOy the
possessed form 3rd person, from hash, e, g. yuz-bdshi
for yuZ'ning Msh-iy lit. the head of a hundred].
^W Ugh (subs.) a garden, P. ; also a bundle of hay (or straw).

**^W hdgh-chah (subs.) a little garden, P. T.
j3USlfiv-> hdgh-U^-^t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to bind,
^U»*3bb Idgh-la-^sh-indq (v. recip.) to bind one-another, or to bind

in company.
Jfji^X^vf lAgh-la-^gh-liq (verb, adj.) bound, in a bound condition.
^UXiU bdgh'la-mdq (v. tr.) to bind.

^}iM^ hdgh-liq (subs.) wisp or rope with which a bundle or sheaf

is bound,
ji^y hdghir (subs.) liver (of an animal).
^j*^W hdghtsh (subs.) a joint or articulation.
(3^ u/^W haghish'la-mdq (v. tr.) to give, to grant, to forgive [corr.

from hakhshy P.].

O • bdq the same as bdgh,
^ bdqd (subs.) a frog.
^uU.vjL» hdqa-chandq (subs.) a tortoise {lit. " a frog in a hole**
from chandq = a hole].

J^^W baqqdl (subs.) a grocer, green-grocer, seller of uncooked
provisions. A.

1878.] ofJBaatem TurhUtdn. 46

(3 • • haqdlchdq (subs.) the pastern bones of a cow or sheep.
O^y^^ haq-iwr-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to look, to show.
^W hd^cha (subs.) the same as Mgh-^sha,

O^V hdq-mdq (v. tr.) to look, to inspect, to look after or take
care of ; to perceive with any of the senses.
^U.mJL»0 Mq^ish-rndq (v, recip.) to look at one another, to look at or
after (in company).
^j;4*V? hdqin (adj.) being fattened [corr. from hdqqan "which is
looked after"] used qf a sheep, ifc, ; also dependent
(of a man),
U)^^ hakdul (subs.) a cook.

'y hdla (subs.) a child, or the young of an animal.
*i^W^ hdla-barqa (subs.) children, family (including the women
of a household). Cf . Hind, hdl-hacha.
(3 • hdldq (subs.) the lower part (below the knee) of trousers.
^L«Jjb hdia-ta-rndq (v. tr.) to bring forth young.
(^f^^, hdlchiq (subs.) mud.
l3'*^W hdlddq (subs.) a mace or truncheon with a wrist-strap.

^S/b hdlqa (subs.) a hammer.
ji^ hdldir (adr.) before, first, formerly.
cPW hen (subs, and adj.) a rich man, a merchant ; also rich,
wealthy.

^V hdya (adv.) just now, lately.
^"^y^.hdyagU^
:^-^W hdyaqi, J ^"^^^ ^'^^^ *^™^'-

A^c^^ Jm-haohah (subs.) the son of a rich man, a person of

independent means, T. P.
Asi^^b hdli'hichali (subs.) the chief wife, the first wife, Kaz.
J^W hmtal (subs.) a mare over four years of age which has not

had a foal.
Q}^, Mir ah (subs.) the standard of a yuzbdshi or centurion,
ig^b halri (subs.) a square of any stufE; (piece-goods were
formerly sold by the squares of their width).

C^W h<Hri (adj.) old^ of long service (said of domesticated
animals).

46 B. B. Shaw-^^ Vocabulary ofils Lamguage [Extra No. for

^jiAj hdi^qugk (sube.) an owl [as if '* the rich or respectable
bird" {qu9h = bird)], Kaz.

ji^Si hauqiz (subs.) the same oi loii.
cJ^UJtlbl; hat-Uh-^sh-mak (t. recip.) ihe tame oi baghlasfamak, Eas.
v^Ulbli Idi'la-mak (t. tr.) tame as baghlamak, Eaz.
(jjk^ Mi-iuq (subs.) rich-ness ; aiao Kaz./ot bagh-liq.
^Ui^b hai-ut-rndq (v. caus.) to enrich, Kaz,
^Ut^b hai'U-mdq (v. intr.) to become rich, Eaz.
c*r UJJfc>J^ hahiUlaH-mah (v. caus.) to cause to remit or forgive, A. T.
v«.ru^1i„^^s^ hdhil'la-eh^mah (v. recip.) to remit to one-another, A. T.
v^U)|Jjks^ bahilJa-mak (v. tr.) to remit or forgive, A. T.
i^Oi^ hahil-Iiq (subs.) forgiveness.
jri iir (num.) one.
j^ji hirar (adv.) singly, one by one.
^l;^ hirao (subs.) a single one (as ' a pair' is said of two),
jj/j hwrrao (subs.) a gimlet, Eaz.
^)^ji hiraoJan (subs.) a single one, Eaz.
^tAj^ birallan (subs.) a single one.
^UJ^ hir-holmaq (v. intr.) to become of one accord, lit. to
become one. [place].

1^ hir-gd (adv.) together [probably from P. gdh = time or
5^ hirla (post-pos.) with (see hirlan),
OuJ^ htr-la-t-fnaJe (v. caus.) to cause to become one, to unite.
}^y, hirlan (post-pos.) with ; also by, through (a line or locality)
e. g. Kashqar yoli hirlan = by the Eashghar road, iehi
hirlan Utup = having passed through the interior of it.
Also used as a conjunction for and: e. g., dt hirlan dU
lih = horse and rider ; shahr hirlan tagh^ning ara^i-da
= between the town and the hill, lit. in the middle (or
interval) of the town and (with) the hilL (Probably
contr. from hir-dilan = a single one, and so ' in one/
' together.' See Gram. p. 70, N.B.).
\jf^y, hir-lanchi (num. adj.) first, foremost, Eaz.
^-^'ir? hir-la'sh'tnak (v. recip.) to become of one accord, tc^^ether.

1878.] (fEoHem TurJcistdn. 4i7

^ji htr-in-ji (num. adj.) first, foremost.
^ for j1^
^ ^J^^J^ htr-ik'tur-mak (v. cehb.) to canse to miite.
ymSKAMS^ bir-ik'tsh-mak (v. recip.) toimite together.
^^^^^^i/i hir-ik-mak (v. intr.) to become joined, to unite.
{ji/itAj*- Jir-wi hir-in (ad\r.) by ones, ednglj.
{jiri* ^jiji hir-in iki-^n (adv.) by ones and twos.
ji hiz (pron.) we.
o;ti«^ ( p for t;^-«J or for 0;t4I A.) used to mean a heavenly

revelation or command conveyed in a vision.
^L«X«j ha^h-la-rndq (v. tr.) to bind,
)jk> for y^
^ i^Z/a or ^7/a (adv.) together, in one.
'— ^'^ bilUzok (subs.) a wrist [derived from bulak, fore-arm, and
ozok = ring or hoop].

•■-^ bulak (subs.) fore-arm.
12^^ b&ldn or bildn, see birlan.

Oif^ balohiq, see cfJHT^^
^^ billm^k, see c^Ui;

^9\XJ ba-nhgah (adv. and conj.) suddenly, unawares, P. but used
for if perchance.
yi bu (pron.) this (short form of bul),
'J^ bHa (subs.) an old man.
^Ji buba (subs.) the same.
•^y^? bubak (subs.) father, grandfather.
^ bubi (subs.) a lady [for bibi],
'i bubieha (subs.) the same [antiquated].
^jfi bota (subs.) a young camel.
^^ butta (subs.) a small plant.
^^y^, b4dana (subs.) a quail.
^UAj«5^ budushqdq (subs.) a burr (which sticks in sheep's fleeces
or woollen clothes).
jyi bur (subs.) plaster, Kaz.

If^ bora (subs.) matting made of plaited reeds ; also woollen
sacking, yVom P.

48 E. B. Shaw— J Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^Ul;^ hwra-Umdq (y. cans.) to caofle (a person) to smelL
^Uyftl;^ hw^ah-miq (y. recip.) to smell in company.
*^jy. hurdgh (snbs.) scent, odonr, (from hura-ma^).
Jiby hurd^hy the eame.
*— n^y hiirak (subs.) kidney.

^Ul^^ bura-rndq (v. tr.) to smell (used of the person who per-
ceives the odour).
^^]jjj hura mdq (v. tr.) to wring.
<3^Vy hora-mdq (y. intr.) to blow or rage (as a storm).

^Jy*. hordn (subs.) a storm.
^"«V^ hurddqi (adj.) fattened, fed up.
V— ^^ hurk (subs.) a small cap.
i^TU^ti^^ hurha-^ah-maJo (v. recip.) to cover or veil one-another, Kaz.
\^\jti6jy, hurTca-mah (v. tr.) to veil, to muffle, to cover with a cloth,

Ejlz. •

V— TUiKj^ hurJsch^n-mai (v. refl.) to veil one's self.

^Jyi hurga (subs.) a flea. [poses].

oX^ hurgut (subs.) the golden eagle [used for sporting pur-

^jyt huma (adv.) anciently.
^U^ humdghi j ^^. ^ ^^^ ^^.^^^

^^jyt bumdqi )
*cy>jy^ hurut (subs.) moustache.
^jUAy^ hnruah-mak (v. recip.) to pucker, to gather (together)

[intr.). From an imaginary or obsolete primitive hur-
mak or huru-mah. [Kaz.]

J;J^ 6«*^ (subs.) the root of a kind of reed sometimes eaten
Ajjyt Hrug^ (subs.) command, order (corr. from hugwrug).
*^}Jf*. huru'k (subs.) a pucker, a gather.
^ Uijy^J huruk-mak (v. tr.) to blow water out of the mouth.

^iajy. iurun (subs.) nose. [preceding.)

u^;^ hurun (post.-pos.) before, previous to. (See the next.

\i)l>y. hurun (subs.) a surety, bail.

i^jy, hori (subs.) a wolf.

^jy. horid (subs.) reed-matting, P.

1878.] of Eastern TwrJcistdn. 49

Ji^ hbz (subs.) white cotton cloth.

Jy. h6z (adj.) grey (used of animals, also of distance or dawn)
])y, hoza (subs.) a weak intoxicating liquor made from various
grains, Kh.

^'>? huzaqh "]

^ * ^ y (subs.) a calf ( ? conn, with buz-la-mdq),

^)y^. huzao ^
^y.jy. loz-lugha (subs.) ginger, Kaz.
^yijyi hoZ'huqa^ the same, Kaz.
^j^V boZ'Chi (subs.) a weaver.

^>y^jy, huzghunj (subs.) a gallnut found on the pistachio tree,
used in dyeing, as a mordant. [camels <&c.).

^l^J^^ luz'la-'sh-mdq (v. recip.) to bellow in company (young
45^S,y huz-la-mdq (v. intr.) to bellow (as a young camel &c.).
i$^jyi huz-mdq (v. tr.) to ruin, to destroy, to lay waste, to spoil.
0)Jji huZ'Uq (v. adj.) deserted, ruinous ; aho abandoned or
wicked.
iJX^^T^ huZ'Uq-luq (subs.) ruinousness, abandonment ; also a desert

place. ■
^UJ^y huZ'Ui-mdq (v. pass.) to be ruined, to be laid waste, to
come to grief,
^y lu8 (subs.) steam, aho fog or mist.
SxImjJ losaghah (subs.) a threshold (for loM^gdh " the place of

kissing" P.).
j^U*u^ hoM-mah (v. tr.) 1. to burst ; 2. to shovel along earth, <fec.

with the hands.
iS^jyyi hos-ur-mdq (v. tr.) to weight, to put a weight on anything

to keep it down.
0)jy^y loS'Ur-uq (subs.) anything used for weighting down.
«^U[^^ Ids-ohmaJe (v. pass.) to be burst or split.

\^yt 168% (adj.) empty ; aho useless, vain (our " bosh").
^UJUt^ Idsk^H-rndq (v, cans.) to cause to be empty, to empty.
jUtUt^ Idsk-a'sh^mdq (v. recip.) to empty together, aho to ' dis-
charge' a laborious task.
7

60 B. B. Sbaw — A Vocabulary of ike Language [Extra No. for

jLtli^j hSeh-a^mdq (▼. intr.) to be empty, to have discbarged a

task or duty, to be tired.
^V4it&^ hSsh-a^n-rndq (v. refl.) to make one's-self empty or free
from a task, to acquit oneself, to discharge a duty.
\mmfy**Yi hSshuk (subs.) a cradle (either rocking or swinging from
the ceiling).
pyi hugh (subs.) an earthenware trumpet used for ^ving notice

that a mill is at leisure, or public baths are ready, P.
o^ hugh (subs.) steam.
J^y^ hughaz (subs.) com (considered as food for animals).
J^^ hughaz (subs.) a throat, also the axis of an upper mill-
stone where the orifice is.
J^^ hughaz (adj.) pregnant.
jIUVjlc^ hughaz- ia-^t-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to cut the throat.
^Vk-i^Vc^ hughaz'la-sh-mdq (v. recip.) to cut throats mutually, op

in company.
^K^tJ^yi hughaZ'la-mdq (v. tr.) to cut the throat, " ^gorger."
^f'^TJ hugh'Chi (subs.) a man who blows the hugh,
1^1 JbC^ hughda'i (subs.) wheat.

^^j)*^y. hugh-dur-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to seize by the throat.
jjfiji h^ghra (subs.) a male camel.
O^^y, hugh-mdq (v. tr.) to throttle, to strangle, to constrict the
throat of a bag, &c,
y^y. hughu (subs.) a stag (Gervus Maral),
Jyjri hughuZf the same as hughaz.
iS^^Jj^yi hughuz-la-rndq, see bughaz-la-mdq.
iS^yy hugh-ush-mdg (v. recip.) to throttle one another.
jUi^^ hughM-ff^q (▼. pass.) to be throttled or strangled ; to
have the throat constricted by anger (so as not to be
able to speak).
(y^y bughum (subs.

> a 1011

^ ]omt or articulation,
ttl^y hughun (subs.)

Cy hoq (subs.) excrement.

^y huqd (subs.) a bull

1878.] qfEagtem TurTcktdn. 51

«•
\^yJt huqeia (subs.) a bundle, any cloth used for wrapping up

a bundle.
^Uy; iuq-mdq (y. intr.) to be concealed behind anything, to lie

in ambush.
yy> huqu (subs.) the wooden framework of a plough.
^UJtyl^ huq-ush-rndq (y. recip.) to conceal oneself one from

another.
^Uiyl^ huq-un-mdq (v. refl.) to conceal oneself.
^y* huJs (subs.) a cap [contr. from burk'].
V^U^I^^ huhurat-mak (v. intr.) to stoop, to bend.
K^^j^y^ hdkw-mak (v. intr.) to moo as a cow.
viJUi^ luk'tnak (v. tr.) to soak any grain in water.
^^y, huk-mak (v. tr.) to hem, to sew the edge.

^5^y l^gan (adv.) to-day [from U " this" and kon "day]."
(jy. hul (pron.) this. [reconcile.

(J JJ^^y hoi-ash'tur-mdq (v. recip. cans.) to make peace between, to
^Wm.)^ hol-ctsh-maq (v. recip.) to be reconciled to one another
( ? reciprocal form of hoi-mdq, see holmhmaq),
u/ ^yi huUak (adj.) separate, other ; (subs.) a division, a detach-
ment [from hul-mak'],
s^mfy^^ 'iyi hiUak'la-t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to separate.
O^U^]bSjj hUl-ak-la-^sh-mak (v. recip.) to go asunder, to separate

from one another.
«^C«»y^ Idl-ak-la-mak (v. tr.) to divide, to separate, to disunite, to

parcel out.
i3^y huldq (subs.) a spring of water.
c3 V^ hula-maq (v. tr.) to stir up, to mix ; aho to rob.
ti'^J^ see v-/U^ [about."

ij'^'y, huldmiq (subs.) gruel, thick soup made with flour, " stir-

\iyfy hul(Vn (v. subs.) robbery, pillage.
K^^^y huld-'n-chi (subs.) a robber.
i^Uj)^^ huld^n-mak (v. refl.) to separate oneself; also to support

oneself, to rest upon (ikiuluph iagh-gha hulanip dur-miz
= " We rest upon two mighty mountains"),
ci'y hiUat (subs.) a whet-stone and touch-stone for gold, &c.

t

52 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

jy^yi huHur (adv.) last year, during last year,
^ff^^r? hultur-ghi (adj.) belonging to last year.

i^^ji huljdq (subs.) a rendezvous, a station for troops (see ^^^J
i} J}*^J^ boUdur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to become ; 9pec. to redace

a horse to bad condition.
^LJIa)^ hulgha-*t-fndq (v. caus.) to cause to stir.
^UmIIa)^ hulglta- sh-rndq (v. recip.) to stir one another.

! O^^.^ huigha-mdq (v. tr.) to stir round (as with a spoon) ; to spoil

(an affair).
^y, holqd (subs.) a small hammer.

iS^y* hol-mdq (v. intr.) to become, to be, also to be done or com-
pleted ; or conv. to have effected one's purpose ; (of a
horse) to be done up ; [in the future tenses] to suffice, to
subserve, to do, to be good, e. g, hola-dur, " it will do."

viJ^j^ hul-mak (v. tr.) to divide, to partition, to parcel out.
^^j^y-i hiilut (subs.) a cloud.
ij^jy^j^yi hoUush'tur-rndq (v. recip. caus.) to cause to be reconciled

to one another.
(jS^j^y^. hol-uth-rndq (v. recip.) to be reconciled to one another, lit*

to become (one) with one another.
KmS\A^j}jj hul-ush-maJc (v. recip.) to divide amongst one-auother.
fy^y^. bulum (subs.) strength, firmness ; (adj.) strong, firm.
LS^jiy lulung (subs.) a corner of any enclosed space.
XCr^y^Ti holun-mdq (pass, form of hol-mdq). To understand such

an impossible word as holun-maq " to be become'd" it
must be taken merely as the impersonal form (see Gram
p. 80, Syntax, § 14), like the French " on est devenu."
Thus kitdh-ni oquW holundi would be " one became
(on est devenu) about to read the book (the book was
about to be read)."
i^yi hd'i (subs.) height, stature, tallness, figure ; also length (as
of a river) ; also edge, margin ; (sometimes used for
the river or water-course itself).
^UJlj^ loga-t-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to dye.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn, 53

^W»u^ hoya-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to dye one another.

^ Ti hayd^gh (subs, and adj.) dye ; also dyed [from hoya-md^l.

^j^^ J^ bof^d^q-ehi (subs.) a dyer.
O^^J^ ^a-mdq (v. tr.) to dye.

0*^J^ haiddh (subs, and adj.) bachelor, unmarried, childless;
aUo (of a mare) not having foaled.
)jiy^, Jmra (subs.) a reed matting, P.
]jiyi huirak (subs.) kidneys, Kh.
^^'^iy, hSi'la-mdq (v. tr.) to measure height, to go over head and
ears into ; also to move along the length of any thing,
" longer" Fb. (from bS'i).
Ojky, ISi'luh (adj.) tall, long.

^^fiyi buy an (subs.) neck.

(^Jyiyi huyur-mdq (v. tr.) to command, to order; also used

respectfully instead of qehndq " to do" in compounds.

Also (the optative butfur-stm-lar) in inviting any one to

ait down, or to begin anything, like the Italian *' favo-

risca."

(3)Jyiy^ buywr-uq (subs.) a command, a " firmdn."
fjyiyi buyun (subs.) neck.
(Jhjy^rlyi buywn-tur-uq (subs.) a yoke, a horse-collar, [from buyun,

and verbal subs, (form /, see Gram, page 63) of verb
tur-mdq'].
^y bdyi (the definite or possessed form of bSi, which see).
''^ Bi (subs.) a head-man among the Kirghiz.
S^. UU (subs.) a lady, a woman (married).
I'AW bedd (subs.) lucerne grass (having purple flowers).
jl«J^ bedao (adj.) barren (used of women and mares) ; also of
mixed breed.
jy> bir (num.) one.
j]jXj birar (adv.) singly, in one.
viJUJtiH or ^^-*];W bir-ash-mah for bir-ish-mak (v. recip.) to

unite in giving.
c]/ii berdq (subs.) a small flag or standard.

54 I^* B. Sbaw — A Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^^, hirao (subs.) a single one.
1^ lirla (p. p.) with.
^^^jini hir-ia-Umak (y. caus.) to cause to become of one accord,

to reconcile, or bring together.
^ '^ hir-la-sh-mah {▼. recip.) to agpree together in one accord.
y^jbi hirlan (p. p.) with. See \i)iji
imJji-i hirh (adj.) firm, strong, fast.
SmmS^^^^j^, lirJc-it-mah (v. comp. tr.) to fasten, to make fast.
\»l}^^^j^, hirJcVt'fnah (v. caus.) to cause to be concealed.
uJ^'»"*t^^ lirJeVsh'tnak (v. recip.) to conceal one another; aUo

(hirk-ish-mak) to confirm one another.
^J'lJbi^i lirJc'iUmaJc (y. pass.) to be made fast.
^^^*^jiA hirki'n-fnak (v. refl.) to conceal one's self.
^mJ'^Ji^ hir-mak [Y. ber-mak] (v. tr.) to give ; [also much used in
composition with other verbs, as: kogup-hirmak 'to
give over' to burning, t. e. to bum, Cf. Hind, jald
dina. With the Present Participle of another verb it
implies beginning, e. g. junai hirdi " he began to go."
KSjii htri (adv.) on this side, on the hither side.
U-) UX^yXi hir-ik'tnak (v. intr.) to agree together, to become one.
jiii biz (pron.) we.

jbii biz (subs.) a gland (especially as found in meat).
Smmf^jti bizak (subs.) adornment, finery.

\^\Aj^]yu bezak-la-n-mak (v. refl.) to adorn oneself.
vUL«1d^ bSzak'la-mak (v. tr.) to adorn, to beautify.
w^»«^^/*^ beZ'dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to become wild.

«— ^^^ bezgak (subs.) fever and ague.
u1JI«xJb^ bez-galdak (subs.) a small black water-fowl, moor-hen.

J'jti biZ'lar (pron.) we [put into the plural form when several
people are spoken of, to distinguish it from the (self.)
respectful plural pronoun, bizy (we), used of a single
person].

ulJ^^ bez-mak (v. intr.) to become wild, to cease frequenting (a
^/H^ bish (num.) five. [place).

1878.] ofJEastem TurhUtdn. 65

j'^^ hish-ar (adv.) by fives.
i^S^^^ hSsh-inji (adj.) fifth.

ji^mjj ligJi^ao (sabs.) a group of five, a five.
^Jjl^ lishaolan (subs.) a five, all the five, Kh. Kaz.
^JbLMju lishallan (subs.) the same.
^4^ lisMh (subs.) a cradle.

f«*^ heqasam (subs.) a sort of striped silk stuff made in Bo-

kh^Lra, Khojand, Margilan, &c.

i-*l

'— ^i:? hek (adv.) strongly, very [for hirk],

^"•fy. Beg (subs.) a chief, a governor.
^i^jJ^s^ Ug^oUMk (subs.) rule, chieftainship,
vi^ u^ Uglik (adj ) belonging to the chief.

g^ lehach (subs.) the daughter of a Beg, or notable, Kaz.
(^ Jcytm (subs.) the wife of a Beg [also heg-im " my ^^%^'\
*HW lehak (subs.) ike same a% b^kach, Kaz.
viJUIj^ lik-iUmah (v. caus.)/(w birkitmak, wAwA see.

jin^ bigiz (subs.) an awl.
ijJ^diXiJ lik-iUtnak (v. pass.) for birkilmak.
viJ'-^-H^ hik'in-maJe (v. refl.) for birkinmak.
C>^ ^»7 (subs.) a man*s waist.
v^ lei (subs.) a shovel, P.

^^j^i lilazuh (subs.) the wrist ; also a wristlet, a bracelet, a
handcuff, \see cTijJ^].
viJ*4^ Ulah (subs.) a man's fore-arm.
w^'W hila-t-mah (v. cans.) to cause to sharpen.
cJJUAIUj Ula-'sh-mah (v. recip.) to sharpen in company,
•^^'if hila-mah (v. tr.) to sharpen, to whet.
sifl^. hilan (post-pos.) with [same as hir-lan].
j:!^i'i hilaor (subs.) crystal, P.

^*W hilao "^

„ > (subs.) a whet-stone, a hone.

Sr^**^ hilai )

^MW hiUhdgh ") (subs.) a girdle, a waist-band, a waist-sash

,>jl« UUUq \ Prom 5»7 and hdgh-la^maq}.

^^J)"^. Ul-dur^mah (v. caus.) to cause to know, to explain.

56 E. 6. Shaw — A Vocabulary qfihe Language [Extra No. for

^UJl&UjJli^ hUqilda-Urndg (y. cans.) to cause to quake.
^3UA|jU3kj lilqilda-^sh-rndg (v. recip.) to quake together.
^^•I^MaaUj hiiqildd'fndq (v. intr.) to quake [as a bog or a moss].
Jf |4XUaU> liJqilddq (subs.) a quaking bog ; aUo a kind of red com-
position used for rings, buttons, &c., which gives to th
touch.
jOii hiUgu (vl. subs.) a mark, an indication, a badge [the future
participle of hil-mdk'\,
w^*«^ hiUmak (v. tr.) to know, to understand ; aUo to think.

^ hillah (adv.) together, in company.
aIjj hilah (post-pos.) with.
C^^*i^ hiUih (y1. subs.) knowledge ; aUo wisdom, [from hiUmak'],
i,^jL[u,\>lii hil-iJC'lih (yl. adj.) knowing, acquainted with [from hiU

maJc],
CJ^H^ hiyuJc (adj.) high, elevated, Kh. Kaz.
^jH^ htyah (subs.) a mare which has a foal.

V

^^^ jpapi (subs.) a deformed dwarf whose head and trunk are
of natural size.
*s^^ pdt (adv.) quickly [also/a^].
^jJUb pataqi (subs.) a percussion cap, P.
^I^Vj pat-rdq (adv.) more quickly.

^IfiJb patqdq (subs, and adj.) a quagmire ; also muddy, miry.
^Ulj patman (subs.) a weight of 64 chdraks,
^Kxi\j patingan (subs.) a vegetable, the "brinjal."

c5y^ patuJe )

> (subs, and adj.) a quagmire ; miry.

^^ pdolia (subs.) the leg below the knee.

C^V"^ p^^^g (subs.) the leg- of an animal,
(j^^ paehdq ' (subs, and adj.) a dent in a metal kettle or sauce-
pan ; also dented.
^^^ pakhta (subs.) cotton-wool (cleaned of seeds).

1878.] of Eastern Twrhisidn. 67

cJg^ij pakhtak (subs.) a doyQyJrom P.
1;^ pdra (subs.) a bribe, P.

U-Tl^^^ljb pdra-hirmak (v, comp.) to bribe.
«— ^^^b^ pdra-yimak (y. comp.) to be bribed, lit to eat bribes.

^M poreha (sabs.) a piece, P.
^UjIIW;^ pareha-la-UmAq^ (v. tr.) to cause to put in pieces.
^U&yi*.^«b parcha-lO'^sh'fndq (v. recip.) to sub-divide together.
i^'^/i porcha-lO'mdq^ (v. tr.) to put in pieces, to sub-divide.

^ />a^a (subs.) a frog (see haha).
O^^ V P^^ct-ehandq^ (subs.) a tortoise (see laqa-chandqY
O^T^^ paqciichdq, the same ae baqalcbaq.
« P^qta, the same ae pakhta.
ijJ^ pak (adj.) clean, P.
iiJUaib phk4a^'n^mak (v. refl.) to clean one's self, P. T.
viAUltSb pdh.la.fnak (v. tr.) to clean, P. T.
^^ pahi (subs.) a razor.
O^^ UT » paki-piehdq^ (subs.) a pen-knife.
^j**^ pdlas (subs.) wooUen matting.
cP^ pdl6n (subs.) a pack-saddle, P.
P^ palao (subs.) a dish of rice and meat, " pilaw," P.

>iJ^ pdldu )

^ly^ paiwdn (subs.) a strong man, an athlete, a wrestler ; also
a good sportsman ; [Jrom pahlw&n. P.]
jfUJ iAj pai.lo't'fndq (v. caus.) to cause to keep watch, to cause to

mount guard.
^U^ IbU pai'lash'indq (▼. recip.) to mount guard together.
^L«ltU pai.la.m6q (v. tr.) to mount guard.
i^^v paUai (subs.) a leather gauntlet for carrying hawks, <ftc.
^ pakhta^ see p&khta.
^ pukhta (adj.) experienced, careful, P.

J4/v portal (subs.) a horse ladea with personal necessaries, (? P.).
8

y^b pdltu I

(subs.) an axe, a hatchet.

K8 B. B. Sbaw— ^ Voeahulary of ike Language [Extra No. for

^j^ pas (adv.) behind ; aUo (adj.) for past, low, inferior,

mean, base, P.
iULwj pUta (subs.) a pistachio nut.

AJ^ pista (subs.) a terrier, a small Chinese pug, any small dog.
^-siMiJ pas'kanah (adj.) little and mean, base, dirty [past, with

diminutive affix Jkana or ghifM], P. T.
^ji^ paa-leunahy the tame as pas-kanah.
CiJ I/sImo pas'la-mak (v. tr.) to abate, to diminish, P. T.

v«/^ y^ pupuk (subs.) a tassel.

^c^ji ^ pupuk'Chi (subs.) a tassel-maker,
o^ put (subs.) leg, foot [also/u^].

O^yi P^^ (subs.) a branch, a twig. [write.

^^^J^ji pilt'tUr-mak (v. caus.) to cause to trust; 2, to cause to
^*^^ji piU-mah (v. tr.) to trust, to believe ; 2. to finish, to accom-
plish ; 8. also ioT piUmak (which see).
«— A«.A^^ piit-ush-mak (v. recip.) to trust one-another j 2. to write to

one another.

*— ' '^^^ putu-mak (v. tr.) to write [ior pit-mak^.
c2^^ P^i^ (^j-) complete, entire.

^ri P^^ (^JO onipty, without kernel ; stupid, empty-headed.
O ♦^ puchaq (subs.) the rind (of a fruit).
I— ^V*^^ pUehak (adj.) empty, without kernel (used of nuts, &c.).
O^^Ji puoJ^dq (subs.) the leg-skin of a fox, wolf, &c., of which
fur-robes are made.

Oy^^ P^ohuq (subs, and adj.) a noseless man ; noseless, snub-
nosed,
jwl^^ pukhra-t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to sneeze [used of flies

teasing a horse's nose].
^S^^lr^ji pukhra-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to sneeze together, [when the

horses of a Kazzak expedition do this it is considered a
bad omen].
^\a>]jLjj pukhra^mdq (v. intr.) to sneeze (used of a horse or camel).
j^ pur (adj.) rotten, unsound.
iSojjJ purddq (subs.) fat, Y.

1878.] qfHastem TuriUtdn. 69

i^^^yi P^^o^^ (subs.) peas.
^USlj^^^ jpurkhura-t'tndq, see pukhrai-mdq,
^UyXt j}^Jfi purkhura-^sh-rndq, eee pukhraah-mdq.
O^liy^Jri purkhura-mdqy see pukhra-mdq.

^^^ postak (subs.) a fur mat, P. T.

•• •

^•ji^yi postin (subs.) a fur robe, P.
^J*^^ poB'dumha (subs«) tbe fat of ike ** dumba*' sheep's tail
together with its skin (which is all eaten) [corr. from
post'i-dttmbay P.]

VJ**^ \J^yi poeh'posh (interj.) used in clearing the road for a great

man [ P ixom poshidan^ " to hide,"] P.
**^^J^ pushang (subs.) a lever [especially one used for raising a

mill-stone].
^jUMtjj puah-mdq (v. intr.) to be melancholy or disturbed in mind.
^^^^ji push-mak (v. intr.) to become cooked ; to ripen*
O^JT^Ti push-ttr-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to become melancholy, to
vex.

^*"^ ^Jy*yi pUsh'Ur-mah (v. cans.) to cause to become cooked, to cook

(tr.) ; to catise to ripen.
^\^jMy^ push-im-mdq (v. refl.) to vex one's self.

i3^ P^^ (subs.) excrement, dung.
t3^^ P^S^2 (s^bs.) a goitre.
**-^ puk (adj.) hollow, empty (used of fruit, Ac.).
i-J^U5|aljo^ pukHda^t-maJe (v. cans.) to cause to sound hollow (by

tapping or stamping, &c.)
w^Ulalji^ pukilda-mak (v. intr.) to soimd hollow, to give a hollow

sound.
iJX> pul (subs.) a copper coin [the fiftieth part of a tanga
which = 5 pence, about] ; also money in general, P.
i}r^yi pui-luq (adj.) costing money, dear, expensive ; possessed of
money, rich, P. T.

^^ pidlah (subs.) a cup, also vulg, u$edfor glass, vapidlah*
aina^ *^ looking-glass," P.

1^ pit (subs.) a louse.

so B. B. Shaw— ^ Voealmlary of the Lwngwige [Extra No. for

^m^jfj^ pii'iU'Ohi (y. subs.) a writer (luied only of the manual

labour of writing).
s^l^pit-mak (v. tr.) to write.
\—f^ jtjjuu piUiar'mak (▼. cans.) to cause to write.
slXt^Hi pit'ik (y. subs.) a writing.
^Wij piehaq (subs.) a knife (yl. subs, trompieh^mai).
v^Uriv piehak (subs.) a creeper, a plant which runs up trees and
dies down in winter.
^J^fH piehan (subs.) hay, any dried fodder.
i^J\Aj^s:ii pieh-tur-mak (y. cans.) to cause to cut out.
U.jij>acij pich-ish-mak (y. recip.) to cut out in company.

^i^ pieh-mak (y. tr.) to cut out any stuff to make a garment,
&c. ; to carye.
j pU (subs, and adj.) spotted with leprosy ; also of animals

with a similar appearance, Kh.
ij piidh (subs, and adj.) The same.
AH^ pega or peiga (subs.) a horse-race (generally oyer many

miles of distance).
*^^ piliah (subs.) the match of a match-lock gun, the cotton

wick of a candle or lamp, P.
^^*iti pilla (subs.) a cocoon (of the silk-worm).
*— ^yij pilik (subs.) a candle-wick.
^^i j^otman (subs.) a bushel, a measured (not weighed) quanti-
ty of grain, Ac. [see next].
^^^ pamanah (subs.) a bushel, a measure of capacity (yarying
in size), P.

W^ iaha (subs.) a flat iron pan for cooking, P.
<3^ tahdq (subs.) a dish, A.
el^^ tapan (subs.) the sole of the foot.
O^jyi^ tap'tur-rndq (y. caus.) to cause to find, to cause to produce.
^UA^U tc^p^ish-maq (y. recip.) to find one-another, to meet; to
marry one-another without the interyention of friends
or agents.

1878.] ofHagiem lh»rhiitdn. 61

JU;^U tdp,shur^miq (v. cans.) to cause to receive, viz. to entrust,

to put under any-one's cbaiger
i^y^^ thp^qu^Tii (subs.) a finder.

0^*e*J» tab^la^'UnAq (v. tr.) to cause to twist (cloth or rope), to
cause to wring.
^UaibU iah-la^'sh^maq (v. recip.) to twist ropes in company
[takes four men, three at one end to twist the strands,
and one man at the other end to twist the united rope].
jUXAI tah'la^miq (▼. tr.) to twist, to twine, to wring.

O^*^ tap-m^ (▼. intr.) to find, to meet with ; to receive, to

obtain.
K^^y^^ t^'Ush (v. subs.) findings, earnings, gain [from tc^p^maq]-
c5>i^ ^^-^ C"^- ^^^') ^JMiings (at play) [from thp^mdq),
3^7*}^ topu^n-miq (v. refl.) to worship [P from obsolete tapu-tnaq

" to serve"] quasi to serve by one's own life.
jUJlSU tata-la-rnhg (v. tr.) to scatch or tear with the nails or

claws.

4xliU tat4iyh^

^ > (adj.) tasty, savoury, sweet.

jitU tat-Uq )

^UoU idi'fnaq (v. tr.)ybr t^-mdq (which see).
J^tAxSU ti^t't't-miq (v. cans.) to cause to taste.
^ImjJU iai^i^^sh-miq (v, cans.) to taste together.
jUjJU tdi'i'fnaq (v. tr.) to taste.
jijy^ Li^^ iaf'i'khuraz (subs.) lit. a cock's comb : the name of a

plant, ( ? " Prince's feather"), corr. P.
*-ax^U TAjik (pr. name) the existing original Arian (Iranian)
population of Western Central Asia, and their language *
(opposed to Turk as * Arab is to 'AJam).
^^^ tahkta (subs.) a plank, a board, a shelf, P.
J^ tdr (adj.) tight, close, confined, narrow.
^3UjI;VS tara-t-maq (v. tr.) 1. Jbr tarqa-'-t-miq (which see).

2. To cause to comb [from tara-mctq'], Kaz.
jUAljU iara-'sh-miq (v. recip.) 1. Mr tarqa-'sh-miq, Zaz.
2. To comb one's hair together, or for one-another.

62 B. B. Shaw— ^ Voedbuhfj/ of the Language [Extra No. for

^]J^ tarMah (subs.) a chip, a shaving ; also a broad piece of

wood used for punishing people by the Chinese, P.
(3!;^ tdrdq (subs.) a comb.
^\J)JJ iara^*l^fndq (v. pass.). Mr tarqa-*l-ini^q, Kaz.

f]j^ iaram (subs.) a divarication, or branching off of one stream
into many (as in a broad flat bed or in a delta). [ ? The
name Tarim-gol for the Biver of Eastern Turkist&n may
be derived from this word, as it would express the
characteristic of that Biver better than the word tarim
= cultivated].

^jL«KU tara-maq (v. tr.). 1. Ibr tarqa-mi^, Kaz. 2. To
comb.

^1;^ taran (subs.) a root used in tanning.
^ac^NU tara-^nchi (subs.) 1. a cultivator ; 2. also the proper name

applied to the Turki colonists in the country of Ila
(Kulja), [from iari-maq],
Jyij^ tarhuz (subs.) a water-melon, P.
;^^U tdr-hughuz (subs.) a gorge, the entrance to a ravine ; lit.

" narrow-throat" (see the words).
^^U tarpi (subs.) carrion.
^U^U tart'ish-maq (v. recip.) to pull against one-another (to '' play
French and English").

^Uj;Ij tart-mag (v. tr.) to draw, to pull ; aUo to draw lines or
figures ; to draw out ; to lead out (an army) ; to weigh.
Cff^j^ tartuq (subs.) tribute ; the yearly ofiEerings made by a local
governor, &c. to his superior chief (so called because
drawn out, as it were, from the country),
obl^^ ^-^^ (*^i* comp.) narrower, more tight.
^UJlf^U tarqa-^t-miq (v. caus.) to cause to disperse.
^UmIj^VJ tarqa-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to scatter one's-selves apart, to

depart from one another.
^UJIJ)15 tarqa-^l-nAg (v. pass.) to be scattered.
^^tclS^U targ[a'mag (v. intr.) to disperse, to scatter.
O^J^ tar-lig (subs.) narrowness^ tightness.

1878.] of Eastern TwrhUtdn. 63

ijj^ tarigh ^millet.

^ij^ iariq

jf^^J^ tarWl'ffu (v. adj.) cultivable.

fij^ tarim (adj.) cultivated, that has been cultivated.

^U^^U tarumas (▼• tr.) to cultivate.

J^ tdz (subs.) scald-heady ' Impetigo capitis.'

1;^ tiza (adj.) fresh, new, in good condition, strong, P.

^}Ujij\j tdza-la'^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to renew, Ac.

^UorJj^'u tiza-la-^sh-mciq (v. recip.) to renew or mend, or clean, in
company.

{^^'J^ taza-la-maq (v. tr.) to renew, to mend, to strengthen,

c2^*^ thzghun (subs.) a stream, a flood. [Specially applied as

the proper name of a Eiver and district 14 miles south
of K&shghar.]

^j^ iazi (subs.) a greyhound, P.

yj^^ tdsh (subs.) a stone, (also a stone used for weighing), a mile-

stone [the distance indicated is also called san^f (=:stone,

P.) or farsakh, A. and is nominally 12,000 paces or

about 5 miles.]

^^ tish (subs, and adj.) the outside, outside.

ojyAMS tasha-yurt (comp. subs.) foreign ooimtry, lit, outside

country.
^\aS\j tcUh-q^'On (adv.) outside. [See Oram. p« 65 and ff.l
^2l^^^ taah-qun (subs.) a flood in a stream.
^USl&li tash'la^^t'tnaq (v. cans.) to cause to throw.
{jl^tS^j t^h-tO'^sh.maq (v. recip.) to throw at one another, to

throw together, to stone.
^L«]UU ttUh-la-mctq (v. tr.) 1. to throw, to throw away, met. to
abandon, to reject (qu. from taeh, a stone as a missile)
2. to put outside, viz.^ to line, to cover.
CJH^^ t&$h4iq (adj.) stony.
(^ir^^ taeh-Uq (subs.) the outer covering of a cap, or of a fur
robC; or of a mattrass; &c.

64 B. B. Shaw — A Voeabuktfy of (he Language [Extra No. for

^U^U tcah^mhq^ (▼. intr.) to overflow the brim, to boil over, to
surge over.

^JU ^U icuih-yani [short for iish-ning gan-t] (subs.) the outside.
^yxJSXi tash'iq (t1. subs.) an overflow, a boiling over, a flood.
^UjJLU iashi-m&q (v. tr.) to transport by repeated efforts, (as ants
carrying away grain).

C ^ y (subs.) a mountain, a mountain chain.

^^ tagha (subs.) a relation by the mother's side.
j\i\3 taghtr (subs.) a bag, a sack.
O^ taq (subs.) a single one, an odd number (opposed to jufty

P. «pwr"or"even").
USVJ faqa (subs.) a horse-shoe ; an odd article (out of pair).
^U^UI^ taqa-^sh-mdq (v. recip.) to strike or press against one-
another (qu. for toqush-tnaq which see) ; to oppress any
one with much talking, to bore.
^^ taqia (subs.) For takhta.
^L«jyu»U t^-tur-maq (▼. caus.) to cause to hang anything on to a
person or animal.
^^A> t^^eha (subs.) a shelf formed by a reeess in a wall.
jUSU taq-rnhq (v. tr.) to hang anything on to a person or animal,

(as a charm or a locket).
^yU iaqur (subs.) a desert whose soil is hard and smooth. Kaz.
^U^y U iaq-^ush-fnaq (v. recip.) to hang things on to one another'8
person.

i^U f^k (subs.) a Tine, Eh.
^^ taka (subs.) a buck goat, a buck antelope.
JW tdl (subs.) 1. a willow, Kh. ; 2. a vine ; 8. ( P for tar P.)
a single one of any long objects, e. g. (sy^ ^^ yt
" a single hwr," J^l JO^ " a single arrow."
)«3)U talada (adv.) out of doors.
J^J^ tdUtdl (adj.) bushy, full (used of a woman's hair, or a
horse's tail; or of fringe).

1878.] of Eastern TurTcUidn. 65

^U JU tala-U-maq (v. caus.) to cause to pillage.
Cr^jy^ JO tala-'sh'tur-maq (v. recip. caus.) to set a fighting (of dogs).
t5^* Ju tata-gh-maq (v. recip.) lit. to rob one-another, to fight
together (of dogs, &o.).
O^ J'^ tala-maq (v. tr.) to pillage, to rob ; to fight (of animals).

^)^ talon (subs.) pillage, a pillaging.
^UiSU tala-n^maq (y. pass.) to be pillaged.
j1^ to2<7o (subs.) a &tal illness of horses, Ejlz.
^Ui^^ taljpiln-mdq (y. intr.) to flutter, to struggle.

^UJU talqan (subs.) parched grain ground into flour. Hindi,
' tattu:
f^ t€tm (subs ) a walL
l}^^ tamaq (subs.) the throat ; also food (readj for eating).

A^^ tamhai^

> (subs.) trousers, drawers, P.

^U'^U tamhan)

^^^ tam-ehi (subs.) drippings, water oonng through the roof

and falling by drops.

f^^ tam-ehi (subs.) a wall-builder, a mason, [from tam^maq'],

^L^^iX^U tam-dur-maq (y. caus.) to cause to drip, to pour out bj

drops.
^U/oU famghrn (subs.) a branding iron.

^Im»U tam-maq (v. intr.) to drip, to fall by drops.

jy^ iamur (subs.) the pulse.

ijy*^ tamuq )

^UJU^IS tam-it'tnaq (y. caus.) to cause to drip. The same as tam^

dur-mak,

UU tana (subs.) a heifer or young bull, (a calf in the second

year).
^^U;^ JiU tdn-ii^r-maq (y. caus.) to cause to deny.

^^U tdnsuq (subs.) a longing, a desire.

^^M^U tansuq-la-maq (y. tr.) to long for.

<-^^ tdng (subs.) dawn^ daybreak.
9

66 R. B. SLaw— -1 Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

lS'^^ tdng (interj.) an exclamation implying astonishment ;" you
don't say so !" or " indeed."
^^4j)bi£U idng'dt-maq (v. comp. intr.) to dawn, to break (said of

the day) [from tony " da^ffrn," and dt-maq " to shoot ;"
imth reference to the rays of light].
^^J)^ uoU idng-dur-maq (t. caus ) to cause to bind.
^•^M^CSU tangsuq (subs.). The same as tanauq,
/jjUJ\j AaC>U tdng-gha-qdi-rndq {v. comp intr.) to remain in astonish-
ment, to be amazed.
Hii^ idngla (subs.) to-morrow, the morrow ; 2. a large wooden
vessel for washing clothes, and mixing dough in.
^j|US nj^2 tdng-la-^t-maq ^y. cans.) to cause to select, to offer to the

choice.
^U^X^^ tdng-la-^tih-maq (y. recip.) 1. to select in company ; 2. to

be astonished.
.^l^lxivS tdng-la-maq (y. tr.) to choose out, to select.
^UwL) tdng-maq (v. tr.) to bind a bundle, or anj inanimate things,
also a broken limb. [thing denied].

^Ujo ian-fnaq (y. intr.) to giye denial to [takes ga after the
(3^^ tanuk (y. subs.) recognition.
iJJ^y^^ towtig'-Zttfl' (y. adj.) recognised (from following).
jil^yU 4dnu'fnaq (y. tr.) to recogmse.
^U^yU tdnu-^sh'tnaq (y. recip.) to recognise one another.
^U-ioJU tan-ish-maq (y. recip.) to deny one another, or to one

another.
^UxiU ian-igh-liq (y. adj.) denied.
^UjjiU tdni-maq (y. tr.). The same as tanu-maq.
j^ ido (subs.). The same as tagh^ Kaz.
Ij^ tdwa (subs.) a shallow pan for cooking in.
^Uyl^U tawa^la-'t'tnaq (y. cans.) to cause to cry out.
JUASIjU tawa-la-'sh'tnaq (y. recip.) to clamour or scold at one
another.
jUJIjb tawa-la-maq (y. intr.) to clamour, to cry out

1878 J of Eastern TurJciitdn. 67

^UAjU taushqan (subs.), a hare*.

(3j^ tduq (subs.) a fowl.
C^h^ tdthJa-^t-maq (v. caus.); The same as fab-la-' f -ma f,
^^mJ^^G tdu-la-'sh-maq (v. rec). Same as iab-la- th-maq,
^L«>jU tdu-la-maq (v. tr.). Same as tal4a-maq\

^jr^ tat (subs.) a young horse in the second year.
\j\j bU taya-taya (preSv part.) slipping and sliding [pron. tat-maq"].
O^^ tdy-dq (subs.) a walking-stick.
j^sjr^ tai-khar (subs.) a young donkey, T. F.
^U^Vj tat^ghah (adj.) slippery ; also given to slipping,
ttj^^ tai-ghan (subs.) a greyhound.
O -^ tai'laq (subs.) a young camel (in the 2nd year)%
O^^ tai-maq (t. intr.) to slip, to sKde.
^^^^ tat-ncha (subs.) a heifer in the 2nd year, Kaz.
^U^^vj fay-ush-maq (v. recip.) to slide together, to amuse oneself by
sliding on ice, or by sliding down a kind of " Montagn&
Russe."
vJJUjI^ tihra-UmaJc (v. caus.) to cause to shake, to cause to »-

move itself.
wU^I^ tibra-'sTi-ma'k (v. recip.) to shake together.
lilUI^ filra-mak (v. intr.) to shake, to move.
iJJUjI^ tibra-'fi-mak (v. recip.) to move, or shake, oneself.

Ci^i^ iuhii [pron. iihW] (subs.) the down of the shawl-goat, [of
which the finest in the world comes from TurfUn].
^j U5I^aS titra-H-mah (v. caus.) to tremble.
s2J<^j}j titra^'sh-mak (v. recip.) to tremble together.
K,mA^]yj titra-tnak (v. intr.) to tremble, to quake, to shiver.

m

^^5** takhi (conj.) moreover, further, again.
ciJ];J tiirak [pron. trek] (subs.) a prop, a support.
wV*«^ tilrgak [pron. tirsak'] (subs.) the elbow.
^'^y turik [pron. trik] (adj.) alive.
^wXe^ tuHk-Hk (subs.) life.

68 B. B. eb$M—A Voeabmlarg of tie Ltmgwige [Extra No. for

y iuz [pron. tig] (subs.) knee.
1/ toga (subs.) knee.
i«rU))y iaxa-la-^Umah (▼. csob.) to cause to kneeL
vIJUm*)!^ taga^lO'^Mk-mah (v. recip.) to kneel oppoute one another.
slS^ty iaza-lajmah (▼. intr.) to kneeL

CJ UiJp ^a*a./a.'«-i»ai (v. refl.) to seat one's self in a kneeling
position (sitting back on one's heels, the usual Turki
sitting posture).

K^^y taz^mah (v. tr.) to Tange (things) in line.
yjJi tag or tii (adv.) with difficulty, hardlj.
^y^^ iuih [pron. tiiK] (subs.) tooth.
i^UjLmJ tuih^a^^t-mak (▼. caus.) to cause to renew the teeth, spe-
cially to file the teeth of a saw.
u^ULmj tuih^-mak (v. intr.) to change the teeth, to cut a fresh
set of teeth (both of men and animals).
%^\xmj tashtak (subs.) an earthen vessel, Kabhghab.
ji^^ taqtir (interj.) lit. fault '' culpa mea," A. ; but used as a
term of respect to a great man, equivalent to ^* Year
Excellency," ^ Tour Highness" (as if to excuse one's
self beforehand for addressing a person of such dignity).
^^ iaqi (adv.) moreover. The same as takhi.
^J^ mkan [ttkan] (subs.) a thorn.
^^^jy^ tuk-tw-mak [tik-tur-mak'] (v. caus.) to cause to sew, Ac.

(^U3]Uj tuk-la^^t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to set upright.
^^UAKC tuk'la''sh''mak (v. recip.) to join together in setting up-
right.
%^\^1Uj tuk-Ia-mak (v. tr.) to raise any long object into a vertical

position, to set upright [see tiklamak'].
i^UilUS tukM-an-mak (v. pass, refl.) [from tukM-nak'] to stare
at [governs y^].
%mS '^ tuk-mak \tik'imk'\ (v. tr.) to sew, to fasten, to fix, ta
plant ; to stake (at play).
s^ U^A^ tuk-Uh-mak [iik'Uh4Mk'\ (v. recip.) to sew together, Ac

1878.] ofSasiem TurhiHdn. 69

^KAyfj tuh-il-mah \i%k-iUmah'] (v. pass.) to be sewn, Ac., aho to
have one's eyes fixed on any thing, to stare [cf . '' fixer," Fb.]
i-Si tag (sabs.) bottom [tag-ida ** beneath"],
c)^ iul Itil] (subs.) tongue ; aUo language.
«.J^1tU tul ltiiyia'*t'fnak (v. caus.) to cause to vituperate.
i^U^XU till ltiiyia'*sh-mak (v. recip.) to scold or abuse one

another.

k1)^ tiilak [tilah] (v. subs ) an earnest desire, a prayer, [from
tilamak].

Jf ^ talaq (subs.) the supra-renal capsule [a gland situated above
the kidneys].
u-TV/^IUj tul ltil]4a'^ak (v. tr.) to scold or abuse, to "give the
rough side of one's tongue" [from tuQ.
i-J^JC tula-mak [tila-mak'] (v. tr.) to desire, to wish for ; also
to request, to ask for.
^-^aIJ tilpah (subs.) a fur cap, with a covering of cloth or silk,

and fur edging round the head.
SmS^ii^ tilfah (subs.). The same as tilpah.
^U5 twnah (subs ) a fur cap extending down over the ears.
^;U? tuman (num.) ten thousand.

^3^A*J tamghdq (subs.) the fur of the throat of a lynx, fox, Ac.
[being fine, robes are made of a collection of such furs],
Aa^j tamglia (subs.) a branding iron.

^ tunj [tinj] (adj.) happy, at ease.

tunji-liq [tinj^liq] happiness.
%<^ tandah (subs.) a long thread prepared for the warp of a
stufE to be woven, P.
jjdx) tandur (subs.) an oven, P.
^KiS tana-Mr (subs.) borax, P.
i-W tang (subs.) a girth, P.
^Sj^ tangri (subs.) God. [Little used in Tarkand, Ac.]
%^J\/otij3 tang4a-mah (v. tr.) to present, to offer, T.

A^ tangah (subs.) a money of account used in Turkistin,

70 B. B. Shaw — A Vocalmlafy qfthe Language [Extra No. far

conristing of 25 snudl copper ^ cash" (of Chinese make
with square holes though them) called dahchdn^ each of
which is worth two pul (imaginary coin). The Talae*
of the tangak varies constantly in the hazdrs according
to the numher of tangak that may he g^ven for a hurr
(a Chinese silver ingot weighing ahout 2 Ihs., and worth
ahout 170 Eupees). Sometimes the numher reaches
1100 and sometimes faUs as low as 800. The Amir of
K^shghar has lately supplied the lack of small silver
coinage, hy issuing silver coins worth a tangak each, and
called ak'tangah (white tangahs) after the model of the
Khokand and Bokh&ra coins so-called, hut in the name
of the Sultin of Turkey ; they are current at a small
premium. The EJiosan tangak consists of 50 copper
$ku-ekan^ which are only slightly smaller than the-
Yarkand dak-ckan. Consequently a Khosan tangak is
worth nearly twice as much as a Yarkand or Kashghar
one.

The word tangak is also used for the * scales* of a
fish.

jy^ tanur (suhs.) an oven, P.
^^*^^ tanidak (subs.) Same as tandah, P.

>y tuwa (subs.) a two-humped camel [the sort more usual m
East Turkist&n], Ejxohiz.

^J^y tuwdq (subs.) a lid, cover of a saucepan.

^|y tuwdq (subs.) a hoof [same as tugaq],

^y tub (subs.) a root (used also in counting trees; as oek
tub darakkt " three trees") ; aUo the bottom of any-
thing. [Used as a comp. post-pos. ; e. g., kazan-ning
tub'uda " in the bottom of the saucepan]."

siny tuban (subs.) a low place [chiefly, as a post-pos. in comp. ;
e. y., din tuban or ning tuban-i-da *' below j"* also as aa
adv. absolutely].

1878.] ofEagtem TurJcistdn. 71

<— Tj/i^^ tuban-rdk (adv.) more below. Aho (post-pos.) din

iuhan^rdk " lower than."
^Xiljy tuhan-lash (adv.) downwards. [ceiling of a room.

\mJjjj^y tuhuriik [tubruk'] (subs.) a pillar or prop supporting the
u-^^y tuhuruk. (subs.). The same as tuhruk. .

m

Vy '^ (subs.) a cannon.

Vy tbp (subs.) a definite quantity (of anything) ; e. y., a

* piece' of cloth, a * herd' of cattle, Ac.
Vy ^^ (subs.) a ball used by children for playing.
Sy topa (subs.) earth, dust.
^^iy iohdq (subs.) the cover of a saucepan.
^— TwSvJ^ topa-la^H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to heap up.
^— ' ^^Jv^^ topa-la-'sh-mak (v. recip.) to heap up together.
u-Tt^Jljy? tapa-Ia-mak (v. tr.) to heap up (as grain in a measure).

l3^y topchdq (adj.) long-necked like a Turkman horse (used of
horses).

^Jf^y top-ehi (subs.) an artillery man, a gunner.
^jffiy top'Chi (subs.) a row of buttons on the breast of a robe.
^^ tupah (subs.) the top, also height [used as a comp. post-pos. ;
e, y., tagh-ning tupa-suda on the top of the mountain].
A— T^^jy tupur-mak (v. tr.) to spit, to spit out.
i-Jj;^^ tupuruk (subs.) spittle, saliva.

\mSiy ^^* (subs.) a skull-cap.

«•

isy tut (subs.) mulberry, P.
\jr^y tut'Oah (adj.) touching, contiguous.
j;L«;^I*Uy tut-ash-tur-maq (v. recip. cans.) to cause to ignite.
^UiUy tut-ash-maq (v. recip.) to lay hold of, to kindle, to ignite
[used only of fire ; and governs yAa].
f^y tut-am (subs.) a measure of length, the length covered
by the clenched hand, a " hand.''
jUJ)UUy tut'Om-la-'t-maq (v. tr.) to cause to measure by noting

the successive lengths covered by the hand grasping the
object.

72 R- B- Shftw— -4 Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No, for

jUAI^Uy f»^-am.Za-'<*-»wfl' (▼• rocip.) to compare measurementg

thus taken.
^Ul^VSy tut-am-h-fnaq (v. tr.) to measure by grasping in the fist.

^jiJy tut-g[un (subs.) captivity.
^Ijl^y tut-luq-maq (y. intr.) to stutter.

^3^y tut-maq (v. tr.) to grasp, to seize, to take.
^l^ji^Lftyy ^fi^.tMi^/tfr-ma<2' (v. rec. caus.) to cause to grasp one-an-

other ; viz, to cause to wrestle.
^UJtyy tut'Ush-maq (v. recip.) to gprasp one another, to wrestle.
j^Uyy iuUuUmaq (v. pass.) to be seized ; aUo to be eclipsed
(of the sun and moon).
c)yy tuiun (subs.) smoke.
^Uiyy ^^.tfn-ma^ (v. refl.) to be seized with astonishment,
^y toti (subs.) a pony, a small baggage horse,
^y toti (subs.) a parrot, P.
^y /tfcJk (subs.) brass.
uJ^USj^y^y tueh^kwr-Ufnah (v. caus.) to cause to sneeze.
t,»/U^ji.ys^y tuehhur-iuih-fnah (v. recip.) to sneeze together.
\^\-^jy^f tuchkur-mak (v. intr.) to sneeze.
O^jf^y tuehkur-uk (v. subs.) a sneeze.
^USVl^y tokhta-'t-maq (v. caus ) to cause to stop.
^UtUiy tokhta-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to stop together.
^V^Uiy iokhta-maq (v. intr.) to stop, to halt.
jUiy tokhmaq (subs.) a mallet. JPor toqmaq.
^>^ tohhu (subs.) a fowl.
fy^y tokhum (subs.) an egg^ a seed.

^y tokhumak (subs.) a seed used in dyeing (yellow and red).
^«a^y tokhi (subs.) a fowl,
jy tur (subs.) a net, P.

jy tur (subs.) the place of honour (in a company, &c.).
Ijy tura (subs.) a Chief (among the Kalmyks) ; a Prince, a
descendant off an independent soTereign, or of the

1878.] of Eastern TurJcUtdn, 73

Prophet (sometimes). Amir TImur in his Autobio-
graphy applies the term to the descendants of Ching^z
Khan, the then sovereign house. The family, which
almost exclusively enjoys the title in Eastern Turkistan,
is that derived from Makhdum A^zim, an eminent S&yad
and saint of Western Turkist&n who, in the 16th cen-
tury of our era, married a Kashgharian lady, a descen-
dant of Satuq Bughra Khan [one of the early kings oi
Kashghar said to be of the race of Af rasiab, and whose
descendants ruled till they were displaced by the Kara-
Khatai power of the Gurkh&n]. The family of Makh-
dum A'zim held sway in East Turki chiefly by virtue of
the religious veneration felt for them, till they were
ousted by the Chinese in the middle of last century,
and have since made many attempts to regain it. (They
are also termed '^ Elhwaja" (pron. Khoja) which is the
term applied to the offspring between a S&yad and a
woman of any other family who are not S&yads). [Pro-
bably of MoNOOL derivation.]
<i)UJI;^ tura-U-mah (v. pass.) to be born, to be increased in num-
bers [said of the generations of men or animals].

SmmfKjf!\j^ titra-mak (v. intr.) to increase in numbers [said of the
progenitor].
U)y iurha (subs.) a nose-bag [for feeding horses] (for tobra).
0;y tort (num.) four.
j^jy* tort-ao (subs.) a four.
M^^jy tart-ao-lan (subs.) a four, Kaz.
\sJV^ tort-am (subs.) a four, Kaz.
^,5b\jj[^ tort-dilan (subs.) a four.
^-as^Hi;^ tort'lanchi (adj.) fourth, Kaz.
\^^Jt^ tort-unchi (adj.) fourth.

uJ^^^y turt-mak (v. tr.) to poke, to prod (as a sleeping man, to
awaken him).

LmS \4Ayjy turt'Uih'tnak (v. recip.) to poke at one-anoth«r.
10

74t R. B. Shaw — A TocahuJary of {Kb Langwage [Extra No. for

wUiyjj^i turt'V/n-male (v. refl.> to poke at one's self [used of the

Eussians crossing themselves] , Kaz.
w^^^«>;y iur-diir-mak (v. cans.) to cause to wind up, [from^mw*].
^jy^jy iursuq (subs.) a leather water bottle, Kaz.
u^^^y turghti (subs.) a Lurk.
$S^Jj^jy tur-ghuz-maq (y. caus.) to cause to stand up, to arouse.
\:i^jy tur-ghun (adj.) tame [from tur-maq " to remain"],
^jy turqa (adj.) silken (used for the stuff of a kind of sieve).
O^Vy tur-ia-maq (v. tr.) to net (stitch) ; also to catch in a net.
iiJ\^^jy tuT'la^maJe (v. tr.) to change appearance, attributes or

accompaniments, A. T.
w^J;y tur-ia-'n-mak (v. refl.) to change one's own appearance or
attributes or accompaniments, A. T.
uJ^y tur-luk (adj.) various, diverse, [probably from iaur. A.].
O^y ^«r-«nafl' (^* intr.) to stand, to rise on to one's feet, to
remain, to stay [from the Continuative Participle of this
verb a corrupted form, dur, is in use as an auxiliary
which has acquired the simple meaning of ^ is." See
Gram.].
tur-fnak (v. tr.) to wind up, to roll up, Kh.
tuma (subs.) a large bird with a long neck (Pa crane),

Kh. Kaz.
tttr-ush-maq (v. recip.) to stand together, to rise up
together.

tW'Uth'fnak (v. recip.) to wind up together.

turugh^

f (^^i) ^*y [^^® colour of a horse].
tumq )

tur-ul-mak (v. pass.) to be wound or roQed up.

iurum (subs.) an axle and socket (of a wheel), a door

socket.
turumt(n (subs.) a sparrow-hawk.
tur-im-maq (v. refl.) to fix one's self [not in common use,

but the probable origin of the name '* Tungam,** quasi

^^i'jfjy

1878.] of Eastern Twrhistdn. 75

iurufi-ffan *^ one who fixes himself/* corrected to trv/ngan
and Tungan '^ a settler or colonist*'] \ from tur-maq " to
stand."
tjp turah (suhs.) . The same as turd.
Jy tuz (adj.) straight, direct, right.
Jy tuz (subs.) salt.

jy toz (subs.) the thin sheets of bark of the mountain birch
tree, used as paper.
K^^jj^^jy tuz-a^t^tUT'fnak (v. cans.) to cause to make right.
u-T U-wJJ^y tfiz-a^t-Uh-mak (v. recip.) to make right together.
^^ !/^ tuz-a't'tnak (v. tr.) to make right, to mend.
%mmy^])y tuz-a^Umak (v. pass.) to be made right, to become right.
\^jy tuzdq (subs.) a springe, a horse hair loop for catching

birds.
^Ij^ tozan (subs.) dust in the air.

O^J^'^Jy toZ'dur-maq (v. cans.) to raise the dust.
O^jp'^jy toZ'dur-maq (v. caus.) to wear out (clothes).
%mm^^J)^jy tuZ'duT'fnak (y. caus.) to cause to make straight.

ft * *■

cf^Jy tozghdq (subs.) the cotton-like seed pods of a certain reed.
i^^jy t^z-liq (adj.) salt, tasting salt.
^^Jy tuZ'lik (subs.) straight ness.
fj^jy toZ'fnaq (v. intr.) to rise in clouds (said of dust).
i^^jy toZ'tnaq (v. intr.) to wear out, to become old.
i—f ^jy tHz-mak (y. intr.) to be enduring, to be patient [governs

gha\.
i^^Jy tuz-mak (y. tr.) to straighten, to make straight.

uJ^j^ tHZ'iik (subs, and adj.) arrangement, order, institution ;
straight, arranged, orderly, correct. [Of. the '' TUzuk
TimurV' so-called].
i^y tus (subs.) appearance.

^y tOB (subs.) the thin sheets of bark of the mountain birch -
tree. See toz.
JliUw^ toMtaghan (subs.) a small wooden cup, Klz,

76 R. B. Sbaw — A Toedhulary of the Language [Extra No. for

()^jy^y t09'tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to arrest, to get (any-one)

stopped.
^4^y ioB.fnaq (v. tr.) to stop, to arrest.
\^y tush (subs.) a dream, a vision.
\J^y tihh (subs.) direction.
\j^y tiish (subs.) mid-day.
\j^y tosh (subs.) breast, chest.
i— TlAy tosha^k (verbal subs.) bed, bedding.
i^UlXji tosha-^l'fnak (v. pass.) to be spread, to be laid out ; [used

of any thing for sitting or lying upon].
u-TL^Liy tosha-mak (v. tr.) to spread, to lay out [as above].
w^LtL&y tush-a^mak (v. tr.) to dream of, to see in a dream.

ijLojU^ J iosh-qar-maq } ^ . «„ ,. . , i. «v

> (v. cans.) to fill, (to cause to be full).
^Uofli&y tosh-qaz-maq)

^vL&y taushqan (subs.) a hare,
^j UilUy tiUh-la-'n-mak (v. refl.) to eat the mid-day meal with any

one.
Or^y tush'luq (subs, and adj.) equivalent.
imJy^y tdsh-lUk (subs.) the mid-day meal.
u-T UAy tiish-mak (v. intr.) to descend, to come down, to get off,,
to settle down [joined with other words to indicate
various meanings, of which tiish-mak supplier the ele-
ment '' down.*' Thus dt-din tiish-mak ** to dismount ;*^
tUsh-Up-ul'turmaq ^* to sit doum^*] yaqilip tush-mak ^* to
fall doum'' ; tUsh-iip qdl-mdq '' to remain fallen'* ». e.y
"to have fallen off].**
^mmf^jy^}^ iush-Hr-mak (v. cans.) to cause to descend, Ac., [takes the

place of tush-mak in transitive compounds, as tiishUr-iip
sdlmdq " to throw down"].
^— ^y tushuk (subs.) a hole, an aperture.
%mJx^y tOsh-iik (subs.) a loss at play, losings (from tUsh'^ak)*
^Uy£y toshu-maq. (See tashi maq.)

py tugh (subs.) a yak's tail fastened at the top of a long stick

1878.] of Eastern TurhUtdn. 77

and used as the standard of a military officer of rank
(not below that of Pansad or chief of five hundred) ; also
to mark the graves of saintly personages.
^^ togha (subs.) a D-shaped buckle (without pin) attached to
surcingles and girths.
^jfi-^y ioghaehi (subs.) a head-man, chief of an encampment or

village, Kaz.
^jUUjJ togha-naq (subs.) a wooden square buckle used in fasten-
ing on a camel's load, Kaz.
Kjr^y toghSi (subs.) a plain covered with reeds.
3^jy^y tugh^dur-maq (v. caus.) to beget.
^Uij^y toghra-Umaq (v. caus.) to cause to cut up small, to cause

to mince.
^l«-5l^y ioghra^^sh-maq (v. recip.) to cut up together.

J^l^y toghraghu (subs.) a juice exuding from the toghraq tree^

and used as leaven in baking.
O^J^y^ toghraq (subs.) a kind of Poplar tree.
r-/y ioghrd'm (verbal subs.) a morsel.

i3}^]j^y toghra-maq (v. tr.) to cut up small, to mince.
. ■
\Sj^y toghri (adj.) straight.

^jUfjJ tugh-qan [pron. tuq-qan] (subs.) a relation, a relative ;
[bir tugh-qan applies to brothers and sisters (of one
generation) ; iki tugh-qan applies to first cousins, t. e,,
bom of parents who were brothers or sisters (lit.
two generations), and so on. This may be translated
'' related in the first, second, third, <&c., degree"].

Oy^y ^9^'^wi (^^i) possessed of the tugli^ i. e., entitled to carry
the insignia of military rank. [Several Turkish Princes
have borne this title, as, Tughluq Timur Khan, &c.]
U^ tugh^ma (subs.) a slave bred in the house ; the child of
slave parents.

^Ucy tugh-maq (v. intr.) to g^ve birth to, to bear [takes the
object merely prefixed without the mark of the accu-
sative : as^ ughul tugh-di ^* she bore a son"].

V"

• ••

78 R. B. Shaw— ji Voedbulary of the L<mguage [Extra No. for

(^^y iiighut (subs.) child-bearing, labour,
^tf/* (subs.) saliva.
tdf (subs.). For t6p.
^y tufa (subs.). For iupa,
^y tofa (subs.). For topa.
o]/y tofraq^ (subs.) dust, earth, Kh.
yl))jyy tufuruk (subs.) saliva.
(3y ^^i (^i) satiated, sated.
^y toq^a (subs.). The same as togha.
^Uy toqdeh (subs.) a small biscuit.

J^y toqal (subs.) the junior wife ; also a hornless cow, Kaz.
^Uy ^o^^a* (subs ). The same as togluii.
^^\3jy toqta-'t'fnaq (t. caus.). The same as tohhtatmaq,
j\.A^Uiy taqta-'sh-maq (v. recip.). The same as tokhtashmaq.
^L«USy toqia-maq (v. intr.). The same as tohhta-maq,
IfUuiy toq-saha (subs). The title of civil olBScial of rank [accord-
ing to Prof. VAmb^ry, derived from tugh + sahib'].
^UJy toqsan (num.) ninety [qu. ioqos "nine," + wi "ten].'*'

taqsan-inehi (num. adj.) ninetieth.
^USy tuq-qan (subs.). The same as iugh-qm.
j|U5y toqmaq (subs.) a mallet.
^^'Ujy taqmaq-chi (subs.) a man who uses a mallet, or who makes

them.
jUJiUSy taqmaq-Ia-maq (v. tr.) to strike with a mallet or with any

heavy object.
^t^Jiy ioqu-t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to weave.

jy^ toqoz (num.) nine.
^J^lyy ioqaz-aolan (num. subs.) a nine, Kaz.
Jhhyy toqoz-ailan (num. subs.) a nine.
^^^jyy toqoz-unchi (num. adj.) ninth.

"^J^yy toq-ush-maq (v. recip.) to strike or brush against one an-
other [qu. from an obsolete verb toq-maq " to strike,"
which has survived in the Osmanli dialect].

1878.] of Eastern TurJcUtdn. 79

ft A ^ ■

^Ww^^y toqu-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to weave in company.
fyy toqi*m (subs.) a felt put under the saddle.
O^yy toqu-maq (v. tr.) to weave.

^y tuk (subs.) hair on men or animals* bodies (exclusive of
beard, hair of the head, mane, tail, &c., which have
separate names),
^oy tohar (adj.) lame.
cf«y toJcal (subs.) leggings reaching up to the thighs, Chibt. (?).
^ yl^^V"* tuk-twr-mah (v. cans.) to cause to empty by pouring out.
wUiy Hh-mak (v. tr.) to empty by throwing out the contents.
wt«jj^y tuk-ur-mak (v. tr.) to spit.
w^^y tukuruk (subs.) saliva.

I>y tuga (subs.) a camel, [the variety is specified by prefixes :
as diruiuga the double humped camel, and ndr tuga
the single humped camel].
^UJlf^ tuga-t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to come to an end, to con-
clude, to finish (tr.).
w'joy tugarak (subs, and adj.) circuit ; circular.
cLJUmtD^ tuga-^ah-mak (v. recip.) to come to a conclusion mutually,

to come to terms together.
\iJ\J€y tuga-W-mak (v. pass.) to be finished [the sense of the Pass.

taken from the Causative].
iiJV«lfy* tuga-mak (v. intr.) to come to an end.
i^Uioy tuga-^n-mak (v. refl.) to finish itself, or one's self, [prac-
tically almost equivalent to the passive].
y^y tugma (subs.) a button.
\^jMy tug^mak (v. tr.) to tie in a knot.
\^y tugun (subs.) a knot (not a bow).
ilJ^X^ tugUn-ehak (subs.) a knot enclosing any small object [as

when money is tied up inside a knot in the turban or
sash].
Jy* tul (subs.) the total of the lambs produced in each year
from a flock of sheep ; the year's increase of the flock.

80 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Langwige [Extra No. for

J^ tul (adj.) widowed,
'y tola (adj. and adv.) many, much, veiy.
i^)\^.Jjty tola-t'tur-mak (t. caus. redupl.) to cause to compensate.
LlX*j)y tola-H-mah (v. caus.) to cause to compensate.
v^jU^)^ tol<i'''9k'mah (v. recip.) to compensate one-another.
^^)y tola-mak (v. tr.) to compensate, to make up for a loss of
property.
Cf^Jy^y tol-dur-maq (v. caus.) to fill.
J^I«jUJ^ tolgha-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to twist.

ii^y tolgha-^q (vl. subs.) labour [of a woman with child].
^L«UIjJ toigha-maq (v. tr.) to twist, to twirl [generallj applied to
things which resist the process and require force, where-
as tdu-la-maq applies to materials which yield easily].
^UiliJy tolgha-n-maq (v. refl.) to twist one's self, to writhe.
\^y^y tolqun (subs.) a wave, a breaker.
^L«1lySJy tolqun-la-maq (v. intr.) to break into waves, to surge up.

^j^y tiilki (subs.) a large yellow variety of fox.
^UjJ toUmaq (v. intr.) to be full.

t^y if»/tff» (subs.) a goat-skin taken off entire, freed of hair
and otherwise prepared; used for holding grain or
flour.
uT 'clr^ tolun di (comp. subs.) the full moon.

fy* torn (adj.) thick, substantial [used almost exclusively in

application to spices and medicinal roots].

jr*j^ tumdr (subs.) a written charm, Kaz.

/^y tdmar (subs.) a root of a tree dug up for fuel, also a log

of drift wood. [head).

A^^y tumagha (subs.) a hood (put on a hawk or hawking^agle's

C y tumaq (subs.) a fur cap with three lappets, one for the nape

of the neck, and one for each ear.
\J^y tumdn (subs.) a fog.
sj^y iuman (subs.). For tuhan,
0~y tumtaq (subs.) a short story, a fable, a parable.

1878.] of Eastern Twrhiatdn. 81

m A

OT^^y tumshuq (subs.) a beak^ an animal's nose; a projection
(of mountain).

iJ^T^y tum-ut^maq (t. cans.). For tamitmaq (which see).

jX^y tumuz (subs.) the dog-days, the height of summer, A. (?)

i}^Jy*y tum-uz-maq (v. cans.). For tamizmaq (which see).

m

k^ tun (subs.) night.

^y* t4n (subs.) a robe reaching to the calf [the usual outer
garment of Central Asiatics].
tt!rM^ tun^a^gon (adv.) yesterday [from tun *' night" and gon

(kofi) " day" ; qu. ' the day belonging to last night'].
^^*y fung (subs.) a wooden barrel for holding water, [fastened

together with twisted wooden bands instead of hoops].
^-^y tong (adj.) hard frozen [used chiefly of earth, mud, &c.,
not of water].
Jy^y tongghuz (subs.) a pig.

Jj^y tong-hoz (adj.) foreign, strange [said to be derived from

tang and kozy {lit, * frozen-eyes') because a stranger

recognises no one, and preserves a cold aspect].

^UXOy tong-la-H-fnaq (v. cans.) to cause to freeze.

^U^Xxiy tang-la-^ th-maq (v. recip.) to freeze together, or, all at

once.
^\^tx}jA tong-la-maq (v. intr.) to become frozen, to freeze ; also, to

harden with the cold, as butter.
^j^y tong-luq (subs.) a hard frozen field [distinguished from
the rest of the country where, no water having been
artificially let in, the ground remains loose and friable
through the severest frosts, such is the dryness of the
climate].
uJ^lCiy tungluk (subs.) a chimney (that part of it which projects
above the roof) ; also, a hole in the roof, whether for the
escape of smoke (from a Kirghiz tent), or for the ad-
mission of light ; also, the felt sheet with which it is
closed at night. [? derived from tutun '' smoke"].
11

82 E. B. Shaw— -4 Voeabulan/ qf ths Language [Extra No. for

jUJyy fumh^i-maq (▼• cans.). For itrnm-^Umaq^ (whicli see).
^Ut^y fiiiitf-*«A-m0; (▼• recip.). For tanu-Uh-vuiq (which see).
I(^y iwmka (subs.) sheet iron, thin iron,
vrf^yy ffin-ti-ySn (adv.) yesterday, [see tunagon\.
i^y^ ftmu-maq (t. tr.). For tanmmaqy (which see).
Jij^y imoaq (subs.) a hoof.

i^y tSi (subs.) a feast [either on the occasion of the circumci-
non of a boy, or of a marriage],
by tUj/a (sabs.) a camel. Eh. Eaz.
:9^^^ #«ya-cAft (subs.) a guardian or attendant of camels.

i3Hy^ ^^^ (subs.) a hoof, Kh. Kaz.
l^^jy^iy tSi^dur-maq (y. cans.) to cause to be satiated, to satiate.
jL^jiAjy tut-dur-maq (v. cans.) to make (any one) aware of, to

divulge.
^^^J)^y tui'dur-mak (v. cans.) to cause to pound up.

Oj^y toi^luq (subs.) preparations for a wedding feast ; the bride's
* corbeiUe de marriage.' [peased, to be sated.

i3^y top-maq (y. intr.) to be satiated, to have one's hunger ap-
i^iy tui-maq (v. tr.) to become aware of, to find out (a secret).
^^^y tiiumak (v. tr.) to pound, to reduce to powder by pounding.
^ iipa (subs.) a small height, a mound [restricted meaning
^ of the word tupa].

^^jyV^ tip'iur^mah (v. cans.) to cause to kick.
^W*^ tip^mak (v. tr.) to kick.

**^ ^**i4* iip-iti'mak (▼. refl.) to stamp on the ground ; also, to kick
one's horse's flanks with one's heels, '' piquer des deux,**
Fr.

%mJ^^^ Hp'uA-mak (▼. recip.) to kick one another.

«>^ft* Tibat (subs.) the country of Tibet (our so-called " Thi-
bet") ; also, an inhabitant of that country [the name is
restricted to the districts on the upper Indus from Baltis-
t&n upwards, and is not extended to Eastern Tibet or
Lhassa].

1878.] ^Uoitem Turkisidn. 83

\J^ tiban (subs.) a packing needle.
uJ^jrW^ tibra^H-mah (v. caus). See tabratak.
i-/UA)^ tibra^^ah-mah (v. recip.). See iabrashak.
«-/Hr^ tibra^mak (v. intr.). See tabramak.
O'Uij^AAi tibra^^n-mak (v. refl.). See tabremak.

(ft^ tibilghu (subs.) a mountain bush of whose wood the ban.

dies of riding-whips are made.
«•
A-H^ iibanak (subs.) a packing needle. See iiban.

j^ tit (subs.) perspiration.

1/i^ ivra (subs.) skin (of men or animak).

i^Ui]^ tira^'i-mak (v. caus.) to cause to prop up.

uJv4-*|;Jp tiro'^sh-mak (v. recip.) to prop up in oompanj.

^^l/j^ iif^k (y1. sube.) a prop, a support (written also tarak),

^^j^ Urak (subs.) a variety of poplar grown in oultiyated land.

*— ^'^irft* iirO'mak (▼. tr.) to prop up, to support (by artificial

means).
^Im»u^ f{^ laamag (comp. y. tr.) to perspire ; also, to be ashamed

[lit. '' perspiration oppresses (him)"], (^V is the nomi-
native, and the English subject takes the accusative
form).
iji^j^ iirtiq (adj.) having the skin drawn up by a wound or
bum, [properly "tartiq'*]. Also, (subs.) a scar.
ii^t«j^i3^ tir-dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to gather up.

i^Uj^jJ tirtak (sube.) elbow.
*— f ^Jy^ ttrff-Uz-mak (v. caus.) to cause to live, to give life ; [for

tirik-^zmak'],
i^V«J)^ iir-la-t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to perspire, to cause to

sweat.
KmJl^ijjj tir-la^^sh-mak (v. recip.) to perspire together, to work

hard in company.
^m/^'i^ tir-la-mak (v. intr.) to perspire.

Jft«;jJ tirma'q (v. subs.) a finger-nail, a claw, a talon (the points
or nails of the same) [from tirma-maq].

8^ R. B. Shaw — A Voeabulary of the Langwige [Extra No. for

\^^j^ iir-mah (v. tr.) to gather up, to collect, to pick up (manj

small objects one by one).
^^%f^ tirma-la^maq (v. tr.) to cover seed up with earth after

sowing (bj hand).
i^Vs/«U^ Urma-maq (v. tr.) to scratch, to tear with the nails or

claws.
^USU^ tima-t-maq (▼• caus.) to cause to scratch.
^U^Uf>J HrfM-^Mh-maq (v. recip.) to scratch one another.

i}^ji? ivma-^q (v. subs.) a finger nail, a claw. See tirmaq, [claws.
^L«U^ tima-maq (y. tr.) to scratch, to tear with the nails or
sJj^ ifm (subs.) the skin of any animal. See tira,
L^f^jy^^ Hrik-tur-mak (y. caus.) to cause to be angry, to anger.
(^l«iMsO^ ttrik'uh'fnak (v. recip.) to be angry with one another.

Vi-^^-*^^ Urik'fnak (y. intr.) to be angry [governs ffha}.
^ifkSi;^ ftr-igMh (vl. adj.) gathered up, stored [from tir-mahl.
y»^^ ttH-'l-ghu (vl. adj.) cultivable [for tarilghu from tarimag],
O^-J^ tiri'*l'maq (▼. pass.) to be cultivated, to be sown.
fiji:^ ttrim (subs, and adj.) cultivated land ; cultivated.
O^ji? tM-mag (v. tr.) to cultivate, to sow [for tarimag'].

m

jb^ tez (adj. and adv.) quick, fast ; also, quickly, P.
y^ tez (subs.) an instrument used for straightening or bend-
ing rods of tents, &c. [It consists of a strong piece of
wood laid horizontally with a gap in its upper side to
receive the object which requires to be straightened or
bent], Kaz.
l/j^ Uza (subs.) a knee [the same as tiz],
cT iyjuf tksah (subs.) horse dung.
O^JjV tez^g (adj. and adv.) quicker ; more quickly.
^j;4v** tizgm (subs.) reins, bridle.
C-f wl[^ tiz-la-^fi-mak (v. refl.) to rest on one's knees, to kneel.
^^}i^ tiz-mah (v. tr.) to arrange in rows, or in line.
^^ tkh (subs.) tooth.

1878.] qfEadem Turkistdn. 85

y^JUJtwJ^ tUh-aH-mah (v. caus.) to cause to file the teeth of a saw.
^V^L&g? tiih"€t'mak (v. tr.) to file the teeth of a saw.
5^jL<tyL&fc> iUh'twr-mah (v. caus.) to cause to make holes.
^.UAjJ tish-q^ari (adv.) outside [for tashqari].
^UJImJ^ tish-la-^t^mak (v. caus.) to cause to hite.
^^UA3Ua> ^M^-Za-'fA-ma^ (y. recip.) to bite one another.
vi)U1UjJ tUh-la-mah (v. tr.) to bite [from tUh ^Hooth"].
viJU^o." ^A-maJt (v. tr.) to perforate, to make a hole in.
sl)j^ fUh-Uk (vL subs.) a hole, a perforation.
iiJ^y^ tUh-UUmak (v. pass.) to be perforated, to be pierced with a

hole.
>j^ iishah (subs.) an adze, a cutting tool with its edge set at
right angles to the stock, and its inner surface at an
acute angle with the same.
"^ tiihi (adj.) female.
t_^A->^ tUh'ik (vl. subs.) a perforation [from tish-mak'],

VftjJ tifa (subs.). For t^a.
liJUixS tif-mak (y. tr.). For tijmak.
i}^jy^ tiq-tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to ram in.
^U^AJJ tiq-Uh-maq (v. recip.) to ram in in company.
^UAu iiq^maq (v. tr.) to press anything into a receptacle, to
ram in.
C-XjJ iik (adj. and subs.) vertical, upright, steep, difilcult ; also,

a steep place.
J^ tikan (subs.) a thorn.
^UJ]UjJ iib^a-^Umak (v. caus.) to cause to set upright.
i^JU^XXjJ tik^la^^ah-mak (v. recip.) to set upright together.
siy^Usj tik-la^mak (v. tr.) to set upright.
^^•^^ tik-mak (v. tr.) to sew, [see takmak'].
yj»i^ tikis (adj.) smooth.
^UJILmaXjuI tikia-h-'t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to make smooth.
iiSJUAImJlXjJ tikt8'la''9h'9nak (v. recip.) to make smooth together,
v^JUJUaOJ tikii'la-mak (v. tr.) to make smooth.

86 B. B. Shaw — A Voeahulari/ of the Language [Extra No. for

wUitMoCjJ iiiit-la-^n-mai (v. pass, or refl.) to be made smoothy to

become smooth.
^ ^ tikah tikah (adv.) in pieoes \iiha\ tihak qeldi ** he pat (it)
in piecea"].
\l)\^jylmS^ ttg-igh-tur^wiah (v. redp. caos.) to cause to exchange.
^.AM^ iig^uh-mah (y. recip.) to change anything against another,

to exchange [from tigfnak].
ijj^*^ tigjmak (y. intr.) to touch, to attain, to reach [goYcms yAa].
ijj^jyt^ tig-Ur-mak (y. cans.) to cause to toaoh, to cause to attain

(a mark), to hit [in the sense of reaching the object
aimed at].
^^Jy^ tigUmum (subs.) a milL [Qu. from tigUr-mak '' to cause to
touch"].
s±)\j^:J^ itg-Uz-mak (y. cans.). The same as tigurmak.

^A^ tigin (subs.) the absence of a price (paid) ; tigin-ga *' gratis,"
" for nothing," Kaz.
Jjul til (subs.) tongue ; also, Lmguage.
\lX^tjj tila^H-mak (y. caus.) to cause to desire.
i^UJtXjJ tila-^ik-mak (y. recip.) to desire of one another, to desire

together.
\l)V? tila'k (y1. subs.) an earnest petition.
s£j\jt!ij3 tila-mak (y. tr.) to desire, to ask for.

■

y^j^"^ iila-^n-ehi (subs.) a beggar.
^^i^ tilpak (subs.) a fur cap.
AaLJ tilha (adj.) idiotic, foolish,
c^ A>JbJ tUba-Uk (subs.) idiocy, foolishness.

^^^^^ iiUehi (subs.) a spy, a news collector.
ilJU^jJjJ iiUdur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to split, to cause to cut

anything lengthwise.
*-^^ tiUfak (subs.). For tilpak.
^U^XbJ til-ia-^t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to abuse, to cause to

scold.
i^U^lu^ til'la-'ah-mak (y. recip.) to scold at one another.

1878.] of Eastern Turlciatdn. 87

utJUlUi tiUJa^mah (v. tar.) to abuse, to scold, to ' give the rough

side of one's tongue' [from til " tongue"].
O* UIjJ tiUmah (v. tr.) to split, to cut anything into strips length,
wise [from til; qu. to make into strips like tongues].
^*-^^;>*^ iih/Or^H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to dance attendance.
V— TUj^JjJ tilmUr-mak (v. intr.) to be in a state of humble expectancy,

to dance attendance.
vUUft^)^AljJ tilmUr-ush-mak (v. recip.) to dance attendance together.
^-^iW til-ik (vl. subs.) a slit or cut lengthwise [from tiUmah
"to slit"].
fS*4* tiUim (vL subs.) a strip or tongue (what remains between
slits).

y^ timao (subs.) a cold, rheum.
J^^J^ timratku (subs.) an itching red spot on the skin.
J^^ timur (subs.) iron,

m

s^j/i^Jy*^ timur^ehi (subs.) a blacksmith, an ironsmith.
(2/J^ tiffin (subs.) a squirrel, Kaz.
cSJ^i^J tintaJc (adj.) mad, insane. [Qu. for tintrah from tintra-
mak,']
i^lJiyLiw tintra-H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to totter, or waver.
O U^I^Iixi tintra-^Bh-mak (v. recip.) to totter or waver together.
iJJU«|^ikx* tintra^mak (v. intr.) to totter; also, to vacillate, to waver.

gijJ^ Unch (adj.) at ease, happy, well [qu. from tin^mak}.
^-^ ^^i? tinehMk (subs.) ease, hapjaness.
^Ujj^OJjJ tin^dnr-maq (v. cans.) to make quiet, Ac. Ac,
^U^ijJ tin^ish^maq (▼. recip.) to be quiet together, Ac. Ac,

«-XxjJ Un^ (adj.) of equal height.
JwXxiAi tin^'la-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to listen*
%Dl^Uxki ttn^-la-i-mak (v. cans.) to cause to make equal in height.
^UlXuAj tin^-la-^Bh-rndg^ (v. recip.) to listen to one another or

together.
v—TUtfcKiAi tvng4€t-^9h-mak (v. recip.) to make equal together.
jUll^ ting^la^maq (v. tr.) to listen.

88 B. B. Shaw— ji VoeaMary of the Language [Extra No. for

^ ^Ifi^-^-mA^ (▼• tr.) to make equal (In heigbt), also, to
compare heights.
jir^ iingiz (subs.) a large lake, a sea.

^Ui^ iin^maq^ (v. intr.) 1, to be quiet (said e, g, of a child) ;
to settle (as muddy water) ; to be filled in and made leyel
(as of an old weU) ; 2^ to sigh.
^jtjJjJ tifi^Uk (subs.) a sigh.
4JH^ tin^q (t^j-) clear, not muddy ; lU. settled.
!^ titoa (subs.) a cameL

e/^^ jaban (subs.) a range of shelves (in a shop, Ac.).
0^>^^ jabdu^maq (v. tr.) to prepare, to make ready (for an ex-
pedition).

OJ^^ johduq (yL subs.) the complete accoutrement of a horse
(either for riding, or for draught or carriage) ; also,
the material preparations for a journey.
J^ jdr (subs.) the high bank of a river [properly ydr],
J^ jdr (subs.) the crying of articles, Ac. in the baz^, a pro-
clamation.
j;V jara (subs.) a wound [toTJardhat^ P.].
^UiiC>l;l». jarang-la-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to tinkle, to ring

(a bell, &c.).
^KtJitii^jl^ jarang-lo'^sh'maq (v. recip.) to tinkle together.
^)^tii\j\^ jofang-la-maq (v. intr.) to tinkle, to resound, to ring

(intr.).
ifj^ jdT'-ohi (subs.) a town-crier [from j4r].
f^ jdm (subs.) a metal or wooden cup, P.
(2l^V' joman (adj.) bad [foryoman].
jjk^^ jamghur (subs.) rain [for gofnghur].
^-^^ j^*ng (subs.) a cold.
i}^^ janjdl (subs.) a tumult, a row, a quarrel, P.

1878.] of Eastern TurJkisfdn. 89

^jU-*llJt«^l^ janjdUla^Bk'Tnaq (v. recip.) to quarrel with one another,

to have a row.
jy^\A. jatuUz (subs.) a spy, a tell-tale [ioTJasUsy P.].
<3^^ jdn-liq (subs.) sheep or goats (considered en masse without
reference to age or sex) [^lit living creature, P. T., spe-
cialized to refer to the flocks which are the principal
possessions of a nomad people, as " birds," with English
sportsmen, have come to mean specially partridges],
tj^ jawa (subs.) a sack made of coarse goat's hair.
sJx^ jatoan (subs.). Tor jahan.
v-f^ j^* (subs.) a place, P.
ijUJlblAi. jdUla-t-maq^ (v. cans.) to cause to put in the proper place,
to cause to set in order.
^U4lbL^ Jdi'lch-^sh'fnaq (v. recip.) to place in proper order mutually,

or relatively to one another. [place, P. T.

^V/oIUIa. jdi-la-maq (v. tr.) to place in order, to put in the proper
^UiLlft. jdi'la-^n-maq (v. pass, and refl.) to be put or to put one's

self in the proper place.
^Sr*^ yaiiaZ-(?A» (subs.) a quarrelsome person, a disputer, P. T.
^U;^i^KJa^ jadal-la-'sh'tur-mak (v. recip. cans.) to cause to quarrel

with one another.
(^UlXJj^ jadaUla'sTi-mak (v. recip.) to quarrel with one another

[from a supposed simple verb jadal-la-mak which is not
in use, because " it takes two to make a quarrel*'].
^1)^ jazanah (subs.) interest (on money lent), usury.
\}^y^ jazml (subs.) a short gun carried on a camel, P.
W.5t !/^ ya;»a»Z-cA» (subs.) a man who serves the jazail, P.
Ly^fc^ jalah (subs.) a harlot.
***^ jilghah (subs.) a valley, a gorge, a ravine.
***^ jv/ma^ (subs.) Friday, the day of assembly, A.
**^ jumdh (inter j.) do you hear ?
**^*^ jandah (subs.) a beggar's gaberdine [a robe with little

tufts of thread-ends sticking out every here and there].
12

90 R. B. Shaw — A Voeabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^ janistah (subs.) a small stone-fruit of the plum kind.
^ y/n^ (subs.) a weight (equal to about 1*275 9^s.).
1^ j4a (subs.) a fur robe, a " posteen." Torjuha.

*}^ jawdb (subs.) answer, dismissal, leave to go ; also, leave or
permission of any kind, P.
{^'^Jji^t-i^y^ jawdh-ia-^ah-tur-maq (v. recip. cans.) to cause to make

retorts.
cS^^^W" Jawdb-la-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to answer back again, to re-
tort ; also, to discuss, dispute.
O^J^ jawd't-tnaq (v. cans.) to cause to be occupied in anything,
to amuse (said with reference to children). For yuwaU
ma^q.
\^j^ jawan (adj.) mature, matronly [epithet applied to a woman
who has a child, but is still young].

0^*^!>^ jawa-^n-fnaq (v. refl.) to occupy or amuse one's self. For
ifutoanmaq,

juha (subs.) a fur robe, P.
juja (subs.) a chick.
juf (subs.) a pair. {For jujft, P.].
imJ^jyS^^j^ Jiff^ia-^sh-tUT'mak (v. recip. cans.) to cause to pair.
Vi-rU«»Xi^^ juf-la^^sh-maJe (v. recip.) to match together, to be similar ;

also, to be joined together smoothly.
cl/L^Xi^ juf-la-mah (v. tr.) to match or pair (two objects), to render

similar or equal ; also, to join together smoothly.
c^'O^ y«$^an (subs.) a horse's headstall and bit*
Uy^ J^^ (subs.) a horse blanket, P.
t^wVi^ juna^H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to start.
UJ U^U^a. juna-^sh-mah (v. recip.) to start together.
^■'^^y^ juna-mah (v. intr.) to start, to depart.

'^T^ jtak (subs.) an edging or binding (of any garment, on the
outer side, such as a tape sown round).
^^^^^ JiaJp-la-^t-mah (v. caus.) to cause to put an edging (to a

garment).

J

1878.] ofHaste^m IhirJcistdn. 91

lJv^uUa. jiak-la'^Bh-mah (v. recip.) to put an edging on in com-
pany.
UJ UIdU^ jiah'la-mah (v. tr.) to put an edging or binding on a

garment.
Vy^i^ jib (subs.) thread (of cotton).
12^1/^ y^^^^ (subs, and adj.) an antelope or gazelle (Saiga Tart a-

rica) ; also, chesnut (the colour of a horse).
JH^ Jtq (adv.) much, many.
^*^^i^ jikda (subs.) the Trebizond date tree and fruit.
u^ jil (subs.) wind ; also yil,

^'h^ jHao (subs.) a thin rope attached to the horse's bit on one
side, and used for fastening him up on dismounting.
Its loose end is carried noosed to the pummel of the
saddle,
fi^i^ jiUm (subs.) glue.
{j^ y*« (subs.) a sort of Demon, A.
^^^^^ jainak (subs.) elbow.

V^ chiba (subs.) sweepings, refuse. For chdbar.
O^-^ chahaq (subs.) a species of fish.

^^S; V chapat (subs.) a pat, a slap ; also, a thin cake made bj pat-
ting the dough between the hands. [Of. chupatti, H.].
O^^ chapaq (subs.) gumminess in the eyes.
\J^^^ chap-a-ghan (subs.) a rapid expedition.
O^tT ohapalaq (subs.) the flat of the hand (as used for giving a

slap), a slap. [Also written ahapalaqJ]
\J^^ chapan (subs.) a robe or gown reaching nearly to the

ancles [the ordinary outer garment of Central Asia].
^^J^ ehapdo (subs.) a plundering.
J;^^ chapdul (subs.) a plundering raid ; also, a charge of cavalry.
0^/*j^ chap-tur-maq (v. cans.) 1, to cause to gallop ; 2, to cause

to strike with the sword or any cutting instrument.

92 R. B. Shaw — A Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^U«^^ ehap'tsh-maq (v. recip.) 1, to gallop together, to race
against one another (of horses) ; 2, to strike one
another with swords, to fight one another with swords.
^^ chap-qu (subs.) a board for chopping on.
^V*i)^l». chap-qu-la-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to chop.
^VoJty^U.. ehap-qu-Ia-^ah-maq (t. recip.) to chop at one another, or

in company.
^l^)^£jV^ ehap-qU'la-maq (v. tr.) to strike repeatedly with a sharp

instrument, to chop.

i;;^^ ehap-qu'n (subs.) a snow storm accompanied by a cutting

wind.
,3^V chap-maq (v. intr.) to gallop.

^UjV^ ehap'tnaq (v. tr.) to strike with a cutting instrument.
^jj^ ehapi (subs.) a shampooing.

(3ivV chap'iq (vl. subs.) a cut, a wound [so called even after
healing].
u:>V». cliat (subs.) the angle at the junction of two streams [used
elsewhere for angles formed by other things].

i^J^ ohatdgh )

••UU. haid I ^^^'^ puzzle-headed, confused, at cross purposes.

J^A^^^^ ehat'ish-maq (v. recip.) to tie many horses two by two.
c5^*^ chaUmaq (y. tr.) to tie two horses together, the head of
each to the crupper of the other [this is the common
way of securing caravan horses in the open plains and
treeless mountains of Central Asia].
Or^ c^tuq J

^ijJlfc. chat-iq ] (^^^^') ^ couple of horses thus fastened together ;

also, the fastening of them so.
i^U^l** ehajmah (subs.) a jacket with long sleeves.
^^ cTiach (subs.) the hair of the head.
O ♦ V ^'^^fl' (subs.) a fringe, a tassel.
i3^^^ chach-maq (v. tr.) to scatter seed, to sow.
O i;4^V ohachira-maq (v. intr.) to splash, to be splashed (of water).

1878.] of Eastern TurkUtdn. D3

KVft. chara (subs.) a large wooden bowl or vessel.

y^ cMra (subs.) help, remedy, P.
j|U3Jlj^ chara-la-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to remedy.
jJIao^SJ^I^ cMra^la-sh-maq (v. recip.) to remedy together.
fj\joi j^W cMra-la-maq (v. tr.) to remedy.

(— ^^ cMrdk (subs.) a certain weight. [There are three distinct
charaks in Eastern Turkist&n : One used for raw silk,
certain colouring materials, spices, tea, &c. ; it is equal to
4 jififfs, or 5 lbs. The second is used for all manner of
goods, and is called atihliq tashi " food weight," also tort-
tash " four weights" ; it weighs 12 J jin^s or nearly 16
fts. This is distinguished from the third sort recently
introduced by the Amir which is called hesh-tash " five
weights," and weighs IQjin^s or 20 fcs.]
^U3);l». char-la- Umaq (v. caus.) to cause to reconnoitre.
^Umt) j\^ char-la-* sh^maq (v, recip.) to reconnoitre one another, to

reconnoitre in company.
O^J^ char-la' q (vl. subs.) a reconnaissance.
C5?*v^ char-la'k-chi (subs.) a reconnoiterer, a patrol.
^jU8;Ia. char-la-maq (v. tr.) to reconnoitre.

^Jy9" chdrtoa (subs.) quadrupeds, cattle, P.
J^^ ly^ chdrwa-dar (subs.) an owner of cattle, sheep or other qua-
drupeds.
V^J^ oharozah (subs.) a small carpet the length of a bed.
OV^ chdroq (subs.) a rough boot of untanned leather formed
like a mocassin with the lower leather drawn up round
the foot ; worn by the Kirghiz mountaineers, and by
caravan-men for journeys.
VmSiy^ chdri (subs.) grain with the husk on.
V^ y ♦ ehaza tash (subs.) jade stone obtained from the quarries in

the mountains. Distinguished from su-tash " water-
stone," which is jade found in the form of rolled pebbles
in the streams. In this state it is free from flaws

94 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Zangwige [Extra No. for

which have all been found out by the hard usage it has
Teceived, so that what remains is solid. This gires it
a greater value for carving; whereas in carving a
piece of chaxa ia%\ the risk is incurred of finding many
days of labour spoilt, by a hidden flaw or crack.

\J'^ ehash (subs.) a heap of grain piled up after thrashing and
winnowing. Also for chashi (which see), P.
^■"AV^ cha-shah (subs.) light bed clothes for the summer [? for
chadir-i-shahj P.].

j^ Vj**^ chash-ghalbir (subs.) an open sieve for separating tbe chaff

from the grain.
•^^^ clidsh-gd (comp. subs.) the hour half way between sun-rise
and midday, (at which a meal is often eaten), P.
^^^tik^ chash'lO'^Ufnaq (v. cans.) to cause to heap up grain.
^U*Xm*1^ chash-la-^ah-maq (v. recip.) to heap up grain together.
J|L«1L&W chash-la*maq (v. tr.) to heap up cleaned grain.

P^ ehagh (subs.) account, reckoning, conjecture, inference;
also, number ; also, time, epoch (any fixed time).
j^IjUIj. Chaghatai (subs.) (Pr. name.) A son of Chinghiz Khan ; his
descendants or family ; the tribes over which they ruled ;
the country ruled by them (in some books this includes
the whole patrimony of Chaghatai, but usually only that
which was left after the separation of the Kh&us of the
Moghuls, viz,, Western Turki8td.n) ; the language spoken
in Western Turkist^n. [The term is now dying out
except in talking of the past.]
^Ul*. chaghan (subs.) a winter festival of Chinese origin.
jjUjXilj* chagh-la-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to conjecture.
^V^JtHil*. chagh-la-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to form conjectures together.
^^X^Vft. chagh-ia-maq (v. tr.) to conjecture, to surmise, to reckon
(anything that is expressed in numbers).
^^^ chagh-luk (adj.) conjectural [from chagK],
O^ cliaq. The same as cMgh.

1878.] of Eastern TurJcistdn. 95

^^ ehaq^a (subs.) a copper coin, Kh.
^ISl*. chaqan (adj.) light coloured (applied to eyes).
^Uly. chaq-qan (vl. adj.) fiery, sparkisb, excitable.
^l^XlfL». chaq-la^tnaq (v. tr.). The same as ehagh-la^maq,
^3^^^ chaq-maq (v. tr.) to bite or sticg (with venom) ; to slander,

to detract.
^3^^^ ehaq-maq (v. intr.) to sparkle, to give forth sparks ; also,

(v. tr.) to crack.
iS"*^^ chaqmaq (subs.) a steel for striking a light on fiint.
^^ ehaqich (subs.) a kind of resin extracted from the birch
tree and also from firs.
oUS^jjIa. chaqir-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to calL
45^**^ri' ♦ chaqir-sh-maq (v. recip.) to call in company.
O^^V^V chaqir-maq (v, tr.) to call, to summon.
^^^XmaSIa. chaq-uh-tur-maq (v. recip. caus.) to cause to sting or

slander one another.
jfU^jJW ehaq-Uh-maq (v. recip.) to sting one another, to slander

one another.
^Uijil^ chaq-il-maq (v. pass.) to be slandered ; 2, to be cracked.
0^-<-Hi!*V chaq-in^maq (v. refl.) to sparkle, to lighten of itself (of

the lightning).

J^ ehdl (adj.) partly black and partly white (of the hair, or
beard), Kn.

'^^ cMla (adj.) unfinished, incomplete.
V'^ ehaldb (subs.) a drink made by mixing water with curds
and whey.

J^^ ehalbar (subs.) wide outer trowsers made of leather (into
which the robes are tucked for work in which they
would be in the way), P. (shalioas).
^UjIj;WU. chalhar-qa-'Umaq (v. caus.) to cause to scold.
^U^IS^WW ehalharqa-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to scold one another.
0^^>^^^^ ehalbarqa-maq (v. intr.) to scold, to upbraid, to abuse.
^— 'Vt' chal^ak (subs.) a thin cake of bread cooked in oil.

g(j B. B. SLaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

v^UjI^I^ chalpai-niaq (v. intr.) to sink down exhausted, to be pros-
trated (by weakness).
(j^^ ehalchiq (subs.) a boggj or miry spot, (permanent).
^L^^LmJW ehdl-ith'tur-maq (v. recip. caus.) to cause to wrestle.
^U^l». ehdl'tsh-maq (v. recip.) to twist one another, to wrestle.
^^^ chalqa (subs, and adv.) on one's back, face upwards ; also,
chalqa-si'da, &c,
^JxAii^ chalqa-i't-maq (v. caus.) to cause to lie face upwards^ to

turn any one over on to his back.
ijf^^^i^^ chalqa-i-maq (v. intr.) to lie on one's back.
^U^U* chalqi-maq (v. intr.) to surge (of water).

UJU^ chaUna (subs.) a lump of hard earth, a piece of sun^ried
brick.
j3^^ cMl-maq (v. tr.) to twist over ; specially 1, to trip up ;
2, to braid, to tat, to crochet ; 3, to stir up (of liquids) ;
4, to beat a roll on a drum, to sound a call on the
trumpet.
^UilVj. cJidl'in-maq (v. pass, and refl.) to be twisted, Ac., to twist
one's self, &c.
^^ oMma (subs.) a conjecture, Kaz.
^US)L«^ cMma-la't-maq (v. caus.) to cause to conjecture.
^U^yU«l*^ chAma-la-eh-maq (v. recip.) to conjecture together.
^L©5L«U. chdma-la-maq (v. tr.) to conjecture.
^tel»^ ehaman (adj.) slow, sluggish, Kaz.
^^^ cAonipon (subs.) a branded malefactor, Onnr. [Cf. chop (?)].
Jji^^ chamghur (subs.) turnip, Y.
^VJI Ulft. ehtna-^t-maq (y. caus.) to cause to cut with an axe.
^UAUIa. ehana-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to cut with axes together, or one

another.
<3^V ^^^''^^ (subs.) a funnel-shaped feeder of a mill.
^LoUl*. chana^maq (v. tr.) to cut with an axe.
^^^ chang (subs.) dust flying in the air.

1878.] ofBa%tern Turkistdn, 97

(^(Gl*^ eJiangah (subs.) a group of hooks to which butchers hang
their meat.
^'Kiva. ehangal (subs.) a claw, a talon.

^U-A'Uxi^ ehangqa-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to be thirsty in company.
^UoUOva. changqa^maq (v. intr.) to be thirsty.

*jj^ chdurah (subs.) circuit, circumference, [child.

ij^yf' chdukan (subs.) a young woman who has not borne a

MJiyy^ chdthgwn (subs.) a tea-pot (used also for the vessel in
which the water is boiled).

\S^ ckdi (subs.) tea.
\J^^ ehayun (subs.) scorpion.
KJ^J^^^ cMi-josh (subs.) a tea-pot (that in which the water is

boiled is called '^ kara (or black) ehdUjosh^^ ; that from
which the tea is poured into the cup is called ** ak (or
white) chdi-josh'' for obvious reasons], P.
^^UjvS^V^ cMi-qa-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to rinse out.
^JU^lSjv*. chdi-qa-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to rinse out together.
^UJl5^lj^ cMi-qa-Umaq (v. pass.) to be rinsed out.
^L«vSjV^ cMi-qa-maq (v. tr.) to rinse out (either cups Ac., or clothes

after soaping).
wVajUjI*. cMtna^H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to masticate.
v^IamtU^Ia. chdina-^h-mak (v. recip.) to masticate together.
v^Ulul^ chd^na-mak (v. tr.) to masticate, to munch.

Vm^^ chip (adj.) left [hand], P.

^Ul^ chajpagUi j ^^. ^ ^^^ left-handed ; with the left
ci*^^^ ehapaqai )
hand, P. T.

^i^ ehappa (subs.) sewing-cotton.

>^ chakh (subs.) a spinning wheel, a water-wheel. [For
charkh, P.]
p}j9' chiragh (subs.) a lamp, P.

ks]j^ chirai (subs.) countenance, appearance. [? For chehrah, P.]
13

98 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

y^M^j^jM^ chirai-siz (adj.J ugly, ill-favoured.
{}i^ji^^j9^ ohirausiZ'liq (subs.) ugliness.

^^jJLl^ chirai'liq (subs, and adj.) beauty, handsomeness; also,
well-favoured, good-looking, '^ T.
Tj9" charkh (subs.) a wheel, a grind-stone, spinning wheel, Ac., P.
^l^ldy^ charkh'ia-maq (v. tr.) to grind (on a turning grind-stone).
^"yt^ chirk (adj.) rotten. [another.

^U-iS;^ chirla-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to call one another, to invite one
(j^'^j^ chirla-maq (v. tr.) to call, to invite, to summon.
^UJ;ISa. chiq-dr-'t-maq (v. redup. caus.) to cause to take out.
^U-*jlfi^ chiq-dr-^th-maq (v. caus. recip.) to take out together.
^U^LS*. chiq-dr-maq (v. caus.) to cause to go out, i, 0., to take out,
to send out, to expel.
^3^-**^ chiq^maq (v. intr.) to go out*
^V«X^ chak^man (subs.) coarse woollen or cotton stuff.

^j^ ehakan (subs.) embroidery, P.
wW^j. chig-il-mak (v. pass.) to be knotted.
vUUx». chig-mak (v. tr.) to knot, to tie in a knot,
'i'l^'^f* chigin-gak (adj.) given to backing (of a horse).
wVJXy. chigin-mak (v. intr.) to back (of a horse), to retire, to
retreat.

si*

j^ chchu, (interj.) used for making a horse move forward.
j^ Chu (prop, name) a river running from near the Issik-ktil
(Lake) north of the Kara Tagh Bange.
V^ chub (subs.) sweepings, Kaz.

Oyyf chiibuq (subs.) a rod [PP. ehdbuq"] ; also, the piece of
cloth let in to the side of the skirt of a robe to give it
fullness.
^j^ chujpchak (subs.) a story, a tale, Kaz.
^j9" chupchuq (subs.) a sparrow, Kaz.
J^y^ chupur (subs.) goat's hair.

^ chot (subs.) a small adze, Kaz.

1878.] of Eastern TurkUtdn, 99

^^ chotd ) , ^ ^

, « , } (suds.) coarse white cotton cloth.
J^j^ chotdr)

jyj^ ohStur (adj.) marked with small-pox.

, * * , ^ , } (subs.) a chicken, a chick,
v*.^ ehUcha )

w^^^ chuchak (subs.) a story, a tale.

^lyjy- ehochqa (subs.) a pig, Kaz.
^mJj^j^ chuchuh (adj.) savoury, nice-tasting, not sour.

^ Jy^ oAor^d» (subs.) a sort of fish with a snout resembling a
duck's bill.
j^UI/^Tj^ churgul-'Umak (v. cans.) to cause to go round.
i^ImSJ^^ churguVsh-mah (v. recip.) to go round together.
^^yVy^ churguUmak (v. intr.) to go round, to revolve, to rotate.

*J^ chaurah (adj.) round, disk-like. Same as ehdurah.
^--' ^J>** ohurU'H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to rot.
OVy^ choruq (subs.). The same as eharoq.
^mSjjj^ chiiru^k (adj.) rotten.
^ JJX^ churu-mak (v. intr.) to rot, to become corrupt.
kSJ)^ chori (subs.) a female slave.

ijy^j^ chughul (adj.) slandering, making mischief,
^y J^J^ ehtighul'luq (subs.) slander, mischief -making.
(jy^ choq (subs.) a tassel, Kaz.
iJ^^ ^^^i (^i* *^^ adv.) many, much ; also, very.
ijy^ ehoq (subs.) a hot ember.
^^ c^oqa (subs.) the back of the head.
j|Ui^ choqmaq (subs.) a mace, a weapon formed of a handle with
a heavy head attached to it rigidly.
f^^y^ ehoqu-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to peck.
jy^ chuqur (subs.) a pit, a depression.
Jy^^ choqur (adj.) marked or pitted with small-pox.
^U«*y^ choqu-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to peck one another.
^^J^^T choqu-maq (v. tr.) to peck.

^^ choka (subs.) chop-sticks for eating Chinese fashion.

100 K. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary efthe Language [Extra No. for

\mJ\A>j^y^ ehuk-ar-H-mak (▼. caus. redup.) to caose to make (a camel)

to lie down, to order (a camel) to be made to lie down.
\mmf^^)^^ ehuk-ar-^^A-mak (r. caus. recip.) to canae (camels) to lie

down in company, to make a number of camels lie down.
^ J\f^ ehuk'Or'fnak (v. caus.) to cause to cdnk, to cause (camels)

to lie down.
^^j^ ehokan (subs.) a young woman who has not borne a child.
Same as ehdukan.
VmS^}y^yY ehuk-tur-mak (v. caus.). The same as ehuk'HT'inak.

<— ' ^^ ehuk-mak (v. intr.) to sink (in water), to lie down (of a

camel).

^'^^jrj9^ ehuk-ur-mak (v. caus.). The same as ehuk-ar^mak.
J^ ehul (subs, and adj.) an arid place ; arid.
^)^*> ehuldq (adj. and subs.) maimed, mutilated, armless, hand-
less ; a man who has lost a hand or arm, &c.
i^y^ ehulan (subs.) cooked rations.
isAilf^ cholpan (subs.) the morning star (seen in summer).
^U5W^^ chulgha'*Umaq (v. caus.) to cause to wind.
^UAW^ ehulgha-*sh-maq (y. recip.) to wind in company.
^^•^•W^*- ehulgha-maq (v. tr.) to wind, to roll up, to entwine.
^UiUJ^ ehulgha-^n-maq (v. refl.) to twine itself.
i-*rUJ)U^** chul'la-^t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to be thirsty, Ac.
%^\^tly^ chuUla-^sh'tnak (v. recip.) to be thirsty together, Ac.
cTl^V^ chul-la-mak (v. intr.) to be thirsty, to become thirsty,, to

dry up, to talk one's self hoarse (or dry) [from ehul],
Kh.
fj^ chom (subs.) a camel's pack-saddle, Kaz.
^t«^ chomaq (subs.) a mace. [See ohoq-mag.']
^^3^ chumali (subs.) an ant.
Sf-^yi- clumchus (subs.) a sparrow.
\}^jy^y^ chum-dur-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to duck, to make (anj

one) take a dip (by word or gesture).

iy-^^j^ chum-rndq (v. intr.) to duck (one's self under water), to
take a dip, to dive.

J

1878.] ofJEattem Turkistdn. 101

ehumuch (subs.) a wooden ladle, P.

(J^Jj^J^ c^um-ur-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to duck, to dip, to duck

(actively).
^Uy«^ ehum-uUrndq (v. pass, with refl. sense) [literally, to be
ducked], specially, to batbe, to dip one's self.
O^^ chundq (adj. and subs.) baving lost an ear ; one wbo bas
lost an ear.
wU^ chunak (subs.) a furrow for irrigation separating tbe se-
veral beds in a gpirden.
w^,^ ehuntak (subs.) a pocket in tbe skirt of a robe.
^[)f chung (adj.) great, large, big.
^WuUL^ chungqai-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to squat.
^U^VAU^ chungqat-sh-maq (v. recip.) to squat together.

^U^Ub^^ chungqcn-maq (v. intr.) to squat (with tbe knees near tbe

face, like tbe natives of India).
^^Jj>J^ chUwar-t-mah (v. caus.) to cause to invert.

V^ff^ cMwar-mak (v. tr.) to tbrow over, to invert, to reverse, to
turn over (entirely), to turn round (on to tbe opposite
direction).

hpy^ chUwar-usk-mak (v. recip.) to invert togetber.
^^J!Jt2f^ chUwar^ul-mak (v. pass.) to be inverted, to be turned

round.

%J^y^ ehuyan \

, I (subs.) pig-iron, also cast-iron.

^ chah an affix implying extent or amount ; also, fasbion*
[See Gram, under ** adverbs" and ** post-positions" and
'' formation of adjectives.*' Also see under chin, below.]

e^^^ ehtdn (subs.) a scorpion. Same as chdydn.
j\xy^ chihar (adj.) skilled, skilful, Kaz.
<>4-H^ chihiq (subs.) a rod, a wand. [See chubuq.]
^yi-H^ ehibin (subs.) a fly, a bouse-fly.
Oy^^^A^ chibilduq (subs.) a curtain stretcbed across a room, di-
viding it into two.

102 R. B. Shaw — A Yocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^"•"^ ehep (subs.) an intrencbment, an earth-work (to protect

guns or troops).
LZ^'if chit (subs.) a border, an edge, a frontier.
^UU*. cMtan (subs.) a rough paling made of crossed sticks.
"^ chitt (subs.) a thorn fence, thorns stuck on the top of a
wall.
chitt (subs.) printed calico, chintz.
^*^ cMcha (subs.) mother, Kaz.
'<ari^ chichak (subs.) a flower ; also, small-pox.
}J^i^ chichan (adj.) eloquent, persuasive, Kaz.
'•^tt^^^^ chiehan-lik (subs.) eloquence, Kaz.
iJU^IJJ^ ehida-H-maq (v. cans.) to cause to last.
^U^ItU*. chida-^sh^maq (v. recip.) to last together.
^U«)cXa*. chida-maq (v. intr.) to last, to endure.
U*ifc-*I*>4»- chida'm-siz (adj.) not lasting, unenduring, impatient,
^jj^lj^ chida'm-liq (adj.) enduring, lasting, patient.
ijJ\^j]jXf. chiran-maJc (v. intr.) to make an effort (physical), to strain

at any task, to groan or grunt over a hard task ; to sit
back in the saddle with one's feet well forward.
d^lH^ chiraUuq (adj.) handsome, good-looking.

i*/i^ji^ cMrJcin (adj.) dirty, Kaz.
OUJJ^J^ chirla-*t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to call.
^Ut)^ chirla-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to call one another.
i3^^/^ chirla-maq (v. tr.) to call, to summon.
/i^^^j^ chirma-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to wind, to cause to twine.
^^^jhf- chirmash (adj.) entangled.
^U«jyLftt«^AA. chirma'sh'tur-maq (v. recip. caus.) to cause to be en-
tangled, to entangle, to intertwine.
JU^U^ chirma'sh-ish^maq (v. recip. redup.) to be entangled to-
gether, to be intertwined.
^UJtU^A. chirma' sh-maq (v. recip.) to wind or twine in company ;

to be entangled.
^UJU^^ chirma-'l-maq (v. pass.) to be wound, to be twined.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 103

^Ut«^x*. cTtirma-maq (v. tr.) to wind (irregularly), to twine.
0)^J^ chirma-uq (subs.) a creeper which winds itself round trees
(dying down in winter).

u-A*^Ji;i^ chiru'^t'tnak (▼. cans.) to cause to rot.

'*-' ^2/^ ehirit-mak (v. intr.) to rot.

^-^Jj^ chirik (subs.) an army, a force.

^USw^a. chiril-la^^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to chirp.

^U^^Uj^f*. ehiril'la-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to chirp or chirrup in chorus.

O s/i^ chiril'la-maq (v. intr.) to chirp, to chirrup, to twitter (like

young birds).

l/i^ ehtza (subs.) a measure of length (two spans of fore-
finger and thumb) [now identified with the half of the
alchin (Russian " arschine") which is about 28 inches].
(3 J^^yif' chiZ'dur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to draw lines.
0^*'*^**LH^ chiz-ish-maq (v. recip.) to draw lines in company.
O ji^ c^iz^maq (v. tr.) to draw a line or lines, to score.
Oi/bf' chiz-iq (vl. subs.) a line, a score.

^jrf- cTiigh (subs.) a reed used for making baskets and mats ; also
a chick (Indian screen).
O^J^i^ chighartmaq (subs.) a coarse kind of grass growing in

bunches which grazing animals will not touch.
ehighariq (subs.) a machine for cleaning cotton of its seeds,
by passing it between two rollers one of iron and one of
wood.
^^-'»^ cMghin (subs.) expense, Kaz.
{^h^ ehiq (subs.) dew.
O^^^ chiq^r-H-maq (v. caus. redup.) to cause to make to go out,

to cause to take out.
(jU^Ua*. ehiq^ar-^sh-maq (v. caus. recip.) to cause to go out in

company.
45 y'^^ chiq-ar-maq (v. caus.) to cause to go out, to take out, to

expel.
^^^^if' ehiqan (subs.) a red eruption on the body.

104 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

ehiq-maq (v. intr.) to go out.

«&2a^ ehiqim (subs.) ezpenae, expenditure.

1^ ehika (subs.) the temple (of the head).

J^^ ehiham (subs.) embroidery.

chik'fnak (▼. tr.) to embroider,

ehik-mak (v. tr.) to smoke.

^UXjla^ ehihman (sube.) coarse cloth. The same as ehaknum.

^^^ ckiga (sube.) vegetable fibre ; a kind of wild hemp ; also, a

rope made of the same.

i— A»»^^ ehig-tnah (v. tr.) to knot, to tie in a knot.

^jyt^ ehigortha (subs.) a locust, a grasshopper.

\£0^Jtf^ ehigit (subs.) ootton seed.

^UjXx^ ehigitak (subs.) the refuse of fat left after boiling.

^lU*. ekiUm (sobs.) a brown berry with a stone in it, not unlike

the Indian hir,

jy^^^ chilhur (subs.) a picketing rein, attached to a horse's head-
staU.

^Uj)L[^^U*» ehilpul'la-^t'tnaq (v. caus.) to cause to sound by splasbing.
^U^lLf^Alxft. chilj^ul'la-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to sound of splashing in

several directions at once.
O^^yiM^ chilpul'la-maq (v. intr.) said of the sound of tbe splashing

of water ; to make a sound of splashing.
(j^ti^i^ ehilpiq (subs.) weakness and running of the eyes.
c£jUlx». chiltah (subs.) a fancy edging to a garment.

(i^i:^ chilim (subs.) a hookah, a hubble-bubble [made of a hol-
lowed gourd to contain the water, in Eastern Tur-
kist&n].
>i*^ chim (subs.) a sod, a turf.
i^^T chimehiq (subs.) a sparrow.
:^f*4^ chvmehi-la't'fnaq (v. caus.) to cause to pinch.
J^^3Uy»^ ckimehi'la'^sh-maq (v. redp.) to pinch one another.

^ chimchilaq (subs.) the little finger ; ehimehildq ana-^i ' the
ring-finger' literally * little finger's mother.'

> -♦

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn, 105

jUWiS- cUmchUa-maq (f. tr.) to pinch (with the fingers, re-

peatedly).

ehimchi-maq (v. tr.) to pinch (once), to give a pinch.
{*/w^ chin (adj.) true, trustworthy.

e;i*- chin (subs.) amount, extent, measure [the probable origin
of the affix ehah (which see). This latter is pronounced
by the Kazzaks chain (as tiz^ga-ehain for tiz-ga-chah) ;
this forms a link to connect the two].
^UjLua. ehin-a-H-mag^ (7. caus.) to cause to tighten.
uJuSUxa. chin-a-'t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to measure.

^UAUaa. chin-aJ'sh-maq (v. recip.) to tighten in company,
i— TuAUa*. eUn-a-' sh-maJc (v. recip.) to measure in company.

j^UUxA. chin-a-mag (v. tr.) to tighten, to brace up.
t«/U Ua*. chtn-a-mak (v. tr.) to measure, to estimate, to reckon (size

or extent) [distinguished from chagh-ia-mag which refers
to numbers].

<-SH?- ching (adj.) strong, firm, tight, hard.
jUl5iij^ ching^qa-maq (v. tr.) to tighten, to brace up. Same as

china-maq,
^LJ^aCj^ chingqar-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to scream.
^^jW^ chingqar-maq (v. intr.) to scream, to squall.
^UJUGjk^ ching-la-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to sharpen by hammer-
ing.

^^^tix^ ching-la-sh^maq (v. recip.) to sharpen together by hammer-
ing.
^UXxi^A. ehing-la-maq (v. tr.) to sharpen by hammering (cold) [as

a horse shoe-nail before shoeing].
ij^ iiAi' chin-la-^ t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to speak truth.
^U-t«J^ chin-la- sh-maq (v. recip.) to speak truth to one another,

to become in earnest with one another.
^Vi^XiikA. chin-la^maq (v. intr.) to speak truth, to speak in earnest,

to get angry.
^,j-H^ chini (subs.) china, porcelain ; specially a china cup.
14

106 R. B. Shaw — A Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

u^ii^ chiyan (sabs.) a scorpion. The same as ehdyan.

halt (subs.) a festival, Bed. [Corr. A.]

4»>^i ^J>^ hatt-Iik (subs.) things prepared for the celebration of the

festival ; also, presents given at the festival.

\s)y^^ kMtun (subs.) a woman, a wife, P. (?)
I«3^ khdda (subs.) a long stake or post.
^J^ hhdrhhaehah (subs.) bother, worry.
^mX^ hhdeah (subs.) calico, shirting^.
CAjJA4ftL^ JcMeah'liJe (adj.) particular, special, P. T.

^^ JbA4/^4 (adj.) annoyed, displeased, troubled. [Corr. P.]
i3^a3UIa. Jch^a-la-^t-mag^ (v. caus.) to cause to annoy.
^U^SUV^ Jch^a-la-^eli^maq (v. recip.) to annoy one another.
^VoJUL^ hh^fa^a-maq (v. tr.) to annoy, to vex.
^UjSvJIa. kh^a-la'^n-maq (v. pass, and refl.) to be annoyed ; to vex

one's self.
^jfjJUlA. JcJiSfa4ig[ (subs.) displeasure, annoyance, P. T.

y^ Jehdla (subs.) a maternal aunt, P.
^v.*jjl.ii hhd'la-t-maq^ (v. caus.) to cause to desire.
^U**.SLi. khd-la-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to desire together, to desire one

another, or, of one another.
jLcSli. khd-la-maq (v. tr.) to desire, to wish for, P. T. [khd for
khtodh],
*WU. kMlta (subs.) a bag, P.
f^ hhdm (adj.) unripe, raw (in all senses), crude, unfashioned,
unlaboured, P. ; hence (subs.) cloth made of coarse sing^le
threads of cotton.

1878.] ofEasfem Turkistdn, 107

fj^^ khdman (subs.) a threshing-floor or ground (where corn is
trodden out); reaped com collected for threshing, P.
[for khirman].
^UJIUL^ khdm-la-*t'tndq (v. cans.) to cause to unravel, (tr.).
^U^L«l^ khdm-la-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to unravel in company.
^jUlULi. khdm-la-rndq (v. tr.) to unravel, P. T.
Jl^l^ khdm-luq (subs.) immaturity, rawness.

^lA.. khdn (subs.) king, prince ; also used in K&shghar as an
ending for the names of women (not of men as in India)
as : At Khdn ('' moon princess"), Mairam Khdn {" lady
Mary").
JHy'v:^^ Khdn-ariq (prop, name) a canal some fourteen miles south
of Kashghar, derived from the Tazghun Eiver ; also a
district and town irrigated by it. [Literally the Khdn'a
canal.]
j^ hhahar (subs.) news, intelligence, information, P.
w^|[r^^ khabar4a^*t.mak (v. caus.) to cause to infonn.
imJ\^9jX^ khahar-la'Sh-mak (v. recip.) to inform one another.
kLj^sjX^ khabar-lO'mak (v. tr.) to give news, to inform [with the

person in ya, and the news in the accusativej, P. T.
i^Ui)^^ khahar-la-^n-mak (v. pass, and refl.) to be informed; to

inform one's self.
j\;^ ihar-khar (adj.) inarticulate, indistinct in utterance.
^]jj^ iharrat (subs.) a carpenter.

'Jj^ hhwrrak (subs.) a snore. [floor, P.

khirman (subs.) corn collected for threshing ; a threshing-

khari (subs.) the main beam of a (flat) roof, [on which

the lesser cross beams from either wall rest on their

ends]. (Cf. Hind, karri = beam.)

•y^ khwdja (subs.) a title applied to the offspring of a Sajad

by a woman of any other family, also to their descendants.

Also, used as a mere term of honour for addressing a

superior, like *^ Sir," generally pronounced khoja.

108 K. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

hliutuh (subs.) a. young ass.
\^y^ hhutun (subs.). For khdtun (which see).
Aa.^ hhoja (subs.). For Jchwdja (which see).
j^jy^ hhurjin (subs.) a saddle bag (double, so as to fit on each

side of the horse's back), P.
d^jy^ hhur-lig[ (adj.) base, contemptible. [From khwdr, P.]
(j^^Xiy^ khuruUla-^t'tnaq (v. cans.) to cause to sncwre.
^UeUlj^^ khuruUia-maq (v. intr.) to snore.

^^^ khush (adj. and adv.) happy, well, P.
\J>^\^^^ khush'dmat (subs.) sycophancy, obsequiousness, P.
^Ujli^A. khush-ia-'t'fnaq (v. cans.) to cause to make happy.
^U^IL^^ khush-ia-'sh-fnaq (v. recip.) to please one another, to please

several people ; to wish one another farewell.
^^^tXyL. Jchwh-la-maq (v. tr.) to make happy, to please.
^uolL*^^ Jehush-la^^n-maq (v. pass, and refl.) to be made happy ; to

please one's self.
^^UjIx&^ Jehush-yaq-mas (adj.) unwilling, lazy.
^UjUm»^ JchusJi-yaq-maq (v. intr.) to be agreeable (of an action), to

be willing (of the agent). [Little used in Eastern Tur-
kistan.]
fy^ khum (subs.) a large earthenware vessel.
J^j^ hhumdr (subs.) illness or mal-aise resulting from the
giving up of stimulants or narcotics; also, headache
after drinking.

KS/^y^ khumdri (adj.) ill from giving up drink or drugs, or from
the excessive use of them.

c2^ khun (subs.) blood-money, satisfaction for the death of
any one [from khun = blood, P.].
^IG^A. khungan (subs.) a cucumber.
]fi^ khira (adj.) dim ; kozi khira = dim-eyed, ». e, short-sighted.
0^*5^^ kMriUla-maq (v. intr.) to speak indistinctly or hoarsely

(as from the effect of a goitre).
^H^ khim (subs.) the dye called * henna'. [Corr. A.]

1878.] of Eastern Turkistan. 109

l«3 da (post-pos ) at, in (used where motion is not implied).
sji\t^ dab (participle). For dep "having said", from de-mak,
v'*^ dab (subs.) a spring forwards, [only used in composition,
as dah'hirmak to spring forwards, to dart forwards].
W'«3 daba (subs.). For ddvoa,

)«}) J dada (subs.) father. TTgdi ddda = step-father.
^'•^ ddr (subs.) a gallows, a clothes-line (for drying clothes), P.
^j^d ddru (subs.) medicine, drugs, spices j gunpowder.
e)i3 ddgh (subs.) grief, sorrow ; also P., an indelible mark.
^I«3 daghd (subs.) deception, cheating, P.
^•UU|»3 dagTid-hdz (adj.) deceitful, cheating, P.
jfUJXflj dagh-la-H-maq^ (v. cans.) to cause to brand.
^U^lU)«3 dagh-ia-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to brand together. [P. T.

^V/BXi|»3 ddgh-ia-fnaq (v. tr.) to mark indelibly, to brand, to tattoo,
^Uiiclj ddgh-Ia^-^n-maq (y. pass, and refl.) to be branded, to brand
one*s self.
•^1.3 dak (advl. affix). For dik.

^)l<3 ddlan (subs.) an inner gateway [dividing the outer pre-
mises to which men have access from the inner court-
yard in which are the women's apartments. It is formed
of a kind of hall or passage with two doors, not opposite
one another, so that no one can see into the inner yard,
even when the doors are open].
yi«3 dalu (subs.) a shoulder-blade, the shoulder.
«iX>l«3 dang (subs.) a serai frequented by the poorer class of tra-
vellers, Ch.
*iSi)d dang (subs.) renown.
^13 dao (subs.). For ddioa!
j\d dao (subs.) a stake laid by a looker-on at a game.

110 R. B. Shaw — A Vocahulary ofihe Language [Extra No. for

)^l«^ ddtoa (subs.) a claim, a lawsuit. (Corr. A.)
Ijl«> dawd (subs.) medicine. (Coir. A.)
^;)jl<3 dawdn (subs.) a pass (over mountains).
^USI^^Ij ddwra-t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to mimic.
^U-il^^li3 ddwra^^sh'fnaq (v. refl.) to mimic one another,
^l^l^^lj ddura-maq (v. tr.) to mock, to mimic, to imitate.
OJt^'^ dduruq (subs.) a clamour, a hullaballoo.
y^jlj ddush (subs.) noise.
j^Um^lj ddush-la-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to make a noise.
^^^t&j]d ddwh-la-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to make a noise together, or

to one another.
^L«X^^| J ddush^a-maq (v. tr.) to make a noise.
1^1 «3 ddi (advL affix). For dak or dik, Kaz.
^H'«^ ddyin (adyl. affix). For dak or dik, Kh.
J^^«) dar-hdl (adv.) at once, on the spot, P. (literallj, in the
condition of affairs).
j^jj^ dar-rao (adv.) while in the act, immediately, P.
ylijd darak (subs.) cognizance, perception (concrete), darak tap-
tim " I have become aware," P. [work).

j^jd dar-kdr (adj.) necessary, required, P. (literally, in the
(j^J^j'^ dar-kdr-liq (subs.) a necessary, a requisite, P. T.
i^UJlU^ J darak'la-Umak (v. caus.) to cause to inquire.
wU^X^<3 darak'la-'^th'mak (v. recip.) to inquire of one another, or,

together.
SmS\^iijd darak'la-mak (v. tr.) to inquire, to endeavour, to become

cognizant.
J^'«3 dazfnal (subs.) a flat iron (for smoothening linen).
c;~/^«) dastar-khdn (subs.) a table-cloth (spread on the floor for
eating) ; also, what is placed thereupon, a spread, a feast.
[The dastoT'khdn is quite an institution in TurkistlUi,
hospitality requiring that one should be put before a
guest on every possible occasion quite regardless of
regular meal-times. First bread, fruit and sweetmeats

1878.] qfEagtem TurkUidn. Ill

are put on the cloth, afterwards meat entries of different
kinds, then huge dishes of pilao, and then cups full of
soup.] (For dastdr-khwdn) y P.
^ap>Liyi*M,3 da^tar-khdn-chi (subs.) the chief servant who lays the

cloth and puts the dishes on it, one by one, taking thero
from the hands of the other attendants. Also, an officer
at the Court of Khokand who enjoja the revenues of a
certain district subject to the duty of providing the
requisites for the Khdn*s guests.

iiS^^d dasiak (subs.) a written order of any one in authority, P.

4jUX»«i3 dast-mal (subs.) a handkerchief, a towel, P.
^Lft^^l^Ltfj dastur-khdn (subs.). For dastar-khdn.
^t*t»5 dasldb (subs.) beginning, commencement.

J^«3 dawnal (subs.). For dast-mal, P.

f^loyw«3 datmdya (subs.) capital (of money) [for doH-mdyal^ P.
[As rigid Musalmdns consider it wrong to receive
interest on their capital, they arrange as follows : they
advance a certain sum to the borrower who is considered
their trading agent; of the profit that accrues (after
deduction and repayment of the capital) two-thirds go
to the capitalist and one-third to the borrower (the
latter having deducted his own cost of maintenance
meanwhile out of the undivided profit). Another ar-
rangement is that the capitalist takes only half the
profits, but the agent or borrower bears his own ex-
penses. Losses are borne, on the second plan by both
in the proportion of 2 to 1 ; and on the first plan by the
capitalist.]
f^ dam (subs.) breath, steam, P.
^L«.jJjli««3 dam-dl'dur-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to take breath,
jf UAfL««3 dam-di-ish-rndq (v. recip.) to take breath, or rest, together ;

or in turns.

^JUIU,) dam-dl-rndq (v. intr.) to take breath, to rest, P. T.

112 R» B. Shaw — A Vocahulary qftJie Language [Extra No. for

|;^^i3 damhwra (subs.) a two-striDged guitar, Kaz.

c^Uj1L«i3 dam-la-H-mak (v. caus.) to cause to cook by steam.

\mmf\jtJiXfd dam'la-*sh-mak (v. recip.) to steam together ; also, for

dam-al-UTi'inaJcy in the sense of rest by turns in any
task, to work * in tie,' to carry by turns.
i-J^''^*^ dam-la-mak (v. tr.) to steam, to cook in steam [by shut-
ting the top of the vessel, as with a tea kettle ; or by
placing the pastry, &c, to be cooked, on a wooden grat-
ing fixed some distance aboTe the surface of boiling
water in the inside of a large closed yessel].

^«3 dwa (post-pos.) from, than.

V^«3 dunyd, (subs ) the world ; also, wealth, riches, A.
jl*3Uii3 dunyd'ddr (adj.) wealthy, rich, A. P.

^,^d duha (subs.) a mound, a hillock. Same as tipah.
J^yi dutdr (subs.) a two-stringed lute [du-tdr as distinguished
from sUtdr = " three-stringed,*' a guitar], P.
J^f^ dur Present auxiliary tense (see Grammar under " Verbs").
Probably a corruption of turur (which often occurs in
its place in old writings) the Present Future of tur-mak
" to stand."
K^j)^ dauri (subs.) rule, reign, the time of any king's rule, P.
^^•^ dusha (subs.) a board for chopping meat on.
J|;«) dul (adj.) hump-backed.
u;5)«3 J)olan (prop, name) the plains of the Tarkand River from
two marches east of Yarkand to within some seven
marches of Aksu ; also, their inhabitants. They are great
reverers of the saintly family of the K&shghar Ehojas.
KS^^^d daulat (subs.). For ddulat (which see).

J;«3 dSl (subs.) the funnel-shaped feeder of a mill.
^)^ doli (subs.) the shoulder-blade, the shoulder [for ddlu].
c5^-J*^ dumhdq (subs.) a drum.

ij)d datvan (subs.) a pass over a mountain range [for daicdn] .
\J^^^ dunan (adj.) two-year-old.

1878.] qfSastem Titrkistdn. 113

i}j^y^ duhbfU (adj.) unripe (of corn). [in Central Asia).

A^^«) dunba (subs.) a broad sheep's tail (of the sort common
^^jd dung (subs.) rising ground.

U^«) deb [pronounced dip] (part.) having said, saying. [This
closes almost every quotation or even statement of
what passed in the mind of any one, answering nearly
to our " that" at the beginning. E. g. hardi dip kupH
^ he arose that he might go" (literally '* let me go, so
saying, he arose") ; ahubu dip iunudim " 1 recognised that
it (was) he" (literally " he, so saying, I recognised").]
Ui.rUjL«»^«3 dipsa-^t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to tread down.
^W»L«^«3 dipsa-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to tread down together.
I— T^'-^^ dipga-mak (v. tr.) to tread down, to tread in.

\mS li^O dSdak (subs.) a female slave.
^^^J)*H'^ di-dur-mah (v. cans.) to cause to say,
^^5^^«3 dSsak'Chi (subs.) a night watchman.

*^Sid dih (adjL and advl, affix) like ; similarly to. [This is affixed
to words or even subordinate sentences; governing
generally the genitive of pronouns, the future participlo
of verbs, but the simple radical of other words.] (?
Verbal form from dS-mak " to say", dek " what is spo-
ken", quail " so to speak ;" as pitik ^ what is written",
from pit-mak " to write".)
^ef-jh^ dS-gU'Chi (subs.) a speaker, one who says [from the fut.

part, of d^-mak']^
i»/V*j«3 dS-mak (v. tr.) to say.

^«) din (post-pos.) from, than, [cant, a dervesh, a beggar, P.
4il^«) diwdna (adj. and subs.) mad ; a madman ; abo, a mendi-

J

^W|; rabat (subs.) a rest-house.

(}^]j rabaq (subs.) a palace, the private dwelling of a Ruler,

[for rawaqf A.].
15

114 B. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^1; rii (adj.) straight, right [for rdst. P.].
^jUSIUl; rdS'Ut'^i-mdq (v. caos.) to cause to discharge (a payment).
^^[jbAtJij rdS'la-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to discharge together.
i^^J rdS'lO'indg (v. tr.) to complete a number, to discharge a
payment, to set right, to set in order. (?) P. T.
JVf^^ rambal (subs.) a soothsayer, P.
imSij rang (subs.) colour, appearance, species, P.
uJ'UjKij rang-la-'t-mah (v. caus.) to cause to dye.
^J^Uy&tfi; rang-la-'^sh-mah (v. recip.) to dye together.
%^ \j*iSjj rang-la-mak (v. tr.) to colour, to dye, P. T.
i^UJllGj rang-la-n-mah (v. pass, and refl.) to be, or, become colour-
ed ; to assume a colour.
*— AaAwIu^ rang-la'^n-tsh-mak (v. refl. recip.) to become coloured in

company ; to paint their faces in company (of women).
cJ^fclfy rang-lih (adj.) coloured, bright coloured, handsome, P. T.
sJ^{^^)J rudah-poH (subs.) a persistent, or, importunate person ; an
incubus, an old man of the sea, P.
"^jyj rozah (subs.) a fast, the month Bamaz&n, P.
J^^ rumal (subs.) a napkin, a towel, a handkerchief [from m

" face" and malidan " to wipe," P.],
cJ^^/ ru^an (subs.) madder (a dye), Kh. P.

J

]) zd (subs.) trouble, annoyance [for iza, A.].
9JJ zdgh (subs.) a jackdaw.

*«^1; zdghchah^ . ,

Si f (subs.). The same, Kh.

^l; zdqehah )

\s)j^l; zaghun (subs.) mustard [only used for extracting oil].
fJX^'J zamaruq (subs.) a root eaten cooked in milk [in Wakban,
Badakhshan, &c.].

jii^J zaghir (subs.) linseed, flax (grown only for the oil),
•-^rt^j zamburak (subs.) a gun, a piece of artillery.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 116

^firrj zanjir (subs.) a chain, P.
^— ' US>^A»*; zanjir-la^'t'tnals (v. caos.) to cause to put in chains.
*— ^^^•^^j;*^* zanjir 'la-* sh-mah (v. recip.) to chain together.
^ y^j zanjir-la-mah (v. tr.) to chain, to put in chains, to chain

up (as a door), P. T.
^^^*ji^) zanjir 'la- n-mah (v. pass.) to be enchained,
^i? zang (subs.) rust,
^mJy^^j zangharah (subs.). The same as zamhirah.
uJ^UiXOf zang-la-H-mak (v. caus.) to cause to rust, to allow to rust.
^*w; zang-la-mah (v. intr.) to rust, to become rusty.

j^* z6r (subs.) strength, force, violence, P.
($^h}j zor-la-H-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to use force, or, violence.
ij-*^j)j zSr-la-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to use force together, to eiert

themselves together, or, against one another.
(J^ JV zSr-la-rndq (v. tr.) to use force to, to use violence to, P. T,
O^J)j zSr-liq (subs, and adj.) force, violence ; strong, violent.
sj'jj zSlan (subs.) fetters.

^ yi^^L^' zerik'tur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to be wearied, to cause

irksomeness.
^^^^^^i;i) zerik-ish-mak (v. recip.) to be wearied (of anything) to-
gether,
i— f ^'♦^;A^ zerik-mak (v. intr.) to be wearied, to feel (anything) irk-
some.
J^j zigJtir (subs.). The same as zaghir,
^W^* Zilchaq (prop, name) a small river or canal a few miles
south of Y&rkand.
^^^J zilchah (subs.) a long-pile carpet, a Turkey carpet.

^ sd (subs.) a kite [bird].
<3V^ sahaq (subs.) instruction, a lecture. [Corr. A.].
V^ sdp (subs.) the handle of an axe, spado, &c.

116 R. B. Shaw— -4 Vocabulary of the Language [Exia» No. for

^Ul«M Bopaq (subs.) the eje of a button (formed of wire).
^IjliUU*' Mapaq-ta-maq (t. tr.) to make an eye to a batton.
^jV*Am> gap^maq (v. tr.) to thread (a needle), to striug (bead«).

^^ Mabun)
jjU^^Uw tai'tur-maq (v. cans.) to canse to aelL
'A.JJi^J^*^ mtUUh-tnaq (v. recip.) to sell together.
^U^ idi-mdq (v. tr.) to sell, to gire in barter.
/AjJX^jJ^ idt-ipdl-rndq (y. tr.) to buj, [literally, to take by purchase].
^^mJ^^ mtt'iq^iz (yL adj.) unsold.
^^|ifljjUif gdt'iq-liq (vl. adj.) sold.
jlUUi^ M^iUmdq (v. pass.) to be sold.
^Im» gaeh (subs.) a starling.
^^ 9aeh (subs.) hair of the head, Kh.
^V».Ui §aehaq (subs.) a tassel. [For ehaeliaq,']
JU^^ gackqan (subs.) a rat, a mouse. Also, the name of one of
the years of the Turki cycle.
^Urj^I^Uw gaeh-tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to sow (seed).
^UAy>U» saeh-uh-maq (v. recip.) to sow in company.

J^»^Vm gaeh'mdq (v. tr.) to sow (seed). The same as ehaehmaq,
^Ul*^^ gaeh-iUrndq (v. pass.) to be sown.

^USI^Vm sdra-H-maq (t. caus.) to cause to sing (as a bird).
^U^IjU* gdrO'^ sh-maq (v. recip.) to sing together (as birds).
tt I^W Bdrdgh (vl. subs.) a bird's song.
O^l;^ sdra^maq (v. intr.) to sing [said only of birds]. For galra-

maq,
^Si)j\^ Borcmg (adj.) mad, insane.
i^}/^ saroA (subs.) a caravansand, a place in a town where

traders with their cattle put up, P.
OjUw Sdrt (prop, name) a term applied by the nomads (Eiigfaiz,
Kazzaks, <&c.) to dwellers in settled habitations,
whether Turks or T&jiks^ >. e,, whether Turanianfi or
Iranians.

I

1878.] qf Eastern IStrkUtdn. 117

i^J^J^ ^arigh^OT'maq (v. intr.) to become yellow.
^j\,^Aj\ij\Mt Borigh'ai'H'maq (v. caas.) to cause to become yellow.
^U.M^lc;U* wrigh^dH'Sh'-maq (v. recip.) to become yellow together.
^'^li;U» garigh-ai-maq (v. intr.) to become yellow.
y^)^ sarghu (adj.) deaf.

tj^^ Bori (advl. affix) as, in the measure of [after the Inde-
finite Verbal Substantive].

^Y •*^^* I (.dj.) yellow.
^)U Bdriq )

e^^l^Uf Sarigh-St (prop, name) literally * yellow grass.' The name
of a plain near the Karakoram.
Jy^^is/^ Sarigh-Aighur (prop, name) a place mentioned in the

Tawarikh-i-Bashidi as in the direction of Lake Lob.
There is at the present day a hill near Karashahr called
Aighur-Taghi. This seems to have been the home of
Uighurs [A'ighur means " a stallion"].
\JiT^iiJ^ Sarigh-Chopan (prop, name) a stage on the road between

Sariqol and Wakhan (nearest the latter). Mentioned
in the Tawarikh-i-Bashidi, and by modem travellers.
Jy' c5^^ Sikriq-qol (prop, name) a wide valley and district on the

east of Pamir in the dominions of K^hghar. [Often
spelt at the present day J^^^ ScLriqol.'] The name

is derived from 8ariq "yellow," and qol (which see),
the Kirghiz name for a wide valley (distinguished from
jiigha "b, gorge"). The name has been wrongly sup-
posed to be that of a Lake, after the manner of IsHgh-
hul J^gi**' " Hot Lake," which is formed with kill
" lake" (spelt with a different guttural and pronounced
with a different vowel). Sariqol is only one of a series
of similar compounds, used in this region, and should not
be divorced from them ; e. g., Sarigh^Chopany Sarigh-
AJighuTy Sarigh'St, 8ari^ ; on the other hand its
second element is found again in King-qol ^ wide valley.'*
See qol.

118 K. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

4S^>^ Sariqta (prop, name) literally, * yellow slant.' Name of a
part of the Qaraqiish Valley.
J^ sdz (subB.) a marsh.
J^ saz (subs.) any musical instrument, P.
1;^ saza (subs.) punishment, P.
\s)]y^ sazan (subs.) a species of fish, Kaz.
^U)^'^ sdz-la-^t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to tune.
^UA) f^ sdz-ia-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to tune up together.
^^^/^ ddZ'la-maq (v. tr.) to tune, to bring into tune, P. T.

i^J^ sdZ'liq (subs.) harmony (chiefly used metaphorically), P. T.
^uXxmW gdH-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be putrid.
O^^^^^^ 9dai'9h maq (v. recip.) to be putrid together.

^ ^ / (vl. adj.) putrid, stinking.

^^^Um sdsiq J

^34l*x»^U# gasigh-liq (vl. subs.) putridity, stinkingness.
^UaawUm sdsi-maq (v. intr.) to putrefy, to be putrid, to stiuk.

P^ sdgh (subs.) wellness, happiness.
^It^Ui saghddq (subs.) a bow.
jfi]^\m saghraghu (adj.) deaf.

kJT/^^ sdghri (subs.) a leather prepared from horse-skin (from the
back of the horse) [ P shagreen].
j^^ saghiz (subs.) fine clay.
^jjIc^Um sagJiizghan (subs.) a magpie.
(jv^^ saghliq (subs.) a ewe.

f^^ saghim (subs.) mirage, distorted and magnified objects as
seen through the heated atmosphere near the ground.
O^apU* saghmaq (v. tr.) to milk.

jfi^ saghu (subs.) a wooden butt or pail.
{ji^^*** saghin (adj.) giving milk, * milch.'
^v.4mimjjj^Ui gaghin-iah-maq (v. recip.) to yearn for one another.
^UijxliM gaghifi-maq (v. tr.) to yearn for (a person).
J^^ safdl (adj.) of earthenware.
(3^^ safdq. For tapah (which see).

Ig78.] of Eoiiem Turkutdn. 119

^U«]UliU« safUq-ia-maq. For sapaqlamaq.
^UiU» sqf-maq. For wpmaq.
^^ sdq. For sa^h.
^^ «^^^ (subs.) a playing marble.
JULw «^^^/ (subs.) a beard,
^j^; jJUUf saqalduruq (subs.) the throat-strap of a horse's head stall.
^ULUUw saq-di-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be well or happy.
^V«^ISU» adq-aUmaq (v. intr.) to be well or happy.
^USX»U« saqla-'t-maq (y. caus.) to cause to be taken care of, to

entrust.
^UAlSUw saqla-^sh'tnaq (v. recip.) to take care of one another.
^L«mU« saqja-maq (v. tr.) to take care of ; also, to wait for.

aSU* sdqa. The same as adkd,
^Lh^^Im taksan (num.) eighty. [From mkiz ''eight" and un
« ten".]
^tAjLm9^ gaksan-ailan (num. subs.) a group of eighty.
^s^\j»S\m sakaan-inehi (num. adj.) eightieth.

J^LmoLw saksaul (subs.) a sort of heavy wood which bums without
wasting, retaining its shape until after it has become a
glowing mass all through.

yP^ sakiz (num.) eight.
^1b^^jiV«M takiz-ailan (num. subs.) a group of eight.
^^)i^^ sakiz-inchi (num. adj.) eighth.
^UJI^aIUw gaUfira-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to dangle, to cause to be

of uneven length.
^JU^I^lm tatbira-'ah-maq (v. recip.) to dangle together, to be of

uneven length together.
^V^I^Lw galhira-maq (v. intr.) to dangle (as a rope) ; to be of

uneven length (as stirrups, or the two sides of a robe).
^V^j jIUm sdl'duT'fndq (v. caus.) to cause to throw.
^UAiUtf sdl'tsh-maq (v. recip.) to throw together.
y»i^ BdUghu (subs.) a sling, a throwing instrument.
^/4*^^ talqin (adj.) cool, temperate, moderately warm.

120 B. B. Shaw^^ Voealmlafy of ike Language [Extra No. for

VJ^ edkna (sabs.) drift wood.

jW^ idl-maq (v. tr.) to throw (gently), to throw off (as clothes^
to pour, to put in, to lay out (as a wall, &c.).
O^^^ Mlinehaq (subs.) any thing put on as an ornament, e. g.^

a necklace, Slo.
j]^\m eamawdr (subs.) a tea-urn ; Bussian eamooar.
V^m^Um eamea (subs.) a small baked meat dumpling.
y^^ gamiu (subs.) a glazed cotton stuff, [now made in Ehotan,
but formerly imported from China], Gh.
^^ idn (subs.) total, amount ; used by the Kasaks for ten

krors (10,00,00,000).
^^ sdn (subs.) the thigh.
^UjUUm san-a-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to count.

^UUh sanaeh (subs.) an entire goat skin used as a bag for flour, &c.
^L^UUm ean-a-^sh-maq (y. recip.) to count together.

C "^ I (subs.) account, number.

JM^ sandq )

•VJUUm ean-a-W-maq (v. pass.) to be counted.
^L«UUm san-a'tnaq (y. tr.) to count, to reckon. [following].

^jA^Ui ganjiq (subs.) an acute pain in the stomach [from the
uJ^Uas^^ eanji-mak (y. tr.) to stab, to prick, to pierce, to spear.
Jlji^ eanddl (subs.) an auYil.
^jdiUv eanduq (subs.) a box. For <5ri^ P.
j^^^ edn-eiz (adj.) countless, uncounted i also, of no account.
ycjjijlm sangraghu (adj.) deaf.
jijxi\^ eangrait (adj.) deaf, Kaz.
i.J\^XJ^U* eanguUla^maJc (y. intr.) to dangle, to hang loose.
^UJ^Ua* satMr-t-maq (y. caus.) to cause to winnow.
^^^^jljj^ saur-ush-maq (y. recip.) to winnow in company.
\^j^ eaur-maq (y. tr.) to winnow (grain).
O^J>ji^ iatiru-maq. The same.
isAijKm gaughai (subs.) a present, a keepsake, P.
i}/^ 9a6q (adj.) cold, [in form deriYcd from eaS-maq],

1878.] of Eastern TurJciHdn. 121

O^^ «a^#-7tt^ (subs.) cold, coldness.
O^-^ saO'Umaq (v. cans.) to cause to be cold, to cool (tr.).
jU-ijUii saS^'sh-maq (v. recip.) to be cold together.
i^^ taS-maq (v. intr.) to be cold, to become cold, to cool (intr.).
^S^ sdt (subs.) a desert plain ; sd^Mk " a desert gazelle."
4^^ sdi (subs.) a gorge, a ravine, a rirer-bed, Eaz.
^yi^ saydg (subs.) a mare wbicb will not consort with the herd,

Kaz. Also, the name of a Kirghiz tribe.
clk^ sSi-laq (adj.) desert, barren.
^jWlbUi tai-la^H'mdq (v. caus.) to cause to select.
^UAJtU. sair.UJ'sh-mdq (v. recip.) to select together.
^3t«lbL» gtn-la^mdq (v. tr.) to select, to pick out.
j^UiX^Uw sa^la-^n-rndq (v. pass.) to be chosen, or selected.
Jfl^lw saumaq (v. tr.). For sanjimah, Ehibgiz.
O^ Bobaq (subs.) instruction. (Corr. A.)
(j^ tapaq (subs.). The same as o^U.

i^V** ^*P^ (subs.) a soldier. For Hpahi, P.
*2XJjj^ sipur-'t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to sweep.
^imJ^j^ Hpur-maJc (v. tr.) to sweep.
^Jyf^ e^ur-qi (subs.) a broom, a brush.
JiJ*" sapil (subs.) a fortification, a battlement. For safil.
ViS-**- 8at (adj.). ugly.

JUL» sut-maq (v. tr.) [prond. almost sit-maq'] to extrude the con-
tents of an egg, the brain, <&c.
(JUIaXam sut'iUfnaq (v. pass.) to be extruded, to ooze out.
^' jy^ saehuh (adj.) sweet-toned.
uf]/«' «flra» (subs.) a rest-house for travellers in a town, P.
j^.j^ sar-bdz (subs.) an infantry soldier [literally "one who
stakes his head,"] P.

wx4/^ »arp(H (subs.) a full dress of honour (including turban or

cap, robe and boots). For gar-o-pai, P.
^^J*^ sur-chi [prond. almost eircht] (subs.) a painter and gilder,

a painter of patterns on a wall.
16

122 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

jli3;^ sarddr (subs.) a high officer charged with some particular
employ, P.
vi)t«^^0^ suT'dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to purge (as a draught).
«/^ sirka (subs.) vinegar, P.
J^j^ 9arkdr (subs.) an official (of great or small degree) chafed
with the duty of collecting and re-distributing or ac-
counting for the revenues in kind, of a large or small
district or village under the orders of its governor or
head-man; also with all the works of making up or
repair of moveable Government property, such as cloth-
ing, furniture, &c., P.

^'Irj*** sar-kardah (subs.) a high official entrusted with any par-
ticular function, P.

s^y^ surgi (subs.) a purging draught.
j^L*^ sur-mak fv. intr.) to be purged (in consequence of a
draught).
cH^ 9afil (subs.) a fortification, a battlement.
JlftM saqdl (subs.) a beard.
^t^^AAo* suq-tur-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to squeeze.
^U.Mb0AM suq-tsh^mdq (v. recip.) to squeeze in company, to squeeze
one another (by the throat).
^Uam siiq-mdq [prond. almost siq-mdq] (v. tr.) to squeeze to
express (juice, &c.).
%±j\uj)j^ sakra-Umak (v. caus.) to cause to jump close-footed.
<^U^|^X^ sakra-sh'Tnak (v. recip.) to jump together.
wW^ sakra-mak (v. intr.) to jump close-footed, to hop.
j^ sakiz (num.) eight.
Jh\/^ sakiz-atlan (num. subs.) a group of eight.
Vji^/^ sakiz'inchi (num. adj.) eighth.
e;-**^^ saksan (num.) eighty [mkiz " eight" and un '' ten"].

'^Lm salla (subs.) a turban.
^j*^ san (pron.) thou.

1878] iif Uastem Turkiitdn. , 123

^j^ sun [prond. almost «»] trial, experience.

^UjLLmi sun-a-^t-maq (v. caus,) to cause to try.

^U-*\Ami sun-a-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to try one another, or in com-

c54**^j^ sun-d'^h-liq (vl. adj.) tried, proved. [panj'

j3L«U-* sun-a-maq (v. tr.) to try, to prove, to make experiment.

^jf^ sun-ehi (subs.) a trier, an examiner.

l}UJjjt}Xm 8un-dur-*t-maq (v. cans, redupl.) to cause to break (tr.), to

cause to make broken.

^y^Jj«XXM sun-diir-maq (v. caus.) to cause to become broken, to break

(tr.). [Also sun-dur-iUh'mdq, Ac]

^U3LL« mn-la-maq (v. tr.) to try, to prove [same as sun-a-maq'],

oUi** siin-rndq (v. intr.) to break, to become broken ; [also siln*

ush-mdq, &c.].
cH*^ sutt'iq (vl. adj.) broken, in a broken state.

y*» 9il (subs.) water, a stream [the latter sense in composition
chiefly, as ak-su " white stream or water," kizil-su " red
stream or water"].
^U3]^4» Btk^a-H'fwiq (v. caus.) to cause to anoint.
JUAI^ swa-sh-maq (v. recip.) to anoint together, to anoint one
^jUI^ 9{l^.l-fnaq (v. pass.) to be anointed. [another,

jUI^-« sH-al-maq (v. intr.) to run dry (said of a cow in milk).
^U«l^ sH-a-maq (v. tr.) to spread any liquid or semi-liquid over

a surface, to anoint, to smear, to plaster.
^Ui|^ sH-a-'fi'maq (v. refl.) to anoint one's self.
jjUUy*! sU-ha-maq. The same as sHamaq [also suhatmaq, subash^
^y^ sUt (subs.) milk. [n^aq, &c.].

*^y^ sHcliuh (adj.) sweet (not bitter or sour).
^y^ sH-chi (subs.) a water-carrier. [P, X.

^^maa^Io^ saudagar-ohi'liq (subs.) the profession of a merchant.

124 R. B. Shaw — A Vooahmlary of the Language [Extra No. for

u«r Uiljjy* tudra-t-mak (v. caiiB.) to cause to drag.

t^l4^|;«3^ sudra-sh-mah (v. recip.) to drag one another, or together.

^\^]jdym gudra-'Umak (v. pass.) to be dragged.

slJ^lfdy^ tmdrO'mah (▼. tr.) to drag.

KiJ\^]jdy*»» tudra-'n-mak (▼. refl.) to drag one*s self, to be dragging (as

a rope behind a cart).

l^^J!^^ sUra-^t-maq (v cans.) to cause to ask.
^U^);^ sHra-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to ask one another, or in company.
(}^jy** sHra^q (vL subs.) inquiry into the rights of a matter,
f)jy^ eUra-'m (subs.) harrow. [justice.

O^jy** s^ra-maq (v. tr.) to ask, to inquire ; also, to rule, to have
jurisdiction.
%^jKj0]jyMi 9urtMnah (v. tr.) to drag.
^^Jji^J}*** sUrt'tilr-mak (v. cans.) to cause to wipe.

^Uj;^ turt-mak (v. tr.) to wipe, Kh. ; to smear, Y.
kmJu^yjj^ gurt-Ush-mak (v. recip.) to wipe in company.
jrjj*** turgu (subs.) a purging draught.
O^Jy^ sHr-mdq (▼. tr.) to ask. The same as tura-maq,
\^\yj^m sOr-mak (v. tr.) to drive together (sheep, &c.).
^*Vi^ fur-ush-mak (v. recip.) to drive together in company, to
drive one another alternately backwards and forwards
(as cattle fighting).
~jyy^ iuruk (subs.) a flock, a herd [from 9urmak'],
M)pjy^ suriin (subs.) a Boyal assembly, a King's Court.

%^^\^^jfyM» sur^un-chak (adj.) stumbling, given to stumbling.
^ ^Jjy^ sur-un-mak (v. refl.) to stumble [qu. to drive one's self

together].
Jy BOX (subs.) a word, a speech ; also, any written matter.
SmS\j^ gozaq (subs.) venereal disease.
*— ' ^^^djj*»» BuZ'dur-mak (v. cans.) to cause to strain (through a cloth, Ac.).
Jrjy^ Buz-gu (subs.) a strainer, a cullender.
'^yJjMt guzguch (subs.) a small-toothed comb (with a rib in tbe
middle).

1878.] ofSastem TurhUidn. 125

v^UJ)^ Boz-la-t-mak (▼. eaas.) to canae to speak.
clXft^^^^ soZ'la-^sh-mah (▼. recip.) to speak together.
yjJ^yyM goZ'la-mah (v. tr.) to speak, to say, to talk.
\±y^'ijym soz-la'^n-mak (v. refl.) to talk to one's self.
cSJV^*^ tuZ'fnak (v. tr.) to strain, to filter ; to remove solids from
a saueepan.
\jj^jjj)*^ suz-ul-fnah (t. pass.) to be strained, or filtered.
^UJ^lcyi gH-ffhar-^t-maq (v. caos.) to cause to water.
^Uj&^VijAM fH-^har-Bh^maq (v. recip.) to water in company.
(j^f^^*^ fH^har-fnaq (v. tr.) to water (the ground or a horse).

y^j^ sH-ffhu (subs.) a water-paiL
O^y^y^ f^g^u-ehaq (subs.) a small pail ; also the name of a tank

in the city of Yarkand.
(S^^jy^y^ 9Uffhur'*i-mdq (▼. caus.) to cause to draw out.
iS^jy^y** 9t$g1iur-mdq (v. tr.) to draw out (any long object as a sword

from the scabbard, or a stick from a faggot).
^Umjj;^^^ tugTiwr-ush-rndq (v. recip.) to draw out in company, to draw

(swords) on both sides.
O^y^ tughoq (adj.) cold.
i^jfyii» tdf (subs.) fine Unen or cotton cloth.
^^^ idfa (subs.) a raised platform for sitting on ; origin of our
* sofa,' P.
uS^y* n[/S (subs.) a recluse, a religious man, A.
fjy^ 9uq (subs.) the stroke of the evil eye.
^j^ 90qta (subs.) black puddings (the blood of animals filled
into sausages ; used in feeding dogs), EIaz.
^l^yuy* Boq-tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to strike.
^USjM aoq-maq (v. tr.) to strike.

^IJyM ^uq-maq (v. tr.) to sheathe, to pass any long object into a
receptacle.
J^y*^ 9oMr (adj.) blind, Kaz.
yj'j^y^ toqush (▼. subs.) a fight, a striking [from soqmaq'],
^U^y»^Mi soq^fuih-nutq (v. recip.) to strike one another, to fight.

120 R. B. Shaw — A Tbcahuhxry of the Language [Extra No. for

^U^^ soq-ul-maq (v. para.) to be beaten.
fyj^ *oqum (subs.) a fat ox.
cJ^ 9uk (subs.) millet cleaned of its busk.
^y** tuia (subs.) an ear*ring.
s*Jj^y»» sukfuk (subs.) a tree used for fuel. The same as iahavl,
iJjMyi» tuh-mak (v. tr.) to scold, or vituperate.
viX^^ 9uk'maJc (v. tr.) to undo a seam.
sj^yj*^ tukush (subs.) abuse, vituperation.
ijJU^y^Aw iuk'tuh-mak (v. recip.) to scold or abuse one another.
s*J\^j>y»i iuk-uth-mak (v. recip.) to undo a seam together.
<— -^UJ^5^ suk'Ul'tnak (v. pass.) to be scolded.
KU^yjm suk'Ul-mak (v. pass.) to be undone (of a seam).

^J^ 9ugat (subs.) a willow tree. Also the name of a place
(where these trees grow) and of a Pass, in the Eaen-
Lun (near Shahid-ullab).
^^y^ tugal (subs.) a wart.
J^^ 9ol (adj.) left [hand].
^lc)^««' MoUaglidi (adj.) left-handed.

(jl^y^ su-laq (subs.) a watering-place for cattle.
O^y^ tuWq (subs.) a house in which cattle or sheep are kept.
^Knytt sulaqai (adj.). The same as solaghai.
^Uj)j^ sula-^q-maq (v. intr.) to be enclosed, or shut up (in any

place).
J^'^ eula-maq (v. tr.) to enclose, to shut up.
^^iy** gu-la-maq (v. tr.) to water (either cattle or the ground),
y^ 8ulu (subs.) breath, Eaz.
Oj^y^ 9uluq (subs.) a bit (horse's).

(}y^y^ sU'luq (subs.) a waterproof, or garment to ward off the
rain.

i$^*^Jry*^ Bulu'q'iUh-maq (v. recip.') to be enclosed together or at the

same time,
^wy^ sulu^q-maq (v. intr.) to be enclosed.
i^y** suliq. For suluq (both senses).

J

ofEatiem Turhiatdn. 127

fy*^ sum (adj.) thick, massive.
fjj^jy^^** 9um-ur'i-mah (v. caus.) to cause to become fat^ to fat-
ten (tr.).
^Ij^jyy** 8um-ur-mak (v. intr.) to become fat.
iiJUw&jijjK*^ sum-ur-ush^mak (v. recip.) to become fat together.

^S^jMt 9ting (post-pos.) after, behind [governs the aflix din]. Also

absolutely as an adverb, Kaz., Eh.
^^r* swngach (subs.) the oa coccygU,
^Kij^ sungaq (subs.) a bone.
^^^KjyM aungalchaq (subs.) the heel-bone.
jKxJjym swig-pidz (subs.) a leek, Ch. P.

\;^y*' sung^ra (post-pos. and adv.). The same as sung, Eaz., Kh.

t^^j^ sung-ghi (adj.) hinder, aftermost, following.

TSr^y^ 9U/nguch (subs.) a culvert, a hole for the escape of water, Y.

Jr^y^ wiwytw (subs.) a tendon. [to digest.

siJ^jf^y^ sung-ur-Umak (v. caus. redup.) to cause to absorb, to cause

yiJh*jy^y** sung-ur-mah (v. caus.) to absorb, to digest, [literally, to

cause to be absorbed or digested]. See singurmak,
siJK^yj^ym aung-ur-ush-mak (v. caus. recip.) to absorb or digest to-
gether.
^K^iytt tun-maq (v. tr.) to stretch, to extend (a limb), sun-'Up yet^
mah to reach (by stretching out a limb).
^K^Jjijiym sun-ush-maq (v. recip.) to stretch (limbs) towards one

another, or together.
^^)y*» suum-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be or become cold, to

cool (tr.).
^U4;yw sutoU'^sh'tnaq (v. recip.) to become cold together, to cool
(intr.) together.
(}^y^ suum'q (vl. adj.) cold, cool.

ii^yy^ suwu-maq (v. intr.) to become cold, to cool.
v«i^tajb^ auya'^'mak (v. caus.) to cause to support or prop up.

l.y^ su^gagh j ^^^^^^^ ^.^ [HtemUy • water-fat'].
jm^ su-gaq )

128 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [£xtra No. for

^•^^y^ 9ugak (subs.) a bone, Ka&
J4r^ 9ugal (subs.) a wart, Eaz.

Muya^U-mak (v. pass.) to be supported or propped (as a
sick man).

f^y^ eHjfam (subs.) a measure (the span between tiie forefinger
and thumb).
fjjifl^ euga^mak (v. tr.) to support or prop up (as a sick man);
also, to prop up, or cause to lean, any object against
some firmer thing ; also metaphorically, to support the
credit of any one.
cl/L«]UU^ eugam-la-mak (t. tr.) to span or measure with the thumb

and forefinger. [against

wUiU^ Buga'*n'mak (t. refl.) to support one's self by, to lean

sSJUJuj^jy* suga'^n-ish-mak (▼. refl. recip.) to lean against one another.

yiJLffiijm suika-mak (v. tr.) to smear, to daub.
i^UASlijyw iuika-^n'ish'fnak (v. refl. recip.) to rub or brush against

one another (as men in a crowded street).
s±jUX^jm tuika-'n-mak (v. refl.) to smear one*s self ; also, to rub one*s

self (as an animal against a post).
c5 W^ sSi-mdq (v. tr.) to kill by cutting the throat ; also to skin.
s1)\a^ suumak (▼. tr.) to love, to like ; to kiss, to caress.
s^j^y^yM Bilg-uk'luk (vl. adj.) beloved.

^j^jiy*** iug-un-chi (subs.) a reward for pleasure given, a (substan-
tial) mark of gratitude.
ijj^jiy^ eug-un-mak (v. refl.) to be pleased or happy (literallj, to

like one's self, ^ to fancy one's self').
^yhix^ sug'Un'Uch (subs.) pleasure, happiness.
OUiUA4tf gipa-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to stroke.
JUAV^ gipa-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to stroke one another.

O^^ifr^ f^pa-maq (v. tr.) to stroke.
O^ ^i^ dpa-la^maq (v. tr.) to stroke continuously ; also speci;ally»

to feel about for any thing, to search with the fingers
or hand, *' tdtonner,**

1878.] of Uastem Turkistdn. ' 129

jUiUu« gipa-'n^rndq (v. refl.) to stroke one's self, to plume itself
(of a bird), to arrange one's hair, Ac.
giis^ eipach (subs.) a turban of white cloth.

^^i-* sip^mak (v. tr.) to strew, to sprinkle, to scatter [by drop-
ping, not by casting].
Jh^ Htdr (subs.) a guitar [seK " three", tdr « string"], P.
s^}^ Bttdr-chi (subs.) a player on the guitar, P. T,
^ sikh (subs.) a spit, a skewer, P.

j^ Hrr (subs.) the colour vermilion j cinnabar, also colour in
general.

j^ Sirr (prop, name) the Eiver Jazartes or Saihun.
Kl^^^ji^ serpi-'Umak (v. pass.) to be moved forward in a wave.
«i'^j>4*« serpi-mak (v. tr.) to move (a fluid or semi-fluid) forward in

a wave.

^^^^* aerpu'n^mak (v. refl.) to move (itself) forward in a wave,

to surge.

C^^Uyji^ serqura^'t^fnaq (v. cans.) to cause sharp pain in any parti-

cular spot of the body.
C^]j^j^ »ergntra^maq (v. intr.) to feel sharp local pain.
O^^j^ strr-la^'t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to paint.
^jU-*J^ju» sirr-la^^gh-maq (v. recip.) to paint together.
JUS^ sirr-la-maq (v. tr.) to paint, to lay on colour.
<jHir^ sitr-liq (adj.) painted, coloured.
C^ji^ Biyir-maq (v. tr.) to tell one's beads (of a rosary).

^Uu^ giriJUmaq (v. cans.) to cause to quilt.
^Uj^ siriJl^maq (v. pass.) to be quilted.

jUj^ giri^fnaq (v. tr.) to quilt, to ornament a garment, &c. by
rows of stitches.

>^ Hz (pron.) you, [used respectfully to a single person as in
English].

j^ 8iz (post-pos.) without, deprived of; also, as a privative
affix to adjectives, Ac., \e. ^., khmh-siz ** un-happy" or
" Ji«-plea8ed"].
17

130 B. B. Shaw— -i Foeahulofy of tie Language [Extra No. for

\jj^j^dji:^ ie^dur-mab (v. eatiB.) to cause (inyoluntarilj), to disooTer

or become aware, to let out (a aecret).
3^)y^y^ «iir^Atif-«ia^ (▼. intr.) to whistle.

jy>i« 9ialaq (adj.) unwell, ailing ; agkriq-nzlaq (subs.) an epi-
demic.
jU)^ nZ'la^'i'fnaq (▼. oaus.) to cause local pain.
^jUtl)*^ tiz-la-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to feel pain together.
JU))J^ nz-la-maq (▼. intr.) to feel any local pain.
0^>i^ siz-maq (▼. tr.) to make a mark by scratching.
L£jLf\Ka$ sez-mak (▼. tr.) to detect, to become aware.

Oiji^ 9iz*iq (tI. subs.) a scratch, a line or mark scratched.
^Siji^ uZ'ik (vl. subs.) a due, a solution.
CJ^^«J^}J^ aez^iU-mak (t. pass.) to be detected.
uJ!»jftto gatjung (subs.) a tailor, Ch.

c^ 9il (subs.) a flood, a flooding, A.
^UjXxo* iiJa-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to rub down, to cause to lue

friction.
{jf^^t^ rila-U-maq (y. caus.) to cause to entertain (a guest), EjlZ.
^j\^Mit%m Bila-sh'tnaq (v. recip.) to rub down together.
(j^%* Ma-^ih-maq (▼. recip.) to entertain one another, Kaz.
^^txot gila-maq (▼. tr.) to rub down^ to use friction.
^UXjl* Hla-mdq (v. tr.) to entertain (a guest) to show hospitality.

f^ sim (subs.) wire, P.
V^.*^ fim-ab (subs.) quicksilver [literally ** silver- water*'], A. P.
^l/fi;UjUw stmar'tnaq (v. tr.) to tuck up one's sleeves or trousers.
^L«)Ujum Bima-la-maq (v. tr.). The same as smarmaq,
i^JUS^^AM* semdr-'i'tnak (v. caus.) to become fat, to fatten (tr.).
lL^U^4Ju« semir-^ih-mak (v. recip.) to become fat together.
ijJ'^^jAXMt $emir-fnak (v. intr.) to become fat, to fatten.
j*^ semiz (adj.) fat.
^^ sin (subs.) a trial, an experiment.
O^*^^-*^ iina-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to try.
^Uw&viju« gina-sh-maq (v. recip.) to try together.

1878.] of Eastern TurhUt6n. 181

Jli^ Hna^^q (vl. adj.) tried, proved.
^JUUju«# sina-tnaq (v. tr.) to try, to make trial, to test, to prove.
^L«;^(UJUw itn-dur-maq (v. oaus.) to cause to break (iatr.), to break

(tr.).
^sf^^ iin-ehi (subs.) a trier, an assajer, an experimenter ; spe-
dalljy a judge of horse-flesh.
^jJlfjjdiXxm Mtng-dur-mah (v. caus.) to cause to be absorbed, to absorb
^^j^^"^^ Binggir-mak (v. tr.) to blow one's nose. (tr.).

4JIJJUM timgil (subs.) a sister younger than one's self.
u,/UliAw 8ing*mak (v. intr.) to be absorbed, to dry up.
{^Iajj^xxm* sing-ur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to dry up, to absorb.
jjUiJui* sin^fnaq (v. intr.) to break, to become broken.

(£»^ shdp (subs.) a straight sword.
^) VjLft %hapalaq (subs.) the palm of the hand together with the
inner side of the fingers ; also, a slap (with the open
hand).
Jv^^ shital (subs.) a percentage of the winnings at any game,

taken by the landlord or by the Qovernment.
j'^ ahdiir (subs.) a man who goes in advance to clear the way
by calling out to the people.
jUJI^li 8hdtir4a-'t'maq (v. caus.) to cause to make a noise so as to
scare away birds, Ac.

m

^U^S^IA 8hdtir'laJ'$Tumaq (v. recip.) to make a noise, Ac. in com-

pany.
^^J^U shditr-la-ghueh (subs.) a rattle for scaring away birds, Ac.
^^y^tjjlM sMttr-la-maq (v. tr.) to make a noise so as to scare away
birds, Ac., to spring a rattle, P. T.

•n A r (subs.) a ladder.

j^^ shdtir. The same as>lA
^^ ihdkh (subs.) a branch, a twig ; also a horn, antler, P.

132 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^Ift^Lft tikdhhdr (subs.) potash, P.
^3^^^ shahh'la-maq (v. intr.) to brancli out.
C^i^ti $Md'Uq (subs.) happiness, pleasare, P. T.
Olj^ol^'^ shdrdq-shdrdq (subs.) the rattle or noise of a child's play-
thing, of a waggon, &c,
O^^b^ sharaq-la-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to rattle, to rattle (tr.).
^LoWI^Li eharaq-la-maq (v. intr.) to rattle, to make a rattling noise.
O^hji^J^ thdr-qura-maq (v. intr.) to make a splashing noise, m»

torrent or a waterfall.
^\^jyLiXJ0 shdMh-tur-iHaq (v. caus.) to cause to hurry.

^U^L& ghdah-maq (v. intr.) to hurry, to make haste.
JfL«;^lA sAdsh-ur-maq, The same as shathturmaq.
J^^ ehaghai (subs.) a jackal.
•— *^ §hd/ (subs.) a straight sword.
^U>IiU» 9Mf'la'*t'mdq (v. caus.) to cause to strike with the sword.
JfU^Vil* gh^^a-^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to strike one another or together

with the sword.
jUliU gMf-la-tndq (v. tr.) to strike with the sword.
iJ^^ shakal (subs.) broken walnut or other fruit-shells,
cr^ shdl (subs.) a wooden plank. Also P. stuff made of goat*?
down, shawl.
^JicWLa $kdl.yaghliq (subs.) a woollen (shawl-stuff) handkerchief

or small scarf.
jjUJJlilS^A shalaq-la-^t-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to jog, to cause to be

shaken uncomfortably.
jjLtBUvA shaldq-la-rndq (v. intr.) to jog, to be shaken uncomfortaUj.
^Vli, ghallaqi (adj. and subs.) impudent, shameless (of a woman) ;

also, a shameless woman.
O^W shaltaq (adj.) defiled.
\^^ ghdli (subs.) rice in the husk, P.
f^*** sham (subs.) a candle [made in Eastern Turkist&n of taUo*
with a wick of cotton wound round a central piece of
reed], A.

1878.] qf Eastern TurJeUtdn. 133

^W tihdma (subs.) refuse tea leaves after infusion.
JL«IA gkamdl (subs.) wind, (? A.).

*^^ shamdh (subs.) a candle.
i-X>t4 shang (subs.) a present, [? Ch.].
^«AXiL& ghangghi ) (adj. and subs.) truculent, turbulent (of men),
yiXiV^ ihangghu ) vicious (of animals).
(y^ shduqum (subs.) tumult, noise.
^U3)jL& shdU'la-^t-mag (v. caus.) to cause to murmur (as water),
^l^l^tft ghdu-la-tnaq (v. intr.) to murmur (as distant waters), to
hum (as a kettle).
^j^jr^ shduni (subs.) a thread of hemp, flax or hair.
^^ shot (adj.) dandy, well-dressed.

1^^ shdi (subs.) a kind of silk stufE with large brilliant pattern^
made in Central Asia [properly shahi, P.].
v*JUlbl& ghdUla^'t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to prepare.
^^\a!!IAA ghdi'Ia-mak (v. tr.) to prepare, to make ready.
\mmSuitAl ghdUla-n-mah (v. refl.) to prepare one's self.

& shub'Shuh (subs.) the shuffling noise of slippers.
^jKJi'ijxi* ghihar-lO'^ih-maq (v. recip.) to whisper together.
^l*S^xA shibaT'la-maq (v. tr.) to whisper.
y^ 8hU'h4 (pron.) this very, this same.
^Uj2tLx«u aUpiUla-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to whistle (a whip).
^UJ]Ua^ shtpil-la-maq (v. intr.)to whistle through the air (as a whip
or stick quickly moved), to whizz.
h^ ihakh (subs.) a precipitous cliff. Also (adj.), hard, diffi-
cult, P.
^Ub^ ihakhdr (subs.) potash, P.
^^*^ shadah (subs.) a string of beads, &o.
^"^ fj^ «^rm-/»X; (adj.) shameful, also shame-faced, P. T.

s^\m>^ thUhak (adj. and subs.) in the second year [sheep or
goats].
\JJ]j^Xa^J* ihish-tur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to swell.
i^U^^ shish-mak (v, intr.) to swelL

184 H. B. Shaw — A Voeahularff of the Language [Extra No. for

4* *

shashi (subs.) a flimsy material used for linings.
i^y\kSt Shaghdwal (subs.) a high official of Central Asian soYeretgnSi
who is supreme over all the Kazis and Mullahs.
^jUjUlii shifd-tap'tnaq (comp. v. intr.) to recover (from illnes8)i

piterallj ** to find a cure"], A. T.
vUt«jj^Ujt ghtfa-kurmah (comp. ▼. intr.) to recover by the use of a

remedy (from illness), to obtain benefit (from a remedy),
[literally ** to see or experience a cure"], A. T.

i^lCot shak'kdk (adj.) suspicious, jealous; also (subs.) a susja-
cious person, P. T.
U^ shakl (subs.) appearance, form, A.
c)^ shakal (subs.) a walnut shell.
J^ shamdl (subs.) wind (from any quarter), [? A.].
*•«-* shamah (subs.) candle [for g^, A.].
y^ ghu (pron.) that [said of things that are present, though
not immediately under one's hand].
y>y^ ahtt-hu (pron.) this or that very, the same.
y^y*^ shuti (subs.) a ladder.
^r*** shokh (adj.) playful, P.

t^yM 9hokhla (subs.) a small yellow seed contained in a pod or

fruit, [used in Turkist&n as medicine, and in IHbet by

the women to stick onto their faces]. The seed of

Solanum nigrum according to Aitchison.

^UXa.^ $hokh'la-mdq (v. tr.) to render playful, to make idle, to

cause to play truant.
jVJlU.^ shokh-la^'n-mdq (v. refl.) to be playful, to play [literally,

to render one's self playful], to play truant.
jjU Ay lU.^ shokh'la-'n-ush-fndq (v. refl. recip.) to play together or with

one another.
Or^y^ shokh'luq (subs.) playfulness, idleness, distraction.
**^jy^*V* shudurung (subs.) dew.

jC}6y*» shudugdr (subs.) land ploughed previous to sowing, which
is only done by very careful cultivators, (? P.).

1878. ] of Uastem Turkistdn. 185

Jy*' shot (subs.) white efflorescence on the ground, common in

certain districts and making the land barren, P.
h^ shora (subs.) saltpetre, P. Also, a small plant.
i}yT^ tA^./tfgr") (subs, and adj.) coyered with white efflorescence,
iyfjX^ shor-liq) salsugineous ; also, land so affected, P. T.
cX>t&^ shoihang (subs.) shears, (? Ch.).
f^y^ sKoq, For tihohh^ P.
(jy^ shoq (subs.) an inclination or hobby, A.
•^^ $huk (interj.) Silence ! Be quiet !
J;^ ihul (pron.) that [applied to less distant objects than uif
but not implying such nearness as hul],

^y^ tihulla (subs.) a diah composed of rice, meat and fat, cooked
tin it is soft.

fy^ ahum (adj.) unlucky, unfortunate, ne'er do weel, A.
'^j^ ahum-ehah [for ahun-ehah] (adj. pron., also adv.) that

much, to that amount or extent, [from $hul ' that' and

choky for chin ^ amount* or ^ extent'].
(3^T^ fhum-luq (subs.) bad luck, coming to grief, [through fault

or mismanagement), A. T.
]iXijMt ghun-dd (adv.) there, in that (place), at that (place), [from

shut ' that' and dd <in' or ' at'].
• I . A , An Jt^ (ftdjl* pron., also adv.) that like, such ; also, like
^ . V that, so. [From shul ' that' and diq or da^h

i^\^jM ghun-gha-chah (comp. adv.) that far, as far as to that,
[from $hul ' that', gha ' to* and chah for chtn * extent'].
jU)y* ghunqdr (subs.) a kind of hawk, (P) ' JPhlco Henderaoni^
l^hJyM ghun-^a-ohah. The same as shun^haehah.
Ay^UCiy]^^ shu-nun^-ffha-chah. The same, Y.
jKSS^yM shungqdr. The same as shunqdr.

^&^ shaikh (subs.) the chief person in charge of a mosque.
Shaikh'UUIslam, a sort of religious police-officer, look-
ing after religious observances as well as bazir morals.
*r4** shirah (subs.) grape- juice (sherbet) ; also rice-water, P.

186 R. B. Shaw— ul Voedbulaiy of the Language [Extra No. for

^,^^^/i^ ehirish (subs.) a powder made from a certam root, and
used mixed with water for glue.
J^ ehihh For ghahl.

sj^i^ ehilan (subs.) cooked rations issued to soldiers, P.
^^^^^^ ihilan-ehi (subs.) the officer charged with issuing these
rations, P. T.
^UU£ skiliaq (subs.) a frivolous complaint of assault, made for
the purpose of extracting money. [plaints.

^^^a^^Axii shiltaq-ehi (subs.) a person given to making such com-
fi)^ ihiltm (subs.) paste made of flour or rice.
fiA ehim (subs.) wide outer trousers, often large enough to
take in the skirts of several robes.
^UyUx-* shim^di-a-rndq (v. tr.) to tuck up quickly (sleeves or

trousers,) [? from shim and dlmdq * to take'] (governs
the accusative both of the limb and also of the gar-
ment), [trousers.
^UilUxft shim-dl-a^n'mdq (v. refl.) to tuck up one's sleeves or

*A4*-* zc^ifah (subs.) a woman. [A.]
\j^ zalal (subs.) injury, [for awar, A.].

(3^^ td'bdq (subs.) a dish, (of earthenware, wood or metal), A.
^Ulb famdq (subs.) the throat ; also Kh., any eatable.
V^^ fandb (subs.) a measure used in measuring land, «Mr.,
a square whose side is forty gaz in length, each gaz being
about 8 feet 6 inches. Also, the tax levied on gardens
and pleasure-grounds, which is assessed per pandbf A.
\^^ fdi (subs.) a young horse rising two years old.

11^ f (subs.) a walking-stick, or pole.

jUVto fagaq )

» fillah (subs.) gold ; also, a gold coin worth 10 shillings, P.
\^r^ to'i (subs.) a feast given on the occasion of a wedding or
circumcision.

1878.] ofUiutem TurkUidn. 137

^11 ^ ^ > (subs.) an animars hoof.
jU^b ^uydq )

^L«j^i>^^ tot-dur-maq (y. caus.) to cause to be satiated, to satiate.

^Uj^ fcn-maq (v. intr.) to become satiated, to feast.

^^^jjo foy-in^maq (v. refl.) to satiate one's appetite, to goi^e

^^Js tayyar (adj.) ready, fit ; also, fat. A, [one's self*

t

^jUWli gMja-maq (v. tr.) to gnaw.

^ ylidr (subs.) a cave, a cavern, A.
(3^\yj^ ghdr-qwra-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to give a hollow sound,
O^W^ gMr-qura-maq (v. intr.) to give a hollow sound.
s^j^M yhanjurghah (subs.) a strap for fastening loads, &c., to
the back of the saddle.
^X^ ghdoyhah (subs.) a row, a disturbance, P.

jc gharr (subs.) a woman of bad repute.

jC ghilrr (interj.) a term of mockery, used to a person who
fails to accomplish what he has tried to do.

^^^iiijjfi yhurung-la'^sh-maq (v. recip.) to speak together in such a

way that the by-standers do not understand.

^L«3LGjj^ ghurung-la-maq (v. intr.) to tinkle (as a camel's bell) ; also,

to talk gibberish, to give an uncertain answer.
j^ ghalhir (subs.) a coarse sieve.
^^Sm ghaltak (subs.) a wooden disk (used as a wheel for play
carts in Turkist&n, and for working ones in many
parts of India) ; also, a roller, a pulley, a reel, [ ? P.
from ghaliidan].

'•y^ Qhalchah (subs.) the name applied to the Aryan (Iranian)
inhabitants of the mountain-districts chiefly Shiyar (Ko-
lab, M&cha, Karategin, Badakhsh&n, Wakh&n, &c.) ; also,
in Eastern Turkistin applied generally to a slave bought
with money.
18

188 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary ofihe Language [Extra No. for

^l^)^jtG^ ghmggliuUla'maq (v. intr.) to hum (as a swarm of bees) ;

to talk indistinctly (as a child), to babble.
j^ ghu» An aflix corresponding with our"n't"in" isn't there ?"
*' doesn't it ?" E. g. hdr-ghu "(there is) isn't there ?"
*^J^ g^Jah, For hhojah.

})y^ ghoza (subs.) a cotton-pod. For «J^ P.
^^ gholjak (adj.) mad (of a dog).

^ ghah (post-pos.) to, on to, into, &c. (Also written ga^ qa
and ka)y [used to imply action as distinguished from
rest; e,g,y kitab ga piUtim "I wrote in(to) the book;"
but hitah da tdptim " I found in the book"].
^^ ghi. See ki and gi,
i}^^ g^*J^ (subs.) a violin.

*^^ f&t (adv.) quickly. The same aapdt.
cT*^ fdfi (subs.) a dwarf with a full-sized trunk and head. The
same as pdpi,
*^y f^^ (subs.) a leg (including the foot). The same &sput.
w^^-* fuchah (adj.) empty, rotten at the core, of fair appearance
but valueless. Also^tfcAa^.

Ti • /. . , } (▼• "itr.) to snort (of a horse).

(3

i^lS qdh (subs.) a coarse woollen sack.

oLU; qalai (subs.) fold, covering, lap, stratum. B, g. obU ^
^^jyi ««>^lf iki kahat kdghaz dah yurga'ng "wrap
(it) in two folds of paper."
^^UGl*vj qahat'ia^maq (v. tr.) to lay in layers, or one on the top of

the other.

1878.] qf Eastern Ti^histdn. 139

^» I - 1 (fi^^*) * gourd used for carrying water.

jUl* qapaq)

^j^y qabirghah (subs.) a rib,
ijfj^/^ qapar-chuq (subs.) a rash on the skin.
^\j*J^\i £(^ar-maq (v. intr.) to rise in a blister (as from a bum on

the skin, or a rub on the foot from an ill-fitting boot).
^UlbU qaba-^Umdq (v. pass.) to be shut in,

^l^ljlS qahtMndq (v. tr.) to shut in, to confine (used of men only).
^jUcl^li qaba-maq (v. intr.) to bark (of dogs).
^LVS qaban (subs.) a male pig, a boar.

(J v^ ^a|>^a/ (subs.) the two side pieces of a Turki saddle, from
which the arch of the seat springs on both sides ; also,
that part of the horse's back covered by them, Eaz.
O^J^i^ Sop'tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause (a dog) to bite, to set on

(a dog). [From qap-maq,']
A^^ qap'Chak (subs.) a small sack (qab).
Oy^ q^'Chuq (subs.) a small qaby Kaz.
^l^tm^li qapia-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to wrangle together, Kaz.
^LoLoolj /^apsa-maq (v. intr.) to jangle, to wrangle, Kaz.
^3^^ qapqaq (subs.) a lid, a cover.
^U^UI qapqan (subs.) a gin for catching foxes.

j/S^ qap.qara (adj.) very black; [an intensitive form of kara],
^^U qapqun. The same as qapqan.
^WLlj qap^la-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to plate.
^t<»]LVj qap^la-maq (v. tr.) to plate (one metal with another).
c5^*i^ q^'fP'fn^q (▼. tr.) to bite [used of dogs].
^^^ qat (subs.) a fold, a stratum. [The same as qabat.']
j^J^ qatar (subs.) a line, a row, P.
^jjVcUu Qataffhan (prop, name) a tribe of Uzbek Turks inhabiting
the districts of Kunduz, &c. [A Tajik proverb says :

" Where the hoof of the Kaiaghan^s horse arrives,
'' There the dead find no grave-cloth, and the living no
home".]

140 R. B. Shaw — A Voeabuhry of the Language [Extra No. for

^ISSVj qai-qaq (adj.) stiffening, stiffened (as badly prepared lea-
ther) ; [from qat-maq],
^UXjIS qat'la-t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to fold.
^t«UjVj qat-ia^maq (v. tr.) to fold, [itself-

^tulUli qaUla-^n-maq (v. pass, and refl.) to be folded; to fold
^UJvj qat^maq (v. intr.) to become hard, to harden, to stiffen.
^UJIS qaUmaq (▼. tr.) to twist (jam into thread) ; also, to join,
to put together.
j^USUJlS qatin-a-^t'tnaq (y. cans.) to cause to travel (the same road)

repeatedly.
^l^U?\i qatin-a-maq (v. tr.) to travel (the same road) repeatedly ;

[to iterate, un-metaphorically].
^L^ylS qat-ur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to become hard, to harden

(tr.). [From qat-maq " to become hard".]
^lx;yjli qat'tur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to twist (yarn) [From qaU
maq " to twist".]

-.M ^ ^ I (subs.) curds.
JwU qdtiq )

^^ qatt'igJi \ (adj. and adv.) hard, stiff ; severe ; also, hardly, <&c«

^ijJVJ qatt'iq / [From qat'tnaq,"]
f^ qatim (subs.) a time. Bir qaiim once ; ihi qatim twice, &«.
f^^ qatim (subs.) a needle-ful (of thread).
\^S3 qacha (subs.) a vessel (of any sort), a pot, Ac.
^l*^U qa.chan (adv.) when? [Derived probably from the com.
mon element qai ^* what," and some other word to de-
note measurement of time ? chin " amount".]
4^Viv)^*>U qachan-gha-ehdh (adv.) until when ? [With the dative affix

gha and the affix chah implying * extent'.]
^11»>U qdch-q&oh (subs.) flight (before the enemy). [From qach^

maq."]
^ISa^vj q^h-qdq (adj.) given to running away.
^^•*^5*.lj qdch-qu-'nchi (subs.) a fugitive. [For qach-qu-chi.^
c5 -^^ qdch'tndq (v. intr.) to flee, to run away.

187S.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 141

C^JjT^ qdeh'Ur-fndq (v. cans.) to cause to flee, to put to flight.
O^^J^ ^dch-ush^rndq (v. recip.) to flee away together.
^^ qdchi (subs.) scissors, shears. [For qainchi,']
if-^ qachir (subs.) a mule. [For khachar. P.]
j^ qdr (subs.) snow.

Kvj qard (adj.) black. Qara^tagh often used to designate moun-
tains which are not covered with perpetual snow. (See
Eemarks, under Aq-tagh,) Qara-su is similarly used to
designate springs of water not derived from snow moun-
tains. (The same remarks apply here.)
^l^l^U qard-'t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to look, to cause to regard.
^^I;U qara-ghai (subs.) a fir-tree [generically].
^^j**!;^ qardqchi (subs.) a highway robber, a bandit.
^UJI^U qard^la-maq (v. tr.) to look frequently or carefully.
(3^'V^ qard'la-maq (v. tr.) to blacken (the face of any one, me-
taphorically), to look black upon, to regard with dis-
favour.
($^\^ qard'%mdq (v. pass, and intr.) to be blackened ; to become
black.

45^1;^ qara-liq (adj.) in mourning (which in Yarkand consists in

not shaving, putting on white and not-coloured clothes,<&c.)

^j^^fJJ qara-mdq (v. intr.) to look, to cast one's eyes [governs gha],

J^*^j;^ qara-mtui (adj.) blackish. [wheat.

{3y*l^ qora-niuq (subs.) a small black seed of a weed found among

J^h qara-^nghu (adj. and subs.) dark, obscure ; also, the dark.

OTJ^ly^ qaf^nghu^luq (subs.) darkness, obscurity.

u)^j^ qard-wal (subs.) a post of observation, a watch, [from
qartimaq'],

ffyj^ qard'ijoal'Chi (subs.) a watchman, a vidette.

Zr* qarta (subs.) the fat in a horse's stomach. Also, playing
cards. Bus.
4i^u;U qar-'tang (adj.) oldish, past the middle age.
**i^^ qarchighah (subs.) a species of a hawk, ? a gos hawk.

s^-

142 R. B. Shaw — A Vo(Mhularffof the Language [Extra No. for

^^j^ qarchi (subs.) large scissors [for qatnch$].
j^Iam^U qarsaq (subs.) a small kind of fox.
^UJt.U qdr'sh'-maq (v. intr.) to be disobedient, to be recusant [? for

qdrd*sh'tnaq *^ to exchange looks with any one"].
^U^jUl qarsh-maq (v. tr.) to mingle, to mix up.
Lc^^ qdr'shi (adv.) contrary, opposite. [? From qara-maq,
qard-^sh-maq,"]
^USXjuai;Up qdr^shUla-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to make an angry re-
joinder ; to cause to place opposite.
^l^Xju&^lS qar^shi'la-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to make rejoinders to one

another.
jfL«3U*»j;U qdr^shi-ia-maq (v. tr.) to place opposite.

jjUJU^tJ qargha-t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to curse.
j^Ia^U^IJ qargha-^sh-maq (v. recip.) to curse together.
^^^j\j qargha-maq (v. tr.) to curse.

^^\ij\j qargha-^n'maq (v. refl.) to curse one's self, viz.^ to impre-
cate curses on one's self in asseverating anything.
jijM qarghu (subs.) a blind man.
^J^i^J qarghish (vl. subs.) a curse.
*^J qarghah (subs.) a crow.

)jij^ qarqara (subs.) a tuft or crest stuck in a woman's cap.
^Viy^li qarlughaoh (subs.) a swallow,
i}ifj^ qdr-liq (adj.) snowy. Also the name of a Pass in the
Kuen-lim leading from Yolarik to Toghra-su on the
Upper Karakash.
oV^^ jarwag' (subs.) a fish hook.
^US^U^U qarma^la't-maq (v. cans.) to cause to grope.
^\J^f^ji qarma-la-maq (v. tr.) to grope (for anything in the dark).
jjV^l/o;lj qarma-maq (v. tr.) to seize, Kibgh.

\i})j^ qdmn (subs.) belly, womb.
^Itkij^lS qdrun-dash (subs.) a brother, a relation, [literally ' womb-
fellow']. The particular relation is specified by the
words : lir-tuqqan qdrundath = one generation relation

1878] of Eastern TwrhUtdn, 143

or first (degree) of relationsliip, viz., brother or sister ;
iki-tuqqan qdrundash = related in second degree, <&c.,
viz., children of brothers or sisters, &c. ; u^hul qdrundash
** a male relative ;" qiz qdrundash " a female relative."
SmfJ^ <74ri (subs.) a person who can repeat the Koran by heart, A.
%^/^ qari (adj. and subs.) old, aged (used only of living crea-
tures) ; also, an old man, an old woman.
kJ^J^ g'^mA (subs.) a span.
^UJXAj^m qdrish-la-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to span.
^L«1m^vj qdrish-ia-maq (v. tr.) to span out, to measure by spans.
O^^J qdr-il-maq. For qairilmaq.
(j^j^ qari'liq (subs.) old age.
O^^ qari-maq (v. intr.) to become old.
J^ qdz (subs.) a goose [ior ^hdz, P.].
1;'^ qdzd (subs.) fate, predestination [for L^ A.].
i}}^ Qazaq (prop, name) the name of several vast hordes of no-
mads known to the Eussians as the Great, Middle and
Little Hordes of Kirghiz (see that name). The Qazaqs are
divided (according to Turki reckoning) into three hordes :
1st, TTlugh-yuz (gpreat horde) sub-divided into the tribes
JJbdan and Dolat; 2nd, Vrta-yuz (middle horde) sub-
divided into the tribes, Arghun, J^aiman, Qipchaq,
Kungrat ; 3rd, Kiehih-yuz (little horde) Alchin, Job-
has. There are also innumerable further sub-divisions of
each of these tribes.
c^> q^^f^^^ (subs.) a cauldron, a cooking-pot.
i}^j^ q^-^naq (v. tr.) to dig.
o4;^ qdznaq (subs.) an inner room or store room, [ ? from kha-

zanah, A.].
0)J^ q^^'fuq (subs.) a peg.
S^j S^^ (subs.) a sausage of horse-flesh.
(^J^ gaziq. The same as qazuq.
OiH}^ qazi'liq. For qazi, K^Z.

14A R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

JiU^^ qdzi-rndq. The same as gdzmdq.

^KamKj qa$qan (sabs.) a thin broad wooden hoop fonning the edge
of a sieve, or of certain trays with perforated bottoms
which are placed one above another over a cauldron of
boiling water for the purpose of cooking pastry by
steam.
^UJlwli qaS'la-H-maq (v. cans.) to cause to resolve.
^UAjl*»U» qaS'la-^sh'tnaq (v. recip.) to resolve together, to conspire.
^I^ImVj qas-la-maq (v. tr.) to resolve, to determine, to intend.
[From «J^ A.]
^UmUI qasmaq (subs.) scraping^ of a cooking-pot, fdz-qasmaq the
scurf of a scald head.
\^^ qdsh (subs.) the hair of the eye-brows ; also, metaphor, a
man's neighbourhood or presence ; e. y., aning qdsh-i-da
= near him, with him.
4ii)U»iv5 qashang (adj.) lazy, slow, sluggish.
jfJM qashao (subs.) a curry-comb.
\jr*^\jr^ qdsh-tash (subs.) jade-stone. [This is found in the moun-
tains of Khotan and Sanju, the so-called Kuen-lon.
There are three varieties : 1st, chaza^tash obtained from
the quarries, often full of flaws which destroy its value ;
2nd, pur-taah (rotten stone) or Jcavmh a soft variety of
the same; 8rd, su-tash (water stone) the most esteemed;
it is obtained in the form of pebbles, water- worn in the
beds of the streams, whereby probably the flaws are
eliminated, the resulting pebble being sound to the core,
and therefore not likely to render useless the long labour
of carving it, by the discovery of a hidden flaw in the
centre. Chapan-lih task (coated stone) a pure nucleus
with a reddish outside is highly valued.]
^*^^ qdshdq (subs.) an animal's forehead.
(jj^^ qashuq (subs.) a spoon for eating soup.
^ ^filUAU qdshi'la-ghuoh (subs.) a curry-comb.
^jUlU^li qdshi'la'fnaq (v. tr.) to scratch all over (with the hands).

1878 ] of Eastern Turkistdn. 145

^l.*ju&lS qathumaq (v. tr.) to scratch (on account of itching).
^U>x&l# qashu^n-maq (v. refl.) to scratch one's self.
O^ g[(*£ (*^i") dried, desiccated.
J^ qaq (suhs.) a temporary pool of water.
(3 jy^^^ ioq-tur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to drive in (a nail, Ac.).
^L^U qdqif'fnaq (v. tr.) to cough up phlegm.
iJir S^S^^2 (siibs.) phlegm from the mouth.
^JULiiU qdqsha-mdq (v. intr.) to lament in a plaintive or querulous
manner.

l}i^ qdq-liq (suhs.) dryness, desiccation.
^U^^ qdq-maq (v. tr.) to drive in (a nail) ; also, to beat (a gar-
ment, Soc.f to remove the dust).
jMi*^ qdq-il-mdq (v. pass.) to be driven in.

J^UJJkfli qdq-in-mdq (v. refl.) (lit. to beat one's self) to dust one'a
self (by quick strokes of the hand).
5^ qald (subs.) a fortress, a fort [for «*li A.].
^jUJIiUI qdla-'t-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to pile up.

(3^ §[dldq (subs.) a smaU wooden spoon for feeding small
children.
^j^J^ qdla-mdq (v. tr.) to pile up, to make up a fire,
^d'^' qaldyi (subs.) tin [for 4«*Ai A.].
oV £dlpdq (subs.) a felt wide-awake (hat), worn in hot weather

by travellers, Ac.
^Iwli qdltdq (adj.) unworthy of credit, untrustworthy.
0}jiy^ qdlturd'q (vl. adj. and subs.) palsied, trembling ; a person
afflicted with the palsy,
j^ ajIj^aW qdltttra-^t-indq (v. caus.) to cause to tremble.
^L«];jAJ15 qdltura-mdq (v. intr.) to tremble, to quake, to shiver.
jl^jJ^ qaldiraq (adj.) rustling (as paper or badly prepared leather,
when crushed together).
O^lri**^ qdldira-H'fndq (v. caus.) to cause to rustle.
^3L«l^aJV5 qdldira-maq (v. intr.) to rustle, to give a rustling sound.
^UJ^aJb qdl'diV'Umdq (v. caus. redup.) to cause to put by.
19

146 R. B. Sbaw— ^ Vooabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^l^jJlS qdl-dir-mdq (v. cauB.) to cause to remain, to put by, to

leave. [From qdl-mdq.']
^UjcJJU qdldighach (subs.) a swallow.

^Ui^^ qalghu't-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be drowsy, to make
(any-one) sleepy (as by talking overmuch).
(3^^*^^* qalghi-maq (v. intr.) to become drowsy, to become sleepy,
to nod.
^UJb qdUmdq (v. intr.) to remain, to stay behind. In compom-
tion with the Perf . Part, of another verb it expresses
completion or condition: e. g,, hetip qdldi "he has
started" (lit. " he remained gone") ; qetip-qdladur " he
is starting" (lit. "he is in the condition of starting").
f^^*^ Qdlmdq (prop, name) a nomad people of Buddhist faith,
living to the east of the Amir of Kashghar's dominions,
the ' Calmucks' of European writers. The name appears
to be applied to aU the Mongolian tribes, by the Turks.
^Ulyflj qalqi'H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to float.
^j^^ qalqi-maq (v. intr.) to float. Also, to hover.

^^ qalttn (subs.) a kind of open horizontal harpsichord, con-
sisting of many strings of different lengths which can
be tightened by turning their pegs or by means of move-
able brieves. It is played partly with the fingers (like
a harp) and partly with a little metal instrument like a
tooth-pick. [For qanun, P.]
^j^jJ^ qdlin (subs.) a carpet, a rug of carpeting, P.
kjii^^ qdling (adj.) thick.

^^ qama (subs.) an otter, otter-skin.
jjUJtolj qama-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to enclose or besiege.
jflJL«^S qama-l-maq (v. pass.) 1, to be enclosed ; 2, to have one's

teeth set on edge.
ijV^UolS qama-maq (v. tr.) to enclose, to beside.
^L«v«lil qama-maq (v. tr.) to set the teeth on edge (as anything
acid).

1878.] ofEoHem TurhUtdn. 147

q€MMhi (subs.) a riding-wbip (consisting of a short wooden
handle with a thick stiff thong of plaited leather, lashed
on so as to form one line with the handle).
^^jyXM^\i qam-la^Bh-tur-mdq (v. recip. cans.) to put together, to cause

to live at peace together, &o., (raeeommoder in both
senses).
^J^]UVj qam-Wsh-rndq (v. recip.) to be fitted together (as broken
pieces of anything); to be in unison, to be at peace
together ; to assist. [ P From an unusual qam-la-maq.']
^U^mo^IUvj qam-la^sh'ish-maq (v. recip. redup.) to assist one another.
^jl^i^^ qamish (subs.) a reed.

cr^ ^dn (subs.) blood. Also, bloodshed.
louUi qandt (subs.) a wing. Also, the side-covering of a Kirghiz
dkm or felt-tent.
^UJUU qdn-a^H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to bleed.
jL«U\j qdn-a-maq (v. intr.) to bleed.
(^Ui^U qdn-iukmaq (y. comp.) to shed blood, to massacre.

M.

^1^^^^ kdU'tiehti (verb used as an adj.) skin-flint, miserly. [Lit.

* he evacuates blood'.]
*^jy^^ qanjwrghah (subs.) straps in the cantle of a saddle for

fastening a cloak, Ac.
*f^^^ qanjughah. The same, Kaz.
*»4**vl» qanjighdh. The same, Kh.

***^ qan-ohdh (adv.) how much ? how many?
I«xilj qan-dh (adv.) where ?
^laSU qan-dagh) (advl. pron. and adv.) what like ? what kind
jl*>i^ qan^daq j of ? Also, how ?
i^^^jyOJh qan-duT't'inaq (v. caus. redup.) to cause to satisfy the

thirst (of another).
^JUytXili qan-dur-maq (v. caus.) to cause (any man or animal) to

satisfy (his or its) thirst.
^tXilS qan-din (adv.) from whence ?
cH^^ qdn4iq (adj.) spotted with blood.

148 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^UiU qan-maq (v. intr.) to quench one's thirst ; to satisfy one's
desire for sleep [governs 9U or uiqu with gha"],
^JUj^UwVJ qangtar-t-mag (v. cans.) to cause to fasten a horse's head

up short.
iJV^uCiVji qangtar-maq (v. tr.) to fasten a horse's head up short by

a bearing-rein, or by hitching the reins over the peak of
the saddle.
Jjjjfi qangshdr (subs.) the bone of the nose, the part midway
between the bridge and the tip.
j^l^ilS qangshdr-liq (adj.) hook-nosed.

^^ qanah) (adv.) where ? Also used as an exclamation equi-
^iVS qani j valent to our * welL'
J^ qdo (subs.) tinder (made of fungi or of the down of a kind
of flowering reed), Kh«
^^A^jU qdurchaq (subs.) a doll, an image for children to play with.
Also, the figures in a kind of Punch and Judy show,
which are dressed up on a man's fingers, who hides be-
hind a cloth and manipulates these marionettes, making
speeches for them in a feigned or falsetto voice produced
by holding a small tube in his month, Kh., (in Yarkand
pronounce qorchaq).
ih^ qdurgha (subs.) a rib.
Vy«j|^U» qdur-mach (subs.) parched or roasted grain.
O^J)^ ^dur-maq (v. tr.) to roast (grain), to fry.

lij^ qdughah (subs.) a leather pail for drawing water.
^iiy^J^ qdughun (subs.) a melon,
u^^ qai (pron.) which, what [only used in compodtion as qal*
da, qat-si].
\jri^ qagash (subs.) [in composition with tuq»qan or uruq']
relation, relative.
c^^Ui qd^-gdn (adv.) which side ? Used also with the affixes da,
&o. As qd^-ydn-da '' on which side ;" qa^-yan gha ^ to
which direction ;" qd^-ydn-i-da '* on which side of it."

1878.] rfHtutem Turkistdn. 149

W^ qatta (subs, and adj.) a fresh beginning ; beginning afresh
[^aitahdsh'din yetsadim '^ I made it over again (lit.

^ from a fresh head') or qaita din yesaadim (lit. " I made

it from a fresh beginning")].
^UJ^lLvJ qaU-ar-Umaq (v. caus. redup.) to cause to turn back (tr.).

to order any one to be turned back.
^l^Luli qait-ar-maq (v. caus.) to cause to return, to turn back (tr.).

^^iLlj qaitaqi (subs.) the turned-back edge of any garment (as a
European coat-coUar).
f wU qaitam (adv.) on the contrary.
^ULli qait-maq (v. intr.) to return, to come or go back, Kh.
^s^li qaichi (subs.) scissors, shears.

]ty^J qai-da (adv.) where ?
^Idjli qal-ddgh (adjl. pron. and adv.) what like ? also, how ?
Jj)^lj^\J qdi-ddgh-rdq (adv.) how again? or how further? [lit.
the comparative of ' how ?' to which the reply would
be * better' or * worse,' not simply ' well' or * ill'].
^IcX^U qai'daq. The same as qaiddgh.
0^l;i qatra-H-fnaq (v. caus.) to cause to whet or sharpen.

(3!/^^ ^aira'^ (vl. subs.) a whet-stone, a rough hone.
^V^j^VJ qairct-maq (v. tr.) to whet, to sharpen on a stone, " re*

^\Jy}i qayir^H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to retrovert forcibly.
^I«3;^ij qd*.yeT'dan (adv.) from what place ? whence ?
(y}j^ qa^-yer-liq (adj.) belonging to what place ? of what place P
^U^\i qayir-maq (v, tr.) to retrovert forcibly, to force back (the
arm or any long-shaped object) into an imnatural posi-
tion.
^\jjjjj\j qayir-iUmaq (v. pass.) to be retroverted.
^Ua^U qayir-in-maq (v. refl.) to retrovert itself.

.moUI qat'Si (pron.) which of them ? who amongst them ? [the
si is the possessive affix of the 8rd person].
yjrilfi qdish (subs.) strap-leather.

150 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Langw^ge [Extra No. for

^j^jy^^^ qdUh-tur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be retroverted forcibly,

to retrovert forcibly (same as qayir-maq) ; also, to cause
to use continuous efforts.
OU^li qdUh-maq (v. intr.) to be retroverted forcibly ; also, to \ifie
continuous efforts.
j^^ qoiighu (subs.) sorrow, grief [P vl. subs, from an obsolete
verb qaumaq],
^UJ^^U qaighur-H-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be sorrowful.
K^jy^^ qaighur-maq (v. intr.) to be sorrowful, to grieve.
cH!^^ qatghU'liq (adj.) sorrowful, grief -laden.
^UjU qaimaq (subs.) cream [often prepared by warming the milk,
as in the preparation of Devonshire cream].
^^ qdin (subs.) the birch-tree (whose bark is in sheets like
paper).

^^ qSin (adj., used only in comp.). Answers to our phnae

" in-law." E. g. qdtn-ata *' f ather-in-kw," qdu^

ana '* mother-in-law."
•^-C^^ qcnng (subs.). For qdin " a birch-tree."
^loJlLUi qalna-'t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to boil, to boil (tr.).
^Ixu^li qalna-maq (v. intr.) to boil (as water).
O^j^ qayur-maq. For qayir-maq (which see).

Oy}^ qayuq (adj.) nasty, having a bad taste.
O ^^ qdyu-maq (v. intr.) to swim (said of one's head).

-I *i- f (^' ^') ^^ stitch, to hem-stitch.

O^^^ qdyi-maqj

SJL>^ qabat The same as obli.

^jv^^ qapar-maq j

^L«Uil qaba-maq. The same as o^^^^*
(..^ qip a particle used before qizil to signify ** intensely,"
" very."

c^V qO'Pldn (subs.) an ounce (or white leopard).
WS^ qat. The same as «s»(i.

1878.] ofJEastem TwrkUtdn. 151

C^ ?«^»yA] The same as ^, JV^.
^» qatig J

f^ qatim. The same as ^l*.
-jV^^ac* qichir-maq (v. tr.) to call, to summon.
il\^j^^ qichqir-maq (v. intr.) to shout.

i^ac* qiehi (subs.) mustard.
/AXuK>:^ qiehish-qaq (subs.) the itch.
-jU^M^jis* qichVsh-maq (v. recip.) to itch all over.
(3^*^?* qichi-maq (v. intr.) to itch (said of others).
O^"*^^^ qichi-^n-maq (v. refl.) to itch (said of the person who
speaks).

1*^ qud<i (see) (l*ip).

y* £tir (prond. qirr) (subs.) a ridge, an edgje formed by two

planes meeting at an angle.
I/S qard (adj.) black.
^LoSjyJ qardVmaq. The same as (3L«Jf(jl*,
^]j^ qard-'n-maq. The same as^ljli.

($^J)^J* qur-dilr-maq (v. cans.) to cause to scrape, &c.

...
^j^y^j^ qir-ghU'Chi (subs.) a turner, a person who works with a

lathe. [From cJl^.]

i^^ qirghol (subs.) a pheasant (of a species resembling the

European, but named JPhaaianus Shataii in Elliott's

Book of Pheasants).

(jj* qvrq (num.) forty.

^Iblj^ qirq-ailan (num. subs.) a group of forty.
• ••

^^ar*^ qirq-inehi (num. adj.) fortieth.

0\J^ iur-maq (prond. qirr-maq) (v. tr.) to scrape, to scratch off,
to scratch out ; to turn (any article by means of a
lathe, quasi '' to scrape off the outer layers*') ; also, to
destroy utterly, to " wipe out ;" also, to spend (time).
kJ^ qarri (subs.) an old woman.
0^***ir^ qurM-maq (prond. qirr-ii-fnaq) (v. pass.) to be scraped off ;
to be turned (in a lathe); to be utterly destroyed
(" wiped out").

152 R. B. Shaw— -4 Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

y qi» (subs.) a maid, a virgiD, a damsel ; also, a daughter.
[? From a root signifying ** redness" for "modesty.'*
See qizarmaq.']
^UJ^hS qiz-aT't-maq (v. cans.) to cause to redden, to make red.
-jL^ly qiz-ar-maq (v. intr.) to redden, to become red, to blush.
[? From the same root as above, see also qiz-maq,"]
ej|/* qazan. The same as o!)t>.
(j^y qazaq. The same as o!)^.
^ y qiz-maq (v. intr.) to become hot or warm ; also metaph., to
become or to be eager [in Uighur it seems to mean " to
redden" see Vambery], Kaz.
^ULyjl qizM-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be hot or eager.

fjij^ qiziq (vl. subs.) warmth, eagerness, vivacity [from qizU
maq\.

%yiji qizil (adj.) red. [? A passive form (in il) from a root
signifying * heat' as well as * redness,' which would thus
be the common origin of qiz-maq, qiz-ar-^maq, qiz-il
and qiz."] (See also gashil.)

(J^y ^w*-«W2 (▼. intr.). The same as qiz-maq,
^Uy^txijjJ qiz-in-dur-maq (v. refl. caus.) to cause to warm one's self.
^Ui^ qiZ'in-maq (v. refl.) to warm one's self.
Jy £w/ (subs.) a slave.
Q^ qul-luq (subs.) slavery, service. Also used as a compli-
mentary reply to congratulations, in the name of " your
servant" or " my service to you."
yuS qamtu (adv.) in company.
ji:^ qimiz (subs.) an intoxicating liquor made from mare's

milk, Kaz.
^^ qandt. The same as c&»(J(i.
^USSIyl quala-H-maq (v, caus.) to cause to pursue ; to cause to

drive away, Kaz.
O^Sj^ quala-maq (v. tr.) to pursue ; to drive away, Kaz.
^^y quanji (subs.) happiness.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 163

(3^'y quan-maq (v. intr.) to be happy, to be pleased.
Jj^y qHbuzl (subs.) a Jew's harp. Also, a rough guitar with
Jyij^ qupuz) horse-hair strings. Also, the inside of the cheek.

^^^. f (subs.) the bark of trees.

Oy^y» quhuq )

O^^-^ g}'IP'<'^r''H-maq (v. caus. redup.) to cause to arouse.

O^/iy gmP'<*r-fnaq (v. caus.) to cause to stand up, to arouse.

J^y qopal (adj.) rude, unpolished (used either of men or

things).

C?^i^ gup-maq (v. intr.) to rise up, to arise.

OHy* mpuq (subs.) a term used in gambling with sheep's knuckle

bones, implying success. As maning qupuq-um kelde

** I have won the toss," qupuq maning-ki " the toss is

mine (I have won it)."
^^ji qui (subs.) blessing, happiness.

Jw*j qotaz)
I- •• c (s^^s.) a yak {Bos grunniens').

y^j^y^ qotas)

^uy» qutan (subs.) a sheep-fold ; a place where a flock of sheep
is collected to pass the night, Kaz.
^L^jIaJJ qut-qdr-rndql (7' caus.) to cause to be free, to release.
^L^l55j5 qut-qdz-rndq) [From an obs. qut-maq.']
OJ^y g'ttf-Zaj' (adj.) blessed.
jyy qotur (subs.) the itch.
O^jyy qutur-maq (v. intr.) to go mad (of a dog), to be rabid.
^V^^jJ^ji qut-uUdur^maq (v. caus.) to cause to become free, to re-
lease.
^UJ^jj qut'UUmaq (v. pass.) to be made free, to be released.
[From an obs. qut-maq,']
O^y q^<^^q (subs.) an armful, as much (of any thing) as can
be embraced in the arms. [From quch-maq."]
^\M'ti\^jM quehaq-la-^sh'fnaq (v, recip.) to embrace one another.
^L«XjU^^ quchaq-lch-maq (v, tr.) to embrace, to take in the arms.
I^^y quohqach (subs.) a small bird (of any sort).
20

154 B. B. Sbaw — A Vocabulafy of the Language [Extra No. for

J^y quehqdr (sube.) a ram.

i3^^*^j^ queh^mdq (v. tr.) to embrace, to take in the anna.
Cf^)3^!^ queh-ur-mdq. The same as qdchwrmdq.
iy^^Jt'J^ qtteh'UMh'fnaq (y. reoip.) to lie in one another's arms.

*^j^ quda (subs.) a person standing in the reUtionship of
father-in-law to one's son or daughter; one of two
fathers whose children have intermarried.
0>3^ quduq (subs.) a well.

jy qurr (sabs.) a garter, a tape for fastening ap leggings.
«y q4r (subs.) a balance, a remainder (of goods or money).
}jyi qura (subs.) a space enclosed by hurdles or nulings ; a

fold, a pen.
Chy qoram (subs.) ground covered with large blocks of stone
(fallen from the mountaias). [? The origin of qara-
qoram."]
i^^])y qura-maq (v. tr.) to make patch- work, to make a garment
Ac., bj sewing together small patches of stuff.

(^\)y quwura-maq (v. intr.) to dry up hard (as a skin exposed
to the sun, Ac.), Ka.z.
^J^jy qurbashi (subs.) a chief poHce official, a ' Kotwal.'

^y qurt (subs.) a worm, a grub.
fj^fjjjj qurt'la-t-maq (y. cans.) to cause or allow to breed worms

(of meat &c.).
f^^^tlj^ qurt'la-maq (y. intr.) to breed worms (of meat Ac).
{}^jy qurchaq. The same as qdurchaq^
^^jy qur-ehi (subs.) a superintendent of a magazine. [See

qurkhana and qttr,]
Ajl^^y qur-khdna (subs.) a magazine (for powder and balls).
L/'^^jy qur-dash (subs.) a contemporary.
fy^jy qurdum (subs.) a place where any stream disappears (in
the sand, &c.). [The Tarkand Biver is said to dis-
appear in a district called kurdum^kak.']
O^jy qursaq (subs.) stomach, belly.

1878.] qfEtutem TurkUtdn. 166

^IdJLjy gursaq^ddsh (subs.) a brother or sister by the same mother

pit. " womb-feUow"].
^^WUy qursaq4ash. The same.
JUJLi^ qursha^'f-maq (v. caus.) to cause to surround.
O^^jy quraha^maq (v. tr.) to surround, to encircle.
e[^^;^ qurqhashun (subs.) lead.

sJ^jy q^rghdn (subs.) a fort, a fortress.
^'f^Jjr* qwrghan^ehah (subs.) a small fort, a redoubt.
jUS;^jl qurq-maq (v. intr.) to fear, to be afraid.
O^^^jy qt^q-ut-maq (v. caus.) to cause to fear, to frighten.
Oi^y^y qurqtt-^nj'liq (adj.) fearful, causing fear, frightful.
iS^y^y qurq'u-^nchak (adj.) fearful, afraid, cowardly.
^S^y^y £«*^?»-'w^** (vl* subs.) fear, fearing.
Cr^jy qHu^ur-maq (v, tr.) to fledge.

«»j;y qurut (subs.) dried curds.
•I " «•

Cr^Vy quf^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to dry.
f.
^)jy quruch (subs.) steel.

e^,yff«r«^»j(^L adj.) dried, dry.

0})y qiiruq (vl. subs.) a field of growing gprass, fenced round to
prevent its being grazed on. [From qUrtt-maqJ^
0^i)y quruq-maq. The same as qurq-maq.

(Vy qurwn (subs.) soot, the black deposit of smoke.
O^'Ti!^ qurum-saq (subs, and adj.) a miser; miserly, stingy, [p
From quru-maq ^ to dry up" in the same way as holutn*
saq ''likely to become (useful)," modem phrase "a
likely boy," from hohmaq " to become," Ac.]
O^^jy quru-maq (v. intr.) to become dry, to dry up.
(J^Jjy qUru-maq (v. tr.) to scare away birds and beasts from a
i:>Vy 9^^^' ^0 same as Jcurwny Y. [field.

\3^Vy q^^^*^^^i (v. refl.) to dry one's self.
O^^^fjy qw^n-maq (v. refl.) to guard one's self, to protect one's self
(from the mud on a road, from flies or mosquitoes, &o. ).

156 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

• «*
>/y qSz (flubs.) not embers or cinders.

^UjU;y quzgha-H-maq (v. cans.) to cause to move ; (tr.) to cauM

to shift.
^UJUj^ quzgha^H-maq (v. pass.) to be moved, to be shifted.
i3^ jy quzgha-maq (v. tr.) to move, to shift. [self-

^Uivifyl quegha-'n-maq (v. refl.) to move one's self, to shift one's
\^yjy quzghun (subs.) a raven (supposed by the Turkis to live a

thousand years).
OjJy iuzuq (subs.) a peg,
v^j^ qozi (subs.) a lamb.
\^y gush (subs.) a bird.

\J^y* £Osh (subs.) a pair ; also, a household, a set of people nsisg
one fire, [chiefly used however in the sense of people
on a journey : «• g,, hu hdrvsan niehah qoeh *' how many
tents or fire (does) this caravan (consist of)"]. Also,

quarters, lodgings.
/

\j^}^ quumsh (adj.) hollow.
^c^^'^^V qosh-hashi (subs.) the headman or responsible head oi

each set of merchants, &c., composing a caravan.
^^^^'^y qosh-hSgi (subs.) the title of a high official ' Lord of tbe
Household,' who acts for the king in his absence.
^y^jj^^ qosh'tur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to join; (tr.) to cause to

unite,
ttiy"**!^ ioshqun (subs.) a crupper.

^\mjJ qoeh-maq (v. tr.) to join, to unite, to put together.
0>*^^ qoshmaq (adj.) united, joining (used only of the hump*
of a two-humped camel when they almost coalesce).
^i^y qosh-na (subs.) a neighbour ; also, a person allowed to live
in some part of one's house.
^Um^' qushndch (subs.) a soothsayer, or foreteller of future events.

m

^^^MJt^yi qushnanji (subs.) an educated woman; also^ a femik

teacher.
^S^^ 9i08h-ni. The same as qoshna.

1878.] of Eastern TurkUidn, 157

O^JJ^y iosh^ur-maq. The same as qoahturmaq.
Oy^y qoshuq (subs.) a ladle.

Cy^y gp^^-^9, (▼!• subs.) poetry, verse, a poem, a song. [From
qosh-maq " to put together".]

iS^J^y^ qosh-ul-maq (v. pass.) to be joined, to be put together, to
be united.
M)y*'y qoshun (subs.) an army,

^^ quy^a (subs.) a rush (a kind of grass), Kaz.
iX^^y qughla-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to pursue.
^L«^^j qughla-maq (v. tr.) to pursue, to follow.
Cr^jyy qughurchaq (subs.). The same as qdurchaq.
uyy qughun (subs.) a melon,
cl^ qol (subs.) a hand.

c)y qol (numl. subs.) a hundred thousand, Kaz.
{jy qol (subs.) a broad open valley between mountains ;
J^ (3a^* ^^ ^yif* Sariq-qoi or Sariqol: '* yellow
valley ;" the name of a valley and small province in the
angle between Pamir and the Muzbaq Kange (a name often
mis-spelt Sirikul, and wrongly applied by Europeans
to a Lake on Pamir). JjS ^S^ King- qol " wide valley ;"
the name of a place on the road between Sariqol and
K&shghar, Kibghiz, Kaz.
)^ quia (adj.) reddish dun (the colour of a horse).
^jiy qulaq (subs.) an ear. [Before affixes the q usually becomes
^A, as qulagh'ing " thine ear".]
*^y qulaq-chah (subs.) a cap with flaps covering the ears.
^J^ y qi*l^q-chun (subs.) a cap with long side (ear) lappets which
can be crossed under the chin.
^ y q^^n (subs.) a wild ass [^Equus hemuonwi], (from quia)*
KS^y qvUn (adj.) easy, propitious.
"^^jy^y qulturmach (subs.) a crutch.

Oy^y qultuq (subs.) the arm-pit. [arms.

jfUjl#^y qultuq-la-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to take under the

258 E. B. Shaw — A Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^y-^tiyiy qultuq-la-maq (v. tr.) to take under the arm, piz., either

to support a person in walking by pUcing one's hand
under his arm, or to carry any object under one's arm.
i^^^y ^uUehi'liq (subs.) slavery, servitude.
O^y ^ui'luq (subs.). For JJ^.
•*-V!^ quluf (sxihe.) a lock, a padlock, P.
cJirr' qulun (subs.) a colt, a foal.
^V^lyy qulun-Ia^maq (v. intr.) to foaL
fy qum (subs.) sand.
{jli\^y qumalaq (subs.) sheep's dung.
^S^y^y qum-tokhi (subs.) Fodoces Sendersonii (lit. * sand-fowl').
sj^^y qumghan (subs.) a basin.
O ♦ yy qumuchaq (subs.) a frog. [The people of Darw&z call it

" bulbul-i-Hazrat AH" (the nightingale of Holy AH).]
Kj'J^y qumwih. For qamish.
C^y qunaq (subs.) a guest; also, a night's lodging. [From

qun-maq,']
(jy^ qonaq (subs.) Indian-corn, maize.

ft * c

\J^y qunan (adj. and subs.) rising three years old ; also, any
four-legged animal of that age.
^l^Jj^dj^ qun-dur-t-maq (v, cans, redup.) to cause to give a night's

lodging.
0 J^*^y gitJin-dur-maq (v. cans.) to cause or allow to sit or He, to

give a lodging-place, to house ; also, to cause to lodge
(as a falconer taking up a hawk on his wrist).
j^^^ quti'duz (subs.) a small animal whose fur is much in r^
quest, (? sable) ; also, fur of that animal.
ylr^y gvngraghu (subs.) a bell.

o\r^y ^tf^yra^ (subs.) a Httle beU attached to an animal.
jX^y qungur (adj.) dun. [Qun^ur-a^ * dun horse', corrupted to
Qungrat, is the name of one of the divisions of the
Middle Horde of Qazzaqs, also of a town in Khiva.]
jfiy qunguz (subs.) a black beetle.

1878] ofEadem TurTeUidn. 159

\^yi^jr^y^ qungi-yoghm (subs.) a boil.

jUiy gun-maq^ (v. intr.) to lodge, to put up ; also, to dismount.

\^y qai (subs.) a sbeep.

Vj*'4y quyash (subs.) the sun [rare],

cky quyaq (adj.) thick, viscous [of fluids].

\J^y quyan (subs.) a hare, Kh. Kaz.

^-^4^ qityang (subs.) a moveable subcutaneous tumour.

• **
^,_^-t^ qcfi-chi (subs.) a shepherd.

O^jyHy qoi-dur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to place, to cause to put,

to cause to set aside, to cause to leave, to cause to
abandon.

OV^y q^y^ruq (subs.) a tail.

Ujy qiii-ma (adj.) cast (of metal). [abandon.

jUjy qoi-maq (v. tr.) to place, to put, to set aside, to leave, to
^3^y qui-maq (v. tr.) to pour, to cast (metal).
jUy qui-mdq (subs.) a cake cooked in butter, a butter-cake.
si)y^**'jiy qiHfushqtm (subs.) a crupper.
(f^y.y qov-ush-rndq (v. recip.) to leave one another.
ch^yi^ quUush-maq (v. recip.) to pour from both sides, to pour
together.

c5^y 2^y^ (a^i-)« The same as quyaq,

..

^jiy qoyun (subs.) the breast of the robe (used as a receptacle

or pocket). [ p From qoi-maq,}
«.
ttj^y quyiin (subs.) a whirlwind, a * devil.'

..

ijliy quyi (subs, and adj.) "lowness," low; e, y., aning qugUsida
"below it," Sindustdn Tarkand-din quyi "India is
lower than Yarqand."

** qah (post-pos.) to.
^^* q%. (See Gram. p. 262, Pronouns.)
^ qia (adj. and subs.) slanting, sloping; also, a road sknting
up a hill-side or on the face of a cliff. [^Sariqa-qta
" yellow slant," the name of a part of the Upper Q4ra.
kash Valley ; corrupted to Sariqia.] Prom qi-maq.

160 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

(3^ q}aq (subs.) a'sbarp-edged rush.

\J^ Qoyan (adv.) which way, on which side. [For qin yanJ]

Q^fii^ qipchdq (prop, name) one of the divisions of the Middle

Horde of Qazzaqs. DashUi-qipchdg the desert north

of the Jaxartes and of Khokand.
** «•
(^W qitiq (subs.) tickling.

^Uj]LSx1x# qitiq.la^H-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to tickle.

^yj%tAxlx3 gitiq-la'fndq (v. tr.) to tickle.

!f ^flj ^*^ *^'*" ^ j (v. tr.) to call, to cry out.

^\^jA^^ qtenqtr'tnaq )
«•

^S^^ qichi (subs.) mustard.
sjl^^ii^ qiehiah (vl. subs.) a tickling, an itching.
^UAxs^ qichish^qaq (subs.) the itch.
^UuiOs^ qichi- sh^maq (v. recip.) to itch all over.
Oi^^ qichiq (vl. subs.) a tickling.

45^4^^^ qichumaq (v. intr.) to experience a tickling or itching

sensation, to itch.

••
jtP qir (subs.) a ridge, the meeting line of two plane surfaces.

.*
^^ qir (subs.) water-proof plaster (applied to a bathing-place,

tank, &c.)
iji^ qira (subs.) a ridge, an edge,
^^j^ qatraghaeh [? for qara-yaghach * black- wood'], an elm.
O'J^ qiraq (subs.) an edging (of any stuff).
Ct!/^ S^ira^ (subs.) a whet-stone, a hone.
Ujii* qirdl (subs ) a white frost.

JlH^ qirdo (subs.) a white frost; a camp of nomads (Kir-
ghiz, &c,),
Cx^J^ q^gMq (subs.). The same as qiraq.
uX^ji^ qirghaol (subs.) a pheasant. [The same as Jj4r'«]

S^^^^ qirg^dt (subs.) a small species of hawk,

• .*

^^yi* qir-ghueh (subs.) a scraper.

• t»

M^r'jV qirghun (subs.) slaughter (in battle).

^S^ji^ qirghi. The same as qirghai.

1878.] ofEattem TurhUtdn. 161

* m

jiFj^ QirgMz (prop, name) a race of nomad Turks living in the
mountains, from the south of Yarkand round by Pamir
and Alai to the north of K^hghar and Aksu (the
Issik-kul district). Thej are called by the Bussians
Tchomy Kirghiz (black Kirghiz), also Mountain Kir-
ghiz, to distinguish them from the Qazzaqs of the
plains, to whom also (though incorrectly) the name of
Qirghiz is applied by the Eussians.
Q^ qirq (num.) forty. More often (3y .

O^J^ gir-maq (v. tr.) to scrape, to shave, to erase ; also, to kill,

f
[see (3^^ ] ; also* ^ spend (time).
Oij^ qiriq (vl. adj.) scraped, threadbare, worn down (as the fur

of a skin, <&c.).
(j^jyMji^ qiriq-tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to shear, Ac.

o'^iH^ qiriq-maq (v. tr.) to shear, to cut with a pair of scissors.
0^-*^iH^ qir-il-maq (v. pass.) to be scraped, to be turned (in a lathe),
to be shaved, to be destroyed utterly.

iS*^^^^ qirindi (subs.) scraping (of leather, a cooking pot, &c.),

y^ qiz (subs.) maiden ; also, daughter. The same as ji.
0^;IH^ qtz-ar-maq. See {3^^j^.
^Va:>Vi^J qizghan-chaq (adj.) grudging, selfish, churlish.
^UiU^ qizghan-maq (v. tr.) to grudge, to be churlish, to stint.

o'^T^^ qizi'q-maq (v. intr.) to be eager or hot (over anything),
t*
cHH^ fl'M^**^ (*^i) ^^^9 *lso eager. Same as (30^«

U^ji^ qizil (adj.) red. Same as Jj^.
oW/^ jm-wo^' (v. intr.) to become hot j also, to become eager.
Same as c^^y^'
^jLJUa*a^ qUta-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to become tight or pressed.
jUUmajJ qista-maq (v. tr.) to tighten, to press ; also, to importune.
i^Jy^* qis-tur-maq (v. caus.) to infix, to stick into (as a flower

into the cap).
^^Aj»^ qigqa (adj.) short.
jl4J;U-u4# qUqaW't-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be short, to shorten.
21

162 B. B. Shaw— ^ Vooabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^L^lJi.MjJ qhqa'r-maq (v. intr.) to become short.
^U.ajJ qii.fndq (v. tr.) to press (sideways).
^jU.4oAf qismdq (subs.) a gin (for catching animals).
^UU.«4«jLf qie-il'tnaq (t. pass.) to be pressed.

Ij^ qM (subs.) winter.
^UAjUvJ^i qishai-^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be crooked.
^A>1^^ qtshat-maq (v, intr.) to be or become crooked.

^1^>S qish'laq (subs.) lit. winter- quarters ; also, a Tillage [pro-
bably so called from having originally only been occu-
pied in winter by the Central Asiatic tribes] ; (opposed
to gai'laq " summer-quarters or pasturage," answering
to the Swiss word ' alp').
^jLuii qish'liq (adj.) belonging to or destined for the winter.
^^Ji^J» qishiq (adj.) crooked.

^^jA^i qiqr-mdq (v. intr.) to try to shout without being able to
produce a loud sound (as people afflicted with goitre).

i^S qil (subs.) horse-hair (for the tail).
^\^ s^t>i^ qel'duT'tnaq (t. cans.) to cause to do.
s^y^ j^cZ-^Att-tfA» (vl. subs.) a doer.

** j3^-»i>J^ qel-maq (v. tr.) to do [very conunon in composition].
^UlUS qeUin^rndq (v. pass.) to be done.
^M qilich (subs.) a sabre.
^U^^^jly qel-iakUmaq (y. recip.) to do in company, to do one

another [in composition with another verb].
^^jiii^iS qeligh'liq (vl. adj.) done.

(^^ qeUiq (vl. subs.) the doing.
^i5j>ly qeliq-iiq (vl. adj.) doing (well), behaving properly; also
sometimes used for qelighliq.

",. ^ ( (subs.) mince-meat.

«W* qimach )

cyU>S qimat (adj.) dear, highly-priced. [From A.]

(j^^ qi-maq (v. tr.) to trim, to cut slanting (generally for the

purpose of making a side of anything square with the

1878.] of JEastem TarhUtdn. 163

other sides; the slant being considered with reference
to the existing edge).
O^^ qamdq (subs.) cream.
O^^ Quimag (subs.) a butter-cake.
*-H4^^^^^ qimat-ehi'liq (subs.) dearness, scarcity, A. T.
^WJj^x^S qimtr-la-U-maq (v. caus.) to cause to crawl.

C? '^ V^*** q*niir-la-maq (v. intr.) to crawl, to creep, to move.
«•
^/^ qin (subs.) a scabbard, a sheath.

^^ qiyun (adj. and subs.) difficult, troublesome ; also, a pain-

ful punishment^ torture*
^UjUjlS qina-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to torture.
^UJvxxf qina^Umaq (▼• pass.) to be tortured ; also, to experience

difficulty or pain (in doing anything).
O^^^ ^liM-majf (v. tr.) to torture ; also, to give trouble or pain.
O^j*^ qinghrdh (subs.) a huge knife, a hanger.
^jUI^I^aAu qinghr'ai'''UmAq (▼. caus.) to cause to be crooked, to make

crooked.
^U^Y^^AAjLf qinghr-tn-rndq (v. intr.) to become crooked.
jyOJ^ qinghur (adj.) crooked.
^Ux# qiydq (subs.) a sharp bulrush.

^^*^ qayi-maq (v. intr.) to swim (said of the head).
..
^^j^y^ qiyin (subs.). The same as qiyun,

^(^j^ qiyin-di (subs.) a cutting of cloth (remaining from the
cutting out of a garment).
tHW* ihf^9. (a^iJO crooked.

^ ha \ ,

^ S (post-pos.) to, onto, into, at (with a sense of ' motion')

o ga j

^ [written also gha and ka] hitab-ga pitti = " he

wrote in (to) the book ;'' but kitab^da oqudi =

^ he read in the book"].

164 R. B. Shaw— -4 VoeaJmlary of the language [Extra No. for

V^ ^P (subs.) a case or cover.
lSJ^^ kojptak (fiiibs.) a playing balL
ji:^^ kap-siz (adj.) impudent (boy) [like a 'gamin'].
^\j^[Jijfi Jcdpsha-H-mah (v. cans.) to cause to chew the cud, to cause

to chatter.
^l^UujK Mpsha-mak (v. intr.) to chew the cud ; also (m<M« com-
monly), to chatter, to babble.
\mJy^}^ kapshuk (t1. subs.) a chatter-box, a prattler.
^^K Jpapki (adj.) gossiping, talkative.
ijbj^ harwdn (subs.) a caravan ; also applied to any individual

merchant, a member of a caravan, P.
jij^ Jedriz (subs.) a subterranean water-course [formed by dig-
ging a line of wells at certain intervals on a hill-slope,
connecting the bottoms of these wells by small tunnels ;
as the foot of the slope is reached the wells get less and
less deep till at last the water-course emerges into the
open air ; in this manner springs at the foot of the hills
are tapped and brought to the surface of the land at
a lower leveL In Eastern TurkLstan these kariz are
found near Turf jLn only], P.
^yC»D JcaM (adj. and subs.) idle, gossiping; also, an idler.

A^K" kasah (subs.) a cup (of earthenware), P.
^*^« Kdshghar (prop, name) the capital of Eastern Turkistan.
[This is the spelling usual among the Western Turkis-
tiinis, and which has now been adopted in the coinage
of the reigning Amir.]
j^^ ^^A^ar (prop, name).. The same. [This is the spelling used
by the natives of the country both in their eveiy day
transactions, and also in their books. It is spelt Qoik-
qar in the ' Kudatku Bilik', an ancient XJighur poem
written in A. H. 462 or A. D. 1069, and lately pub-
lished with a translation by Prof. VAmbiry.]
^^^ kd9hki (interj.) Would to God ! P. ( ? )
^^ kdkd (subs.) an egg.

1878.] of Eastern Turhktdn, 165

Jo gal (subs.) throat, Y.
^y gdl (adj.) blunt, Y.
^^o ga-li [a compound affix applied to the root of verbs con-
veying the sense *in order to'].
^^jJK Jcalih (subs.) a mould, P.
uJ/^l^ Jcamshuh (adj. and subs.) having a retreating chin.
sj^ Jcdn (subs.) a mine, P.
^^j^ Jeatoah (subs.) a hole.
^J^ kdush (subs.) slippers. From P.
\j^jr^ Jcdmh (subs.) chewing the cud.
cDUjI&jIS Muaha-H-mak (v, cans.) to cause to chew the cud.
wv^^;K Jedusha-mah (v. intr.) to chew the cud.
ii)Ujl(;o Jcdola-t-maJc (v. cans.) to cause to dig.
iiJ^'^« Jcdola-mah (v. tr.) to dig, to excavate.
clJLdi^D Mi'^t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to be angry,
w^o kSi'inak (v. intr.) to be angry, to be vexed, to be tired.
V»^ gap (subs.) word, speech ; a social meeting, a ' conver-
sazione,' P.
sl}^ kaptak. The same as i*jUat^.

j^ kaptar (subs.) a pigeon. From P.
C^^/^ kiprik (subs.) an eyelash.
j^^ kapshar (subs.) solder; a joint made by soldering.
From P.
^■ax^j^ kapshik (subs.). The same as o^;»(^.
ji^ kapkir (subs.) a ladle, a skimmer. From P.
siJ^t^ gap-la-* ah^mak (v. recip.) to converse.
^^ijS kapish (subs.) slippers. From ka/sh^ P.
t-W katak (subs.) a fowl-house.
^ul> kitman (subs.) a hoe.
ilJLcXiUii kitman-la-mak (v. tr.) to hoe.

^ katta (adj.) great. [The eldest son of the Amir of Bokhara
always bears the title ^jyy^ ' Eatta-Turah' = * Great
or first Prince'.]

166 B. B. Shaw — A Voeaiulafy of the Zan^m^e [Extra No. for

^ kaj (adj.) crooked, specially perverse, P.
fT 9^3 (sabs.) plaster, mortar.
^^^ kajaha \ (subs.) camel's pamiiers (generally for women
^y^ Jcajatca ) to travel in), P.

*i^^ kich'kinah (adj.) very small, tiny, little [from kickik-kinah'].
'i^ hiehih (adj.) little, small.

*J^4^ kichikkina [contr. from kiehik'kina] (adj.) very small,

tiny, little ; also (subs.), a very little, a small quantity.

UJ U^ kech-mak (v. intr.) to pass through (water, &c.), to wade,

to ford ; to pass by (a fault), to let pass (one's rights) ;

[governs diii],

^"'^ Jy^ keeh'Ur-mak (v. cans.) to cause to pass through or by, to

cause to let pass,
i^ldd ^adSi (subs.) a beggar, a pauper. From P.
i^ik)^ gaddi-Uh (subs.) poverty, beggary, P. T.

J kar (adj.) deaf, P.
^ hir (adj.) dirty, soiled.

j^ kurr (subs.) a cave, a cavern. From A.

\f kira (subs.) hire, P.

^c^l/* kira-chi (subs.) a letter out on hire, P. T.

iJ^l^ kira-kash (subs.) a carrier for hire, the owner of a troop of

horses, &c. who carries merchandise for hire, P.
^sijr kirpi (subs.) a hedgehog.

^"^j^ kirpik (subs.). The same as kiprik,

Crj^j^ kar-qulaq (adj. and subs.) deaf, lit. deaf-eared ; also, a deaf
man.
^"^^JTT kir-guz-mak (v. cans.) to cause to enter.

%^^ karki (subs.) an adze.
^^j^ kvr-fnak (v. intr.) to enter, to come in [governs gha\.

j^ kiiz (subs.) autumn.

1878.] ofUattem TwhUtdn. 167

^s^Ip huzat'CM (subs.) a guard, a sentry, a care-taker.

uJ^Uj)^ Jcuzat-maJc (v. tr.) to guard, to take care of.
Smmi^^j^ kuza-mak (v. tr.) to cut hair (of a horse's mane, &c.) with
a knife.

uJ/? gazaJc (subs.) smarting (of a wound, caused bj cold air or

water getting into it).
^^^Jr Sfoziik (subs.) a small knife (for paring the nails, Ac.).
dJ^ kisak (subs.) a piece, a portion; (in Eastern Turkist&n

confined to) a piece of brick.

t)-*^ kasal (adj.) ill, unwell. From A.
^— ' UImo kes-il-mak (v. pass.) to be cut.
i^\amS kes-mak (v. tr.) to cut.
lSJ^*^ kkmak (subs,) a shot fired backwards from the back of a

horse at full gallop, a Parthian shot.
^/^ kuhan (subs.) a chain hobble (for a horse).
^y^ kishi (subs.) a person, a * body' ; [kishi with the negative

verb = * no-body'].
j^ kaftar (subs.) a pigeon. [For kc^tarJl From P.
^^■^ kafsh (subs.) a slipper, P.
j^f^ kafshar (subs.) solder, a soldered joint, P.
^'^j^ kijrik (subs.) an eye lash.* Same as kiprik.
J^r^ kafgir. For kapgir.

u^ kal (subs.) scald-head ; also (adj.), hornless (of a cow, &c.).

Ji kul (subs.) ashes, cinders.

^ gul (subs.) a flower, P.

a1$ kaUih (subs.) a cow ; (used also in a general way for homed

cattle).
^ kalta (adj.) short.
^■"^ kaltak (subs.) a stick, an Alpenstock.
•*^^^ kaklik (subs.) a red-legged partridge, a * chikor', OaceabU
pallidttSf Hume.

168 R. B. Shaw— ^ Voeahulaty of the Lanpta^e [Extra Xo. for

uJ^ kakkuk (subs.) a cuckoo.

^'SiS huluJe (adj.) winning (applied to the hone that comes in
first in a race).
^ kirn (conj.) that; also (pron.) who?

fS kam (adj. and adv.) little (in amount), P.

^)«A4i ham-haghal (adj.) poor, indigent [lit. having nothing ta

carry under his arm], P.
s
^J? gumdn (subs.) doubt, suspicion, P.

Ik^jJUU^ gumdn-liq (adj.) doubtful, suspicious, suspected ; also, en-

ceinte^ (not implying any concealment of the fact), P. T.

j^ kamar (subs.) a girdle or waist-belt, P.

A4«^ kim-iraa (pron.) originally, whosoever, whoever [£rom kim

' who' and iraa * may be*] ; modem usage, a person, any

one, some one.
j^^ kampir (subs.) an old man, an old woman, P.

* •; ♦ J (subs.) paucity, deficiency, scantiness, scarcity,

K^A*i kamMk )

y^iXSjui kami't'fnak (v. cans.) to cause to become less, to dimi-
nish (tr.).
liJUJ^ kami-tnak (v. intr.) to become less, to diminish (intr.) P. T.
C^ kant \ (subs.) a village, a place of settled habitations [the
«XJi kand ) termination of many names of places, Yarkand,

T^hkand, <&;c.].
AJi kanah (subs.) a tick. V^^

V^ Tcuh or kup (adj. and adv.) much, many ; also, much, very,

^.j^ kuba (subs.) a mallet.
V^ Icop (subs.) a water-butt.
^-^'^^^ kop'di-H'mak (v. caus.) to cause to become much or many,

to increase (tr.). [(intr.).

S'^y^^^X kop-di-mak (v. intr.) to become much or many, to increase.

1878.] qf Eastern TurkUtdn. 169

^^jy^ir htp'tur-mah (v. cans.) to cause to ferment.
^yy ffupchak (subs.) the nave of a wheeL
*-^^j^ kupchuh (subs.) a saddle cashion.
^Jijr kupruJc (subs.) a bridge.
OU^lLjy kwp'la'Sh^mah (v. recip.) to throng together to any work

[from an unusual kt^'la-mak'].
\mJj^y kup'luk (subs.) many-ness, much-ness, a deal of.

^% { } (intr.) to ferment, to swell, to foam.

c-Tv^^ kupur-mak)

'— ^y kup'Uk (vl. suBs.) foam.

{^'^^^ kupah-lak (subs.) a moth, a butterfly.

UJ LJ^Uy kutar~H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to lift.

\^{jcj\jjS kutar-mak (v. tr.) to lift, to raise. [g^g^'

^■■■^^jy^ kutar-^n-mak (v. refl.) to take one's self off bag and bag-

*mmS\jjS kutak (subs.) a log of wood, a cross-out portion of a trunk.

\J^y kutan (subs.) the gut.

<— ^^ v^^ gujjak (subs.) a shovel.

^^^ kiich (subs.) strength, power.

^y kUch (subs.) a march, a migration, P.

^^ kUch (subs.) a wife.

^^ kmha (subs.) a street or lane in a town, P.

^^ kuja ) .

I * X *^ \ (subs.) a vegetable broth, Kh., Kaz.

^X kucha)

*-^ V/y^jjlj-y kuch'a'n-dur'mah (v. refl. cans.) to cause to exert one's self.
v-J wwy kiich'O'n'mak (v. refl.) to exert one's self, " %^efforcer^^ to

make an effort.
^•^WVj" kuch-a-ir-mak (v. intr.) to become strong.

^^y^y kuch'luk (adj.) strong, powerful, [the title given to the
Na'iman prince from whom ChaDgez Ehdn conquered
the country of K&shghar].
OalSy^^ kuch-liik'Uk (subs.) powerful-ness, mightiness.
^^^^X kUch^mak (v. intr.) to march, to migrate, P. T.
22

170 B. B. Shaw — A Voedbulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^7y^^ huchuk (subs.) a puppy,
i^ ^^y kUch'Un-mak (v. refl.) to march one's self about, to wander

about without purpose or unnecessarily.
)(^^ JcUda (subs.) a grass of a very nourishing nature growing
in the mountains, Kjlz.

jy^ Jcurr (subs.) a cavern. See j^,
\j^^Jjr kura^sh (subs.) a wrestling match.
**-* U-il^ Jeura'^eh'tnaJc (v. recip. ?) to wrestle together (in a friend-
ly way).
lSJI;^ hura^k (subs.) a shoYcl, Khos:.
^^\)y kura-mak (v. tr.) to shovel away, to throw (snow, earth,
&c.) up with a shovel.

*^ ^ I (subs.) a counterpane, Kh. ; also, lamb-skin, Y.

^Jjr kiirpah )

^^J\*J^ji kHrsat-mak (v. cans.) to cause to see, to show.
i^^S^jjS kurshapalak (subs.) a bat, P. T.

^JJ~)J^ gwrkura^k (vl. subs.) thunder.
u-T ^fjij^ gurkura-mak (v. intr.) to thunder.

J!r^r kHr^guz-mak (v. cans.) to cause to see, to show.
^^J^ kHr-mak (v. tr.) to see, to look. " Ohddn kurmaq^* to be
pleased.
wU^j;^ kHr-ush'tnak (v. recip.) to see one another; to have an

interview.
j^^jjy^ kHr-uk'Siz (vl. adj.) un-seemly, tm-sightly.
^■■^^JU?^ kHr-uk'Hk (vl. adj.) seemly, sightly, well-favoured, weU-

made.
*— ^W^y kHr-uJ-mak (v. pass.) to be seen.

X^JUy^ kHr-um-luk (vL adj.) worthy of being seen.
\mJ^\^jjj> kHr-un-mak (v. refl.) to make one's self (or itself) seen, to
appear.
JJ^ koz (subs.) an eye.
Jjr kuz (subs.) autumn.
I^y koza (subs.) a pitcher, P.

1878.] of JSastem Turkistdn. 171

L-5?^!/^ ^j?-«;f-cA« (subs.) a watchman, a sentry ; lit. a looker after.
fil^JXr Jcuz-at-mah (v. cans. ?) to look after, to take care of.
^^*^J!r T^oZ'tik-mak (comp. v. intr.) to fasten the eyes on ; lit. to

sew the eyes.
\^\aS^^^ Jcdz-tig-mah (comp. v. intr.) to strike (said of the evil eye)

[governs gha]. Conjugated in the 3rd pers. sing,
v^frjj^ kdZ'Chi (subs.) a good judge (of horseflesh, &c.). Lit. an
eye-er.
^ vV JeoZ'la-mak (v. tr.) to keep one's eye upon, to watch from
a distance.
^^X)y koZ'luh (subs.) dark spectacles to protect the eye, made of

hair ; also, the stone of a ring, <&c.
V— X/j^ hoZ'luJc (adj.) far-sighted, long-sighted ; also, gifted with
the evil eye [supposed to be a great advantage as the
possessor can compel the sale to him of any horse, &c.,
that he takes a fancy to, omder penalty of causing it to
die if it be refused to him].
i^Uijlj^i Jcoz-uk-mah (v. intr.). The same as koz-tigmak.

^^ kosa (adj.) beardless, with only a few straggling .hairs on
the face, P.
cJ^aSUm^ kosa-H-mak (v. cans.) to cause to stir (the fire).
^^UoUw^ JcoM-mah (v. tr.) to stir (the fire).

^ . ^ > (subs.) a piece of wood for stirring the fire, a poker.

^Vm#^ Jcosai )

^^ kaush (subs.) slippers. The same as jj^&c., P.; also,

chewing the cud.
Vj**^ ^^«A (subs.) meat [for gosht^ P.].

%^J\A\^yS Jiausha'tnak (v. intr.) to chew the cud. [Camels are

watched before purchase, to see whether they perform
this operation properly. If they do not move their
jaws laterally at least 25 times before swallowing again,
they are not considered to be in good health. In that
case it is said : kauah-i huzuldi " its chewing is spoilt".]

172 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulafy qf He Lan^nage [Extra No. for

^^^ kufdh-iak (subs.) a moth, a batierfij. The same as lu^h-

lah.
^mSyy^ hmfntk (subs.) a bridge. The same as hvjprvik,
i-Jy^ Icufuk (subs.) foam. The same as kupuk.
uJ^ kok (subs.) a leather thong forming the pivot of the trellis-
work of a Kirghiz tent.
\mJy kok (subs.) the skj. Also (adj.), blue ; also, green.
xjji^jiji kok-ar-^i-mak (v. cans.) to cause to be blue, to make bloft

(or green).
s^J^j^y kok-ar-mak (v. intr.) to become blue (or green).
\2j\j*]jij^ kok'ta-mak (t. intr.) to thunder.

^ ^ > { (subs.) breasty chest,

^_5^y kokti )

^iiy^jr kokihun (adj.) aged, decrepit, in extreme old age; aLso, an

intriguer, a mischief-maker.

%lJ\^tiji kok'la^mak (v. tr.) to stitch roughly, to tack ; to fasten two
wands together bj a leather thong passed through them
forming a pivot, [the sides of a Earghia tent are fonned
of wands thus fastened together into a trellis-^ork
which, can be folded up for travelling, or else extended
and set upright round the circumference of a circle, and
then covered with felts to form the sides of the tent].

\^\j*iSy kok'la-mak (v. intr.) to become blue or green, to send forth
leaves (of a tree).

I— r^*y kokmak (subs.) a wild sheep lOvis nahura],
J^ji kokndr (subs.) the poppy, P.
^J^j^ kok'ish (adj.) bluish, greenish*

Uj^ kul (subs.) a lake, a pond, a tank [common in the geogra-
phy of Central Asia as Issiq-kul (warm lake), kara-W
(black lake) ; but not ^* SirikuP* (as sometimes spelt by
Europeans), see Sariq^ol or Sariqol}.
uj Uly kau-la-'t'fnak (v. caus.) to cause to dig.

*^y kulagah (subs.) shade, shadow.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn. 173

^Uttjy kau'la-mak (v. tr.) to dig, to excavate.
imS^'iji hulang (subs.) daily bread.
^'iy kulankah. For kulagah^ Kaz.
lJJ^;*^^ kul'dur-mah (v. caus.) to cause to laugh.
^^jr kulki (adj.) laughable.
%mS^y kul-mak (v. intr.) to laugh.
KJ*'y^j^ kuhnua (adj.) miserly.
^^ji ktmak (subs.) help, assistance.

\jj^^ kumak (adj.) toothless, whose mouth retreats from want of
teeth.
^J^^jr kumak'Chi (subs.) a helper, an assistant.
wU^XSl^ji kumak'la'*8h'mak (v. recip.) to assist one another, to do

any thing conjointly.
^T^J^ kumush (subs.) silver.

siij^ kon (subs.) the sun ; also, a day.

tt2^ kun (subs.) women connected by being the wives of the

same husband.
\^y kUn (subs.) common leather (cow's or camel's hide).
^j^^J^j^ kon-uUurush-i (subs.) sun-set ; lit. sun's sitting down.
^.^JUiy kon-ldtish-i (subs.) sun-set ; lit. sun's sinking.
9^^y^^r kon-tughush'i (subs.) sun-rise ; lit. sun's birth.
^^^hy^Jr kunjit (subs.) the grain sesame, P.
^J^'^^jr kori'Chikish'i (subs.) sun-rise ; lit. sun's conning.
i^Sf^^ ktm-chi (subs.) a leather-worker.

^jff^y^ kun-ohi (subs.) a jealous person ( P from kun the name

applied to the connection between two women who are

wives of the same husband).

K2J^^^^^ kun-chi'la^sh-mak (v. recip.) to be jealous of one another.

\JJlftx:^yi kun-chi'la-mak (v. intr.) to be jealous. [man.

yj>.lfcX>ji kundash (adj.) connected by being the wives of the same

\JJ\^jjtX}^ kun-dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to become trained, to train

to educate.
Jy^j^ kon-doz (subs.) day-time.

174 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahdary of the Language [Extra No. far

ij*^y^ hungl (subs.) heart (chiefly used metaph. for ' mind,* &c).
w^^ hungl-ah (subs.) a coat or shirt not opening at the breast.
'^^^^^ kungl-chak (adj.) merciful-hearted.
^"^^^y hungl-lik (adj.) pleasing to the heart ; also adv., heartily,
with pleasure.
^JUAXiji Jcun-la'Sh-maJc (v. recip.) to be jealous of one another.
^U«&iy kun-la-mak (v. intr.) to be, or become jealous.
imJj^j^ kdn-loh (subs.) a parasol, a sun-shade.

wJoV kon-lih y '^^ ^

«jJ^*|^^ kun-mak (v. iutr.) to become trained, to receive an educa-
tion.
^jr kuya (subs.) smut, the blackness formed on the outside of
a kettle, black (of any kind applied or formed on any
object).
^^y^ kilya (subs.) a grub which destroys garments.

\ t \ ("^^^^0 * son-in-law.

^uy kuyao )

^j^^ kuidurgu (subs.) a malignant pustule, [so called because it

is cured by inserting a hot needle].

vJSJl^jd^^ kui-dwr-mak (v. cans.) to cause to bum (intr.), to bum

(tr.), to set fire to.

sl^H^ kuilak (subs.). The same as hunglak,

i*JU{^ kuUmak (v. intr.) to bum, to be burnt.

%mJy^ kUg-Uk (adj.) burnt.

iS Jcah \
^ \ (post-pos.) to, at, into, onto. [See kd^ gd,']
*5 gah)

S?! } (reive, affixes). See Gram. p. 312, Syntax.

uJ^^^ kipak (subs.) bran.
^^^Jj^iir kep'tur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to become dry, to dry (tr.).
^^^^^ kep-mak (v. intr.) to become dry, to dry [said of clotbes,
&c.].

1878.] of Eastern Twrhistun. 176

<i— rt«^Ujj Jcet-ar-mak \ (v. caus.) to cause to go away, to remove

\mmS\^jyi^iS ket-kuT-fnak [■ [any living being, a spot on a garment,

uJ^;^^ ket-kuz-mak J Ac.].

v^Uxj^ ket-mak (v. intr.) to go away.

^^^j^ ke*'tur-mak (v. caus. iioxn. kel-muk con,) to cause to come,

to bring.

^ kech (adj. and adv.) towards evening, late in the day.

cttJ!^?- kech-qunm (adv.) late in the day.
^^ kichik (adj.) small, little.
*^«^ Mch'k-Hnah (adj.) tiny, little, very small.
C-T Usi^ kich-mak (v. intr.) to ford, to pass through (a river), to
pass by (or abandon one's rights). [Governs dinJ]
4— A^^si^ ktch-ur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to ford, to cause to pass

by, &c.
Aacir kechah (subs.) night.
i->J^^ kichik. The same as iS:eif.
i^S^sir Mch-ik (vl. subs.) a ford.
aA^^.var&r kichik'kinah (adj.) tiny, little.
t^UXJjJsri* kech'ik-mak (v. intr.) to delay, to be late.
^\^jySfJi ki-dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to put on (clothes).
yt^ kirr (adj.) dirty, soiled.
1^ kira. The same as [^.

\^\j^ kirdk (adj.) necessary, needful [often used as an imper-
sonal verb in the sense of " it is necessary" with the
infinitive of another verb].
i^diUji kirdk-lik (subs.) the needful, necessaries.
^j^ kirpi (subs.) a hedgehog.
{jj^jj^j^ kir-guz-mak (v. caus.) to cause to enter, to bring in.
s^\^j^ kir-mak (v. intr.) to enter, to come or go in.
j>^ Mgiz (subs.) felt. See Mghiz.
^iJJ)*^ kezak (subs.) turn, order, succession.
^^^^J}^yt^ kez-dw-mak (v. caus.) to cause to walk about.
<^^^ kcZ'tnak (v. intr.) to walk about.

176 R- B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^}ji^ hixuh (subs.) a contagious fever.

^^^ hesak (subs.) a piece (of any thing) ; specially, a piece of
brick, [prob. from Jcei^maKl.
^\y««JuiO^ Jtes-tur-mak (v. cans.) to cause to cut.
iSJlMt^i kes-mah (v. tr.) to cut.
KJjjMfjS keS'Uk (y1. subs.) a cut, a notch.

'^mJ^ kisah (subs.) a bag attached to the girdle, P.
^\JuJ^ kiahdn (subs.) a hobble, a short chain fastening together a

horse's forelegs.
^JUJ kisM (subs, and pron.) a person ; any-one, some-one, e. g.
ohddn kishi *' a good person ;*' kiahi keUma-di '* no one

came."
*i^ Mik (subs.) a wild goat, or sheep, or antelope, [applied

generally to all wild animals of those sorts, which are
afterwards distinguished by their specific names, as : sdi^
kUk4, lit. "desert Uik'' {Saiga Tartarica?), idgh-ktik-i
"mountain k^ik'' (includes ibex, Ovis PoUi, &c.)].
--Kji kekach \ (adj.) stuttering, stammering, having an impe-
fiJlSji kekak j diment in one's speech.
,i}^iJ^ kekach-la-mak | ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ stammer.
jjUtifeji kekak'la^mak )

ijj\jjj^ kekai-'t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to be haughty,
iJX^^ kekai'fnak (v. intr.) to be haughty, to give one's self airs.
\1}3JjS kikar^tak (subs.) the wind-pipe.
\2j^j^ Hkar-t-mak (v. caus.) to cause to eructate.
fi)UyCxi Jdkar-mak (v, intr.) to eructate.

^Hj^ Ukar-uk (vl. subs.) an eructation.
^4^ kUgur-mak j ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ (clothes).
^^Jj^ kUgm-mak)

}i^ ktgiz (subs.). Same as kighiz.
f^ gilam (subs.) a carpet, P.
siJU;^IUi keUtur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to come, to bring.
fjJuJj^j^ibi JceUtur-uUmak (v. caus. pass.) to be brought.

1878.] ofUastem Turhistdn. 177

wt^^^ljLN Jcel-ish'twr-mah (v. recip. caus.) to cause to come to a

good result, to bring to a satisfactory conclusion.
^l^Aljp keUiah-mak (y, recip.) to come together ; speciallj, to come

to a good result.
viJ'^ij^ JceUmak (v. intr.) to come. [Kaz.

^^j^ keli (subs.) a laige mortar (in which rice, &c. is pounded),
wls^^ Jceli-ehak (subs.) a small hand-mortar (see k^i), Kaz.

ijV^ kelin (subs.) a daughter-in-law.
cLlV^J^jri^ kelin-chak (subs.) a daughter-in-law (thus called while still

a bride), Kaz.
f^ kim (conj.) that ; also, (pron.) who. See fS.

**— ^^*^ Jn-mak (v. tr.) to put on (clothes), to wear.
^^j*^ kim-ersa (pron.) lit. who-cver, whoso-ever ("it may be"),
but usually some one [same as kisht] (no longer common).
v*Jt«^^ kimar-mak (v. tr.) to gnaw, Kaz.
^Lm*^ kimsdn (subs.) a gold-tinted leather.
~^^ kimuk (subs.) cancellated bony tissue.
**^ ktmah (subs.) a vessel, a ship, a boat.
^j/^ ktin (subs.) the rear, the back part ; also, (adv.) afterwards,
behind; also, (post-pos.) after, behind [goyems din] ;
Min-ga "backwards," Min-uga "towards" or "to the
back of it" (definite).
i^dijJ kinduk (subs.) the naveL

^H^ king (adj.) wide, broad, extended ; also, roomy, capacious.
^KiAJ kingash (subs.) counsel, advice, deliberation.
c-TuM-Kiii kingash-mak (v. intr.) to deliberate, to take counsel [ ? recip.

of kingaumak; quasi "to open (one's mind) to one
another"].
v^UlCvjp king-aH-mak (v. pass.) to be made wide or open.

ULIkiJ^ king-di-H-mak (v. caus.) to cause to become open or wide,
^i'^^i^ king-aumak (v. intr.) to become wide or open, to expand.

i^k^^ king^chulik ),,,.,

C\ f c \ (s^bs.) wideness, expansion.

**>^Ji*»^ king-lik )

23

178 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Langwige [Extra No. for

*^ Mnah (sabs.) jealousy, P.
(j^^y^^^ Mnah tui-tndq (comp. t. intr.) to be jealous, P. T.
(^Li^H^xxi Jnttah-la-^sh'tnak (v. recip.) to be jealous of one anotber,

P. T.
iiJL9t^xxi Mnah'h-ffMk (v. intr.) to be jealous.

*^**^ itf»fi->-ffAaA (adv.) backwards: Min-i-ehah ket-mak "to re-
tire," ** to back (of a borse) ;" Jnin'i'Chah tur-mak "to
turn tbe back on."

J

' M (part.) a particle expressive of multitude: e, g. la-u-
lashkar " the whole army", " the army and alL"
W' Idbd (subs.) the marks of the (Qjilmiiq) Buddhist religion

[Lama].
^' Idbar (subs.) title of an officer commanding a corps of in-
fantry (500 men).
Vi^^W^J JapuUla^mak (v. intr.) to flap to and fro (with the wind).

^^ latia (subs.) a rag. Also a kind of flowered silk stuff.
^' Idchah (subs.) sealing-wax.

^*-' lachak (subs.) a handkerchief thrown by women over the
backs of their heads to cover their hair, when praying
or going into any public place. Also, a kind of turban
or tiara worn by Kirghiz women.
laehiq (subs.) a temporary shed in a melon garden, <&c., to
shelter the person who looks after it, "a lodge in a
garden of cucumbers."
^2/^*^' MoHn (subs.) a kind of hawk.
J^ lor. The plural affix.
^j^ Ids (subs.) refuse silk.

^' lash (subs.) green sHme (formed on stagnant water, &c.).
'■^ ^f (subs.) false boasting, a drawing of the long bow, P.
O 1^9,' An affix forming nouns of locality. E, g. yauldq
" summer quarters" (pastures in the mountains, ' Alps'
in the Swiss sense) , jish-laq " winter quarters" (this

1878.] of JSastem Titrkistdn. 179

name formerly applied by the nomad inhabitants of
Central Asia to the places where they spent the winter,
has now become applied to all settled habitations or
Tillages) ; Su-iaq '' a watering-place (of cattle) ;** OU
laq " a grassy place/' &c,
\mmf^ Idh (subs.) sealing-wax, P.
^) Ian, An affix forming numeral substantives. jE. g. ** ochao-
Ian ** a group of three." See Grammar, p. 808.
jKji langar (subs.) an anchor (or rather a heavy object used
instead of an anchor), P. Also, a halting-place, a rest*
house, Y.
A^' lanhah (subs.) linen (P Nankeen).
J!)5 Idwar. See IMar.
c5*' Idi (subs.) mud, clay, P.
^^s^) IdUehi (subs.) a worker in clay, one who makes walls, &q.

of mud, P. T.
O^M Un-la-^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to become muddy, to

muddy (tr.), P. T.
l}^V Idi-la-maq (v. intr.) to become muddy. Also, to float, P. T.
(Jv^ Idi'lik (adj.) muddy. Also the name of the second stage
from Tarkand on the Aksu road, P. T.
^-i^ lab (subs.) a lip, an edge, P.
v£AJ lachaJh. See tS^H.

^— ^ lak (num.) a hxmdred thousand, P.
C^ lahlak (subs.) a stork, A.
^r^ /ff^A (subs.) a rush (grass).
^y luq. See lik.
\mJjf luh The same as Idk.
fj^jf lum'lum (subs.) a composition resembling india-rubber.

#V ^^^j (subs.) the inside of the cheek, P.
^V lungqa (subs.) a flower-pot.

lunffi (subs.) a scarf used as turban or wabt-scarf chiefly
used by the Afgh&ns, P.

^

180 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

''An affix used in forming adjectives from substantiTeSy
^ . and also abstract nouns from other nouns or from

^ *. , -< adjectives. It takes various forms according to the
letters of the word to which it is affixed. See
Gram. Euph. Changes.

• r

JUly« matdl (subs.) a proverb, a saying, Kaz.
L^Ut* matang (subs.) a kind of sweetmeat, (? Ch.).

jf^^ mdtdo (subs.) a number of animals picketted together to
a single rope, a chain-gang of criminals similarly fasten-
ed, Kaz.
\J^^ majdn for marfdn (subs.) coral, A.
^^ mdch (subs.) paste made of the fine dust collected from a
flour mill.
Oh^ fndrdq (vl. subs.) a place of ambuscade or of secret oU
servation (of an enemy),
^j^!;^ mdrdq-chi (subs.) an ambush, men placed so as to observe
the enemy without being themselves seen.

Jj;^ mdrdl (subs.) the female of the 12-tined stag of Eastern
Turkist^n.
^^IaJI;U Mdrdl-hdshi (prop, name.) a town founded by the Chinese

near Lai-Masjid, at the junction of the roads from
Tarkand and Kashghar to Aksu.
1^!;^ mdrdli (subs.) leather prepared from the skins of the

JUI^U mdra^mdk (v. tr.) to watch from a concealed post of ob-
servation, to lie in ambush.
^'»5j^ mardaoh (adv.) tailor- wise (used of a mode of sitting),
Kaz.
*i^^ Tndrozah (subs.) a small carpet.

JJ^ mdzdr (subs.) a tomb of a holy man (which is revered as
a shrine and ornamented with flags and yak-tails fas-
tened to long poles, also often with horns of wild ani-

1878.] ofUastern Tur1cist6n. 181

mals). The cairns, which one meets with throughout
the mountains separating India from Turkist^n, on all
noticeahle spots such as Passes, <&o. are, in the parts of
these mountains inhahited hy the Musalmans, honoured
with the title of " M&z&r" and considered to be the
tombs of ancient worthies, A.
(y/^ mazdq (subs.) a joke, (corr. A.).
yj**^ rndsh (subs.) a kind of pulse, P.
t*V/« mdsha (subs.) candle-snuffers ; also, the fork in wich the
match of a match-lock gun is fixed.
(jWL* fndshaq (subs.) gleanings.
c:9j^Uo ffidshut (subs.) raw silk.
JUl^ mdqdl. See matdl,
^UJU»U« rndqia^H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to praise.
^V^UjLo md^ta^maq (v. tr.) to praise.
Uilwl^ mdqta-'n-maq (v. refl.) to praise one's self, to boast.
y^ mdJcu (subs.) a shuttle (generally made of horn).
^^ mdla (subs.) a bush-harrow, a rake, an instrument for
covering seed with earth after sowing.
^t^jdJl^ mdl-dur-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to dip.

^UJU« mdUmdq (v. tr.) to dip, specially into a dyeing vat.

^^ mdmd (subs.) a grandmother, an old woman.
Cy^^ mdmuq (subs.) cotton, Kaz.

y^^ mantu (subs.) a small meat-dumpling baked in steam.
jiy^^ mantu-paz (subs.) a baker of * Mantus.'
%,j^T^^ fnantu-chi (subs.) a pimp, Kashghab.
^l-«;^axiU mang-dur-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to walk.
^3U*»»j^L« mangni'^sh-mdq (v. recip.) to bleat to one-another (of

sheep or goats).
O^lyy^ mangra^mdq, (v. intr.) to bleat, to baa (used of sheep and

goats).
^^^^ mangqa (subs.) a running from the nose ; also, a dfuigeroos
illness in horses.

182 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [EitaNo. for

^lj!>L« tnangldi (subs.) the forehead.

jUC>U mang-mdg (v. intr.) to walk, to go, to progress in any

manner (physically).

^f>^^ mang-Uh (t1. subs.) movement, pace.

cJ ^ mdi (subs.) fat, grease, batter, Kaz.

Vi^ mdga (subs.) capital, original sum inrested, P.

(3^^ fnayaq (subs.) sheep's droppings.

I*>i^ maida (subs.) fine powder, P.

t^Lt^lcAjL* mdida-la-maq (tr.) to reduce to powder.

Oi/^ fndiruq (adj.) twisted, crippled, Kaz.

M)y^'^ mdimHn (subs.) a monkey, A.

t-T L«l^«^ midra-mak (v. intr.) to move.

sj^/^ marjdn (subs.) coral, A.

*^*«*^ masJcah (subs.) fresh butter, P.

V/-^^ maehrah (subs.) a social re-union with music, Ac.

(y*^ mashq (subs.) practice drill, military exercises, A.

cV**^ ma^qul (adj.) lit. reasonable; commonly used for well,

all right, A.
^j^tijAM^ fna^qul'la^^sh-maq (v. recip.) to come to an agreement

together.
^UXlj^A^ ma^quUla-maq (v. intr.) to come to an agreement, to agree to.
tJJ^'* fnilteq (subs.) a gun, a musket.

milteq-chi (subs.) a gunner, a musketeer,
^j^ man (pron.) I,

^ men-em (pron.) my, Kaz, [for maning\
cajJiX.aA^ man-man-lik (subs.) egotism, self-conceit.
**^ manah (interj.) here! ^^voieiP*
y^ mu interrogative affix. See Grammar. .
^ mu for hu in oblique cases.
^T^ muchah (subs.) the hind-quarters of a sheep, Kaz.
O^j"* muchal (subs.) the cycle of 12 years (each of which is
named after an animal). See Grammar.
O^*'!^^* muju- ^t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to pulverize in the hands.

1878.] ofUastem TurkiMn. 183

O^y^y^ fnuju-maq (v. tr.) to rub between the fingers, to nib to

powder in the hands ; to bring down the pride (of any
one) ; also, to scrape the meat ofE a bone [in this last
sense used only by the Eazzaks].
iji^y* tnHehin (subs.) tweezers (with which the Turks of Yarkand
and Kashghar used to pull out the hair of their faces
out of compliment to their beardless masters the Chinese)
P.
^^jy^ mori (subs.) a gutter ; also, a chimney, p P.

Jy^ muz (subs.) ice.
^Jj^ muzdt properly muz-art (from muz " ice" and ari old Turki
for a " Pass") prop, name of a Pass on the road from
Aksu to Ila.
^)y^ muzai (subs.) a calf.

P^Jj^ muz'tdgh (subs.) a glacier ; also, a snowy mountain. (See
Bemarks regarding the application of such words as
proper names, under Aq-tagh,)
O^jy^ muZ'luq (adj.) icy, coYered with ice.
\^^^y mushaJc (subs.) a fire- work, a rocket, a squib.
Oy^y* witwAttifc (subs.) a cat.
\^\^tXy mush-la-mak [for musht-ia^mak'} (y. tr.) to strike with

the fist, P. T.

JV -a£t*yA«0 (prop, name) Mongol.
ijy^y Ifuglul)

J^ mol (adj.) plentiful, abundant, Kh.

^y mola (subs.) a pack-saddle.

^y mulla (subs.) an educated person, one who has learnt to

read and write, P.

s:}^y* Multdn (prop. name). A name applied in Yarkand to all

Shias, since a party of Mult^ni Shtas made themselves

notorious by their misconduct some years ago in that

town.

ttJTT^ moMii (subs.) a wild-cat.

184 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

fy mum (subs.) wax ; dh-mwn " bee's wax" ; kara^vMm "cob-
bler's wax/' P.
(j^<ss^y^ munjaq (subs.) a coloured bead.
Zjs^y mun-chah (adv.) thus much, (from bu which see, and ehh)^
a]^}jy mun^dagh (adv.) thus.
ttXsy mun-dah (adv.) here.
%mS^y^ mung (subs.) sorrow, care.
^J^XJy* mung-at-rndq (v. intr.) to become sorrowful.
^UAIjXij^ mung-da-^sh-Tnaq^ (v. recip.) to impart one's griefs to one-
^U^Xvi^ mung-la^^sh-maq ) another.
)^y^ munguz (subs.) a horn.
^jJUar*^^|-^ mikrbdn-ehi-liq (subs.) kindness, graciousness, P. T.
j^jJUk^U^ mihrndn-chi'Iiq (subs.) hospitality, P. T.

Jsi"* mijdz for mizdj (subs.) health ; also, disposition, temper, F.
vJy« mekh (subs.) a nail, a peg, P.
^V^jHaci** mekh-la^^t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to nail, P. T.
^L«3li4^ mekh-la-maq (v. tr.) to nail, P. T.
w^ird<^ midira^^t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to move, to move (tr.)
<— '^];i*u^ midira-mak (v. intr.) to move, to creep.
%^\^lyiti^ tnidir-ia-mak (v. intr.) to move about, to creep about.

%CijX^ mdirdah (adv.) here [for bu or ma^er-dah ' in this place'].
yj*^ mis (subs.) copper, P.
A*.\.a.mJ^ mU^q^achah (subs.) a copper vessel, P. T.
i^^i**^'^ mishiq (subs.) a cat.
Mni^ ffj'tXjan") interrogative or dubitative form of the Indcf.
{*;i^^ mHkm j Part, of the defective verb irmak or imak) is ?

whether ? [See Grammar.]
j^xUju« milteq (subs.) a gun.

ui^ mail (subs.) inclination, choice, A.
ijii^ min (pr.) I, Kaz, Kiegh.
^j^^"^ minjaq. See munjdq.

(3^^*^"* min-dur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to ride, to mount (any-
one).

UJ

1878.] of Eastern TurhUtdn. . 185

UJ^/* min-Uh-fnaJe (v. recip.) to ride together.
ming (num.) a thousand,
"i^ ming (subs.) a beauty-spot, a mole on the face, [horse.
^U^^A/o min-ga-^sTi'mak (v. recip.) to ride two together on one
^^ mingah (subs.) the brain.
i^UijL* min-mah (v. tr.) to mount a horse, to ride, " monter h
**i^ mina (interj.) here ! ** void /" {cheval*^

*i^ miyah (subs.) the brain.

cy^U ndhdt (subs.) sugar, P.
^^^ ndchdr (adj.) helpless, P.
cJ^DV^ «<l<?A4r-W£ (subs.) helplessness, P. T.

J^ ndr (subs.) a single-humped camel, like those of India.

^Ij^ nar-rdq, "For nari-rdq.

^/^ nari (adv. and post-pos.) beyond, on the further side.
[This is perhaps merely a contraction of an-yeri Cnyeri
that place). At any rate, it may be used precisely as
if it were a compound of pronoun and substantive ; e, g,
aaning nari-*ng gha " to thy further side" (where it
takes both the possessive termination and dative post-
position) ; fin-din nari or nari da " on the further side
from (of) the house." See Grammar. But it has also
the properties of a simple adverb, in that it can take
the comparative form, see next word.]
c}ji)^ nari'rdq (adv. comparative) further, beyond, more on the
other side.
J^ ndz (subs.) blandishments, endearments, P.
^UJJjU ndz-la-'t-maq (v. cans.) to cause to endear himself, P. T.
^jUiVjU ndz-la-n-maq (v. refl.) to endear one's self, P. T.
C^v ndz'liq (adj.) endearing, using blandishments,
■W^ ndzuk (adj.) delicate, tender, P.
24

186 R- R Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

1/*^ nde (subs.) snuff (generally put into the mouth under the

tongue and retained there for some time), P.
j\yJ^ ndiwdr. The same, P.
Jl^^ ndsiodl. The same.
^]^U ndswai. The same, Kaz.

S^';^^'^**-'*} (subs.) a pear, p.
^^I^u ndshioatij

A^U ndshtah (subs.) an early breakfast, a morsel eaten on firat

getting up, * choti haziri,* P,
1;^^ naghdra (subs.) a large kettle-drum, P.
5-|;^U naghdra-chi (subs.) a kettle-drummer, P. T.

^2J^ ndk (subs.) a pear.
^y^^ namu9 (subs.) an indignity, a disgrace, A.

^ ndo ") (subs.) the wooden spout or channel which carries
'^^ ndwa ) the water to the wheel of a water-mill, P.
*^!;^ ndwdt. See ndbdt.
ijS^ nai (subs.) a reed, a fife, P.
i^f^^ fun-chi (subs.) a fifer, P. T.

•^i** ni'Chand (pron.) seyeral, P. T.
*-^«* ni-chuk (adv.) how ? in what manner P thus, so.

■

*^ ni'Chah (pron.) how many ? how much ?
*^^*'^ nuskhah (subs.) model ; also, pattern, design, drawing, A.
1;^ naghara. See !;Ut>.
***^ naghmah (subs.) music, melody, P.
^*tr*^ naghmah'Chi (subs.) a musician, P. T.

^^j^ nimarsah [ni^^m-ersa'] (pron.) some thing [lit. " what-erer
(it) may be." It preserves the memory of its origin
sufficiently to avoid taking affixes or post-positions as
a rule, excepting sometimes that of the accusative].
^ nUmah (pron.) what ? also, something. [See Grammar,
Pronouns.]
ning or nang or nung. The affix of the Genitive case ; in
early Turki " property," " possession."

1378.] ofHa^em Turhhtdn. 187

^J^ ni (pron.) what ? Also (post-pos.) the affix of the Accosa-

tive case.
iV nat. See <cli.
vi)Uw ni'tah (adv.). The same as nuchuk, [Almost obsolete.]
ni-chuk. See

• ** . - y - / Lg^y\ i^t what time ? when P
I'^S^^ ni-cMq^da )

i}^^-f^ ni'cMgh'liq (pron.) what, at a guess P about how much ?

[See cTidghJ]

\^y^ ni'^chun [for ni-uehuii] (adv.) why P for what reason P

*'5^ ni'Chah, See *^.

♦ -.

^^ noi-cAaA (subs.) a little reed, specially one placed in a shut-
tle and on which the thread is wound.
^Ji^*^^ nim^ish-qa (adv.) to what purpose P wherefore P

^^ nimah. See *^.
^^^h^ ning. The affix of the Genitive case. See Grammar.

ft ^^

^^ji^ niersah [ni-ersa]. The same as nimarsah [constructed
with ni instead of nima],

^ II an affix corresponding with our "isn't there," "does'nt
it."

O^J)^/*^ Mr-dur-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to be tired, to tire, (tr.).
(j)^J^ hdrduq (subs.) fatigue, tiredness.
^L^lfc hdr-mdq (v. intr.) to be tired, to feel fatigue.
^^^^j^ Mr-iUmaq (v. caus.) to cause to be tired.

lS^^ hang (subs.) a clifE, a precipice, Y.
cy^iXilA hangghut (subs.)^the ruddy sheildrake, Oasarea ruiila.
j^y^ hangu (subs.) name of a tree from whose hard wood cups
are made, (?) a kind of poplar.
^wIa hangi (subs.) a jack-ass.

188 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

\lXf)t^ hatda-mah (y. tr.) to drive, to drive away.
^J^mXj^ har-kaehan (adv.) whenever, whensoever (lit. * every when'),
\mJ L«iyb hur-mak (v. tr.) to hlow away (with the mouth).
Vm/^jy^ hUr'-kak (adj.) shying (of a horse), easily frightened.
viX^^ hur-mak (v. intr.) to hark (of a dog).
v^JUijj^yfe hUruk-mak (v. intr.) to shy [for huruh-hak (?)].
v^UJ^^«yb huruk'UUfnah (v. cans.) to cause to shy.
J^y^ hukuz (suhs.) a bullock, an ox.
JH^ hoi (adj.) wet, damp.

i^JjlxsK^Jb hohehi'Uk')

* •*♦ -^ > (subs.) wetness, humidity.

uJ^jA hol'lok J
(2JL«1J^ hoUia-mak (v. tr.) to wet.
y^^ ^* hauhai (inter j.) alas ! what a pity !

«i I . , f (suhs.) an owl.

(3^^^ gapaUq (adj.) flat.
o\ri^ yapraq (subs.) a leaf (of a tree), Kaz.
4?^^ ydparmdq. The same, E. T.
^ V«jyu^u y{ip-wA.fi#r-«»fl£ (v. recip. caus.) to cause to become affixed,

to affix.
\JJ\^Aj\j gap'ish-maq (v. recip.) to stick together, to become affixed
to one-another to climb, to *^ swarm up," [recip. from
following].
O^^ y^P-'fnaq (v. tr.) to close, to cover.

yn ydhu (subs.) a baggage horse or strong pony.
O^Jyi^* gapurmaq. See o^ji^.
^U^^U gap-ush-maq. Bee gapishmaq.

C/X * y r' 9 j (aubs.) the covering of a horse, horse-clothing.

W-i • .^ - gap'Un-ji (subs.) a covering (for the body) against rain or
cold, a blanket.

1878.] ofHastem TwrhUtdn, 180

{j\^^y^ yap-un-mag^ (v. refl.) to cover one's self, to throw one's
clothes on without putting one^s arms into the sleeves.
jJ^le yapah^laq. See oKUU.
«^vj ydt (adj.) strange, unknown.

O^^ ydtdq (subs.) a man belonging to a nomad tribe who from
poverty comes into the towns to earn a livelihood,
Kaz, Eh.
^USU ydt-qdq (adj.) sleepy, who sleeps much or often.

\3 Jy^^ ydt-quz-maq )
oUiXJlj ydt'la-'n-maq (v. refl.) to feel one's self strange, to be shy.
^jUXSU ydt'la-maq (v. tr.) to treat as a stranger, to shun.

jUSv> ydUmaq (v. intr.) to lie down, to lie.
UT^y^ ydUugh'luq (vl. adj.) lying down, leaning.
Oy^ ydt'Uq (vl. adj.) leaning, inclined.
•^^ y4(? (subs.) memory, recollection, P.
^I«3 «3U ydd'ddsh for ydd-ddehi (subs.) a memorandum, a reminder.
(3^** *^^ ydd'la-H-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to remember, to remind,

P. T.
O^ *^ • ydd-la-^sh-mdq (v. recip.) to remember one another, to

speak of one another, P. T.
^3>*^S»2^i ydd'l^n-fnaq (v. pass, or refl.) to be reminded, to bethink

one's self, to recollect, P. T.
^3^S jl^ ydd'lcMndq (v. tr.) to commit to memory, to learn by heart.

M ydr (subs.) a friend, P.

/^ ydr (subs.) a bow (for shooting).

JH ydr (subs.) a fissure, a split (in the earth), a bank, a clifE
(of earth). [The derivation of the name " Yarkand"
is said to be from ydr " a bank*' and kand or kant " a
village or inhabited place," as in Besh-Jcant " the five
villages," Tashkand ^the stone abode," &c. Yarkand is
situated on the edge of a bank which forms the north*
western boundary of' a depressed fluviatile plain nearly

190 R. B. Shaw— ^ Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

four miles wide, low and marshy, which was prob^y
formed by the diyaricating branches of the Yarkand
River. That river, however, now flows in a bed, 7 or 8
miles further east, which resembles in its character the
plain on the south-east side of Tarkand. The Zilchak
Ustang which runs through the latter some 81 miles
from the city, being derived from the main river some
miles higher up, has the appearance of a natural stream
and not of a canal, and is perhaps a relic left by the
main stream in its former bed. The edge of the higher
level plain in the neighbourhood of the city is also cut
by numerous fissures or depressions with high banks
which add to the appropriateness of the name Yarkand
^the city of banks." The name Yam&n-y&r "evil
banks," is also common in the country, being applied
to a river passing south of Kashghar Fort, and also to
a dry river-bed some 2 miles north of Yarkand.]
I;Vj» yara (subs.) a woimd.

^UljU ydr-a-H-maq (v. cans.) to cause (or allow) to be pleasant
(to one's self), to appreciate, to be pleased with [from
yara-naq^,

^USI^b ydrdt-maq (v. tr.) to create, to make out of nothing.
^UIjJI;^ ydrdt'il-maq (v. pass.) to be created.
\J^b^ ydr-dsh (subs.) peace, concord, P. T.
^U^^^yL&KO ydr-d'sh-tur-maq (v. recip. cans.) to cause to make peace,

to reconcile.

j|UAI^l> ydr-d^sh-rndq (v. recip.) to make peace together, to be-
come reconciled ; also, to suit, to become, [lit. ' to be
pleasant to one-another ;' from gdr-a-tnaq],
i3|;4 gdrdq (subs.) a weapon, an arm.
^UKil^lj ydrdq-la^maq (v. tr.) to arm.

^M!,ara.U^ i (adj.) wounded.

\

1878.] qf Eastern Turkistdn, * 191

(}^}/i ydr-a-mdq (v. intr.) to be pleasant, to be agreeable, to
please, P. T.
0^;«3;^ tfdr-dur-.mdq (v. caus.) to cause to split, (tr.).
O^h^ ydrgMq^ (subs.) leather (of sheep or goat's skin).
yt>^ ydr-gliu (subs.) a fine, an exaction [quasi something split
off by force from a man's property] (from ydr-mdq).
oV^^ ydr-ghu-chaq (subs.) a hand-mill (only used for making
tobacco into snuff, or splitting or breaking up grain for
cattle, not for flour).
^^';^ ydr-qandt (subs.) a bat.

i^^i yarligh ), , . , .,. , ,

Zjj^ ^^ J (subs.) a (written) decree, an edicts a " farmftn."

(3*1;^ ydrMq (adj.) friendly.
(jirj^ ydr-liq (adj.) fissured, with many banks.
jUU^U ydrliqa-maq (v. tr.) to absolve (from sin), to proclaim an
amnesty.
^M ydr-ma (subs.) split peas (or any other grain).
^UAl«;U yarmaah^maq. Same as yapish-rndq.

(3^^ ydr-mdq (v. tr.) to split, to slit. [See ydr « a fissure."]
i^M yarmdq (subs.) a bronze coin of small value current in the
time of the Chinese.
3^)M ydru-'t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be enlightened, to throw

light (or any thing), to lighten, to illuminate.
jU4j>;b ydr-ush-rndq (v. recip.) to split together.
jUAj^b ydru-'sh^mdq (v. recip.) to lighten together.

^)). ydrt^'gh \ ^^^^^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ generaUy.
0}JH ydru^'q )
^3^-^^W ydr-iUmaq (v. pass.) to be split.

fij^ yar-im (subs.) half [from ydr-maq "to split"].
J\ ydz (subs.) spring, also summer. [See ydshilJ]
Jl^;«3;l^ ydz'dur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to write.

192 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^Uoy^'U gdz-ghur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to err, to cause to be
(legally) guilty, to bring in guilty, to conyict.
Or)^ y^X'lug^ (^dJO acUipted to summer, summer (clothes, &o.).
3^) * ydz-mdq (v. tr.) to write, [? connected with garligh],
O^W gdz-mdq (y. intr.) to err, to deriate (from the road or from

one's duty).
O^J* yAz-maq (y. tr.) to unfold, to spread out.
0)J^ y^-^ (▼!• subs.) an error, a deyiation from rectitude, a

sin [from ^dji;.fft^^].
s^/i ydzi (subs.) the country (as opposed to the town) [? from
ydz summer, quasi " summer quarters," or else from
ydZ'tndq to spread out, quasi "open country," "rase

campagne*' as opposed to the town].
Cr^JH ydzM-maq (v. pass.) to be written.
^ub^'U ydzM-maq (v. pass.) to be spread out.
O^/^ ydzi'iiq (subs.) a dweller in the country, a country-man.
^Ujli»b yaaa-t-maq (v. caus.) to cause to make.

jJUmU yds(Pq (subs.) line of battle, formation of troops.
^v^Wu ydsd-mdq (v. tr.) to make, to construct, to form, to form

up (troops) ; also, to ornament, to adorn.
jUiUvU ydsd-'n-maq (v. refl.) to form up in line (of an army) ;
to adorn one's self,
jtwb ydsdo (subs.) a line of battle, Ki.z.
Oy^H ydsdwal (subs.) a chamberlain, an usher; lit. a former up
or arranger of men.
^lar^lLwO ydstd-'n-chdq (subs.) an elbow-cushion, a support for the

elbows.
^UiUuftlj ydstd-n-rndq (v. refl.) to support one's self on one's elbows,
to sit in a half reclining position.
(}jXm0\^ ydstuq (subs.) a pillow (for the head), Kaz.
^lii«b ydsqdq (subs.) a slate [not used for roofing because there

is no rain].
Jr^A^U ydsmuq (subs.) a kind of pulse.

J

1878.] of Eastern TurhUtdn. 193

i5^"***'W ydssi (adj.) wide (in superficial measurement), Kaz.

yjl^ ydsh (subs.) age (counted in years), years of age {e. g,, man
qirq ydah-da dur-man '* I am forty years old ;" * hesh
ydsh-gha yelti " he reached five years of age"].
\jr^ ydsh (adj.) of tender age, young [e, y.,ydsh hala "an in-
fant," ydah yigit " a young man"].
\jr^ ydsh (subs.) a tear.

J^H ydsh-ar (adj.) aged (so-and-so) [«. g,, ellik ydshar ddam
" a man fifty years of age"].
^Uj^v,i»b ydsh-ar-H-rndq (v. cans.) to cause to weep.
^jJUjjLiv^ ydsh^ar-Urndk (v. cans.) to cause to become green.

jil/^lorb ydsh-ar-rndq (v. intr.) to weep, to shed tears.
viJv/o;L&^ ydsh-ar-mah (v. intr.) to sprout, to become green.
(3^ * ydsh-a^rndq (v. intr.) to age, to grow older [applies equally

at all ages].
^UjU.V2 ydsh-an-rndq (v. refl.) to age one's self, to grow older.

ijy*^H ydsh-iuq (subs.) youth, early age.
JfUojI^b ydsh-ttr-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be hidden, to hide, to
conceal.
m)}/T^^ ydsh-ur-itn (adj.) hidden, concealed.
^Wj^j^U ydsh-ur-un-mdq (v. refl.) to hide one's self, to conceal itself.
OUi^b ydsh'Un-mdq (v. refl.) to hide one's self.

i^i^H ydshiq (adj.) lean, without fat (said only of meat).
O^H ydshil (adj.) green. [Possibly this is a passive form derived
from a root having the meaning of * becoming green' as
connected with the growth of plants, and which would
be the common origin of ydsh ' early age', ' budding
youth,' and of ydsh-ar-mah " to become green," (whose
form shows that the syllable U in ydshil is not of the
essence of the root), ar being the verbal co-efficient of
colour, as kok-ar-mak " to become blue," sarigh-ar-maq
" to become yellow," ozga-^r-mak " to become of different
colour." See also qiz-ar-mak and qizih This hypo-
25

194 B. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

thetical common root of ydth and ydsh-il is perbaps
connected with that of gdz " spring*' (the season of
growth). Compare also gaz-mctq " to open out." Prof.
Yamberj (from the kudatku BilikJ gives the following
comparison of the ages of man with the seasons of
the year,

ydz =: Spring, answers to childhood (which we
have seen is called gdsh).
gal = Summer, answers to youth.
hoB (kuz) = Autumn (the reaping season), an-
swers to full-grown manhood.

qish = Winter, answers to old age.
Thus it appears (as might indeed he imagined) that
the idea of comparing man's childhood with the season of
the first growth of plants has long heen familiar to
the Turks, and they may have expressed this in the
formation of their words for the same.]
^^4^^ ydshin (subs.) lightning.

^W ydgh (subs.) grease, fat. [Distinguished into 9ihi/dgh
" oil,'* tatliq ydgh " sweet oil," quyuruq yaghi lit. " tail
fat" (the fat of the tail of the Dumba sheep), sari^l
ydgh " yellow grease," viz.^ " ghee or clarified butter,"
maskah yagh " butter."]
-^Vib yaghdch (subs.) wood, a stick.
^l^iXcl^ yagh-dttr-maq (v. caus.) to cause to rain, to water (from

above), " arroser,**
vrfif^W yaghrun (subs.) a shoulder-blade, Kaz. Kibgh.
^ar*^b yaghriin-chi (subs.) one who divines hy means of the

shoulder-blades of sheep, Kaz. Kibgh.
yitc\j ydgh'la-ghu (subs.) a frying-pan, [from ydgh * grease'].
^UiXrA ydgh'h'^n-mdq (v. pass, and refl.) to be made or become
greasy, to make itself greasy, to become greasy of itself*
^UUcl^ ydgh'la-mdq (v, tr.) to make greasy, to grease.
c5^^ ydgh'liq (subs.) a napkin (for wiping the grease from one's
hands) ; also, (adj.) greasy.
US^ • ydghi (adj.) rebellious; also, warring, at war, P,

1878.] qfEa^em Turhistdn. 195

ji^H ydg\ir (adj.) galled (by the saddle, Ac, said of ahorse).
(J^rir^ ydghuUq (subs.) rebellion j also, hostility, P. T.
(s/i^^ yaghin (subs.) rain.
(3^ yo^ (subs.) the jaw-bone.

^H ydqd (subs.) a border, an edge, a collar (of a garment),
[the other edges of a garment have a different name],
^vxivjlj ydqd-la-maq (v. tr.) to border, to edge ; to move along the
edge (of anything) ; to make a collar (to a garment) ;
to seize by the collar, to collar.
^L^^Ajb ydq-tur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to light (fire).
^V^^IjU ydg-twr-maq (v. caus.) to cause (or allow) to be pleasant
(to one's self), to approve, to be pleased with.
^^5j3b ydqti (subs.) light, KjlZ.
^u*u ydq-mdq (v. tr.) to light, to set on fire.
^Ujlj ydq-mdq (v. intr.) to be agreeable, to please [governs gha\,
ij^H ydq-in (adv.) near, close to [ ? at the edge (ydqa)"].
^UUilj ydq-il-maq (v. pass.) to be lighted.
^[j^&xxjh ydqin-la-maq (v. intr.) to become near, to approach [go-
vems gha].
ij^ ydl (subs.) a mane (of a horse).
<J^ ydl (subs.) wages, pay, recompense for service.

O * ydldq (subs.) a plate for feeding dogs out of, [from their
licking up the remainders].
cJ^SW ydla^mdk (v. tr.) to lick.

^UiSlj yaldnghdch (adj.) naked, J[)are [? bom yaia^maq].
^v-^lU.Uijb yalanghdch-la^maq (v. tr.) to make naked, to strip.

^-^^^ ydlang (adj.) half -clothed (said of a man insufficiently

clothed in cold weather), bare, naked (said of a plain or

mountain).

^*L«11mjIj ydlang-la-rndq (v. tr.) to make bare ; also, to brandish

i}ir^^^ ydlang-liq (subs.) a bare place, an open plain. [ (a sword).

y^ ydlao (subs.). See ydldq, Kaz.
O ^'Wn yalbdr-mdq (v. intr.) to beseech, to entreat, to act as a
' lick spittle' [P from ydla maq}.

196 R. B. Sbaw — A Voeahulary of the Language [Extra No. for

j^^ ySlpdq (adj.) wide (in superficial measiirement), flat
3^by^ y^^'*^'^'^'^^ (j- caus.) to cause to glisten (whether by

rubbing up to make bright, or bj displaying the hiigiit
object in the light).
^LoIj^IAj ydhiur-a^mdq (v. intr.) to glisten, to shine.
c5^**4^Vi ydl-ehi'H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to be pleased with one's

service, to render acceptable service.
cjW^ ^ ydl-ehUrndq (v. intr.) to be pleased with (any one's) ser-
vices, to approve. [Governs ' J*»'.]
^jV^I^jib ydl'dir-a-rndq. See yalturamdq.
^UUA{ ydlgha^mdq (v. tr.) to join, to unite,
c^'^'i yalghdn (subs.) a lie, an untruth,
^.j**^*^ ydlghdn-chi (subs.) a liar.

Jy^ yolgkoz (adj.) alone.
i3vjy»^ yalghoz'iiq (subs.) loneliness, the being alone.
0^^>*Ai ydlghoz-la-maq (v. tr.) to isolate, to cause to be alone.
(JJy^^ ydlghoz-luq (subs.) solitude, loneliness, isolation,
(^/fti^ ydlin (subs.) a flame.
^v^jdijJb ydlin-dur-rndq (v. caus.) to cause to entreat (by withhold-
ing what is asked for), * se faire prierJ*
jUixJU ydlin-tnaq (v. intr.) to beseech, to abase one's self in en-
treaties (governs gha of the person entreated, and uch»
of the petition) [? the refl..form of ydla-maq; see also
ydharmdq,']
^5^^ yd'mdq (vl. subs.) a patch (sewn into a garment).
O^^W ydma-rndq (v. tr.) to patch, to sew a patch over a rent in
a garment.
U^ y(mdn (adj.) bad, evil ; also, bad to beat, brave, adroit.
^UXiUj yamdn-la-mdq (v. intr.) to become bad, to take in bad part,

to take it ill, to be offended ; also, to die of a cerUin
disease (of horses in which the breast swells).
l3i"^W yamdn-liq (subs.) evil, badness.
J^^H ydmghur (subs.) rain.

1878.] ofHastem Turkisidn. 197

U^ ^dn (subs.) a flank, a side. [Forms several adverbs, see

Grammar.]
^^ 1/dna (adv.)* See yanah.
KJ^^H ydn-hdsh (sabs.) the hip-bone [lit. ' side-head'].
O^^^-^Uilj ydn-hdaJ^la-rndq (v. intr.) to lie on one's side, to recline

on one's hip.
^luu yifitdq (sabs.) a thorny plant growing in desert places and
eaten by camels.
'*-^^*^*^^*^ ydnfi't-mdq (v. cans.) to cause to poand up.
*"*^^ * ydnfi-mdq (v. tr.) to pound up, to reduce to powder ; also,

(metaph.) to bring to nothing, to ruin.
C^f^ ydn-chiq (subs.) a side-pocket.
U**'*^^ y^n^ddah (subs.) a companion, lit. " a side-fellow*' [conf.
quridq-ddshl, [by side.

^U^|d>u ydn-ddsh-mdq (v. intr.) to accompany, to be or go side
(S^Jy^h ydn-dur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to bum, to burn (tr.).
jUj^«Aib ydfudur-mdq (v. caus.) to cause to return, to return (tr.) ;
also, to cause to do again.
O^'^ yangdq (subs.) a walnut.
O^^ ydngdq (subs.) the jaw-bone.
^UI^V* yanyra-mdq (v. intr.) to echo back, to give an echo.
JUCU yanggkdq (subs.) a wabiut.
jjVj&lj yangiUmaq (v. tr.) to make a mistake.
*>^^ yangzah (subs.) sort, kind, pattern, Cmir.
Z^^H yang^ligh (adj.) equal, same [generally used with hir before
it, = one and the same] (obsolete).
vJ^4*^W yanghUh (vl. subs.) a mistake [from yangilmaq],
4JUjU ydn-maq (v. intr.) to burn, to consume (itself) by fire.
O^^ ydn-mdq (v. intr.) to return, to turn back ; also, to change
one's mind, to give up [governs din] ; also, its past
participle in composition with another verb indicates
repetition of the action of the latter, e. y., ydn-ip qeUdim
" I did it over again,"

198 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

jfU^U ydni-rndg (v. tr.) to whet, to sharpen, ' repawer.*
J^ ydo (subs, and adj.) an enemy ; also, hostile, Eaz.
l)^ ydwa (adj.) wild, not tamed.
yj'^yi yatoash (adj.) tame, docile, tractable.
^jl9^M ydu-ohi (subs.) a go-between, or arranger of a marriage
[the custom is for this person to wear one leg of his
trousers loose over his riding boot while the other leg
is tucked into the boot as usual ; this is the mark of the
business that he has come upon] (? from ydu-maq),
O^^J^ ydu-^sh-ntaq (v. recip.) to approach one another, to approach
together [from ydu-maq],
oM ydu-^q (adv.) near.
^V^YS^l^ ydu'^q-la-rndq (v. intr.) to approach.
jU^U ydu-maq (v. intr.) to approach.
1^^ ydi (subs.) summer, [rare at the present day except in

camp].
O^^ ydydq (subs.) a footman ; also, (adv.) on foot, Kh.
J^W yaydo. The same, Kaz.
0^}i yoi-ldq (subs.) a summer pasture, an ' alp' (in the Swiss
sense).
^L«X^b ydi'la-maq (v. intr.) to pass the summer (used of flocks
and herds taken to their summer-pastures).
^WW ydi-mdq (v. tr.) to spread out, to extend. Same as ydz^maq,
^Ui^^ ydy-uUrndq (v. pass.) to be spread out, to flood.
^X>Uj[ yetf'Silan (num. subs.) a group of seven.
^^/*aAj[ yeUmUh (num.) seventy.
^^g^***^^ yet-mish^anchi (n. adj.) seventieth.
^*^ yet'Onchi (num. adj.) seventh.

^fi yetti (nimi.) seven [yetti-yuiduz or yetti-ughri (' the seven
stars' or ^ the seven thieves'), the name of the Great
Bear among the Eazzaks, who say that this constella-
tion is a gang of robbers ever circling round to watch
their opportunity of carrying o£E the two horses (two

1878.] qf Bastem TurhiBtdn. 199

bright stars of Ursa Minor) called Aqboz dt and Kok-
hSz dt (* white-grey horse* and * blue grey horse') which
are picketted to a peg (the Pole-Star) round which they
graze].
^ ^akh (subs.) ice, P.
^U« yahh-tan (subs.) a pannier, a leather box forming one side
of a baggage animal's load, [for P. yah-ddn],
yaJehshi (adj. and adv.) good ; well,
i^ yahhaJc (subs.) glazed chintz [? from yak\ ice. P.].
\2J^tsi yakh-la-mak (v. intr.) to freeze ; also, to set (of grease or
any liquid or viscous fluid which hardens with decrease
of temperature), P. T.
^As5 yahhni (subs.) cold meat.

*>i yed (subs.) a perfume, a pleasant smelL [smell.

ijJwSjJl yed-la-'t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to perceive a pleasant
uJUlfOj yed'h-mak (v. tr.) to smell, to perceive a pleasant odour.
viJUiJjJi yed'la-n-mak (v. pass, and refl.) to be smelt, to smell
(intr.) to give rise to a pleasant odour.
*—>^*^ yed'lik (adj.) pleasant smelling, odoriferous.

)ji yard (subs.) a wound.

^Iri yardgh (subs.) a weapon, an arm, [see 0!;^ .
C^^jji yara^h-la-maq (v. tr.) to arm. Same as o^iUijl^.
d^lri yard-'yh-liq (vl. adj.) pleasing [from yard-maq].
Oi^}A yardgh'liq^ (adj.) armei

ohi ytirdq (adj.) distant ; also, (adv.) far.

O^^bi yurdq-la-*sh~maq (v. recip.) to remove to a distance from

one another, to separate (tr. or intr.).

^JUXSI^ yurdq-la-maq (v. tr.) to remove to a distance.

O^^Ji yurdq4iq (subs.) distance, far-ness.
C^}ji yara-maq. See o^b^i •
j^*i yayhdch (subs.) wood.
\^^^ yag^idch^cU (subs.) a carpenter.
<3^^ yighla-maq (v. intr.) to weep, to lament with tears.

200 R. B. Shaw— ul Vocabulary of the Langwtge [Extra No. for

L5^ yighi (sabs.) weeping, lamentation.
^ yeqa. See ^.
jUl2j| yek'it-mdq (v. cans.) to cause to fall, to throw down.
^UlL yek'il-mdq (y. pass.) to be caused to fall, to be thrown
down, to falL
O^^ yek'fndq (v. tr.) to throw down, Kaz.

^ yak-kah (adj. and adv.) alone ; only, P.
ctJU^ yiyar-mak (v. tr.) to spin. [Also vi)U;Xj|]
^1bt«^ yiyarm-ailan (num. subs.) a gproup of twenty.
^SS^Jri yiyortn^'anchi (num. adj.) twentieth.
^•^^jh yigarmah (num.) twenty.

k^i yil (subs.) a year. [The solar year from ndo-roz to n&O'
roz (early spring) is called after the animals of the
Tartar year-cycle. The lunar year is of course called
by its number after the era of the Hijra.]
^^ yuldn (subs.) a serpent, a snake.
^^h yaldng. See J^lfl^ .
^UGlj yaldng-ghdch. See ^^)lk .
uJ*^ yttZ^t (subs.) horse-kind (used of horses generally without
distinction of sex or age, like the English word 'mankind'
for the children of men generally), hir top yulqi " a
(mixed) herd of horses."

WJ yulqi-ohi (subs.) a keeper of a herd of horses.

lj*M yiliq_ (adj.) lukewarm, tepid.
v->Jj^ yilik (subs.) marrow. Also (J*^'*
clJl^lft^ yem-la-mak (y. tr.) to paste, to glue. Also i*|U)UjJLu.
'^ yflnya (subs.) an elder brother's wife.
Cr^ yang-ligh. See i^^.
L^^ yany» (adj.) new.

«

^ yanah (adj. and adv.) other ; also, again.
'yi yt$d (subs.) a leek.
O^l^i yud'*t-maq (v. cans.) to cause (a child) to stop crying (by
giving it something to amuse it), to hush.

1878.] of Eastern TurkUtdn. 201

Kj'^yi yuffsh or yatod-'sh (adj.) mild, tractable, gentle.
cJ*^'^ yudsh'liq (adj.) mildness, gentleness.
jjiXJl^ yudlduz (subs.) a packing-needle.
O^i?*^!^ yud-n-dw-maq (v. cans.) to cause (a child) to stop crying,

to pacify, to soothe (a child).
3^ji yud-'n-maq (v. refl.) to pacify itself, to stop crying (of a
child), to become hushed.
^Ti yupqa (adj.) thin (not used of men or animals).
4?^'^^ yupqa^la-maq (v. tr.) to make thin.

^^yi yut (subs.) a scarcity of grass on the pastures.
ij^ji yutal (adj.) coughing, having a cough.
lIJU/Ij^ yutahmak ") .

^^j/yi siU.kur.malc j ^'^ ^*"^ *° *'°"«'-
*^^>y^ yut-ur-mak (v. caus.) to cause to be lost, to lose [for

O^ji ywi-maq (v. tr.) to swallow.

byi y^''^ (adv.) upright, standing, Kaz.
^by* ytitrah (subs.) heart (used without metaphor).

^)i yurt (subs.) a country, one's home.
UT^J^ yurUaul (subs.) a mounted troop of plunderers [from

yurUmaq],
^'^^Jyi yibrt-ah (vl. subs, and adj.) a trot ; trotting.
iJ^J^ yurt-qan (subs.) a counterpane, a bed-covering stuffed

with cotton.
C^Jji yurt-mdq (v. intr.) to trot.
\jJ^j)^jji yur-diir-mak (v. caus.) to cause to proceed [from y5r-»m^•].

^Jji yurgJia (subs.) an amble (pace of ahorse).
jUSU;^ yurghada^maq (v. intr.) to amble.
^^^Jyi yurga-mak (v. tr.) to roll up, to wind, to fold.
^mJ^^jji yurga^'n-mak (v. refl.) to roll one's self up.
^^J^Jji yur-gUz-mak. See yur-dur-mak.
26

202 B. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the LangtMge [Extra Xo. for

^Jyi yurma (subs.) an ornamental stitch worked with a crochet

by means of which loops of thread are brought tiirough

the stuff from behind, each loop being brought through

the bight of the preceding one.

O^J}i yH^ru-mdq (v. tr.) to interpret (a dream).

Sm^^jji ydr-mdq (v. intr.) to walk, to prog^ss, to proceed, [di^ya

min-tp yur-mak " to proceed on horseback*'].
^^^^)Jyi yurik-H-mak (v. caus.) to cause to walk, to cause to

proceed.
**-^ ^)^^ yuru-mak. See yur-mak, also mang-mdq.
%3l*J^ yurdq. See ydruyh, ydruq (in both senses).
«— ^j^ yilru-'k (vl. subs.) pace, gait, manner of walking.

Jji yuz (subs.) the cheek, the face ; also, face or surface (of
any object) ; also metaph., an^din ul yuz-i gkd that
side of it {viz., beyond it) ; fuldn kelgan-ning hu-yuz-i-
da ** since so-and-so came" (lit. *' on this side of so-and-
80*s coming'*). Bu (or vZ)-yuz-> da (or gha) is thus a
compound post-position taking ning or din after the
noun. [See grammar.]
Jji yuz (num.) a hundred.
y)y^ yuz-do (num. subs.) a group of a hundred, Kaz.
^*jH yuz-ailan (num. subs.) a group of a hundred, ' une cen-
taine.*
s^S^^Jy^* yuz-hdshi (subs.) a chief of a hundred, a centurion.
^^"^Jyi yuz-la-^t-mak (v. cans.) to cause to put face to face, or

confront ; also, to cause to face round (tr.)
\l)^y^9jy^ yuz-la-^sh'tur-mak (v. recip. caus.) to cause to face or

confront one another.
I— T KJL'ijyi yiiz-la-'sh-maq (v. recip.) to face or confront one another.
uJ^LcS,^ yuz'la-mak (v. tr.) to put in face of, to confront (tr.) ; alaO|

to face round (a man or any object, &c.).
^Vyi yiiz-la-mak (v. tr.) to bring up to the number of
hundred.

J

1878.] of Eastern TurkUtdn. 203

^^^y}i yuz-la-^n-mak (v. refl. and pass.) fco face, to put one's selE

in face of ; also, to face (one's self) round, to turn one's
face towards ; also, to be confronted, to be faced round.
s^y**yi yuaun (subs.) institution, regulation, custom. [? from
y&sd'tndq ior yd8un\,
i}^y*^yi yt$sun4uq (adj.) regular, customary.
O J^yi yushur-maq. See ydhsur-maq,
\:))jy**'yi yushur-un. See ydhsurun.

^ji yoshah (subs.) a kind of red earth used as a colouring

matter.
Pyi yogh (subs.) a yoke, P.

P^ yogh (subs.) the' axle of a water-wheel, whose prolongation
forms also the axle of the upper mill-stone (revolving
through a hole in the centre of the lower mill-stone),
Kh.
s^yi yoghan (adj.) thick, stout, fat ; also, large, big.
^l-*«3liU^ goghan-la-maq (v. tr.) to make thick, to thicken.
^U^IiU^ yoghan-la^^n-maq (v. refl. and pass.) to become thick or

stout ; to be made thick, <&c.

iJV^^y* yoghan-Uq (subs.) thickness, stoutness.

^j^y^yi yu-ghu-chi (subs.) a washer, specially a washer of the dead.

O^^^ yughur-mdq (v. tr.) to mix, to compound (any substance

with a liquid).

O^ yoq (v. impers.) is not, there is not, not being, non-existent,

non-existence, &c, ; also (interj.) no ! [never used with

a verb, like our word ' not,' to give it a negative sense ;

the seeming exceptions being resolvable into compound

tenses in which yoq is used as the Participle of the

verb of negation prefixed to an auxiliary verb : e, y.,

yoq-dur-many yoq-idlm (compare qelghan-dur-man^ qeU

ghan-idim) but never yoq bir-dim or yoq hira-man (not

auxiliaries). Instead of these we always have the

forms hir-fiM'dim, hirindi-man Q^ I gave not," " I give

204 R. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

not*'). Again goq»qeImdq means *^ to make non-existent/'
" to destroy", " to annihilate" ! (it is not the negati?e
of " to make/' whioh would be qel-mas, but a compoand
verb). Here goq is used as a verbal adjective (compare
chung geltndq " to make big"). Toq-hohndq = " to
become non-existent", '' to be destroyed or annihilated",
("not to become..." would he bol-mas)']. Misc. Ex.
ish'im yoq-qa ketti " my work came (went) to nothing ;"
man yoq toaqt-da ^^ at a time when I was not present",
(lit. " I-not-being time in") ; man-da yoq " I have not
..."(lit. 'there is not to me'). Finally wherever Mr
is used, yoq can be substituted for it, if it be desired to
make the statement negative.
^yi yuqa, Seeyupqa^ Kaz.
\jj^ji yoqari (adv. and post-pos.) up, above ; also, above, over.
[See Grammar].
\^^*J^yi yoqari-lash (adj. and adv.) sloping upwards ; upwards by

a slope.
^UjIS^ yoq-at-maq (v. tr.) to make non-existent, to annihilate, to

destroy ; also, to lose, [for yoq itmak],
jJUjIS^ yoq-aUmaq (v. intr. and passive) to become non-existent^
to be destroyed or annihilated, to disappear ; also, to be
lost, [ior yoq-holrndq].
^^j^^ yuq-iur-maq (v. cans.) to cause to be inflected, to inflect,

(tr.), [with the particular illness as a nominative or
subject, and din (from) and gha (to) of the persons].
y^yi yoq-so (inter j.) a respectful form of yoq.
Jy^yi yuq-suz (adj.) of no account, mean, miserly.
Jj^^i yH'Uq-suz (adj.) unwashed, dirty [from yi^-m^^].
(J^^yi yoq-la-maq (v, tr.) to remember.

Cf^H yuq-maq (v. intr.) to stain, to leave a mark, to touch, to
affect, to produce an effect, to profit; to infect, to
attack (as does an illness) [governs gha"].

1878.] ^ JSa9tem Taridstdn. 205

^mmJyi yuh (sabs.) baggage, a load, goods.
sj$yi yuffan (subs ) a bridle.
v«jL«K>^ yuk*la-male (v. tr.) to load, to lade (with accusative of the
object and gha of the carrier) •
^^yt yuh'luk (vl. adj.) laden.
wU;y^ y'ugur-maq (v, intr.) to run.
^vo;f;di^^ yuhun-diir-mak (v. caus.) to cause to sit in a kneeling

position.
u-T^j^ yukun-mak (v. intr.) to sit in a kneeling position [the

uniyersal ceremonious mode of sitting in Central Asia,
first knbeling down and then sitting back on one's
heels ; the mode of sitting with the legs crossed in
front of one (tailor-fashion) which is called chdr zdnu
(' four knees'), is considered either familiar or dis-
respectful.]
Jl^ yol (subs.) a road, a route, a way ; also the E. Turkistani
name for the Chinese unit of road-measurement, a ^^ Zt"
[defined to be the distance at which the horns on a
cow*s head or the distinction between a man and a
woman's face become indistingtdshable !].
i^^^ji yola-mdq (v. intr.) to approach, to go near, [see ydn-maq
and yauq-la-maq'},
s^\^'iji yula-mah (v. tr.) to prop, to support, to shore up.
v^Ui)^ yulaJ'Ti-mak (v. refl.) to support one's self, to lean«
\J^J^^ yulhart (subs.) a tiger.

\j^^*^ji yoUdash (subs.) a companion on the road, a travelling
companion.
(j^J^iyfji yul'dur-maq (v. caus.) to cause to pull up by the roots.
JX^yi yiilduz (subs.) a star (including planets) ; quyuruq yulduz

" a comet" (lit. * a tail-star').
\:)y^ji yiilghun (subs.) tamarisk.
i^^^ji yol'la-mdq (v. tr.) to set (a man) on his way, to starb
(any one).

206 R. B. Shaw— ul Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

jU^ gul-maq (v. tr.) to uproot, to pull out by the roots,
tt^y^ yi*/t»» (subs.) the spinal chord.
A^^jSji yoUuq-mdq (v. intr.) to meet by the way, to encoutttcr,
[governs yAfl].
O^ji gH-mdq (v. tr.) to wash.
^S^^J^ji gurndq-sihit (subs.) the fruit of the Ooriandrum Sffftrin,

« Dhania' Hind.
-ttlJJU^ yumala-H-maq (v. caus.) to cause to roll about, to roll

about (tr.).
^U«5L«^ yumala-maq (v. intr.) to roll about.
C^^yi gumala-q (vl. adj.) round, spherical.
^LeXiyU^ gumalaq-la-maq (v. tr.) to make round.
^y^ji gumurtkah (subs.) an egg, Kaz.
^y-ii>^ji gumshdq (adj.) soft.
0^*^yi gumghdq (subs.) a bail of thread, &c.
JU^^ gum-maq (v. tr.) to close (one's eyes, mouth or hand).
Or^y* g^m-uq (vl. adj.) closed (of the eyes, mouth or hand).
3^Jy^yi gumw-mdq (v. caus.) to throw down, to overthrow (a wall
or building).
0)jy^y^ g^*^^^'^l (^1- *^j') ruii^ous, in a ruinous condition.
^y^ yt^n (subs.) wool, Kaz. Kh.
kmS^^yi yung (subs.) wool.

iL5^^ yungichqa (subs.) lucerne (the grass), Kaz., Kh.
ii^ji yungul (adj.) light (not heavy).
0^*^y yun-mdq (v. tr.) to cut (in a shaving manner, as a pen),

to whittle.
jlUi^ gH^un-rndq (v. refl.) to wash one's self.
gS^y'yyi gunuchqah (subs.). See gungichqa.
^^yji gunuchkah (adj.) fine, slender.
^Lo^j^ gunu-mdq. See gdni-rndq*

OJyi g<iuq. Seegduq.
iJ^^jyi gHuq-la-rndq. See gduq-la-maq.
yij) (subs.) thread. See jib.

V -*

1878.] of Eastern TurJcistdn, 207

C>xLx.j yip.liJc (subs.) a fine thread attached by leather-workers
to the thicker thread with which their stitches are made,
which fine thread is pushed through by means of a
needle drawing the stouter thread with it.
w^ yipak (subs.) silk.

<— SHb-4i y Utile (adj.) sharp, acute.

w^-4i yet-mak (v. intr.) to arrive, to reach, to attain.

^^♦•H^ yei'tnish (num.) seventy. See ^J^Sj,

m

^5^ yetti (num.) seven. See ^J^.

jiA yer (subs.) ground, land, the earth ; also, place, locality.
oIH^ y^^S' (adj. and adv.) distant, far.
^^'^jbi yer-la-mah (v. tr.) to put into the earth, to bury.
(^UAxf yesh-mak (v. tr.) to untie, to undo a knot.
^IoXmjo yesh-in-mah (v. refl.) to untie one's self, to undress one's self .
0^*ii yiSf^'fndq (v. tr.) to collect, to bring together, to accumulate.
ii/ii^ yigh'in (subs.) an assemblage.
C^^H^ yiyh'in-maq (v. refl.) to collect themselves, to assemble ;
also, to collect one's self, to tuck in one's skirts (in sitting
down).
^J^ ySkan (subs ) a water- rush.
**^ii^ yigit (subs.) a young man; also, a soldier (cavalry).
^^-^IrW yiyar-mah See vSJl^O;^,
*^j^ yigarmah. See **ji|.
i/id yiL See Jb.
i/J^ yil (subs.) wind, Kaz.
c)^ yildn. See iyJIj.
*^ryr^* yeUpu-gu-ch (subs.) a fan.
tU^iJ^ yel-pi'tnak (v. tr.) to fan.
f 1*^ yil'dam (adv.) quickly, fast.
^*Xuj yildiz (subs.) a root-filament.
(V^0 yelim (subs.) glue.
w>^*4jjj^ yelint'la-mah (v. tr.) to glue.
fH yem (subs.) corn, cattle-feed.

208 R. B. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language Sfc, [Extra No. for

c-T^-^i ye-mah (v. tr.) to eat.
slJUl«^ yem-U-mah. See iSi^^o^Ujijij.
^j*J^ y4-muh (subs.) fruit.
^^ yif^g (subs.) a sleeve.

^-H^« yenek )

1878.] ofUastem Turhistdn. 209

APPENDIX

TO

VOCABULARY.

TUEKI NAMES OF BIRDS.

By J. ScFLLT, Esq.

Late Medical Officer^ Kdshghar Agency,

\m» tjjuiy* *«^' Aohchab qoyniq s&. The Common Kite of Eastern Turki-

stan, Milvus melanotis.
J^!^ cJ ' -^<1 ^ttq&r. The White Heron, Herodias alba,
^ y^W CJi' Aq bash sL The Marsh Harrier, Circus aruginosm,
^U^^y c5' Aq quchq&ch. The Tree Sparrow, Passer montanus.
•^l^^y^W'' ) Ala bash korak aurddk. The Common Teal, Querquedula

%l)]dj,] ) ^^^«»-

OjA^^^I A1& chikit. The Black-throated Wheatear, Saxicola
^y 51 AU soqin. The White Stork, Ciconia alba, [desert i.

wli^j^J^" Aid ghaz aurddk. The Merganser, Mergus castor,
\mS*hy^ ' Aid ghurdldi. The Grey Shrike, Lanius Homeyeri,
*^j^ ^\ AM qdrgha. The Hooded Crow, Oorvus comix,
*— ''»^j' Aurddk. Equivalent to our word *duck', but applied
specially to the Mallard, Anas boschas,
J^y Auqdr. The Grey Heron, Ardea cinerea, See^lA*.
y^j* Auldr. The name given to two species of Snow-cocks or
Snow-pheasants, vig,, Tetraogallus himalagensis and
Tetraogallus tibetanus.
^Uy^U^^I xji qdrloghdch. The Common Swallow, Rirundo rustica.
27

210 R. B. Shaw — A Vocalulary of the Language [Extra No. for

ji^ iy Ay^h siz. The name given to a Night-jar or Goatsucker,
Oaprimulgus arenicolor.
^^i' Aitalgu. The female of the * Shunq^r, Falco Hendersons
s^^mi) Aisdk. Name of a hird ahout the size of a Thrash.
^\ijy *id' Ili torghai. The Bokhara Lark, Melanocorgpha torquata,
^sAJJb Bdliqchi. The name of the Common and Lesser Terns,
Sterna fluviat His and Stemula minuta.
\J^y* cTV Bdi qush. The Snowy Owl, JVgctea ntvea.

i^j^ (A.) Ba^ri. The Per^rine Falcon, Milco peregrinus.
f]j^yj^ Bir toghrdm. A small Wren, Troglodytes pallidus.
*^-^V^ Birgut or ^j^jyi Burgut. The Golden Eagle, Aquila
cJirysaetus, See cA^^l/*
viJli>;^l «^j Boz aurdak. The Smew, Mergellus albellus.
C^t^^ty lo^^ Boz chikit. The Wheatear, Saxicola isalellina,
U** )oyi Boz s&. The Pale Harrier, Circus Stoainsonii.
\mJj*Xiy»* ^jj Boz sunduk. The Water Pipit, Anthiis aqwftieus,
Sr^^lir^ ^J^ Boz ghurdlai. The Desert Shrike, ZanitM arenarius.
ijb^^yi Boz l^chin. The name of a Falcon, Falco Tschemidievu
O^^H^ Baghit^. The Large Sand Grouse, Pterocles arenarius,
VpIw Bulhul. The Barred Warbler, Nisoria undata. [oUlp >
^^. Baidina. The Common Quail, Gotumuff communis. See
*-^^ Pakhtaq; cf. *3^l5 Pers. The Kashghar Ring-Dove,
Turtur Stoliczkce.

" * V Popshak torghai. The Crested Lark, Qalerita magna.

Ky )

i^U )H ^^^ ^*8^- The Mountain Finch, Montifringilla Juema-
topggia,

^^. i«. f ^^^ tumshuk qargha. The Rook, Oorvus frugilegus.

Oy^y^y j^ Tagh tumuchuq. Swinhoe's Finch, Oarpodacus mongolian.
^\cj\j ^U Tagh qfirghdsi. The Alpine Chough, Fgrrhocoras alpinus.

^U

1878.] of Bastem TurhUtdn, 211

-jUy^li cU Tagh qirloghAch. The Crag Martin, Ptianoprogne ru-

^A.lij.yl a\j Tagh quchq^hi. The name given to several species of

passerine birds found only in the mountains.
^yiy^ cU Tagh hupupi. The Bohemian Waxwing, Ampelis garrula.
y^S^l^ Tardchi. The Willow Sparrow, Passer salicicolus,
Ai;\iv^lij.A.y Tukhundk kargha. The Jackdaw, Oolwus monedula.
^^^y Tokhi. A Fowl. See if^j^fj^-

jy Toz. The Pea-fowl, Pavo cristatus.
^ jy Torghai. A Lark.

j^^lny^ Torulghu. The Turtle Dove, Ti^ur auritus,
iS^^^jjJj^ Turumtai. The Merlin, Lithofalco asalon. In India this

name is applied to a difEerent species, viz., Hypotiorchis
ehicquera, the Bed-headed Merlin.
^ v-Xoiy Tokhmak b&. The Long-legged Buzzard, Bvieoferox,

^^^ \ Toghraq quchq^chi. A Eose Finch, Propasser .

Oy^y^y Tumochuq. The name given to a species of Finch,

Erythrospiza ohsoieta.
^^UUa. Jaghalbai. The Hobby, PEypotriorchU subhuteo.
ti^VA^LSxA, Jing jing. The Bearded Eeedling, Oalamophilus liar*

micus.
^-«*^i^ Jingsa. The Indian Bush-chat, Pratincola indica.
^^J^IdCja. Jigda chuk. The Black-throated Thrush, Planeatieus

atrogularis.
ijJ]djj^y»^M\A. Cha sughsu aurdak. The Pintail Duck, Dafila acuta,
s^jff^^ Chaghchi, The Indian Blue Throat, Gyanecula suecica,

^^^y ^ Cha quchqach. The name of a Bunting, Emberiza scha-

nicola.

\iJWjkA. Chaghunddk. The Bactrian Owlet, Athene bactriana.

ij*^ Chaman. The Lapwing, Vanellus eristatus.

^ J^^J^ Chulan torgh&i. A small Lark, Alandula pispoletta.

212 B. B. Shaw— 2I VoedMary of the Language [Extra No. for

(3x^^ Chulloq. A name applied to several species of Florer.

^S^^^h" ChumighAq. The Litile Qrehe, Podieepe minor.

»

^^*4?' Chighchi. A species of Beed Wurbler, Acroeej^hdlm na-
crorhynehue.

^^^l^ht^ Chikit. A Wheatear, Sawicola.
uSi^t^ty ^ Chikit qan&t aurdak« The White-eyed Duck, A^tlijfi
viJ|t3;j) o^ 3 nyroea.

*^,j/^ Khanma. The Water Hen, OalUnula chloroptu. See

*^\} Zaghcha. The Andijani name for the Jackdaw. See

^I«xlcjfj Zarghald&q. The Andijani name for the Golden Oriole.
See ^:»>».
ob^J Zagh&r&q. The Green Sandpiper, Aetitis ocTiropliw,
cl^)J Zungiq. Podoces humilis,

^ S&. The name given to Bussards, Harriers and Kites.
4^^ S&ch. The Bose-coloured Starling, Pastor roseus,
^lyU* Sdlw&r. The Cinereous Vulture, VuJtur monachui.
cJ;di^«M^j^ Sarigh sunduk. The Yellow-headed Wagtail, Budget

cUreola, '
^^ygi^ Sarigh quchqich. The Bed-headed Bunting, Eutplza

luteola,
sj^j*^ Saghizghdn. The White-rumped Magpie, Pica hactriana,
JU^A«» SokochAq. A Wood-pecker, Picus leucopterua.
^]dj)) ^ Sun aurddk. The Mallard, Anas hoschas.
Vjj^ Sopid. The Indian Oriole, Oriolus Tcundoo,
fty SurAm. A Wren Warbler, Bhopophilus jpekinenns.
ij^y*^ Soqan. A Stork, Ciconia,
«^*^^ Sunduk. The Common Wagtail, Motacilla alba.
f |H^ Sair&n. The Marsh Pipit, Oorydalla Eichardi.
oAt oh^}-^ ShAydriq chulloq. The Indian Binged Plover, jEgiaiiUi

fluviatilis.
jlSi^ Shunqir. The Shunkar Falcon, Falco Rendereoni.

1878.] of Eastern Turkistdn, 213

v^^;y^^ Sii torghii. The Horned Lark, OtocorU penicillata. See

i^yu«U X^ *) Sdi y^ghurchi. The Kentish Bing Plover, ^gialophiluB
_f. \ cantianus,

^Uc 'Uq4r. A Heron. SeejUjI andjl5jli|.

*^ 'Akka. The Andijani name for the Magpie. See tyU)**-.
;^ Ghdz. The Grey Lag Goose, Anser cinereua.
^^s* Ghiji. The Lammergeyer, €hfpaetu8 harhatus,
L-Sv^ Ghorki. The Brown-headed Gull, Xema hrunneioephala.

mm

Aax^j^ Qdrchigha. The Goshawk, Astnr palwnhariw,
^J^ Qdrgha. A Crow.
Uy^lS Qarloghdch. A Swallow.
jldJlS-WS QashqdldAq. The Common Coot, Fulica atra.
^asii JL^l# Qdqsh^l pichak. The Stilt, Himantopus intermedius.
^ jy O^ Qapaq torghAi. The Crested Lark, Galerida magna. See

Vb/* * } Qara h&sh quchqach. A Bunting, Emberiza pgrrhuloides.

CUfc^y ]/ Qara chikit. A Wheatear, Saxicola Hendersoni,
^ ]y Qar4 8&. A Buzzard, Buteo japontcus.

M ft •* ^^^^

e/^^ !/* Q^^^ Boqan. The Black Stork, Oiconia nigra.

J^ \^ Q^4 gh&z. The Common Cormorant, GractUus carlo,

y^jyJLM \Ji Qard k&sh torghAi. The Homed Lark, Otocoris penu

eillata.
Acj\j )ji Qar4 q&rgha. The Black Crow, Oonms culminatus.

^^A^y I/' Q^ai l^nchkaoh. The Common Starling, Siumus vulgaris.

\Jl^y l^ Q&i^ qush. The local name in Eastern Turkistan for the
Golden Eagle, Aguila ehrysaetus. See ^j^jy^

U^y Qirghaul. The Tarkand Pheasant, Phasianus Shawi.

^j^y Qarghai. The Sparrow Hawk, AecipUer niam.

2 14 H. B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^L» Jj^l Qizil bAsh aurd^k. The Red-crested Pochard, Branta

jyi^y J^y i Qizil tumshuq qaigha. The Red-billed Chough, Fregilm

&iji / graculus,
^jj^^jji ^j5 Qizil kurkdn^k. The Redstart, Buttcilla ergthrogastra,
^ ^^ Qildti B&, The female Ilen-Harrier, Circus cganeu9,
^jyi J* Qil yurgha- The Swif tfoot, Fodoces ITendersoni.
^_^-H^y ^ Qum tokhisi. The Little Bustard, Otis tefrax.
-jlcyi^ Ji Qum saghizghani. A name sometimes given to PodoeeM

Hendersom. See Apj^ JLj.
vilify Jlu Qanak aui-dAk. The Shoveller, Spatula cfypeata.

^3^UJ Qaniichi. The Reed Warbler, Acroeephalus arundinaeeue.
^^/ QuchqAch. Any small passerine bird ; equivalent to Chiria
in Hindustani,
^y Qush. Any large sized bird.
yj^^y^ Qoddi. The Swan, Oggnus olor.

^i)^y Qodan. The Water Hen, Gallinula ehloroput.
c!^^* Quzghun. The Tibetan Raven, Oorvus tibetanut.
5^y^^ ^J^ Kirich qarloghdch. A Swift, Ogpselus pekinensis.
s^hjj] ^-y Karak aurdAk. The Blue-winged Teal, Querquedula eireia.
^"^^ KakUk. The Chukor Partridge, OaccabU chuhor.
i.J^> Kakkok. The Common Cuckoo, Cuculm canorua.
cyV^ Kalkhdt. The Andijani name for the Kite.
vi)Ul(;^ Kurgdndk. The Kestrel, Tinnunculus alaudarius.
y}^^ Koktalghu. A Tree Warbler, Phgliopneuste rama.
wy Kok sd. The male Hen Harrier, Circus cganeus.
i^yXiyM^ji Kok sunduk. A Wagtail, Mbtacilla personata.
^Jj v-Jy Kok q&rgha. The European Roller, Coracias garruia.

{Jj^ Kogan. The Indian Stock-pigeon, Palumhana Everts
fnanni.

"i clr Kul buqahsi. The Bittern, Botaurus steilarie.
J^jS Koshkal. The Stock-pigeon, Golumba anae.

1878.] of Eastern Turhistdn. 215

*44^ Giya (? «J^ Girya). The Sea Eagle, Haliaetus leucory-

i*;i!^^ Ldchin. The Barbary Falcon, Faico harharu9.
^^lJJ Laglag. The White gtork, Ciconia alba. See e^li^-^Ht.
^,^T^J^^ Mahramchi. The Common Snipe, Oallinago scolopaciniis,
^UUb ciAvo Mashak ydpaUq. The Long-eared Owl, Otus vulgaris.

^ ' ^ > Mashk ydmghurchi. The Greenshanks, Totanus glottis,

Uv ^j;]}4^ Mizdn sd. The Kite, Milvus melanotU,
*M^ Maina. The Black-bird, Morula vulgaris,
(y^y) Watwdlaq. The local Yarkandi name for the common
Quail. See a3o^.
cj^iulfc Hangghut. The Brahminy Duck, Oasarca rutila.
^jiy^ Hiipiip. The Common Hoopoe, Upupa epops,
^y ci*^ Hui qush. The Great Eagle Owl, Bubo maximus,

y^ '^^ Yawa kabtar. The Blue Hill Pigeon, Oolumba rupestris,
j5bL| Y^paUq. The Short-eared Owl, Otus brachyotus.
pVc^UJ^b Yar qdrloghdch. A Swift, Oypselus^acuticauda.
^S^Jy^* Yamghurchi. A name applied to several species of Waders.
^j^ Yekan tokhisi. The Water Bail, Rallus aquaticus.

TURKI NAMES OF PLANTS.
By J. Scully, Esq.

I

f^I achi chijghdk.

^^1 c4*-i achigh dndr.
^J^y \^jff^ ikhchi koki. Bape or Cole-seed, Brassica napus,
^U^I^ol adr&sm&n. Feganum harmala. See gul asman.

216 R. B. Shaw— -4 Vocabulary of the Language [Extra No. for

^l«X*ljl dr^mad^n. Name of a tree, undetermined.
AjjI ^pa. Barley, Hordeum disiiehum*
\J^^^^ *J^I arpa bddy^n. Anisum sativum,

^jmjJ;! Irtish. The Pencil Cedar, Juniperus excelsa,
ij^J^ drman. Wormwood, Artemisia vulgaris.
yJ^Cj) ^zgh&n. A species of Rose, Bosa.
K^yi ^^' dghacha yughuch. A Cucurbitaceous Plant.
^,S^<a^ udUil 4ftab parast. Sunflower, Helianthus anuus.

^^ tti^' ^^^^ S^^' ^pi^^iDi Poppy* Pf^pc^ver somniferum,
^j^' dq drman. A species of Wormwood, Artemisia.
*^I o' ^q dlma. White Apple, Fyrus malus.
f^jy] ^3' ^q auzum. White Grape, Vitis vinifera,
^^c\j ^' dq b4dy&n. Coriander, Ooriandrum sativum.

ip;) tJ-W (3' ^ ^^^^ *^^' ^©l^ry* Apium graveoleus.

j\xj ^\ iq piaz. A variety of Onion, Allium cepa.
^KjJ ^I ^ tikan. Sea Buckthorn, Hippophae rhamnoides.
sJ^i? o' ^ tik&n. A Shrub, Lycium ruthenicum.
»«J^^ o' ^ jigda- White Eleagnus.
jxxc J*5 ^3' 4q guU anbar. A Centaurea.
\£9^] ^s:b^ ^3' ^q ohichik dut. A species of Cress, Lepidium latifolium.
3^y l5' ^^ qondq. The Great Millet, Solcus sorghum.

^y o' ^^ lobiA. White Pulse, Dolichos lablah.
(j^ji L-5^ c5^ ^^ ^*^^ qazaq. White Opium Poppy, Papaver somniferum.
d^Ui ^1 4q nabat. A variety of Sweet Melon, Cucumis meio.
^iji J I ala koki.

J^^l dltun gul. " Golden Flower."
cyUn dlqat.
^r^l dlmurt. The Pear. See Amurt.

^^ alma. The Apple, Fyrus malus or Fyrus indiea,
yWyi dlobalu.
'^^y alucha.

1878.] ofJEastem TwrhisUn. 217

^y^\ imurt. The Pear, Fyrus communis.

/^^ dnAr. The Pomegranate, Funioa granatin.
^J^j^^ anar guK, Pomegranate blossom.
ji^^ iinjir. The Fig, Ficua eariea.
^j^Ji})^\J^'^^ andij^n inzmni.
ijS J^tXi dndijangul.

*^^j' aujma. The Mulberry, Morus alba.

• tt!^?"j' iiujun.
^^^I duruk. ? The Plum,
^td^^l 4urahdiLn. A Boragewort, Afperugo prooumbens.
SmJ})y 4uzuk.
V^y cUjjl duzun turup. Knol Kohl, Brassica ol&racea eaulo-rapa.
S^^j] ausma.

ci!r*j' dusun. The Wild Cabbage, Brassica oleracea.
sj^ uT/^j' dughri tikdn. A Leguminous plant, Astragalus sp.
W^jl duljd. The Apricot. See Aulja.
As^jl aulja. The Apricot, Prunus armeniaca.
ij\Xjbiy dwul mundq. A species of Spurge, Euphorbia lathy r is.
\^*H!^ duiddn. A species of Madder, Bubia sp,
t^jiy} dit auzum.
^^^<U<A«^| 4it khmak paliki. See ait qoghun.

s^y^;^} 6it qoghun. A variety of Sweet Melon, Oucumis melo.
U^^\^^yji dirkdk aujma.
sj^y^^^y) dirkdk qomush.

V^^^^^^' dishdk qomush. Orache, Atriplex sp,
j*i) digar. Sweet Flag, Acorus calamus.
^^xAaSu^I alndk fashti. Castor oil seeds, Bicinus communis.
L5^^,^**4d' dyigh qormAchi.

»
jyk^\x^^\j bdjin chAmghur.

cl^>*H^y bajin qoghun. Chinese Melon.

^^■4^^ bijfn gulf. A Larkspur, Delphinium incanum.
28

218 R. B Shaw— ii Vocahulary of the Language [Extra No. far

f]^^. bddam. The Almond, Amygdalus communis,
lli^i h&qU. A Bean, Faba tp.
JSjjj badingan. The Egg-Plant, Solatium melongena,
i^^ JJu bughdaf. Common Wheat, Triiicum vulgare.
j]^y. bukhwdr. A Cruciferous plant.
jU^^43y budushqdq. Burweed, Xanthium Hrumariwn.
^e^jy, burtsi. A Chenopod, Euroiia ceratoides.
fljj^jy. bori duzum. Bladder-Senna, Colutea arhoreseens.

\^Wj^-jy* bori porchAqi.

J^l Ml » mAj^f bori samsdqi. A Broomrape, Orobanohe sp.

S^^jyi^jy- ^^^ yapurmdqi.
yy hughaa. Corn.

*W buya. A Leguminous plant, Sophora alopeeuroides.
»*Mrf baida. Purple Medick or Lucerne, Medicago iotiva.
^^^ ^. baisai. The Turnip, Bramca rapa,
^^j.A*L5j^j b^shak shirin. A variety of Sweet Melon,
rf bihl. The Quince, Fgrus egdonia.

Vr -^ • t p4qa puti qomush. A species of Reed.

^jyj\j AJb p&qa ydpurmaq. The Greater Plantain, PlaiUago major.
i-^^ p41ak. ? Bhinacanthua communis,
J^^ patingan. The Egg- Apple plant, Solanum melongena.
t^jj^^^yjyj pupuk suporgi. A Eeed, Arundo,

{3 9'jH porchaq. Common Pea, Fisum sativum,

J^ piaz. Onion, Allium cepa,
^*-v'^i piazak.
^mJy^ pizak. A Grass, Calamagrosiis laaa.

j\j] j^"U tdtligh inir,
JjHm, jjiJU tatligh shaftul. ? The Nectarine, Amygdalus periica,
yjy^ ^^ tAj khordz. See Taji gul.

1878.] qfEoHem !R$rkistdn. 219

^ i^^^ tiji gu\. The Cockscomb, Oelosia cristata.
jy^* J^ t^rbuz. The Water Melon, Oitrullua vulgaris,
^yi J^ t^rbuzak. A Cucurbitaoeous plant, Momordica Oharaniia.
^^j^ tdrgh4ch.
J^til.

«^i^ turup. The Radish, Baphanus aativus,
^^ tarigh. Millet, Panieum miliaoeum.
y^ tam^ku. Tobacco, Nicotiana tabaeum.
(jr^yy tutushq^q. Burdock, Lappa major.
\>lJ^j^y tukhum^k. A Leguminous plant, Sophora japoniea,
iS^jy tozghAq.
^^y toghdch.
y^J^y toghraghu.

(JLr^y toghrdq. A Poplar, Fopulus haUamifera,
^JVob^y toghrdq tfli.
ittJjl ^S^y tokllk ixxt.
S^'^^^y tuga tipini.

^)j^ tairak. The White Poplar, Populus alba.
^^J^ S^y? tairti sugat. The Weeping Willow, Salix hahylomea.
<«^ ^' talba baida. White MelUot, Melilottu alba.

*S^^ jdm^a. A Pondweed, Poiamogeton natans.
y^^ jingdu. A small Bean.

janasta. The Plum, Prunus dameutiea.
'^y^ juwani. A species of Dill, Anethum Sowa.
uy^y^ jokhdr gul.

*^^ v-Tj^ jori qand. A variety of Sweet Melon,
jighda. A variety of Sweet Melon.

•••

^^'i^ jigda. A species of Oleaster, Eleagnus angwtifolia.

<^^V ch&lang. See Chilang.

^^A/ol*. chimghur. The Turnip, Bratsioa rapa.

220 R. B. Shaw — A Voeabulary ofihe Language [Extra No. for

chamgbur cbuchuki.

^i^ tJ"^ ^^ koki.
iUa^ji j>^ cbaqir injma.

*i»^^l^ chilang. Cabbage, Brassiea oleraeea,
i~>^1 y^y^y^ cbujun &ut. A species of Millet, Panicum crus-galli,
i^y ^y^y^ cbujun tarigb. A Fodder grass, Panicum glaucum,
Aiy> imJj^j/f cbucbuk buya, A species of liquorice, Qlycyrrhiza gUn'

dulifera.

'■^ r^ * > cbucbuk buya munj4qi.

^^ cbigb. A Grass, Arundinella nepalensis.
^US^jJo^ cbigbirtm4q. A species of Iris, Iris soongariea.
s:)^^ cbiUn. Tbe Jujube, Zizgphus vulgaris,
^^^Jj ^k^ chilka zard^k.

^^XU*. cbilkl A variety of Sweet Melon.
J^^ cbinir. Tbe Oriental Plane Tree, Platanus orientalis.
J^ ^^jM^ cbinl gul. Cbina Aster.

^JS c>^ kbdn gull. Frencb Marigold, Tagetes patula.
*^4^ v-^*^*^ kbatAi kbina. A species of garden Balsam.

Vyir

^ ^Ua^ kbafdi gul. Cbina Aster, Cktllistephus chinensis.

t\^y^ kbokb^ A Composite plant.
J^ Ai.^ kbokba tikin. A kind of Tbistle, Onicus arvensis.
u^ ^''^j^ kbokba gul, P Onicus arvensis,

kiT^X^ kbong&n. Cucumber, Oucumis sativus.

'j'«^ ddwd. Tamarisk, Tamarix ^.
j«)^i«3 ddudar. Frencb Bean, Phaseolus vulgaris.
J^J'^ dodo. A species of Tam, Dioscorea deUoida,

* ** > kbat&i supurgisi. An Amarantb, Amaranthus hlitum.

1878.] ofEagtem Turkistdn. 221

J

M)y^J z^liun. Wild Nevew, Brassiea eampestris,
^^)j zardak. The Carrot, Daitcus earota,
^j^jj zarangza. The Safflower Plant, Oarthamu9 tinctorius*
i}^j^) za'far gul. P Saffron plant, GrociM sativm.
j^j zighir. Flax, Linum usitaiissimum.
^J zikh.

U^y^^ sdpaqsiz gul. = sapaqsi gul.
\^Jyit^ supurzi.- An Amaranth, Amaratithus blitum,
^Jy^ supurgi. A species of Tamarisk, Tamarix elongaia,
**^ sada. The Elm, TTlmus eroaa,
m)^J^ t^J^ sarigh azghan. Tellow Bose, Bosa hrunonii,
^^y ti/^ sarigh iut. A grass found growing at high elevations.
*i^'? 5^^ sarigh buya. A Leguminous plant, Sophora sp.
»i>ju sJj ^j^ garigh talba baida. Common or Yellow Melilot, Melilotus

qfficinalu.
^^j]) C^^ sarigh zdrdak.

*f»* ji^ sarigh sabba, Pot Marigold, Calendula ojlcinaiis.
fj^j^^ C?-^** sarigh sanbar gul, African Marigold, TageU8 ereeia.
u:^^ ^j*M sarigh sugat. " Yellow Willow.*'

> sarigh 'ashq pichiLq. Indian Cress, Tropeolum majus.
O ♦^ J
uH ^ ^ sarigh gul. A Marigold, Calendula stellata.

iJj]jAX ^jm sarigh hafaring. Tropeolum,

'^^Vri'iij*^ sarigh yurgdmich. A species of Dodder, Cu9cuta sp.
{^Hj*^ sarimsdq. ? Garlic, Allium sativum.
J\xj ^Wmw sams&q piaz. A variety of Onion, Allium cepa,
ss>j] cJjly» sutlik Aut. A species of Sow-thistle, Mulgedium tataricum.
0^ {if^y^ sosun guL A species of Irii*

^ \ sosuni 'ashq pichak.

222 R- B. Shaw — A Vocabulary of tke Language [Extra No. for

\mJy^ sok. A Grass, Folypogon mofupeliensU,
s>£0^y*^ Bugat. A Willow, Salix daphinoides,

*^y 0!^y** suluq 4ut.
^'Uj f^^ym Bong pi4z.

*ili3 »U** siihdana. Fennel Flower, Hfigella sativa.

^P^'j^i** simaz aut.

%s>y^ sh^tut. A species of Mulberry, Morua Icsvigata,
J^*** sbil. The Rice plant, Oryza sativa,
Hy^ji"^^ shildir buya.
"K^^ji*^^ sbaldir Idghucb. A Leguminous plant, Sph(Brophgia sp,
J^Ml ghaftul. The Peach, Prunus persica,
ss9yiX ghalghut.
^■^^^ shumshi. The Femgreck, Trigonella fcsnum-grmeum,
tA^yi, shokbU. A species of Night-shade, Solanum nigrum,
^y, fX** shum buya. A species of Broomrape, Phelipasa indiea,

t

ijjlsij fjM^ 'asuq picb^k. A Bindweed, PharhUU nil.
y^ 'ainilu.

ghasba.

y^ij^ AAi.U f 4kbta fiurugbi. Cotton seeds, Oossgpium herbaceum.
vi)SU f414k. J^ibulua terrestris.
J^ Mz, Onion, Allium cepa,
^^> fmS^ji farang guli.

<3

c5 .^ qdp^. The Gourd, Cueurhita pepo.
^Iri^ O^^ qdpiiq tair^k. " Gourd Poplar."
V^ A^U q^rgba tamgbdqi. A Composite plant, Fhwnopus orieutalit.

1878] of Eastern Twrhistdn, 223

^51x^15 iijM qdrgba taxngh^i. A Pigwort, Dodartia orientalis.
-Ix^uA^vj ) qirgha tamgb^i Aut. A Leguminous plant, Oxytropis
0;I 5 C wphora.

^AM^ J^jiafc liJJ qdrgha jigdahsi. A species of Eleagntu,

c:>;i y-^ qaghaz aut. Milk Thistle, Sonchua oleraceue.
^ w-5^^^ qdmchi guL The Love-lies-bleeding Amaranth, A/naran-

thus eandatus,
sj^ ^^ * q4mchi gul. Garden Persicary, Polygonum orientale.
^v.i/e\i q^mghdq. A Saltwort, Salsola collina,

f^ qdirum.
e/^j' I/* ^*'^ drman.

^-►^^1 }y qar^ 4ujma. A species of Mulberry, Marus atro-purpurea,
SmJ})!^ 1/ ^^^ &uruk. Apricot, 'Prunus armeniaoa,
^y ^f qar4 sona. A species of Sow-thistle^ Sonehus,
^j^ \f qari shokhal&. A Night-shade, ^lawum nigrum.

CH j/' qar& gul. A species of Marsh Mallow, Althcsa rosea,
^U^ ]j» qmr^ yugb^cb. A species of Ash, Fraxinus Moorcroftiana.
^;^il Ji/ qazil dzghdn. Bed Bose.
cJV^ <-^>* ^izil p4chAq.

J^ ^y qizil piaz. Bed onion.
VXiy ^y 9^'^ tump. Bed Badish, Baphanus sativus.
iSM^XA. ^jjy qizil janasta.

**^i^ c/i)' qizil jigda. An Oleaster, Eleaynus parviflora,
Axx^ iMy qizil khina. A variety of garden Balsam.
CJ'«>;; iJiy qizll zarddk.

lP ^iy qizU gul. The Bose, Bosa macrophylla,
«JJ Jiy qizil Uld.
Oy^^^^ ^y ^^^ ^^ qaz4q. Bed Opium Poppy, Papaver somniferum,
^;y* J^j^ qizil moieh. Spur Pepper, Capsicum f rut escens.
ciy^j^ tJiy qizil yulgbun. Tamarisk, Tamaria galliea,
i^v*3b qal^^i. ? ^mafvifi^At^tf.
\:iy^y qoghun. Sweet Melon.
^jrJ^y qo koki A species of Sorrel, Bumex khtsehianus.

221 R. B. Shaw — A Voeabulaty of the Langunge [Extra No. for

i/'yV^ qomush. A Beed, Arundo madagaseariensis.
^jl^y^ qammi. The Melon, CucumU melo.
O^y qoniq. Maize or Indian-corn, Zea mags.
Mi J^ qongdn. Cucumber, Oueumis sativus.
yjt^ S^y quikoki. The Dock, Bumex aquaticus,
*^^' (J^ qiya<l ^^*' A species of grass, OalamagrostU NepaUmit,
^S^ qichi. Indian Mustard, Sinapis juneca,
VA/ >^w,XjkU4.jkj qaishlik turup. A Cruciferous plant.

%y! t^ k4hloh. The Persimon, Diospgros haki,
^}yr kibrayi. An Umbelliferous plant.
fj^ karam.
i-^y kurmak.
^j^ kakra.
J>^ V— j^ kakkok koki. Sow-thistle, Sonehm sp.
*^ kakia. A Spurge, Euphorbia sp,
*4*^ kampa. A species of Wormwood, Artemisia sp,
^«3^ koda. Onion, Allium eepa,
isy^l t^jS liodA amurt. ? A variety of Pear.
U'^*>*^ s^Jji kozgi bughdai.
*^y^ \..Jy kok shokhlli. A species of Night-shade, Solatium niarum,

> kok 'ashqa pichdk.
^fH )

^*t^ uJ^ tok lobi4. A variety of Bean.

J^ji koknar. The Field Poppy, Papaver rhoeas,

^y^ kokia. An Onagrad, (Enothera mollissima.

*^*y kunjud. A Cruciferous plant.

y kawa. i

j^i^ kaibaz. The Cotton plant, Chssgpium herhaceutn.

b^^l/H^ kaibaz anasi. A plant of the Mallow family » ^buiH

avtcenna.

^^ lJJ kaik till. A Spurge, Euphorbia sp.

111-)'

1878.] of Eastern Twrhistdn. 226

*iw kaikia. Acroptilon picrU.
J<^ kaindir. The Hemp Plant, (hnnabis sativa.
H^ kaivia. Fennel^ Fosnieulum vulgare.

^U*«! J^ gul ismin. A Ruewort, Peganum hafmala,
'^^ c>^ gul khinahsi. Garden Balsam, Impatiens haUam%na»
{j^y^ t)^ gul s6sun. See Susun gul.
ysA jJ5 gul 'anbar, A species of Centaurea.
^lolili JS gul nif&dan. A Larkspur, Delphinium ep.
*'^M JS gul nafsha. A species of Mallow.
^Jjjr gurunj. Rice, Oryza sativa,
cr^ gailds.

J

^^ lobia. A Pulse, Doliehos lahlah
^^ *y lola kokL
jlj? ^^ laili qaziq. The Poppy, Papaver.

r

yjA*^ m^h. The Bean, Fhaseolus munga,
kjy'^^ mdlghun.
^j^^ v:;I^V majg4n khina. A species of Balsam,
i^ J5 ^y^si^ mukhmal guL

^^U-« man4qi.
jtyx^ mandar. An Asclepiad, Ognanchum tp,
O^ Ji^j-^ mud4n gul,
^^j^ munda.

narinji 'ashq pichdq.

,,v** o^AU nashwat. The Pear, Fyrtte communis,

^j^ nakhud,
Sj*^ nargas. A Narcis8u»«

226 B. 6. Shaw — A Voeahulary of the Language ofJEastem TurkUtoM,

9

^ %mi>Jy^ haw4 rang gal. A species of Mallow, Malta parviflora,

d^ ^J>Ak haft rang. Great Indian Cress, See Hafarang.

LmSijAk hafarang. The Qreat Indian Cress or Nasturtiom, IVvpM-
ium majus.

j^bf*' f^ haihishibar. Common Mallow, Malva eylvettris,

(jS ^Um^cUA hindostan gul. Oomphrena gloho9a,

^mmf^y ^jM hawil mon&k. Euphorbia lath^rie. See awol monaq.

0

is

t)^^«** ^^ ydrma qamchi guL A Persicaryy Polgonum tp,
U'To^ ^^;^ j&zghi bughddi.

* > jdshU 'ashq pich&q. A Legominoos plant.

i5^ )

J^^ yilpuz. A species of Goosefoot, Ohenopodium vulvarui.
a9j*»» U-«U y&mgh&sat. Coriander, Coriandrum sativum,
^uilj ydntiq. The Camel Plant, Alhagi maurorum.
^U.ub yangghiq. The Walnut, Juglans regia.
"^V^jh y^w4 baida. Wild Lucerne.
j^J^ IjW jiwi gul 'anbar. Wild Centaurea.

C^ yagbAch. A Tree, Ailanthus eaeeisa.
Ci*yy *"^ yit qomushi. Goosefoot, Ohenopodium album.
^i/^ yakan. Eeed-mace, Tgpha angustifolia,
C V^ yurgdmdch. Bindweed, Convolvulus arvensis.
c!>*v^ yulghun. Tamarisk, Tamarix gallioa,
^^j^ cf'^ji yumgb&q sabut. Coriander.

J

JOURNAL

or THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

VOL. XLVII.
PART II. (Natural History, &c.)

(Nos. I TO IV.— 1878 : with 15 plates.)

EDITED BY

The Natural Wistory Secretary.

'* It will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science
in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing, and send them to
the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such commumcations shall be long
intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shidl entirely cease.'' Sir Wm. Jones.

CALCUTTA :

PBIVTED BY O. H. BOUSE, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION FBESS,

AKD FUBLI8HBD AT THE

ASIATIC society's BOOMS, 57, PABK STBEET.

1878.

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

Paqe
AiTDEBSON-, J. ;— 0» the Indian Species of the Genus Erinaceus, ... 193

; — On Arvicola indica, Oray, and its relations to the

Suh-Oenus Nesokia, with a description of the species of Neso^

Blaotord, W. T. ;— Description o/Ruticilla schisticeps, Kodgs,,...

; — Notes on some Reptilia from the Himalayas

andBurma, ^25

-— ; — On some Mammals from Tenasserim, ... 150

; — Description of a supposed new Redgehog

214
1

(Erinaceus niger) from Muscat in Arabia, ... 212

Bbanfill, B. R. ; — Fhysiographical Notes ifc, on Tanjore (Tan-

j^'^^)y •" '•' ... ... ... ... 179

BEorGH, R. S. ;—0n the proper relative Sectional Area for Copper

and Lightning Bods, ... ... ... 291

Godwin- Austen, H. H. ;— Sixth List of Birds from the Hill Ban^

ges of the North-JEast Frontier of India, ... 12

Keatdtge, R. H. Colonel ;—Becord of the Occurrence of Earth-

quakes in Assam during 1877, ... ... 2

Ltdekkeb, R. ; — Aberrant Dentition q/*Felis Tigris, ... ... 4

; — Great Snowfall in Kashmir, ... ... 177

Shabp, D. ; — Preliminary diagnoses of new Coleopterous Insects be-
longing to the families Dytiscidjs, StaphylinidaB, and Scarabseidse, 1G9

Theobald, W. ; — Notes on the Land and Fresh-water Shells of Kash-
mir, more particularly of the Jhilum valley below Srinagarand
the hills North of Jamu, ... ... ... ^41

Watebhouse, J. Captain; — An Account of the Tidal Observations
in the QulfofCutch, conducted by the Great Trigonometrical
Survey, ... ... ... ... ... ... 26

_^— ; — Tlie Application of Bhotography to the

Beproduction of Maps and Flans by Fhoto -mechanical and other
processes, ... .., ... ... ,^^ 53

iv List of Chntrihutors.

Fage
WxyyE, A. B. \— Notes on the Earthquake in the Punjab of March

2nd, 1878, ... .. •.. ••* ••• 131

W00D-MA.SOK, J. ; — X«^ o/Hymenoptera, ... ... ... 167

; — Description of a new Zepidopterous Insect 5^-

longing to the genus ThvLUxnajLiiBy ... ... ... 175

J — Description of a New Homopterous Insect be-

longing to the Oenus Cosmoscarta, ... ... ... 191

Date of issue of the different numbers of Journal, Part II, 1878.
No. I.— Containing pp. 1—52, with Plates 1, 2, 10, 11, and with four

wood-cuts, — ^was issued on 24th May,' 1878.
j^o, II. Containing pp. 63 — 124, and one plate unnumbered — was issued

10th July, 1878.
No. III.— Containing pp. 125—174, with Plates 6, 7, 8,— was issued 28th

October, 1878.
No. IV.— Containing pp. 175—237, with Plates 3, 4, 5, 6a, 9, 12, 13, 14,

was issued April 6tb, 1879.

JOURNAL

OP THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. I.— 1878.

I. — Description of Buticilla schisticeps, Hodgs, — By W. T. Blaj^pobd,

(Beceiyed October 11th, 1876 ;— Kead March 7th, 1877.)

(With Plate I.)

Since the original description of the male of this bird was published
in the appendix to the first ' Catalogue of the specimens and drawings of
Mammalia and Birds of Nepal and Thibet' presented bj Mr. Hodgson to
the British Museum, I am not aware that anything has been added to its
history. It does not appear to have been seen by Blyth or Jerdon, there is
no specimen in the Society's old collection, nor to the best of my belief has
there hitherto been one in the Indian Museum, and the bird has not yet,,
so far as I know, been found in the western Himalayas or in Turkestan.
Unless Colonel Prejevalski has obtained it in Mongolia, I do not think it
has hitherto been procured elsewhere than in the Tibetan region north of
Sikkim and Nepal. The female, so far as I can learn, has not been de-
scribed, although there appears to be a figure of it amongst Mr. Hodgson's

drawings.

I have just received a pair of this rare bird from Mr. Mandelli, and
the foUowing is a description of both sexes.

Male, Crown of head and nape, greyish blue, paler in front, becoming
rather darker on the nape. A narrow band on the forehead, lores, sides of
head and^neck, chin and sides of throat, and back glossy black. Scapularies
1

2 R. ljyde]s]LeT— Aberrant Dentition of Pelis Tigris. [No. 1,

black afc the base, but with a broad tip of ferruginous or rich chestnut,
lower rump and upper tail coverts the same. Quills black ; a broad white
band, formed by the whole of the median coverts, and the basal portions of
the greater coverts, together with the outer edges of the last 3 or 4 secon-
daries (tertiaries of some writers), traverses the wing longitudinally. Tail
black. Beneath, there is a white spot in the middle of the throat, in
contact with the rich ferruginous tint of the breast, abdomen and lower
tail coverts, which are the same colour as the rump ; axillaries white,
under wing coverts black and white mixed, inner margins of quills
dusky grey. Wing, 3*5 ; tail, 2*95 \ tarsus, 0*93 ; culmen, 0*62 j bill from
front, 0'4.

Female, Olive brown above, forehead, lores and sides of head paler
and more rufous ; rump, upper tail coverts and basal portion of all the tail
feathers, except the middle pair, ferruginous ; central rectrices and terminal
portion of all the others black, rather browner than in the male however ;
quills brownish black with paler brown edges, and a white bar over the
wing as in the male. Chin, throat, breast, sides of abdomen and flanks
rufescent brown with an olive tinge ; a white spot, as in the male, in the
centre of the throat ; middle of the abdomen paler, lower tail coverts pale
rufous. Wing 32, tail 2*8.

Of course I have no means of ascertaining certainly that the female
is correctly identified, as the birds were obtained by Mr. Mandelli's collec-
tors, but the white breast-spot leaves very little doubt on this head. As
regards the locality, the only information Mr. Mandelli can give me is
that these birds were obtained in Tibet in the month of November 1875.

II. — Aberrant Dentition of Felis Tigris. — By R. Ltdekkeb, B. A.

(Read 6th February, 1878.)

(With Plate II.)

In the accompanying plate (No. II), there is represented the right
ramus of a mandible of an individual of Rlis tigris which was killed in
British Burma ; this jaw is remarkable in that it carries an additional
premolar. The normal number of low;er molar teeth in the genus FelU is
three, namely, two premolars, which are respectively the penultimate and
ultimate of that series, and one true molar, which is the first of the latttf
series, and which is often known as the '* camassial tooth.*'

In the figured specimen, there is between the canine tooth and the pe«
nultimate premolar, a small and simple tooth, which is the ante-penultimate

J 878.] R. Ljdekker— Aberrant Dentition of Fe\i8 Tigris. .8

tooth of the premolar series, and which, as we have seen, does not occur in
the normal dentition of the genus Felis ; on the left side of the figured
jaw this additional premolar is ahsent.

The interest that attaches to the presence of this additional premolar
in our specimen, is that in an extinct genus of Felida, the normal numher
of the lower premolars was three in place of two, as in Felis. This extinct
genus was named hj M. Gervais Fseudalt^rus,* and the one species
(P. quadridentattts) on which it was determined, was obtained from
the miocene formation of Sansan in France ; the species was previously
named by De Blainville in his " Osteographie," Felia quadridentatua and
jpl tetraodon. Subsequently Professor Leidyf described a second species
of the genus, under the name of P. intrepidus, from the Pliocene of
Nebraska. Still later, I myself | described the lower jaw of a third
species, P. sival&nsis, from the Siwaliks of this country.

It is well known that the small number of the molar series which
exists in the living Felida is a highly specialized character, which is not
found in the oldest camivora, nor in many of those which are still living.
The existence of an additional lower premolar in the Miocene and Pliocene
genus PseudalurtM shows that that genus is less specialized than Felis, and
indicates that the former was probably the line through which the latter
was described from some primitive carnivore in which the whole four of the
typical premolar series were developed. The occasional occurrence of the
ante-penultimate lower premolar in Felis must be regarded as an instance
of ** reversion" towards the genus Fseudcelurus,

• " Zoologie et Pal^ontologie Fran9ai8e8", Vol. I, p. 127.
t ^^ Extinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska,*' p. 52.
J "Records of Geological Survey of India," Vol. X., p. 83.

Col. Keatinge — Record of tho

[No. 1,

III. — Record of the Occurrence of Earthquakes in Anam

V>« O. X*y V. 0*y

Date.

District.

Time of
Occurrence.

15th February.
Do.

Darrang, Mangaldai.
K&mrup, Gfauhdti.

10-45 A. M.
11 A. ic.

2drd do.
Do.

No reports reached from Goilp&ra, Nowgong, Lakhimpar,

K&mrtip, Barpeti.
Go41p&ra, Go41para.

No reports reached from Gauh&ti, Darrang, Nowgong, Sibs^Lgar,

11-50 p. M.
12 8 p. K.

28th do.
Do.

Godlp&ra, Go^pdra.
GAro Hills, Tdr4.

10 p. M.
11-40 p. ic

No reports reached from Eamrup, Darrang, Nowgong,

March
15th March. | Khdsi Hills, Shillong. | 8-33 p. ic.

No reports reached from Go41p&ra, Kimrdp, Darrang, Nowgong,
20th do. I Khdsi Hills, Shillong. | 5 a. m.

No reports reached from Go&lpdra, Kimr&p, Darrang, Nowgong,

April
29th April. | Khdsi Hills, ShiUong. | 10 P. m.

No reports received from Go41p4ra, E[4mr6p, Darrang, Nowgong,

May

11th May.
Do.
Do.

Do.

17th May.
Do.

Kdmrtip, Gauhati.
Khdsi Hills, ShiUong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

Nowgong, Nowgong.

9 p. H.
9- 10 p. M.
915 p. M.

9-30 p. M.

No reports received from Godlpdra, Sibsagar, Lakhimpar,

Khdsi Hills, Shillong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

10- 10 p. M.
10-35 p. M.

1878.]

Occwrrenee of Barthquahes in Atsam.

5

during 1877. Communicated hy CoL. E. H. Keatinge,
Ohief Oommissioner,

Duration.

Extent of damage if any, and general remarks.

A second.

20 to 25 seconds. No damage, two distinct shocks and preceded by loud

rumbling noise.
No damage.

Sibsdgar, Sjlhet, Cachar, N^a Hills, Gt&ro and Khdsi Hills.

4 seconds.
7 seconds.

Lakhimpur, Sjlhet, Cacb&r, N^a Hills, Giro and Kh&si Hills.

No damage.
Do.

8 seconds.
80 seconds.

_ *

No damage. Slight shock.
Do. do.

Sibsagar, Lakhimpur, Sjlhet, Cachdr, Ndga and Khiisi Hills.

1877.

10 seconds. | No damage.

Sibsdgar, Lakhimpur, Sjlhet, Oachir, N^a Hills, and GUro Hills.

6 seconds. | No damage.

Sibs^gar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Oachir, N^iga and Giro Hills.

1877.

8 seconds. | No damage.

Sibsagar, Lakhimpur, Sjlhet, Oach&r, N^a Hills and Giro Hills.

1877.

12 seconds.
45 seconds.
10 to 12 seconds.

No damage.

No damage.

Two distinct shocks. Severe and very marked. No
damage. Declared bj Deputj Commissioner to be the
severest felt since the great one in September 1875.
The shocks were not preceded bj the usual rumbling
noise and were not quick and jerkj, but long and undu-
lating.

No damage. One sharp shock.

5 seconds.

Sjlhet, Cachir, Naga Hills and Garo Hills.

80 seconds.
6 to 8 seconds.

No damage.

No damage. Two clear distinct shocks at intervals of 3
to 4 seconds between the two shocks. Verj marked, but
not severe ; not preceded bj the usual rumbling noise.

6

Col. Keatinge — Beeordofihe

[No, I

Date.

District.

Time of
Occurrence.

No reports received from Go^para, Kimrdp, Nowgong, Sibsagar,

Jmie
4th June. | N^ Hills, S&magdting. | 3*30 p. ic.

No reports received from Go&lp4ra, Kimrlip, Darrang, Nowgong,

7th do.
Do.
Do.
Do.

12*24 p. If.
12 25 p. M.
12-25'5 s. p. M.
12-30 p. M.

9th July.

10th July.

3rd August.
Do.

Kh^i Hills, Shillong.
(jo41p4ra, G^alp^ra.
Kamrdp, Barpeti.
K4inrdp, Ckiuhdti.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Darrang, Nowgong,

Julj
I Eh^ Hills, ShiUong. | 115 a. m.

Ascertained that the shock
I E&mrdp, GrauhiUii. | 1 a. ic.

Ascertained that the shock

IDarrang, Tezpur.
No^ong, Nowgong.

August
12-30 p. M.

2 P.M.

6th August.
Do.
Do.

No reports received from Goflp&ra, Eamrup, SibdLgar,

August

9-30 p. M.
9-30 p. M.
10 30 p. It,

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Goilpara, Kixnrup,

; Khisi Hills, Shillong.
Nowgong, Nowgong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

17th do.
Do.

1 A. V.
1-30 A. K.

21st do.
Do.

IGoalpara, Dhubri.
Giro Hills, Turi.

Khisi HiUs, Shillong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Goilpara, Kiunrup,

5-50 p. K.
5-37 p. K.

No reports received from Kimrup, Darrang, Nowgong, Sibeigmr,

22nd da | Khisi Hills. | 4 p. K.

No reports recaved

!9 p. ic
i 9-30 p. K.
9-40 p. K.

2i>th do.
Do.

Nowfijong.

Khasi Hillss Shillong.

Darrang, Texpur.

1878.]

Occurrence of Earthquakes in Assam,

Duration.

Extent of damage if any, and general remarks.

Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Oacbar, Ndga Hills and Grdro Hills.

1877.

Very short. | Slight and unaccompanied by noise.

Sibs%ar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Cach4r, Garo Hills and Ehdsi Hills.

5 seconds.
1^ minutes.
5 seconds.
5 seconds.

No damage.

Slight shock. No damage.

No damage.

Smart shock no damage.

Sibsagar, Lakhimpur^ Sylhet, Cachar, Ndga and Qdro Hills.

1877.

3 seconds. | No damage.

not felt in any other district.

Very short. | Slight. No damage.

not felt in any other district.

1877.

6 to 8 seconds.
2 seconds.

Slight, no damage, preceded by usual rumbling noise.
Slight. No damage.

Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Cachar, Ndga, G^o and £h&si Hills.
1877, — (continued) .

5 seconds.
2 seconds.
A few seconds.

No damage.
No damage.
Distinct shock. No. damage.

SibsAgar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Oachdr, Ndga and Gdro Hills.

5 seeonds.

A few seconds.

No damage.

Slight. No damage.

NoT^gong, Sibsdgar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Oachdr, N^ and Giro Hills.

4 seconds.
2 seconds.

Slight. No damage.
Slight. No damage.

Xiakhimpur, Sylhet, Cachir, Naga and Kh&si Hills.

2 seconds. No damage.

fronoL other districts.

2 seconds.

3 seconds.

8 to 10 seconds.

Slight. No damage.

No damage.

No damage. Shock, clear, distinct and marked.

Col. Keatinge — Record qf the

[No. 1,

Date.

District.

Time of
Occoirence.

No reports received from Gk>alp&ra» K&mrdp, Sibsagar,
80tb August Sibsdgar, Jorb&t. SSO a. m.

No reports received from GK)41p&ray KiLmrdp, Darrang, Nowgong,

September

Ist September.

Do.
10th do.

Do.

Do.

16tb do.

Do.
18tb do.

Do.

Kb&si HiUs, ShiUong.
Cacb4r.

Kamrdp, Gauh&ti.
Nowgong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

Sibs^ar, Jorb^t.
Sibsagar, Sibsagar.
Nowgong, Nowgong.

Darrang, Tezpur.

6 '80 A. M.
6*45 A. M.
11 p. M.

II A. M.
1115 A. IC.

7 A. H.

7 A. ic

10 A. M.
10-30 A. M.

Ascertained that the shocks were not felt at GK>alpara, Lakbimpar,

7tb October.
Idth do.
dOth do.

K^Ui Hills, ShiUong.

Do.

Darrang, Tezpur.

1st December. | Darrang, Tezpur.

7th do.
Do.
Do.
Do.

Sibsdgar Jorbdt.
Goalp^ra, Godlpdra.
Nowgong, Nowgong.
Darrang, Tezpur.

October

5*30 A. ic.
6*45 A. M.
11-30 p. M.

November

NU.

December

I 610 A. M.

Ascertained that this shock

12 p. M.
1-25 A, M.
1-30 A. ic.
1-30 A. M.

Do.
Do.

Sibsagar, Sibs^ar.
Gauhati, (Kdmrtip).

About 2 A. M.
Do.

1878.]

Occurrence af Earthquakes in Assam.

0

Duration.

Extent of damage if any, and general remarks.

Nowgong, Lakhimpor, Sjlhet, Cachdr, N^& and Gdro Hills.
About 5 seconds. | No damage. Slight trembling shock.
Lakhimpur, Sjlhet, Cach^, Nagd^ Khasi and Gdro Hills.

1877.

No damage.

Slight shock.

No damage.

Very slight shock. No damage.

Sudden and distinct shock not preceded by usual rumbling
noise. No damage.

No damage. The sensation was as of one shock upwards.

Nil.

No damage. One sharp shock preceded by a heavy rum-
bling noise.

Slight shock, but the usual rumbling noise was loud and
long.

Sylhet, N^d and Garo Hills on the 10th, 16th and 18th.
1877.

6 seconds.

7 seconds.

1 min. 10 sec.

2 seconds.

8 to 10 seconds.

2 seconds.
Less than a sec.
10 seconds.

8 to 12 seconds.

10 seconds.
15 seconds.
20 to 25 seconds.

1877.

No damage.
No damage.
No damage. Sharp shock.

(?)

5 seconds.
4 seconds.
A full 20 seconds.

1877.

A few sees. only. | Two distinct but slight shocks. No damage.

not felt in any other district.

No damage.

Slight shock.

Do. No damage done.

Very severe, about half a dozen distinct shocks, the second
one very strong and caused much damage. South wall
of kutcherry cracked and broken down. Northern
walls cracked. Treasury walls cracked in several places.
Circuit bungalow walls much cracked. Jail uninjured.
Deputy Commissioner's bungalow on the hill simered
most, chimney fell in,' causing loss of valuable pro-
perty.

Nil.

A slight shock accompanied by the usual rumbling noise.
No damage.

Less than a sec.
5 seconds.

10

Col. Kesitinge^—Becord of the

[No. 1,

Date.

District.

Time of
Occurrence-

7th December.
Do.
Do.

Barpetd, (Kimrtip).
Khdsi Hills, Shillong.
N. Lakbimpur.

210 JL. ic.

2 A. M.

2-35 A. M.

Ascertained that this shock was not felt in Cacli&r,

9th December.

Darrang, Tezpur.

12-30 P. M.
3 p. M.
8-50 p. 11.
1'4!5 jl. m.

Do. Khisi Hills, ShiUong.

Ascertained that this shock was not felt at Goalpira, Kdmrdp,

11th December.
Do.

Darrang, Tezpur.
Nowgong, Nowgong.

11*30 P. M.

1 A.M.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Go41p&ra, Kiunrdp^

18th December.
Do.

Do.
Do.

K^mrdp, Gauh&ti.
Darrang, Tezpur.

Kh&si Hills, ShiUong.
Nowgong, Nowgong.

3-35 p. M.
3*45 p. M.
4-20 p. M.
5*15 p. M.
3-47 p. M.
8-60 p. M.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Gro^para, Sibs^gar,

22nd December.
Do.

Darrang, Tezpur.
Khdsi Hills, ShiUong.

4 JL* Jf •

10-30 p. M.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in Goalp&ra, K&mrAp, Nowgong,

29th December.
Do.
Do.

Kh^i HiUs, ShUlong.
Cachir, Silchar.
Godlp^a, Goilp&ra.

9 p. M.

10 p. M.

11 p. M.

Ascertained that the shock was not felt in E[&mriipy Darrang,

1878. J

Occurrence of Earthquakes in Assam,

11

Duration.

Not stated.
10 seconds.
2 seconds.

Extent of damage, if any, and general remarks.

Nil.

No damage done.

Treasury room cracked in several places. No serious
damage.

Sylhet, Giro and Ndgd Hills and Head Quarters Lakhimpur.

8 to 10 seconds.
A few seconds.
8 seconds.
5 seconds.

The first two shocks very distinct. No damage. The
third shock was very smart, and the rumble and shock
came almost together. No damage.

No damage.

Nowgong, Sibs^ar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Cach&r, N^a and Gdro Hills.

10 seconds.
8 seconds.

Smart shock. No damage.
Very slight. No damage.

Sibs%ar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Cachir, Naga, G&ro and Kh&si Hills.

5 seconds.
10 seconds.
A few seconds.
15 to 20 seconds.
5 seconds.
2 seconds.

Slight. No damage.

1st, very distinct with loud rumbling. No damage.

2nd, slight rumbling, distinct, but no shock.

8rd, loud continued rumbling, no shock.

No damage.

Sharp shock, no damage.

Lakhimpur, Sylhet, CachAr, Ndgd and Gdro Hills.

8 to 10 seconds.
5 seconds.

Distinct shock with loud rumbling. No damage.
No damage.

Sibsdgar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Cachdr, N4g4 and Garo Hills.

5 seconds.
2 seconds.
5 seconds.

No damage.
Very slight.
Slight shock.

Nowgong, Sibsdgar, Lakhimpur, Sylhet, Nagd and Garo HiUs.

12 H. H. Godwin- Austen— fiff^M List of Birds from the [No. 1,

IV.— Sixth List of Birds from the Hill Banges of the Norik-Easi
Frontier of India. — By Lieut-Colonel H. H. Gk)DWiN-Au8TEK,
J^. Z. 8, ^., &A.J late Deputy Superintendent Topographieal Survey
of India,

(Received 16th March ; read 3rd April.)
[With Plates X and XI.]

This list is the result of two seasons* Surrey exploration in the East-
em N4g& Hills (Mr. A. W. Chennell) and of the low hills near Sadija
and the neighbourhood of the Brdhmakhund (Mr. M. T. Ogle). I hare
again to acknowledge the kind services of the above gentlemen, to whom I
owe so much, and who have added considerably to the value of the collec-
tion by taking careful measurements in the flesh and recording the colour
of the soft parts. The collection is a large one and contains, as will be seen,
besides a large number of species already recorded, many interesting birds.
Together with the birds included in my paper on the Dafla Hills and
Darrang Terai, which I have now introduced and marked with an asterisk,
it brings up the total number of species collected during the progress of
No. 6 Topographical Survey to 586.

Having now left the service, I much fear that this will be my last
contribution in these pages to the avi-fauna of the £astem Districts.
The assistants who have been associated with me hitherto on this pleasant
work are being gradually reduced in number ; and have either been
transferred to other parties, or have proceeded on weU merited leave
of absence to a distance, so that it is difficult to arrange for collecting with
success, and a certain amount of aid is requisite, which only individuals in
the country can obtain. When this paper was almost completed, the
arrival of Mr. Chennell in England, with another collection of some 800
skins from the North Khasi Hills, has enabled me to add a few more species
to the list, and there are still some I have not yet identified.

70. Ubbua CoBOMAin)A, Latham.
North Khasi Hills, (collected by Mr. Chennell).

*71. HuHUA NiPALEiTSis, Hodgson.

73. Ketupa flavipes, Hodgson, var. magn\fica^ Swinhoe.
North Kh4si Hills. The specimen in Mr. ChennelPs collection has the
tarsus covered with a white down, huffy above, extending to within 1-3 inch
of the base of the toes, as recorded by Mr. Swinhoe in his description of
K. magnifica from Ningpo, (Ibis, 1873, p. 127).

1878.] Hill Banges of the N. U. Frontier. 13

On Mr. Chenneirs label I find the following notes :

L. 21 inches, W. 16*6, T. 60, t. 3-0, Bf. 1-8. Bill greenish homy,
irides golden yellow. Legs and feet dusky grey. The mid toe is 1*75, its
claw 1*1, hind toe 1*0, claw 1*25.

These dimensions and the coloration of the feet and legs are much
nearer to those of Mr. Swinhoe's bird than to those given by either Sharpe
or Jerdon for flavipes. In neither of the latter is any mention made of
the down covered tarsus, a character so striking that it could hardly have
escaped their notice, and one which, besides the vermiculated breast and
lower parts, distinguishes the species from OeyUmsnsis.

Swinhoe concludes with the remark that the fine down of the tarsus
appears to wear o:ff, but the specimen now recorded is an adult, and though
this down may disappear to a certain extent, I do not think the tarsus and
the joint above would ever become bare as in Ceyhnensis ajxdflavipes,

*94. Ohblidok nipaleksis, Hodgson.

106. Batbachostomtjs javensis, Horsfield, ? ?

This specimen belongs to the Indian Museum, Calcutta, where I found
it among some skins that had been sent down by the late lamented Captain
John Butler from the "N&gi Hills, and I was by the kind permission of the
Trustees allowed to bring it to England. It is a most interesting specimen
in the rufous phase of plumage, but unfortunately the sex is not marked.
It agrees with a specimen of B. Javensis ? in the collection of Lord
Tweeddale, and the description of the species as given in P. Z. S. 1877, p. 435,
and the dimensions do not differ materially. I give a description of the
Nagd Hill bird, interesting as being f o\md so far to the northward.

Entire plumage rich chestnut brown, a few white feathers at the base
of the upper mandible tipped rufous and barred with black. White on
chin and throat, some of the feathers on the latter crossed by a V-shaped
dark line, but they only extend to the upper breast, this being covered by
feathers having large, rounded white centres, bounded on the terminal margin
by a narrow dark line and fringed with chestnut ; towards the abdomen and
fiianks the white marks become narrow and lengthened. The wing is
unspotted, but conspicuous white feathers margined with black are mingled
with the scapulars, and there is a well-marked nuchal collar, each feather
crossed by a narrow black line edged terminally by another. There is a
slight mottling of dull black on the primaries and secondaries and lower
back. The tail is similarly mottled and crossed by 7 pale clear rufous bands,
the outer penultimate tail feather has 5 distinct white bars on the outer web,
the very short outermost feather has a terminal whitish spot.

W. 5-25 inches, T. 5-6, t. 0% Bf . 0*6. Breadth at gape, 1*05, mid-toe
and claw 075. The long frontal plumes are black, rufous at the base.

14 H. H. Godwin- Austen— ^id?^A List of Birds from the [No. I,

This bird is, I think, nearest to B, Javensis, B. qffinii apparently noii
having anj white in front of the eye.

On my submitting this paper and the specimen to Lord Tweeddale be
thus wrote to me, — " This N&gi Hill example of the genus, BatraehoHonM
'' without doubt belongs to the B. Javensis (Horsf. ex Java). I havecriti-
" cally compared the two and cannot detect any difference. It may tara
" out to be Mr. Hume's B, eastaneus, in which case B. Sodgsoni will be-
'' come a synonym of B» Javensis, It is a large form of B. affinis, but tbe
" white on the throat seems to extend higher up, as it does in the JaTui
<< species and in B. comutus of Sumatra and Borneo." Lord Tweeddale
does not concur with me regarding the white mark in front of the eye, and
says, " it is just as strongly marked in my examples of B. affinis.^^

130. Halcyon pileata, Bodd.
jff". atricapillm, Gmel. — Jerdon, Birds of India, Vol. I, p. 226.
^ L. about 10-3, W. 49, T. 4-0, t. 058, Bf. 2-3, BiU from nostril 215.
The dimensions of the length and wing are much smaller than those
given by Dr. Jerdon.

183. Cetx tbidacttla, Pallas.
Dr. Jerdon informed me that he saw this species in a small stream
close under the village of Cherra Pdnji, but as I never got it myself, I
did not record it. Mr. A. W. Chennell has two specimens he shot on the
Umthunna Eiver, N. Khdsi Hills.

♦135a. AlCEDO GBAITDIS, Blyth.

Also got on the Buri Dihing.

♦137. Cebtle guttata, Vigors.
Tenga P^ni and Buri Dihing.

147. PAL^OEiaS ETTPATBIUS, Lin.

L. 21, W. 81, T. 13-5, t. 0-8, Bf. 1*5, Bg. 1'2,
Bill deep red. Legs and feet orange yellow.
N. Khdsi Hills, December, (Chennell).

♦152fl. Pal^obnis MELANOBHTiffCHUS, Waglcr.
♦171. GECimjs STBiOLATUS, Blyth.

210. Sttbnictjltjs dicbuboibes, Hodgson.
Mr. Chennell has two specimens from the N. Kh&i Hills of this
curiously plumaged bird, so like the king-crow.
Length 100, W. 5*5, T. 5*75, t. 07, Bf. 0-8,

1878.] mil Banges of the N, S. Frontier. 15

•245. Cebthia. discolob, Blyth.

•303. CXOBNIS UNICOLOB, Bljth.

313. NiTiBiTLA. HODGSOKi, Moore.

A single male specimen was collected for me by Mr. A. Chennell in
the Ndg& Hills ; this is of a richer chestnut below than a specimen from
Darjiling. A female was obtained bj Mr. Ogle at Sadiya. I give a de-
scription of the latter, that in Jerdon. being taken from the male.

?. Above, olivaceous brown, wings and tail dark umber-brown,
beneath, all pale rufous bufE. Under tail coverts white.

W. 1'76, t. 0*65. The wing is rather shorter than in the male which
has it 1 .90.

320. SiFHiA LEUCOHELAinrBA, Hodgson.

I now possess two males and three females from Sadiya, two males
from the Munipur Hills, and one male from Sibsdgar, Assam. Dr. Jerdon
only describes the male, the female apparently was unknown to him. I
therefore give one of a specimen sent me from Darjiling by Mr. L. Man-
delli.

? . Above, brown with an olive cast, darkest on the head, ochraceous on
the rump. Wing and tail ruddy brown, ferruginous at the base of the tail
feathers and on the wing coverts. Beneath, dingy sordid white, purer on
the centre of the abdomen, ochraceous on the flanks. Hind claw well
curved. W. 23, T. 2-06, t. 0.72, Bf. 0-36.

S . Sadiya, W. 24, T. 216, t. 085, Bf. 0-30 to 0*35.

Legs, sepia-brown ; irides deep brown.

377. Chlettabicus bupicbpb, Blyth, var. atrosuperciltaris, Godwin-
Austen. P. A. S. B., June 1877, p. 147.
S . Busty chestnut on the head, same colour, but paler, on the nape and
ear coverts : back and wings pale olive-brown, quills tinged rufous, tail
brown. A narrow black streak over the eye, beneath dull white with an

earthy tinge.

Legs dark plumbeous.

L. about 6, W. 2-86, T. 33, t. 090, Bf . 0-43.

Maubum Tila, near Sadiya.

liarger than typical C. rt^ficepa and not so white below.

•3785. SUTHOBA. DAFLAENSis, Godwin-Austen.
•382. Gbahmatoptila btbiatA; Vigors.

10 H. H. Godwin- Austen— jSfijr^A List of Birds from the fXo. 1,

S90g. Tubdivvs Naoaxksib, Godwin- Austen, [A. M. N. H., Dec. 1877.]

'' Above, rich umber-brown throughout with no streaking on the fea-
thers of the head. Beneath, the same tint, much paler, with slight mstj
shading into and adjacent to the doll whitish centre of the breast, chin
also whitish.

'* Irides dark brown, legs and feet light sienna-grey.

" Length about 670, wing 22, taU 2 2, t. 090, Bf. 0*50, hind toe,
0'35, claw 0'3. This species is very distinct from T, Qaroensis in its
deeper umber coloration and smaller size. Particularly is this the case in
the legs, feet and hind claw.

" It was obtained by Mr. A. W. Ghennell, of the Survey, in the Eastern
Ndgd HUls."

890(^. TuBDiNTTS 8TBIATVS, Walden.

I have compared a specimen from Sadiya of the bird hitherto con-
sidered as T, brevicaudatus with the type in the Calcutta Museum, obtained
by Col. Tickell in Tenasserim, and find that they are, after aU, distinct.
The Tenasserim form is very strong rufous on the breast, belly and under
tail-coverts, the spots on the secondaries are small and triangular, whereas in
that from Sadiya they are large and tip the feather. The throat is also
grayer in this last. In the " Ibis*' for 1876, p. 854, Lord Tweeddale
remarks on the highly colored drawing by Tickell of T. brevicaudatus, and
Mr. Gould has very probably figured an Assam bird, which should stand
properly under the title of T, striatus, Walden, described in Ann, Mag.
Nat. Hist., (4), vii., p. 241, and which Jerdon had veiy probably compared
with true hrevicauchttu from the Burmah side and considered distinct.
This bird is the one I refer to under the title of T. WtUiofnsoni in
J. A. S. B., Ft. II., 1877, p. 44. I have four specimens from Sadiya (G^
ELills and Munipur), in all of which the spots on the secondaries are rufous,
while in a specimen from the Mul6-it range, Tenasserim, obtained by Mr.
Limborg, they are white, thus agreeing with Col. Tickell's drawing of trae
brevicaudatus from the same locality. This specimen is again not so
rufous as the type in the Indian Museum, but this is a very variable
character in this group, (as may be seen in Pnoe, squanuita^ of which
specimens white beneath are often met with,) and probably depends on age.
After all striatus is only a variety of brevicaudatus.

899ft. Pellobneum Makdellii, W. Blanford, [J. A. S. B., vol XLI,

Pt. II, p. 165, pi. VII., (1872).]

Var. pectoralis.

I described this variety of the Darjiling form in the J. A. S. B.
vol. XLVI, R. II, 1877, pp. 41-42, as it differs a good deal in its markings

1878.] Hill Ranges of the N. E. Fi^ontier, 17

from P. Mandellii described bj W. Blanford from Darjiling, and is the
form which extends to the G&ro, Kh&si and North OachiLr Hills, P. rufi-
caps of my First List, [J. A. S. B., Vol. XXXIX, p. 103, (1870).]

Jerdon, when noticing a new species from the Kh&si Hills, in Vol. 11.,
Birds of India, had Feh palustre in mind.

*401. FoMATOBHiinrs vebbtjginosus, Blyth.

405c. POMATOBHINUB STEirOBnYKGniTS, G.-A.

The original description appeared in this Journal, Ft. II., Vol. XLVI.
p. 43, (1877), and I have only to add that its nearest ally is P. ochracei-
eeps, Walden, from Burmah ; but the above species is larger and has the
lower parts pale ferruginous, whilst in ochraceieeps they are of the purest
white, and it is not so rufous on the head and nape. The legs of atenor-
hynchu8 are horny grey ; in the figure of ochraceieeps lately published in
the Ibis for 1877, PI. XIII, the legs appear to be much too blue ; should this
coloring however be correct, it will mark another point of difference.

Mr. Ogle shot this species on Manbdm Tila, at an elevation of 8,000
feet, not far from Sadiya.

407a. Gabbtjlax ituchalis, Godwin-Austen. Plate X.

The second specimen of this bird was obtained again by Mr. Ogle, on
the Kamlangpani, at 500 ft. I described the first example, obtained also
by Mr. Ogle, in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History for November
1876, and I here repeat the original description and remarks upon it. It
is figured on the accompanying plate.

" Above, top of head to nape dark slaty grey, succeeded by a broad
rich ferruginous collar an inch in breadth, which fades into the olive-green
of the back. Wings and tail of a rather darker tint of olive, the latter
tipped black ; the first four primaries are tipped hoalry-grey ; the shoulder
of wing has a ru^ty tinge. A narrow frontal band ; the lores, with a
narrow line over and below the eye, black ; this is continued in a streak of
dark rusty brown over the ear-coverts ; a few white feathers border the
black frontal band above. Chin black, extending a short way down the
middle of throat ; breast pale ashy, with a slight vinous tinge. Cheeks and
ear-coverts pure white. Flanks and under tail-coverts dull olive-green.
Bill black. Irides purple-lake. Legs fleshy-grey.

" Length 10 inches, wing 4'25, tail 4*6, tarsus 1*7, bill at front 0*9.

" This beautiful species was among a batch of birds lately received from
and collected by Mr. M. T. Ogle, of the Topographical Survey, in the
Lhota-Nag& hills. It is the representative there of G. chinensis, but
differs in possessing the broad ferruginous nape, and the neutral grey of
the head is of a darker hue. In other respects it is identical, save in some
3

18 H. H. Godwin-AuBien^fiffdr^A Lut of Birds from the [Nal,

minor points, such as :-^he black of the throat does not extend so far down
on to the upper breast ; the lower breast is paler than in c AtiMfint, and bu
a Tinous tinge ; the under tail^^overts are pure olivaceous with no ochnoe-
ous tint ; and, lastly, the white of the cheek and ear-coTerts extends in
this new form further down the side of the neck.*'

*427&* AcrnruBA DAniASNSis, Godwin- Austen. [FL lY, J. A. S. B., 1876.]

497 J. AcTDTiTBA OoLET, Godwiu-Austeu. Plate XL
This beautiful new form, discoYored by Mr. M. T. Ogle, was described
in J. A. S. B., Vol. XLVI, Pt. II, 1877, p. 42, from Manbdm Tils on
the Tengap&ni Biyer, near Sadiya. It is now figured.

*430. SiBiA PICAOIDBS, Hodgson.
*432. Malacocebcus tebbicolob, Hodgson.

*498. BuTiciLLA HoDasoKi, Moore.
*584. Pbhtia socialib, Sykes, small Tariety.

•685. Pboia Stbwabti, Blyth.

562a. Phtllosgopus fuliginitenteb, Hodgson, sp.
SoromU fuliginiventeTi Jerdon. [Birds of India, Vol. II, p. 162, No. 525.]

A duU but well marked ring roimd the eyes, an indistinct superciliom
of same colour as the breast. All above very dusky bistre-brown with an
olive tinge. Beneath dingy oil-green, paler on chin; under tail-coTerts
rather lengthened. Irides dull brown, legs ochraceous green. Obtained at
Sadiya.

L. 4-25, W. 215,.T. 20, t. 087, Bf. 0*34.

564. Beouloibbs tbochiloibes, Sundeval.

i from Noa Dihing, March 6th. Compared with specimens in Briti^
Museum.

Lord Tweeddale writes — " Has your specimen got white margins to tiie
outer tail feathers P If it has so, it will be true P. viridipemm, aod
which is probably nothing but P. preshytes of S, MuUer. Seebohm
thinks that P. trochiioidesy viridipennisy and preihytei are one and ^
same,"*

576. Abbobitib afeinib, Hodgson.
This bird I have only received from the N%a TTillfl • it has a briglit
yellow ring round the eye.

• Compare Stray Feathers, V, 1877, pp. 330, 504.—- £d.

1878.] mil Banff e8 qfthe JST. B. Frontier. 19

672. AbBOBITIS FLATEaTTLAJtlS, n 8p.

Detcriptum : Above ash grey, purer grey on rump, rather darker on the
head. Wings pale umber-brown. Tail ash-brown, the two outer feathers
white on the inner web, the next with a narrow edging of white. Lores
white, ear-coverts white and grey. Chin pure yellow fading on throat ;
breast, nape, flank and thighs greyish white, whitish on the breast ; a very
faint yellow tinge on the abdomen ; under tail-coverts white. A small
patch of yellow on inner shoulder of the wing,

Bill dark above, buff below.

W. 1-84, T. 1-8, t. 0-67, Bf. 0-8.

J2ii*.— Sadiya. (Mr. Ogle.)

Having failed to identify this bird with any species I have examined,
I have now described it more fully ; it is the specimen I noted as probably
new imder the above title in the J. A. S. B., Vol XLYI, Ft. 11, p. 44,
(1877).

It is nearest to A. aawihoiekiituSy having the same coloured head and
form of bill, but its entire ashy upper sur&ce distinguishes it well from
all the species I am acquainted with.

*586. HszacuBiTS sohistaceub, Hodgson.

•687. Henicubus scottlebi. Vigors.

*688. HENicrmvs sinensis, Gould.
*590a. MoTAcaxLA hodosoki, Q. K. Gray.

*692. Galobates MELAyoPE, Pallas.

694. BuDTTES ciTBEOLA, Pallas.
9 . Fengapdni, W. Sadiya. April 24th.
The black band on the nape is hardly developed at all.

694a. BuBYTES citeeoloides, Hodgson.
9 . Brahmaputra. April 6th.
The white of the wing has a slight wash of yellow on it.

*612. CuTiA Nifalensib, Hodgson.
*621. Peopabus chbts^sus, Hodgson.

626a. Staphidea pluhbeigeps, Godwin-Austen.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Dec. 1877.

Original Description: "Head (sub-crested) ash-grey, purer behind;
feathers narrowly edged paler. Back pale olive-brown, a few feathers

20 H. H. Godwin- Austen— jSfwrM LUi ofBirdtfrom the [No. 1,

pale-sbafted. Wing^ umber-brown. Tail darker, the four outer feathers
tipped with white, increasing outwards diagonally. Lores pale grey. The
ear- coverts only to just beneath the eye chesnut, the feathers white-shafted.
Chin, throat, and all the lower parts white. Flanks pale aepia-grej;
under tail-coverts the same, tipped white.

" Irides reddish brown. Legs umber.

" Length 46 inches, wing 2-8, tail 906, tarsus 0*7, bill at front Oa—
Obtained near Sadiya and Brahmakhtind."

A near ally is Staphidea castaneiceps, Moore, very common in the EMa
and Ndg& Hills, while another very distinct species is Staphidea torqueoU,
Swin. ; but in this last the chestnut commences at the base of the lower
mandible, passes under the eye and round the nape in a broad band of
chestnut-brown, and the last three tertiaries are margined white on the
inner web. This is absent in the Assam species.

In my note-book I find that I obtained one example in the Dikrang
▼alley, Dafla hills, which I shot at camp No. 9 ; but this was subsequentlj
lost somehow or other, and therefore I did not insert it in the List o!
Birds from the Dafla Hills, published in the Society's Journal.

Can this be Ixulus striatus, Blyth ? Blanf ord in J. A. S. B., 1872,
p. 166, says the Darjiling bird is the same as the Tenasserim type in the
Calcutta Museum, but mentions that it has a rufous superciliom, which
none of my specimens possess.

[Since writing the above, I have received from Mr. W. B}anf ord, in
a letter from Calcutta in reply to some questions I wrote to him regarding
this species, Zr. striatus, some remarks which I now quote. '' I have two
specimens of the Sikkim bird ; I have re-compared them with the type from
Tenasserim, and I cannot understand how I can have identified the two.
The Tenasserim bird is, as Blyth describes it, greyish brown (ashy brown ac-
cording to Tickell), the cap may have been a trifle darker, but very little,
not so distinct I should say as in the Sikkim bird, and the white shafts are
far more conspicuous in the Tenasserim type. Above all, the bill is much
larger in the latter ; the difference is so marked that I think I must hare
compared a Sikkim specimen differing from those I have now. The cheek
patch is distinct but faint. In the specimen from Sikkim, (Jjr. r^fiyaMy
Hume) which I now have, the rufous supercilium is only indicated posteri-
orly." This last title was given to the Sikkim bird by Mr. A. O. Hume in
Stray Feathers, Vol. V, p. 108. Mr. Blanf ord has now followed up his letter
by sending me two specimens from Mr. Mandelli's collection of this Darji-
ling form, and on comparison I find that it is quite distinct from pUm-^
heiceps. This last has the head of a decided ash-grey colour^ and the
feathers are more lengthened behind, so as to give a sub-crested appearance.
Bill shorter and deeper. Legs stouter, altogether a larger bird. In one

1878.] Hill Banyes of the JST. E. H-antier. 21

specimen from Darjiling, there is an extension shewn of the rufous of the .
ear-coverts round the nape, of which there is not a trace in the Sadiya ex*
amples. These are the dimensions of r^figenis, W. 2*45, T. 0*6, Bf . 0'47«
The wings run about equal. This genus presents us with an interest-
ing example of modification of plumage in areas that are in a great measure
separated now physically. We appear to have 5 forms : —

1. 8taphideaca8taneieeps,'i&.Qorej{l%^, Gdro,Khd8i and Niga Hills.

2. „ striatus, Blyth, (1859). Tenasserim.
8. „ rt{figenis, Hume. Sikkim Hills.

4. „ plumbeicepSf Godwin-Austen. Sadiya^ Eastern Assam.

5. „ torqueoUiy Swinhoe. W. China.]

669. Gabbultjs bispegulajiis, Vigors.
This Himalayan Jay was obtained by Mr. Chennell at Shillong, and is
in his collection.

*838. Stfheotideb BENaALEirsis, Gmelin.

873. Bhynchjba bekgalensis, Linnaeus.
North Ehisi Hills. Mr. Chennell.

In the neighbourhood of Calcutta these birds breed as early as March
and April ; two chicks were brought to me about the middle of the former
month.

879. iBrDOBHTKCHTTB STBiTTHBBsn, Vigors.
i . Noa Dihing.
W. 9 25, T. 6-5, 1. 1-7, Bf. 302.

907a. PoDiCA PEESOKATA, G. E. Gray.

This bird, hitherto only recorded, on the Indian side, from Cachir,
was found by Mr. Ogle on the Noa Dihing river near Sadiya ; the speci-
men is a male, and has been compared with those in the Indian Museum
from Tenasserim.

W. 9-5, T. 5-4, t. 20, Bf. 215, bill to nares 106.

908. FoBZAifA AEOOL, Sykes.
In Mr. Chennell's collection from North Khasi Hills.
Length about 9*25, W. 44, T. 2-3, t. 1*8, Bf. 1*0.
Bill dusky green, yellow below, irides red brown, legs and feet dusky
lake.

910. PoEZANA PTGlf.£A, Naumauu.
Near base of the Hills. N. Khdsi. Obtained by Mr. Chennell.

935a. GoBSACHms melajtolophvs. Raffles.
Dipur Bhil. Eastern Assam, March, (Chennell).

22 H. H. Godwin- Austen— fifta?<A Liti of Birdtfrtm the fNo. 1,

The discovery of this interesting bird in this part of India is note-
worthy, as I do not belieye it has hitherto been obtained any idiere in
India, certably never recorded. Up to the present it has been only known
as a native of Japan, Sumatra, Philippines, Arrakan (Ramri Islaiid),
Ceylon and the Nioobars (Home). The specimen, a male, agrees well with
Mr. A. O. Hume*s excellent description from the last-named locality in
^ Stray Feathers, Vol. II, p. 813." Mr. Chennell's dimensions in the
flesh are '' wing 10*7, tail 6, tarsus 3*0, bill at front 1*9. Bill dark homy;*'
these I have checked and find correct, the wing I make exactly 11^.
The tarsus of the Nicobar bird appears to be very much shorter than in
Schlegel's description and in this specimen from Assam.

950. SASCtDiOBKis KELAKOKOTUS, Pennant.
There is a head of this species in Mr. Chennell*s collection from Upper
Assam.

^81. Labus BiDiBUNDrs, Linn.
♦987. Stebita MELAJfTOGASTBA, Temminck.

I^otet on Species recorded informer Lists.

79. AtHEITE CTTCiriiOIDES.

Mr. ChenneU writes me an interesting account connected with the
habits of this bird ** One evening last January while in search of ^ohfplee^
*^ tron, several of which were calling about my camp at Gorhanga, I came
" upon two birds struggling desperately on the ground. I shot both, one
« turned out to be an owl, Athene cueuloides ¥ and the other a thmsh
'' Myiophonus temminchii $ . The little owl had so furiously attacked the
'* thrush that even in death its strong talons were firmly fixed in the
" victim's back."

157. PiCFB Maoei.
In the colour of the ear-coverts there is, I find, very great variance
from pure white to pale earthy brown ; they are white in a female from
Sadiya.

311. MVSCICAFTJLA ^STIGMA.

The young bird is dull umber-brown above, the feathers tipped pale
rufous and edged darkly, giving it a very speckly appearance. Upper
tail coverts rufous umber. Secondary coverts forming a narrow wing bar,
3 last secondaries edged in the same way. Beneath white, some of the
feathers tipped dark brown. Wings and tail ashy umber-brown.

From Shillong Peak. July, (ex coll. Chennell.)

1878.] Mill Bange9 of the JST. E. Frontier, 23

816. NiLTATA OBAHBIB.

I haye a specuaoen of this species in its young plumage which is worth
description.

Above, brown with a rufous shade, the feathers of the head shafted
ferruginous, those of the wing coverts, lower back and rump broadly tipped
with the same colour and edged black. Tail dark chestnut brown, wings
mnber-brown. Beneath, breast ferruginous brown with some dusky edgings,
giving a slightly barred appearance, paling to whitish on abdomen.

830. PKOEPTaA prsiLLA, var.

A specimen in Mr. Ghennell's collection is in a very interesting stage
of plumage. It is uniform brown, the feathers not so scale-like as usual,
only a very few of the feathers on the lower back having terminal spots to
them ; in size and form of bill it ia the same as the type. I was at first
iQclined to consider it distinct, but it is better to wait until we see more
similar specimens before naming it, for it appears immature. The wings
are rusty umber-brown, chin pale, breast and belly ashy umber with no bars
or markings.

W. 1-8, T. very short, t. 0*7, Bf. 9-43.

From the N. Kh&si Hills.

846. Pitta cucullata, Hartlaub.
I have seen a specimen in Mr. Chennell's collection which he obtained
in the N. Khdsi Hills, and he only saw one other. I have already alluded
to the apparent rarity of the species in these Hills.

d86a. Ftctobhib altibostbis, Jerdon.
^= griseigularis^ Hume.
I observe that Mr. Hume is still of opinion that his Bhtit&n Du&r
bird is distinct from altirogtriSy and in Stray Feathers, Vol. Y, No. 2,
p. 116, he has named it griseigularis (relying on Dr. Jerdon's description
being correct). Had Mr. Hume looked up the " Fifth List of Birds from
the N. E. Frontier," J. A. S. B.,Vol. XLV, Pt/ll,p. 197, he would have seen
that after the intimation of the re-disoovery of the species (Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., Jany. 1876) the type of aUirottris turned up in the British Museum,
and that my specimens had been compared with it, leaving no doubt in my
mind that they are identical, both in plumage and bill. Mr. Hume's specie
mens and my own, moreover, come from the same line of country, the
great plain north of the Brahmaputra. Dr. Jerdon's description is short,
but applies very fairly in every way, save in respect to the bill, which is
deeper than in Sinetisia. Jerdon says '' making an approach to Para-
doxomiSy^ by this he may have intended to convey only a very slight ap-
proach. The following appear to be the principal differences in the de-
scription of the plumage.

24 H. H. Godwin-Austen— /Si^rt List of Birds from the [No. I,

Above " slightly brownish ferraginoos," Hame, Vol. V, or " rather
dark ferruginous brown," Hume, Vol. IV. = " pale reddish brown," Jerdon.

Beneath " dull rusty," Hume, Vol. V, or " Brownish buff deeper
coloured &c.," Hume, Vol. IV, := " pale fulyescent," Jerdon.

Under wing-coyerts " pale yellowish fawn," Hume, VoL V, = " pale
ferruginous," Jerdon.

When such distinctions as these are made the basis on which to found
new species, it is I think advisable to wait, and if possible compare with
the type. But in altirostris we have one very marked character which Dr.
Jerdon did not overlook, viz,<t " forehead and streak over the eye hoary
grey." No two men agree in describing various shades of brown, olire-
green ^., an important element being the kind of light the skins are
placed in, and individual sensitiveness to colour. It is satisfactory to koow
that the type of altirostris has been found, otherwise we should have been
left in a cloud of doubt regarding even its very existence, for in Stray
Feathers, VoL III, p. 116, an idea is thrown out that Dr. Jerdon had got
hold of a variety of Pi/etorhis sinensis when he was at Thyet-Myo. Even
had the type of altirostris been lost, I hold it would have been better to
consider it as re-discovered in Assam, and then have waited for it totnm
up again on the Irrawady (where I am sure it will be found*) before giving
the Assam bird a new title.

427c. AcTnnjBA. EchEBTONi, Gould. Var. Khasiana^ Godwin-Austen.
This is referred to in my list of Dafla Hill Birds and is the species
noted as near Egertoni in my First List.

437a. MaljLCOCEBCUB (Li^XABBii.) bobigikosus, Godwin-Austen,
described in J. A. S. B., 1874, p. 164, is the JPyotorhis longirostriij
Hodgson, of Moore's Catalogue of Birds in the Indian Museum. I have
compared my specimens with the type and only observe that those from
Eastern Assam are larger. I was misled into describing it under a new
name by a specimen which is only a slight variety of Ptfc. sinensis, label-
led wrongly P. longirostris, in the British Museum. At the time I described
Jf. rohiffinosus the Indian Museum birds were still packed awaj and not
to be got at, and I trusted to the correctness of Mr. Gray's identification
of the British Museum bird. I was further misled by longirosiris being
placed in the genus Fyctorhis, with which it has no affinity, but is a true
Malacoeercus,

« It has been re-found hy Mr. Oates, see Stray Feathers, V, p. 249. — £i>.

1878.] Mill Banges ofth^ N. R Frontier. 25

631a. Oethotomus ateigtjlaeis, Temminck.

=i flavi'Viridis, Moore. Dunsiri Valley, Assam.

On comparing this with a specimen from Tenasserim collected by Mr.
0. Limborg, I notice that in the former the chestnut on the head does not
extend so far back on the nape as in the latter, and in a specimen from the
Gdro Hills it is confined to the frontal part of the head only. Assam hirda
have the darkish sub-terminal tip to the tail feathers as mentioned by Mr.
Moore in his description. The abdominal portion is not so pure a white ui
the Assam bird.

619a. MnOiA bufigxjlabis, Mandelli.

This is Alcippe eollaria^ Walden.

I have compared a specimen sent home lately by Mr. Hume and find
it identical with the Assam form. Mandelli's title has priority.

619&. MiNLA. Mandellit, Godwin-Austen.

Through the kindness of Mr, P. L. Sclater I have been able to com-
pare Mr. Hume's JProparus duhius from South Burma with this bird ; it
is clearly distinct, one of those interesting representative races we so often
find at the extreme limit of range. M, dubius is much paler beneath and
has not got the white markings on the nape. It would be conferring a great
pervice to ornithology if Mr. Hume would always send home similar doubt-
ful species, which can only be satisfactorily determined by comparison
with types in public and private collections.

26 J. Waterlioiu*— J« Acromui of the Tidal 'Xo. I

v.— ^n Account of the Tidal Ohscr rat ions in the Gulf of CWri, conducted
by the Great Trigonometrical ISurrey, under the Superintendence if
CoLOXEL J. T. Walcsb, C. B., R. E., during the yeart 1873-74-75.
Compiled from the G, T, Surrey Beportt by CuTAnr J. Wino-
B0V6E, AMMtant Surveyor General,

Origin and Object of the Observations. — In his Report on the Opendou
of the Great Trigonometrical Sturej for 1866-67, Col. Walker writes:

" Dr. Oldham, the Superintendent of the Geological Sorrej of Iixiia,
has recently drawn the attention of the Government to certain qnestiou
which have hoen raised regarding secular changes in the relative levd of
the land and sea, which are helieved to be going on in various parts of the
Bombay Presidency, and more particularly at the head of the Gulf whicb
separates the province of Cutch from that of Kattymur. Dr. Oldham
recommends that certain points should be selected on the south cosst of
Kattywar, and aa far up the Gulf as possible, and that the existing relathre
levels of land and sea should be determined at those points by accurate tidal
observations carried over as long a period as possible, the tidal stations be-
ing connected by lines of levels. Thus, by repeating the operations at a
time sufficiently distant to allow the secular changes to reach an appreciaUe
magnitude, this question, which is of much scientific importance, wiQ be
satisfactorily settled."

The Government of India sanctioned the observations being made, and
Col. Walker was making arrangements for carrying them out, when a teiy
considerable reduction in the expenditure of the Survey Department, is
consequence of the financial difficulties in 1869-70, caused the indefinite
postponement of the operations. It was not until August 1872 that steps
could be taken for commencing them*

The delay which thus took place is, however, not to be r^pnetted, be*
cause it resulted in the investigations being carried on in a more complete
and elaborate manner than had been originally contemplated, with a riew to
acquiring more comprehensive and accurate results than were at fiist
desired.

Happening to be present at the Meeting (in Edinburgh) of the Bntish
Association in 1871, Colonel Walker ascertained that a CJonunittee d the
Association, presided over by Sir William Thomson, had initiated a sjstem
of tidal investigations which was anticipated to secure scientific results of
the highest value. On studying the details of these operations he found
that his original programme, which contemplated tidal observations of on)/
a few weeks' duration, would be inadequate to detect the existence of minute

1878.] Observnfims in the OulfofCutch. 27

secular changes in the relations of land and sea, and that no conclusive re-
sults could be obtained unless the observations were carried over a period of
rather more than a year at the commencement, and a corresponding period
at the close, of the investigation. He further saw that if this were
done, the value of the operations would be greatly increased, because the
results would not only serve the purpose for which they were originally
contemplated, but would materially contribute towards the attainment of the
better knowledge of the law of the tides, which is considered by the British
Association to be so important a desideratum, and which is expected to lead
to an evaluation of the mass of the moon, to definite information regarding
the rigidity of the earth, to an approximation of the depth of the sea from
the observed velocities of tide-waves, to the determination of the retar-
dation of the earth's rotation due to tidal friction, and also to the various
practical benefits which necessarily accrue from accurate predictions of the
height of the tide at any given time.

Preliminary Preparations, — ^With the sanction of the Secretary of
State for India, Lieut, (now Captain) A. W. Baird, B. E., Assistant Super-
intendent G. T. Survey, who was then in England on furlough, was deputed
to study the practical details of the mode of tidal registration and of the
harmonic analysis of the observations, which, were recommended and prac-
tised by the Tidal Committee of the British Association.

Lieut. Baird also tested at Chatham a new self -registering tide-gauge
constructed by Adie, the well-known optician and mathematical instrument-
maker, on the same principle as those he had previously sent out to Lidi%
which were provided with barrels of unusual length (five feet) in order
that the tidal curves might be drawn on the largest scales practicable. The
new tide-gauge was on the same pattern, but with a few modifications, the
most important of which was the substitution of a chronometer escape-
ment instead of a pendulum or gravity escapement for the driving clock, in
order to permit of the instrimient being erected on positions where the con-
cussions of the sea waves would interfere with and perhaps stop the action
of a pendulum clock. On trial it was found to work very satisfactorily.

No tidal registrations can be deemed complete without simultaneous
registrations of the condition of the atmosphere, because it is well known
that the rise and fall of the tides on a line of coast is materially influenced
by the direction and force of the winds, and that it also varies inversely
with changes in the barometric pressure. Arrangements were therefore
made for supplying each tidal station with an anemometer and a barometer,
both self-recording. The anemometers registered both direction and
Telocity and were similar to Beckley's, but smaller, in order to be light
and portable. The barometers were aneroids, because safely portable self-
registering mercurial barometers could not be obtained.

28 J. Waterhouse — An Account of the Tidttl [No. 1,

Selection ofStatioM, — On Col. Walker's return to India, in November
1872, he deputed Lieut. Baird to make a reconnaisance of the Gulf of
Cutch, with a view to selecting tidal stations, and more particularly to
ascertain how the instructions which had been received from the Govern-
ment to establish a station '' at a point as far into the Runn of Cutch as
possible to which the tide has free access*' could bo best carried oai
For a point to have free access with the sea it is necessary that it should
always have at least 4 or 5 feet of water over it at lowest tides, and also
that the sea should approach it directly, and not through tortuous channels;
the point must also be either on the edge of the mainland or at no great
distance beyond, because of the difficulty and expense of constructing a
station on the foreshore. It seemed not improbable that it might not be
possible to find a point at the edge of the Kunn which would satisfy all the
requisite conditions.

Lieut. Baird proceeded first to Jdria Bandar, close to the head of the
tiulf , where he fitted up a country boat for navigating the creeks and chan-
nels of the Gulf, and secured the services of an experienced pilot to accom-
pany him in his explorations. After a month's cruising about and loDg
searching along the muddy foreshores of the Gulf, three places well adapted
for tidal observations were found. 1st, Nawan^ Point, midway up the
Gulf on the Cutch coast, 15 miles from Mundra ; 2nd, Hanstal Point at
the head of the Gulf, about 18 miles from Jtiria, and 3rd, Okha Point on
the Kattywar coast, just at the mouth of the Gulf, opposite the Island of
Beyt. At Nawanar there was a minimum depth of 19 feet of water within
836 feet of a site for a station ; at Hanstal 72 feet within 160 feet of a aits
for a station, and at Okha 23 feet within 220 feet of a site for a station.
Nawandr is about 9 or 10 and Hanstal 16 miles from the nearest village
where drinking water can be procured ; Okha Point has Beyt within 1 mile,
but a boat is required for communication with it.

The three places selected were considered to be well adapted for ihe
operations, which was the more fortxmate in that Lieut. Baird beUeTed
them to be the only suitable points to be met with for the purpose. It is
to be regretted, however, that an intermediate point could not be found on
the Kattywar coast, between Okha and Hanstal, for Nawandr being on the
opposite coast had to be connected with the other two stations by a veiy
long line of levels passing round the head of the Gulf ; and, as it afterwards
turned out, Nawandr proved unsuitable by constant changes in the con-
figuration of the foreshore.

Preliminary Arrangements, — The stations having been selected, pre-
liminary arrangements were commenced.

The first question to be decided was whether the tide-gauges should
be set up on stages erected in the sea beyond the low- water line, or on

1878.] Oltervations in the Qulfof Cutck. 29

masonry platforms constructed on shore at the high-water line. It is
obviously desirable that the communication between the surface of the
ocean and the gauge should be as direct as possible, in order that the tidal
curve may be accurately delineated. Thus, it is usual to erect tide-gauges
in ports or harbours where the piers, quays and landing-stages constructed
for the requirements of the shipping present facilities for their being set
up in the vicinity of deep water. In the Gulf of Cutch, however, the
stations were all at a distance from the nearest inhabited localities and
presented no facilities whatever ; for not only building materials and food
for the workmen, but even fresh water, had to be brought to them from
considerable distances. It was thus imperative that the plan of operations
should be of the simplest nature possible, so as to be carried out with the
least cost and the greatest expedition. Had any jetties or piers been
available for the operations the stations would have been erected on them,
but under existing circumstances it was only possible to connect the tide-
gauges with deep water by erecting stagings for them in the sea ; and these
would have had to be very strongly built to withstand the full force of the
sea, without undergoing any displacement whatever, and that, not for a
short time only, but for several years, so as to include both the first series
of tidal registrations, taken to determine the present relations of the land
and sea, and the final series which will have to be taken to determine the
future relations some years hence. The stagings would, moreover, have
had to be connected with the land by piers, in order to permit of ready-
access to the instruments at all times. The cost of such stagings and their
connecting piers would have far exceeded the funds available, and therefore
Col. Walker decided, though with some reluctance, on having the tide-
gauges set up on shore, over wells sunk near the high-water line and con-
nected with the sea by piping.

Final Arrangements. — The following is a brief sketch of the arrange-
ments adopted :

Masonry wells of a diameter of about 3 feet were sunk at the stations
to a depth of several feet below the lowest tides ; in these wells iron cylin-
ders with an internal diameter of 22 inches, slightly exceeding the diameter
of the float of the tide-gauge, were set up vertically and connected with the
sea by an iron piping carried along the shore down to the low- water line,
where a flexible piping was attached and carried out into deep water. The
flexible piping terminated in a rose suspended by means of buoys a few feet
above the bed of the sea, in order to prevent the entrance of silt as much as
possible, and was attached to the iron piping in such a manner that it might
be readily removed and cleaned whenever necessary. The tide-gauges were
set up over the cylinders, and their iron bed-plates indicated the planes to
which the tidal measurements were referred ; they were connected by

30 J. Waterbouae— ^fi Account of the Tidal [No. 1,

leyelling with permanent bench-marks fixed in the ground in the yicinitj of
the stations.

The iron cylinders were made up in sections of 50 inches in length, a
sheet of wrougbt-iron being bent to the size required and riyetted to form
a cylinder, a cast-iron flange was fitted on to each end and the faces of these
carefully turned so as to fit exactly. The bottom section had a flat iron
plate carefully screwed on to one end, so as to form the bottom of the well,
and the whole when bolted together formed a water-tight well into which
water could only enter through the piping connecting it with the sea. The
size of the cylinders was decided on so as to utilise the iron sheets mosfc
economically, and when finished four men could carry one section. Before
being let into the wells they were well painted oyer, inside and outside, with
tar in order to keep them from rusting. The leyel of the top flange of the
cylinder was about 6 feet aboye high-water spring tide, and about 2 feet
6 inches aboye the floor of the obseryatory. A board fitted on and screwed
to the top of the cylinder, with holes for the float-bands to pass through,
preyented anything falling accidentally inside the cylinder.

The rigid iron piping was ordinary gas-pipe in lengths of about 14 feet,
with an internal diameter of 2 inches, which had been computed to he
sufficient to permit of the transmission of the tidal waye from the sea io
the cylinder in the well without sensible retardation, so that the height of
the water in the cylinder should always be the same as that of the surface
of the sea. In order to render the connections perfectly water-tight, ts
well as to facilitate the joining together of the lengths of piping, these weie
fitted with cast-iron flanges made to screw on to each end.

The piping was connected with the bottom of the cylinder, at 9 inches
aboye it, by a small bend, and was then brought up yertically outside the
cylinder to a height 1 or 2 feet below the lowest high-water. At this
point was another bend with a stop-cock in it, and the pipe was then
taken straight out down to the sea along the slope of the shore to reach
low- water springs.

The rigid and flexible pipes were connected together by means of the
following arrangement :

To the end of the rigid iron pipe a brass connecting piece, made as
shown in the figure, was fitted, haying two outer extremities, to one of which
a flexible two-inch suction-pipe was fixed and the other closed by a brass
disc with a good washer. When the flexible pipe had to be examined
for cleaning, the brass disc was unscrewed and a short length of spare flexiUe
piping with a rose at its end fitted on, and taken out to deep water tem-
porarily. The original pipe was then taken off and cleaned, the disc be-
ing screwed on for the time in its place ; then when finished the long pipe
and disc were replaced in their original ])ositions. The flexible pipe was

1878.]

Observations in the Qulf of Cutch,

31

I

>di3o

two inches in diameter with copper inside, just
the same as the suction-pipe. It was provided
in lengths of 60 or 60 feet, and in smaller one
of 20 feet for temporary use only. The
lengths were fitted with couplings and unions
for connecting them with each other.

Lengths of this snction-pipe were joined
on to the end of the iron piping in the
manner above described, and taken out to
deep water. At the end of the outer length
a copper rose, of about 16 inches in length, 2
inches in diameter, and having about 150 holes
of t\ of an inch bored in it, was screwed on.
This rose was sustained a few feet from the hot-

torn, being attached to a small
t' Tt^it^i nun-buoy by a chain and shackle

with swivel, the whole being held
in position in deep water by an
anchor. To the top of the small
nun-buoy a chain was attached,
to which was fixed the large buoy
floating on the surface, with
plenty of slack chain to allow for
lise and fall of tide, and this
buoy also served to mark the
position of the flexible pipe.
The arrangement will be under,
stood by reference to the annexed
figure.

The level of the water in the well should obviously always coincide
with that of the sea, otherwise the registrations of the gauge are worthless ;
it is therefore imperatively necessary to compare the inside and outside
levels from time to time, in order to remove all doubt as to the efficiency
of the communication between the well and the sea. For this purpose an
ordinary gauge was attached to a pile driven into the bed of the sea, and
its zero was connected with that of the self -registering gauge over the
well, by spirit levelling, and thus a comparison of the levels could be readily
made whenever desirable. On taking these comparisons during certain
trial observations at Bombay, Captain Baird was surprised to find that
while the levels were generally identical, there were occasional large differ-
ences which at first could not be accounted for ; eventually, however, he
succeeded in tracing them to the accidental presence of air inside the piping.

lower Jimv-biioy
Rojfe ■

82 J. WaterhouBC— ^M AeeoutU of the Tidal [Ko, 1,

He soon devised a aimple method of expelling the air and restoriDg the
requisite identity ot level, bj fixing a stop^cock for the exit ot the air >t tbe
vertical bend, where the iron piping, after rising from the bottom of the
well to within a few inches of the surface of the ground, begins to slope
downwards towards the sea. This bend has necessarily to be made it*
point a little below the level of the lowest high-water tide, and, conseqnentlj,
on opening the stop- cock at high-water, all the air inside the pipe is of
conrse immediately expelled, and then the water inside the well at oscs
assumes the same level as that of the sea. But for this expedient it wonM
have been impossible to carry on the operations continuously for any length
of time, as there was found to be a decided tendency for air to collect m the
pipes. It was most fortunate that this was discovered during the eipai-
mental observations at Bombay, for there stop-cocks could be readily cod-
structed and attached to the piping, which could not possibly have been
done at either of the stations in the Gulf.

At Okha Captain Baird found some difficulty in keeping the stop-cock
dry and having access to it. He
therefore bad a water-tight boi
8 feet long and 1 foot sqoue
made in halves and fitted oier
}),fl A°d under the stop-cock, koki

haviQg been cut to admit tbe
pipes, and carefully caulked op
after the box bad been fitt«d
over the pipe (see figure); in thit
way no water could get at the
stop-cock except over the top cf
the box. Underneath the Gnt
7 or 8 feet of tbe pipe leadiog
to the sea, a layer of mad tiA
stones of considerable thicknea
was made, and a wall of mnulai'
material built all round '^
stop-cock, leaving a space about 3
feet square for standing in and
steps for getting down to it ; also
mud and sand were thrown down
between the iron cylinder and the masonry wall right up to the level of tbe
stop-cock bend, It was found that by this means the stop-cock was quite
dry and access could be had to it at any time however high the tide was-

Captain Baird spent the recess of 1873 at Bombay in prfiparing for tbe
operations of the field season ot 1873-74. Cylinders as above described

1878.] Ohsermfions in the Gulf of Catch. 38

were constructed in suitable lengths to be easily transported to the tidal
stations and there put together. The several self -registering instruments
which were to be employed — ^the tide-gauges, the aneroid barometers and
the anemometers or anemographs — were overhauled and put into good
working order. The tide-gauges were tested by being employed to register
the tides in the harbour of Bombay for several weeks continuously, and
were set up over wells connected with deep water by piping, in order that
the experimental observations should be taken under precisely similar
circumstances to the actual observations. Sundry alterations and improve-
ments were made in them, and in fact everything was done which could be
thought of to ensure the instruments being found in a satisfactory condition
when they were set up for work at the tidal stations. It was a matter of
great importance to have all this done at Bombay, because the advan-
tages of excellent workshops and skilled artificers were not to be met
with in the places where the instruments had to be set up for observation.

While in Bombay, Capt. Baird also constructed three portable obser-
vatories for erection at the tidal stations. These observatories were made
in such a manner as to be readily put together, or taken > to pieces and
re-erected at any other place where they might afterwards be required.
They were about 12' x 9' X 9' and about 12 feet high in the centre, the
roof sloping from the ridge to the sides which were about 8 feet high.
They were clinker-built, but it was found necessary to cover them with a
tarpaulin to keep out the heavy rain during the monsoons.

Operations at Okha Station. — Okha station being near the mouth of
the Qulf and the nearest to Bombay, where all the preliminary arrange-
ments were made, was selected as the first to be taken in hand. There all
the instruments and stores, and the European assistants, including Mr.
Peters, a skilled artificer of the Bombay Harbour Works, whose services had
been obligingly placed at Capt. Baird's disposal by Major Merewether, B. E.,
6 sub-surveyors and 24 men were sent, on the 13th October, 1873, direot from
Bombay in a large pattimar (or native sailing vessel) . Meeting with contrary
winds, the " Kotia Romani*' took such a long time to perform the voyage
that Capt. Baird began to fear that she was lost with all hands on board ; at
last, however, she arrived with her passengers and crew nearly starved, for
they had only taken a week's provisions for a voyage which lasted a fortnight.
On the 5th November the stores were landed and the first thing to be done
was to make an exoavation for the iron cylinder. At Okha, as well as at
^awanar, the soil being sandy, it was necessary to take measures to prevent
the sides of the well from falling in during the excavation, and therefore a
masonry well of sufficient diameter to receive the iron cylinder and vertical
shaft of the piping had to be sunk in much the same manner as the wells
so frequently used in this country for the foundations of bridges and aque-
5

84 J. Waterhouse — An Acetmni of the Tidal [No.1,

ducts. Tbe operations were considerably facilitated by the employment of
Bull's Patent Dredgers for scooping out the soil under the sinking masoni;.
(At Hanstal, where the soil was firm, the masonry well was unneoessair).
The masonry well was completed to the full depth of 25 feet by tbe 4&
December, and by the 20th the cylinder had been set up, the piping oon«
nected with the sea had been laid out into deep water, the observatory was
erected and the several self -registering instruments — ^a tide-gauge, an ane-
mometer and an aneroid barometer — were all in position and ready for ^
preliminary trial of their performances. By the 23rd everything was com-
plete, the instruments were all working well, and Capt. Baird was about
to proceed to the next station, when an accident happened through a native
boat drifting down past the station about 3 in the morning of the 24ib
December, and dragging her anchors across the flexible pipe, smashing it
and carrying off a large portion of it as well as the buoys, anchors &c. Be-
ing on the spot, Capt. Baird was able to rectify the damage and to ar-
range for protecting the piping by laying out and anchoring hawsers aroond
it. Guards were also provided to prevent boats from approaching tbe bnojB.
Thus this accident, though very annoying at the time, proved of uae in
showing the necessity of taking . special precautions for the protectaon d
the piping from injury. Similar measures were taken at tlie other stations,
and these precautions were essential to the success of the operations, be>
cause in case of any similar accident happening to injure the piping, tbe
native subordinate who would ordinarily be left in sole charge of the station
to keep the instruments in order and look after their performances, would
be unable to repair the damage without the personal help of Capt Baird
or the European assistant, to obtain which would probably cause suspen-
sion of the tidal registrations for a fortnight or more, and greatly impair
the value of the observations.

While engaged in completing the arrangements at Okha, Capt. Baiid
sent his assistants in advance to Hanstal and Nawanar to sink the welb,
erect the observatories and get everything ready for him to set up iba
instruments.

The observatory at Okha was fixed on three cross-beams fitted oo ti»
tops of six large piles embedded 8 feet in the sand. The cylinder was about
2 feet from the eastern end ; the tide-guage being of course as nearly ai
possible in the centre of the building. The aneroid barometer was plaited
carefully on a shelf at one corner. The anemometer was fixed to a shelf bo
that the upright pipe passed through the roof close to the ridge at titf
western end (the rain-gauge being close to it on the outside). A platfozn
was made to get at the anemometer easily, and this served a doable purpose^
as it was also the framework for a guard to protect the penduluxa and clock
of the tide-gauge, and cloth having been fixed all round it, kept any wind
from getting to the pendulum.

Xa78.] Obtervaiiotu in the (Mf of Ouieh. 35

The Belf-rcgistering tide-gauge was carefully eo placed that the band
allowed the float to be 8 inches from ooe side of the cylinder, while it was
the same distance itself from the other side. The instrument having been
carefully levelled by wedges, the trestle was secured with screws to the
floor ; a hole was cut in the floor and a small box let down (properly fitted
BO as to allow no sand to come in), in order that the counterpoise weight
might be able to act for the entire range of the instrument.

The float hand was made 35 feet 6 inches long and 33 feet of chain
was added to this, and fixed at its other end to the book under the float,
forming a continuous band as it were. The scale of wheels adopted here
was i ; the barrel being 5 feet long, that scale was the largest that could be
used for a 1490 feet range of tide. The float had a swivel to which the
band was attached, and the band also passed through two guides fixed to an
upright scale on one side, and through another guide fixed to the trestle on
the other.

The temporary tide-gauge, consisting of a pile firmly imbedded in the
sand and standing about % feet out of the ground, was placed about the

3G J. Waterliouse — An Account of (he Tidal [Ko. 1,

level of low- water neaps ; to this was attached a box containii^ a copper
float, and to the float was attached a deal rod with a pointer at the end of
it about 6i feet above the float. In the bottom of the box a pipe, two feet
long, of small diameter was fixed so as to permit the sea to have access to
the float ; the box itself was about 6 inches square and 6 feet high, the
side of it attached to the pile was extended upwards for 6 feet and had a
groove in it in which the upright rod with the index worked (vidt fignre),
BO that by having this upper part numbered from a certain zero, the level of
the sea below this zero could be at once read off. It was found bj carefol
trial in a bucket of water that the pointer always recorded 6 feet 2 inches
above the level of the water in which the float worked — the scale was made
accordingly ; levels were taken to connect the temporary tide-gauge with tho
top of the cylinder, for comparison of level of water inside and outside.

It will be imnecessary to enter into details of the operations at each
station as they were similar to those at Okha, of which the principal oat-
lines have been given. Full details will be found in Capt. Baird's re-
port appended to the General Reports of the Great Trigonometrical Sarrej
for 1873-74 and 1874-75.

Commencement and Progress of the Ohservations. — The regular tidal
registrations were commenced at Okha by the end of December 1873 ; at
Hanstal by the end of March 1874, and at Nawan&r by the end of April
It was hoped that they might have been carried on continuously for at
least a year, or perhaps longer, at each station, in order to furnish the re-
quisite data for investigations of the separate influence of each as well v
the combined of all the principal tidal constituents, and the least that is
needed for this purpose is a series of observations extending over a year.
Diiring this time the errors of the clocks for driving the barrels of the self-
registering instruments would have to be frequently determined and the
clocks corrected ; the instruments would also have to be examined and
cleaned, and possibly repaired also, and the relations between the curves oo
the diagrams and their zero lines would have to be carefully re-determined
from time to time ; and all this would have to be done either by Capt
Baird or by his assistant Mr. Eendell.

Capt. Baird accordingly drew up a programme for the periodic in-
pection of the stations and arranged that he and Mr. Rendell should make
tours of inspection in turn. It was calculated that a tour embracing all
three stations, would take about a month from the date of leaving to that
of returning to recess quarters ; these had been established in Kajkote, the
nearest town to the Gulf where house accommodation suitable for Europeaitf
could be obtained. Anticipating that during the monsoon months the wea-
ther at the tidal stations might be found too cloudy to permit of astrono-
mical observations for determining the clock errors, Capt. Baird provided

1878] Observations in the Onlf of Gutch. 37

himself with two portable chronometers which were rated at Rajkote
and carried about on the tours of inspection, for comparison with the
clocks.

Difficulties of the Operations, — The operations were carried on under
many and great difficulties, ani Capt. Baird and his assistants incurred
considerable risk when crossing the Gulf in native sailing vessels, as they
frequently had to, whenever their presence was required at either of the
stations. Huts had to be built and iron water-tanks provided at each sta-
tion for the native subordinates who were placed in charge of the
instruments, and for the men of the guard furnished by the Durbar of the
Native State in which the station is situated. Arrangements also had to be
made to supply these men with food and drinking water, which at Hanstal
was no easy matter, for the nearest point whence these necessaries of life
were procurable was about 25 miles off. At each station a line of post
runners had to be established to the nearest points on the main line of
postal communication, as it was essentially necessary that Capt. Baird
should receive daily reports from the men in chaise of the observatories.

The inspection of the observations necessitated a great deal of hard
marching and entailed much exposure and privation. Even so early as in
the month of May, before the setting in of the monsoon, the Runn of
Cutch was covered with water, from six inches to a foot in depth, which
had to be waded through for many miles distance to reach the station at
Hanstal. At such seasons travellers usually cross the Bunn by riding on
the camels of the country ; these animals are bred in large numbers along
the borders of the Gulf, and are accustomed from their birth to wander
about the swamps, browsing on the mangrove bushes, and thus they learn
to walk with ease and keep their feet on ground which would be impossi-
ble to most other camels. Of his journey with Mr. Bendell, to Hanstal in
the month of May, Capt. Baird writes, *' Our only land-marks in the whole
" of the last 14 miles were two small mounds of earth thrown up — when
** there were postal chowkies there — at 4 or 5 miles apart, and the observa-
" tory itself ; we both felt a curious sensation as if we were being carried out
** to sea, which was occasioned by seeing small branches of scrub floating
on the surface of the water and being driven by the wind inland ; and
once, with the exception of one of the mounds above mentioned in the
" distance, there were no fixed objects visible to destroy this optical illu-
** sion." Later on, when the monsoon set in, the difficulties of locomotion
were greatly increased ; direct communication with Nawanilr, by crossing
the Gulf in a sailing boat, became impossible, as none but native vessels
were available for the purpose, and they could not venture across in the
strong gales then prevailing ; and in order to reach that station a very long
circuit had to be made round the head of the Gulf, crossing the Runn at

u
It

38 J. Waterhou8e---4« Aeeownt of the Tidal [No. 1,

its narrowest point opposite to Wawania. Moreover the common nnmetal-
led roads in a black-soil country, as is the western portion of Kattjwar, he-
come all but impassible during the rains ; and thus Capt. Baird was often
unable to get over the ground more expeditiously than at the rate of about
a mile an hour. Between the 7th July and the 8th September he was
actually 88 days in the field, and marched nearly 800 miles under most
adverse circumstances.

General Working of the Tide-gaugeB, — ^The general working of the
tide-gauges at the three stations has now to be noticed.

At Okha the registrations went on most satisfactorily throughout 187i
and the following field season ; there were very few breaks of continuity of
the records, and they were very short and of no importance. At Hanstal
where the water was very muddy, and not pure and clear as at Okha, the
breaks were more numerous and longer ; they were caused sometimes by the
driving-clock getting out of order, but more frequently by the deposit of fine
mud in the well and piping of the gauge, notwithstanding the precaution
which had been taken to keep the rose at the extremity of the piping high
above the mud-banks ; this necessitated the occasional suspension of opera*
tions while the mud was being removed, and care was always taken to make
the break between the times of high and low water, whenever possible ; thus,
as the record of the highest and lowest points of curves has been secured in
almost all instances, the breaks may usually be interpolated between than
by hand, in conformity with the collateral curves, without any risk of
significant error. The foreshore at Okha being sand and rock vrithont
mud, there was no tendency there for the pipe to become choked. Both at
Okha and at Hanstal air was found to enter the iron piping, whenever the
latter was laid bare by the action of the surf, which frequently happened ;
but it was readily expelled at high- water, by opening the stop-cock which
has already been described as attached to the piping for that pxirpose.

At Nawandjr, matters went on less prosperously. When inspecting
this station in July 1874, Capt. Baird found everything apparently in good
order ; the curves on the diagram seemed at first to be all that could be
desired, but it was soon evident that they were erroneous, for the level of
the water in the well differed very sensibly from the sea level. On exazoin-
ing the piping, the extreme end was found to be buried in sand above the
low- water line, at a spot where a few weeks before, there had been a depth
of 20 feet of water at low tide, but which was then left bare for some
time daily. On further examination it was ascertained that the configura-
tion of the foreshore had entirely changed, and an extensive sandspit had
formed on the line of the piping ; this had been caused by the drift from
a belt of sand-hills to the south, under the influence of the strong winds
which blew from the south-west during the monsoon, the r^stered veloci-

1878. ] Observations in the Guff of Cufch. 39

ties of which were 860 to 890 miles daily, for several days preceding the
misadventure. This accident necessitated the suspension of the registra-
tions at Nawanar until such time as the piping could he extracted and
again put into communication with deep water. It was expected that the
original configuration of the foreshore would prohahly he restored hy natura 1
causes, when the wind veered round to the usual direction, soon after the
commencement of the cold- weather months ; hut this expectation was dis-
appointed, and as the cold season wore on it hecame only too certain that
the piping which lay beyond the low- water line would never be recovered.
A supply of new piping was therefore obtained from Bombay and attached
by Mr. Bendell to the land portion of the original pipe ; and by the com-
mencement of March 1875, after a break of 9 months' duration, the tide-
gauge was once more in free communication with the sea, and there appeared
to be every probability that it would so remain at least till the setting in of
the next monsoon.

But within a fortnight after the re-starting of the tide-gauge at Nawa-
ndjr, the foreshore again shallowed, and the new piping was covered with a
deposit of silt and mud, nearly up to the level of the rose at its outer ex-
tremity. Mr. Bendell at once cut away the flexible piping and substituted
several lengths of iron piping, supported by being attached to stakes driven
vertically into the ground. By remaining on the spot for two months,
taking measures to prevent the rose from being reached by the constantly
rising mud and silt, Mr. Bendell succeeded in securing satisfactory and
continuous readings for the whole of the time, and he checked them occa-
sionally by hourly readings taken pari passu on a graduated staff, which had
been set up in the sea in deep water, in order to afford a means of verifying
the indications of the self -registering gauge. The station of Nawan&r has
thus been proved to be unsuitable for continuous tidal observations, exten-
ding over a long period, for it is only during the months of fine weather
between November and May, that observations can be carried on there >
otherwise than by setting up the tide-gauge on a staging erected for it out
in deep water, the cost of which would be inadmissible.

Preliminary Results. — The preliminary results of the observations up
to September 1874, as worked out by Capt. Baird, show that the greatest
range of the tide was —

14*8 feet at Okha.
19*6 „ Nawandr.
21-2 „ Hanstal.
or two to four feet more in each instance than the ranges given in the
marine Charts.

Very fairly approximate values of the progress of the tidal wave, up
and down the Gulf, have also been obtained, showing that —

40 J. Waterbouse — An Account of the Tidal [No. 1,

High-water occurs at Nawanar lA. 5m. after Okha.
„ Hanstai 1 40 „

Low-water occurs at Nawandr 1 36 „

,, Hanstai 2 53 „

The results obtained from the combined tidal and leveling operations
show that the mean sea-level is higher bj 7 inches, at the head of the Gulf,
and by 4 inches, midway up, than it is at the mouth of the Gulf.

The curves of the self -registering aneroid barometers were compared
four times daily with a mercurial barometer, and the differences met with—
after allowing for index errors — were usually so trivial and unimportant
that every confidence may be felt in the general accuracy of the curves.
The aneroids are of a delicate construction and are liable to get out of order,
but as spare ones were available, no break of importance occurred at dther
station.

The anemometers were less satisfactory in their working, probably be-
cause they were so much more exposed to the vicissitudes of the weather.
The long continuance of winds coming from the same quarter caused the
direction gear to clog, and until this was discovered the recorded directions
are to some extent incorrect. On the other hand, the velocity gear was
kept in constant action by the strong winds prevailing. Several seteie
gales were recorded. The greatest velocities registered in 24 hours were—

620 miles at Okha on the 20th June, 1874.

890 „ Nawanar „ 26th „

1130 „ Hanstai „ 5th August, „

On the latter date the anemometer of Hanstai recorded 270 miles in
the three hours between 2 a. h. and noon. Capt. Baird is not entuielj
satisfied with the performances of these instruments ; but, considering their
small size (for the sake of lightness and portability), and their exposure to
fierce winds, to rain and, worse than all, to the constant oxidising influenoe
of the sea, Colonel Walker thinks it improbable that any instruments would,
under similar circumstances, have given much better results.

The total rainfall during the monsoon of 1874, as registered bj the
rain-gauges set up at each station, was —

1075 inches at Okha.

13*61 „ Nawandr.

18-40 „ Hanstai.

21'91 „ Rajkot (40 miles inland).

It will be seen that, a greater range of tide, a greater velocity of wind
and a greater rainfall, have been registered at the head than at the month
of the Gulf, and intermediate values at the midway station of Nawanar.

The scientific value of the observations is greatly increased by the con-
temporaneous observations of the barometric pressure, the velocity and direc^

1878.] Ohsermtiona in the Qulf of Cutch, 41

tion of the wind^ and the amount of rainfall ; and it is believed that no series
of tidal observations has been better furnished than these with the requisite
data for separating local atmospheric influences from the true tidal con-
stituents, which are caused by the varying position of the sun and moon.

Spirit-leveling operations, — ^At short distances round each station
three blocks of stone were sunk in the ground to serve as bench-marks for
future reference, and each of them was carefully connected with the zero of
the tide-guage. Bench-marks were also placed in position, one at about
every 10 miles, from Okha station along the road to Hanstal and thence to
Nawau&r in Kutch across the Kunn. Bench-marks were also laid down with
reference to the nearest Great Trigonometrical Stations. During the field-
season of 1874-75, Capt. Baird conducted a series of spirit-leveling operations
for determining the present relative levels of the datum points of the three
tidal stations, and of the stone bench-marks which had been laid down a
year previously along the lines to be levelled over. The length of the main
lines connecting the three tidal stations was 275 miles, which was leveled
over independently by Capt. Baird and Narsing Dass, in accordance with
the rigorous system which has obtained for several years past in the G. T.
Survey. 29 miles of branch lines were also executed, in order to connect the
stations of the Kattywar triangulation with the tidal stations.

In working between Nawanar and Hanstal, Capt. Baud had to make
a considerable detour round the head of the Gulf, crossing the Kunn be-
tween Shikarpur and Mallia. Several bench-marks were fixed on the Bunn^
and they will be important points of reference when these operations are
repeated with the tidal observations some years hence, when a sufficient in-
terval shall have elapsed to allow of the rising or sinking of the surface of
the ground to an appreciable extent. The existing surface-level of the
Bunn has been obtained at a number of points, for Capt. Baird took the
precaution of having all the pins on which the leveling staves were set up,
driven downwards until their heads were exactly flush with the surface of
the ground.

Operations dwring the Monsoon. — Considerable anxiety was felt as to
the possibility of securing continuous records during the monsoon, when
heavy gales are prevalent ; but every precaution was taken to strengthen
the wooden observatories in which the instruments were set up, and to
anticipate and provide for all possible contingencies ; and it was most satis-
factory that, although the monsoon of 1874 set in very severely and lasted
long, the observatories all stood firm, and the tide-gauges and other self-
registering instruments remained in good working order throughout the
reason.

Close of the Operations, — The carrying out of the periodical inspections
during the monsoon was the most trying and difficult part of the operations.
6

42 J. Waterbouae — An Account of the Tidal [No. 1,

During the monsoon of 1874 this duty was performed entirelj by Gap<;.
Bairdy who had generously given his assistant leave of absence on urgent
private affairs at that time. It had, however, proved to be so arduous and
to entail so much exertion and exposure, that Colonel Walker felt he wonld
not be justified in requesting Capt. Baird to carry on the inspections
during the monsoon of 1875. He was therefore directed to continue the
registrations up to within a few days of the commencement of the monsoon,
and then to dismantle all the stations, and remove the instruments.

Accordingly at the close of the field-season of 1874-75, the instruments
were taken down and the observatories dismantled. At each station the
vertical iron cylinder, in which the float of the guage had acted, was left in
statu quo, together with a length of the iron piping, extending about 50
feet seawards from the cylinder. The cylinder was filled with clean dry
sand, and closed above with a thick planking, after which a massive pile ot
stones was raised over the ground around it, to serve the double object of a
protection and an indication of the position for future reference.

The three bench-marks in the immediate vicinity of the cylinder, with
each end of which the datum of the guage had been connected, were similariy
covered over. Finally the several cairns were placed under the protedion
of the local officials ; and it is to be hoped that the cylinders and bench-
marks will be readily discovered whenever the second series of operations
are commenced, and that they will be found to have remained nndisturhed
meanwhile. •

Thus the periods during which the tidal heights have been continuouslj
registered at the three stations are, 16i months at Okha, 14 months at
Hanstal, 2 months at Nawan6r in 1874 and 2 months more in 1875. As
already noticed, simultaneous observations of the direction and velocity ct
the wind and of the barometric pressure were made by the anemograph and
barograph which were set up at each station.

The long break in the registrations at Nawanir is to be r^retted. Bat
as the station lies nearly midway up the Gulf, it is probable that the values
of the difference between the mean level for the periods of actual obser-
vation and the mean level for the entire year, which are given by the regis-
trations at Okha and Hanstal, may be applied proportionately to the results
at Nawandr, to obtain the mean level for the year there, and Capt. Baird
found, that this plan gave very accordant and promising results.

When all the observations were completed, the ordinates of the several
curves were measured, (taking full account of clock-error whenever there
was any) and then tabulated for each hour of the day. The numerical re-
sults thus obtained serve as the data on which the analysis of the obsff-
vations was subsequently based.

Thus ended the first series of operations, to determine whether the
relations of land and sea are constant or changing. CoL Walker writes:

1878.] Olservationa in the Oulf of Cuteh. 43

" Great credit is due to Capt. Baird for the manner in which he con-
" ducted the task entrusted to him. The difficulties he had to contend with
" in ohtaining exact registrations continuously for such long periods were
^' very serious and formidable ; aU the stations were situated at points on the
" coast line which were very far from the nearest habited localities ; and the
" inspections during the season of monsoons, which work was done entirely
^' by himself, necessitated constant travelling during the most inclement time
" of the year, and entailed an amount of risk and exposure which would tell
** on a constitution of iron."

Mnal JResults. — The analysis of the results of the observations has
necessarily been a work of time and has only lately been completed^ Col.
Walker felt assured that it would be best performed with the assistance of
Mr. Roberts of the Nautical Almanac Office in London, by whom all the tidal
observations taken for the British Association had been,* and are still being
reduced and analyzed, under the superintendence of Sir W. Thomson, and
who hady previous to the commencement of the observations, aided Capt.
Baird in the prepanition of an account of the practical application of the
harmonic analysis by which tidal observations are reduced for the British
Association. Sanction was therefore obtained for Capt. Baird to remain
in England and reduce his observations with Mr. Boberts' assistance. The
results will be presently stated. But first it is necessary to give a brief
epitome of the method of investigation which has been followed. .

The rise and fall of the level of the ocean, twice, or nearly so, in twenty-
four hours, is weU known to be due to the attractions of the sun and the moon.
If the orbit of the earth and that of the moon were quite circular and lay
in the plane of the equator, and if the moon performed its revolution round
the earth in the same time that the sun appears to revolve around the earth,
then there would be two tides daily, differing from each other in form
— should the sun and moon not be in conjunction — ^but recurring alike from
day to day. The moon, however, makes her circuit of the earth in 48
minutes over the twenty-four hours, and thus the sun makes thirty apparent
circuits of the earth while the moon is only making twenty-nine ; more-
over, the orbits of the earth and of the moon are not circular, nor are they
situated in the plane of the equator. Thus the positions of the sun and
moon, relatively to the earth, are momentarily varying in distance, declin-
ation and right ascension. Consequently, the level of the ocean is subject
to momentary variations in the dynamical action of the disturbing bodies ;
and these cause a variety of tides which recur periodically, some in short,
others in long, periods.

In the present investigations, the short and the long period tides have
been analyzed by different methods. The former — ^which here embrace all
tides recurring in periods of or about a day in duration, and in any aliquot
part of the quasi-diurnal period — have been treated in accordance with the

4( J. WaterhouflC— .in Accouni of the Tidal [No. 1,

Bjnthesis of Laplace. Thus a number of fictiiaous stars are asAoined to
move, each uniformly in the plane of the earth's equator, with angnkr
Telocities which are small in comparison with that of the earth's rotstion,
80 that the period of each star is sometiiing not very dilEerent from 24
mean solar hours, and ranges between a minimum of 23 hours and a max-
imum of 27. Each star is supposed to produce a primary tide in its qvui-
diurnal period, and also Tarious sub-tides which run through their periods
ill i) i) i or some other aliquot part of the primary period ; but of these
sub- tides it may here be observed that some are considerably larger than tiieir
so-called primaries, as for instance, the lunar semidiurnal tide, the mag-
nitude of which is enormously greater than that of the lunar dionud. The
primary is simply the tide of which the period is nearest to 24 mean aolar
hours.

Thus the momentarily varying level of the surface of the ooeaa is
supposed to be the resultant of a large number of tides, each of wfaiefa is
perfectly independent of all the others, and has its own amplitude and
period of revolution, which remain ever constant throughout all time.
Occasionally several of the most important tides are in conjunctioD, aod
then the range between high and low-water is a maximum, as at spring
tides ; at other times some tides are in opposition to others, and then ^
tidal rauge is a minimtun, as occurs at neap tides.

. Every tide may be represented by a circle of known diameter ; and if
we suppose a point to move uniformly right round the circumference of this
circle so as to make a complete revolution in the time which is the tide's
period, then the height of the point above or below the horizontal diameter
of the circle at any moment, represents the height of the tide at that moment
By the synthesis of Laplace we are able to find, from continuous obser-
vations of the varying level of the sea, the amplitude and the epoch (as
they are called) of each of the several tides of which the height of the sea-
level at any moment is the resultant. The amplitude is the radius of the
representative circle, the epoch enables us to ascertain the point which the
tide has reached at amy given moment during its movement over the
circumference of the circle. Thus when we know the amplitudes, the
epochs and the velocities of rotation of any number of constituent tides,
we are in a position to be able to compute and predict the height of the
sea-level, at any future moment, at the station where the observatiooa on
which our calculations are based were taken.

The velocity of rotation of a tide rests piimarily on certain oomhi-
nations of the angular velocities of the earth's rotation round its axis, the
moon's rotation round the earth, the earth's round the sun, and the i^sogKS-
sion of the moon's perigee, which are decided on a priori from theon^cal
considerations. These preliminary angular velocities are the arguments
of the several fictitious stars of Laplace's method.

1878.] Observations in the Gulf of dutch. 45

The portion of the height of the sea-level above or below it3 mean
height (with reference to some fixed datum Hne), which is due to the com*
bined influences of the several tides produced by any one of the fictitious
stars, is given by the following well-known expression of the law of periodi-
city : —

h =z B^ coa(nt — ty) 4- S, cos(2n/ — c,) -f B^ cos(dn^ — €,) -f ...
in which h is the height above mean sea at any moment, t is the time ex-
pressed in mean solar hours, commencing at 0^ , astronomical reckoning,
and n is the angular velocity of the star in degrees of arc per mean solar
hour, so that 360^ -S- n denotes the period of the star in hours of mean
time. B^iB the amplitude, and c^ the epoch of the full-period tide ; JB^
and c,, JSg and c,, &o., are the amplitudes and epochs of the sub-tides,
whose periods are one-half, one- third, &c., that of the primary period* The
amplitude is the semi-diameter of the circle whose circumference indicates
the path of a tide. The epoch is the arc which, when divided by the angu-
lar velocity of the tide, gives the hour-angle when the height of the tide is
a maximum ; this occurs, on the day of starting, when nt = c^ for a prima-
ry tide, when 2nt = c^ (and again 12 ^tta«i-hours afterwards) for a tide
whose period is half that of the primary, and so on.

Thus, if we now put h for the height of the sea-level at any moment,
and A for the value of the height of the mean sea-level which results from
the combined influence of the whole of the fictitious stars, we have —

h = A + ^ ( JB» co8(«^— €,) 4- 5, cos(2«/— €,) + . . . |

where the symbol 2 stands for the sunmiation of the whole of the terma
within the brackets, which relate to all the fictitious stars.

There are two principal stars, respectively called S and M for brevity,
the first of which represents the mean sun, or that point in the plane of the
earth's equator whose hour-angle is equal to mean solar time ; the second
represents the mean moon, a point moving in the plane of the equator with
an angular velocity equal to the mean angular velocity of the moon. The
other fictitious stars respectively furnish the corrections to S and M for
declination and parallax, to M for lunar evection and variation, and to S and
M for the compound actions which produce what are called Helmholtz
Tides, &c. The 24th part of the period of star S being an hour, that of
any other of the fictitious stars may be oonveniently spoken of, and is here
called a quasi-hour.

To find the argument (the angular velocity n of the preceding f ormu-
Ise) for each fictitious star, various combinations have to be made of the
following fundamental angular velocities, viz> : —

7, the earth's rotation • • • . . » 16^*0410686 per mean solar hour.

0-, the moon's TBTolution round the earth.. » 0*5490165 ,, „

fi, the earth's revolution round the sun. . . . ~ 0*0410686 „ ,,

&, the progn^ossion of the moon^s perigee . . = 0*0046418 y, „

46 J* Waterbouse — Jn Account of the Tidal [No. 1,

The several fictitious stars whose tides have been analyzed in these
investigations, are —

S, with argument « = y — ff = 16***

M „ y — <r = 14-4920521

K „ y = 150410686

O „ y — 2<r = 13-&430356

P „ y — 2iy = 14 9589314

J II y^<r — ^ = 15-6854433

Q „ y — 8<r-|-«i = 13*3986609

/A „ y — 2<r-|-i7 = 13-9841042

N „ y — |<r-l-i « = 14-2198648

L „ y — i<r — iu» = 14 7642394

V II y — fr — iw+1? =14-2662915

X ■ „ y — icr+iS — tf = 147278127

MS „ y — W—iv = 14-7460261

and SM „ y-|-<r — 2iy = 15-5079479

The ^2ki«i-hour angles of the several fictitious stars, other than S, at
mean noon of the day of starting, were found by putting

y = the Sidereal time,
iy = the Sun's mean longitude = y,
o- = the Moon's mean longitude,
o- — 0) = the Moon's mean anomaly,

and taking the corresponding numerical values of each element, for the
hour and station, from the Nautical Almanac and Hansen's Lunar Tables,
and then substituting these values in the preceding symbolic expressions
for the hourly variations of the several stars.

The number of stars and the angular velocity of each star having thus
been decided on, a priori^ from theoretical considerations, the values of the
constants 12 and c for the tidal constituents of each star have to be deter-
mined from the evidence afforded by the tabulated values of the height of
the sea-level for every hour of the day during the entire period of observa-
tion ; this should not be less than 371 days. The values of the constants
have been computed for the several tides at the three stations of Okha,
Nawan&r, and Hanstal, and are given below. It will be remembered that
Okha is situated at the entrance to the Gulf of Cutch, Nawanar midway
up the Qulf , and Hanstal at its upper extremity ; also that conidnnoas
observations over a period of not less than 14 months were obtuned at the
upper and lower stations, whereas at the middle station, Nawan^, there
was a break of several months, in consequence of an alteration of the fore-
shore during the monsoon of 1874 ; thus the results for Nawanir are &ur
from being as exact and complete as those for the two other stations.

1878.]

Observations in the Qulfof Cutch,

47

H
m

w

■4S

F>4

s

^ N 00 1^ V^ cq

P »p t* »p O O W3 ip O 05 op O O ^ ^ ^ v., ••v.^ ^- v.^ *^ ^^ w

;:5'^f^5b6o»bow«^^"^"^aDQWc?^cbdDcb05dD65i>cb

COcX)C050lO^O'*OiCO"^^Ot>00^0(M'*COC<l'H^t>OiH

II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II

WWI|I«IIWWWW«II^WWWWIWM>WIWWIWWWIWW

e5i>rHOi»«oo--:3!COQcocqt^F^

0it^^5SC^O0iC0OC0cqQC0O

T'osopOr-ioocpe^ocp^oo

Oi-toOOOOOOOOfHOO

II II II II II II II II II II II II II 11

00
00
00

COQ^lOCD'^aiGiCO
.-HOiCOCOtOOOOO
COQ0lOC<ia0lO0000
pHOOrHC^C^UDrHOO

oooo«-<ooooo

II II II II II II II II II II

ft^ ft^ ft^ ft^ ft^ ft? ft^ ft^ ft^ ft^

5

■4S

CO

00

. II II

tf w" »J* bb

••^ ^^ •'•3
^ 00 »-^ ^

c: 00 00 fl

II II

00

8 8:^3

o

6 '^

:J2oo^

II

-- . 00 -*J ts

c
CIS

*^::^^

CO CO ©^

lO t* 00

r-l 00

II II 11

»• n »<

www

^ •> at

l> O t>

O 00 00

00 t^ 05

co^t>

CSI ^
00 i-H

^ 00

f-H 05

lb CO
oc c^

00 CSI

<M O 00

l>. 1-t "^

• • •

00

II II II II II II II II

www

w

wo

II

o

II

CO 00 l> 05
O 05 05 CO
00 CO CO »C
C^ rH r-l 00

o oo o

II II II II

c«

w

W

c«

w

•*

•«

•»

lO

o

S

<M Tp 05

(M

f— 1

(N

•"• o o

II II II

MM «• M «« »4 H

P^ ft? ft? ft? ft? ft? ft;^

fH O O

II II II

Mm*

te-43 J
II

M
O

05l>^«i-^C0Q0O00l>
OOOOOC500000«-tOOkO

00 cq 00 Ol
'^ C^ O l>
00 f-l c^

II II 11 II II II II II II II

8

CSb?'^C5Q0|>^OOC0'^t^

^ "* CO O 05 O
■^ »H 1-) N 1-t (N

II

o -

CO 00 CO 05 00 p

Cb tP N 05 CO "^ . . .

i-Hi—t 0000«-<006lOO(M

11 II II II II II II

II II

^ «

•9 ^ «

O (N (M 00

■ ■ • •

00 ^ -- (M
00 05 fH
rH C^ rH

II II II II II

-»3

«s «« ^ #^ •« »^ ^^ •% M »

rH'^(NQCOWC005l.'5CO
^Cv|OOCOOCn|OOOOCOW3

t*eqi-»oO'-H05c^c<iQ

OO^PPp'HpOrHpp

O«HOOOO00OOOO

II II II II II II II II II II II

53i5tri23::i5g'-<r:^c^cQcooo5

OOOOS-^OOOf— 'WOi— •C5O500rH

»-iCO<MOOOC^IOiOMOt^iOOO'^CO
W0"^00C0'H'7-if-Hl>.p,^,-«OO

oooooooooo

II 11 II II II II II II II

<-< o o

II II II II

.^•"^

00 uooaBttToaDCQODnlQ^

48 J. Waierbouse — An Account of the Tidal [No. 1,

It will be seen tbat tbe principal tides are first tbe j^Mwi-semi-dionial
of M, and tben tbe semi-diurnal of S and tbe ^«a#»-diiimal of K, whkli
range from one-tbird to one-fourtb of tbe former. S and M being tiie
principal stars, tbeir sub-tides, down to tbe tbree-bourly tide of S and the
corresponding tide of M, bare been computed. For K tbe ^i^m-diurnal
and semi-diurnal tides were computed ; for tbe stars O to Q only tbe pri-
mary tides. For tbe stars L to SM tbere are no primaries, and tbe tides of
longest period are tbe ^ikwi-semi-diumal ; for MS tbe longest tide is the
^tfOM-demi-semi-diumal ; tbese, being tbe principal ones for eacb star, have
been computed.

Here it is necessary to observe tbat tbe number of sub-tides which
bare to be investigated in eacb instance, in order to evaluate tbe fnll in-
fluence of tbe star, is a matter wbicb can only be decided after considerable
experience of sucb investigations bas been gained by tbe analyns of the
tides at a great variety of stations. It was tberef ore left to Mr. Bobeits,
wbose practical familiarity witb tbe subject probably exceeds that of any other
individual, to prescribe tbe number of terms to be computed for eacb star.

On inserting tbe numerical values of tbe constants H and c in the
general expression, and substituting for nt its values in succession for every
bour from tbe starting-point, tbe beigbt (in feet) of eacb tide and sub-tide
may be computed for every bour. Tbe sum of tbese gives tbe portion of
tbe beigbt of tbe sea-level at tbat bour wbicb is due to tbe influence of the
sbort-period tides. Tbis usually far exceeds tbe portion wbicb is due to
all otber causes, and is tbus frequently taken to represent tbe wbole beigbt.

Sbould it be desired to compute tbe bourly beigbts for any day of any
year, witbout commencing at tbe starting-point of tbe observations, as may
be necessary wben tidal predictions are required, tbe values of y, ij, a-, and«
must be f oimd, as stated on page 46, for mean noon of tbe day wbicb may
be adopted as tbe new starting-point ; tbe ^tkiM-bour-angles of tbe several
fictitious stars, otber tban S, at tbat moment must tben be found, after
wbicb tbose for tbe succeeding bours may be obtained by successive ad-
ditions of tbe respective bourly increments wbicb are due to eacb star.

Tbe values of tbe constants B and c baving been determined for eacb of
the three tidal stations, tbe next step taken was tbe calculation of tbe height
of the sea-level at eacb hour, throughout the entire period of registraticm
at eacb station. The differences between the observed and the computed
values were tben taken as the data for calculating tbe influence of variations
in barometric pressure, and in tbe velocity and direction of tbe wind, on
tbe sea-level. Equations were formed in which the unknown quantities
were B, the effect of a barometric pressure of one inch, and 2f and JS, tbe
effects of the North and the East components respectively of winds blowing
at the rate of 10 miles an bour. Of tbese equations there were as many
as the number of days of observation ; they were solved by tbe method

1878.] Observations in the Oulfof Cutch. 49

of minimum, squares. Corrections were then computed for the daily
variations of the atmospheric influences on the sea-leyel, and were applied
to the values of height resulting from the preyious inyestigations of the
short-period tides. Finally, the differences between the heights thus
determined and those actually observed were taken as the data for calcu-
lating the influence of each of the long.period tides.

The evaluation of the atmospheric influences gave the following factors
for changes of sea-level due to a barometric pressure of one inch, and to
north and east winds travelling with a velocity of 10 miles per hour : —

At Okha. At Hanstal.

Barometric pressure + 0*356 feet — 0438 feet.

North Wind —0-191 „ —0*262 „

East Wind + 0161 „ 4- 0087 „

These results are not satisfactory ; the height of the sea-level at Okha
appears to increase with an increase of barometric pressure, which is scarcely
possible. It happens that at this station the changes of pressure occurred,
as a rule, simultaneously with the changes of wind ; and thus it is im-
possible to determine the separate effect of each, otherwise than by some
arbitrary method of treatment. The observations will therefore be again
analyzed, with a view to ascertaining whether they may not be made to
yield more consistent results. Meanwhile, the values of the atmospheric
factors already obtained must be considered to be only approximate, giving
fairly accurate results when employed collectively but not individually.

Of the constants for the long-period tides the following values have
been computed for the stations of Okha and Hanstal, after the elimination
of atmospheric influences, by employing the preliminary values of the factors
which are given in the preceding paragraph. At Nawan&r sufficient obser-
vations are not forthcoming for the evaluation of either the atmospheric
or the long-period tides.

Long-period tides, and their Constants.

(<r — a»)

Lunar monthly elliptic tide,

2<r

Lunar fortnightly declinational tide.

2{<T-v)

Luni-solai

' synodic fortnightly tide^

V

Solar annual elliptic tide,

2v

Solar semi

-annual declinational tide,

Okha.

Hanstal.

Feet.

o

Tide.

Feet. <»

B

= 0-068, c :

= 311-38

(<r — «)

JB=0107, c = 14-17

W

0-070, „

62-73

2(r

„ 0142, „ 46-74

»

0-136, „

24919

2(<r-ri)

„ 0163, „ 11-76

}9

0162, „

311

V

„ 0024, „ 195-32

99

0121, „
7

14475

2v

„ 0090, „ 156-38

50

J. Waterliouse — An Account of the Tidal

[No. 1,

The present appears to be a good opportunity for giving the tidil
constituents which were calculated by Mr. Eoberts for the Port of Tuticorm,
from obserrations taken there in the year 1871-72, by Captain Branffll,
with a self -registering tide-gauge similar to those employed in the Gulf of
Cutch.

Short 'Period Tides at Tuticorin, and their Constants,

Star S

Star M . . . -«

Star O

Feet.

^i2,=0039, €.=108 78
^,=0-429, €,= 95-59
i2^=0073, c^ =282 65
JK.=0003, €.= 51-34
JK, =0007, €,=202-75

J2.=0006, €.=23i-64
i?,=0 596, €,= 55-81
-B3 =0015, €j = 182 86
ie^=0 022, €^=192-76
li^=0OlO, €4= 45-91
L-B,=0 004, €,=319-74

...jB,=0-112, €^=314-25

StarP
J

99

99

»l
»

K

Q

L

N
X

V

/*
2SM

MS

Feet.

^.=0064,

^,=0011,

C^, =0-274,

iJ2,=0143,

JBj =0-032,

-B,=0030,
i2, =0-072,
jB, =0019,
jBj =0022,
-B, =0-016,
.B,=0011,

-B^=0018,

,=281-78
,=18170
,=132-80
,=116'25
,=359-08

,=242-50

,= ss-eo

,=248-45
,= 35-58
,=183-83
,=246-37

,=2S2-99

€ =313-15

69-54

307-85

313-35

87-50

w

>l

»

Long-period Tides at Tuticorin, and their Constants.

Feet
Lunar monthly ... ... -B=0024

Lunar fortnightly ... ... „ 0"065

Luni-solar fortnightly ... ... „ 0*016

Solar annual ... ... „ 0-399

Solar semi-annual ... ... „ 0080

Here there were no data for evaluating the atmospheric tides separatelr,
and it is probable that the magnitude of the amplitude of the solar annial
tide is in groat measure due to atmospheric influences.

PbOQBAMKE of FuTUBE OPBBATIOlfS.

The following important orders on the systematic record of tidal
observations at selected points on the Coasts of India, were issued by tbe
Government of India in the Department of Revenue, Agriculture, aad Com-
merce, under date 4th July, 1877 : —

" The Governor General in Council observes that the great scientific ad-
vantages of a systematic record of tidal observations on Indian coasts biva
frequently been urged upon, and admitted by, the Government of In^
Hitherto the efforts in the direction of such a record have been desultoij.
and in many cases wanting in intelligent guidance and careful selection 01
the points where the observations should be recorded. Additional import-
ance has recently been given to the subject by the institution of a Mtfiae
Survey Department, for whose operations accurate tidal observations are *

1S78.] Observations in tlie Oulf of Catch, 51

necessity, without which no permanent record of the changes of ground in
the different harbours of the coast can be kept up.

" 2. The advantages to be expected from well-considered and carefully
conducted observations of the tides are mainly the following :

" (1) They enable standards to be fixed for the purposes of survey.

'^ (2) They afford data for the calculation of the rise and fall of the
tides, and thus subserve the purposes of navigation.

** (3) They are of scientific interest apart from their practical useful-
ness as stated above.

^' The first two of these advantages are of strictly local bearing : an
accurate survey of a port is essential to the safety of the shipping frequent-
ing it, and correct tide-tables are necessary for the convenience of navi-
gators and for engineering purposes within the port itself.

** 3. The Governor General in Council is of opinion that, in yiew of
these considerations, every port where a tide-gauge is set up should pay for
its establishment and maintenance from port funds. The third object, the
scientific results to be expected from the record, will be sufiiciently provided
for by the appointment by the Government of India of one of its own officers
to supervise and control the local observations, and to arrange for their utili-
zation to the utmost extent possible. The charges will thus be divided in a
manner appropriate to the advantages to be secured.

" 4. His Excellency in Council accordingly resolves to entrust the
general superintendence and control of tidal observations upon Indian coasts
to Captain Baird, R. E., Deputy Superintendent in the Great Trigono-
metrical Survey Department, who will be guided in his operations by the
orders and advice of the head of that Department. This will involve no
new charge upon Imperial Funds, for Captain Baird has for some years past
been engaged upon observations of this nature in the Gulf of Cutch and in
reduction of the observations in England : the work is of a nature which
properly falls within the scope of the operations of the Great Trigono-
metrical Survey ; and the object of the present change is merely to provide
for its extension and systematization under an undivided control. Captain
Baird will thus remain a member of the Department, and his operations
will form one of the subjects to be treated by the Superintendent in his
annual report.

" 6. The first duty of the Superintendent will be to instruct Captain
Baird to determine, in communication with the Governments of the mari-
time provinces, the points where observations should be carried out. The
necessary gauges (where these do not already exist) will then have to be
provided from port funds, and the establishments entertained under the
sanction of the Local Governments. It will probably be most convenient
that all Captain Baird' s communications with the establishments in charge

52 J. Waterbouse — Tid/il Ohservaiions in the QvXfof Ctktch, [No. I,

should pasB through the Local GoYemments, but this point may be sektled
as may be found most expedient in practice.*'

In accordance with these orders, enquiries have been, and are being
made, with a view to ascertain the ports at which it will be desirable to
establish tidal stations. The suitability of a port for this purpose will
depend,^r^, on a site being available thereat, on which a self-registeriiig
tide-gauge may be erected, so as to be either immediately over the sea, or
connected by piping with the sea at some poiQt where there is a depth of
not less than 10 to 15 feet of water at the lowest tides ; secondly, on tbe
presence of a port officer, who will exercise a general supervision orer the
operations, and correct the clocks of the several self -registering instruments,
whenever necessary, either by direct determinations of time, or by arrang-
ing to get the true time from the nearest telegraphic office ; thirdly, on the
feasibility of making arrangements for the periodical inspection of the
instraments at intervals of not less than six months generally, and more
frequently when no officer is resident on the spot to superintend the
operations.

So far as has yet been ascertained, the ports which seemhkeljto
answer all the required conditions are Aden, Kurrachee, Bombay, Gurwar,
Beypore, Faumben, Madras, Vizagapatam, Akyab, Bangoon, and Port
Blair. The following ports are believed to be unsuitable : Surat, Mangalore,
Cannanore, Cochin, Muttrun, Negapatam, Coconada, False Point, Diamond
Harbour, Moulmein, and Mergui.

At Aden a self -registering tide-gauge was erected by the local officers
about two years ago ; but the registers have been taken in such an unsatis-
factory manner that the results are not of the slightest use. Captain Baird
is now arrang^g for the establishment of a tidal station there, with propff
instruments, and trained men to take charge of them. At Kurrachee a
tide-gauge, which was originally set up by Mr. Farkes, has been in work
for several years, and has furnished the data from which tide-tables for the
port have been computed annually by Mr. Farkes. In course of time the
present gauge — ^the scale of which is very small — should be replaced by one
of those which are used by Captain Baiid, and an anemometer and a baro-
meter (both self -registering) should be set up beside the gauge. But it is
not desirable to interfere with the working of the present arrangements at
Kurrachee until other ports, at which nothing is now being done in the
way of tidal observations, are duly provided for. At Bombay, Carwar, and
Madras, instruments are now being set up by Captain Baird.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. II.— 1878-

Owing to an accident at the last moment, I regret that I have been
unable to supply the full number of copies required of the specimen of
photocoUotjpe printing referred to at page 93, and, therefore, am obliged
to defer giving it till my return from England.

J. W.

giving an account of the photographic operations for the reproduction of
maps, now so largely employed in this country, I have carefully revised
and to a great extent re-written it, so as to bring the information up to
date and hope that it may not be considered too much wanting in novelty
or too technical for the Journal.

I. LfTTBODUCTION.

Among the many useful and important artistic and scientific applica-
tions of photography, one of the most valuable is the reproduction by its
means, in absolute facsimile, of maps and plans, speedily and cheaply and
on any scale — either the same, larger, or smaller. So fully are these advan-
tages appreciated, that most civilized States now possess special photo-
graphic studios for the reproduction of maps, plans, &c., for fiscal, military
and other purposes.

Before the introduction of lithography, about the beginning of the
present century, the only means by which maps, or indeed, pictorial sub-
jects of any kind, could be reproduced, was by engraving on metal platea
or on wood, both tedious and expensive methods.
8

52 J. Waterbouse — Tidal Ohservationg in the ChdfofCuteh, [No. 1,

should pass through the Local Qoyernments, but this point may be settled
as may be found most expedient in practice.*'

Li accordance with these orders, enquiries have been, and are being
made, with a view to ascertain the ports at which it will be desirable to
establish tidal stations. The suitability of a port for this purpose will
depend,^«/, on a site being available thereat, on which a self-registering
tide-gauge may be erected, so as to be either immediately over the sea, or
connected by piping with the sea at some point where there is a depth of
not less than 10 to 15 feet of water at the lowest tides ; secondly, on the
presence of a port officer, who will exercise a general supervision over the
operations, and correct the clocks of the several self -registering instrumentB,
whenever necessary, either by direct determinations of time, or by azrang-
ing to get the true time from the nearest telegraphic office ; thirdly, on the
feasibility of making arrangements for the periodical inspection of the
instrmnents at intervals of not less than six months generally, and more
frequently when no officer is resident on the spot to superintend the
operations.

So far as has yet been ascertained, the ports which seem likely to
answer all the required conditions are Aden, Kurrachee, Bombay, Carwar,
Beypore, Faumben, Madras, Vizagapatam, Akyab, Bangoon, and Port
Blair. The following ports are believed to be unsuitable : Surat, Mangalore,
Cannanore, Cochin, Muttrun, Negapatam, Coconada, False Point, Diamond
Harbour, Moulmein, and Mergui.

At Aden a self -registering tide-gauge was erected by the local officers
about two years ago ; but the registers have been taken in such an unsatis-
factory manner that the results are not of the slightest use. Captain Baird
is now arranging for the establishment of a tidal station there, with proper
instruments, and trained men to take charge of them. At Kurrachee a
tide-gauge, which was originally set up by Mr. Parkes, has been in work
for several years, and has furnished the data from which tide-tables for ^e
port have been computed annually by Mr. Parkes. In course of time t^e
present gauge — ^the scale of which is very small — should be replaced by one
of those which are used by Captain Baird, and an anemometer and a baro-
meter (both self -registering) should be set up beside the gauge. But it is
not desirable to interfere with the working of the present arrangements at
Kurrachee imtil other ports, at which nothing is now being done in the
way of tidal observations, are duly provided for. At Bombay, Carwar, and
Madras, instruments are now being set up by Captain Baird.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. II.— 1878.

Owing to an accident at the last moment, I regret that I have been
unable to supply the full number of copiea required of the specimen of
photocoUotype printing referred to at page 93, and, therefore, am obliged
to defer giving it till my return from England.

J. W.

giving an account of the photographic operations for the reproduction of
maps, now so largely employed in this country, I have carefully revised
and to a great extent re-written it, so as to bring the information up to
date and hope that it may not be considered too much wanting in novelty
or too technical for the Journal.

I. iNTRODUCTIOTr.

Among the many useful and important artistic and scientific applica-
tions of photography, one of the most valuable is the reproduction by its
means, in absolute facsimile, of maps and plans, speedily and cheaply and
on any scale — either the same, larger, or smaller. So fully are these advan-
tages appreciated, that most civilized States now possess special photo-
graphic studios for the reproduction of maps, plans, <&c., for fiscal, military
and other purposes.

Before the introduction of lithography, about the beginning of the
present century, the only means by which maps, or indeed, pictorial sub-
jects of any kind, could be reproduced, was by engraving on metal platea
or on wood, both tedious and expensive methods.
8

52 J. Waterbouse — Tidal Ohservaiions in the GulfofCutch. [No. 1,

should pass through the Local Qovernments, but this point may be settled
as may be found most expedient in practice.'*

In accordance with these orders, enquiries have been, and are being
made, with a view to ascertain the ports at which it will be desirable to
establish tidal stations. The suitability of a port for this purpose will
depend,^^, on a site being available thereat, on which a self -registering
tide-gauge may be erected, so as to be either immediately over the sea, or
connected by piping with the sea at some point where there is a depth of
not less than 10 to 15 feet of water at the lowest tides ; secondly ^ on the
presence of a port officer, who will exercise a general supervision over the
operations, and correct the clocks of the several self -registering instruments,
whenever necessary, either by direct determinations of time, or by arrang-
ing to get the true time from the nearest telegraphic office ; thirdly^ on the
feasibility of making arrangements for the periodical inspection of the
instruments at intervals of not less than six months generaUy, and more
frequently when no officer is resident on the spot to superintend the
operations.

So far as has yet been ascertained, the ports which seem likely to

__niinmr"' ~^^ i.'L..^ -.--..--^-J -i»i»

18 now arranging for the establishment of a tidal station there, with proper
instruments, and trained men to take charge of them. At Kurrachee a
tide-gauge, which was originally set up by Mr. Parkes, has been in work
for several years, and has furnished the data from which tide-tables for the
port have been computed annually by Mr. Parkes. In course of time the
present gauge — ^the scale of which is very small — should be replaced by one
of those which are used by Captain Baird, and an anemometer and a baro-
meter (both self -restoring) should be set up beside the gauge. But it is
not desirable to interfere with the working of the present arrangements at
Kurrachee until other ports, at which nothing is now being done in the
way of tidal observations, are duly provided for. At Bombay, Carwar, and
Madras, instruments are now being set up by Captain Baird.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. II.— 1878.

VI. — The Application of Photography to the Beproduction of Maps and
Flamly JPhoto-tneehanical and other processes, — By Cjlpt, J. Wateb-
HOUSE, B. S. C, Assistant Surveyor- General of India,

This paper was originallj submitted to the Geographical Congress at
Paris in 1875, but as the Proceedings of the Congress have not been pub-
lished and the paper may be of interest to Members of the Society, as
giving an account of the photographic operations for the reproduction of
maps, now so largely employed in this country, I have carefully revised
and to a great extent re-written it, so as to bring the information up to
date and hope that it may not be considered too much wanting in novelty
or too technical for the Journal.

I. Intboduction.

Among the many useful and important artistic and scientific applica-
tions of photography, one of the most valuable is the reproduction by its
means, in absolute facsimile, of maps and plans, speedily and cheaply and
on any scale — either the same, larger, or smaller. So fully are these advan-
tages appreciated, that most civilized States now possess special photo-
graphic studios for the reproduction of maps, plans, <&c., for fiscal, military
and other purposes.

Before the introduction of lithography, about the beginning of the
present century, the only means by which maps, or indeed, pictorial sub-
jects of any kind, could be reproduced, was by engraving on metal platea
or on wood, both tedious and expensive methods.
8

64 J. Waterliouse — The Application of "Photography [No. 2,

With the invention of lithography, a new impetus was given to
cartc^raphj hj the comparative ease with which maps could be produced
and multiplied by direct drawing or transfer on stone. The young ait was,
however, scarcely out of its cradle when Joseph Nic^phore Niepce, of Cha-
lons-sur-Saone, experimenting unsuccessfully in endeavouring to find a sub-
stitute for lithographic stone, conceived the happy idea of obtaining images
on metal plates by the sole agency of light upon thin films of asphaltum
or bitumen of Judsea — and thus produced the first permanent photographs
by a method of heliographic engraving, which, with a few modifications^
still serves to produce excellent results ; and it is worthy of remark in con-
nection with our subject that Niepce's first essays were in reproducing
engravings.

Since these first essays of Niepce, the idea of superseding the slow
and laborious hand- work of the lithographic draftsman and engraver by the
quicker, cheaper and more accurate processes of photography, has been
steadily kept in view, and various modes of engraving, both for copper-plate
and surface-printing, and of lithography by the aid of photography, as
well as other special photo-mechanical processes, have been introduced from
time to time with more or less success, till at the present time these
methods have taken a high and important position among the graphic
arts, and as they steadily progress towards perfection, are rapidly extending
their artistic, scientific and industrial applications.

The attention of cartographers was very soon drawn to the advants^es
that might be gained by the employment of photography for the reproduc-
tion of maps and plans, but for some time progress in this direction was
hindered by the difficulty of obtaining accurate images, free from the dis-
tortions caused by imperfect construction of the photographic lenses then
employed. The first serious attempt to carry out the method practically
appears to have been made, in 1855, by Colonel Sir Henry James, IL £.,
Director of the .Ordnance Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, witJi the
object of obtaining accurate reductions from the large-scale surveys more
expeditiously and with more economy than could be done by means of the
pantograph.

The result proved incontestably the great value of photography for
this purpose and the enormous saving in time and money that oould be
effected by its use. The possibility of producing absolutely accurate pho-
tographic reductions was questioned in Parliament, but Sir BJenry James
satisfactorily showed that the employment of photography produced redac-
tions more accurate than could be obtained by any method previously in
use ; that the maximum amount of error could scarcely be perceived, and was
much within the limit of the expansion and contraction of paper under
ordinary atmospheric changes — which was all that could 'be desired.

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans. 55

For some time, however, the use of photography in the Ordnance
Survey Office appears to have heen limited to obtaining accurate reduced
prints for the engravers to trace from on to their copper-plates, and was
not extended to producing maps for publication, owing to the expense
and comparative slowness of production of photographic silver prints, com-
pared with the lithographic or copper-plate impressions, to saj nothing of
their want of permanence.

Experiments were next made with some of the so-called carbon pro-
cesses, then recently discovered in France by Poitevin and first worked
in England by Founcy, with the object of transferring the photographic
design at once on to the copper-plate, instead of tracing from the photo-
graphs by hand. The results obtained were not very satisfactory and a
trial was made of Mr. Asser's photolithographic process, which had been
published shortly before. Although this process was not found quite
adapted to the purpose intended, the advantages of a method whereby
facsimile prints in lithographic ink might be obtained and transferred
to zinc or stone, so as to permit of a large number of copies to be
printed off as easily as from an ordinary lithographic transfer drawing, and
with precisely the same advantages in respect to cheapness and permanence,
were obvious ; and in 1860, after several trials, Captain A. de Courcy Scott,
R. £.', who wag in charge of the photographic operations at Southampton,
perfected the process of photozincography, which has since been employed
with so much success and advantage at the Ordnance Survey Office,
Southampton, and in this country at the Survey Offices in Calcutta, Dehra
Dtin, Pdna and Madras, as well as at other public and private institutions
in other parts of the world.

By a curious coincidence, at the very time when this process was being
worked out in England, Mr. W. Osborne, of Melbourne, Australia, indepen-
dently perfected an almost identically similar process of photolithography,
which has been extensively used in the Crown Lands Offices of Victoria and
Adelaide for reproducing the maps of the Australian Surveys, and has also
been worked commercially by Mr. Osborne in Europe and America.

These two processes, appear to have been the first instances of the
practical application of photography to the reproduction and multiplication
of maps for publication. They still remain, however, very extensively used,
and are by the simplicity, cheapness and rapidity of their operations and the
facilities they offer for the reproduction of maps of large size, of greater
practical value than oiher processes which have since been brought forward
with the same object, and are perhaps capable of producing finer results
within the limits of a single negative.

In India, the ever-increasing wants in the way of communications by
rail, road and river, and the rapid extension of irrigation and other

66 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Fhoto^phy [No.'2,

engineering projects, as well as the ordinary military, administrative and
fiscal requirements make the early production of accurate maps a matter of
very great necessity and importance, and as skilled lithographic drafts-
men and engravers are scarcely to be obtained and must be trained as
required, or brought from Europe at great expense, the subject of photo-
graphic reproduction as a means of quickly producing a^d publishing copies
of the original maps of the Surveys, is much more important in this
country than it is in Europe or other countries where skilled cartographic
lithographers and engpravers are comparatively numerous.

The success that had attended the introduction of photography at the
Ordnance Survey Office for the reproduction and reduction of maps imme-
diately attracted the notice of the Surveyor Oeneral of India, and the
services of two trained sappers, with the necessary apparatus, having been
obtained from England, a small beginning was made in Calcutta in 1862.
Owing to difficulties experienced in working photolithography in the peculiar
climate of Calcutta, and the unsuitability of the original maps for reproduc-
tion by the process, owing to their being coloured and brush-shaded, little
advance was made in the practical working of photolithography or photo-
zincc^raphy in India till 1865, when Mr. J. B. N. Hennessey, of the Great
Trigonometrical Survey, who had devoted part of his furlough in England to
going through a practical course of instruction in photozincography at the
Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton, fairlj established the process at
the Office of the Superintendent of the Great Trigonometrical Survey at
Dehra Ddn. I and other officers of the Survey Department were trained
under Mr. Hennessey, and, in 1867, photozincography was finally started in
Calcutta by Capt. A. B. Melville, who officiated for me during my absence
on furlough, and since 1869 it has been carried on under my own supervision.
Photozincographic offices have also been established under the Bombay
Government at Ptina, and at the Bevenue Survey Office in Madras for the
reproduction of the maps of the Bevenue and Settlement Surveys in those
Presidencies as well as miscellaneous work for other departments. In both
of these offices the Southampton process of photozincography is used wiUi
a few modifications, but in Madras photolithography is also used with
equally good results, and is, I am told, preferred for very fine work.

Before the introduction of photography the publication of the results
of the Surveys by the Surveyor GeneraPs Office could only be accomplished
by the ordinary methods of lithography and engraving ; and though much
good work was done in the former manner by the very limited native agency
available in this country, i^any maps had to be sent to England to be litho-
graphedy while the whole of the engraving connected with the Atlas of India,
on the scale of 4 miles to one inch, was done in England under considerable
disadvantages. Even with this help it was found quite impossible that

1878.]

to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans.

57

the publication could keep pace with the surveys, and the consequence
was that the record rooms became filled with valuable materials that
often could not be turned to practical account till they had become anti-
quafced and out of date. Now, on the contrary, by the aid of photozinco-
graphy, the publishing branches are able to keep pace with the progress of
the Surveys so closely that as a rule each season's mapping of all the 1-inch
Topographical and some of the Ee venue Surveys is reproduced and pub-
lished before the drawing of the following season's maps is taken in hand.
An immense amount of work is thus done that could never have been
undertaken by lithography and engraving alone, even though the transfer
of the engraving of the Atlas of India to Calcutta has greatly facilitated
the early publication of the latest additions to the Atlas year by year. And
not only are the ordinary departmental publications thus hastened, but a
very large number of miscellaneous maps and drawings are reproduced
specially for the use of other departments of the public service.

The following table of the work executed by the Photographic Branch
of the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, during the year 1877, will give
an idea of the very large extent to which photography is being used for the
reproduction and publication of the results of the Imperial Surveys and
other miscellaneous demands.

Topographical Maps, ....
Revenue Survey Maps, ....

District Maps,

General Maps,

City and Cantonment Plans,
Miscellaneous Maps, &c., . .

Proofe,

Photos, of Life Convicts, . .
Cadastral Maps, Bengal, . .

Total,

Cadastral Maps, N. W. P.,

Grand Total,

I

167

233

6

42

59

362

56

925
2,113

3,038

I

>
'■X3

272
263
22
199
104
510

1,370
3,973

5,343

I

348

348

348

u

>

218

46

68

536

863

863

241
297
8
176
122
607

1,351
4,047

t
5,398

106

71

8

44

37

190

56

u

20,776
22,370
6,664
9,359
8,580
57,138
5,932

2,800

507 133,618
2,218 99,450

2,725, 238,068

I

o

II

"A

21.215

18,320

5,084

6.629

8,580

82,515

2,800

145,143
99,450

244,593

» 20,962-00 square feet.

1 22,027-40 square feet.

58 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

In the Oreat Trigonometri<»lSiurvey Office at DehnDdn, during the
jear 1876-77, 117 maps and 80 charts, besides misoeUaaeons diagrams were
photographed, and 25,529 copies printed from them ; 297 blue prints and
silver prints were also made.

At the Qovt. Photozincographic Office, F4na, during the same year,
the number of negatives taken was 2,745, the number of maps photozinoo-
graphed was 1,798, and the number of copies printed off (including copies
of 79 lithographs) was 74,739. Siooe the formation of the office, in 1867,
to the present time 9,100 maps have been photozincographed.

The specific advantages to be gained by the use of photography for
the reproduction of maps and plans are :

1. Bapidity of production and multiplication, especially when employ-
ed for copying subjects containing close and intricate details. The gain
varies according to the amount of detail and the time that would be taken
by a skilled draughtsman or engraver to make the copy by hand. For
instance, a highly finished map that would take several months to lithograph
or engrave, may by the aid of photography be copied and some hundreds of
copies printed off within a week.

2. The perfect fidelity with which the most delicately minute and
intricate details are copied. The most skilful and careful draughtnoan
is liable to make errors in copying, and never can attain the same ac*
curacy of delineation, especially of minute objects, as is obtained with the
camera.

8. The facility with which copies may be obtained on scales larger or
smaller than the original. The extent to which this may be taken advan-
tage of depends very much upon the object in view as well as upon the style
of the original, and the relative thickness and size of the lines and details
composing it ; but notwithstanding certain drawbacks and inconveniences it
may sometimes be attended with, this facility of enlarging or reducing the
scale of an original drawing with the most perfect accuracy and with the
absence of all personal error, is one of the most important advantages of
photography, and its immense superiority in this respect over the penta-
graph and other methods has been proved to be beyond question.

4. The comparative cheapness of the photographic me^ods. The
relative cost of hand labour and photography is affected by several considera-
tions, e. y., the nature of the subject, the process employed, the number of
copies made and the pay of the photographers as compared with that of
draughtsmen. In most cases it will be found that when it is really an
advantage to employ photography in reproducing maps for any particular
purpose, the cost will be far less than it would be by employing hand labour.

Notwithstanding these advantages, the use of photography as a means
of reproducing maps and plans for publication has not extended so much as

1878.] to the Seprodvction of Maps and Plans. 50

might have been expected^ partly on account of defects inherent in photo-
graphic copying, and only to be oyeroome by great skill and long experience
on the part of the photographer, and partly owing to the difficulty of
making draughtsmen fully understand the requirements to be fulfilled when
preparing maps to be reproduced by phot(^aphy for publication, in order to
produce satisfactory results, and that they must strictly refrain from using
colour and draw the map neatly in black and white, so that every line may
be reproduced of its proper strength, according as the map is to be copied
on the same scale as the original or to be reduced.

It matters little how roughly drawn or highly coloured an original
drawing or map may be, if it is intended to lithograph or engrave it, because
a skilled lithographer or engraver can easily put it into proper and conven-
tional form ; but when such a drawing is handed to the photographer he
can only produce a facsimile of it with all its deficiencies — ^the coloured
details hidden imder a black mass of shade, the finer parts perhaps wanting
altogether^ the writing rough and broken, or so small as to be almost
invisible, besides other defects caused by the unsuitableness of the draw-
ing for reproduction by photography, and these defects are liable to be
imduly attributed to the process.

These difficulties were felt in all their force when it was first deter-
mined to introduce photozincography for the publication of the maps of
the Imperial Indian Surveys, because till that time these maps had been
drawn in a very delicate, highly finished style, with many of the details on
them coloured and the hill features shown by brush shading. It was
soon seen that an entire change of style was necessary and that the original
maps prepared specially for photographic reproduction, must be drawn in
pen and ink lines alone, without colour or brush-shading. It was some
time before the desired results were obtained, but after several years'
experience a high degree of excellence has been attained in the prepara-
tion of original maps suitable for photographic reproduction, and now all
maps of the above Surveys and most of the miscellaneous maps and
drawings received from other departments are drawn with this object.

The change of style has been regretted by some as spoiling the beauty
and finish of the maps, and the want of colour certainly has some draw-
backs, but there can be no doubt that the necessity for drawing the origi*
nal maps so that they may be fit for immediate publication has effected
here, as it has also been found to do wherever photozincography or photo-
lithography has been introduced, an inmiense improvement in the style of
drawing of the manuscript maps as well as in the accurate delineation of the
ground. The photozincographed copies as a rule appear somewhat coarse
and rough when compared with good lithographs or engravings, but they
possess the groat advantage of being produced quickly and cheaply ; while

60 J. Waterhousc — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

being absolute facsimiles of the original maps submitted bj the surFejois,
they are entirely free from the errors that even the most careful draughts-
man is liable to make when copying by hand, and they &ithf ully preserre
the appearance and character of the ground exactly as delineated by the
surveyor.

In most foreign topographical establishments, I believe, the principal
use of photography is for making reductions, and not so much for the repro-
duction of maps on the same scale as the originals. In India, however,
photozincography is very largely used for full-scale reproductions. Thus,
the whole of the standard maps of the Topographical Surveys on the scale of
1-inch to the mile and the Cadastral village maps of the Revenue Surrey,
on the scales of 32 inches to the mile, for Bengal, and 16 inches to the mile,
for the N.-W. Provinces, are reproduced on the same scale and are
not reduced for publication on any smaller scale. In some cases, however,
the surveys are made and drawn on the scale of two inches to a mile and
are then reduced to one-inch, with a great improvement in the general
appearance of the finished maps — ^reductions always appearing sharper and
more highly finished than reproductions to scale. Some of the maps of the
Revenue Surveys are reduced to the standard scale of 1-inch to the mile
by a double reduction from the maps on the original scale of survey — 1
inches to the mile. These are first photozincographed, in sections of con-
venient size, on the reduced scale of 2 inches to the mile and some prints are
struck off in blue ink. Upon these blue prints, the draughtsman re-draws
the map in a st^le suitable for a further reduction to one-half, leaving
out all details not required on the 1-inch map and generalising the hill
features, &c., so as to produce a proper effect when reduced. By the use
of these blue prints, the labour of making a piecemeal reduction with the
pantograph is saved, and the draughtsman can produce a more accurate
result.

Silver print reductions to one-fourth of the standard 1-inch maps are
made for the use of the engravers in preparing the sheets of the Atlas of
India on the quarter-inch scale.

In the Photpzincographic Offices at Pdna and Madras more use appears
to be made of reduction for the village maps than in the Calcutta Office.

The photographic processes applicable to the reproduction of maps
are :

I. — Photographic printing on Sensitive Papers, In these methods
prints are obtained on a sensitive surface of paper prepared with the salts
of silver, platinum and iron, or with certain salts of chromium in conjunc-
tion with pigmented gelatine. In all of them the whole of the photogra-
phic operations connected with the printing have to be repeated for every
impression.

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Plant, 61

II. — Photo- lithography or Photo-zincography ^ or the methods by which.*
photographic image in greasy ink may be produced on, or transferred to, ar
lithographic stone or zinc plate and printed off in the lithographic press.
The photographic operations cease with the production of the image in
greasy ink, and the impressions are produced by the ordinary operations of
lithographic printing. The use of these processes is, however, limited to the
reproduction of subjects in line or dot, as they can only reproduce half
tones in a y&ty imperfect manner.

III. — Photo-collotype^ or the method of producing a photographic image
on a layer of gelatine applied on a suitable support, so that when the
gelatine surface is moistened, impressions may be obtained from it in
printing ink. By this method, also, a photographic image once produced
on the printing surface of gelatine is capable of yielding some hundreds of
impressions in the printing press ; and instead of the subjects for reproduc-
tion being confined to those in dot or line, as in photo-zincography, any
subject can be copied which is capable of giving a good photograph by
the ordinary process of silver printing.

IV. — Woodbury-type, or the method whereby a photographic image is
impressed into a soft metal plate, somewhat in the same manner as in the
operation of nature-printing, forming a mould into which liquid coloured
gelatine is poured and attached under pressiire to a sheet of paper, thus
yielding an image in which the lights and shades of the picture are formed
by different thicknesses of coloured gelatine.

V. — Heliography or Photo-engraving^ the method of obtaining on
a metal plate a photographic image in intaglio capable of giving impressions
in the copper- plate press. In this method the engraved plate once obtained
serves for the impression of a large number of copies and may be inde-
finitely multiplied by electrotyping.

VI. — Photo-typography, or the method of obtaining by means of pho-
tography an image in relief on a metal plate, which may be mounted on a
block to be set up with type and be printed in the ordinary printing press.
These blocks may also be indefinitely multiplied by electrotyping in the same
manner as ordinary woodcuts.

It will be observed that the five last-named processes all possess the
great advantage that, once the photographic image has been obtained on the
printing surface, the operations of printing can be accomplished by the^
same means and at the same rate as by the ordinary industrial methods.
The printing may be performed by night or by day, quite independently of
the agency of light, and requires no further chemical manipulations.

It would be beyond the scope of this paper to enter fully into the
practical details of these various processes of photographic printing, as
my object is merely to review those applicable to cartographic pur*
9

62 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

poses, and to give a sommary of the principal methods that may be usefully
employed with reference to the wants of the State or of private individuals,
rather than to those of professional cartographers and map-publishers,
though the latter may in many cases also find photography a useful auxiliary.
Photographic methods can never entirely take the place of lithography or
engraving by hand, either for public or private purposes, but their use may
be advantageously extended. Those who wish for fuller details may con*
suit the text-books by Abney, Carey Lea, Monckhoven, Y(^el and others,
and the special works referred to in this paper.

II. Pbefabation of the OBionrAL DsAwiNe.

I have already adverted to the difficulty that has been found in this
country and elsewhere in obtaining original drawings suitable for repro-
duction by photozincography, and to the fact that without a proper original
drawing it is quite impossible to produce satisfactory results. Besides its
principal use in reproducing maps of the Surveys, photozincography is
very largely utilised in India by engineers for the reproduction of their
plans and drawings, and by other public officers for an immense variety of
miscellaneous maps and plans, and as we were constantly asked to photo-
zincograph subjects utterly unsuitable to the process, a set of rules for the
preparation of the original drawings for reproduction by photozincography
was drawn up under General Thuillier's direction and published in the
official Gazettes all over India, and the result has been a gp^eat improve-
ment in the execution of the drawings we receive for reproduction*

The rules are as follows : — ,

1. All drawings should be on white, smooth -surfaced paper, free
from dirt, pencil marks, creases and wrinkles. When possible they should
remain stretched on the drawing-board.

2. The Indian ink should be freshly rubbed down and give good hlaeh
lines, free from glaze.

8, The lines should be firm and cleanly drawn — ^not too fine or too close
together. They must be quite blacky and light effects must be produced
by fine and open black lines, and never by the use of pale ink. Thick lines
in the printing and borders of maps should be well filled in. Pencil marks
should be carefully removed, so as not to injure the blackness and firnmess
of the lines.

4. All cross-hatching and shading should be as open and clear as
possible, and the lines composing it firm and not too fine. Intensity of
shade must be shown rather by an increase in the thickness of the lines
than by placing them closer together, in order that the intermediate spaces
may not become blocked up when transferred to zinc. It is better not to
rule the shading of mechanical and architectural section-drawings, but to

1878.] io the Beproducfion of Maps and Flans, 63

show the shaded parts by a light tint of blue, violet, or aniline red
(fuschine or roseine). These parts will reproduce white, and can have a
ruled tint transferred on the stone or zinc in the usual way, which will give
a much neater appearance.

5. In plans or drawings intended for photozincography, washes of
any colour except very pale blue, violet, or aniline red, are absolutely in-
admissible. Outlines, may, however, be drawn, if necessary, in any strong
red, brown, yellow, orange or green pigment which will reproduce black.
Any details required to be shown in the original, but not in the copy, may
be drawn in pale blue, violet, or aniline red. Details that are not required
to be reproduced may be painted out with Chinese white.

6. Biver courses, lakes and tanks should be left blank, and not filled
in with fine lines. They may be indicated by a pale wash of blue without
detriment to their reproduction.

7. When drawings are to be reduced care must be taken to draw the
lines, lettering, and detail of sufficient thickness and size relatively to the
scale of reduction, so that they may not be lost or illegible when reduced.
Sufficient space must also be left between the lines to prevent subsequent
blocking up.

8. When possible, drawings should be made on a larger scale than
they are required to be copied. Photographic reductions are always sharp-
er and firmer than reproductions to the same scale, and defects in drawing
are lessened by reduction.

9. Where plans or drawings to scale are to be reduced, the scale should
be given in terms of a single unit of measurement and not as relative to any
second unit. Thus, the scale on a map drawn on the scale of 4 miles to
an inch for reduction to 16 miles to an inch, should be shown simply as a
" scale of miles."

10. As photography produces a more or less perfect facsimile of the
original drawing, it is essential that drawings intended for publication
should be complete and finished in every respect before they are made over
to the photographer. The drawing, printing of names, &c., should be in as
neat a style as possible, and not require to be altered or touched up. The
hair-strokes of the printing should not be too fine.

The foregoing rules may be summed up in afew words : — White-fapeb,
BULGE- INK, and FiBM OPEN DBA WOO ; and as success in the after processes
depends entirely upon the perfection of the original drawing and its capa-
bility of giving a negative on which the ground is perfectly opaque while
the lines are quite clear and as transparent as the bare glass, these essentials
must be most carefully observed. Their neglect will entail failure and
disappointment.

For drawings intended for reproduction by the collotype methods these

64 J. Waterliouse — The Application of Fhotogrttpliy [No. 2,

rules are equally applicable, especially No. 7, and there is even more neces-
sity for perfect cleanliness of the paper and neatness and finish of the
drawing, because the faintest tints will be reproduced by the gelatine print-
ing surface and corrections cannot be made on it, as they can on zinc,
Btone or copper. For this reason also, the greatest care must be taken to
complete the drawing in every respect before it is given to be reproduced.
Drawings in line may be finer and more delicate than for photolithography,
but still must not be so fine as to interfere with the obtaining of a perfectlj
dense and opaque negative, otherwise the ground of the print will appev
dirty and stained. Pale ink may be used when necessary for effect, hut
not more than is really requisite. Colour may be used to any extent, hav-
ing always due regard to the photographic effect when reproduced. On
account of the difficulty of photographing certain colours so as to produce
the same effect as in the original picture, the best results will be prodnced
from drawings specially prepared in monochrome, such as Indian ink or sepia.

In the case of drawings for any special purpose or not intended for
publication, the above rules may be relaxed, but the general principles laid
•down should be observed, as far as practicable, if the best results are
desired.

When drawings are prepared specially for photographic reproduction,
there need be no difficulty in taking all the precautions necessary for pro-
ducing good results. It often happens, however, that the photc^rapher is
called upon to reproduce drawings, lithographs, or old MSS., printed
records, or engravings, which either may never have been suitable for the
purpose, or, if suitable when fresh, have become dirty and stained by age-
Herr Scamoni, the skilful Chief of the Photographic Department of the
Imperial State Paper Office at St. Petersburg, has given some useful hints
on the treatment of such subjects under these circumstances.*

" Yellow, or otherwise objectionable, spots should be carefully covered
over in the spaces between the lines with Chinese white, and wheneTer
possible the lines should be strengthened in parts where they appear weak."

'* Lithographs and engravings may be bleached, by immersion in a
solution of chloride of lime, or Eau de Javelle^ (1 to 10 or 15 of water),
then soaked in water for some hours, after which they are treated with a
weak solution of hyposulphite of soda and finally well rinsed in clean
water."

*' Fresh grease stains may be removed with chloroform, benzine and
ether, or with a weak alkaline solution of caustic potash or its carbonate.*'

'* Old grease stains may be removed with a more or less strong solution
of potash, applied at the back of the subject/*

* Sandhiteh der S^UographiCj p. 67.

1878.] io the Reproduction of Maps and Plans, 65

'^ Iron mould and ink spots may be taken out with a solution of oxalic
acid or salts of sorrel."

When tracings are made on paper or vellum cloth to be reproduced
without the aid of the camera, special care must be taken to keep the back
of the drawing clean, and to choose paper or cloth free from stains and of
as even a texture as possible.

Originals drawn on rough paper may be smoothed in a copper plate
press, and, if dirty, should be carefully cleaned with india-rubber or bread.

IIL The PBODrcTioN of the Negative.

After the due preparation of the original, the production of the
negative is a point of the utmost importance, and may well be considered
by itself before proceeding to the consideration of the various processes
of photographic printing.

In order to obtain the most satisfactory results for photolithography,
photozincography, or any other process specially applicable to line subjects,
the negative must be perfectly sharp all over, free from distortion and
possess the greatest amount of contrast between the lines and the ground.
If care is taken to produce good negatives from suitable originals, results
may be obtained which will compare with ordinary lithographs and
engravings for sharpness and delicacy. The difference in the results of
working with good negatives or bad ones is incredible ; with a good nega-
tive from a good original every thing works well, but with a bad negative
from a faulty original all kinds of difficulties may be encountered, and the
attainment of a passable result is almost a matter of chance.

The first thing is to arrange the plan so that it may be copied without
any distortion and be quite sharp all over.

To ensure freedom from distortion, the lens employed must give an
image quite free from all curvature of the marginal lines of a rectangle.
In practice the most suitable forms have been found to. be the ' Rectilinear'
of Dallmeyer ; the * Doublet* of Koss ; * Aplanatic' of Steinheil and others
on the same principle. The lenses known as triple combinations are also
good. In the Surveyor General*s Office, Calcutta, Dallmeyer*s Rapid Eecti-
linears are used and found to answer well. The lens should be worked well
within its power, so as to use the most central rays ; and to secure the
sharpness of the image all over the plate, a small stop or diaphragm should
be used.

The plan must be placed so as to be evenly illuminated by a good
strong light falling as horizontally as possible, in order to avoid shadows
being thrown by the grain of the paper, and thus diminishing the even
opacity of the ground of the negative.

66 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

The apparatus for supporting the plans yaries according to tbe
nature of the work required, and may either be a perfectly smooth board
fixed permanently in a truly vertical position against a wall or other
support, a form which is very suitable when large plans have to be copied
or reduced ; or it may consist of a frame large enough to take a certain
size of map and capable of being adjusted in various ways so as to moTe
up and down in a vertical plane or horizontally right and left, so tluit
different parts of the plan may be'brought in front of the camera withoat
moving the plan on the board.* In any case, arrangements must exist,
either in the plan-board or in the camera-stand, for making the plane of the
map or plan to be copied exactly parallel to the plane of the sensitive plate
in the camera.

The map must be attached to the plan-board so that it may lie per«
f ectly fiat and free from ridges. This is best secured by placing in front
of it a sheet of glass which is fastened down on the board with pins at
the corners. Or a glazed frame may be used for holdii^ plans of a medium
size. In either of these cases care must be taken to avoid any reflection
from light objects in front of the plan-board.

It is convenient to have the plan-board and the focussing glass of the
camera ruled in squares of 1 inch or other convenient size^ in order to at
once test the perfect parallelism of the sensitive plate and the plan-board.

When the work is confined to the reproduction or reduction of msps
or other subjects of one fixed size on a single plate, it will be found
convenient to draw a rectangle of the required size on the ground glass of
the camera. When the image of the subject exactly fills this rectangle the
adjustments of focus and parallelism will be correct.

The camera used for reproduction to scale should be at least of saffi-
cient length to draw out to twice the equivalent focal length of the largest
lens it is to be used with, and may be furnished with cone fronts to give
further extension if necessary. With large cameras of a long range of focus
it will be found convenient to have the back pai*t of the camera fixed and
the front part carrying the lens moveable, so as to enable the operator to
focus conveniently. The camera may be fixed on a stand furnished with
adjustments for moving it horizontally right or left, and have a tilting mo-
tion up and down, in order to adjust the camera perfectly level, or tilt it
slightly so as to correct any want of verticality of the plan-board. The
camera-stand should run upon rails fixed in the ground at right angles to
the wall carrying the plan-board, thus enabling the distance of the camera
from the plan-board to be easily and accurately adjusted according to
the scale required. When using a reversing mirror or prism for taking re-

♦ f3ee my * Rej^rt on the Cartographic Applieatums of Thotography* pistes V, VII
and X, and Sir H. James' ' Fhotozineographj/', plates I and XL

1878.] to the Beproduetion of Maps and Flans. 67

Yersed negatives for collotype and other purposes, it is a good plan,
when possible, to have an arrangement for laying the plan horizontally
under the lens at any convenient distance from it.

The whole of the apparatus connected with the camera and plan-board
must be rigid and firmly, fixed, so as to be free from vibration. The
slightest vibration is sufficient to destroy the perfect sharpness of the image.
In the glass-house attached to the Photographic Branch of the Surveyor
General's Office here, I have endeavoured, and I think with success, to over-
come all vibration caused by carriages passing in the street close by, by
dividing the floor of the camera-room into isolated blocks resting on a bed
of sand, so that each camera shall stand by itself on a block isolated from
adjoining blocks and from the walls and floor of the building The plan-
boards are fixed on a separate wall quite isolated from the walls of the
building.

Flans may be copied either in the open air or under shelter — coloured
and old stained manuscripts, maps or drawings are better copied in full
sunlight. The glass-house I have constructed at the Surveyor Gtenerars
Office faces the south and is glazed with ground glass, so that a strong
diffused light may be thrown upon the plan-boards. When circumstances
permit, it is well to have the camera and plan-board mounted on a firm
stand working on a pivot, so that, as the day wears on, the position of the
plan-boards may be changed so as always to face the sun. I adopted this
arrangement at the Trigonometrical Survey Office, Dehra Dun, and I
believe it has many advantages over the fixed glass-house rendered necessary
in Calcutta by the constant wind and dust, and the greater necessity of
being able to carry on work without interruption at all times of the year.

The negatives of maps &c., drawn in line only, for reproduction by
photozincography, are taken by the ordinary wet collodion process with iron
development, modified so as to secure the greatest transparence in the lines
and density of the ground ; but as the ordinary wet collodion process by
itself will not give all the intensity required to produce an almost opaque
ground, it is obtained by intensifying the negative in the usual way with
pyrogallic acid and silver, after fixing ; then treating it with a saturated
solution of bichloride of mercury till the film becomes white, and finally
applying a dilute solution of hydrosulphate of ammonia, which instantly
changes the colour of the film to a dense black or brown throughout. The
negative is afterwards varnished with a resinous varnish, or flowed over, while
wet, with a solution of gum or gelatine and allowed to dry. All defects, pin-
marks ^., are then stopped out with Indian ink or black varnish. In
taking the large negatives on plates 32 x 24, that we are now producing for
copying the maps of the Cadastral Surveys, it has been found that the first
intensification may be produced by washing the plate after the first develop-

OS J. Watorhouse — The AppUcatum of Vhotogrofhy [No. 2,

ment and applying a weak solution of nitrate of silver followed bj a second
application of the iron developer.

Other methods of obtaining the extra density required for these nega-
tives have been proposed and are in use,* but, notwithstanding several in-
conveniences arising from the use of bichloride of mercury and hydrosulphate
of ammonia, the above appears to be the best and most certain when working
on the large scale.

When maps are not drawn entirely in pen and ink but have the bills
brush shaded, and it is desired to reproduce them by the collotype or engra-
ving processes, great care and skill are required on the part of the photo-
grapher to get the ground of the negative dense enough to give a perfectlj
clean impression in the white parts of the map, and at the same time pre-
vent the grain of the paper from showing and give the faintest tints of
the shading their proper value. Coloured maps also give a good deal of
trouble, and when allowable the colour should be washed off as much as
possible before the negatives are taken. Colours may sometimes be removed
by chemical means, but there is risk of injury to the original.

In many of the processes about to be described it is necessairto
use a negative which instead of giving an image reading the same vaj
as the original shall give it reversed as to right and left. There are several
methods of obtaining these reversed negatives.

(1.) By coating the original unreversed negative with a thick transfer
collodion,t or a layer of gelatine, and then stripping off the film and, either
laying it down again on a sheet of glass in a reversed position, or using it
as a film negative which may be used for giving both reversed or unreversed
images. This method is practical and useful, but is not suitable for map
work on account of the liability to contraction and distortion of the image.
There is also difficulty in keeping the film negatives flat, and they have
been found to become brittle and perish very soon in this climate.

(2.) By turning the sensitive plate in the camera, so that the light
acts, through the glass, on the back surface of the film. This method is al%
practical, simple and useful, but requires care in the selection of glass
plates free from scratches, <&c., and in wiping the back of the plate before
it is put in the camera. It is used in the Belgian Topographical Bureau
with dry tannin plates, but I have not found it suitable for reproducing
very fine map- work on wet plates.

(3.) By placing a reversing mirror or prism in front of the lens — ^the

image thus passes through the lens reversed and is impressed directly on

the sensitive plate. This is one of the simplest and most effectual of all

methods. If a mirror is used it should be one silvered by depositing silver

♦ See Abney, Instruction in Photographt/y p. 22.
t See the same work, p. 160.

1878. j to the Reproduction of Maps and Flans, 69

on the front surface and should be large enough not to cut off the oblique
rajs entering the lens. A large solid reversing prism is expensive and heavy,
but for moderate sizes an efficient instrument may be made by building up
a hollow prism with glass plates and filling it with a transparent fluid having
a suitable index of refraction. M. Derogy, of Paris, has just invented an
ingenious and economical method of employing a reversing prism by
placing a small prism between the lenses. I have not seen any results of
this arrangement, but it seems likely to be as effective as it is simple.

(4.) By what is known as the ' dusting on' or ' powder* process. A
glass plate is coated with a mixture of gum, sugar and bichromate of potash
dissolved in water, thoroughly dried with heat, and then exposed to light
under a negative. After removal from the printing frame, the gummy
film is dusted over with very fine plumbago which adheres to it in
inverse proportion to the action of light, i, «., those parts on which the light
has acted refuse th&-powder in proportion to the intensity of the action of
light, while the protected parts, attracting moisture from the air and so
becoming ' tacky,' take the powder readily, and thus an exact transcript
of the original negative is produced, but reversed. This method is simple
and effective and seems to be one of the best that can be employed when
a mirror or prism is not available, or when, as is frequently the ease,
the reversed negative can only be obtained by copying from a single
original unreversed negative.

(5.) By making a copy, either in the camera or by contact, on a film
of collodio-bromide of silver. The image is developed as usual by the
alkaline method, and then treated with nitric acid which dissolves the
reduced silver in the exposed parts of the film, leaving the bromide in the
unexposed parts ; the plate is then again exposed to light and developed.
This method, proposed, I believe, by the late Mr. Sutton, is said to give
very good results, but the use of nitric acid is an obvious disadvantage.

(6.) By copying in the camera, first making a transmitted positive
either by the collodion process or with a special pigmented gelatine tissue.
This method is most useful when the reversed negative is required to be
either larger or smaller than the original.

(7.) By means of the reversing action of the red and blue rays of the
spectrum. This method is a discovery of my own and has not yet been
thoroughly worked out ; it is, however, simple and could, I believe, be suc-
cessfully utilised. A film of collodio-bromide of silver stained with anilin
blue is exposed to light for a few moments, then placed under a negative in a
printing frame in front of which is a sheet of red glass, and exposed to light.
The action of the light passing through the red glass in the clear part of
the negative is to neutralise or destroy the effect of the previous exposure
of the plate to light, and on development a more or less perfect reversed
10

70 J. Waterliou8e — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

negative iirijige is obtaiDed. For line subjects a blue glass may also be
used, but for half-tone work only a red glass can be emplojed.

In some processes also, it is conTenient to use either direct or reversed
transparent positives instead of negatives. These can be obtained either
by contact printing on dry collodion plates or gelatine tissue, or in the
camera, in the manner adopted for making transparencies, as described in
the text-books.

Having now described the preliminary operations for preparing the
original and producing the negative, which are common to all processes, we
may {Hroceed to the consideration of the different printing processes which,
as stated in the introduction, may be divided into 6 classes, viz. :

I. Printing on sensitive papers. II. Photo4ithography or Photo-
zincography. III. Photo-collotype. IV. Woodbury-type. V. Helio-
graphy or Photo-engraving. VI. Photo-typography.

IV. Photographic Pedttino ow Sensitite Papehs.

The processes under this head may be divided into three classes —

First : — Those in which the sensitive papers are prepared with salts
of silver and the results are not permanent.

Secondly : — Those in which the sensitive papers are prepared with the
salts of iron, platinum and other metals, and the pi*ints though not abso-
lutely permanent are more so than silver prints.

Thirdly : — Those in which coloured gelatine or other colloid mixed
with an alkaline bichromate forms the sensitive surface and yields prints
which, for all practical purposes, may be considered perfectly permanent*

Silver-printing. — ^Notwithstanding its expensiveness and the want of
permanence of the prints, silver printing has hitherto maintained the first
place among photographic printing processes, and though very nearly
equalled, is as yet unsurpassed for the beauty and delicacy of its results.
It is the process in most extensive use for producing copies of portraits
and views, and although rapid advances are being made in more permanent
methods, it is likely to be a long time before the beautiful but perishable
silver print is entirely superseded.

The following brief outline of the operations will be sufficient to show
the nature of the process.*

' A sheet of paper coated with albumen containing an alkaline chloride,
such as common salt, or paper which has merely been immersed in a
solution of such salt and dried, is floated on a solution of nitrate of silver
and allowed to dry in the dark. It is then placed above the negative in a
copying frame, which is so constructed that the light may pass frediy
through the negative, and at the same time may admit of the examination

* For details, see Abney's InHruciion in Pkotoffrapky, p. 113.

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plaits. . 71

of the print while the back surface of the sensitive paper is shielded from
light. The exposure to light lasts for some minutes, by which the parts
unprotected by the denser parts of the negative are darkened more or less^
according to its translucency, while the parts entirely shielded from the
light remain quite white. When the action of the light is judged sufficient,
the sensitive paper is removed from the frame in a dark place, and must
then undergo an operation oi fixing to remove the unchanged salts of silver,
which would cause the print to darken unless carefully protected from the
light. This is effected by steeping the print for a short time in a solution
of hyposulphite of soda ; but before the print undergoes this indispensable
operation it is usual to place it in a solution of chloride of gold, by which
part of the reduced silver forming the image is replaced by a film of gold
and the print takes a more agreeable tone, also becoming more permanent
than it would be if this operation, called ' toning,* were omitted. It is,
however, impossible to ensure perfect permanency of these prints, by reason
of the sulphiur contained in the albumen or in traces of sulphur salts formed
by the decomposition of the hyposulphite of soda, and left in the print after
even the most careful washing, slowly acting on the reduced silver forming
the image and converting it into a sulphide, by which the tone and bril*
liancy of the picture are lost, and the lighter shades appear to fade away
entirely. It should, however, be stated that prints prepared on plain, or
unalbumeniscd, paper are more permanent than the albumenised prints,
though not so brilliant, sharp and delicate ; and they have the further
advantage of being less liable to shrinkage and distortion than the albu-
menised prints, and are thus more suitable for the reproduction of maps
where accuracy of scale is a desideratum.

It is evident that owing to the expensiveness of the materials used in
producing these prints and their want of permanency, together with the slow
rate at which they can be produced, this process is almost useless for the
reproduction of maps in large numbers ; and, in fact, its use in cartography
is limited to making copies of special maps for immediate reference or
temporary purposes, and as guides for engravers or lithographers in
preparing compilations from maps on a larger scale. Silver prints have also
been used by engravers to obtain a coiTect tracing on the waxed surface of
their copper plates, but unless these prints are prepared with great care
they are open to the objection of becoming distorted and untrue to scale by
the contractions and expansions caused by the successive washings they
have to undergo. Prints on plain paper are better for this purpose
than those on albumenised paper, and prints on paper containing a large
proportion of resin in the size are better still.

In the English Ordnance Survey the topographers are furnished
with silver-print reductions from the large scale outline survey, on which

72 J. Watorhouse — The Application of Fhotography [No. 2,

they insert the features of the ground, suitably delineated according to the

scale.

A very early application of this process has lately been re-introduoed
in Germany by Herr Remain Talbot, of Berlin, under the title of the LiehU
pans process, with the object of enabling engineers and others to readily
prepare a few copies of their plans without the necessity of using a camera
and other expensive appliances. In this method a print on a sensitiye
chlorised paper, prepared with nitrate of silver and an organic acid, so that it
may be kept for some time in stock ready for use, is first taken by exposing
it to light under the original drawing itself, which to secure the best results
should be drawn in very black ink on thin paper or vellum cloth. This
print, on which the lines are clear and the ground opaque, is simply fixed
in a solution of hyposulphite of soda and then thoroughly washed and
dried. A second copy is now made from this negative print in exactly the
same way, and as, this time, the lines darken under the clear parts of the
negative and the ground remains clear, we obtain a perfect transcript of the
original. This process is said to be largely used in Germany for copying
maps and engineering plans. It is no doubt useful in many cases where
it is undesirable or impossible to make more extensive photographic arrange-
ments, but besides being limited to the reproduction of copies on the same
scale as the original, it labours under the disadvantages of expense and want
of permanency common to all the silver printing processes.

In the processes just noticed the exposure to light is usually from 15
to 80 minutes, but in dull weather, or with certain negatives, it may be
much longer ; it is obvious, therefore, that even under the most favourable
conditions comparatively few prints can be produced from a single negative
in a day. In order to shorten the exposure and permit prints to be pro-
duced with much greater rapidity than with the ordinary process, a method
has been introduced by Major Libois of the Belgian army, by which,
instead of the image being produced at once in its full strength by the
action of light, the latter is only allowed to act for a few seconds, and the
full effect is produced by treating the print with a developing agent com-
posed principally of gallic acid, which at once reduces the silver in the parts
acted on by the light, and thus produces a visible image in place of the
almost invisible one formed by the action of the light alone. This process
was extensively used in the Dep6t de la Guerre, Paris, some jears ago, and
large numbers of maps were turned out by it, I was told, almost as quickly
as they could have been printed in the press, and it had the further advan-
tage that facsimile copies could be made of maps from which good results
could not have been obtained by photolithography. The same process was
used at the Dep6t de la Guerre in Brussels, but not on so large a scale.
I have also used it with success in India, and it may be recommended in

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans, 73

cases where silver printiDg is required for maps &c. It is more economical
than the ordinary process, and much more rapid in working, the exposure
heing counted by seconds instead of by minutes. The operations are briefly
as follows :

Thin photographic paper is salted by floating on a solution containing
2 per cent each of chloride of ammonium and citrate of soda in water
slightly acidified with citric acid. The paper is dried and may be kept for
use. It is sensitised by floating in the dark on a bath containing 5 per cent
of nitrate of silver acidified with a little citric acid. The exposure to light
is conducted in the same way as in the ordinary process, but is exceedingly
short — a few seconds to one minute being generally suflicient. When taken
from the printing frame only a very feeble image is visible, it is therefore
developed in a mixture of a solution of gallic acid (1 to 3800 water) with
a solution of acetate of lead (I to 200 water), to which a little acetic acid is
added. The detail gradually strengthens, and in about a quarter of an hour
the prints are fully developed and of a good black colour. After being
washed they are fixed in a bath of hyposulphite of soda at 30 per cent.,
then well washed and dried.*

The foregoing are the principal methods of silver printing suitable for
cartographic purposes, but, however convenient and useful they may be for
special objects where photolithography is not applicable, they cannot be
considered adapted for purposes of publication, and their want of perman-
ency is an insuperable defect.

Printing with Salts of Iron. — From time to time attention has been
drawn to the possibility of replacing silver-printing by processes depending
on the use of the salts of iron and other cheap materials, but, though
certainly useful in some respects, they have never been brought into
extensive practical use.

One of the best known of these processes is the * cyanotype*, invented
by Sir John Herschel, and lately re-introduced by Messrs. Marion & Co.,
of Paris, who prepare and supply the ferro-prussiate paper ready for use.
Good even-textured paper is brushed over with a mixture containing
nearly equal proportions of 10 or 12 per cent solutions of ammonio-citrate
of iron and the ferridcyanide of potassium, dried and exposed to light
under a print or drawing placed with the printed side uppermost. The
resulting faint photographic image is developed and fixed by a mere wash-
ing in plain water, yielding a print in white or light blue lines on a dark
blue ground.

This process is rapid, simple apd cheap. The camera is dispensed
with, and the only photographic apparatus required is a printing frame and

* Maes and Hannot*s TiraiU de TopograpJUe et de Reproduetian dea Cartea au moyen
de h Photographie, p. 295.

7i J. Waterhoust* — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

one or two dishes or trays. The sensitive paper is easily prepared and can
be kept indefinitely in the dark until required for use. There is no measing^
with chemicals after the preparation of the paper, pure water only being*
required to develope and fix the prints. The exposure to the light is very
short, two or three minutes in the sun being ample to make a clear legible
copy from a line negative or from a drawing on tracing cloth. The chemi-
cals employed are both very inexpensive.

The objections to the process are two : first the difficulty of obtaining
clear whites ; this, however, is of no consequence so long as the details are
clearly legible ; and secondly, the colour of the prints — white on a dark
blue ground . Although this does not interfere with the practical use of
the process for special work, it completely prevents it from being employed
as a means of multiplying copies of maps or plans on a large scale. An-
other defect is, the want of sharpness arising from the necessity for placing
the reverse side of the original in contact with the sensitive paper in
order to get an unreversed print. These objections may be partly obviated
by printing from a negative on paper or glass, in which case the lines will
be dark blue on a light blue or white ground, but then cameras and other
expensive photographic apparatus will be required to produce the negative.

M. H. Pellet has recently recommended a process of this kind whereby
prints are obtained in dark lines on a clear ground. Paper is sensitised in
a mixture of —

Oxalic acid, ... ... ,.

Perchloride of Iron, ...

dried and exposed as usual under a drawing. The print is developed in
a bath of yellow prussiate of potash at 15 or 18 per cent, well washed and
fixed with dilute muriatic acid, then finally washed and dried.

The blue prints thus produced can also be used as the basis of
drawings for photozincography.

Another process, which, though not quite so simple as the above, has
the advantage of giving a print in black on a white ground, forms one of
the numerous important photographic methods for which we are indebted
to the illustrious Poitevin.

Paper is coated in the dark with a solution of perchloride of iron and
tartaric acid in water ; when dry, it is exposed under a tracing on cloth or
paper, or a reversed positive on glass, and as soon as the parts exposed to the
light have become thoroughly bleached the print is removed and developed
in a bath of gallic acid. The parts protected from the light turn to an inky
black, while tlie exposed and bleached parts remain white or only take a
slight tint. The print is then thoroughly washed and dried. The whole

5

parts

10

»

100

»

187S.] to the BeproJuction of Maps and Plans, 75

operations of printing, developing and washing can be finished in lialf an
hour. This process, simple as it appears, requires certain precautions in
using a strongly sized paper for the prints, and a very transparent original
to obtain the most successful results.

It is capable of the same applications as the cyanotype last described,
and, like it, is quite unsuitable for producing maps for publication.

Another process of Poitevin's is dependent on the property possessed
by the ferric salts of rendering gelatine insoluble, the solubility being, how»
ever, restored when the ferric salt is decomposed by the action of light into
the ferrous salt.

Paper is thinly coated with a 6 per cent solution of coloured gelatine
and when dry immersed in a solution of —

Perchloride of Iron, 10 parts or* 1 to 3 parts.
Tartaric acid, 3 „ „ ^ to 1 „

Water, 100 „ „ 100

and dried in the dark. After exposure to light under a positive, such as a
map on tracing paper, the print is immersed in hot water, and the gelatine
in the parts exposed to light dissolves out, leaving an exact transcript of the
original drawing with dark lines on a white ground. The print may be
rinsed in water acidulated with hydrochloric acid to remove the iron salt.

Salmon and Oarnier have taken advantage of the fact that if paper
is coated with a solution of the percitrate of iron and exposed to the light,
the parts exposed to the light become hygroscopic in inverse proportion to
the intensity of the action of light, and therefore if such paper is exposed
to light under a map or drawing on thin paper or vellum cloth, and
afterwards brushed over with a fine powder, such as lamp-black or plumbago,
more or less of the powder will adhere to the parts protected from the light,
while the exposed parts will scarcely take it at all. After development the
print has only to be washed to remove the unaltered iron salt from the film.

Other similar processes of printing with the salts of iron, uranium &c.,
will be found in the text-books. They are, however, very little used and
may be regarded more as curiosities than as practical printing methods.

Platinum printing process, — There is, however, one process which
deserves mention as producing very beautiful and permanent prints, in
which the image is formed of reduced platinum. This process has been
patented by the inventor, Mr. W. Willis, junior. Paper is floated on a
weak solution of nitrate of silver and dried. It is then brushed over with
a solution of double oxalate of potassium and iron, together with a solution
of chloroplatinite of potassium. After exposure under a negative the print
is floated on a warm solution of oxalate of potash, which causes the platinum

* Boivin, in Moniteur de la Photographie^ Ist April, 1878.

76 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

salt to be reduced in the parts exposed to the light. The prints are fixed
first with hyposulphite of soda, and then with oxalate of potash and finally
washed with water.

Oollo-chromate printing, — We now come to the more important pro-
cesses depending on the reaction of the salts of chromium, particularly the
alkaline bichromates, on gelatine, gum, albumen and other colloid substances
under the influence of light, whereby these substances become more or less
insoluble in and unabsorbent of water in proportion to the amount of the
action of light, and further acquire the property of taking up greasy ink
and not attracting plumbago or other fine dry powder, also in proportion to
the amount of the action of light upon them.

This simple reaction, only partially discovered in 1839 by Mungo
Ponton, was first worked out and turned to practical account, some twelve
years afterwards, by Fox Talbot in his process of photoglyphic engraving ;
and after him Pretsch and, notably, Poitevin employed it in processes which
have been the foundation of nearly all the modern methods of permanent
photographic printing.

The simplest of all these processes, and one which may render useful
service in the cases already noticed where only a few copies are required,
was one of the first published by Poitevin. It consists in coating paper
with a mixture of albumen, gum, or gelatine and bichromate of potash,
coloured with Indian ink or any other suitable pigment ; or, if preferred,
the paper may be coated with coloured gelatine and then made sensitive
in a separate bath of bichromate of potash, and this is sometimes the best
method, because the paper will not keep good for long in its sensitive state.
The sensitive coloured paper is exposed under a very clear line negative
in a copying frame for a few minutes, and then taken out and plunged
into water, either hot or cold, according as gelatine, gum or albumen have
been used. The unaltered colloid in the lights of the print, which have
been protected from the light under the dark parts of the negative, dissolves
in the water, leaving a clear image in pigment on a white ground.

This simple method is capable of extensive use in' copying maps or
topographical sketches, but is only applicable to subjects in line, well drawn
in black and white in accordance with the rules in Sect. III. These prints
have the advantage of being quite permanent and, as the collo-chromate
mixture is more sensitive to light than the chloride of silver, they can be
produced at a quicker rate than £he silver prints, and are, of course, cheaper
on account of the inexpensiveness of the materials used.

For reproducing subjects in half tones a different procedure must be
followed. In the process just described the exposure to light and the develop,
ment of the print by washing are effected on the coloured side of the
paper, and as the light can act with full power through the clear spaces on

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans, 77

the negative, representing the lines of the subject, it renders the colloid
coating insoluble throughout the thickness of the coloured film, so that
the lines withstand the solvent action of the warm water, which entirely
removes the rest of the coloured film from the ground and parts which have
not been influenced at all by the light. If, however, instead of a negative
of a line subject, on which the lines are transparent and the ground opaque,
we take a negative of a subject in half tones, possessing various degrees of
translucency in the lights and shadows of the picture, and make a print
from it on a piece of the pigmented paper, we shall find that the light will
only be able to penetrate through the entire thickness of the colloid film
in the deepest shadows, represented, as before, by nearly clear glass ; in
the darker half-tones it will penetrate nearly through the coating ; in the
middle tones about half-way through, and in the lightest tones the light will
be able to act only on the surface of the gelatine. We shall therefore
have a print with an insoluble surface of varying depth, and underlying
this a more or less soluble layer ; it will thus readily be understood that
when exposed to the action of warm water this layer will dissolve and carry
away with it the partially insoluble surface-film forming the half shades of
the picture, leaving only the stronger shades and giving a rough, hard, and
unfinished appearance to the print.

For a long time this difficulty proved a stumbling-block in the way
of the progress of permanent printing and gave the sUver-printing pro-
cesses a supremacy of which it has now become difficult to deprive them.
The Abb6 Laborde was the first to see the necessity for adopting the
principle of exposing on one side and developing on the other. Blair,
Fargier and Swan applied this to the carbon process, and the latter finally
succeeded in introducing a practical method of pigment-printing applicable
to the same class of subjects as silver-printing. Swan prepared a tissue by
coating paper with a thick layer of gelatine mixed with bichromate of potash
and coloured with any suitable pigment. After the exposure to light
the gelatinous surface of the tissue was caused to adhere closely to a second
piece of paper coated with india-rubber. The whole being immersed in
hot water, the paper on which the gelatinous layer was originally supported,
became loosened and could be removed, allowing the hot water to gradually
dissolve away the unaltered and soluble gelatine. In this manner the
exposure to light takes place on one side of the gelatine film, while the
washing away of the superfluous gelatine is effected from the other, or
unexposed side, without disturbing in any way the exposed parts of the
film, and thus the most delicate shades in the half tones are perfectly
preserved. Since its introduction by Swan this process has been much
improved by Messrs. J. B. Johnson, B. Sawyer and other members of the
London Autotype Company which acquired Swan's patents, and under
11

78 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

the name of the * Autotype' process, it has been worked on a large
commercial scale for the reproduction of works of art, and is now fairly
beginning to come into active competition with silver-printing for all
ordinary purposes of portrait and landscape phot<^raphy.

On the Continent, the pigment-printing process is largely used by the
well-known houses of Braun and Goupil for the reproduction of works of
art, and is also coming into extended use for general purposes.

The following is an outline of the operations as now practised by the
Autotype Company.*

The pigment tissue is prepared by coating long bands of paper witii a
moderately thick layer of gelatine coloured with any suitable pigment,
and is sold ready for use either in an insensitive or sensitive condition.

The tissue is sensitised by immersion for a minute or two in a 5 per
cent solution of bichromate of potash in water, to which some alcohol may
be added with advantage, especially in hot climates ; the bath should ak)
be cooled down with ice if its temperature exceeds 65°. The tissue is then
carefully dried, and when dry is ready to be exposed under the negative. This
is done in a printing-frame in the usual way, the only precaution necessary
being to paste slips of thin grey paper round the edges of the negative,
so as to cut off a great portion of the light and form what is called the
^ safe edge'. As the tissue generally appears black all over, the progress of
the printing cannot be ascertained by inspection, and it is necessary to nse
a little instrument called an * actinometer', by means of which, the degree
of exposure necessary for any negative having been once ascertained,
it is easy to give the same amount of exposure to successive prints. Up
to this point the operations are the same whatever may be the natare of
the support upon which the picture finally rests. The subsequent opera-
tions, however, differ accordingly as the image is developed on a final
support, by what is called the * single transfer' method, or on a temporary
support, by the * double transfer' method. In any case, some support is in-
dispensable to retain the image and preserve it from injury during the
washing.

In the single transfer process the support is paper coated with a gela-
tinous substance which, though insoluble in water, retains sufficient adhe-
sive power when moistened to enable it to hold the picture during
development and afterwards permanently.

After exposure under the negative the pigmented tissue having been
immersed in cold water, together with a piece of the transfer paper, the two
surfaces are applied to one another imder water, and both drawn out together.
They are then laid on a zinc plate, tissue uppermost, and brought into close

• See "2j^ Autotype Process'', 6th edition. Also MonckhoTOn's, Yidal's iad
Licscgang's treatises on Carbon-printing.

1878.] to the Reproduction o/Maj>8 and Plans. 79

contact, all intervening air being driven oat by means of an india-rubber
scraper, or * squeegee*, wbich also removes all superfluous moisture. The
prints and support are allowed to remain together for a short time, and are
then immersed in warm water. After a little while the soluble gelatine will
soften and become partially dissolved, when the paper forming the original
support of the layer of gelatine may be gently removed, leaving a dark
slimy-looking mass on the transfer paper. The soluble gelatine gradually
clears away by the action of the hot water and reveals the image in more or
less perfection of details according as the exposure has been properly timed.
When fully developed, the print is washed with cold water, then passed
through a solution of alum, rinsed again with water and allowed to dry.

Instead of paper, any other suitable permanent support may be used,
but whatever the support may be, a reversed negative must be used if it
is desired to obtain non-inverted pictures by the single transfer method.

When it is inconvenient to use a reversed negative, and it is desired to
obtain a non-inverted picture — the development of the tissue-prints must
be conducted by the doable transfer method upon a temporary support,
either rigid or flexible. The discovery that the pigment pictures might be
developed upon any impermeable surface is due to Mr. J. R. Johnson, who
also found that i£ such surface previously receive a coating of some fatty
or resinous compound, the picture may be transferred, after development, to
a final support.

The most suitable surface for the temporary support is a sheet of zinc,
which may be either polished or grained ; opal glass, or porcelain plates may
also be used with advantage.

The plate employed as the temporary support first receives a coating
of a solution of wax and resin in turpentine, and some operators coat the
plate with collodion after the waxing, in order to improve the surface. The
pigment tissue carrying the image is attached to the support under water
in much the same way as in the single transfer method, and after remaining
for a time, is developed in the same way and allowed to dry. The plate
mth the picture on it is then rinsed in water, and a piece of what is called
double transfer paper — a fine paper coated with an enamel surface — having
been soaked in water till quite soft, is Isdd on the wet plate, avoiding
air-bubbles, and pressed into perfect contact with it by means of the india-
rubber scraper. The picture with the transfer paper attached is now dried
carefully, and when dry separates of itself from the temporary support.

Mr. J. R. Sawyer of the Autotype Company has introduced a flexible
support, consisting of paper coated with a solution of gelatine rendered in-
soluble with chrome alum. When dry this is coated again with an alkaline
solution of shelLvc, dried and well rolled under powerful pressure — it is
afterwards coated with a waxing compound. The use of this flexible sup-

80 J. Waterhouse — TJie J^pliciUion of Photography [No. 2,

port is said to be advantageous with small pictores, but I have not found
it answer very well in this coontrj.

All these operations, which seem so complicated, are in reality veiy
simple, and as the senmtised tissue is very sensitive to light a great manj
prints can be produced in a single day. The number may, moreover, b6
increased by a plan proposed by Gapt. Abney, R. £., of exposing the print
for only half the usual time and then letting it lie by in the dark for some
hours. The decomposing action set up by the light goes on in the darkness,
and on development a picture is produced quite as good as if it had received
a full amount of exposure and been developed at once. This discover; is
largely utilised by those working the process in England, and enables an
amount of work to be done in the winter months which would otherwise
be impossible.

The single transfer process has been successfully worked at the Sur-
veyor General's Office in Calcutta for the production of photographs of tbe
convicts transported for life to the Andamans. No great difficuliaes vere
met with in working it, even in the hot weather, but it waa found necesssiy
to ice the solution of bichromate of potash used for sensitising the tiasae,
and to add a certain proportion of spirits of vnne to it, in order to keep the
gelatine from softening too much. Messrs. Bourne and Shepherd, the well-
known Indian photographers, have made arrangements for working the
Autotype process at Simla, the climate of Bombay having been found
unsuitable.

The pigment prints are perfectly permanent for all practical puipcew,
and, though they may under certain circumstances change colour slightlj or
lose their brilliancy, there is no such absolute &ding and loss of details as
in silver prints. The process may be applied in all cases to replace sOver
printing where permanency of results is an object. As I have mentioned
before, the process is not quite suitable for the reproduction of coloured or
shaded maps, owing to difficulties in obtaining prints comprising large sor-
f aces of clean white paper together vnth the delicate half tones of hill-
shading. For maps in line the simple carbon process is more suitably or if
many copies are required, photozincography would be better.

Anilin Printing, — Before proceeding to the consideration of the pro-
cesses employed for producing prints in the printing press, mention may he
made of an ingenious process of printing which depends upon the nse of
salts of chromium, and is largely used in Europe for the reproduction of
maps and plans. It is known as the * Anilin printing process' and is ^
invention of Mr. J. Willis, who has patented it.

Paper is impregnated with a solution of bichromate of potash to whka
a little phosphoric acid has been added. After exposure to light under a
transparent positive, such as a drawing on thin paper or vellum cloth, or ereB

1878.] io the Beproduction of Maps and Plans. 81

an ordinary engraving or manuscript, it is exposed in a closed box to the
vapour of anilin, which developes a greyish image. The print is then fixed
bj merely washing with water. As a positive original yields a positive
print, maps or drawings may be copied without the necessity of making a
negative by means of a camera, which is a great recommendation in
certain cases. The process has hitherto been worked only by the inventor
and his licensees and has not come into general use.

V. PhOTOLITHOGEAPHT KSH PHOTOZmCOGBAPHT.

In all the processes noticed in the last section, it is necessary to repeat
the printing operation by exposure to light for every print produced. The
rate of printing will consequently be more or less dependent on the sensi-
tiveness of the paper, the strength of the light at the time of exposure and
the state of the weather ; the printing operations can, moreover, only
be carried on during the few hours of daylight. In the photo-mechanical
processes, now about to be described, these grave disadvantages are obviated,
and, once the photographic image has been produced upon the printing
surface, prints may be made in any numbers, quite independently of light
or weather.

The simplest and most generally useful of these mechanical processes
is photolithography, or the analogous photozincography, the principal
difference between the latter and the ^rmer being merely the substitution of
a thin smooth plate of grained zinc for the thick heavy lithographic stone.
For maps of large size, zinc is certainly the most suitable and ofEers in other
respects all the advantages of stone, but the latter being better known is
generally preferred for ordinary work of moderate size.

In ordinary lithography, the image may be produced on the stone or
zinc either by transfer from a drawing on paper with the solution of resi-
nous soap known as ' autographic ink', or by drawing direct on the stone with
a similar ink or crayon ; so in photolithography there are two similar
methods of obtaining the photographic image — either by transfer from a
photographic print in fatty ink — or by impressing the image direct on the
stone, by applying a photographic negative on a suitable coating sensitive
to light and removing by means of a solvent the parts unaltered by light.
The transfer method being the most convenient is the one in general use.

The first photolithographic process on record is that proposed by
Jobard, of Brussels, who, in 1839, obtained lithographic proofs from stone
or zinc plates that had been treated with iodine or bromine. This process
never came into practical use and has been quite superseded by two distinct
methods — one dependent on the alterability of asphaltum imder the influ-
ence of light — the other on the reactions of the alkaline bichromates upon
gelatine and other colloid substances.

82 J. Wafcerhou8G — The Application of Fhotoffraphif [Xo. 2,

Asphaltum methods, — In 1852, MM. Lemercier, Lerebours, BarreswH
and Davanne, proposed a method of lit ho- photography, in which a stone was
coated with a solution of hitumen in ether, exposed to light under a reversed
negative, and developed with ether, which dissolves the parts not afPeeted bj
the light, while the exposed parts being insoluble remain and form the image.
(Benzole, chloroform or turpentine may also be used instead of ether).
After development the stone was prepared with acid and gum and inked
in the same way as an ordinary lithographic drawing.*

Since then many other similar asphalt um processes have been proposed
and have been worked with great success, both for subjects in line and half-
tone ; but, owing to the length of exposure required and the uncertainty of
the results, this process is not well adapted for general use, and has, I
believe, been almost abandoned in favour of the coUochromate methods.

CollO'chromate Processes, — Paul Pretsch, whilst working out his photo-
gal vanographic process, hereafter to be described, discovered that if a
mixture of gelatine and bichromate of potash be spread upon a suitable
support and when dry exposed to light, then again moistened and inked
in with a roller charged with printing ink, the ink would only take upon
the parts altered by the light, and thus impressions could be obtained bj
transferring the design to zinc or stone.

Pretsch does not seem to have made any practical use of this discovery,
but shortly afterwards, in 1855, Ppitevin independently worked out a
photolithographic process on the same principle, which has been the founda-
tion of all the present processes of photolithography and photocoUotype
and is worked to the present day for the reproduction of the Belgian
topographical maps. Poitevin impressed his photographic image direct
upon the stone and not by transfer.

The first practical transfer process of photolithography seems to have
been suggested by Asser, of Amsterdam, early in 1859. He coated unsized
paper with starch, and then floated it on a strong solution of bichromate of
potash. When dry it was exposed to light under a well intensified nega-
tive. The print was next heated with a fiat iron, then moistened and inked
in with transfer ink, by means of a roller, and thus an impression was obtain-
ed which could be transferred to stone or zinc.f

The next transfer processes were the Southampton process of photo^
zincography, which was founded on Asser' s, and Mr. Osborne's process of
photolithography. These two processes, though quite independent one of the
other, were identical in principle and almost so in details ; the only difference
being that Mr. Osborne added a certain proportion of albumen to the mixture
of gelatine and bichromate and then treated his prints with boiling water, in

• See Davanne, Chimie Fhotographiqite^ p. 466.
t Photographic Nexvsy Vol. Ill, p. 146.

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Flans. 83

order to congulate the albumen and leave a slight coating of it on the
paper, so as to obtain a *grip' on the stone during the process of transfer.*

At the Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton, and at the various pho-
tographic offices in India, in which the process has been introduced from
Southampton, photozincography is used, with the best results ; but in
Australia, America and the Continent of Europe photolithography is more
usual and it is also used at Madras.

These processes have occasionally been used with fair success for the
reproduction of shaded maps, architectural views and other subjects in half-
tones, but they are not by any means suitable for such subjects, and are
best adapted for the reproduction of maps and drawings boldly executed in
dot or line alone.

They may also be used for copying prints or engravings of all kinds
on the same, larger or smaller scales, but engravings, and even many
lithographs, are generally more or less unsuitable for the purpose. The
best results are obtained from original drawings specially prepared to suit
the requirements of photographic reproduction, in strict accordance with
the rules already given.

The following outline of the Southampton method will give an idea of
the operations. Like the pigment-printing process, already described, it
depends upon the property possessed by a dried layer of gelatine and other
colloids, when mixed with an alkaline bichromate, of becoming insoluble and
repellent of water under the influence of light. The procedure, too, is much
the same as in the simple pigment-printing process, except that, instead of
the fatty ink which forms the image on the photo-transfer print being
mixed with the gelatine, it is applied to the surface of the print after
exposure to light. The inked print is then washed in hot water, by which
the colloid coating in the unexposed parts is dissolved and carries away
with it the superfluous ink not retained by the lines forming the image.

The negatives are obtained by the methods already described appli-
cable to the reproduction of subjects in line.

Having obtained a suitable negative, the next operation is to produce
from it a photograph in greasy ink which may be transferred to zinc or
stone.

To prepare the sensitive paper, a sheet of bank -post paper is coated
twice with a mixture of 6 parts gelatine and 4 parts bichromate of potash,
dissolved in 100 parts of water, dried in the dark and glazed to give it a
smooth surface. It is then exposed to the light under a negative for one or
two minutes in the sun, or until the finest lines are distinctly visible. When
sufficiently exposed, which may be ascertained by the whole of the detail
appearing in brown upon a bright yellow ground, the print is taken out of

• Photographic Newty Vol. IV, p. 374.

84 J. Wafcerhouse — The Application of PKotograpl^ [No. 2,

tho printing frame and passed through a lithographic press in contact with
a polished stone, or zinc plate, which has been coated with a lithographic
transfer ink, and thus receives an even coat of the greasy ink. The
inked print is immersed for a few minutes in tepid water, to soften the
gelatine still remaining soluble in the parts not acted on by light, and then
laid on a sloping glass or metal plate and gently washed with a sponge
and warm water till all the unaltered gelatine is removed, carrying the
superfluous ink with it. The lines, on which the light has acted, remain
insoluble and retain the ink, forming a clear image of the subject in a
greasy transfer ink, precisely similar to the ordinary lithographic transfer
drawing. When all the details are clearly and sharply defined, and the
ground is quite free from ink, the print is rinsed in clean water and dried.
It is then ready for transfer to stone or zinc.

It often happens that a map is too large to be photographed in a single
section. In this case the transfer prints of the different negatives are
carefully joined together with gelatine and transferred to the stone or plate ;
or if too large to be printed in one sheet, the joined-up transfers may be cut
up into as many convenient-sized sections as may be necessary.

Zinc plates possess great advantages over lithographic stones on
account of their superior lightness, cheapness, facility for storage and less
liability to breakage, and are therefore to be preferred in reproducing plans
of larg^ size. For fine work stone is considered by some to give better
results than zinc, but I believe that if due care be taken as good prints
may be made from zinc as the best from stone.

The plates used for this purpose are about ^\ of an inch in thickness,
and have one side carefully planed and smoothed ; but in order to give a
somewhat porous surface to the plate, so that it may be more absorbent of
moisture and hold the greasy ink better, the planed side of the plate is
grained, or roughened by grinding it evenly all over with very fine sand and
water. After the transfers are made, the plate is etched with a preparation
of gum and decoction of gall-nuts to which a little phosphoric acid is
added.

If the transfers are made to a lithographic stone instead of to a zbc
plate, the operations are exactly the same as for transferring an ordinary
lithographic transfer-drawing, except that the stone need not be heated.
The operations of printing, whether from zinc or from stone, are preciseLj
the same as in ordinary lithography.

Various modifications have been introduced, but the above process is
still one of the best and most simple, and, if care be taken with suitable
subjects, results may be obtained by it not to be surpassed by any othar
method. Full details regarding it will be found in Sir H. James'
* Photozincography^^ also in the Photographic New9, Vol. XII, page

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans* 85

2S0 et seq» The accompanying specimen of a reduction from an old
engraved map will give an idea of the results that may be obtained.

In the Southampton process the whole of the unaltered gelatine is
removed from the paper, and the objection has been made that, in con-
sequence of this, the ink on the lines being left on ridges of gelatine is
more liable to. spread in transferring, that the fine lines are liable to be
washed away by the dissolution of the gelatine beneath them, and that the
prints are liable to slip during transfer. To remedy these defects various
methods have been proposed for retaining the gelatine on the paper.

One of the best of these methods has been perfected by Capt. Abney,
who has patented it under the name of * papyrotype.'*

A tough paper is coated with gelatine, and subsequently treated with
alum or chrome alum. It then receives a coating of gelatine and bichromate
of potash as in the Southampton process. Afber exposure to Hght the
print is drawn through cold water, and is then ' squeegeed* down on to a
smooth metal plate, and inked in with a soft gelatine roller charged with
transfer ink. The ink * takes' only on the parts exposed to light, while the
ground of the print remains clear. When the image is fully inked up, the
print is dried and exposed to light, to harden the gelatine thoroughly by
the action of light on the bichromate salt still remaining, and is then ready
for transfer to stone or zinc.

Among the advantages claimed for this process, the principal are that —

The ink which forms the lines is not left on ridges of gelatine, as in
the Southampton method. The fine lines are not liable to be removed.
The surface of the transfer will have no tendency to slip during transfer.

In practice this method was not found to answer in this country so
well as the ordinary one, but a modification of the latter has lately been
introduced in the Surveyor QeneraPs Office, with the same object as the
papyrotype, and seems to answer well.

The paper is prepared as usual with two coats of gelatine and bichro-
mate of potash. It is then put away for a few days, in order to allow the
gelatine to become hard and insoluble. When required for use, it is
coated again with a mixture of gelatine and bichromate of potash of about
one-third the usual strength, and is then exposed to light and inked in the
usual way. The washing is done with cold water instead of with hot.

Instead of allowing the gelatine to harden by keeping, which takes from
8 to 12 or 14 days according to the season, the hardening action may be
hastened by laying the sensitive paper face downwards on a board, and
allowing the light to act on the back surface for a minute or two. This may
be done, either after the print has been obtained from the negative, or just

♦ * Instruction in Fhotography^' p. 155.
12

80 J. Waterlious«e — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

after the preliminary coating has been g^ven to the paper. The gelatine
may abo be hardened with alum or chrome almn.

It has been f omid that this method has the adyantage that a base of
hard insoluble gelatine remains on the paper and retains the finest lineS)
while the fresh and easily soluble final coating preserves the clearness of
the ground. It is necessary that the underlying gelatine should be
thoroughly hardened, otherwise the transfers stick to the zinc plate in
transferring, and are difficult to remove ; the soft gelatine is also liable to
spread over the lines and prevent their transfer.

Another advantage is that warm water is not required for washing the
prints, and the ink is not so liable to become pasty as in the usual mode of
working. The lines are found to keep crisp and the spaces between them
free from scum, thus giving clearer and sharper transfers.

Mr. Herbert Deveril, Government photolithographer in New Zealand,
found that, in working Osborne's original process of photolithograpby,
which is still generally used in the Australian Colonies, great inconvenience
arose from the use of boiling water to coagulate the albumen added by Mr.
Osborne to the gelatine in order to produce an insoluble surface with a
' grip* on the stone. He has therefore substituted the following method of
producing his transfer prints. Paper is first coated with gelatine to which
a small proportion of chrome alum has been added. This is allowed to dry
and is then sensitised in a solution of bichromate of potash. The prints
are exposed and inked as in the Southampton process, and are washed oS
in cold water.* Mr. Deveril claims for this method the further advantage
that the sensitive paper can be kept in good condition for a long time.
The keeping properties of papers coated with gelatine and bichromate are,
however, very dependent on climatic conditions. The results which I have
seen by the process are exceedingly good.

A method of photolithography by transfer which yields excellent results
in line, and even reproduces half-tones fairly well, is a modification of Asaer's
process, invented by Mr. Toovey, of Brussels, who coats paper with a sola-
tion of gum arabic mixed with bichromate of potash, and after exposure to
light under the negative in the usual way, places the transfer-print face
downwards on the stone with several thicknesses of wet blotting paper over
it, and leaves it under pressure for some hours in a powerful press.

The gum on the parts not exposed to light being soluble is forced into
the stone and prepares it, while the lines being hardened and rendered in-
soluble leave the stone quite free from gum and ready to take printing ink
from a roller when passed over them, thus producing an image which may
be printed from as soon as the soluble bichromate salt has been washed out,
because the bichromated gum is a most powerful preparation for the stoos

* * Fhotographie News,' Vol. XTX, p. 685.

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Flans. ST

and, indeed, is difficult to remove without grinding the stone down to some
depth.

This process requires care in adjusting the amount of moisture to be
applied to soften the gum, so that it may not bo squeezed under the lines
and block them up^ and it has not,. I believe,, come into general use.

There are two disadvantages which militate against the employment of
the transfer processes of photolithography for the finer and better class of
maps. The first, is the difficulty of obtaining reproductions perfectly true
to scale, owing to the unequal expansion of the transfer paper in the various
washings and squeezings it has to undergo. Although this unequal expansion
and contraction is very slight, and for most practical purposes may be disre-
garded, it has greatly hindered the more universal adoption of this valuable
method for the reproduction of the official maps in England and foreign
countries.

Mr. Rodriguez, of Lisbon, has, however, lately introduced an improve-
ment into the transfer process with the object of doing away with the
possibility of stretching in the course of any of the operations.* Instead
of using paper as the support of the coating of gelatine on which the pho-
tographic image is impressed, he uses a sheet of tinfoil about the thickness
of thin paper. This is first smoothed on a very finely grained lithographic
stone and then laid down quite fiat on a sheet of zinc. After being
cleaned with alkali and well washed, the tinfoil is brushed over with a
solution of gelatine and bichromate, dried rapidly, and is then ready to be
exposed under a negative in the usual manner. To ink the print, the sheet -
of tin is first plunged into water, and then carefully laid down wet on a litho-
graphic stone so as to avoid folds, the gelatine side being uppermost. The
film is then inked in with a roller. After the first inking in the print is
left for about a couple of hours and is then inked in again and afterwards
washed with a sponge and water. It may then be lifted off the stone and
dried. The operations of transfer are the same as usual.

The second disadvantage of the transfer methods is the almost un-
avoidable spreading of the lines under the operation of transferring, which
makes a photolithographed map look heavy and unsightly compared with a
lithographed one. This defect may, however, be diminished very much
by skilful manipulation and taking care to have as thin a coating as pos-
sible of gelatine on the paper, and to use a good hard transfer ink in small
quantity. With these precautions and with a suitable original, results may
be obtained from photolithographic transfers which will well compare with
ordinary lithography, or even engraving, in sharpness and delicacy.

These special defects of the transfer methods may be in great part
obviated by impressing the photographic image direct on the stone, as origi-

• * British Journal of Photography^ Vol. XXV, p. 232.

88 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Fhotography [No. 2,

nally proposed by Poitevin, but this plan has again other disadvantages of
its own which render it less saitable for map work than the transfer process.
It has, however, been used extensively, and very successfully, in the produc-
tion of the Belgian topographical maps on the scale of 1 : 20,000.

In the process used for the Belgian maps, the stone is covered with a
very thin coating of a mixture of gelatine and bichromate of potash, rapidly
dried and exposed to light under a reversed negative, which is obtained by
reversing the position of a dry tannin plate in the camera and allowing the
light to act through the glass on the underside of the collodion film. A
thin coating of printing ink is then applied all over the stone with a roller,
and the surface is afterwards washed with warm water in which a little starch
has been dissolved. This gradually removes all the soluble parts of the
gelatine coating, leaving on the stone a clear image of the map. The stone
is then covered with gum and after drying and remaining for a short time
is ready for printing and capable of yielding 1500 good impressions.*

For line-work zinc plates are also used and prepared in much the same
way.

This process has undoubtedly some advantages as regards accoiacj of
scale, and the quickness and cheapness of the operations, but on the other
hand it has disadvantages as regards the difficulty of securing perfect
contact between the stone and the negatives, the necessity for a reversed
negative, the prints being limited within a single negative and the inoon«
veniences of working with heavy stones.

Besides the foregoing, many methods of photolithogpraphy have been
proposed, but as for the most part they are only modifications of the
processes I have described, which are all good and may be considered typical,
it will be unnecessary for me to go further into details regarding them.

VI. Photocollottpe,

The great defect of all the processes of photolithography described in
the last section is, that they can only be applied with advantage to the
reproduction of drawings or subjects in which the gradation of shade is
shown by lines or dots separated by white spaces of varying sizes and at
different intervals apart, as in line or stipple engravings and lithographs in
line or chalk. Even such drawings to be successfully reproduced must be
in a good bold open style and have all the lines or points composing them
of an equal and perfect blackness, tn the many attempts that have been
made to reproduce photographs from nature by photolithography or photo*
engraving, or to copy paintings and brush-shaded drawings in which grada^
tion of shade is continuous, success, only partial at best, has been secured bj

* Maes and Haxmot's ' TraiU de Topographie^ et de Eeproduction det GarU9
moj/en de la Fkotographie ' ; also Hannot's * Za Fhotographie dam Us Armies, '

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans. SO

breaking up and destroying the continuity of gradation. By the processes
of photocollotype, so called from the printing surface being of gelatine, these
defects are entirely obviated, and absolutely permanent photographic prints
may be produced in the printing press equal to silver prints in perfect
delineation of detail and delicate gradation of shade, but vastly superior
to them in permanence and cheapness of production.

Poitevin was the first to recognise, so early as 1855, the fact that the
half-tones were better preserved on stones that had been treated with a
chromated colloid mixture if, after exposure to light under a negative,
instead of being inked all over and then washed with water to remove the
superfluous ink, they were first moistened and then inked in with a litho-
graphic roller charged with printing ink*. He seems, however, to have
always regarded the stone as the principal printing surface and treated it
by the ordinary methods of lithography. Only a few impressions could be
obtained from stones thus treated.

In 1866, Messrs. Tessie du Mothay and Marechal, of Metz, discovered
that the stone or metal plate hitherto used as a printing surface might be
replaced by a mixture of isinglass, gelatine and gum, treated with an acid
chromate, and evenly spread upon a well polished metal surface ; because
if, after exposure to light under a photographic negative, such a gela-
tinous surface were moistened, greasy ink applied upon it with a roller
would adhere well to the parts of it that had been acted upon by light, and
would be taken up by those parts in proportionate quantities, according to
the intensity of the gradations of light and shade produced on them by
the action of light, and their consequent impermeability to water. Photo-
graphic prints in fatty ink reproducing the most delicate gradations of shade
without any apparent grain or break of continuity could thus be produced. f

It will be seen that this process was based on exactly the same principle
as Poitevin's photolithography, but differed from it in the distinct recognition
of the colloid film as the printing surface. Messrs. Tessi^ de Mothay and
Marechal were also the first to recognise the necessity of adding a certain
proportion of acid or of oxydising or reducing agents to the chromate salt
used for sensitising the gelatine, with the object of rendering the colloid
surface more apt to receive the greasy ink and also of hardening the film so as
to enable it to withstand the wear and tear of printing. This they did by
exposing the sensitive plates to a high temperature before using, but the
effect was produced in great measure by the decomposition of the chromate
salts by the acids or other substances added to the colloid mixture.

Messrs. Tessie du Mothay and Marechal printed off their ' phototype*
plates in a lithographic press in much the same way as ordinary lithographs,

• * Traite de Vimpresnon photographiqt4e aant seh (Cargent^ p. 78.
t * Photographic Xetc*,' Vol. XI, p. 260.

90 J. Wiiterhouae— TAtf Application of Photography [No. 2,

but with certain modifications due to the peculiar nature of the printing
surface. The principal of these was the use of two inks, one stiff, for
giving force to the shadows, the other thin, for bringing out the more
delicate half tones.

The * phototype' process as at first proposed laboured under the defect
of not being able to yield a large number of prints from a single plate, but,
in 1869, it was improved upon in this respect by Albert, of Munich, who
substituted a thick glass plate for the metal plate used by Tessie du Mothay
and Marechal as a support for the colloid film. His films consisted of alba-
men, gelatine and bichromate of potash alone, and he gave them the required
solidity and adherence to the glass by first coating the plate with a
sensitive colloid mixture containing a larg^ proportion of albumen, and
then giving the under side of this first coating a preliminary exposure
to light through the glass. The second coating containing more gelatine
was then applied, and after it had dried, and the photographic image
had been impressed upon it, the plate was again exposed from the back,
in order to thoroughly solidify and combine the under part of the com*
pound film. The gelatine films so prepared were capable of yielding some
hundreds, or even, it is said, thousands of perfect copies. This process
is still largely used by its inventor and is known by the name of Albert-
type.*

According to some authorities, Messrs. Ohm, Grossmann and G^emoser^

of Berlin, took out a patent, in 1867, for a method of photocollographie
printing comprising, in addition to the use of glass as the support of the
gelatine film, of the double coating of the plate and of the hardening of the
film by exposure of the back surface, the introduction into the sensitive
gelatine mixture of certain resinous compounds dissolved in spirit, by which
the gelatine film is rendered quite insoluble and admirably adapted to form a
fine printing surface. It is said on the other hand that the credit of all these
improvements is due to Albert ; but, in any case, it is certain that until after
the publication of Albert's process early in 1869, Ohm and Grossmann's was
almost unknown and had not come into general use. In October 1869, the
Autotype Company in London acquired the patent, and have since worked
the process with the greatest success.

About a year after the publication of Albert's method, Mr. Ernest
Edwardsy of London, introduced, under the name of * Heliotype,' a very im-
portant modification of the photocollotype process.

He first waxed a glass plate and then coated it with a substantial layer
of gelatine and bichromate of potash, containing a small quantity of chrome
alum, with the object of hardening the gelatine and rendering it insoluble,
without destroying its impermeability to water. When dry, the gelatine

• 'Photographic News,* Vol. XIII, p. 121.

1878.] to the Beproductian of Maps and Plans. 91

film was removed from the waxed glass plate, and the side which had heen
next to the glass was exposed under a reversed negative in the usual way,
and, then, as in Alhert's process, the hack surface of the film was hardened
hj exposure to light. After this, the film was attached imder water to a
metal plate, pref erahlj pewter, coated with india-ruhher, and ' squeegeed* into
perfect contact with it. The hiohromate salt was then removed bj washing
and the plate was ready to be printed in an ordinary Albion printing
press.

In this process the peculiarities were the use of chrome alum for
hardening the gelatine ; the separation of the colloid film from its original
support, by which perfect contact with the n^ative was secured, as well
as less risk of breaki^e of the latter ; the subsequent transference of the
film to a metal plate, by which the liability to breakage of glass plates in
the progress of printing was obviated, and, lastly, the substitution of vertical
instead of a scraping pressure in printing, by which the gelatine films were
not exposed to injury by wear and scraping of the surface.

This process is still, I believe, largely practised and full details of it,
with various improvements suggested by Capt Abney, R. E., will be
found in the latter's excellent little work — " Instruction in Photography. ^^

About the same time, Herr Obernetter, of Munich, proposed another
process of the same kind offering some peculiarities, and said to produce
very satisfactory results.

A sheet of glass is coated with a mixture of gelatine, albumen, sugar
and bichromate of potash, dried and exposed to light under a negative.
The plate is then dusted over with finely powdered zinc, which attaches
itself only to the parts protected from the light and in proportion to the
amount of protection they have received. The plate is then heated to about
869^ F., or exposed to light till the whole surface of the film has been
rendered insoluble. Before printing, the plates are treated with dilute
muriatic or sulphuric acid. By this operation the parts of the gelatine
film covered with zinc, are rendered, by the formation of hydrogen, sus-
ceptible of attracting water to a greater or less degree, while the other
portions, upon which no zinc has settled, are capable of receiving a fatty
ink. The printing is then proceeded with in the usual manner.*

Since 1869, when these processes first began to come into practical use,
many methods of working have been introduced, chiefly in Germany and
France, but so far as known they are nearly all of them more or less
modifications of one or other of the above, merely differing in the manner
of preparing and hardening the gelatine film. A good deal of information
on the subject will be found in Husnik's ^* Gesammtgebiet des Lichtdrucks^^^
Qeymet's ^^ Phototypie,^^ Moock's " I^aitS pratique d' impressions photo-

• * Fhotographic New$; Vol. XIII, p. 483.

$>2 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [Xo. 2,

graph iques aux e/icres grasses,** and A. Martin's ^^ Sandbuch der EuiaiU
photographic und der Phoiotypie oder dee Lichtdruckes."

The great difference between the photocollotjpe processes and litho->
graphj is, that whereas the lithographic stone receives a like quantity of ink
in all parts of the image, and is incapable of producing a true and continuoua
gradation of shade, the moist gelatine film possesses the valuable property,
not possessed by the stone, of receiving a greater or less amount of ink in
different parts of the image, in exact proportion to the intensity of the
action of the light upon them, and is thus capable of reproducing the
most delicate gradations of shade as perfectly as they are shown in an
ordinary silver print.

It will thus be readily understood that instead of the advantages of
photographic reproduction by cheap and speedy mechanical processes being
confined to the reproduction of certain special subjects, they can be extended
to all classes of subjects, such as photographs from nature, brush-shaded
and coloured maps, MS. records, drawings and paintings of all kinds. Even
for line subjects, the process surpasses most of the known processes of photo-
engraving, photozincography or photolithography in the delicacy, sharpness
and clearness with which the finest lines can be reproduced, as well as in
perfect accuracy of scale, owing to there being no intermediate process of
transfer, with its attendant washings and pressings, and the plate being
printed by vertical pressure.

The process has the further advantage that the prints do not require
mounting, and this makes it very suitable for book illustration, for which,
indeed, it is now being very largely used. It is especially valuable for
illustrations of a scientific character in cases where otherwise only the
highest class of lithography or engraving would be applicable and at an
enormously increased expense.

For the most successful application of the photocollotype processes to
the reproduction of maps, the result depends, as in photozincography, very
much on the quality of the negative, and that again on the original.

Any negative that will give a good photographic print will answer, but
the successful reproduction of shaded maps or drawings demands consider-
able care in the execution of the original drawing as well as in taking the
negative. The precautions to be taken in these respects have already been
indicated in sections II and III.

For some years past my attention has been given to the utilisation of
this valuable process for the reproduction of maps and other phot<^raphic
work which the Surveyor General's Office is called upon to do for various
Government departments. In the Proceedings of the Society for November
1871, I described a process which I had found to answer well for line work,
and strenuous efforts were made to bring this and other methods into prac-

1878.] to the Beprodnction of Maps and Ftan^^. 93

tical working. It is much to be regretted that owing to the many difficulties
met with in manipulating the gelatine films in the hot damp climate of
Calcutta, and in getting printers with the special artistic skill required to
produce the best results, our efforts have not been quite successful, and, as
photozincography is found more convenient for most of the work passing
through the office, the photocollotype process has not been brought into
general use.

As the process previously described in the Proceedings has since then
been modified and is, I know, exceedingly good for line work, the following
description of the manipulations, extracted from the Annual Reports of the
Surveyor (xeneral*s Office for 1871-72 and 1872-73, may prove of interest,
especially as the working details of few of the other processes have been
published.

The printing plates are of plate glass, about i or half an inch in thick-
ness, evenly ground on one side with fine sand. When required for use
they are thoroughly cleaned to remove all grease, and then carefully levelled.
The composition of the gelatine coating is as follows : —

r Gelatine, 1 ounce.

A. < Glycerine, 1 dram.

C Distilled water, Bounces.

f Albumen,* 1 ounce.

\ Distilled water, 1 ounce.

c Tannin, 10 grains.

\ Water, (in hot weather. Spirits of wine,)... 1 ounce.
The above quantity will be sufficient for two square feet of plate.
As soon as the gelatine in solution A is quite dissolved, B is added and
then C is poured in gradually with constant stirring. The whole is strained
through two thicknesses of cotton cloth and poured evenly over the plates
on the ground side, any air bubbles being carefully removed. The plates
are then covered over with a light paper cover, to prevent dust falling on
them, until they are set^ when they may be removed into the open air and
turned face downwards to dry. Or they may be dried with gentle heat in
a drying box, but too quick drying is to be avoided because the gelatine
films will dry unevenly.

When the plates are dry, they may be put away till required or
sensitised in a bath of —

Bichromate of Potash, 1 part.

Water, 20 parts.

They are allowed to remain in this for 5 minutes, then removed to a
drying box and dried with a gentle heat. When dry, the deposit at the back
of the plates, and any inequalities at the corners of the gelatine film aro

* 30 gprains of carbolic soap may be used instead of the albumen.
13

9 A J. Watcrhouse — The Application of Thotography [No 2,

removed, and the plates are ready for exposare under the negative, which
must be a reversed one obtained as described in section III.

If the reversed negative has been taken direct on glass, the exposora
to light is performed in a pressure frame, in the same way as for ordin&rj
photographs. It is advisable, however, to secure clean margins by shielding
the borders of the negative by means of a mask, cut out in yellow or brown
paper, which should well overlap the edges of the printing plates. The
sensitive plate may be rubbed over with a little powdered soapstone to pre*
vent any adherence to the negative. Some sheets of dark>coloured paper or
cloth should be placed behind the sensitive plate and then a thick sheet of
glass to give a good even pressure.

If, however, the negative has been stripped from the glass and is in the
form of a thin skin, the most perfect contact will be produced by trans*
f erring the negative on to the surface of the printing film, in such a manner
that it may be removed again after the exposure.

This operation presents some difficulties, but I have found the following
method answer well. The sensitised and dried gelatine surface of the prin-
ting plate is covered with a very thin even coating of wax dissolved in
turpentine or benzole. The plate is then placed in a dish containing suffix
cient spirits of wine to cover it. The thin negative film is laid down upon
the gelatine in its proper position, the plate and film are then removed from
the spirit, and the negative film carefully squeegeed into close contact with
the gelatine surface. The plate is then covered with a few thicknesses of
blotting paper, under a thick glass plate, and allowed to dry. When dry, the
plate is ready for exposure. After exposure, the negative film is removed
from the gelatine surface ; and, if sufficient wax was used and the film is
fairly tough, it comes away without tearing. Should it tear, it shonld
at once be dissolved off with ether, or there will be a oontinuating action of
light on the parts of the gelatine surface protected by the negative film, so
that they will print darker than the rest of the plate. Before printing, the
wax should be removed from the gelatine with turpentine. The object of
effecting the transfer in a bath of spirits of wine is, that neither ^
gelatine, wax, bichromate of potash or negative film are in any way afiected
by it.

The duration of the exposure to light varies from 10 minutes in the
sun for a clear line subject, to from 25 to 50 minutes for a subject in half
tones, according to the density of the negative and the intensity of the Ught
It is almost impossible to judge of the progress of the printing by in«
spcction, and it is necessary to use an aotinameter as a guide to the exposure.
The following form of actinometer has been found to answer well for the
purpose. It consists principally of a box, in the lid of which is fixed s
translucent scale divided in 14 squares of different densities, No. 1 being

1S78.] 1o the Reproduetion of Maps and Flans, 95

almost transparent, while No. 14 is almost quite opaque ; and numbers cor-
responding to the densities are painted in opaque colour on the scale. The
scale is made by taking a ^collodion negative of a drawing shaded in tints
of different strengths, and should be intensified so as to correspond in
density with the kind of negatives it is intended to be used with.

The body of the box contains a block for carrying the sensitive surface,
which may be spread on paper or on a glass plate, and a strip of vulcanised
rubber below it presses the block into close contact with the scale.

I prefer to use in the actinometer a sensitive film of the same com-
position as the printing plate ; small slips of glass are therefore coated with
the gelatine mixture, sensitised, dried and exposed to light at the same
time and in the same manner as the printing plates, and thus the progress of
the action of light can be watched and timed very closely.

When the exposure to light is considered sufficient, the printing plate
is removed from the pressure-frame and laid, gelatine side downwards, on a.
board covered with black cloth. The back, or under surface, of the gelatine
is then exposed to light, for about 10 minutes, to thoroughly harden the
gelatine and prevent it from swelling too much in the after processes. It
is well to conduct this second exposure under a piece of ground glass, in
order to prevent any scratches that may be on the back of the glass from
showing as white lines in the print. The edges of the plate are then pro-
tected by strips of paper coated with solution of india-rubber, and when the
india-rubber is dry, the plate is soaked in water until all the soluble bichro-
mate has been removed, and is then ready for printing.

The plates can be printed in a lithographic press, but then they require to
be fixed on a level stone with plaster of Paris. It has been found, however,
more convenient, and in some respects better, to print them with vertical
pressure in an ordinary Albion platen press ; and in order to prevent the glass
being broken, the bed of the press is fitted with two or three thicknesses of
kamptulicon, besides a sheet of vulcanised india-rubber on which the plate
rests. It is also desirable to place a piece of white paper over the bedding
in order to enable the state of the plate when it is being inked up, to be
better seen.

The inking in requires great skill and care on the part of the printer
and is the most difficult part of the whole operation. The plate having
been well soaked in water is laid on the press, and after being wiped to
remove the excess of moisture, is inked in, if a line subject, with an ordinary
lithographic roller charged with an ink composed of lithographic chalk ink
thinned with a little olive oil, followed by rolling with a smooth roller to
clear away the superfluous ink ; a mask of the required size is laid on the
plate to preserve the margins clean ; over this comes the printing paper
covered with a piece of soft felt, to drive the paper well into the hollows of

96 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Thoiogtapliy [No. %

the plate ; the tjmpan is lowered and the impression pulled in the ordinaij
way. The plate is then damped and inked in again, and so on.

Half-tone subjects are treated in the same manner, but it is sometimes
advisable to use two kinds of ink of different consistence or depth of colour ;
a stiff or dark ink gives force to the shadows, while a thin or lighter
coloured one will bring out the delicate half-tones. Rollers made of gelatine,
glycerine and castor-oil may be used with advanti^e, as they drive the ink
better into the hollows of the lines than the leather rollers. Capt. Abnej,
who has given great attention to these processes, says that the greal;
secret of producing good results is to have the conmiand of first rate rollers.
Glazed enamelled paper is generally used for printing half-tone subjects,
but in some cases unenamelled paper answers well. The most suitable
paper for printing seems to depend partly on the composition of the sensi-
tive surface and partly on the ink.

One of the great drawbacks to the extended use of the photocollotTpe
process for the reproduction of maps is the difficulty of making corrections
on the plates. When the printing surface is a metal plate or lithographic
stone, upon which a map has been either engraved, zincc^raphed or litho-
graphed, additions and erasures may easily be made without any risk of the
loss of the printing surface or even of much damage to it. With the tender
gelatine films the case is different, and although writing or simple lines
may be inserted without much difficulty, it would be almost impos^ble to
successfully alter gradation of shade or to insert shaded details. On the
other hand, the taking out of details must be done by some chemical means
which must always be attended with the imminent risk of raising the gelatine
film from its support and the consequent utter destruction of the printing
plate.

As maps, almost more than any other printed subject, require that it
shall always be possible to make corrections on the printing plates, it is
obvious that the use of any process which will not permit of this being
done must be confined more to the reproduction of maps already printed or
of an ephemeral character than to the preparation of new or standard
ones. And thus, though photocollotype is admirably adapted for repro-
ducing copies of old or other special maps, which are, or can be, finished
once and for all, it is not suited for maps on which corrections are likely to
be required.

With the plates prepared as described we have found that details maj
be inserted by two or three methods. The first is by writing in the re-
quired additions on the dry gelatine surface, using an ink composed of
bichromate of potash, either alone or coloured with Indian ink. After <^
insertion of the additions the plate is exposed to the light for a few minutes
to reduce the bichromate, and may then be washed and printed as osoaL

1878.] to the Beproduetion of Map9 and Flans. 97

Or an ink composed of solution of chrome alum may be used and will not
require exposure to light. In some cases the part to be corrected may be
washed oyer with a solution of bichromate of potash and allowed to dry,
and then the required details may be printed in from another negative.

The taking out of details is more difficult and requires care. It may
be accomplished by washing the part with a strongish solution of caustic
potash or cyanide of potassium. Should a plate print dirty, it mskj be
cleaned up and greatly improved by being washed with a weak solution of
cyanide of potassium, or better, with a solution of citric acid, which not only
clears up plates that print dirty, but at the same time facilitates the inking
in. A weak solution of ammonia is also said to be useful in this
respect.

The process just described was found to answer better in Calcutta for
line- work than for half-tones, and for the latter the following formula for
the gelatine films appeared preferable : —

Gelatine, li ounce.

Glycerine, 1\ dram.

Albumen, 1 ounce.

Bichromate of Potash, 4iO grains.

Chrome Alum, 7 grains.

Water, 12 ounces.

The plates coated with this mixture have to be dried in the dark, but
in other respects the operations are much the same.

The processes in which a thick film of gelatine is spread upon a glass
plate were found to present in Calcutta many inconveniences in the drying
of the films, and the tendency there is in dry weather for the films to peel
away from the glass plates and utterly break up and destroy the surface of
the latter. There is also the constant risk of breaking the plates in the
press. I was therefore led to go back to the old process of Tessi6 du
Mothay and Marechal, in which a thin film of gelatine is supported upon a
metal plate, and finally succeeded very well with the following method which
I have fully described in the * Tear Booh of Photography^ for 1877.

A flat plate of copper, such as used for engraving, is finely grained on
its best side, and having been carefully levelled, is washed with warm water
and coated on the grained side, while wet, with a mixture composed of —

Gelfitine (Nelson's opaque), 16 parts.

Water, 100 „

Bichromate of Potash, 4 „

Formic acid (when the former are dissolved), 4 „

The excess is poured off, so as to leave enough to give a thin even
coating. Half an ounce of gelatine is more than sufficient to cover 450
square inches of plate.

98 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [Xo. 2,

The plate is then replaced in the drying box and when dry is ready for
exposure to light in the usual way ; bat it will be found desirable, in order
to secure perfect contact, to transfer the negative film on to the gelatine
surface in a bath of alcohol as before described.

Formic acid varies in strength and other properties, and if it should be
found that the films nuide by the above formula are too soft, the platfes
may be kept a few days before printing. The addition of a very small
quantity of tartaric acid (about -^^ of a part) will improve the films in this
respect, and so will the cautious addition of some hardening agent, such as
chrome alum, glycerine, glucose, honey, &c.

The printing operations are the same as for the plates already described,
but the use of glue rollers and vertical pressure will be found advantageous.
The thin films have been found to stand the wear and tear of printing well
and to have no tendency to chip or tear away from the plates.

In all cases where the photographic image is impressed directly on the
printing surface, a reversed negative must be used, as before explained, ajid
these are sometimes rather troublesome to produce. I have lately tried
whether the use of this reversed negative could not be dispensed with in
the photoeollotype process, by taking the negative in the usual way direct
on to the thick ground glass plate and then, while still wet and without
varnishing, coating this negative with a thin layer of any of the foregoing
mixtures of gelatine, either with or without bichromate. When the sensitive
gelatine coating is dry, it is exposed to light through the negative on the
under side and allowed to print well through the film. This plan was
found to have many conveniences to recommend it, and to answer very well
for subjects in line, but not for half-tones. For map-work it has the
undoubted advantagea of perfect accuracy of scale and the greatest possible
sharpness of the image.

The foregoing descriptions vrill give an idea of these interesting
processes which are now being very largely used for producing photo-
graphic prints of all kinds, though, I believe, the successful working
of them still presents some difficulties, even in better climates than Indi&
Against their employment for map-work on the large scale there will, how-
ever, always remain the impossibility of joining up several sections of s
large map on the printing surface, the difficulty of reproducing the finest
tints of a shaded map vrith a perfectly clean white ground, and, above all,
the difficulty of making additions and corrections on the plates.

The accompanying specimen of a reproduction of an old map of Bengal
will give an idea of what may be done by the process described at page 93.

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Flam, 90

VII. WOODBUBT-TYPE.

We have already seen that the great drawhack to the production of
photographs in printing ink with continuous gradation of shade, by either
photography or photo-engraving, is the necessity for breaking up the
continuity of gradation by a more or less marked ' grain*, and that this
difficulty has been overcome by the photocoUotype processes.

By a very ingenious process, invented in 186l(, Mr. Walter Woodbury
succeeded in solving the problem in another way, and, by a mode of operation
analogous to ' Nature-Printing', has been able to produce absolutely per-
manent prints with such perfect photographic gradation, combined with
the most exquisite transparent delicacy and richness of tone, that none
but the initiated would know that they were not the ordinary silver
prints.

A tissue is first made by coating a tough film of collodion with a
moderately thick even layer of gelatine and bichromate of potash, slightly
coloured in order to see the progress of the development. When dry,
the tissue is laid collodion side next to the negative film, and exposed to light
proceeding from one direction only, in order to prevent diffused rays acting
through the thick gelatine coating and so blurring the image. This tissue of
gelatine and collodion is then temporarily attached to a glass plate and
treated with hot water, very much in the same way as in the pigment
printing process already described. The whole of the gelatine upon which
the light has not acted, and which therefore remains soluble, is dissolved
away, leaving an image in relief, the highest parts of which represent the
deepest shadows of the picture, while the parts intervening, down to the
lowest, represent the intermediate gradations between the deepest shadows
and the highest lights.

When dry, the gelatine composing this image will be quite hard and
capable of resisting the heavy pressure required to indent it into soft metal,
without itself being injured.

The tissue bearing the image having been stripped from the temporary
support, is laid face downwards on a sheet or block of lead or type-metal,
about \ of an inch thick, between two finely surfaced steel plates and
submitted to the pressure of a very powerful hydraulic press. The pro-
minent parts of the relief are thus forced into the soft metal and produce a
mould the deeper parts of which represent the shades and the shallower the
lights of the picture. As the relief obtained from gelatine and bichro-
mate of potash alone will impart to this mould a smooth surface without
grain, such plates could not be printed with printers' ink, like a copper-
plate engraving. Mr. Woodbury therefore uses a semi-transparent ink
consisting of gelatine coloured with any suitable pigment.

100 J. Waterhouse — The Applieation of Fhoiography No. 2,

The leaden plate or mould is laid in a suitable press of peculiar con-
struction* and slightly greased. A small quantity of the coloured gelatine
having been poured in a liquid state into the middle of the mould, a piece of
suitable paper is laid above it and pressed strongly down, so as to force the
ink thoroughly into the depressions all over the plate and squeeze out all the
ink between the surface of the metal and the paper in the parts forming
the highest lights of the picture. The gelatinous ink is allowed a short
time to ' set* and attach itself to the paper ; the paper is then removed and
brings with it a perfect impression of the picture in coloured gelatine, of
different thicknesses corresponding in intensity and gradation of shade to the
depth in different parts of the plate. The print has now only to be
' fixed' in a solution of alum and when dry is perfectly permanent and
ready to be trimmed and mounted.

The rate of impression is about the same as of ordinary copper-plate
printing and may be carried on quite independently of the light. If very
large numbers are required of a single subject, it is easy to produce as many
printing plates as may be required from the original gelatine relief, which,
may afterwards be put away and kept indefinitely. The cost of printing
is exceedingly small and prints are produced in large numbers at a marvel-
lously cheap rate. As the process requires special mechanical appliances
and apparatus it has generally been worked on the large scale by public
companies.

The Woodbury-type is unfortunately not well adapted for the repro-
duction of maps, because it has been found very difficult to produce im-
pressions of large dimensions, and, owing to the peculiar method of printing,
it is almost impossible to obtain the clear black lines and pure white ground
so indispensable in a good map. The prints also have to be mounted,
which is an objection. However, in special cases where the work is within
the capabilities of the process, it will be found valuable, because it possesses
the great advantage over the collotype processes for the reproduction of
half-tone subjects that the printing of an almost indefinite number of
copies can be carried on with as perfect certainty as in ordinary litho-
graphy or engraving, while in beauty, transparency and delicacy of grada-
tion the Woodbury-type prints are undoubtedly superior to collotypes,

VIII. Photogbaphic ENGEAvnro.

As was noticed in the Introduction, the earliest practical process of
photography was a method of photographic engraving invented by Nicc-
phore Niepce, and since his time nearly every great improvement in photo-
graphy has been applied to this object. Thus, no sooner was the Daguerre-
otype invented than essays were made by Fizeau, Donn6 and others to engrave

* For a drawing of this press, soe Abney*8 Treatise on Fhotographyy p. 175.

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Flam, 101

the images produced on the metal plates. In like manner, the earliest appli-
cation of the peculiar action of the alkaline bichromates upon colloid
substances was Fox Talbot's photoglyphic process, which was soon followed bj
the photo-galvanographic and helioplastic processes of Pretsch and Poitevin.
Engraving processes have also been based upon Swan's pigment-printing
process, the Woodburj-type and the collotype. With the exception,
perhaps, of the second, all these methods, from the earliest to the latest, are
in use at the present time in a more or less modified form.

The object of engraving maps upon copper is to obtain a plate taking
but little storage room and not liable to break, which shall yield a large
number of impressions of tmiform quality and, with due precautions, be
capable of being preserved in a good condition for printing during any
length of time.

Copper-plates have the further advantage that they may be multiplied
to any extent by electrotyping, and corrections may be made when required,
either on the original plate or on the electrotyped matrix or copy. Transfers
may also be made from them to stone or zinc and printed in the^same way
as ordinary lithographs. This procedure is specially applicable when very
large numbers are required or when the subject is to be printed in colours.

Besides these more practical advantages, the superior beauty and finish^
of copper-plate engraving give it the preference for all maps of a permanent
or standard character.

With these objects in view nearly every civilised nation has at leas{>
one engraved map giving the results of the State Surveys on a convenient
scale for general use. For the same reasons map-publishers generally
engrave the maps composing their atlases and other standard publications.

Notwithstanding its many advantages copper-plate- engraving is a
very slow process and is also expensive, because the art of the engraver is
one requiring great artistic and manipulative skill, only to be fully acquired
by an almost life-long apprenticeship. Map-engraving, it is true, does not
require so high a degree of artistic skill as line or aquatint engraving, but
it nevertheless requires a long training, particularly in the more difficult
branch of hill-etching which demands almost as much skill to produce
first-rate results as ordinary line-engraving.

Although the advantages of photographic engraving as a means of
avoiding the long and costly labour Q&. engraving maps by hand are obvious,
for various reasons these processes have not yet come into general use. A
successful commencement has, however, been made by the Italian and
Austrian Governments of employing photography in the production of
their engraved maps, and there is little doubt that before long, photographio
engraving will bo more extensively used for this purpose than it is at pre*
sent, especially as processes are now available by which gradation of shade
14

102 J. WaterhooM — 7%tf Jpplieaium of TKoiogra^hy [No. %

may be obtained witbout difficulty, and the expensive band*work of tha
engraver in biting in or finishing maj to a great extent be dispensed with.

The processes of photographic engraving that have been proposed from
time to time for producing incised images on metal pktes capable of being
printed in the oopper-pkte press, are very numerous. I shall, howev^ con-
fine myself to those which have been most successfully worked and of
which the details have been more or less fully published. Further informa-
tion on the subject will be found in the special works referred to in the
footnotes, and also in Hammann's ^^De% ArU OrapkiquM dmiinit d
multiplier par Vlmpresiion^* and A. Martin's ^^ Handhuch der ^EmaH-
phoiograp\ie und der JBhototypie oder des Liehtdruekee,^* which both give
very complete resumes of the early progress in this branch of photography,
with details of many of the processes. The Photographic Journals and the
Patent Office records may also be consulted.

The principal methods of obtaining an incised image on a metal pUte
by means of photography are :

1. Obtaining a photographic image on a metal plate coated with
asphaltimi and then etching or 'biting in' with acid.

2. Obtaining a photographic image in gelatine on a metal plate and
etching the latter with some substance that will not attack the gelatine.

8. Obtaining an image by the direct action of light on a metal plate,
as in the Daguerreotype process, then forming a metallic reserve to protect
either the lights or shadows of the image and etching with a suitable
mordant.

4. Electrotyping from a relief obtained by the swelling or partial
solution of a chromated gelatine film, either directly or by the intervention
of a cast in wax or plaster.

5. Electrotyping from a relief in insoluble gelatine obtained in the
same way as in the * Autotype' or Pigment-printing process.

6. Electrotyping from a leaden plate on which an image has been im-
pressed from a gelatine relief, as in the Woodbury-type process.

7. Electrotyping from a relief obtained directly on a collodion
positive cliche.

It will be seen that these methods divide themselves into two principal
groups of etching and electrotyping processes.

Etching proeesies with Asphaltum. — ^We have already seen that Niepoe
in his experiments to find a substitute for lithography, made use of the pro-
perty possessed by bitumen of Judsea, or asphaltum, of becoming insoluble in
oil of lavender and other solvents, after exposure to the action of light, to
obtain photographic images on metal plates which were then bitten in with
acid, so as to form engraved plates, usually copies of engravings, though
he also obtained images from nature.

1878.] to the Beproditctian qfMajpi and Plans. 108

Owing to the imperfeotion of photographic appliances in those earlj
days of the art, the results ohtained by Niepce could not have been very
satisfactory, but with better appliances the same process has yielded in the
hands of Niepce de St. Victor, the nephew of the inventor, Amand Durand
and others, results which prove its practicability, and its capabilities for
reproducing images direct from nature or for copying fine line engravings
and similar subjects, for which latter it is much better adapted.*

A process on this principle has been very successfully used at the Im-
perial State-Printing Office, Berlin, for the engraving of plates for bank
notes and other purposes, and I have also tried it myself with fair success.

The following outline will give an idea of the operations.f

A perfectly smooth copper plate, having been thoroughly cleaned and
polished, is coated with a solution of asphaltum in turpentine, to which* a
little oil of lemon is added. It is then carefully dried in the dark so as to
preserve an even coating, free from dust.

The image may be impressed upon the sensitive surface by sun-printing
through an ordinary negative on glass, but as there is by this plan great
risk of losing perfect sharpness by want of close contact between the glass
and the copper plate, it is better to remove the collodion film from the
negative and transfer it on to the surface of the asphaltum, so that it may
be in absolute contact with it all over, and thus secure the utmost possible
sharpness of the image. The collodion film is loosened from the glass in an
acid bath, containing 1 part each of sulphuric and acetic acids in 320 parts
of wat-er, and the transfer is then effected in a bath of 1 part glycerine and
4 parts of water. The transferred film being dry, the plate is ready to be
exposed to light, and as the asphaltum is not very sensitive, the exposure
is somewhat long"— extending from 6 to 36 hours ; but it is better to over-
expose and to work in diffused day-light rather than in the full sunshine.

When the plate is judged to have been sufficiently exposed, the collo-
dion film is removed and the asphaltum surface is rubbed lightly with a tuft
of cotton dipped in olive oil, to which after a short time a little turpentine
is added. The image gradually begins to appear, and by degrees the
unaltered asphaltum is all removed, so that the design appears in clear brown
upon the polished copper. The plate is then washed with soap and water
and allowed to dry.

The next operation is the etching or biting in of the image. The back
of the plate having been well coated with a thick varnish of asphaltum, to
protect it from the action of the acid, the plate is plunged into a trough

• See ^ Train pratique de Orawtr$ Eiliographique tur Acier et tur Vfrre% par M.
Niepce de St. Victor.

t Full detailB will be found in my ' Sepwt on the Cariographie Applieatiom ef
Photography^ p, 79.

lOJj J. Waterbouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

containing a mixture of 1 part cblorate of potasb, 10 parts muriatic acid
and 48 parts water, and allowed to remain till tbe weakest lines of the
drawing begin to appear. It is tben well washed and tbe aspbaltnm cover-
ing tbe lines is removed witb benzole. Tbe design will now be seen stand-
ing in a sligbt relief, and an electrotype must be made in order to oUain
a printing plate from wbieb impressions may be taken in tbe ordinary way.
Tbe sbarpness of the lines is- better preserved by making a relief and
electrotyping, than it would be by biting in.

Tbe best results by tbis process are obtained from subjects in line, and
even witb these tbe operation of ' biting in* demands a little manipnlatire
skill. Good results have, however, been obtained in reproducing half-tone
subjects, but they require the greatest skill on the part of tbe manipulator
al^d generally much re-touching by a practised engraver.

A modification of Niepce*s process, by which good results have been
obtained^ has been introduced by M. N^gre, it is briefly as follows :

A plate of steel is covered with a coating of bitumen or bichromated
gelatine and exposed to light under a negative. After development by a
suitable solvent, which removes the parts not acted on by light, the plat»
is placed in a solution of gold and, by means of a galvanic battery, a thin
regular coating of gold is deposited on those parts which present a dean
metallic surface ; the remainder of the sensitive coating is then removed,
and a beautiful damascened design in gold is obtained. Tbe gold adheres
well to tbe metal surface and as it is not attacked by the etching liquid,
the design may be etched without injuring the ground of the plate.

This process also appears only suitable for line work, though it is said
that satisfactory results in half-tone have been obtained with it.

M. Baldus, of Paris, is said to have used a similar process, but to have
etched his plates in a solution of sulphate of copper by attaching them
to the positive pole of a galvanic battery.

The processes dependent on the use of asphaltum are all more or less
slow and uncertain in practice, and if not already quite abandoned m fxvovi
of the quicker and more certain processes dependent on the use of gelatine
and bichromate of potash, are rapidly becoming so, especially as their use-
fulness is almost entirely confined to reproducing subjects in line. Exceed-
ingly fine results can, however, be produced in this manner, and it is
particularly valuable in cases where an ' etching' or * biting in' process is
required, because the bitumen forms a much better ' resist' for the acid or
etching liquid than does gelatine, as we shall now see.

Etching processes with Gelatine, — In 1852, Mr. Henry Fox Talb(^
brought forward a method of photographic engraving called ' Photoglyphy/
which is of some interest as being the first practical photographic process
founded on Ponton's discovery of the decomposition of bichromate of

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Flans 105

potash in contact with organic matter under the influence of light. Talhot
found that by the action of light, a dried film of gelatine mixed with an
alkaline bichromate became impermeable to certain fluids in proportion to
the intensity of the action of the light upon it. He coated steel plates
with a thin film of gelatine and bichromate of potash, and after exposure
to the light under a photographic positive, he etched the image so produced
with a solution of bichloride of platinum which, penetrating the unaltered
gelatine in the parts protected from the light and attacking the underlying
metal, produced the shadows of the resulting picture. Some very promising
results were obtained in this manner, and great expectations were enter-
tained of its utility in producing engraved plates for book illustration
and other purposes. These hopes, however, have not been fulfilled and the
process, though remarkable as the first of the many valuable methods g>i
photographic press-printing dependent on the use of gelatine and the
alkaline bichromates, has inherent defects and difficidties which seem to
render it of little practical value.*

M. Baldus has successfully employed a modification of the photo-
glyphic process for line-work, f He coats a copper-plate with gelatine and
bichromate and exposes it under a negative or a positive, then etches in a solu-
tion of perchloride of iron, which attacks the copper in all the parts not acted
upon by the light, and thus a first relief is obtained. As this relief is not
sufficient, the plate is inked in with a printing roller, when the ink attaches
itself to the parts in relief and protects them from the action of the etching
liquid. This procedure is repeated till the desired effect is produced. If a
negative is used an incised plate is obtained, which may be printed in the
copper-plate press. If a positive is used the image is in relief and suitable
for being printed with type. I have found that the reliefs obtained in this
way are exceedingly sharp, though the gelatine films will not stand the
action of the etching fluid for very long.

Messrs. Leitch and Co., of London, have lately introduced a similar
process, called by them * Photogravure.* It appears to be due to M. Gamier,
who has had great experience in these processes and produced some very
fine results. The method of working is a secret, but it is said that a metal
plate is coated with a sensitive composition capable of resisting the action
of acids. The photographic image is impressed on the sensitive surface
through a negative and is then etched with perchloride of iron. The etch-
ing is said to be to a certain extent automatic, that is to say, the etching
action on the lines ceases at different periods in proportion to their fineness.

♦ A full description of Talbot's process, with specimens, will be found in tho
appendix to the English translation of Tissandier's * Eistory and Handbook of Fhoto-
graphyy* edited by J. Thomson.

t See the above work, p. 207.

100 J. WaterhouBe — 1%« Applicaiim of Photography [No. 2,

Daguerreotype Etching. — 1£xdj attempte have been made to engrare
the beautiful and delicate pbotographic imag^ fonned on the Daguerreotype
plate. Thus, Donn£ simplj etched the image with dilute nitric acid, wiiieh
attacked the silver forming the shadows, leaving the whites protected bj
the mercury untouched. Grove etched the plates with the aid of the
galvanic battery. Fizeaa first etched as deeply as possible with dUaie
muriatic acid and then, having filled up the hollows with drying oil,
deposited gold upon the lights ; the oil having then been removed, the plate
was bitten with dilute nitric acid. In order to render the silver plate more
capable of standing the wear and tear of printing it was covered with a thin
film of copper, which could easily be removed and renewed when required.

Other processes were also put forward, but they all failed, from tiie
^l^culty of biting the image to a sufficient depth and of obtaining the
requisite ' grain' to enable a large number of impressions to be pulled ofL
None of them seem to have ever come into practical use and, like the
Daguerreotype, they have almost fallen into oblivion*

If with the superior knowledge and appliances of the present day, any
such process could be successfully worked, it would probably offer many
advantages over any other etching process, especially for mape and other
works in line.

Several ingenious processes of chemical engraving applicable to photo-
g^phy have been proposed by Messrs. Gamier and Salmon, Vial, Dulos
and others ; but as they do not appear to have come into practical use, it
will be unnecessary to enter into details regarding them. Descriptions of
them will be found in Eoret*s * Manuel du Qraveur \

Though they have the advantage of rapidity, all these procesaes, in
which the image is obtained by etching or biting in with acids or other
etching fluids, are open to the objection that for all subjects containing
fine and delicate lines the etching and stopping out require almost the
same manipulative skill and care as in ordinary engraving, and the processes
consequently become expensive to work. There is also a tendency for the
lines to become coarse and heavy. In those gelatine processes in which
the etching fluid acts through the gelatine it gradually loosens the latter
from its support and attacks the parts which should not be bitten at alL
These defects are to a great extent obviated in the processes we are now
about to consider, in which the printing plates are produced by the electro-
deposition of copper on the photographic image.

Eleetrotyping methods, — In nearly all the electrotyping methods the
printing plate is obtained by depositing copper on a gelatine relief obtidned
by the agency of light, or on a cast in plaster, gutta-pereha, &c. taken from
such a gelatine relief.

If a dry fihn of chromated gelatine on a suitable support be exposed to

J

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans, 107

light under a photographic cliche, and then plunged into hot water, the
parts acted on hy light heing insoluble will remain on the support in differ-
ent d^rees of relief according to the intensity of the light, while the
unexposed parts will be washed away. An image in high relief formed of
hard and insoluble gelatine will thus be obtained^ from which a cast or
electrotype in intaglio may be made.

If, however, instead of using hot water, the plate be plunged into cold
water, the gelatine will be found to absorb water and swell up in the parts
protected from the light, while in the parts acted on by the light it will only
slightly absorb the water, and these parts will thus form hollows. The
power of absorbing water will also be found to be in exact proportion to the
degree of protection from light. In this case, an image in low relief
is obtained which may also be moulded from, or electrotyped. *

Upon these two principles several processes of producing printing-plates
both for copper-plate and letter-press printing have been founded with
more or less success.

The first process of the kind was Paul Pretsch's ' Photogalvanography',
invented in 1854. He appears at first to have obtained his plates by coat-
ing a glass with gelatine and bichromate, exposing to light and then wash-
ing away the soluble gelatine and taking a mould of the resulting relief ,
in g^tta-percha, from which an electrotype was made in the usual manner.*

This process gave fair results both in line and half-tone, but, owing to
the washing away of the soluble gelatine being effected on the side of the
film exposed to light, the plates were defective and required a good deal of
touching up by skilled engravers, which vastly increased the expense of their
production. The process failed as a commercial speculation.

Almost immediately afterwards, in 1855, Poitevin published methods
of obtaining plates from the gelatine reliefs obtained by swelling the sen-
sitive films in cold water. Plaster casts were either made from them or the
gelatine surface itself was metaUised and electrotyped in the usual way.f

This method produced tolerable results, though the prints were always
somewhat coarse, owing to the fact that swollen gelatine will not g^ve the
same sharpness as when dry.

Both these processes were more or less unsuitable for reproducing sub-
jects in half-tone — Pretsch's because in the process of washing away the
soluble gelatine, the lighter half-tones were liable to be lost — Poitevin's be-
cause of the difficulty of keeping the swelling in proper relative proportion,
owing to more absorbent parts of the film lying underneath less absorbent
parts. Both processes also failed to give the necessary ' grain,' without
which the proper inking of the engraved plates could not be effected.

• See * Journal of the Fhotographn Society of Zomd&ny' Vol. HI, p. 68.
t See ' Traits de Vimprettum photographiqtte mm §ih d^argeni^ p. 49.

10<i J. Waiterhouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

Various attempts were made to improve on tbese processes, bat an-
Buccessf ullj, until M. Placet showed that it was necessary to adopt in them
the same principle of exposing on one side of the gelatine film and develop-
ing on the other, which, as we have seen, had previous! j been shown to he
necessary for the preservation of the half-tones in the pigment-printing
process, and for a similar reason.

M. Placet indicated several ingenious ways of obtaining his results.*
They may, however, be briefly simmied up as follows :

A film of chromated gelatine is exposed under a transmitted positive
cliche, so that the light acts on the under side of the film ; this is done either
by covering the collodion side of the clich6 itself with the sensitive coatings
or by using a thin transparent sheet of transfer collodion or mica as a sap-
port for it. After exposure to the light, the film is soaked in water, where*
upon those parts which have been protected from the light swell up in
proportion to the amount of the action of light upon them. By treating
the moidd in relief thus obtained with metallic solutions, an electrotype
copy in copper may be produced, which can be printed from in the copper-
plate press.

If a negative cliche is used, the unaltered gelatine must be dissolved or
a second electrotype must be made.

M. Placet also suggested the employment of a sensitive surface which
would become soluble under the influence of light, such as a mixture of
gelatine, or other colloid, with perchloride of iron and tartaric acid, as
recommended by Poitevin for pigment-printing. In this case the solvent
acting on the exposed side hollows out the image, in the same way as an
etching fluid does on copper, but with the advantage that each line has only
the exact strength given to it by the intensity of the cliche. Or the altered
parts of the gelatine film may simply be swollen with cold water, producing
an image in relief. In either case, a mould is taken from the gelatine and
electrotyped, or copper may be deposited on the gelatine itself.

By his process M Placet was able to obtain very perfect gpradation of
shade in the half-tones of his pictures, with a fine natiiral grain produced
by some means which he did not divulge. He has lately, however, de-
scribed a method of producing the grain, which consists in plunging the gela-
tine plate into a solution of bichromate of potash and then treating it with
a solution of protosulphate of iron containing acetic acid.t The principle
he lays down is first to treat the gelatine with a solvent and then with a
solution of some substance that will tan or contract it.

Messrs. Fontaine, Avet and Drivet have also proposed similar processes,
in which they have partially overcome the difiiculty of obtaining a proper

♦ Soo Davonno, * Le9 Frogrdt de la JPhotoffraphie,' p. 185.

t Soe * Bulletin de la Soc, Frane, de FhotographU; Vol. XXIII, p. 180.

1878.] to the Beproduction of Maps and Flans, 109

' grain' by interposing between the clich6 and the gelatine fihn a fine net-
work or an impression of an engraved or roulette tint ; but these artificial
grains have a disagreeable effect, and the methods seem to have fallen into
disuse, except for line-work and photo-typography, which will be described
further on. Avet's process is, however, I believe, still in use for producing
the maps of the Italian Surveys.

Oeymefs method, — The fourth method, that of electrotyping from a
gelatine relief obtained by the pigment-printing process, is somewhat similar
in principle to Placet's process, but as there are important differences and
the process appears likely to prove of some utility, it may well be treated
separately.

According to M. Geymet, who has very fully described the process and
all the manipulations of preparing and electrotyping the reliefs in his
*^ Oravure Selio^raphique" it was the invention of M. Audra, a French
amateur.

Pigmented gelatine tissue is sensitised and exposed to light exactly in
the manner described at p. 78 for the ' Autotype' process. It is transferred
to a smooth glass or a polished copper plate, developed in warm water, and when
dry is metallised and electrotyped. If the subject is one in line or dot only
the above operations are sufficient, but if the subject is a photograph from
nature, or any other with gradation of shade, it is necessary to obtain a
^ grain', and this M. Geymet does by taking a copper-plate with its surface
grained or engraved with a ruled or roulette tint, inking it up in the ordi-
nary way and then covering it with a coating of transfer collodion. When
dry, the film of collodion is stripped off the plate and carries with it the
impression of the grain. This film is then placed between the cliche and
the sensitive gelatine film and serves to break up the shadows in the more
transparent parts of the clicb6.

A similar process has been used at the Dep6t de la Guerre, in Belgium,
for the reproduction of maps.*

Last year, whilst making some experiments on this process, I succeed-
ed in obtaining the necessary ' grain' by chemical means which produce a
finer and less artificial effect, and I have also made a few other modifica-
tions in the process, which may be worth recording at length.

A piece of the ordinary autotype tissue is sensitised in a 5 per cent
solution of bichromate of potash. When dry, it is exposed to light under a
reversed n^ative and then transferred in cold water to the surface of a well
polished copper plate and squeegeed down into close contact with it. In
order to prevent subsequent adherence to the newly deposited copper in the
electrotyping bath, the copper plate is silvered by rubbing it with a little of
the following solution mixed with tripoli.

• See Mactt and Ilunnot ' Traite dc Topographify ^f.,' p. 330.
15

110 J. Waterhouse — The Applicatum of FhoiograpJiy [No. 2,

Nitrate of Silver, 1 part.

Cyanide of Potassium, 10 „

Water, 100 „

The gelatine tissue attached to the copper plate is allowed to dry,
and then developed in warm water in the usual manner, great care being
taken not to loosen the lines, an accident which is very liable to happen,
though the preliminary drying of the tissue before development teods to
prevent it.

When the image is quite clear from all soluble gelatine, the plate is
well drained and plunged into a bath containing —

Tannin, 5 parts.

Strong Spirits-of-wine, 100 „

This at once removes all moisture from the gelatine relief, hardens it, and
gives it a fine grain, coarser in the shadows than in the lights. The plate
remains a few minutes in this bath till the action is complete in the deepest
shadows ; the tannin is then washed ofE with a little spirits-of-wine, and the
plate is allowed to dry.

The gelatine relief has now to be prepared for receiving the electrotype
deposit. A band of copper having been soldered to it, the back of the pkte
is coated with Brunswick black, to prevent deposition of the copper upon
it. When the backing is dry, the margins of the picture are cleaned with
a little of the silvering solution. The gelatine surface then receives %
very slight coating of wax dissolved in turpentine, which is well polished off,
and is rubbed over with fine plumbago or silver-bronze powder to render the
surface conducting. The plate is then ready to be placed in the depositiBg
bath.

Any good electrotyping arrangement may be used, but I prefer a Smee's
battery with a separate depositing trough, containing a solution of 10 puts
each of sulphate of copper and sulphuric acid in 100 parts of water.

A plate of copper, to serve as an anode and connected with the silver
plate of the battery, is laid horizontally about an inch above the bottom of
the depositing trough which should be large enough to allow the plate
bearing the gelatine relief to be slipped under the anode. The relief -pl^te
is connected with the zinc plates of the battery and, when everything else
is ready, the circuit is completed by slipping it into the depositing trough
under the anode; By laying the plates horizontally in this manner the
deposit is more even and the gelatine film seems to be more readily co^red
with copper.

When the deposit of copper is of sufficient thickness it is separated
from the matrix, and only requires a gentle * oil-rubbing' to be fit f<tf
printing.

1878.] to the Reproduction of Maps and Plans. Ill

The plates obtained by this method show very good half-tone with an
almost imperceptible grain, giving the effect of a fine chalk-drawing.

I have lately tried to obtain the images upon the copper by the double
transfer process, making use of a flexible temporary support, consisting
of paper coated with india-rubber, as first proposed by Swan, which can
easily be removed with benzole after the transfer of the gelatine image to
the copper. The ' grain* is given to the image by soaking it in water after
the removal of the india-rubber paper, and then applying the solution of
tannin in alcohol. This plan seems likely to be successful, if so, it will
greatly simplify the operations and enable engraved plates to be obtained
from any ordinary negative without the trouble of reversing.

By electrotyping direct from the gelatine relief, the results are always
rather heavier and coarser than they should be, because, although hardened
and insoluble, the gelatine relief can always absorb a little of the copper
solution in the depositing trough and consequently the image swells and
loses sharpness.

The strong tanning given to the gelatine film and the preliminary
coating of wax before metallising the surface obviate this defect to a consid-
erable extent ; but it may perhaps be better to obtain a matrix in lead by
pressure from the gelatine relief, and then to obtain the printing plate by
electrotyping twice from the lead matrix. This is a more round-about and
expensive method, but is likely to yield finer results and has been adopted
by Woodbury and Rousselon in the processes next to be considered.

The process is simple and if it could be successfully worked out it
might be usefully employed in this country in reproducing shaded maps
and for other miscellaneous purposes. It has the very great advantage
over photo- collotype that the plates can be corrected, if necessary, and can
be printed in any numbers in the ordinary copper- plate press without risk
of breakage or damage to the printing surface.

Wbodhwry-type methods, — It has already been shown that in the Wood-
bury-type process the photographic image is impressed into a soft metal
plate by means of a relief in insoluble gelatine on a collodion support, and
that instead of impressions being printed in ordinary printers' ink they are
made in coloured gelatine. In such prints the gradation of shade is conti-
nuous and there is no perceptible grain.

Mr. Woodbury has proposed an ingenious method for obtaining gela-
tine reliefs with a granular surface, so that, when impressed into soft metal,
electrotypes in copper may be obtained from the latter, which will serve as
printing-plates for printing with printers' ink in the copper-plate press, and
yield superior results to those obtained by electrotyping immediately from
the gelatine relief.

A plate of glass is waxed and coated with a thin film of collodion, and a

112 J. Wnt«rhou«e — The Jpplicatian of Photography [No. %

mixture of gelatine and bichromate of potash, containing a quantity of fine
emery, powdered glass or charcoal is poured over it and allowed to ' set'.
The gelatine film is then dried and taken from the glass, and the collodion
bide exposed beneath a negative. After a sufficient exposure, it is tempo-
rarily attached, on the collodion side, with india-rubber solution, to a flbeet
of glass and washed in warm water.

The resulting granular image is then pressed into a sheet of soft metal
by means of the hydraulic press. The soft metal plate has an electrotype
made from it in copper, and another plate, subsequently covered with a
coating of iron, is again made from this to serve as the printing-plate, the
first copper plate being kept as a reserve.*

Mr. Woodbury also describes another method which in aome respects
resembles Qeymet's, before described.

Paper is successively coated with three or more mixtures of gelatine,
bichromate of potash and some granular substance in different degrees of
fineness — first with the coarsest and lastly with the finest. When dry, the
tissue is exposed under a negative, transferred under water to a finely polished
plate of zinc or steel, then washed in warm water as usual, and when dry is
ready for pressure into the soft metal block. In this case, the light tones
are composed of the finest grains and the shadows of the coarsest. .

M. Rousselon, the manager of Messrs. Goupil's photographid works
at Asni^res, near Paris, has obtained engraved plates with remarkably good
half-tones by a process somewhat similar to the Woodbury-type, which is
also largely worked by Messrs. Gk)upiL The peculiarity is in the grain,
which is obtained by the addition to the sensitive mixture of gelatine and
bichromate of some substance which has the property of causing the film
to become granular under the influence of light, the granular effect being
increased in proportion to the intensity of action of the light. The other
operations are the same as in the first of Mr. Woodbury's processes just
described. The details of this process are a secret, but it is said that the
substance used for producing the grain is chloride of calcium.

I am not aware of either Woodbury's or Bousselon's processes being
utilised for the reproduction of maps, but in certain cases they could, no
doubt, be usefully employed. The only difficulty seems to be that an
immensely powerful hydraulic press is required for large subjects.

JPhoto-mezzotini. — Tlie Editor of the ^BriiUik Journal of Phoiogrt^^n^
has lately suggested a process of photo-mezzotint engraving founded on the
' dusting on' or ' powder' process, already alluded to.f

A polished steel plate is thinly coated with —

* ^British Journal Photographie AlfnanaCj* 1872, p. 40.
t 'Briiuh Journal of Fhotography; Vol. XXIV, p. 170.

187S.] to the Beprodueiion of Maps and Plans. 113

Saturated solution o{ bichromate of ammonia, ... 5 drachms.

Honey, 3 „

Albumen, 3 „

Water, H V^^^-

When the coating is thoroughly dry, the plate is exposed to light
under a transparency. A large camePs hair brush is charged with a mix-
ture of the two finest kinds of emery powder, and applied with a circular
whisking motion all over the surface. The powder attaches itself to those
parts of the plate on which the light has not acted, precisely in proportion
to the amount of protection they have received, owing to the unaltered
parts of the film attracting moisture and becoming 'tacky.' The most
* tacky* parts, forming the deep shadows of the picture, will attract the
coarsest particles of the emery, the finer parts will take finer emery and the
highest lights will take none at all. When the picture is fully developed,
it is placed face to face against a polished plate of softer metal and passed
between a pair of rollers, so that the emery powder image may be indented
into the polished metal. The plate is then burnished in parts by a skilled
engraver and when the desired result is obtained, is printed in the usual
way in the copper-plate press.

This process seems capable of rendering useful service in the repro-
duction of maps.

Scamoni's method, — The last method is that recommended by Herr
G. Scamoni, of the Imperial Russian State-paper Office, and is fully described
in his ' Handbuch der Heliographiey^ already referred to. The results are
exceedingly good, but the process is only suitable for line work.

Herr Scamoni having obtained a suitable negative of a drawing or
other line isubject, makes a positive copy of it in the camera by the wet
collodion process, and after fixing, treats this positive with various successive
intensifying solutions, so as to give it a very sensible relief. After drying
the plate is varnished with a thin varnish and coated with fine plumbago,
after which it is electrotyped in the usual way.

In the specimens I have seen of this process the lines are exceedingly
sharp and fine, and it would seem well adapted for map- work.

A photo-mechanical process has lately been introduced by Messrs.
Aubel and £[aiser of Lindenhohe, near Cologne, and called ' Aubeldruck.'
The results for line-work are very superior but the process is a secret.
It is believed to consist in some method of etching a glass negative, so that
prints may be obtained direct from the glass surface or by transfer to stone.

In all cases where the printing-plates are obtained by electro-deposi-
tion of copper, and many copies are required, it is necessary to protect the
engraved surface of the plate with a coating of iron by the process known
as * acierage' or * steel facing.' This enables a very large number of copies

114 J. Waterhouse — T^e Applieaium of Photogre^hy [No. 2,

to be printed without deterioration of the plate, and the coating can easOj
be removed and renewed whenever required. Details will be found in Ure's
' Dictionary of ArU^ Manufactures and Mines, article EKOBAYiKa.

IX. Photo-ttpogbapht.

The object of the photo-tjpographic processes is to obtain a surface
block by photographic agency, that may be set up with type in the same
way as woodcut, stereotyped or electrotyped blocks, and be printed in the
ordinary printing press. The process offers great advantages in the
rapidity with which the blocks may be made and printed off in large
numbers. Up to the present time no entirely satisfactory method has beea
discovered for printing subjects in half-tones in this way, though Mr. Dun-
can Dallas has produced some very promising results. The processes are,
therefore, almost entirely limited to the reproduction of subjects in line
or dot alone.

The operations in this branch of photographic reproduction are based
upon exactly the same principles as the photo-engraving processes just con-
sidered, and in some of them the only difference is the substitution of
a positive clich6 for a negative, or vice versd.

The existing processes may be divided into three classes :

Ist. Those in which a mould is made from a relief in swollen gelatine.

2nd. Those in which the image is obtained in asphaltum or gelatine
on a metal plate and bitten in.

drd. Those in which an image in a waxy and resinous ink is obtained
by the methods described under the head of photozincography, then trans-
ferred to a metal plate and bitten in.

Moulding Processes, — Of the first class several methods have been
introduced from time to time, but they are all on the same principle and are
modifications of Pretsch*s and Poitevin*s processes already described, differ-
ing, as a rule, merely in technicalities which being trade secrets have not
been fully published.

The following method is a typical one. A glass plate or other suitable
surface is coated with a mixture of gelatine and bichromate of potash and
when dry exposed to light under a negative. After this, it is immersed in
cold water till the parts unaltered by the light, which represent the whites
of the original drawing, swell up to the required height, leaving the lines
quite sunk. The plate is then removed from the water and, the superfluous
moisture having been carefully blotted off, is ready to have a cast made
from it.

This may be done in two ways first, by metallising the gelatine surface
either by means of plumbago or bronze powder, oj by reducing silver upon
it by applying a solution of nitrate of silver followed by treatment with a

1878.] to the Beproduotion of Mrrps and Flans, 115

fiolution of pjrogallic acid or of phosphorus in bisulphide of carbon. The
gelatine relief then receives a thin deposit of copper in the usual way. The
thin copper electrotype is backed up with type metal, planed and mounted
on a wooden block so as to be of the height of type.

This method gives the finest results but takes time.

The second method is to take a cast of the gelatine relief in type-
metal. A cast in plaster, wax, &c. must first be taken from the gelatine, a
second cast in plaster is made from this, and then stereotyped in the usual
manner. This method is quicker than the last, but the results are coarser.

These processes are now largely used for illustrations in books and
newspapers, but, so far as I know, have not been regularly applied to the
reproduction of maps.

Inching processes, — The processes in the second class, in which a metal
plate on which the image has been obtained on a sensitive coating of
asphaltum or gelatine is bitten in with an etching liquid, though capable of
giving very perfect results, are not, I believe, so much used as the other
methods which are quicker and more simple.

A photographic image is impressed from a reversed negative on a cop-
per or zinc plate prepared as in the Berlin engraving process described
at p. 103, and, after development with olive oil and turpentine, is bitten in
so as to yield an image in sufficiently high relief for surface printing, the
precaution being taken of protecting the finest parts of the work as soon
as they are sufficiently bitten, by covering them with stopping-out varnish.

If the sensitive surface is chromated gelatine, the soluble gelatine may
be removed or not, but the etching fluid must be such that it will not
dissolve or remove the gelatine from the surface of the plate — solutions
of perchloride of iron, bichloride of platinum, nitrate of silver in alcohol,
bichromate of ammonia in dilute sulphuric acid are some of the most
suitable mordants for the ptirpose. In any case, the full amount of relief
cannot be obtained through the gelatine at one operation. After the first
biting-in the gelatine film must be removed and the lines protected from
the further action' of the etching fluid.

Qillotage. — The last class, in which a photographic transfer in resinous
ink is made on a metal plate, and then bitten in, comprises the simplest
and most largely used of these processes.

The process generally employed is substantially the same as Gillot*s
** paniconography", now commonly called * Gillotage,' which is largely used
for illustrated papers and various other purposes.

A polished zinc plate, which has been strongly varnished at the back to
protect it from the acid in the subsequent operations, receives a transfer in
greasy ink, either from an engraved copper plate, a lithographic drawing
on paper, or a photo-transfer print prepared as for photozincography.

ll(i J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photo^aph^ [Xo. 2,

The plate is then etched in the usual way and rolled up with a Tarnish
ink, containing a large proportion of resinous matter ; it is then dusted with
powdered resin, which sticks to the lines and renders them more capable of
resisting the acid ; the superfluous resin is brushed o£E and the plate is gentlj
heated.

The edges of the plate and the large white spaces are covered with
shellac varnish and when the varnish is thoroughly dry, the plate is plunged
into a trough containing very weak dilute nitric acid, kept in constant
motion, and is left until the finest parts are sufS^ciently bitten, which
generally takes about a quarter of an hour ; it is then taken out of the
trough, washed, dried, and placed on a sort of grating over a charcoal fire.
Under the influence of the heat, the coating of ink and resin on the
lines, heing gently softened, flows down and protects the sides of the
hollows formed by the first biting, filling up the spaces where the lines
are very close. As soon as this effect is produced the plate is allowed
to cool and then inked with a lithc^raphic roller, as if a proof was going to
be pulled. It is again dusted with powdered resin, and is then ready for a
second biting in, which is to attack the parts somewhat lighter, and there-
fore may be effected with stronger acid.

The operations of inking, dusting with resin, heating and biting with
acid are repeated several times till the plate presents only a uniform black
colour. Then the plate is bitten with strong dilute acid which bites out the
parts to be left completely white. The large whites, which have been
covered all along with a strong shellac varnish, are then cut out with a saw,
and the plate is ready to be mounted on a wooden or leaden block for print-
ing. These plates usually require considerable touching up to take off the
ragged edges of the lines caused by the spreading of the ink, though this may
also be done by repeating the inking and biting in, so as to remove the
steps formed by the successive bitings.*

This process has been applied at the Imprimerie Nationale, Paris, for
producing large geological maps, but the special precautions that had to be
taken in " overlaying" the plates in the press so as to print properly were
very tedious, and must have largely increased the expense and lessened the
use of the process. Messrs. Yves and Barret, of Paris, are said to use it
largely for reproducing maps and engineers' plans, &c.

JPhotO'hlocks in half -tone, — Many attempts have been made from
time to time to obtain surface blocks from photographs from nature and
other shaded subjects, but with imperfect success. If this object could be
successfully attained, it is easy to understand that it would be of im-
mense value for book and newspaper illustration and many other purposes.
There are, unfortunately two grave difficulties to be overcome — one caused
• See Bayauno, * Xe* Frogres de la Photographies p. 20X.

1878.] to the Bej^oduction of Ma/p% and Flam. 117

by the fact that to produce a successful printing block the surface of
all the lines or dots which receive the ink must be very nearly on one
uniform level, and therefore the moulding processes above described are
inapplicable. The second and greater difficulty is to obtain a suitable
grain to break up the continuous gradation of shade in the photograph.

M. Eodriguez, of Lisbon, has proposed an ingenious method by which
promising results have been obtained. He makes a paste of sugar of milk,
or some other substance in powder soluble in nitric acid, with a little oil of
lavender and bitumen, and adds a sufficient quantity of it to a solution of
bitumen in turpentine. The metal plate is thinly coated with this in the
ordinary way, exposed to light and developed with turpentine. The plate
is then plunged into a bath of dilute nitric acid which gradually penetrates
the resinous coating and dissolves the substance used for forming the
grain, breaking up the preparation more or less according to the thickness
of the bitumen, and thus reproduces the half -tints of the originals.*

In many processes of collotype the gelatine film presents a very
marked grain, which may be coarse or fine according to the composition
employed. It is probable, though I have not tried it nor, so far as I can
recollect, seen it proposed, that blocks showing very fair half-tone could
be obtained by taking a print from such a plate with a grain, transferring
it to zinc and then biting it in by a method similar to Gillot's already
described. Yery great care would have to be taken in the successive
etchings to preserve the uniformity of surface and protect the finest
tints from being bitten too much.

The prints in half-tone obtained by Mr. D. Dallas' process, known
as " Dallastint", appear to have been produced by some such method.
This, however, is only a conjecture on my part, because no details of the
process have been published.

M. Eousselon has, I believe, obtained fair results by similar transfers
from his engraved plates, and it is probable also that a transfer to zino
from one of the plates, prepared by the modification proposed by myself of
Qeymet's photo-engraving process, bitten in in the same way, might also
answer the purpose, though the grain is perhaps scarcely strong enough.

Details of several of the methods of photo-typography will be found
in Motteroz's " JEssai sttr les grammes chimiques en relief ^^ and Scherer'a
" Lehrhuch der Ohemiffraphie,'*

X. Miscellaneous Processes.

In addition to the processes by which photographic prints are obtained
directly by the aid of light, there are several ways in which photography
can be employed as a useful auxiliary in obtaining correct tracings for the

• 8f)o ' Bulletin de la Soc. Franc, de Fhoiographie; pp 208, 254.
16

118 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography [Xo. 2,

use of the draughtsman, engraver or lithographer, thus saving all the labour
of hand-t racing and obtaining also a far more accurate image than could
possibly be obtained in any other waj.

Blue- Prints, — It is well known that when photographed a pale blue
colour acts exactly as if it were white. If, therefore, we can obtain by
photography an accurate image of any original drawing or other subject in
pale blue ink, either on the same, an enlarged or reduced scale, it will be
possible to redraw the whole or part with black ink over the blue print, in a
style suitable to be again reproduced by photography, without fear of obtain-
ing a double image. It will also be obvious that the blue ground-work will
be more complete and more accurate than any tracing by hand or pantograph
could possibly be.

It has already been stated that this method has been extensively used
in the Survey of India for making reductions of maps to smaller scales, and
at the same time generalising the details on the large-scale maps so as to
adapt them to and render them more suitable for the smaller scale.

The same system may be applied to the production of maps or plans
in several colours, thus : supposing a map is to be reduced and printed in
three colours, black for the outline and names, brown for the hills, and blue
for the streams and other water.

Three blue prints are given to the draughtsman who draws on the first
only the outline and names, on the second the hills, and on the third t-he
water. These three drawings are then very carefully photographed all
on the same scale, and transfers are made from them on to three stones or
zinc plates, which are then used for printing the diSerent colours of the map
just as in ordinary chromo-lithography.

There is no limit to the number of colours that may be employed, and
as the blue-prints are all on the same scale, very perfect ' register* may be
secured, if due care be taken in the drawing and subsequent photographic
operations.

The advantage of using photo-zincography for preparing the blue-
prints is that in reducing a large-scale map, the transfers of the several
sections may be joined together and printed off in one sheet, and thus
may be redrawn in a more complete manner than if the sections had each to
be drawn separately and afterwards joined up.

It is not, however, always desirable or possible to obtain the blue
prints by photozincography, and they may be obtained in a more direct
manner by coating paper with bichromate of potash and gelatine, exposing
imder a negative, well washing the print with hot water to dissolve the
gelatine, then steeping it in a solution of proto-sulphate of iron, again well
washing and then applying a solution of f errocyanide of potassium, and
finally well washing. A pale blue print is thus obtained which will answer

1878.] to the Eeproduetion of Maps and P/ans, 119

every purpose. The * cyanotype* process, before described, might also be
used, but the blue is much more intense and would be liable to produce
a double image on the copy.

Besides its uses in the Survey Department, the blue-print method is
also appreciated and utilised by engineers and other public officers in India,
who desire from time to time to show alterations or improvements on a
standard plan, or wish to make use of a standard map for showing their
own special requirements.

Bichromate-prints. — In the case of miscellaneous subjects which it
is desirable to lithograph, photography can also be usefully applied in giving
the lithographio- draughtsman an accurate tracing over which he may make
his transfer-drawing in the usual way. This was formerly done by making
a silver-print on the required scale, and then either tracing over it on
lithographic tracing-transfer paper, or coating the print itself with the
composition used for lithographic transfer paper and re-drawing on the
print itself ; but in either case, the dark colour of the photograph inter-
feres very much with the drawing.

A method of overcoming this difficulty has been suggested by Mr.
Fraser S. Crawford of the Government Photo-lithographic Office, Adelaide,
S. Australia, and has proved exceedingly useful here in Calcutta. A print
is taken from the negative, on the paper prepared with gelatine and bichro-
mate of potash for the photozincographic transfers, but it must be printed
as deeply as possible, so that the lines may remain clearly visible after the
bichromate has been washed out. Instead of inking the print, it is simply
washed till aU the soluble bichromate is removed, and is then dried. The
surface of the print is coated with the ordinary composition of starch or
isinglass used for preparing lithographic transfer paper and, according as
the drawing is to be executed with the pen or chalk, receives a smooth or
grained surface by passing it through the press either on a polished or grained
copper plate. The draughtsman then makes his drawing with autographic
ink or lithographic chalk over the faint russet image on the photographic
print. An ordinary silver-print can be given as a guide in cases where the
bichromate print is not sufficiently distinct for the details to be easily made
out. This method is very suitable for copying maps, sketches, or photo-
graphs from nature, especially if the former are to be on a smaller scale
than the original. The light colour of the photographic print renders it
easy to see the efPect of the drawing above it. The saving of time and
labour in tracing and the superior accuracy of the ground- work are also
great advantages gained by its use.

Fhotographing on Stone, — ^The following method of photographing
direct on stone may sometimes be of use with the same object, when the
lithographic drawing is to be made on the stone itself and not transferred.

120 J. "Waterbouse — I^e Application of Phoiograph^ [No. 2,

The surface of the stone is made as level as possible and carefully
polished, it is then washed with an 8 per cent solution of chloride of cal*
cium and dried. A 12 per cent solution of nitrate of silver is then washed
over the stone in the dark, and when dry it is exposed to light under a
reversed negative. The print is fixed with a 20 per cent solution of hypo-
sulphite of soda, and then well washed witb plenty of water to remore
all traces of the hyposulphite.

This method is used at the Topographical Department at the Hagae
to give the ground- work for the beautifully engraved chromo-lithc^raphed
maps of the Dutch Netherlands, and for the reproduction of photographs
of Dutch artillery material, by a similar system of engraving upon stone
permitting several shades of the same tint to be printed from one
stone.*

Photographing on Copper, — A photographic image may also be ob-
tained upon a copper plate by the following method, proposed by M. Mialeret,
which may be of use to engravers in giving them an accurate image of
their subject to work upon.f

The copper plate, being well cleaned and ready for engraving, is plunged
into a solution of

Sulphate of Copper, 125 parts.

Sea Salt, 75 „

Water 960 „

and allowed to remain for about a minute, it is then taken out of the bath,
well washed and polished with a soft cloth. It is next exposed to light for
about 5 or 10 minutes under a reversed negative, or even under a paper
print on thin paper, care being taken that the design appears reversed on
the plate. The plate is then removed from the printing-frame and plunged
into a 20 per cent solution of hyposulphite of soda containing a little chlo-
ride of silver. After a few seconds, the ground whitens, while the design
becomes of a deep black. The plate is then taken out and well washed.
The black deposit forming the shades may be removed or allowed to remain,
in which case the plate should be varnished. It is said that these images
may be etched by the use of menstrua which will attack the copper without
affecting the silver, but I have not been successful in this application of
the process.

XI. CONCLTTDINO EeMABKS.

Having now described the different processes most capable of being
utilised by the cartographer, it may be as well to briefly sum up the cases
in which they are applicable, and to indicate the direction in which improve-
ments should be looked for.

• * Report on th4 Cartographic Applications of Photographif* p. 68.
t * Photographic NewSj Vol. X, p. 190.

1878.] to the Eeproductton of Maps and Plans. 121

The applications of photography to copying purposes may be divided
into two principal classes, according as the original subjects have or have
not been specially prepared for photographic reproduction.

As regards subjects in the first class, it is possible to adapt and
prepare the original drawings, so as to fit them for the requirements of any
photographic process considered most suitable to meet the object in view.
As a rule such drawings will be intended for publication or reproduction in
large numbers by the photo-mechanical processes rather than by silver or
pigment-printing, which will do very well for small numbers.

For the reproduction of maps and plans a process is required which
will admit of large-sized sheets being produced. Many processes capable
of yielding very beautiful results when employed for subjects of small size
are quite un suited for larger work.

For map- work in line, photozincography will generally be found most
suitable and convenient on account of the simplicity of the operations, the
facilities it gives for joining several small sections into large sheets, and
the short time required for turning out a large number of copies. Under
favourable conditions, photozincography will give very excellent results for
all practical purposes. If anything finer is required for permanent or
standard purposes, then one of the engraving processes would be most suit-
able, and in certain cases the photocollotype could also be applied with
advantage. For diagrams and small maps &c., to be printed with type,
photo-typography will prove useful.

For shaded or coloured maps and drawings, photozincography and photo-
typography are not applicable, and recourse must be had either to photo-
collotype or to one of the engraving methods with bichromate and gelatine
which will give gradation of shade, such as Eousselon's, Woodbury's or
Gey met' 8. It is probable that these latter processes will prove of great use
as soon as their requirements and capabilities are better known.

It may be as well to repeat that whenever it is possible, drawings
specially prepared for reproduction by photography should be drawn on
a larger scale than they are ultimately required.

With regard to subjects in the second class, it is evident that the choice
of a photographic process must depend very much on the nature of the
original subject and its suitability for photographic reproduction by any
particular method, as well as on the number of copies required.

It would be impossible to notice here all the cases coming within this
class, it will therefore perhaps be sufficient to state that in most instances
when only a few copies are required and permanency is not an object,
ordinary silver printing will be found most convenient for all classes of
subjects ; and where the original is sufficiently translucent and photographic
cameras not available, both negative and copy may be obtained in this
manner sufficiently good for many practical purposes.

122 J. Waterliouse — The Application of Photography [No. 2,

If the greatest simplieitj In the printing operations is an object, the
cjanotjpe or other iron processes may be used. If the prints are required
to be permanent, the simple pigment process or the autotype may be em-
ployed, according as the original is in line or shaded.

If a large number of copies are required, then it will be more advisable
to employ one of the photo -mechanical processes. The choice will depend
much upon the nature and importance of the subject. As a general rule,
in cases where the original is a lithograph, engraving or wood-cut, the best
effect will be produced by employing an analogous photographic process.

Photolithography or photozincography is generally applicable to all
subjects in dot or line, which can be printed in the lithographic press, except
very fine delicate engravings or drawings ; but if a block is required for
printing with type it must be produced by one of the photo-typographic
processes. The photo-collotype processes are of more general application and
may be used for every kind of subject whether in line or half-tone. Their
use is, however, restricted to subjects within the limits of a single negative,
and they do not present the same facilities for carrying out alterations and
corrections as the lithographic and engraving methods do, and thus their
value for reproducing maps &c. on which corrections may be required is
very much diminished. The fact of the printing surface being composed of
an unstable organic substance like gelatine gives these processes an element
of uncertainty which is a great drawback to their extended use on the lai^
scale, especially in hot climates, and a really satisfactory and simple photo-
mechanical process capable of reproducing any kind of subject without limit
of size within ordinary dimensions is still a desideratum. The photo-
engraving methods are the most suitable for high-class work which is likely
to repay the cost of the skilled hand-labour required to finish and prepare
the plates for the press. A simple method of photo-engraving of general
applicability would be most valuable, and it is hoped that such a process
will before long be available.

Use of Photography in War. — For the reduction and enla^ng of
military and topographical sketches, and for multiplying copies of maps
and sketches required for use during a campaign, photography can render
great services. The principal supply of such maps should, of course, be
provided by a permanent office, established in a capital town and well
provided with the proper appliances. The extent to which photography
can be used in the field will depend on the character of the theatre of
operations, available water-supply and means of transport, as well as other
military considerations. In an open country with tolerably good roads, a
complete photographic equipment might be carried in wagons specially fitted
up for the purpose, and arrangements made for copying, enlarging or re-
ducing sketches, maps or plans, and printing them by photozincography or

1878.] - to the Beproduction of Mttj^s and Flans. 123

on a paper specially prepared for photocoUotype printing, wbioh would only
have to be sensitised when required and, after exposure under the negative,
could be fastened down on to a metal plate and printed in an ordinary print-
ing press. In this way also views or other subjects unfit for photozinco-
graphy might be printed if required in larger numbers than could con-
veniently be accomplished by silver-printing.

In connexion with such a method of printing by photocoUotype, it
would be very convenient to arrange for drawings being made on a tissue
consisting of a transparent basis, such as waxed paper or sheet gelatine,
covered with a thin opaque film which could be easily cut through with an
etching. point. Such drawings would form very perfect reversed negatives.

Apparatus and appliances for taking views by the dry and wet pro-
cesses and for taking prints of them in the ordinary way should also form
part of the equipment.

A military photographic travelling field equipment of this kind has
been organised in the English service and attached to the Field Train of
the Koyal Engineers. A description of it was given by Oapt. Abney in
a paper read before the British Association in 1874.*

In the case of operations in a wild or hilly country, the photog^phic
equipment must be limited to the most indispensable requirements, and be
regulated by the nature of the transport available and by other local and
military considerations. It is very doubtful whether photozincography could
be advantageously carried out in such localities, and the photographic outfit
might be limited to some moderate-sized sets of apparatus for views and
copying, with a large stock of dry plates and the necessary appliances for
silver-printing. Some of the simple iron processes of printing might
perhaps be usefully employed. Recent improvements in the preparation of
dry plates by what are called the emulsion processes have greatly facilitated
and simplified the practice of photography in the field, so far as taking the
negatives is concerned, and a sensitive tissue has been prepared by Mr.
Warnerke for this purpose, by which the use of glass plates may be
dispensed with.

The apparatus, &c., should be strongly packed in moderate-sized
parcels so as to be carried either by men or pack-animals.

At the same time it should be stated that it seems very doubtful
whether photography can really be employed with much advantage in the
field under the conditions of modem warfare in civilised countries. Its
main use in any case will be the copying of reconnaissances and sketches
of positions preparatory to a battle and of sketches and views of positions
on the battle-field after the event. The delicate operations required either
for taking negatives or for printing copies from them cannot satisfactorily

♦ ^British Journal of Photography,^ Vol. XXI, p. 415.

124 J. Waterhouse — The Application of Photography ^Sfc.

be carried out on the move ; and therefore the photographic establishment
must be more or less stationary, and this may prevent its emplojmeiit in
many cases where it might perhaps be of use. In the Abyssinian Cam-
paign, a staff of photographers from the School of Military Engineering,
Chatham, accompanied the force and did good service, under great difficul-
ties, in copying route maps and sketches, and in taking pictures of objects
and points of interest. In the Franco-German Campaign in 1870-71, the
Germans organised a photographic brigade to accompany the Head Quarters
of the army. It was found, however, that the photographers encmn-
bered with apparatus, &c. could not keep up with the movements of the
Head Quatters and, indeed, the want of them does not seem to have been
very much felt.*

If facilities exist for the transport and working of a small lithograpbie
press, it will be found more convenient to have original sketches drawn
with transfer ink for immediate transfer to zinc than to reproduce them by
photography, and for this purpose an excellent ink has been devised bj
Capt. Abney, which may be used on any kind of paper without preliminary
preparation. It will also be found a great advantage to print copies of
maps on ordinary calico, because it can be folded and packed away much
more easily than paper and does not so readily get worn by use. This
plan has been adopted in the Surveyor General's Office with success in
preparing maps for the Camps of Exercise in this country.

Another use photographic reproduction can be put to in time of
war is the preparation of miniature despatches to be sent by pigeon-post.
Such despatches were largely used in the Franco-German Campaign for
communicating with the beleaguered garrison and residents in Paris. This
is a service that photography alone can render and it is likely to be laii^ly
utilised in any future European war in similar cases.

* Soo Capt. Hannot*8 ' La Fhotographie dam Us Armees \

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE,

No. III.— 1878.

VII. — Notes on some Eeptilia from the Simalayas and Burma, — B^

W, T. BL1.NTOBD, F. E. S^ Ac.

(Bead 5tli June.)

The apecies described in the following pages are chiefly from a very
interesting collection made by Mr. W. Davison in the Tenasserim provinces.
One snake is from another collection made in Sikkim by Mr. Gammie.

Dbaco majob, sp. nov.

D. peraffinis D. dussumieri, naribus supeme veraatiSj pede posteriore
axillam hand attingenie ; tympano nudo ; tuberculo parvo ulrinque supeme
post supercilium oriente, eristd nucJiali nulld ; sed multo major , appen-
diculd gulari longd squamis majoribus indutd, nonnullis squamis majuseulis
distantibus in lined unicd interruptd laterali ad insertionem alts coUocatiSy
nee aggregatis; alls alitor coloratis, fusco-transfasciatis, vel omnino
pariter marmoratis nee versus margines saturatioribus.

Hab. in provincid Tenasserim, hand prooul ab urbe Tavoy atque ad
radices montis Nawiabu dicti.

Description. The hind limb falls a little short of the axil, when laid
forwards. Nostrils directed upwards, tympanum naked. Upper labials
large, some of them exceeding the nasal shield in length. A small tubercle
above at the hinder extremity of the orbit. No crest of enlarged scales.
Dorsal scales sub-equal in si25e, not keeled, a few much larger scales, usually
at a considerable distance apart, in a single interrupted row along each side
17

1 20 W. T. Blanf ord— JVb/d?# on some Reptilia [No. 3,

of the back at the insertion of the wing. Gular appendage covered with
large scales, each fully twice as long and broad as the scales of the abdomen.
Abdominal scales keeled. A fringe of lai^e pointed triangular scales,
many of them nearly equal to the tympanum in breadth, along the hinder
part of the thigh and each side of the basal portion of the tail. Tail
triangular near the base, with a row of slightly enlarged and sharply
keeled scales along its upper edge. Scales below the tail, near the base,
but not just behind the anus, larger than those at the ades.

The colouration above in spirit is nearly uniform, the wings are
marked with very distinct dusky cross bands, broken up by light spots in
the only female collected, but these markings are less distinct or wanting
in the males, in which the wings are mottled with pale irregular spots.
lu some the wings are rather darker near the margins, but this is not so
distinct as in D. dussumieri, and there is never the dark fringe with narrow
sub-parallel pale transverse lines of that species. Throat unspotted,
greenish yellow in spirit, pale scarlet beneath the lateral appendages.

This is probably the largest species of the genus known. The laj^st
specimen, a male, measures 14 inches in extreme length, of which the head
and body from nose to anus measure 4*75. Two other males have tiie
body of the same length, the tail being about an inch shorter. A female
is less in all its dimensions, nose to anus 3*5, tail 5'75. The sex has been
ascertained by dissection. In the female the gular appendage is very
short. From the condition of the ovary the specimen is probably adnlt
All the examples captured were obtained in the forest east of Tavoy, two
being from the foot of Nawlabd hill, a high ridge some eight miles east
from Tavoy town.

The nearest described species are D. quinquefetseiatus of Penang and
D. dussumieri of Malabar, and strange to say the latter, although so
widely removed in locality, is the more closely allied of the two in
structure. The present form is distinguished from both by its much
larger size and from D* quinquefasciatus by its naked tympanum and
longer hind limbs. From D. dussumieri, D, major is known by having
much larger supra-labials, each plate near the middle of the lip on each side
exceeding the nasal in length, by the enlarged scales at the sides being single
and not aggregated into groups, by the much larger scales on the gular sac,
and by the colouration of the wings.

Besides the new form, D. tnaculatus and a species which is probably
D. ianiopterus were obtained in the same forest. The typical specimen
of the last named species, a male from Chartaboum, was said by Pr.
Gunther,* who described it, to have a very low nuchal crest and no tubercle
above the orbit. Now in two males of the Tenasserim dragon, there is a

* Bept. Brit. Ind., p. 126.

1878.] from the Ilimalayag and Burma, 127

small tubercle above the orbit and there is no nuchal crest, but as in one
specimen there is a longitudinal row of scales very slightly larger than the
others along the back of the neck, and as the snpra-orbital tubercle is
small, these characters may be variable, and I hesitate to separate the
species upon such slight data without actual comparison. Still it is not
quite certain that the Tenasserim lizard is the true D. tanioptertu,

Bbonchocela BUBMAirA, sp. nov.

B, omnino viridis, affinig B. cristatellse, B. molluccanseque, sed squamis
lateralihus minorihus, in series longitudinales ad 25 dUpositis, serie dorsali
parum majore, eristd nuchali parvuid, seutis majoribua post supereiUum
nullis.

Hab. ad Tavoy in Tenasserim.

Description, Scales of the sides of moderate size, smaller than in
B, eristatelia, larger than in B, juhata, in about 23 to 25 longitudinal
rows, fewer behind, scales of the abdomen much larger, in about 12 rows,
all sharply keeled. Dorsal row of scales distinctly larger than those of the
sides, nuchal crest very low, formed of a series of triangular fiat spines,
passing between the shoulders into the dorsal row of scales. No fold before
the shoulder. There are no enlarged scales behind the superciliary ridge,
all the scales between the eye and tympanum are nearly similar, those in
the middle are a little larger than the others, but there is no distinctly
enlarged scale. The hind limb, laid forwards, does not quite extend to the
end of the snout, the fore limb extends to the thigh, the fourth hind toe
is one-fifth longer than the third. Colour grass green throughout, paler
below, no dark patches nor yellow bands on the body. On the top of the
head, the supra-orbital regions are surrounded by slightly enlarged scales
of a dusky purplish colour, but this may be individual or due to change of
tint in spirit.

This species is at once distinguished from B, eristatelia (and from
B, mollttecana if that be really different)* by its larger lateral scales,
by its much lower nuchal crest and by the absence of any enlarged scales
behind the supercilium. From B. Jubata^ on the other hand, the present
form may be known by the lateral scales being larger, as well as by the
want of enlarged scales behind the supercilium. There is no specimen of
B, smaraffdinaf in Calcutta for comparison, but that species has evidently
much larger lateral scales, no true nuchal crest, longer limbs, different colour-
ation, and very much larger scales on the throat, for there are said to be
only 16 series between the angles of the mouth, whereas in B. hurmana
there are double that number.

• StoUczka, J. A. S. B., XXXIX, Pt. IT, p. 179.
t Giinther, Ropt. Brit. Ind., p. 138.

128 W. T. Blanford— -K>^« on some Reptilia [Xo, 3,

The only specimen of Bronehocela collected by Mr. Davison was
procured near Tavoy. The raze is about the same as that of other species ;
from nose to anus 3*7 inches, tail about 12 inches when perfect.

LlOLEPIS GT7TTATUS.

Mr. Davison^s description of the habits of this lizard, of which he has
procured several specimens, supplements Mr. Theobald's.* All the speci«
mens procured were found in perfectly open places devoid of vegetation,
a favourite position being in the hard threshing floors made in the middle
of dry rice-flelds. Here Liolepis makes its burrow and is seldom found
far away from the mouth of its hole. This appears to confirm Mr.
Theobald's opinion that Lioiepis never ascends trees, as Cantor supposed.

Mr. Theobald classed together Uromastue, Lioiepis and Phnfnoeepha-
luSj in a distinct family, which he called JTromasticid^B, The distinction
of the family has been accepted by other naturalists, and so far as the genus
ITromastix is concerned, has some important structural peculiarities in its
favour, but I have already given my reasonsf for dissenting from Mr.
Theobald's views as to the alliance between Vromastix and Phrynocephdus^
and 1 now feel some doubt as to whether there is any close connexion between
Lioiepis ^uA 27roma«^t>, despite tbe circumstance that both burrow, and
that there is some slight similarity in their habits. Lioiepis wants the peca-
liar dentition of Vromastix and is no more exclusively herbivorous than
Stellio, I have examined the stomachs of three specimens of Lioiepis : in
one I found nothing except insects, (chiefly crickets and termites,) whilst in
the other two there was a mixture of insects and vegetable substance
fragments of small fruits and apparently of leaves. The intestinal tract is
much shorter than in Uromastia ; in a specimen of L. guttatus 16i inches
long, the whole length of the stomach and intestine (preserved in spirit) is
16 inches. In Uromastia the length of the intestine is much greater than
that of the body and tail ; in a fresh specimen of U, hardwickei, measuring
12i inches, the intestinal tract was 27 inches long. In a large example
of the Mesopotamian IT. microlepis, preserved in spirit and 17 inches in
length, the intestinal tract was also 27 inches long. Moreover, in Uromastis
the form of the coecum is dilEerent, and much more complicated than in
Lioiepis, in which there is simply an expansion of the intestine.

Ultjpe,{ gen. nov. Lycodontidarum.

Corpus facile f eompressum. Caput hreve^ depressum^ collo paulR
latins. Oeulipupilla elliptica, verticalis. Scutum loreale cum presoeuUeri

* Jonr. Lin. Soc. X, p. 34. Descriptiye Oatalogrie, Bept. Biit. Ind., p. 119.
t Eastern Persia, II, p. 334, note.

X Etym. Ulupi, a princess of the N^gas or serpents, mentioned in the KabI
Bh&rata.

1878.] from the Himalayas and Burma, 129

junctwn ; nasale hand bipartitum. SquanuB corporis in tredecim seriebus
longitudinalihttSy Iwvea^ ventrales ad latera angulaicB, subcaudales biseriatim
ordinata,

XJLrpB DAVisoin, sp. nov.

U. scutisprafrontalibuscumpostfrontalibus longitudine fere aqttalibu^f
verticali medioeriy occipitalibus duplo majoribus ; Joreali longo ad oculum
attingente ; praoeulari alio nullo, postoeulari unico ; supralabialibus 7,
tertio quartoque infraorbitalibus ; ventralibus 265, anali integro ; sub-
caudalibua 108 ; supeme nigra, albo-transfasciata, annuiis antice latioribus
at que mag is distantibus, subtus albida.

Sab. inprovincid Tenasserim Burmaniaa, haudprocui ab urbe Tavoj.

Description, Bodj, slender, compressed. Head a little broader thaa
the necky short, depressed. Pupil elliptical, vertical. Shields of head
regular, nostril in a single shield ; loreal and prseocular united. Scales of
body smooth, in 13 rows. Yentrals 265, strongly angulate at the sides,
anal undivided, subcaudals in 108 pairs. Maxillary teeth few in number,
a space behind the anterior tooth, followed by three or four teeth close
together, the two anterior rather the longest ; mandibular teeth small.

Sead shields. — Eostral much broader than high, scarcely extending
to the upper surface of the head. Anterior frontals as long and nearly as
broad as the posterior, the anterior edges of the former meeting at a slight
angle directed backwards, and each anterior edge being about equal to the
suture between the two shields. Vertical of moderate size, about half of
an occipital, the sides convex, curving gently towards each other at first,
more rapidly behind. Occipitals rounded behind. Nostril small, rather
nearer to the anterior than to the posterior extremity of the nasal shield,
which is much longer than high, and has only one shield, of about the
same shape, and apparently consisting of the loteal and prseocular united,
between it and the eye. No other prseocular is present ; one postocular ;
the superciliary descends on the side of the head before and behind the
eye. Upper labials 7, the 3rd and 4tth forming the lower edge of the
orbit ; temporals 1 + 2.

Colour in spirit, above black with white cross-bands, each about a third
of the width of the intervening dark space, becoming broader on the sides ;
lower parts white ; so the colour may be described as white with large
black spots above. The white rings and black interspaces are broadest
near the head and become much narrower behind, and still narrower on the
tail, but the proportion of the two colours remains the same. On the single
specimen collected there are 36 white rings on the body, 26 on the tail,
the last being terminal. The white sides and lower parts, on the hinder
part of the body and the tail, are spotted and mottled with dusky. Head,

lao W. T. Blanford— JVo/e# on some Reptilia. [Xo 3,

blackish <ibove, but with a white band on each side from the white sides of
the neck passing over each occipital to the snperciliarj shield, the two
bands being only separated by a narrow dusky space behind the vertical.
Lower portion of upper labials white.

A single specimen of this interesting snake was obtained by Mr.
Davison at the foot of Nawlabd Hill, east of Tavoy, in evei^reen forest,
at an elevation of about 1,500 feet above the sea. This specimen measures
28 inches, of which the tail is 6.

It appears to me that this snake must be considered the type of a
new genus of Lycodonts, distinguished from all other Indian forms by the
small number of scales round the body. The single nasal shield, the union of
the prseocular and loreal, and the strongly angulated ventral shields are
also a peculiar combination of characters, although all are found in some
other genera of the same family.

Ophites aAHMiEi, sp. nov.

O. iquamis eorporis in 19 seriet longitudinales ordinatis, dormlibu9
earinatiSy Jateralibtu Icevibus ; scuiis prmfronialihu* pariter long is aique
iatis, postfrontalibut tripiiciter majoribut ; verticali vix longiore quam laiOy
iateribui contexts; loreali parvo^ longiore quam alto ; pntoculari unico,
postocuiaribus duobus ; supralabialibvs 8, tertio, quartOy quinioque infraar-
bitdlibus ; ventralibus 214, anali integro, 9ubcaudalibu* 101. (hlor JuecuSy
annulit aniice albidis, posiice griseie, marginibus irregularibue, variegatus,

Hab. in Sikkim.

Description, Scales of the body in 19 rows, the 9 dorsal rows keeled,
6 rows at each side smooth. Body slender, compressed, head rather broader,
flat. Eye small, pupil apparently vertical. Yentrals 214, bluntly angulate
at the sides, anal entire, subcaudals 101 pairs.

Head shields. — RostAil about as broad as high. Nostril lai^e, between
two nasals, but scarcely separate from the anterior frontal. Anterior
frontals small, each about one-third of a postfrontal and about as broad as
long ; postf rentals much broader in the middle than they are in front or
behind, their anterior and posterior outer corners being hollowed out to
receive the nasal and pneocular shields, between which each postfrontal is
bent over the side of the head above the small loreaL Vertical very little
longer than broad, with convex sides. Each occipital is about twice as
large as the vertical, rather attenuate behind, with the posterior termination
rounded. Upper labials 8, the 3rd, 4th and 5th entering the orbit.
Loreal small, longer than high. One prseocular, just reaching the upper
surface of the head \ 2 postoculars. Temporals irregular. Two elongate
chin shields of about equal length, the anterior in contact with 5 lower
labials.

A. B. Wynne — Notes on an Earthquake in the Punjab. 181

Colour in spirit, evidently somewhat faded. The body is surrounded
by alternating dusky and light rings with very irregular crooked margins.
Head above dusky olivaceous with pale spots in the middle of most of the
shields ; upper labials and anterior lower labials pale with dusky margins.
An imperfect pale collar behind the head : all the lower part of the head
and neck whitish. There are 30 pale rings on the body, the first pale ring
imperfect above, and the dark patch in front not continuous across the
throat, the rest of the rings encircle the animal. Farther back the pale
rings become grey with pale margins and light spots occur in the dark
rings. On the belly, throughout the anterior part of the body, the dark
rings are only about half as broad as the white, above the difference is lens,
and near the head the dark rings are much broader above than the white.
There are 16 rings on the tail.

This snake is distinguished from all other species of Ophites by having
19 instead of 17 rows of scales round the body. It approaches nearest
to O. septentrionalis*^ the precise habitat of which is unknown, but is
probably the Himalayas or Assam, the type specimen having been collected
by Dr. Jerdon soon before his departure from India, and found unlabelled
amongst his collections after his death. From O. septentriofuilis the pre-
sent species appears to be distinguished by more numerous scales, by its
differently shaped anterior frontals, and by the dark rings extending across
the belly.

A single specimen was procured by Mr. Gammie at the Cinchona
plantation in South-eastern Sikkim. This specimen measures 31^ inches,
of which the tail is 7. It is rather surprising to find a new snake in so
well explored a locality.

VIII. — Notes on the Earthquake in the Punjab of March 2ndy 1878. —

By A. B. Wtnot, F. G. S.
(Read 5th June.)

Earthquakes in the Punjab are not uncommon, but little effort
seems to have been made to record their occurrence in any way that
might prove useful ; indeefd as a rule they are neither sufiiciently frequent
nor pronounced to leave more than a passing impression, though the direc-
tions from which the undulations come are occasionally noticeable, and
doubtless, with proper appliances, they would form an interesting study.

On the 2nd of last March the most severe shock which has occurred
within the memory of the present generation, so far as I can learn, affected
the whole of the northern part of the province. With regard to it I have
collected a few notes which I offer more as a record of the event than as

• Giinther, P. Z. S., 1875, p. 233.

132 A. B. Wynne — Notes on an JEarthquake in the Punjab. [No. 3,

an exhaustive or abstrusely scientific treatment of the subject. Accurate
details concerning so large an area are not within the reach of eveiy one
to collect, and I have had a little difficulty in learning even so much as I
have put together. Some of this information has been derived from per-
sonal observation, some from the accounts given by friends or aequuntances,
and some from the reports in the '' Pioneer" newspaper, and '* Civil and
Military Gazette."

It may be as well to give the localities from which information has
been received in the form of a list, with the hour of the shock, where known,
reduced to Madras time,* and the duration of the earth-movement, opposite.

Punjab Uarthquake of March 2nd, 1878.

Locality.

Hour felt,
(Madrafl time).t

Duration.

Sound wave.

Authority.

Bannu, ....

Uncertain, . • . •

Uncertain ••

None

B. Udny, Esq., Deputy

Aboat noon, ....

About 2 mi-

•

No informa-

rV>ipmi<ffrioYipr,

KohAt^ ..

Major Swinton Broirne^

'

nutes.

tion.

6th P. L

Kohii, ••

Noon, Madias

Uncertain..

Bumbling

Major Boss, 1st Siks per

(11-37 Station.)

sound.

Capt. Flowdfm, C. S.

Peshiwar, . .

About noon, ....

Over a mi-
nute.

Noticed « .

Gapt. M. S. Wynne, Slat
Begiment.

Kaoshera, ..

No details, ....

• • I •

• • • •

Beported.

Hoti Mardin,

No details, • • . .

• • . •

. . . •

Mi^or Stewart — Qnides.

Attock, ....

About noon,., ..

Over a mi-
nute.

Unnoticed..

Capt. G. F. Maasy, C. S.

Abhottabad,

Noon,

1 minute, 50
seconds.

Unnoticed..

Ferscmal.

B&walpindi,

Immediately af-

Over a mi-

No sound • •

Dr. Henderson, Ck>L Sur-

ter noon.

nute.

geon.

• • • •

• • ■ •

. • • •

Soundnoticed

Mr. P.

Jhelum, ....

Noon, ...»••..

Uncertain . .

No sound . .

Buchanan Scott, Esq^

B. E.
Bev. Mr. Corbyn, Mr.

Murree, ....

Noon,

^ a minute to

Unrecorded

3 minutes.

W. L. Holman.

liahore, • • • .

11*56 A. ic., ....

3 minutes . .

• • • •

" Civil and Military Ga-
zette" Mar. 4th. 1878.

liahore, ....

About noon P ..

Unrecorded

• • t •

" Pioneer" Mar. 6th, „

Lahoro, ....

12-60 P.M.?

Unrecorded

. • • •

B. Dick, Esq.

Ferozptir, . .

Unrecorded, ....

5 minutes . ,

Noticed, loud

Ditto.

Simla, • • . •

12 h. 1 m. ? . .

9 minutes . .

Unrecorded

Ditto.

Masiiri, ....

Unrecorded, ....

No informa-
tion.

No informa-
tion.

"Pioneer'' Mar. 1878.

* Whero

the time of the p

lace is unknot

n to be that oi

f Madras, or the reduction

thus rendered doubtful, a note of inteirogation is inserted.

t Madras time according to Frontier authorities is 23 minutes faster than the
local time kept, by which Station guns are fired.

1*^7 f^.] A. B. Wynne — Notes on an Earthqualce in the Punjab. 133

A few days before the greater shock, I felt au earthquake at Abbotta-
bad, on February 26th, at 3 '40 p. M. It was of the kind usual in
these parts, lasted only a few seconds and did no damage. A sharp shock
was reported in the " Pioneer" to have occurred at Kdngra on the 19th of
March (after the greater one), and others occurred in Hazdra — on March
29th at 7 p. M. ; on April ^h at 6*11 a. m., (a short and sharp
one) ; on April 19th at 5'9 A. M., a more considerable one ; on April 2l8t
at 9*20* A. M., lasting about five seconds* That of April 19th was, though
short, rather severe yet insufficient to bring down tall chimneys at
Abbottabad badly shaken and bulged by the earthquake of March 2nd.
The shock of the 2l8t caused the roof beams of the d&k bungalow at
Haripur to creak, while on the night of the same day there was a slight
shock after midnight at Eawalpindi.

In all the .cases just mentioned except the Kangra one, of which I
have no information in point, and that of April 4th, the undulation was
more or less clearly felt to be from west to east, as seems to be the case
most frequently in the N. W. Punjab, but on April 4th, it appeared to
come from north to south. In none, so far as I am aware, was any sound-
wave heard, indeed I have only once heard this : some years ago at Murree,
when an east and west shock occurred (at about 10 o'clock p. K.) in the
silence of the night. I find, however, that a noise was heard in some casea
accompanying the shock of March 2nd, 1878, though entirely unnoticed
in others, and positively absent at B&walpindi, according to a careful
observer.

The detailed information, such as it is, which I have been able to collect
with regard to this severely -felt earthquake is as follows : —

Earthquake of March 2nd, 1878.

Bannu. The shock was felt here severely and lasted unusually long.
This is all the information I can gather.

Kohdt. Captain Plowden, Deputy Commissioner of Kohat, replying to
a letter, informs me that the shock occurred there at 39 minutes past
11 o'clock A. M., station time, or noon ? by Madras. The motion came
from the west with a rumbling sound like that of the underground railway,
trains, followed by a roll and three sharp shocks : no shocks were observed
before or after this earthquake and its duration was not accurately
determined.

Major Ross, Ist Sikhs, who gave this information, was bathing at the
time, and says the water was driven out of his tub to the height of eight
inches or so, and the bath-room seemed to heave like the cabin of a ship at
sea.

• All local, not Madras time, for which add 23 minutes.
IS

13 i A. B. Wynne — Notes an an Earthquake in the Punjab. [No. 3,

Several houses and public buildings in the district were cracked &nd
otherwise damaged.

I am informed by another Officer (Major Browne) who was then in
Kohat that he felt the shock at about the same time given abo?e, it lasted
some two minutes, shook the whole place very violently, so that people left
their houses, and it seemed to come from the westward,

A considerable portion of one of the walls of the strongly built Foit
of Kohat was thrown down. No accompanying sound was noticed bj mj
friend, and the whole character of the disturbance seems to have resembled
that of other places.

Peshdwar. My informant felt the shock here as he was " marching
out" with his regiment towards Jamrdd. It occurred at noon nearlj,
Madras time, (or after 11*30 station time) and he was then about tbiee
miles from Feshdwar on the Jamrdd road. A halt having been made, some
of the men who were sitting down jumped up, startled by the motioiL He
noticed that a low rumbling sound immediately preceded the shock : the
earth was plainly seen to undulate, and a vrater-cut beside the road, after tiie
shock had passed, showed a lately wetted margin of two feet or more, con-
sequent upon the transit of a longitudinal wave caused by the undulations.
The motion came from the westward in the direction of Jamrdd. Some of
the people present felt nausea.

On his return to the station he f otmd the front of his bungalow thrown
down. A wall of the fort also fell, and several other houses were damaged.
The Barracks escaped, owing to their having been built with iron couplings
in the walls, and in the city, from the use of wooden tie-beams in the
masonry, because of the damage often done here by slighter earthquakes,
the injury done was less than in the Station.

ITaoshera. Reports say the shock was severely felt here.

Moti Mar dan, I can only learn that the earth quake- wave here set
things which were suspended swinging in an east and west direction.

Attack. At Attook the earthquake occurred late in the forenoon
(station time) about noon by Madras. A wall of the Serai or fort was
thrown down, and the motion of the earth was strongly felt even by people
on foot, by whom a strong shock may often pass unnoticed.

Ahhottahad. He^ the movement commenced within a minute or »
before or after 12, noon, (Madras time) as nearly as I could estimate from the
time usually kept at the station. I was lying sick in bed but happened to
have my watch in view ; there was a palpable undulation crossing my bed
from westward to east. At first it commenced with a slight tremor of the
usual kind and after a short pause of perhaps 3 seconds, this returned with
greatly increased strength. The wall of the room cracked from the crown
of the arch over the door to the roof, which being of wooden shingles

1878.] A. B. Wynne — Notes on an Earthquahe in the Punjab. 135

creaked and strained so loudly, that I may have been unable to notice any
sound- waye. I got up but could only more slowly, and after some delay in
securing my watch by which I was noting the time, I reached the outside
of the house, and heard the crash of chimneys falling at the neighbouring
bungalows, while the stones of the one belonging to the dak bungalow I
had been in, were all shaken asunder, though the chimney (a low one) did
not fall. A cup half filled with milk in my room had its contents violently
thrown out, and projected nearly to the distance of a foot on each side
towards the east and west.

During the shock the vibration was so continuous or so quickly
repeated as to seem without intermission after the first one I have men-
tioned, and the motion died away more gradually than it commenced. I
timed its duration as 1 minute and 50 seconds from first to last.

Doctor Grant, then acting Medical Officer of the station, who had left
me shortly before, was walking up an inclined open space when the shock
occurred ; he observed the ground to undulate and the trees to sway about
considerably, though there was no wind, he felt a sensation of nausea and
found it difficult to walk. Next he saw a man thrown from a ladder and
then a cloud of dust rising from the falling wall of a bungalow. On reach-
ing his own he found the wall cracked, also above an arch.

Some time afterwards I was staying at another two-storied house in
this station which had suffered very much. Some of the walls were cracked
from near the ground to the roof ; the cracks passing through weak places,
such as openings for windows or doors. I noticed that it was in most cases
those walls which ran east and west that were cracked ; as if a short wave to
which they could not conform had passed longitudinally beneath them.

No one in the place remembered an earthquake of such severity to
have occurred before.

Bdwalpindi, At this station the earthquake occurred immediately
after gun-fire (12, noon, Madras time), possibly a little later than at Abbotta-
bad, but the time kept there is scarcely to be relied upon to a minute. The
movement appeared to come from a direction north of west, to judge from the
observations of Dr. Henderson, and from the directions in which he found
water to have been thrown out of ves.sel8. It lasted for over a minute. Dr.
Henderson is certain there was no sound-wave, bu^ another person stated
that a low rumbling sound did precede the shock.

Dr. Henderson felt the heaving of the earth very distinctly ; his little
boy fell down and asked what was the matter with the ground.

Dr. C of the 10th Hussars was talking to the Mess Sergeant in the

compound of the Mess, he did not recognise the occurrence as an earth-
quake, but felt sick and walked to a tree for support. On returning a
minute or two afterwards, the Sergeant said he too had felt sick; and asked
for medicine.

13(> A. B. Wviine — yot€9 on an Enrihquaie in the Punjab. [Xo 3.

Some of the bouHes in the station were rent and shaken, and a forge at
one of the workshops was thrown down, but the damage done seems to
have boon less than elsewhere. The place is situated on an open plain and
stands upon a considerable depth of sandy and coherent brick clay, oTer-
lying highly inclined sandstones and clays, often vertically bedded.

Jhelum. The shock was felt at Jhelum at noon, Madras time. It
appeared to come from N. E. and to pass to S. W., and it was unaccom-
panied by any rumbling sound. It damaged the steeple of the Church near
the top, cracking it across and shifting the upper part both by lifting it to
one side and turning it horizontaUy on the base of the broken part, as far
as can be seen from below.

The Officer who communicated this thought he must have got a sun-
stroke ; he was out of doors when the shock occurred and the ground mored,
and he noticed an interval after the first, between it and the (?) stronger
shock which followed, much in the same way as occurred at Abbottabad.

Murree. In a letter from Murree it was mentioned that the shock
was severely felt, and house-property sustained considerable damage: no fur-
ther details have reached me.

By another letter (from Mr. Holman) I learn that the time the shock
occurred was 12 o'clock, noon : its direction so far as he could remember
was from south to north.* (From another observer I learn that the direc-
tion appeared to be from west or west by south.) Its duration he supposes
was about half a minute, though most people said three minutes. (N. R
The average of these would give one minute and three quarters, very nearly
the time observed of Abbottabad.)

There were three distinct shocks, the last the most severe, and be only
remembers one as bad during a long-continued residence of many years in
Murree.

Some damage was done to the station, walls fell, and several chimnejs
also. One observer heard two distinct loud sounds like volley-firing, which
he attributed to the working of the shingle roofs.

Lahore, My information concerning the earthquake at Lahore comes
partly from the " Pioneer" — or the local press (Civil and Military Gazette),
partly from a friend who was kind enough to make enquiry for me.

From the report iiFthe " Pioneer" of March 6th, 1878, though the shock
is said to have been severe, the writer did not himself notice the occurrence
at all, but was told of it afterwards, and gives the time as nooUy presumably
Madras time.

In the local paper of March 4th, the time of the shock is given as 4
minutes to 12 o'clock noon. " A continuous vibration of the ground lasted

* The ridgo on which Murree stands at an elevation of over 7000 feet runs neariy
N. E.— S. W.

IS/'S.] A. B. Wynne — Notes on an Earfhqwike in the Punjab. 137

for 3 minutes," and the earth " wave appeared to travel from east to west."

One of the gentlemen who wrote to mj friend, says, he was sleeping
at the time, and heing suddenly awakened hy the earthquake, he ran into his
bathroom to observe the tub. In this, the water was oscillating and had
wetted its sides 5 inches vertically above the level shown when at rest.
Hanging plants and a bird cage in the verandah set in motion by the earth-
wave swung to the north and south, a direction corresponding to that
marked by the water in the tub.

As to duration the same observer thinks the time given in the local
paper excessive, and that it could not have been many seconds, perhaps 30.
He does not state that any sound-wave was heard.

A wall in his house was cracked and the filling of an archway showed
a complete separation all round the arch. In the city many old houses fell
and one in falling was reported to have killed three men.

Mr. Scott, R. E. of Jhelum, heard from Lahore that two friends play-
ing at billiards in the latter station observed a N. E. — S. W. oscillation
in the lamp-frame above the table, on the occurrence of the shock, which
took place at noon, the same time as in Jhelum.

I^eroZjpur. Although at Lahore the earthquake passed unnoticed by
at least one person, in a station so near as Ferozpur, according to a cor-
respondent of the " Pioneer," something like a panic occurred. He writes
— " The first shock was quite violent enough to cause a very sensible move-
ment on the earth's surface, and the dull rumbling noise was so unusually
loud as to attract general attention. Half a minute after came the second
shock, a very rude one indeed, making floors upheave, walls oscillate, and
beams and rafters start and crack. Every one rushed into the open air
only to find the ground shivering under their feet. The third shock
was gentler, the tremor of the earth, however, continued for a long time,
and it was fully five minutes if not more from the beginning of the first
shock till the last trembling passed away. No buildings fell, but many
beams were started, and some walls were cracked."

The time of the first shock is not given.

Simla. If Madras time is kept at this station, as seems probable, the
shock was felt there at the same general time as elsewhere, i. e,, one minute
past 12, noon. See " Pioneer" March 6th, 1878. The reports in this paper
say, the earthquake shook Simla to its foundations, and was one of the longest
continued ever known there. " The wave or movement came first from east by
south and lasted for about a minute, when it shifted to north-east, and increased
in intensity from a tremor to a roll, the shocks occurring without inter-
mission for nine full minutes, the last being at ten minutes past noon. It
was the third shock within six months, each being severe."

The coincidence apparent as to time would seem to identify the shocks

13H A. B. Wvnne — Notet on an Earthquake in the Punjab. [Xo. 3,

here as part of the same earthquake felt in the other places mentioned, but
the directions and duration are so very different as to suggest that the
undulation, if generated near a line reaching from the Simla portion of the
Himalaya, towards and beyond Peshdwar, met with some resistance or dis-
turbing force by which it was deflected or even reflected, and its effects
rendered cumulative, so that the shock was felt for a greatly longer period.

MasiuLri, An earthquake shock at Masuri is so mentioned in the
'' Pioneer" as to render it presumably that of March 2nd, and as a result it
is stated that springs had ceased to flow.

The following table of the directions from which the shock was felt
to come at different places may be useful.

Kohdt,

PeshAwar, i ti i.u ^

TT ^' n*- J / r From the west.

Hoti Mardan,

Abbottabad,

Murree, From the south?

Edwalpindi, From west by north.

Lahore, Uncertain.

Simla, From south of east and north-east.

It will be seen from these brief notes that the effects of the shock of
March 2nd were more or less forcibly felt over the whole of the Upper
Punjab and neighbouring regions. The space being so large, the most
favourable conditions for observing earthquake phenomena — i, e., constant
homogeneity and elasticity of the rocks forming the earth's crust — could
scarcely have been expected. Mountain regions being exceptionally un-
favourable from the form of the ground and liability to variety of for-
mations, fissures, planes of displacement &o,, much disturbance of the earth-
wave, and variation of effect might have been anticipated ; and yet it would
appear that the shock must have been almost simultaneously felt along the
whole western outer Himalayas and their continuation, from Masuri to
Peshdwar, in a direct line some 455 miles apart.

Assuming 30 miles a minute to be a high rate for transmission of an
earthquake wave (Mallet, Admiralty Manual of Scientific Enquiry) and
that this shock originated near either Peshdwar or Masuri the passage of
the wave from one station to the other would have occupied about 15
minutes, and it should have been observed so much later at one of these
places, which would perhaps be a large error to attribute to the time
recorded. But if the shock started from a point near midway between and
occupied half the time in reaching these points almost simultaneously, then
a smaller error of time would be both possible and difficult to detect from
the records at hand. There is, however, no information available regarding
the earthquake from the vicinity of KishtwAr, which would be about half

1878.] A. B. Wynne — Notes on an Earthquake in the Punjab. 139

way in the Himalayas, though at Lahore, nearly in the same relative
situation, on the plains, the time given is ** about noofC" according to
observations made, or the same as at either extremity of the region known
to have been disturbed.

However these considerations might indicate a seismic centre among
the mountains somewhere on the Simla side of Kashmir, the observed mo-
tion of the undulations both at Simla and towards Peshdwar are against
the supposition of such an origin, even though a considerable amount of
this motion be attributed to secondary vibrations masking the main earth
wave.

If the disturbance had one common source, and if the primary un-
dulation reached the earth's surface at almost the same time at all the
widely distributed points indicated, it may perhaps be a legitimate deduction
that the place from which it originated was very deep-seated, or else that the
conditions of the earthquake were somewhat peculiar and the disturbances
were initiated along an extended line rather than at any particular point.

It will be noticed that the greatest differences in the results, so far
as the information collected extends, took place at Simla, Lahore, and
Ferozpur ; differences both in the duration and direction of the motion*
which would render further information most desirable, and it will be
observed, that this disparity coincides in a way with the marked general
change in the alignment of the mountain ranges. All the stations close
to the outer Himalaya in the upper Punjab, whence I have obtained any
details, stand among or adjacent to ranges belonging to the east- west, or
west-by-south system, prevailing on the Peshdwar side of the Jhelum
valley, while Simla and Masuri are upon or near ranges having the north-
westerly bearing common to the main direction of the western Himalayan
chains. On the supposition that the earth -wave travelled from the west
as indicated by so many of the upper Punjab observations, it would have
passed longitudinally amongst the western mountains and under the ad-
jacent Kawalpindi plateau towards the east as far as the Jhelum valley
sinus, and, meeting the oblique ranges beyond, might have manifested itself
in a different manner.

The varying geological structure of the whole region does not appear
to have appreciably influenced the results of the earthquake's manifestation
at different places. Peshdwar stands in an alluvial plain ; Attock close to
the edge of the Indus flats (at their junction with, but more correctly,)
upon a mass of slates. Abbottabad is close to, if not actually traversed
by, a long line of fault having a very large (unestimated) displacement and

* In the case of Murree my informant seems rather uncertain, as to the direc-
tion, but my Lahore information is positive as to this being N. and S. though from
which is not stated.

liO A. B. Wvnne — Xofes on an Earthquake in the Punjab, [No. i^,

cutting off limestone mountains from others formed of slate. BawalpintH
is on a plateau formed of tertiary rocks, alternating sandstones and clajs,
just there nearly vertical and horizontally overlaid by post-tertiary and
perhaps even newer clays, sands, and boulder-beds. Lahore and Ferozpnr
are on the alluvial Punjab plains.

In most of these places, the shock occurred at the same time, as nearly
as can be judged, and its results were similar, whether it lasted under two or
as much as five minutes.

KohAt, close to east and west ridges of limestone or of sandstone,
and standing upon a stony detrital deposit at the mouth of the Han^
valley, is about 80 miles due west of Rawalpindi : in both places the
undulation approached from the westward, in the latter more nearly west-
north-west.

Simla is entirely differently situated from these stations ; at a great
elevation and nearer to crystalline masses which would probably afford a
better conducting medium for the earth-waves. Yet here the time of the
occurrence was presumably the same as elsewhere, and though the move-
ment is said to have come from opposite directions and to have lasted fully
nine minutes, I have no evidence that the damage caused, which would be a
measure of the force exerted, was at all greater than at Abbottabad or
other localities.

I have heard it more than once observed that these Punjab earth-
quakes usually occur after rain has succeeded a spell of fine weather ;
indeed Dr. Henderson tells me that from this he predicted the occurrence
of the earthquake previous to that of March 2nd, felt at Rawalpindi as
well as by myself in Hazara. With reference to this point it should be
remembered that the nine distinct shocks which I have mentioned as having
recently occurred in the Punjab within fifty-three days, have followed a
sctoson of excessive rainfall preceded by an exceptionally and disastrously
dry summer.

Whether the access of meteoric water by gravitation through the
rocks to hotter regions below be a sufficient cause in the present case for
the phenomena observed, or a better one can be suggested, I must leave for
the enlightened consideration of competent seismologists ; and though
several minor shocks are not unusual attendants upon a greater earthquake,
I venture to suggest that something exceptional in the way of cause must
have occurred to account for the greatly increased frequency of late of the
eartliquakes in the Punjab, where they have rarely taken place more than
once in a twelvemonth, at least for the last nine years : and also for the
greater than usual intensity which has marked one of them, almost simul-
taneously felt over an area, which may be roughly estimated at 67,000
square miles.

1878.] l^il

IX. — Notes on the land and fresh-water shells q/* Kashmir, more particular-
ly of the Jhilum valley below Srinagar and the hills North of Jamu, —
By W. Theobald, Geological Survey of India,

(Received 27th June ;— Read 3rd July, 1878.)

The present notes embody the results of a hasty traverse of the ground
from Mari to Srinagar and thence vid the Mohu pass to Jamu, during the
very unfavourable months of March and April last year, and it is to be
hoped that the rather meagre list here given may be hereafter enlarged
\QTy considerably by others who may have more leisure, and a more favour-
able season for their investigations than I could command.

In the list of Kashmir moUusca appended to these notes, an asterisk
marks those species not obtained by myself personally.

Melania tttbebculata, Miill.
A small race of this widely spread shell occurs in the outer hills.

Valvata piscinalis, Miill.
Abundant on the river mud in pools under the Travellers* Bungalow at
Soper.

BlTHTiaA PULCHELLA, B.

Common in the valley.

Hyalika LrciDA, Drap.
H. PULVA, Drap.
Both species occur on the Panjal range and are common in the debris
of streams running into the valley.

Macbochlamts indica, B.
M.Z^itrinoideSy auctorum (non vera).
M, petrosa, Hutton.

This widely spread species is rather rare in the outer hills. A single
mature shell only was met with, much smaller than the type, and measuring
only 18 X 15 X 7 mm. An immature shell was a trifle larger.

M. sPLEin)ENs, Hutton.
Colour bright chestnut, with a lustrous polish. My largest shell is not
quite adult, and measures 15 X 13 x 8 mm. A dead adult shell is a trifle
smaller. It shows the mouth very oblique and shaped much as in M, aspi-
des, with the lip thickened inside as in Bemiplecta monttcola. This species
occurs rather plentifully in places above Uri, nestling under stones.

M. patane, B.
A few dead specimens'bf^what seems a small race of this species were
obtained above Uri, one specimen measured 9 X 7*7 x 5 mm.
19

142 \V. Tlieobald— JVo/tf« on the land [No. 3,

Maceochlamys, sp.
A single dead shell of a species resembling M, levicula was found with
the luiit, above Uri, measaring 6 x 5 x 4*5 mm.

Kaliella babbakpobensis, Pfr.

A single siKJcimen of this widely spread species, measuring 6 mm. in
height, was foimd in Kashmir. The speciBc name is badly chosen, as this is
a hill species, (not found on the plains, unless transported on plants), and
ranges throughout the Himalayas and also the mountain ranges of Southern
India.

HeMIPLECTA MONTICOLA, Huttou.

IT. lahiata, Pfr.

Generally distributed throughout the Western Himalayas, In the
valley of the Jiichlari river, an affluent of the Chinab, this species occurs
remarkably line and in incredible numbers in the fissures of rocks, though
few live specimens were procurable at the time of my visit. The colour of
the shell is dark chestnut both above and below, and there are four or five
prominent pale bars or transverse stripes, marking the seasonal arrest of
growth and the position of successive opiphragms, formed during the period
of hybernation. The epidermis is very thin and pale yellow, and the shell
does not attain maturity under seven or eight years. The first five whorls
are minutely shagreened, the remaining ones smooth but more or less trans.
versely rugose.

My largest specimen measures 47 x 39 X 23 mm. The species is
particularly common below Nachilana in the Bichlari valley.

H. JAMVENSIS, n 8.

Aapecia inter If. niontieolam ct 11. ligulatam. Teatd so/idd, contexd^
(ijifjusta umhiUcidd, supra lecissimc (/raniklosO'Corrugata (II. ligulaia modo)
aiiblcr Icct'if/dtil. Colore suj^ra pu It idr brmineo, suiter alhido, As^mcti-
has sex, lente crescintibm. Lnbio i7itm incrnssato, simplici. Aitinet ad
27 X 23 X I'l mm.

Habitat in vallc Jawi, inter Chineni ei Adampur.

This species might be regarded by some as an impoverished race of the
last, from which I have little doubt it is proximately derived, but it differs
too much in size, colour, form, and range to be properly united therewith.
Mr, W. Blauford suggests it may be the fl". monticola of Pfeiffer, which is
very likely. I have unfortunately no live shells, but the type of colouration
in my best specimens is more of the type of ligulata than of monticola, being
white below. It is I think clearly a species descended from S. monticola,
and modified to meet the climatal conditions of the Jawi valley below Chi-
neni, where the winter cold and summer heat are both more intense than is
suitable for monticola on the one hand, or Ugulata on the other.

1878.] and fresh -water slielh of Kdslnnir. 113

TltOCUOMOEPHA HYBA, B.

Two dead adults and a living half grown shell were obtained by me
on the hills behind Aijas, to the east of the Walar lake. The largest spcci-
men measured 17 x 16 x 11 mm. It recalls the Nilghiri TJiysorwta
gtierini, but the animal belongs to the Zonitidw.

This species occurs occasionally in thickets between Dalhousie and
Chamba between 6000 and 7000 feet above the sea.

HeLTCABTON FLEMTNOn.

This species is not rare in the outer hills and two distinct races are
discernible : the one {a) being confined to the higher and moister hills, whilst
the other {h) occupies the warmer valleys and the drier ranges of less eleva-
tion.

a. My finest specimens of this race are from near Mari (Murrec)
where they were collected by my colleague Mr. Wynne, The finest mea-
sure 42 X 31 X 20 mm., though shells rarely attain this size. Shells of
the ordinary dimensions of 35 mm. are not rare in parts of the Jhilum
valley about Uri, and even among the outer hills, and occur subfossil in the
valley deposits (clays) in many places outside the main ranges and in the
Sutlej valley. The reputed locality of the type, * Sind', is open to consider-
able doubt, unless the specimen was imported in a plant case. In five spe-
cimens the lower part of the shell is lustrous, whilst the upper half has a
dull silky sheen, from innumerable fine stria which cover the surface.

h. This race runs considerably smaller than the last, the largest spe-
cimen of some hundreds measuring 22 x 17 x 12 mm. It is a minia-
ture of the last, and occurs abundantly in the Chiniib valley above the
junction of the Bichlari river and also at Dharmsala in the Kangra valley.
The shell is almost wholly enveloped by the mantle when the animal is in
motion.

There is yet another race which may perhaps prove a distinct species,
but which at present I prefer to consider as a variety of the larger form
of II. Jleniingiiy and which I will term provisionally : —

c, var. altivagus. Of this form I have only a few dead shells. The
lai'gest measures 31 x 23 x l-l mills, and it differs from the type by being
much flatter. I only met with it sparingly above Uri.

H. SCUT ELLA, B.

Sparingly distributed in the Western Himalayas at moderate eleva-
tions. The body delicately arched, like the outline of a triton's tail. This
species occurs with the small race of H. Jlemingii both in the Chinab valley
and at Dharmsala though nowhere so numerous.

H. MOXTICOLA, B.

There is some confusion between this species, the last, and the next,
which, without more information, 1 cannot clear up. Sx:>cciinens received

144 W. Theohik[ii^mtes on the land [Xo. 3,

by mo from Benson under this name were certainly closely allied to the
last. In the Concho! (^ia Indica, however, a very different shell is figured
(Plate CLII, figs. 1, 4,) and one which seems barely distinct (save in size
only) from H. eassida, Hutton, also given on the same Plate. My coadju-
tor, Mr. Hanley, purchased most of Benson's types, but has most unfortu-
nately not said if the figure is taken from one of them.

My own impression is, that JST. monticola^ B. is a near ally of jET.
scutella, B. and that the monticola figured in the Conchologia Indica is a
mere immature specimen of H. eassida^ Hutton. It is true the shell is said
to be in one ' dull* in the other ' lustrous', but this may be the result of
its condition, as in JET. flemingii^ the lustrous surface of the shell is covered
with a dull epidermis, which in scutella is wanting, and I was much struck
with the presence of this dull epidermis, as it is covered by the mantle ; the
shells of other Zonitida imder such circumstances being usually lustrous.

H. CASSiDA, Hutton.
A single adult specimen of what I consider this species was taken by
me under a stone above Uri. Two young shells (one of them forwarded to
me by Mr. Lydekker) also seem to belong to this species, though the mouth
is rounder and deeper than in the adult (vide Conch. Indica, Plate CLII,
figs. 2, 3). This species might almost be ranged in Far^phanta and
would seem to be rare as I have only seen the above three specimens.

Vallonia pttlchella, Miill.

V. COSTATA, Miill.
The higher ranges,

Fbfticicola huttont, Pfr.
Widely distributed, but individuals do not seem anywhere numerous.

Pebon^us c(enopictx7s, Hutton.
Widely distributed and individuals numerous. In the North- western
!Punjab, this species harbours under stones, and is variable in size.

NAPJErS CAKDELABIS, Pfr.

wZVl domina^ B. This is a common species being found about Man and
in various places in Elashmir, usually above 6000 feet, but occasionaUy
lower. Sinistral shells are most numerous, but dextral ones also occur not
rarely. My largest sinistral shell measures 35*6 x 9'2 and my smallest
27*7 X 8*7 mm. The dextral shells are smaller, ranging from 33 x 8*8 to
24 X 8'5 mm.

The shells vary somewhat in a lai^e series, in tumidity and in the
attenuation of the spire, and even in the number of whorls, a remark which
applies to all the species of the genus, and proves the risk of creating new
species from single examples.

1878.] and fresli'toaier shelh of Kashmir. 145

I do not think that N. domina, B. can be separated, as the main dis-
tinction seems to be in the texture of the shell ; but in this group the tex-
ture varies from homy and sub-diaphanous, in which the striped markings
are conspicuous, to creamy porcellanous, in which they are more or less if
not wholly obsolete. The difference too in this respect is considerable
between the living and dead shells, and largely depends (unless I am much
mistaken) on the conditions of climate and alimentation under which the
animal lived.

A slender form is seen in places, with a thinner shell than the type,
and indicating a passage to 27'. kunawarensis, Hutton. A typical example
of this variety measures 26*5 x 8 mills.

In the above and in all the measurements which follow the short axis
is measured just behind the aperture.

N. SINDICTTS, B.

Of this species both dextral and sinistral shells occur, the former most
numerously. The size ranges between 27 x 8 and 17 X 3 x 6*6 mm. for
dextral shells and 22 x 7 and 18'2 x 6'2 mm. for sinistral ones out of a
large series. It occurs abundantly in the Jhilum valley about Chatur,
(above Kohala) at low elevations, and elsewhere less commonly up to 3000
feet or thereabouts.

N. C(ELEBS, B.

This is a forest species, usually ranging from 5000 feet upwards. It is
the most variable species of the group, both as regards size and form rang-
ing from 22 x 8 to 14 x 6*2 mm. Some systematists might easily make
six or eight species out of the varieties of this shell ; but with a large, but
by no means exhaustive, series before me, I cannot venture to specifically
separate the very variable shells which a large series displays. I have never
seen a sinistral specimen, but JV. hoysiantts, B. looks like a sinistral exam-
ple of the largest form of cpelehs.

N. ABCTJATUS, Hutton,

Kashmir specimens range between 2 x 6'1 and 13*7 x 5 mills. A
single dextral shell found by me measures 12 x 4 mills. It does not seem
a common species. The habitat * Moulmein' given in the Conchologia
Indica is of course absurd, but for this and similar blunders I am nowise
responsible, since the publishers declined to furnish me with proofs, as the
work went through the press.

N. SEaBEaATus, B.

A single specimen of what seems a variety of this shell was found, but
it had an abnormal look about it. It measures 11*2 x 5 mm and has the
ordinary homy appearance of ccelehs and its allies. A smaller form, var.
pusillua^ would seem to belong to this species and is far from rare on the
Chinab valley above 6000 feet. It only measures 9 x 3"8 mills.

1 U) \V. TheoljalJ— .V>/^5 on the Imd [Xo. 3,

X. PKETiosurt, Cantor.
Tlic type was obtained near the Jhilum on the well-contested battle-
field of Ciiilianwalla. The species also occurs sparingly throughout the
Jhilum valley below Uri, but is nowhere common except about Kathai fort
6n the right bank, where it is abundant, though I saw only dead shells.
The range of this species must be veiy limited, as I have not noticed it to
the eastward, or anywhere in the cis-Ravi country.

N. SMITIIII, B.

An occasional individual of what I take to be this species, is here and
there met with in the Jhilum valley below Uri, but I have only seen dead
shells. It also occurs at Mari, where I have seen a few specimens, a trifle
smaller than the type. My best specimen measures 11*1 x Wo mm. and
exhibits the characteristic dilatation of the peristome.

X. RUFISTBIOATUS, B.

Common on the outer hills from the Jumna to the Indus. Closely
allied to this species and with difficulty separable in a large series, are
N. eremitay B., N. sindicus^ B., J^. mhicola^ B. and N, spel<Btis, Hutton,
these two last forms being erroneously placed in my Catalogue (Tbacker
and Co., 1876,) under Cylindrus,

Opelvs geacilis, Hutton.

The outer hills bordering the plains, but not noticed in the valley.

CYLrNDBUS rNSULABIS, Ehr.

The outer hills and plains.

Pupa muscobum, L,

P. GUTTA, B.

Both these species no doubt spread over the higher ranges of Kash-
mir, though the type of the latter species has only been taken by me in
Spiti.

P. niMALATx^LXA, B.
p. nUTTOyiANA, B.

Both these species occur abundantly on the Panjal range and in the

debris of streams flowing therefrom, whence they are carried down during

Hoods into the plains.

P. — sp.

A single specimen of a Pupa somewhat of the plicidens type occurred

in the Jhilum valley with numbers of the last two species. I do not know

it, but hesitate to describe it as new, till it has been compared more fully

than I have at present means of doing.

Alt. 2-5 mm.

Clausilta ctltxdbica, Gray.

I did not take this species in Kashmir, but as I took it in Dharmsala

a little east of tho llavi, I have no doubt that it should be included in the

Kashmir fauna.

1878.] and fresh -water slielh of Kashmir. 1 1-7

C. WAA.OENr, Stol.

A single dead shell of what is probably this species was found by me
a little below Eampnr the first stage below Baramula. The type was found
near Mari, and it doubtless ranges into Kashmir in suitable localities.

Ennea bicolob, Hutton.
The outer hills, where it is almost invariably associated with Ojyeas

m

gracilis and PeroncBUS ccenopictus,

ccelostele scalaeis, b.
Geostilbia balantjs, B.
Both these species are found in the outer hills bordering the plains,
the former rather rarely.

Lymnjea.
The species of this genus do not call for remark.

Planobbis.
Several small species of this genus, which my opportunities did not
allow of my recording, have no doubt to be added to the Kashmir fauna.

COEBICULA KASnJIIBENBIS, Dcsh,

My largest specimen, from near Soper, measures 45 x 39 x 23 mm.
Smaller specimens occur lower down the Jhilum near Baramula.

C. OCCIDENS, B.

Accompanies the last. My largest specimen measures 21 x 17*5
X 11 5 mm. In Kashmir specimens the rufous rays (which Hanley says
are rarely present) are rarely absent, but never very strongly marked and
sometimes with difficulty visible.

Sph^bium indicum, Desh.

PiSLDIUM HTDASPICOLA, n. 8.

Testd sub-cordate ovaU-tenui, exilissime striata, antice rotundatd, pos-
tice vix truncatd 4 x 3'4 X 2 5 mm.

Habitat valle Kashmir enscy in fluminibus ad Hj/daspem fluent ibtis,
prope Shypion,

The nearest ally of this species is P. clarkeanum, Nov., but it is more
rounded in front and hardly truncated behind.

A single specimen only was found in the stream near Shypion, a feeder
of the Jhilum.

The above is a very imperfect list of the shells of so diversified a region
as regards surface and climate as Kashmir. The correct determination of
the smaller fresh- water species of Bithynia and Flanorbis, and of the species
of Sphcerium and Pisidium which almost certainly occur is difficult. ITnio
I have not noticed in the valley.

At page 41 of my Catalogue of Indian shells, I have given the Punch
Hills as a habitat of the operculatc Megnlomastoma funiculatum of Sikkim,

14^ W. Theohald—^^otes on tie land [No. 3,

on the authority of shells received from Mr. Lydekker with that habitat,
which subsequent enquiry has served to render extremely doubtful, and I
have accordingly excluded the species from the Kashmir fauna.

In conclusion I would urge that visitors to Kashmir could hardly fail
to add many species to the above list if they carefully collected in the
higher ranges, and along routes not visited by me, especially the smaller
species of Pupa, 4&c. which are most conveniently sought for among
the light rejectamenta and vegetable refuse swept down by floods, and
heaped up along the banks of streams in sheltered spots.

List of land and fresh-water shells, presumably inhabiting Kashmir and its
vicinity. Shells, not seen by me, marked by an asterisk.

Paludomus tanjoriensis, Qmel.*

Melania tuberculata, Miill. »

M. variabilis, B.*

Valvata piscinalis, Miill.

V. stoliczJcana, NevUl.* (Cat. Moll. lad. Mus.)

Tivipara benyalensis, Lam.*

V, dissimilis, Miill.*

Bithynia pulehella, B.

HyaliTia lucida, Drap.

H, fulva, Drap.

Macrochlamys indica, B.

M. splendens, Hutton.

M. patane, B.

JIf. sp.

Kaliella Barakporensis, Pfr.

Hemiplecta monticola, Hutton.

H. jamuensis, Theob.

Trochomorpha hyba, B.

Helicarion cassida, Hutton.

JB.,Jlemingii, Pfr. (type and var. minor.)

H,flemingii, var. altivagus, Theob. (an sp. no v. ?)

JET. monticola, B.

JS. scutella, B.

Fruticicola huttoni, B.

Val Ionia pulehella, Miill.

V. costata, Miill.

BeroncBus coenopictus, Hutton.

Napceus candelaris, Pfr.

N. sindicus, B.

i\r. ccelebSy B.

1S78.] and freshwater ahelU of Kashmir. 149

N. areuatus, Hutton.

I^. pretiosuSy Cantor.

I^, seyreyatus, B.

If. smithii, B.

-ZT. rufistrigatiMy B.

N. vihea, Hutton.

Cylindrus insulariSy Ehr.

Pupa museorum^ L.

P. ffutta, B.

P. himalayafuif B.

P. htUtoniana, B.

P. sp.

Suecinea pfeifferi, Ross.*

Clausilia cylindricay Gray.

01 vxtageniy Stol.

J^mt^a hicolor, Hutton.

Opeas graciliSy Hutton.

.^M( iubrica, Miill.*

Glessula huegeli, Pfr.*

Gcslostele sealaris, B.

Geoatilhia halanus, B.

Carychium indieum, B.*

Zjymn^a luteola. Lam.

X. peregra^ Mull.

£. stagnaliSy Mull.

£. awricularia^ MiilL

£. truneatula, MuU.

Planorhis calathus, B.*

P. exustus, Desh.

P. carinatus, Miill.

Oorhicula kashmirensis, Desh.

C occidenSy B.

Spharium indiewn^ Desh.*

Pisidium hgdasptcola, Theob.

20

150 W. T. Blanford — On 9ome MammaU/rom Tenauerim. [No. 3,

X. — On some MammaU from Tenasserim. — -By W. T. Blanfobd, F. B. S.

(Becdved and read March 6tli, 1878.)
(With Plates VI, VII, VIII.)

The xnammals descrihed in the following notes are from two oollections.
The first and largest was made by Mr. W. Dayi&on for Mr. Hume, to whom
I am indebted for the specimens ; the second, which although smaller, com-
prised several very interesting forms, was collected bj Mr. Limborg. The
bats procured by the latter have already been described by Mr. Dobson.*

The localities, and, in almost every case, the sexes have been carefully
recorded on the specimens obtained by both the naturalists named. Mr.
Davison's labels in many cases contain detailed measurements taken before
skinning. As will be seen, several important additions are made to the
Tenasserim fauna, and the most of these are from B&nkasfin in Southern
Tenasserim, where some Malay forms have been obtained, which had not
previously been noticed so far north.

In addition to the Tenasserim specimens, Mr. Hiune has very kindly
given to me a larg^ portion of his mammalian collection, and has entrusted
me with the whole for examination and description.

IirSECTITOSi..

Gymnura rafflesL
Vigors and Horsfield, Zool. Jour. EH, p. 246; — ^Wagner, Bohreber^s S&ogth.
Bupp. II, p. 46; V, p. 534.

This species was mentioned in Mr. Blyth's list of the mammals of
Burma,t as probably existing in Mergui, although its occurrence within
British limits had not been recorded. It hite since been obtained at B^Lnka*
sdn in Southern Tenasserim, by Mr. Davison, to whom I am indebted for a
perfect female in spirit. The anatomy of the animal is almost unknown,
but I hope to induce a more competent anatomist than I am to examine
the specimen.

The skins from B&nkastin vary much in the extent of white on the
fore part of the body. Generally the head and neck are white with the
exception of a broad black patch above each eye and a variable amount of
black bristles mixed with white on the crown. The anterior portion of the
back is clad with mixed white and black bristles, the proportion varying ; on
the hinder back, sides, limbs and lower parts from the breast, the long hairs
are generally black, but in one specimen there is a line of white bristies
down the middle of the breast and belly ; this line is wanting in the other two

• J. A. 8. B. 1877, Pt. 2, p. 812.

t J. A. S. B. 187$, Ft* 9} ^tra number, p. 82,

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some JUammaU from TenasBerim, 151

skins which I have examined. The extent of the white varies so much that
^t is not at all improbable that specimens wholly white or wholly black may
occur. The fine woolly under fur is dusky olivaceous at the base, brown at
the tips on the upper parts, ashy with brownish ends beneath* The terminal
portion of the tail is compressed, and in some specimens partially or wholly
white in colour, and the under surface of the tail is thinly clad through-
out with scattered short bristles, about a quarter of an inch long. These
bristles are wanting on the upper part of the tail, which has very much
shorter scattered hairs. The small scales covering the tail are indistinctly
arranged in rings, and subimbricate ; on the lower surface the scales are
convex and distinctly imbricate, the bristles arising from tl^e interstices*
Thus the under surface of the tail is veiy rough and may probably be of
use to the animal in climbing.

The characters of the tail just mentioned do not appear to have been
noticed in the published descriptions of Oymnura, all of which are probably
copied from that by Horsfield and Vigors. Another important differenc9
from the original account is to be found in the claws of the specimiena
before me not being retractile. In the original description* the retractili-
ty of the claws is mentioned, both in the Ijatin characters and in the Eng**
lish note pointing out the distinctions between Qymnura and Tupaia, It
is possible that the Tenasserim animal differs from that found in Sumatra^
but the distinction between retractile and non-retraotile claws would in all
probability be of generic importance, and it is difficult to conceive that two
genera of insectivora, so closely resembling each ^other in their very peculiar
external characters, and yet differing in so important a detail, should inhabit
two regions of which the fauna is, for the most part, identical. At the
same time it is possible that I am mistaken in referring the Tenasserim
animal to C^mnura raffUzi,

The following are the dimensions of the female specimen in spirit —

inches.

Length from nose to anus, 12

„ of tail, 8*5

„ of ear from orifice, 0*94

„ of tarsus and hind foot (claws not included), 2'15

The stuffed specimen is nearly the same, except that the tail is rather
longer. The dimensions given by Horsfield and Vigors for an adult are
rather more ; — head and body 14*25 inches, tail 10*5, whilst the tarsus is
stated to be only 2 inches long, but the difference is trifling.

Mr. Davison informs me that Oymnura is purely nocturnal in its
habits, and lives under the roots of trees. It has a peculiar and most offen^
sive smell, not musky, but rather alliaceous, resembling decomposed cooked

* Zool. Jour., Ill, p. 248.

152 W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim. [No. 3,

Togetables. There is a slight smell in the dried skin. The contents of the
stomach in the spirit specimen appear to consist entirely of remains of
insects, amongst which I can, I think, detect termites, but most of the frag-
ments are too much broken for identification.

Tupaia pegnana.

Jerdon^ Maza. Lid. Ko. 88 : — ^Blyth Mam. Bona. No. 65.

Blyth in his Catalogue of the Mammalia in the Museum of the Asiatic
Society classed the Feguan Tupaia as a variety of T. ferruginea^ but in his
Mammals of Burma he separated the Burmese species, as Jerdon had done.
He, however, pointed out that the two are barely separable, and that
a ferruginous tinge is present in some Burmese specimens.

Skins collected by Mr. Davison in Southern Tenasserim have all the
posterior portion of the back distinctly ferruginous. Others from Mydwadi,
west of Moulmain, are almost equally rufous on the rump, whilst other
specimens again from the same neighbourhood have no rufous tinge. A
specimen from Tavoy has scarcely a trace of rufescent. Without a larger
series of Malaccan specimens than I have at hand, I cannot positively say
that the two forms pass into each other, but I am strongly disposed to sus«
pcct that they do so.

The following dimensions taken on the animals when recently killed are
recorded by Mr. Davison on his tickets.

1 « ad. 2 ^ ad. 3 $

Nose to anus, 68 68 66

Tail from anus, 7* 6*8 6-4

Hairs at end of tail, M 1-2 0-8

Total 14-9 14-8 13-8

Length of fore foot (claws excluded), 0*88 1- O-Q

„ hind foot ( „ ), 1-65 1-75 1-69

„ of ear extemaUy, 03 02 035

„ „ inside from orifice, 0-6 0*56 0*45

Breadth of ear laid flat, 0 8 0*7 0*6

No. 1 is from Kaukarjit on the Houngdarau river, 2 and 3 from tiie
neighbourhood of Myawadi, all localities to the eastward of Moulmain,

Cabkivoea.
Frionodon maoulosus, Pis. VI, vn.

W. Blanf. Froc. As. Soc. Bengal, March 1878, p. 98.

P. qffinis P. gracili, sed major, atque maculis fasciisque fuscis majori-
bus omatus ; dorso nigrescerUi-fusco, lineis sex alhis angustis trantfasciaUf,
fascid alhd laterali utrinque post aurem orienie, usque ad femorem decuf'

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim, 153

rente, lateribus maculis longis fuscis supeme majusculis, subtus minarihus
signatis, collo sursum duohus fasciis latis suhnigris lofigiiudinalihus, inter
se vittd alhd angustd, medio fuseo-lineatd, discretis, notato ; caudd annulis
septem fttscis alhisque alternis circumdatd, illis fere duplo latiorihuSy apice
alhescente.

Long, a rostro ad anum 18*25, eauda sinepilis ad apicem 16, pilorum
0*75, iota 35 ; cranii 3, tarsi a calcaneo 2'S poll, angl,

JB.ab. in provincid Tenasserim, (Davison, Limborg).

Upper part brownish black broken up by greyish white bands, lower
parts white, tail brownish black with 7 white rings, tip whitish. Two
broad black bands run down each side of the upper part of the neck, between
them is a narrow greyish white band with a faint mesial dark streak, some-
what interrupted, and passing into two bands of elongate spots between the
shoulders. The two broad dark bands pass into the dark patches of the
back ; on each side of these bands is a white rather wavy stripe, commen-
cing at the ear and continued along the neck, above the shoulder, and down
the side to the thighs, becoming more irregular behind ; below this again is
a dark band somewhat broken up into spots in front, passing over the
shoulder, and continued as a line of large spots along the side. The back is
chiefly brownish black, crossed by six narrow transverse whitish bands, the
first Ave equidistant, the foremost communicating with the mesial neck
band, and the hinder all uniting with the white band on the side, so as to
break up the dark colour into large spots. There are small black spots on
the fore neck, lower portion of the sides, and outside of the limbs, the spots
on the fore neck forming an imperfect gorget. The white rings on the tail
are not much more than half the breadth of the dark rings ; the last dark
ring, near the tip, and the first white ring are narrower than the others.
Nose dark brown mixed with grey, a dark ring round each orbit with a
streak running back to below the ear and another passing up to the crown ;
forehead between and behind the eyes, and in front of the ears, and cheeks,
pale grey. Ears rounded and clad with blackish hairs outside and near the
margin inside, a few long pale hairs on the inner surface of the ear conch.
Whiskers long, extending to behind the ears, the upper brown, the lower en-
tirely white. Soles, except the pads, which are naked, covered with fine hair.

The fur is soft and short throughout, that on the upper parts is ashy
grey at the base ; lower fur very fine, tips of the longer hairs black or
white ; none of the hairs are more than half an inch long on the back, being
much shorter than in P. pardicolor.

The following dimensions are taken on a fully adult noale specimen
preserved whole in spirit. The length of the body would perhaps be an
inch or two more in a fresh specimen, the other dimensions are probably
unaltered.

154 W. T. Blanford — On iome Mammahjrom Tenas$erim, [No. 3,

inches.

Length from nose to rump over carve of hack, 18*25

„ of tail without the hairs at the end, 16*

„ of hairs at end of tail, 0*76

Total 35.

Length from nose to rump in a straight line, 16*75

Height at shoulder* ahout, 6*

Hind foot and tarsus from toe to tarsal joint, 2 8

Length of ear from orifice, 1-05

„ „ from hase of helix, 1-1

„ „ outside from crown of head, 0-65

„ from orifice of ear to eye, 1*2

„ from anterior angle of eye to nostril, 0*97

Longest whisker, 3*6

The skull of the same specimen measures :

in. metre

Length from occipital plane to anterior end of premaxillaB,... 3. -076

„ from inferior margin of ybrfl7w^» ma^«»7» to do., 2*9 '073

Greatest breadth across zygomatic arches, 1*5 '038

Breadth of brain case at posterior termination of zygomatic

arches, T -025

Least breadth of brain case behind post-orbital processes, ... 0-45 -0115

Length of suture between nasal bones, 0'62 OlS

„ of bony palate from opening of posterior nares to

incisors, 1*4 -035

Breadth between posterior molars, 0 53 '013

Length of mandible from angle to symphysis, 2 05 -0515

Height of ditto, 08 020

The stuffed skin was most carefully set by Mr. Davison himself, the
dimensions being made exactly the same as those taken on the body before
skinning. The present measurements are — ^nose to insertion of tail 19 inches,
tail with hair 16^ in., total 35^, nearly the same as in the specimen in spirit.
It is probable that this skin also has contracted a little in drying.

This species appears well distinguished from P. gracilis and P. par-
dicolor by its larger size, and by the much greater prevalence of dark colour
on the upper surface generally. In external characters P. maculotus is
nearer to the Malay species, P. gracilis, the Himalayan P. pardieolor

« Measured from the posterior foot pad to the top of the baok between the shoul-
ders, the leg being straight.

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim. 155

having the upper parts coYered with comparatively small spots, and more nu-
merous rings on the tail.* With P. gracilis I am only acquainted by de-
scription and figures.f Judging by these, the principal difference in the
colouration is that, in P. gracilis, the pale tint prevails very much more
than in P. maculosus, the upper parts of the former being marked by irregu-
larly shaped blackish spots on a pale ground, whereas the upper surface of
the latter is dark, with a few white streaks dividing the colour into patches.
On the tail of P. gracilis the dark rings are represented as narrower, and,
towards the tip, much narrower than the white rings, and there is a long
white tip. In P. maculosus the dark tail rings are nearly twice as broad
as the light, and the white tail tip is very short, shorter than the last dark
ring. The distribution of colour on the head also appears different, the
whole nasal region in front of the eyes being dark in P. maculosus, but not
in the figure of P. gracilis. The more important dimensions of P. gracilis
as given by Horsfield are ; length of the body from the extremity of the
nose to the root of the tail 1 ft. 3^ in., length of tail 1 ft. ^^ in. It is
probable these measurements are from a stuffed specimen, but the much
smaller size of P. gracilis is shewn by the dimensions of the skull given by
Dr. Grayl whose measurements of the two species P. gracilis and P. pardico-
lor are the following. Those of P. maculosus are appended for comparison.

P. ffracilii, P. pardicolor. P. maouiosus.

Length of skull, 2' 7'"§ 2" 6"' 8"

Width at brain case, 11"' 10^*" 1"

Width of zygomatic arch, V Si"' 1" 2^' 1' 6*'

This gives the idea that the skull of P. maculost^ is longer and that
the breadth across the zygomatic arches is greater in proportion to the width
of the brain case than in the other two species, and judging from an imper-
fect skull of P. pardicolor in my possession, this is the case. I think it
probable that P. maculosus is a much more powerful animal than either of
the other species. The nose is proportionally narrower, more pointed and
shorter in P. pardicolor, and the bony palate extends a shorter distance
behind the posterior molars. From the opening of the posterior nares to
the anterior palatal foramina the distance is 0*93 inch in P. pardicolor, 1*27
in P. maculosus, the form and position of the foramina being similar in the
two.

* Jerdon, Mam. Ind. p. 124, says eight or nine. I ooont ten pale xings besides
the whitish tail tip on two Sikkim specimens, received from Mr. MandelU. The
rings near the base and tip of the tail are narrower than in the middle.

t FelU graeilii, Horsfield. Bes. in Java. This work is not paged, and the plates
are not numbered. The animal is described and figured, and tiie head, feet and denti-
tion are separately represented on another plate.

X Cat. Cam. &c., Mam. Brit. Mua. 1869.

{ In the original I'' T*' but this is, I think, clearly a misprint for Tf* 7^*

156 W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim. [No. 3,

The first speoiinen of this species (a very beautiful and perfect skin)
was obtained by Mr. Davison at B4nkastbi in Southern Tenasserim. The
animal was caught in a trap. The second specimen was procured bj Mr.
Limborg to the East of Moulmain.

Martes flavigiila.

Blyth, J. A. S. B.y XXVI, p. 316 ; XLIV, Ft 2, ertra number, p. 29 :— Jerdon,
Mam. Ind. p 82.

A skin belonging to the Malayan race, distinguished from the Hincia-
layan form by the crown of the head and nape being brown instead of black,
by wanting the white chin, and by the fur being shorter, was obtained at
Bdnkasdn in Southern Tenasserim by Mr. Davison. The Himalayan form
is recorded from Arakan by Mr. Blyth, so that both are found in British
Burma.

BODEKTIA.

Soiurufl rafigenis. Pis. vn, vm.

W. Blanf. Proc. Ab. Soc. Bengal, March 1878, p. 93.

8, medius, S. atridorsalem canicepemque maffnitudine suhaquans, 9ed
eaudd corpore cum capite paullo hreviore, rostro longo ; supeme fuseo-oliva-
ceus, punetiunculis minutis nigris fulmsque variatus, subtus albus^ maculd-
qt^ albd post aurem utram signatus, f route rufescentSy genis ferrugineis^
mystacibus nigris^ caudd distichdy supeme eand, pilis nigris alho-terminatis
atque semel annulatis indutd, subtus castaned. Long, corporis a rostro ad
anum 8, cauda, pilis ad extremitatem non inclusis 6*5, planted sine unguis
bus 1*8.

Hob, in sylvis densis, ad latera montis Mulegit dicti, in provincid
Tenasserim JBurmania, (Davison, Limborg).

This squirrel is nearly the same size as S, caniceps and S. atrodorsalis^
but the tail is much shorter, its length, without counting the hairs at the
end, being always considerably less than that of the head and body ; it is
distinctly distichous below. Fur soft throughout.

Upper parts dark olive, frizzled, cheeks ferruginous, a small white spot
behind the ear, lower parts white, tail hoary, black with white rings and
tips above, chesnut below.

The colour of the back and sides resembles that of specimens of 8,
caniceps in which there is no yellow or rufous tinge, being a fine mixture of
black and pale yellow, the sides rather paler. The fur on the back, as in se-
veral allied species of squirrel, is of two kinds, the finer and shorter hairs
being dark leaden colour at the base, pale yellowish grey at the tips, and
about a quarter of an inch long in the middle of the back, the longer hairs
are coarser, about half an inch long, and black with a pale yellow ring near

1878.] W. T. BTanford — On some Mammahfrom Tenasserim, 157

the end, the tips being black. As usual the longer hairs are most abundant
near the middle of the back, less so on the sides. Forehead rufous mixed
with black, the sides of the head are dark ferruginous above, paler below,
shading off gradually into the colour of the face and throat. Ears rounded,
covered thinly inside and out with short hairs ; a little patch of silky white
hair behind each ear is concealed by the ear conch when the ears are laid
back.* Whiskers black. The hairs of the lower parts are dark grey at the
base, white at the ends, there is a tinge of rufous on the fore neck and
throat in some specimens. Fore limbs yellowish olive outside, like the
sides, whitish inside, hind limbs also whitish within, but more rufous out-
side. Tail clad above with black hairs, having a white ring near, but not
at their base, and white tips, so as to produce a very beautiful hoary appear-
ance, lower surface of the tail chesnut, the longer hairs on the sides with
black and white tips

The following dimensions in inches were taken by Mr. Davison on
fresh specimens :

t ?ad. 9ad.

Length from nose to insertion of tail, 7*3 8*2 8'1

„ of tail without hairs at end, 6*7 6"0 6*5

„ of hairs at end of tail, 15 21 1*3

Total 14-5 16-3 159
Length of fore foot (palma) (claws not mea-
sured), ri5 1-1 11

Length of hind foot from heel without claws, 1*75 1*85 1*8

Height of ear outside, 0*5 0*5 055

inside from orifice, 0*8 0*8 08

The skull (Plate VII) differs considerably from those of 8, lokrioides^
8. atridorsalisy 8. caniceps, 8. phayrei, 8. hlanfordi and all other allied
apecies with whieh I have been able to compare it, in the narrow and
singularly elongate nasal portion, in which character the present species
shews an approach to Hheithrosciurus of Gray.

The following are the dimensions of the skull of the present species,
compared with those of some of the other Himalayan and Burmese forms.

S. rufigc- S. lokri- 8. atridor- S. cani-
nis. oides. salis. ceps.

^ad. $ad. ^ad. ^ad.

Length from occiput to end of nasals,... 207 185 1*95 2-3a

Breadth across zygomatic arches, 1*2 1*06 1*18 1*37

„ of brainpan at posterior termina-
tion of zygomatic arches, 0-95 0-9 0-93 1*02

* This white mark is represented too large in the plate.
21

99
99

0-65

0-7

0-82

0-63

0 75

0-9

0-53

0-52

07»

0-36

0-37

0-44

0-82

0-82

1-

158 W. T. Blanford — On some MammaUfrom Tenaggerim, [No. 3,

S. nxfige- S. lokii- 8. atridar- S. cani-
nis. oideB. sails. cepe*

Breadth across behind post orbital

processes, 0*75

„ of frontals between orbits, 0'62

Length of suture between nasal bones,... 0*62

of upper row of molars, 042

of bon J palate behind incisors,... 0*9
Width of bony palate between posterior

molars, 0'27 0*24 0-23 0-3

Length of mandible from angle to sym-
physis, 1- 0-96 105 125

„ of row of lower molars, 0*42 0^37 0*38 0*44

. Four specimens of this squirrel were obtained by Mr. Davison at the
end of January and beginning of February 1877 ; all were procured in
dense forest, at an eleyation of above 5000 feet, on the sides of Mooleyit,
a lofty mountain east of Moulmain on the range separating the Houngda-
rau from the Thoung Yin valley. A single specimen was subsequently pro-
cured in the same locality by Mr. Limborg and this was the first to reach me.
None of the other Burmese or Himalayan squirrels resemble the pre^
sent form, nor am I acquainted with any Malay species with similar coloura-
tion. The nearest approach is perhaps made by S. pemyi, found at Se-
chuen in China.* This species haa a yellow spot behind the ear, the lower
surface of the tail is ferruginous, and the belly white, but it wants the
ferruginous cheeks, it has no white tips to the hairs in the upper sorface
of the tail, and it is more rufous above, the latter character being, however^
of little or no importance.

The Himalayan Sciurus loJcriah also possesses, I find, the small whitish
tuft behind the ear, though less developed than in 8. rujlgenis ; the
colouring of the lower parts and tail are, however, conspicuously distinct
in the two forms. The presence of the white spot in S, lokriak affords an
excellent character for distinguishing this species from 8. lohrioides.f

* Milne Edwards, Rer. et Mag. Zool. 1867, p. 230, pi. 19.

t According to Gray, A. M. N. H. Ser. 3, XX, pp. 274, 281, the tree S. foJErtaiUb*
of Hodgson is the species with a black tail tip, 8, astammwt of McClelland and BtyHu
The species called S» lokrioidet by all Indian natvralists is re-named Maeroxue similis hy
Gray. As Hodgson^s types are in the British Museiun and are qaoted hy Dr. Omy,
he may bo light, though it is very remarkable that he should be, because the spedeB
commonly referred to S» lokrwides abotmds in Nepal, where Hodgson of course ooUeci-
ed it) whilst I doubt if S. atsamensii be found there. Dr. Anderson has especially
examined the British Museum speoimena^ and will I believe clear up those difficuUiaL

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammahfrom Tenassertm, 159

SoiuruB atridorsalis.

Gray, Aim. Mag. N. H., 1842, Ser. 1, Vol. X, p. 263 ; 1867, Ser. 3, Vol. XX,
p. 284 ;— Blyth, J. A. S. B. XXIV, p. 477 ; XXVni, p. 276 ; XLIV, Pt. 2. Extra
number, p. 36 ; — Beavan, P. Z. S. 1866, p. 428.

This is certainly the most variable of the Burmese squirrels. The back
varies in colour from dark speckled grey, with scarcely a tinge of fulvous,
to grizzled rufous tawny, the head being in the former case the same colour
as the back, or slightly rufescent, in the latter distinctly ferruginous, the
ears being usually even deeper rufous than the forehead. Occasionally' the
whole back from the nape to the insertion of the tail, is black ; more com-
monly there is a black patch from between the shoulders to the rump, but
frequently the area of black is shorter and narrower, and occasionally,
especially in the more rufous specimens, not a trace remains. The whiskers
are sometimes entirely white, sometimes all black, occasionally mixed ^hite
and black. The tail is normally grey like the sides, with more or less dis-
tinct transverse bands, due to the hairs being ringed greyish white' and
black, but in some specimens all the hairs are black except at their extreme
tip, and in others, they are entirely pale rufous, save at the extreme base,
and even this amount of dark colouration disappears towards the tip of the
tail. The lower surface, including the breast, abdomen and inside of the
limbs is normally rich bay, but sometimes chesnut, pale ferruginous or even
pale rufescent, in the dark rufous form the red sometimes extends to the
throat, in other cases the lower neck is grey, or the whole central portion is
pale rufous, and only the lateral parts bay, especially on the breast. I have
two specimens also in which the middle of the breast and abdomen is grizzled
like the sides and throat, the lateral j^ortions of the lower parts alone being
bay. This shews a complete passage into S. gordoni* : it is true that in
the latter, so far as I know, there is no black on the back, but as this pecu-
liarity is not constant is true S, atridorsalis^ the distinction is evidently
insufficient. The paler under parts may possibly be due to immaturity ; with
this exception however I cannot find that the variations I have mentioned
are due to either sex or age. All specimens from Myawadi appear to have
black whiskers, and all from Moulmain white, but from Kaukaryit, on the
Houngdarau river, south of Myawadi, I have both forms. I am indebted to
Mr. Hume for a superb series of this species and of 8. caniceps, and I have
also a considerable number of both from the collections made by Mr. Lim-
borg. These two are in fact the commonest squirrels of Tenasserim.

The following are measurements by Mr. Davison :

♦ Anderson,?. Z. 8., 1871, p. 140.

IGO W. T. Blanford— Ort fome Mammals from Tenasgerim. [No. 3,

Length from nose to anus,., 8' 8 8-5 865 8.9 7*62

„ of tail from anus, 75 7*9 74 7-7 775 8*3

„ of hairs at end of tail, 2*5 2*5 2*7 2-4 2-5 2*

Total 18 0 18-4 IS'G 1875 1815 1792

Length of fore foot (without claws), 082 115 118 1*2 1*2 119

„ hind foot and tarsus (do.), 1*55 1*85 17 18 19 1*8

Height of ear outside, 0*5 0-55 0*4 05 Ooo

„ inside from orifice, 055 0-65 071 0*9 092 0*63

Some measurements of spirit specimens differ but little from the abore,
I have only seen S. airidorsalU from the northern portion of the
Tenasserim provinces, the species has not jet , so far as I am aware, beea
recorded from Mergui or Tavoy, nor is it known to occur west of the SaU
ween river. It abounds around Moulmain and Amherst, and in the valleys
of the Houngdarau and Attaran rivers.*

S. phayrei.

Blji.li, J. A. 8. B., XXrV, 1865, p. 476 ; XLIV, Pt. 2, Extra number, p. 36 ;— Peteia,
P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 429,— Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 3, XX, p. 277.
8, hyper ythrm, Blyth, J. A. S. B., XXTV, p. 474.

This species, as noticed by Blyth, is only known to occur west of the
Salween. It is not, so far as 1 am aware, found west of the Sitoung ; in the
Irawadi valley in Pegu, it appears to be replaced by S, pygerythrus^ whilst
further north, around Ava, it is represented by the closely allied 8, hlan-
fordiy into which it doubtless passes. S. phayreiy Mr. Davison tells me, is
found north as far as Pah-Khyoung at the southern extremity of Kareni ;
(the country of the Bed Karens).

The following are dimensions of a female from Thatone :

in.

Length from nose to anus, 9*6

„ of tail from anus, 8"S

„ of hairs at end of tail, 2*3

Total 20-7

Length of fore foot (without claws), 1*2

„ of hind foot and tarsus (do.), 1*8

„ of ear outside, 05

„ „ inside from orifice, 0'7

• Error is proverbially immortal, and consequently, attention cannot be too fipe-
qucntly called to the ciiciimstance that the localities assigned to this species and to
many other Asiatic squirrels in Dr. Gray's lists are incorrect.

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim. 161

S. oanioeps.

Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842, Ser. 1, Yol. X, p. 263 ; Sor. 3, XX, p. 280 ;
Blyth, J. A. S. B., 1876, XLIV, Pt. 2, Extra number, p. 36.

S. chrysomtM, Blyth, J. A. S. B., XVI, p. 873 ; XXIV, p. 474.
S. concolor, Blyth, J. A. S. B., XXIV, p. 474.

Although there is nothing like the variation in colouring in this spe-
cies that there is in S. atridorsalis, still a wide difference is found
between different specimens, especially in the colouration of the upper parts,
as Blyth and Gray have noticed ; some having the back pale ferruginous,
whilst others have the whole upper surface dull olivaceous grey, minutely
punctulated with scarcely a trace of rufous. The most rufous specimens
I have seen are from the Houngdarau valley, east of Moulmain, in these the
crown of the head, the back from the nape to the commencement Sf. the tail
and the sides are pale rusty red with scarcely a trace of j^unctulation. Moul-
main specimens, as a rule, are punctulated and merely washed with rufous,
especially on the anterior part of the back, or the rufous tinge is very faint,
and sometimes wanting. Blyth has noticed* that the least rufous specimen
he had seen came from Mergui. Southern Tenasserim specimens, judging
from one skin collected by Mr. Davison in Tavoy, and several from Banka-
stin, want the ferruginous tinge entirely. To the Bankasun specimens I
will refer further presently.

There is also some variation in the colouration of the abdomen. Some
specimens are almost white below, others more or less cinerous and more or
less punctulated. In some the colour of the lower parts is olivaceous grey,
scarcely paler than the sides. In very many specimens there is a dark
mesial line more or less developed, but it is not constant. These differences
of colouration in the under surface are apparently quite independent of the
degree to which the upper parts are washed with rufous, and none of the
differences, so far as I can judge, are due to age or sex.

The specimens from Bankasun in the extreme south of the Tenasse-
rim provinces are decidedly darker, both above and below, than any
I have examined from farther north, much darker even than the Tavoy
specimen. The Bankastin skins are almost olive green above, distinctly
punctulated, and scarcely paler but rather greyer below. In two specimens
out of three there is a darker mesial line beneath. The only difference
between these skins and S, concolor of Blyth from Malacca, of which spe-
cies I have examined the type in the Indian Museum, consists in the latter
having a slight rufous wash on the upper surface. I have no doubt that
the Bdnkasun squirrel passes into the Malaccan S. concolor. These dark
olivaceous forms may perhaps be sufficiently distinct to constitute a local

• J. A. S. B., 1855, XXIV, p. 475.

162 W. T. Blanford — On sotns Mammals from Tenasserim, [No. 3,

race, for which Bljth's name may be retained, but they are not, I think,

really separable from 8. canicept.

The following dimensions in the flesh of two adult females, are

taken from Mr. Davison's tickets ; both specimens are from Kaukaryit in

the Houngdarau valley. I also add (3 and 4) the measurements of two

spirit specimens from Mr. Limborg's collection.

1? 2? 8^^ 49,

Length from nose to anus, 8*2 8*7 9*25 8*75

„ of tail from anus, 9*2 9*8 775 9 25

„ of hairs at end of tail, 25 23 3 325

^^■^^^^^^^ ^^^H^^^^^^ ^^^a^^^i^^ a^^H^H^^HiM

Total 19-9 20-8 20* 2125

Length of fore foot (without claws), 12 12 132 1-22

„ of hind foot and tarsus (do.), 1*8 1*85 2' 2-05

Height of ear outside, 0*4 052 045 045

„ inside from orifice, .' 08 09 0*83 O'S

8, caniceps ranges throughout the Tenasserim provinces from Moul-
main to the banks of the Pakchoung. 1 have also one specimen labelled
from Thatone, which is to the webt of the Salween, but the skin so predse-
ly resembles the peculiarly dark olive specimens from Bankasun that 1 am
inclined to suspect the label must have been changed by accident.

S. mouhoti.

Gray, P. Z. S., 1861, p. 137.

S. berdmorei, Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 3, XX, p. 279. (P an 8, berdmani
verua Blyth.)

Several skins were procured by Mr. Davison, and a specimen in spirit
was collected by Mr. Limborg, of a species of striped squirrel differing
somewhat from the Museum specimens of 8. berdmarei, but agreeing very
well with Gray's description of 8. mouhoti from Camboja.* The museum
specimens of 8, herdmorei, said by Blythf to have been collected by him-
self in MartabanJ, have three broad black stripes along the back, whereas
in the specimens before me there are no black stripes and no distinct darker

* Eppecially with the second description quoted above from the * Annals and MJaga-
zine of Natural History.' In the original description the interspace between the pale
lateral lines was said to be black, in the second account blackish, which accords better
with Mr. Davison's specimens. The remark appended to the original description of S,
Mouhoti, that it differs from most squirrels of the same size by having the three Btreaks
on the upper part of the back, I understand to refer to the lateral bands, a dark one
between two pale stripes, on the upper part of the side, not on the lower as in i^. nUmtm
and its allies.

t Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc. p. 106.

t J. A. S. B., 1862, XXXI, p. 333.

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim, 163

band in the middle of the back, although there is a slight indication of
darkening in one specimen. In the original description of S. herd"
moreiy* it was said to have an obscure pale central dorsal streak, flanked by
a blackish band, but in a subsequent descriptionf of an example sent from
Moulmain the three black bands of the back were especially noticed. Sub-
sequently 8. mouhoti was described by Gray and then identified by the
describer with 8, herdmorei, an identification adopted by Blyth.^ It is
possible that the two forms pass into each other, but they look very dilPer-
ent, and for the present I prefer retaining Gray's name for the variety
before me, of which the following is a description.

The upper surface is yellowish brown, puncticulated, the hairs being black
with two buff rings. The fine woolly under- fur is dark slate- coloured at the
base with buff tips. On each side of the back there are two longitudinal pale
lines extending from the shoulder to the thigh, the upper narrow and well
defined, the lower broader and less marked. Between the two and above
the upper pale line, the fur is darker in some specimens, but apparently this
is not constant. The sides below the lower pale lateral bands are greyish
brown puncticulated. The lower parts throughout are white, sometimes
tinged with buff. The tail hairs are light brown at the base, then black,
then brown again, then black to near the tips, which are whitish. Whiskers
black. The ears are rounded with very short hairs outside.

The bare planta on the hind feet extends further towards the heel than
in the more typically arboreal squirrels, 8. caniceps^ 8. atridorsalis and 8.
phai/reiy in which the bare portion ends about •} to i of an inch from the
proximal extremity of the tarsus, whereas in 8, mouhoti it extends to the
joint. The claws too in 8, mouhoti are rather less curved, and the pads on
the feet appear more raised.

The following are measurements in inches taken by Mr. Davison, before
skinning, on two females, the first from Kaukaryit, the second from
Myawadi, both east of Moulmain, and of the male preserved by Mr. Lim*
borg in spirit.

1? 2$ 8^

Length from nose to anus, 7*3 6*8 6"4i

„ of tail from anus, ^ 5 8 5'6 5'4

„ of hairs at end of tail, 2* 2'

Total 151 14-4

• J. A. 8. B., 1849, XVni, Pt. 1, p. 603.

t J. A. 8. B., 1859, XXVIII, p. 418.

t J. A. 8. B., 1875, XLIY, Pt. 2, Exto number, p. 37.

lC4s W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenasserim. [No. 3i

1? 2? SS

Length of fore foot (without claws), 0-8& 0*85 085

„ hind foot and tarsns (do.), 1-63 1-5 1*65

Height of ear outside, 04 0*5 0*35

„ inside from orifice, 0*8 0*8 0*65

Bljth in his list of the Mammals of Burma, suggests that 8» heri-
morei should perhaps more properly range as a species of Jjamias, In the
specimen of 8. mouhoti in spirit, ohtained hy Mr. Limhorg, I cannot detect
any cheek pouches. Unfortunately the skull of this specimen is too much
injured to he extracted for measurement.

The only specimens of this squirrel hitherto ohtained are from the
country east of Moulmain. Mr. Davison informs me that he has never
seen either this or 8. herdmorei in Southern Tenasserim. The latter is,
however, reported with some doubt by Blyth from Mergui.

S. barbei.

Blyth, J. A. S. B., XVI, p. 876, PI. XXXVI, fig. 8 ; XVIII, p. 603 ; XLIV,Pt 2,
Extra number, p. 38.

The following are the dimensions of three fresh specimens recorded by
Mr. Davison : 1 and 3 from Kaukaryit on the Houngdarau river, 2 from
Myawadi.

IJad. 2*ad. 3?

Length from nose to anus, 4*65 46 4*7

„ of tail from anus, 5* 4*9 6*

„ of hairs at end of tail, 0 85 1*5 T

Total 10-5 110 10-7

Length of fore foot (without claws), 0*75 0*7 0*7

„ hind foot and tarsus (do.), 1' 1*12 1-15

Height of ear outside, 0*4 0*45 0*45

„ inside from orifice, 0*58 0*6 0*6

This species appears to be found throughout Tenasserim, extending
south to Malacca. Specimens from Southern Tenasserim and from Mabicca
have much darker dorsal bands and shorter ear tufts than those £rom the
neighbourhood of Moulmain. Judging from the specimens before me too,
the southern form appears smaller, with a comparatively shorter tail, but I
have no fresh measurements. The original types came from Ye, about half
way between Moulmain and Tavoy, and probably belonged to the Northern
variety.

1878.] W. T. Blanford — On some Mammals from Tenass&rm, 165

Pteromys cineraoeiis.

Blyth, J. A. S. B., XVI, p. 866 ; XXVIII, p. 276 ; XUV, Pt. 2, Extra number,
p. 35.

A fine female skin from Wimpong, 15 miles from Thatone, (west
of the Salween) has the tip very little darker than the remainder of
the tail, and is easily distinguished from P. oral of Southern India by its
greyer colour, and by the lower parts being white. The following are the
dimensions noted by Mr. Davison on the fresh specimen.

in.

Length from nose to anus, 18*5

„ of tail from anus, 22*5

„ of hairs at end of tail, 3*

Total 44-0

Length of fore foot (without claws), 2*4

„ of hind foot and tarsus (do.,) 3'

Height of ear outside, 1*5

„ inside from orifice, 2*

Bhisomys oaBtaneufl.

Blyth, J. A. 8. B., XII, p. 1007 ; XLIV, Pt. 2, Extra number, p. 41.

A specimen from Thatone in Martaban, west of the Salween river, and
another from, I believe, the same neighbourhood, differ from Arakan and
Pegu specimens by having a white spot in the middle of the forehead, as in
some other species of the genus. As there appears no other distinction,
and as the spot is evidently variable, being far more distinct in one speci-
men before me than in another, I do not think this form is more than a
variety.

MuB robufituliis.

Blyth, J. A. S. B., XXVIII, p. 294 ; XLIV, Pt. 2, Extra number, p. 39.

Specimens in spirit from near Maulmain collected by Mr. Limborg do
not appear to me distinct from the common tree rat of lower Bengal,
M. rtffescefu of Blyth and Jerdon, but not, I think, of Gray, as in the origi-
nal description by the latter the tail is said to be shorter than the body,
whereas in both the Bengal and Burmese rats the tail exceeds the head and
body in length. I can see no difference in the skulls of the Bengal and Te-
nasserim rats.
22

166 W. T. Blanford— Oit some Mammahfrom TenasserM. [Na 3,

, Ukgulata.
TraguluB napu.

Mo$chu9 napu, Raffles, Linn. Trans. XIII, p. 262.

Tragulus napUy A. Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sc. Kat. Ser. 6, II, 1864, pp. 106, 158, FI.
II, fig. 2 J— Blyth, J. A. 8. B., XLIV, 1876, Pt. 2, Extra number, p. 44 ; P. Z. a,
1864, p. 483.

T, /Meatus, Blyth, J. A. 8. B., XXVII, 1868, p. 278.

T. javanicua, Blyth, Cat. Mam. Mus. As. Soc, p. 166, nee Pallas.

As was suggested by Blyth in his remarks on Tragulus Jcanchil, the
larger form of chevrotain is also found in Southern Tenasserim, Mr. Davi-
son having procured an adult and a young animal from Bankasun. Owing
to the extreme confusion which formerly prevailed as to the synonymy of
the Traguli^ the nomenclature and distribution of the different species can*
not be said yet to be rightly determined in all cases, but it is clear that
two distinct forms are found in the Tenasserim provinces and these forms
appear to be the T. kanchil and T. napu of A. Milne-Edwards' monograph
of the Tragulidw in the ' Annales des Sciences Naturelles', as has already
been pointed out by Mr. Blyth.

The most striking differences between the two species are, — ^first, size ;
T. napu being probably thrice the weight of T. kanchil ; — ^second, the much
stouter limbs of the former ; the length of the tarsus and hind foot in two
specimens before me of T, napu and T. kanchil respectively being 5*85 and
4*8, whilst the circumference of each tarsus in the middle is 1*3 and 0*85;
— and, third, colouration, especially below. There is but little difference
above ; both are brown, becoming paler and greyer on the sides, but the
dark line from the nape down the back of the neck is much more distinct
in T. kanchil. The colouration of the throat and helly, however, is very
different ; in T, napu there are five white stripes on the throat, one longitu-
dinal in the middle, and two oblique stripes on each side, the upper lateral
band being much shorter than the lower. In the adult skin from Tenasse-
rim all these bands unite in front, but not in the young specimen, in which
the median stripe is separated from the others, as described bj Milne-
Edwards. The interspaces between the white bands are dark brown, darker
than the sides of the neck, but this appears sometimes to be the case in 21
kanchil also. The abdomen in adult T, napu is mostly white, the breast
and the space between the thighs purer white than the rest ; in the young
all the middle portion of the abdomen between the broad white breast and
the narrower white groin is smokey brown ; in both there is a rudimentaiy
dark median band, not nearly so distinct as in T. kancML

In T. kanchil there are but three white stripes on the throat, the
median lino being sometimes entirely distinct from the two broad and long

1878.] P. Smith — Tenasserim Hymenoptera. 167

oblique lateral stripes, sometimes coalescing with them in front ; the abdo*
men is pale rufous and white in patches, the centre of the anterior portion
and the sides of the posterior portion being white, and the remainder rufous,
but the proportion of the two colours varies ; there is, however, a well
marked dark median line along the anterior half beginning from the dark
transverse band on the breast.

In both species the rump is rufous, and the tail brown above, white
below and at the tip. All the differences noticed, except the number of
white stripes on the throat, have already been pointed out by Blyth.

XI. — List q/* Hymenoptera obtained hy Me. Ossian Limbobg east of
Maidmaifij Tenasserim Provinces^ during the months of December 1876,
January f March and April 1877, with descriptions of new species ; — by
Fbedbbick Smith, Biological Department, British Museum. (Com-
municated by J. Wood-Mason.)

(Received 30th Augufit, 187^.)

Scoliadee.

1. Elis ltndeki, St. Fargeau, Hym. Ill, 500.

2. LiACOS ANALis, Pabr.

Fompilid®.

8. POMFILUS PEBEOBIKUS, Smith.

4. PoMPiLUS vmosrs, n. sp.

Male. Ferruginous : the thorax with black markings, and the abdo-
men f usco-ferruginous towards the apex. The antennsB fuscous above ; the
eyes and tips of the mandibles black ; the front, before the antennae, pale
reddish yellow. The meso thorax with a black longitudinal stripe on each
side ; the thorax at the sides and beneath paler than the disk, and with a
golden lustre ; the pectus black ; wings f usco-hyaline. The extreme base
of the abdomen black ; the first, second and third segments with their apical
margins fusco ferruginous, the following segments entirely so.
Length 6^ lines,

Sphegid».

5. Ammophila niobifes. Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins., Ft. IV, p. 215.

6. Chlobioit lobatxjm, Fabr.) Ent. Syst., II, p. 206.

168 F. Smith — Tenasserim Hymenoptera. [No. 3,

BembioidfB.

7. Bembex fossobtus, n. sp.

Female. Black, with lacteous fasciae and markings above, the legs
faintly yellow. The clypeus, labrum, mandibles, the scape in front, a
narrow line at the inner orbits of the eyes, and a broad one behind, not
extending to their summit, white, faintly yellow behind the eyes ; the tips
of the mandibles, and a transverse spot at the base of the clypens, black ;
the vertex with a downy white pubescence. Thorax smooth and shining
above, and very finely punctured ; the margin of the prothorax, a line over
the tegulse, uniting with a curved one on the hinder margin of the scatel-
lum, a narrow transverse one on the post-scutellum, a curved transverse one
on the metathorax, and its posterior lateral angles, lacteous ; the sides of
the thorax and the legs more or less faintly yellowish ; the coxsb and femo-
ra with black markings ;' the claw- joint of the tarsi fuscous ; wings hyaline,
the nervures f usco-ferruginous. The segments of the abdomen with broad
lacteous fasci» a little before the apical margins of the segments ; the
f ascisB with their anterior margins emarginate laterally ; black beneath,
with the lateral posterior angles lacteous.
Length 8^ lines.

Eumenidse.
8. EiTHEinss ABCVATA8, Fabr., Ent. Syst., II, p. 276^

Vespidse.

9. POLYBIA S17MATBBN8IS, SauSS.

10. P. OBiEifTALis, Sauss., Mon. Gu^pes Soc., p. 208.

Foneridse.

11. DiACAMMA SCALPATBUK, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins., Form., p. 8i

12. Meoachile bimidiata, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins., Apidie, Pi h
p. 174.

18. Xylocopa latipeb, Brury, Illust. Exot. Ins., II, p. d8.

14. X iESTiTAsrs, Linn., Syst. Nat., I, p. 961.

15. X. coLLABis, St. Farg., Hym. II, p. 189.

16. X. AMETHTSTnrA, Latr., Ins. Ill, p. 876.

17. BoKBiTS sxncnrs, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins., Apidae, II, p. 403.

18. BoMBirs MOKTrvAQUs, n. sp. $.

Black : head elongate, the clypeus shining and finely pimctured ; the
pubescence black. Thorax with rufo-fulvous pubescence above, and with
black on the disk ; the posterior tibise and tarsi obscurely ferruginous
palest beneath ; the tarsi with ferruginous pubescence within ; wings dark
brown with a purple and violet iridescence in certain lights ; the tegoU^

1878.] D. Sharp — New Coleopterous Insects, 109

obscurely rufo-piceous. Abdomen : the basal segment with bright yellow
pubescence, on the second and third it is black, and on the following seg^
ments it is bright ferruginous ; beneath, obscurely ferruginous, and the
segments fringed with ruf o-fulvous pubescence.
Length 9^ lines.

Sah. Moolaiyet. Alt. 3-6000 ft.

19. Apis indica., Fabr., Ent. Syst., Supp. p. 274f.

20. Apis flobea, Fabr., Ent. Syst., II, p. 341.

21. Tbigona tebhinata, n. sp.

Worker. Black : head and thorax semiopaque, abdomen smooth and
shining. The anterior margin of the clypeus, the labrum, mandibles, and
basal half of the scape in front, pale ferruginous ; the apical joint of the
fiagellum pale. The margins of the mesothorax pale ferruginous ; the
scutellxun fringed with short fulvous pubescence, the tarsi, except the basal
joints, ferruginous ; wings hyaUne and iridescent, the nervures and tegu-
ke testaceous. The base and apex of the abdomen ruf o-testaceous^ the
former with two black spots ; beneath pale ruf o-testaceous.
Length 2i lines.

XII. — Preliminary diagnoses of new Coleopterous Insects "belonging to the
families Dytiscidse, StaphylinidsB, and Scarabasidse obtained hy the late
Db. F. Stoliczka during the 2nd mission to Yarkand under Sib
Douglas Fobstth. — By D. Shabp.

DTTISCIDiB.

1. Agabus diohrous.

A. ohlongo-ovaliSf nitidus, suhtus niger, supra testaceus, vertice nigro,
rtifO'bimaculatOy antennis pedibusgue testae eis, femoribtts in medio late ni^
gris ; scutello fusco ; elytris apicem versus vis fusco-nebulosis. Long. 8
mm., lat. 4 mm.

Hab. a single male individual found on the road across the P^mir
from Sarikol to Panjah.

2. nybius oinotus.

I. ovaliSf angustulus, parum eonvexuSy svibtus ferrugineus ; supra fus*
eO'€BneuSf prothoraeis elytrorumque lateribus late testaeeis ; subnitiduSf sub*
iilissime retieulatus. Long. Si mm., lat. vix 4^ mm.

Hab, Tangihiss&r.

170 D. Sharp — New Coleopterous Insects [No. 3,

STAPHYLINID^.

1. Taohinos stolicakflB.

T. parvulus, sub-depressus, ni^er, elytris castanets vel piceo^easianeis^
antennis pedihusque sordide testaceis ; prothorace fere tmpunciato, e/vtris
parce punetatiSy obsolete striffosuiis, ahdomine sat crehre sub-obsolete punc-
tato. Long. 0 mm., lat. If mm.

Hab. On the road across the Pamir, from Sarikol to Panjah.

2. Fhilonthua stolioaksB.

P. rubido, Er. similis et affinis : angustulus, sub-parallelus, niger^ elytris
rt^fis^ antennis fusciSy basi cum pedibus testaceis^ abdominis segmentis fer-
rugineo-marginatis ; thorace angustulo, subparailelo, serie discoidaii pune-
tarum 5, et punciis lateralibus sat numerosis, elytris rufis basi summo paullo
obscuriore, crebre^ferefortiterpunctatis ; abdomine dense, aqualiter gubti^
literque punctato, opaco. Long. 5 mm.

Hab. Y&rkand.

3. Fhilonthus pamirensis.

Ex. qffinitate Staph, tenuis, Fabr. Angustulus, haud parallelus, niger,
elgtris rufis, antennis pedibusque poster ioribusfuscis, illarum basi pedihus-
que anterioribus testaceis ; ahdomine subtiliter punctate. Long. 6 mm.

Hab. On the road across the Pamir from Sarikol to Panjah.

SCARAB^ID^.

1. Onthophagtis oonoolor.

O. niger, fere nudus, supra opacus, subtus sat nitidus ; proihoraes
peropacOy parcius subtiliter punctate, lateribus ad angulos anteriores eei-
denter sinuatis ; elytris subtiliter striatis, interstitiis parcius et subtiliter
punctatis, punctis haud per spicue setigeris. Long. 7 — 9 m.m.

Masc. Gapite vert ice medio breviter tubereulato, prothorace fere mutico.

Fern. Capite medio lined curvatd sat elevatd, vertice medio lamind ele-
vatd (ad apicemplus minusve emarginatd) brevissimd

Hab. Sind valley, Kashmir ; and Murree, Panjdb hills.

2. AphodiuB »ger.

A. Scarabsei granarii, Lin. similis ; oblongus, levit&r convexus, niiidus,
niger, elytris piceis vel fere nigrisy pedibus rufis, elypeo medio enmrginato,
frontefere muticd ; prothorace subtiliter punctate, versus latera punctis

1878.] from Kashmir, Tdrkand, Sfc. 171

major ihu9 crebrihus, margine hagali integro, angulis posieriarihus sinuatis ;
elytris vix suhtiliter sir tat is, atriis indistincte crenatis, T* et 8° ante apicem
eonjunctis, humeris langius ciliatis. Long. 5 — 5^ mm., lat. 2\ mm.

Hab. Two small specimens were found at Yangihiss^ ; of some
others the exact locality is not recorded.

8. AphodiuB kashmirensis.

A. niger, nitidua, sat canvesus, pedihus rufo-pieeis, antennis rujls,
clavd fused ; clypeo anterius emarginato, et utrinque subacute prominu-
Jo ; prothorace punctis magnis profundis sat numerosis, aliisque minutis,
margine basalt distincto, sulculo ante eum crenulato, elytrisfortiter crenato^
striatis, interstitiis subtilissime sparsim punetatis.

Long. 6 — 6} mm., lat. 8^ mm.

Hab. Drds, Kargil and Leh, in LadAk.

4. Aphodius tenuimanus.

A. Aphodii melanosticti, Er. persimilis ; oblongus, subcanvexm, niti-
dw, infuscato-testaeeuSy eapite thoraceque nigris, hoc lateribus testaceis ;
elytris luteis, maculis dorsaltbus 4 vel 5, strigdque sublaterali nigris, pedi-
bus metastemoque medio testaceis; fronte medio vix tuherculato ; tibits
anterioribus tenuibus, intus conspicue ciliatis. Long. 5 — 6 mm.

The exact locality where Dr. Stoliczka procured the specimens is
unknown.

5. Geotrupes kashmirensis*

G. Geotrupis stercorarii (Haroldi) persimilis, sed elytris longioribus ;
ohlongO'Ovalis, supra viridescente-niger, nitidus, subtus pwrpureus, Julvo-
pubescens ; antennis piceo-rufis ; mandibulis extus rotundatis, ad apicem
leviter unisinuatis ; elytris striis U, minus distincte punetatis; abdo^
mine etiam in medio punctato, sed illo minus pubescente ; tibiarum posticarum
earind tertid (ab apice) omnino earente. Long. 24 mm., lat. 13 mm.

Hab. Dt&s, Kargil or Leh, two individuals.

6. HopUa oonoolor.

H. oblonga, sat elongata, ferruginea, sqi^mulis pallide griseis, magnis,
fere ttqualiter vestita ; tarsorum posticorum unguiculo mutico. Long. 8
mm., lat. 4i mm.

Hab. Kugiar.

172 D. Sharp — New Ooleopterout Imeefs [No. 3,

7. Serioa IsBtUmla.

S. ohovata, convexa, nitidula^ tantwn ahdomine opaco, hrunneo-fer-
ruginea; proihoraee fortiter punctata^ elytris seriatim pundaHs, seridiu
leviter depressis, interstitiis plants, tantum juxta series punetatis ; antemus
lO-articulatiSfJlabelii articulo prima apiee emarginato. Long. 8i mm.,
lat. 4 mm.

Locality not recorded.

8. Iiaohnostema stridnlans.*

L. testacea, eapite, thorace seutelloque fore forrugineis, supra opaea^
opalescens, subtus ahdomine injlato nitido, peetore minus dense villoso ;
eapite hrevi, fortiter punctate ; prothoraee sparsim punctata fortiter trans-
verso, margine laterali integro, sinuate, angulis posterioribus obtusis ; elg^
tris sat crebre parum profonde punetatis. Long. 15^ mm., lat. 8 mm..

Hab. Murree, a single individual.

9. Laohnosterna stoliozkflD.

L. oblonga, picea, nitida, peetore prostemo que griseo-villosis ; eapite
haud parvo, clypeo fortiter reftexo-marginato, anterius vix emarginato ;
prothoraee lateribus rotundatis, anterius quam posterius magis angustato^
crehrius punctata, angulis posterioribus obtusis, margine laterali serrato ;
elytris crebrius fortiter punetatis, areis hngitudinalibus parcius punetatis^
haud argute elevatis. Long. 15 — 16 mm., lat. 8 mm.

Hab. Murree.

* I am acquainted with only one other species closely allied to this, it is as yet
imdescribed and is labelled in my collection " Aneylonycha pulvinosa, Beiche, India bar ;**
it has the same appearance as Z. stridulans, and has, like it, the epipleural Une finely
crenulate, hut it differs considerably in the structure of the antenns and of the daws ;
in Lachnostema atridulans, the flabellum of the antenna is rather long, and composed of
fiye joints, the first is,, however, very short, not half the length of the second, which
itself is a good deal shorter than the three following ones ; the claws are divided into
two rather divergent portions of equal length. In the undescribed Beicheian species
the flabellum is short and composed only of three joints, and the daws of the feet are
strongly dentate in the middle.

I add a short diagnosis of this insect.

Lachnostsbma pulvinosa, n. sp* Ferru^inea, elyiris diUttioribus, iupr€ opaca^
opakscefu, sttbtut abdomine injlato, medio nitido, peetore pareius viliow ; eapite brevi den»t
rugoiO'punctato ; prothoraee eparsim punetato, punetie in margine anteriori magmis, fortittr
transversa, lateribus valde sinuatis, in medio perdilatatis, angulis posterioribus valde obiusis,
margine laterali subcrenulato ; elgtris sat crebre subtiliter punetatis. Long. 16 mnu

1878.] from Kashmir, Tdrlcand, Sfc, 173

10. Bhizotrogus bilobus.

R. antennis 10-articulatis ; ohlonffua, colore varidbilu, ferrugineus
vel picetM, mbopacttSy prothorace in medio scejpius nitido, ad latera alhido-
pruinoso ; clypeo in medio profunde emarginato ; prothoracis laterihua
anterius crenulatis ; elytris indistincte et inequaliter ptmctatiSy lateribus
dense ciliatis ; pggidio ventreque pruinosis ; pectore prostemoque dense
viilosis.

Long. 17i — 20 mm., lat. 9 — 10 mm.

Hab. Yangihiss^ and Kugiar, Eastern Turkestan.

11. Anomala stoliozkeD.

(Genus Cailistethus, Blancd.) A. ovata, minus convespa, latissime viri*
disy nitidissima ; elytris subopacis, antennis nigris ; capite thoraceque lavi-
gatis ; elytris seriebus duplicatis punctorum tribus, et inter eas sat crehre
punctatis. Long. 12^ mm., lat. 6^ nrni.

Hab. a single individual was found at Murree.

12. Adoretus nudiusculus.

A. tesiacetMy clypeo ferrugineOyfronte fusca, nitidula, parcius hrevissi^
meque setosus ; prothorace fortiter punctate , lateribus subcrenulatisy angu^
lis posterioribus omnino rotundatis ; elytris obsolete costat is, for titer punc^
tatis.

Long. 9i mm., lat. 5i mm.

Hab. Jhelum vallej, a single individual.

13. Adoretus simplex.

A. angustulus, parallelus, sat elongatus, densius albido-setosus, subopa^
cus, subtus parcius setosus, nitidus ; clypeo rotundato, in medio alte reflexo ;
prothorace basi cequaliter et tenuiter marginato, angulis posterioribus rotun^
datis ; elytris obsoletissime costatis, crebius punctatis»

Long. 10 mm., lat. 4^ mm.

Hab. Jhelum valley.

14. Fentodon tninoatus.

P. nigrO'piceus, nitidus, capite anterius truncato, angulis inter se dis^
tantibuSy tuberculo longitudinali acuto, fronte in medio tubereulis duobus
minutis ; prothorace fortiter punctato, basi ad angulos posteriores tenuiter
marginato, Elytris sat crebre haud profunde punctatis, seriebus duplicatis
haud distinotis. Long. 19 — 20 mm., lat. 12 mm.

Hab. Kugidr. Two individuals, which are no doubt both males.

174 D. Sharp — New Colecpieraus LuecU,

15. Fentodon pnmilxiB.

F. nigro-pieeuSj nitidtu, eapiU anteriw truncato, ongulis inter te dU^
iantibiu, tubereulo longitudifkali aeuto, frofUe in medio tubereulis ditobue
minutU ; protkoraee fbrtiier punetato, hati adanguloe poeterioree tenuiter
marginato ; elgtrie fere denee, euhrugulose puMeUUis^ eeridme dupiieatU
hand dietineiie.

Long. 14i— 151 mm., lat. 9--10.

Hab. Kugiir.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Part II.— PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. IV.— 1878.

XIII. — Description of a new Lepidopterous Insect belonging to the genus

Thaumantis. — Bg J. Wood-Mason.

(With Plate XII.)

Besides the fine and beautiful insect described below, there are repre-
sented in the Zoological collections formed by Mr. Ossian Limborg and staff
in Upper Tenasserim during the months of December, 1876 and January,
February, March, and April 1877, 225 other species of Lepidoptera, partly
butterflies, 50 to 60 of which are considered to be undescribed, and several of
which are referred to new genera, by Mr. F. Moore, who has worked out
the whole collection and written a paper upon it which will shortly be pub-
lished and illustrated by three or four coloured plates in the Proceedings of
the Zoological Society of London.

LEPIDOPTERA.

Fam. MoEPHio^.
Thaumantis lotjisa.

Th, louisa, Wood-Mason, P. A. S. B., July 1877, p. 163.
f Th. alts supra albis, anticis dimidio basali, posticis partibus duabus
hasalibus IcBtissime et purissime fulvis ; singulis, ut in Th. howqua, fascid
submarginali lunularum cum maculis hastiformibus coalitarum saturatis"
sime violaceo-fusca, ornatis ; lunuUs maculisque alarum posticarum vald^
fnajoribus : alis infra luteofulois, anticarum parte media sola alba luteo
vix tincta ; strigis quatuor sinuatis, duabus basalibus saturate brunneis,
alterisque duabtts submarginalibus obsoletis et tantum ad angulum analem
hrunneO'Coloratis ; anticarum ocellis omnibus (5) obsoletis, posticarum aw
28

176 J. Wood-Mason — Deieription of a new ThaamaDtis. [No. 4*

tern duobus (intermediU tribui ohsoleiis) rt^Sy pupilla alha^ iride ienmi
nigra,

Expans. alarum antic, une, 5 iin, 3.

Habitat in T&noiserim in fnontibu§ ** Taco" dictis ad alt. 3 — 6000
fed. ; O. Liniborg detesit.

This fine and distinct species belongs to the same division of the genns
as Th. eamadevay Th. nourmahal, Th. eambodia, and Th, howqua^ to the
last of -which it is most nearly related, but from which it difEers in haring
the upper surface of the wings white and fulvous instead of fulvous
throughout, and in having five spots, the red rings of the ocelli, on the under-
surface of the fore wings, and only two well-developed ocelli on the hinder
wings, instead of three and five ocelli respectively.

Both the specimens obtained are males and each is furnished, like the
same are in all the allied species and in some at least of those belonging to
the other section of the genus, with a tuft of erectile hairs situated on the
upper surface of each hinder wing near the base of the organ. Dr. Fritz
Miiller has recently communicated to the Entomological Society of
London a valuable paper in which the tufts of hairs and the glandular
patches he has discovered on different parts of the body in the males of
many Brazilian Lepidoptera are considered to be odoriferous organs serving,
in all probability, to attract the females. In the species of HUmmanti^
the tufts by their erection probably serve to scatter a scented secretion
poured out by skin-glands at their base ; and I hope that some one of the
three gentlemen (Major Badgley and Messrs. Peal and MandeUi) who are
located in districts in or near to which two of the species* (Tk. eamadeta
and Th, diores) abound, will before long examine living specimens of the
male of one or the other of these species so as to be able to tell us whether
these structures are odoriferous or not. The accompanying plate is from
a characteristic coloured drawing of the typical specimen (presented hy
me to the Oxford Museum) by Professor Westwood, Hope Professor of
Zoology in the University of Oxford.

* Short descriptions, by the aid of which and of that of the aooompanyiDg illustra-
tion any one ought to be able to recognize these two species, are subjoined : —

Th. eamadevaf has the fore wings above white tinged with leaden blue, brown, at
the base, and with a submarginal band of blotches and another of lunules foseoiu ;
the hinder wings fuscous brown at base and with a band of leaden white lunules behind
the middle ; and five red ocelli, each provided with a black iris-like ring, on &e under
surfEtce of each of the four wings. The expanse of the fore wings is 4^ inches. The
species is well-figured by Westwood in his ' Cabinet of Oriental Entomology,* pL iv.

Th, dioTM belongs to the other section of the genus : it is to be recognised at a
glance by the fuscous black upper surfeu^ of its wings, each of which has in the centre a
huge band or spot of indescribably brilliant metallic changeable blue ; on the fore wings
this spot is much paler and less changeable externally, while on the hinder wings it is
paler in the centre. Expanse 3| — 4| inches.

1878.] B. LjdeVker— Great Snow-fall in Kashmir. 177

XIV. — Great Snow-fall in Kashmir. — J&y R. Ltdskkeb, B. A.

Among the inhabitants of the Kashmir Himalaya, the winter and
spring of 1877-78 will long be memorable on account of the enormous
quantity of snow which then fell on their mountains and valleys, and still
more on account of the grievous famine which followed this excessive snow-
fall. So excessive indeed was thb snow-fall, that no tradition or record
exists even among the oldest inhabitants of anything approaching to such
a fall. I have therefore thought that a short account of this abnormal
snow-fall, and of the destruction inflicted by it on the indigenous animal
life, might be thought not unworthy of a place in the records of the Asiatic
Society, and have accordingly put together the following notes :

Early in the month of October 1877, snow commenced to fall in the
valley and mountains of Kashmir, and from that time up to May 1878,
there seems to have been an almost incessant snow-fall on the higher moun-
tains and valleys ; the inhabitants have indeed informed me that in places it
frequently snowed without intermission for upwards of ten days at a time.
It is extremely difficult to obtain from the natives any correct estimate as
to the amount of snow which fell in any place ; but at Dras, which has an
elevation of about 10,000 feet, I estimated the snow-fall from the native
account as having been from 80 to 40 feet thick on the level.

The effects of this enormous snow-fall are to be seen throughout the
country. At Dras, the well-built travellers' bungalow, which had stood,
I believe, some thirty years, was entirely crushed down by the weight of the
snow which fell on it. In almost every village in the neighbouring moun-
tains more or less of the log-houses have likewise fallen ; while at Gulmarg
and Sonamarg, where no attempt was made to remove the snow, almost all
of the huts of the European visitors have been utterly broken down by the
snow.

In the higher mountains, whole hill-sides have been denuded of vege-
tation and soil by the enormous avalanches which have swept down them,
leaving vast gaps in the primseval forests and choking the valleys below with
the debris of rocks and trees.

As an instance of the amount of snow which must have fallen on the
higher levels, we will take the Zogi-pass, leading from Kashmir to Dras,
which has an elevation of 11,800 feet. I crossed this pass early in August
last, and I then found that the whole of the ravine leading up to the pass
from the Kashmir side was still filled with snow, which I estimated in places
to be at least 150 feet thick. The road at that time was carried over the
snow up the middle of the ravine ; the true road which runs along one
bank of the ravine being still entirely concealed by snow. It seemed to me

178 R. Lydekker^Oreat Snow-fall in Kashmir. [No. 4,

quite impossible that eren half the amount of snow then remaining could
be melted during the summer.

I heard subsequently from a traveller who crossed the pass on the 5th
of September, that the road was then just beginning to get dear from snow,
and that some of his loads were carried along it, while others were taken
over the snow in the ravine.

In ordinary seasons this road on the Zogi-pass is clear from snow
some time during the month of June ; if we refer to page 223 of Mr. Drew's
" Jammoo and Kashmir Territories," we shall find that in speaking of this
pass, he savs, *' About the beginning of June the snow-bed breaks up, and
the ravine is no longer passable."

It is thus apparent that the road across the Zogi-la was not clear of
snow during the past summer until three months later than it is in normal
seasons, while the ravine early in September was still filled with snow. I
crossed the same pass in August 1874, and at that time there was not the
slightest trace of snow to be seen anywhere on the pass, or in the ravine
leading up to it. As another instance of the great snow-fall, I will take
the valley leading from the town of Dras up to the pass separating that
place from the valley of the Kisheng^nga river. About the middle of
August, almost the whole of the first-mentioned valley, at an elevation of
12,000 feet, was completely choked with snow, which in places was at least
200 feet in thickness. In the same district all passes over 13,000 feet were
still deep in snow at the same season of the year. In ordinary seasons the
passes in this district which are not more than 15,000 feet in height are
completely cleared of snow at the beginning of August, except in a few
sheltered ravines. During last summer, however, it was quite impossible^
that the snow could have even melted on the passes.

Traces of this great snow-fall were even to be observed in the outer
hills in September, since at the end of that month, I saw a patch of snow
resting in a hollow of the Haji Fir ridge above Uri, which is only a little
over 9,000 feet in height. The Thakadar of this place told me that he had
never before seen snow there after the beginning of June.

It is almost unnecessary to point out, that if a snow-fall similar to the
above were to be of constant occurrence in the Himalaya, the perma*
nent snow-line would lie at a much lower level than it does at present, and
that the glaciers would greatly increase in size, and descend much lower into
the valleys.

In conclusion, it remains to notice the destruction of animal life caused
by this unusual snow-fall. In the upper Ward wan valley I was told by
some European travellers that they had several times seen numbers of Ibex
embedied in the snow ; in one place upwards of sixty heads were counted,
and in another the number of carcases was estimated by my informant as

1878.] B. R. BranfiU— PAy*»o^TopA»<?a/ NoteB on Tanjore, Sfc, 179

little short of one hundred. I myself twice saw some fifteen carcases of
small Ihex embedded in the snow-drifts of the Tilail valley.

The most conyincing proof, however, of the havoc caused among the
wild animals by the great snow-fall, is the fact that scarcely any Ibex were
sepn during last summer, in those portions of the Ward wan and Tilail
valleys, which are ordinarily considered as sure finds. Near saline springs
in the latter valley, Ibex are always to be found in the later summer,
but this year I only heard of one solitary buck, probably the sole sur-
vivor of a herd, having been seen at these salt-licks. The native shikaris
say that almost all the Ibex have either been killed by the snow, or havo
migrated into Skardo where the snow-fall was less.

The Bed- Bear (Ursus isahellinus) was also far less numerous during
the past summer than in ordinary seasons, and the shikaris say that num-
bers of them have perished, owing to their winter quarters having been snowed
up so long that the occupants perished from hunger.

The same explanation will probably account for the fact that in the
higher regions I found many of the marmot burrows deserted.

Much has been said lately as to the destruction inflicted on the game
of the Kashmir Himalaya by the rifle of the European sportsmen, but I
think that the destruction caused by the snow of the past winter has
far exceeded any slaughter which would be inflicted by sportsmen during
a period of at least five or six years.

XV. — Physioffraphical Notes Sfe, on Tanjore (Tanja-ur). — By Liefteitant-
CoLONEL B. R. Bbanfill, Deputy Superintendent, Chreat IViyonomC'
trical Branchy Survey of India, — Communicated by Colonel J. T.
Walkeb, C. B., R. E., Surveyor- General of India.

The Tanjore district of the Madras Presidency is nearly contained
within an equilateral triangle of 75 to 80 miles on each side, on the
Coromandel coast (Ch6ramandal = Chdlan's region) immediately south of
the river Kolla^am {Angliee ** Coleroon"), which is the north and north-
west boundary, running S. W. by W. 75 miles inland from the river mouth.
The Bay of Bengal forms the east side, running from the same point nearly
75 miles due south to Point Calimere (Eallimdd). The third side is an
irregular line of much the same length from Point Calimere to the " Cauvery"
(E^v^ri and Eolla(jam) 10 miles east of Trichinopoly (TrisirdpaUi). This
triangular area contains about 3,000 square miles, two thirds of which is
Kav^ri delta, and two thirds of this portion, or about 1,400 square miles

180 B. R. BranfiU— PAynoyr^^uMj Ifotes on Thnfore, !(e. [No. 4,

is irrigated, and there is scarcely another acre of it that coidd be profitaUj
brought under irrigation. In addition to this, some 650 square miles <^
undulating country, running 40 miles to the southward along the shore of
Palk*s Bay to the P&mhanar, the border of Shivagangai Zamind£ri estate
(Madura District), and extending 12 to 20 miles inland, also belongs to
Tanjore. But the scope of these notes does not embrace more than the
deltaic portion of Tanjore, the country to the south having been traversed
the previous season, and reported on.

Although there are several places named " hill** (malai), or '' monnd**
(m64u), there is nothing at all worthy to be called a hill, except the dwmeM
or sand hillocks along the sea-hoard, the height of which (at Negapatam)
barely attains an elevation of 50 feet above sea level, and a few insignifi-
cant sand-drifts in the £. N. E. comer of the delta^ near the mouth of the
Kolla4am river.

The whole delta consists of an even plain of alluvial deposit contain-
ing a comparatively large proportion of sand and having a good slope of 3
or 4 feet per mile. The fall, however, decreases as the coast is neared to 2
feet per mile or less. The following particulars of slope are from the rail-
way levels of the South India Bailway, according to which the bed of the
K4v6ri for nearly one hundred miles, from Kardr to within 30 miles of the
present coast line, has a pretty even fall of near 4 feet a mile. The next
10 miles the gpradient decreases to about 3 feet per mile, and the next to
vrithin 10 miles of the coast to 2 feet per mile.

Continuing the examination of the declivity (by means of the recent
Government Hydrographic or Marine Charts), the fall of the ground out
at sea beyond the coast line increases in the first fourteen miles to 5 or 6
feet per mile, to 8 or 9 feet per mile for the next nine miles, to 24 feet
per mile for the next six, and to 38 feet per mile for the last ten miles
examined up to 37 miles from the coast. This rapid deepening of the
sea is a noticeable fact, but it seems only natural if the present coast line
is of purely fluviatile formation.

The character of the alluvium alters and generally deteriorates in
fertility as the distance from the head sluices of the K^v6ri channels
increases. It varies from a rich red or black loam to a pale sandy day,
the sand increasing and the clay diminishing from west to east, and but
for the annual fertilizing floods would be anything but rich and produetiTe.
Without artificial manure the land usually bears but one crop yearly.

The sea-board flats are usually well raised above sea-level, and
further protected from high tides and storm waves by a high sand-ridge
along the coast. Cyclones have been frequent on the coast, but have not
made the great devastating inroads they appear to have made elsewhere
on fche coast. The formation of this coast-ridge or sea-wall appears to be

1878.] B. E. Branfill — Fhy»ioyraphical Notet on Tanjore, ^e. 181

explained by the strong sea breezes which prevail in the hot and dry
season, and, blowing strongest at the hottest part of the day, when the
sand of the sea beach is driest and most easily raised, continually drift it
up inland to accumulate under the shelter of the coast vegetation.

It is thus formed into a ridge, or line of hillocks, parallel to the
shore-line at the inner and upper edge of the beach, frequently standing at
a steep slope on both sea-ward and land- ward sides. The blown sand does
not appear to extend far inland, being kept down by the fringe of palms
and other vegetation that usually grows near the coast. This advanced
vegetation equally protects the sand-ridge from being blown down again
and out to sea in the violent westerly winds of the south-west monsoon.

This coast sand-ridge is a common feature on the coasts of Southern
India, and it seems likely that the devastating storm-waves which have
visited the coast have only or chiefly destroyed the towns and villages that
were unprotected by it, such as those most conveniently situated for
trade at the mouth of a river or inlet, and those opposite to a muddy coast
line where there is no sand that will drift. In such places (in the number
of which Madras may be included), it would be prudent to raise an
artificial wall or ' lev6e' ; a small price to pay for immunity from such a
calamity as befel Masulipatam in 1864, when many thousands of persons*
perished miserably, and such as has probably swept out of existence many a
flourishing port on the Coromandel Coast.

As to whether the coast line of the K&v^ri delta is altering, it may
be well to consider the elements of change at work. We notice first the
silt-bearing floods of the autumnal rains, which are doubtless yearly raising
the level of the land generally and tending to make it encroach on the
sea, extending the coast line eastwards and shoaling the sea-bed, a slow
but unceasing process, albeit the effects may seem to wax and wane and
even to contradict what must inevitably occur sooner or later. The process
of new land-formation may be much slower now than it was before the
great irrigation works were begun, but so long as fresh silt is brought down
by the annual floods, it cannot cease altogether. The heaviest grains are
dropped first as the current slackens, whilst the lightest are carried on
until the river current is lost in the quiet depths of the open sea.

The next element of change is the wind, which acts both directly and
indirectly and in various ways. First, there is the north-east monsoon
(wind), acting indirectly by means of the southward, long-shore cur-
rent which carries the silt-bearing floods more or less down the coast,
and so to deposit their heaviest burden to the south of the river outlets,
thus commencing the sand-banks which help to shift the river mouth north-
wards. This wind cannot act directly on the shore sand to the north of
^ 30,000 persona are stated to have perished in one night.

182 B. B. BmaM—Physiofraphical IToiet on Tanjore, ^e. [No. 4,

the river mouths, because the sand is then moist from the recent autumnal
rains, the heaviest rain of the year, and therefore unmoyed. But the south-
ward set of the rollers and beat of the surf must tend to drift the shore-
sand loosened by its violence, southward across the river mouths, which it
shoals, helping to form the bar of sand-banks and islands usually formed
in such situations.

In January and February the north-east monsoon (wind) gradually
changes into land and sea breezes, which increase as the spring advances
with clear weather and a hotter sun. The sand of the sea-shore rapidly
dries and is drifted by the sea-breezes to the top of its slope, as long as
there is loose sand to drift and nothing to shelter it.

The sea-breezes veer gradually to the south-east and southward until
in May they become strong * long-fhore^ winds from the south, directly
transporting northward much of the blown sand collected along the coast-
ridge, in clouds of dust which settles in the hollows and tends to fill up and
choke the southern edges of the river out-falls and so to shift them north-
wards.

With the change of wind from the north-east in January to south-east
and south in April and May, the ' long-shore' current changes from aouth
to north, latterly running rapidly northwards and bringing in the heavy
sea-rollers obliquely to the coast from the south-east, to dash in lines of
roaring surf on the shore, washing the sand of the beach northwards at
every stroke. This double action it is (perhaps chiefly) that drives the rirer
mouths northwards.

Whether this is the right explanation or not, the fact remains that the
mouths of the rivers of the Coromandel Coast are continually shifting
northwards.

This is seen best in the Mah^nadi and Kav^ri ; also in the Penn^r
(Pindka), Nagari river, Kordaliyar, Ku-am, Pal&r and Vaigai.

It is less noticeable in the Godav^ri, Yellar, and Tamraparani. The
Kistna seems to contradict this tendency, and the G6daveri also has one
outlet apparently to the south of its delta, but these apparent exceptions
probably admit of some explanation. On the west coast, the Netravati
exhibits a similar tendency to make its outlet into the sea considerably
north of the spot it seems to be going to, as it approaches the coast.
The northward shifting of the Netravati mouth is probably due to the
northward set of the current, and the violent beat of the breakers during
the south-west monsoon, which has nothing to counter-balance it. It
seems probable that where the beach is sandy, the same tendency of the
river-mouths to shift northwards may be observed in Ceylon.

After shifting for an indefinite period to the north, during which it
seems probable that the bed of the river must be silting up, especially

1878.] B. R. BrvLnGU—Physiographical Kotes on Tnnjore, 8[c. 183

near the outfall where the current is less, some unusually high flood may
be expected to top the bank and thus form a new outlet to the south.
This may possibly occur near the head of the delta, and the new channel
may take its course along the southern edge or border and recommence the
process of shifting its mouth northward again. This may be the explanation
of the Kistna apparently flowing along the southern border of its delta ; it
also points to a possibility of the K^y6ri doing the same thing some day.

When a river has opened a new mouth and abandoned the whole or a
portion of its course, especially that which ran parallel to the coast, it
seems only likely that a lagoon or hack-water will be formed, which will
sooner or later silt up and eventually be reclaimed entirely from the sea.

Having thus considered the causes of the northward shifting of the
river mouths on the Coromandel Coast, to which the Kdveri has been
subject continually during the formation of its delta, to the east of Trichi«
nopoly, the probable history of its more recent inland course offers itself
for consideration.

Dr. Burnell of the Madras Civil Service states he has met with no
mention of the Kolla^am (Coleroon), which is now the principal bed of
the lower K^v6ri, by the early geographers, and thinks that the channel which
passes by Kumbak6nam and M^yaveram and enters the sea at K4v^ri-
paftanani, having retained the name of Kav^i throughout its course, was
the main channel of the river till the 10th or 12th century.

From Ptolemy's map of the Coast of India, it would appear that 1,500
to 2,000 years ago, there was a spit of land jutting out into the sea at the
Kdv^ri mouth near " Ohdberis Emporium'^ (Kdv^ri-pattanam), of which
there is now no trace, either above or below the sea-level contour line.

Such a spit or shoal would, however, naturally disappear if the river
mouth shifted, or if any thing stopped the deposition of silt which formed
it, and this must have happened when the great irrigation works at the
head of the delta were constructed.

At present the Kav^ri-paftanam mouth of the K^v^ri is nearly
silted up, and the principal outlet of the surplus flood- water is now by the
mouth of the Kolladam, where, according to recent maps, a new deltaic
projection and shoal are forming.

The great irrigation works are supposed to have been constructed
in the 10th and 12th centuries, but local traditions represent them as early
as the year 200 A. D. In any case, the delta has been under irrigation from
time immemorial. The story of the K&v^ri main channel would seem to be
somewhat thus : — ^After some long period of silting up from the deposit left
by the annual floods, the river in some unusual inundation must have over-
flowed its banks and found a new and easier course*
24

184 B. B. BrB.nG\\^Phifsio^aphical Notes on TanjorCy S[c, [No. 4,

This diTension may hare occurred either aboye or below what is now
the island of Srirangam, lying like a sand-bank in mid-riyer. If it oocnr.
red aboye, it seems likely that the new channel or northern branch (the
KoUadam*), soon became the deeper bed of the two, and then either ap-
proached and threatened, or actually breached the north bank of the
southern or old K&y6ri branch below the island, and the ' grand aaaikat'
(dam or weir), which is strictly a riyer-wall or ' ley^', must haye been
built to preyent or repair a breach.

If, on the other hand, the breach or bifurcation occurred below Siiran-
gam, the ' g^nd anaikaf' was probably made to repair it and keep the
stream back in its own channel : but if so, the attempt was ineffectual, for
the riyer must haye then formed a new bed for itself, some miles higher op
the channel, at a point nearly opposite a place marked on the map (Indian
Atlas, Sheet 79) as * Palaya Cauvery' (Old Cauyery).

In either case, the northern channel, which flows along the left or
northern border of the delta, and immediately under the grayel up-lands of
north-east Trichinopoly, became the deeper and wider one, carrying off the
high floods, whilst the south or old K^y^ri branch, kept at a higher leyei
with impeded stream and checked by numerous irrigation works, gradually
silted up and threatened to leaye Tanjore unwatered, for the bed of the
Kolla^am was too deep to admit of irrigation channels being profitably led
from it. The difference of leyel of the two beds at the grand Miaikat is
yariously stated to haye been from 10 feet to 20 feet early in this (19th)
century and to be rapidly increasing.

In this state ^the British Goyemment took charge of the district
and, after trying many other expedients to saye and restore the K^vdd
irrigation, in 1836 constructed first the upper anaikat, a weir or dam acroaa
the head of the northern branch or Kolladam, in order to raise the stream,
so as to flow into the Eayeri Proper or southern branch. This proyed more
than suflicient in times of high floods, and there was danger of oyerwhelming
Tanjore by a sudden inundation from pouring in an excessiye supply. To
remedy this, sluices were formed in the ' grand anaika^* to proyide an escape
for the sand, and surplus water that was not wanted, and finally a head^
sluice or regulating dam was made across the Kayeri channel where it
enters the delta, below the ' grand anaikat,' thus giying the means of regu-
lating the supply as desired.

The Kdy6ri proper continues its eom'se through the delta

* P Kolai-(y)-idam » ' Slaughter place', from a legend that men weire cast into a
chaem through which the K&v6ri had disappeared, in order to fill it up ; a story that
looks as if a human sacrifice had been performed at the repair or filling up of a great
breach. Koll&yi « a breach in a hank (Qtmdert). Ano&er suggests Kilai-y-i^am ■»
' hifiircation-place', from kilai, a branch, bifurcation &c.

1878.] B. R. BnsiSil—Fhjfsio^raphieai Mies on Tanjore, ife. 185

continually diminished stream, giving ofE numerous supply channels all
the way to the Coast, when little stream remains to enter the sea at E&v^ri-
pattanftm or Kildr (^ JEast-battme^),

There is no projection beyond the normal (north and south) line of
the coast here, nor any spit or shoal to witness to any old projection of the
river mouth, nor do the Marine Chart soundings indicate anything of the
kind. That the diminished stream flows in its old bed, is proved by the
name of the channel and the port at its outlet, and also by the traditions
at the places on its course, Kumbakdnam, M&yaveram &c., where the
sanctity of the E&v6ri water is still highly esteemed.

The other and now chief branch, the E[olla4am, takes a north-easter-
ly course, keeping more and more to the northward along the low ground
that probably existed on the north edge of the K4v6ri delta, and has, by
its rapidity and volume, made for itself a deep and wide bed, too deep below
the surface of the country to allow of irrigation channels being led from
it, and in most places three-quarters of a mile in width. To utilize the
surplus water escaping to the sea by this channel, the ' Coleroon lower
anaikat'* was built, to supply the Mayaveram and Shi-yali Taluks of N. £.
Tanjore, and the Chidambaram Q Chilambram') Taluk of South Arcot.

The water overflowing the final anaikat flows with a greatly retarded
current and in a very tortuous course along the last few miles before
it enters the sea near Divu-kdtai (' l9le-fort\ the *' Devikotta" of Atlas
Sheet No. 79), the name of which indicates, that it was on an island when
first named (tivu being the Tamil form of the Sanskrit dvipa, an island).

Notwithstanding published statements to the contrary, it appears that
sand-banks are still forming at the mouth of the Kolla^am, and the Marine
Chart of the coast gives the position of a shoal called the " Coleroon shoal,*'
whence Porto Novo, or Muhammad (? Mahmud) Bandar, seems likely to be
left far inland in course of time.

The direction of the Kolla4am bed being more north and south
than that of the so called S. W. monsoon wind— of which fact, there is
ample proof in the permanent eastward set of the stems, twigs and branches
of the trees exposed to it — the fine blown sand of the river bed in the dry and
hot season (April and May), is drifted up into heaps and lines along the
southern or right bank of the river, tending to form a natural river wall
there and to keep the stream nearer to the northern bank.

The K4v6ri delta is only about 10 miles in width at Tanjore and.
it is flanked by comparatively high ground, composed of previous sedi-
mentary formation, stratified beds of laterite, conglomerate and mottled
grit, with quartz pebbles mixed, through which the river first cut its way,
whilst depositing the material of its present delta.

* Locally " Axudkaiai*' or Dam-bank.

186 B. R. Branfill — Physiogrfrphical Noteg an Ihnjare, ^c, [No. 4,

There are some 50 or 60 different riyer chasnels, by which the
water is distributed for irrigation, or for drainage over the whole extent of
the delta, the names of which being mostly derived from those of reigning
princes, should throw some light upon the history of the country, for there
are representatives of the old Pandiyan and Ch61an dynasties, who reigned
before tlie I6th century, as well as of the Telugu Nayakans who super-
seded them, and possibly also of the Mahrattas whom the British Govern-
ment succeeded. There are thirteen tidal mouths of the Kav^ that enter
the sea and are more or less navigable for small boats.

There has been little change in the principal river channels of
late years, due in a great measure to the conservative measures adopted
under the British Government, and to the great regulating works, con-
structed for keeping the floods under control. There must be a tendency
for the channels to silt up, as well as for the whole of the irrigated part of
the delta to rise, but there seems to be no apprehension at present of dan-
ger to the province from this source.

Near the coast, and more particularly at the south-east comer of the
delta, towards Point Calimere (Kallimed), there are extensive salt-swampe^
with patches of jungle and desert.

The K6(3[ikarai salt-marsh covers nearly 100 square miles, being about
20 miles long east and west, and 5 miles wide north and south. It is
used as a vast salt-pan under Government supervision. The two highest
spring tides of May and June (called by the natives ' Chittrai Parvam*,
* full-moon of April and May\ and Vis^kha Vellam, ^ May — June flood*)
overflow the sea-wall and fill the swamp with brine, which is, in favourable
seasons, soon crystallized under the evaporation from the sun and the dry
west winds. The south-east and southerly breezes that prevail in May,
probably combine to make the spring tides of this season unusually high.

A considerable degree of sanctity is locally attributed to V^d^ran-
yam, (^ VSdaforesf) and to K64ikarai (^ Fromontory-shore^) from a tradi-
tion that here, as subsequently, at the Bdm^svaram promontory, the mythic
hero Kama tried to make a causeway to Lanka, Ceylon. There is now
daily postal communication by open boat, between India and Ceylon at this
place.

An impression exists that this sea, Palks Straits and Bay, is silting
up, but this process must be exceedingly slow, inasmuch as no large rivers
now discharge any large proportion of their silt into this receptacle. The
Vaigai (P Yeghavati) outlet scarcely ever discharges, and as more irrigation
works are introduced, this proportion must diminish.

Still this is to a great extent an inland sea surrounded by a sandy
shore from which the land-breezes and strong southerly and westerly winds
must bear some drift to deposit. Moreover, the northward beat of the surf

1878.] B. R. BraxiSil—Fhysioyraphieal Noiea on Tanjore, Sfe. 187

along the noitb-east Coast of Ceylon from April to September, and the
southward beat along the east Coast of Tanjore from November to January^
must tend more or less to shoal the entrance to Palk's Bay from the Bay of
Bengal.

This sea was known to the old geographers as Sinus Argaricus
(Colonel Yule's map of ancient India has Sinus Argalicus for Falk's Bay,
and a town marked at the mouth of the Vaigai named " Argari ? Argalu ?
Marallo ? (MaravAr)" ; I would venture to suggest that the sea may very
likely have been so named from Anaikaraiy The barrier, cross-bank or datn-
bank, by which term the great natural ' bund' or causeway, Adam's bridge,
between India and Ceylon was probably known. The early Arabian voyagers
knew it as (and thence called the country beyond it) * Ma,abar', i, e..
The ford, ferry or passage. I understand, however, that the name appears
in Ptolemy as AvxcipoviroXis (? Anakarai-toim) from which the Bay may
have been called, and, if so, this town may have been the old town now called
Attankarai (from Aru a river, and Karai a bank, shore) situated at the old
mouth of the Yaigai river.

It is an interesting question whether the line of sand-banks and
islets forming 'Adam's bridge', between lUm^svaram and Mannir, is
undergoing any permanent change. I could learn nothing reliable on
the subject when I was there in 1874, '76^ and '76, but it can scarcely
be at a perfect stand-still. On the one hand, there appear to be traditions
that at one time it was possible to walk across at low water dry shod, but
I could not learn that this had actually occurred within modem his-
toric times. On the other hand, it would appear that there was a consider-
able trade carried on between Arabia and China through these Straits,
and one would hardly suppose that it could have been carried on in such
small vessels as can alone have passed through the passages in *' Adam's
bridge" previous to the excavation of the PAmban channel by the British
Government, imless there were passages that have silted up since. Dr.
Bumell tells me, he has a reliable Portuguese MS. of 1685, by a Captain
J. Ribeiro, stating that there was then '* no passage, except two narrow
canals, one by Bamanacor and the other by Manar" ; and that " a small
* sumaca' only can pass by either at high water."

At the present time, there is a single channel at Manner answering
this description, and none elsewhere, except the new passage at P4mban,
which has been cut artificially through the rocky reef at a place where in
quite recent times, the old built-stone causeway had been breached by sfcorm-
waves (in 1484 and since) which also destroyed the adjacent town on
the spit of land west of Pamban between T6ni-turai and Vettilai Man-
dapam.

The surf beats heavily all along '^ Adam's bridge" during both mon-

188 B. B. BrAudiil—Pkygioffn^kical Notet on Tamjore, ^e. [No. 4,

flooiu, and a strong current sets constantly the same waj as the wind ; at
other times the current raries with the tide, and one would suppose that no
sand-hanks could withstand the Tiolence of the wash orer them at every
change of tide. Still the islets and sand-banks do remain as a whole, albeit
probably in a state of frequent change indiTidually. But the growth of
ooral is active here, and new islets are said to be forming where there were
none, and old ones increasing.

The blown sand too, seems to hare some effective elemait of conglo-
meration in it, by which sand-stone is forming constantly. If, however, the
available waterway is curtailed by new islets and sand-banka, it would
appear likely, that the passage between them must probably become deeper
by the increased violence of the water that has to pass. It seems theivfon
likely, that the land may gain superficially on the sea in Palk's Stnuta, hut
equally so that some of the channels may remain as deep as hitherto, or
possibly become even deeper for an indefinite time to come.

Tanjore appears to have been occupied from very early times by
Tamil people, over whom the Gh61an or S<5ran dynasty held swaj hst
many centuries prior to the 16th century, and their country was known
as the *' Ch6ramandalam" (whence Ooromandel).

The Ch61an capital was at difEerent times at £[anchipuram (Conjeve-
ram) ; at U'raiy4r, near Trichinopoly ; at Tanjore ; at Kumbak6nam and
other places.

The Telugu Nayaks sueceeded the Chdlan kingdom and ruled in Tan-
jore for more than a century up to 1675, when the Mahratta princes super-
seded them, and ruled till they were superseded by the British Gk>venimenfe.

The Ch61an rulers seem to have done noost good for the country
by elaborating the extensive system of irrigation, to which the present
Government has added little but restorative, conservative and regulating
works, of the gpreatest value no doubt, but no fresh channels have been
made. They also built many of the great Hindu Temples, of which there
are no less than 3,000 in Tanjore, and their endowments still remain, hut
the management of many of these is in a deplorable state of neglect, and
the temples fast going to ruin. Witness Tirupalturai, Qangaikandapuram,
Mannargu^i and others.

The Nayakan rulers also have left their mark on the country in the
numerous Mandapams (open temple halls), Chattrams, (native alms, and
rest-houses) and many other buildings, showing their peculiar Indo-Mooriah
style of architecture, having vaulted roofs and pointed arches, the best
specimen of which that I have seen is the palace of Tirumala Nayak at
Madura, built about 1650.

A very noticeable fact in the Tanjore delta is the comparative
scarcity of forts and fortified towns. The inhabitants appear to me to be

1878.] B. R. Branfill— PAytwyrflfpAwa/ Nota an Tanjore, Sfc. 183

unusually and seriously industrious, and to hare a smaller admiiifure of
the wariike classes than any of the South-Indian districts I have passed
through. They have heen hahituated to agriculture for so long that the
rice of war has died out, and the people seem too busy and well off to
revive it.

The Nayaks do not seem to have introduced many immigrants of
Telugu race ; the neighbouring warlike tribes of Kalians and Maravans are
also absent from the deltaic part of the country, and the pastoral tribes are
only found in the more forested tracts beyond the delta.

It is stated that with the exception of a short experience of Muham*
madan rule under Haidar 'Ali (in 1780), there is no record of the country
having suffered from famine, although food prices have risen very high
daring the prevalence of famine in adjacent districts.

There is one patent reason for the country not having been harassed
by fire and sword, which is, that it was impassable for troops, or
could be easily made so, for half the year or more, and thai in the
cool and fine season of autumn and winter, when the rice-fields are all
under water. Besides this, there were no made roads in the delta fit for
wheeled traffic, except in the dxy season. Pack cattle are much used even
now.

The irrigated part of the country is now well supplied with raised
roads, but even these for the most part are almost useless for any large amount
of wheel traffic in the wet season, because they are unmetalled, or only
metalled with the ordinary river sand from the channels : and it appears
marvellous how a thriving population can be content to pass several months
confined to their villages as it were in islands, surrounded by a sea of deep
mud, with only doubtful pathways for communication along the narrow and
irregular banks dividing the rice-fields. The river channels, when in flood,
are not commonly used for communication or traffic. The British Govern-
ment made some of the channels narigable by means of locks &c., but these
have become completely disused, and replaced by railways.

The climate of the Kav^ri delta is mild and moist, compared with that
of the adjacent districts, due no doubt to its situation on the coast and
the great spread of irrigation water. The annual course of the weather is
somewhat thus :—

During January the weather is oool and fine with fresh north-east
breezes.

In Februitfy the wind is lighter and more easterly. Heavy fogs are
common night and morning, succeeded by hot days. The rice crop is cut
and the country quickly drains dry.

In March, April and May the wind is variable. Near the coast, land
and sea-breezes prevail. The hot weafther sets in, fields become bare and
parched, and the heat increases greatly. Latterly, southerly and south-
westerly winds set in, and occasional thunder-storms occur to clear and

190 B, R. BiKTi^W'-'Phtfsioyraphical Notes on Ihnjore, ^v. [Xo. 4,

cool the air, and an occasional partial 'fresh' comes down the K^fM
channels.

In June, strong westerly winds prevail with much dust and dry heat.

In July, August and Septemher, the river channels fill from the
south-west monsoon rain on the western ghats, also from occasional local
falls of rain. Early rice cultivation heg^ns, and the westerly winds gradn-
ally fall, to he succeeded hy calms and variable winds.

In October and November, the wind sets in from the north-east, and
heavy falls of rain occur, the temperature f aUs considerably, and rice culti-
vation is carried on to the utmost extent.

In December, the weatfier becomes fine and the wind more steady from
the norfch-east.

The population of Tanjore is dense, being nearly 2,000,000 for an
area of 8,700 square miles, giving an average of 640 per square mile, but
it amounts, in the richer parts, to 1,000 per square mile. It is composed
chiefly (two thirds) of Hinduized local tribes and one third of settlers.

Gbobs Numbeb.

Casts ob Racb.

No.

EMPLOTICBirT.

fi OAA Ann r

Yanniyan (Kallar ?).

574,000

Labonrexs.

TTiTifliiHnf

Paraiyan (Pallar P &c.)

350,000

Menials.

IothI (1(W- I

Sambadavan.

118,000

Fishermen.

cent.

V

IdaiyanB, SAnin, ice.

158,000 (

Herdmnen, pottan^

1,804,000 J

604,000

VeUflan.

348,000
(

Cultivators.

Land and hooae-

Immi- <

127,000 {

owners, scholars.

grants.

{

idlers, &c.

W V.

Chetti, See,

120,000 1

Weayera, artifioen^
merchants, dbc.

Trade, horticnltiue.

103,000 MnhamTnadans, principally Labb^.

&c.

66,000 ChnstiaiiB.

1,000 Others.

Total, 1,974,000

There are said to be no wild or aboriginal tribes in the district.

Although the famine was scarcely over, in the beginning of 1878 there
were no signs of distress risible, but all the people seemed well off. On the
contrary, the upper classes seemed to be all the wealthier. Bricks were
being made and burnt everywhere. New houses and buildings were being
erected, and the effect of the famine appears only to have enriched
the dwellers in this land of rice-fields. The labouring population being paid
in grain as usual, the high prices prevailing elsewhere did not albct
them*

1878.] R. S. Brough — Sectional Areas for Lightning Bods, 191

XVI. — On the proper relative Sectional Areas for Oopper and Iron Light'

ning Bods. — Bg R. S. Bhough.

So far as mere conductivity is concerned, a comparatively thin wire of
either copper or iron would suffice for the loftiest building ; but such a thin
conductor would be dangerous, because it would be fused by a heavy dis-
charge of lightning.

Now the problem is to determine what relative sectional areas should
be given to copper and iron rods, in order that neither should be more lia-
ble to fusion than the other.

The usual answer given, is, that an iron rod should have 4 times the
sectional area of a copper rod.* This result is, I suppose, arrived at in
the following way. The conductivity of copper is about 6 times as great
as that of iron, but the melting point of iron is about 50 per cent, higher

6*0
than that of copper, therefore •-- = 4, is the ratio for the sectional area

of iron to copper.

This simple treatment of the problem, however, is incomplete, because
it neglects to take three most important factors into consideration, namely,
(1) the influence of the rise of temperature in increasing the electrical
resistance of the metal, (2) the difference between the " thermal capacity"
or " specific heat" of copper and iron, and (3) the fact that the iron rod
being made several times more massive than the copper rod, it will require
a proportionately greater quantity of heat to increase its temperature.
These omissions introduce an enormous error in the result.

The effect of the passage of a discharge of lightning through the rod
will be to raise its temperature.

The temperature (T) to which a given length of the rod will be raised
will depend on

(1) The quantity of heat developed by the discharge.

(2) The mass of the rod.

(3) The " Specific heat" <r of the metal composing the rod.
This may be expressed mathematically as follows :

XT

T = Const.

er m

where m is the mass of th^ unit length of the rod, which we shall assume
to be uniforni in sectional area throughout its length, and H is the quanti-
ty of heat developed by the discharge.

• War Office Jlemorandum by Sir Fred. Chapman, R. E.
26

192 R. S. Brougb — On the proper relative Sectional [No. 4,

We may take <r = 01018 for copper, and = 0 1218 for iron. These
figures were only verified by Dulong and Petit up to 800^ C. It is proba-
ble, bowevefy that tbeir ratio, witb wbicb we are only bere concerned,
would not greatly alter at bigber temperatures. At any rate, comparing
the specific beat between O' and 100^ C, witb tbat between (f and 30(f C,
we infer that any alteration would be in favour of iron, t. «., tbat the speci-
fic beat of iron would increase in a quicker ratio tban tbat of copper.

Adopting tbe centimetre as tbe unit of length, tbe mass of one centi-
metre of tbe rod =s p a, where a is tbe sectional area of tbe rod in square
centimetres, and p = 8'9 for copper and = 7*8 for iron.

Further, assuming tbe quantity and duration of tbe discbarge to be
constants, H =: Const, x B, where R is tbe resistance of the unit length
of tbe conductor.

But B =: - , where X is tbe specific resistance of tbe metal per cubic

centimetre at its temperature of fusion.

We may take tbe melting point of copper as 1400° C, and tbat of
wrought iron as 2000° C* ; and, in order to find X assume tbat Dr. William
Siemens's formula^ wbicb be verified to 1000^ C, holds good,t viz. —

X t = \, (0026577 t i + 00031443 t — 029751)

for copper

X t = \, (0072545 t i + 00138183 t — 1-23971)

for iron

Tbe temperatiLre t in these formulse is to be measured from the abso-
lute zero, so that we have t = 1673 for copper, and t = 2278 for iron.

Tbe value of X^ per cubic centimetre of copper is 1-652 Microhms, and
per cubic centimetre of iron is 9*827 Microhms.^

Thus tbe value of X t per cubic centimetre of copper becomes 10 Hie^
ohms at 1673° C, and per cubic centimetre of iron becomes 107 Microhms
at 2273° C.

Hence H = Const. — for copper

and H = Const. -7— for iron

A

• Bunkine's Tables.

f Bakerian Lecturo, 1871.

X Jenkin's Cantor Lectures, from Mathiessen's experiments.

1878.] Areoifor Copper and Iron Lightning Bods. 198

Therefore T = Const. ^ ,,,,^ — 1 for copper

01018 X 8-y X a* *^*^

107

and T = Const, rrrrrrrt =-T Tm for 5w^

01218 X 7-8 X A*

11*09
Thus T = Const. — 5— for copper

. „ ^ , 112-63 . .
and T = Const. — rr- for iron

A

Now patting T = the temperature of fusion in each case

11*09
1400 = Const. — -J— for copper

•.wwx /^ _x 112-63 . .
2000 = Const. — Tj- for iron

A

^ , ._. 1400 112-63
Therefore

Cr)"=

2000 • 1109
= 0-7 X 10-16

= 7112
Whence A = 2*7a about

= r- a about

or the sectional area of an iron rod should be to the sectional area of a
copper rod in the ratio of 8 to 8.

104 W. L. Distant — On a New Cosraoscarta. [No. 4,

XVII. — Deicription of a New Homopterous Insect belonging to the Genus
Cosmoscarta. — By W. L. Distant. Oommunicated by J.. Wood-
Mason.

COSUOSCABTA MASONI, n. sp.

Pronotum stramineous, with a qaadrate black spot on anterior margin ;
head luteous ; tegmina, pectus, legs and abdomen shining black. Proster-
nnm with lateral borders stramineous.

Face robustly tumid, transversely strigose, with a central impunctate
longitudinal impression ; eyes prominent, luteous ; oceUi distinct, shining^
situated at about an equal distance from each other as from eyes ; basal
portion of the head somewhat pitchy. Pronotum thickly and finely punc-
tured, with the lateral margins dilated and strongly reflexed, the lateral
angles produced prominently outwards, and the posterior margin rounded,
the disc is prominently raised and convex, across the centre of which is a
faint impunctate central longitudinal line. The frontal quadrate black
patch contains a deep, angular, linear impression on each side behind the
eyes, and two small rounded impressions on the posterior border.

Tegmina obscurely and finely punctured ; wings dark fuscous with the
nervures black. Hind tibiae with a small spine towards apex.

9 • Long. ex. tegm. 17 mill. Exp. tegm. 45 milL

Greatest long, pronot. 7i mill. Exp. lat. ang. pronot. 11 mill.

Habitat, Taoo, Tenasserim. Alt. 3—5000 ft.

The distinct colouration and more especially the peculiar structure of
the pronotum, will serve to distinguish this fine species from any other of
the genus. In the last respect its nearest allied form will be the C, costs-

lis, Walk.*

This insect was contained in a collection of Tenasserim Ithynchota
entrusted to me by Prof. Wood-Mason for determination. It is too
soon to speak of their geographical affinities as a whole, but the genus
Cosmoscarta, which was represented by two other species (O. megamera
and G. basinotata), exhibits affinities which I believe will be shared by the
other Bhynchota of this collection. O, basinotata has hitherto only been
recorded from Borneo, and O, megamera, although found in N. India, hfts
still been also received from Penang, Laos, and Hong-Kong.

* Stal no doubt correctly places this form as only a variety of C. proserpina, Whiio
a species I do not possess in its typical form.

1S78 ] J. Anderson — On Indian Species <>/*Erinaceus. 195

XVIII. — On the Indian Species of the C^i** Erinaccus. — 5y J. Anderson,
M. D., Supdt. Indian Museum^ and Professor of Comparative Anatomy,
Medical College.

(Read 4th December, 1878.)

(With Plates III, IV, V and Va.)

Dr. Jerdon* recognized only two species of Indian Hedgehog, viz.^
Erinaceus collaris. Gray, and Erinaceus micropus, Blyth, distinguishing the
former as the North Indian and the latter as the South Indian hedgehog.
But besides these, the following supposed species had either been described
or indicated as belonging to the Indian and Himalayan fauna, before the
publication of Jerdon's work. They were as follows, according to priority,
viz., E, spatangus, Bennett,t E, gragi, Bennett J E. mentalis, Gray§
(not described) and finally E. nudiventrisy Horsfield.|| The two first of
these were stated by Bennett to be from the Himalayas, while Gray recorded
E, mentalia from India, and Horsfield E. nudiventris from Madras.

Dr. Jerdon doubtfully considered E, grayi as identical with E, colla-
riSy and E. spatangus as the young of E, grayi, but he did not pass any
opinion on the undescribed E. mentalis. In 1841, Wagner described a
hedgehog under the name of E. albiventris,% and considered it as pro-
bably of Indian origin. On the strength of this opinion Jerdon was
disposed to regard it as possibly E, micropus. Dr. Peters, however, very
kindly arranged with the authorities of the Museum at Munich that the
type of E, alhiventer should be sent to him for comparison with a specimen
forwarded to him by me, and which I then believed to be E. micropus, but
which now proves to be a nearly allied species named by Stoliczka E. pie-^
tiM,** This latter species, however, is so closely allied to E, micropus, in
the structure of its feet, that the comparison instituted between its feet and
those of E. alhiventer, conclusively proves that the latter is a perfectly dis-
tinct form from both, as it only possesses 4 toes in the hind feet, whereas
E, microptfs and E. pictus, like all the other Indian species of hedgehogs,
have 5 toes in the hind feet. Dr. Peters is of the opinion that E. alhiven^
ter, is probably the young of E, heterodactylus, Sundvl. from Africa.

^ Mammals of India, 1867, p. 62.
t Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1832, p. 123.
{ 1. c. p. 124.

} List. Mamm. B. M. 1851, p. 81.
il Cat. Mamm. East. Ind. Co. Mus. 1861, p. 136.
f Schrebor, Saugeth. Vol. (Supp.) 11, 1841, p. 22.
•• Stoliczka, Joum. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. XLI, 1872, p. 223.

196 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [No. 4»

From the facts to be hereafter stated there can be no doubt bat that
these two species, S. micropua and E. pietui are perfectly distinct from each
other, and from any other species of Indian hedgehog ever described.

It would also appear from what I have stated under JS. grayi^ that it is
a well-defined species, and that it is probably the hedgehog which was
figured by Gray from the Doab as E, eollaris, but which was never deacrib-
ed, and also that Dr. Jerdon was correct in regarding E, tpaian^uM as the
young of E, grayiy the latter term being the one that should be accepted

for the species.

Dr. Gunther, to whom I am indebted for comparing the hedgehogs in
the British Museum with certain specimens forwarded from the Indian
Museum, informed me that the true relations of E. menialis cannot be pro*
perly determined. I regret, however, that having mislaid Dr Grtinther*8
notes, I am unable to give the details of his comparisons.

I have personally examined the type of E. nudiventrU which is a Tory
young example of E. micropus.

Besides these thrtse species, E. micropus, E. pictus, and E. grayi^ the
materials which have passed under my observation* have yielded two
other apparently distinct species of hedgehog from Western India, and
which I propose to name respectively E, jerdoni, and E. blai^brdif the
distinctive characters of which are indicated hereafter. We have thus five
species of hedgehog in India, three of which are forms which were unknown
when Fitzingert published his compilation on the Erinaeeida in which he
recognized E. grayi^ E. collaris, E. epatangue, E, mentalis, E, nudivenirit
and E, micropw, referring them all to a trivial sub-genus Jlemieekimu.

The hedgehogs of India are referable to two distinct groups, based on
the characters of the dentition. E, micropus and E. pieiue resemble each
other in the following dental detail, wherein they differ from the other Indian
hedgehogs, but whether any of the African forms are like them in this re-
spect I am unable to say. The character I refer to is this, that the second
upper premolar has a simple crown and only one fang, whereas E. groffi^ Jf
jerdoni, E, blanfordi, E. maeracanthus, E. niger,X E, megaloiie, E. attriiu9
E. alhuhus, and E. europauSy have the same tooth large with a compound
crown and with 3 fangs. In both the species, the second upper premolar is
very small and somewhat external to the line of the other teeth. In E.
pietus, the tooth would appear to be generally present throughout life, and it
is larger than in E. micropuSy in which it seems to be generally lost at an
early i^e. In hedgehogs with a compound second premolar, the tooth is

* I am specially indebted to Mr. W. T. Blanford for his having placed his fine
801168 of Indian hedgehogs, preserved in alcohol, at my disposal for examination,
t Sitzgsber. Ak. Wiss. Wien. LYI. 1867, pp. 844, 890.
X For description of this species see following pages (p. 212).

1878.] of the Qenun 'ErinsicevLB. 197

always in the line of the other teeth and always large and is never prema-
turely shed.

The first premolar also of the lower jaw is relatively smaller than in
the species jnst enumerated, and it is smaller in S. micrqpus than in ^.
pictus.

There is a remarkahle circumstance connected with S. micropus. In
examining the different species of Indian hedgehogs, I was in the habit of
having their skulls removed and cleaned for examination, and in having this
done with M micropus I was always disappointed on receiving ba«k the
skulls from the osteologist to find what I supposed was a broken zygomatic
arch, owing to careless manipulation. The Museum osteologist, however,
persisting in asserting that he was most careful in preparing the skulls, and
that he had not injured them, I had a careful dissection made from without
inwards on to the zygomatic arch, and I was astonished to find that there
was no trace of a malar bone in any specimens of M micropus examined
by me, 4 in all. This fresh dissection showed that the interval between the
zygomatic process of the squamous and the malar process of the maxillary
is bridged over by tendon, and that therefore this South Indian hedgehog
stands alone in this remarkable feature. Such a variation on the normal
structure of the skull of a hedgehog was not to be anticipated, as there is no
weakening of the zygomatic arch in any of the other species. Even in the
allied species S. pictus, the malar is strongly developed. An examination of
the free ends of the process of the maxilla and squamous shews that this
observation is perfectly accurate, as there is no indication whatever of any
specialized surface on which a malar could rest, and which is always easily
observable in skulls of other species in which the malar has been lost.

Notwithstanding this anomalous character, I am disposed to attach
more weight to the character of the second upper premolar in this species
than to the absence of its malar, which is an intense specific variation,
whereas the other which is common to two species very closely allied in other
details of their structure would seem to be almost entitled to sub-generic
rank.

These two forms, M micropus and S, pictw, notwithstanding the fore-
going difference in the skulls, are externally so alike that they might be
mistaken for one another. Not only is their coloration almost identical,
but the form of their heads is much the same ; and more important, their
fore feet more especially differ essentially in shape from the fore feet of all
the other Asiatic species of hedgehogs (see figs, e and^ PI. Ill, and com-
pare with fig.y^, PI. rV). Both of these species are characterized by their
feet being short, club-shaped, and tubercular on the soles, whereas in such
forms as E. grayi and the other Asiatic hedgehogs, the feet are not club-

lOS J. Anderson — On the Indinn Species [Xo. 4,

vshaped and tubercular, but moderately elongated with well-developed toes
and generally long claws.

The feet of hedgehogs would appear to be the subject of considerable
variation, as some have only 4 toes on the hind feet, (Peroechinui Fitzinger),
and moreover the central pad of the hind feet would appear to be rudimen-
tary in some species and to be present in others, while, as has just been shovnn,
some of them have tubercular soles. It appears to me therefore that relia-
ble specific characters are to be observed in the feet of the members of this
genus, but I do not consider any of the variations to be of sub- generic value.
As an illustration of the differences that subsist in this respect, it will be
observed that the species M grayi does not possess any true central pad on
the hind foot, a structure which is largely developed in JS. jerdoni, but
nearly absent in M hlanfordi^ which, as was to be expected from this cir-
cumstance, is closely allied to H, grayi.

Another feature in the structure of Indian hedgehogs is deserving of
attention, and that is the presence on the vertex, in some species, of a consi-
derable nude area quite devoid of spines, and even of the most rudimentary
hairs. This naked area reaches forwards to where the spines arise on the
forehead, dividing those on this region into two sets, one on either side of
the head. It occurs in all the Indian species with the exception of E.
grayi and JE, blarifordi, and it is present also in J^. niger and S. tnacra^
canthusy whereas it does not appear to exist in the European hedgehog and
I have not observed it in any of the following species, viz.^ E. aurituty S.
albulus, and JS. megalotis, all of which, however, like the Indian species,
whether with or without this area, agree in having fine soft almost silky hair,
very distinct from the long bristly hair that clothes the body of the Euro-
pean species.

In the Zoology of Persia* a small hedgehog is figured along with the
type of JE, tnacracanthus. Both of the specimens which yielded the figures
are now in the Indian Museum and the latter is distinguished (JS, maera^
canthus,) by this nude area and black spines with two white rings, and the
former, which Blanford considered as a young specimen of the species, by
the entire absence of the bare area and by yellowish spines of which the
tips are white, followed by a narrow black ring succeeded by a white and this
i^ain by a short brown space. This small hedgehog in the character of
its spines and in the absence of the bare area on the vertex resembles JS.
megalotisy but it does not appear to be that species. I am disposed to con-
clude that this bare area is of too great structural importance to be present
or absent among members of a species and to consider it as of specific signi-
ficance. With regard to the disposition of the spines it would appear that

♦ Zool. of Persia, Blanford, 1876, PI. 1.

1878.] of the Qenus Erinaceus. 199

their relative positions to each other depend greatly on the condition of the
panniculus camosus, and that the spines only become irregularly intermixed
through contractions of this muscle which, when relaxed, permits the spines
to lie flat and regularly.

On the label of an example of J3. albultUy collected by StoUczka, he has
written, '* outer edge of nostrils ciliated.'' On looking at the nostril in all
the Indian species of hedgehog, I find that the outer edge, more especially the
upper crescentic half, is provided with a papillary valve which serves to close
the orifice. In E. grayi, it forms a distinct fringe of 12 papilke.

The spines of the Indian and Western Asiatic hedgehogs are grooved
and ridged, the ridges being covered with fine tubercles. The numbers of
the ridges on the spines of the same animal are subject to considerable
variation, and the degree to which the tubercles are developed appears to
vary, so that stable specific characters are not yielded by these structures.

The foregoing characters, therefore, permit of the Indian hedgehogs
being resolved into the following groups, and of the species being recognized
by the characters under which they are grouped.

A. Second itppeb fbemolab simple, oiTE-FAKaED.
a. Feet olub-shaped, soles tubercular,
I. A division or bare area on the vertex.
No malar bone : a prominent dark brown band through the eyes
on to the neck. A white frontal band. Spines orange
with apices white, succeeded by a narrow dark brown band.

Ears moderate. Fur below white, limbs brown, JE. micropus*

A perfect malar bone : a brown band through the eyes and
only very rarely prolonged on to the neck, stopping at the
angle of the mouth. Spines broadly white at apex, suc-
ceeding brown band rather pale : no orange tint on spines.
Ears round and not large, but larger than in the preced-
ing species. Limbs pale brown, under-siurface white, ... 27. pictus.

B. SECOm) UPPER PEEMOIiAB COMPOTTND, THBEB-PAITaED.

h. Feet well developed and broad,
II. No division or bare area on the vertex.
No large mesial pad on the hind foot. Head elongated and
muzzle long. Ears large, high and pointed. General

colour dark brown, J^- y^y»-

Mesial pad on the hind foot very feeble. Head short, muzzle
not elongated. Ears moderately large, not high and not
pointed. General colour black above, fuliginous-brown

below, ^' Uanfordi.

26

200 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [No. 4,

III. A division on the vertex, separating the spines into two groups.

Hind foot with a large prominent mesial pad. Muzzle moder-
ately long. Ears large, rounded at the tip and broad at
the base. Spines long with 2 white and 3 black bands
in the adult. General colour black above and below, ... E. jerdonL

The following is a description of these species in detail :

Ebinacetts miceopub. Plate V*^.

Urinaeeus auritus, Pearson, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. V, 1836, p. 191.
Urinaceus eoliaris, Gray. List. Mam. B. M. 1843, p. 81, partim,
JSrinaceus micropus, Blyth, Journal Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Vol. XV, 1846,

p. 170, partim ; id. op. cit. Vol. XXII, 1853, p. 582 ; id. Cat. Mam.

Mus. As. Soc. Bengal, 1863, p. 80 ; Wagner, Schreber, Saugeth, Suppl.

V, 1855, p. 591 ; Stoliczka, Journal Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Vol. XLI,

1872, p. 225.
Urinaceus nudiventris, Horsfield, Cat. Mam. East Ind. As. Mus., 1851,

p. 136.
Urinaceus (Hemiechinus) micropus, Fitzinger, Sifczungbte. der BL Akad.

Wissensch. Wien, Vol. LX, PI. 1, 1867, p. S75, partim.

Head rather short, and broader than JS. pictus, and slightly concave
from the forehead to the tip of the snout. Ears moderately lai^e and
rounded at the tip, directed forwards and outwards, and slightly smaller
than the ears of U. p ictus. Feet well developed, but small, short and
broad, with short toes and short claws: feet being somewhat lar<^r
than those of U. picfus. The first toe of the hind foot small, but claw
strong. The soles of the hind feet more or less tubercular. When
the muscle is not contracted over the forehead, the spines do not reach
anterior to the front margin of the ears. There is a broad bare space
passing backwards from the forehead for about one inch and a quarter,
with a nearly uniform breadth of half an inch, and this bare area would
appear to exist in both sexes of the species. The tail is short, and
there is a semicircular bare area above it. The ears are moderately but
sparingly clad with short whitish hairs, and the tail with longish dark
brown hairs. The anterior third of the head, up to half way between the
nose, the eye, and the chin appear to be nude, but they are very sparsely
covered with minute white hairs. The middle third of the head is covered
more profusely with longer hairs, and the posterior third, to between the ears
densely with moderately long hairs, increasing in length from before back-
•wards. The upper surfaces of the feet are well clad with short flattened
brown hairs. The bare surfaces on the head and above the tail are perfect-
ly devoid of hairs. The under surface is not very thickly clad and the

1878.] of the Oenus Erinaceus. 201

insides of the limbs are still less so. The spines are rather fine, about 0*83
of an inch long, very sharp and marked with from 17 to 22 ridges and fur-
rows, the former generally broader than the latter, and covered with minute
shining tubercles. The apex of each spine is white and is succeeded by a
narrow dark brown band which gives a brown and white speckled appear-
ance to the animal The remainder of each spine is yellow or orange yellow.
The seminude skin of the anterior third of the head is leaden-coloured, a
hue that extends on to the chin. The hairs on the second or middle third
of the head form a broad brown band which embraces the eye, passes back-
wards behind the angle of the mouth, over the under surface of the neck as
a dark brown collar. A brown spot at the upper angle of the ear. A
broad white band behind the brown band and the spines of the forehead,
passing downwards before the ears on to the sides of the neck and throat,
behind the brown band, and continuous with the white of the under parts ;
chin and whiskers white, and sides of chin brownish. The lower halves of
the limbs clad with brown hairs, also the tail. The inguinal region and
lower abdomen clad with brown hairs with an intermixture of white.

The leading features of this species are its short snout and head, short
club-shaped feet as compared with JE. grayi, U. hlanfordiy and E. jerdoni ;
its slightly longer feet as compared with ^. pictWy which are, however, of
the same type ; its not long ears, slightly shorter than in the latter ; its
white and brown tipped spines, orange or yellow ; and a brown collar over
the forehead, between the eyes, behind the angle of the mouth and across
the throat.

The skull is distinguished by its short broad character, but in this re-
spect it is much narrower than the skull of £. pictus. In the former, the
breadth across the zygomata falls short considerably of two thirds of the
length, whereas in U. p ictus y breadth and sharpness are marked fea-
tures of the skull, combined with a greater post-orbital contraction than in
J^. micropuSy and, in the adult male, the breadth generally equals two thirds
of the length. The complete absence of the malar bone is another charac-
ter which separates it from M pictus, from which it is also distinguished by
the small size of its 2 upper premolars.

The following are some measurements of E. mieropus.

^ ^ ^

Length of body and head, 6' 65 6*05 5^90

„ of tail, 0"45 0*53 0*57

Height of ear, ri5 1*05 1*02

Breadth of ear, 0"80 0*78 0*76

Snouttoeye, TOO 0*94 0*94

Eye to ear, 0"40 0*31 0*38

Length of hind foot without claw, ... T'lS 1*13 1*15

Breadth at 5th toe, 0"36 0*40 0^30

202 J. Anderson — On the Indian Specus [No. 4,

Blyth, in 1846,* in treating of the hedgehogs collected by Hutton near
the Sutlej, pointed out that the third specimen described by Hutton,t with
8ome doubt, under the name of S, collaria, Gray, was apparently distinct
from that species. Blyth was disposed to regard it as identical with a
hedgehog in the Asiatic Society's Museum, the locality of which he thea
stated was unknown, but which he afterwards considered^ to have beea
received from the Nilgiris from Mr. Smoult and to be the specimen men-
tioned by Pearson as K auritus. This latter specimen Blyth regarded as
specifically identical with hedgehogs sent him from Southern India by Sir
Walter Elliot, and with the hedgehog from Southern India in the British
Museum grouped by Gray under JS. collaris. He compared the skull of an
adult specimen sent from Southern India by Sir Walter Elliot with the
skull of Mr. Smoult's hedgehog and found them exactly to correspond, and
these specimens he named M microptu, the last mentioned being the type
of the species. The skull, however, of Capt. Hutton's third specimen he
goes on to remark " presents some differences ; the general form is rather
shorter and broader, it is more constricted between the orbits and the sygo*
xnsB are considerably more projecting ; the small upper premolar anterior
to the incisor teeth is less minute ; and in the lower jaw, the second lateral
pair of incisors from the front are much smaller, as indeed are also the
next or last pair of the true incisors." From the description of this speci-
men which was obtained by Hutton § in the neighbourhood of Shah Faiid
on the left bank of the Sutlej, and from the details regarding the points
wherein its. skull difEers from the skull of the Southern Indian hedgehog, I
am disposed to consider, that Hutton* s third specimen was an example of
£. picius. In 1853 1| Blyth was still doubtful regarding the specific iden-
tity of Hutton's third specimen with M micropus.

The next species, the cranial characters of which had been so well
indicated by Blyth in 1846 and which entitle it to recognition, was de-
scribed in 1872 by Stoliczka as U. pictuSf but no reference was made
to Blyth's observations, nor to the cranial and dental features of the
animal. The characters selected by Dr. Stoliczka were exclusively exter-
nal, and were derived from supposed differences existing between its
spines and those of JE, micropuSy but after a very careful consideration of a
large series of spines of both forms under the microscope, it appears to me
that much importance cannot be attached to these structures as guides to
species.

♦ Joum. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XV, p. 170; op, cit, Vol, V, 1836, p. 191,

t op. eit., Vol. XIV, p. 351.

t oP' at,. Vol. XXII, 1863, p. 682.

{ op. «V., Vol. XIV, p. 361.

I op. ciU VoL XXII, 1863, p. 682.

1878.] of the Oenus UnusLcenB. 203

Gray in his Lisb of Mammalia* confouBded this species ivith his E,
eoUariSf = JS. grayi.

E. micropus appears to he confined to Southern India, where it occurs
in the low lying country and not on the mountains. Col. Beddome
informs me that no hedgehog is found on the Nilgiris. The limits, however,
of its northern and western distribution have yet to be ascertained.

EmNACETTS piCTUS. Plate III.

? Erinaeeus indicuSy Boyle, 111. Ind. Zool. 1839, p. 6, not described.
Mrinaceus eollaris ? Hutton, Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Vol. XIV, 1845,

p. 351, 3rd specimen, par^m ; Blytb, h c. p. 352, foot note,. » J. ojp, cit,

Vol. XXII, 1853, p. 6S2, partim.
Erinaceus mieropusy Blyth, Journ. Asiatic Soc. Vol. XV, 1846, p. 170,

partim,
Erinacem (Eemiecliinus) micropus, Fitzinger, Sitzungsbte. der K. Akad.

Wissensch. Wien, Vol. LVI, Pt. 1, 1867, p. 875, partim.
Erinaceus (Hemiechinus) pteiitt, Stoliczka, Journal Asiatic Soc. Bengal,

Vol. XLI, 1872, p. 223.

Head (fig. d) the same as in J^. micropus, but the ears (fig. g) some-
what larger, and the feet (o tof) narrower and not quite so long : the tail
(fig. A) also is the same as in that species. The spines have the same char-
acters as in E. mieropus, but their tips are more broadly white and the brown
bands below are not so dark. The result is that the latter are nearly oh.
scured by the former. The remaining spines are pale yellowish, nearly white
and not orange. There is no continuation of the brown band of the forehead
lower than the angle of the mouth, except as a very rare circumstance,
and in animals from the region of Central India, where the species probably
meets the Southern E. micropus, but the colours in all other respects are
alike. The dimensions of the species are these :

3 S 9 ^ 9

Length of head and body, 6^70 6*00 5*85 5*90 4"73

„ „ tail, 0^68 0*08 0*55 0*53 0"58

Height of ear, 1*33 1*23 1*03 1*21 0"85

Breadth of ear, 0*86 0*88 0*70 0*81 0"61

Snouttoeye, 0*88 0*80 0*88 0"95 0"73

Eyetoear, 0*39 0*35 0*30 0^*30 0"25

Length of hind foot without claw, ... 1* 10 1* 12 1* 10 1" 10 0" 95

Breadth across 5th toe, 0*36 0*30 0*25 0"35 0"30

The skull (figs, a to e) is distinguished by its shortness and great zygo-
matic breadth, in which respects it dilEers from the skulls of all other Asia-

• List of Mamm. B. M., 1843, p. 81.

204 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [Xo. 4,

tic hedgehogs, and, as already stated, by ifcs one-f anged simple second preino-
lar placed out of the line of the teeth, and by the rather marked post-orbital
contraction. The teeth are large and about the same size as in £. micropust
only the second premolar of the latter is excessively minute. The other
characters wherein it difEers from E. micropiu, have been already indicated
under that species.

As already remarked, this form was first described by Hutton as a
probable variety of certain hedgehogs which he doubtfully regarded as
J7. collariSf which two of them appear to have been, but this third specimen,
however, was undoubtedly U. pictus. E, micropus has diverged from the
ordinary character of the genus more than any other Indian hedgehog, as
is evinced by the absence of the malar, and in the excessively rudimentary
character of its second premolar, and these modifications occurring in the
most southern outlier of a Palaearctic type are noteworthy.

A hedgehog obtained at Guna by Dr. A. Barclay would seem to indi-
cate that the two species may possibly interbreed, as I have experienced
some difficulty, judging by external characters only, in saying to which it
should be properly referred. The coloration of its spines is more like that
of E. pictus J than E. micropus , as the tips are broadly white, but, unlike any
other example of E. pictus that has come under my observation, the brown
band from the forehead is prolonged beyond the angle of the mouth across
the throat. In all other respects, the coloration is alike to that of E.
micropus. The ears also are somewhat larger than in E, pictus. The
affinities, however, of this hedgehog as manifested by its teeth and the form
of its skull are towards E. pictus.

Besides occurring at Guna, the most southern locality from which I
have obtained it, I have received it also from Ulwar, from Major T. Cadell,
V. C. ; and the Indian Museum also came into the possession of a large num-
ber of specimens from Agra through Mr. A. E. Carlleyl. An example from
Karachi has been received by exchange with the Municipal Museum, through
the valued assistance of Mr. J. A. Murray. This latter specimen agrees
with one in Mr. W. T. Blanford's possession from the same locality. He
also possesses an adult male from Jeysulmere, the dimensions of which are
given in the first column of the foregoing measurements.

It is probable that E. indieus was applied by Boyle to the hedgdiog
which occurs about Delhi, and which appears to be this species.

Ebikaceus gbayi. Plate lY.

Erinaceus coliaris, Gray, 111. Ind. Zool , Vol. I, 1872, Plate VIII, (not
described) : id. List. Mamm. B. M. 1843, p. Slypartim : Hutton, Journ.
As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XIV, 1846, p. 351, (first two specimens only) ;

1878.] oftheOenus'EnmceuH. 205

Blyth, op. city Vol. XV, 1846, p. 170 : id, op. city Vol. XXII, 1853, p.

6S2,partim; Wagner, Schreber, Saugeth. Suppl., Vol. V, 1856, p. 590:

Stoliczka, Journ. As. Soc., Vol. XLI, 1872, p. 225.
Erinacem grayi, Bennett, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1832, p. 124 ; Gray List Mamm.

B. M. 1843, p. 81 : Wagner, Schreber, Saugeth., Suppl. Vol. II, 1841,

p. 28 ; id. op. cii., Suppl. Vol. V, 1856, p. 590 ; Fitzinger, Sitsungsbte.

der K. Akad. Wien, Vol. LVI, Pt. 1, 1867, p. S70, partim; Stoliczka,

Journ. As. Soc. Beng, Vol. XLI, 1842, p. 225.
^rinaceus tpatangus, Bennett, Proc. Zoo. Soc. 1832, p. 124, juv ; Ogilby,

Boyle's 111. Ind. Himal. Botany, 1839, p. 62 ; Blyth, Journ. As. Soc.
Bengal, Vol. XV, 1846, p. 170 ; Gray, Mamm. B. M,. 1843, p. 82 ;

Wagner, Schreber, Saugeth., Suppl. Vol. II, 1841, p. 27 ; id. op. cit

Suppl. Vol. V, 1856, p. 590 ; Stoliczka, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol.

XLI, 1872, p. 225.
JBemiechinus grayi, Fitzinger, Sitzungsbte. der K. Akad. Wien, Vol. LVI, Pt.

1, 1867, p. 870.
Semiechinus collaris, Fitzinger, Sitzungsbte. der K. Akad. Wien, Vol. LVI,

Pt. 1, 1867, p. 872.
JECemiechinus gpatanguSy Fitzinger, Sitzungsbte. der K. Akad. Wien, Vol. LVI,

Pt. 1, 1867, p. 873,

Facial portion of head pointed and rather long (fig. d). Ears (fig. g)
large, full, long and somewhat pointed. Feet (figs, e and g) large, the fore
feet rather broad and somewhat truncated, with moderately long toes and
powerful claws. The proximal palmar pads forming a pair, and not very
prominent. The hind feet with the toes turned inwards, the fingers moder-.
ately long and with strong claws. The proximal pad of the sole internal to
the first toe, and which is strongly developed as a large mesial pad in JJ.
jerdoni, is practically absent in this species, so little is it developed.* The
tail (fig. h) is moderately long and shortly haired ; no bare space on the ver-
tex. The spines begin slightly behind the anterior margin of the ear, and they
are generally about 0^75 long. The longitudinal grooves are numerous and
shallow, but broader than the ridges which are 25 to 26 in number and stud-
ded with small tubercles. The spines are very narrowly tipped with blacky
and below this there is a very narrow yellowish band, succeeded by a broad
dark-brown, almost black band, the remainder of each spine being yellow,
except at its extreme base which is dusky. The broad dark -brown band
below the yellow subapical band is so strongly developed, that when the ani-
mal is viewed from the side, with the spines directed outwards, it has a
black appearance. There is, however, considerable variation in the intensity
to which the yellow sub-apical band is developed, and some animals are

* The artist has not well represented this feature on the plate^

206 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [No. 4,

therefore much lighter coloured than others, as the hrown hand succeeding
the latter is also much paler in some individuals than in others.

This species, besides the almost entire absence of the proximal mesial
pad of the sole, is at once distinguished bj the complete absence of the bare
space that occurs in E. pictus, and £. mieropus, among the spines of the
vertex. From the two last named species which have no large proximal pad
on the sole, it is recognised bj its large feet, well developed toes, powerful
claws, and bj the turning in of the hind feet, as well as bj its different
coloration. There is a considerable naked space over the sacrum, and
on the dorsum of the tail as in other species. The snout is seminude*
being sparsely covered with very minute hairs. Behind the whiskers, the
hairs become much more numerous and longer, and the area below the eye*
and the forehead are well clad. The greater part of the front of the ear is
nude, but there is a sprinkling of short white hairs internal to and along its
margins. The chin and below the lower lips are almost naked, and, immedi-
ately behind the chin, the hairs are few. The \mder parts are well clad, but
not densely so, and the limbs are thinly clad, more especially the feet on which
the hairs are very few and short. The tail also is only sparsely clothed.

The general colour of the animal is blackish-brown or brown, the spinous
portion of the body being darkest ; but the colour is variable owing to the
reasons already mentioned.

The front of the face from the nose backwards to the spines, the limbs
and all the under parts with the exception of the chin and a line from it
upwards to the ear which are white, are generally dark-brown or fuliginous-
brown, blackish on the face, on which there is occasionally a considerable
intermixture of white hairs. The hairs which clothe the ears, and a tuft
of hairs at the base of the anterior margin of the ears, are white. The
white on the chin is more prolonged upwards to the ears in some specimens
than in others, giving rise to a kind of white collar which is much exagge-
rated in the figure of U, ooiiaris. The claws are homy yellow.

The following are the measurements of this species :

^ ? 5

Length of body and head, 6"85 e"70 6^70

„ of tail, o"96 rao ro2

Height of ear, 1''45 r'62 1"38

Breadth of ear, 0"97 0"97 1"00

Snouttoeye 1*00 0*49 0*62

Eye to ear, 0''62 0"49 0"62

Length of hind foot without claw, 1' 45 1"45 1''50

Breadth of hind foot, 0"49 0^45 0'*38

1878.] oftheOenus'EnnBXieviS, 207

The skull of this species (figs, aio h) is distinguished from that of JS.
p ictus, and the skull of JE. mieropus, by its large second premolar with
three fangs, and from the other two species by its great zygomatic breadth.
In this latter respect, it resembles S. pictus, but the skull has a considera-
bly longer muzzle than in that species, and, as a whole, is not so broad and
round. It is considerably broader than JE, hlanfordi, with more marked
post-orbital contraction, and from JE. jerdoni it is still more markedly
separated by its relatively much greater breadth across the zygomatic, and
more especially across the base of the muzzle, at the third premolar.
The skull is undoubtedly most nearly allied to that of E. hlanfordi, to
which it presents a very close resemblance when the adolescent skull is
compared with the adolescent skull of the type of that species. But
the latter is narrower across the zygomae, and has less post-orbital con«
traction, as already stated. It is further separated from the skull of E*
jerdoni by its larger teeth, and by the different form of the canine. This
tooth in E. hlanfardi, as well as in this species, is less triangular and more
filharply pointed than in E, jerdoni, JE. niger, JS, pictus, and JE. mioropus^
and in this respect differs more in appearance from the first premolar than
it does in these last-named species. All of these species are characterized by
the presence of two sharp cusps, to the canine section of the third premo-
lar, while in E. niger described by Blanford, the posterior of these two cusps
is entirely absent and its last molar presents only one eminence, while in all
the others this tooth has two cusps the inner of which is always the larger.

The figure in the Illustrations of Indian Zoology was copied from one
of GFeneral Hardwicke's drawings, and on the plate it is stated that the hedge-
hog was a species found in the Doab. There are many tracts of country in
North- Western India named Doab, but General Hardwicke appears from his
paper on Ji£u9 giganteus,* in using the term Doab, to haye had in view the
country lying between the Jumna and Ganges, in which the military
Station of Fatehgarh is situated, and where he appears to have been stationed.
There he had drawings made of the species of hedgehog which is there
common, also of JIfus giganteits, andof Jf. (JN'eaokid) hardwiokii = Arvicola
indica, Gray.

I am indebted to the late Mr. Andrew Anderson for many living exam-
ples of the hedgehog that occurs about Fatehgarh, and which appears to me to
agree with the figure of JE. collaria, from the Doab. As in the figure, the
chin of these hedgehogs was more or less white, and, in some, the white ex-
tended up towards the ear as a kind of collar which, however, is exaggerated
in the drawing of E. collaris, in which the contrast between the colours is
too marked, and the animal altogether represented too dark. Notwithstand-

♦ Trans. Joum. Linn. 8oc. Vol. VII, 1804, p. 308.
27

208 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [No. 4,

ing, I think there can be but little doubt, that the Fatehgarh hedgehog
which is yeiy common in the district is the JE, eoliarie. Gray.

The specimens from Madras in the British Museum referred to this
species are, as already mentioned, examples of JE. mieraptu, Blyth.

This species has been also obtained at Ajmir in RiLjptitina by Mr.
Blanf ord, and if I am correct in referring to it Hutton*s two specimens, it
extends west to the Sutlej. There Hutton obtained it in separate holes,
'' beneath a thorny bush called * Jhund' in the desert tracts of shifting sand
between Sundah Badairah and Hasilpoor," on the left bank of the Sutlej, and
apparently in close proximity to Erinaeeus pieties.

Ebinaceits blaxfoedi, n. s., Plate V.

Muzzle rather short (fig. d) and not much pointed ; ears moderately
large (fig. y), but broader than long and rounded at the tips, which are not
accuminate as in E. grayu The length of the anterior margin is equivalent
to the breadth of the ear at its base. The feet (figs, e and/) are large and
the hind foot resembles that of E, grayi, with the first toe well developed
and there is the absence of any well developed median pad. The feet are
also larger and broader than in E. jerdoni, and the first toe is more largely
developed as in E. grayi. The claws are long and curved, especially those
of the fore foot. The tail (fig. A) is short. The spines meet in a point on
the forehead and do not reach quite so far forwards as the base of the upper
border of the car, and there is no bare patch in the midst of them, on tiie
vertex. They are moderately long with 24 to 28 concentric ridges and fur-
rows, the former finely tubercular. The general colour of the spiny por-
tion of the animal is deep black, when the spines are looked at directly on
end and when they are at rest, but when raised or seen sideways, the mesial
yellow band becomes visible. The apex of each spine is broadly tipped
with deep black, and this is succeeded by a very broad yellow mesial band,
the base of each spine being dusky brown. The fur generally is deep brown
and moderately long and soft. A few white hairs occur on the chin, and
there is a tuft of white hairs at the anterior angle of the ear, and the latter
anteriorly and posteriorly is sparsely covered with white hairs.

The skin of the back of the ear is blackish, also the margins of the ears
anteriorly, but the centre of the ear is white. The claws are yellowish.

Measurements of E, hlanfordi.

Length of body and head, 6 36

„ of tail, 0 91

„ of hind foot without claw, •• 1*32

Height of ear, 1' 10

1878.] of the Genu^ 'RnuRceus. 209

Breadth of ear, 0"86

Nose to eye, 0"72

Eye to ear, 0^85

The skull (figs, a to e) of this species is distinguished from that of ^.
grayif by its much less zygomatic breadth and by the less protuberant
character of the supra post-orbital region. The teeth in both these species
have much the same general characters. It is undoubtedly very closely
allied to M grayi, which it resembles in the absence of a bare area over the
vertex, in its large feet with its hind toes somewhat turned inwards, and
strong and long claws, and in the almost complete absence of a mesial pad on
the hind foot, but it differs from it externally in its shorter muzzle, much
shorter and more rounded ears, and in its darker coloration, and smaller size.

This species is known only from one specimen procured by Mr. W. T.
Blanf ord at Bohri in Sind, where it is apparently associated with S, jerdoni,
and I have named the species after its discoverer.

Ebikaceus je&doni, n. s., Plate V-^.

Muzzle moderately long and pointed. Ears large, rounded at the tips
and broad at the base. Feet large, more especially the fore feet which are
broad and powerful, with strong claws. The hind feet well developed, but
proportionally not so large as the fore feet. A large well developed pad on
the under aspect of the hind foot. Claws strong. The tail moderately
long. The spines begin on a line with the anterior margins of the ear,
divided on the vertex by a large nude area as in ^. micropus and
JF. pictue. The spines are not very thick and they are marked generally
with 19 grooves and 19 ridges, the latter exceeding the breadth of the
former and being very sharp, with the tubercles passing down on their
sides, almost into the hollow of the furrow. The animal is black when
the spines lie flat, but when they are partially erected, the white bands
show, and a variegated appearance is produced. In the adult with the
spines 2*15 in length, there are two white and three dark bands. The
apical band is broad and deep shining black, and it is succeeded by a white
band nearly of the same breadth, which is followed by a brown band with a
white band below it, and then a dusky basal band. These are the characters
of two females from Karachi, but in the younger of the two, the spines are
0**97 in length and the basal band is hardly developed. In an adolescent
male from Rdjanpur, which I refer to this species, there is generally only
one white central band to each spine, the apical and basal bands being
black. In a few, however, measuring Cr-76 in length, there are two white
and three apical bands as in the type, and it is probable that in this adoles-
cent male as it reached maturity and its spines grew, the coloration of the

210 J. Anderson — On the Indian Species [No. 4,

type would be attained. In a still younger female from Rohri, Sind, and for
the privilege of examining which I am indebted to Mr. W. T. Blanf ord, the
spines are fine and rather soft, and the majority of them do not exceed
(/'•SO, but yet they have only one white band prominently developed, although
the basal white band is more or less indicated.

The hair generally is dusky brown, with an intermixture of grey hairs
on the head and on the chin and throat, the fur behind the latter area and
on the sides of the neck being paler brown than on the limbs and on the
sides. A patch of white hairs occurs at the base of the anterior angle of
the ear, and the inner surface of the ear is clad with short white hairs and
the apical third of the back of the organ with similar hairs. The mousta-
ches are brown and reach behind the ear. The claws are yellow.

Measurements of ^. jerdoni.

Adult. Adolescent.

? ^

Length of body and head, 7' 45 6^85

„ of tail, r25 0"91

„ of hind foot without claw, I'' 48 1' 40

Height of ear, ^40 r'35

Breadth of ear, 0"76 0^80

The skull of the female in its general characters is allied to the skull
of E, macraeanthus, Blanf ord, but is considerably less, with smaller teeth,
the upper dental line of the latter measuring I'^'OS to 0^*97 in this species,
which is a considerable difference in such small skulls. The skull also of
D. fnacr acanthus is characterised by a considerable concavity on the mesial
line in the fronto-parietal area, which does not exist in this species. The
skull has also a very strong resemblance to the skull of E, ni^er, but it is
a relatively broader skull than the latter, which has an attenuated facial
region, less post-orbital breadth and less temporal contraction, a smaller
brain case, and only one internal cusp developed on the third premolar. It
is distinguished from the skull of E, hlanfordi by its more slightly elon-
gated character, by its greater post-orbital breadth and swelling, by its
relatively longer and less expanded zygomatic arch, more produced muzzle
and by its teeth. It is markedly distinct from the short but especially
broad skull of E, grayi^ and it has much smaller teeth than that species.

The external features which appear to me to entitle this form to recog-
nition as a species distinct from E, hlanfordi^ are the very prominent char-
acter of the mesial pad on the hind foot, its larger ears and the presence cl
a large nude area on the vertex, as in E, micropus and E.pictus, this latter
character along with those already indicated separating it from E. yfoyt-

1878.] of the Genus ErinvicevLS, 211

It resembles JE. niger^ in having a bare mesial area on tbe vertex, but is dis«
tingoished from that form by its smaller fore feet and smaller ear, and bj
its cranial characters as well.

There can be little doubt, however, but that E. maeriieanthus, and
S, Jerdoniy are very closely allied forms, but I believe that the characters
I have indicated will be found persistent and reliable guides to enable them
to be distinguished the one from the other.

This species occurs at Karachi, from whence I have received it from
Mr. J. A. Murray, the Curator of the Karachi Museum, and from B4jan-
pur from Dr. E. Sanders. Mr. Blanford has also obtained it at Eohri, in
Sind.

Descbiption op Plates.

Plate III. Details of structure of JErinaceus piefus, Stoliczka. a.
upper view of skull : h, side view of skull : c. skull seen from below : d.
side view of head : e, upper and under aspects of hind foot : y. fore foot
seen from above and from below : y. side view of ear : A. side view of tail.
AU drawn natural size.

Plate IV. Details of structure of Erinacem grayi^ Bennett. «. upper
view of skull : 5. side view of skull : c, skull seen from below : d, side view
of head : e, upper and under aspects of hind foot : f, fore foot seen from
above and from below : g, side view of ear : h» side view of taiL All drawn
natural size.

Plate V. Details of structure of Urinapeus hlanfordi, n.s, a. upper
view of skull : h. side view of skull : c, skull seen from below : d, side
view of head : e, upper and under aspects of hind foot : f, fore foot seen
from above and from below : g, side view of ear : A. side view of tail.
All drawn natural size.

Plate V-^. Skull of Urinaceus micropus, Blyth. «. upper view: h,
side view : e, skull seen from below : Natural size. d. teeth of upper and
lower jaws enlarged 2 diameters.

Skull of JSrinaoew jerdani, n.s. e, upper view of skull : f, side
view : g, skull seen from below : Natural size. A. teeth of upper and
lower jaws enlarged 2 diameters.

212 W. T. Blanford — New Hedgehog from Muscat in Arahia, [No. 4,

XIX. — Description of a supposed new Sedgehog from Muscat in Arabia,-^

Bg W. T. Blaotohd, P. R. S., Ac.

(Received and road Dec. 4th 1878.)

(With Plate IX.)

Amongst a collection of small mammals, birds and reptiles, sent to me
some time since by Colonel Miles, the Political Agent at Muscat, are two
specimens, one preserved in spirit, the other a skin, of a species of hedgehog
which appears to me undescribed. It is somewhat intermediate in charac-
ters between the Indian E, collarisj and the Persian and Baluchistan E.
macracanthus, and E. megalotis, being larger than the former and baring
longer spines, whilst it is inferior in both respects to the two latter. The
following is a description of the new form.

EBnTACEUB KIQEB, sp. nOT.

E. supra niger, subtus nigreseenti-fusctu, auriculis longiusculis, pilis
sparsis griseis indutis, aculeis longiuseulis, apices versus nigrisy in medio
alhis, ad basin fiscis. Long, tota 6 — 7y auriculi 1'6, planta 1*25 poll, angl,

Hab. Juzta Muscat in Arabia.

The description is chiefly taken from the specimen in spirit, a female.
The size is moderate, exceeding that of E. collaris, but apparently inferior
to E. europaus. The colour is black aboye, the white ring on the spines
being very inconspicuous, the face is sooty black with a few gray hairs
interspersed, the ears are gprey. On the lower parts and limbs all the hairs
are sooty or blackish brown.

The feet are of moderate size, not so broad as in E, gragi, nor short as
in E, micropuSy but resembling those of E. collaris in form, and thinly clad
with hair above. Five claws on all feet, the inner claw on the hind feet
much smaller than the others.

The ears are long, not very broad, rounded at the end, thinly dad out-
side and near the margin inside with short whitish hairs : there are longer
white hairs at the base of the anterior inner margin, and longer blackish
hair near the base in front and behind.

Spines long, one inch to one and a quarter in length on the hinder part
of the back. In the spirit specimen, a female, none exceed 1*1 inches ; in
the dried skin some are nearly 1\ inches long. The spines commence on the
forehead inside of each ear, leaving a space free from spines in the middle,
running back for about an inch. All are black at the points for half an inch,
then white for about | inch, then dusky to near the base where they are

1878.] W. T. Blanford— JVw Redgekogfrom Muscat in Arabia, 213

rather paler. Each spine is surrounded hy about 24 to 28 longitudinal
grooves, the ridges between the grooves being closely tuberculate.

The following are measurements of the specimen in spirit, an adult
female. Males are probably rather larger. The length, owing to contrac-
tion, is somewhat less than that of a fresh specimen would be —

Length from nose to anus, 5*5

j^vvO ox xaii, ■•• ••• ••• t«* *t* !•• ••• ••• ••• Uv

• • • •• •

• * • . • •

•••

• • . • • •

• • • • • •

. • • • ••

••• •• •

Total,
Length of ear from orifice, . . .
Ditto ditto outside, ...

Breadth of ear,

Length of palma without claws^ ...

Ditto planta ditto, ...

The skull of the same specimen is rather narrower than that

Jom, and has a longer muzzle. The following are measurements

Length from occipital plane to end of premaxiUaries,
Ditto from lower margin oi foramen magnum to ditto.
Ditto of bony palate from opening of posterior nares,

Breadth across zygomatic arches,

Breadth of frontal region between orbits, •••
Ditto nasal bones, ...

Length of nasal suture,...
Ditto of mandible,

Height of ditto about, ••

••• •••

••• •••

. t •

•••

64
1-6
1-35
0-9
0-9
1-25
of E. eol

•

in
1-9
1-78
105
0-98
0-45
013
0-56
1-42
005

Description of F laic.

Fig. 1. Head of Erinaceus niger.
2. Fore foot of ditto,
8. Hind foot of ditto.

4, 6, 6. SkuU of ditto.

214 J. Anderson — On the Suh-Oenus Nesokia. [No. 4,

XX. — On' Arvicola indica, Choify and its relations to the Sub- Oenue
Nesokia, with a description of the species o/* Nesokia- — By J. Ander-
son, M. D., Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Brofessor of
Comparative Anatomy , Medical College.

(Read 4tli Dec. .1878.)
(With PUtes XIII and XIV.)

In Qray and Hardwicke's Illustrations of Indian Zoology there is a
representation of a rodent,* " The Indian Field-Mouse," Arvicola indiea.
Gray, bearing the date Ist Maj, 1829. This drawing is unaccompanied
by any information regarding the locality from whence the animal was
obtained. It represents a rat with a short blufE head ; with moderately-
sized, semi-nude ears ; sparsely clad feet with rather long claws, and a naked
tail shorter than the length of the body and head. The eye is figured
large. The general colour is a pale sandy brown, with interspersed longer
hairs.

In the Proceedings of the Zoological Society for 1835, p. 108, it is
recorded that Dr. Gray on exhibiting some rats and mice collected by Mr.,
now Sir Walter, Elliot, in the Southern Mahratta country, took occasion to
point out that the so-called Arvicola indiea was really a true Mus. In 1837t
Dr. Gray in referring to the Genus Mus, as understood by him, stated that
" the Mus giganteus, Hardwicke, may be regarded as the type, to which
may be added the two following new Indian species which have the tail
shorter than the body and the fur with scattered bristles," and these species
were Mus rufescensy Gray, (House-rat), and Mus koh. The latter he con-
sidered to be identical with Arvicola indiea. Dr. Gray, holding this
view regarding the identity of the animal figured in the 111. Ind. Zool.
with that of the rat sent by Elliot from Madras, under the Canarese name of
Koky re-named it, adopting the native name, koky ^qt the species. The Mus
kokf afterwards described by Elliot as Mus providenSy appears to me, how-
ever, to be distinct from the animal originally figured as A, indiea.

In the same contribution, Dr. Gray described a rodent with " the
cutting teeth, large, smooth, yellow and fiat in front" under the name of
Mus hardwickiu He compared it to Mus kok, that is, to the Madras rat
which, he stated, it very much resembled, '' but the skull is much wider and
stronger and rather larger, and the cutting teeth are nearly twice as wide
and are flat in front. The grinders are very little larger than those of that

species.''

♦ Vol. I, Plate XI, Mamm. 1832.

t Mag. Nat. Hist. (Charles worth) Vol. I, 1837, p. 585.

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Sub-Oenus Nesokia. 215

In 1842,* Dr. Gray, selecting Mu3 hardwickii as his type, described
the genus Jfesokia, characterizing it thns, " cutting teeth yerj large, flat
in front and smooth ; grinders 3'3 ; front upper large with three cross
ridges ; the middle oblong, and the hinder much narrowed behind, each with
two cross ridges ; the front lower grinder larger, narrowed in front with
three cross ridges ; hinder each with two ridges, the hindermost smallest ,
rather narrowed behind : tail short, thick, with whorls of scales and scattered
bristles : toes 4 — 5, moderate, the three middle sub-equal, long, the outer
moderate : claws small, compressed : &ont thumb tubercular, with a rudi*
mentarj claw : ears moderate, naked." " This genus," Dr. Gray states, " is
easily known from the rats (Mus) by the large size of the cutting teeth
and the shortness of the tail : it appears," he continues, *' to be intermediate
between the Bats and ^hizomys"

In 1839,t Sir Walter Elliot described the afore-mentioned rat from
Southern India under the name of Mus (Neotofna) providensj identifying
it with the Mus indicus, GeofE. and the Arvicola indica, Gray, mentioning
its Canarese name Kok or Kokuy but his identification of it with M. indicus
Geoff, was erroneous, as Musprovidens is undoubtedly a Nesokia, Prof.
A. Milne-Edwards, who has kindly examined for me the type specimen of
M. indicus^ Geoff, in the Paris Museum, informs me that it is very nearly
allied to Mus deeumanus, and that, although it is a little smaller, its teeth
have the same conformation ; and he further observes that Mus indicus is
perfectly different from the animal figured by Peters under the name of
Spalacomys indicus. Mus providens, however, has a skull like that of S*
indicus, as I have satisfied myself by the examination of the skulls of two
of Sir Walter Elliot's specimens.

Sir W. Elliot, in considering Musprovidens as identical with Arvicola
indieoy Gray, lends the weight of his authority to the view that I have
been led to adopt regarding Arvicola indica, because there can be no doubt
that they both belong to one sub-generic type of Mus.

On referring to the list of Mammalia in the British Museum, published
in 1848, three specimens of a rat are mentioned under the name of Mus
kokX from Madras, and presented to the British Museum by Sir W.
Elliot, and in the Introduction to his List of Mammalia§ 1843, Dr.
Gray states that the Mus kok and some other species of rats {Mus
rufeseensy &c.) described in the Magazine || of Natural History, 1837, were
founded on specimens sent by Sir Walter Elliot, and that they were au-

♦ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. X, 1842, p. 264.
t Madr. Jounu Lit. and 9c., Vol. X, 1889, p. 209,
% I. e,y p. 110.
i Op. eit.y 1843, p. vii.

26

216 J. Anderson — On the Suh-Oenm Nesokia. [No. 4,

thentic specimens of the species described by Elliot in the Madras Journal
of Literature and Science.* There can therefore be no doubt of the iden-
tity of Mu8 koh with Mus providens, and that the types, as stated in the
' List of Mammalia,' on the authority of Elliot, were from cultivated
plains in the Madras Presidency, and from Madras itself. The figure of
Arvicola indiea, fortunately bearing the date, 1st May 1829, renders it
impossible that any of Elliot's specimens could hare contributed the type
of that species, and, moreover, in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society
of 1835, it is stated that it was figured from General Haidwicke's draw-
ings.

In the * List of Mammalia,' there is no specimen under M. koh, of
which Arvicola indiea was regarded by Dr. Gray as a synonym, that could
have formed the type of the latter, as all the specimens of M. kok that
have been mentioned were, with one exception, received from Sir W. Elliot.
The exception is described as {e) '' a small rat with a very long tail : Lidia :
from Dr. Smut's Collection." A very long tail would seem to be sufficient
evidence that this was neither Jf. kok nor. Arvicola indiea. On again
turning to the ^ List of Mammalia,' we find that the type of Newkia hard^
wickii was presented by General Hardwicke, and in connection with this
it is noteworthy that animals from the North- West Provinces of India
corresponding to the description of that species are remarkably like the
drawing of Arvicola indiea. Moreover, Blyth states that there is no rat
in Bengal, nor apparently in Madras, corresponding to that figure, and by
extensive research, I can confirm this statement.

In the Catalogue of the Specimens and Drawings of Mammalia and
Birds of Nepal and Tibet, presented by B> H. Hodgson to the British
Museum (1846), the Kok, M. providens, is assigned to Nesokia, a course
which Blyth himself followed in his Memoir on the Bats and Mice of India
and in his Catalogue of Mammals.

In 1842, Sir Walter Elliot presented two stuffed specimens of Jfiw
providens = M, kok, Gray, to the Museum of the Adatic Society of Bengal
and these specimens still exist in the Indian Museum. They apparently
belong to the variety found in the red soil, and which Elliot says is much
redder than the common Koku of the black land, and they are quite
distinct from M, (N.) hardwickiu

On a review of these circumstances, I am disposed to make the sug-
gestion that the rat figured as Arvicola indiea, and which Gray considered
to be the Mu9 indieus of Geoffrey, is in reality the rat described by him,
first under the name of Mua kardwiokU, and afterwards as Ifesokia
hardwickii ; and in connection with this view of the question, it is impor-
tant to bear in mind that the figure of Arvicola indiea was received from

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Sub-Qenus Nesokia. 217

General Hardwioke who afterwards, in presenting to the British Museum
the type of Qray^s Mus (NesoJcia) hardwichii, presented a rat agreeing
with the figure of Arvicola indica. The type of Ifus indicus with which
Gray helieved his Arvieola indica to he specifically identical was from
Fondicherry, and as has already heen stated, it is a true rat allied to M,
decumanus, and perfectly distinct from the animal figured under the name
of A, indica, but, moreover, no rat has been obtained at Fondicherry at -
all corresponding specifically to the Mu8 (Nesokia) hardwiekii with which
the figure of Arvieola indica agrees.

The specimens of Mu8 providens in the Calcutta Museum are distin-
guished from JIfus (Nesokia) hardwichii by their much narrower incisors,
smaller molars, and by a long but narrow anterior palatine foramen, an
opening which is very short in Mus (Nesokia) hardwiekii, as is seen in
Feters' characteristic figure of the so-called Spalaeomys indicus,^ but the
form of the skull is the same; both differing in the same respects from
Mus. I have had the Madras rat alivef and have observed that it has the
deep and rather short muzzle of Nesokia, with incisors broader than those
of ordinary rats, and with the molars, when worn down, having the general
characters of Nesokia, These rats, coming as they do from Southern
India, agree externally with the types of M, providens, and have similar
short Nesokian skulls.

In Lower Bengal, there is a burrowing rat, a great pest in gardens,
in which it constructs numerous tortuous passages, some comparatively
superficial, and others at times very deep, and throws up heaps resem.
bling mole hills. It is closely allied to Mus providens, but differs from it
in its somewhat greater size, and in other slight details, afterwards to be
noticed. This is the rat which Blyth incorrectly identified with Mus
indicus, Geoff., and with which he also wrongly identified Arvicola indica^
Mus hutioni, Blyth, JT. rattoides, Hodgson, Mus pyctoris, Hodgson, and
Mus duhius, Kelaart, but which is perfectly distinct &om Mus (Nesokia)
hardwichii which also differs from M. huttoni. It appears probable that
this is the rat also figured in the 111. Ind. Zool. Vol. II, pi. 21, under the
nanie of Arvicola hengalensis, but which was never described. This being
the case, the Bengal form must be named, whilst Mus (N.) hardwiekii will
stand for the rat originally described as Arvicola indica, and afterwards as
Nesokia hardwiekii ; the original of the figure of A. indica being probably
the type itself of Mus hardwiekii, whereas M. (N) providens will stand for
the Southern form first described by Gray under the barbarous name of M,
kok. In the Indian Museum, there are many rats in alcohol from Fateh-

• Abhand. der K. Akad. Wiflaensch. zu Berlin, 1840, p. 143, Taf. H, fig. 1.
t I may take the opportunity to record here that males and females of this rat
escaped from confinement in the Calcutta Museum.

218 J. Anderson — On the Sub-Genus Nesokia. [No. 4,

garh, presented bj the late Mr. Andrew Anderson, which yield skulls the
exact counterpart of the skull figured hj Peters as Spalacomys indieus,
and these rats agree with the figure of A. indica^ and with the description of
Nesokia hardwickii. Hodgson described, in 184*6, a rat from Nepal which
he called Mus hydropMlus* and which Gray first regarded as an Arvicola^
and afterwards as a NesoJcia, He described it as characterised by its small
ears, hardly above one-third the length of the head, also by its short tail
** and by its fine and short pelage : the head he described as larger and the
muzzle thicker than in the common land rats ; ' above dusky brown ; below and
the limbs nearly white. Long piles inconspicuous. Snout to vent 3 J inches ;
tail 2i ; head 1\ ; ears ^ ; palm \ ; planta ^.' These characters would seem
to indicate a rat allied to the so-called Nesokia or Spaiaeom^s, Peters, but
I hesitate to pronounce any decided opinion on the species. In connection
with the name of hydrophilus given by Hodgson to this rat, I have
observed that the common Nesokia of Lower Bengal, which I propose
to name Mus (N.) hlythianus after Blyth, who did so much to forward
the progress of Natural History in India and to enlarge our knowledge
of this group, manifests a remarkable capacity, for a rat of its type,
to take to water, when hard-pressed. Its burrows are frequently con-
structed on the banks of tanks in Lower Bengal, and when the rats are
being dug out, they will freely take to the water, if that is their only way
of escape, and swim considerable distances. To test this aquatic power, I had
two rats placed in a large wire bird-cage, and the cage partially submerged.
If the rats, when in those circumstances, were much annoyed, they inmiedi-
ately dived to the bottom of the cage, where they could be observed run-
ning about under water. I also had them removed from the cage, and let
loose in the large sheet of water in the Zoological Gardens, between the
two iron bridges. When let loose at the bank, and an attempt was made
to catch them, they immediately dived, and the stronger of the two did not
appear at the surface for some time, when it was observed at a consider*
able distance from the bank, making for the opposite side. .

I have already referred to the name g^ven by Elliot to the allied form
from Madras, <viz., M. providens. He records of it that it stores up lai^
quantities of grain during harvest. The natives of Bengal ascribe a similar
habit to M. {N.) hlythianus^ and it has been stated to me that sometimes
considerable quantities of grain may be found in a burrow, and that the
natives being aware of this habit make raids on these murine granaries.

With reference to the characters of the genus Nesokia^ Gray, the
examination of a large series of skulls of M, hardtoiekii and of the other
species shows that tlie dental features selected by Gray are esaentudly

* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Vol. XY, 1845, p. 267 ; Cat. Sp. and Draw. Hamm.
&c. Hodgson, Nepal, Coll. Brit. Museum, 1846, p. 19 ; /. e, 1863, new ed., p. 10.

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Sub-Oenus Nesokia. 219

those of worn teeth, and that they do not contain the characters of the
dentition as seen in the teeth before they are worn. In the latter condition,
each of the three laminae of the first upper molar presents a large central
cusp, and a much smaller or even minute cusp on either of its sides, resulting
as it were from the sinuous characters of each lamina of the tooth. In true
mice and ordinary rats, the laminae are transversely more sinuous and
smaller, whereas in Nesokia they are large and transverse without any
marked sinuosity, in the more typical forms. In the second upper molar,
there are only two laminae, the first being abortive and only represented
by a small isolated cusp attached to the anterior face of the inner cusp or
fold of the first of the two laminae, which is exactly the same arrangement
as in Mu9, The last molar, except in having its laminae more regularly
transverse than in Mus, resembles the same tooth in this latter genus. In
the lower jaw, there is the same regularly transverse character in the larger
laminae as compared with Mus, but all the cusps are the same. In the
large rats of the type of M, giganteus, Hardwicke, the teeth conform more
to the type characteristic of the ordinary rats and mice, the laminae, how-
ever, being relatively larger than in Mtis and less sinuous, but taking the
dentition as a whole, in connection with the form of the skull, these large
rats are more closely allied to NesoJda than to the true rats, an opinion
which was first held by Sir Walter Elliot.*

The incisor' teeth of a Nesokia are always broader than those of an
ordinary rat, and in this respect are more chisel-shaped, but the incisor
teeth of the laige rats such as M, giganteus are also proportionally broader
than those of ordinary rats.

In the adult animal, such as that figured by Prof. Peters, the laminae
are very regularly transversely oblong without any trace of such cusps as
those I have described ; and in old individuals of the larger rats, such as M.
giganteus, the teeth I have observed to be worn down, much in the same
way as in the so-called Nesokia = Spalacomys. Considering these facts,
it does not appear that the genus Nesokia has any ground to recognition
on characters derived from the dentition. The points in which the skulls
of rats referable to the type of M, (Nesokia) hardwickii, Gray, (Spala-
eomys indica, Peters,) differ from those of the ordinary rats and mice are, on
the other hand, much more pronounced than any difference in their dentition.
The skull of Nesokia is a much broader and shorter skull with a short stout
muzzle and expanded zygomata. The brain case is much shorter and broader
than that of any member of the genus Mus. The temporo-parietal ridges also
are proportionally nearer each other than in Mus^ and the upper surface of
the parietals is more flattened. The anterior palatine foramina are much

* Madr. Joum. Lit. and So., Tol. X, p. 209. Sir W. Elliot erroneously regarded
M. providers and If, giganUui as belonging to the geniui Neotoma,

220 J. Anderson — On the Sub- Oenu$ Nesokia. [No. 4>

more closed than in ordinary rats and mice, and in some of the more typi-
cal Neiokutj such as M, (N.) hardwiekii, they are almost closed. There is
also this further difference, that the palate of Mw^Nesokia contracts more
anteriorly than in Mus^ and is always proportionally narrower, with a
much shorter edentulous interspace behind the last molar than in Mu9.
In the larger rats, such as M. giganteui^ the posterior portion of the
palate, in this respect, corresponds to Mu9'Ne9okiay and the features of
the palate generally are more Mtu-Netokian^ than those of true Mu$.
The palate also of Mut^Newkia is marked by two somewhat pronounced
longitudinal furrows which are the backward prolongations of the anterior
palatine foramina. These grooves, near their hinder extrenuties, hare the
posterior palatine foramina lying in their course, and beyond them they
are prolonged over the posterior margin of the palatines where they nearly
constitute a closed canal by the inward projection of the inner palatine
border of the maxilla and the somewhat thickened and anteriorly recurred
posterior margin of the palatines. This arrangement is seen to occur only
in a very feeble degree in ordinary rats and mice which, however, have not,
as a rule, any thickening of the hinder margin of the palatines. Like the
majority of thoroughly burrowing rodents, the tympanies are relatively
much larger than in the ordinary rats. The large rats {M, giganieus) have
the palatine features and the tympanies of Mtu-Nesokia, These giant rats
have rather more elongated skulls than the more typical Nesokians and,
in this respect, they serve to connect the latter with the generality of
mice and rats, but in their other features they more resemble Mtu-Netokia
than Mu$. I would therefore regard them as constituting a section of the
Bub-genus I^esokia, This view was first put forward by Sir Walter
Elliot, so long ago as 1839, and Blyth agreed with him in regarding the
affinities manifested by the great bandicoot rats as thoroughly Netokian^
and in the propriety of separating ail of these Newkian species from the
typical forms of mice.

After a careful consideration of the characters which these various
species display, it appears that this sub>genuB of Mut may be conveniently
divided into three sections ; Ist, one section containing such forms as ^itt
{Newkia) liardwickii, M. (N.) huttani^ M. (N.) scuUgiy the more typical
species of Nesokia^ all characterised by broad incisors regularly laminated,
large molars and small anterior palatine foramina, with tails considerably
shorter than the body ; and the females possessing only 4 pairs of mammary
teats, two inguinal, one axillary and one pectoral : 2nd, another section
comprising M, {N,) provident, M, (JV.) hlgthianus (n, «.) and M, (^.) har^
elayanus (n. «.), distinguished by somewhat narrower incisors, smaller and less
regularly tranversely laminated molars, more open anterior palatine foramina
and longer tails ; with the females possessing as many as even 7 to 9 pairs of

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Suh-Genus Nesokia. 221

mammarj teats* : and, lastly, a third division containing M. (JV.) gigantetu
and M, (N.) elliotanus^ {n.s.) the so-called handicoot rats, with longer skulls,
broad incisors, with molars of the type of the second section, but propor-
tionally somewhat larger with less wavy laminse, longer anterior palatine
foramina and tails nearly equalling the length of the body and head.
I have largely collected rats for the Indian Museum from all parts of India,
and out of the materials brought together I am enabled to determine the
following species belonging to the sub-genus Nesokia,

1st Section.
Mrs. (Nesokia) hardwicioi. Gray.

? Arvicola indica, Gray, Gray and Hardw., 111. Ind. Zool., Vol. 1, 1832,
PI XI.

Mu8. hardwickii, Gray, Mag. Nat. Histv (Charlesworth), Yol. 1, 1837,
p. 585.

Nesokia hardwickii, Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Yol. X, 1842^
p. 265, List Mamm. of 1843, p. 113 ; Jerdon, Mamm. Ind. 1867, p. 190.

? Mus hgdrophiluSf Hodgson, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Yol. XY, 1843,
p. 267.

P MuspyctoriSy Hodgson, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Yol. XY, 1845,
p. 267.

Nesokia grijithii, Horsfd., Cat. Mamm. East Ind. As. Mus., 1851,
p. 145.

Spalacomtfs indica, Peters, Abhand. der K. Akad. Wissensch. zu Berlin,
1860, p. 143, Taf. lY, fig. 1.

The head short and bluff, much shorter and broader than in M, (N,)
providens and Jf. {N.) hlythianus ; the muzzle broad and deep, and in these
respects it resembles {N) hut ton i. The eye moderately large and situated
about half way between the ear and the end of the muzzle. Ears not large,
smaller than in these other two species, rounded, seminude, but clad with
minute hairs. Tail variable, but much shorter than in Jf. (N) providejis,
and M. {N) hlythianus, seldom exceeding the distance between the vent
and the middle of the neck, but shorter than in Jf. (N.) huttoni :. ringed,
nearly nude, less clad than in Jf. {N.) providens and Jf. {N.) hlythianus^
with minute hairs. Feet well developed, smaller than in M. (N,) huttoni ;
claws moderately long ; the upper surface of the feet sparsely clad.

The fur is generally soft and moderately long, but not so silky as
M. (N.) huttoni : it varies however in this respect and is sometimes somewhat

* Hodgson described a rat, as M, plurimammis from Nepal and the Terai, which,
from the description and the proportional length of its tail appoan to be an allied
species.

222 J. Anderson — On the Suh^Oenus Nesokia. [No. 4,

harsh. The pelage, as in the other species, consists of three kinds of hairs,
short under-lying fur, and ordinary hairs, intermixed among which, espe-
cially on the dorsal and sacral regions, are numerous long hlack ludrs which
project a long way heyond the fur, as in jSf. (iV.) blythianus* hut not to
the same extent. The general colour of the animal on the upper parts is
sandy hrown or fawn, paler on the sides, and dusky grey with a tinge of
yellowish rufous on the under-surface. The muzzle, feet and tail are flesh-
coloured, and the ears are of the same colour hut somewhat darker.

Mr. Blanfordf has pointed out that M. (JIT.) Kardwickii is a much
larger animal than M, {N,) hutfofU. The measurements of the largest
male, M. (N.) huttoni^ mentioned hy him are as follows, taken from the fresh
animal, viz. : —

Length of hody and head, 7"

Length of tail, 4"-6

Length of hind foot, 1"'6

whereas the largest male, out of an extensive series of this rat in alcohol,
collected by the late Mr. Andrew Anderson at Fatehgarh, gives the follow-
ing dimensions :

Length of body and head, 7'*'S5

„ of tail, 4"-60

„ of hind foot, l''^?

Besides differing in size these species would appear also to difPer in
the relative proportions of the tail and the feet, the latter being somewhat
larger in M. (I^.) huttoniy than in Jf. (N.) kardwickii. The M. (IT,)
gr\ffithi of Horsfield in its proportion agrees with this species. If two
female examples of the two species from the same localities are compared,
wo have similar results, thus —

M, (N,) huttoni, M. (-^.) hardwiekiL

9 ?

Length of body and head, 650 6"-45

„ of tail, 4-55 4'M5

„ of hind foot, 1-43 r'-25

I am indebted to Dr. Dobson for having compared the foregoing male
specimen from Fatehgarh with the type in the British Museum, with
which be pronounces it to agree.

The skulls, however, are remarkably alike and the only differences I
can detect are, that the molar teeth of animals by their other characters
referable to M, {N,) huttoni, are somewhat larger than those of 2f. (j^.)
hardwickiij the anterior palatine foramina of the latter being a little shorter

* These piles axe not shown in the figure of the species in the Zoology of Pcnia.

t ZooL of Persia, p. 59.

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Suh-Oenue Nesokia. 223

than that of the former, but in both thej are much closed and their characters
are well shewn in the female skull of this species figured by Prof. Peters,
This foramen, however, is subject to a slight variation in the degree to
which it is closed. The skulls of both species agree in having an expanded
surface to the malar process of the maxillary.

Mr. Andrew Anderson forwarded to the Indian Museum from Fa-
tehgarh specimens agreeing with the example that has been compared
with the type of the species and which also conforms to Hodgson's de-
scription of Mu8. ptfctoriSf the type of which, however, Dr. Dobson informs
me, he has not been able to find either in the British Museum or in the
India Musemn,

This species in the proportion of its tail, in the colour of its pelage,
in the flesh-coloured character of its several parts, such as its feet and
tail, and in the form of its head so closely approaches the figure of the
animal depicted as Arvieola indiea^ that I hesitate only with a meagre
doubt to regard it as identical with the animal figured under that name.
The only dubiety I have in expressing this opinion arises from the affinity
that exists between JbT. (N,) hardwickiiy and the burrowing rodent described
by Blyth as M, (iT.) huftoni.

This species is very prevalent about Fatehgarh in the North- Western
Provinces of India, and if M. griffithi is correctly identified with it, the spe-
cies would appear to extend into Afghanistan, to the district about Quettah.

Mus (Nesokia) huttoni.

Mu8 huttoniy Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. XV., 1846, p. 139.

Nesokia indica, Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXII, 1863>
p. B2S,partim: id. Cat. Mamm. As. Soc. Mus., 1863, ^: 112, part itn.

Nesokia huttoni, Blanford, Zool. of Persia, 1876, p. 59, P. VI, fig. 1,
et cranium, figs. 1 and 2, p. 60.

Head and general form of the animal the same as in M, (N.) hard-
fcickiiy but with larger feet and a somewhat longer tail. Fur also as in
that species, but more soft and silky and paler fawn-coloured, the under
parts being pale hoary, sometimes tinged with yellowish and ferruginous.
The ears are round and about the same dimensions as in M. (N.) hardwiokii^
and very sparsely clad with minute hairs. The feet sparsely covered with
short whitish hairs and the tail also almost nude. The nose and feet are
flesh-coloured, but the tail and ears are darker and brownish.

9 9

Length of body and head,* 7"- 6"-7

„ of tail, 4"'6 4f''2

„ of hind feet, f-6 r'-5

* These moasaremonts are taken from Mr. Blanford's " Persia," and are those of
froflh specimens.

27

224 J. Anderson — On the Sub- Qentu Nesokia. [No. 4,

The general characters of the skull I have already indicated under
Jf. (i^.) hardwiehii.

Mr. Blanford states that this field-rat has only 3 pairs of mammflft^ bat
in a female collected by him at Kalagin, Baldchistan, I observe that it has
the same number of mammsB as the female of Jf. (N,) hardwiehii, viz,y 8,
two inguinal pairs, one axillary pair, and one pectoral pair as in that species.
Mr. Blanford probably overlooked the axillary mamm» which occur also in
M, (N.) jprovidens, and M. (i\r.) hlythianm, and in the ordinary rats, such
as M, decumanus.

The Indian Museum has received this species from Umballa, where it
was obtained by the late Lieut.-Col. Tytler ; from Kalagan in Baluchistan
from Mr. Blanford, who hai also presented examples from Shahbandar and
Khipra, Sind ; and from Karachi examples have been received from Mr. J. A.
Murray of the Municipal Museum of that town.

Examples have also been quite recently sent to the Indian Museum
from Dakka, Afghanistan, by that observant naturalist Dr. Arthur Barclay.
He states " that this species occurs in lai^e numbers all about that Fort,
which is at a low elevation, being only a little above Peshawar. The soil
is loose and very fine, almost like exceedingly fine sand. The holes of this
rat do not run deep but ramify horizontally, just below the surface of the
ground. It throws out a mound of earth at the exit of the hole. I have
never seen these rats out of their dens during the day, but frequently
during my evening walk I have watched them throwing out earth. The
mouth of the hole is usually kept shut up with earth."

M. (Nesokia) scullyi.
NcBoJcia 9cullyi, J. Wood-Mason, Proc. As. Soc. Beng., 1876, p. 80.

Form of body and head the same as in Jifi {N.) hardwiehii, but distin-
guished from it and from M, {N,) huttani, to both of which it is closely allied,
by its much larger feet, the hinder pair of which in an animal with the body
and head 6'''6 long, the hind foot and claws measure 1"*72, whereas in M.
(j^.) hardwiehii and Jf. (^.) huttoni, in animals of the same dimension
the feet measure respectively l''*26 and 1"'43. The tail is longer than in
M. (i\r.) hardwiehii, and in its proportions it more resembles the tail of
M. (iV^.) huttoni. The fur also is longer and more silky than the fur of
the two foregoing species, but in this respect it is approached by M. (Ni)
huttoni. The tail is stated by Mr. Wood-Mason to be without a single
hair, but in the type I observe that it is very sparsely covered with hairs,
to the tip. The feet are clad with short brown hairs, but to a less extent
than in any of the other species.

The fur is a slightly paler fawn than that of M. (-^.) huttoni, the long
piles being white tipped. The sides are still paler, and the under sur&ce is

1878.] J.Anderson — On the Suh-Oenus'N esokia. 225

a pale grey, tinged with yellowish. The whiskers are black, tipped with
white. The ears are short, scarcely appearing above the fur, and they are
almost nude, but sparsely clad as in the other species. The feet and claws
flesh-coloured.

The skull has a broader muzzle than the skull of M. (2^.) huttoni,
than which it is somewhat larger, exceeding also the size of the skull of
M. (JN".) hardtoicJcii. It also differs from the skull of M. {N) huttani, in its
greater supraorbital breadth and less expanded zygomatic. It has the ex-
panded malar process of the maxillary as in M, (JV.) hardwickii and Jf. (2^.)
huttoniy but to less extent than in the latter species, than which the lachrymal
foramen is much smaller. Its molar teeth are also larger than in M, (iT.)
huttoniy and its anterior palatine foramina are more open. Dr. Scully
gives the dimensions as follows : total length ll'^'S, tail 5'''2, and the weight
as 5*6 oz. The irides he states are dark brown.

This species was obtained by Dr. Scully at Sanju in Eashgaria and
presented by him to the Indian Museum.

The Indian Museum has received from Muscat, Arabia, a young rat be-
longing to this sub-genus, of the following dimensions. Length of body
and head 3**35, tail 2"'30, hind foot O^'OS. Its ears are small and rounded,
its tail is rather densely clad with short hairs. It is too young to indicate
its species, but it is quite distinct from any of the field rats described in
this article.

2nd Section,
Mvs (Nesokia.) pbottdxns.

Mus Jcohy Gray, Mag, Nat. Hist. (Charlesworth's), Vol. I, 1837,
p. 585, partim, nee Arvicola indica. Gray ; id. List of Mamm. B. M. 184i3|
partim; Kelaart, Prod. Faun. Zeyl. 1832, p. 66.

Mus {Neotoma) providens, Elliot, Mad. Jour. lit. Ac., Vol. X, 1839,
p. 209, partimy nee Mus indicus, G^off. St. Hil., nee Arvicola indiea, Gray.

Mus (Nesohia) indicuSy Blyth, Cat. Mamm. As. Soc. Mus., 1863, p. 112,
partim, nee Arvicola indica. Gray, nee M. huttoni.

NesoJcia indicay Blyth, Joum. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXII, 1863,
p. 329, partimy nee M, hardwickiiy nee Mus indicus^ Gkoff., St. Hil. ; Jerdon
Mammal of Ind. 1867, partim.

Mus hardwickii, Kelaart, Prod. Faun. Zeylanica, 1852, p. 65.

The head short and truncated, with a deep muzzle ; the ears nearly
round, the height equalling the distance between the tip of the muzzle and
the eye, nearly nude, but sparsely covered with minute hairs. Eye moder-
ately large, occupying about the middle of the interval between the tip of
the snout and the ear. Feet well developed. Claws short and stout. The

226 J. Anderson — On the Sub-Qenus Nesokia. [Xo. 4,

tail nearly equals the length of the trunk and head, and is thus longer than
in M. (N.) hlythianus, seminude, ringed and with short brown bristly hairs
around the margin of the annuli. Whiskers full and long.

The fur is rather harsh and long and consists as in the other species of
three kinds, but the long piles are not numerous.

The general colour of the upper parts is brown, paler than in Jf. (^.)
hlythianuB, with an intermixture of yellowish or fawn-coloured hairs as in
that species, producing a varied hue of brown and yellow : the under parts
are whitish with a yellowish tinge, and there are no brown or long hairs
intermixed. There is a variety occurring in the red soil and which Elliot
says is much redder* in colour than the common Koku of the dark land.
The nose, ears and feet are dark flesh-coloured or brownish, and the feet
are covered with short brown hairs. The claws are yellowish. The whiskers
are black.

Sir Walter Elliot gives the following measurements of an old male :
length of body 7 inches ; of tail 6| ; total 13i ; of head 1 J^ ; of ear ^^ ;
of fore palm ^^ ; of hind palm 1^ ; weight 6 oz. 6 drs "f

The skull is considerably smaller than that of M. (H.) hlyihianuty of
the same age, from which it is also distinguished by its more outwardly arch-
ed malar process of the maxillary ; by its considerably smaller teeth, and
long, but less open, anterior palatine foramina. The brain case also is rela-
tively shorter and more globular than that of M, (iT.) hlythianu$. The total
lengths of two female skulls of the same age of these species stand in the
following relations to each other. M, {N.) providens, l"-45. M, {N,) hiyihiO'
nus, l"-67. Molar line in the former 0"-30, in the hitter 0"-33. The upper
surface of the skull in the fronto-nasal region is less arched in M, {^.)proci^
dens, than in Jf. (N.) hlythianus. The incisors are brilliant orange, more
so than in M, (iV.) bIythiant$Sy but this is a variable character.

The external features which distinguish this from the nearly allied Jf.
(^.) hlythianus are its smaller size and slightly shorter head and muzzle,
and somewhat smaller ears and longer tail, associated with a paler brown
fur and fewer long piles.

This animal occurs in southern Western India and also in Ceylon. In
the Indian Museum, there is one of Kelaart's specimens of Mu9 dubius, and
which he afterwards considered to be Nesohia hardwickii^ but its skull and
features generally are those of this species.

This species produces from 8 to 10;]: at a birth. Elliot relates that this
burrowing field-rat is largely eaten by the Wuddurs, or tank-diggers, who also

* It is a CTuiouB circmnstaiice that the pelage of M, (N,) blythuuiuSf becomes

qxiite rufous in alcohol, and that stuffed specimens long exposed to Ught, change to the

same hue, as do also stuffed examples of M. (N*) provident,
t /. c, p. 210.

X L e,y p. 210.

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Suh-Oenus Nesokia. 227

plunder its burrows for the grain that is stored up for its winter con-
sumption, and he mentions that in favourable localities the Wuddurs
find the grain in such quantities as to subsist almost entirely upon it,
during that season of the year ! Sir Walter Elliot has also described the
burrows of this species, which apparently closely correspond to those of
j3f. (^.) hli/thianiM, and he states that a variety is said to frequent the
banks of nullahs and to take to the water when pursued, but that these
differ in no respect from the common kind — an exact parallel to what
occurs also with the allied form M. (iV.) hlythiani^ found in Bengal.

Mus (Nesokia) BLYTHiAiars, n. s.

? Arvicola hen^alemis, Gray and Hardw., 111. Ind. 2tool., Vol. II,
1833-34, pi. 21, not described.

Mus (I^esohia) indicits, Blyth, Cat. Mamm. As. Soc. Mus^ 1863, p. 112
partim, nee M, indictcs, Geoffrey St. Hil.

NeBohia indica, Blyth, Joum. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. XXXII, 1863,
p. 329, pariim, nee Mus indices, Geoffroy St. Hil. ; Jerdon, Mamm. Ind.
1867 p. 187, partim, nee M. indicus, GeofEroy St. Hil.

Head moderately large, but the muzzle broad and deep compared with
Mus decumanus. Ears rounded ; about one half the length of the interval
between their base anteriorly and the tip of the snout nearly nude, but
sparsely covered with minute hairs. Eye moderately large, placed a little
nearer the ear than towards the tip of the snout. Feet well developed,
moderately large. Claws short and stout. The length of the tail some-
what variable, but rarely exceeding the length of the trunk, exclusive of the
head. It is ringed and sparsely covered with short bristly hairs at the
margins of the rings.

The fur is rather coarse and the piles are profusely intermixed among
the pelage and project a long way beyond it. These long hairs are most
numerous on the lumbar and sacral regions.

The general colour of the animal is dark brown with fleshy-coloured
nose, ears and feet, the imder-surface having a somewhat gpreyish tint ap-
proaching to hoary. Intermixed among the generally brown hairs of the
upper parts, are numerous yellowish hairs producing a speckled appearance,
and these yellow hairs give rise to a somewhat rufous tint in the brown
colour. The under-surface is without any intermixture of brown and yellow
hairs. The ears and upper surface of the feet and the tail are clad with
short brown hairs. The whiskers are black.

228 J. Anderson — On the Sub- Genus Nesokia. [No. 4,

Measurements in the flesh, of male and female.

^ ?

Length of body and head, 8"-20 G'-OS

„ taU, 6" 45 5 "-55

Total length, 14"-65 IVGO

Length of bind foot 1^30 1^-30

Height of ear, CSS 0"75

Breadth of ear, 0^75 0^65

The females are distinguished by the presence of 8 pairs of mam-
mary teats. Two in the inguinal region, four on the sides, one pair in the
axilla and one pectoral pair.

The skull is distinguished from the skull of the nearly allied form
M. (N,) providens by the characters already stated, and from the skull of
M, hardwickii it differs in its considerably narrower incisors and smaller
and more irregularly laminated molars, and by its long and open anterior
palatine foramina. It is also a more arched skull. The incisor teeth are
orange, occasionally brilliantly so, but generally white towards their tips,
whilst in some these teeth are nearly white in both sexes, but the teeth of
the males are usually the most coloured.

The nasals vary considerably in length and breadth. Compared witb the
skulls of ordinary mice, shortness of muzzle is one of its most distinguishing
features, associated with expansion of the zygomata and general rotundity.
The skull of the male is always considerably larger than that of the female.
Among males found among the native huts, I have observed two types of
skull, one larger than the typical form, but the animals in other respects
were identical with other males conforming to the ordinary type of skuIL
I have never observed these more elongated skulls in females, but if they
do occur I would be disposed to attribute the variation to inter>breeding
with Mu9 decumanus.

The adult rat, in its external appearance, has a strong resemblance to
M. decumanus, when the depth of its muzzle and longer tail are overlooked,
and a superficial observer at first sight would be disposed to r^ard them as
one and the same species.

It is distinguished from M. (N.) hardwiciiiy by its much longer tail,
by its coarser and much darker pelage, narrower incisors and larger ears, and
these features and its much smaller feet distinguish it from M. (N,) tcull^

It is a larger animal than M. (If.) providens, than which it has some-
what larger ears, a larger head, and broader incisors.^

The Indian Museum possesses examples of this species from Ghizipur
in the North- West of India, from Dacca, Cachar and Midnapore, and
numerous specimens from Calcutta and its neighbourhood.

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Sub-Genus Nesokia. 229

In Gachar specimens, the colour is somewhat darker.

This rat is very generally distributed over Lower Bengal, and from' its
abundance it becomes a nuisance in gardens, owing to the tortuous character
of it^ burrows, and from the circumstance that they are generally only a few
inches below ground, unless the animal happens to burrow on the bank of a
tank when the burrow usually runs horizontally inwards. A burrow con-
sists of a great number of short passages which run a short way and then
stop, but I have been unable to detect that they are generally constructed
on one plan. There is, of course, a continuous but tortuous principal pas-
sage from which the offshoots are given off, and the termination of the
former, or it may be the end of one of the short passages, may be enlarged
and contain a nest of leaves and grass. Other burrows are much simpler,
consisting of only a few passages with one principal passage running right
inwards for a long way, and these are generally constructed on the banks
of tanks. From a nest such as that described I have removed as many as
10 young rats. Like M. (i\r.) jprovidensy it is of a fierce disposition and
utters a peculiar aspirant sound, grinding and rather knocking its teeth
together at the same time, and erecting all its fur, more especially the
long piles, and contracting its ears which, like the ears of rats generally, are
capable of a folded contraction, about the middle of the conch.

I have already mentioned its aquatic habit and that of storing grain.

The Indian Museum, some years ago, received from Moulmein, through
the late Captain Hood, a nearly albino adolescent female Nesokia closely
allied to this species and to M. (N.) providens, but as it is immature,
and abnormal in colour, I hesitate to name it specifically. The following
are its measurements :

Length of body and head, 6*70

„ of tail, 5'-26

Total length, ir-90

Length of hind foot, 1*'32

Height of ear, 0^-75

The skull has the ordinary characters of this section of the Sub-genus,
and manifests some affinities to M, (JST,) providens, more especially in its
anterior palatine foramina, which are narrower than in M, (^.) hlythianus,

Hodgson has described a rat which is closely allied to this species, viz.f
M. {N,) plurimammis,

Mtts (Nesokia) BABCLAYAims, n. s.

Dr. Arthur Barclay of the Bengal Medical Service, obtained at Gdna,
Central India, an adult male field rat which appeared at first sight to be a
new generic type, judging from its external appearance only. Whilst it had
the general form of Nesokia there was this remarkable feature that its ears

230 J. Anderson — On the Suh-Oenw Nesokia. [No. 4,

were nude and only projecting a very short way above the for, while a
broad white band ran from above the nose, through the eye, to the ear. I
had the animal figured and afterwards killed, and on examining the skull
there could be no doubt regarding the animal's affinities, and that it was
closely allied to Mus (Nesokia) hlythianus, having the same narrow
incisors, compared with M, (J^.) hardwickii, and the same small molars,
with wide anterior palatine foramina.

The ears were nearly symmetrical on either side and, as already stated
projected only a little above the fur. It seemed to me, however, that their
short character was due to their having been artificially cut, as the margin of
each ear was rounded and unhaired. I was therefore disposed to conclude
that this rat must have been once in confinement, probably on account of the
curious sport of a white band from the nose through the eye, and that either
to mark the animal so that it could always be recognised, or perhaps with
the object of enhancing its value to the uninitiated, its ears had been cut.
There could be no doubt but that it was a Nesokia allied to, but probably
distinct from, Mus (N.) hlythianus.

I was so convinced of this that I sent to the North-West for more spe-
cimens of these field rats, and to Mr. Whitwell of the Opium Department,
Gh^zipur, I am indebted for a female field rat which appears to be a normal
example of a species which was first made known by the sport which I have
described.

The following is a description of this species :

Muzzle short and blufE, less so than in M, (N.) hardtoiokiij and slights
ly shorter than in M, {N,) hlythianus. Ears moderately large and rounded.
Forehead slightly arched. Tail exceeding the length of the trunk, but not
equalling the length of the combined body and head : ringed and sparsely
clad. Hind foot well developed. Piles moderately long. Fur not very
soft, much coarser than in M. (N.) huttoni. General colour of upper parts
brown or brownish, tending to silvery grey on the under surface. Feet
and muzzle flesh-coloured ; hair brownish. Tail nearly black. Claws horny
white.

Dimensions of male and female.

* ?

Length of body and head, 8''-70 7'.75

„ of tail, 7"-20 7''00

„ of hind foot, l^Sd l^SS

The skull is considerably larger than that of Mus (N) hlyihianu9^
relatively longer and more arched. There is not, however, very great
difference in size between the teeth of this form and that of M. (N.) hlythi-
anus, and the anterior palatine foramina are much the same in both. The
nasals are considerably relatively broader and larger than those of Mus (j^.)

1878.] J. Anderson — On the Sub- Genus Nesokia. 231

hltfthiant$8, but these bones appear to be subject to considerable yariation in
this group, and, in the female skull, they are much narrower than in the
skull of the male.

In Sind, there is a field rat which corresponds in its general character
to this species. The skull of a female from Khipra, Thar and Fdrkar
District, Sind, has all the characters of the female from Gh^zipur with
exactly similar nasals.

A very closely allied, if not identical rat to this, is found at Srinagar,
Kashmir, and of which the Indian Museum has one example collected by
Dr. Stoliczka.

Its skull exactly agrees with the skull of the male (see figure), except
that its nasals are a little narrower. This Kashmir rat is a dark sandy
brown above, with long black piles, especially on the lower portion of the
back ; the under surface of the animal being yellowish with an intermixture
of dusky. The fur is coarse, resembling that of this species, of which the
Kashmir rat is probably a local race.

This rat appears also to occur in the Purneah District, and in the
Indian Museum there is a skull of a rat, marked Cachdr, seemingly closely
allied to this form .

Srd Section

MuB (Nesokia) elliotanus, n. s.

Head short and deep ; muzzle deep and broad ; eye half way between ear
and nose, moderately large ; ears not large, rounded sparsely covered with
short hairs. Feet large and well developed with strong claws and sparsely
clad. Tail sparsely covered with short bristles on the margins of the
annul!, and nearly equalling the length of the body and head.

Pelage coarse, with moderately long piles, most numerous on the back
and over the rump. Yibrisss8 moderately long.

General colour above, brown with intermixed yellowish or pale brown
hairs, producing much the same colour as in Jf. (i\^) hlythianm, paler on
the sides and passing into greyish on the under parts. Nose and feet flesh-
coloured. Ears dark brown, tail blackish.

Measurements of 4 specimens.

Calcutta. Purneah. Calcutta. Purneah.

(J tf ? juv. 2 juv.

Length of body and head,... ICSO Q^SS 8" 25 6^95

„ of tail, S^-SO* ^'70 T'^O 6^90

„ of hind foot, 2''-28 2''-28 2''(Mi r-83

Height of ear, ri2 r08 0*-95 T'OS

The skull of this species approaches in size the dimensions of the skull
of such rats as M, {N,) ffiganteus, but in form it resembles the skull of

• Imperfect
28

232 J. Anderson — On the Sub- Genus Nesokia. [No. 4,

M, (jV.) hlythianus more than that of the former, being less elongated and
with a shorter muzzle, with less breadth between the lachrymal foramina.
The teeth have the same characters as in M. {N.) hlythianus, but, of course,
are very much larger. The nasals are moderately short and very different
from the broad nasals of M. {N.) giganteus.

The total length of the skull of the largest male is 2'20 from the upper
border of the foramen magnum to the end of the premaxiUaries, with a
maximum breadth of 1*27 across the zygomatic.

Mr. S. E. Peal has presented to the Indian Museum from Sibsdgar,
Assam, a rat distinctly referable to this species, and I am indebted to
Mr. W. T. Blanford for the opportunity to examine another example of
this species from the Khasi Hills.

In all of these skulls, the female as well as the male, the incisors are
bright orange, but in the female somewhat paler, due to her youth or, it may
be, sex, and with white tips as in the male Assam skull.

I obtained this rat first at Purneah and afterwards two specimens at
Calcutta. The adult male of these two I obtained from a native who assert-
ed that he found it in a palm tree, which I discredit. It is evidently a bur-
rowing rat closely allied to M, (-^.) hlgthmnus. It would appear to be very
rare about Calcutta, for I have not succeeded in obtaining more than two
specimens, notwithstanding that I have made special efforts to obtain
others. In all probability, the rats mentioned by Hardwicke as Calcutta
bandicoots were large examples of Mus decumanuSy which occasionally at-
tains to a great size.

Blyth, in his Memoir on the Rats and Mice' of India, remarked that
Nesokia indica (=:Mus hJythianm) had not been seen from the eastward of
the Bay of Bengal, though it was likely enough to occur in the dry climate
of the region of the Upper Irawadi. Mr. Theobald in 1866*, in confirmation
of this supposition of Blyth's, recorded the occurrence at Tonghoo, on the
Sittang, of a rat which he referred to this sub-genus. The dimensions
indicate an animal of about the same size as M. {N.) elliotanuSy but dis-
tinguished from it at once by the different proportions of its tail and trunk.
It is in all probability a new species.

Mrs (Nesokia) gigantefs.

Mus giganteus, Hardwicke, Trans. Journ. Linn. Soc, Vol. VII, 1804,
p. 306, PL 18 ; Desm. Mamm. 1822, p. 298 ; Brantz, Muizen, 1827, p. 101 ;
Gray, Proc. Zoo. Soc. 1832, p. 40 ; Kelaart, Faunse Zeylanicse, 1852, p. 58.

Mus {Neotoma) giganteuSy Elliot, Madr. Journ. Lit. and Sc, Vol. X,
1839, p. 209.

• Proc. As. Soc. Beng. p. 239.

1878.] J, Anderson — On the Sub- Genus Nesokia. 233

Mm handicota, Blyth, Cut. Mamm. As. Soc. Mus., 1863, p. 112 ; id,
Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXII, 18G3, p. 333.

Fandi Koku^ Telegu = Pig-rat, according to Elliot, L c, p. 209,

Nose somewhat pointed ; muzzle moderately long and rather deep ; eye
considerably nearer to the ear than to the nose, moderately large. Ears
somewhat large and rounded, nearly nude, but sparsely clad with short brown
hairs. Tail broadly ringed, sparsely clad with short hairs and nearly equal-
ling the length of the body and head. Feet well developed, sparsely clad
on their upper surfaces with short hairs ; claws not strong. Vibrissse long,
some of those of the moustache passing behind the ear.

Pelage coarse, consisting of three kinds of hairs, viz., the underlying
fur, the bristly hairs of the general pelage and the long coarse piles which
are intermixed in great profusion among the fur of the back. These long
piles are especially abundant on the lumbar and dorsal "regions where they are
very long, and being so numerous hide the general pelage lying below them
and project out a long way beyond it. The piles are almost entirely absent
from the sides of the animal and from the head and neck, but, beyond the
latter region they rapidly increase in numbers and length. In the living
animal, these piles are always as a rule erect.

The general colour of the animal is earthy brown with intermixed
yellow hairs, paler on the sides, where the yellowish or grey hairs are more
numerous, owing to the absence of the piles. The piles are so numerous
on the back that that region is uniform dark brown, and this colour is pro-
longed along the back to the head. The under surface is dusky brown with
a greyish tint. The limbs are brownish, and the nose, inside of the ear
and the feet are flesh-coloured, the upper surface of the latter being sparsely
covered with dark brown hairs. The tail is black.

This animal attains to a great size ; the type having measured 13*25
inches in the length of its body and head, with a tail 13 inches long ; but
adult males are even larger than this.

The skull of this rat is much more elongated than the skull of M. (^.)
providens, but it, as already stated, belongs to the same group, but is, of course,
immensely larger, measuring 2 "-66 in length by r'-35 in maximmn breadth
across the zygomatic. It differs from the skull of the allied species from
Lower Bengal and Assam in its slightly more elongated muzzle and very
much larger nasals. The female has 12 mammae.

This species occurs in great numbers in the district around Gdna
and, like its congener M. (N.) hlj/thianus, it has the reputation of being
a water rat. In the Manbhiim District it is not uncommon, but two
specimens in the Indian Museum are much greyer than those from Bhddra-
chellum, south of the Godavari, presented by Mr. W. T. Blanford, and which

234 J. Anderson— On the Suh-Oenus Nesokia.

nearly resemble the bandicoot of Ceylon. The Manbhum rats have many
greyish piles interspersed among the dark brown hairs, but this seems to
be only a local variation of no importance. Their skulls agree ^dth the
skulls of the bandicoots from Guna, for which I am indebted to
Dr. A. Barclay, and are not separable specifically from them. Although
these Guna rats and also the bandicoots from the south of the God^vari
are the exact counterparts in external appearance of the Ceylon rats, the
skulls of the latter have remarkably different nasals from the rats of Gtina
and Manbhdm, being much narrower and more posteriorly pointed, and
moreover the muzzle of the skull is narrower and not so long. Allowance,
however, must be made for variation, especially in insular examples of a
species, and I am, therefore, disposed to regard the foregoing differences
observable in the species of the Ceylon bandicoots in this light.

Description of Flates,

Plate XIII, Mus (N.) hltfthianus : a, upper view of skull of a ^ ; nat.
gize : hj under view of same skull : c, «ide view of same skull : d, teeth
of right upper jaw and teeth of right lower jaw, enlarged
Mus {^.) providens ; tf, upper view of skull of M. N. providens, nat.
size : /, under view of same skull : y, side view of same skull : A,
teeth of right upper and lower jaws, enlarged.

Mus (N,) harclayanus : i, upper view of skull : j\ under view of skull :
k, side view of skull : /, teeth of right upper and lower jaws, enlarged.

Plate XIV, Mus (If,) giganteus : a, upper view of skull : h, under view of
skull : c, side view of skull : d, 1, teeth of right upper jaw, enlarged :
d, 2, teeth of right lower jaw, enlarged.

Mus (N.) elliotarius : e, upper view of skull : /, under view of skull :
y, side view of skull : h, right upper and lower teeth, enlai^ed.

INDEX.

Names of new genera and species have an asterisk (♦) prefixed.

»»

\t

Abromis affinis, 18

* „ flavigularis, ib.

„ xanthoflchistus, 19
Actinura daflaensis, 18

egertoni (var. khasianus) 24
ogleif 18
*AdoretuB nu<^usculus, 173

* „ simplex, ib.
*Agabu8 dichrous, 169

Alcedo grandis, 14

Alcippe coUariSf 25

Ammophila nigripes, 167
*Anomala stoliczksB, 173
♦AphodiuB SBger, 170

* „ kaslmurensis, 171

* „ tenuimanus, ib.
Apis florea, 169

„ indica, ib,
Arvicola indica, 214, 221

,, bengalensis, 227
Assam, earthquakes in, during 1877) 4
Athene cuculoides, 22
BatrachostomuB afiSnis, 14

castaneus, ib,
comntus, ib.
hodgsoni, ib,
„ javensis, 13

•Bembex fossorius, 168
Bithynia polchella, 141
Bombus eximius, 1 68

* „ montivagufl, ib,
•Bronchocela burmana, 127

cristatclla, ib,
jubata, ib.
moUucana, ib.
„ smaragdina, i^.

Budytes citreola, 19

„ citreoloides, ib.
Calobates melanope, 19
Carychium indicum, 149
Certhia discolor, 16
Ceryle guttata, 14
Ceyx tridactyla, 14
Chclidon nipalensis, 13
Chleuasicus ruficeps, var, atrosupercili-

aris, 15
Chlorion lobatum, 167
Clausilia cylindrica, 146
„ waageni, 147

»»

Coelostele scalaris, 147
Ck)rbicula kashmirensis, 147

„ occidens, ib.
Cosmoscarta basinolata, 194
* „ masoni, ib,

„ megamera, ib.

Cutch, tidal observationa in Gulf of, 26
Cutia nipalensis, 19
Cylindrus insularis, 149
Cyomis unicolor, 15
Dentition aberrant of Felit tigris^ 2
Diacamma scalpatrum, 168
Draco dussumieri, 126
„ maculatus, ib.

„ major, 125

„ quinquefasdatus, 126

„ tseniopterus, ib.
Eai^quakes in Assam in 1877, 4

„ in Panjab, March 2nd,

1878, 131
Elis lindeni, 167
Ennea bicolor, 147
Erinaceus auritus, 2<X0

blanfordi, 208
collaris, 200
grayi, 204
indicus, ib.
jerdoni, 209
micropus, 200
niger, 212
nudiventris, 200
pictus, 203
spatangus, 205
Eumenes arcuatas, 168
Felis tigris, aberrant dentition o^ 2
„ quadndentatus, 8
„ tetraodon, ib,
Fruticicola huttoni, 144
Garrulax chinensis, 17
„ nuchalis, ib.
Garrulus bispecularis, 21
Gorsachius melanolophus, 21
Gecinus striolatus, 14
Gcostilbia balanus, 147
*Gcotrupes kashmirensis, 171
Glossula huegeli, 149
Grammatoptila striata, 15
Gymnura rafflesi, 150
Halcyon atricapillns, 14

>»

236

Index,

11

Halcyon pUeata, 14
Helicarion ca^fiida, 144
flemingii, 143

„ var, altivagOB, ih,
monticolaf ib,
„ scutella, ib,
Hemiechinus collariB, 205

„ spatangus, t3.

*Hemiplecta iamuensia, 142
labiata, i^.
ligulata,
„ monticola, ib.
Heziicurus BchiHtaccus, 19
„ scouleri, lb.
„ sinensiB, xb,
•Hoplea concolor, 171
Horomis fuliginiventer, 18
Huhua nipalensifl, 72
Hyalina fulva, 141
„ lucida, t^.
Ibidorhynchus struthenii, 21
•IlybiuB cinctiw, 169
Izulus mfigenis, 20

„ striatofi, i^.
Kaliella barrakporensis, 142
Kajihinir, snowfiill in, 177
Ketupa flavipos, 12
„ magniiica, ib,
^LachnoBtema pulvinosa, 172

• „ StoliczkaB, ib,

• ,, Btridulans, ib,
LaruB ridibmiduB, 22
Liac<M analis, 167

Lightning Rods, relatiTe sr>ctional areas

for copper and iron, 191
Liolepis guttatus, 128
Lymnffia, 147

auricolaria, 149
luteola, t*.
percgra, ib,
stagnalis, ib,
tnincatula, ib,
Macrocblamys aspides, 141
indica, ib,
patane, ib,
pt^trosa, ib,
splondcns, ib,
„ vitrinoidos, ib,

Malacocercus terricolor, 18

„ (Layardia) robiginosnB, 24

Maries flavigula, 156
Megachile dimidiata, 168
Melania tuberculata, 141

,, variabilis, 148
Minla dubius, 25

mandollii, ib,
mfigulariB, ib,
Moschns napu, 166
Motacilla hodgsoni, 19
Muscicapula lostigma, 22
Mufl bandicota, 233

It
»
t*

Mua gigaateufl, 232

„ hardwickii, 221, 227

„ hydrophilns, ib,

„ huttoni, 223

„ kok, 225

„ pyctorifl, 221

y, robnatuloB, 165

„ (Neotoma) gigantens, 232
n f> providens, 225

y, (Neeokia) barclayanus, 229

n
»»

i»

n
n

n

blythianns, 227
elliotanuB, 231
gigantena, 232
hardwickii, 227
hnttoni, 223
providens, 225
scullyi 224
Myiophonns temminckii, 22
Napffius arcnatus, 145
boysianuB, H,
candelaris, 144
coelebs, 145
domina, 144
eremita, 146
konawarensis, 145
pretdosuB, 146
rufistrigatos, t^.
salsicola, U,
Beg^rc^gatus, 145
sindiciis, ib,
smithii, 146
speliens, ib,
Tibex, 149
Nesokia, sub-genns, 144
griffithii, 221
hardwickii, ib,
huttoni, 223
indica, 223, 225, 227
„ scullyi, 224
Niltava grandis, 23
Nitidula hodg^oni, 15
•Onthophagus concolor, 170
Opoas gracilis, 146

* Ophites ganuniei, 130

„ septontrionalis, 131
Orthotomus atrignlaris (flaviviridis}, 25
Falasomis eupatrius, 14

„ molanorhynchus, ib,
Paludomns tanjoriensis, 148
Pandi koku, 233

Pellomeum mandcllii var. pectoralia, 16
„ ruficops, 17

^Pentodon tnincatus, 173

* „ pumilus, 174
Peronens coonopictus, 144

*Philonthus pamirensis, 170

* „ stoliczksB, ib.
Photo collotype, 88

Photographic engraTing, 100 [pern, 70
„ printing an sensitive pa*

Photography applied to reprodnctioa ol
Map0,&a, 53

n
n
If

II
II
II
II
II
II
II

>t

II
II
II
II

i

Index,

237

Photolithography and photosincogra-

phy, 81
Phototypography, 114
PhrynocephaluB, 128
Phylloscopus fuliginiventeri 18
Picus macei, 22
Piaidium clarkeanum, 147

* „ hydaspicola, ib.
Pitta cucullata, 23
Planorbis calathus, 149

,y carinatus, ib,
„ exustuB, ib,
Pnoepyga pusilla, 23
Podica personata, 21
Polybia orientalis, 168
„ sumatrenBis, t^.
Pomatorhinus ferruginosuB, 17
„ ochraceiceps, ib.

„ stenorhynchuB, i^.

PompiluB peregrinus, 167

* „ vitiosuB, ib,
Porzana akool, 21

„ pygmaea, ib.
Prinia socialis, 18
„ stewarti, ib,
Prionodon gracilis, 154

* y, maculosus, 162
„ pardicolor, 166

ProparuB chryBseus, 19

,, dubius, 26
PseudseluruB, 3

intrepiduBf i^.
quadridentatuB, ib,
Bivalensis, ib,
Pteromys cineraceus, 165
Punjab, earthquake in, March 22nd

1878, 131
Pupa gutta, 146
„ himalayana, t^.
„ huttoniana, ib,
„ muBcarum, ib,
Pyctorhifl altirostris, 23

griseigularis, t^.
longirostris, 24
,, sinensis, ib,
Keguloides trochiloideB, 18
Khizomys castoneuB, 165
•RhizotrogUB bilobus, 173
Rhynchjea bengalensis, 21
Ruticilla hodgsoni, 18
„ Bchisticeps, I
Sarcidiomis melanonotus, 22
SciujuB atridorsalis, 167, 169
barbei, 164
berdmorei, 162
caniceps, 157, 161
chryBonotus. 161
concolor, ib,
hyperythruB, 160

»>

j>

»»

Sciurus lokiiah, 168

lokrioides, 157
mouhoti, 162
pemyi, 168
phayrei, 160

• „ rufigenis, 156
•Serica ladticula, 172

Siphia leucomelanura, 15
Snowfall in Kashmir, 177
Spalacomys indica, 221
SphsBrium indicum, 147
Sterna melanogastra, 22
Staphidea castaneiceps, 20

plumbeiceps, 19

rufigenis, 21

striatus, ib.

torqueola, 20
Succinea pfeifferi, 149
SumiculuB dicruroides, 14
Suthora daflaensis, 16
Sypheotides bengalensis, 21
*Tachinus stoliczkee, 170
Tanjore (Tanja-ur), physiographieal

notes on, 179
Thaumantis camadeva, 176
„ diores, ib.

• „ louisa, 176

Tidal obflervationB in the Gulf of Cutch,

26
Tiger, aberrant dentition o^ 2
Tragulus fuscatus, 166
javanicus, t*.
kanchil, t^.
napu, ib.
*Trigona terminata, 169
Trochomorpha hyba, 143
Tupaia peguana, 162
TurdinuB brevicaudatuB, 16
garoensis, t^.
nagaensiB, t^.
striatuB, ib,
„ wiUiamsoni, ib^
•Ulupe, 128

• „ davisoni, 129
Uromastiz, 128
UromasticidsB, ib,
Urrua coromanda, 12
Vallonia costata, 144

„ polchella, ib,
Valvata piscinalis, 141

„ stoliczkana. 148
Vivipara bengalensis, 148

„ dissimilis, ib,
Woodburytype, 99
Xylocopa aBstuans, 168

amethystina, ib.
collaris, ib,
„ latipeB, f^.
Zua lubrica, 149

>»

»»

»»

WTBLAWFORD Journ Asial Soc B.^ng-dl Vol X1,V!I. Ft 1! 1378

RUTICILLA SCH!ETlCEPS,.i2.

J ANLERSOH .W A^LU, Sue BfiuSdlM.XLVll.F'^ll 1878,

1 AaifiL-Soi: R(:ii(;.l! Vji "J".;

AMni:nSOr.;, Jou™ AsioI Hoc llaisjl. V-il Xl»i! Pi|!.l878

^- ,rl

b

M.,>-.lui-i .-, 1, ,ir,..jn,ili) Imp.

I ANDERSONJournAsial-S™ Renjal Vol.XLVll.Pt 11,1878. PLATE.V"

1 XLVII. Pt 11,1878

/ 1

r..

"^■■^t,,;, »,. 1 /■ ■•

r

1.2.3 PR.10NODON MACULOSUS.
4 5CIURUS RUF1GENI3,

:::;:Riin ri'FIjEmie

PWIW-Au.'^TEN, Journ Asial.Soc Bengal 7^1 yXVl PtII 1377 JViOsJi

<'■-

IJARRUI.AA riiJCHALiS

GODWIN-AUSTEN Journ Asi.l S«B«ifJ.VolXLVl.ptn 1877 PUIEXl.

ACTINURA OGLEI.

J.WOOD-MASON, JoumAsiat Soc Beiiga] .lB78.Yol.XLVII,R D.

THAUMANTIS LOUISA,

J.AMlEBoOM.JournA.antSoi B.ni.l V.,i XL/11 St \\\?~S

m

\s^

Krti.lud.uAmed del

J ANDERSON.Jourri AtiaL Coc Bsn^al.Vol XLVII 1^

PL ATE. XIV

S.Sadgrield Ulh:

Btihari Lali Daaa del

I '

• 4

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
THE ABOVE CARD

INDIAN INSTITUTE LIBRARY